diff options
| author | Roger Frank <rfrank@pglaf.org> | 2025-10-15 05:32:36 -0700 |
|---|---|---|
| committer | Roger Frank <rfrank@pglaf.org> | 2025-10-15 05:32:36 -0700 |
| commit | 0c85ef759dd27f69cb6992e8bbca0bb35eb6710c (patch) | |
| tree | 6222d8a28122d037daf45f30a2a7b6fed81fa610 | |
| -rw-r--r-- | .gitattributes | 3 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 8993-0.txt | 21050 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 8993-0.zip | bin | 0 -> 368870 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 8993-h.zip | bin | 0 -> 378114 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 8993-h/8993-h.htm | 29391 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | LICENSE.txt | 11 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | README.md | 2 |
7 files changed, 50457 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/.gitattributes b/.gitattributes new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6833f05 --- /dev/null +++ b/.gitattributes @@ -0,0 +1,3 @@ +* text=auto +*.txt text +*.md text diff --git a/8993-0.txt b/8993-0.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..2b0d96f --- /dev/null +++ b/8993-0.txt @@ -0,0 +1,21050 @@ +The Project Gutenberg eBook of The Mysterious Island, by Jules Verne + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and +most other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no restrictions +whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it under the terms +of the Project Gutenberg License included with this eBook or online at +www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the United States, you +will have to check the laws of the country where you are located before +using this eBook. + +Title: The Mysterious Island + +Author: Jules Verne + +Release Date: August 31, 2003 [eBook #8993] +[Most recently updated: June 9, 2022] + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: UTF-8 + +Produced by: Norman M. Wolcott + +*** START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE MYSTERIOUS ISLAND *** + + + + +The Mysterious Island + +by Jules Verne + + + + +[Redactor’s Note: _The Mysterious Island_ (Number V013 in the T&M +numerical listing of Verne’s works) is a translation of _L’Île +mystérieuse_ first published in England by Sampson and Low and in the +United States by Scribner and Henry L. Shepard using the same +translation of W. H. G. Kingston. English translators often altered +their translations to suit current political views of Church and +Empire. In the Kingston translation the chapters near the end of the +book where Captain Nemo makes his appearance are altered beyond all +recognition and all mention of Captain Nemo’s previous life as a +“freedom fighter” for Indian independence is removed, in addition to +other deletions. The present translation is by the American Stephen W. +White. It first appeared in the _Evening Telegraph_ of Philadelphia, PA +and was later published as an Evening Telegraph Reprint Book (1876). +The present version is prepared from a xerox copy of that book kindly +provided by Mr. Sidney Kravitz of Dover, NJ. According to Taves and +Michaluk “Although more faithful than any other translation, this one +has never been reprinted”. And so after a lapse of 127 years this +translation of _The Mysterious Island_ is now again available to the +public. + +Since the text was hand set for a newspaper there are many printer’s +errors (including upside-down characters). Where obvious these have +been corrected, although an attempt has been made to retain the +original spelling of words in use at that period. Where there is a +doubt, words have been altered so that the spelling is consistent. In +other cases, like “trajopan” where the inconsistency is traced to +Verne’s original, the spelling is left unaltered. A table of contents +based on the chapter headings has been added which also indicates the +points at which the french version was divided into three parts. An +updated translation by Sidney Kravitz is now available from Wesleyan +University Press (2001). + + +JULES VERNE’S LAST STORY + + +THE + +THE MYSTERIOUS ISLAND + +ISLAND + +WITH A MAP OF THE ISLAND AND A FULL GLOSSARY + + +By JULES VERNE + + +AUTHOR OF “THE TOUR OF THE WORLD IN EIGHTY DAYS,” “A JOURNEY TO THE +CENTRE OF THE EARTH,” “TWENTY THOUSAND LEAGUES UNDER THE SEA,” +ETC.,ETC. + + + + +_TRANSLATED EXPRESSLY FOR_ + +“T H E E V E N I N G T E L E G R A P H,” + +_AND REPRINTED FROM THE COLUMNS OF THAT JOURNAL._ + + + + +PHILADELPHIA: + + +OFFICE OF THE EVENING TELEGAPH, 108 SOUTH THIRD ST. + +1876 + +PRICE, 25 CENTS + + +THE MYSTERIOUS ISLAND + + + + +CONTENTS + + +PART I SHIPWRECKED IN THE AIR + +I The Hurricane of 1865—Cries in the Air—A Balloon Caught By a +Waterspout—Only the Sea in Sight—Five Passengers—What Took Place in the +Basket—Land Ahead!—The End. + +II An Episode of the Rebellion—The Engineer Cyrus Smith—Gideon +Spilett—The Negro Neb—The Sailor Pencroft—The Youth, Herbert—An +Unexpected Proposal—Rendezvous at 10 O’clock P.M.—Departure in the +Storm. + +III Five O’clock in the Afternoon—The Lost One—The Despair of +Neb—Search to the Northward—The Island—A Night of Anguish—The Fog of +the Morning—Neb Swimming—Sight of the Land—Fording the Channel. + +IV The Lithodomes—The Mouth of the River—The “Chimneys”—Continuation +of the Search—The Forest of Evergreens—Getting Firewood—Waiting for the +Tide—On Top of the Cliff—The Timber-Float—The Return to the Coast. + +V Arranging the Chimneys—The Important Question of Fire—The Match +Box—Search Over the Shore—Return of the Reporter and Neb—One Match—The +Crackling Fire—The Fish Supper—The First Night on Land. + +VI The Castaways’ Inventory—No Effects—The Charred Linen—An Expedition +Into the Forest—The Flora of the Woods—The Flight of the Jacamar—Tracks +of Wild Beasts—The Couroucous—The Heath-Cock—Line-Fishing +Extraordinary. + +VII Neb Has Not Yet Returned—The Reflections of the Reporter—The +Supper—Prospect of a Bad Night—The Storm Is Frightful—They Go Out Into +the Night—Struggle with the Rain and Wind. + +VIII Is Cyrus Smith Alive?—Neb’s Story—Footprints—An Insoluble +Question—The First Words of Smith—Comparing the Footprints—Return to +the Chimneys—Pencroff Dejected. + +IX Cyrus Is Here-Pencroff’s Attempts—Rubbing Wood—Island or +Continent—The Plans of the Engineer—Whereabouts in the Pacific—In the +Depths of the Forest—The Pistachio Pine—A Pig Chase—A Smoke of Good +Omen. + +X The Engineer’s Invention—Island Or Continent?—Departure for the +Mountain—The Forest—Volcanic Soil—The Tragopans—The Moufflons—The First +Plateau—Encamping for the Night—The Summit of the Cone + +XI At the Summit of the Cone—The Interior of the Crater—Sea +Everywhere—No Land in Sight—A Bird’s Eve View of the Coast—Hydrography +and Orography—Is the Island Inhabited?—A Geographical Baptism—Lincoln +Island. + +XII Regulation of Watches—Pencroff Is Satisfied—A Suspicious Smoke—The +Course of Red Creek—The Flora of the Island—Its Fauna—Mountain +Pheasants—A Kangaroo Chase—The Agouti—Lake Grant—Return to the +Chimneys. + +XIII Top’s Contribution—Making Bows and Arrows—A Brick-Kiln—A +Pottery—Different Cooking Utensils—The First Boiled Meat—Mugwort—The +Southern Cross—An Important Astronomical Observation. + +XIV The Measure Of the Granite Wall—An Application of the Theorem of +Similar Triangles—The Latitude of the Island—An Excursion to the +North—An Oyster-Bed—Plans for the Future—The Sun’s Passage of the +Meridian—The Co-ordinates of Lincoln Island. + +XV Winter Sets In—The Metallurgic Question—The Exploration of Safety +Island—A Seal Hunt—Capture of an Echidna—The Ai—The Catalonian +Method—Making Iron and Steel. + +XVI The Question of a Dwelling Discussed Again—Pencroff’s Ideas—An +Exploration to the North of the Lake—The Western Boundary of the +Plateau—The Serpents—The Outlet of the Lake—Top’s Alarm—Top Swimming—A +Fight Under Water—The Dugong. + +XVII A Visit to the Lake—The Direction of the Current—The Prospects of +Cyrus Smith—The Dugong Fat—The Use of the Schistous Limestone—The +Sulphate of Iron—How Glycerine Is Made—Soap—Saltpetre—Sulphuric +Acid—Nitric Acid—The New Outlet. + +XVIII Pencroff Doubts No More—The Old Outlet of the Lake—A +Subterranean Descent—The Way Through the Granite—Top Has +Disappeared—The Central Cavern—The Lower Well—Mystery—The Blows with +the Pick—The Return. + +XIX Smith’s Plan—The Front of Granite House—The Rope Ladder—Pencroff’s +Ideas—The Aromatic Herbs—A Natural Warren—Getting Water—The View From +the Windows of Granite House. + +XX The Rainy Season—What to Wear-A Seal-Hunt—Candle-Making—-Work in +the Granite House—The Two Causeways—Return From a Visit to the +Oyster-Bed—What Herbert Found in His Pocket. + +XXI Several Degrees Below Zero—Exploration of the Swamp Region to the +Southeast—The View of the Sea—A Conversation Concerning the Future of +the Pacific Ocean—The Incessant Labor of the Infusoria—What Will Become +of This Globe—The Chase—The Swamp of the Tadorns. + +XXII. The Traps—The Foxes—The Peccaries—The Wind Veers to the +Northwest—The Snow-Storm—The Basket-Makers—The Coldest Snap of +Winter—Crystallization of the Sugar-Maple—The Mysterious Shafts—The +Projected Exploration—The Pellet of Lead. + + +PART II THE ABANDONED + +XXIII Concerning the Leaden Pellet—Making a Canoe—Hunting—In the Top +of a Kauri—Nothing to Indicate the Presence of Man—The Turtle on its +Back—The Turtle Disappears—Smith’s Explanation. + +XXIV Trial of the Canoe—A Wreck on the Shore—The Tow—Jetsam +Point—Inventory of the Box—What Pencroff Wanted—A Bible—A Verse from +the Bible. + +XXV The Departure—The Rising Tide—Elms and Other Trees—Different +Plants—The Kingfisher—Appearance of the Forest—The Gigantic +Eucalypti—Why They Are Called Fever-Trees—Monkeys—The +Waterfall—Encampment for the Night. + +XXVI Going Toward the Coast—Troops of Monkeys—A New Water-Course—Why +the Tide Was Not Felt—A Forest on the Shore—Reptile Promontory—Spilett +Makes Herbert Envious—The Bamboo Fusilade. + +XXVII Proposal to Return By the South Coast—Its Configuration—Search +for the Shipwrecked—A Waif in the Air—Discovery of a Small Natural +Harbor—Midnight on the Mercy—A Drifting Canoe. + +XXVIII Pencroff’s Halloos—A Night in the Chimneys—Herbert’s +Arrow—Smith’s Plan—An Unexpected Solution—What Had Happened in Granite +House—How the Colonists Obtained a New Domestic. + +XXIX Projects to Be Carried Out—A Bridge Over the Mercy—To Make An +Island of Prospect Plateau—The Draw-Bridge—The Corn Harvest—The +Stream—The Causeway—The Poultry Yard—The Pigeon-House—The Two Wild +Asses—Harnessed to the Wagon—Excursion to Balloon Harbor. + +XXX Clothing—Seal-Skin Boots—Making Pyroxyline—Planting—The +Fish—Turtles’ Eggs—Jup’s Education—The Corral-Hunting Moufflons—Other +Useful Animals and Vegetables—Home Thoughts. + +XXXI Bad Weather—The Hydraulic Elevator—Making Window Glass and Table +Ware—The Bread Tree—Frequent Visits to the Corral—The Increase of the +Herd—The Reporter’s Question—The Exact Position of Lincoln +Island—Pencroff’s Proposal. + +XXXII Ship Building—The Second Harvest—Ai Hunting—A New Plant—A +Whale—The Harpoon From the Vineyard—Cutting Up This Cetacea—Use of the +Whalebone—The End of May—PencroffIs Content. + +XXXIII Winter—Fulling Cloth—The Mill—Pencroff’s Fixed Purpose—The +Whalebones—The Use of An Albatross—Top and Jup—Storms—Damage to the +Poultry-Yard—An Excursion to the Marsh—Smith Alone—Exploration of the +Pits. + +XXXIV Rigging the Launch—Attacked By Foxes—Jup Wounded—Jup Nursed—Jup +Cured—Completion of the Launch—Pencroff’s Triumph—The Good Luck—Trial +Trip, to the South of the Island—An Unexpected Document. + +XXXV Departure Decided Upon—Preparations—The Three Passengers—The +First Night—The Second Night—Tabor Island—Search on the Shore—Search in +the Woods—No One—Animals—Plants—A House—Deserted. + +XXXVI The Inventory—The Night—Some Letters—The Search Continued—Plants +and Animals—Herbert in Danger—Aboard—The Departure—Bad Weather—A +Glimmer of Intelligence—Lost At Sea—A Timely Light. + +XXXVII The Return-Discussion—Smith and the Unknown—Balloon Harbor-The +Devotion of the Engineer-A Touching Experience-Tears. + +XXXVIII A Mystery to Be Solved—The First Words of the Unknown—Twelve +Years on the Island—Confessions—Disappearance—Smith’s +Confidence—Building a Wind-Mill—The First Bread—An Act of +Devotion—Honest Hands. + +XXXIX Always Apart—A Bequest of the Unknown’s—The Farm Established At +the Corral—Twelve Years—The Boatswain’s Mate of the Britannia—Left on +Tabor Island—The Hand of Smith—The Mysterious Paper + +XL A Talk—Smith and Spilett—The Engineer’s Idea—The Electric +Telegraph—The Wires—The Batter—the Alphabet—Fine Weather—The Prosperity +of the Colony—Photography—A Snow Effect—Two Years on Lincoln Island. + +XLI Thoughts of Home—Chances of Return—Plan to Explore the Coast—The +Departure of the 16th of April—Serpentine Peninsula Seen From Sea—The +Basaltic Cliffs of the Western Coast—Bad Weather—Night—A New Incident. + +XLII Night At Sea—Shark Gulf—Confidences—Preparations for Winter—Early +Advent of Bad Weather—Cold—In-Door Work—Six Months Later—A Speck on the +Photograph—An Unexpected Event. + + +PART III THE SECRET OF THE ISLAND + +XLIII Lost Or Saved?—Ayrton Recalled—Important Discussion—It Is Not +the Duncan—Suspicion And Precaution—Approach of the Ship—A Cannon +Shot—The Brig Anchors in Sight of the Island—Night Fall. + +XLIV Discussions—Presentiments—Ayrton’s Proposal—It Is Accepted—Ayrton +and Pencroff on Safety Islet—Norfolk Convicts—Their Projects—Heroic +Attempt of Ayrton—His Return—Six Against Fifty. + +XLV The Mist Rises—The Engineer’s Disposition of Forces—Three +Posts—Ayrton and Pencroft—The First Attack—Two Other Boat Loads—On the +Islet—Six Convicts on Shore—The Brig Weighs Anchor—The Speedy’s +Projectiles—Desperate Situation—Unexpected Denouement. + +XLVI The Colonists on the Beach—Ayrton and Pencroff as Salvors—Talk At +Breakfast—Pencroff’s Reasoning—Exploration of the Brig’s Hull in +Detail—The Magazine Uninjured—New Riches—A Discovery—A Piece of a +Broken Cylinder. + +XLVII The Engineer’s Theory—Pencroff’s Magnificent Suppositions—A +Battery in the Air—Four Projectiles—The Surviving Convicts—Ayrton +Hesitates—Smith’s Generosity and Pencroff’s Dissatisfaction. + +XLVIII The Projected Expedition—Ayrton At the Corral—Visit to Port +Balloon—Pencroff’s Remarks—Despatch Sent to the Corral—No Answer From +Ayrton—Setting Out Next Day—Why the Wire Did Not Act—A Detonation. + +XLIX The Reporter and Pencroff in the Corral—Moving Herbert—Despair of +the Sailor—Consultation of the Engineer and the Reporter—Mode of +Treatment—A Glimmer of Hope—How to Warn Neb—A Faithful Messenger—Neb’s +Reply. + +L The Convicts in the Neighborhood of the Corral—Provisional +Occupation—Continuation of Herbert’s Treatment—Pencroff’s +Jubilation—Review of the Past—Future Prospects—Smith’s Ideas. + +LI No News of Neb—A Proposal From Pencroff and Spilett—The Reporter’s +Sorties—A Fragment Of Cloth—A Message—Hurried Departure—Arrival At +Prospect Plateau. + +LII Herbert Carried to Granite House—Neb Relates What Had +Happened—Visit of Smith to the Plateau—Ruin and Devastation—The +Colonists Helpless—Willow Bark—A Mortal Fever—Top Barks Again. + +LIII An Inexplicable Mystery—Herbert’s Convalescence—The Unexplored +Parts of the Island—Preparations for Departure—The First +Day—Night—Second Day—The Kauris—Cassowaries—Footprints in the +Sand—Arrival At Reptile End. + +LIV Exploration of Reptile End—Camp At the Mouth of Fall River—By the +Corral—The Reconnaissance—The Return—Forward—An Open Door—A Light in +the Window—By Moonlight. + +LV Ayrton’s Recital—Plans of His Old Comrades—Taking Possession of the +Corral—The Rules of the Island—The Good Luck—Researches About Mount +Franklin—The Upper Valleys—Subterranean Rumblings—Pencroff’s Answer—At +the Bottom of the Crater—The Return + +LVI After Three Years—The Question of a New Ship—Its +Determination—Prosperity of the Colony—The Shipyard—The Cold +Weather—Pencroff Resigned—Washing—Mount Franklin. + +LVII The Awakening of the Volcano—The Fine Weather—Resumption of +Work—The Evening of the 15th of October—A Telegraph—A Demand—An +Answer—Departure for the Corral—The Notice—The Extra Wire—The Basalt +Wall—At High Tide—At Low Tide—The Cavern—A Dazzling Light. + +LVIII Captain Nemo—His First Words—History of a Hero of Liberty—Hatred +of the Invaders—His Companions—The Life Under Water—Alone—The Last +Refuge of the Nautilus—The Mysterious Genius of the Island. + +LIX The Last Hours of Captain Nemo—His Dying Wishes—A Souvenir for His +Friends—His Tomb—Some Counsel to the Colonists—The Supreme Moment—At +the Bottom of the Sea. + +LX The Reflections of the Colonists—Renewal of Work—The 1st of +January, 1869—A Smoke From the Volcano—Symptoms of An Eruption Ayrton +and Smith At the Corral—Exploration of the Crypt Dakkar—What Captain +Nemo Had Said to the Engineer. + +LXI Smith’s Recital—Hastening the Work—A Last Visit to the Corral—The +Combat Between the Fire and the Water—The Aspect of the Island—They +Decide to Launch the Ship—The Night of the 8th of March. + +LXII An Isolated Rock in the Pacific—The Last Refuge of the +Colonists—The Prospect of Death—Unexpected Succor—How and Why It +Came—The Last Good Action—An Island on Terra Firma—The Tomb of Captain +Nemo. + + + + +THE MYSTERIOUS ISLAND. + +By JULES VERNE. + + +PART I +SHIPWRECKED IN THE AIR + + + + +CHAPTER I. + + +THE HURRICANE OF 1865—CRIES IN THE AIR—A BALLOON CAUGHT BY A +WATERSPOUT—ONLY THE SEA IN SIGHT—FIVE PASSENGERS—WHAT TOOK PLACE IN THE +BASKET—LAND AHEAD!—THE END. + + +“Are we going up again?” + +“No. On the contrary; we are going down!” + +“Worse than that, Mr. Smith, we are falling!” + +“For God’s sake throw over all the ballast!” + +“The last sack is empty!” + +“And the balloon rises again?” + +“No!” + +“I hear the splashing waves!” + +“The sea is under us!” + +“It is not five hundred feet off!” + +Then a strong, clear voice shouted:— + +“Overboard with all we have, and God help us!” + +Such were the words which rang through the air above the vast +wilderness of the Pacific, towards 4 o’clock in the afternoon of the +23d of March, 1865:— + +Doubtless, no one has forgotten that terrible northeast gale which +vented its fury during the equinox of that year. It was a hurricane +lasting without intermission from the 18th to the 26th of March. +Covering a space of 1,800 miles, drawn obliquely to the equator, +between the 35° of north latitude and 40° south, it occasioned immense +destruction both in America and Europe and Asia. Cities in ruins, +forests uprooted, shores devastated by the mountains of water hurled +upon them, hundreds of shipwrecks, large tracts of territory desolated +by the waterspouts which destroyed everything in their path, thousands +of persons crushed to the earth or engulfed in the sea; such were the +witnesses to its fury left behind by this terrible hurricane. It +surpassed in disaster those storms which ravaged Havana and Guadeloupe +in 1810 and 1825. + +While these catastrophes were taking place upon the land and the sea, a +scene not less thrilling was enacting in the disordered heavens. + +A balloon, caught in the whirl of a column of air, borne like a ball on +the summit of a waterspout, spinning around as in some aerial +whirlpool, rushed through space with a velocity of ninety miles an +hour. Below the balloon, dimly visible through the dense vapor, mingled +with spray, which spread over the ocean, swung a basket containing five +persons. + +From whence came this aerial traveller, the sport of the awful tempest? +Evidently it could not have been launched during the storm, and the +storm had been raging five days, its symptoms manifesting themselves on +the 18th. It must, therefore, have come from a great distance, as it +could not have traversed less than 2,000 miles in twenty-four hours. +The passengers, indeed, had been unable to determine the course +traversed, as they had nothing with which to calculate their position; +and it was a necessary effect, that, though borne along in the midst of +this tempest; they were unconscious of its violence. They were whirled +and spun about and carried up and down without any sense of motion. +Their vision could not penetrate the thick fog massed together under +the balloon. Around them everything was obscure. The clouds were so +dense that they could not tell the day from the night. No reflection of +light, no sound from the habitations of men, no roaring of the ocean +had penetrated that profound obscurity in which they were suspended +during their passage through the upper air. Only on their rapid descent +had they become conscious of the danger threatening them by the waves. + +Meanwhile the balloon, disencumbered of the heavy articles, such as +munitions, arms, and provisions, had risen to a height of 4,500 feet, +and the passengers having discovered that the sea was beneath them, and +realizing that the dangers above were less formidable than those below, +did not hesitate to throw overboard everything, no matter how +necessary, at the same time endeavoring to lose none of that fluid, the +soul of the apparatus, which sustained them above the abyss. + +The night passed in the midst of dangers that would have proved fatal +to souls less courageous; and with the coming of day the hurricane +showed signs of abatement. At dawn, the emptied clouds rose high into +the heavens; and, in a few hours more, the whirlwind had spent its +force. The wind, from a hurricane, had subsided into what sailors would +call a “three reef breeze.” + +Toward eleven o’clock, the lower strata of the air had lightened +visibly. The atmosphere exhaled that humidity which is noticeable after +the passage of great meteors. It did not seem as if the storm had moved +westward, but rather as if it was ended. Perhaps it had flowed off in +electric sheets after the whirlwind had spent itself, as is the case +with the typhoon in the Indian Ocean. + +Now, however, it became evident that the balloon was again sinking +slowly but surely. It seemed also as if it was gradually collapsing, +and that its envelope was lengthening and passing from a spherical into +an oval form. It held 50,000 cubic feet of gas, and therefore, whether +soaring to a great height or moving along horizontally, it was able to +maintain itself for a long time in the air. In this emergency the +voyagers threw overboard the remaining articles which weighed down the +balloon, the few provisions they had kept, and everything they had in +their pockets, while one of the party hoisted himself into the ring to +which was fastened the cords of the net, and endeavored to closely tie +the lower end of the balloon. But it was evident that the gas was +escaping, and that the voyagers could no longer keep the balloon +afloat. + +They were lost! + +There was no land, not even an island, visible beneath them. The wide +expanse of ocean offered no point of rest, nothing upon which they +could cast anchor. It was a vast sea on which the waves were surging +with incomparable violence. It was the limitless ocean, limitless even +to them from their commanding height. It was a liquid plain, lashed and +beaten by the hurricane, until it seemed like a circuit of tossing +billows, covered with a net-work of foam. Not even a ship was in sight. + +In order, therefore, to save themselves from being swallowed up by the +waves it was necessary to arrest this downward movement, let it cost +what it might. And it was evidently to the accomplishment of this that +the party were directing their efforts. But in spite of all they could +do the balloon continued to descend, though at the same time moving +rapidly along with the wind toward the southwest. + +It was a terrible situation, this, of these unfortunate men. No longer +masters of the balloon, their efforts availed them nothing. The +envelope collapsed more and more, and the gas continued to escape. +Faster and faster they fell, until at 1 o’clock they were not more than +600 feet above the sea. The gas poured out of a rent in the silk. By +lightening the basket of everything the party had been able to continue +their suspension in the air for several hours, but now the inevitable +catastrophe could only be delayed, and unless some land appeared before +nightfall, voyagers, balloon, and basket must disappear beneath the +waves. + +It was evident that these men were strong and able to face death. Not a +murmur escaped their lips. They were determined to struggle to the last +second to retard their fall, and they tried their last expedient. The +basket, constructed of willow osiers, could not float, and they had no +means of supporting it on the surface of the water. It was 2 o’clock, +and the balloon was only 400 feet above the waves. + +Then a voice was heard—the voice of a man whose heart knew no +fear—responded to by others not less strong:— + +“Everything is thrown out?” + +“No, we yet have 10,000 francs in gold.” + +A heavy bag fell into the sea. + +“Does the balloon rise?” + +“A little, but it will soon fall again.” + +“Is there nothing else we can gut rid of?” + +“Not a thing.” + +“Yes there is; there’s the basket!” + +“Catch hold of the net then, and let it go.” + +The cords which attached the basket to the hoop were cut, and the +balloon, as the former fell into the sea, rose again 2,000 feet. This +was, indeed, the last means of lightening the apparatus. The five +passengers had clambered into the net around the hoop, and, clinging to +its meshes, looked into the abyss below. + +Every one knows the statical sensibility of a balloon. It is only +necessary to relieve it of the lightest object in order to have it +rise. The apparatus floating in air acts like a mathematical balance. +One can readily understand, then, that when disencumbered of every +weight relatively great, its upward movement will be sudden and +considerable. It was thus in the present instance. But after remaining +poised for a moment at its height, the balloon began to descend. It was +impossible to repair the rent, through which the gas was rushing, and +the men having done everything they could do, must look to God for +succor. + +At 4 o’clock, when the balloon was only 500 feet above the sea, the +loud barking of a dog, holding itself crouched beside its master in the +meshes of the net, was heard. + +“Top has seen something!” cried one, and immediately afterwards another +shouted:— + +“Land! Land!” + +The balloon, which the wind had continued to carry towards the +southwest, had since dawn passed over a distance of several hundred +miles, and a high land began to be distinguishable in that direction. +But it was still thirty miles to leeward, and even supposing they did +not drift, it would take a full hour to reach it. An hour! Before that +time could pass, would not the balloon be emptied of what gas remained? +This was the momentous question. + +The party distinctly saw that solid point which they must reach at all +hazards. They did not know whether it was an island or a continent, as +they were uninformed as to what part of the world the tempest had +hurried them. But they knew that this land, whether inhabited or +desert, must be reached. + +At 4 o’clock it was plain that the balloon could not sustain itself +much longer. It grazed the surface of the sea, and the crests of the +higher waves several times lapped the base of the net, making it +heavier; and, like a bird with a shot in its wing, could only half +sustain itself. + +A half hour later, and the land was scarcely a mile distant. But the +balloon, exhausted, flabby, hanging in wrinkles, with only a little gas +remaining in its upper portion, unable to sustain the weight of those +clinging to the net, was plunging them in the sea, which lashed them +with its furious billows. Occasionally the envelope of the balloon +would belly out, and the wind taking it would carry it along like a +ship. Perhaps by this means it would reach the shore. But when only two +cables’ length away four voices joined in a terrible cry. The balloon, +though seemingly unable to rise again, after having been struck by a +tremendous wave, made a bound into the air, as if it had been suddenly +lightened of some of its weight. It rose 1,500 feet, and encountering a +sort of eddy in the air, instead of being carried directly to land, it +was drawn along in a direction nearly parallel thereto. In a minute or +two, however, it reapproached the shore in an oblique direction, and +fell upon the sand above the reach of the breakers. The passengers, +assisting each other, hastened to disengage themselves from the meshes +of the net; and the balloon, relieved of their weight, was caught up by +the wind, and, like a wounded bird recovering for an instant, +disappeared into space. + +The basket had contained five passengers and a dog, and but four had +been thrown upon the shore. The fifth one, then, had been washed off by +the great wave which had struck the net, and it was owing to this +accident that the lightened balloon had been able to rise for the last +time before falling upon the land. Scarcely had the four castaways felt +the ground beneath their feet than all thinking of the one who was +lost, cried:—“Perhaps he is trying to swim ashore. Save him! Let us +save him!” + + + + +CHAPTER II. + + +AN EPISODE OF THE REBELLION-THE ENGINEER CYRUS SMITH—GIDEON SPILETT—THE +NEGRO NEB—THE SAILOR PENCROFF—THE YOUTH, HERBERT—AN UNEXPECTED +PROPOSAL—RENDEZVOUS AT 10 O’CLOCK P.M.—DEPARTURE IN THE STORM. + + +They were neither professional aeronauts nor amateurs in aerial +navigation whom the storm had thrown upon this coast. They were +prisoners of war whose audacity had suggested this extraordinary manner +of escape. A hundred times they would have perished, a hundred times +their torn balloon would have precipitated them into the abyss, had not +Providence preserved them for a strange destiny, and on the 20th of +March, after having flown from Richmond, besieged by the troops of +General Ulysses Grant, they found themselves 7,000 miles from the +Virginia capital, the principal stronghold of the Secessionists during +that terrible war. Their aerial voyage had lasted five days. + +Let us see by what curious circumstances this escape of prisoners was +effected,—an escape which resulted in the catastrophe which we have +seen. + +This same year, in the month of February, 1865, in one of those +surprises by which General Grant, though in vain, endeavored to take +Richmond, many of his officers were captured by the enemy and confined +within the city. One of the most distinguished of those taken was a +Federal staff officer named Cyrus Smith. + +Cyrus Smith was a native of Massachusetts, an engineer by profession, +and a scientist of the first order, to whom the Government had given, +during the war, the direction of the railways, which played such a +great strategic part during the war. + +A true Yankee, thin, bony, lean, about forty-five years old, with +streaks of grey appearing in his close cut hair and heavy moustache. He +had one of those fine classical heads that seem as if made to be copied +upon medals; bright eyes, a serious mouth, and the air of a practiced +officer. He was one of these engineers who began of his own wish with +the pick and shovel, as there are generals who have preferred to rise +from the ranks. Thus, while possessing inventive genius, he had +acquired manual dexterity, and his muscles showed remarkable firmness. +He was as much a man of action as of study; he moved without effort, +under the influence of a strong vitality and his sanguine temperament +defied all misfortune. Highly educated, practical, “clear-headed,” his +temperament was superb, and always retaining his presence of mind he +combined in the highest degree the three conditions whose union +regulates the energy of man: activity of body, strength of will, and +determination. His motto might have been that of William of Orange in +the XVIIth century—“I can undertake without hope, and persevere through +failure.” + +Cyrus Smith was also the personification of courage. He had been in +every battle of the war. After having begun under General Grant, with +the Illinois volunteers, he had fought at Paducah, at Belmont, at +Pittsburg Landing, at the siege of Corinth, at Port Gibson, at the +Black River, at Chattanooga, at the Wilderness, upon the Potomac, +everywhere with bravery, a soldier worthy of the General who said “I +never counted my dead.” And a hundred times Cyrus Smith would have been +among the number of those whom the terrible Grant did not count; but in +these combats, though he never spared himself, fortune always favored +him, until the time he was wounded and taken prisoner at the siege of +Richmond. + +At the same time with Cyrus Smith another important personage fell into +the power of the Southerners. This was no other than the honorable +Gideon Spilett, reporter to the New York Herald, who had been detailed +to follow the fortunes of the war with the armies of the North. + +Gideon Spilett was of the race of astonishing chroniclers, English or +American, such as Stanley and the like, who shrink from nothing in +their endeavor to obtain exact information and to transmit it to their +journal in the quickest manner. The journals of the United States, such +as the New York _Herald_, are true powers, and their delegates are +persons of importance. Gideon Spilett belonged in the first rank of +these representatives. + +A man of great merit; energetic, prompt, and ready; full of ideas, +having been all over the world; soldier and artist; vehement in +council; resolute in action; thinking nothing of pain, fatigue, or +danger when seeking information, first for himself and afterwards for +his journal; a master of recondite information of the unpublished, the +unknown, the impossible. He was one of those cool observers who write +amid the cannon balls, “reporting” under the bullets, and to whom all +perils are welcome. + +He also had been in all the battles, in the front rank, revolver in one +hand and notebook in the other, his pencil never trembling in the midst +of a cannonade. He did not tire the wires by incessant telegraphing, +like those who speak when they have nothing to say, but each of his +messages was short, condensed, clear, and to the purpose. For the rest, +he did not lack humor. It was he who, after the affair of Black river, +wishing at any price to keep his place at the telegraph wicket in order +to announce the result, kept telegraphing for two hours the first +chapters of the Bible. It cost the New York _Herald_ $2,000, but the +New York _Herald_ had the first news. + +Gideon Spilett was tall. He was forty years old or more. Sandy-colored +whiskers encircled his face. His eye was clear, lively, and quick +moving. It was the eye of a man who was accustomed to take in +everything at a glance. Strongly built, he was tempered by all climates +as a bar of steel is tempered by cold water. For ten years Gideon +Spilett had been connected with the New York _Herald_, which he had +enriched with his notes and his drawings, as he wielded the pencil as +well as the pen. When captured he was about making a description and a +sketch of the battle. The last words written in his note-book were +these:—“A Southerner is aiming at me and—.” And Gideon Spilett was +missed; so, following his invariable custom, he escaped unscratched. + +Cyrus Smith and Gideon Spilett, who knew each other only by reputation, +were both taken to Richmond. The engineer recovered rapidly from his +wound, and it was during his convalescence he met the reporter. The two +soon learned to appreciate each-other. Soon their one aim was to rejoin +the army of Grant and fight again in the ranks for the preservation of +the Union. + +The two Americans had decided to avail themselves of any chance; but +although free to go and come within the city, Richmond was so closely +guarded that an escape might be deemed impossible. + +During this time Cyrus Smith was rejoined by a devoted servant. This +man was a negro, born upon the engineer’s estate, of slave parents, +whom Smith, an abolitionist by conviction, had long since freed. The +negro, though free, had no desire to leave his master, for whom he +would have given his life. He was a man of thirty years, vigorous, +agile, adroit, intelligent, quick, and self-possessed, sometimes +ingenuous always smiling, ready and honest. He was named +Nebuchadnezzar, but he answered to the nickname of Neb. + +When Neb learned that his master had been taken prisoner he left +Massachusetts without waiting a moment, arrived before Richmond, and, +by a ruse, after having risked his life twenty times, he was able to +get within the besieged city. The pleasure of Cyrus Smith on seeing +again his servant, and the joy of Neb in finding his master, cannot be +expressed. But while he had been able to get into Richmond it was much +more difficult to get out, as the watch kept upon the Federal prisoners +was very strict. It would require an extraordinary opportunity in order +to attempt an escape with any chance of success; and that occasion not +only did not present itself, but it was difficult to make. Meanwhile, +Grant continued his energetic operations. The victory of Petersburg had +been vigorously contested. His forces, reunited to those of Butler, had +not as yet obtained any result before Richmond, and nothing indicated +an early release to the prisoners. The reporter, whose tiresome +captivity gave him no item worthy of note, grew impatient. He had but +one idea; to get out of Richmond at any risk. Many times, indeed, he +tried the experiment, and was stopped by obstacles insurmountable. + +Meanwhile, the siege continued, and as the prisoners were anxious to +escape in order to join the army of Grant, so there were certain of the +besieged no less desirous to be free to join the army of the +Secessionists; and among these was a certain Jonathan Forster, who was +a violent Southerner. In truth, the Confederates were no more able to +get out of the city than the Federal prisoners, as the army of Grant +invested it around. The Mayor of Richmond had not for some time been +able to communicate with General Lee, and it was of the highest +importance to make the latter aware of the situation of the city, in +order to hasten the march of the rescuing army. This Jonathan Forster +had conceived the idea of passing over the lines of the besiegers in a +balloon, and arriving by this means in the Confederate camp. + +The Mayor authorized the undertaking, a balloon was made and placed at +the disposal of Forster and five of his companions. They were provided +with arms as they might have to defend themselves in descending, and +food in case their aerial voyage should be prolonged. The departure of +the balloon had been fixed for the 18th of March. It was to start in +the night, and with a moderate breeze from the northeast, the party +expected to arrive at the quarters of General Lee in a few hours. But +the wind from the northeast was not a mere breeze. On the morning of +the 18th there was every symptom of a storm, and soon the tempest broke +forth, making it necessary for Forster to defer his departure, as it +was impossible to risk the balloon and those whom it would carry, to +the fury of the elements. + +The balloon, inflated in the great square of Richmond, was all ready, +waiting for the first lull in the storm; and throughout the city there +was great vexation at the settled bad weather. The night of the 19th +and 20th passed, but in the morning the storm was only developed in +intensity, and departure was impossible. + +On this day Cyrus Smith was accosted in one of the streets of Richmond +by a man whom he did not know. It was a sailor named Pencroff, aged +from thirty-five to forty years, strongly built, much sun-burnt, his +eyes bright and glittering, but with a good countenance. + +This Pencroff was a Yankee who had sailed every sea, and who had +experienced every kind of extraordinary adventure that a two-legged +being without wings could encounter. It is needless to say that he was +of an adventurous nature, ready to dare anything and to be astonished +at nothing. Pencroff, in the early part of this year, had come to +Richmond on business, having with him Herbert Brown, of New Jersey, a +lad fifteen years old, the son of Pencroff’s captain, and an orphan +whom he loved as his own child. Not having left the city at the +beginning of the siege, he found himself, to his great displeasure, +blocked. He also had but one idea: to get out. He knew the reputation +of the engineer, and he knew with what impatience that determined man +chaffed at his restraint. He did not therefore hesitate to address him +without ceremony. + +“Mr. Smith, have you had enough of Richmond?” + +The engineer looked fixedly at the man who spoke thus, and who added in +a low voice:— + +“Mr. Smith, do you want to escape?” + +“How?” answered the engineer, quickly, and it was evidently an +inconsiderate reply, for he had not yet examined the man who spoke. + +“Mr. Smith, do you want to escape?” + +““Who are you?” he demanded, in a cold voice. + +Pencroff made himself known. + +“Sufficient,” replied Smith. “And by what means do you propose to +escape?” + +“By this idle balloon which is doing nothing, and seems to me all ready +to take us!”— + +The sailor had no need to finish his sentence. The engineer had +understood all in a word. He seized Pencroff by the arm and hurried him +to his house. There the sailor explained his project, which, in truth, +was simple enough:—They risked only their lives in carrying it out. The +storm was at its height, it is true; but a skilful and daring engineer +like Smith would know well how to manage a balloon. He, himself, would +not have hesitated to have started, had he known how—with Herbert, of +course. He had seen many storms and he thought nothing of them. + +Cyrus Smith listened to the sailor without saying a word, but with +glistening eyes. This was the opportunity, and he was not the man to +let it escape him. The project was very dangerous, but it could be +accomplished. During the night, in spite of the guards, they might +reach the balloon, creep into the basket, and then cut the lines which +held it! Certainly they risked being shot, but on the other hand they +might succeed, and but for this tempest—but without this tempest the +balloon would have been gone and the long-sought opportunity would not +have been present. + +“I am not alone,” said Smith at length. + +“How many would you want to take?” demanded the sailor. + +“Two; my friend Spilett, and my man Neb.” + +“That would be three,” replied Pencroff; “and, with Herbert and myself, +five. Well, the balloon can carry six?” + +“Very well. We will go!” said the engineer. + +This “we” pledged the reporter, who was not a man to retreat, and who, +when the project was told him, approved of it heartily. What astonished +him was, that so simple a plan had not already occurred to himself. As +to Neb, he followed his master wherever his master wanted to go. + +“To-night, then,” said Pencroff. + +“To-night, at ten o’clock,” replied Smith; “and pray heaven that this +storm does not abate before we get off.” + +Pencroff took leave of the engineer, and returned to his lodging, where +he found young Herbert Brown. This brave boy knew the plans of the +sailor, and he was not without a certain anxiety as to the result of +the proposal to the engineer. We see, therefore, five persons +determined to throw themselves into the vortex of the storm. + +The storm did not abate. And neither Jonathan Forster nor his companion +dreamed of confronting it in that frail basket. The journey would be +terrible. The engineer feared but one thing; that the balloon, held to +the ground and beaten down under the wind, would be torn into a +thousand pieces. During many hours he wandered about the nearly +deserted square, watching the apparatus. Pencroff, his hands in his +pockets, yawning like a man who is unable to kill time, did the same; +but in reality he also feared that the balloon would be torn to pieces, +or break from its moorings and be carried off. + +Evening arrived and the night closed in dark and threatening. Thick +masses of fog passed like clouds low down over the earth. Rain mingled +with snow fell. The weather was cold. A sort of mist enveloped +Richmond. It seemed as if in the face of this terrible tempest a truce +had been agreed upon between the besiegers and besieged, and the cannon +were silent before the heavy detonations of the storm. The streets of +the city were deserted; it had not even seemed necessary, in such +weather, to guard the square in which swung the balloon. Everything +favored the departure of the prisoners; but this voyage, in the midst +of the excited elements!— + +“Bad weather,” said Pencroff, holding his hat, which the wind was +trying to take off, firmly to his head, “but pshaw, it can’t last, all +the same.” + +At half-past 9, Cyrus Smith and his companions glided by different +routes to the square, which the gas lights, extinguished by the wind, +left in profound darkness. They could not see even the huge balloon, as +it lay pressed over against the ground. Beside the bags of ballast +which held the cords of the net, the basket was held down by a strong +cable passed through a ring fastened in the pavement, and the ends +brought back on board. + +The five prisoners came together at the basket. They had not been +discovered, and such was the darkness that they could not see each +other. Without saying a word, four of them took their places in the +basket, while Pencroff, under the direction of the engineer, unfastened +successively the bundles of ballast. It took but a few moments, and +then the sailor joined his companions. The only thing that then held +the balloon was the loop of the cable, and Cyrus Smith had but to give +the word for them to let it slip. At that moment, a dog leaped with a +bound into the basket. It was Top, the dog of the engineer, who, having +broken his chain, had followed his master. Cyrus Smith, fearing to add +to the weight, wanted to send the poor brute back, but Pencroff said, +“Pshaw, it is but one more!” and at the same time threw overboard two +bags of sand. Then, slipping the cable, the balloon, shooting off in an +oblique direction, disappeared, after having dashed its basket against +two chimneys, which it demolished in its rush. + +Then the storm burst upon them with frightful violence. The engineer +did not dare to descend during the night, and when day dawned all sight +of the earth was hidden by the mists. It was not until five days later +that the breaking of the clouds enabled them to see the vast sea +extending below them, lashed by the wind into a terrific fury. + +We have seen how, of these five men, who started on the 20th of March, +four were thrown, four days later, on a desert coast, more than 6,000 +miles from this country. And the one who was missing, the one to whose +rescue the four survivors had hurried was their leader, Cyrus Smith. + +[The 5th of April, Richmond fell into the hands of Grant, the Rebellion +was repressed, Lee retreated into the West (_sic_) and the cause of the +Union triumphed.] + + + + +CHAPTER III. + + +FIVE O’CLOCK IN THE AFTERNOON—THE LOST ONE—THE DESPAIR OF NEB—SEARCH TO +THE NORTHWARD—THE ISLAND—A NIGHT OF ANGUISH—THE FOG OF THE MORNING—NEB +SWIMMING—SIGHT OF THE LAND—FORDING THE CHANNEL. + + +The engineer, on the giving way of the net, had been swept away by a +wave. His dog had disappeared at the same time. The faithful animal had +of its own accord sprung to the rescue of its master. + +“Forward!” cried the reporter, and all four, forgetting weakness and +fatigue, began their search. Poor Neb wept with grief and despair at +the thought of having lost all that he loved in the world. + +Not more than two minutes had passed between the moment that Smith had +disappeared, and the instant of his companions landing. They were, +therefore, hopeful of being in time to rescue him. + +“Hunt, hunt for him,” cried Neb. + +“Yes, Neb, and we will find him,” replied Spilett. + +“Alive?” + +“Alive!” + +“Can he swim?” demanded Pencroff. + +“Oh, yes,” responded Neb. “And, besides, Top is with him—” + +The sailor, looking at the roaring sea, shook his head. + +It was at a point northward from this shore, and about half a mile from +the place where the castaways had landed, that the engineer had +disappeared, and if he had come ashore at the nearest point it was at +least that distance from where they now were. + +It was nearly 6 o’clock. The fog had risen and made the night very +dark. The castaways followed northward along the shore of that land +upon which chance had thrown them. A land unknown, whose geographical +situation they could not guess. They walked upon a sandy soil, mixed +with stones, seemingly destitute of any kind of vegetation. The ground, +very uneven, seemed in certain places to be riddled with small holes, +making the march very painful. From these holes, great, heavy-flying +birds rushed forth, and were lost in the darkness. Others, more active, +rose in flocks, and fled away like the clouds. The sailor thought he +recognized gulls and sea-mews, whose sharp cries were audible above the +raging of the sea. + +From time to time the castaways would stop and call, listening for an +answering voice from the ocean. They thought, too, that if they were +near the place where the engineer had been, washed ashore, and he had +been unable to make any response, that, at least, the barking of the +dog Top would have been heard. But no sound was distinguishable above +the roaring of the waves and the thud of the surf. Then the little +party would resume their march, searching all the windings of the +shore. + +After a walk of twenty minutes the four castaways were suddenly stopped +by a foaming line of breakers. They found themselves upon the extremity +of a sharp point upon which the sea broke with fury. + +“This is a promontory,” said the sailor, “and it will be necessary to +turn back, keeping to the right in order to gain the main land.” + +“But if he is there!” cried Neb, pointing towards the ocean, whose +enormous waves showed white through the gloom. + +“Well, let us call again.” + +And all together, uniting their voices, uttered a vigorous cry, but +without response. They waited for a lull, and tried once more. And +again there was no answer. + +Then the castaways turned back, following the opposite side of the +promontory over ground equally sandy and rocky. However, Pencroff +observed that the shore was bolder, that the land rose somewhat, and he +thought that it might gradually slope up to the high hill which was +dimly visible through the darkness. The birds were less numerous on +this shore. The sea also seemed less surging and tempestuous, and it +was noticeable that the agitation of the waves was subsiding. They +hardly heard the sound of the surf, and doubtless, this side of the +promontory formed a semi-circular bay, protected by its sharp point +from the long roll of the sea. + +But by following this direction they were walking towards the south, +which was going away from that place where Smith would have landed. +After a tramp of a mile and a half, the shore presented no other curve +which would permit of a return towards the north. It was evident that +this promontory, the point of which they had turned, must be joined to +the mainland. The castaways, although much fatigued, pushed on +courageously, hoping each moment to find a sudden turn which would take +them in the desired direction. What, then, was their disappointment +when, after having walked nearly two miles, they found themselves again +arrested by the sea, upon a high promontory of slippery rocks. + +“We are on an island,” exclaimed Pencroff; “and we have measured it +from end to end!” + +The words of the sailor were true. The castaways had been thrown, not +upon a continent, but upon an island not more than two miles long, and +of inconsiderable breadth. + +This desert isle, covered with stones, without vegetation, desolate +refuge of sea-birds, did it belong to a more important archipelago? +They could not tell. The party in the balloon, when from their basket +they saw the land through the clouds, had not been able to determine +its size. But Pencroff, with the eyes of a sailor accustomed to +piercing the gloom, thought, at the moment, that he could distinguish +in the west confused masses, resembling a high coast. But at this time +they were unable, on account of the obscurity, to determine to what +system, whether simple or complex, their isle belonged. They were +unable to get off, as the sea surrounded them, and it was necessary to +wait until the next day to search for the engineer; who, alas! had made +no cry to signal his presence. + +“The silence of Cyrus proves nothing,” said the reporter. “He may have +fainted, or be wounded, and unable to reply, but we will not despair.” + +The reporter then suggested the idea of lighting a fire upon the point +of the island, which would serve as a signal for the engineer. But they +searched in vain for wood or dry branches. Sand and stones were all +they found. + +One can understand the grief of Neb and his companions, who were +strongly attached to their brave comrade. It was too evident that they +could not help him now, and that they must wait till day. The engineer +had escaped, and was already safe upon the land, or he was lost +forever. The hours were long and dreadful, the cold was intense, and +the castaways suffered keenly, but they did not realize it. They did +not think of sleep. Thinking only of their chief, hoping, wishing to +hope, they moved back and forth upon that arid island, constantly +returning to the northern end, where they would be closest to the place +of the catastrophe. They listened, they shouted, they tried to catch +some call, and, as a lull would come, or the roar of the surf fall with +the waves, their hallooes must have sounded far into the distance. + +Once the cry of Neb was answered by an echo; and Herbert made Pencroff +notice it, saying:—“That proves that there is land not far to the +west.” + +The sailor nodded; he knew his eyes could not deceive him. He thought +he had seen land, and it must be there. But this distant echo was the +only answer to the cries of Neb, and the silence about the island +remained unbroken. Meanwhile the sky was clearing slowly. Towards +midnight, some stars shone out, and, had the engineer been there with +his companions, he would have noticed that these stars did not belong +to the northern hemisphere. The pole star was not visible in this new +horizon, the constellations in the zenith were not such as they had +been accustomed to see from North America, and the Southern Cross shone +resplendent in the heavens. + +The night passed; and towards 5 o’clock in the morning the middle +heavens began to brighten, though the horizon remained obscure; until +with the first rays of day, a fog rose from the sea, so dense that the +eye could scarcely penetrate twenty paces into its depths, and +separated into great, heavy-moving masses. This was unfortunate, as the +castaways were unable to distinguish anything about them. While the +gaze of Neb and the reporter was directed towards the sea, the sailor +and Herbert searched for the land in the west; but they could see +nothing. + +“Never mind,” said Pencroff, “if I do not see the land. I feel that it +is there,—just as sure as that we are not in Richmond.” + +But the fog, which was nothing more than a morning mist, soon rose. A +clear sun warmed the upper air, its heat penetrating to the surface of +the island. At half-past 6, three quarters of an hour after sunrise, +the mist was nearly gone. Though still thick overhead, it dissolved, +below, and soon all the island appeared, as from a cloud. Then the sea +appeared, limitless towards the east, but bounded on the west by a high +and abrupt coast. + +Yes, the land was there! There, safety was at least provisionally +assured. The island and the main land were separated by a channel half +a mile wide, through which rushed a strong current. Into this current +one of the party, without saying a word or consulting with his +companions, precipitated himself. It was Neb. He was anxious to be upon +that coast and to be pushing forward towards the north. No one could +keep him back. Pencroff called to him in vain. The reporter prepared to +follow, but the sailor ran to him, exclaiming:— + +“Are you determined to cross this channel?” + +“I am,” replied Spilett. + +“Well, then, listen to me a moment. Neb can rescue his master alone. If +we throw ourselves into the channel we are in danger of being carried +out to sea by this strong current. Now, if I am not mistaken it is +caused by the ebb. You see the tide is going out. Have patience until +low water and then we may ford it.” + +“You are right,” answered the reporter; “we will keep together as much +as possible.” + +Meantime, Neb was swimming vigorously in a diagonal direction, against +the current; his black shoulders were seen rising with each stroke. He +was drawn backward with swiftness, but he was gaining towards the other +shore. It took him more than half an hour to cross the half mile which +separated the isle from the mainland, and when he reached the other +side it was at a place a long distance from the point opposite to that +which he had left. + +Neb, having landed at the base of a high rocky wall, clambered quickly +up its side, and, running, disappeared behind a point projecting into +the sea, about the same height as the northern end of the island. + +Neb’s companions had watched with anxiety his daring attempt, and, when +he was out of sight, they fixed their eyes upon that land from which +they were going to demand refuge. They ate some of the shellfish which +they found upon the sands; it was a poor meal, but then it was better +than nothing. + +The opposite coast formed an immense bay, terminated to the south by a +sharp point bare of all vegetation, and having a most forbidding +aspect. This point at its junction with the shore was abutted by high +granite rocks. Towards the north, on the contrary, the bay widened, +with a shore more rounded, extending from the southwest to the +northeast, and ending in a narrow cape. Between these two points, the +distance must have been about eight miles. A half mile from the shore +the island, like an enormous whale, lay upon the sea. Its width could +not have been greater than a quarter of a mile. + +Before the Island, the shore began with a sandy beach strewn with black +rocks, at this moment beginning to appear above the receding tide. +Beyond this rose, like a curtain, a perpendicular granite wall, at +least 300 feet high and terminated by a ragged edge. This extended for +about three miles, ending abruptly on the right in a smooth face, as if +cut by the hand of man. To the left on the contrary, above the +promontory, this kind of irregular cliff, composed of heaped-up rocks +and glistening in the light, sank and gradually mingled with the rocks +of the southern point. + +Upon the upper level of the coast not a tree was visible. It was a +table-land, as barren though not as extensive as that around Cape Town, +or at the Cape of Good Hope. At least so it appeared from the islet. To +the right, however, and back of the smooth face of rock, some verdure +appeared. The confused massing of large trees was easily +distinguishable extending far as the eye could reach. This verdure +gladdened the sight tired by the rough face of granite. Finally, back +of and above the plateau, distant towards the northwest about seven +miles, shone a white summit, reflecting the sun’s rays. It was the +snowy cap of some lofty mountain. + +It was not possible at present to say whether this land was an island +or part of a continent; but the sight of the broken rocks heaped +together on the left would have proved to a geologist their volcanic +origin, as they were incontestably the result of igneous action. + +Gideon Spilett, Pencroff, and Herbert looked earnestly upon this land +where they were to live, perhaps for long years; upon which, if out of +the track of ships, they might have to die. + +“Well,” demanded Herbert, “what do you think of it, Pencroff?” + +“Well,” replied the sailor, “there’s good and bad in it, as with +everything else. But we shall soon see; for look; what I told you. In +three hours we can cross, and once over there, we will see what we can +do towards finding Mr. Smith.” + +Pencroff was not wrong in his predictions. Three hours later, at low +tide, the greater part of the sandy bed of the channel was bare. A +narrow strip of water, easily crossed, was all that separated the +island from the shore. And at 10 o’clock, Spilett and his two +companions, stripped of their clothing, which they carried in packages +on their heads, waded through the water, which was nowhere more than +five feet deep. Herbert, where the water was too deep, swam like a +fish, acquitting himself well; and all arrived without difficulty at +the other shore. There, having dried themselves in the sun, they put on +their clothes, which had not touched the water, and took counsel +together. + + + + +CHAPTER IV. + + +THE LITHODOMES—THE MOUTH OF THE RIVER—THE “CHIMNEYS”—CONTINUATION OF +THE SEARCH—THE FOREST OF EVERGREENS—GETTING FIREWOOD—WAITING FOR THE +TIDE—ON TOP OF THE CLIFF—THE TIMBER-FLOAT—THE RETURN TO THE COAST. + + +Presently the reporter told the sailor to wait just where he was until +he should come back, and without losing a moment, he walked back along +the coast in the direction which Neb had taken some hours before, and +disappeared quickly around a turn in the shore. + +Herbert wished to go with him. + +“Stay, my boy,” said the sailor. “We must pitch our camp for the night, +and try to find something to eat more satisfying than shellfish. Our +friends will need food when they come back.” + +“I am ready, Pencroff,” said Herbert. + +“Good,” said the sailor. “Let us set to work methodically. We are +tired, cold, and hungry: we need shelter, fire, and food. There is +plenty of wood in the forest, and we can get eggs from the nests; but +we must find a house.” + +“Well,” said Herbert, “I will look for a cave in these rocks, and I +shall certainly find some hole in which we can stow ourselves.” + +“Right,” said Pencroff; “let us start at once.” + +They walked along the base of the rocky wall, on the strand left bare +by the receding waves. But instead of going northwards, they turned to +the south. Pencroff had noticed, some hundreds of feet below the place +where they had been thrown ashore, a narrow inlet in the coast, which +he thought might be the mouth of a river or of a brook. Now it was +important to pitch the camp in the neighborhood of fresh water; in that +part of the island, too, Smith might be found. + +The rock rose 300 feet, smooth and massive. It was a sturdy wall of the +hardest granite, never corroded by the waves, and even at its base +there was no cleft which might serve as a temporary abode. About the +summit hovered a host of aquatic birds, mainly of the web-footed tribe, +with long, narrow, pointed beaks. Swift and noisy, they cared little +for the unaccustomed presence of man. A shot into the midst of the +flock would have brought down a dozen; but neither Pencroff nor Herbert +had a gun. Besides, gulls and sea-mews are barely eatable, and their +eggs have a very disagreeable flavor. + +Meanwhile Herbert, who was now to the left, soon noticed some rocks +thickly strewn with sea weed, which would evidently be submerged again +in a few hours. On them lay hosts of bivalves, not to be disdained by +hungry men. Herbert called to Pencroff, who came running to him. + +“Ah, they are mussels,” said the sailor. “Now we can spare the eggs.” + +“They are not mussels,” said Herbert, examining the mollusks carefully, +“they are lithodomes.” + +“Can we eat them?” said Pencroff. + +“Certainly.” + +“Then let us eat some lithodomes.” + +The sailor could rely on Herbert, who was versed in Natural History and +very fond of it. He owed his acquaintance with this study in great part +to his father, who had entered him in the classes of the best +professors in Boston, where the child’s industry and intelligence had +endeared him to all. + +These lithodomes were oblong shell-fish, adhering in clusters to the +rocks. They belonged to that species of boring mollusk which can +perforate a hole in the hardest stone, and whose shell has the +peculiarity of being rounded at both ends. + +Pencroff and Herbert made a good meal of these lithodomes. which lay +gaping in the sun. They tasted like oysters, with a peppery flavor +which left no desire for condiments of any kind. + +Their hunger was allayed for the moment, but their thirst was increased +by the spicy flavor of the mollusks. The thing now was to find fresh +water, which was not likely to fail them in a region so undulating. +Pencroff and Herbert, after having taken the precaution to fill their +pockets and handkerchiefs with lithodomes, regained the foot of the +hill. + +Two hundred feet further on they reached the inlet, through which, as +Pencroff had surmised, a little river was flowing with full current +Here the rocky wall seemed to have been torn asunder by some volcanic +convulsion. At its base lay a little creek, running at an acute angle. +The water in this place was 100 feet across, while the banks on either +side were scarcely 20 feet broad. The river buried itself at once +between the two walls of granite, which began to decline as one went up +stream. + +“Here is water,” said Pencroff, “and over there is wood. Well, Herbert, +now we only want the house.” + +The river water was clear. The sailor knew that as the tide was now low +there would be no influx from the sea, and the water would be fresh. +When this important point had been settled, Herbert looked for some +cave which might give them shelter, but it was in vain. Everywhere the +wall was smooth, flat, and perpendicular. + +However, over at the mouth of the watercourse, and above high-water +mark, the detritus had formed, not a grotto, but a pile of enormous +rocks, such as are often met with in granitic countries, and which are +called _Chimneys_. + +Pencroff and Herbert went down between the rocks, into those sandy +corridors, lighted only by the huge cracks between the masses of +granite, some of which only kept their equilibrium by a miracle. But +with the light the wind came in, and with the wind the piercing cold of +the outer air. Still, the sailor thought that by stopping up some of +these openings with a mixture of stones and sand, the Chimneys might be +rendered habitable. Their plan resembled the typographical sign, &, and +by cutting off the upper curve of the sign, through which the south and +the west wind rushed in, they could succeed without doubt in utilizing +its lower portion. + +“This is just what we want,” said Pencroff, and if we ever see Mr. +Smith again, he will know how to take advantage of this labyrinth.” + +“We shall see him again, Pencroff,” said Herbert, “and when he comes +back he must find here a home that is tolerably comfortable. We can +make this so if we can build a fireplace in the left corridor with an +opening for the smoke.” + +“That we can do, my boy,” answered the sailor, “and these Chimneys will +just serve our purpose. But first we must get together some firing. +Wood will be useful, too, in blocking up these great holes through +which the wind whistles so shrilly.” + +Herbert and Pencroff left the Chimneys, and turning the angle, walked +up the left bank of the river, whose current was strong enough to bring +down a quantity of dead wood. The return tide, which had already begun, +would certainly carry it in the ebb to a great distance. “Why not +utilize this flux and reflux,” thought the sailor, “in the carriage of +heavy timber?” + +After a quarter of an hour’s walk, the two reached the elbow which the +river made in turning to the left. From this point onward it flowed +through a forest of magnificent trees, which had preserved their +verdure in spite of the season; for they belonged to that great +cone-bearing family indigenous everywhere, from the poles to the +tropics. Especially conspicuous were the “deodara,” so numerous in the +Himalayas, with their pungent perfume. Among them were clusters of +pines, with tall trunks and spreading parasols of green. The ground was +strewn with fallen branches, so dry as to crackle under their feet. + +“Good,” said the sailor, “I may not know the name of these trees, but I +know they belong to the genus firewood, and that’s the main thing for +us.” + +It was an easy matter to gather the firewood. They did not need even to +strip the trees; plenty of dead branches lay at their feet. This dry +wood would burn rapidly, and they would need a large supply. How could +two men carry such a load to the Chimneys? Herbert asked the question. + +“My boy,” said the sailor, “there’s a way to do everything. If we had a +car or a boat it would be too easy.” + +“We have the river,” suggested Herbert. + +“Exactly,” said Pencroff. “The river shall be our road and our carrier, +too. Timber-floats were not invented for nothing.” + +“But our carrier is going in the wrong direction,” said Herbert, “since +the tide is coming up from the sea.” + +“We have only to wait for the turn of tide,” answered the sailor. “Let +us get our float ready.” + +They walked towards the river, each carrying a heavy load of wood tied +up in fagots. On the bank, too, lay quantities of dead boughs, among +grass which the foot of man had probably never pressed before. Pencroff +began to get ready his float. + +In an eddy caused by an angle of the shore, which broke the flow of the +current, they set afloat the larger pieces of wood, bound together by +liana stems so as to form a sort of raft. On this raft they piled the +rest of the wood, which would have been a load for twenty men. In an +hour their work was finished, and the float was moored to the bank to +wait for the turn of the tide. Pencroff and Herbert resolved to spend +the mean time in gaining a more extended view of the country from the +higher plateau. Two hundred feet behind the angle of the river, the +wall terminating in irregular masses of rocks, sloped away gently to +the edge of the forest. The two easily climbed this natural staircase, +soon attained the summit, and posted themselves at the angle +overlooking the mouth of the river. + +Their first look was at that ocean over which they had been so +frightfully swept. They beheld with emotion the northern part of the +coast, the scene of the catastrophe, and of Smith’s disappearance. They +hoped to see on the surface some wreck of the balloon to which a man +might cling. But the sea was a watery desert. The coast, too, was +desolate. Neither Neb nor the reporter could be seen. + +“Something tells me,” said Herbert, “that a person so energetic as Mr. +Smith would not let himself be drowned like an ordinary man. He must +have got to shore; don’t you think so, Pencroff?” + +The sailor shook his head sadly. He never thought to see Smith again; +but he left Herbert a hope. + +“No doubt,” said he, “our engineer could save himself where any one +else would perish.” + +Meanwhile he took a careful observation of the coast. Beneath his eyes +stretched out the sandy beach, bounded, upon the right of the +river-mouth, by lines of breakers. The rocks which still were visible +above the water were like groups of amphibious monsters lying in the +surf. Beyond them the sea sparkled in the rays of the sun. A narrow +point terminated the southern horizon, and it was impossible to tell +whether the land stretched further in that direction, or whether it +trended southeast and southwest, so as to make an elongated peninsula. +At the northern end of the bay, the outline of the coast was continued +to a great distance. There the shore was low and flat, without rocks, +but covered by great sandbanks, left by the receding tide. + +When Pencroff and Herbert walked back towards the west, their looks +fell on the snowcapped mountain, which rose six or seven miles away. +Masses of tree-trunks, with patches of evergreens, extended from its +first declivities to within two miles of the coast. Then from the edge +of this forest to the coast stretched a plateau strewn at random with +clumps of trees. On the left shore through the glades the waters of the +little river, which seemed to have returned in its sinuous course to +the mountains which gave it birth. + +“Are we upon an island?” muttered the sailor. + +“It is big enough, at all events,” said the boy. + +“An island’s an island, no matter how big,” said Pencroff. + +But this important question could not yet be decided. The country +itself, isle or continent, seemed fertile, picturesque, and diversified +in its products. For that they must be grateful. They returned along +the southern ridge of the granite plateau, outlined by a fringe of +fantastic rocks, in whose cavities lived hundreds of birds. A whole +flock of them soared aloft as Herbert jumped over the rocks. + +“Ah!” cried he, “these are neither gulls nor sea-mews.” + +“What are they?” said Pencroff. “They look for all the world like +pigeons.” + +“So they are,” said Herbert, “but they are wild pigeons, or rock +pigeons.” I know them by the two black bands on the wing, the white +rump, and the ash-blue feathers. The rock pigeon is good to eat, and +its eggs ought to be delicious; and if they have left a few in their +nests—” + +“We will let them hatch in an omelet,” said Pencroff, gaily. + +“But what will you make your omelet in?” asked Herbert; “in your hat?” + +“I am not quite conjurer enough for that,” said the sailor. “We must +fall back on eggs in the shell, and I will undertake to despatch the +hardest.” + +Pencroff and the boy examined carefully the cavities of the granite, +and succeeded in discovering eggs in some of them. Some dozens were +collected in the sailor’s handkerchief, and, high tide approaching, the +two went down again to the water-course. + +It was 1 o’clock when they arrived at the elbow of the river, and the +tide was already on the turn. Pencroff had no intention of letting his +timber float at random, nor did he wish to get on and steer it. But a +sailor is never troubled in a matter of ropes or cordage, and Pencroff +quickly twisted from the dry lianas a rope several fathoms long. This +was fastened behind the raft, and the sailor held it in his hand, while +Herbert kept the float in the current by pushing it off from the shore +with a long pole. + +This expedient proved an entire success. The enormous load of wood kept +well in the current. The banks were sheer, and there was no fear lest +the float should ground; before 2 o’clock they reached the mouth of the +stream, a few feet from the Chimneys. + + + + +CHAPTER V. + + +ARRANGING THE CHIMNEYS—THE IMPORTANT QUESTION OF FIRE—THE MATCH +BOX—SEARCH OVER THE SHORE—RETURN OF THE REPORTER AND NEB—ONE MATCH—THE +CRACKLING FIRE—THE FISH SUPPER—THE FIRST NIGHT ON LAND. + + +The first care of Pencroff, after the raft had been unloaded, was to +make the Chimneys habitable, by stopping up those passages traversed by +the draughts of air. Sand, stones, twisted branches, and mud, +hermetically sealed the galleries of the & open to the southerly winds, +and shut out its upper curve. One narrow, winding passage, opening on +the side; was arranged to carry out the smoke and to quicken the +draught of the fire. The Chimneys were thus divided into three or four +chambers, if these dark dens, which would hardly have contained a +beast, might be so called. But they were dry, and one could stand up in +them, or at least in the principal one, which was in the centre. The +floor was covered with sand, and, everything considered, they could +establish themselves in this place while waiting for one better. + +While working, Herbert and Pencroff chatted together. + +“Perhaps,” said the boy, “our companions will have found a better place +than ours.” + +“It is possible.” answered the sailor, “but, until we know, don’t let +us stop. Better have two strings to one’s bow than none at all!” + +“Oh,” repeated Herbert, “if they can only find Mr. Smith, and bring him +back with them, how thankful we will be!” + +“Yes,” murmured Pencroff. “He was a good man.” + +“Was!” said Herbert. “Do you think we shall not see him again?” + +“Heaven forbid!” replied the sailor. + +The work of division was rapidly accomplished, and Pencroff declared +himself satisfied. “Now,” said he, “our friends may return, and they +will find a good enough shelter.” + +Nothing remained but to fix the fireplace and to prepare the meal, +which, in truth, was a task easy and simple enough. Large flat stones +were placed at the mouth of the first gallery to the left, where the +smoke passage had been made; and this chimney was made so narrow that +but little heat would escape up the flue, and the cavern would be +comfortably warmed. The stock of wood was piled up in one of the +chambers, and the sailor placed some logs and broken branches upon the +stones. He was occupied in arranging them when Herbert asked him if he +had some matches. + +“Certainly,” replied Pencroff, “and moreover, fortunately; for without +matches or tinder we would indeed be in trouble.” + +“Could not we always make fire as the savages do,” replied Herbert, “by +rubbing two bits of dry wood together?” + +“Just try it, my boy, some time, and see if you do anything more than +put your arms out of joint.” + +“Nevertheless, it is often done in the islands of the Pacific.” + +“I don’t say that it is not,” replied Pencroff, “but the savages must +have a way of their own, or use a certain kind of wood, as more than +once I have wanted to get fire in that way and have never yet been able +to. For my part, I prefer matches; and, by the way, where are mine?” + +Pencroff, who was an habitual smoker, felt in his vest for the box, +which he was never without, but, not finding it, he searched the +pockets of his trowsers, and to his profound amazement, it was not +there. + +“This is an awkward business,” said he, looking at Herbert. “My box +must have fallen from my pocket, and I can’t find it. But you, Herbert, +have you nothing: no steel, not anything, with which we can make fire?” + +“Not a thing, Pencroff.” + +The sailor, followed by the boy, walked out, rubbing his forehead. + +On the sand, among the rocks, by the bank of the river, both of them +searched with the utmost care, but without result. The box was of +copper, and had it been there, they must have seen it. + +“Pencroff,” asked Herbert, “did not you throw it out of the basket?” + +“I took good care not to,” said the sailor. “But when one has been +knocked around as we have been, so small a thing could easily have been +lost; even my pipe is gone. The confounded box; where can it be?” + +“Well, the tide is out; let us run to the place where we landed,” said +Herbert. + +It was little likely that they would find this box, which the sea would +have rolled among the pebbles at high water; nevertheless, it would do +no harm to search. They, therefore, went quickly to the place where +they had first landed, some 200 paces from the Chimneys. There, among +the pebbles, in the hollows of the rocks, they made minute search, but +in vain. If the box had fallen here it must have been carried out by +the waves. As the tide went down, the sailor peered into every crevice, +but without Success. It was a serious loss, and, for the time, +irreparable. Pencroff did not conceal his chagrin. He frowned, but did +not speak, and Herbert tried to console him by saying, that, most +probably, the matches would have been so wetted as to be useless. + +“No, my boy,” answered the sailor. “They were in a tightly closing +metal box. But now, what are we to do?” + +“We will certainly find means of procuring fire,” said Herbert. “Mr. +Smith or Mr. Spilett will not be as helpless as we are.” + +“Yes, but in the meantime we are without it,” said Pencroff, “and our +companions will find but a very sorry meal on their return.” + +“But,” said Herbert, hopefully, “it is not possible that they will have +neither tinder nor matches.” + +“I doubt it,” answered the sailor, shaking his head. “In the first +place, neither Neb nor Mr. Smith smoke, and then I’m afraid Mr. Spilett +has more likely kept his notebook than his match-box.” + +Herbert did not answer. This loss was evidently serious. Nevertheless, +the lad thought surely they could make a fire in some way or other, but +Pencroff, more experienced, although a man not easily discouraged, knew +differently. At any rate there was but one thing to do:—to wait until +the return of Neb and the reporter. It was necessary to give up the +repast of cooked eggs which they had wished to prepare, and a diet of +raw flesh did not seem to be, either for themselves or for the others, +an agreeable prospect. + +Before returning to the Chimneys, the companions, in case they failed +of a fire, gathered a fresh lot of lithodomes, and then silently took +the road to their dwelling. Pencroff, his eyes fixed upon the ground, +still searched in every direction for the lost box. They followed again +up the left bank of the river, from its mouth to the angle where the +raft had been built. They returned to the upper plateau, and went in +every direction, searching in the tall grass on the edge of the forest, +but in vain. It was 5 o’clock when they returned again to the Chimneys, +and it is needless to say that the passages were searched in their +darkest recesses before all hope was given up. + +Towards 6 o’clock, just as the sun was disappearing behind the high +land in the west, Herbert, who was walking back and forth upon the +shore, announced the return of Neb and of Gideon Spilett. They came +back alone, and the lad felt his heart sink. The sailor had not, then, +been wrong in his presentiments; they had been unable to find the +engineer. + +The reporter, when he came up, seated himself upon a rock, without +speaking. Fainting from fatigue, half dead with hunger, he was unable +to utter a word. As to Neb, his reddened eyes showed how he had been +weeping, and the fresh tears which he was unable to restrain, +indicated, but too clearly, that he had lost all hope. + +The reporter at length gave the history of their search. Neb and he had +followed the coast for more than eight miles, and, consequently, far +beyond the point where the balloon had made the plunge which was +followed by the disappearance of the engineer and Top. The shore was +deserted. Not a recently turned stone, not a trace upon the sand, not a +footprint, was upon all that part of the shore. It was evident that +nobody inhabited that portion of the island. The sea was as deserted as +the land; and it was there, at some hundreds of feet from shore, that +the engineer had found his grave. + +At that moment Neb raised his head, and in a voice which showed how he +still struggled against despair, exclaimed:— + +“No, he is not dead. It is impossible. It might happen to you or me, +but never to him. He is a man who can get out of anything!” + +Then his strength failing him, he murmured, “But I am used up.” + +Herbert ran to him and cried:— + +“Neb, we will find him; God will give him back to us; but you, you must +be famishing; do eat something.” + +And while speaking the lad offered the poor negro a handful of +shell-fish—a meagre and insufficient nourishment enough. + +But Neb, though he had eaten nothing for hours, refused them. Poor +fellow! deprived of his master, he wished no longer to live. + +As to Gideon Spilett, he devoured the mollusks, and then laid down upon +the sand at the foot of a rock. He was exhausted, but calm. Herbert, +approaching him, took his hand. + +“Mr. Spilett,” said he, “we have discovered a shelter where you will be +more comfortable. The night is coming on; so come and rest there. +To-morrow we will see—” + +The reporter rose, and, guided by the lad, proceeded towards the +Chimneys. As he did so, Pencroff came up to him, and in an off-hand way +asked him if, by chance, he had a match with him. The reporter stopped, +felt in his pockets, and finding none, said:— + +“I had some, but I must have thrown them all away.” + +Then the sailor called Neb and asked him the same question, receiving a +like answer. + +“Curse it!” cried the sailor, unable to restrain the word. + +The reporter heard it, and going to him said:—“Have you no matches?” + +“Not one; and, of course, no fire.” + +“Ah,” cried Neb, “if he was here, my master, he could soon make one.” + +The four castaways stood still and looked anxiously at each other. +Herbert was the first to break the silence, by saying:— + +“Mr. Spilett, you are a smoker, you always have matches about you; +perhaps you have not searched thoroughly. Look again; a single match +will be enough.” + +The reporter rummaged the pockets of his trowsers, his vest, and coat, +and to the great joy of Pencroff, as well as to his own surprise, felt +a little sliver of wood caught in the lining of his vest. He could feel +it from the outside, but his fingers were unable to disengage it. If +this should prove a match, and only one, it was extremely necessary not +to rub off the phosphorus. + +“Let me try,” said the lad. And very adroitly, without breaking it, he +drew out this little bit of wood, this precious trifle, which to these +poor men was of such great importance. It was uninjured. + +“One match!” cried Pencroff.” “Why, it is as good as if we had a whole +ship-load!” + +He took it, and, followed by his companions, regained the Chimneys. +This tiny bit of wood, which in civilised lands is wasted with +indifference, as valueless, it was necessary here to use with the +utmost care. The sailor, having assured himself that it was dry, said:— + +“We must have some paper.” + +“Here is some,” answered Spilett, who, after a little hesitation, had +torn a leaf from his note-book. + +Pencroff took the bit of paper and knelt down before the fire-place, +where some handfuls of grass, leaves, and dry moss had been placed +under the faggots in such a way that the air could freely circulate and +make the dry wood readily ignite. Then Pencroff shaping the paper into +a cone, as pipe-smokers do in the wind, placed it among the moss. +Taking, then, a slightly rough stone and wiping it carefully, with +beating heart and suspended breath, he gave the match a little rub. The +first stroke produced no effect, as Pencroff fearing to break off the +phosphorus had not rubbed hard enough. + +“Ho, I won’t be able to do it,” said he; “my hand shakes—the match will +miss—I can’t do it—I don’t want to try!” And, rising, he besought +Herbert to undertake it. + +Certainly, the boy had never in his life been so affected. His heart +beat furiously. Prometheus, about to steal the fire from heaven, could +not have been more excited. + +Nevertheless he did not hesitate, but rubbed the stone with a quick +stroke. A little sputtering was heard, and a light blue flame sprung +out and produced a pungent smoke. Herbert gently turned the match, so +as to feed the flame, and then slid it under the paper cone. In a few +seconds the paper took fire, and then the moss kindled. An instant +later, the dry wood crackled, and a joyous blaze, fanned by the breath +of the sailor, shone out from the darkness. + +“At length,” cried Pencroff, rising, “I never was so excited in my +life!” + +It was evident that the fire did well in the fireplace of flat stones. +The smoke readily ascended through its passage; the chimney drew, and +an agreeable warmth quickly made itself felt. As to the fire, it would +be necessary to take care that it should not go out, and always to keep +some embers among the cinders. But it was only a matter of care and +attention as the wood was plenty, and the supply could always be +renewed in good time. + +Pencroff began at once to utilize the fire by preparing something more +nourishing than a dish of lithodomes. Two dozen eggs were brought by +Herbert, and the reporter, seated in a corner, watched these +proceedings without speaking. A triple thought held possession of his +mind. Did Cyrus still live? If alive, where was he? If he had survived +his plunge, why was it he had found no means of making his existence +known? As to Neb, he roamed the sand like one distracted. + +Pencroff, who knew fifty-two ways of cooking eggs, had no choice at +this time. He contented himself with placing them in the hot cinders +and letting them cook slowly. In a few minutes the operation was +finished, and the sailor invited the reporter to take part in the +supper. This was the first meal of the castaways upon this unknown +coast. The hard eggs were excellent, and as the egg contains all the +elements necessary for man’s nourishment, these poor men found them +sufficient, and felt their strength reviving. + +Unfortunately, one was absent from this repast. If the five prisoners +who had escaped from Richmond had all been there, under those piled-up +rocks, before that bright and crackling fire upon that dry sand, their +happiness would have been complete. But the most ingenious, as well as +the most learned—he who was undoubtedly their chief, Cyrus Smith—alas! +was missing, and his body had not even obtained burial. + +Thus passed the 25th of March. The night was come. Outside they heard +the whistling of the wind, the monotonous thud of the surf, and the +grinding of the pebbles on the beach. + +The reporter had retired to a dark corner, after having briefly noted +the events of the day—the first sight of this new land, the loss of the +engineer, the exploration of the shore, the incidents of the matches, +etc.; and, overcome by fatigue, he was enabled to find some rest in +sleep. + +Herbert fell asleep at once. The sailor, dozing, with one eye open, +passed the night by the fire, on which he kept heaping fuel. + +One only of the castaways did not rest in the Chimneys. It was the +inconsolable, the despairing Neb, who, during the whole night, and in +spite of his companions’ efforts to make him take some rest, wandered +upon the sands calling his master. + + + + +CHAPTER VI. + + +THE CASTAWAYS’ INVENTORY—NO EFFECTS —THE CHARRED LINEN—AN EXPEDITION +INTO THE FOREST—THE FLORA OF THE WOODS—THE FLIGHT OF THE JACAMAR—TRACKS +OF WILD BEASTS—THE COUROUCOUS—THE HEATH-COCK—LINE-FISHING +EXTRAORDINARY. + + +The inventory of the castaways can be promptly taken. Thrown upon a +desert coast, they had nothing but the clothes they wore in the +balloon. We must add Spilett’s watch and note-book, which he had kept +by some inadvertence; but there were no firearms and no tools, not even +a pocket knife. Every thing had been thrown overboard to lighten the +balloon. Every necessary of life was wanting! + +Yet if Cyrus Smith had been with them, his practical science and +inventive genius would have saved them from despair. But, alas! they +could hope to see him no more. The castaways could rely on Providence +only, and on their own right hands. + +And, first, should they settle down on this strip of coast without an +effort to discover whether it was island or continent, inhabited or +desert? It was an urgent question, for all their measures would depend +upon its solution. However, it seemed to Pencroff better to wait a few +days before undertaking an exploration. They must try to procure more +satisfying food than eggs and shellfish, and repair their strength, +exhausted by fatigue and by the inclemency of the weather. The Chimneys +would serve as a house for a while. Their fire was lit, and it would be +easy to keep alive some embers. For the time being there were plenty of +eggs and shell-fish. They might even be able to kill, with a stick or a +stone, some of the numerous pigeons which fluttered among the rocks. +They might find fruit-trees in the neighboring forest, and they had +plenty of fresh water. It was decided then to wait a few days at the +Chimneys, and to prepare for an expedition either along the coast or +into the interior of the country. + +This plan was especially agreeable to Neb, who was in no hurry to +abandon that part of the coast which had been the scene of the +catastrophe. He could not and would not believe that Smith was dead. +Until the waves should have thrown up the engineer’s body—until Neb +should have seen with his eyes and handled with his hands his master’s +corpse, he believed him alive. It was an illusion which the sailor had +not the heart to destroy; and there was no use in talking to Neb. He +was like the dog who would not leave his master’s tomb, and his grief +was such that he would probably soon follow him. + +Upon the morning of the 26th of March, at daybreak, Neb started along +the coast northward to the spot where the sea had doubtless closed over +the unfortunate engineer. + +For breakfast that morning they had only eggs and lithodomes, seasoned +with salt which Herbert had found in the cavities of the rocks. When +the meal was over they divided forces. The reporter stayed behind to +keep up the fire, and in the very improbable case of Neb’s needing him +to go to his assistance. Herbert and Pencroff went into the forest. + +“We will go hunting, Herbert, “said the sailor. “We shall find +ammunition on our way, and we will cut our guns in the forest.” + +But, before starting, Herbert suggested that as they had no tinder they +must replace it by burnt linen. They were sorry to sacrifice a piece of +handkerchief, but the need was urgent, and a piece of Pencroff’s large +check handkerchief was soon converted into a charred rag, and put away +in the central chamber in a little cavity of the rock, sheltered from +wind and dampness. + +By this time it was 9 o’clock. The weather was threatening and the +breeze blew from the southeast. Herbert and Pencroff, as they left the +Chimneys, cast a glance at the smoke which curled upwards from amid the +rocks; then they walked up the left bank of the river. + +When they reached the forest, Pencroff broke from the first tree two +thick branches which he made into cudgels, and whose points Herbert +blunted against a rock. What would he not have given for a knife? Then +the hunters walked on in the high grass along the bank of the river, +which, after its turn to the southwest, gradually narrowed, running +between high banks and over-arched by interlacing trees. Pencroff, not +to lose his way, determined to follow the course of the stream, which +would bring him back to his point of departure. But the bank offered +many obstacles. Here, trees whose flexible branches bent over to the +brink of the current; there, thorns and lianas which they had to break +with their sticks. Herbert often glided between the broken stumps with +the agility of a young cat and disappeared in the copse, but Pencroff +called him back at once, begging him not to wander away. + +Meanwhile, the sailor carefully observed the character and +peculiarities of the region. On this left bank the surface was flat, +rising insensibly towards the interior. Sometimes it was moist and +swampy, indicating the existence of a subterranean network of little +streams emptying themselves into the river. Sometimes, too, a brook ran +across the copse, which they crossed without trouble. The opposite bank +was more undulating, and the valley, through whose bottom flowed the +river, was more clearly defined. The hill, covered with trees rising in +terraces, intercepted the vision. Along this right bank they could +hardly have walked, for the descent was steep, and the trees which bent +over the water were only sustained by their roots. It is needless to +say that both forest and shore seemed a virgin wilderness. They saw +fresh traces of animals whose species was unknown to them. Some seemed +to them the tracks of dangerous wild beasts, but nowhere was there the +mark of an axe on a tree-trunk, or the ashes of a fire, or the imprint +of a foot. They should no doubt have been glad that it was so, for on +this land in the mid-Pacific, the presence of man was a thing more to +be dreaded than desired. + +They hardly spoke, so great were the difficulties of the route; after +an hour’s walk they had but just compassed a mile. Hitherto their +hunting had been fruitless. Birds were singing and flying to and fro +under the trees; but they showed an instinctive fear of their enemy +man. Herbert descried among them, in a swampy part of the forest, a +bird with narrow and elongated beak, in shape something like a +kingfisher, from which it was distinguished by its harsh and lustrous +plumage. + +“That must be a jacamar,” said Herbert, trying to get within range of +the bird. + +“It would be a good chance to taste jacamar,” answered the sailor, “if +that fellow would only let himself be roasted.” + +In a moment a stone, adroitly aimed by the boy, struck the bird on the +wing; but the jacamar took to his legs and disappeared in a minute. + +“What a muff I am,” said Herbert. ‘Not at all,” said the sailor. “It +was a good shot, a great many would have missed the bird. Don’t be +discouraged, we’ll catch him again some day.” + +The wood opened as the hunters went on, and the trees grew to a vast +height, but none had edible fruits. Pencroff sought in vain for some of +those precious palm trees, which lend themselves so wonderfully to the +needs of mankind, and which grow from 40° north latitude to 35° south. +But this forest was composed only of conifers, such as the deodars, +already recognized by Herbert; the Douglas pines, which grow on the +northeast coast of America; and magnificent fir trees, 150 feet high. +Among their branches was fluttering a flock of birds, with small bodies +and long, glittering tails. Herbert picked up some of the feathers, +which lay scattered on the ground, and looked at them carefully. + +“These are ‘couroucous,’“ said he. + +“I would rather have a guinea-hen, or a heath-cock,” said Pencroff, +“but still, if they are good to eat”— + +“They are good to eat,” said Herbert; “their meat is delicious. +Besides, I think we can easily get at them with our sticks.” + +Slipping through the grass, they reached the foot of a tree whose lower +branches were covered with the little birds, who were snapping at the +flying insects. Their feathered claws clutched tight the twigs on which +they were sitting. Then the hunters rose to their feet, and using their +sticks like a scythe, they mowed down whole rows of the couroucous, of +whom 105 were knocked over before the stupid birds thought of escape. + +“Good,” said Pencroff, “this is just the sort of game for hunters like +us. We could catch them in our hands.” + +They skewered the couroucous on a switch like field-larks, and +continued to explore. The object of the expedition was, of course, to +bring back as much game as possible to the Chimneys. So far it had not +been altogether attained. They looked about everywhere, and were +enraged to see animals escaping through the high grass. If they had +only had Top! But Top, most likely, had perished with his master. + +About 3 o’clock they entered a wood full of juniper trees, at whose +aromatic berries flocks of birds were pecking. Suddenly they heard a +sound like the blast of a trumpet. It was the note of those gallinaceæ, +called “tetras” in the United States. Soon they saw several pairs of +them, with brownish-yellow plumage and brown tails. Pencroff determined +to capture one of these birds, for they were as big as hens, and their +meat as delicious as a pullet. But they would not let him come near +them. At last, after several unsuccessful attempts, he said, + +“Well, since we can’t kill them on the wing, we must take them with a +line.” + +“Like a carp,” cried the wondering Herbert. + +“Like a carp,” answered the sailor, gravely. + +Pencroff had found in the grass half-a-dozen tetras nests, with two or +three eggs in each. + +He was very careful not to touch these nests, whose owners would +certainly return to them. Around these he purposed to draw his lines, +not as a snare, but with hook and bait. He took Herbert to some +distance from the nests, and there made ready his singular apparatus +with the care of a true disciple of Isaac Walton. Herbert watched the +work with a natural interest, but without much faith in its success. +The lines were made of small lianas tied together, from fifteen to +twenty feet long, and stout thorns with bent points, broken from a +thicket of dwarf acacias, and fastened to the ends of the lianas, +served as hooks, and the great red worms which crawled at their feet +made excellent bait. This done, Pencroff, walking stealthily through +the grass, placed one end of his hook-and-line close to the nests of +the tetras. Then he stole back, took the other end in his hand, and hid +himself with Herbert behind a large tree. Herbert, it must be said, was +not sanguine of success. + +A good half hour passed, but as the sailor had foreseen, several pairs +of tetras returned to their nests. They hopped about, pecking the +ground, and little suspecting the presence of the hunters, who had +taken care to station themselves to leeward of the gallinaceæ. Herbert +held his breath with excitement, while Pencroff, with dilated eyes, +open month, and lips parted as if to taste a morsel of tetras, scarcely +breathed. Meanwhile the gallinaceæ walked heedlessly among the hooks. +Pencroff then gave little jerks, which moved the bait up and down as if +the worms were still alive. How much more intense was his excitement +than the fisherman’s who cannot see the approach of his prey! + +The jerks soon aroused the attention of the gallinaceæ, who began to +peck at the bait. Three of the greediest swallowed hook and bait +together. Suddenly, with a quick jerk, Pencroff pulled in his line, and +the flapping of wings showed that the birds were taken. + +“Hurrah!” cried he, springing upon the game, of which he was master in +a moment. Herbert clapped his hands. It was the first time he had seen +birds taken with a line; but the modest sailor said it was not his +first attempt, and, moreover, that the merit of the invention was not +his. + +“And at any rate,” said he, “in our present situation we must hope for +many such contrivances.” + +The tetras were tied together by the feet, and Pencroff, happy that +they were not returning empty handed, and perceiving that the day was +ending, thought it best to return home. + +Their route was indicated by the river, and following it downward, by 6 +o’clock, tired out by their excursion, Herbert and Pencroff re-entered +the Chimneys. + + + + +CHAPTER VII. + + +NEB HAS NOT YET RETURNED—THE REFLECTIONS OF THE REPORTER—THE +SUPPER—PROSPECT OF A BAD NIGHT—THE STORM IS FRIGHTFUL—THEY GO OUT INTO +THE NIGHT—STRUGGLE WITH THE RAIN AND WIND. + + +Gideon Spilett stood motionless upon the shore, his arms crossed, +gazing on the sea, whose horizon was darkened towards the east by a +huge black cloud mounting rapidly into the zenith. The wind, already +strong, was freshening, the heavens had an angry look, and the first +symptoms of a heavy blow were manifesting themselves. + +Herbert went into the Chimneys, and Pencroff walked towards the +reporter, who was too absorbed to notice his approach. + +“We will have a bad night, Mr. Spilett,” said the sailor. “Wind and +rain enough for Mother Cary’s chickens.” + +The reporter turning, and perceiving Pencroff, asked this question:— + +“How far off from the shore do you think was the basket when it was +struck by the sea that carried away our companion?” + +The sailor had not expected this question. He reflected an instant +before answering:— + +“Two cables’ lengths or more.” + +“How much is a cable’s length?” demanded Spilett. + +“About 120 fathoms, or 600 feet.” + +“Then,” said the reporter, “Cyrus Smith would have disappeared not more +than 1,200 feet from the shore?” + +“Not more than that.” + +“And his dog, too?” + +“Yes.” + +“What astonishes me,” said the reporter, “admitting that our companion +and Top have perished, is the fact that neither the body of the dog nor +of his master has been cast upon the shore.” + +“That is not astonishing with so heavy a sea,” replied the sailor. +“Moreover, it is quite possible that there are currents which have +carried them farther up the coast.” + +“Then it is really your opinion that our companion has been drowned?” +asked, once more, the reporter. + +“That is my opinion.” + +“And my opinion, Pencroff,” said Spilett, “with all respect for your +experience, is, that in this absolute disappearance of both Cyrus and +Top, living or dead, there is something inexplicable and incredible.” + +“I wish I could think as you do, sir,” responded Pencroff, “but, +unhappily, I cannot.” + +After thus speaking the sailor returned to the Chimneys. A good fire +was burning in the fireplace. Herbert had just thrown on a fresh armful +of wood, and its flames lit up the dark recesses of the corridor. + +Pencroff began at once to busy himself about dinner. It seemed +expedient to provide something substantial, as all stood in need of +nourishment, so two tetras were quickly plucked, spitted upon a stick, +and placed to roast before at blazing fire. The couroucous were +reserved for the next day. + +At 7 o’clock Neb was still absent, and Pencroff began to be alarmed +about him. He feared that he might have met with some accident in this +unknown land, or that the poor fellow had been drawn by despair to some +rash act. Herbert, on the contrary, argued that Neb’s absence was owing +to some fresh discovery which had induced him to prolong his +researches. And anything new must be to Cyrus Smith’s advantage. Why +had not Neb come back, if some hope was not detaining him? Perhaps he +had found some sign or footprint which had put him upon the track. +Perhaps, at this moment he was following the trail. Perhaps, already, +he was beside his master. + +Thus the lad spoke and reasoned, unchecked by his companions. The +reporter nodded approval, but Pencroff thought it more probable that +Neb, in his search, had pushed on so far that he had not been able to +return. + +Meantime, Herbert, excited by vague presentiments, manifested a desire +to go to meet Neb. But Pencroff showed him that it would be useless in +the darkness and storm to attempt to find traces of the negro, and, +that the better course was, to wait. If, by morning, Neb had not +returned, Pencroff would not hesitate joining the lad in a search for +him. + +Gideon Spilett concurred with the sailor in his opinion that they had +better remain together, and Herbert, though tearfully, gave up the +project. The reporter could not help embracing the generous lad. + +The storm began. A furious gust of wind passed over the coast from the +southeast. They heard the sea, which was out, roaring upon the reef. +The whirlwind drove the rain in clouds along the shore. The sand, +stirred up by the wind, mingled with the rain, and the air was filled +with mineral as well as aqueous dust. Between the mouth of the river +and the cliff’s face, the wind whirled about as in a maelstrom, and, +finding no other outlet than the narrow valley through which ran the +stream, it rushed through this with irresistible violence. + +Often, too, the smoke from the chimney, driven back down its narrow +vent, filled the corridors, and rendered them uninhabitable. Therefore, +when the tetras were cooked Pencroff let the fire smoulder, only +preserving some clear embers among the ashes. + +At 8 o’clock Neb had not returned; but they could not help admitting +that now the tempest alone was sufficient to account for his +non-appearance, and that, probably, he had sought refuge in some +cavern, waiting the end of the storm, or, at least, daybreak. As to +going to meet him under present circumstances, that was simply +impossible. + +The birds were all they had for supper, but the party found them +excellent eating. Pencroff and Herbert, their appetite sharpened by +their long walk, devoured them. Then each one retired to his corner, +and Herbert, lying beside the sailor, extended before the fireplace, +was soon asleep. + +Outside, as the night advanced, the storm developed formidable +proportions. It was a hurricane equal to that which had carried the +prisoners from Richmond. Such tempests, pregnant with catastrophes, +spreading terror over a vast area, their fury withstood by no obstacle, +are frequent during the equinox. We can understand how a coast facing +the east, and exposed to the full fury of the storm, was attacked with +a violence perfectly indescribable. + +Happily the heap of rocks forming the Chimneys was composed of solid, +enormous blocks of granite, though some of them, imperfectly balanced, +seemed to tremble upon their foundations. Pencroff, placing his hand +against the walls, could feel their rapid vibrations; but he said to +himself, with reason, that there was no real danger, and that the +improvised retreat would not tumble about their ears. Nevertheless, he +heard the sound of rocks, torn from the top of the plateau by the +gusts, crashing upon the shore. And some, falling perpendicularly, +struck the Chimneys and flew off into fragments. Twice the sailor rose, +and went to the opening of the corridor, to look abroad. But there was +no danger from these inconsiderable showers of stones, and he returned +to his place before the fire, where the embers glowed among the ashes. + +In spite of the fury and fracas of the tempest Herbert slept +profoundly, and, at length, sleep took possession of Pencroff, whose +sailor life had accustomed him to such demonstrations. Gideon Spilett, +who was kept awake by anxiety, reproached himself for not having +accompanied Neb. We have seen that he had not given up all hope, and +the presentiments which had disturbed Herbert had affected him also. +His thoughts were fixed upon Neb; why had not the negro returned? He +tossed about on his sandy couch, unheeding the warfare of the elements. +Then, overcome by fatigue, he would close his eyes for an instant, only +to be awakened by some sudden thought. + +Meantime the night advanced; and it was about 2 o’clock when Pencroff +was suddenly aroused from a deep sleep by finding himself vigorously +shaken. + +“What’s the matter?” he cried, rousing and collecting himself with the +quickness peculiar to sailors. + +The reporter was bending over him and saying:— + +“Listen, Pencroff, listen!” + +The sailor listened, but could hear no sounds other than those caused +by the gusts. + +“It is the wind,” he said. + +“No,” answered Spilett, listening again, “I think I heard—” + +“What?” + +“The barking of a dog!” + +“A dog!” cried Pencroff, springing to his feet. + +“Yes—the barking—” + +“Impossible!” answered the sailor. “How, in the roarings of the +tempest—” + +“Wait—listen,” said the reporter. + +Pencroff listened most attentively, and at length, during a lull, he +thought he caught the sound of distant barking. + +“Is it?” asked the reporter, squeezing the sailor’s hand. + +“Yes—yes!” said Pencroff. + +“It is Top! It is Top!” cried Herbert, who had just wakened, and the +three rushed to the entrance of the Chimneys. + +They had great difficulty in getting out, as the wind drove against +them with fury, but at last they succeeded, and then they were obliged +to steady themselves against the rocks. They were unable to speak, but +they looked about them. The darkness was absolute. Sea, sky, and earth, +were one intense blackness. It seemed as if there was not one particle +of light diffused in the atmosphere. + +For some moments the reporter and his two companions stood in this +place, beset by the gusts, drenched by the rain, blinded by the sand. +Then again, in the hush of the storm, they heard, far away, the barking +of a dog. This must be Top. But was he alone or accompanied? Probably +alone, for if Neb had been with him, the negro would have hastened, at +once, to the Chimneys. + +The sailor pressed the reporter’s hand in a manner signifying that he +was to remain without, and then returning to the corridor, emerged a +moment later with a lighted fagot, which he threw into the darkness, at +the same time whistling shrilly. At this signal, which seemed to have +been looked for, the answering barks came nearer, and soon a dog +bounded into the corridor, followed by the three companions. An armful +of wood was thrown upon the coals, brightly lighting up the passage. + +“It is Top!” cried Herbert. + +It was indeed Top, a magnificent Anglo-Norman, uniting in the cross of +the two breeds those qualities—swiftness of foot and keenness of +scent—indispensable in coursing dogs. But he was alone! Neither his +master nor Neb accompanied him. + +It seemed inexplicable how, through the darkness and storm, the dog’s +instinct had directed him to the Chimneys, a place he was unacquainted +with. But still more unaccountable was the fact that he was neither +fatigued nor exhausted nor soiled with mud or sand. Herbert had drawn +him towards him, patting his head; and the dog rubbed his neck against +the lad’s hands. + +“If the dog is found, the master will be found also,” said the +reporter. + +“God grant it!” responded Herbert. “Come, let us set out. Top will +guide us!” + +Pencroff made no objection. He saw that the dog’s cunning had disproved +his conjectures. + +“Let us set out at once,” he said; and covering the fire so that it +could be relighted on their return, and preceded by the dog, who seemed +to invite their departure, the sailor, having gathered up the remnants +of the supper, followed by the reporter and Herbert, rushed into the +darkness. + +The tempest, then in all its violence, was, perhaps, at its maximum +intensity. The new moon had not sufficient light to pierce the clouds. +It was difficult to follow a straight course. The better way, +therefore, was to trust to the instinct of Top; which was done. The +reporter and the lad walked behind the dog, and the sailor followed +after. To speak was impossible. The rain, dispersed by the wind, was +not heavy, but the strength of the storm was terrible. + +Fortunately, as it came from the southeast, the wind was at the back of +the party, and the sand, hurled from behind, did not prevent their +march. Indeed, they were often blown along so rapidly as nearly to be +overthrown. But they were sustained by a great hope. This time, at +least, they were not wandering at random. They felt, no doubt, that Neb +had found his master and had sent the faithful dog to them. But was the +engineer living, or had Neb summoned his companions only to render the +last services to the dead? + +After having passed the smooth face of rock, which they carefully +avoided, the party stopped to take breath. The angle of the cliff +sheltered them from the wind, and they could breathe freely after this +tramp, or rather race, of a quarter of an hour. They were now able to +hear themselves speak, and the lad having pronounced the name of Smith, +the dog seemed to say by his glad barking that his master was safe. + +“Saved! He is saved! Isn’t he, Top?” repeated the boy. And the dog +barked his answer. + +It was half-past 2 when the march was resumed. The sea began to rise, +and this, which was a spring tide backed up by the wind, threatened to +be very high. The tremendous breakers thundered against the reef, +assailing it so violently as probably to pass completely over the +islet, which was invisible. The coast was no longer sheltered by this +long breakwater, but was exposed to the full fury of the open sea. + +After the party were clear of the precipice the storm attacked them +again with fury. Crouching, with backs still to the wind, they followed +Top, who never hesitated in his course. Mounting towards the north, +they had upon their right the endless line of breakers deafening them +with its thunders, and upon their left a region buried in darkness. One +thing was certain, that they were upon an open plain, as the wind +rushed over them without rebounding as it had done from the granite +cliffs. + +By 4 o’clock they estimated the distance travelled as eight miles. The +clouds had risen a little, and the wind was drier and colder. +Insufficiently clad, the three companions suffered cruelly, but no +murmur passed their lips. They were determined to follow Top wherever +he wished to lead them. + +Towards 5 o’clock the day began to break. At first, overhead, where +some grey shadowings bordered the clouds, and presently, under a dark +band a bright streak of light sharply defined the sea horizon. The +crests of the billows shone with a yellow light and the foam revealed +its whiteness. At the same time, on the left, the hilly parts of the +shore were confusedly defined in grey outlines upon the blackness of +the night. At 6 o’clock it was daylight. The clouds sped rapidly +overhead. The sailor and his companions were some six miles from the +Chimneys, following a very flat shore, bordered in the offing by a reef +of rocks whose surface only was visible above the high tide. On the +left the country sloped up into downs bristling with thistles, giving a +forbidding aspect to the vast sandy region. The shore was low, and +offered no other resistance to the ocean than an irregular chain of +hillocks. Here and there was a tree, leaning its trunks and branches +towards the west. Far behind, to the southwest, extended the borders of +the forest. + +At this moment Top gave unequivocal signs of excitement. He ran ahead, +returned, and seemed to try to hurry them on. The dog had left the +coast, and guided by his wonderful instinct, without any hesitation had +gone among the downs. They followed him through a region absolutely +devoid of life. + +The border of the downs, itself large, was composed of hills and +hillocks, unevenly scattered here and there. It was like a little +Switzerland of sand, and nothing but a dog’s astonishing instinct could +find the way. + +Five minutes after leaving the shore the reporter and his companions +reached a sort of hollow, formed in the back of a high down, before +which Top stopped with a loud bark. The three entered the cave. + +Neb was there, kneeling beside a body extended upon a bed of grass— + +It was the body of Cyrus Smith. + + + + +CHAPTER VIII. + + +IS CYPRUS SMITH ALIVE?—NEB’S STORY—FOOTPRINTS —AN INSOLUBLE +QUESTION—THE FIRST WORDS OF SMITH—COMPARING THE FOOTPRINTS—RETURN TO +THE CHIMNEYS—PENCROFF DEJECTED. + + +Neb did not move. The sailor uttered one word. + +“Living!” he cried. + +The negro did not answer. Spilett and Pencroff turned pale. Herbert, +clasping his hands, stood motionless. But it was evident that the poor +negro, overcome by grief, had neither seen his companions nor heard the +voice of the sailor. + +The reporter knelt down beside the motionless body, and, having opened +the clothing, pressed his ear to the chest of the engineer. A minute, +which seemed an age, passed, daring which he tried to detect some +movement of the heart. + +Neb raised up a little, and looked on as if in a trance. Overcome by +exhaustion, prostrated by grief, the poor fellow was hardly +recognizable. He believed his master dead. + +Gideon Spilett, after a long and attentive examination, rose up. + +“He lives!” he said. + +Pencroff, in his turn, knelt down beside Cyrus Smith; he also detected +some heartbeats, and a slight breath issuing from the lips of the +engineer. Herbert, at a word from the reporter, hurried in search of +water. A hundred paces off he found a clear brook swollen by the late +rains and filtered by the sand. But there was nothing, not even a +shell, in which to carry the water; so the lad had to content himself +with soaking his handkerchief in the stream, and hastened back with it +to the cave. + +Happily the handkerchief held sufficient for Spilett’s purpose, which +was simply to moisten the lips of the engineer. The drops of fresh +water produced an instantaneous effect. A sigh escaped from the breast +of Smith, and it seemed as if he attempted to speak. + +“We shall save him,” said the reporter. Neb took heart at these words. +He removed the clothing from his master to see if his body was anywhere +wounded. But neither on his head nor body nor limbs was there a bruise +or even a scratch, an astonishing circumstance, since he must have been +tossed about among the rocks; even his hands were uninjured, and it was +difficult to explain how the engineer should exhibit no mark of the +efforts which he must have made in getting over the reef. + +But the explanation of this circumstance would come later, when Cyrus +Smith could speak. At present, it was necessary to restore his +consciousness, and it was probable that this result could be +accomplished by friction. For this purpose they mode use of the +sailor’s pea-jacket. The engineer, warmed by this rude rubbing, moved +his arms slightly, and his breathing began to be more regular. He was +dying from exhaustion, and, doubtless, had not the reporter and his +companions arrived, it would have been all over with Cyrus Smith. + +“You thought he was dead?” asked the sailor. + +“Yes, I thought so,” answered Neb. “And if Top had not found you and +brought you back, I would have buried my master and died beside him.” + +The engineer had had a narrow escape! + +Then Neb told them what had happened. The day before, after having left +the Chimneys at day-break, he had followed along the coast in a +direction due north, until he reached that part of the beach which he +had already visited. There, though, as he said, without hope of +success, he searched the shore, the rocks, the sand for any marks that +could guide him, examining most carefully that part which was above +high-water mark, as below that point the ebb and flow of the tide would +have effaced all traces. He did not hope to find his master living. It +was the discovery of the body which he sought, that he might bury it +with his own hands. He searched a long time, without success. It seemed +as if nothing human had ever been upon that desolate shore. Of the +millions of shell-fish lying out of reach of the tide, not a shell was +broken. There was no sign of a landing having ever been made there. The +negro then decided to continue some miles further up the coast. It was +possible that the currents had carried the body to some distant point. +For Neb knew that a corpse, floating a little distance from a low +shore, was almost certain, sooner or later, to be thrown upon the +strand, and he was desirous to look upon his master one last time. + +“I followed the shore two miles further, looking at it at low and high +water, hardly hoping to find anything, when yesterday evening, about 5 +o’clock, I discovered footprints upon the sand.” + +“Footprints,” cried Pencroff. + +“Yes, sir,” replied Neb. + +“And did they begin at the water?” demanded the reporter. + +“No,” answered the negro, “above high-water mark; below that the tide +had washed out the others.” + +“Go on, Neb,” said Spilett. + +“The sight of these footprints made me wild with joy. They were very +plain, and went towards the downs. I followed them for a quarter of an +hour, running so as not to tread on them. Five minutes later, as it was +growing dark, I heard a dog bark. It was Top. And he brought me here, +to my master.” + +Neb finished his recital by telling of his grief at the discovery of +the inanimate body. He had tried to discover some signs of life still +remaining in it. But all his efforts were in vain. There was nothing, +therefore, to do but to perform the last offices to him whom he had +loved so well. Then he thought of his companions. They, too, would wish +to look once more upon their comrade. Top was there. Could he not rely +upon the sagacity of that faithful animal? So having pronounced several +times the name of the reporter, who, of all the engineer’s companions, +was best known by Top, and having at the same time motioned towards the +south, the dog bounded off in the direction indicated. + +We have seen how, guided by an almost supernatural instinct, the dog +had arrived at the Chimneys. + +Neb’s companions listened to his story with the greatest attention. How +the engineer had been able to reach this cave in the midst of the +downs, more than a mile from the beach, was as inexplicable as was his +escape from the waves and rocks without a scratch. + +“So you, Neb,” said the reporter, “did not bring your master to this +place?” + +“No, it was not I,” answered Neb. + +“He certainly could not have come alone,” said Pencroff. + +“But he must have done it, though it does not seem credible,” said the +reporter. + +They must wait for the solution of the mystery until the engineer could +speak. Fortunately the rubbing had re-established the circulation of +the blood, and life was returning. Smith moved his arm again, then his +head, and a second time some incoherent words escaped his lips. + +Neb, leaning over him, spoke, but the engineer seemed not to hear, and +his eyes remained closed. Life was revealing itself by movement, but +consciousness had not yet returned. Pencroff had, unfortunately, +forgotten to bring the burnt linen, which could have been ignited with +a couple of flints, and without it they had no means of making a fire. +The pockets of the engineer were empty of everything but his watch. It +was therefore the unanimous opinion that Cyrus Smith must be carried to +the Chimneys as soon as possible. + +Meantime the attention lavished on the engineer restored him to +consciousness sooner than could have been hoped. The moistening of his +lips had revived him, and Pencroff conceived the idea of mixing some of +the juice of the tetras with water. Herbert ran to the shore and +brought back two large shells; and the sailor made a mixture which they +introduced between the lips of the engineer, who swallowed it with +avidity. His eyes opened. Neb and the reporter were leaning over him. + +“My master! my master!” cried Neb. + +The engineer heard him. He recognized Neb and his companions, and his +hand gently pressed theirs. + +Again he spoke some words—doubtless the same which he had before +uttered, and which indicated that some thoughts were troubling him. +This time the words were understood. + +“Island or continent?” he murmured. + +“What the devil do we care,” cried Pencroff, unable to restrain the +exclamation, “now that you are alive, sir. Island or continent? “We +will find that out later.” + +The engineer made a motion in the affirmative, and then seemed to +sleep. + +Taking care not to disturb him, the reporter set to work to provide the +most comfortable means of moving him. + +Neb, Herbert, and Pencroff left the cave and went towards a high down +on which were some gnarled trees. On the way the sailor kept +repeating:— + +“Island or continent! To think of that, at his last gasp! What a man!” + +Having reached the top of the down, Pencroff and his companions tore +off the main branches from a tree, a sort of sea pine, sickly and +stunted. And with these branches they constructed a litter, which they +covered with leaves and grass. + +This work occupied some little time, and it was 10 o’clock when the +three returned to Smith and Spilett. + +The engineer had just wakened from the sleep, or rather stupor, in +which they had found him. The color had come back to his lips, which +had been as pale as death. He raised himself slightly, and looked +about, as if questioning where he was. + +“Can you listen to me without being tired, Cyrus?” asked the reporter. + +“Yes,” responded the engineer. + +“I think,” said the sailor, “that Mr. Smith can listen better after +having taken some more of this tetra jelly,—it is really tetra, sir,” +he continued, as he gave him some of the mixture, to which he had this +time added some of the meat of the bird. + +Cyrus Smith swallowed these bits of tetra, and the remainder was eaten +by his companions, who were suffering from hunger, and who found the +repast light enough. + +“Well,” said the sailor, “there are victuals waiting for us at the +Chimneys, for you must know, Mr. Smith, that to the south of here we +have a house with rooms and beds and fire-place, and in the pantry +dozens of birds which our Herbert calls couroucous. Your litter is +ready, and whenever you feel strong enough we will carry you to our +house.” + +“Thanks, my friend,” replied the engineer, “in an hour or two we will +go. And now, Spilett, continue.” + +The reporter related everything that had happened. Recounting the +events unknown to Smith; the last plunge of the balloon, the landing +upon this unknown shore, its deserted appearance, the discovery of the +Chimneys, the search for the engineer, the devotion of Neb, and what +they owed to Top’s intelligence, etc. + +“But,” asked Smith, in a feeble voice, “you did not pick me up on the +beach?” + +“No,” replied the reporter. + +“And it was not you who brought me to this hollow?” + +“No.” + +“How far is this place from the reef?” + +“At least half a mile,” replied Pencroff, “and if you are astonished, +we are equally surprised to find you here.” + +“It is indeed singular,” said the engineer, who was gradually reviving +and taking interest in these details. + +“But,” asked the sailor, “cannot you remember anything that happened +after you were washed away by that heavy sea?” + +Cyrus Smith tried to think, but he remembered little. The wave had +swept him from the net of the balloon, and at first he had sunk several +fathoms. Coming up to the surface, he was conscious, in the half-light, +of something struggling beside him. It was Top, who had sprung to his +rescue. Looking up, he could see nothing of the balloon, which, +lightened by his and the dog’s weight, had sped away like an arrow. He +found himself in the midst of the tumultuous sea, more than half a mile +from shore. He swum vigorously against the waves, and Top sustained him +by his garments; but a strong current seized him, carrying him to the +north, and, after struggling for half an hour, he sank, dragging the +dog with him into the abyss. From that moment to the instant of his +finding himself in the arms of his friends, he remembered nothing. + +“Nevertheless,” said Pencroff, “you must have been cast upon the shore, +and had strength enough to walk to this place, since Neb found your +tracks.” + +“Yes, that must be so,” answered the engineer, reflectively. “And you +have not seen any traces of inhabitants upon the shore?” + +“Not a sign,” answered the reporter. “Moreover, if by chance some one +had rescued you from the waves, why should he then have abandoned you?” + +“You are right, my dear Spilett. Tell me, Neb,” inquired the engineer, +turning towards his servant, “it was not you—you could not have been in +a trance—during which—. No, that’s absurd. Do any of the footprints +still remain?” + +“Yes, master,” replied Neb; “there are some at the entrance, back of +this mound, in a place sheltered from the wind and rain, but the others +have been obliterated by the storm.” + +“Pencroff,” said Cyrus, “will you take my shoes and see if they fit +those footprints exactly?” + +The sailor did as he had been asked. He and Herbert, guided by Neb, +went to where the marks were, and in their absence Smith said to the +reporter:— + +“That is a thing passing belief.” + +“Inexplicable, indeed,” answered the other. + +“But do not dwell upon it at present, my dear Spilett, we will talk of +it hereafter.” + +At this moment the others returned. All doubt was set at rest. The +shoes of the engineer fitted the tracks exactly. Therefore it must have +been Smith himself who had walked over the sand. + +“So,” he said, “I was the one in a trance, and not Neb! I must have +walked like a somnambulist, without consciousness, and Top’s instinct +brought me here after he rescued me from the waves. Here, Top. Come +here, dog.” + +The splendid animal sprang, barking, to his master, and caresses were +lavished upon him. It was agreed that there was no other way to account +for the rescue than by giving Top the credit of it. + +Towards noon, Pencroff having asked Smith if he felt strong enough to +be carried, the latter, for answer, by an effort which showed his +strength of will, rose to his feet. But if he had not leaned upon the +sailor he would have fallen. + +“Capital,” said Pencroff. “Summon the engineer’s carriage!” + +The litter was brought. The cross-branches had been covered with moss +and grass; and when Smith was laid upon it they walked towards the +coast, Neb and the sailor carrying him. + +Eight miles had to be travelled, and as they could move but slowly, and +would probably have to make frequent rests, it would take six hours or +more to reach the Chimneys. The wind was still strong, but, +fortunately, it had ceased raining. From his couch, the engineer, +leaning upon his arm, observed the coast, especially the part opposite +the sea. He examined it without comment, but undoubtedly the aspect of +the country, its contour, its forests and diverse products were noted +in his mind. But after two hours, fatigue overcame him, and he slept +upon the litter. + +At half-past 5 the little party reached the precipice, and soon after, +were before the Chimneys. Stopping here, the litter was placed upon the +sand without disturbing the slumber of the engineer. + +Pencroff saw, to his surprise, that the terrible storm of the day +before had altered the aspect of the place. Rocks had been displaced. +Great fragments were strewn over the sand, and a thick carpet of +several kinds of seaweed covered all the shore. It was plain that the +sea sweeping over the isle had reached to the base of the enormous +granite curtain. + +Before the entrance to the Chimneys the ground had been violently torn +up by the action of the waves. Pencroff, seized with a sudden fear, +rushed into the corridor. Returning, a moment after, he stood +motionless looking at his comrades. + +The fire had been extinguished; the drowned cinders were nothing but +mud. The charred linen, which was to serve them for tinder, had gone. +The sea had penetrated every recess of the corridor, and everything was +overthrown, everything was destroyed within the Chimneys. + + + + +CHAPTER IX. + + +CYRUS IS HERE-PENCROFF’S ATTEMPTS—RUBBING WOOD—ISLAND OR CONTINENT —THE +PLANS OF THE ENGINEER—WHEREABOUTS IN THE PACIFIC—IN THE DEPTHS OF THE +FOREST—THE PISTACHIO PINE—A PIG CHASE—A SMOKE OF GOOD OMEN. + + +In a few words the others were informed of what had happened. This +accident, which portended serious results—at least Pencroff foresaw +such—affected each one differently. Neb, overjoyed in having recovered +his master, did not listen or did not wish to think of what Pencroff +said. Herbert shared in a measure the apprehensions of the sailor. As +to the reporter, he simply answered:— + +“Upon my word, Pencroff, I don’t think it matters much!” + +“But I tell you again; we have no fire!” + +“Pshaw!” + +“Nor any means of lighting one!” + +“Absurd!” + +“But, Mr. Spilett—” + +“Is not Cyrus here?” asked the reporter; “Isn’t he alive? He will know +well enough how to make fire!” + +“And with what?” + +“With nothing!” + +What could Pencroff answer? He had nothing to say, as, in his heart, he +shared his companion’s confidence in Cyrus Smith’s ability. To them the +engineer was a microcosm, a compound of all science and all knowledge. +They were better off on a desert island with Cyrus than without him in +the busiest city of the Union. With him they could want for nothing; +with him they would have no fear. If they had been told that a volcanic +eruption would overwhelm the land, sinking it into the depths of the +Pacific, the imperturbable answer of these brave men would have been, +“Have we not Cyrus!” + +Meantime, the engineer had sunk into a lethargy, the result of the +journey, and his help could not be asked for just then. The supper, +therefore, would be very meagre. All the tetras had been eaten, there +was no way to cook other birds, and, finally, the couroucous which had +been reserved had disappeared. Something, therefore, must be done. + +First of all, Cyrus Smith was carried into the main corridor. There +they were able to make for him a couch of seaweeds, and, doubtless, the +deep sleep in which he was plunged, would strengthen him more than an +abundant nourishment. + +With night the temperature, which the northwest wind had raised, again +became very cold, and, as the sea had washed away the partitions which +Pencroff had constructed, draughts of air made the place scarcely +habitable. The engineer would therefore have been in a bad plight if +his companions had not covered him with clothing which they took from +themselves. + +The supper this evening consisted of the inevitable lithodomes, an +ample supply of which Herbert and Neb had gathered from the beach. To +these the lad had added a quantity of edible seaweed which clung to the +high rocks and were only washed by the highest tides. These seaweeds, +belonging to the family of Fucaceæ, were a species of Sargassum, which, +when dry, furnish a gelatinous substance full of nutritive matter, much +used by the natives of the Asiatic coast. After having eaten a quantity +of lithodomes the reporter and his companions sucked some of the +seaweed, which they agreed was excellent. + +“Nevertheless,” said the sailor, “it is time for Mr. Smith to help us.” + +Meantime the cold became intense, and, unfortunately, they had no means +of protecting themselves. The sailor, much worried, tried every +possible means of procuring a fire. He had found some dry moss, and by +striking two stones together he obtained sparks; but the moss was not +sufficiently inflammable to catch fire, nor had the sparks the strength +of those struck by a steel. The operation amounted to nothing. Then +Pencroff, although he had no confidence in the result, tried rubbing +two pieces of dry wood together, after the manner of the savages. It is +true that the motion of the man, if it could have been turned into +heat, according to the new theory, would have heated the boiler of a +steamer. But it resulted in nothing except putting him in a glow, and +making the wood hot. After half an hour’s work Pencroff was in a +perspiration, and he threw away the wood in disgust. + +“When you can make me believe that savages make fire after that +fashion,” said he, “it will he hot in winter! I might as well try to +light my arms by rubbing them together.” + +But the sailor was wrong to deny the feasibility of this method. The +savages frequently do light wood in this way. But it requires +particular kinds of wood, and, moreover, the “knack,” and Pencroff had +not this “knack.” + +Pencroff’s ill humor did not last long. The bits of wood which he had +thrown away had been picked up by Herbert, who exerted himself to rub +them well. The strong sailor could not help laughing at the boy’s weak +efforts to accomplish what he had failed in. + +“Rub away, my boy; rub hard!” he cried. + +“I am rubbing them,” answered Herbert, laughing, “but only to take my +turn at getting warm, instead of sitting here shivering; and pretty +soon I will be as hot as you are, Pencroff!” + +This was the case, and though it was necessary for this night to give +up trying to make a fire, Spilett, stretching himself upon the sand in +one of the passages, repeated for the twentieth time that Smith could +not be baffled by such a trifle. The others followed his example, and +Top slept at the feet of his master. + +The next day, the 28th of March, when the engineer awoke, about 8 +o’clock, he saw his companions beside him watching, and, as on the day +before, his first words were, + +“Island or continent?” + +It was his one thought. + +“Well, Mr. Smith,” answered Pencroff, “we don’t know.” + +“You haven’t found out yet?” + +“But we will,” affirmed Pencroff, “when you are able to guide us in +this country.” + +“I believe that I am able to do that now,” answered the engineer, who, +without much effort, rose up and stood erect. + +“That is good,” exclaimed the sailor. + +“I am dying of hunger,” responded Smith. “Give me some food, my friend, +and I will feel better. You’ve fire, haven’t you?” + +This question met with no immediate answer. But after some moments the +sailor said:— + +“No, sir, we have no fire; at least, not now.” + +And be related what had happened the day before. He amused the engineer +by recounting the history of their solitary match, and their fruitless +efforts to procure fire like the savages. + +“We will think about it,” answered the engineer, “and if we cannot find +something like tinder—” + +“Well,” asked the sailor. + +“Well, we will make matches!” + +“Friction matches?” + +“Friction matches!” + +“It’s no more difficult than that,” cried the reporter, slapping the +sailor on the shoulder. + +The latter did not see that it would be easy, but he said nothing, and +all went out of doors. The day was beautiful. A bright sun was rising +above the sea horizon, its rays sparkling and glistening on the granite +wall. After having cast a quick look about him, the engineer seated +himself upon a rock. Herbert offered him some handfuls of mussels and +seaweed, saying:— + +“It is all that we have, Mr. Smith.” + +“Thank you, my boy,” answered he, “it is enough—for this morning, at +least.” + +And he ate with appetite this scanty meal, washing it down with water +brought from the river in a large shell. + +His companions looked on without speaking. Then, after having satisfied +himself, he crossed his arms and said:— + +“Then, my friends, you do not yet know whether we have been thrown upon +an island or a continent?” + +“No sir,” answered Herbert. + +“We will find out to-morrow,” said the engineer. “Until then there is +nothing to do.” + +“There is one thing,” suggested Pencroff. + +“What is that?” + +“Some fire,” replied the sailor, who thought of nothing else. + +“We will have it, Pencroff,” said Smith. “But when you were carrying me +here yesterday, did not I see a mountain rising in the west?” + +“Yes,” saidSpilett, “quite a high one.” + +“All right,” exclaimed the engineer. “Tomorrow we will climb to its +summit and determine whether this is an island or a continent; until +then I repeat there is nothing to do.” + +“But there is; we want fire!” cried the obstinate sailor again. + +“Have a little patience, Pencroff, and we will have the fire,” said +Spilett. + +The other looked at the reporter as much as to say, “If there was only +you to make it we would never taste roast meat.” But he kept silent. + +Smith had not spoken. He seemed little concerned about this question of +fire. For some moments he remained absorbed in his own thoughts. Then +he spoke as follows:— + +“My friends, our situation is, doubtless, deplorable, nevertheless it +is very simple. Either we are upon a continent, and, in that case, at +the expense of greater or less fatigue, we will reach some inhabited +place, or else we are on an island. In the latter case, it is one of +two things; if the island is inhabited, we will get out of our +difficulty by the help of the inhabitants; if it is deserted, we will +get out of it by ourselves.” + +“Nothing could be plainer than that,” said Pencroff. + +“But,” asked Spilett, “whether it is a continent or an island, +whereabouts do you think this storm has thrown us, Cyrus?” + +“In truth, I cannot say,” replied the engineer, “but the probability is +that we are somewhere in the Pacific. When we left Richmond the wind +was northeast, and its very violence proves that its direction did not +vary much. Supposing it unchanged, we crossed North and South Carolina, +Georgia, the Gulf of Mexico, and the narrow part of Mexico, and a +portion of the Pacific Ocean. I do not estimate the distance traversed +by the balloon at less than 6,000 or 7,000 miles, and even if the wind +had varied a half a quarter it would have carried us either to the +Marquesas Islands or to the Low Archipelago; or, if it was stronger +than I suppose, as far as New Zealand. If this last hypothesis is +correct, our return home will be easy. English or Maoris, we shall +always find somebody with whom to speak. If, on the other hand, this +coast belongs to some barren island in the Micronesian Archipelago, +perhaps we can reconnoitre it from the summit of this mountain, and +then we will consider how to establish ourselves here as if we were +never going to leave it.” + +“Never?” cried the reporter. “Do you say never, my dear Cyrus?” + +“It is better to put things in their worst light at first,” answered +the engineer; “and to reserve those which are better, as a surprise.” + +“Well said,” replied Pencroff. “And we hope that this island, if it is +an island, will not be situated just outside of the route of ships; for +that would, indeed, be unlucky.” + +“We will know how to act after having first ascended the mountain,” +answered Smith. + +“But will you be able, Mr. Smith, to make the climb tomorrow?” asked +Herbert. + +“I hope so,” answered the engineer, “if Pencroff and you, my boy, show +yourselves to be good and ready hunters.” + +“Mr. Smith,” said the sailor, “since you are speaking of game, if when +I come back I am as sure of getting it roasted as I am of bringing it—” + +“Bring it, nevertheless,” interrupted Smith. + +It was now agreed that the engineer and the reporter should spend the +day at the Chimneys, in order to examine the shore and the plateau, +while Neb, Herbert, and the sailor were to return to the forest, renew +the supply of wood, and lay hands on every bird and beast that should +cross their path. So, at 6 o’clock, the party left, Herbert confident. +Neb happy, and Pencroff muttering to himself:— + +“If, when I get back I find a fire in the house, it will have been the +lightning that lit it!” + +The three climbed the bank, and having reached the turn in the river, +the sailor stopped and said to his companions:— + +“Shall we begin as hunters or wood-choppers?” + +“Hunters,” answered Herbert. “See Top, who is already at it.” + +“Let us hunt, then,” replied the sailor, “and on our return here we +will lay in our stock of wood.” + +This said, the party made three clubs for themselves, and followed Top, +who was jumping about in the high grass. + +This time, the hunters, instead of following the course of the stream, +struck at once into the depths of the forests. The trees were for the +most part of the pine family. And in certain places, where they stood +in small groups, they were of such a size as to indicate that this +country was in a higher latitude than the engineer supposed. Some +openings, bristling with stumps decayed by the weather, were covered +with dead timber which formed an inexhaustible reserve of firewood. +Then, the opening passed, the underwood became so thick as to be nearly +impenetrable. + +To guide oneself among these great trees without any beaten path was +very difficult. So the sailer from time to time blazed the route by +breaking branches in a manner easily recognizable. But perhaps they +would have done better to have followed the water course, as in the +first instance, as, after an hour’s march, no game had been taken. Top, +running under the low boughs, only flushed birds that were +unapproachable. Even the couroucous were invisible, and it seemed +likely that the sailor would be obliged to return to that swampy place +where he had fished for tetras with such good luck. + +“Well, Pencroff,” said Neb sarcastically, “if this is all the game you +promised to carry back to my master it won’t take much fire to roast +it!” + +“Wait a bit, Neb,” answered the sailor; “it won’t be game that will be +wanting on our return.” + +“Don’t you believe in Mr. Smith?” + +“Yes.” + +“But you don’t believe be will make a fire?” + +“I will believe that when the wood is blazing in the fire-place.” + +“It will blaze, then, for my master has said so!” + +“Well, we’ll see!” + +Meanwhile the sun had not yet risen to its highest point above the +horizon. The exploration went on and was signalized by Herbert’s +discovery of a tree bearing edible fruit. It was the pistachio pine, +which bears an excellent nut, much liked in the temperate regions of +America and Europe. These nuts were perfectly ripe, and Herbert showed +them to his companions, who feasted on them. + +“Well,” said Pencroff, “seaweed for bread, raw mussels for meat, and +nuts for dessert, that’s the sort of dinner for men who haven’t a match +in their pocket!” + +“It’s not worth while complaining,” replied Herbert. + +“I don’t complain, my boy. I simply repeat that the meat is a little +too scant in this sort of meal.” + +“Top has seen something!” cried Neb, running toward a thicket into +which the dog had disappeared barking. With the dog’s barks were +mingled singular gruntings. The sailor and Herbert had followed the +negro. If it was game, this was not the time to discuss how to cook it, +but rather how to secure it. + +The hunters, on entering the brush, saw Top struggling with an animal +which he held by the ear. This quadruped was a species of pig, about +two feet and a half long, of a brownish black color, somewhat lighter +under the belly, having harsh and somewhat scanty hair, and its toes at +this time strongly grasping the soil seemed joined together by +membranes. + +Herbert thought that he recognized in this animal a cabiai, or +water-hog, one of the largest specimens of the order of rodents. The +water-hog did not fight the dog. Its great eyes, deep sank in thick +layers of fat, rolled stupidly from side to side. And Neb, grasping his +club firmly, was about to knock the beast down, when the latter tore +loose from Top, leaving a piece of his ear in the dog’s mouth, and +uttering a vigorous grunt, rushed against and overset Herbert and +disappeared in the wood. + +“The beggar!” cried Pencroff, as they all three darted after the hog. +But just as they had come up to it again, the water-hog disappeared +under the surface of a large pond, overshadowed by tall, ancient pines. + +The three companions stopped, motionless. Top had plunged into the +water, but the cabiai, hidden at the bottom of the pond, did not +appear. + +“Wait,”, said the boy, “he will have to come to the surface to +breathe.” + +“Won’t he drown?” asked Neb. + +“No,” answered Herbert, “since he is fin-toed and almost amphibious. +But watch for him.” + +Top remained in the water, and Pencroff and his companions took +stations upon the bank, to cut off the animal’s retreat, while the dog +swam to and fro looking for him. + +Herbert was not mistaken. In a few minutes the animal came again to the +surface. Top was upon him at once, keeping him from diving again, and a +moment later, the cabiai, dragged to the shore, was struck down by a +blow from Neb’s club. + +“Hurrah!” cried Pencroff with all his heart. “Nothing but a clear fire, +and this gnawer shall be gnawed to the bone.” + +Pencroff lifted the carcase to his shoulder, and judging by the sun +that it must be near 2 o’clock, he gave the signal to return. + +Top’s instinct was useful to the hunters, as, thanks to that +intelligent animal, they were enabled to return upon their steps. In +half an hour they had reached the bend of the river. There, as before, +Pencroff quickly constructed a raft, although, lacking fire, this +seemed to him a useless job, and, with the raft keeping the current, +they returned towards the Chimneys. But the sailor had not gone fifty +paces when he stopped and gave utterance anew to a tremendous hurrah, +and extending his hand towards the angle of the cliff— + +“Herbert! Neb! See!” he cried. + +Smoke was escaping and curling above the rocks! + + + + +CHAPTER X. + + +THE ENGINEER’S INVENTION—ISLAND OR CONTINENT?—DEPARTURE FOR THE +MOUNTAIN—THE FOREST—VOLCANIC SOIL—THE TRAGOPANS—THE MOUFFLONS —THE +FIRST PLATEAU—ENCAMPING FOR THE NIGHT—THE SUMMIT OF THE CONE + + +A few minutes afterwards, the three hunters were seated before a +sparkling fire. Beside them sat Cyrus Smith and the reporter. Pencroff +looked from one to the other without saying a word, his cabiai in his +hand. + +“Yes, my good fellow,” said the reporter, “a fire, a real fire, that +will roast your game to a turn.” + +“But who lighted it?” said the sailor. + +“The sun.” + +The sailor could not believe his eyes, and was too stupefied to +question the engineer. + +“Had you a burning-glass, sir?” asked Herbert of Cyrus Smith. + +“No, my boy,” said he, “but I made one.” + +And he showed his extemporized lens. It was simply the two glasses, +from his own watch and the reporter’s, which he had taken out, filled +with water, and stuck together at the edges with a little clay. Thus he +had made a veritable burning-glass, and by concentrating the solar rays +on some dry moss had set it on fire. + +The sailor examined the lens; then he looked at the engineer without +saying a word, but his face spoke for him. If Smith was not a magician +to him, he was certainly more than a man. At last his speech returned, +and he said:— + +“Put that down, Mr. Spilett, put that down in your book!” + +“I have it down,” said the reporter. + +Then, with the help of Neb, the sailor arranged the spit, and dressed +the cabiai for roasting, like a suckling pig, before the sparkling +fire, by whose warmth, and by the restoration of the partitions, the +Chimneys had been rendered habitable. + +The engineer and his companion had made good use of their day. Smith +had almost entirely recovered his strength, which he had tested by +climbing the plateau above. From thence his eye, accustomed to measure +heights and distances, had attentively examined the cone whose summit +he proposed to reach on the morrow. The mountain, situated about six +miles to the northwest, seemed to him to reach about 3,500 feet above +the level of the sea, so that an observer posted at its summit, could +command a horizon of fifty miles at least. He hoped, therefore, for an +easy solution of the urgent question, “Island or continent?” + +They had a pleasant supper, and the meat of the cabiai was proclaimed +excellent; the sargassum and pistachio-nuts completed the repast. But +the engineer said little; he was planning for the next day. Once or +twice Pencroff talked of some project for the future, but Smith shook +his head. + +“To-morrow,” he said, “we will know how we are situated, and we can act +accordingly.” + +After supper, more armfuls of wood were thrown on the fire, and the +party lay down to sleep. The morning found them fresh and eager for the +expedition which was to settle their fate. + +Everything was ready. Enough was left of the cabiai for twenty-four +hours’ provisions, and they hoped to replenish their stock on the way. +They charred a little linen for tinder, as the watch glasses had been +replaced, and flint abounded in this volcanic region. + +At half-past 7 they left the Chimneys, each with a stout cudgel. By +Pencroff’s advice, they took the route of the previous day, which was +the shortest way to the mountain. They turned the southern angle, and +followed the left bank of the river, leaving it where it bent to the +southwest. They took the beaten path under the evergreens, and soon +reached the northern border of the forest. The soil, flat and swampy, +then dry and sandy, rose by a gradual slope towards the interior. Among +the trees appeared a few shy animals, which rapidly took flight before +Top. The engineer called his dog back; later, perhaps, they might hunt, +but now nothing could distract him from his great object. He observed +neither the character of the ground nor its products; he was going +straight for the top of the mountain. + +At 10 o’clock they were clear of the forest, and they halted for a +while to observe the country. The mountain was composed of two cones. +The first was truncated about 2,500 feet up, and supported by fantastic +spurs, branching out like the talons of an immense claw, laid upon the +ground. Between these spurs were narrow valleys, thick set with trees, +whose topmost foliage was level with the flat summit of the first cone. +On the northeast side of the mountain, vegetation was more scanty, and +the ground was seamed here and there, apparently with currents of lava. + +On the first cone lay a second, slightly rounded towards the summit. It +lay somewhat across the other, like a huge hat cocked over the ear. The +surface seemed utterly bare, with reddish rocks often protruding. The +object of the expedition was to reach the top of this cone, and their +best way was along the edge of the spurs. + +“We are in a volcanic country,” said Cyrus Smith, as they began to +climb, little by little, up the side of the spurs, whose winding summit +would most readily bring them out upon the lower plateau. The ground +was strewn with traces of igneous convulsion. Here and there lay +blocks, debris of basalt, pumice-stone, and obsidian. In isolated +clumps rose some few of those conifers, which, some hundreds of feet +lower, in the narrow gorges, formed a gigantic thicket, impenetrable to +the sun. As they climbed these lower slopes, Herbert called attention +to the recent marks of huge paws and hoofs on the ground. + +“These brutes will make a fight for their territory,” said Pencroff. + +“Oh well,” said the reporter, who had hunted tigers in India and lions +in Africa, “we shall contrive to get rid of them. In the meanwhile, we +must be on our guard.” + +While talking they were gradually ascending. The way was lengthened by +detours around the obstacles which could not be directly surmounted. +Sometimes, too, deep crevasses yawned across the ascent, and compelled +them to return upon their track for a long distance, before they could +find an available pathway. At noon, when the little company halted to +dine at the foot of a great clump of firs, at whose foot babbled a tiny +brook, they were still half way from the first plateau, and could +hardly reach it before nightfall. From this point the sea stretched +broad beneath their feet; but on the right their vision was arrested by +the sharp promontory of the southeast, which left them in doubt whether +there was land beyond. On the left they could see directly north for +several miles; but the northwest was concealed from them by the crest +of a fantastic spur, which formed a massive abutment to the central +cone. They could, therefore, make no approach as yet to the solving of +the great question. + +At 1 o’clock, the ascent was again begun. The easiest route slanted +upwards towards the southwest, through the thick copse. There, under +the trees, were flying about a number of gallinaceæ of the pheasant +family. These were “tragopans,” adorned with a sort of fleshy wattles +hanging over their necks and with two little cylindrical horns behind +their eyes. Of these birds, which were about the size of a hen, the +female was invariably brown, while the male was resplendent in a coat +of red, with little spots of white. With a well-aimed stone Spilett +killed one of the tragopans, which the hungry Pencroff looked at with +longing eyes. + +Leaving the copse, the climbers, by mounting on each other’s shoulders, +ascended for a hundred feet up a very steep hill, and reached a +terrace, almost bare of trees, whose soil was evidently volcanic. From +hence, their course was a zigzag towards the east, for the declivity +was so steep that they had to take every point of vantage. Neb and +Herbert led the way, then came Smith and the reporter; Pencroff was +last. The animals who lived among these heights, and whose traces were +not wanting, must have the sure foot and the supple spine of a chamois +or an izard. They saw some to whom Pencroff gave a name of his +own—“Sheep,” he cried. + +They all had stopped fifty feet from half-a-dozen large animals, with +thick horns curved backwards and flattened at the end, and with woolly +fleece, hidden under long silky fawn-colored hair. They were not the +common sheep, but a species widely distributed through the mountainous +regions of the temperate zone. Their name, according to Herbert, was +_Moufflon_. + +“Have they legs and chops?” asked the sailor. + +“Yes,” replied Herbert. + +“Then they’re sheep,” said Pencroff. The animals stood motionless and +astonished at their first sight of man. Then, seized with sudden fear, +they fled, leaping away among the rocks. + +“Good-bye till next time,” cried Pencroff to them, in a tone so comical +that the others could not forbear laughing. + +As the ascension continued, the traces of lava were more frequent, and +little sulphur springs intercepted their route. At some points sulphur +had been deposited in crystals, in the midst of the sand and whitish +cinders of feldspar which generally precede the eruption of lava. As +they neared the first plateau, formed by the truncation of the lower +cone, the ascent became very difficult. By 4 o’clock the last belt of +trees had been passed. Here and there stood a few dwarfed and distorted +pines, which had survived the attacks of the furious winds. Fortunately +for the engineer and his party, it was a pleasant, mild day; for a high +wind, at that altitude of 3,000 feet, would have interfered with them +sadly. The sky overhead was extremely bright and clear. A perfect calm +reigned around them. The sun was hidden by the upper mountain, which +cast its shadow, like a vast screen, westward to the edge of the sea. A +thin haze began to appear in the east, colored with all the rays of the +solar spectrum. + +There were only 500 feet between the explorers and the plateau where +they meant to encamp for the night, but these 500 were increased to +2,000 and more by the tortuous route. The ground, so to speak, gave way +under their feet. The angle of ascent was often so obtuse that they +slipped upon the smooth-worn lava. Little by little the evening set in, +and it was almost night when the party, tired out by a seven hours’ +climb, arrived at the top of the first cone. + +Now they must pitch their camp, and think of supper and sleep. The +upper terrace of the mountain rose upon a base of rocks, amid which +they could soon find a shelter. Firewood was not plenty, yet the moss +and dry thistles, so abundant on the plateau, would serve their turn. +The sailor built up a fireplace with huge stones, while Neb and Herbert +went after the combustibles. They soon came back with a load of +thistles; and with flint and steel, the charred linen for tinder, and +Neb to blow the fire, a bright blaze was soon sparkling behind the +rocks. It was for warmth only, for they kept the pheasant for the next +day, and supped off the rest of the cabiai and a few dozen +pistachio-nuts. + +It was only half-past 6 when the meal was ended. Cyrus Smith resolved +to explore, in, the semi-obscurity, the great circular pediment which +upheld the topmost cone of the mountain. Before taking rest, he was +anxious to know whether the base of the cone could be passed, in case +its flanks should prove too steep for ascent. So, regardless of +fatigue, he left Pencroff and Neb to make the sleeping arrangements, +and Spilett to note down the incidents of the day, and taking Herbert +with him, began to walk around the base of the plateau towards the +north. + +The night was beautiful and still; and not yet very dark. They walked +together in silence. Sometimes the plateau was wide and easy, sometimes +so encumbered with rubbish that the two could not walk abreast. +Finally, after twenty minutes tramp, they were brought to a halt. From +this point the slant of the two cones was equal. To walk around the +mountain upon an acclivity whose angle was nearly seventy-five degrees +was impossible. + +But though they had to give up their flank movement, the chance of a +direct ascent was suddenly offered to them. Before them opened an +immense chasm in the solid rock. It was the mouth of the upper crater, +the gullet, so to speak, through which, when the volcano was active, +the eruption took place. Inside, hardened lava and scoriæ formed a sort +of natural staircase with enormous steps, by which they might possibly +reach the summit. Smith saw the opportunity at a glance, and followed +by the boy, he walked unhesitatingly into the huge crevasse, in the +midst of the gathering darkness. + +There were yet 1,000 feet to climb. Could they scale the interior wall +of the crater? They would try, at all events. Fortunately, the long and +sinuous declivities described a winding staircase, and greatly helped +their ascent. The crater was evidently exhausted. Not a puff of smoke, +not a glimmer of fire, escaped; not a sound or motion in the dark +abyss, reaching down, perhaps, to the centre of the globe. The air +within retained no taint of sulphur. The volcano was not only quiet, +but extinct. + +Evidently the attempt was to succeed. Gradually, as the two mounted the +inner walls, they saw the crater grow larger over their heads. The +light from the outer sky visibly increased. At each step, so to speak, +which they made, new stars entered the field of their vision: The +magnificent constellations of the southern sky shone resplendent. In +the zenith glittered the splendid Antares of the Scorpion, and not far +off that Beta of the Centaur, which is believed to be the nearest star +to our terrestrial globe. Then, as the crater opened, appeared +Fomalhaut of the Fish, the Triangle, and at last, almost at the +Antarctic pole, the glowing Southern Cross. + +It was nearly 8 o’clock when they set foot on the summit of the cone. +The darkness was by this time complete, and they could hardly see a +couple of miles around them. Was the land an island, or the eastern +extremity of a continent? They could not yet discover. Towards the west +a band of cloud, clearly defined against the horizon, deepened the +obscurity, and confounded sea with sky. + +But at one point of the horizon suddenly appeared a vague light, which +slowly sank as the clouds mounted to the zenith. It was the slender +crescent of the moon, just about to disappear. But the line of the +horizon was now cloudless, and as the moon touched it, the engineer +could see her face mirrored for an instant on a liquid surface. He +seized the boy’s hand— + +“An island!” said he, as the lunar crescent disappeared behind the +waves. + + + + +CHAPTER XI. + + +AT THE SUMMIT OF THE CONE—THE INTERIOR OF THE CRATER—SEA EVERYWHERE —NO +LAND IN SIGHT—A BIRD’S EVE VIEW OF THE COAST—HYDROGRAPHY AND OROGRAPHY +—IS THE ISLAND INHABITED?—A GEOGRAPHICAL BAPTISM—LINCOLN ISLAND. + + +A half hour later they walked back to the camp. The engineer contented +himself with saying to his comrades that the country was an island, and +that to-morrow they would consider what to do. Then each disposed +himself to sleep, and in this basalt cave, 2,500 feet above sea-level, +they passed a quiet night in profound repose. The next day, March 30, +after a hurried breakfast on roast trajopan, they started out for the +summit of the volcano. All desired to see the isle on which perhaps +they were to spend their lives, and to ascertain how far it lay from +other land, and how near the course of vessels bound for the +archipelagoes of the Pacific. + +It was about 7 o’clock in the morning when they left the camp. No one +seemed dismayed by the situation. They had faith in themselves, no +doubt; but the source of that faith was not the same with Smith as with +his companions. They trusted in him, he in his ability to extort from +the wilderness around them all the necessaries of life. As for +Pencroff, he would not have despaired, since the rekindling of the fire +by the engineer’s lens, if he had found himself upon a barren rock, if +only Smith was with him. + +“Bah!” said he, “we got out of Richmond without the permission of the +authorities, and it will be strange if we can’t get away some time from +a place where no one wants to keep us!” + +They followed the route of the day before, flanking the cone till they +reached the enormous crevasse. It was a superb day, and the southern +side of the mountain was bathed in sunlight. The crater, as the +engineer had supposed, was a huge shaft gradually opening to a height +of 1,000 feet above the plateau. From the bottom of the crevasse large +currents of lava meandered down the flanks of the mountain, indicating +the path of the eruptive matter down to the lower valleys which +furrowed the north of the island. + +The interior of the crater, which had an inclination of thirty-five or +forty degrees, was easily scaled. They saw on the way traces of ancient +lava, which had probably gushed from the summit of the cone before the +lateral opening had given it a new way of escape. As to the volcano +chimney which communicated with the subterranean abyss, its depth could +not be estimated by the eye, for it was lost in obscurity; but there +seemed no doubt that the volcano was completely extinct. Before 8 +o’clock, the party were standing at the summit of the crater, on a +conical elevation of the northern side. + +“The sea! the sea everywhere!” was the universal exclamation. There it +lay, an immense sheet of water around them on every side. Perhaps Smith +had hoped that daylight would reveal some neighboring coast or island. +But nothing appeared to the horizon-line, a radius of more than fifty +miles. Not a sail was in sight. Around the island stretched a desert +infinity of ocean. + +Silent and motionless, they surveyed every point of the horizon. They +strained their eyes to the uttermost limit of the ocean. But even +Pencroff, to whom Nature had given a pair of telescopes instead of +eyes, and who could have detected land even in the faintest haze upon +the sea-line, could see nothing. Then they looked down upon their +island, and the silence was broken by Spilett:— + +“How large do you think this island is?” + +It seemed small enough in the midst of the infinite ocean. + +Smith thought awhile, noticed the circumference of the island, and +allowed for the elevation. + +“My friends,” he said, “if I am not mistaken, the coast of the island +is more than 100 miles around.” + +“Then its surface will be—” + +“That is hard to estimate; the outline is so irregular.” + +If Smith was right, the island would be about the size of Malta or +Zante in the Mediterranean; but it was more irregular than they, and at +the same time had fewer capes, promontories, points, bays, and creeks. +Its form was very striking. When Spilett drew it they declared it was +like some fantastic sea beast, some monstrous pteropode, asleep on the +surface of the Pacific. + +The exact configuration of the island may thus be described:—The +eastern coast, upon which the castaways had landed, was a decided +curve, embracing a large bay, terminating at the southeast in a sharp +promontory, which the shape of the land had hidden from Pencroff on his +first exploration. On the northeast, two other capes shut in the bay, +and between them lay a narrow gulf like the half-open jaws of some +formidable dog-fish. From northeast to northwest the coast was round +and flat, like the skull of a wild beast; then came a sort of +indeterminate hump, whose centre was occupied by the volcanic mountain. +From this point the coast ran directly north and south. For two-thirds +of its length it was bordered by a narrow creek; then it finished in +along cue, like the tail of a gigantic alligator. This cue formed a +veritable peninsula, which extended more than thirty miles into the +sea, reckoning from the southeastern cape before mentioned. These +thirty miles, the southern coast of the island, described an open bay. +The narrowest part of the island, between the Chimneys and the creek, +on the west, was ten miles wide, but its greatest length, from the jaw +in the northeast to the extremity of the southwestern peninsula, was +not less than thirty miles. + +The general aspect of the interior was as follows:—The southern part, +from the shore to the mountain, was covered with woods; the northern +part was arid and sandy. Between the volcano and the eastern coast the +party were surprised to see a lake, surrounded by evergreens, whose +existence they had not suspected. Viewed from such a height it seemed +to be on the same level with the sea, but, on reflection, the engineer +explained to his companions that it must be at least 300 feet higher, +for the plateau on which it lay was as high as that of the coast. + +“So, then, it is a fresh water lake?” asked Pencroff. + +“Yes,” said the engineer, “for it must be fed by the mountain streams.” + +“I can see a little river flowing into it,” said Herbert, pointing to a +narrow brook whose source was evidently in the spurs of the western +cliff. + +“True,” said Smith, “and since this brook flows into the lake, there is +probably some outlet towards the sea for the overflow. We will see +about that when we go back.” + +This little winding stream and the river so familiar to them were all +the watercourses they could see. Nevertheless, it was possible that +under those-masses of trees which covered two-thirds of the island, +other streams flowed towards the sea. This seemed the more probable +from the fertility of the country and its magnificent display of the +flora of the temperate zone. In the northern section there was no +indication of running water; perhaps there might be stagnant pools in +the swampy part of the northeast, but that was all; in the main this +region was composed of arid sand-hills and downs, contrasting strongly +with the fertility of the larger portion. + +The volcano did not occupy the centre of the island. It rose in the +northwest, and seemed to indicate the dividing line of the two zones. +On the southwest, south, and southeast, the beginnings of the spurs +were lost in masses of verdure. To the north, on the contrary, these +ramifications were plainly visible, subsiding gradually to the level of +the sandy plain. On this side, too, when the volcano was active, the +eruptions had taken place, and a great bed of lava extended as far as +the narrow jaw which formed the northeastern gulf. + +They remained for an hour at the summit of the mountain. The island lay +stretched before them like a plan in relief, with its different tints, +green for the forests, yellow for the sands, blue for the water. They +understood the configuration of the entire island; only the bottoms of +the shady valleys and the depths of the narrow gorges between the spurs +of the volcano, concealed by the spreading foliage, escaped their +searching eye. + +There remained a question of great moment, whose answer would have a +controlling influence upon the fortunes of the castaways. Was the +island inhabited? It was the reporter who put this question, which +seemed already to have been answered in the negative by the minute +examination which they had just made of the different portions of the +island. Nowhere could they perceive the handiwork of man; no late +settlement on the beach, not even a lonely cabin or a fisherman’s hut. +No smoke, rising on the air, betrayed a human presence. It is true, the +observers were thirty miles from the long peninsula which extended to +the southwest, and upon which even Pencroff’s eye could hardly have +discovered a dwelling. Nor could they raise the curtain of foliage +which covered three-fourths of the island to see whether some village +lay sheltered there. But the natives of these little islands in the +Pacific usually live on the coast, and the coast seemed absolutely +desert. Until they should make a more complete exploration, they might +assume that the island was uninhabited. But was it ever frequented by +the inhabitants of neighboring islands? This question was difficult to +answer. No land appeared within a radius of fifty miles. But fifty +miles could easily be traversed by Malay canoes or by the larger +pirogues of the Polynesians. Everything depended upon the situation of +the island—on its isolation in the Pacific, or its proximity to the +archipelagoes. Could Smith succeed, without his instruments, in +determining its latitude and longitude? It would be difficult, and in +the uncertainty, they must take precautions against an attack from +savage neighbors. + +The exploration of the island was finished, its configuration +determined, a map of it drawn, its size calculated, and the +distribution of its land and water ascertained. The forests and the +plains had been roughly sketched upon the reporter’s map. They had only +now to descend the declivities of the mountain, and to examine into the +animal, vegetable, and mineral resources of the country. But before +giving the signal of departure, Cyrus Smith, in a calm, grave voice, +addressed his companions. + +“Look, my friends, upon this little corner of the earth, on which the +hand of the Almighty has cast us. Here, perhaps, we may long dwell. +Perhaps, too, unexpected help will arrive, should some ship chance to +pass. I say _chance_, because this island is of slight importance, +without even a harbor for ships. I fear it is situated out of the usual +course of vessels, too far south for those which frequent the +archipelagoes of the Pacific, too far north for those bound to +Australia round Cape Horn. I will not disguise from you our situation.” + +“And you are right, my dear Cyrus,” said the reporter, eagerly. “You +are dealing with men. They trust you, and you can count on them. Can he +not, my friends?” + +“I will obey you in everyting [sic], Mr. Smith,” said Herbert, taking +the engineer’s hand. + +“May I lose my name,” said the sailor, “if I shirk my part! If you +choose, Mr. Smith, we will make a little America here. We will build +cities, lay railroads, establish telegraphs, and some day, when the +island is transformed and civilized, offer her to the United States. +But one thing I should like to ask.” + +“What Is that?” said the reporter. + +“That we should not consider ourselves any longer as castaways, but as +colonists.” + +Cyrus Smith could not help smiling, and the motion was adopted. Then +Smith thanked his companions, and added that he counted upon their +energy and upon the help of Heaven. + +“Well, let’s start for the Chimneys,” said Pencroff. + +“One minute, my friends,” answered the engineer; “would it not be well +to name the island, as well as the capes, promontories, and +water-courses, which we see before us?” + +“Good,” said the reporter. “That will simplify for the future the +instructions which we may have to give or to take.” + +“Yes,” added the sailor, “it will be something gained to be able to say +whence we are coming and where we are going. We shall seem to be +somewhere.” + +“At the Chimneys, for instance,” said Herbert. + +“Exactly,” said the sailor. “That name has been quite convenient +already, and I was the author of it. Shall we keep that name for our +first encampment, Mr. Smith?” + +“Yes, Pencroff, since you baptized it so.” + +“Good! the others will be easy enough,” resumed the sailor, who was now +in the vein. “Let us give them names like those of the Swiss family +Robinson, whose story Herbert has read me more than once:—’Providence +Bay,’ ‘Cochalot Point,’ ‘Cape Disappointment.’“ + +“Or rather Mr. Smith’s name, Mr. Spilett’s, or Neb’s,” said Herbert. + +“My name!” cried Neb, showing his white teeth. + +“Why not?” replied Pencroff, “‘Port Neb’ would sound first-rate! And +‘Cape Gideon’—” + +“I would rather have names, taken from our country,” said the reporter, +“which will recall America to us.” + +“Yes,” said Smith, “the principal features, the bays and seas should be +so named. For instance, let us call the great bay to the east Union +Bay, the southern indentation Washington Bay, the mountain on which we +are standing Mount Franklin, the lake beneath our feet Lake Grant. +These names will recall our country and the great citizens who have +honored it; but for the smaller features, let us choose names which +will suggest their especial configuration. These will remain in our +memory and be more convenient at the same time. The shape of the island +is so peculiar that we shall have no trouble in finding appropriate +names. The streams, the creeks, and the forest regions yet to be +discovered we will baptize as they come. What say you, my friends?” + +The engineer’s proposal was unanimously applauded. The inland bay +unrolled like a map before their eyes, and they had only to name the +features of its contour and relief. Spilett would put down the names +over the proper places, and the geographical nomenclature of the island +would be complete. First, they named the two bays and the mountain as +the engineer had suggested. + +“Now,” said the reporter, “to that peninsula projecting from the +southwest I propose to give the name of Serpentine Peninsula, and to +call the twisted curve at the termination of it Reptile End, for it is +just like a snake’s tail.” + +“Motion carried,” said the engineer. + +“And the other extremity of the island,” said Herbert, “the gulf so +like an open pair of jaws, let us call it Shark Gulf.” + +“Good enough,” said Pencroff, “and we may complete the figure by +calling the two sides of the gulf Mandible Cape.” + +“But there are two capes,” observed the reporter. + +“Well, we will have them North Mandible and South Mandible.” + +“I’ve put them down,” said Spilett. + +“Now we must name the southwestern extremity of the island,” said +Pencroff. + +“You mean the end of Union Bay?” asked. Herbert. + +“Claw Cape,” suggested Neb, who wished to have his turn as godfather. +And he had chosen an excellent name; for this Cape was very like the +powerful claw of the fantastic animal to which they had compared the +island. Pencroff was enchanted with the turn things were taking, and +their active imaginations soon supplied other names. The river which +furnished them with fresh water, and near which the balloon had cast +them on shore, they called the Mercy, in gratitude to Providence. The +islet on which they first set foot, was Safety Island; the plateau at +the top of the high granite wall above the Chimneys, from which the +whole sweep of the bay was visible, Prospect Plateau; and, finally, +that mass of impenetrable woods which covered Serpentine Peninsula, the +Forests of the Far West. + +The engineer had approximately determined, by the height and position +of the sun, the situation of the island with reference to the cardinal +points, and had put Union Bay and Prospect Plateau to the east; but on +the morrow, by taking the exact time of the sun’s rising and setting, +and noting its situation at the time exactly intermediate, he expected +to ascertain precisely the northern point of the island; for, on +account of its situation on the Southern Hemisphere, the sun at the +moment of its culmination would pass to the north, and not to the +south, as it does in the Northern Hemisphere. + +All was settled, and the colonists were about to descend the mountain, +when Pencroff cried:— + +“Why, what idiots we are!” + +“Why so?” said Spilett, who had gotten up and closed his note-book. + +“We have forgotten to baptize our island!” + +Herbert was about to propose to give it the name of the engineer, and +his companions would have applauded the choice, when Cyrus Smith said +quietly:— + +“Let us give it the name of a great citizen, my friends, of the +defender of American unity! Let us call it Lincoln Island!” + +They greeted the proposal with three hurrahs. + + + + +CHAPTER XII. + + +REGULATION OF WATCHES—PENCROFF IS SATISFIED—A SUSPICIOUS SMOKE—THE +COURSE OF RED CREEK—THE FLORA OF THE ISLAND—ITS FAUNA—MOUNTAIN +PHEASANTS—A KANGAROO CHASE—THE AGOUTI—LAKE GRANT—RETURN TO THE +CHIMNEYS. + + +The colonists of Lincoln Island cast a last look about them and walked +once around the verge of the crater. Half an hour afterwards they were +again upon the lower plateau, at their encampment of the previous +night. Pencroff thought it was breakfast time, and so came up the +question of regulating the watches of Smith and Spilett. The reporter’s +chronometer was uninjured by the sea water, as he had been cast high up +on the sand beyond the reach of the waves. It was an admirable +time-piece, a veritable pocket chronometer, and Spilett had wound it up +regularly every day. The engineer’s watch, of course, had stopped while +he lay upon the downs. He now wound it up, and set it at 9 o’clock, +estimating the time approximately by the height of the sun. Spilett was +about to do the same, when the engineer stopped him. + +“Wait, my dear Spilett,” said he. “You have the Richmond time, have you +not?” + +“Yes.” + +“Your watch, then, is regulated by the meridian of that city, which is +very nearly that of Washington?” + +“Certainly.” + +“Well, keep it so. Wind it up carefully, but do not touch the hands. +This may be of use to us.” + +“What’s the use of that?” thought the sailor. + +They made such a hearty meal, that little was left of the meat and +pistachio-nuts; but Pencroff did not trouble himself about that. Top, +who had not been forgotten in the feast, would certainly find some new +game in the thicket. Besides, the sailor had made up his mind to ask +Smith to make some powder and one or two shot-guns, which, he thought, +would be an easy matter. + +As they were leaving the plateau, Smith proposed to his companions to +take a new road back to the Chimneys. He wished to explore Lake Grant, +which lay surrounded so beautifully with trees. They followed the crest +of one of the spurs in which the creek which fed the lake probably had +its source. The colonists employed in conversation only the proper +names which they had just devised, and found that they could express +themselves much more easily. Herbert and Pencroff, one of whom was +young and the other something of a child, were delighted, and the +sailor said as they walked along:— + +“Well, Herbert, this is jolly! We can’t lose ourselves now, my boy, +since, whether we follow Lake Grant or get to the Mercy through the +woods of the Far West, we must come to Prospect Plateau, and so to +Union Bay.” + +It had been agreed that, without marching in a squad, the colonists +should not keep too far apart. Dangerous wild beasts surely inhabited +the forest recesses, and they must be on their guard. Usually Pencroff, +Herbert, and Neb walked in front, preceded by Top, who poked his nose +into every corner. The reporter and engineer walked together, the +former ready to note down every incident, the latter seldom speaking, +and turning aside only to pick up sometimes one thing, sometimes +another, vegetable or mineral, which he put in his pocket without +saying a word. + +“What, the mischief, is he picking up?” muttered Pencroff. “There’s no +use in looking; I see nothing worth the trouble of stooping for.” + +About 10 o’clock the little company descended the last declivities of +Mount Franklin. A few bushes and trees were scattered over the ground. +They were walking on a yellowish, calcined soil, forming a plain about +a mile long, which extended to the border of the wood. Large fragments +of that basalt which, according to Bischof’s theory, has taken +350,000,000 years to cool, strewed the uneven surface of the plain. Yet +there was no trace of lava, which had especially found an exit down the +northern declivities. Smith thought they should soon reach the creek, +which he expected to find flowing under the trees by the plain, when he +saw Herbert running back, and Neb and the sailor hiding themselves +behind the rocks. + +“What’s the matter, my boy?” said Spilett. + +“Smoke,” answered Herbert. “We saw smoke ascending from among the +rocks, a hundred steps in front.” + +“Men in this region!” cried the reporter. + +“We must not show ourselves till we know with whom we have to deal,” +answered Smith. “I have more fear than hope of the natives, if there +are any such on the island. Where is Top?” + +“Top is on ahead.” + +“And has not barked?” + +“No.” + +“That is strange. Still, let us try to call him back.” + +In a few moments the three had rejoined their companions, and had +hidden themselves, like Neb and Pencroff, behind the basalt rubbish. +Thence they saw, very evidently, a yellowish smoke curling into the +air. Top was recalled by a low whistle from his master, who motioned to +his comrades to wait, and stole forward under cover of the rocks. In +perfect stillness the party awaited the result, when a call from Smith +summoned them forward. In a moment they were by his side, and were +struck at once by the disagreeable smell which pervaded the atmosphere. +This odor, unmistakable as it was, had been sufficient to reassure the +engineer. + +“Nature is responsible for that fire,” he said, “or rather for that +smoke. It is nothing but a sulphur spring, which will be good for our +sore throats.” + +“Good!” said Pencroff; “what a pity I have not a cold!” + +The colonists walked towards the smoke. There they beheld a spring of +sulphate of soda, which flowed in currents among the rocks, and whose +waters, absorbing the oxygen of the air, gave off a lively odor of +sulpho-hydric acid. Smith dipped his hand into the spring and found it +oily. He tasted it, and perceived a sweetish savor. Its temperature he +estimated at 95° Fahrenheit; and when Herbert asked him on what he +based his estimate:— + +“Simply, my boy,” said he, “because when I put my hand into this water, +I have no sensation either of heat or of cold. Therefore, it is at the +same temperature as the human body, that is, about 95°.” + +Then as the spring of sulphur could be put to no present use, the +colonists walked towards the thick border of the forest, a few hundred +paces distant. There, as they had thought, the brook rolled its bright +limpid waters between high, reddish banks, whose color betrayed the +presence of oxide of iron. On account of this color, they instantly +named the water course Red Creek. It was nothing but a large mountain +brook, deep and clear, here, flowing quietly over the lands, there, +gurgling amid rocks, or falling in a cascade, but always flowing +towards the lake. It was a mile and a half long; its breadth varied +from thirty to forty feet. Its water was fresh, which argued that those +of the lake would be found the same—a fortunate occurrence, in case +they should find upon its banks a more comfortable dwelling than the +Chimneys. + +The trees which, a few hundred paces down stream overshadowed the banks +of the creek, belonged principally to the species which abound in the +temperate zone of Australia or of Tasmania, and belong to those +conifers which clothed the portion of the island already explored, some +miles around Prospect Plateau. It was now the beginning of April, a +month which corresponds in that hemisphere to our October, yet their +leaves had not begun to fall. They were, especially, casuarinæ and +eucalypti, some of which, in the ensuing spring, would furnish a +sweetish manna like that of the East. Clumps of Australian cedars rose +in the glades, covered high with that sort of moss which the +New-Hollanders call _tussocks_; but the cocoa-palm, so abundant in the +archipelagoes of the Pacific, was conspicuous by its absence. Probably +the latitude of the island was too low. + +“What a pity!” said Herbert, “such a useful tree and such splendid +nuts!” + +There were flocks of birds on the thin boughs of the eucalypti and the +casuarinæ, which gave fine play to their wings. Black, white, and grey +cockatoos, parrots and parroquets of all colors, king-birds, birds of +paradise, of brilliant green, with a crowd of red, and blue lories, +glowing with every prismatic color, flew about with deafening clamors. +All at once, a strange volley of discordant sounds seemed to come from +the thicket. The colonists heard, one after another, the song of birds, +the cries of four-footed beasts, and a sort of clucking sound strangely +human. Neb and Herbert rushed towards the thicket, forgetting the most +elementary rules of prudence. Happily, there was neither formidable +wild beast nor savage native, but merely half-a-dozen of those mocking +birds which they recognized as “mountain pheasants.” A few skillfully +aimed blows with a stick brought this parody to an end, and gave them +excellent game for dinner that evening. Herbert also pointed out superb +pigeons with bronze-colored wings, some with a magnificent crest, +others clad in green, like their congeners at Port-Macquarie; but like +the troops of crows and magpies which flew about, they were beyond +reach. A load of small-shot would have killed hosts of them; but the +colonists had nothing but stones and sticks, very insufficient weapons. +They proved even more inadequate when a troop of quadrupeds leaped away +through the underbrush with tremendous bounds thirty feet long, so that +they almost seemed to spring from tree to tree, like squirrels. + +“Kangaroos!” cried Herbert. + +“Can you eat them?” said Pencroff. + +“They make a delicious stew,” said the reporter. + +The words had hardly escaped his lips, when the sailor, with Neb and +Herbert at his heels, rushed after the kangaroos. Smith tried in vain +to recall them, but equally in vain did they pursue the game, whose +elastic leaps left them far behind. After five minutes’ chase, they +gave it up, out of breath. + +“You see, Mr. Smith,” said Pencroff, “that guns are a necessity. Will +it be possible to make them?” + +“Perhaps,” replied the engineer; “but we will begin by making bows and +arrows, and you will soon use them as skilfully as the Australian +hunters.” + +“Bows and arrows!” said Pencroff, with a contemptuous look. “They are +for children!” + +“Don’t be so proud, my friend,” said the reporter. “Bows and arrows +were sufficient for many centuries for the warfare of mankind. Powder +is an invention of yesterday, while war, unhappily, is as old as the +race.” + +“That’s true, Mr. Spilett,” said the sailor. “I always speak before I +think. Forgive me.” + +Meanwhile Herbert, with his Natural History always uppermost in his +thoughts, returned to the subject of kangaroos. + +“Those which escaped us,” he said, “belong to the species most +difficult to capture—very large, with long grey hair, but I am sure +there are black and red kangaroos, rock-kangaroos, kangaroo-rats—” + +“Herbert,” said the sailor, “for me there is only one kind—the +‘kangaroo-on-the-spit’—and that is just what we haven’t got.” + +They could not help laughing at Professor Pencroff’s new +classification. He was much cast down at the prospect of dining on +mountain-phesants; but chance was once more kind to him. Top, who felt +his dinner at stake, rushed hither and thither, his instinct quickened +by sharp appetite. In fact, he would have left very little of what he +might catch or any one else, had not Neb watched him shrewdly. About 3 +o’clock he disappeared into the rushes, from which came grunts and +growls which indicated a deadly tustle. Neb rushed in, and found Top +greedily devouring an animal, which in ten seconds more would have +totally disappeared. But the dog had luckily fallen on a litter, and +two more rodents—for to this species did the beasts belong—lay +strangled on the ground. Neb reappeared in triumph with a rodent in +each hand. They had yellow hair, with patches of green, and the +rudiments of a tail. They were a sort of agouti, a little larger than +their tropical congeners, true American hares, with long ears and five +molar teeth on either side. + +“Hurrah!” cried Pencroff, “the roast is here; now we can go back to the +house.” + +The journey was resumed. Red Creek still rolled its limped waters under +the arching boughs of casuarence, bankseas and gigantic gum trees. +Superb liliaceæ rose, to a height of twenty feet, and other arborescent +trees of species unknown to the young naturalist, bent over the brook, +which murmered gently beneath its leafy cradle. It widened sensibly, +nevertheless, and the mouth was evidently near. As the party emerged +from a massive thicket of fine trees, the lake suddenly appeared before +them. + +They were now on its left bank, and a picturesque region opened to +their view. The smooth sheet of water, about seven miles in +circumference and 250 acres in extent, lay sleeping among the trees. +Towards the east, across the intermittent screen of verdure, appeared a +shining horizon of sea. To the north the curve of the lake was concave, +contrasting with the sharp outline of its lower extremity. Numerous +aquatic birds frequented the banks of this little Ontario, in which the +“Thousand Isles” of its American original were represented by a rock +emerging from its surface some hundreds of feet from the southern bank. +There lived in harmony several couples of kingfishers, perched upon +rocks, grave and motionless, watching for fish; then they would plunge +into the water and dive with a shrill cry, reappearing with the prey in +their beaks. Upon the banks of the lake and the island were constantly +strutting wild ducks, pelicans, water-hens and red-beaks. The waters of +the lake were fresh and limpid, somewhat dark, and from the concentric +circles on its surface, were evidently full of fish. + +“How beautiful this lake is!” said Spilett. “We could live on its +banks.” + +“We will live there!” answered Smith. + +The colonists, desiring to get back to the Chimneys by the shortest +route, went down towards the angle formed at the south by the junction +of the banks. They broke a path with much labor through the thickets +and brush wood, hitherto untouched by the hand of man, and walked +towards the seashore, so as to strike it to the north of Prospect +Plateau. After a two miles’ walk they came upon the thick turf of the +plateau, and saw before them the infinite ocean. + +To get back to the Chimneys they had to walk across the plateau for a +mile to the elbow formed by the first bend of the Mercy. But the +engineer was anxious to know how and where the overflow of the lake +escaped. It was probable that a river existed somewhere pouring through +a gorge in the granite. In fine, the lake was an immense receptacle +gradually filled at the expense of the creek, and its overflow must +somehow find a way down to the sea. Why should they not utilize this +wasted store of water-power? So they walked up the plateau, following +the banks of Lake Grant, but after a tramp of a mile, they could find +no outlet. + +It was now half-past 4, and dinner had yet to be prepared. The party +returned upon its track, and reached the Chimneys by the left bank of +the Mercy. Then the fire was lighted, and Neb and Pencroff, on whom +devolved the cooking, in their respective characters of negro and +sailor, skilfully broiled the agouti, to which the hungry explorers did +great honor. When the meal was over, and just as they were settling +themselves to sleep, Smith drew from his pocket little specimens of +various kinds of minerals, and said quietly, + +“My friends, this is iron ore, this pyrites, this clay, this limestone, +this charcoal. Nature gives us these as her part in the common task. +To-morrow we must do our share!” + + + + +CHAPTER XIII. + + +TOP’S CONTRIBUTION—MAKING BOWS AND ARROWS—A BRICK-KILN—A +POTTERY—DIFFERENT COOKING UTENSILS—THE FIRST BOILED MEAT—MUGWORT—THE +SOUTHERN CROSS—AN IMPORTANT ASTRONOMICAL OBSERVATION. + + +“Now then, Mr. Smith, where shall we begin?” asked Pencroff the next +morning. + +“At the beginning,” answered the engineer. + +And this, indeed, was necessary, as the colonists did not even possess +implements with which to make implements. Neither were they in that +condition of nature which “having time,” economizes effort; the +necessities of life must be provided for at once, and, if profiting by +experience they had nothing to invent, at least they had everything to +make. Their iron and steel was in the ore, their pottery was in the +clay, their linen and clothes were still to be provided. + +It must be remembered, however, that these colonists were _men_, in the +best sense of the word. The engineer Smith could not have been aided by +comrades more intelligent, or more devoted and zealous. He had +questioned them, and knew their ability. + +The reporter, having learned everything so as to be able to speak of +everything, would contribute largely from his knowledge and skill +towards the settlement of the island. He would not shirk work; and, a +thorough sportsman, he would follow as a business what he had formerly +indulged in as a pastime. Herbert, a manly lad, already well versed in +natural science, would contribute his share to the common cause. Neb +was devotion personified. Adroit, intelligent, indefatigable, robust, +of iron constitution, knowing something of the work in a smithy, his +assistance would be considerable. As to Pencroff, he had sailed every +sea, had been a carpenter in the Brooklyn yards, an assistant tailor on +board ship, and, during hie leaves of absence, a gardener, farmer, +etc.; in short, like every sailor, he was a Jack-of-all-trades. + +Indeed, it would have been hard to bring together five men, more able +to struggle against fate, and more certain to triumph in the end. + +“At the beginning,” Smith had said. And this beginning was the +construction of an apparatus which would serve to transform the natural +substances. Every one knows what an important part heat plays in these +transformations. Therefore, as wood and coal were already provided it +was only necessary to make an oven to utilize them. + +“What good is an oven,” asked Pencroff. + +“To make the pottery that we want,” replied Smith. + +“And how will we make an oven?” + +“With bricks.” + +“And how will we make the bricks?” + +“With the clay. Come, friends. We will set up our factory at the place +of production, so as to avoid carriage. Neb will bring the provisions, +and we shall not lack fire to cook food.” + +“No,” replied the reporter, “but suppose we lack food, since we have no +hunting implements?” + +“If we only had a knife!” cried the sailor, + +“What, then?” asked Smith. + +“Why, I would make a bow and arrows. And game would be plenty in the +larder.” + +“A knife. Something that will cut,” said the engineer, as if talking to +himself. + +Suddenly his face brightened: + +“Come here, Top,” he called. + +The dog bounded to his master, and Smith having taken off the collar +which the animal had around his neck, broke it into halves, saying:— + +“Here are two knives, Pencroff.” + +For all response, the sailor gave a couple of cheers. Top’s collar was +made from a thin piece of tempered steel. All that was therefore +necessary was to rub it to an edge upon a sand-stone, and then to +sharpen it upon one of finer grain. These kind of stones were readily +procurable upon the beach, and in a couple of hours the implements of +the colony consisted of two strong blades, which it was easy to fasten +into solid handles. The overcoming of this first difficulty was greeted +as a triumph and it was indeed a fortunate event. + +On setting out, it was the intention of the engineer to return to the +western bank of the lake, where he had noticed the clay, of which he +had secured a specimen. Following the bank of the Mercy they crossed +Prospect Plateau, and after a walk of about five miles, they arrived at +a glade some 200 paces distant from Lake Grant. + +On the way, Herbert had discovered a tree from which the South American +Indians make bows. It was the “crejimba,” of the palm family. From it +they cut long straight branches, which they peeled and shaped into +bows. For cords they took the fibres of the “hibiscus heterophyltus” +(Indian hemp), a malvaceous plant, the fibres of which are as strong as +the tendons of an animal. Pencroff, having thus provided bows, only +needed arrows. Those were easily made from straight, stiff branches, +free from knots, but it was not so easy to arm them with a substitute +for iron. But Pencroff said that he had accomplished this much, and +that chance would do the rest. + +The party had reached the place discovered the day before. The ground +was composed of that clay which is used in making bricks and tiles, and +was therefore just the thing for their purpose. The labor was not +difficult. It was only necessary to scour the clay with sand, mould the +bricks, and then bake them before a wood fire. + +Usually, bricks are pressed in moulds, but the engineer contented +himself with making these by hand. All this day and the next was +employed in this work. The clay, soaked in water, was kneaded by the +hands and feet of the manipulators, and then divided into blocks of +equal size. A skilled workman can make, without machinery, as many as +10,000 bricks in twelve hours; but in the two days the brickmakers of +Lincoln Island had made but 3,000, which were piled one upon the other +to await the time when they would be dry enough to bake, which would be +in three or four days. + +On the 2d of April, Smith occupied himself in determining the position +of the island. + +The day before he had noted the precise minute at which the sun had +set, allowing for the refraction. On this morning, he ascertained with +equal precision the time of its rising. The intervening time was twelve +hours and twenty-four minutes. Therefore six hours and twelve minutes +after rising the sun would pass the meridian, and the point in the sky +which it would occupy at that instant would be north. + +At the proper hour Smith marked this point, and by getting two trees in +line obtained a meridian for his future operations. + +During the two days preceding the baking they occupied themselves by +laying in a supply of firewood. Branches were cut from the edge of the +clearing, and all the dead wood under the trees was picked up. And now +and then they hunted in the neighborhood, the more successfully, as +Pencroff had some dozens of arrows with very sharp points. It was Top +who had provided these points by bringing in a porcupine, poor game +enough, but of an undeniable value, thanks to the quills with which it +bristled. These quills were firmly fastened to the ends of the arrows, +and their flight was guided by feathering them with the cockatoo’s +feathers. The reporter and Herbert soon became expert marksmen, and all +kinds of game, such as cabiais, pigeons, agoutis, heath-cock, etc., +abounded at the Chimneys. Most of these were killed in that part of the +forest upon the left bank of the Mercy, which they had called Jacamar +Wood, after the kingfisher which Pencroff and Herbert had pursued there +during their first exploration. + +The meat was eaten fresh, but they preserved the hams of the cabiai by +smoking them before a fire of green wood, having made them aromatic +with odorous leaves. Thus, they had nothing but roast after roast, and +they would have been glad to have heard a pot singing upon the hearth; +but first they must have the pot, and for this they must have the oven. + +During these excursions, the hunters noticed the recent tracks of large +animals, armed with strong claws, but they could not tell their +species; and Smith cautioned them to be prudent, as, doubtless, there +were dangerous beasts in the forest. + +He was right. For one day Spilett and Herbert saw an animal resembling +a jaguar. But, fortunately, the beast did not attack them, as they +could hardly have killed it without being themselves wounded. But, +Spilett promised, if he should ever obtain a proper weapon, such as one +of the guns Pencroff begged for, that he would wage relentless war on +all ferocious beasts and rid the island of their presence. + +They did not do anything to the Chimneys, as the engineer hoped to +discover, or to build, if need be, a more convenient habitation, but +contented themselves by spreading fresh quantities of moss and dry +leaves upon the sand in the corridors, and upon these primitive beds +the tired workmen slept soundly. They also reckoned the days already +passed on Lincoln Island, and began keeping a calendar. On the 5th of +April, which was a Wednesday, they had been twelve days upon the +island. + +On the morning of the 6th, the engineer with his companions met at the +place where the bricks were to be baked. Of course the operation was to +be conducted in the open air, and not in an oven, or, rather, the pile +of bricks would in itself form a bake-oven. Carefully-prepared faggots +were laid upon the ground, surrounding the tiers of dry bricks, which +formed a great cube, in which air-holes had been left. The work +occupied the whole day, and it was not until evening that they lit the +fire, which all night long they kept supplied with fuel. + +The work lasted forty-eight hours, and succeeded perfectly. Then, as it +was necessary to let the smoking mass cool, Neb and Pencroff, directed +by Mr. Smith, brought, on a hurdle made of branches, numerous loads of +limestone which they found scattered in abundance to the north of the +lake. These stones, decomposed by heat, furnished a thick quick-lime, +which increased in bulk by slacking, and was fully as pure as if it had +been produced by the calcimation of chalk or marble. Mixed with sand in +order to diminish its shrinkage while drying, this lime made an +excellent mortar. + +By the 9th of April the engineer had at his disposal a quantity of +lime, all prepared, and some thousands of bricks. They, therefore, +began at once the construction of an oven, in which to bake their +pottery. This was accomplished without much difficulty; and, five days +later, the oven was supplied with coal from the open vein, which the +engineer had discovered near the mouth of Red Creek, and the first +smoke escaped from a chimney twenty feet high. The glade was +transformed into a manufactory, and Pencroff was ready to believe that +all the products of modern industry would be produced from this oven. + +Meantime the colonists made a mixture of the clay with lime and quartz, +forming pipe-clay, from which they moulded pots and mugs, plates and +jars, tubs to hold water, and cooking vessels. Their form was rude and +defective, but after they had been baked at a high temperature, the +kitchen of the Chimneys found itself provided with utensils as precious +as if they were composed of the finest kaolin. + +We must add that Pencroff, desirous of knowing whether this material +deserved its name of pipe-clay, made some large pipes, which he would +have found perfect, but for the want of tobacco. And, indeed, this was +a great privation to the sailor. + +“But the tobacco will come like everything else,” he would say in his +hopeful moments. + +The work lasted until the 15th of April, and the time was well spent. +The colonists having become potters, made nothing but pottery. When it +would suit the engineer to make them smiths they would be smiths. But +as the morrow would be Sunday, and moreover Easter Sunday, all agreed +to observe the day by rest. These Americans were religious men, +scrupulous observers of the precepts of the Bible, and their situation +could only develop their trust in the Author of all things. + +On the evening of the 15th they returned permanently to the Chimneys, +bringing the rest of the pottery back with them, and putting out the +oven fire until there should be use for it again. This return was +marked by the fortunate discovery by the engineer of a substance that +would answer for tinder, which, we know, is the spongy, velvety pulp of +a mushroom of the polypore family. Properly prepared it is extremely +inflammable, especially when previously saturated with gunpowder, or +nitrate or chlorate of potash. But until then they had found no +polypores, nor any fungi that would answer instead. Now, the engineer, +having found a certain plant belonging to the mugwort family, to which +belong wormwood, mint, etc., broke off some tufts, and, handing them to +the sailor, said:— + +“Here, Pencroff, is something for you.” + +Pencroff examined the plant, with its long silky threads and leaves +covered with a cotton-like down. + +“What is it, Mr. Smith?” he asked. “Ah, I know! It’s tobacco!” + +“No,” answered Smith; “it is Artemesia wormwood, known to science as +Chinese mugwort, but to us it will be tinder.” + +This mugwort, properly dried, furnished a very inflammable substance, +especially after the engineer had impregnated it with nitrate of +potash, which is the same as saltpetre, a mineral very plenty on the +island. + +This evening the colonists, seated in the central chamber, supped with +comfort. Neb had prepared some agouti soup, a spiced ham, and the +boiled corms of the “caladium macrorhizum,” an herbaceous plant of the +arad family, which under the tropics takes a tree form. These corms, +which are very nutritious, had an excellent flavor, something like that +of Portland sago, and measurably supplied the place of bread, which the +colonists were still without. + +Supper finished, before going to sleep the party took a stroll upon the +beach. It was 8 o’clock, and the night was magnificent. The moon, which +had been full five days before, was about rising, and in the zenith, +shining resplendent above the circumpolar constellations, rode the +Southern Cross. For some moments the engineer gazed at it attentively. +At its summit and base were two stars of the first magnitude, and on +the left arm and the right, stars, respectively, of the second +magnitude and the third. Then, after some reflection, he said:— + +“Herbert, is not to-day the 15th of April?” + +“Yes, sir,” answered the lad. + +“Then, if I am not mistaken, to-morrow will be one of the four days in +the year when the mean and real time are the same; that is to say, my +boy, that to-morrow, within some seconds of noon by the clocks, the sun +will pass the meridian. If, therefore, the weather is clear, I think I +will be able to obtain the longitude of the island within a few +degrees.” + +“Without a sextant or instruments?” asked Spilett. + +“Yes,” replied the engineer. And since it is so clear, I will try +to-night to find our latitude by calculating the height of the Cross, +that is, of the Southern Pole, above the horizon. You see, my friends, +before settling down, it will not do to be content with determining +this land to be an island; we must find out its locality.” + +“Indeed, instead of building a house, it will be better to build a +ship, if we are within a hundred miles of an inhabited land.” + +“That is why I am now going to try to get the latitude of the place, +and to-morrow noon to calculate the longitude.” + +If the engineer had possessed a sextant, the work would have been easy, +as this evening, by taking the height of the pole, and to-morrow by the +sun’s passage of the meridian, he would have the co-ordinates of the +island. But, having no instruments he must devise something. So +returning to the Chimneys, he made, by the light of the fire, two +little flat sticks which he fastened together with a thorn, in a way +that they could be opened and shut like compasses, and returned with +them to the beach. But as the sea horizon was hidden from this point by +Claw Cape, the engineer determined to make his observation from +Prospect Plateau, leaving, until the next day, the computation of the +height of the latter, which could easily be done by elementary +geometry. + +The colonists, therefore, went to the edge of the plateau which faced +the southeast, overlooking the fantastic rocks bordering the shore. The +place rose some fifty feet above the right bank of the Mercy, which +descended, by a double slope, to the end of Claw Cape and to the +southern boundary of the island. Nothing obstructed the vision, which +extended over half the horizon from the Cape to Reptile Promontory. To +the south, this horizon, lit by the first rays of the moon, was sharply +defined against the sky. The Cross was at this time reversed, the star +Alpha being nearest the pole. This constellation is not situated as +near to the southern as the polar star is to the northern pole; Alpha +is about 27° from it, but Smith knew this and could calculate +accordingly. He took care also to observe it at the instant when it +passed the meridian under the pole, thus simplifying the operation. + +The engineer opened the arms of his compass so that one pointed to the +horizon and the other to the star, and thus obtained the angle of +distance which separated them. And in order to fix this distance +immovably, he fastened these arms, respectively, by means of thorns, to +a cross piece of wood. This done, it was only necessary to calculate +the angle obtained, bringing the observation to the level of the sea so +as to allow for the depression of the horizon caused by the height of +the plateau. The measurement of this angle would thus give the height +of Alpha, or the pole, above the horizon; or, since the latitude of a +point on the globe is always equal to the height of the pole above the +horizon at that point, the latitude of the island. + +This calculation was postponed until the next day, and by 10 o’clock +everybody slept profoundly. + + + + +CHAPTER XIV. + + +THE MEASURE OF THE GRANITE WALL—AN APPLICATION OF THE THEOREM OF +SIMILAR TRIANGLES—THE LATITUDE OF THE ISLAND—AN EXCURSION TO THE +NORTH—AN OYSTER-BED—PLANS FOR THE FUTURE—THE SUN’S PASSAGE OF THE +MERIDIAN—THE CO-ORDINATES OF LINCOLN ISLAND. + + +At daybreak the next day, Easter Sunday, the colonists left the +Chimneys and went to wash their linen and clean their clothing. The +engineer intended to make some soap as soon as he could obtain some +soda or potash and grease or oil. The important question of renewing +their wardrobes would be considered in due time. At present they were +strong, and able to stand hard wear for at least six months longer. But +everything depended on the situation of the island as regarded +inhabited countries, and that would be determined this day, providing +the weather permitted. + +The sun rising above the horizon, ushered in one of those glorious days +which seem like the farewell of summer. The first thing to be done was +to measure the height of Prospect Plateau above the sea. + +“Do you not need another pair of compasses?” asked Herbert, of the +engineer. + +“No, my boy,” responded the latter, “this time we will try another and +nearly as precise a method.” + +Pencroff, Neb, and the reporter were busy at other things; but Herbert, +who desired to learn, followed the engineer, who proceeded along the +beach to the base of the granite wall. + +Smith was provided with a pole twelve feet long, carefully measured off +from his own height, which he knew to a hair. Herbert carried a +plumb-line made from a flexible fibre tied to a stone. Having reached a +point 20 feet from the shore and 500 feet from the perpendicular +granite wall, Smith sunk the pole two feet in the sand, and, steadying +it carefully, proceeded to make it plumb with the horizon. Then, moving +back to a spot where, stretched upon the sand, he could sight over the +top of the pole to the edge of the cliff, bringing the two points in +line, he carefully marked this place with a stone. Then addressing +Herbert, + +“Do you know the first principles of geometry?” said he. + +“Slightly, sir,” answered Herbert, not wishing to seem forward. + +“Then you remember the relation of similar triangles?” + +“Yes, sir,” answered Herbert. “Their like sides are proportional.” + +“Right, my boy. And I have just constructed two similar right angled +triangles:—the smaller has for its sides the perpendicular pole and the +distances from its base and top to the stake; the second has the wall +which we are about to measure, and the distances from its base and +summit to the stake, which are only the prolongation of the base and +hypothenuse of the first triangle. + +“I understand,” cried Herbert. “As the distance from the stake to the +pole is proportional to the distance from the stake to the base of the +wall, so the height of the wall is proportional to the height of the +rod.” + +“Exactly,” replied the engineer, “and after measuring the first two +distances, as we know the height of the pole, we have only to calculate +the proportion in order to find the height of the wall.” + +The measurements were made with the pole and resulted in determining +the distances from the stake to the foot of the pole and the base of +the wall to be 15 and 500 feet respectively. The engineer and Herbert +then returned to the Chimneys, where the former, using a flat stone and +a bit of shell to figure with, determined the height of the wall to be +333.33 feet. + +Then taking the compasses, and carefully measuring the angle which he +had obtained the night before, upon a circle which he had divided into +360 parts, the engineer found that this angle, allowing for the +differences already explained, was 53°. Which, subtracted from 90°—the +distance of the pole from the equator—gave 37° as the latitude of +Lincoln Island. And making an allowance of 5° for the imperfections of +the observations, Smith, concluded it to be situated between the 35th +and the 40th parallel of south latitude. + +But, in order to establish the co-ordinates of the island, the +longitude also must be taken. And this the engineer determined to do +when the sun passed the meridian at noon. + +They therefore resolved to spend the morning in a walk, or rather an +exploration of that part of the island situated to the north of Shark +Gulf and the lake; and, if they should have time, to push on as far as +the western side of South Mandible Cape. They would dine on the downs +and not return until evening. + +At half-past 8 the little party set out, following the edge of the +channel. Opposite, upon Safety Islet, a number of birds of the +sphemiscus family strutted gravely about. There were divers, easily +recognizable, by their disagreeable cry, which resembled the braying of +an ass. Pencroff, regarding them with gastronomic intent, was pleased +to learn that their flesh, though dark colored, was good to eat. They +could also see amphibious animals, which probably were seals, crawling +over the sand. It was not possible to think of these as food, as their +oily flesh is detestable; nevertheless Smith observed them carefully, +and without disclosing his plans to the others, he announced that they +would very soon, make a visit to the island. The shore followed by the +colonists was strewn with mollusks, which would have delighted a +malacologist. But, what was more important, Neb discovered, about four +miles from the Chimneys, among the rocks, a bed of oysters, left bare +by the tide. + +“Neb hasn’t lost his day,” said Pencroff, who saw that the bed extended +some distance. + +“It is, indeed, a happy discovery,” remarked the reporter. “And when we +remember that each oyster produces fifty or sixty thousand eggs a year, +the supply is evidently inexhaustable.” + +“But I don’t think the oyster is very nourishing,” said Herbert. + +“No,” answered Smith. “Oysters contain very little azote, and it would +be necessary for a man living on them alone to eat at least fifteen or +sixteen dozen every day.” + +“Well,” said Pencroff, “we could swallow dozens and dozens of these and +not exhaust the bed. Shall we have some for breakfast?” + +And, without waiting for an answer, which he well knew would be +affirmative, the sailor and Neb detached a quantity of these mollusks +from the rocks, and placed them with the other provisions for +breakfast, in a basket which Neb had made from the hibiscus fibres. +Then they continued along the shore between the downs and the sea. + +From time to time Smith looked at his watch, so as to be ready for the +noon observation. + +All this portion of the island, as far as South Mandible Cape, was +desert, composed of nothing but sand and shells, mixed with the debris +of lava. A few sea birds, such as the sea-gulls and albatross, +frequented the shore, and some wild ducks excited the covetousness of +Pencroff. He tried to shoot some, but unsuccessfully, as they seldom +lit, and he could not hit them flying. + +This made the sailor say to the engineer:— + +“You see, Mr. Smith, how much we need guns!” + +“Doubtless, Pencroff,” answered the reporter, “but it rests with you. +You find iron for the barrels, steel for the locks, saltpetre, charcoal +and sulphur for the powder, mercury and nitric acid for the fulminate, +and last of all, lead for the balls, and Mr. Smith will make us guns of +the best quality. + +“Oh, we could probably find all these substances on the island,” said +the engineer. “But it requires fine tools to make such a delicate +instrument as a firearm. However, we will see after awhile.” + +“Why, why did we throw the arms and everything else, even our +penknives, out of the balloon?” cried Pencroff. + +“If we hadn’t, the balloon would have thrown us into the sea,” answered +Herbert. + +“So it would, my boy,” answered the sailor; and then another idea +occurring to him:— + +“I wonder what Mr. Forster and his friend thought,” he said, “the next +day, when they found they balloon had escaped?” + +“I don’t care what they thought,” said the reporter. + +“It was my plan,” cried Pencroff, with a satisfied air. + +“And a good plan it was, Pencroff,” interrupted the reporter, laughing, +“to drop us here!” + +“I had rather be here than in the hands of the Southerners!” exclaimed +the sailor, “especially since Mr. Smith has been kind enough to rejoin +us!” + +“And I, too,” cried the reporter. “After all, what do we lack here? +Nothing.” + +“That means—everything,” answered the sailor, laughing and shrugging +his shoulders. “But some day we will get away from this place.” + +“Sooner, perhaps, than you think, my friends,” said the engineer, “if +Lincoln Island is not very far from an inhabited archipelego or a +continent. And we will find that out within an hour. I have no map of +the Pacific, but I have a distinct recollection of its southern +portion. Yesterday’s observation places the island in the latitude of +New Zealand and Chili. But the distance between these two countries is +at least 6,000 miles. We must therefore determine what point in this +space the island occupies, and that I hope to get pretty soon from the +longitude. + +“Is not the Low Archipelago nearest us in latitude,” asked Herbert. + +“Yes,” replied the engineer, “but it is more than 1,200 miles distant.” + +“And that way?” inquired Neb, who followed the conversation with great +interest, pointing towards the south. + +“Nothing!” answered Pencroff. + +“Nothing, indeed,” added the engineer. + +“Well, Cyrus,” demanded the reporter, “if we find Lincoln Island to be +only 200 or 300 miles from New Zealand or Chili?” + +“We will build a ship instead of a house, and Pencroff shall command +it.” + +“All right, Mr. Smith,” cried the sailor; “I am all ready to be +captain, provided you build something seaworthy.” + +“We will, if it is necessary,” answered Smith. + +While these men, whom nothing could discourage, were talking, the hour +for taking the observation approached. Herbert could not imagine how +Mr. Smith would be able to ascertain the time of the sun’s passage of +the meridian of the island without a single instrument. It was 11 +o’clock, and the party, halting about six miles from the Chimneys, not +far from the place where they had found the engineer after his +inexplicable escape, set about preparing breakfast. Herbert found fresh +water in a neighboring brook, and brought some back in a vessel which +Neb had with him. + +Meantime, the engineer made ready for his astronomical observation. He +chose a smooth dry place upon the sand, which the sea had left +perfectly level. It was no more necessary, however, for it to be +horizontal, than for the rod which he stuck in the sand to be +perpendicular. Indeed, the engineer inclined the rod towards the south +or away from the sun, as it must not be forgotten that the colonists of +Lincoln Island, being in the Southern Hemisphere, saw the orb of day +describe his diurnal arc above the northern horizon. + +Then Herbert understood how by means of the shadow of the rod on the +sand, the engineer would be able to ascertain the culmination of the +sun, that is to say, its passage of the meridian of the island, or, in +other words, the _time_ of the place. For the moment that the shadow +obtained its minimum length it would be noon, and all they had to do +was to watch carefully the end of the shadow. By inclining the rod from +the sun Smith had made the shadow longer, and therefore its changes +could be the more readily noted. + +When he thought it was time, the engineer knelt down upon the sand and +began marking the decrease in the length of the shadow by means of +little wooden pegs. His companions, bending over him, watched the +operation with the utmost interest. + +The reporter, chronometer in hand, stood ready to mark the minute when +the shadow would be shortest. Now, as this 16th of April was a day when +the true and mean time are the same, Spilett’s watch would give the +true time of Washington, and greatly simplify the calculation. + +Meantime the shadow diminished little by little, and as soon as Smith +perceived it begin to lengthen he exclaimed:— + +“Now!” + +“One minute past 5,” answered the reporter. + +Nothing then remained but the easy work of summing up the result. There +was, as we have seen, five hours difference between the meridian of +Washington and that of the island. Now, the sun passes around the earth +at the rate of 15° an hour. Fifteen multiplied by five gives +seventy-five. And as Washington is in 77° 3’ 11” from the meridian of +Greenwich, it follows that the island was in the neighborhood of +longitude 152° west. + +Smith announced this result to his companions, and, making the same +allowance as before, he was able to affirm that the bearing of the +island was between the 35° and 37° of south latitude, and between the +150° and 155° of west longitude. + +The difference in this calculation, attributable to errors in +observation, was placed, as we have seen, at 5° or 300 miles in each +direction. But this error did not influence the conclusion that Lincoln +Island was so far from any continent or archipelago that they could not +attempt to accomplish the distance in a small boat. + +In fact, according to the engineer, they were at least 1,200 miles from +Tahiti and from the Low Archipelago, fully 1,800 miles from New +Zealand, and more than 4,500 miles from the coast of America. + +And when Cyrus Smith searched his memory, he could not remember any +island in the Pacific occupying the position of Lincoln Island. + + + + +CHAPTER XV. + + +WINTER SETS IN—THE METALLUGRIC QUESTION—THE EXPLORATION OF SAFETY +ISLAND—A SEAL HUNT—CAPTURE OF AN ECHIDNA—THE AI—THE CATALONIAN +METHOD—MAKING IRON AND STEEL. + + +The first words of the sailor, on the morning of the 17th of April, +were:— + +“Well, what are we going to do to-day?” + +“Whatever Mr. Smith chooses,” answered the reporter. + +The companions of the engineer, having been brickmakers and potters, +were about to become metal-workers. + +The previous day, after lunch, the party had explored as far as the +extremity of Mandible Cape, some seven miles from the Chimneys. The +extensive downs here came to an end and the soil appeared volcanic. +There were no longer high walls, as at Prospect Plateau, but the narrow +gulf between the two capes was enframed by a fantastic border of the +mineral matter discharged from the volcano. Having reached this point, +the colonists retraced their steps to the Chimneys, but they could not +sleep until the question whether they should look forwards to leaving +Lincoln Island had been definitely settled. + +The 1,200 miles to the Low Archipelago was a long distance. And now, at +the beginning of the stormy season, a small boat would certainly not be +able to accomplish it. The building of a boat, even when the proper +tools are provided, is a difficult task, and as the colonists had none +of these, the first thing to do was to make hammers, hatchets, adzes, +saws, augers, planes, etc., which would take some time. It was +therefore decided to winter on Lincoln Island, and to search for a more +comfortable dwelling than the Chimneys in which to live during the +inclement weather. + +The first thing was to utilize the iron ore which the engineer had +discovered, by transforming it into iron and steel. + +Iron ore is usually found in combination with oxygen or sulphur. And it +was so in this instance, as of the two specimens brought back by Cyrus +Smith one was magnetic iron, and the other pyrites or sulphuret of +iron. Of these, it was the first kind, the magnetic ore, or oxide of +iron, which must be reduced by coal, that is to say, freed from the +oxygen, in order to obtain the pure metal. This reduction is performed +by submitting the ore to a great heat, either by the Catalonian method, +which has the advantage of producing the metal at one operation, or by +means of blast furnaces which first smelt the ore, and then the iron, +carrying off the 3 or 4 per cent of coal combined with it. + +The engineer wanted to obtain iron in the shortest way possible. The +ore he had found was in itself very pure and rich. Such ore is found in +rich grey masses, yielding a black dust crystallized in regular +octahedrons, highly magnetic, and in Europe the best quality of iron is +made from it. Not far from this vein was the coal field previously +explored by the colonists, so that every facility existed for the +treatment of the ore. + +“Then, sir, are we going to work the iron?” questioned Pencroff. “Yes, +my friend,” answered the engineer. + +“But first we will do something I think you will enjoy—have a seal hunt +on the island.” + +“A seal hunt!” cried the sailor, addressing Spilett “Do we need seals +to make iron?” + +“It seems so, since Cyrus has said it,” replied the reporter. + +But as the engineer had already left the Chimneys, Pencroff prepared +for the chase without gaining an explanation. + +Soon the whole party were gathered upon the beach at a point where the +channel could be forded at low water without wading deeper than the +knees. This was Smith’s first visit to the islet upon which his +companions had been thrown by the balloon. On their landing, hundreds +of penguins looked fearlessly at them, and the colonists armed with +clubs could have killed numbers of these birds, but it would have been +useless slaughter, and it would not do to frighten the seals which were +lying on the sand some cable lengths away. They respected also certain +innocent-looking sphemiscus, with flattened side appendages, mere +apologies for wings, and covered with scale-like vestiges of feathers. + +The colonists marched stealthily forward over ground riddled with holes +which formed the nests of aquatic birds. Towards the end of the island, +black objects, like moving rocks, appeared above the surface of the +water, they were the seals the hunters wished to capture. + +It was necessary to allow them to land, as, owing to their shape, these +animals, although capital swimmers and difficult to seize in the sea, +can move but slowly on the shore. Pencroff, who knew their habits, +counselled waiting until the seals were sunning themselves asleep on +the sand. Then the party could manage so as to cut off their retreat +and despatch them with a blow on the muzzle. The hunters therefore hid +themselves behind the rocks and waited quietly. + +In about an hour half a dozen seals crawled on to the sand, and +Pencroff and Herbert went off round the point of the island so as to +cut off their retreat, while the three others, hidden by the rocks, +crept forward to the place of encounter. + +Suddenly the tall form of the sailor was seen. He gave a shout, and the +engineer and his companions hurriedly threw themselves between the +seals and the sea. They succeeded in beating two of the animals to +death, but the others escaped. + +“Here are your seals, Mr. Smith,” cried the sailor, coming forward. + +“And now we will make bellows,” replied the engineer. + +“Bellows!” exclaimed the sailor. “These seals are in luck.” + +It was, in effect, a huge pair of bellows, necessary in the reduction +of the ore, which the engineer expected to make from the skins of the +seals. They were medium-sized, about six feet long, and had heads +resembling those of dogs. As it was useless to burden themselves with +the whole carcass, Neb and Pencroff resolved to skin them on the spot, +while Smith and the reporter made the exploration of the island. + +The sailor and the negro acquitted themselves well, and three hours +later Smith had at his disposal two seal skins, which he intended to +use just as they were, without tanning. + +The colonists, waiting until low water, re-crossed the channel and +returned to the Chimneys. + +It was no easy matter to stretch the skins upon the wooden frames and +to sew them so as to make them sufficiently air-tight. Smith had +nothing but the two knives to work with, yet he was so ingenious and +his companions aided him so intelligently, that, three days later, the +number of implements of the little colony was increased by a bellows +intended to inject air into the midst of the ore during its treatment +by heat—a requisite to the success of the operation. + +It was on the morning of the 20th of April that what the reporter +called in his notes the “iron age” began. The engineer had decided to +work near the deposits of coal and iron, which were situated at the +base of the northeasterly spurs of Mount Franklin, six miles from the +Chimneys. And as it would not be possible to go back and forth each +day, it was decided to camp upon the ground in a temporary hut, so that +they could attend to the important work night and day. + +This settled, they left in the morning, Neb and Pencroff carrying the +bellows and a stock of provisions, which latter they would add to on +the way. + +The road led through the thickest part of Jacamar Wood, in a +northwesterly direction. It was as well to break a path which would +henceforth be the most direct route between Prospect Plateau and Mount +Franklin. The trees belonging to the species already recognized were +magnificent, and Herbert discovered another, the dragon tree, which +Pencroff designated as an “overgrown onion,” which, notwithstanding its +height, belongs to the same family of liliaceous plants as the onion, +the civet, the shallot, or the asparagus. These dragon trees have +ligneous roots which, cooked, are excellent, and which, fermented, +yield a very agreeable liquor. They therefore gathered some. + +It took the entire day to traverse the wood, but the party were thus +able to observe its fauna and flora. Top, specially charged to look +after the fauna, ran about in the grass and bushes, flushing all kinds +of game. Herbert and Spilett shot two kangaroos and an animal which was +like a hedge-hog, in that it rolled itself into a ball and erected its +quills, and like an ant-eater, in that it was provided with claws for +digging, a long and thin snout terminating in a beak, and an extensile +tongue furnished with little points, which enabled it to hold insects. + +“And what does it look like boiling in the pot?” asked Pencroff, +naturally. + +“Like an excellent piece of beef,” answered Herbert. + +“We don’t want to know any more than that,” said the sailor. + +During the march they saw some wild boars, but they did not attempt to +attack the little troupe, and it seemed that they were not going to +have any encounter with savage beasts, when the reporter saw in a dense +thicket, among the lower branches of a tree, an animal which he took to +be a bear, and which he began tranquilly to sketch. Fortunately for +Spilett, the animal in question did not belong to that redoubtable +family of plantigrades. It was an ai, better known as a sloth, which +has a body like that of a large dog, a rough and dirty-colored skin, +the feet armed with strong claws which enable it to grasp the branches +of trees and feed upon the leaves. Having identified the animal without +disturbing it, Spilett struck out “bear” and wrote “ai” under his +drawing and the route was resumed. + +At 5 o’clock Smith called a halt. They were past the forest and at the +beginning of the massive spurs which buttressed Mount Franklin towards +the east. A few hundred paces distant was Red Creek; so drinking water +was not wanting. + +The camp was made. In less than an hour a hut, constructed from the +branches of the tropical bindweed, and stopped with loam, was erected +under the trees on the edge of the forest. They deferred the geological +work until the next day. Supper was prepared, a good fire blazed before +the hut, the spit turned, and at 8 o’clock, while one of the party kept +the fire going, in case some dangerous beast should prowl around, the +others slept soundly. + +The next morning, Smith, accompanied by Herbert, went to look for the +place where they had found the specimen of ore. They found the deposit +on the surface, near the sources of the creek, close to the base of one +of the northeast buttresses. This mineral, very rich in iron, enclosed +in its fusible vein-stone, was perfectly suited to the method of +reduction which the engineer intended to employ, which was the +simplified Catalonian process practised in Corsica. + +This method properly required the construction of ovens and crucibles +in which the ore and the coal, placed in alternate layers, were +transformed and reduced. But Smith proposed to simplify matters by +simply making a huge cube of coal and ore, into the centre of which the +air from the bellows would be introduced. This was, probably, what +Tubal Cain did. And a process which gave such good results to Adam’s +grandson would doubtless succeed with the colonists of Lincoln Island. + +The coal was collected with the same facility as the ore, and the +latter was broken into little pieces and the impurities picked from it. +Then the coal and ore were heaped together in successive layers—just as +a charcoal-burner arranges his wood. Thus arranged, under the influence +of the air from the bellows, the coal would change into carbonic acid, +then into oxide of carbon, which would release the oxygen from the +oxide of iron. + +The engineer proceeded in this manner. The sealskin bellows, furnished +with a pipe of refractory earth (an earth difficult of fusion), which +had previously been prepared at the pottery, was set up close to the +heap of ore. And, moved by a mechanism consisting of a frame, +fibre-cords, and balance-weight, it injected into the mass a supply of +air, which, by raising the temperature, assisted the chemical +transformation which would give the pure metal. + +The operation was difficult. It took all the patience and ingenuity of +the colonists to conduct it properly; but finally it succeeded, and the +result was a pig of iron in a spongy state, which must be cut and +forged in order to expel the liquified gangue. It was evident that +these self-constituted smiths wanted a hammer, but they were no worse +off than the first metallurgist, and they did as he must have done. + +The first pig, fastened to a wooden handle, served as a hammer with +which to forge the second upon an anvil of granite, and they thus +obtained a coarse metal, but one which could be utilized. + +At length, after much trouble and labor, on the 25th of April, many +bars of iron had been forged and turned into crowbars, pincers, +pickaxes, mattocks, etc., which Pencroff and Neb declared to be real +jewels. + +But in order to be in its most serviceable state, iron must be turned +into steel. Now steel, which is a combination of iron and carbon, is +made in two ways: first from cast iron, by decarburetting the molten +metal, which gives natural or puddled steel; and, second, by the method +of cementation, which consists in carburetting malleable iron. As the +engineer had iron in a pure state, he chose the latter method, and +heated the metal with powdered charcoal in a crucible made from +refractory earth. + +This steel, which was malleable hot and cold, he worked with the +hammer. And Neb and Pencroff, skillfully directed, made axe-heads, +which, heated red-hot and quickly plunged in cold water, took an +excellent temper. + +Other instruments, such as planes and hatchets, were rudely fashioned, +and bands of steel were made into saws and chisels; and from the iron, +mattocks, shovels, pickaxes, hammers, nails, etc., were manufactured. + +By the 5th of May the first metallurgic period was ended, the smiths +returned to the Chimneys, and new work would soon authorize their +assumption of a new title. + + + + +CHAPTER XVI. + + +THE QUESTION OF A DWELLING DISCUSSED AGAIN—PENCROFF’S IDEAS—AN +EXPLORATION TO THE NORTH OF THE LAKE—THE WESTERN BOUNDARY OF THE +PLATEAU—THE SERPENTS—THE OUTLET OF THE LAKE—TOP’S ALARM—TOP SWIMMING—A +FIGHT UNDER WATER—THE DUGONG. + + +It was the 6th of May, corresponding to the 6th of November in the +Northern Hemisphere. For some days the sky had been cloudy, and it was +important to make provision against winter. However, the temperature +had not lessened much, and a centigrade thermometer transported to +Lincoln Island would have averaged 10° or 12° above zero. This would +not be surprising, since Lincoln Island, from its probable situation in +the Southern Hemisphere, was subject to the same climatic influences as +Greece or Sicily in the Northern. But just as the intense cold in +Greece and Sicily sometimes produces snow and ice, so, in the height of +winter, this island would probably experience sudden changes in the +temperature against which it would be well to provide. + +At any rate, if the cold was not threatening, the rainy season was at +hand, and upon this desolate island, in the wide Pacific, exposed to +all the inclemency of the elements, the storms would be frequent, and, +probably, terrible. + +The question of a more comfortable habitation than the Chimneys ought, +therefore, to be seriously considered, and promptly acted upon. + +Pencroff having discovered the Chimneys, naturally had a predilection +for them; but he understood very well that another place must be found. +This refuge had already been visited by the sea, and it would not do to +expose themselves to a like accident. + +“Moreover,” added Smith, who was discussing these things with his +companions, “there are some precautions to take.” + +“Why? The island is not inhabited,” said the reporter. + +“Probably not,” answered the engineer, “although we have not yet +explored the whole of it; but if there are no human beings, I believe +dangerous beasts are numerous. So it will be better to provide a +shelter against a possible attack, than for one of us to be tending the +fire every night. And then, my friends, we must foresee everything. We +are here in a part of the Pacific often frequented by Malay pirates—” + +“What, at this distance from land?” exclaimed Herbert. + +“Yes, my boy, these pirates are hardy sailors as well as formidable +villains, and we must provide for them accordingly.” + +“Well,” said Pencroff, “we will fortify ourselves against two and +four-footed savages. But, sir, wouldn’t it be as well to explore the +island thoroughly before doing anything else?” + +“It would be better,” added Spilett; “who knows but we may find on the +opposite coast one or more of those caves which we have looked for here +in vain.” + +“Very true,” answered the engineer, “but you forget, my friends, that +we must be somewhere near running water, and that from Mount Franklin +we were unable to see either brook or river in that direction. Here, on +the contrary, we are between the Mercy and Lake Grant, which is an +advantage not to be neglected. And, moreover, as this coast faces the +east, it is not as exposed to the trade winds, which blow from the +northwest in this hemisphere.” + +“Well, then, Mr. Smith,” replied the sailor, “let us build a house on +the edge of the lake. We are no longer without bricks and tools. After +having been brickmakers, potters, founders, and smiths, we ought to be +masons easily enough.” + +“Yes, my friend; but before deciding it will be well to look about. A +habitation all ready made would save us a great deal of work, and +would, doubtless, offer a surer retreat, in which we would be safe from +enemies, native as well as foreign?” + +“But, Cyrus,” answered the reporter, “have we not already examined the +whole of this great granite wall without finding even a hole?” + +“No, not one!” added Pencroff. “If we could only dig a place in it high +out of reach, that would be the thing! I can see it now, on the part +overlooking the sea, five or six chambers—” + +“With windows!” said Herbert, laughing. + +“And a staircase!” added Neb. + +“Why do you laugh?” cried the sailor. “Haven’t we picks and mattocks? +Cannot Mr. Smith make powder to blow up the mine. You will be able, +won’t you, sir, to make powder when we want it?” + +The engineer had listened to the enthusiastic sailor developing these +imaginative projects. To attack this mass of granite, even by mining, +was an Herculean task, and it was truly vexing that nature had not +helped them in their necessity. But he answered Pencroff, by simply +proposing to examine the wall more attentively, from the mouth of the +river to the angle which ended it to the north. They therefore went out +and examined it most carefully for about two miles. But everywhere it +rose, uniform and upright, without any visible cavity. The rock-pigeons +flying about its summit had their nests in holes drilled in the very +crest, or upon the irregularly cut edge of the granite. + +To attempt to make a sufficient excavation in such a massive wall even +with pickaxe and powder was not to be thought of. It was vexatious +enough. By chance, Pencroff had discovered in the Chimneys, which must +now be abandoned, the only temporary, habitable shelter on this part of +the coast. + +When the survey was ended the colonists found themselves at the +northern angle of the wall, where it sunk by long declivities to the +shore. From this point to its western extremity it was nothing more +than a sort of talus composed of stones, earth, and sand bound together +by plants, shrubs, and grass, in a slope of about 45°. Here and there +the granite thrust its sharp points out from the cliff. Groups of trees +grew over these slopes and there was a thin carpet of grass. But the +vegetation extended but a short distance, and then the long stretch of +sand, beginning at the foot of the talus, merged into the beach. + +Smith naturally thought that the over flow of the lake fell in this +direction, as the excess of water from Red Creek must be discharged +somewhere, and this point had not been found less on the side already +explored, that is to say from the mouth of the creek westward as far as +Prospect Plateau. + +The engineer proposed to his companions that they clamber up the talus +and return to the Chimneys by the heights, exploring the eastern and +western shores of the lake. The proposition was accepted, and, in a few +minutes, Herbert and Neb had climbed to the plateau, the others +following more leisurely. + +Two hundred feet distant the beautiful sheet of water shone through the +leaves in the sunlight. The landscape was charming. The trees in autumn +tints, were harmoniously grouped. Some huge old weatherbeaten trunks +stood out in sharp relief against the green turf which covered the +ground, and brilliant cockatoos, like moving, prisms, glanced among the +branches, uttering their shrill screams. + +The colonists, instead of proceeding directly to the north bank of the +lake, bore along the edge of the plateau, so as to come back to the +mouth of the creek, on its left bank. It was a circuit of about a mile +and a half. The walk was easy, as the trees, set wide apart, left free +passage between them. They could see that the fertile zone stopped at +this point, and that the vegetation here, was less vigorous than +anywhere between the creek and the Mercy. + +Smith and his companions moved cautiously over this unexplored +neighborhood. Bows and arrows and iron-pointed sticks were their sole +weapons. But no beast showed itself, and it was probable that the +animals kept to the thicker forests in the south. The colonists, +however, experienced a disagreeable sensation in seeing Top stop before +a huge serpent 14 or 15 feet long. Neb killed it at a blow. Smith +examined the reptile, and pronounced it to belong to the species of +diamond-serpents eaten by the natives of New South Wales and not +venomous, but it was possible others existed whose bite was mortal, +such as the forked-tail deaf viper, which rise up under the foot, or +the winged serpents, furnished with two ear-like appendages, which +enable them to shoot forward with extreme rapidity. Top having gotten +over his surprise, pursued these reptiles with reckless fierceness, and +his master was constantly obliged to call him in. + +The mouth of Red Creek, where it emptied into the lake, was soon +reached. The party recognized on the opposite bank the point visited on +their descent from Mount Franklin. Smith ascertained that the supply of +water from the creek was considerable; there therefore must be an +outlet for the overflow somewhere. It was this place which must be +found, as, doubtless, it made a fall which could be utilized as a +motive power. + +The colonists, strolling along, without, however, straying too far from +each other, began to follow round the bank of the lake, which was very +abrupt. The water was full of fishes, and Pencroff promised himself +soon to manufacture some apparatus with which to capture them. + +It was necessary first to double the point at the northeast. They had +thought that the discharge would be here, as the water flowed close to +the edge of the plateau. But as it was not here, the colonists +continued along the bank, which, after a slight curve, followed +parallel with the sea-shore. + +On this side the bank was less wooded, but clumps of trees, here and +there, made a picturesque landscape. The whole extent of the lake, +unmoved by a single ripple, was visible before, them. Top, beating the +bush, flushed many coveys of birds, which Spilett and Herbert saluted +with their arrows. One of these birds, cleverly hit by the lad, dropped +in the rushes. Top rushing after it, brought back a beautiful +slate-colored water fowl. It was a coot, as large as a big partridge, +belonging to the group of machio-dactyls, which form the division +between the waders and the palmipedes. Poor game and bad tasting, but +as Top was not as difficult to please as his masters, it was agreed +that the bird would answer for his supper. + +Then the colonists, following the southern bank of the lake, soon came +to the place they had previously visited. The engineer was very much +surprised, as he had seen no indication of an outlet to the surplus +water. In talking with the reporter and the sailor, he did not conceal +his astonishment. + +At this moment, Top, who had been behaving himself quietly, showed +signs of alarm. The intelligent animal, running along the bank, +suddenly stopped, with one foot raised, and looked into the water as if +pointing some invisible game. Then he barked furiously, questioning it, +as it were, and again was suddenly silent. + +At first neither Smith nor his companions paid any attention to the +dog’s actions, but his barking became so incessant, that the engineer +noticed it. + +“What is it, Top?” he called. + +The dog bounded towards his master, and, showing a real anxiety, rushed +back to the bank. Then, suddenly, he threw himself into the lake. + +“Come back here, Top,” cried the engineer, not wishing his dog to +venture in those supicious waters. + +“What’s going on under there?” asked the sailor examining the surface +of the lake. + +“Top has smelt something amphibious,” answered Herbert. + +“It must be an alligator,” said the reporter. + +“I don’t think so,” answered Smith. “Alligators are not met with in +this latitude.” + +Meantime, Top came ashore at the call of his master, but he could not +be quiet; he rushed along the bank, through the tall grass, and, guided +by instinct, seemed to be following some object, invisible under the +water, which was hugging the shore. Nevertheless the surface was calm +and undisturbed by a ripple. Often the colonists stood still on the +bank and watched the water, but they could discover nothing. There +certainly was some mystery here, and the engineer was much perplexed. + +“We will follow out this exploration,” he said. + +In half an hour all had arrived at the southeast angle of the lake, and +were again upon Prospect Plateau. They had made the circle of the bank +without the engineer having discovered either where or how the surplus +water was discharged. + +“Nevertheless, this outlet exists,” he repeated, “and, since it is not +outside, it must penetrate the massive granite of the coast!” + +“And why do you want to find that out?” asked Spilett. + +“Because,” answered the engineer, “if the outlet is through the solid +rock it is possible that there is some cavity, which could be easily +rendered habitable, after having turned the water in another +direction.” + +“But may not the water flow into the sea, through a subterranean outlet +at the bottom of the lake?” asked Herbert. + +“Perhaps so,” answered Smith, “and in that case, since Nature has not +aided us, we must build our house ourselves.” + +As it was 5 o’clock, the colonists were thinking of returning to the +Chimneys across the plateau, when Top again became excited, and, +barking with rage, before his master could hold him, he sprang a second +time into the lake. Every one ran to the bank. The dog was already +twenty feet off, and Smith called to him to come back, when suddenly an +enormous head emerged from the water. + +Herbert instantly recognized it, the comical face, with huge eyes and +long silky moustaches. + +“A manatee,” he cried. + +Although not a manatee, it was a dugong, which belongs to the same +species. + +The huge monster threw himself upon the dog. His master could do +nothing to save him, and, before Spilett or Herbert could draw their +bows, Top, seized by the dugong, had disappeared under the water. + +Neb, spear in hand, would have sprung to the rescue of the dog, and +attacked the formidable monster in its own element, had he not been +held back by his master. + +Meanwhile a struggle was going on under the water—a struggle which, +owing to the powerlessness of the dog, was inexplicable; a struggle +which, they could see by the agitation of the surface, was becoming +more terrible each moment; in short, a struggle which could only be +terminated by the death of the dog. But suddenly, through the midst of +a circle of foam, Top appeared, shot upward by some unknown force, +rising ten feet in the air, and falling again into the tumultuous +waters, from which he escaped to shore without any serious wounds, +miraculously saved. + +Cyrus Smith and his companions looked on amazed. Still more +inexplicable, it seemed as if the struggle under water continued. +Doubtless the dugong, after having seized the dog, had been attacked by +some more formidable animal, and had been obliged to defend itself. + +But this did not last much longer. The water grew red with blood, and +the body of the dugong, emerging from the waves, floated on to a little +shoal at the southern angle of the lake. + +The colonists ran to where the animal lay, and found it dead. Its body +was enormous, measuring between 15 and 16 feet long and weighing +between 3,000 and 4,000 pounds. On its neck, yawned a wound, which +seemed to have been made by some sharp instrument. + +What was it that had been able, by this terrible cut, to kill the +formidable dugong? None of them could imagine, and, preoccupied with +these incidents, they returned to the Chimneys. + + + + +CHAPTER XVII + + +A VISIT TO THE LAKE—THE DIRECTION OF THE CURRENT—THE PROSPECTS OF CYRUS +SMITH—THE DUGONG FAT—THE USE OF THE SCHISTOUS LIMESTONE—THE SULPHATE OF +IRON—HOW GLYCERINE IS MADE—SOAP—SALTPETRE—SULPHURIC ACID—NITRIC +ACID—THE NEW OUTLET. + + +The next day, the 7th of May, Smith and Spilett, leaving Neb to prepare +the breakfast, climbed the plateau, while Herbert and Pencroff went +after a fresh supply of wood. + +The engineer and the reporter soon arrived, at the little beach where +the dugong lay stranded. Already flocks of birds had gathered about the +carcass, and it was necessary to drive them off with stones, as the +engineer wished to preserve the fat for the use of the colony. As to +the flesh of the dugong, it would undoubtedly furnish excellent food, +as in certain portions of the Malay archipelago it is reserved for the +table of the native princes. But it was Neb’s affair to look after +that. + +Just now, Cyrus Smith was thinking of other things. The incident of the +day before was constantly presenting itself. He wanted to solve the +mystery of that unseen combat, and to know what congener of the +mastodons or other marine monster had given the dugong this strange +wound. + +He stood upon the border of the lake, looking upon its tranquil surface +sparkling under the rays of the rising sun. From the little beach where +the dugong lay, the waters deepened slowly towards the centre, and the +lake might be likened to a large basin, filled by the supply from Red +Creek. + +“Well, Cyrus,” questioned the reporter, “I don’t see anything +suspicious in this?” + +“No, my dear fellow, and I am at a loss how to explain yesterday’s +affair.” + +“The wound on this beast is strange enough, and I can’t understand how +Top could have been thrown out of the water in that way. One would +suppose that it had been done by a strong arm, and that that same arm, +wielding a poignard, had given the dugong his death-wound.” + +“It would seem so,” answered the engineer, who had become thoughtful. +“There is something here which I cannot understand. But neither can we +explain how I myself was saved; how I was snatched from the waves and +borne to the downs. Therefore, I am sure there is some mystery which we +will some day discover. In the mean time, let us take care not to +discuss these singular incidents before our companions, but keep our +thoughts for each other, and continue our work.” + +It will be remembered that Smith had not yet discovered what became of +the surplus water of the lake, and as there was no indication of its +ever overflowing, an outlet must exist somewhere. He was surprised, +therefore, on noticing a slight current just at this place. Throwing in +some leaves and bits of wood, and observing their drift, he followed +this current, which brought him to the southern end of the lake. Here +he detected a slight depression in the waters, as if they were suddenly +lost in some opening below. + +Smith listened, placing his ear to the surface of the lake, and +distinctly heard the sound of a subterranean fall. + +“It is there,” said he, rising, “there that the water is discharged, +there, doubtless, through a passage in the massive granite that it goes +to join the sea, through cavities which we will be able to utilize to +our profit! Well! I will find out!” + +The engineer cut a long branch, stripped off its leaves, and, plunging +it down at the angle of the two banks, he found that there was a large +open hole a foot below the surface. This was the long-sought-for +outlet, and such was the force of the current that the branch was +snatched from his hands and disappeared. + +“There can be no doubt of it now,” repeated the engineer. “It is the +mouth of the outlet, and I am going to work to uncover it. + +“How?” inquired Spilett. + +“By lowering the lake three feet.” + +“And how will you do that?” + +“By opening another vent larger than this.” + +“Whereabouts, Cyrus?” + +“Where the bank is nearest the coast.” + +“But it is a granite wall,” exclaimed Spilett, + +“Very well,” replied Smith. “I will blow up the wall, and the waters, +escaping, will subside so as to discover the orifice—” + +“And will make a waterfall at the cliff,” added the reporter. + +“A fall that we will make use of!” answered Cyrus. “Come, come!” + +The engineer hurried off his companion, whose confidence in Smith was +such that he doubted not the success of the undertaking. And yet, this +wall of granite, how would they begin: how, without powder, with but +imperfect tools, could they blast the rock? Had not the engineer +undertaken a work beyond his skill to accomplish? + +When Smith and the reporter re-entered the Chimneys, they found Herbert +and Pencroff occupied in unloading their raft. + +“The wood-choppers have finished, sir,” said the sailor, laughing, “and +when you want masons—” + +“Not masons, but chemists,” interrupted the engineer. + +“Yes,” added Spilett, “we are going to blow up the island.” + +“Blow up the island?” cried the sailor. + +“A part of it, at least,” answered the reporter. + +“Listen to me, my friends,” said the engineer, who thereupon made known +the result of his observations. His theory was, that a cavity, more or +less considerable, existed in the mass of granite which upheld Prospect +Plateau, and he undertook to penetrate to it. To do this, it was first +necessary to free the present opening, in other words to lower the +level of the lake by giving the water a larger issue. To do this they +must manufacture an explosive with which to make a drain in another +part of the bank. It was this Smith was going to attempt to do, with +the minerals Nature had placed at his disposal. + +All entered into the proposal with enthusiasm. Neb and Pencroff were at +once detailed to extract the fat from the dugong and to preserve the +flesh for food; and soon after their departure the others, carrying the +hurdle, went up the shore to the vein of coal, where were to be found +the schistous pyrites of which Smith had procured a specimen. + +The whole day was employed in bringing a quantity of these pyrites to +the Chimneys, and by evening they had several tons. + +On the next day, the 8th of May, the engineer began his manipulations. +The schistous pyrites were principally composed of carbon, of silica, +of alumina, and sulphuret of iron,—these were in excess,—it was +necessary to separate the sulphuret and change it into sulphate by the +quickest means. The sulphate obtained, they would extract the Sulphuric +acid, which was what they wanted. + +Sulphuric acid is one of the agents in most general use, and the +industrial importance of a nation can be measured by its consumption. +In the future this acid would be of use to the colonists in making +candles, tanning skins, etc., but at present the engineer reserved it +for another purpose. + +Smith chose, behind the Chimneys, a place upon which the earth was +carefully levelled. On this he made a pile of branches and cut wood, on +which were placed pieces of schistous pyrites leaning against each +other, and then all was covered over with a thin layer of pyrites +previously reduced to the size of nuts. + +This done, they set the wood on, fire, which in turn inflamed the +schist, as it contained carbon and sulphur. Then new layers of pyrites +were arranged so as to form an immense heap, surrounded with earth, and +grass, with air-holes left here and there, just as is done in reducing +a pile of wood to charcoal. + +Then they left the transformation to complete itself. It would take ten +or twelve days for the sulphuret of iron and the alumina to change into +sulphates, which substances were equally soluble; the others—silica, +burnt carbon, and cinders—were not so. + +While this chemical process was accomplishing itself, Smith employed +his companions upon other branches of the work, which they undertook +with the utmost zeal. + +Neb and Pencroff had taken the fat from the dugong, which had been +placed in large earthen jars. It was necessary to separate the +glycerine from this fat by saponifying it. It was sufficient, in order +to do this, to treat it with chalk or soda. Chalk was not wanting, but +by this treatment the soap would be calcareous and useless, while by +using soda, a soluble soap, which could be employed for domestic +purposes, would be the result. Cyrus Smith, being a practical man, +preferred to try to get the soda. Was this difficult? No, since many +kinds of marine plants abounded on the shore, and all those fucaceæ +which form wrack. They therefore gathered a great quantity of these +seaweed, which were first dried, and, afterwards, burnt in trenches in +the open air. The combustion of these plants was continued for many +days, so that the heat penetrated throughout, and the result was the +greyish compact mass, long known as “natural soda.” + +This accomplished, the engineer treated the fat with the soda, which +gave both a soluble soap and the neutral substance, glycerine. + +But this was not all. Smith wanted, in view of his future operations, +another substance, nitrate of potash, better known as saltpetre. + +He could make this by treating carbonate of potash, which is easily +extracted from vegetable ashes, with nitric acid. But this acid, which +was precisely what he wanted in order to complete his undertaking +successfully, he did not have. Fortunately, in this emergency, Nature +furnished him with saltpetre, without any labor other than picking it +up. Herbert had found a vein of this mineral at the foot of Mount +Franklin, and all they had to do was to purify the salt. + +These different undertakings, which occupied eight days, were finished +before the sulphate of iron was ready. During the interval the +colonists made some refractory pottery in plastic clay, and constructed +a brick furnace of a peculiar shape, in which to distil the sulphate of +iron. All was finished on the 18th of May, the very day the chemical +work was completed. + +The result of this latter operation, consisting of sulphate of iron, +sulphate of alumina, silica, and a residue of charcoal and cinders, was +placed, in a basin full of water. Having stirred up the mixture, they +let it settle, and at length poured off a clear liquid holding the +sulphates of iron and alumina in solution. Finally, this liquid was +partly evaporated, the sulphate of iron crystalized, and the +mother-water was thrown away. + +Smith had now a quantity of crystals, from which the sulphuric acid was +to be extracted. + +In commerce this acid is manufactured in large quantities and by +elaborate processes. The engineer had no such means at his command, but +he knew that in Bohemia an acid known as Nordhausen is made by simpler +means, which has, moreover, the advantage of being non-concentrated. +For obtaining the acid in this way, all the engineer had to do was to +calcinize the crystals in a closed jar in such a manner that the +sulphuric acid distilled in vapor, which would in turn produce the acid +by condensation. + +It was for this that the refractory jars and the furnace had been made. +The operation was a success; and on the 20th of May, twelve days after +having begun, Smith was the possessor of the agent which he expected to +use later in different ways. + +What did he want with it now? Simply to produce nitric acid, which was +perfectly easy, since the saltpetre, attacked by the sulphuric acid, +would give it by distillation. + +But how would he use this acid? None of the others knew, as he had +spoken no word on the subject. + +The work approached completion, and one more operation would procure +the substance which had required all this labor. The engineer mixed the +nitric acid with the glycerine, which latter had been previously +concentrated by evaporation in a water-bath, and without employing any +freezing mixture, obtained many pints of an oily yellow liquid. + +This last operation Smith had conducted alone, at some distance from +the Chimneys, as he feared an explosion, and when he returned, with a +flagon of this liquid, to his friends, he simply said:—“Here is some +nitro-glycerine!” + +It was, in truth, that terrible product, whose explosive power is, +perhaps, ten times as great as that of gunpowder, and which has caused +so many accidents! Although, since means have been found of +transforming it into dynamite, that is, of mixing it with clay or sugar +or some solid substance sufficiently porous to hold it, the dangerous +liquid can be used with more safety. But dynamite was not known when +the colonists were at work on Lincoln Island. + +“And is that stuff going to blow up the rocks?” asked Pencroff, +incredulously. + +“Yes, my friend,” answered the engineer, “and it will do all the better +since the granite is very hard and will oppose more resistance to the +explosion.” + +“And when will we see all this, sir?” + +“To-morrow,” when we have drilled a hole,” answered the engineer. + +Early the next morning, the 21st of May, the miners betook themselves +to a point which formed the east bank of Lake Grant, not more than 500 +feet from the coast. At this place the plateau was lower than the lake, +which was upheld by the coping of granite. It was plain that could they +break this the waters would escape by this vent, and, forming a stream, +flow over the inclined surface of the plateau, and be precipitated in a +waterfall over the cliff on to the shore. Consequently, there would be +a general lowering of the lake, and the orifice of the water would be +uncovered—this was to be the result. + +The coping must be broken. Pencroff, directed by the engineer, attacked +its outer facing vigorously. The hole which he made with his pick began +under a horizontal edge of the bank, and penetrated obliquely so as to +reach a level lower than the lake’s surface. Thus the blowing up of the +rocks would permit the water to escape freely and consequently lower +the lake sufficiently. + +The work was tedious, as the engineer, wishing to produce a violent +shock, had determined to use not less than two gallons of +nitro-glycerine in the operation. But Pencroff and Neb, taking turns at +the work, did so well, that by 4 o’clock in the afternoon it was +achieved. + +Now came the question of igniting the explosive. Ordinarily, +nitro-glycerine is ignited by the explosion of fulminated caps, as, if +lighted without percussion, this substance burns and does not explode. + +Smith could doubtless make a cap. Lacking fulminate, he could easily +obtain a substance analogous to gun-cotton, since he had nitric acid at +hand. This substance pressed in a cartridge, and introduced into the +nitro-glycerine, could be lighted with a slow match, and produce the +explosion. + +But Smith knew that their liquid had the property of exploding under a +blow. He determined, therefore, to make use of this property, reserving +the other means in case this experiment failed. + +The blow of a hammer upon some drops of the substance spread on a hard +stone, suffices to provoke an explosion. But no one could give those +blows without being a victim to the operation. Smith’s idea was to +suspend a heavy mass of iron by means of a vegetable fibre to an +upright post, so as to have the iron hang directly over the hole. +Another long fibre, previously soaked in sulphur, was to be fastened to +the middle of the first and laid along the ground many feet from this +excavation. The fire was to be applied to this second fibre, it would +burn till it reached the first and set it on fire, then the latter +would break and the iron be precipitated upon the nitro-glycerine. + +The apparatus was fixed in place; then the engineer, after having made +his companions go away, filled the hole so that the fluid overflowed +the opening, and spread some drops underneath the mass of suspended +iron. + +This done, Smith lit the end of the sulfured fibre, and, leaving the +place, returned with his companions to the Chimneys. + +Twenty-five minutes after a tremendous explosion was heard. It seemed +as if the whole island trembled to its base. A volley of stones rose +into the air as if they had been vomited from a volcano. The concussion +was such that it shook the Chimneys. The colonists, though two miles +away, were thrown to the ground. Rising again, they clambered up to the +plateau and hurried towards the place. + +A large opening had been torn in the granite coping. A rapid stream of +water escaped through it, leaping and foaming across the plateau, and, +reaching the brink, fell a distance of 300 feet to the shore below. + + + + +CHAPTER XVIII. + + +PENCROFF DOUBTS NO MORE—THE OLD OUTLET OF THE LAKE—A SUBTERRANEAN +DESCENT—THE WAY THROUGH THE GRANITE—TOP HAS DISAPPEARED—THE CENTRAL +CAVERN—THE LOWER WELL—MYSTERY—THE BLOWS WITH THE PICK—THE RETURN. + + +Smith’s project had succeeded; but, as was his manner, he stood +motionless, absorbed, his lips closed, giving no sign of satisfaction. +Herbert was all enthusiasm; Neb jumped with joy; Pencroff, shaking his +head, murmured:— + +“Indeed, our engineer does wonders!” + +The nitro-glycerine had worked powerfully. The opening was so great +that at least a three times greater volume of water escaped by it than +by the former outlet. In a little while, therefore, the level of the +lake would be lowered two feet or more. + +The colonists returned to the Chimneys, and collecting some picks, +spears, ropes, a steel and tinder, returned to the plateau. Top went +with them. + +On the way the sailor could not resist saying to the engineer:— + +“But do you really think, Mr. Smith, that one could blow up the whole +island with this beautiful liquid of yours?” + +“Doubtless,” replied the other, “island, continents, the world itself. +It is only a question of quantity.” + +“Couldn’t you use this nitro-glycerine to load firearms.” + +“No, Pencroff, because it is too shattering. But it would be easy to +make gun-cotton, or even common powder, as we have the material. +Unfortunately, the guns themselves are wanting.” + +“But with a little ingenuity!—” + +Pencroff had erased “impossible” from his vocabulary. + +The colonists having reached Prospect Plateau, hastened at once to the +old outlet of the lake, which ought now to be uncovered. And when the +water no longer poured through it, it would, doubtless, be easy to +explore its interior arrangement. + +In a few moments they reached the lower angle of the lake, and saw at a +glance what the result was. + +There, in the granite wall of the lake, above the water-level, appeared +the long-looked for opening. A narrow ledge, left bare, by the +subsidence of the water, gave them access to it. The opening was twenty +feet wide, though only two feet high. It was like the gutter-mouth in a +pavement. It was not open enough for the party to get in, but Neb and +Pencroff, with their picks, in less than an hour had given it a +sufficient height. + +The engineer looked in and saw that the walls of the opening in its +upper part showed a slope of from 30° to 35°. And, therefore, unless +they became much steeper it would be easy to descend, perhaps, to the +level of the sea. And if, as was probable, some vast cavern existed in +the interior of the massive granite, it was possible that they could +make use of it. + +“What are we waiting for, Mr. Smith,” cried the sailor, all impatience +to begin the exploration, “Top, you see, has gone ahead!” + +“We must have some light,” said the engineer. “Go, Neb, and cut some +resinous branches.” + +The negro and Herbert ran to some pine and evergreens growing upon the +bank, and soon returned with branches which were made into torches. +Having lit them, the colonists, with Smith leading, entered the dark +passage, but recently filled with water. + +Contrary to their expectation, the passage grew higher as they +advanced, until soon they were able to walk upright. The granite walls, +worn, by the water, were very slippery, and the party had to look out +for falls. They, therefore, fastened themselves together with a cord, +like mountain climbers. Fortunately, some granite steps made the +descent less perilous. Drops of water, still clinging to the rocks, +glistened like stalactites in the torchlight. The engineer looked +carefully at this black granite. He could not see a stratum or a flaw. +The mass was compact and of fine grain, and the passage must have been +coeval with the island. It had not been worn little by little by the +constant action of water. Pluto, and not Neptune, had shaped it; and +the traces of igneous action were still visible upon its surface. + +The colonists descended but slowly. They experienced some emotion in +thus adventuring into the depths of the earth, in being its first human +visitants. No one spoke, but each was busied with his own reflections +and the thought occurred to more than one, that perhaps some pulp or +other gigantic cephalopod might inhabit the interior cavities which +communicated with the sea. It was, therefore, necessary to advance +cautiously. + +Top was ahead of the little troop and they could rely on the dog’s +sagacity to give the alarm on occasion. After having descended 100 +feet, Smith halted, and the others came up with him. They were standing +in a cavern of moderate size. Drops of water fell from the roof, but +they did not ooze through the rocks, they were simply the last traces +of the torrent which had so long roared through this place, and the +air, though humid, emitted no mephitic vapor. + +“Well, Cyrus,” said Spilett, “here is a retreat sufficiently unknown +and hidden in the depths, but it is uninhabitable.” + +“How, uninhabitable?” asked the sailor. + +“Why, it is too small and too dark.” + +“Cannot we make it bigger, blast it out, and make openings for the +light and air?” answered Pencroff, who now thought nothing +impracticable. + +“Let us push on,” said Smith. “Perhaps lower down, nature will have +spared us this work.” + +“We are only a third of the way down,” observed Herbert. + +“But 100 feet,” responded Cyrus; “and it is possible that 100 feet +lower—.” + +“Where is Top?” asked Neb, interrupting his master. + +They looked about the cavern. The dog was not there. + +“Let us overtake him,” said Smith, resuming the march. The engineer +noted carefully all the deviations of the route, and easily kept a +general idea of their direction, which was towards the sea. The party +had not descended more than fifty feet further, when their attention +was arrested by distant sounds coming from the depths of the rock. They +stopped and listened. These sounds, borne along the passage, as the +voice through an acoustic tube, were distinctly heard. + +“Its Top’s barking!” cried Herbert. + +“Yes, and the brave dog is barking furiously,” added Pencroff. + +“We have our spears,” said Smith. “Come on, and be ready.” + +“It is becoming more and more interesting,” whispered Spilett to the +sailor, who nodded assent. + +They hurried to the rescue of the dog. His barks grew more distinct. +They could hear that he was in a strange rage. Had he been captured by +some animal whom he had disturbed? Without thinking of the danger, the +colonists felt themselves drawn on by an irresistible curiosity, and +slipped rather than ran down the passage. Sixteen feet lower they came +up with the dog. + +There, the corridor opened out into a vast and magnificent cavern. Top, +rushing about, was barking furiously. Pencroff and Neb, shaking their +torches, lit up all the inequalities of the granite, and the others, +with their spears ready, held themselves prepared for any emergency. + +But the enormous cavern was empty. The colonists searched everywhere; +they could find no living thing. Nevertheless, Top continued barking, +and neither threats nor caresses could stop him. + +“There must be some place where the water escaped to the sea,” said the +engineer. + +“Yes, and look out for a hole,” answered Pencroff. + +“On, Top, on,” cried Smith, and the dog, encouraged by his master, ran +towards the end of the cavern, and redoubled his barking. + +Following him, they saw by the light of the torches the opening of what +looked like a well in the granite. Here, undoubtedly, was the place +where the water had found its way out of the cavern, but this time, +instead of being a corridor sloping and accessible, it was a +perpendicular well, impossible to descend. + +The torches were waved above the opening. They saw nothing. Smith broke +off a burning branch and dropped it into the abyss. The resin, fanned +by the wind of its fall, burned brightly and illuminated the interior +of the pit, but showed nothing else. Then the flame was extinguished +with a slight hiss, which indicated that it had reached the water, +which must be the sea level. + +The engineer calculated, from the time taken in the fall, that the +depth was about ninety feet. The floor of the cavern was therefore that +distance above the sea. + +“Here is our house,” said Smith. + +“But it was preoccupied,” said Spilett, whose curiosity was +unsatisfied. + +“Well, the thing that had it, whether amphibious or not, has fled by +this outlet and vacated in our favor,” replied the engineer. + +“Any how, I should like to have been Top a quarter of an hour ago,” +said the sailor, “for he does not bark at nothing.” + +Smith looked at his dog, and those who were near him heard him murmur:— + +“Yes, I am convinced that Top knows more than we do about many things!” + +However, the wishes of the colonists had been in a great measure +realized. Chance, aided by the marvelous acuteness of their chief, had +done them good service. Here they had at their disposal a vast cavern, +whose extent could not be estimated In the insufficient light of the +torches, but which could certainly be easily partitioned off with +bricks into chambers, and arranged, if not as a house, at least as a +spacious suite of rooms. The water having left it, could not return. +The place was free. + +But two difficulties remained, the possibility of lighting the cavern +and the necessity of rendering it easier of access. The first could not +be done from above as the enormous mass of granite was over them; but, +perhaps, they would be able to pierce the outer wall which faced the +sea. Smith, who during the descent had kept account of the slope, and +therefore of the length of the passage, believed that this part of the +wall could not be very thick. If light could be thus obtained, so could +entrance, as it was as easy to pierce a door as windows, and to fix a +ladder on the outside. + +Smith communicated his ideas to his companions. + +“Then let us set to work!” answered Pencroff; “I have my pick and will +I soon make daylight in the granite! Where shall I begin?” + +“Here,” answered the engineer, showing the strong sailor a considerable +hollow in the wall, which greatly diminished its thickness. + +Pencroff attacked the granite, and for half an hour, by the light of +the torches, made the splinters fly about him. Then Neb took his place, +and Spilett after Neb. The work continued, two hours longer, and, when +it seemed as if the wall could not be thicker than the length of the +pick, at the last stroke of Spilett the implement, passing through, +fell on the outside. + +“Hurrah forever!” cried Pencroff. + +The wall was but three feet thick. + +Smith looked through the opening, which was eighty feet above the +ground. Before him extended the coast, the islet, and, beyond, the +boundless sea. + +Through the hole the light entered in floods, inundating the splendid +cavern and producing a magical effect. While on the left hand it +measured only thirty feet in height and one hundred in length, to the +right it was enormous, and its vault rose to a height of more than +eighty feet. In some places, granite pillars, irregularly disposed, +supported the arches as in the nave of a cathedral. Resting upon a sort +of lateral piers, here, sinking into elliptic arches, there, rising in +ogive mouldings, losing itself in the dark bays, half seen in the +shadow through the fantastic arches, ornamented by a profusion of +projections which seemed like pendants, this vaulted roof afforded a +picturesque blending of all the architectures—Byzantine, Roman, +Gothic—that the hand of man has produced. And this was the work of +nature! She alone had constructed this magic Alhambra in a granite +rock! + +The colonists were overcome with admiration. Expecting to find but a +narrow cavern, they found themselves in a sort of marvellous palace, +and Neb had taken off his hat as if he had been transported into a +temple! + +Exclamations of pleasure escaped from their lips, and the hurrahs +echoed and reechoed from the depths of the dark nave. + +“My friends,” cried Smith, “when we shall have lighted the interior of +this place, when we shall have arranged our chambers, our store-rooms, +our offices in the left-hand portion, we will still have this splendid +cavern, which shall be our study and our museum! + +“And we will call it—” asked Herbert. + +“Granite House,” answered Smith; and his companions saluted the name +with their cheers. + +By this time the torches were nearly consumed, and as, in order to +return, it was necessary to regain the summit of the plateau and to +remount the corridor, it was decided to postpone until the morrow the +work of arranging their new home. + +Before leaving, Smith leaned over the dark pit once more and listened +attentively. But there was no sound from these depths save that of the +water agitated by the undulations of the surge. A resinous torch was +again thrown in, lighting up anew for an instant the walls of the well, +but nothing suspicions was revealed. If any marine monster had been +inopportunely surprised by the retreat of the waters, he had already +regained the open sea by the subterranean passage which extended under +the shore. + +Nevertheless the engineer stood motionless, listening attentively, his +gaze plunged in the abyss, without speaking. + +Then the sailor approached him, and, touching his arm:— + +“Mr. Smith,” he said. + +“What is it, my friend,” responded the engineer, like one returning +from the land of dreams. + +“The torches are nearly out.” + +“Forward!” said Smith; and the little troop left the cavern and began +the ascent through the dark weir. Top walked behind, still growling in +an odd way. The ascension was sufficiently laborious, and the colonists +stopped for a few minutes at the upper grotto, which formed a sort of +landing half way up the long granite stairway. Then they began again to +mount, and pretty soon they felt the fresh air. The drops, already +evaporated, no longer shone on the walls. The light of the torches +diminished; Neb’s went out, and they had to hasten in order to avoid +having to grope their way through, the profound darkness. A little +before 4 o’clock, just as the torch of the sailor was burnt out, Smith +and his companions emerged from the mouth of the passage. + + + + +CHAPTER XIX. + + +SMITH’S PLAN—THE FRONT OF GRANITE HOUSE—THE ROPE LADDER—PENCROFF’S +IDEAS—THE AROMATIC HERBS—A NATURAL WARREN—GETTING WATER—THE VIEW FROM +THE WINDOWS OF GRANITE HOUSE. + + +On the next day, May 22, the colonists proceeded to take possession of +their new abode. They longed to exchange their insufficient shelter for +the vast retreat in the rock, impenetrable to wind and wave. Still they +did not intend altogether to abandon the Chimneys, but to make a +workshop of it. + +Smith’s first care was to ascertain exactly over what point rose the +face of Granite House. He went down on the shore to the foot of the +immense wall, and, as the pickaxe, which slipped from the reporter’s +hands, must have fallen perpendicularly, he could ascertain, by finding +this pickaxe, the place where the granite had been pierced. And, in +fact, when the implement was found, half buried in the sand, the hole +in the rock could be seen eighty feet above it, in a straight line. +Rock pigeons were already fluttering in and out by this narrow opening. +They evidently thought Granite House had been discovered for their +benefit. + +The engineer intended to divide the right portion of the cavern into +several chambers opening upon an entrance-corridor, and lighted by five +windows and a door cut in the face of the rock. Pencroff agreed with +him as to the window, but could not understand the use of the door, +since the old weir furnished a natural staircase to Granite House. + +“My friend,” said Smith, “if we could get to our abode by the weir, so +can others. I want to block up this passage at its month, to seal it +hermetically, and even, if necessary, to conceal the entrance by +damming up the lake.” + +“And how shall we get in?” said the sailor. + +“By a rope ladder from the outside,” answered Smith, “which we can pull +up after us.” + +“But why take so many precautions?” said Pencroff. “So far, the animals +we have found here have not been formidable; and there are certainly no +natives.” + +“Are you so sure, Pencroff?” said the engineer, looking steadily at the +sailor. + +“Of course we shall not be perfectly sure till we have explored every +part.” + +“Yes,” said Smith, “for we know as yet only a small portion. But even +if there are no enemies upon the island, they may come from the +outside, for this part of the Pacific is a dangerous region. We must +take every precaution.” + +So the facade of Granite House was lighted with five windows, and with +a door opening upon the “apartments,” and admitting plenty of light +into that wonderful nave which was to serve as their principal +hallroom. This facade, eighty feet above the ground, was turned to the +east, and caught the first rays of the morning sun. It was protected by +the slope of the rock from the piercing northeast wind. In the +meantime, while the sashes of the windows were being made, the engineer +meant to close the openings with thick shutters, which would keep out +wind and rain, and which could be readily concealed. The first work was +to hollow out these windows. But the pickaxe was at a disadvantage +among these hard rocks, and Smith again had recourse to the +nitro-glycerine, which, used in small quantities, had the desired +effect. Then the work was finished by the pick and mattock—the five +ogive windows, the bay, the bull’s-eyes, and the door—and, some days +after the work was begun, the sun shone in upon the innermost recesses +of Granite House. + +According to Smith’s plan, the space had been divided into five +compartments looking out upon the sea; upon the right was the hall, +opposite to the door from which the ladder was to hang, then a kitchen +thirty feet long, a dining-room forty feet long, a sleeping-room of the +same size, and last a “guest chamber,” claimed by Pencroff; and +bordering on the great hall. + +These rooms, or rather this suite of rooms, in which they were to live, +did not occupy the full depth of the cave. They opened upon a corridor +which ran between them and a long storehouse, where were kept their +utensils and provisions. All the products of the island, animal and +vegetable, could be kept there in good condition and free from damp. +They had room enough, and there was a place for everything. Moreover, +the colonists still had at their disposal the little grotto above the +large cavern, which would serve them as a sort of attic. This plan +agreed upon, they became brickmakers again, and brought their bricks to +the foot of Granite House. + +Until that time the colonists had had access to the cavern only by the +old weir. This mode of communication compelled them first to climb up +Prospect Plateau, going round by the river, to descend 200 feet through +the passage, and then to ascend the same distance when they wanted to +regain the plateau. This involved fatigue and loss of time. Smith +resolved to begin at once the construction of a strong rope ladder, +which, once drawn up after them, would render the entrance to Granite +House absolutely inaccessible. This ladder was made with the greatest +care, and its sides were twisted of fibres by means of a shuttle. Thus +constructed, it had the strength of a cable. The rungs were made of a +kind of red cedar, with light and durable branches; and the whole was +put together by the practised hand of Pencroff. + +Another kind of tackle was made of vegetable fibre, and a sort of +derrick was setup at the door of Granite House. In this way the bricks +could easily be carried to the level of Granite House; and when some +thousands of them were on the spot, with abundance of lime, they began +work on the interior. They easily set up the wood partitions, and in a +short time the space was divided into chambers and a store-house, +according to the plan agreed upon. + +These labors went on quickly under the direction of the engineer, who +himself wielded hammer and trowel. They worked confidently and gaily. +Pencroff, whether carpenter, ropemaker, or mason, always had a joke +ready, and all shared in his good humor. His confidence in the engineer +was absolute. All their wants would be supplied in Smith’s own time. He +dreamed of canals, of quarries, of mines, of machinery, even of +railroads, one day, to cover the island. The engineer let Pencroff +talk. He knew how contagious is confidence; he smiled to hear him, and +said nothing of his own inquietude. But in his heart he feared that no +help could come from the outside. In that part of the Pacific, out of +the track of ships, and at such a distance from other land that no boat +could dare put out to sea, they had only themselves to rely upon. + +But, as the sailor said, they were far ahead of the Swiss Family +Robinson, for whom miracles were always being wrought. In truth they +knew Nature; and he who knows Nature will succeed when others would lie +down to die. + +Herbert especially distinguished himself in the work. He understood at +a word and was prompt in execution. Smith grew fonder of him every day +and Herbert was devoted to the engineer. Pencroff saw the growing +friendship, but the honest sailor was not jealous. Neb was courage, +zeal, and self-denial in person. He relied on his master as absolutely +as Pencroff, but his enthusiasm was not so noisy. The sailor and he +were great friends. As to Spilett, his skill and efficiency were a +daily wonder to Pencroff. He was the model of a newspaper man—quick +alike to understand and to perform. + +The ladder was put in place May 28. It was eighty feet high, and +consisted of 100 rungs; and, profiting by a projection in the face of +the cliff, about forty feet up, Smith had divided it into two parts. +This projection served as a sort of landing-place for the head of the +lower ladder, shortening it, and thus lessening its swing. They +fastened it with a cord so that it could easily be raised to the level +of Granite House. The upper ladder they fastened at top and bottom. In +this way the ascent was much more easy. Besides, Smith counted upon +putting up at some future time a hydraulic elevator, which would save +his companions much fatigue and loss of time. + +The colonists rapidly accustomed themselves to the use of this ladder. +The sailor, who was used to shrouds and ratlines, was their teacher. +The great trouble was with Top, whose four feet were not intended for +ladders. But Pencroff was persevering, and Top at last learned to run +up and down as nimbly as his brothers of the circus. We cannot say +whether the sailor was proud of this pupil, but he sometimes carried +Top up on his back, and Top made no complaints. + +All this time, the question of provisions was not neglected. Every day +Herbert and the reporter spent some hours in the chase. They hunted +only through Jacamar Woods, on the left of the river, for, in the +absence of boat or bridge, they had not yet crossed the Mercy. The +immense woody tracts which they had named the Forests of the Far West +were entirely unexplored. This important excursion was set apart for +the first five days of the coming spring. But Jacamar Woods were not +wanting in game; kangaroos and boars were plenty there, and the +iron-tipped spears, the bows and arrows of the hunters did wonders. +More than this, Herbert discovered, at the southwest corner of, the +lagoon, a natural warren, a sort of moist meadow covered with willows +and aromatic herbs, which perfumed the air, such as thyme, basil, and +all sorts of mint, of which rabbits are so fond. The reporter said that +when the feast was spread for them it would be strange if the rabbits +did not come; and the hunters explored the warren carefully. At all +events, it produced an abundance of useful plants, and would give a +naturalist plenty of work. Herbert gathered a quantity of plants +possessing different medicinal properties, pectoral, astringent, +febrifuge, anti-rheumatic. When Pencroff asked of what good were all +this collection of herbs:— + +“To cure us when we are sick,” answered the boy. + +“Why should we be sick, since there are no doctors on the island?” said +Pencroff, quite seriously. + +To this no reply could be made, but the lad went on gathering his +bundle, which was warmly welcomed at Granite House; especially as he +had found some Mountain Mint, known in North America as “Oswego Tea,” +which produces a pleasant beverage. + +That day the hunters, in their search, reached the site of the warren. +The ground was perforated with little holes like a colander. + +“Burrows!” cried Herbert. + +“But are they inhabited?” + +“That is the question.” + +A question which was quickly resolved. Almost immediately, hundreds of +little animals, like rabbits, took to flight in every direction, with +such rapidity that Top himself was distanced. But the reporter was +determined not to quit the place till he had captured half a dozen of +the little beasts. He wanted them now for the kitchen: domestication +would come later. With a few snares laid at the mouth of the burrows, +the affair would be easy; but there were no snares, nor materials for +snares; so they patiently rummaged every form with their sticks, until +four rodents were taken. + +They were rabbits, much like their European congeners, and commonly +known as “American hares.” They were brought back to Granite Home, and +figured in that evening’s meal. Delicious eating they were; and the +warren bade fair to be a most valuable reserve for the colonists. + +On May 31, the partitions were finished, and nothing remained but to +furnish the rooms, which would occupy the long days of winter. A +chimney was built in the room which served as a kitchen. The +construction of the stove-pipe gave them a good deal of trouble. The +simplest material was clay; and as they did not wish to have any outlet +on the upper plateau, they pierced a hole above the kitchen window, and +conducted the pipe obliquely to this hole. No doubt during an eastern +gale the pipe would smoke, but the wind rarely blew from that quarter, +and head-cook Neb was not particular + +When these domestic arrangements had been made, the engineer proceeded +to block up the mouth of the old weir by the lake, so as to prevent any +approach from that quarter. Great square blocks were rolled to the +opening, and strongly cemented together. Smith did not yet attempt to +put in execution his project of damming up the waters of the lake so as +to conceal this weir; he was satisfied with concealing the obstruction +he had placed there by means of grass, shrubs, and thistles, which were +planted in the interstices of the rocks, and which by the next spring +would sprout up luxuriantly. Meanwhile he utilized the weir in +conducting to their new abode a little stream of fresh water from the +lake. A little drain, constructed just below its level, had the effect +of supplying them with twenty-five or thirty gallons a day; so there +was likely to be no want of water at Granite House. + +At last, all was finished, just in time for the tempestuous season. +They closed the windows with thick shutters till Smith should have time +to make glass from the sand. In the rocky projections around the +windows Spilett had arranged, very artistically, plants of various +kinds and long floating grasses, and thus the windows were framed +picturesquely in green. The denizens of this safe and solid dwelling +could but be delighted with their work. The windows opened upon a +limitless horizon, shut in only by the two Mandible Capes on the north +and by Claw Cape at the south. Union Bay spread magnificently before +them. They had reason enough to be satisfied, and Pencroff did not +spare his praises of what he called “his suite on the fifth floor.” + + + + +CHAPTER XX. + + +THE RAINY SEASON—WHAT TO WEAR-A SEAL-HUNT—CANDLE-MAKING—-WORK IN THE +GRANITE HOUSE—THE TWO CAUSEWAYS—RETURN FROM A VISIT TO THE +OYSTER-BED—WHAT HERBERT FOUND IS HIS POCKET. + + +The winter season began in earnest with the month of June, which +corresponded with December in our northern hemisphere. Showers and +storms succeeded each other without an intermission, and the inmates of +the Granite House could appreciate the advantages of a dwelling +impervious to the weather. The Chimneys would indeed have proved a +miserable shelter against the inclemency of the winter; they feared +even lest the high tides driven by the sea-wind should pour in and +destroy their furnaces and their foundry. All this month of June was +occupied with various labors, which left plenty of time for hunting and +fishing, so that the reserve stock of food was constantly kept up. +Pencroff intended, as soon as he had time, to set traps, from which he +expected great results. He had made snares of ligneous fibre, and not a +day passed but some rodent was captured from the warren. Neb spent all +his time in smoking and salting meat. + +The question of clothes now came up for serious discussion. The +colonists had no other garments than those which they wore when the +balloon cast them on shore. These, fortunately, were warm and +substantial; and by dint of extreme care, even their linen had been +kept clean and whole; but everything would soon wear out, and moreover, +during a vigorous winter, they would suffer severely from cold. Here +Smith was fairly baffled. He had been occupied in providing for their +most urgent wants, food and shelter, and the winter was upon them +before the clothes problem could be solved. They must resign themselves +to bear the cold with fortitude, and when the dry season returned would +undertake a great hunt of the moufflons, which they had seen on Mount +Franklin, and whose wool the engineer could surely make into warm thick +cloth. He would think over the method. + +“Well, we must toast ourselves before the fire!” said Pencroff.” +There’s plenty of fire wood, no reason for sparing it.” + +“Besides,” added Spilett, “Lincoln Island is not in very high latitude, +and the winters are probably mild. Did you not say, Cyrus that the +thirty-fifth parallel corresponded with that of Spain in the other +hemisphere?” + +“Yes,” said the engineer, “but the winter in Spain is sometimes very +cold, with snow and ice, and we may have a hard time of it. Still we +are on an island, and have a good chance for more moderate weather.” + +“Why, Mr. Smith?” said Herbert. + +“Because the sea, my boy, may be considered as an immense reservoir, in +which the summer heat lies stored. At the coming of winter this heat is +again given out, so that the neighboring regions have always a medium +temperature, cooler in summer and warmer in winter.” + +“We shall see,” said Pencroff. “I am not going to bother myself about +the weather. One thing is certain, the days are getting short already +and the evenings long. Suppose we talk a little about candles.” + +“Nothing is easier,” said Smith. + +“To talk about?” asked the sailor. + +“To make.” + +“And when shall we begin?” + +“To-morrow, by a seal-hunt.” + +“What! to make dips?” + +“No, indeed, Pencroff, candles.” + +Such was the engineer’s project, which was feasible enough, as he had +lime and sulphuric acid, and as the amphibia of the island would +furnish the necessary fat. It was now June 4, and Pentecost Sunday, +which they kept as a day of rest and thanksgiving. They were no longer +miserable castaways, they were colonists. On the next day, June 5, they +started for the islet. They had to choose the time of low tide to ford +the channel; and all determined that, somehow or other, they must build +a boat which would give them easy communication with all parts of the +island, and would enable them to go up the Mercy, when they should +undertake that grand exploration of the southwestern district which +they had reserved for the first good weather. + +Seals were numerous, and the hunters, armed with their iron-spiked +spears, easily killed half a dozen of them, which Neb and Pencroff +skinned. Only the hides and fat were carried back to Granite House, the +former to be made into shoes. The result of the hunt was about 300 +pounds of fat, every pound of which could be used in making candles. +The operation was simple enough, and the product, if not the best of +its kind, was all they needed. Had Smith had at his disposition nothing +but sulphuric acid, he could, by heating this acid with neutral fats, +such as the fat of the seal, separate the glycerine, which again could +be resolved, by means of boiling water, into oleine, margarine, and +stearine. But, to simplify the operation, he preferred to saponify the +fat by lime. He thus obtained a calcareous soap, easily decomposed by +sulphuric acid, which precipitated the lime as a sulphate, and freed +the fatty acids. The first of these three acids (oleine, margarine, and +stearine) was a liquid which he expelled by pressure. The other two +formed the raw material of the candles. + +In twenty-four hours the work was done. Wicks were made, after some +unsuccessful attempts, from vegetable fibre, and were steeped in the +liquified compound. They were real stearine candles, made by hand, +white and smooth. + +During all this month work was going on inside their new abode. There +was plenty of carpenter’s work to do. They improved and completed their +tools, which were very rudimentary. Scissors were made, among other +things, so that they were able to cut their hair, and, if not actually +to shave their beards, at least to trim them to their liking. Herbert +had no beard, and Neb none to speak of, but the others found ample +employment for the scissors. + +They had infinite trouble in making a hand-saw; but at last succeeded +in shaping an instrument which would cut wood by a rigorous +application. Then they made tables, chairs and cupboards to furnish the +principal rooms, and the frames of beds whose only bedding was +mattrasses of wrack-grass. The kitchen, with its shelves, on which lay +the terra-cotta utensils, its brick furnace, and its washing-stone, +looked very comfortable, and Neb cooked with the gravity of a chemist +in his laboratory. + +But joiners work had to give place to carpentry. The new weir created +by the explosion rendered necessary the construction of two causeways, +one upon Prospect Plateau, the other on the shore itself. Now the +plateau and the coast were transversely cut by a water-course which the +colonists had to cross when ever they wished to reach the northern part +of the island. To avoid this they had to make a considerable detour, +and to walk westward as far as the sources of Red creek. Their best +plan therefore was to build two causeways, one on the plateau and one +on the shore, twenty to twenty-five feet long, simply constructed of +trees squared by the axe. This was the work of some days. When these +bridges had been built, Neb and Pencroff profited by them to go to the +oyster-bed which had been discovered off the down. They dragged after +them a sort of rough cart which had taken the place of the inconvenient +hurdle; and they brought back several thousand oysters, which, were +readily acclimated among the rocks, and formed a natural preserve at +the mouth of the Mercy. They were excellent of their kind, and formed +an almost daily article of diet. In fact, Lincoln Island, though the +colonists had explored but a small portion of it, already supplied +nearly all their wants, while it seemed likely that a minute +exploration of the western forests would reveal a world of new +treasures. + +Only one privation still distressed the colonists. Azotic food they had +in plenty, and the vegetables which corrected it; from the ligneous +roots of the dragon-trees, submitted to fermentation, they obtained a +sort of acidulated beer. They had even made sugar, without sugar-cane +or beet-root, by collecting the juice which distills from the “acer +saccharinum,” a sort of maple which flourishes in all parts of the +temperate zone, and which abounded on the island. They made a very +pleasant tea from the plant brought from the warren; and, finally, they +had plenty of salt, the only mineral component necessary to food—but +bread was still to seek. + +Perhaps, at some future time, they would have been able to replace this +aliment by some equivalent, sago flour, or the breadfruit tree, which +they might possibly have discovered in the woods of the southwest; but +so far they had not met with them. Just at this time a little incident +occurred which brought about what Smith, with all his ingenuity, could +not have achieved. + +One rainy day the colonists were together in the large hall of Granite +House, when Herbert suddenly cried, + +“See, Mr. Smith, a grain of corn.” + +And he showed his companions a single gram which had got into the +lining of his waistcoat through a hole in his pocket. Pencroff had +given him some ring-doves in Richmond, and in feeding them one of the +grains had remained in his pocket. + +“A grain of corn?” said the engineer, quickly. + +“Yes, sir; but only one.” + +“That’s a wonderful help,” said Pencroff, laughing. “The bread that +grain will make will never choke us.” + +Herbert was about to throw away the grain, when Cyrus Smith took it, +examined it, found that it was in good condition, and said quietly to +the sailor:— + +“Pencroff, do you know how many ears of corn will spring from one +grain?” + +“One, I suppose,” said the sailor, surprised at the question. + +“Ten, Pencroff. And how many grains are there to an ear?” + +“Faith, I don’t know.” + +“Eighty on an average,” said Smith. “So then, if we plant this grain, +we shall get from it a harvest of 800 grains; from them in the second +year 640,000; in the third, 512,000,000; in the fourth, more than +400,000,000,000. That is the proportion.” + +His companions listened in silence. The figures stupefied them. + +“Yes, my friend,” resumed the engineer. “Such is the increase of +Nature. And what is even this multiplication of a grain of corn whose +ears have only 800 grains, compared with the poppy plant, which has +32,000 seeds, or the tobacco plant, which has 360,000? In a few years, +but for the numerous enemies which destroy them, these plants would +cover the earth. And now, Pencroff,” he resumed, “do you know how many +bushels there are in 400,000,000,000 grains?” + +“No,” answered the sailor, “I only know that I am an idiot!” + +“Well, there will be more than 3,000,000, at 130,000 the bushel!” + +“Three millions!” cried Pencroff. + +“Three millions.” + +“In four years?” + +“Yes,” said Smith, “and even in two, if, as I hope, we can get two +harvests a year in this latitude.” + +Pencroff answered with a tremendous hurrah. + +“So, Herbert,” added the engineer, “your discovery is of immense +importance. Remember, my friends, that everything may be of use to us +in our present situation.” + +“Indeed, Mr. Smith, I will remember it,” said Pencroff, “and if ever I +find one of those grains of tobacco which increase 360,000 times, I’ll +take care not to throw it away. And now what must we do?” + +“We must plant this grain,” said Herbert. + +“Yes,” added Spilett, “and with the greatest care, for upon it depend +our future harvests!” + +“Provided that it grows,” said the sailor. + +“It will grow,” answered Smith. + +It was now the 20th of June, a good time for planting the precious +grain. They thought at first of planting it in a pot; but upon +consideration, they determined to trust it frankly to the soil. The +same day it was planted, with the greatest precaution. The weather +clearing a little, they walked up to the plateau above Granite House, +and chose there a spot well sheltered from the wind, and exposed to the +midday fervor of the sun. This spot was cleared, weeded, and even dug, +so as to destroy insects and worms; it was covered with a layer of +fresh earth, enriched with a little lime; a palissade was built around +it, and then the grain was covered up in its moist bed. + +They seemed to be laying the corner-stone of an edifice. Pencroff was +reminded of the extreme care with which they had lighted their only +match; but this was a more serious matter. The castaways could always +have succeeded in obtaining fire by some means or other; but no earthly +power could restore that grain of corn, if, by ill fortune, it should +perish! + + + + +CHAPTER XXI + + +SEVERAL DEGREES BELOW ZERO—EXPLORATION OF THE SWAMP REGION TO THE +SOUTHEAST—THE VIEW OF THE SEA—A CONVERSATION CONCERNING THE FUTURE OF +THE PACIFIC OCEAN—THE INCESSANT LABOR OF THE INFUSORIA—WHAT WILL BECOME +OF THIS GLOBE—THE CHASE—THE SWAMP OF THE TADORNS. + + +From this moment Pencroff did not let a day pass without visiting what +he called with perfect gravity, his “corn field.” And alas, for any +insects that ventured there, no mercy would be shown them. Near the end +of the month of June, after the interminable rains, the weather became +decidedly cold, and on the 29th, a Fahrenheit thermometer would +certainly have stood at only 20° above zero. + +The next day, the 30th of June, the day which corresponds to the 3lst +of December in the Northern Hemisphere, was a Friday. Neb said the year +ended on an unlucky day, but Pencroff answered that consequently the +new year began on a lucky one, which was more important. At all events, +it began with a very cold snap. Ice accumulated at the mouth of the +Mercy, and the whole surface of the lake was soon frozen over. + +Fresh firewood had continually to be procured. Pencroff had not waited +for the river to freeze to convey enormous loads of wood to their +destination. The current was a tireless motor, and conveyed the +floating wood until the ice froze around it. To the fuel, which the +forest so plentifully furnished, were added several cartloads of coal, +which they found at the foot of the spurs of Mount Franklin. The +powerful heat from the coal was thoroughly appreciated in a temperature +which on the 4th of July fell to eight degrees above zero. A second +chimney had been set up in the dining-room, where they all worked +together. During this cold spell Cyrus Smith could not be thankful +enough that he had conducted to Granite House a small stream of water +from Lake Grant. Taken below the frozen surface, then conducted through +the old weir, it arrived unfrozen at the interior reservoir, which had +been dug at the angle of the storehouse, and which, when too full, +emptied itself into the sea. About this time the weather being very +dry, the colonists, dressing as warmly as possible, determined to +devote a day to the exploration of that part of the island situated to +the southeast, between the Mercy and Claw Cape. It was a large swampy +district and might offer good hunting, as aquatic birds must abound +there. They would have eight or nine miles to go and as far to return, +consequently the whole day must be given up. As it concerned the +exploration of an unknown portion of the island, every one had to take +part. + +Therefore, on the 5th of July, at 6 o’clock in the morning, before the +sun had fairly risen, the whole party, armed with spears, snares, bows +and arrows, and furnished with enough provisions for the day, started +from Granite House, preceded by Top, who gambolled before them. They +took the shortest route, which was to cross the Mercy on the blocks of +ice which then obstructed it. + +“But,” as the reporter very truly observed, “this cannot supply the +place of a real bridge.” + +So the construction of a “real” bridge was set down as work for the +future. This was the first time that the colonists had set foot on the +right bank of the Mercy and had plunged into the forest of large and +magnificent firs, then covered with snow. But they had not gone half a +mile when the barking of Top frightened from a dense thicket where they +had taken up their abode, a whole family of quadrupeds. + +“Why they look like foxes,” said Herbert, when he saw them scampering +quickly away. + +And they were foxes, but foxes of enormous size. They made a sort of +bark which seemed to astonish Top, for he stopped in his chase and gave +these swift animals time to escape. The dog had a right to be +surprised, for he knew nothing of natural history; but by this barking, +the greyish-red color of their hair, and their black tails, which ended +in a white tuft, these foxes had betrayed their origin. So Herbert gave +them without hesitation their true name of culpeux. These culpeux are +often met with in Chili, in the Saint Malo group, and in all those +parts of America lying between the 30th and 40th parallels. + +Herbert was very sorry that Top had not caught one of these carnivora. + +“Can we eat them?” asked Pencroff, who always considered the fauna of +the island from that special point of view. + +“No,” said Herbert, “but zoologists have not yet ascertained whether +the pupil of the eye of this fox is diurnal or nocturnal, or whether +the animal would come under the genus “canine.” + +Smith could not help smiling at this remark of the boy, which showed +thoughtfulness beyond his years. As for the sailor, from the moment +these foxes ceased to belong to the edible species, they ceased to +interest him. Ever since the kitchen had been established at Granite +House he had been saying that precautions ought to be taken against +these four-footed plunderers. A fact which no one denied. + +Having turned Jetsam Point the party came upon a long reach washed by +the sea. It was then 8 o’clock in the morning. The sky was very clear, +as is usual in prolonged cold weather; but, warmed by their work, Smith +and his companions did not suffer from the sharpness of the atmosphere. +Besides, there was no wind, the absence of which always renders a low +temperature more endurable. The sun, bright but cold, rose from the +ocean, and his enormous disc was poised in the horizon. The sea was a +calm, blue sheet of water, like a land-locked sea under a clear sky. +Claw Cape, bent in the shape of an ataghan, was clearly defined about +four miles to the southeast. To the left, the border of the swamp was +abruptly intercepted by a little point which shone brightly against the +sun. Certainly in that part of Union Bay, which was not protected from +the open sea, even by a sand bank, ships beaten by an east wind could +not have found shelter. + +By the perfect calm of the sea, with no shoals to disturb its waters, +by its uniform color, with no tinge of yellow, and, finally, by the +entire absence of reefs, they knew that this side was steep, and that +here the ocean was fathoms deep. Behind them, in the west, at a +distance of about four miles, they saw the beginning of the Forests of +the Far West. They could almost have believed themselves upon some +desolate island in the Antarctic regions surrounded by ice. + +The party halted here for breakfast; a fire of brushwood and seaweed +was lighted, and Neb prepared the meal of cold meat, to which he added +some cups of Oswego tea. While eating they looked around them. This +side of Lincoln island was indeed barren, and presented a strong +contrast to the western part. + +The reporter thought that if the castaways had been thrown upon this +coast, they would have had a very melancholy impression of their future +home. + +“I do not believe we could even have reached it,” said the engineer, +“for the sea is very deep here, and there is not even a rock which +would have served as a refuge; before Granite House there were shoals, +at least, and a little island which multiplied our chances of safety; +here is only the bottomless sea.” + +“It is curious enough,” said Spilett, “that this island, relatively so +small, presents so varied a soil. This diversity of appearance belongs, +logically, only to continents of a considerable area. One would really +think that the western side of Lincoln Island, so rich and fertile, was +washed by the warm waters of the Gulf of Mexico, and that the northern +and southern coasts extended into a sort of Arctic Sea.” + +“You are right, my dear Spilett,” replied the engineer, “I have +observed the same thing. I have found this island curious both in its +shape and in its character. It has all the peculiarities of a +continent, and I would not be surprised if it had been a continent +formerly.” + +“What! a continent in the middle of the Pacific!” cried Pencroff. + +“Why not?” answered Smith. “Why should not Australia, New Ireland, all +that the English geographers call Australasia, joined to the +Archipelagoes of the Pacific Ocean, have formed in times past a sixth +part of the world as important as Europe or Asia, Africa or the two +Americas. My mind does not refuse to admit that all the islands rising +from this vast ocean are the mountains of a continent now engulphed, +but which formerly rose majestically from these waters.” + +“Like Atlantis?” asked Herbert. “Yes. my boy, if that ever existed.” +“And Lincoln Island may have been a part of this continent?” asked +Pencroff. “It is probable,” replied Smith. “And that would explain the +diversity of products upon the surface, and the number of animals which +still live here,” added Herbert. + +“Yes, my boy,” answered the engineer, “and that gives me a new argument +in support of my theory. It is certain after what we have seen that the +animals in the island are numerous, and what is more curious, is that +the species are extremely varied. There must be a reason for this, and +mine is, that Lincoln Island was formerly a part of some vast +continent, which has, little by little, sunk beneath the surface of the +Pacific.” “Then,” said Pencroff, who did not seem entirely convinced, +“what remains of this old continent may disappear in its turn and leave +nothing between America and Asia.” “Yes,” said Smith, “there will be +new continents which millions upon millions of animalculæ are building +at this moment.” “And who are these masons?” inquired Pencroff. “The +coral insects,” answered Smith. “It is these who have built by their +constant labor the Island of Clermont Tonnerre, the Atolls and many +other coral islands which abound in the Pacific. It takes 47,000,000 of +these insects to deposit one particle; and yet with the marine salt +which they absorb, and the solid elements of the water which they +assimilate, these animalculæ produce limestone, and limestone forms +those enormous submarine structures whose hardness and solidity is +equal to that of granite. + +Formerly, during the first epochs of creation, Nature employed heat to +produce land by upheaval, but now she lets these microscopic insects +replace this agent, whose dynamic power at the interior of this globe +has evidently diminished. This fact is sufficiently proved by the great +number of volcanoes actually extinct on the surface of the earth. I +verily believe that century after century, and infusoria after +infusoria will change the Pacific some day into a vast continent, which +new generations will, in their turn, inhabit and civilize.” + +“It will take a long time,” said Pencroff. “Nature has time on her +side,” replied the engineer. “But what is the good of new continents?” +asked Herbert. “It seems to me that the present extent of habitable +countries is enough for mankind. Now Nature does nothing in vain.” +“Nothing in vain, indeed,” replied the engineer; “but let us see how we +can explain the necessity of new continents in the future, and +precisely in these tropical regions occupied by these coral islands. +Here is an explanation, which seems to me at least plausible.” + +“We are listening, Mr. Smith,” replied Herbert. + +“This is my idea: Scientists generally admit that some day the globe +must come to an end, or rather the animal and vegetable life will be no +longer possible, on account of the intense cold which will prevail. +What they cannot agree upon is the cause of this cold. Some think that +it will be produced by the cooling of the sun in the course of millions +of years; others by the gradual extinction of the internal fires of our +own globe, which have a more decided influence than is generally +supposed. I hold to this last hypothesis, based upon the fact that the +moon is without doubt a refrigerated planet, which is no longer +habitable, although the sun continues to pour upon its surface the same +amount of heat. If then, the moon is refrigerated, it is because these +internal fires, to which like all the stellar world it owes its origin, +are entirely extinct. In short, whatever be the cause, our world will +certainly some day cool; but this cooling will take place gradually. +What will happen then? Why, the temperate zones, at a time more or less +distant, will be no more habitable than are the Polar regions now. Then +human, as well as animal life, will be driven to latitudes more +directly under the influence of the solar rays. An immense emigration +will take place. Europe, Central Asia, and North America will little by +little be abandoned, as well as Australasia and the lower parts of +South America. Vegetation will follow the human emigration. The flora +will move towards the equator at the same time with the fauna, the +central parts of South America and Africa will become the inhabited +continent. The Laplanders and the Samoyedes will find the climate of +the Polar Sea on the banks of the Mediterranean. Who can tell but that +at this epoch, the equatorial regions will not be too small to contain +and nourish the population of the globe. Now, why should not a +provident nature, in order from this time, to provide a refuge for this +animal and vegetable emigration, lay the foundation, under the equator, +of a new continent, and charge these infusoria with the building of it? +I have often thought of this, my friends, and I seriously believe that, +some day, the aspect of our globe will be completely transformed, that +after the upheaval of new continents the seas will cover the old ones, +and that in future ages some Columbus will discover in the islands of +Chimborazo or the Himalaya, or Mount Blanc, all that remains of an +America, an Asia, and a Europe. Then at last, these new continents, in +their turn, will become uninhabitable. The heat will die out as does +the heat from a body whose soul has departed, and life will disappear +from the globe, if not forever, at least for a time. Perhaps then our +sphere will rest from its changes, and will prepare in death to live +again under nobler conditions. + +“But all this my friends, is with the Creator of all things. From the +talking of the work of these infusoria I have been led into too deep a +scrutiny of the secrets of the future.” + +“My dear Cyrus,” said the reporter, “these theories are to me +prophesies. Some day they will be accomplished.” + +“It is a secret with the Almighty,” replied Smith. + +“All this is well and good,” said Pencroff, who had listened with all +his ears, “but will you tell me, Mr. Smith, if Lincoln Island has been +constructed by these infusoria.” + +“No,” replied Smith, “it is of purely volcanic origin.” + +“Then it will probably disappear some day. I hope sincerely we won’t be +here.” + +“No, be easy, Pencroff, we will get away.” + +“In the meantime,” said Spilett, “let us settle ourselves as if +forever. It is never worth while to do anything by halves.” + +This ended the conversation. Breakfast was over, the exploration +continued, and the party soon arrived at the beginning of the swampy +district. + +It was, indeed, a marsh which extended as far as the rounded side +forming the southeastern termination of the island, and measuring +twenty square miles. The soil was formed of a silicious clay mixed with +decayed vegetation. It was covered by confervæ, rushes, sedges, and +here and there by beds of herbage, thick as a velvet carpet. In many +places frozen pools glistened under the sun’s rays. Neither rains, nor +any river swollen by a sudden increase could have produced this water. +One would naturally conclude that this swamp was fed by the +infiltration of water through the soil. And this was the fact. It was +even to be feared that the air here during hot weather, was laden with +that miasma which engenders the marsh fever. Above the aquatic herbs on +the surface of the stagnant waters, a swarm of birds were flying. A +hunter would not have lost a single shot. Wild ducks, teal, and snipe +lived there in flocks, and it was easy to approach these fearless +creatures. So thick were these birds that a charge of shot would +certainly have brought down a dozen of them, but our friends had to +content themselves with their bows and arrows. The slaughter was less, +but the quiet arrow had the advantage of not frightening the birds, +while the sound of fire-arms would have scattered them to every corner +of the swamp. The hunters contented themselves this time with a dozen +ducks, with white bodies, cinnamon-colored belts, green heads, wings +black, white, and red, and feathered beaks. These Herbert recognized as +the “Tadorns.” Top did his share well in the capture of these birds, +whose name was given this swampy district. + +The colonists now had an abundant reserve of aquatic game. When the +time should come the only question would be how to make a proper use of +them, and it was probable that several species of these birds would be, +if not domesticated, at least acclimated, upon the borders of the lake, +which would bring them nearer to the place of consumption. + +About 5 o’clock in the afternoon Smith and his companions turned their +faces homewards. They crossed Tadorn’s Fens, and re-crossed the Mercy +upon the ice, arriving at Granite House at 8 o’clock in the evening. + + + + +CHAPTER XXII. + + +THE TRAPS—THE FOXES—THE PECCARIES —THE WIND VEERS TO THE NORTHWEST —THE +SNOW-STORM—THE BASKET-MAKERS —THE COLDEST SNAP OF WINTER +—CRYSTALLIZATION OF THE SUGAR-MAPLE —THE MYSTERIOUS SHAFTS—THE +PROJECTED EXPLORATION—THE PELLET OF LEAD. + + +The intense cold lasted until the 15th of August, the thermometer never +rising above the point hitherto observed. When the atmosphere was calm +this low temperature could be easily borne; but when the wind blew, the +poor fellows suffered much for want of warmer clothing. Pencroff +regretted that Lincoln Island, instead of harboring so many foxes and +seals, with no fur to speak of, did not shelter some families of bears. + +“Bears,” said he, “are generally well dressed; and I would ask nothing +better for the winter than the loan of their warm cloaks.”. + +“But perhaps,” said Neb, laughing “These bears would not consent to +give you their cloak. Pencroff, these fellows are no Saint Martins.” + +“We would make them, Neb, we would make them,” answered Pencroff in a +tone of authority. + +But these formidable carnivora did not dwell on the island, or if they +did, had not yet shown themselves. Herbert, Pencroff, and the reporter +were constantly at work getting traps on Prospect Plateau and on the +borders of the forest. In the sailor’s opinion any animal whatever +would be a prize, and rodents or carnivora, whichever these new traps +should entice, would be well received at Granite House. These traps +were very simple. They were pits dug in the ground and covered with +branches and grass, which hid the openings. At the bottom they placed +some bait, whose odor would attract the animals. They used their +discretion about the position of their traps, choosing places where +numerous footprints indicated the frequent passage of quadrupeds. Every +day they went to look at them, and at three different times during the +first few days they found in them specimens of those foxes which had +been already seen on the right bank of the Mercy. + +“Pshaw! there are nothing but foxes in this part of the world,” said +Pencroff, as, for the third time, he drew one of these animals out of +the pit. “Good-for-nothing beasts;” + +“Stop,” said Spilett; “they are good for something.” + +“For what?” + +“To serve as bait to attract others!” + +The reporter was right, and from this time the traps were baited with +the dead bodies of foxes. The sailor had made snares out of the threads +of curry-jonc, and these snares were more profitable than the traps. It +was a rare thing for a day to pass without some rabbit from the warren +being captured. It was always a rabbit, but Neb knew how to vary his +sauces, and his companions did not complain. However, once or twice in +the second week in August, the traps contained other and more useful +animals than the foxes. There were some of those wild boars which had +been already noticed at the north of the lake. Pencroff had no need to +ask if these animals were edible, that was evident from their +resemblance to the hog of America and Europe. + +“But these are not hogs, let me tell you,” said Herbert. + +“My boy,” replied the sailor, handing over the trap and drawing out one +of these representatives of the swine family by the little appendage +which served for a tail, “do let me believe them to be hogs.” + +“Why?” + +“Because it pleases me.” + +“You are fond of hogs, then, Pencroff?” + +“I am very fond of them,” replied the sailor, “especially of their +feet, and if any had eight instead of four I would like them twice as +much.” + +These animals were peccaries, belonging to one of the four genera, +which make up that family. This particular species were the +“tajassans,” known by there dark color and the absence of those long +fangs which belong to the others of their race. Peccaries generally +live in herds, and it was likely that these animals abounded in the +woody parts of the island. At all events they were edible from head to +foot, and Pencroff asked nothing more. + +About the 15th of August the weather moderated suddenly by a change of +wind to the northwest. The temperature rose several degrees higher, and +the vapors accumulated in the air were soon resolved into snow. The +whole island was covered with a white mantle, and presented a new +aspect to its inhabitants. It snowed hard for several days and the +ground was covered two feet deep. The wind soon rose with great +violence and from the top of Granite House they could hear the sea +roaring against the reefs. + +At certain angles the wind made eddies in the air, and the snow, +forming itself into high whirling columns, looked like those twisting +waterspouts which vessels attack with cannon. The hurricane, coming +steadily from the northwest, spent its force on the other side of the +island, and the eastern lookout of Granite House preserved it from a +direct attack. + +During this snow-storm, as terrible as those of the polar regions, +neither Smith nor his companions could venture outside. They were +completely housed for five days, from the 20th to the 25th of August. +They heard the tempest roar though Jacamar Woods, which must have +suffered sadly. Doubtless numbers of trees were uprooted, but Pencroff +comforted himself with the reflection that there would be fewer to cut +down. + +“The wind will be wood-cutter; let it alone,” said he. + +How fervently now the inhabitants of Granite House must have thanked +Heaven for having given to them this solid and impenetrable shelter! +Smith had his share of their gratitude, but after all, it was nature +which had hollowed out this enormous cave, and he had only discovered +it. Here all were in safety, the violence of the tempest could not +reach them. If they had built a house of brick and wood on Prospect +Plateau, it could not have resisted the fury of this hurricane. As for +the Chimneys, they heard the billows strike them with such violence +that they knew they must be uninhabitable, for the sea, having entirely +covered their islet, beat upon them with all its force. + +But here at Granite House, between these solid walls which neither wind +nor water could effect, they had nothing to fear. During this +confinement the colonists were not idle. There was plenty of wood in +the storehouse cut into planks, and little by little they completed +their stock of furniture. As far as tables and chairs went they were +certainly solid enough, for the material was not spared. This furniture +was a little too heavy to fulfil its essential purpose of being easily +moved, but it was the pride of Neb and Pencroff, who would not have +exchanged it for the handsomest Buhl. + +Then the carpenters turned basket-makers, and succeeded remarkably well +at this new occupation. + +They had discovered at the northern part of the lake a thick growth of +purple osiers. Before the rainy season, Pencroff and Herbert had +gathered a good many of these useful shrubs; and their branches, being +now well seasoned, could be used to advantage. Their first specimens +were rough; but, thanks to the skill and intelligence of the workmen +consulting together, recalling the models they had seen, and rivalling +each other in their efforts, hampers and baskets of different sizes +here soon added to the stock of the colony. The storehouse was filled +with them, and Neb set away in special baskets his stock of pistachio +nuts and roots of the dragon tree. + +During the last week in August the weather changed again, the +temperature fell a little, and the storm was over. The colonists at +once started out. There must have been at least two feet of snow on the +shore, but it was frozen over the top, which made it easy to walk over. +Smith and his companions climbed up Prospect Plateau. What a change +they beheld! The woods which they had left in bloom, especially the +part nearest to them where the conifers were plenty, were now one +uniform color. + +Everything was white, from the top of Mount Franklin to the +coast—forests, prairie, lake, river, beach. The waters of the Mercy ran +under a vault of ice, which cracked and broke with a loud noise at +every change of tide. Thousands of birds—ducks and wood-peckers—flew +over the surface of the lake. The rocks between which the cascade +plunged to the borders of the Plateau were blocked up with ice. One +would have said that the water leaped out of a huge gargoyle, cut by +some fantastic artist of the Renaissance. To calculate the damage done +to the forest by this hurricane would be impossible until the snow had +entirely disappeared. + +Spilett, Pencroff, and Herbert took this opportunity to look after +their traps and had hard work finding them under their bed of snow. +There was danger of their falling in themselves; a humiliating thing to +be caught in one’s own trap! They were spared this annoyance, however, +and found the traps had been untouched; not an animal had been caught, +although there were a great many footprints in the neighborhood, among +others, very clearly impressed marks of claws. + +Herbert at once classified these carnivora among the cat tribe, a +circumstance which justified the engineer’s belief in the existence of +dangerous beasts on Lincoln Island. Doubtless these beasts dwelt in the +dense forests of the Far West; but driven by hunger, they had ventured +as far as Prospect Plateau. Perhaps they scented the inhabitants of +Granite House. + +“What, exactly, are these carnivora?” asked Pencroff. + +“They are tigers,” replied Herbert. + +“I thought those animals were only found in warm countries.” + +“In the New World,” replied the lad, “they are to be found from Mexico +to the pampas of Buenos Ayres. Now, as Lincoln Island is in almost the +same latitude as La Plata, it is not surprising that tigers are found +here.” + +“All right, we will be on our guard,” replied Pencroff. + +In the meantime, the temperature rising, the snow began to melt, it +came on to rain, and gradually the white mantle disappeared. +Notwithstanding the bad weather the colonists renewed their stock of +provisions, both animal and vegetable. + +This necessitated excursions into the forest, and thus they discovered +how many trees had been beaten down by the hurricane. The sailor and +Neb pushed forward with their wagon as far as the coal deposit in order +to carry back some fuel. They saw on their way that the chimney of the +pottery oven had been much damaged by the storm; at least six feet had +been blown down. + +They also renewed their stock of wood as well as that of coal, and the +Mercy having become free once more, they employed the current to draw +several loads to Granite House. It might be that the cold season was +not yet over. + +A visit had been made to the Chimneys also, and the colonists could not +be sufficiently grateful that this had not been their home during the +tempest. The sea had left undoubted signs of its ravages. Lashed by the +fury of the wind from the offing, and rushing over Safety Island, it +spent its full force upon these passages, leaving them half full of +sand and the rocks thickly covered with seaweed. + +While Neb, Herbert, and Pencroff spent their time in hunting and +renewing their supply of fuel, Smith andSpilett set to work to clear +out the Chimneys. They found the forge and furnaces almost unhurt, so +carefully protected had they been by the banks of sand which the +colonists had built around them. + +It was a fortunate thing that they laid in a fresh supply of fuel, for +the colonists had not yet seen the end of the intense cold. It is well +known that in the Northern Hemisphere, the month of February is noted +for its low temperature. The same rule held good in the Southern +Hemisphere, and the end of August, which is the February of North +America, did not escape from this climatic law. + +About the 25th, after another snow and rain storm, the wind veered to +the southeast, and suddenly the cold became intense. In the engineer’s +opinion, a Fahrenheit thermometer would have indicated about eight +degrees below zero, and the cold was rendered more severe by a cutting +wind which lasted for several days. + +The colonists were completely housed again, and as they were obliged to +block up all their windows, only leaving one narrow opening for +ventilation, the consumption of candles was considerable. In order to +economize them, the colonists often contented themselves with only the +light from the fire; for fuel was plenty. + +Once or twice some of them ventured to the beach, among the blocks of +ice which were heaped up there by every fresh tide. But they soon +climbed up to Granite House again. This ascent was very painful, as +their hands were frostbitten by holding on to the frozen sides of the +ladder. + +There were still many leisure hours to be filled up during this long +confinement, so Smith undertook another indoor occupation. + +The only sugar which they had had up to this time was a liquid +substance which they had procured by making deep cuts in the bark of +the maple tree. They collected this liquid in jars and used it in this +condition for cooking purposes. It improved with age, becoming whiter +and more like a syrup in consistency. But they could do better than +this, and one day Cyrus Smith announced to his companions that he was +going to turn them into refiners. + +“Refiners! I believe that’s a warm trade?” said Pencroff. + +“Very warm!” replied the engineer. + +“Then it will suit this season!” answered the sailor. + +Refining did not necessitate a stock of complicated tools or skilled +workmen; it was a very simple operation. + +To crystallize this liquid they first clarified it, by putting it on +the fire in earthenware jars, and submitting it to evaporation. Soon a +scum rose to the surface, which, when it began to thicken, Neb removed +carefully with a wooden ladle. This hastened the evaporation, and at +the same time prevented it from scorching. + +After several hours boiling over a good fire, which did as much good to +the cooks as it did to the boiling liquid, it turned into a thick +syrup. This syrup was poured into clay moulds which they had made +beforehand, in various shapes in the same kitchen furnace. + +The next day the syrup hardened, forming cakes and loaves. It was sugar +of a reddish color, but almost transparent, and of a delicious taste. + +The cold continued until the middle of September, and the inmates of +Granite House began to find their captivity rather tedious. Almost +every day they took a run out-doors, but they always soon returned. +They were constantly at work over their household duties, and talked +while they worked. + +Smith instructed his companions in everything, and especially explained +to them the practical applications of science. + +The colonists had no library at their disposal, but the engineer was a +book, always ready, always open at the wished-for page. A book which +answered their every question, and one which they often read. Thus the +time passed, and these brave man had no fear for the future. + +However, they were all anxious for the end of their captivity, and +longed to see, if not fine weather, at least a cessation of the intense +cold. If they had only had warmer clothing, they would have attempted +excursions to the downs and to Tadorns’ Fens, for game would have been +easy to approach, and the hunt would assuredly have been fruitful. But +Smith insisted that no one should compromise his health, as he had need +of every hand; and his advice was taken. + +The most impatient of the prisoners, after Pencroff, was Top. The poor +dog found himself in close quarters in Granite House, and ran from room +to room, showing plainly the uneasiness he felt at this confinement. + +Smith often noticed that whenever he approached the dark well +communicating with the sea, which had its opening in the rear of the +storehouse, Top whined in a most curious manner, and ran around and +around the opening, which had been covered over with planks of wood. +Sometimes he even tried to slip his paws under the planks, as if trying +to raise them up, and yelped in a way which indicated at the same time +anger and uneasiness. + +The engineer several times noticed this strange behavior, and wondered +what there could be in the abyss to have such a peculiar effect upon +this intelligent dog. + +This well, of course, communicated with the sea. Did it then branch off +into narrow passages through the rock-work of the island? Was it in +communication with other caves? Did any sea-monsters come into it from +time to time from the bottom of these pits? + +The engineer did not know what to think, and strange thoughts passed +through his mind. Accustomed to investigate scientific truths, he could +not pardon himself for being drawn into the region of the mysterious +and supernatural; but how explain why Top, the most sensible of dogs, +who never lost his time in barking at the moon, should insist upon +exploring this abyss with nose and ear, if there was nothing there to +arouse his suspicions? + +Top’s conduct perplexed Smith more than he cared to own to himself. +However, the engineer did not mention this to any one but Spilett, +thinking it useless to worry his companions with what might be, after +all, only a freak of the dog. + +At last the cold spell was over. They had rain, snow-squalls, +hail-storms, and gales of wind, but none of these lasted long. The ice +thawed and the snow melted; the beach, plateau, banks of the Mercy, and +the forest were again accessible. The return of spring rejoiced the +inmates of Granite House, and they soon passed all their time in the +open air, only returning to eat and sleep. + +They hunted a good deal during the latter part of September, which led +Pencroff to make fresh demands for those fire-arms which he declared +Smith had promised him. Smith always put him off, knowing that without +a special stock of tools it would be almost impossible to make a gun +which would be of any use to them. + +Besides, he noticed that Herbert and Spilett had become very clever +archers, that all sorts of excellent game, both feathered and +furred—agoutis, kangaroos, cabiais, pigeons, bustards, wild ducks, and +snipe—fell under their arrows; consequently the firearms could wait. +But the stubborn sailor did not see it in this light, and constantly +reminded the engineer that he had not provided them with guns; and +Gideon Spilett supported Pencroff. + +“If,” said he, “the island contains, as we suppose, wild beasts, we +must consider how to encounter and exterminate them. The time may come +when this will be our first duty.” + +But just now it was not the question of firearms which occupied Smith’s +mind, but that of clothes. Those which the colonists were wearing had +lasted through the winter, but could not hold out till another. What +they must have at any price was skins of the carnivora, or wool of the +ruminants; and as moufflons (mountain goats), were plenty, they must +consider how to collect a flock of them which they could keep for the +benefit of the colony. They would also lay out a farm yard in a +favorable part of the island, where they could have an enclosure for +domestic animals and a poultry yard. + +These important projects must be carried out during the good weather. +Consequently, in view of these future arrangements, it was important to +undertake a reconnoissance into the unexplored part of Lincoln Island, +to wit:—the high forests which extended along the right bank of the +Mercy, from its mouth to the end of Serpentine Peninsula. But they must +be sure of their weather, and a month must yet elapse before it would +be worth while to undertake this exploration. While they were waiting +impatiently, an incident occurred which redoubled their anxiety to +examine the whole island. + +It was now the 24th of October. On this day Pencroff went to look after +his traps which he always kept duly baited. In one of them, he found +three animals, of a sort welcome to the kitchen. It was a female +peccary with her two little ones. Pencroff returned to Granite House, +delighted with his prize, and, as usual, made a great talk about it. + +“Now, we’ll have a good meal, Mr Smith,” cried he, “and you too, Mr. +Spilett, must have some.” + +“I shall be delighted,” said the reporter, “but what is it you want me +to eat?” + +“Sucking pig,” said Pencroff. + +“Oh, a suckling-pig! To hear you talk one would think you had brought +back a stuffed partridge!” + +“Umph,” said Pencroff, “so you turn up your nose at my suckling pig?” + +“No,” answered Spilett coolly, “provided one does not get too much of +them—” + +“Very well, Mr. Reporter!” returned the sailor, who did not like to +hear his game disparaged. “You are getting fastidious! Seven months +ago, when we were cast upon this island, you would have been only too +glad to have come across such game.” + +“Well, well,” said the reporter, “men are never satisfied.” + +“And now,” continued Pencroff, “I hope Neb will distinguish himself. +Let us see; these little peccaries are only three months old, they will +be as tender as quail. Come, Neb, I will superintend the cooking of +them myself.” + +The sailor, followed by Neb, hastened to the kitchen, and was soon +absorbed over the oven. The two prepared a magnificent repast; the two +little peccaries, kangaroo soup, smoked ham, pistachio nuts, +dragon-tree wine, Oswego tea; in a word, everything of the best. But +the favorite dish of all was the savory peccaries made into a stew. At +5 o’clock, dinner was served in the dining-room of Granite House. The +kangaroo soup smoked upon the table. It was pronounced excellent. + +After the soup came the peccaries, which Pencroff begged to be allowed +to carve, and of which he gave huge pieces to every one. These suckling +pigs were indeed delicious, and Pencroff plied his knife and fork with +intense earnestness, when suddenly a cry and an oath escaped him. + +“What’s the matter?” said Smith. + +“The matter is that I have just lost a tooth!” replied the sailor. + +“Are there pebbles in your peccaries, then?” said Spilett. + +“It seems so,” said the sailor, taking out of his mouth the object +which had cost him a grinder. + +It was not a pebble, it was a leaden pellet. + + + + +PART II +THE ABANDONED + + + + +CHAPTER XXIII. + + +CONCERNING THE LEADEN PELLET—MAKING A CANOE—HUNTING—IN THE TOP OF A +KAURI—NOTHING TO INDICATE THE PRESENCE OF MAN—THE TURTLE ON ITS +BACK—THE TURTLE DISAPPEARS—SMITH’S EXPLANATION. + + +It was exactly seven months since the passengers in the balloon had +been thrown upon Lincoln Island. In all this time no human being had +been seen. No smoke had betrayed the presence of man upon he island. No +work of man’s hands, either ancient or modern, had attested his +passage. Not only did it seem uninhabited at present, but it appeared +to have been so always. And now all the framework of deductions fell +before a little bit of metal found in the body of a pig. + +It was certainly a bullet from a gun, and what but a human being would +be so provided? + +When Pencroff had placed it upon the table, his companions looked at it +with profound astonishment. The possibilities suggested by this +seemingly trivial incident flashed before them. The sudden appearance +of a supernatural being could not have impressed them more. + +Smith instantly began to reason upon the theories which this incident, +as surprising as it was unexpected, suggested. Taking the bit of lead +between his fingers he turned it round and about for some time before +he spoke. + +“You are sure, Pencroff,” he asked, at length, “that the peccary was +hardly three months old?” + +“I’m sure, sir,” answered the sailor. “It was sucking its mother when I +found it in the ditch.” + +“Well, then, that proves that within three months a gun has been fired +upon Lincoln Island.” + +“And that the bullet has wounded, though not mortally, this little +animal,” added Spilett. + +“Undoubtedly,” replied Smith; “and now let us see what conclusions are +to be drawn from this incident. Either the island was inhabited before +our arrival, or men have landed here within three months. How these men +arrived, whether voluntarily or involuntarily, whether by landing or by +shipwreck, cannot be settled at present. Neither have we any means of +determining whether they are Europeans or Malays, friends or enemies; +nor do we know whether they are living here at present or whether they +have gone. But these questions are too important to be allowed to +remain undecided.” + +“No!” cried the sailor springing from the table. “There can be no men +besides ourselves on Lincoln Island. Why, the island is not large: and +if it had been inhabited, we must have met some one of its people +before this.” + +“It would, indeed, be astonishing if we had not,” said Herbert. + +“But it would be much more astonishing, I think,” remarked the +reporter, “if this little beast had been born with a bullet in his +body!” + +“Unless,” suggested Neb, seriously, “Pencroff had had it—” + +“How’s that, Neb?” interrupted the sailor, “I, to have had a bullet in +my jaw for five or six months, without knowing it? Where would it have +been?” he added, opening his mouth and displaying the thirty-two +splendid teeth that ornamented it. “Look, Neb, and if you can find one +broken one in the whole set you may pull out half-a-dozen!” + +“Neb’s theory is inadmissible,” said Smith, who, in spite of the +gravity of his thoughts, could not restrain a smile. “It is certain +that a gun has been discharged on the island within three months. But I +am bound to believe that the persons on this island have been here but +a short time, or else simply landed in passing; as, had the island had +inhabitants when we made the ascent of Mount Franklin, we must have +seen them or been seen. It is more probable, that within the past few +weeks some people have been shipwrecked somewhere upon the coast; the +thing, therefore, to do is to discover this point.” + +“I think we should act cautiously,” said the reporter. + +“I think so, too,” replied Smith, “as I fear that they must be Malay +pirates;” + +“How would it do, Mr. Smith,” said the sailor, “to build A canoe so +that we could go up this river, or, if need be, round the coast? It +won’t do to be taken unawares.” + +“It’s a good idea,” answered the engineer; “but we have not the time +now. It would take at least a month to build a canoe—” + +“A regular one, yes,” rejoined the sailor; “but we don’t want it to +stand the sea. I will guarantee to make one in less than five days that +will do to use on the Mercy.” + +“Build a boat in five days,” cried Neb. + +“Yes, Neb, one of Indian fashion.” + +“Of wood?” demanded the negro, still incredulous. + +“Of wood, or what is better, of bark,” answered Pencroff. “Indeed, Mr. +Smith, it could be done in five days!” + +“Be it so, then,” answered the engineer. “In five days.” + +“But we must look out for ourselves in the meantime!” said Herbert. + +“With the utmost caution, my friends,” answered Smith. “And be very +careful to confine your hunting expeditions to the neighborhood of +Granite House.” + +The dinner was finished in lower spirits than Pencroff had expected. +The incident of the bullet proved beyond doubt that the island had +been, or was now, inhabited by others, and such a discovery awakened +the liveliest anxiety in the breasts of the colonists. + +Smith and Spilett, before retiring, had a long talk about these things. +They questioned, if by chance this incident had an connection with the +unexplained rescue of the engineer, and other strange events which they +had encountered in so many ways. Smith, after having discussed the pros +and cons of the question, ended by saying:— + +“In short, Spilett, do you want to know my opinion?” + +“Yes, Cyrus.” + +“Well, this is it. No matter how minutely we examine the island, we +will find nothing!” + +Pencroff began his work the next day. He did not mean to build a boat +with ribs and planks, but simply a flat bottomed float, which would do +admirably in the Mercy, especially in the shallow water and its +sources. Strips of bark fastened together would be sufficient for their +purpose, and in places where a portage would be necessary the affair +would be neither heavy nor cumbersome. The sailor’s idea was to fasten +the strips of bark together with clinched nails, and thus to make the +craft staunch. + +The first thing was to select trees furnishing a supple and tough bark. +Now, it had happened that the last storm had blown down a number of +Douglass pines, which were perfectly adapted to this purpose. Some of +these lay prone upon the earth, and all the colonists had to do was to +strip them of their bark, though this indeed was somewhat difficult, on +account of the awkwardness of their tools. + +While the sailor, assisted by the engineer was thus occupied, Herbert +and Spilett, who had been made purveyors to the colony, were not idle. +The reporter could not help admiring the young lad, who had acquired a +remarkable proficiency in the use of the bow and arrows, and who +exhibited, withal, considerable hardiness and coolness. The two +hunters, remembering the caution of the engineer, never ventured more +than two miles from Granite House, but the outskirts of the forest +furnished a sufficient supply of agoutis, cabiais, kangaroos, +peccaries, etc., and although the traps had not done so well since the +cold had abated, the warren furnished a supply sufficient for the wants +of the colonists. + +Often, while on these excursions, Herbert conversed with Spilett about +the incident of the bullet and of the engineer’s conclusions, and one +day—the 26th of October—he said:— + +“Don’t you think it strange, Mr. Spilett, that any people should have +been wrecked on this island, and never have followed up the coast to +Granite House?” + +“Very strange if they are still here,” answered the reporter, “but not +at all astonishing if they are not.” + +“Then you think they have gone again?” + +“It is likely, my boy, that, if they had staid any time, or were still +here, something would have discovered their presence.” + +“But if they had been able to get off again they were not really +shipwrecked.” + +“No, Herbert, they were what I should call shipwrecked temporarily. +That is, it is possible that they were driven by stress of weather upon +the island, without having to abandon their vessel, and when the wind +moderated they set out again.” + +“One thing is certain,” said Herbert, “and that is, that Mr. Smith has +always seemed to dread, rather than to desire, the presence of human +beings on our island.” + +“The reason is, that he knows that only Malays frequent these seas, and +these gentlemen are a kind of rascals that had better be avoided.” + +“Is it not possible, sir, that some time we will discover traces of +their landing and, perhaps, be able to settle this point?” + +“It is not unlikely, my boy. An abandoned camp or the remains of a +fire, we would certainly notice, and these are what we will look for on +our exploration.” + +The hunters, talking in this way, found themselves in a portion of the +forest near the Mercy, remarkable for its splendid trees. Among others, +were those magnificent conifera, called by the New Zealanders “kauris,” +rising mere than 200 feet in height. + +“I have an idea, Mr. Spilett,” said Herbert, “supposing I climb to the +top of one of these kauris, I could see, perhaps, for a good ways.” + +“It’s a good idea,” answered the other, “but can you climb one of these +giants?” + +“I am going to try, anyhow,” exclaimed the boy, springing upon the +lower branches of one, which grew in such a manner as to make the tree +easy to mount. In a few minutes he was in its top, high above all the +surrounding leafage of the forest. + +From this height, the eye could take in all the southern portion of the +island between Claw Cape on the southeast and Reptile Promontory on the +southwest. To the northwest rose Mount Franklin, shutting out more than +one-fourth of the horizon. + +But Herbert, from his perch, could overlook the very portion of the +island which was giving, or had given, refuge to the strangers whose +presence they suspected. The lad looked about him with great attention, +first towards the sea, where not a sail was visible, although it was +possible that a ship, and especially one dismasted, lying close in to +shore, would be concealed from view by the trees which hid the coast. +In the woods of the Far West nothing could be seen. The forest formed a +vast impenetrable dome many miles in extent, without an opening or +glade. Even the course of the Mercy could not be seen, and it might be +that there were other streams flowing westward, which were equally +invisible. + +But, other signs failing, could not the lad catch in the air some smoke +that would indicate the presence of man? The atmosphere was pure, and +the slightest vapor was sharply outlined against the sky. For an +instant Herbert thought he saw a thin film rising in the west, but a +more careful observation convinced him that he was mistaken. He looked +again, however, with all care, and his sight was excellent. No, +certainly, it was nothing. + +Herbert climbed down the tree, and he and the reporter returned to +Granite House. There Smith listened to the lad’s report without +comment. It was plain he would not commit himself until after the +island had been explored. + +Two days later—the 28th of October—another unaccountable incident +happened. + +In strolling along the beach, two miles from Granite House, Herbert and +Neb had been lucky enough to capture a splendid specimen of the +chelonia mydas (green turtle), whose carapace shone with emerald +reflections. Herbert had caught sight of it moving among the rocks +towards the sea. + +“Stop him, Neb, stop him!” he cried. + +Neb ran to it. + +“It’s a fine animal,” said Neb, “but how are we going to keep it?” + +“That’s easy enough, Neb. All we have to do is to turn it on its back, +and then it cannot get away. Take your spear and do as I do.” + +The reptile had shut itself in its shell, so that neither its head nor +eyes were visible, and remained motionless as a rock. The lad and the +negro placed their spears underneath it, and, after some difficulty, +succeeded in turning it over. It measured three feet in length, and +must have weighed at least 400 pounds. + +“There, that will please Pencroff,” cried Neb. + +Indeed, the sailor could not fail to be pleased, as the flesh of these +turtles, which feed upon eel-grass, is very savory. + +“And now what can we do with our game?” asked Neb; “we can’t carry it +to Granite House.” + +“Leave it here, since it cannot turn back again,” answered Herbert, +“and we will come for it with the cart.” + +Neb agreed, and Herbert, as an extra precaution, which the negro +thought useless, propped up the reptile with large stones. Then the two +returned to Granite House, following the beach, on which the tide was +down. Herbert, wishing to surprise Pencroff, did not tell him of the +prize which was lying on its back upon the sand; but two hours later +Neb and he returned with the cart to where they had left it, and—the +“splendid specimen of chelonia mydas” was not there! + +The two looked about them. Certainly, this was where they had left it. +Here were the stones he had used, and, therefore, the lad could not be +mistaken. + +“Did the beast turn over, after all?” asked Neb. + +“It seems so,” replied Herbert, puzzled, and examining the stones +scattered over the sand. + +“Pencroff will be disappointed.” + +“And Mr. Smith will be troubled to explain this!” thought Herbert. + +“Well,” said Neb, who wished to conceal their misadventure, “we won’t +say anything about it.” + +“Indeed, we will tell the whole story,” answered Herbert. + +And taking with them the useless cart, they returned to Granite House. + +At the shipyard they found the engineer and the sailor working +together. Herbert related all that happened. + +“You foolish fellows,” cried the sailor, “to let at least fifty pounds +of soup, escape!” + +“But, Pencroff,” exclaimed Neb, “it was not our fault that the reptile +got away; haven’t I told you we turned it on its back?” + +“Then you didn’t turn it enough!” calmly asserted the stubborn sailor. + +“Not enough!” cried Herbert; and he told how he had taken care to prop +the turtle up with stones. + +“Then it was a miracle!” exclaimed Pencroff. + +“Mr. Smith,” asked Herbert, “I thought that turtles once placed on +their backs could not get over again, especially the very large ones?” + +“That is the fact,” answered Smith. + +“Then how did it—” + +“How far off from the sea did you leave this turtle,” asked the +engineer, who had stopped working and was turning this incident over in +his mind. + +“About fifteen feet,” answered Herbert. + +“And it was low water?” + +“Yes, sir.” + +“Well,” responded the engineer, “what the turtle could not do on land, +he could do in water. When the tide rose over him he turned over, +and—tranquilly paddled off.” + +“How foolish we are,” cried Neb. + +“That is just what I said you were,” answered Pencroff. + +Smith had given this explanation, which was doubtless admissible; but +was he himself satisfied with it? He did not venture to say that. + + + + +CHAPTER XXIV. + + +TRIAL OF THE CANOE—A WRECK ON THE SHORE—THE TOW—JETSAM POINT—INVENTORY +OF THE BOX—WHAT PENCROFF WANTED—A BIBLE—A VERSE FROM THE BIBLE. + + +On the 29th of October the canoe was finished. Pencroff had kept his +word, and had built, in five days, a sort of bark shell, stiffened with +flexible crejimba rods. A seat at either end, another midway to keep it +open, a gunwale for the thole-pins of a pair of oars, and a paddle to +steer with, completed this canoe, which was twelve feet in length, and +did not weigh 200 pounds. + +“Hurrah!” cried the sailor, quite ready to applaud his own success. +“With this we can make the tour of—” + +“Of the world?” suggested Spilett. + +“No, but of the island. Some stones for ballast, a mast in the bow, +with a sail which Mr. Smith will make some day, and away we’ll go! But +now let us try our new ship, for we must see if it will carry all of +us.” + +The experiment was made. Pencroff, by a stroke of the paddle, brought +the canoe close to the shore by a narrow passage between the rocks, and +he was confident that they could at once make a trial trip of the craft +by following the bank as far as the lower point where the rocks ended. + +As they were stepping in, Neb cried:— + +“But your boat leaks, Pencroff.” + +“Oh, that’s nothing, Neb,” answered the sailor. “The wood has to drink! +But in two days it will not show, and there will be as little water in +our canoe as in the stomach of a drunkard! Come, get in!” + +They all embarked, and Pencroff pushed off. The weather was splendid, +the sea was as calm as a lake, and the canoe could venture upon it with +as much security as upon the tranquil current of the Mercy. + +Neb and Herbert took the oars, and Pencroff sat in the stern with the +paddle as steersman. + +The sailor crossed the channel, and rounded the southern point of the +islet. A gentle breeze was wafted from the south. There were no +billows, but the canoe rose and fell with the long undulations of the +sea, and they rowed out half a mile from the coast so as to get a view +of the outline of Mount Franklin. Then, putting about, Pencroff +returned towards the mouth of the river, and followed along the rounded +shore which hid the low marshy ground of Tadorn’s Fen. The point, made +longer by the bend of the coast, was three miles from the Mercy, and +the colonists resolved to go past it far enough to obtain a hasty +glance at the coast as far as Claw Cape. + +The canoe followed along the shore, keeping off some two cables length +so as to avoid the line of rocks beginning to be covered by the tide. +The cliff, beginning at the mouth of the river, lowered as it +approached the promontory. It was a savage-looking, unevenly-arranged +heap of granite blocks, very different from the curtain of Prospect +Plateau. There was not a trace of vegetation on this sharp point, which +projected two miles beyond the forest, like a giant’s arm, thrust out +from a green sleeve. + +The canoe sped easily along. Spilett sketched the outline of the coast +in his note-book, and Neb, Pencroff, and Herbert discussed the features +of their new domain; and as they moved southward the two Mandible Capes +seemed to shut together and enclose Union Bay. As to Smith, he regarded +everything in silence, and from his distrustful expression it seemed as +if he was observing some suspicious land. + +The canoe had reached the end of the point and was about doubling it, +when Herbert rose, and pointing out a black object, said:— + +“What is that down there on the sand?” + +Every one looked in the direction indicated. + +“There is something there, indeed,” said the reporter. “It looks like a +wreck half buried in the sand.” + +“Oh, I see what it is!” cried Pencroff. + +“What?” asked Neb. + +“Barrels! they are barrels, and, may be, they are full!” + +“To shore, Pencroff!” said Smith. + +And with a few strokes the canoe was driven into a little cove, and the +party went up the beach. + +Pencroff was not mistaken. There were two barrels half buried in the +sand; but firmly fastened to them was a large box, which, borne up by +them, had been floated on to the shore. + +“Has there been a shipwreck here?” asked Herbert. + +“Evidently,” answered Spilett. + +“But what is in this box?” exclaimed Pencroff, with a natural +impatience. “What is in this box? It is closed, and we have nothing +with which to raise the lid. However, with a stone—” + +And the sailor picked up a heavy rock, and was about to break one of +the sides, when the engineer, stopping him, said:— + +“Cannot you moderate your impatience for about an hour, Pencroff?” + +“But, think, Mr. Smith! May be there is everything we want in it!” + +“We will find out, Pencroff,” answered the engineer, “but do not break +the box, as it will be useful. Let us transport it to Granite House, +where we can readily open it without injuring it. It is all prepared +for the voyage, and since it has floated here, it can float again to +the river month.” + +“You are right, sir, and I am wrong,” answered the sailor, “but one is +not always his own master!” + +The engineer’s advice was good. It was likely that the canoe could not +carry the things probably enclosed in the box, since the latter was so +heavy that it had to be buoyed up by two empty barrels. It was, +therefore, better to tow it in this condition to the shore at the +Granite House. + +And now the important question was, from whence came this jetsam? Smith +and his companions searched the beach for several hundred paces, but +there was nothing else to be seen. They scanned the sea, Herbert and +Neb climbing up a high rock, but not a sail was visible on the horizon. + +Nevertheless, there must have been a shipwreck, and perhaps this +incident was connected with the incident of the bullet. Perhaps the +strangers had landed upon another part of the island. Perhaps they were +still there. But the natural conclusion of the colonists was that these +strangers could not be Malay pirates, since the jetsam was evidently of +European or American production. + +They all went back to the box, which measured five feet by three. It +was made of oak, covered with thick leather, studded with copper nails. +The two large barrels, hermetically sealed, but which sounded empty, +were fastened to its sides by means of strong ropes, tied in what +Pencroff recognized to be “sailor’s knots.” That it was uninjured +seemed to be accounted for by the fact of its having been thrown upon +the sand instead of the rocks. And it was evident that it had not been +long either in the sea or upon the beach. It seemed probable, also, +that the water had not penetrated, and that its contents would be found +uninjured. It therefore looked as if this box must have been thrown +overboard from a disabled ship making for the island. And, in the hope +that it would reach the island, where they would find it later, the +passengers had taken the precaution to buoy it up. + +“We will tow this box to Granite House,” said the engineer, “and take +an inventory of its contents; then, if we discover any of the survivors +of this supposed shipwreck, we will return them what is theirs. If we +find no one—” + +“We will keep the things ourselves!” cried the sailor. “But I wish I +knew what is in it.” + +The sailor was already working at the prize, which would doubtless +float at high water. One of the ropes which was fastened to the barrels +was partly untwisted and served to fasten these latter to the canoe. +Then, Neb and Pencroff dug out the sand with their oars, and soon the +canoe, with the jetsam in tow, was rounding the promontory to which +they gave the name of Jetsam Point. The box was so heavy that the +barrels just sufficed to sustain it above the water; and Pencroff +feared each moment that it would break loose and sink to the bottom. +Fortunately his fears were groundless, and in an hour and a half the +canoe touched the bank before Granite House. + +The boat and the prize were drawn upon the shore, and as the tide was +beginning to fall, both soon rested on dry ground. Neb brought some +tools so as to open the box without injury, and the colonists forthwith +proceeded to examine its contents. + +Pencroff did not try to hide his anxiety. He began by unfastening the +barrels, which would be useful in the future, then the fastenings were +forced with pincers, and the cover taken off. A second envelope, of +zinc, was enclosed within the case, in such a manner that its contents +were impervious to moisture. + +“Oh!” cried Pencroff, “they must be preserves which are inside.” + +“I hope for something better than that,” answered the reporter. + +“If it should turn out that there was—” muttered the sailor. + +“What?” asked Neb. + +“Nothing!” + +The zinc cover was split, lengthwise and turned back, and, little by +little, many different objects were lifted out on the sand. At each new +discovery Pencroff cheered, Herbert clapped his hands, and Neb danced. +There were books which made the lad crazy with pleasure, and cooking +implements which Neb covered with kisses. + +In truth the colonists had reason to be satisfied, as the following +inventory, copied from Spilett’s note-book, will show:— + +TOOLS.—3 pocket-knives, with-several blades, 2 wood-chopper’s hatchets, +2 carpenter’s hatchets, 3 planes, I adzes, l axe, 6 cold chisels, 2 +files, 3 hammers, 3 gimlets, 2 augers, 10 bags of nails and screws, 3 +saws of different sizes, 2 boxes of needles. + +ARMS.—2 flint-lock guns, 2 percussion guns, 2 central-fire carbines; 5 +cutlasses, 4 boarding sabres, 2 barrels of powder, holding l5 pounds +each, l2 boxes of caps. + +INSTRUMENTS.—1 sextant, 1 opera-glass, 1 spyglass, 1 box compass, 1 +pocket compass, 1 Fahrenheit thermometer, 1 aneroid barometer, 1 box +containing a photographic apparatus, together with glasses, chemicals, +etc. + +CLOTHING.—2 dozen shirts of a peculiar material resembling wool, though +evidently a vegetable substance; 3 dozen stockings of the same +material. + +UTENSILS.—1 Iron pot, 6 tinned copper stewpans, 3 iron plates, 10 +aluminium knives and forks, 2 kettles, 1 small portable stove. 5 table +knives. + +BOOKS.-l Bible, 1 atlas, 1 dictionary of Polynesian languages, 1 +dictionary of the Natural Sciences, 3 reams of blank paper, 2 blank +books. + +“Unquestionably,” said the reporter, after the inventory had been +taken, “the owner of this box was a practical man! Tools, arms, +instruments, clothing, utensils, books, nothing is wanting. One would +say that he had made ready for a shipwreck before-hand!” + +“Nothing, Indeed, is wanting,” murmured Smith, thoughtfully. + +“And it is a sure thing,” added Herbert, “that the ship that brought +this box was not a Malay pirate!” + +“Unless its owner had been taken prisoner,” said Pencroff. + +“That is not likely,” answered the reporter. “It is more probable that +an American or European ship has been driven to this neighborhood, and +that the passengers, wishing to save what was, at least, necessary, +have prepared this box and have thrown it overboard.” + +“And do you think so, Mr. Smith?” asked Herbert. + +“Yes, my boy,” answered the engineer, “that might have been the case. +It is possible, that, anticipating a ship wreck, this chest has been +prepared, so that it might be found again on the coast—” + +“But the photographic apparatus!” observed the sailor incredulously. + +“As to that,” answered the engineer, “I do not see its use; what we, as +well as any other ship wrecked person, would have valued more, would +have been a greater assortment of clothing and more ammunition!” + +“But have none of these things any mark by which we can tell where they +came from,” askedSpilett. + +They looked to see. Each article was examined attentively, but, +contrary to custom, neither books, instruments, nor arms had any name +or mark; nevertheless, they were in perfect order, and seemed never to +have been used. So also with the tools and utensils; everything was +new, and this went to prove that the things had not been hastily thrown +together in the box, but that their selection had been made +thoughtfully and with care. This, also, was evident from the zinc case +which had kept everything watertight, and which could not have been +soldered in a moment. + +The two dictionaries and the Bible were in English, and the latter +showed that it had been often read. The Atlas was a splendid work, +containing maps of every part of the world, and many charts laid out on +Mercator’s Projection. The nomenclature in this book was in French, but +neither in it, nor in any of the others, did the name of the editor or +publisher appear. + +The colonists, therefore, were unable to even conjecture the +nationality of the ship that had so recently passed near them. But no +matter where it came from, this box enriched the party on Lincoln +Island. Until now, in transforming the products of nature, they had +created everything for themselves, and had succeeded by their own +intelligence. Did it not now seem as if Providence had intended to +reward them by placing these divers products of human industry in their +hands? Therefore, with one accord, they all rendered thanks to Heaven. + +Nevertheless, Pencroff was not entirely satisfied. It appeared that the +box did not contain something to which he attached an immense +importance, and as its contests lessened, his cheers had become less +hearty, and when the inventory was closed, he murmured:— + +“That’s all very fine, but you see there is nothing for me here!” + +“Why, what did you expect, Pencroff?” exclaimed Neb. + +“A half pound of tobacco,” answered the sailor, “and then I would have +been perfectly happy!” + +The discovery of this jetsam made the thorough exploration of the +island more necessary than ever. It was, therefore, agreed that they +should set out early the next morning, proceeding to the western coast +via the Mercy. If anyone had been shipwrecked on that part of the +island, they were doubtless without resources, and help must be given +them at once. + +During the day the contents of the box were carried to Granite House +and arranged in order in the great hall. And that evening—the 29th of +October—Herbert before retiring asked Mr. Smith to read some passages +from the Bible. + +“Gladly,” answered the engineer, taking the sacred book in his hands; +when Pencroff checking him, said:— + +“Mr. Smith, I am superstitious. Open the book at random and read the +first verse which you meet with. We will see if it applies to our +situation.” + +Smith smiled at the words of the sailor, but yielding to his wishes he +opened the Bible where the marker lay between the leaves. Instantly his +eye fell upon a red cross made with a crayon, opposite the 8th verse of +the seventh chapter of St. Matthew. + +He read these words:— + +“For every one that asketh, receiveth; and he that seeketh, findeth.” + + + + +CHAPTER XXV. + + +THE DEPARTURE—THE RISING TIDE—ELMS AND OTHER TREES—DIFFERENT PLANTS—THE +KINGFISHER—APPEARANCE OF THE FOREST—THE GIGANTIC EUCALYPTI—WHY THEY ARE +CALLED FEVER-TREES—MONKEYS—THE WATERFALL—ENCAMPMENT FOR THE NIGHT. + + +The next day—the 30th of October—everything was prepared for the +proposed exploration, which these last events had made so necessary. +Indeed, as things had turned out, the colonists could well imagine +themselves in a condition to give, rather than to receive, help. + +It was agreed that they ascend the Mercy as far as practicable. They +would thus be able to transport their arms and provisions a good part +of the way without fatigue. + +It was also necessary to think, not only of what they now carried, but +of what they might perhaps bring back to Granite House. If, as all +thought, there had been a shipwreck on the coast, they would find many +things they wanted on the shore, and the cart would doubtless have +proved more convenient than the canoe. But the cart was so heavy and +unwieldy that it would have been too hard work to drag it, which fact +made Pencroff regret that the box had not only held his half-pound of +tobacco, but also a pair of stout New Jersey horses, which would have +been so useful to the colony. + +The provisions, already packed by Neb, consisted of enough dried meat, +beer, and fermented liquor to last them for the three days which Smith +expected they would be absent. Moreover, they counted on being able to +replenish their stock at need along the route, and Neb had taken care +not to forget the portable stove. + +They took the two wood-choppers’ hatchets to aid in making their way +through the thick forest, and also the glass and the pocket compass. + +Of the arms, they chose the two flint-lock guns in preference to the +others, as the colonists could always renew the flints; whereas the +caps could not be replaced. Nevertheless, they took one of the carbines +and some cartridges. As for the powder, the barrels held fifty pounds, +and it was necessary to take a certain amount of that; but the engineer +expected to manufacture an explosive substance, by which it could be +saved in the future. To the firearms they added the five cutlasses, in +leather scabbards. And thus equipped, the party could venture into the +forest with some chance of success. + +Armed in this manner, Pencroff, Herbert, and Neb had all they could +desire, although Smith made them promise not to fire a shot +unnecessarily. + +At 6 o’clock the party, accompanied by Top, started for the mouth of +the Mercy. The tide had been rising half an hour, and there were +therefore some hours yet of the flood which they could make use of. The +current was strong, and they did not need to row to pass rapidly up +between the high banks and the river. In a few minutes the explorers +had reached the turn where, seven months before, Pencroff had made his +first raft. Having passed this elbow, the river, flowing from the +southwest, widened out under the shadow of the grand ever-green +conifers; and Smith and his companions could not but admire the +beautiful scenery. As they advanced the species of forest trees +changed. On the right bank rose splendid specimens of ulmaceæ, those +valuable elms so much sought after by builders, which have the property +of remaining sound for a long time in water. There was, also, numerous +groups belonging to the same family, among them the micocouliers, the +root of which produces a useful oil. Herbert discovered some +lardizabalaceæ, whose flexible branches, soaked in water, furnish +excellent ropes, and two or three trunks of ebony of a beautiful black +color, curiously veined. + +From time to time, where a landing was easy, the canoe stopped, and +Spilett, Herbert, and Pencroff, accompanied by Top, explored the bank. +In addition to the game, Herbert thought that he might meet with some +useful little plant which was not to be despised, and the young +naturalist was rewarded by discovering a sort of wild spinach and +numerous specimens of the genus cabbage, which would, doubtless, bear +transplanting; they were cresses, horse-radishes, and a little, +velvety, spreading plant, three-feet high, bearing brownish-colored +seeds. + +“Do you know what this is?” asked Herbert of the sailor. + +“Tobacco!” cried Pencroff, who had evidently never seen the plant which +he fancied so much. + +“No, Pencroff,” answered Herbert, “It is not tobacco, it is mustard.” + +“Only mustard!” exclaimed the other. “Well if you happen to come across +a tobacco plant, my boy, do not pass it by.” + +“We will find it someday,” said Spilett. + +“All right,” cried Pencroff, “and then I will be able to say that the +island lacks nothing!” + +These plants were taken up carefully and carried back to the canoe, +where Cyrus Smith had remained absorbed in his own thoughts. + +The reporter, Herbert, and Pencroff, made many of these excursions, +sometimes on the right bank of the Mercy and sometimes upon the left. +The latter was less abrupt, but more wooded. The engineer found, by +reference to the pocket-compass, that the general direction of the +river from its bend was southwest, and that it was nearly straight for +about three miles. But it was probable that the direction would change +further up, and that it would flow from the spurs of Mount Franklin, +which fed its waters in the northwest. + +During one of these excursions Spilett caught a couple of birds with +long, slim beaks, slender necks, short wings, and no tails, which +Herbert called tinamous, and which they resolved should be the first +occupants of the future poultry-yard. + +But the first report of a gun that echoed through the forests of the +Far West, was provoked by the sight of a beautiful bird, resembling a +kingfisher. + +“I know it,” cried Pencroff. + +“What do you know?” asked the reporter. + +“That bird! It is the bird which escaped on our first exploration, the +one after which we named this part of the forest!” + +“A jacamar!” exclaimed Herbert. + +It was, indeed, one of those beautiful birds, whose harsh plumage is +covered with a metallic lustre. Some small shot dropped it to the +earth, and Top brought it, and also some touracolories, climbing birds, +the size of pigeons, to the canoe. The honor of this first shot +belonged to the lad, who was pleased enough with the result. The +touracolories were better game than the jacamar, the flash of the +latter being tough, but it would have been hard to persuade Pencroff +that they had not killed the most delicious of birds. + +It was 10 o’clock when the canoe reached the second bend of the river, +some five miles from the mouth. Here they stopped half an hour, under +the shadow of the trees, for breakfast. + +The river measured from sixty to seventy feet in width, and was five or +six feet deep. The engineer had remarked its several affluents, but +they were simply unnavigable streams. The Forests of the Far West, or +Jacamar Wood, extended farther than they could see, but no where could +they detect the presence of man. If, therefore, any persons had been +shipwrecked on the island, they had not yet quitted the shore, and it +was not in those thick coverts that search must be made for the +survivors. + +The engineer began to manifest some anxiety to get to the western coast +of the island, distant, as he calculated, about five miles or less. The +journey was resumed, and, although the course of the Mercy, sometimes +towards the shore, was oftener towards the mountain, it was thought +better to follow it as long as possible, on account of the fatigue and +loss of time incident to hewing a way through the wood. Soon, the tide +having attained its height, Herbert and Neb took the oars, and Pencroff +the paddle, wad they continued the ascent by rowing. + +It seemed as if the forest of the Far West began to grow thinner. But, +as the trees grew farther apart, they profited by the increased space, +and attained a splendid growth. + +“Eucalypti!” cried Herbert, descrying some of these superb plants, the +loftiest giants of the extra-tropical zone, the congeners of the +eucalypti of Australia and New Zealand, both of which countries were +situated in the same latitude as Lincoln Island. Some rose 200 feet in +height and measured twenty feet in circumference, and their bark, five +fingers in thickness, exuded an aromatic resin. Equally wonderful were +the enormous specimens of myrtle, their leaves extending edgewise to +the sun, and permitting its rays to penetrate and fall upon the ground. + +“What trees!” exclaimed Neb. “Are they good for anything?” + +“Pshaw!” answered Pencroff. “They are like overgrown men, good for +nothing but to show in fairs!” + +“I think you’re wrong, Pencroff,” said Spilett, “the eucalyptus wood is +beginning to be extensively used in cabinet work.” + +“And I am sure,” added Herbert, “that it belongs to a most useful +family,” and thereupon the young naturalist enumerated many species of +the plant and their uses. + +Every one listened to the lad’s lesson in botany, Smith smiling, +Pencroff with an indescribable pride. “That’s all very well, Herbert,” +answered the sailor, “but I dare swear that of all these useful +specimens none are as large as these!” + +“That is so.” + +“Then, that proves what I said,” replied the sailor, “that giants are +good for nothing.” + +“There’s where you are wrong, Pencroff,” said the engineer, “these very +eucalypti are good for something.” + +“For what?” + +“To render the country healthy about them. Do you know what they call +them In Australia and New Zealand?” + +“No sir.” + +“They call them ‘fever’ trees.” + +“Because they give it?” + +“No; because they prevent it!” + +“Good. I shall make a note of that,” said the reporter. + +“Note then, my dear Spilett, that it has been proved that the presence +of these trees neutralizes marsh miasmas. They have tried this natural +remedy in certain unhealthy parts of Europe, and northern Africa, with +the best results. And there are no intermittent fevers in the region of +these forests, which is a fortunate thing for us colonists of Lincoln +Island.” + +“What a blessed island!” cried Pencroff. “It would lack nothing—if it +was not—” + +“That will come, Pencroff, we will find it,” answered the reporter; +“but now let us attend to our work and push on as far as we can get +with the canoe.” + +They continued on through the woods two miles further, the river +becoming more winding, shallow, and so narrow that Pencroff pushed +along with a pole. The sun was setting, and, as it would be impossible +to pass in the darkness through the five or six miles of unknown woods +which the engineer estimated lay between them and the coast, it was +determined to camp wherever the canoe was obliged to stop. + +They now pushed on without delay through the forest, which grew more +dense, and seemed more inhabited, because, if the sailor’s eyes did not +deceive him, he perceived troops of monkeys running among the +underbrush. Sometimes, two or three of these animals would halt at a +distance from the canoe and regard its occupants, as if, seeing men for +the first time, they had not then learned to fear them. It would have +been easy to have shot some of these quadrumanes, but Smith was opposed +to the useless slaughter. Pencroff, however, looked upon the monkey +from a gastronomic point of view, and, indeed, as these animals are +entirely herberiferous, they make excellent game; but since provisions +abounded, it was useless to waste the ammunition. + +Towards 4 o’clock the navigation of the Mercy became very difficult, +its course being obstructed by rocks and aquatic plants. The banks rose +higher and higher, and, already, the bed of the stream was confined +between the outer spurs of Mount Franklin. Its sources could not be far +off, since the waters were fed by the southern watershed of that +mountain. + +“Before a quarter of an hour we will have to stop, sir,” said Pencroff. + +“Well, then, we will make a camp for the night.” + +“How far are we from Granite House?” asked Herbert. + +“About seven miles, counting the bends of the river, which have taken +us to the northwest.” + +“Shall we keep on?” asked the reporter. + +“Yes, as far as we can get,” answered the engineer. “To-morrow, at +daylight, we will leave the canoe, and traverse, in two hours I hope, +the distance which separates us from the coast, and then we will have +nearly the whole day in which to explore the shore.” + +“Push on,” cried Pencroff. + +Very soon the canoe grated on the stones at the bottom of the river, +which was not more than twenty feet wide. A thick mass of verdure +overhung and descended the stream, and they heard the noise of a +waterfall, which indicated that some little distance further on there +existed a natural barrier. + +And, indeed, at the last turn in the river, they saw the cascade +shining through the trees. The canoe scraped over the bottom and then +grounded on a rock near the right bank. + +It was 5 o’clock, and the level rays of the setting sun illuminated the +little fall. Above, the Mercy, supplied from a secret source, was +hidden by the bushes. The various streams together had made it a river, +but here it was but a shallow, limpid brook. + +They made camp in this lovely spot. Having disembarked, a fire was +lighted under a group of micocouliers, in whose branches Smith and his +companions could, if need be, find a refuge for the night. + +Supper was soon finished, as they were very hungry, and then there was +nothing to do but to go to sleep. But some suspicious growling being +heard at nightfall, the fire was so arranged as to protect the sleepers +by its flames. Neb and Pencroff kept it lit, and perhaps they were not +mistaken in believing to have seen some moving shadows among the trees +and bushes; but the night passed without accident, and the next day—the +31st of October—by 5 o’clock all were on foot ready for the start. + + + + +CHAPTER XXVI. + + +GOING TOWARD THE COAST—TROOPS OF MONKEYS—A NEW WATER-COURSE—WHY THE +TIDE WAS NOT FELT—A FOREST ON THE SHORE—REPTILE PROMONTORY—SPILETT +MAKES HERBERT ENVIOUS—THE BAMBOO FUSILADE. + + +It was 6 o’clock when the colonists, after an early breakfast, started +with the intention of reaching the coast by the shortest route. Smith +had estimated that it would take them two hours, but it must depend +largely on the nature of the obstacles in the way. This part of the Far +West was covered with trees, like an immense thicket composed of many +different species. It was, therefore, probable that they would have to +make a way with hatchets in hand—and guns also, if they were to judge +from the cries heard over night. + +The exact position of the camp had been determined by the situation of +Mount Franklin, and since the volcano rose less than three miles to the +north, it was only necessary to go directly toward the southwest to +reach the west coast. + +After having seen to the mooring of the canoe, the party started, Neb +and Pencroff carrying sufficient provisions to last the little troop +for two days at least. They were no longer hunting, and the engineer +recommended his companions to refrain from unnecessary firing, so as +not to give warning of their presence on the coast. The first blows of +the hatchet were given in the bushes just above the cascade, while +Smith, compass in hand, indicated the route. The forest was, for the +most part, composed of such trees as had already been recognized about +the lake and on Prospect Plateau. The colonists could advance but +slowly, and the engineer believed that in time their route would join +with that of Red Creek. + +Since their departure, the party had descended the low declivities +which constituted the orography of the island, over a very dry +district, although the luxuriant vegetation suggested either a +hydrographic network permeating the ground beneath, or the proximity to +some stream. Nevertheless, Smith did not remember having seen, during +the excursion to the crater, any other water courses than Bed Creek and +the Mercy. + +During the first few hours of the march, they saw troops of monkeys, +who manifested the greatest astonishment at the sight of human beings. +Spilett laughingly asked if these robust quadrumanes did not look upon +their party as degenerate brethren; and, in truth, the simple +pedestrians, impeded at each step by the bushes, entangled in the +lianas, stopped by tree trunks, did not compare favorably with these +nimble animals, which bounded from branch to branch, moving about +without hindrance. These monkeys were very numerous, but, fortunately, +they did not manifest any hostile disposition. + +They saw, also, some wild-boars, some agoutis, kangaroos, and other +rodents, and two or three koulas, which latter Pencroff would have been +glad to shoot. + +“But,” said he, “the hunt has not begun. Play now, my friends, and we +will talk to you when we come back.” + +At half-past 9, the route, which bore directly southwest, was suddenly +interrupted by a rapid stream, rushing over rocks, and pent in between +banks but thirty or forty feet apart. It was deep and clear, but +absolutely unnavigable. + +“We are stopped!” cried Neb. + +“No,” replied Herbert; “we can swim such a brook as this.” + +“Why should we do that?” answered Smith. “It is certain that this creek +empties into the sea. Let us keep to this bank and I will be astonished +if it does not soon bring us to the coast. Come on!” + +“One minute,” said the reporter. “The name of this creek, my friends? +We must not leave our geography incomplete.” + +“True enough,” said Pencroff. + +“You name it, my boy,” said the engineer, addressing Herbert. + +“Will not it be better to wait till we have discovered its mouth?” +asked Herbert. + +“Right,” replied Smith, “let us push on.” + +“Another minute,” exclaimed Pencroff. + +“What more?” demanded the reporter. + +“If hunting is forbidden, fishing is allowed, I suppose,” said the +sailor. + +“We haven’t the time to waste,” answered the engineer. + +“But just five minutes,” pleaded Pencroff; “I only want five minutes +for the sake of breakfast!” And lying down on the bank he plunged his +arms in the running waters and soon brought up several dozen of the +fine crawfish which swarmed between the rocks. + +“These will be good!” cried Neb, helping the sailor. + +“Did not I tell you that the island had everything but tobacco?” sighed +the sailor. + +It took but five minutes to fill a sack with these little blue +crustaceæ, and then the journey was resumed. + +By following the bank the colonists moved more freely. Now and then +they found traces of large animals which came to the stream for water, +but they found no sign of human beings, and they were not yet in that +part of the Far West where the peccary had received the leaden pellet +which cost Pencroff a tooth. + +Smith and his companions judged, from the fact that the current rushed +towards the sea with such rapidity, that they must be much farther +from, the coast than they imagined, because at this time the tide was +rising, and its’ effect would have been visible near the mouth of the +creek. The engineer was greatly astonished, and often consulted his +compass to be sure that the stream, was not returning towards the +depths of the forest. Meantime, its waters, gradually widening, became +less tumultuous. The growth of trees on the right bank was much denser +than on the left, and it was impossible to see through this thicket; +but these woods were certainly not inhabited, or Top would have +discovered it. At half-past 10, to the extreme surprise of Smith, +Herbert, who was walking some paces ahead, suddenly stopped, +exclaiming, “The sea!” + +And a few minutes later the colonists, standing upon the border of the +forest, saw the western coast of the island spread before them. + +But what a contrast was this coast to the one on which chance had +thrown them! No granite wall, no reef in the offing, not even a beach. +The forest formed the shore, and its furthermost trees, washed by the +waves, leaned over the waters. It was in no sense such a beach as is +usually met with, composed of vast reaches of sand or heaps of rocks, +but a fine border of beautiful trees. The bank was raised above the +highest tides, and upon this rich soil, supported by a granite base, +the splendid monarchs of the forest seemed to be as firmly set as were +those which stood in the interior of the island. + +The colonists stood in a hollow by a tiny rivulet, which served as a +neck to the other stream; but, curiously enough, these waters, instead +of emptying into the sea by a gently sloping opening, fell from a +height of more than forty feet—which fact explained why the rising tide +did not affect the current. And, on this account, they were unanimous +in giving this water-course the name of Fall River. + +Beyond, towards the north, the forest shore extended for two miles; +then the trees became thinner, and, still further on, a line of +picturesque heights extended from north to south. On the other hand, +all that part of the coast comprised between Fall River and the +promontory of Reptile End was bordered by masses of magnificent trees, +some upright and others leaning over the sea, whose waves lapped their +roots. It was evidently, therefore, on this part of the coast that the +exploration must be continued, as this shore offered to the castaways, +whoever they might be, a refuge, which the other, desert and savage, +had refused. + +The weather was beautiful, and from the cliff where the breakfast had +been prepared, the view extended far and wide. The horizon was +perfectly distinct, without a sail in sight, and upon the coast, as far +as could be seen, there was neither boat nor wreck, but the engineer +was not willing to be satisfied in this respect, until they had +explored the whole distance as far as Serpentine Peninsula. + +After a hurried breakfast he gave the signal to start. Instead of +traversing a beach, the colonists followed along the coast, under the +trees. The distance to Reptile End was about twelve miles, and, had the +way been clear, they could have accomplished it in four hours, but the +party were constantly obliged to turn out from the way, or to cut +branches, or to break through thickets, and these hindrances multiplied +as they proceeded. But they saw no signs of a recent shipwreck on the +shore; although, as Spilett observed, as the tide was up, they could +not say with certainty that there had not been one. + +This reasoning was just, and, moreover, the incident of the bullet +proved, indubitably, that within three months a gun had been fired on +the island. + +At 5 o’clock the extremity of the peninsula was still two miles +distant, and it was evident that the colonists would have to camp for +the night on the promontory of Reptile End. Happily, game was as plenty +here as on the other coast, and birds of different kinds abounded. Two +hours later, the party, tired out, reached the promontory. Here the +forest border ended, and the shore assumed the usual aspect of a coast. +It was possible that an abandoned vessel might be here, but, as the +night was falling, it was necessary to postpone the exploration until +the morrow. + +Pencroff and Herbert hastened to find a suitable place for a camp. The +outskirts of the forest died away here, and near them the lad found a +bamboo thicket. + +“Good,” said he, “this is a valuable discovery.” + +“Valuable?” asked Pencroff. + +“Yes, indeed, I need not tell you, Pencroff, all its uses, such as for +making baskets, paper, and water-pipes; that the larger ones make +excellent building material and strong jars. But—” + +“But?” + +“But perhaps you do not know that in India they eat bamboo as we do +asparagus.” + +“Asparagus thirty feet high?” cried, Pencroff. “And is it good?” + +“Excellent,” answered the lad. “But they eat only the young sprouts.” + +“Delicious!” cried Pencroff. + +“And I am sure that the pith of young plants preserved in vinegar makes +an excellent condiment.” + +“Better and better.” + +“And, lastly, they exude a sweet liquor which makes a pleasant drink.” + +“Is that all?” demanded the sailor. + +“That’s all.” + +“Isn’t it good to smoke?” + +“No, my poor Pencroff, you cannot smoke it!” + +They did not have to search far for a good place for the camp. The +rocks, much worn by the action of the sea, had many hollows that would +afford shelter from the wind. But just as they were about to enter one +of these cavities they were arrested by formidable growlings. + +“Get back!” cried Pencroff, “we have only small shot in our guns, and +these beasts would mind it no more than salt!” + +And the sailor, seizing Herbert, dragged him behind some rocks, just as +a huge jaguar appeared at the mouth of the cavern. Its skin was yellow, +striped with black, and softened off with white under its belly. The +beast advanced, and looked about. Its hair was bristling, and its eyes +sparkling as if it was not scenting man for the first time. + +Just then Spilett appeared, coming round the high rocks, and Herbert, +thinking he had not seen the jaguar, was about rushing towards him, +when the reporter, motioning with his hand, continued his approach. It +was not his first tiger. + +Advancing within ten paces of the animal, he rested motionless, his gun +at his shoulder, not a muscle quivering. The jaguar, crouching back, +made a bound towards the hunter, but as it sprung a bullet struck it +between the eyes, dropping it dead. + +Herbert and Pencroff rushed to it, and Smith and Neb coming up at the +moment, all stopped to look at the splendid animal lying at length upon +the sand. + +“Oh, Mr. Spilett, how I envy you!” cried Herbert, in an excess of +natural enthusiasm. + +“Well, my boy, you would have done as well,” answered the reporter. + +“I have been as cool as that!” + +“Only imagine, Herbert, that a jaguar is a hare, and you will shoot him +as unconcernedly as anything in the world! And now,” continued the +reporter, “since the jaguar has left his retreat I don’t see, my +friends, why we should not occupy the place during the night” + +“But some others may return!” said Pencroff. + +“We will only have to light a fire at the entrance of the cavern,” said +the reporter, “and they will not dare to cross the threshold.” + +“To the jaguar house, then,” cried the sailor, dragging the body of the +animal after him. + +The colonists went to the abandoned cave, and, while Neb was occupied +in skinning the carcass, the others busied themselves with piling a +great quantity of dry wood around the threshold. This done they +installed themselves in the cave, whose floor was strewn with bones; +the arms were loaded for an emergency; and, having eaten supper, as +soon as the time for sleep was come, the fire at the entrance was lit. + +Immediately a tremendous fusilade ensued! It was the bamboo which, in +burning, exploded like fire-works! The noise, in itself, would have +been sufficient to frighten off the bravest beasts. + + + + +CHAPTER XXVII. + + +PROPOSAL TO RETURN BY THE SOUTH COAST—ITS CONFIGURATION—SEARCH FOR THE +SHIPWRECKED—A WAIF IN THE AIR—DISCOVERY OF A SMALL NATURAL +HARBOR—MIDNIGHT ON THE MERCY—A DRIFTING CANOE. + + +Smith and his companions slept like mice in the cavern which the jaguar +had so politely vacated, and, by sunrise, all were on the extremity of +the promontory, and scrutinizing the horizon visible on either hand. No +ship or wreck was to be seen, and not even with the spy-glass could any +suspicious object be discerned. It was the same along the shore, at +least on all that portion, three miles in length, which formed the +south side of the promontory; as, beyond that, a slope of the land +concealed the rest of the coast, and even from the extremity of +Serpentine Peninsula, Claw Cape was hidden by high rocks. + +The southern bank of the island remained to be explored. Had they not +better attempt this at once, and give up this day to it? This procedure +had not entered into their first calculations, as, when the canoe was +left at the sources of the Mercy, the colonists thought that, having +explored the west coast, they would return by the river; Smith having +then believed that this coast sheltered either a wreck or a passing +ship. But as soon as this shore disclosed no landing place, it became +necessary to search the south side of the island for those whom they +had failed to discover on the west. + +It was Spilett who proposed continuing the exploration so as to settle +definitely the question of the supposed shipwreck, and he inquired how +far it would be to Claw Cape. + +“About thirty miles,” answered the engineer, “if we allow for the +irregularity of the shore.” + +“Thirty miles!” exclaimed Spilett, “that would be a long walk. +Nevertheless, I think we should return to Granite House by the south +coast.” + +“But,” observed Herbert, “from Claw Cape to Granite House is at least +ten miles further.” + +“Call it forty miles altogether,” answered the reporter, “and do not +let us hesitate to do it. At least we will have seen this unknown +shore, and will not have it to explore over again.” + +“That is so,” said Pencroff. “But how about the canoe?” + +“The canoe can stay where it is for a day or two,” replied Spilett. “We +can hardly say that the island is infested with thieves!” ‘ + +“Nevertheless, when I remember that affair of the turtle, I am not so +confident.” + +“The turtle! the turtle!” cried the reporter, “don’t you know that the +sea turned it over?” + +“Who can say?” murmured the engineer. + +“But—,” began Neb, who, it was evident, wished to say something. + +“What is it, Neb?” questioned the engineer. + +“If we do return by the shore to Claw Cape, after having gone round it, +we will be stopped—” + +“By the Mercy!” cried Herbert. “And we have no bridge or boat!” + +“Oh!” answered Pencroff, “we can cross it readily enough with some +logs.” + +“Nevertheless,” said Spilett, “it would be well to build a bridge some +time if we wish to have ready access to the Far West.” + +“A bridge!” cried Pencroff. “Well isn’t Mr. Smith State Engineer? If we +shall need a bridge we will have one. As to carrying you over the Mercy +to-night without getting wet, I will look out for that. We still have a +day’s provision, which is all that is necessary, and, besides, the game +may not give out to-day as It did yesterday. So let us go.” + +The proposal of the reporter, strongly seconded by the sailor, obtained +general approval, as every one wished to end their doubts, and by +returning by Claw Cape the exploration would be complete. But no time +was to be lost, for the tramp was long, and they counted on reaching +Granite House that night. So by 6 o’clock the little party was on its +way, the guns loaded with ball in case of an encounter, and Top, who +went ahead, ordered to search the edge of the forest. + +The first five miles of the distance was rapidly traversed, and not the +slightest sign of any human being was seen. When the colonists arrived +at the point where the curvature of the promontory ended, and +Washington Bay began, they were able to take in at one view the whole +extent of the southern coast. Twenty-five miles distant the shore was +terminated by Claw Cape, which was faintly visible through the morning +mists, and reproduced as a mirage in mid-air. Between the place +occupied by the colonists and the upper end of the Great Bay the shore +began with a flat and continuous beach, bordered in the background by +tall trees; following this, it became very irregular, and thrust sharp +points into the sea, and finally a heap of black rocks, thrown together +in picturesque disorder, completed the distance to Claw Cape. + +“A ship would surely be lost on these sands and shoals and reefs,” said +Pencroff. + +“It is poor quarters!” + +“But at least a portion of her would be left,” observed the reporter. + +“Some bits of wood would remain on the reefs, nothing on the sands,” +answered the sailor. + +“How is that?” + +“Because the sands are even more dangerous than the rocks, and swallow +up everything that is thrown upon them; a few days suffice to bury out +of sight the hull of a ship of many tons measurement.” + +“Then, Pencroff,” questioned the engineer, “if a vessel had been lost +on these banks, it would not be surprising if there was no trace left?” + +“No, sir, that is after a time or after a tempest. Nevertheless, it +would be surprising, as now, that no spars or timbers were thrown upon +the shore beyond the reach of the sea.” + +“Let us continue our search,” replied Smith. + +By 1 o’clock the party had accomplished twenty miles, having reached +the upper end of Washington Bay, and they stopped to lunch. + +Here began an irregular shore, oddly cut into by a long line of rocks, +succeeding the sand banks, and just beginning to show themselves by +long streaks of foam, above the undulations of the receding waves. From +this point to Claw Cape the beach was narrow and confined between the +reef of rocks and the forest, and the march would therefore be more +difficult. The granite wall sunk more and more, and above it the tops +of the trees, undisturbed by a breath of air, appeared in the +background. + +After half an hour’s rest the colonists took up the march again, on the +lookout for any sign of a wreck, but without success. They found out, +however, that edible mussels were plenty on this beach, although they +would not gather them until means of transport between the two banks of +the river should have been perfected. + +Towards 3 o’clock, Smith and his companions reached a narrow inlet, +unfed by any water-course. It formed a veritable little natural harbor, +invisible from without, and approached by a narrow passage guarded by +the reefs. At the upper end of this creek some violent convulsion had +shattered the rock, and a narrow, sloping passage gave access to the +upper plateau, which proved to be ten miles from Claw Cape, and +therefore four miles in a direct line from Prospect Plateau. + +Spilett proposed to his companions to halt here, and, as the march had +sharpened their appetites, although it was not dinner time, no one +objected to a bit of venison, and with this lunch they would be able to +await supper at Granite House. + +Soon the colonists, seated under a group of splendid pines, were eating +heartily of the provisions which Neb had brought out from his +haversack. The place was some fifty or sixty feet above the sea, and +the view, extending beyond the furthest rock of the cape, was lost in +Union Bay. But the islet and Prospect Plateau were invisible, as the +high ground and the curtain of high trees shut out the horizon to the +north. Neither over the extent of sea nor on that part of the coast +which it was still necessary to explore could they discover even with +the spyglass any suspicious object. + +“Well” said Spilett, “we can console ourselves by thinking that no one +is disputing the island with us.” + +“But how about the pellet?” said Herbert. “It was not a dream.” + +“Indeed it was not!” cried Pencroff, thinking of his missing tooth. + +“Well, what are we to conclude?” asked the reporter. + +“This,” said Smith, “that within three months a ship, voluntarily or +otherwise, has touched—” + +“What! You will admit, Cyrus, that it has been swallowed up without +leaving any trace?” cried the reporter. + +“No, my dear Spilett; but you must remember that while it is certain +that a human being has been here, it seems just as certain that he is +not here now.” + +“Then, if I understand you sir,” said Herbert, “the ship has gone +again?” + +“Evidently.” + +“And we have lost, beyond return, a chance to get home?” said Neb. + +“I believe without return.” + +“Well then, since the chance is lost, let us push on,” said Pencroff, +already home-sick for Granite House. + +“But, just as they were rising, Top’s barking was heard, and the dog +burst from the forest, holding in his mouth a soiled rag. + +Neb took it from him. It was a bit of strong cloth. Top, still barking, +seemed by his motions to invite his master to follow into the wood. + +“Here is something which will explain my bullet,” cried Pencroff. + +“A shipwrecked person!” answered Herbert. + +“Wounded, perhaps!” exclaimed Neb. + +“Or dead!” responded the reporter. + +And all holding their arms in readiness, hurried after the dog through +the outskirts of the forests. They advanced some distance into the +wood, but, to their disappointment, they saw no tracks. The underbrush +and lianas were uninjured and had to be cut away with the hatchet, as +in the depths of the forest. It was hard to imagine that any human +creature had passed there, and yet Top’s action showed no uncertainty, +but was more like that of a human being having a fixed purpose. + +In a few minutes the dog stopped. The colonists, who had arrived at a +sort of glade surrounded by high trees, looked all about them, but +neither in the underbrush or between the tree trunks could they +discover a thing. + +“What is it, Top?” said Smith. + +Top, barking louder, ran to the foot of a gigantic pine. + +Suddenly Pencroff exclaimed:— + +“This is capital!” + +“What’s that,” asked Spilett. + +“We’ve been hunting for some waif on the sea or land—” + +“Well?” + +“And here it is in the air!” + +And the sailor pointed out a mass of faded cloth caught on the summit +of the pine, a piece of which Top had found on the ground. + +“But that is no waif!” exclaimed Spilett. + +“Indeed it is,” answered Pencroff. + +“How is it!” + +“It is all that is left of our balloon, of our ship which is stranded +on the top of this tree.” + +Pencroff was not mistaken, and he added, with a shout:— + +“And there is good stuff in it which will keep us in linen for years. +It will make us handkerchiefs and shirts. Aha, Mr. Spilett! what do you +say of an island where shirts grow on the trees?” + +It was, indeed, a fortunate thing for the colonists that the aerostat, +after having made its last bound into the air, had fallen again on the +island. They could, either keep the envelope in its present shape, in +case they might desire to attempt a new flight through the air, or, +after having taken off the varnish, they could make use of its hundreds +of ells of good cotton cloth. At these thoughts all shared Pencroff’s +joy. + +It was no easy task to take down this envelope from the tree top. But +Neb, Herbert, and the sailor climbed up to it, and after two hours of +hard work not only the envelope, with its valve, springs, and leather +mountings, but the net, equivalent to a large quantity of cordage and +ropes, together with the iron ring and the anchor, lay upon the ground. +The envelope, excepting the rent, was in good order, and only its lower +end had been torn away. + +It was a gift from heaven. + +“Nevertheless, Mr. Smith,” said the sailor, “if we ever do decide to +leave the island it won’t be in a balloon, I hope. These air ships +don’t always go the way you want them to, as we have found out. If you +will let me have my way, we will build a ship of twenty tons, and you +will allow me to cut from this cloth a foresail and jib. The rest of it +will do for clothes.” + +“We will see about it, Pencroff,” answered Smith. + +“And meanwhile it must all be put away carefully,” said Neb. + +In truth, they could not think of carrying all this weight of material +to Granite House; and while waiting for a proper means of removing it, +it was important not to leave it exposed to the weather. The colonists, +uniting their efforts, succeeded in dragging it to the shore, where +they discovered a cave so situated that neither wind, rain, nor sea +could get at it. + +“It is a wardrobe,” said Pencroff; “but since it does not kick, it will +be prudent to hide the opening, not, perhaps from two-footed, but from +four-footed thieves!” + +By 6 o’clock everything was stored away, and after having named the +little inlet, Balloon, Harbor, they took the road for Claw Cape. +Pencroff and the engineer discussed several projects, which it would be +well to attend to at once. The first thing was to build a bridge across +the Mercy, and, as the canoe was too small, to bring the balloon over +in the cart. Then to build a decked launch, which Pencroff would make +cutter-rigged, and in which they could make voyages of +circumnavigation—around the island; then, etc. + +In the meantime the night approached, and it was already dark, when the +colonists reached Jetsam Point, where they had discovered the precious +box. But here, as elsewhere, there was nothing to indicate a shipwreck, +and it became necessary to adopt the opinions expressed by Smith. + +The four miles from Jetsam Point to Granite House were quickly +traversed, but it was midnight when the colonists arrived at the first +bend above the mouth of the Mercy. There the river was eighty feet +wide, and Pencroff, who had undertaken to overcome the difficulty of +crossing it, set to work. It must be admitted that the colonists were +fatigued. The tramp had been long, and the incident of the balloon had +not rested their arms or legs. They were therefore anxious to get back +to Granite House to supper and bed, and if they had only had the +bridge, in a quarter of an hour they could have been at home. + +The night was very dark. Pencroff and Neb, armed with the hatchets, +chose two trees near the bank, and began cutting them down, in order to +make a raft. Smith and Spilett, seated on the ground, waited to assist +their companions, and Herbert sauntered about, doing nothing. + +All at once the lad, who had gone up the stream, returned hurriedly, +and, pointing back, exclaimed:— + +“What is that drifting there?” + +Pencroff stopped work and perceived an object resting motionless in the +gloom. + +“A canoe!” he exclaimed. + +All came up and saw, to their astonishment, a boat following the +current. + +“Canoe, ahoy!” shouted Pencroff from force of habit, forgetting that it +might be better to keep quiet. + +There was no answer. The boat continued to drift, and it was not more +than a dozen paces off, when the sailor exclaimed:— + +“Why, it’s our canoe! She has broken away and drifted down with the +current. Well, we must admit that she comes in the nick of time!” + +“Our canoe!” murmured the engineer. + +Pencroff was right. It was indeed their canoe, which had doubtless +broken loose and drifted all the way from the headwaters of the Mercy! +It was important to seize it in passing before it should be drawn into +the rapid current at the mouth of the river, and Pencroff and Neb, by +the aid of a long pole, did this, and drew the canoe to the bank. + +The engineer stepped in first, and, seizing the rope, assured himself +that it had been really worn in two against the rocks. + +“This,” said the reporter in an undertone; “this is a coincidence—” + +“It is very strange!” answered the engineer. + +At least it was fortunate, and while no one could doubt that the rope +had been broken by friction, the astonishing part of the affair was +that the canoe had arrived at the moment when the colonists were there +to seize it, for a quarter of an hour later, and it would have been +carried out to sea. Had there been such things as genii, this incident +would have been sufficient to make the colonists believe that the +island was inhabited by a supernatural being, who placed his power at +their disposal. + +With a few strokes the party arrived at the mouth of the Mercy. The +canoe was drawn on shore at the Chimneys, and all took their way to the +ladder at Granite House. + +But, just then, Top began barking furiously, and Neb, who was feeling +for the lower rung, cried out:— + +“The ladder’s gone!” + + + + +CHAPTER XXVIII + + +PENCROFF’S HALLOOS—A NIGHT IN THE CHIMNEYS—HERBERT’S ARROW—SMITH’S +PLAN—AN UNEXPECTED SOLUTION—WHAT HAD HAPPENED IN GRANITE HOUSE—HOW THE +COLONISTS OBTAINED A NEW DOMESTIC. + + +Smith stood silent. His companions searched in the obscurity along the +wall, over the ground, for the broken part of the ladder, supposing it +had been torn off by the wind. But the ladder had certainly +disappeared, although it was impossible to tell in the darkness whether +a gust of wind had not carried it up and lodged it on the first ledge. + +“If this is a joke, it’s a pretty poor one,” cried Pencroff. “To get +home and not be able to find the staircase, won’t do for tired men.” + +Neb stood in open-mouthed amazement. + +“It could not have been carried away by the wind!” said Herbert. + +“I’m beginning to think that strange things happen in Lincoln Island!” +said Pencroff. + +“Strange?” rejoined Spilett. “Why no, Pencroff, nothing is more +natural. Somebody has come while we have been absent, and has taken +possession of the house and drawn up the ladder!”. + +“Some one!” cried the sailor. “Who could it be?” + +“Why, the man who shot the bullet,” answered the reporter “How else can +you explain it?” + +“Very well, if any one is up there,” replied Pencroff, beginning to get +angry, “I will hail him, and he had better answer.” + +And in a voice of thunder the sailor gave a prolonged “Ohe,” which was +loudly repeated by the echoes. + +The colonists listened, and thought that they heard a sort of chuckling +proceed from Granite House. But there was no answering voice to the +sailor, who repeated his appeal in vain. + +Here was an event that would have astonished people the most +indifferent, and from their situation the colonists could not be that. +To them, the slightest incident was of moment, and certainly during +their seven months’ residence nothing equal to this had happened. + +They stood there at the foot of Granite House not knowing what to do or +to say. Neb was disconsolate at not being able to get back to the +kitchen, especially as the provisions taken for the journey had all +been eaten, and they had no present means of renewing them. + +“There is but one thing to do, my friends,” said Smith, “to wait until +daylight, and then to be governed by circumstances. Meanwhile let us go +to the Chimneys, where we will be sheltered, and, even if we cannot +eat, we can sleep.” + +“But who is the ill-mannered fellow that has played us this trick?” +asked Pencroff again, who thought it no joke. + +Whoever he was, there was nothing to do but to follow the engineer’s +advice. Top having been ordered to lie down under the windows of +Granite House, took his place without complaint. The brave dog remained +at the foot of the wall, while his master and his companions took +shelter among the rocks. + +The colonists, tired as they were, slept but little. Not only were +their beds uncomfortable, but it was certain that their house was +occupied at present, and they were unable to get into it. Now Granite +House was not only their dwelling, it was their storehouse. Everything +they possessed was stored there. It would be a serious thing if this +should be pillaged and they should have again to begin at the +beginning. In their anxiety, one or the other went out often to see if +the dog remained on watch. Smith, alone, waited with his accustomed +patience, although he was exasperated at finding himself confronted by +something utterly inexplicable, and his reason shrank from the thought +that around him, over him, perhaps, was exercising an influence to +which he could give no name. Spilett sharing his thoughts, they +conversed together in an undertone of those unaccountable events which +defied all their knowledge and experience. Certainly, there was a +mystery about this island, but how discover it? Even Herbert did not +know what to think, and often questioned Smith. As to Neb, he said that +this was his master’s business and not his; and if he had not feared +offending his companions, the brave fellow would have slept this night +as soundly as if he had been in his bed in Granite House. + +Pencroff, however, was very much put out. + +“It’s a joke,” he said. “It’s a joke that is played on us. Well, I +don’t like such jokes, and the joker won’t like it, if I catch him!” + +At dawn the colonists, well armed, followed along the shore to the +reefs. By 5 o’clock the closed windows of Granite House appeared +through their leafy curtain. Everything, from this side, appeared to be +in order, but an exclamation escaped from the colonists when they +perceived that the door which they had left closed was wide open. There +could be no more doubt that some one was in Granite House, The upper +ladder was in its place; but the lower had been drawn up to the +threshold. It was evident that the intruders wished to guard against a +surprise. As to telling who or how many they were, that was still +impossible, as none had yet shown themselves. + +Pencroff shouted again, but without answer. + +“The beggars!” he exclaimed, “to sleep as soundly as if they were at +home! Halloo! pirates! bandits! corsairs! sons of John Bull!” + +When Pencroff, as an American, called any one a “son of John Bull,” he +had reached the acme of insult. + +Just then, the day broke and the facade of Granite House was +illuminated by the rays of the rising sun. But inside as well as +without all was still and calm. It was evident from the position of the +ladder that whoever had been inside the house had not come out. But how +could they get up to them? + +Herbert conceived the idea of shooting an arrow attached to a cord +between the lower rungs of the ladder which were hanging from the +doorway: They would thus be able by means of the cord to pull this +ladder down, and gain access to Granite House. There was evidently +nothing else to do, and with a little skill this attempt might prove +successful. Fortunately there were bows and arrows at the Chimneys, and +they found there, also, some twenty fathoms of light hibiscus cord. +Pencroff unrolled this, and fastened the end to a well-feathered arrow. +Then Herbert having placed the arrow in his bow took careful aim at the +hanging part of the ladder. + +The others stationed themselves some distance in the background to +observe what might happen, and the reporter covered the doorway with +his carbine. + +The bow bent, the arrow shot upward with the cord, and passed between +the two lower rungs of the ladder. The operation had succeeded. But +just as Herbert, having caught the end of the cord, was about giving it +a pull to make the ladder fall, an arm thrust quickly between the door +and the wall seized the ladder and drew it within Granite House. + +“You little beggar!” cried Pencroff. “If a ball would settle you, you +would not have to wait long!” + +“But what is it?” demanded Neb. + +“What! didn’t you see?” + +“No.” + +“Why, it’s a monkey, a macauco, a sapajo, an orang, a baboon, a +gorilla, a sagoin! Our house has been invaded by monkeys, which have +climbed up the ladder while we were away.” + +And at the moment, as if to prove the truth of what the sailor said, +three or four quadrumana threw open the window shutters and saluted the +true proprietors of the place with a thousand contortions and grimaces. + +“I knew all the time it was a joke,” cried Pencroff, “But here’s one of +the jokers that will pay for the others!” he added, covering a monkey +with his gun and firing. All disappeared but, this one, which, mortally +wounded, fell to the ground. + +This monkey was very large and evidently belonged to the first order of +quadrumana. Whether a chimpanzee, an orang, a gorilla, or a gibbon, it +ranked among these anthropomorphi, so called on account of their +likeness to the human race. Herbert declared it was an orang-outang, +and we all know that the lad understood zoology. + +“What a fine beast!” cried Neb. + +“As fine as you choose!” answered the reporter, “but I don’t see yet +how we are going to get in!” + +“Herbert is a good shot,” said the reporter, “and his bow is sure! We +will try again—” + +“But these monkeys are mischievous,” cried Pencroff, “and if they don’t +come to the windows, we cannot shoot them; and when I think of the +damage they can do in the rooms and, in the magazine—” + +“Have patience,” answered Smith. “These animals cannot hold us in +check, very long.” + +“I will be sure of that when they are out of there, “rejoined Pencroff, +“Can you say how many dozens of these fools there may be?” + +It would hare been hard to answer Pencroff, but it was harder to try +again the experiment of the arrow, as the lower end of the ladder had +been drawn within the doorway, and when they pulled on the cord again, +it broke, and the ladder remained, as before. + +It was, Indeed, vexatious. Pencroff was in a fury, and, although the +situation had a certain comic aspect, he did not think it funny at all. +It was evident that the colonists would, eventually, get back into +their house and drive out the monkeys, but when and how they could not +say. + +Two hours passed, during which the monkeys avoided showing themselves; +but they were there, for all that, and, two or three times, a muzzle or +paw slipped by the door or the windows, and was saluted by a shot. + +“Let us conceal ourselves,” said the engineer, at length. “And then the +monkeys will think we have gone off, and will show themselves again. +Let Herbert and Spilett remain hidden behind the rocks and fire on any +that appear. + +The directions of the engineer were followed, and while the reporter +and the lad, who were the best shots in the party, took their +positions, the others went over the plateau to the forest to shoot some +game, as it was breakfast time and they had no food. + +In half an hour the hunters returned with some wild pigeons, which +would be pretty good roasted. Not a monkey had shown itself. + +Spilett and Herbert went to their breakfast, while Top kept watch under +the windows. Then they returned to their post. Two hours later the +situation was unchanged. The quadrumana gave no sign of existence, and +it seemed as if they must have disappeared; but it was more likely +that, frightened by the death of one of their number and the +detonations of the guns, they kept themselves hidden in the chambers or +the store-room of Granite House. And, when the colonists thought of all +that was stored in this latter room, the patience which the engineer +had recommended turned into irritation, and indeed they could not be +blamed for it. + +“It is too bad!” exclaimed the reporter, at length; “and is there no +way we can put an end to this?” + +“We must make these beggars give up!” cried Pencroff. “We can readily +do it, even if there are twenty of them, in a hand-to hand fight! Oh, +is there no way we can get at them?” + +“Yes,” replied Smith, struck by an idea. + +“Only one?” rejoined Pencroff. “Well, that’s better than none at all. +What is it?” + +“Try to get into Granite House by the old weir,” answered the engineer. + +“Why in the mischief didn’t I think of that!” cried the sailor. + +This was, indeed, the only way to get into Granite House, in order to +fight the band and drive them out. It is true that, if they tore down +the cemented wall which closed the weir, the work would have all to be +done over again; but, fortunately, Smith had not yet effected his +design of hiding this opening by covering it again with the lake, as +that operation necessitated a good deal of time. + +It was already past noon when the colonists, well armed and furnished +with picks and mattocks, left the Chimneys, passed under the windows of +Granite House, and, having ordered Top to remain at his post, made +ready to climb the left bank of the Mercy, so as to reach Prospect +Plateau. But they had hardly gone fifty paces, when they heard the loud +barkings of the dog, as if making a desperate appeal. All halted. + +“Let us run back,” cried Pencroff. And all did as proposed as fast as +possible. + +Arrived at the turn, the whole situation was changed. The monkeys, +seized with a sudden fright, startled by some unknown cause, were +trying to escape. Two or three were running and springing from window +to window, with the agility of clowns. In their fright they seemed to +have forgotten to replace the ladder, by which they could easily have +descended. In a moment half a dozen were in such a position that they +could be shot, and the colonists, taking aim, fired. Some fell, wounded +or killed, within the chambers, uttering sharp cries. Others, falling +to the ground without, were crushed by the fall, and a few moments +afterwards it seemed as if there was not one living quadrumana in +Granite House. + +“Hurrah,” said Pencroff, “hurrah, hurrah!” + +“Don’t cheer yet,” saidSpilett. + +“Why not,” asked Pencroff. “Ain’t they all killed.” + +“Doubtless: but that does not give us the means of getting in.” + +“Let us go the weir!” exclaimed Pencroff. + +“We will have to,” said the engineer. “Nevertheless it would have been +preferable—” + +And at the instant, as if in answer to the observation of the engineer, +they saw the ladder slide over the door-sill and roll over to the +ground. + +“By the thousand pipes, but that is lucky!” cried Pencroff, looking at +Smith. + +“Too lucky!” muttered Smith, springing up the ladder. + +“Take care, Mr. Smith!” exclaimed Pencroff, “if there should be any +sojourners—” + +“We will soon see,” responded the other. + +All his companions followed him and in a moment were within the +doorway. + +They searched everywhere. No one was in the chambers or in the +storeroom, which remained undisturbed by the quadrumana. + +“And the ladder,” said Pencroff; “where is the gentleman who pushed it +down to us?” + +But just then a cry was heard, and a huge monkey, that had taken refuge +in the corridor, sprang into the great hall, followed by Neb. + +“Ah, the thief!” cried Pencroff, about to spring with his hatchet at +the head of the animal, when Smith stopped him. + +“Spare it, Pencroff.” + +“What, spare this black ape?” + +“Yes, it is he that has thrown us the ladder,” said the engineer, in a +voice so strange, that it was hard to say whether he was in earnest or +not. + +Nevertheless, all threw themselves on the monkey, which, after a brave +resistance, was thrown down and tied. + +“Ugh!” exclaimed Pencroff; “and now what will we do with it?” + +“Make a servant of it,” answered Herbert, half in earnest, as the lad +knew how great was the intelligence of this race of quadrumana. + +The colonists gathered round the monkey and examined it attentively. It +appeared to belong to that species of anthropomorphi in which the +facial angle is not visibly inferior to that of the Australians or +Hottentots. He was an orang of the kind which has neither the ferocity +of the baboon nor the macauco, nor the thoughtlessness of the sagoin, +nor the impatience of the magot, nor the bad instincts of the +cynocephalous. It was of a family of anthropomorphi which has traits +indicating a half-human intelligence. Employed in houses, they can wait +on the table, do chamber-work, brush clothes, black boots, clean the +knives and forks, and—empty the bottles, as well as the best trained +flunkey. Buffon possessed one of these monkeys, which served him a long +time as a zealous and faithful servant. + +The one at present tied in the hall of Granite House was a big fellow, +six feet high, deep-chested, and finely built, a medium-sized head, +with a sharp facial angle, a well-rounded skull, and a prominent nose, +and a skin covered with smooth hair, soft and shining,—in short, a +finished type of anthropomorphi. Its eyes, somewhat smaller than those +of a human being, sparkled with intelligence; its teeth glistened +beneath its moustache, and it wore a small nut-brown beard. + +“He is a fine chap,” said Pencroff. “If we only understood his +language, one might talk with him!” + +“Then,” said Neb, “are they in earnest, my master? Will we take it as a +domestic?” + +“Yes, Neb,” said the engineer, smiling. “But you need not be jealous.” + +“And I hope it will make an excellent servant. As it is young its +education will be easy, and we will not have to use force to make it +mind, nor to pull out its teeth as is sometimes done. It cannot fail to +become attached to masters who only treat it well.” + +“And we will do that,” said Pencroff, who having forgotten his recent +wrath against the “jokers,” approached the orang and accosted him +with:— + +“Hullo, my boy, how goes it?” + +The orang responded with a little grunt, which seemed to denote a not +bad temper. + +“You want to join the colony, do you? Would you like to enter the +service of Mr. Smith?” + +The monkey gave another affirmative grunt. + +“And you’ll be satisfied with your board as wages?” + +A third affirmative grunt. + +“His conversation is a little monotonous,” observed Spilett. + +“Well,” replied Pencroff, “the best domestics are those that speak +least. And then, no wages! Do you hear, my boy? At first we give you no +wages, but we will double them later, if you suit us!” + +Thus the colonists added to their number one who had already done them +a service. As to a name, the sailor asked that he should be called, in +remembrance of another monkey, Jupiter, or by abbreviation, Jup. And +thus, without more ado, Master Jup was installed in Granite House. + + + + +CHAPTER XXIX. + + +PROJECTS TO BE CARRIED OUT—A BRIDGE OVER THE MERCY—TO MAKE AN ISLAND OF +PROSPECT PLATEAU—THE DRAW-BRIDGE—THE CORN HARVEST—THE STREAM—THE +CAUSEWAY—THE POULTRY YARD—THE PIGEON-HOUSE—THE TWO WILD ASSES—HARNESSED +TO THE WAGON—EXCURSION TO BALLOON HARBOR. + + +The colonists had now reconquered their domicile without having been +obliged to follow the weir. It was, indeed, fortunate, that at the +moment they decided to destroy their masonry, the band of monkeys, +struck by a terror not less sudden than inexplicable, had rushed from +Granite House. Had these animals a presentiment that a dangerous attack +was about to be made on them from another direction? This was the only +way to account for their retreat. + +The rest of the day was occupied in carrying the dead monkeys to the +wood and burying them there, and in repairing the disorder made by the +intruders,—disorder and not damage, as, though they had upset the +furniture in the rooms, they had broken nothing. Neb rekindled the +range, and the supply in the pantry furnished a substantial repast that +was duly honored. + +Jup was not forgotten, and he ate with avidity the pistachio nuts and +the roots of the sumach, with which he saw himself abundantly provided. +Pencroff had unfastened his arms, although he thought it best to keep +the monkey’s legs bound until they could be sure he had surrendered. + +Seated at the table, before going to bed, Smith and his companions +discussed three projects, the execution of which was urgent. The most +important and the most pressing was the establishment of a bridge +across the Mercy, then the building of a corral, designed for the +accommodation of moufflons or other woolly animals which they had +agreed to capture. These two plans tended to solve the question of +clothing, which was then the most serious question. + +It was Smith’s intention to establish this corral at the sources of Red +Creek, where there was abundant pasturage. Already the path between +there and Prospect Plateau was partially cleared, and with a better +constructed cart, carriage would be easy, especially if they should +capture some animal that could draw it. + +But while it would not be inconvenient to have the corral some distance +from Granite House, it was different with the poultry-yard, to which +Neb called attention. It was necessary that the “chickens” should be at +the hand of the cook, and no place seemed more favorable for an +establishment of this kind than that portion of the lake shore +bordering on the former weir. The aquatic birds also would thrive +there, and the pair of tinamons, taken in the last excursion, would +serve as a beginning. + +The next day—the 3d of November—work was begun on the bridge, and all +hands were required on the important undertaking. Laden with tools the +colonists descended to the shore. + +Here Pencroff reflected as follows:— + +“Supposing while we are away Master Jup takes the notion of hauling up +the ladder, which he so gallantly unrolled for us yesterday.” + +“We would be dependent on his tail!” answered Spilett. + +The ladder was therefore made fast to two stakes driven firmly into the +ground. The colonists ascended the river, and soon arrived at its +narrow bend, where they halted to examine whether the bridge could not +be thrown across at this place. The situation was suitable, as from +this point to Balloon Harbor the distance was three miles and a half, +and a wagon road connecting Granite House with the southern part of the +island, could easily be constructed. + +Then Smith communicated to his companions a project which he had had in +view for some time. This was to completely isolate Prospect Plateau, so +as to protect it from all attacks of quadrupeds or quadrumana. By this +means Granite House, the Chimneys, the poultry yard, and all the upper +part of the plateau destined for sowing would be protected against the +depredations of animals. + +Nothing could be easier than to do this, and the engineer proposed to +accomplish it as follows:—The plateau was already protected on three +sides by either natural or artificial water courses. On the northwest, +by the bank of Lake Grant, extending from the angle against the former +weir to the cut made in the east bank to draw off the water. On the +north, by this new water course which had worn itself a bed both above +and below the fall, which could be dug out sufficiently to render the +passage impracticable to animals. And upon the east, by the sea itself, +from the mouth of this new creek to the mouth of the Mercy. Therefore +the only part remaining open was the western part of the plateau +included between the bend in the river and the southern angle of the +lake, a distance of leas than a mile. But nothing could be easier than +to dig a ditch, wide and deep, which would be filled from the lake, and +flow into the Mercy. Doubtless the level of the lake would be lowered +somewhat by this new drain on its resources, but Smith had assured +himself that the flow of Red Creek was sufficient for his purpose. + +“Thus,” added the engineer, “Prospect Plateau will be a veritable +island, unconnected with the rest of our domain, save by the bridge +which we will throw over the Mercy, by the two causeways already built +above and below the fall, and by the two others which are to be +constructed, one over the proposed ditch, and the other over the left +bank of the Mercy. Now if this bridge and the causeways can be raised +at will, Prospect Plateau will be secured from surprise.” + +Smith, in order to make his companions comprehend clearly his plans, +had made a plot of the plateau, and his project was rendered perfectly +plain. It met with unanimous approval; and Pencroff, brandishing his +hatchet, exclaimed:— + +“And first, for the bridge!” + +This work was the most urgent. Trees were selected, felled, lopped, and +cut into beams, planks, and boards. The bridge was to be stationary on +the right bank of the Mercy, but on the left it was to be so +constructed as to raise by means of counterweights, as in some +draw-bridges. + +It will be seen that this work, even if it could be easily +accomplished, would take considerable time, as the Mercy was eighty +feet wide at this point. It was first necessary to drive piles in the +bed of the river, to sustain the flooring of the bridge, and to set up +a pile-driver to drive the piles, so as to form two arches capable of +supporting heavy weights. + +Fortunately they lacked neither the necessary tools for preparing the +timber, nor the iron work, to bind it together, nor the ingenuity of a +man who was an adept at this sort of work, nor, finally, the zeal of +his companions who in these seven months had necessarily acquired +considerable manual skill. And it should be added that Spilett began to +do nearly as well as the sailor himself “who would never have expected +so much from a newspaper man!” + +It took three weeks of steady work to build this bridge. And as the +weather was fine they lunched on the ground, and only returned to +Granite House for supper. + +During this period it was observed that Master Jup took kindly to and +familiarized himself with his new masters, whom he watched with the +greatest curiosity. Nevertheless, Pencroff was careful not to give him +complete liberty until the limits of the plateau had been rendered +impassible. Top and he were the best possible friends, and got on +capitally together although Jup took everything gravely. + +The bridge was finished on the 20th of November. The movable part +balanced perfectly with the counterpoise, and needed but little effort +to raise it; between the hinge and crossbeam on which the draw rested +when closed, the distance was twenty feet, a gap sufficiently wide to +prevent animals from getting across. + +It was next proposed to go for the envelope of the balloon, which the +colonists were anxious to place in safety; but in order to bring it, +the cart would have to be dragged to Balloon Harbor, necessitating the +breaking of a road through the dense underwood of the Far West, all of +which would take time. Therefore Neb and Pencroff made an excursion to +the harbor, and as they reported that the supply of cloth was well +protected in the cave, it was decided that the works about the plateau +should not be discontinued. + +“This,” said Pencroff, “will enable us to establish the poultry-yard +under the most advantageous conditions, since we need have no fear of +the visits of foxes or other noxious animals.” + +“And also,” added Neb, “we can clear the plateau, and transplant wild +plants”— + +“And make ready our second corn-field,” continued the sailor with a +triumphant air. + +Indeed the first corn-field, sowed with a single grain, had prospered +admirably, thanks to the care of Pencroff. It had produced the ten ears +foretold by the engineer, and as each ear had eighty grains, the +colonists found themselves possessed of 800 grains—in six months—which +promised them a double harvest each year. These 800 grains, excepting +fifty which it was prudent to reserve, were now about to be sowed in a +new field with as much care as the first solitary specimen. + +The field was prepared, and inclosed with high, sharp-pointed +palisades, which quadrupeds would have found very difficult to +surmount. As to the birds, the noisy whirligigs and astonishing +scarecrows, the product of Pencroff’s genius, were enough to keep them +at a distance. Then the 750 grains were buried in little hills, +regularly disposed, and Nature was left to do the rest. + +On the 21st of November, Smith began laying out the ditch which was to +enclose the plateau on the west. There were two or three feet of +vegetable earth, and beneath that the granite. It was, therefore, +necessary to manufacture some more nitro-glycerine, and the +nitro-glycerine had its accustomed effect. In less than a fortnight a +ditch, twelve feet wide and six feet deep was excavated in the plateau. +A new outlet was in like manner made in the rocky border of the lake, +and the waters rushed into this new channel, forming a small stream, to +which they gave the name of Glycerine Creek. As the engineer had +foreseen the level of the lake was lowered but very slightly. Finally, +for completing the enclosure, the bed of the stream across the beach +was considerably enlarged, and the sand was kept up by a double +palisade. + +By the middle of December all these works were completed, and Prospect +Plateau, shaped something like an irregular pentagon, having a +perimeter of about four miles, was encircled with a liquid belt, making +it absolutely safe from all aggression. + +During this month the heat was very great. Nevertheless, the colonists, +not wishing to cease work, proceeded to construct the poultry-yard. +Jup, who since the enclosing of the plateau had been given his liberty, +never quitted his masters nor manifested the least desire to escape. He +was a gentle beast, though possessing immense strength and wonderful +agility. No one could go up the ladder to Granite House as he could. +Already he was given employment; he was instructed to fetch wood and +carry off the stones which had been taken from the bed of Glycerine +Creek. + +“Although he’s not yet a mason, he is already a ‘monkey,’“ said +Herbert, making a joking allusion to the nickname masons give their +apprentices. And if ever a name was well applied, it was so in this +instance! + +The poultry-yard occupied an area of 200 square yards on the southeast +bank of the lake. It was enclosed with a palisade, and within were +separate divisions for the proposed inhabitants, and huts of branches +divided into compartments awaiting their occupants. + +The first was the pair of tinamons, who were not long in breeding +numerous little ones. They had for companions half-a-dozen ducks, who +were always by the water-side. Some of these belonged to that Chinese +variety whose wings open like a fan, and whose plumage rivals in +brilliance that of the golden pheasant. Some days later, Herbert caught +a pair of magnificent curassows, birds of the gallinaceæ family, with +long rounding tails. These soon bred others, and as to the pellicans, +the kingfishers, the moorhens, they came of themselves to the +poultry-yard. And soon, all this little world, after some disputing, +cooing, scolding, clucking, ended by agreeing and multiplying at a rate +sufficient for the future wants of the colony. + +Smith, in order to complete his work, established a pigeon-house in the +corner of the poultry-yard, and placed therein a dozen wild pigeons. +These birds readily habituated themselves to their new abode, and +returned there each evening, showing a greater propensity to +domestication than the wood pigeons, their congeners, which do not +breed except in a savage state. + +And now the time was come to make use of the envelope in the +manufacture of clothing, for to keep it intact in order to attempt to +leave the island by risking themselves in a balloon filled with heated +air over a sea, which might be called limitless, was only to be thought +of by men deprived of all other resources, and Smith, being eminently +practical, did not dream of such a thing. + +It was necessary to bring the envelope to Granite House, and the +colonists busied themselves in making their heavy cart less unwieldly +and lighter. But though the vehicle was provided, the motor was still +to be found! Did not there exist in the island some ruminant of +indiginous species which could replace the horse, ass, ox, or cow? That +was the question. + +“Indeed,” said Pencroff, “a draught animal would be very useful to us, +while we are waiting until Mr. Smith is ready to build a steam-wagon or +a locomotive, though doubtless, some day we will have a railway to +Balloon Harbor, with a branch road up Mount Franklin!” + +And the honest sailor, in talking thus, believed what he said. Such is +the power of imagination combined with faith! + +But, in truth, an animal capable of being harnessed would have just +suited Pencroff, and as Fortune favored him, she did not let him want. + +One day, the 23d of December, the colonists, busy at the Chimneys, +heard Neb crying and Top barking in such emulation, that dreading some +terrible accident, they ran to them. + +What did they see? Two large, beautiful animals, which had imprudently +ventured upon the plateau, the causeways not having been closed. They +seemed like two horses, or rather two asses, male and female, finely +shaped, of a light bay color, striped with black on the head, neck, and +body, and with white legs and tail. They advanced tranquilly, without +showing any fear, and looked calmly on these men in whom they had not +yet recognized their masters. + +“They are onagers,” cried Herbert. “Quadrupeds of a kind between the +zebra and the quagga.” + +“Why aren’t they asses?” asked Neb. + +“Because they have not long ears, and their forms are more graceful.” + +“Asses or horses,” added Pencroff—“they are what Mr. Smith would call +“motors,” and it will be well to capture them!” + +The sailor, without startling the animals, slid through the grass to +the causeway over Glycerine Creek, raised it, and the onagers were +prisoners. Should they be taken by violence, and made to submit to a +forced domestication? No. It was decided that for some days they would +let these animals wander at will over the plateau where the grass was +abundant, and a stable was at once constructed near to the poultry-yard +in which the onagers would find a good bedding, and a refuge for the +night. + +The fine pair were thus left entirely at liberty, and the colonists +avoided approaching them. In the meantime the onagers often tried to +quit the plateau, which was too confined for them, accustomed to wide +ranges and deep forests. The colonists saw them following around the +belt of water impossible to cross, whinnying and galloping over the +grass, and then resting quietly for hours regarding the deep woods from +which they were shut off. + +In the meantime, harness had been made from vegetable fibres, and some +days after the capture of the onagers, not only was the cart ready, but +a road, or rather a cut, had been made through the forest all the way +from the bend in the Mercy to Balloon Harbor. They could therefore get +to this latter place with the cart, and towards the end of the month +the onagers were tried for the first time. + +Pencroff had already coaxed these animals so that they ate from his +hand, and he could approach them without difficulty, but, once +harnessed, they reared and kicked, and were with difficulty kept from +breaking loose, although it was not long before they submitted to this +new service. + +This day, every one except Pencroff, who walked beside his team, rode +in the cart to Balloon Harbor. They were jolted about a little over +this rough road, but the cart did not break down, and they were able to +load it, the same day, with the envelope and the appurtenances to the +balloon. + +By 8 o’clock in the evening, the cart, having recrossed the bridge, +followed down the bank of the Mercy and stopped on the beach. The +onagers were unharnessed, placed in the stable, and Pencroff, before +sleeping, gave a sigh of satisfaction that resounded throughout Granite +House. + + + + +CHAPTER XXX. + + +CLOTHING—SEAL-SKIN BOOTS—MAKING PYROXYLINE—PLANTING—THE FISH—TURTLES’ +EGGS—JUP’S EDUCATION—THE CORRAL-HUNTING MOUFFLONS—OTHER USEFUL ANIMALS +AND VEGETABLES—HOME THOUGHTS. + + +The first week In January was devoted to making clothing. The needles +found in the box were plied by strong, if not supple fingers, and what +was sewed, was sewed strongly. Thread was plenty, as Smith had thought +of using again that with which the strips of the balloon had been +fastened together. These long bands had been carefully unripped by +Spilett and Herbert with commendable patience, since Pencroff had +thrown aside the work, which bothered him beyond measure; but when it +came to sewing again the sailor was unequalled. + +The varnish was then removed from the cloth by means of soda procured +as before, and the cloth was afterwards bleached in the sun. Some +dozens of shirts and socks—the latter, of course, not knitted, but made +of sewed strips—were thus made. How happy it made the colonists to be +clothed again in white linen—linen coarse enough, it is true, but they +did not mind that—and to lie between sheets, which transformed the +banks of Granite House into real beds! About this time they also made +boots from seal leather, which were a timely substitute for those +brought from America. They were long and wide enough, and never pinched +the feet of the pedestrians. + +In the beginning of the year (1866) the hot weather was incessant, but +the hunting in the woods, which fairly swarmed with birds and beasts, +continued; and Spilett and Herbert were too good shots to waste powder. +Smith had recommended them to save their ammunition, and that they +might keep it for future use the engineer took measures to replace it +by substances easily renewable. How could he tell what the future might +have in store for them in case they left the island? It behooved them, +therefore, to prepare for all emergencies. + +As Smith had not discovered any lead in the island he substituted iron +shot, which were easily made. As they were not so heavy as leaden ones +they had to be made larger, and the charges contained a less number, +but the skill of the hunters counterbalanced this defect. Powder he +could have made, since he had all the necessary materials but as its +preparation requires extreme care, and as without special apparatus it +is difficult to make it of good quality, Smith proposed to manufacture +pyroxyline, a kind of gun-cotton, a substance in which cotton is not +necessary, except as cellulose. Now cellulose is simply the elementary +tissue of vegetables, and is found in almost a pure state not only in +cotton, but also in the texile fibres of hemp and flax, in paper and +old rags, the pith of the elder, etc. And it happened that elder trees +abounded in the island towards the mouth of Red Creek:—the colonists +had already used its shoots and berries in place of coffee. + +Thus they had the cellulose at hand, and the only other substance +necessary for the manufacture of pyroxyline was nitric acid, which +Smith could easily produce as before. The engineer, therefore, resolved +to make and use this combustible, although he was aware that it had +certain serious inconveniences, such as inflaming at 170° instead of +240°, and a too instantaneous deflagration for firearms. On the other +hand, pyroxyline had these advantages—it was not affected by dampness, +it did not foul the gun-barrels, and its explosive force was four times +greater than that of gunpowder. + +In order to make the pyroxyline, Smith made a mixture of three parts of +nitric acid with five of concentrated sulphuric acid, and steeped the +cellulose in this mixture for a quarter of an hour; afterwards it was +washed in fresh water and left to dry. The operation succeeded +perfectly, and the hunters had at their disposal a substance perfectly +prepared, and which, used with discretion, gave excellent results. + +About this time the colonists cleared three acres of Prospect Plateau, +leaving the rest as pasture for the onagers. Many excursions were made +into Jacamar Wood and the Far West, and they brought back a perfect +harvest of wild vegetables, spinach, cresses, charlocks, and radishes, +which intelligent culture would greatly change, and which would serve +to modify the flesh diet which the colonists had been obliged to put up +with. They also hauled large quantities of wood and coal, and each +excursion helped improve the roads by grinding down its inequalities +under the wheels. + +The warren always furnished its contingent of rabbits, and as it was +situated without Glycerine creek, its occupants could not reach nor +damage the new plantations. As to the oyster-bed among the coast rocks, +it furnished a daily supply of excellent mollusks. Further, fish from +the lake and river were abundant, as Pencroff had made set-lines on +which they often caught trout and another very savory fish marked with +small yellow spots on a silver-colored body. Thus Neb, who had charge +of the culinary department, was able to make an agreeable change in the +menu of each repast. Bread alone was wanting at the colonists’ table, +and they felt this privation exceedingly. + +Sometimes the little party hunted the sea-turtles, which frequented the +coast at Mandible Cape. At this season the beach was covered with +little mounds enclosing the round eggs, which were left to the sun to +hatch; and as each turtle produces two hundred and fifty eggs annually, +their number was very great. + +“It is a true egg-field,” said Spilett, “and all we have to do is to +gather them.” + +But they did not content themselves with these products; they hunted +also the producers, and took back to Granite House a dozen of these +reptiles, which were excellent eating. Turtle soup, seasoned with +herbs, and a handful of shell-fish thrown in, gained high praise for +its concoctor, Neb. + +Another fortunate event, which permitted them to make new provision for +winter, must be mentioned. Shoals of salmon ascended the Mercy for many +miles, in order to spawn. The river was full of these fish, which +measured upwards of two feet in length, and it was only necessary to +place some barriers in the stream in order to capture a great many. +Hundreds were caught in this way, and salted down for winter, when the +ice would stop the fishing. + +Jup, during this time, was elevated to the position of a domestic. He +had been clothed in a jacket, and short trowsers, and an apron with +pockets, which were his joy, as he kept his hands in them and allowed +no one to search them. The adroit orang had been wonderfully trained by +Neb, and one would have said they understood each other’s conversation. +Jup had, moreover, a real affection for the Negro, which was +reciprocated. When the monkey was not wanted to carry wood or to climb +to the top of some tree, he was passing his time in the kitchen, +seeking to imitate Neb in all that he was doing. The master also showed +great patience and zeal in instructing his pupil, and the pupil showed +remarkable intelligence in profiting by these lessons. + +Great was the satisfaction one day when Master Jup, napkin on arm, came +without having been called to wait on the table. Adroit and attentive, +he acquitted himself perfectly, changing the plates, bringing the +dishes, and pouring the drink, all with a gravity which greatly amused +the colonists, and completely overcame Pencroff. + +“Jup, some more soup! Jup, a bit more agouti! Jup, another plate! Jup, +brave, honest Jup!” + +Jup, not in the least disconcerted, responded to every call, looked out +for everything, and nodded his head intelligently when the sailor, +alluding to his former pleasantry said:— + +“Decidedly, Jup, we must double your wages!” + +The orang had become perfectly accustomed, to Granite House, and often +accompanied his masters to the forest without manifesting the least +desire to run off. It was laughable to see him march along with a stick +of Pencroff’s on his shoulder, like a gun. If any one wanted some fruit +gathered from a treetop how quickly be was up there. If the wagon +wheels stuck in the mire, with what strength he raised it onto the road +again. + +“What a Hercules!” exclaimed Pencroff. “If he was as mischievous as he +is gentle we could not get along with him.” + +Towards the end of January the colonists undertook great work in the +interior of the island. It had been decided that they would establish +at the foot of Mount Franklin, near the sources of Red Creek, the +corral destined to contain the animals whose presence would have been +unpleasant near Granite House, and more particularly the moufflons, +which were to furnish wool for winter clothing. Every morning all the +colonists, or oftener Smith, Herbert, and Pencroff, went with the +onagers to the site, five miles distant, over what they called Corral +Road. There an extensive area had been chosen opposite the southern +slope of the mountain. It was a level plain, having here and there +groups of trees, situated at the base of one of the spurs, which closed +it in on that side. A small stream, rising close by, crossed it +diagonally, and emptied into Red Creek. The grass was lush, and the +position of the trees allowed the air to circulate freely. All that was +necessary was to build a palisade around to the mountain spur +sufficiently high to keep in the animals. The enclosure would be large +enough to contain one hundred cattle, moufflons or wild goats and their +young. + +The line of the corral was marked out by the engineer, and they all set +to work to cut down the trees necessary for the palisade. The road +which they had made furnished some hundred trees, which were drawn to +the place and set firmly in the ground. At the back part of the +palisade they made an entranceway, closed by a double gate made from +thick plank, which could be firmly fastened on the outside. + +The building of this corral took all of three weeks, as, besides the +work on the palisades, Smith put up large sheds for the animals. These +were made of planks, and, indeed, everything had to be made solidly and +strong, as moufflons have great strength, and their first resistance +was to be feared. The uprights, pointed at the end and charred, had +been bolted together, and the strength of the whole had been augmented +by placing braces at intervals. + +The corral finished, the next thing was to inaugurate a grand hunt at +the pasturages, near the foot of Mount Franklin, frequented by the +animals. The time chosen was the 7th of February, a lovely summer day, +and everybody took part in the affair. The two onagers, already pretty +well trained, were mounted by Spilett and Herbert and did excellent +service. The plan was to drive together the moufflons and goats by +gradually narrowing the circle of the chase around them. Smith, +Pencroff, Neb, and Jup posted themselves in different parts of the +wood, while the two horsemen and Top scoured the country for half a +mile around the corral. The moufflons were very numerous in this +neighborhood. These handsome animals were as large as deer, with larger +horns than those of rams, and a greyish-colored wool, mingled with long +hair, like argali. + +The hunt, with its going and coming, the racing backwards and forwards, +the shouting and hallooing, was fatiguing enough. Out of a hundred +animals that were driven together many escaped, but little by little +some thirty moufflons and a dozen wild goats were driven within the +corral, whose open gate seemed to offer a chance of escape. The result +was, therefore, satisfactory; and as many of these moufflons were +females with young, it was certain that the herd would prosper, and +milk and skins be plenty in the future. + +In the evening the hunters returned to Granite House nearly tired out. +Nevertheless the next day they went back to look at the corral. The +prisoners had tried hard to break down the palisade, but, not +succeeding, they had soon become quiet. + +Nothing of any importance happened during February. The routine of +daily work continued, and while improving the condition of the existing +roads, a third, starting from the enclosure, and directed towards the +southern coast, was begun. This unknown portion of Lincoln Island was +one mass of forest, such as covered Serpentine Peninsula, giving +shelter to the beasts from whose presence Spilett proposed to rid their +domain. + +Before the winter returned careful attention was given to the +cultivation of the wild plants which had been transplanted to the +plateau, and Herbert seldom returned from an excursion without bringing +back some useful vegetable. One day it was a kind of succory, from the +seed of which an excellent oil can be pressed; another time, it was the +common sorrel, whose anti-scorbutic properties were not to be +neglected; and again, it was some of those valuable tubercles which +have always been cultivated in South America, those potatoes, of which +more than two hundred species are known at present. The kitchen garden, +already well enclosed, well watered, and well defended against the +birds, was divided into small beds of lettuce, sorrel, radish, +charlock, and other crucifers; and as the soil upon the plateau was of +wonderful richness, abundant crops might be anticipated. + +Neither were various drinks wanting, and unless requiring wine, the +most fastidious could not have complained. To the Oswego tea, made from +the mountain mint, and the fermented liquor made from the roots of the +dragon-tree, Smith added a genuine beer; this was made from the young +shoots of the “abies nigra,” which, after having been boiled and +fermented, yielded that agreeable and particularly healthful drink, +known to Americans as “spring beer,” that is, spruce beer. + +Toward the close of summer the poultry yard received a fine pair of +bustards belonging to the species “houbara,” remarkable for a sort of +short cloak of feathers and a membranous pouch extending on either side +of the upper mandible; also some fine cocks, with black skin, comb, and +wattles, like those of Mozambique, which strutted about the lake shore. + +Thus the zeal of these intelligent and brave men made every thing +prosper. Providence, doubtless, assisted them; but, faithful to the +precept, they first helped themselves, and Heaven helped them +accordingly. + +In the evenings, during this warm summer weather, after the day’s work +was ended, and when the sea breeze was springing up, the colonists +loved to gather together on the edge of Prospect Plateau in an arbor of +Neb’s building, covered with climbing plants. There they conversed and +instructed each other, and planned for the future; or the rough wit of +the sailor amused this little world, in which the most perfect harmony +had never ceased to reign. + +They talked, too, of their country, dear and grand America. In what +condition was the Rebellion? It certainly could not have continued. +Richmond had, doubtless, soon fallen into General Grant’s hands. The +capture of the Confederate capital was necessarily the last act in that +unhappy struggle. By this time the North must have triumphed. How a +newspaper would have been welcomed by the colonists of Lincoln Island! +It was eleven months since all communication between them and the rest +of the world had been interrupted, and pretty soon, the 24th of March, +the anniversary of the day when the balloon had thrown them on this +unknown coast, would have arrived. Then they were castaways, struggling +with the elements for life. Now thanks to the knowledge of their +leader, thanks to their own intelligence, they were true colonists, +furnished with arms, tools, instruments, who had turned to their use +the animals, vegetables and minerals of the island, the three kingdoms +of nature. + +As to Smith, he listened to the conversation of his companions oftener +than he spoke himself. Sometimes he smiled at some thought of +Herbert’s, or some sally of Pencroff’s, but always and above all other +things, he reflected upon those inexplicable events, upon that strange +enigma whose secret still escaped him. + + + + +CHAPTER XXXI. + + +BAD WEATHER—THE HYDRAULIC ELEVATOR—MAKING WINDOW GLASS AND TABLE +WARE—THE BREAD TREE—FREQUENT VISITS TO THE CORRAL—THE INCREASE OF THE +HERD—THE REPORTER’S QUESTION—THE EXACT POSITION OF LINCOLN +ISLAND—PENCROFF’S PROPOSAL. + + +The weather changed during the first week in March. There was a full +moon in the beginning of the month, and the heat was excessive. The +electricity in the air could be felt, and the stormy weather was at +hand. On the 2d the thunder was very violent, the wind came out east, +and the hail beat against the front of Granite House, pattering like a +volley of musketry. It was necessary to fasten the doors and shutters +in order to keep the rooms from being inundated. Some of the hailstones +were as large as pigeons’ eggs, and made Pencroff think of his +cornfield. He instantly ran there, and by covering the tiny young +sprouts with a large cloth was able to protect them. The sailor was +well pelted, but he did not mind that. + +The stormy weather lasted for eight days, and the thunder was almost +continuous. The heavens were full of lightning, and many trees in the +forest were struck, and also a huge pine growing upon the border of the +lake. Two or three times the electric fluid struck the beach, melting +and vitrifying the sand. Finding these fulgurites, Smith conceived the +idea that it would be possible to furnish the windows of Granite House +with glass thick and solid enough to resist the wind and rain and hail. + +The colonists, having no immediate out-of-doors work, profited by the +bad weather to complete and perfect the interior arrangements of +Granite House. The engineer built a lathe with which they were able to +turn some toilette articles and cooking utensils, and also some +buttons, the need of which had been pressing. They also made a rack for +the arms, which were kept with the utmost care. Nor was Jup forgotten; +he occupied a chamber apart, a sort of cabin with a frame always full +of good bedding, which suited him exactly. + +“There’s no such thing as fault-finding with Jup,” said Pencroff. “What +a servant he is, Neb!” + +“He is my pupil and almost my equal!” + +“He’s your superior,” laughed the sailor, “as you can talk, Neb, and he +cannot!” + +Jup had by this time become perfectly familiar with all the details of +his work. He brushed the clothes, turned the spit, swept the rooms, +waited at table, and—what delighted Pencroff—never laid down at night +before he had tucked the worthy sailor in his bed. + +As to the health of the colony, bipeds and bimana, quadrupeds and +quadrumana, it left nothing to be desired. With the out-of-doors work, +on this salubrious soil, under this temperate zone, laboring with head +and hand, they could not believe that they could ever be sick, and all +were in splendid health. Herbert had grown a couple of inches during +the year; his figure had developed and knitted together, and he +promised to become a fine man physically and morally. He profited by +the lessons which he learned practically and from the books in the +chest, and he found in the engineer and the reporter masters pleased to +teach him. It was the engineer’s desire to teach the lad all he himself +knew. + +“If I die,” thought Smith, “he will take my place.” + +The storm ended on the 9th of March, but the sky remained clouded +during the remainder of the month, and, with the exception of two or +three fine days, rainy or foggy. + +About this time a little onager was born, and a number of moufflons, to +the great joy of Neb and Herbert, who had each their favorites among +these new comers. + +The domestication of piccaries was also attempted—a pen being built +near the poultry-yard, and a number of the young animals placed therein +under Neb’s care. Jup was charged with taking them their daily +nourishment, the kitchen refuse, and he acquitted himself +conscientiously of the task. He did, indeed, cut off their tails, but +this was a prank and not naughtiness, because those little twisted +appendages amused him like a toy, and his instinct was that of a child. + +One day in March, Pencroff, talking with the engineer, recalled to his +mind a promise made some time before. + +“You have spoken of something to take the place of our long ladder, Mr. +Smith. Will you make it some day?” + +“You mean a kind of elevator?” answered Smith. + +“Call it an elevator if you wish,” responded the sailor. “The name does +not matter, provided we can get to our house easily.” + +“Nothing is easier, Pencroff; but is it worth while?” + +“Certainly, sir, it is. After we have the necessaries, let us think of +the conveniences. For people this will be a luxury, if you choose; but +for things, it is indispensable. It is not so easy to climb a long +ladder when one is heavily loaded.” + +“Well, Pencroff, we will try to satisfy you,” answered Smith. + +“But you haven’t the machine.” + +“We will make one.” + +“To go by steam?” + +“No, to go by water.” + +Indeed, a natural force was at hand. All that was necessary was to +enlarge the passage which furnished Granite House with water, and make +a fall at the end of the corridor. Above this fall the engineer placed +a paddle-wheel, and wrapped around its axle a strong rope attached to a +basket. In this manner, by means of a long cord which reached to the +ground, they could raise or lower the basket by means of the hydraulic +motor. + +On the 17th of March the elevator was used for the first time, and +after that everything was hoisted into Granite House by its means. Top +was particularly pleased by this improvement, as he could not climb +like Jup, and he had often made the ascent on the back of Neb or of the +orang. + +Smith also attempted to make glass, which was difficult enough, but +after numerous attempts he succeeded in establishing a glass-works at +the old pottery, where Herbert and Spilett spent several days. The +substances entering into the composition of glass—sand, chalk, and +soda—the engineer had at hand; but the “cane” of the glassmaker, an +iron tube five or six feet long, was wanting. This Pencroff, however, +succeeded in making, and on the 28th of March the furnace was heated. + +One hundred parts of sand, thirty-five of chalk, forty of sulphate of +soda, mixed with two of three parts of powdered charcoal, composed the +substance which was placed in earthen vessels and melted to a liquid, +or rather to the consistency of paste. Smith “culled” a certain +quantity of this paste with his cane, and turned it back and forth on a +metal plate so placed that it could be blown on; then he passed the +cane to Herbert, telling him to blow in it. + +“As you do to make soap bubbles?” + +“Exactly.” + +So Herbert, puffing out his cheeks, blew through the cane, which he +kept constantly turning about, in such a manner as to inflate the +vitreous mass. Other quantities of the substance in fusion were added +to the first, and the result was a bubble, measuring a foot in +diameter. Then Smith took the cane again, and swinging it like a +pendulum, he made this bubble lengthen into the shape of cylinder. + +This cylinder was terminated at either end by two hemispherical caps, +which were easily cut off by means of a sharp iron dipped in cold +water; in the same way the cylinder was cut lengthwise, and after +having been heated a second time it was spread on the plate and +smoothed with a wooden roller. + +Thus the first glass was made, and by repeating the operation fifty +times they had as many glasses, and the windows of Granite House were +soon garnished with transparent panes, not very clear, perhaps, but +clear enough. + +As to the glassware, that was mere amusement. They took whatever shape +happened to come at the end of the cane. Pencroff had asked to be +allowed to blow in his turn and he enjoyed it, but he blew so hard that +his products took the most diverting forms, which pleased him +amazingly. + +During one of the excursions undertaken about this time a new tree was +discovered, whose products added much to the resources of the colony. + +Smith and Herbert, being out hunting one day, went into the forests of +the Far West, and as usual the lad asked the engineer a thousand +questions, and as Smith was no sportsman, and Herbert was deep in +physics and chemistry, the game did not suffer; and so it fell out that +the day was nearly ended, and the two hunters were likely to have made +a useless excursion, when Herbert, stopping suddenly, exclaimed +joyfully:— + +“Oh, Mr. Smith, do you see that tree?” + +And he pointed out a shrub rather than a tree, as it was composed of a +single stem with a scaly bark, and leaves striped with small parallel +veins. + +“It looks like a small palm. What is it?” asked Smith. + +“It is a “cycas revoluta,” about which I have read in our Dictionary of +Natural History.” + +“But I see no fruit on this shrub?” + +“No, sir, but its trunk contains a flour which Nature furnishes all +ground.” + +“Is it a bread-tree?” + +“That’s it, exactly.” + +“Then, my boy, since we are waiting for our wheat crop, this is a +valuable discovery. Examine it, and pray heaven you are not mistaken.” + +Herbert was not mistaken. He broke the stem of the cycas, which was +composed of a glandular tissue containing a certain quantity of +farinaceous flour, traversed by ligneous fibres and separated by +concentric rings of the same substance. From the fecula oozed a sticky +liquid of a disagreeable taste, but this could readily be removed by +pressure. The substance itself formed a real flour of superior quality, +extremely nourishing, and which used to be forbidden exportation by the +laws of Japan. + +Smith and Herbert, after baring carefully noted the location of the +cycas, returned to Granite House and made known their discovery, and +the next day all the colonists went to the place, and, Pencroff, +jubilant, asked the engineer:— + +“Mr Smith, do you believe there are such things as castaways’ islands?” + +“What do you mean, Pencroff?.” + +“Well, I mean islands made especially for people to be shipwrecked +upon, where the poor devils could always get along!” + +“Perhaps,” said the engineer, smiling. + +“Certainly!” answered the sailor, “and just as certainly Lincoln Island +is one of them!” + +They returned to Granite House with an ample supply of cycas stems, and +the engineer made a press by which the liquid was expelled, and they +obtained a goodly quantity of flour which Neb transformed into cakes +and puddings. They had not yet real wheaten bread, but it was the next +thing to do. + +The onager, the goats, and the sheep in the corral furnished a daily +supply of milk to the colony, and the cart, or rather a light wagon, +which had taken its place, made frequent trips to the corral. And when +Pencroff’s turn came, he took Jup along, and made him drive, and Jup, +cracking his whip, acquitted himself with his usual intelligence. Thus +everything prospered, and the colonists, if they had not been so far +from their country, would have had nothing to complain of. They liked +the life and they were so accustomed to the island that they would have +left it with regret. Nevertheless, such is man’s love of country, that +had a ship hove in sight the colonists would have signalled it, have +gone aboard and departed. Meantime, they lived this happy life and they +had rather to fear than to wish for any interruption of its course. + +But who is able to flatter himself that he has attained his fortune and +reached the summit of his desires? + +The colonists often discussed the nature of their Island, which they +had inhabited for more than a year, and one day a remark was made +which, was destined, later, to bring about the most serious result. + +It was the 1st of April, a Sunday, and the Pascal feast, which Smith +and his companions had sanctified by rest and prayer. The day had been +lovely, like a day in October in the Northern Hemisphere. Towards +evening all were seated in the arbor on the edge of the plateau, +watching the gradual approach of night, and drinking some of Neb’s +elderberry coffee. They had been talking of the island and its isolated +position in the Pacific, when something made Spilett say:— + +“By the way, Cyrus, have you ever taken the position of the island +again since you have had the sextant?” + +“No,” answered the engineer. + +“Well, wouldn’t it be well enough to do so?”. + +“What would be the use?” asked Pencroff. “The island is well enough +where it is.” + +“Doubtless,” answered Spilett, “but it is possible that the +imperfections of the other instruments may have caused an error in that +observation, and since, it is easy to verify it exactly—” + +“You are right, Spilett,” responded the engineer, “and I would have +made this verification before, only that if I have made an error it +cannot exceed five degrees in latitude or longitude.” + +“Who knows,” replied the reporter, “who knows but that we are much +nearer an inhabited land than we believe?” + +“We will know to-morrow,” responded the engineer,” and had it not been +for the other work, which has left us no leisure, we would have known +already.” + +“Well,” said Pencroff, “Mr. Smith is too good an observer to have been +mistaken, and if the island has not moved, it is just where he put it!” + +So the next day the engineer made the observations with the sextant +with the following result:—Longitude 150° 30’ west; latitude 34° 57’ +south. The previous observation had given the situation of the island +as between longitude 150° and 155° west, and latitude 36° and 35° +south, so that, notwithstanding the rudeness of his apparatus, Smith’s +error had not been more than five degrees. + +“Now,” said Spilett, “since, beside a sextant, we have an atlas, see, +my dear Cyrus, the exact position of Lincoln Island in the Pacific.” + +Herbert brought the atlas, which it will be remembered gave the +nomenclature in the French language, and the volume was opened at the +map of the Pacific. The engineer, compass in hand, was about to +determine their situation, when, suddenly he paused, exclaiming:— + +“Why, there is an island marked in this part of the Pacific!” + +“An island?” cried Pencroff. + +“Doubtless it is ours.” added Spilett. + +“No.” replied Smith. “This island is situated in 153° of longitude and +37° 11’ of latitude.” + +“And what’s the name?” asked Herbert. + +“Tabor Island.” + +“Is it important?” + +“No, it is an island lost in the Pacific, and which has never, perhaps, +been visited.” + +“Very well, we will visit it,” said Pencroff. + +“We?” + +“Yes, sir; We will build a decked boat, and I will undertake to steer +her. How far are we from this Tabor Island?” + +“A hundred and fifty miles to the northeast.” + +“Is that all?” responded Pencroff. + +“Why in forty-eight hours, with a good breeze, we will be there!” + +“But what would be the use?” asked the reporter. + +“We cannot tell till we see it!” + +And upon this response it was decided that a boat should be built so +that it might be launched by about the next October, on the return of +good weather. + + + + +CHAPTER XXXII. + + +SHIP BUILDING—THE SECOND HARVEST—AI HUNTING—A NEW PLANT—A WHALE—THE +HARPOON FROM THE VINEYARD—CUTTING UP THIS CETACEA—USE OF THE +WHALEBONE—THE END OF MAY—PENCROFF IS CONTENT. + + +When Pencroff was possessed of an idea, he would not rest till it was +executed. Now, he wanted to visit Tabor Island, and as a boat of some +size was necessary, therefore the boat must be built. He and the +engineer accordingly determined upon the following model:— + +The boat was to measure thirty-five feet on the keel by nine feet +beam—with the lines of a racer—and to draw six feet of water, which +would be sufficient to prevent her making leeway. She was to be +flush-decked, with the two hatchways into two holds separated by a +partition, and sloop-rigged with mainsail, topsail, jib, storm-jib and +brigantine, a rig easily handled, manageable in a squall, and excellent +for lying close in the wind. Her hull was to be constructed of planks, +edge to edge, that is, not overlapping, and her timbers would be bent +by steam after the planking had been adjusted to a false frame. + +On the question of wood, whether to use elm or deal, they decided on +the latter as being easier to work, and supporting immersion in water +the better. + +These details having been arranged, it was decided that, as the fine +weather would not return before six months, Smith and Pencroff should +do this work alone. Spilett and Herbert were to continue hunting, and +Neb and his assistant, Master Jup, were to attend to the domestic cares +as usual. + +At once trees were selected and cut down and sawed into planks, and a +week later a ship-yard was made in the hollow between Granite House and +the Cliff, and a keel thirty-five feet long, with stern-post and stem +lay upon the sand. + +Smith had not entered blindly upon this undertaking. He understood +marine construction as he did almost everything else, and he had first +drawn the model on paper. Moreover, he was well aided by Pencroff, who +had worked as a ship-carpenter. It was, therefore, only after deep +thought and careful calculation that the false frame was raised on the +keel. + +Pencroff was very anxious to begin the new enterprise, and but one +thing took him away, and then only for a day, from the work. This was +the second harvest, which was made on the 15th of April. It resulted as +before, and yielded the proportion of grains calculated. + +“Five bushels, Mr. Smith,” said Pencroff, after having scrupulously +measured these riches. + +“Five bushels,” answered the engineer, “or 650,000 grains of corn.” + +“Well, we will sow them all this time, excepting a small reserve.” + +“Yes, and if the next harvest is proportional to this we will have +4,000 bushels.” + +“And we will eat bread.” + +“We will, indeed.” + +“But we must build a mill?” + +“We will build one.” + +The third field of corn, though incomparably larger than the others, +was prepared with great care and received the precious seed. Then +Pencroff returned to his work. + +In the meantime, Spilett and Herbert hunted in the neighborhood, or +with their guns loaded with ball, adventured into the unexplored depths +of the Far West. It was an inextricable tangle of great trees growing +close together. The exploration of those thick masses was very +difficult and the engineer never undertook it without taking with him +the pocket compass, as the sun was rarely visible through the leaves. +Naturally, game was not plenty in these thick undergrowths, but three +ai were shot during the last fortnight in April, and their skins were +taken to Granite House, where they received a sort of tanning with +sulfuric acid. + +On the 30th of April, a discovery, valuable for another reason, was +made by Spilett. The two hunters were deep in the south-western part of +the Far West when the reporter, walking some fifty paces ahead of his +companion, came to a sort of glade, and was surprised to perceive an +odor proceeding from certain straight stemmed plants, cylindrical and +branching, and bearing bunches of flowers and tiny seeds. The reporter +broke off some of these stems, and, returning to the lad, asked him if +he knew what they were. + +“Where did you find this plant?” asked Herbert. + +“Over there in the glade; there is plenty of it.” + +“Well, this is a discovery that gives you Pencroff’s everlasting +gratitude.” + +“Is it tobacco?” + +“Yes, and if it is not first quality it is all the same, tobacco.” + +“Good Pencroff, how happy he’ll be. But he cannot smoke all. He’ll have +to leave some for us.” + +“I’ll tell you what, sir. Let us say nothing to Pencroff until the +tobacco has been prepared, and then some fine day we will hand him a +pipe full.” + +“And you may be sure, Herbert, that on that day the good fellow will +want nothing else in the world.” + +The two smuggled a good supply of the plant into Granite House with as +much precaution as if Pencroff had been the strictest of custom house +officers. Smith and Neb were let into the secret, but Pencroff never +suspected any thing during the two months it took to prepare the +leaves, as he was occupied all day at the ship-yard. + +On the 1st of May the sailor was again interrupted at his favorite work +by a fishing adventure, in which all the colonists took part. + +For some days they had noticed an enormous animal swimming in the sea +some two or three miles distant from the shore. It was a huge whale, +apparently belonging to the species _australis_, called “cape whales.” + +“How lucky for us if we could capture it!” cried the sailor. “Oh, if we +only had a suitable boat and a harpoon ready, so that I could +say:—Let’s go for him! For he’s worth all the trouble he’ll give us!” + +“Well, Pencroff, I should like to see you manage a harpoon. It must be +interesting.” + +“Interesting and somewhat dangerous,” said the engineer, “but since we +have not the means to attack this animal, it is useless to think about +him.” + +“I am astonished to see a whale in such comparatively high latitude.” + +“Why, Mr. Spilett, we are in that very part of the Pacific which +whalers call the ‘whale-field,’ and just here whales are found in the +greatest number.” + +“That is so,” said Pencroff, “and I wonder we have not seen one before, +but it don’t matter much since we cannot go to it.” + +And the sailor turned with a sigh to his work, as all sailors are +fishermen; and if the sport is proportionate to the size of the game, +one can imagine what a whaler must feel in the presence of a whale. +But, aside from the sport, such spoil would have been very acceptable +to the colony, as the oil, the fat, and the fins could be turned to +various uses. + +It appeared as if the animal did not wish to leave these waters. He +kept swimming about in Union Bay for two days, now approaching the +shore, when his black body could be seen perfectly, and again darting +through the water or spouting vapor to a vast height in the air. Its +presence continually engaged the thoughts of the colonists, and +Pencroff was like a child longing for some forbidden object. + +Fortune, however, did for the colonists what they could not have done +for themselves, and on the 3d of May, Neb looking from his kitchen +shouted that the whale was aground on the island. + +Herbert and Spilett, who were about starting on a hunt, laid aside +their guns, Pencroff dropped his hatchet, and Smith and Neb, joining +their companions, hurried down to the shore. It had grounded on Jetsam +Point at high water, and it was not likely that the monster would be +able to get off easily; but they must hasten in order to cut off its +retreat if necessary. So seizing some picks and spears they ran across +the bridge, down the Mercy and along the shore, and in less than twenty +minutes the party were beside the huge animal, above whom myriads of +birds were already hovering. + +“What a monster!” exclaimed Neb. + +And the term was proper, as it was one of the largest of the southern +whales, measuring forty-five feet in length and weighing not less than +150,000 pounds. + +Meantime the animal, although the tide was still high, made no effort +to get off the shore, and the reason for this was explained later when +at low water the colonists walked around its body. + +It was dead, and a harpoon protruded from its left flank. + +“Are there whalers in our neighborhood?” asked Spilett. + +“Why do you ask?” + +“Since the harpoon is still there—” + +“Oh that proves nothing, sir,” said Pencroff. “Whales sometimes go +thousands of miles with a harpoon in them, and I should not be +surprised if this one which came to die here had been struck in the +North Atlantic.” + +“Nevertheless”—began Spilett, not satisfied with Pencroff’s +affirmation. + +“It is perfectly possible,” responded the engineer, “but let us look at +the harpoon. Probably it will have the name of the ship on it.” + +Pencroff drew out the harpoon, and read this inscription:— + +Maria-Stella Vineyard. + + +“A ship from the Vineyard! A ship of my country!” be cried. “The +Maria-Stella! a good whaler! and I know her well! Oh, my friends, a +ship from the Vineyard! A whaler from the Vineyard!” + +And the sailor, brandishing the harpoon, continued to repeat that name +dear to his heart, the name of his birthplace. + +But as they could not wait for the Maria-Stella to come and reclaim +their prize, the colonists resolved to cut it up before decomposition +set in. The birds of prey were already anxious to become possessors of +the spoil, and it was necessary to drive them away with gunshots. + +The whale was a female, and her udders furnished a great quantity of +milk, which, according to Dieffenbach, resembles in taste, color, and +density, the milk of cows. + +As Pencroff had served on a whaler he was able to direct the +disagreeable work of cutting up the animal—an operation which lasted +during three days. The blubber, cut in strips two feet and a half thick +and divided into pieces weighing a thousand pounds each, was melted +down in large earthen vats, which had been brought on to the ground. +And such was its abundance, that notwithstanding a third of its weight +was lost by melting, the tongue alone yielded 6,000 pounds of oil. The +colonists were therefore supplied with an abundant supply of stearine +and glycerine, and there was, besides, the whalebone, which would find +its use, although there were neither umbrellas nor corsets in Granite +House. + +The operation ended, to the great satisfaction of the colonists, the +rest of the animal was left to the birds, who made away with it to the +last vestiges, and the daily routine of work was resumed. Still, before +going to the ship-yard, Smith worked on certain affairs which excited +the curiosity of his companions. He took a dozen of the plates of +baleen (the solid whalebone), which he cut into six equal lengths, +sharpened at the ends. + +“And what is that for?” asked Herbert, when they were finished. + +“To kill foxes, wolves, and jaguars,” answered the engineer. + +“Now?” + +“No, but this winter, when we have the ice.” + +“I don’t understand,” answered Herbert. + +“You shall understand, my lad,” answered the engineer. “This is not my +invention; it is frequently employed by the inhabitants of the Aleutian +islands. These whalebones which you see, when the weather is freezing I +will bend round and freeze in that position with a coating of ice; then +having covered them with a bit of fat, I will place them in the snow. +Supposing a hungry animal swallows one of these baits? The warmth will +thaw the ice, and the whalebone, springing back, will pierce the +stomach.” + +“That is ingenious!” said Pencroff. + +“And it will save powder and ball,” said Smith. + +“It will be better than the traps.” + +“Just wait till winter comes.” + +The ship-building continued, and towards the end of the month the +little vessel was half-finished. Pencroff worked almost too hard, but +his companions were secretly preparing a recompense for all his toil, +and the 31st of May was destined to be one of the happiest times in his +life. + +After dinner on that day, just as he was leaving table, Pencroff felt a +hand on his shoulder and heard Spilett saying to him:— + +“Don’t go yet awhile, Pencroff. You forget the dessert.” + +“Thank you, Spilett, but I must get back to work.” + +“Oh, well, have a cup of coffee.” + +“Not any.” + +“Well, then, a pipe?” + +Pencroff started up quickly, and when he saw the reporter holding him a +pipe full of tobacco, and Herbert with a light, his honest, homely face +grew pale, and he could not say a word; but taking the pipe, he placed +it to his lips, lit it, and drew five or six long puffs, one after the +other. + +A fragrant, blueish-colored smoke filled the air, and from the depths +of this cloud came a voice, delirious with joy, repeating, + +“Tobacco! real tobacco!” + +“Yes, Pencroff,” answered Smith, “and good tobacco at that.” + +“Heaven be praised!” ejaculated the sailor. “Nothing now is wanting in +our island. And he puffed and puffed and puffed. + +“Who found it?” he asked, at length. “It was you, Herbert, I suppose?” + +“No, Pencroff, it was Mr. Spilett.” + +“Mr. Spilett!” cried the sailor, hugging the reporter, who had never +been treated that way before. + +“Yes, Pencroff,”—taking advantage of a cessation in the embrace to get +his breath—“But include in your thanksgiving Herbert, who recognized +the plant, Mr. Smith, who prepared it, and Neb, who has found it hard +to keep the secret.” + +“Well, my friends, I will repay you for this some day! Meanwhile I am +eternally grateful!.” + + + + +CHAPTER XXXIII + + +WINTER—FULLING CLOTH—THE MILL —PENCROFF’S FIXED PURPOSE—THE +WHALEBONES—THE USE OF AN ALBATROSS —TOP AND JUP—STORMS—DAMAGE TO THE +POULTRY-YARD—AN EXCURSION TO THE MARSH—SMITH ALONE—EXPLORATION OF THE +PITS. + + +Winter came with June, and the principal work was the making of strong +warm clothing. The moufflons had been clipped, and the question was how +to transform the wool into cloth. + +Smith, not having any mill machinery, was obliged to proceed in the +simplest manner, in order to economize the spinning and weaving. +Therefore he proposed to make use of the property possessed by the +filaments of wool of binding themselves together under pressure, and +making by their mere entanglement the substance known as felt. This +felt can be obtained by a simple fulling, an operation which, while it +diminishes the suppleness of the stuff, greatly augments its +heat-preserving qualities; and as the moufflons’ wool was very short it +was in good condition for felting. + +The engineer, assisted by his companions, including Pencroff—who had to +leave his ship again—cleansed the wool of the grease and oil by soaking +it in warm water and washing it with soda, and, when it was partially +dried by pressure it was in a condition to be milled, that is, to +produce a solid stuff, too coarse to be of any value in the industrial +centres of Europe, but valuable enough in the Lincoln Island market. + +The engineer’s professional knowledge was of great service in +constructing the machine destined to mill the wool, as he knew how to +make ready use of the power, unemployed up to this time, in the +water-fall at the cliff, to move a fulling mill. + +Its construction was most simple. A tree furnished with cams, which +raised and dropped the vertical millers, troughs for the wool, into +which the millers fell, a strong wooden building containing and +sustaining the contrivance, such was the machine in question. + +The work, superintended by Smith, resulted admirably. The wool, +previously impregnated with a soapy solution, came from the mill in the +shape of a thick felt cloth. The striæ and roughnesses of the material +had caught and blended together so thoroughly that they formed a stuff +equally suitable for cloths or coverings. It was not, indeed, one of +the stuffs of commerce, but it was “Lincoln felt,” and the island had +one more industry. + +The colonists, being thus provided with good clothes and warm +bed-clothing, saw the winter of 1866-67 approach without any dread. The +cold really began to be felt on the 20th of June, and, to his great +regret, Pencroff was obliged to suspend work on his vessel, although it +would certainly be finished by the next spring. + +The fixed purpose of the sailor was to make a voyage of discovery to +Tabor Island, although Smith did not approve of this voyage of simple +curiosity, as there was evidently no succor to be obtained from that +desert and half arid rock. A voyage of 150 miles in a boat, +comparatively small, in the midst of unknown seas, was cause for +considerable anxiety. If the frail craft, once at sea, should be unable +to reach Tabor Island, or to return to Lincoln Island, what would +become of her in the midst of this ocean so fertile in disasters? + +Smith often talked of this project with Pencroff, and he found in the +sailor a strange obstinacy to make the voyage, an obstinacy for which +Pencroff himself could not account. + +“Well,” said the engineer one day, “you must see, Pencroff, after +having said every good of Lincoln Island, and expressing the regret you +would feel should you have to leave it, that you are the first to want +to get away.” + +“Only for a day or two,” answered Pencroff, “for a few days, Mr. Smith; +just long enough to go and return, and see what this island is.” + +“But it cannot compare with ours.” + +“I know that.”” + +“Then why go?” + +“To find out what’s going on there!” + +“But there is nothing; there can be nothing there.” + +“Who knows?” + +“And supposing you are caught in a storm?” + +“That is not likely in that season,” replied Pencroff. “But, sir, as it +is necessary to foresee everything, I want your permission to take +Herbert with me.” + +“Pencroff,” said the engineer, laying his hand on the shoulder of the +sailor, “If anything should happen to you and this child, whom chance +has made our son, do you think that we would ever forgive ourselves?” + +“Mr. Smith,” responded Pencroff with unshaken confidence, “we won’t +discuss such mishaps. But we will talk again of this voyage when the +time comes. Then, I think, when you have seen our boat well rigged, +when you have seen how well she behaves at sea, when you have made the +tour of the island—as we will, together—I think, I say, that you will +not hesitate to let me go. I do not conceal from you that this will be +a fine work, your ship.” + +“Say rather, our ship, Pencroff,” replied the engineer, momentarily +disarmed. And the conversation, to be renewed later, ended without +convincing either of the speakers. + +The first snow fell towards the end of the month. The corral had been +well provisioned, and there was no further necessity for daily visits, +but it was decided to go there at least once a week. The traps were set +again, and the contrivances of Smith were tried, and worked perfectly. +The bent whalebones, frozen, and covered with fat, were placed near the +edge of the forest, at a place frequented by animals, and some dozen +foxes, some wild boars, and a jaguar were found killed by this means, +their stomachs perforated by the straightened whalebones. + +At this time, an experiment, thought of by the reporter, was made. It +was the first attempt of the colonists to communicate with their +kindred. + +Spilett had already often thought of throwing a bottle containing a +writing into the sea, to be carried by the currents, perhaps, to some +inhabited coast, or to make use of the pigeons. But it was pure folly +to seriously believe that pigeons or bottles could cross the 1,200 +miles separating the island from all lands.— + +But on the 30th of June they captured, not without difficulty, an +albatross, which Herbert had slightly wounded in the foot. It was a +splendid specimen of its kind, its wings measuring ten feet from tip to +tip, and it could cross seas as vast as the Pacific. + +Herbert would have liked to have kept the bird and tamed it, but +Spilett made him understand that they could not afford to neglect this +chance of corresponding by means of this courier with the Pacific +coasts. So Herbert gave up the bird, as, if it had come from some +inhabited region, it was likely to return there if at liberty. + +Perhaps, in his heart, Spilett, to whom the journalistic spirit +returned sometimes, did not regret giving to the winds an interesting +article relating the adventures of the colonists of Lincoln Island. +What a triumph for the reporters of the New York _Herald_, and for the +issue containing the chronicle, if ever the latter should reach his +director, the honorable John Bennett! + +Spilett, therefore, wrote out a succinct article, which was enclosed in +a waterproof-cloth bag, with the request to whoever found it to send it +to one of the offices of the _Herald_. This little bag was fastened +around the neck of the albatross and the bird given its freedom, and it +was not without emotion that the colonists saw this rapid courier of +the air disappear in the western clouds. + +“Where does he go that way?” asked Pencroff. + +“Towards New Zealand,” answered Herbert. + +“May he have a good voyage,” said the sailor, who did not expect much +from this method of communication. + +With the winter, in-door work was resumed; old clothes were repaired, +new garments made, and the sails of the sloop made from the +inexhaustible envelope of the balloon. During July the cold was +intense, but coal and wood were abundant, and Smith had built another +chimney in the great hall, where they passed the long evenings. It was +a great comfort to the colonists, when, seated in this well-lighted and +warm hall, a good dinner finished, coffee steaming in the cups, the +pipes emitting a fragrant smoke, they listened to the roar of the +tempest without. They were perfectly comfortable, if that is possible +where one is far from his kindred and without possible means of +communicating with them. They talked about their country, of their +friends at home, of the grandeur of the republic, whose influence must +increase; and Smith, who had had much to do with the affairs of the +Union, entertained his hearers with his stories, his perceptions and +his prophecies. + +One evening as they had been sitting talking in this way for some time, +they were interrupted by Top, who began barking in that peculiar way +which had previously attracted the attention of the engineer, and +running around the mouth of the well which opened at the end of the +inner corridor. + +“Why is Top barking that way again?” asked Pencroff. + +“And Jup growling so?” added Herbert. + +Indeed, both the dog and the orang gave unequivocal signs of agitation, +and curiously enough these two animals seemed to be more alarmed than +irritated. + +It is evident,” said Spilett, “that this well communicates directly +with the sea, and that some animal comes to breathe in its depths.” + +“It must be so, since there is no other explanation to give. Be quiet, +Top! and you, Jup! go to your room.” + +The animals turned away, Jup went to his bed, but Top remained in the +hall, and continued whining the remainder of the evening. It was not, +however, the question of this incident that darkened the countenance of +the engineer. + +During the remainder of the month, rain and snow alternated, and though +the temperature was not as low as during the preceding winter, there +were more storms and gales. On more than one occasion the Chimneys had +been threatened by the waves, and it seemed as if an upraising of the +sea, caused by some submarine convulsion, raised the monstrous billows +and hurled them against Granite House. + +During these storms it was difficult, even dangerous, to attempt using +the roads on the island, as the trees were falling constantly. +Nevertheless, the colonists never let a week pass without visiting the +corral, and happily this enclosure, protected by the spur of the +mountain, did not suffer from the storms. But the poultry-yard, from +its position, exposed to the blast, suffered considerable damage. Twice +the pigeon-house was unroofed, and the fence also was demolished, +making it necessary to rebuild it more solidly. It was evident that +Lincoln Island was situated in the worst part of the Pacific. Indeed, +it seemed as if the island formed the central point of vast cyclones +which whipped it as if it were a top; only in this case the top was +immovable and the whip spun about. + +During the first week in August the storm abated, and the atmosphere +recovered a calm which it seemed never to have lost. With the calm the +temperature lowered, and the thermometer of the colonists indicated 8° +below zero. + +On the 3d of August, an excursion, which had been planned for some time +was made to Tadorn’s Fen. The hunters were tempted by the great number +of aquatic birds which made these marshes their home, and not only +Spilett and Herbert, but Pencroff and Neb took part in the expedition. +Smith alone pleaded some excuse for remaining behind at Granite House. + +The hunters promised to return by evening. Top and Jup accompanied +them. And when they had crossed the bridge over the Mercy the engineer +left them, and returned with the idea of executing a project in which +he wished to be alone. This was to explore minutely the well opening +into the corridor. + +Why did Top run round this place so often? Why did he whine in that +strange way? Why did Jup share Top’s anxiety? Had this well other +branches beside the communication with the sea? Did it ramify towards +other portions of the island? This is what Smith wanted to discover, +and, moreover, to be alone in his discovery. He had resolved to make +this exploration during the absence of his companions, and here was the +opportunity. + +It was easy to descend to the bottom of the well by means of the +ladder, which had not been used since the elevator had taken its place. +The engineer dragged this ladder to the opening of the well, and, +having made fast one end, let it unroll itself into the abyss. Then, +having lit a lantern, and placing a revolver and cutlass in his belt, +he began to descend the rungs. The sides of the well were smooth, but +some projections of rocks appeared at intervals, and by means of these +projections an athlete could have raised himself to the mouth of the +well. The engineer noticed this, but in throwing the light of the +lantern on these points he could discover nothing to indicate that they +had ever been used in that way. + +Smith descended deeper, examining every part of the well, but he saw +nothing suspicious. When he had reached the lowermost rung, he was at +the surface of the water, which was perfectly calm. Neither there, nor +in any other part of the well, was there any lateral opening. The wall, +struck by the handle of Smith’s cutlass, sounded solid. It was a +compact mass, through which no human being could make his way. In order +to reach the bottom of the well, and from thence climb to its mouth, it +was necessary to traverse the submerged passage under the shore, which +connected with the sea, and this was only possible for marine animals. +As to knowing whereabouts on the shore, and at what depth under the +waves, this passage came out, that was impossible to discover. + +Smith, having ended his exploration, remounted the ladder, covered over +again the mouth of the well, and returned thoughtfully to the great +hall of Granite House, saying to himself:— + +“I have seen nothing, and yet, there is something there.” + + + + +CHAPTER XXXIV. + + +RIGGING THE LAUNCH—ATTACKED BY FOXES—JUP WOUNDED—JUP NURSED—JUP +CURED—COMPLETION OF THE LAUNCH—PENCROFF’S TRIUMPH—THE GOOD LUCK—TRIAL +TRIP, TO THE SOUTH OF THE ISLAND—AN UNEXPECTED DOCUMENT. + + +The same evening the hunters returned, fairly loaded down with game, +the four men having all they could carry. Top had a circlet of ducks +round his neck, and Jup belts of woodcock round his body. + +“See, my master,” cried Neb, “see how we have used our time. Preserves, +pies, we will have a good reserve! But some one must help me, and I +count upon you, Pencroff.” + +“No, Neb,” responded the sailor, “the rigging of the launch occupies my +time, and you will have to do without me.” + +“And you, Master Herbert?” + +“I, Neb, must go to-morrow to the corral.” + +“Then will you help me, Mr. Spilett?” + +“To oblige you, I will, Neb,” answered the reporter, “but I warn you +that if you discover your recipes to me I will publish them.” + +“Whenever you choose, sir,” responded Neb; “whenever you choose.” + +And so the next day the reporter was installed as Neb’s aid in his +culinary laboratory. But beforehand the engineer had given him the +result of the previous day’s exploration, and Spilett agreed with Smith +in his opinion that, although he had found out nothing, still there was +a secret to be discovered. + +The cold continued a week longer, and the colonists did not leave +Granite House excepting to look after the poultry-yard. The dwelling +was perfumed by the good odors which the learned manipulations of Neb +and the reporter emitted; but all the products of the hunt in the fen +had not been made into preserves, and as the game kept perfectly in the +intense cold, wild ducks and others, were eaten fresh, and declared +better than any waterfowl in the world. + +During the week, Pencroff, assisted by Herbert, who used the sailor’s +needle skilfully, worked with such diligence that the sails of the +launch were finished. Thanks to the rigging which had been recovered +with the envelope of the balloon, hemp cordage was not wanting. The +sails were bordered by strong bolt-ropes, and there was enough left to +make halliards, shrouds, and sheets. The pulleys were made by Smith on +the lathe which he had set up, acting under Pencroff’s instruction. The +rigging was, therefore, completed before the launch was finished. +Pencroff made a red, white, and blue flag, getting the dye from certain +plants; but to the thirty-seven stars representing the thirty-seven +States of the Union, the sailor added another star, the star of the +“State of Lincoln:” as he considered his island as already annexed to +the great republic. + +“And,” said he, “it is in spirit, if it is not in fact!” + +For the present the flag was unfurled from the central window of +Granite House and saluted with three cheers. + +Meantime, they had reached the end of the cold season; and it seemed as +if this second winter would pass without any serious event, when during +the night of the 11th of August, Prospect Plateau was menaced by a +complete devastation. After a busy day the colonists were sleeping +soundly, when towards 4 o’clock in the morning, they were suddenly +awakened by Top’s barking. The dog did not bark this time at the mouth +of the pit, but at the door, and he threw himself against it as if he +wished to break it open. Jup, also, uttered sharp cries. + +“Be quiet, Top!” cried Neb, who was the first awake. + +But the dog only barked the louder. + +“What’s the matter?” cried Smith. And every one dressing in haste, +hurried to the windows and opened them. + +“Beneath them a fall of snow shone white through the darkness. The +colonists could see nothing, but they heard curious barkings +penetrating the night. It was evident that the shore had been invaded +by a number of animals which they could not see.” + +“What can they be?” cried Pencroff. + +“Wolves, jaguars, or monkeys!” replied Neb. + +“The mischief! They can get on to the plateau!” exclaimed the reporter. + +“And our poultry-yard, and our garden!” cried Herbert. + +“How have they got in?” asked Pencroff. + +“They have come through the causeway,” answered the engineer, “which +one of us must have forgotten to close!” + +“In truth,” said Spilett, “I remember that I left it open—” + +“A nice mess you have made of it, sir!” cried the sailor. + +“What is done, is done,” replied Spilett. “Let us consider what it is +necessary to do!” + +These questions and answers passed rapidly between Smith and his +companions. It was certain that the causeway had been passed, that the +shore had been invaded by animals, and that, whatever they were, they +could gain Prospect Plateau by going up the left bank of the Mercy. It +was, therefore, necessary quickly to overtake them, and, if necessary, +to fight them! + +“But what are they?” somebody asked a second time, as the barking +resounded more loudly. + +Herbert started at the sound, and he remembered having heard it during +his first visit to the sources of Red Creek. + +“They are foxes! they are foxes!” he said. + +“Come on!” cried the sailor. And all, armed with hatchets, carbines, +and revolvers, hurried into the elevator, and were soon on the shore. + +These foxes are dangerous animals, when numerous or irritated by +hunger. Nevertheless, the colonists did not hesitate to throw +themselves into the midst of the band, and their first shots, darting +bright gleams through the darkness, drove back the foremost assailants. + +It was most important to prevent these thieves from gaining Prospect +Plateau, as the garden and the poultry-yard would have been at their +mercy, and the result would have been immense, perhaps, irreparable +damage, especially to the corn-field. But as the plateau could only be +invaded by the left bank of the Mercy, it would suffice to oppose a +barrier to the foxes on the narrow portion of the shore comprised +between the river and the granite wall. + +This was apparent to all, and under Smith’s direction the party gained +this position and disposed themselves so as to form an impassable line. +Top, his formidable jaws open, preceded the colonists, and was followed +by Jup, armed with a knotty cudgel, which he brandished like a +cricket-bat. + +The night was very dark, and it was only by the flash of the discharges +that the colonists could perceive their assailants, who numbered at +least 100, and whose eyes shone like embers. + +“They must not pass!” cried Pencroff. + +“They shall not pass!” answered the engineer. + +But if they did not it was not because they did not try. Those behind +kept pushing on those in front, and it was an incessant struggle; the +colonists using their hatchets and revolvers. Already the dead bodies +of the foxes were strewn over the ground, but the band did not seem to +lessen; and it appeared as if reinforcements were constantly pouring in +through the causeway on the shore. Meantime the colonists fought side +by side, receiving some wounds, though happily but trifling. Herbert +shot one fox, which had fastened itself on Neb like a tiger-cat. Top +fought with fury, springing at the throats of the animals and +strangling them at once. Jup, armed with his cudgel, laid about him +like a good fellow, and it was useless to try to make him stay behind. +Gifted, doubtless, with a sight able to pierce the darkness, he was +always in the thick of the fight, uttering from time to time a sharp +cry, which was with him a mark of extreme jollification. At one time he +advanced so far, that by the flash of a revolver he was seen, +surrounded by five or six huge foxes, defending himself with rare +coolness. + +At length the fight ended in a victory for the colonists, but only +after two hours of resistance. Doubtless the dawn of day determined the +retreat of the foxes, who scampered off toward the north across the +drawbridge, which Neb ran at once to raise. When daylight lit the +battlefield, the colonists counted fifty dead bodies upon the shore. + +“And Jup! Where is Jup?” cried Neb. + +Jup had disappeared. His friend Neb called him, and for the first time +he did not answer the call. Every one began to search for the monkey, +trembling lest they should find him among the dead. At length, under a +veritable mound of carcasses, each one marked by the terrible cudgel of +the brave animal, they found Jup. The poor fellow still held in his +hand the handle of his broken weapon; but deprived of this arm, he had +been overpowered by numbers, and deep wounds scored his breast. + +“He’s alive!” cried Neb, who knelt beside him. + +“And we will save him,” answered the sailor, “We will nurse him as one +of ourselves!” + +It seemed as if Jup understood what was said, for he laid his head on +Pencroff’s shoulder as if to thank him. The sailor himself was wounded, +but his wounds, like those of his companions, were trifling, as thanks +to their firearms, they had always been able to keep the assailants at +a distance. Only the orang was seriously hurt. + +Jup, borne by Neb and Pencroff, was carried to the elevator, and lifted +gently to Granite House. There he was laid upon one of the beds, and +his wounds carefully washed. No vital organ seemed to have been +injured, but the orang was very feeble from loss of blood, and a strong +fever had set in. His wounds having been dressed, a strict diet was +imposed upon him, “just as for a real person,” Neb said, and they gave +him a refreshing draught made from herbs. + +He slept at first but brokenly, but little by little, his breathing +became more regular, and they left him in a heavy sleep. From time to +time Top came “on tip-toe” to visit his friend, and seemed to approve +of the attentions which had been bestowed upon it. + +One of Jup’s hands hung over the side of the bed, and Top licked it +sympathetically. + +The same morning they disposed of the dead foxes by dragging the bodies +to the Far West and burying them there. + +This attack, which might have been attended with very grave results, +was a lesson to the colonists, and thenceforth they never slept before +having ascertained that all the bridges were raised and that no +invasion was possible. + +Meantime Jup, after having given serious alarm for some days, began to +grow better. The fever abated gradually, and Spilett, who was something +of a physician, considered him out of danger. On the 16th of August Jup +began to eat. Neb made him some nice, sweet dishes, which the invalid +swallowed greedily, for if he had a fault, it was that he was a bit of +a glutton, and Neb had never done anything to correct this habit. + +“What would you have?” he said to Spilett, who sometimes rebuked the +negro for indulging him. “Poor Jup has no other pleasure than to eat! +and I am only too glad to be able to reward his services in this way!” + +By the 21st of August he was about again. His wounds were healed, and +the colonists saw that he would soon recover his accustomed suppleness +and vigor. Like other convalescents he was seized with an excessive +hunger, and the reporter let him eat what he wished, knowing that the +monkey’s instinct would preserve him from excess. Neb was overjoyed to +see his pupil’s appetite returned. + +“Eat Jup,” he said, “and you shall want for nothing. You have shed your +blood for us, and it is right that I should help you to make it again!” + +At length, on the 25th of August, the colonists seated in the great +hall, were called by Neb to Jup’s room. + +“What is it?” asked the reporter. + +“Look!” answered Neb, laughing, and what did they see but Jup, seated +like a Turk within the doorway of Granite House, tranquilly and gravely +smoking! + +“My pipe!” cried Pencroff. “He has taken my pipe! Well, Jup, I give it +to you. Smoke on my friend, smoke on!” + +And Jup gravely puffed on, seeming to experience the utmost enjoyment. + +Smith was not greatly astonished at this incident, and he cited +numerous examples of tamed monkeys that had become accustomed to the +use of tobacco. + +And after this day master Jup had his own pipe hung in his room beside +his tobacco-bag, and, lighting it himself with a live coal, he appeared +to be the happiest of quadrumana. It seemed as if this community of +taste drew closer together the bonds of friendship already existing +between the worthy monkey and the honest sailor. + +“Perhaps he is a man,” Pencroff would sometimes say to Neb. “Would it +astonish you if some day he was to speak?” + +“Indeed it would not,” replied Neb. “The wonder is that he don’t do it, +as that is all he lacks!” + +“Nevertheless, it would be funny if some fine day he said to +me:—Pencroff, suppose we change pipes!” + +“Yes,” responded Neb. “What a pity he was born mute!” + +Winter ended with September, and the work was renewed with ardor. The +construction of the boat advanced rapidly. The planking was completed, +and as wood was plenty Pencroff proposed that they line the interior +with a stout ceiling, which would insure the solidity of the craft. +Smith, not knowing what might be in store for them, approved the +sailor’s idea of making his boat as strong as possible. The ceiling and +the deck were finished towards the 13th of September. For caulking, +they used some dry wrack, and the seams were then covered with boiling +pitch, made from the pine trees of the forest. + +The arrangement of the boat was simple. She had been ballasted with +heavy pieces of granite, set in a bed of lime, and weighing 12,000 +pounds. A deck was placed over this ballast, and the interior was +divided into two compartments, the larger containing two bunks, which +served as chests. The foot of the mast was at the partition separating +the compartments, which were entered through hatchways. + +Pencroff had no difficulty in finding a tree suitable for a mast. He +chose a young straight fir, without knots, so that all he had to do was +to square the foot and round it off at the head. All the iron work had +been roughly but solidly made at the Chimneys; and in the first week of +October yards, topmast, spars, oars, etc., everything, in short, was +completed; and it was determined that they would first try the craft +along the shores of the island, so as to see how she acted. + +She was launched on the 10th of October. Pencroff was radiant with +delight. Completely rigged, she had been pushed on rollers to the edge +of the shore, and, as the tide rose, she was floated on the surface of +the water, amid the applause of the colonists, and especially of +Pencroff, who showed no modesty on this occasion. Moreover, his vanity +looked beyond the completion of the craft, as, now that she was built, +he was to be her commander. The title of captain was bestowed upon him +unanimously. + +In order to satisfy Captain Pencroff it was necessary at once to name +his ship, and after considerable discussion they decided upon Good +Luck—the name chosen by the honest sailor. Moreover, as the weather was +fine, the breeze fresh, and the sea calm, the trial must be made at +once in an excursion along the coast. + +“Get aboard! Get aboard!” cried Captain Pencroff. + +At half-past 10, after having eaten breakfast and put some provisions +aboard, everybody, including Top and Jup, embarked, the sails were +hoisted, the flag set at the masthead, and the Good Luck, with Pencroff +at the helm, stood out to sea. + +On going out from Union Bay they had a fair wind, and they were able to +see that, sailing before it, their speed was excellent. After doubling +Jetsam Point and Claw Cape, Pencroff had to lie close to the wind in +order to skirt along the shore, and he observed the Good Luck would +sail to within five points of the wind, and that she made but little +lee-way. She sailed very well, also, before the wind, minding her helm +perfectly, and gained even in going about. + +The passengers were enchanted. They had a good boat, which, in case of +need, could render them great service, and in this splendid weather, +with the fair wind, the sail was delightful. Pencroff stood out to sea +two or three miles, opposite Balloon Harbor, and then the whole varied +panorama of the island from Claw Cape to Reptile Promontory was visible +under a new aspect. In the foreground were the pine forests, +contrasting with the foliage of the other trees, and over all rose Mt. +Franklin, its head white with snow. + +“How beautiful it is!” exclaimed Herbert. + +“Yes, she is a pretty creature,” responded Pencroff. “I love her as a +mother. She received us poor and needy, and what has she denied to +these five children who tumbled upon her out of the sky?” + +“Nothing, captain, nothing,” answered Neb. And the two honest fellows +gave three hearty cheers in honor of their island. + +Meantime, Spilett, seated by the mast, sketched the panorama before +him, while Smith looked on in silence. + +“What do you say of our boat, now, sir?” demanded Pencroff. + +“It acts very well,” replied the engineer. + +“Good. And now don’t you think it could undertake a voyage of some +length?” + +“Where, Pencroff?” + +“To Tabor Island, for instance.” + +“My friend,” replied the engineer, “I believe that in a case of +necessity there need be no hesitancy in trusting to the Good Luck even +for a longer journey; but, you know, I would be sorry to see you leave +for Tabor Island, because nothing obliges you to go.” + +“One likes to know one’s neighbors,” answered Pencroff, whose mind was +made up. “Tabor Island is our neighbor, and is all alone. Politeness +requires that at least we make her a visit.” + +“The mischief!” exclaimed Spilett, “our friend Pencroff is a stickler +for propriety.” + +“I am not a stickler at all,” retorted the sailor, who was a little +vexed by the engineer’s opposition. + +“Remember, Pencroff,” said Smith, “that you could not go the island +alone.” + +“One other would be all I would want.” + +“Supposing so,” replied the engineer, “would you risk depriving our +colony of five, of two of its colonists?” + +“There are six,” rejoined Pencroff. “You forget Jup.” + +“There are seven,” added Neb. “Top is as good as another.” + +“There is no risk in it, Mr. Smith,” said Pencroff again. + +“Possibly not, Pencroff; but, I repeat, that it is exposing oneself +without necessity.” + +The obstinate sailor did not answer, but let the conversation drop for +the present. He little thought that an incident was about to aid him, +and change to a work of humanity what had been merely a caprice open to +discussion. + +The Good Luck, after having stood out to sea, was returning towards the +coast and making for Balloon Harbor, as it was important to locate the +channel-way between the shoals and reefs so as to buoy them, for this +little inlet was to be resting place of the sloop. + +They were half a mile off shore, beating up to windward and moving +somewhat slowly, as the boat was under the lee of the land. The sea was +as smooth as glass. Herbert was standing in the bows indicating the +channel-way. Suddenly he cried:— + +“Luff, Pencroff, luff.” + +“What is it?” cried the sailor, springing to his feet. “A rock?” + +“No—hold on, I cannot see very well—luff again—steady—bear away a +little—” and while thus speaking, the lad lay down along the deck, +plunged his arm quickly into the water, and then rising up again with +something in his hand, exclaimed:— + +“It is a bottle!” + +Smith took it, and without saying a word, withdrew the cork and took +out a wet paper, on which was written these words:— + +“A shipwrecked man—Tabor Island:—l53° W. lon.—37° 11’ S. lat.” + + + + +CHAPTER XXXV. + + +DEPARTURE DECIDED UPON—PREPARATIONS—THE THREE PASSENGERS—THE FIRST +NIGHT—THE SECOND NIGHT—TABOR ISLAND—SEARCH ON THE SHORE—SEARCH IN THE +WOODS—NO ONE—ANIMALS—PLANTS—A HOUSE—DESERTED. + + +“Some one shipwrecked!” cried Pencroff, “abandoned some hundred miles +from us upon Tabor Island! Oh! Mr. Smith, you will no longer oppose my +project!” + +“No, Pencroff, and you must leave as soon as possible.”. + +“To-morrow?” + +“To-morrow.” + +The engineer held the paper which he had taken from the bottle in his +hand. He considered for a few moments, and then spoke:— + +“From this paper, my friends,” said he, “and from the manner in which +it is worded, we must conclude that, in the first place, the person +cast away upon Tabor Island is a man well informed, since he gives the +latitude and longitude of his island exactly; secondly, that he is +English or American, since the paper is written in English.” + +“That is a logical conclusion,” answered Spilett, “and the presence of +this person explains the arrival of the box on our coast. There has +been a shipwreck, since some one has been shipwrecked. And he is +fortunate in that Pencroff had the idea of building this boat and even +of trying it to-day, for in twenty-four hours the bottle would have +been broken on the rocks.” + +“Indeed,!’ said Herbert, “it is a happy chance that the Good Luck +passed by the very spot where this bottle was floating.” + +“Don’t it seem to you odd?” asked Smith of Pencroff. + +“It seems fortunate, that’s all,” replied the sailor. “Do you see +anything extraordinary in it, sir? This bottle must have gone +somewhere, and why not here as well as anywhere else?” + +“Perhaps you are right, Pencroff,” responded the engineer, “and +nevertheless—” + +“But,” interrupted Herbert, “nothing proves that this bottle has +floated in the water for a long time.” + +“Nothing,” responded Spilett, “and moreover the paper seems to have +been recently written. What do you think, Cyrus?” + +“It is hard to decide.” answered Smith.. + +Meanwhile Pencroff had not been idle. He had gone about, and the Good +Luck, with a free wind, all her sails drawing, was speeding toward Claw +Cape. Each one thought of the castaway on Tabor Island. Was there still +time to save him? This was a great event in the lives of the colonists. +They too were but castaways, but it was not probable that another had +been as favored as they had been, and it was their duty to hasten at +once to this one’s relief. By 2 o’clock Claw Cape was doubled, and the +Good Luck anchored at the mouth of the Mercy. + +That evening all the details of the expedition were arranged. It was +agreed that Herbert and Pencroff, who understood the management of a +boat, were to undertake the voyage alone. By leaving the next day, the +11th of October, they would reach the island, supposing the wind +continued, in forty-eight hours. Allowing for one day there, and three +or four days to return in, they could calculate on being at Lincoln +Island again on the 17th. The weather was good, the barometer rose +steadily, the wind seemed as if it would continue, everything favored +these brave men, who were going so far to do a humane act. + +Thus, Smith, Neb, and Spilett was to remain at Granite House; but at +the last moment, the latter, remembering his duty as reporter to the +New York _Herald_, having declared that he would swim rather than lose +such an opportunity, was allowed to take part in the voyage. + +The evening was employed in putting bedding, arms, munitions, +provisions, etc., on board, and the next morning, by 5 o’clock, the +good-byes were spoken, and Pencroff, hoisting the sails, headed for +Claw Cape, which had to be doubled before taking the route to the +southeast. The Good Luck was already a quarter of a mile from shore +when her passengers saw upon the heights of Granite House two men +signalling farewells. They were Smith and Neb, from whom they were +separating for the first time in fifteen months. + +Pencroff, Herbert, and the reporter returned the signal, and soon +Granite House disappeared behind the rocks of the Cape. + +During the morning, the Good Luck remained in view of the southern +coast of the island, which appeared like a green clump of trees, above +which rose Mount Franklin. The heights, lessened by distance, gave it +an appearance little calculated to attract ships on its coasts. At 1 +o’clock Reptile Promontory was passed ten miles distant. It was +therefore impossible to distinguish the western coast, which extended +to the spurs of the mountain, and three hours later, Lincoln Island had +disappeared behind the horizon. + +The Good Luck behaved admirably. She rode lightly over the seas and +sailed rapidly. Pencroff had set his topsail, and with a fair wind he +followed a straight course by the compass. Occasionally Herbert took +the tiller, and the hand of the young lad was so sure, that the sailor +had nothing to correct. + +Spilett chatted with one and the other, and lent a hand when necessary +in manœuvring the sloop. Captain Pencroff was perfectly satisfied with +his crew, and was constantly promising them an extra allowance of grog. + +In the evening the slender crescent of the moon glimmered in the +twilight. The night came on dark but starlit, with the promise of a +fine day on the morrow. Pencroff thought it prudent to take in the +topsail, which was perhaps an excess of caution in so still a night, +but he was a careful sailor, and was not to be blamed. + +The reporter slept during half the night, Herbert and Pencroff taking +two-hour turns at the helm. The sailor had as much confidence in his +pupil as he had in himself, and his trust was justified by the coolness +and judgment of the lad. Pencroff set the course as a captain to his +helmsman, and Herbert did not allow the Good Luck to deviate a point +from her direction. + +The night and the next day passed quietly and safely. The Good Luck +held her southeast course, and, unless she was drawn aside by some +unknown current, she would make Tabor Island exactly. The sea was +completely deserted, save that sometimes an albatross or frigate-bird +passed within gun-shot distance. + +“And yet,” said Herbert, “this is the season when the whalers usually +come towards the southern part of the Pacific. I don’t believe that +there is a sea more deserted than this.” + +“It is not altogether deserted,” responded Pencroff. + +“What do you mean?” + +“Why we are here. Do you take us for porpoises or our sloop for +driftwood?” And Pencroff laughed at his pleasantry. + +By evening they calculated the distance traversed at 130 miles, or +three and a third miles an hour. The breeze was dying away, but they +had reason to hope, supposing their course to have been correct, that +they would sight Tabor Island at daylight. + +No one of the three slept during this night. While waiting for morning +they experienced the liveliest emotions. There was so much uncertainty +in their enterprise. Were they near the island? Was the shipwrecked man +still there? Who was he? Might not his presence disturb the unity of +the colony? Would he, indeed, consent to exchange one prison for +another? All these questions, which would doubtless be answered the +next day, kept them alert, and at the earliest dawn they began to scan +the western horizon. + +What was the joy of the little crew when towards 6 o’clock Pencroff +shouted— + +“Land!” + +In a few hours they would be upon its shore. + +The island was a low coast, raised but a little above the waves, not +more than fifteen miles away. The sloop, which had been heading south +of it, was put about, and, as the sun rose, a few elevations became +visible here and there. + +“It is not as large as Lincoln Island,” said Herbert, “and probably +owes its origin to like submarine convulsions.” + +By 11 o’clock the Good Luck was only two miles distant from shore, and +Pencroff, while seeking some place to land, sailed with extreme caution +through these unknown waters. They could see the whole extent of this +island, on which were visible groups of gum and other large trees of +the same species as those on Lincoln Island. But, it was astonishing, +that no rising smoke indicated that the place was inhabited, nor was +any signal visible upon the shore. Nevertheless the paper had been +precise: it stated that there was a shipwrecked man here; and he should +have been upon the watch. + +Meanwhile the Good Luck went in through the tortuous passages between +the reefs, Herbert steering, and the sailor stationed forward, keeping +a sharp lookout, with the halliards in his hand, ready to run down the +sail. Spilett, with the spy-glass, examined all the shore without +perceiving anything. By noon the sloop touched the beach, the anchor +was let go, the sails furled, and the crew stepped on shore. + +There could be no doubt that that was Tabor Island, since the most +recent maps gave no other land in all this part of the Pacific. + +After having securely moored the sloop, Pencroff and his companion, +well armed, ascended the coast towards a round hill, some 250 feet +high, which was distant about half a mile, from the summit of which +they expected to have a good view of the island. + +The explorers followed the edge of grassy plain which ended at the foot +of the hill. Rock-pigeons and sea-swallows circled about them, and in +the woods bordering the plain to the left they heard rustlings in the +bushes and saw movements in the grass indicating the presence of very +timid animals, but nothing, so far, indicated that the island was +inhabited. + +Having reached the hill the party soon climbed to its summit, and their +gaze traversed the whole horizon. They were certainly upon an island, +not more than six miles in circumference, in shape a long oval, and but +little broken by inlets or promontories. All around it, the sea, +absolutely deserted, stretched away to the horizon. + +This islet differed greatly from Lincoln Island in that it was covered +over its entire surface with woods, and the uniform mass of verdure +clothed two or three less elevated hills. Obliquely to the oval of the +island a small stream crossed a large grassy plain and emptied into the +sea on the western side by a narrowed mouth. + +“The place is small,” said Herbert. + +“Yes,” replied the sailor. “It would have been too small for us.” + +“And,” added the reporter, “it seems uninhabited.” + +“Nevertheless,” said Pencroff, “let us go down and search.” + +The party returned to the sloop, and they decided to walk round the +entire island before venturing into its interior, so that no place +could escape their investigation. + +The shore was easily followed, and the explorers proceeded towards the +south, starting up flocks of aquatic birds and numbers of seals, which +latter threw themselves into the sea as soon as they caught sight of +the party. + +“Those beasts are not looking on man for the first time. They fear what +they know,” said the reporter. + +An hour after their departure the three had reached the southern point +of the islet, which terminated in a sharp cape, and they turned towards +the north, following the western shore, which was sandy, like the +other, and bounded by a thick wood. + +In four hours after they had set out the party had made the circuit of +the island, without having seen any trace of a habitation, and not even +a footprint. It was most extraordinary, to say the least, and it seemed +necessary to believe that the place was not and had not been inhabited. +Perhaps, after all, the paper had been in the water for many months, or +even years, and it was possible, in that case, that the shipwrecked one +had been rescued or that he had died from suffering. + +The little party, discussing all sorts of possibilities, made a hasty +dinner on board the sloop, and at 5 o’clock started to explore the +woods. + +Numerous animals fled before their approach, principally, indeed +solely, goats and pigs, which it was easy to see were of European +origin. Doubtless some whaler had left them here, and they had rapidly +multiplied. Herbert made up his mind to catch two or three pairs to +take back to Lincoln Island. + +There was no longer any doubt that the island had previously been +visited. This was the more evident as in passing through the forest +they saw the traces of pathways, and the trunks of trees felled by the +hatchet, and all about, marks of human handiwork; but these trees had +been felled years before; the hatchet marks were velvetted with moss, +and the pathways were so overgrown with grass that it was difficult to +discover them. + +“But,” observed Spilett, “this proves that men not only landed here, +but that they lived here. Now who and how many were these men, and how +many remain?” + +“The paper speaks of but one,” replied Herbert. + +“Well,” said Pencroff, “if he is still here we cannot help finding +him.” + +The exploration was continued, following diagonally across the island, +and by this means the sailor and his companions reached the little +stream which flowed towards the sea. + +If animals of European origin, if works of human hands proved +conclusively that man had once been here, many specimens of the +vegetable kingdom also evidenced the fact. In certain clear places it +was plain that kitchen vegetables had formerly been planted. And +Herbert was overjoyed when he discovered potatoes, succory, sorrel, +carrots, cabbage, and turnips, the seeds of which would enrich the +garden at Granite House. + +“Indeed,” exclaimed Pencroff, “this will rejoice Neb. Even if we don’t +find the man, our voyage will not have been useless, and Heaven will +have rewarded us.” + +“Doubtless,” replied Spilett, “but from the conditions of these fields, +it looks as if the place had not been inhabited for a long time.” + +“An inhabitant, whoever he was, would not neglect anything so important +as this.” + +“Yes, this man has gone. It must be—” + +“That the paper had been written a long time ago?” + +“Undoubtedly.” + +“And that the bottle had been floating in the sea a good while before +it arrived at Lincoln Island?” + +“Why not?” said Pencroff. “But, see, it is getting dark,” he added, +“and I think we had better give over the search.” + +“We will go aboard, and to-morrow we will begin again,” replied the +reporter. + +They were about adopting this counsel, when Herbert, pointing to +something dimly visible, through the trees, exclaimed:— + +“There’s a house!” + +All three directed their steps towards the place indicated, and they +made out in the twilight that it was built of planks, covered with +heavy tarpaulin. The door, half closed, was pushed back by Pencroff, +who entered quickly. + +The place was empty! + + + + +CHAPTER XXXVI. + + +THE INVENTORY—THE NIGHT—SOME LETTERS—THE SEARCH CONTINUED—PLANTS AND +ANIMALS—HERBERT IN DANGER—ABOARD—THE DEPARTURE—BAD WEATHER—A GLIMMER OF +INTELLIGENCE —LOST AT SEA—A TIMELY LIGHT. + + +Pencroff, Spilett and Herbert stood silent In darkness. Then the former +gave a loud call. There was no answer. He lit a twig, and the light +illuminated for a moment a small room, seemingly deserted. At one end +was a large chimney, containing some cold cinders and an armful of dry +wood. Pencroff threw the lighted twig into it, and the wood caught fire +and gave out a bright light. + +The sailor and his companions thereupon discovered a bed in disorder, +its damp and mildewed covers proving that it had been long unused; in +the corner of the fireplace were two rusty kettles and an overturned +pot; a clothes-press with some sailors’ clothing, partially moulded; on +the table a tin plate, and a Bible, injured by the dampness; in a +corner some tools, a shovel, a mattock, a pick, two shot guns, one of +which was broken; on a shelf was a barrel full of powder, a barrel of +lead, and a number of boxes of caps. All were covered with a thick +coating of dust. + +“There is no one here,” said the reporter. + +“Not a soul.” + +“This room has not been occupied in a long time.” + +“Since a very long time.” + +“Mr. Spilett,” said Pencroff, “I think that instead of going on board +we had better stay here all night.” + +“You are right, Pencroff, and if the proprietor returns he will not be +sorry, perhaps, to find the place occupied.” + +“He won’t come back, though,” said the sailor, shaking his head. + +“Do you think he has left the island?” + +“If he had left the island he would have taken these things with him. +You know how much a shipwrecked person would be attached to these +objects. No, no,” repeated the sailor, in the tone of a man perfectly +convinced; “no, he has not left the island. He is surely here.” + +“Alive?” + +“Alive or dead. But if he is dead he could not have buried himself, I +am sure, and we will at least find his remains.” + +It was therefore agreed to pass the night in this house, and a supply +of wood in the corner gave them the means of heating it. The door +having been closed, the three explorers, seated upon a bench, spoke +little, but remained deep in thought. They were in the mood to accept +anything that might happen, and they listened eagerly for any sound +from without. If the door had suddenly opened and a man had stood +before them, they would not have been much surprised, in spite of all +the evidence of desolation throughout the house; and their hands were +ready to clasp the hands of this man, of this shipwrecked one, of this +unknown friend whose friends awaited him. + +But no sound was heard, the door did not open, and the hours passed by. + +The night seemed interminable to the sailor and his companions. +Herbert, alone, slept for two hours, as at his age, sleep is a +necessity. All were anxious to renew the search of the day before, and +to explore the innermost recesses of the islet. Pencroff’s conclusions +were certainly just, since the house and its contents had been +abandoned. They determined, therefore, to search for the remains of its +inhabitant, and to give them Christian burial. + +As soon as it was daylight they began to examine the house. It was +prettily situated under a small hill, on which grew several fine gum +trees. Before it a large space had been cleared, giving a view over the +sea. A small lawn, surrounded by a dilapidated fence, extended to the +bank of the little stream. The house had evidently been built from +planks taken from a ship. It seemed likely that a ship had been thrown +upon the island, that all or at least one of the crew had been saved, +and that this house had been built from the wreck. This was the more +probable, as Spilett, in going round the dwelling, saw on one of the +planks these half-effaced letters:— + +BR ... TAN ... A. + +“Britannia,” exclaimed Pencroff, who had been called by the reporter to +look at it; “that is a common name among ships, and I cannot say +whether it is English or American. However, it don’t matter to what +country the man belongs, we will save him, if he is alive. But before +we begin our search let us go back to the Good Luck.” + +Pencroff had been seized with a sort of anxiety about his sloop. +Supposing the island was inhabited, and some one had taken it—but he +shrugged his shoulders at this unlikely thought. Nevertheless the +sailor was not unwilling to go on board to breakfast. The route already +marked was not more than a mile in length, and they started on their +walk, looking carefully about them in the woods and underbrush, through +which ran hundreds of pigs and goats. + +In twenty minutes the party reached the place where the Good Luck rode +quietly at anchor. Pencroff gave a sigh of satisfaction. + +After all, this boat was his baby, and it is a father’s right to be +often anxious without reason. + +All went on board and ate a hearty breakfast, so as not to want +anything before a late dinner; then the exploration was renewed, and +conducted with the utmost carefulness. As it was likely that the +solitary inhabitant of this island was dead, the party sought rather to +find his remains than any traces of him living. But during all the +morning they were unable to find anything; if he was dead, some animal +must have devoured his body. + +“We will leave to-morrow at daylight,” said Pencroff to his companions, +who towards 2 o’clock were resting for a few moments under a group of +trees. + +“I think we need not hesitate to take those things which belonged to +him?” queried Herbert. + +“I think not,” answered Spilett; “and these arms and tools will add +materially to the stock at Granite House. If I am not mistaken, what is +left of the lead and powder is worth a good deal.” + +“And we must not forget to capture a couple of these pigs,” said +Pencroff. + +“Nor to gather some seed,” added Herbert, “which will give us some of +our own vegetables.” + +“Perhaps it would be better to spend another day here, in order to get +together everything that we want,” suggested the reporter. + +“No, sir;” replied the sailor. “I want to get away to-morrow morning. +The wind seems to be shifting to the west, and will be in our favor +going back.” + +“Then don’t let us lose any time,” said Herbert, rising. + +“We will not,” replied Pencroff. “Herbert, you get the seed, and +Spilett and I will chase the pigs, and although we haven’t Top, I think +we will catch some.” + +Herbert, therefore, followed the path which led to the cultivated part +of the island, while the others plunged at once into the forest. +Although the pigs were plenty they were singularly agile, and not in +the humor to be captured. However, after half an hour’s chasing the +hunters had captured a couple in their lair, when cries mingled with +horrible hoarse sounds, having nothing human in them, were heard. +Pencroff and Spilett sprang to their feet, regardless of the pigs, +which escaped. + +“It is Herbert!” cried the reporter. + +“Hurry!” cried the sailor, as the two ran with their utmost speed +towards the place from whence the cries came. + +They had need to hasten, for at a turn in the path they saw the lad +prostrate beneath a savage, or perhaps a gigantic ape, who was +throttling him. + +To throw themselves on this monster and pinion him to the ground, +dragging Herbert away, was the work of a moment. The sailor had +herculean strength. Spilett, too, was muscular, and, in spite of the +resistance of the monster, it was bound so that it could not move. + +“You are not wounded, Herbert?” + +“No, oh no.” + +“Ah! if it had hurt you, this ape-” + +“But he is not an ape!” cried Herbert. + +At these words Pencroff and Spilett looked again at the object lying on +the ground. In fact, it was not an ape, but a human being—a man! But +what a man! He was a savage, in all the horrible acceptation of the +word; and, what was more frightful, he seemed to have fallen to the +last degree of brutishness. + +Matted hair, tangled beard descending to his waist, his body naked, +save for a rag about his loins, wild eyes, long nails, mahogany-colored +skin, feet as hard as if they had been made of horn; such was the +miserable creature which it was, nevertheless, necessary to call a man. +But one might well question whether this body still contained a soul, +or whether the low, brutish instinct alone survived. + +“Are you perfectly sure that this is what has been a man?” questioned +Pencroff of the reporter. + +“Alas! there can be no doubt of it,” replied Spilett. + +“Can he be the person shipwrecked?” asked Herbert + +“Yes,” responded the reporter, “but the poor creature is no longer +human.” + +Spilett was right. Evidently, if the castaway had ever been civilized, +isolation had made him a savage, a real creature of the woods. He gave +utterance to hoarse sounds, from between teeth which were as sharp as +those of animals living on raw flesh. Memory had doubtless long ago +left him, and he had long since forgotten the use of arms and tools, +and even how to make a fire. One could see that he was active and +supple, but that his physical qualities had developed to the exclusion +of his moral perception. + +Spilett spoke to him, but he neither understood nor listened, and, +looking him in the eye, the reporter could see that all intelligence +had forsaken him. Nevertheless, the prisoner did not struggle or strive +to break his bonds. Was he cowed by the presence of these men, whom he +had once resembled? Was there in some corner of his brain a flitting +remembrance which drew him towards humanity? Free, would he have fled +or would he have remained? They did not know, and they did not put him +to the proof. After having looked attentively at the miserable +creature, Spilett said:— + +“What he is, what he has been, and what he will be; it is still our +duty to take him to Lincoln Island.” + +“Oh yes, yes,” exclaimed Herbert, “and perhaps we can, with care, +restore to him some degree of intelligence.” + +“The soul never dies,” answered the reporter, “and it would be a great +thing to bring back this creature of God’s making from his +brutishness.” + +Pencroff shook his head doubtfully. + +“It is necessary to try at all events,” said the reporter, “humanity +requires it of us.” + +“It was, indeed, their duty as civilized and Christian beings, and they +well knew that Smith would approve of their course. + +“Shall we leave him bound?” inquired the sailor. + +“Perhaps if we unfasten his feet he will walk,” said Herbert. + +“Well, let us try,” replied the sailor. + +And the cords binding the creature’s legs were loosened, although his +arms were kept firmly bound. He rose without manifesting any desire to +escape. His tearless eyes darted sharp glances upon the three men who +marched beside him, and nothing denoted that he remembered being or +having been like them. A wheezing sound escaped from his lips, and his +aspect was wild, but he made no resistance. + +By the advice of the reporter, the poor wretch was taken to the house, +where, perhaps, the sight of the objects in it might make some +impression upon him. Perhaps a single gleam would awaken his sleeping +consciousness, illuminate his darkened mind. + +The house was near by, and in a few minutes they were there; but the +prisoner recognized nothing—he seemed to have lost consciousness of +everything. Could it be that this brutish state was due to his long +imprisonment on the island? That, having come here a reasoning being, +his isolation had reduced him to this state? + +The reporter thought that perhaps the sight of fire might affect him, +and in a moment one of those lovely flames which attract even animals +lit up the fireplace. The sight of this flame seemed at first to +attract the attention of the unfortunate man, but very soon he ceased +regarding it. Evidently, for the present at least, there was nothing to +do but take him aboard the Good Luck, which was accordingly done. He +was left in charge of Pencroff, while the two others returned to the +island and brought over the arms and implements, a lot of seeds, some +game, and two pairs of pigs which they had caught. Everything was put +on board, and the sloop rode ready to hoist anchor as soon as the next +morning’s tide would permit. + +The prisoner had been placed in the forward hold, where he lay calm, +quiet, insensible, and mute. Pencroff offering him some cooked meat to +eat, he pushed it away; but, on being shown one of the ducks which +Herbert had killed, he pounced on it with bestial avidity and devoured +it. + +“You think he’ll be himself again?” asked the sailor, shaking his head. + +“Perhaps,” replied the reporter. “It is not impossible that our +attentions will react on him, since it is the isolation that has done +this; and he will be alone no longer.” + +“The poor fellow has doubtless been this way for a long time.” + +“Perhaps so.” + +“How old do you think he is?” asked the lad. + +“That is hard to say,” replied the reporter, “as his matted beard +obscures his face; but he is no longer young, and I should say he was +at least fifty years old.” + +“Have you noticed how his eyes are set deep in his head?” + +“Yes, but I think that they are more human than one would suspect from +his general appearance.” + +“Well, we will see,” said Pencroff; “and I am curious to have Mr. +Smith’s opinion of our savage. We went to find a human being, and we +are bringing back a monster. Any how, one takes what he can get.” + +The night passed, and whether the prisoner slept or not he did not +move, although he had been unbound. He was like one of those beasts +that in the first moments of their capture submit, and to whom the rage +returns later. + +At daybreak the next day, the 17th, the change in the weather was as +Pencroff had predicted. The wind hauled round to the northwest and +favored the return of the Good Luck; but at the same time it had +freshened, so as to make the sailing more difficult. At 5 o’clock the +anchor was raised, Pencroff took a reef in the mainsail and headed +directly towards home. + +The first day passed without incident. The prisoner rested quietly in +the forward cabin, and, as he had once been a sailor, the motion of the +sloop produced upon him a sort of salutary reaction. Did it recall to +him some remembrance of his former occupation? At least he rested +tranquil, more astonished than frightened. + +On the 16th the wind freshened considerably, coming round more to the +north, and therefore in a direction less favorable to the course of the +Good Luck, which bounded over the waves. Pencroff was soon obliged to +hold her nearer to the wind, and without saying so, he began to be +anxious at the lookout ahead. Certainly, unless the—wind moderated, it +would take much longer to go back than it had taken to come. + +On the 17th they had been forty-eight hours out, and yet nothing +indicated they were in the neighborhood of Lincoln Island. It was, +moreover, impossible to reckon their course, or even to estimate the +distance traversed, as the direction and the speed had been too +irregular. Twenty-four hours later there was still no land in view. The +wind was dead ahead, and an ugly sea running. On the 18th a huge wave +struck the sloop, and had not the crew been lashed to the deck, they +would have been swept overboard. + +On this occasion Pencroff and his companions, busy in clearing things +away, received an unhoped-for assistance from the prisoner, who sprang +from the hatchway as if his sailor instinct had returned to him, and +breaking the rail by a, vigorous blow—with a spar, enabled the water on +the deck to flow off more freely. Then, the boat cleared, without +having said a word, he returned to his cabin. + +Nevertheless, the situation was bad, and the sailor had cause to +believe himself lost upon this vast sea, without the possibility of +regaining his course. The night of the 18th was dark and cold. But +about 11 o’clock the wind lulled, the sea fell, and the sloop, less +tossed about, moved more rapidly. None of the crew thought of sleep. +They kept an eager lookout, as either Lincoln Island must be near at +hand and they would discover it at daybreak, or the sloop had been +drifted from her course by the currents, and it would be next to +impossible to rectify the direction. + +Pencroff, anxious to the last degree, did not, however, despair; but, +seated at the helm, he tried to see through the thick darkness around +him. Towards 2 o’clock he suddenly started up, crying:—“A light! a +light!” It was indeed a bright light appearing twenty miles to—the +northeast. Lincoln Island was there, and this light, evidently lit by +Smith, indicated the direction to be followed. + +Pencroff, who had been heading much too far towards the north, changed +his course, and steered directly towards the light, which gleamed above +the horizon like a star of the first magnitude. + + + + +CHAPTER XXXVII. + + +THE RETURN-DISCUSSION—SMITH AND THE UNKNOWN—BALLOON HARBOR-THE DEVOTION +OF THE ENGINEER-A TOUCHING EXPERIENCE-TEARS. + + +At 7 o’clock the next morning the boat touched the shore at the mouth +of the Mercy. Smith and Neb, who had become very anxious at the stormy +weather and the prolonged absence of their companions, had climbed, at +daylight, to Prospect Plateau, and had at length perceived the sloop in +the distance. + +“Thank Heaven! There they are,” exclaimed Smith; while Neb, dancing +with pleasure, turned towards his master, and, striking his hands +together, cried, “Oh, my master!”-a more touching expression than, the +first polished phrase. + +The engineer’s first thought, on counting the number of persons on the +deck of the Good Luck, was that Pencroff had found no one on Tabor +Island, or that the unfortunate man had refused to exchange one prison +for another. + +The engineer and Neb were on the beach at the moment the sloop arrived, +and before the party had leaped ashore, Smith said:— + +“We have been very anxious about you, my friends. Did anything happen +to you?” “No, indeed; everything went finely,” replied Spilett. “We +will tell you all about it.” + +“Nevertheless, you have failed in your search, since you are all +alone.”, “But, sir, there are four of us,” said the sailor. + +“Have you found this person?”. “Yes.” + +“And brought him back?” “Yes.” “Living?” “Where is he, and what is he, +then?” “He is, or rather, he was a human being; and that is all, Cyrus, +that we can say.” + +The engineer was thereupon, informed of everything that had happened; +of the search, of the long-abandoned house, of the capture of the +scarcely human inhabitant. + +“And,” added Pencroff,” I don’t know whether we have done right in +bringing him here.” + +“Most certainly you have done right,” replied the engineer. + +“But the poor fellow has no sense at all.” “Not now, perhaps; in a few +months, he will be as much a man as any of us. “Who knows what might +happen to the last one of us, after living for a long time alone on +this island? It is terrible to be all alone, my friends, and it is +probable that solitude quickly overthrows reason, since you have found +this poor being in such a condition.” + +“But, Mr. Smith,” asked Herbert, “what makes you think that the +brutishness of this man has come on within a little while?” + +“Because the paper we found had been recently written, and no one but +this shipwrecked man could have written it.” + +“Unless,” suggested Spilett, “it had been written by a companion of +this man who has since died.” + +“That is impossible, Spilett.” + +“Why so?” + +“Because, then, the paper would have mentioned two persons instead of +one.” + +Herbert briefly related the incident of the sea striking the sloop, and +insisted that the prisoner must then have had a glimmer of his sailor +instinct. + +“You are perfectly right, Herbert,” said the engineer, “to attach great +importance to this fact. This poor man will not be incurable; despair +has made him what he is. But here he will find his kindred, and if he +still has any reason, we will save it.” + +Then, to Smith’s great pity and Neb’s wonderment, the man was brought +up from the cabin of the sloop, and as soon as he was on land, he +manifested a desire to escape. But Smith, approaching him, laid his +hand authoritatively upon his shoulder and looked at him with infinite +tenderness. Thereupon the poor wretch, submitting to a sort of +instantaneous power, became quiet, his eyes fell, his head dropped +forward, and he made no further resistance. + +“Poor shipwrecked sailor,” murmured the reporter. + +Smith regarded him attentively. To judge from his appearance, this +miserable creature had little of the human left in him; but Smith +caught in his glance, as the reporter had done, an almost imperceptible +gleam of intelligence. + +It was decided that the Unknown, as his new companions called him, +should stay in one of the rooms of Granite House, from which he could +not escape. He made no resistance to being conducted there, and with +good care they might, perhaps, hope that some day he would prove a +companion to them. + +Neb hastened to prepare breakfast, for the voyagers were very hungry, +and during the meal Smith made them relate in detail every incident of +the cruise. He agreed with them in thinking that the name of the +Britannia gave them reason to believe that the Unknown was either +English or American; and, moreover, under all the growth of hair +covering the man’s face, the engineer thought he recognized the +features characteristic of an Anglo-Saxon. + +“But, by the way, Herbert,” said the reporter, “you have never told us +how you met this savage, and we know nothing, except that he would have +strangled you, had we not arrived so opportunely.” + +“Indeed, I am not sure that I can tell just what happened,” replied +Herbert. “I was, I think, gathering seeds, when I heard a tremendous +noise in a high tree near by. I had hardly time to turn, when this +unhappy creature, who had, doubtless, been hidden crouching in the +tree, threw himself upon me; and, unless Mr. Spilett and Pencroff—” + +“You were in great danger, indeed, my boy,” said Smith; “but perhaps, +if this had not happened, this poor being would have escaped your +search, and we would have been without another companion.” + +“You expect, then, to make him a man again?” asked the reporter. + +“Yes,” replied Smith. + +Breakfast ended, all returned to the shore and began unloading the +sloop; and the engineer examined the arms and tools, but found nothing +to establish the identity of the Unknown. + +The pigs were taken to the stables, to which they would soon become +accustomed. The two barrels of powder and shot and the caps were a +great acquisition, and it was determined to make a small powder +magazine in the upper cavern of Granite House, where there would be no +danger of an explosion. Meantime, since the pyroxyline answered very +well, there was no present need to use this powder. + +When the sloop was unloaded Pencroff said:— + +“I think, Mr. Smith, that it would be better to put the Good Luck in a +safe place.” + +“Is it not safe enough at the mouth of the Mercy?” + +“No, sir,” replied the sailor. “Most of the time she is aground on the +sand, which strains her.” + +“Could not she be moored out in the stream?” + +“She could, but the place is unsheltered, and in an easterly wind I am +afraid she would suffer from the seas.” + +“Very well; where do you want to put her?” + +“In Balloon Harbor,” replied the sailor. “It seems to me that that +little inlet, hidden by the rocks, is just the place for her.” + +“Isn’t it too far off?” + +“No, it is only three miles from Granite House, and we have a good +straight road there.” + +“Have your way, Pencroff,” replied the engineer. “Nevertheless, I +should prefer to have the sloop under our sight. We must, when we have +time, make a small harbor.” + +“Capital!” cried Pencroff. “A harbor with a light house, a breakwater, +and a dry dock! Oh, indeed, sir, everything will be easy enough with +you!” + +“Always provided, my good man, that you assist me, as you do three +fourths of the work.” + +Herbert and the sailor went aboard the Good Luck, and set sail, and in +a couple of hours the sloop rode quietly at anchor in the tranquil +water of Balloon Harbor. + +During the first few days that the Unknown was at Granite House, had he +given any indication of a change in his savage nature? Did not a +brighter light illumine the depths of his intelligence? Was not, in +short, his reason returning to him? Undoubtedly, yes; and Smith and +Spilett questioned whether this reason had ever entirely forsaken him. + +At first this man, accustomed to the air and liberty which he had had +in Tabor Island, was seized with fits of passion, and there was danger +of his throwing himself out of one of the windows of Granite House. But +little by little he grew more quiet, and he was allowed to move about +without restraint. + +Already forgetting his carnivorous instincts, he accepted a less +bestial nourishment, and cooked food did not produce in him the +sentiment of disgust which he had shown on board the Good Luck. + +Smith had taken advantage of a time when the man was asleep to cut the +hair and beard which had grown like a mane about his face, and had +given him such a savage aspect. He had also been clothed more decently, +and the result was that the Unknown appeared more like a human being, +and it seemed as if the expression of his eyes was softened. Certainly, +sometimes, when intelligence was visible, the expression of this man +had a sort of beauty. + +Every day, Smith made a point of passing some hours in his company. He +worked beside him, and occupied himself in various ways to attract his +attention. It would suffice, if a single ray of light illuminated his +reason, if a single remembrance crossed his mind. Neither did the +engineer neglect to speak in a loud voice, so as to penetrate by both +sound and sight to the depths of this torpid intelligence. Sometimes +one or another of the party joined the engineer, and they usually +talked of such matters pertaining to the sea as would be likely to +interest the man. At times the Unknown gave a sort of vague attention +to what was said, and soon the colonists began to think that he partly +understood them. Again his expression would be dolorous, proving that +he suffered inwardly. Nevertheless, he did not speak, although they +thought, at times, from his actions, that words were about to pass his +lips. + +The poor creature was very calm and sad. But was not the calmness only +on the surface, and the sadness the result of his confinement? They +could not yet say. Seeing only certain objects and in a limited space, +always with the colonists, to whom he had become accustomed, having no +desire to satisfy, better clothed and better fed, it was natural that +his physical nature should soften little by little; but was he imbued +with the new life, or, to use an expression justly applicable to the +case, was he only tamed, as an animal in the presence of its master? +This was the important question Smith was anxious to determine, and +meantime he did not wish to be too abrupt with his patient. For to him, +the unknown was but a sick person. Would he ever be a convalescent? + +Therefore, the engineer watched him unceasingly. How he laid in wait +for his reason, so to speak, that he might lay hold of it. + +The colonists followed with strong interest all the phases of this cure +undertaken by Smith. All aided him in it, and all, save perhaps the +incredulous Pencroff, came to share in his belief and hope. + +The submission of the Unknown was entire, and it seemed as if he showed +for the engineer, whose influence over him was apparent, a sort of +attachment, and Smith resolved now to test it by transporting him to +another scene, to that ocean which he had been accustomed to look upon, +to the forest border, which would recall those woods where he had lived +such a life!” + +“But,” said Spilett, “can we hope that once at liberty, he will not +escape?” + +“We must make the experiment,” replied the engineer. + +“All right,” said Pencroff. “You will see, when this fellow snuffs the +fresh air and sees the coast clear, if he don’t make his legs spin!” + +“I don’t think it,” replied the engineer. + +“We will try, any how,” said Spilett. + +It was the 30th of October, and the Unknown had been a prisoner for +nine days. It was a beautiful, warm, sunshiny day. Smith and Pencroff +went to the room of the Unknown, whom they found at the window gazing +out at the sky. + +“Come, my friend,” said the engineer to him. + +The Unknown rose immediately. His eye was fixed on Smith, whom he +followed; and the sailor, little confident in the results of the +experiment, walked with him. + +Having reached the door, they made him get into the elevator, at the +foot of which the rest of the party were waiting. The basket descended, +and in a few seconds all were standing together on the shore. + +The colonists moved off a little distance from the Unknown, so as to +leave him quite at liberty. He made some steps forward towards the sea, +and his face lit up with pleasure, but he made no effort to escape. He +looked curiously at the little waves, which, broken by the islet, died +away on the shore. + +“It is not, indeed, the ocean,” remarked Spilett, “and it is possible +that this does not give him the idea of escaping.” + +“Yes,” replied Smith, “we must take him to the plateau on the edge of +the forest. There the experiment will be more conclusive.” + +“There he cannot get away, since the bridges are all raised,” said Neb. + +“Oh, he is not the man to be troubled by such a brook as Glycerine +Creek; he could leap it at a bound,” returned Pencroff. + +“We will see presently,” said Smith, who kept his eye fixed on his +patient. + +And thereupon all proceeded towards Prospect Plateau. Having reached +the place they encountered the outskirts of the forest, with its leaves +trembling in the wind, The Unknown seemed to drink in with eagerness +the perfume in the air, and a long sigh escaped from his breast. + +The colonists stood some paces back, ready to seize him if he attempted +to escape. + +The poor creature was upon the point of plunging in the creek that +separated him from the forest; he placed himself ready to spring—then +all at once he turned about, dropping his arms beside him, and tears +coursed down his cheeks. + +“Ah!” cried Smith, “you will be a man again, since you weep!” + + + + +CHAPTER XXXVIII + + +A MYSTERY TO BE SOLVED—THE FIRST WORDS OF THE UNKNOWN—TWELVE YEARS ON +THE ISLAND—CONFESSIONS—DISAPPEARANCE—SMITH’S CONFIDENCE —BUILDING A +WIND-MILL—THE FIRST BREAD—AN ACT OF DEVOTION—HONEST HANDS. + + +Yes, the poor creature had wept. Some remembrance had flashed across +his spirit, and, as Smith had said, he would be made a man through his +tears. + +The colonists left him for some time, withdrawing themselves, so that +he could feel perfectly at liberty; but he showed no inclination to +avail himself of this freedom, and Smith soon decided to take him back +to Granite House. + +Two days after this occurrence, the Unknown showed a disposition to +enter little by little into the common life. It was evident that he +heard, that he understood, but it was equally evident that he +manifested a strange disinclination to speak to them. Pencroff, +listening at his room, heard these words escape him:— + +“No! here! I! never!” + +The sailor reported this to his companions, and Smith said:— + +“There must be some sad mystery here.” + +The Unknown had begun to do some little chores, and to work in the +garden. When he rested, which was frequent, he seemed entirely +self-absorbed; but, on the advice of the engineer, the others respected +the silence, which he seemed desirous of keeping. If one of the +colonists approached him he recoiled, sobbing as if overcome. Could it +be by remorse? or, was it, as Spilett once suggested:— + +“If he does not speak I believe it is because he has something on his +mind too terrible to mention.” + +Some days later the Unknown was working on the plantation, when, of a +sudden, he stopped and let his spade fall, and Smith, who was watching +him from a distance, saw that he was weeping again. An irresistible +pity drew the engineer to the poor fellow’s side; and, touching his arm +lightly, + +“My friend,” said he. + +The Unknown tried to look away, and when Smith sought to take his hand +he drew back quickly. + +“My friend,” said Smith, with decision, “I wish you to look at me.” + +The Unknown obeyed, raising his eyes and regarding the other as one +does who is under the influence of magnetism. At first he wished to +break away, then his whole expression changed; his eyes flashed, and, +unable longer to contain himself, he muttered some incoherent words. +Suddenly he crossed his arms, and in a hollow voice:— + +“Who are you?” he demanded. + +“Men shipwrecked as you have been,” replied the engineer, greatly +moved. “We have brought you here among your kindred.” + +“My kindred! I have none! + +“You are among friends—,” + +“Friends! I! Friends!” cried the Unknown, hiding his face in his hands. +“Oh, no! never! Leave me! leave me!” and he rushed to the brink of the +plateau overlooking the sea, and stood there, motionless, for a long +time. + +Smith had rejoined his companions and had related to them what had +happened. + +“There certainly is a mystery in this man’s life,” said Spilett, “and +it seems as if his first human sensation was remorse.” + +“I don’t understand what kind of a man we have brought back,” says the +sailor. “He has secrets—” + +“Which we will respect,” answered the engineer, quickly. “If he has +committed some fault he has cruelly expiated it, and in our sight it is +absolved.” + +For two hours the Unknown remained upon the shore, evidently under the +influence of remembrances which brought back to him all his past, a +past which, doubtless, was hateful enough, and the colonists, though +keeping watch upon him, respected his desire to be alone. + +Suddenly he seemed to have taken a resolution, and he returned to the +engineer. His eyes were red with the traces of tears, and his face wore +an expression of deep humility. He seemed apprehensive, ashamed, +humiliated, and his looks were fixed on the ground. + +“Sir,” said he, “are you and your companions English?” + +“No,” replied Smith, “we are Americans.” + +“Ah!” murmured the Unknown, “I am glad of that.” + +“And what are you, my friend?” asked the engineer. + +“English,” he responded, as if these few words had cost him a great +effort. He rushed to the shore, and traversed its length to the mouth +of the Mercy, in a state of extreme agitation. + +Having, at one place, met Herbert, he stopped, and in a choking voice, +accosted him:— + +“What month is it?” + +“November,” replied the lad. + +“And what year?” + +“1866.” + +“Twelve years! Twelve years!” he cried, and then turned quickly away. + +Herbert related this incident to the others. + +“The poor creature knew neither the month nor the year,” remarked +Spilett. + +“And he had been twelve years on the island, when we found him.” + +“Twelve years,” said Smith. “Twelve years of isolation, after a wicked +life, perhaps; that would indeed affect a man’s reason.” + +“I cannot help thinking,” observed Pencroff, “that this man was not +wrecked on that island, but that he has been left there for some +crime.” + +“You may be right, Pencroff,” replied the reporter, “and if that is the +case, it is not impossible that whoever left him there may return for +him some day.” + +“And they would not find him,” said Herbert. + +“But, then,” exclaimed Pencroff, “he would want to go back, and—” + +“My friends,” interrupted Smith, “do not let us discuss this question +till we know what we are talking about. I believe that this unhappy man +has suffered, and that he has paid bitterly for his faults, whatever +they may have been, and that he is struggling with the need of opening +his heart to someone. Do not provoke him to speak; he will tell us of +his own accord some day, and when we have learned all, we will see what +course it will be necessary to follow. He alone can tell us if he has +more than the hope, the certainty of some day being restored to his +country, but I doubt it.” + +“Why?” asked the reporter. + +“Because, had he been sure of being delivered after a fixed time, he +would have awaited the hour of his deliverance, and not have thrown +that paper in the sea. No, it is more likely that be was condemned to +die upon this island, to never look upon his kind again.” + +“But there still is something which I cannot understand,” said the +sailor. + +“What is that?” + +“Why, if this man had been left on Tabor Island twelve years ago, it +seems probable that he must have been in this savage condition for a +long time.” + +“That is probable,” replied the engineer. + +“And, therefore, it is a long time since he wrote that paper.” + +“Doubtless—and yet that paper seemed to have been written recently—” + +“Yes, and how account for the bottle taking so many years in coming +from Tabor Island here?” + +“It is not absolutely impossible,” responded the reporter. “Could not +it have been in the neighborhood of the island for a long time?” + +“And have remained floating? No,” answered the sailor, “for sooner or +later it would have been dashed to pieces on the rocks.” + +“It would, indeed,” said Smith, thoughtfully. + +“And, moreover,” continued the sailor, if the paper had been enclosed +in the bottle for a long time, it would have been injured by the +moisture, whereas, it was not damaged in the least.” + +The sailor’s remark was just, and, moreover, this paper, recently +written, gave the situation of the island with an exactness which +implied a knowledge of hydrography, such as a simple sailor could not +have. + +“There is, as I said before, something inexplicable in all this,” said +the engineer, “but do not let us urge our new companion to speak, When +he wishes it we will be ready to listen.” + +For several days after this the Unknown neither spoke nor left the +plateau. He worked incessantly, digging in the garden apart from the +colonists, and at meal times, although he was often asked to join them, +he remained alone, eating but a few uncooked vegetables. At night, +instead of returning to his room in Granite House, he slept under the +trees, or hid himself, if the weather was bad, in some hollow of the +rocks. Thus he returned again to that manner of life in which he had +lived when he had no other shelter than the forests of Tabor Island, +and all endeavor to make him modify this life having proved fruitless, +the colonists waited patiently. But the moment came when, irresistibly +and as if involuntarily forced from him by his conscience, the terrible +avowals were made. + +At dusk on the evening of the 10th of November, as the colonists were +seated in the arbor, the Unknown stood suddenly before them. His eyes +glowed, and his whole appearance wore again the savage aspect of former +days. He stood there, swayed by some terrible emotion, his teeth +chattering like those of a person in a fever. The colonists were +astounded. “What was the matter with him? Was the sight of his +fellow-creatures unendurable? Had he had enough of this honest life? +Was he homesick for his brutish life? One would have thought so, +hearing him give utterance to these incoherent phrases:- + +“Why am I here? By what right did you drag me from my island? Is there +any bond between you and me? Do you know who I am—what I have done—why +I was there—alone? And who has told you that I was not abandoned—that I +was not condemned to die there? Do you know my past? Do you know +whether I have not robbed, murdered—if I am not a miserable—a wicked +being—fit to live like a wild beast—far from all—say—do you know?” + +The colonists listened silently to the unhappy creature, from whom +these half avowals came in spite of himself. Smith, wishing to soothe +him, would have gone to him, but the Unknown drew back quickly. + +“No! no!” he cried. “One word only—am I free?”. + +“You are free,” replied the engineer. + +“Then, good-bye!” he cried, rushing off. + +Neb, Pencroff, and Herbert ran to the border of the wood, but they +returned alone. + +“We must let him have his own way,” said the engineer. + +“He will never come back,” exclaimed Pencroff. + +“He will return,” replied the engineer. + +And after that conversation many days passed, but Smith—was it a +presentiment—persisted in the fixed idea that the unhappy man would +return sooner or later. + +“It is the last struggle of this rude nature, which is touched by +remorse, and which would be terrified by a new isolation.” + +In the meantime, work of all kinds was continued, both on Prospect +Plateau and at the corral, where Smith proposed to make a farm. It is +needless to say that the seeds brought from Tabor Island had been +carefully sown. The plateau was a great kitchen-garden, well laid out +and enclosed, which kept the colonists always busy. As the plants +multiplied, it was necessary to increase the size of the beds, which +threatened to become fields, and to take the place of the grass land. +But as forage abounded in other parts of the island, there was no fear +of the onagers having to be placed on rations; and it was also better +to make Prospect Plateau, defended by its belt of creeks, a garden of +this kind, and to extend the fields, which required no protection, +beyond the belt. + +On the 15th of November they made their third harvest. Here was a field +which had indeed increased in the eighteen months since the first grain +of corn had been sown. The second crop of 600,000 grains produced this +time 4,000 bushels or more than 500,000,000 grains. The colonists were, +therefore, rich in corn; as it was only necessary to sow a dozen +bushels each year in order to have a supply sufficient for the +nourishment of man and beast. + +After harvesting they, gave up the last fortnight in the month to +bread-making. They had the grain but not the flour, and a mill was +therefore necessary. Smith could have used the other waterfall which +fell into the Mercy, but, after discussing the question, it was decided +to build a simple wind-mill on the summit of the plateau. Its +construction would be no more difficult than a water-mill, and they +would be sure of always having a breeze on this open elevation. + +“Without counting,” said Pencroff, “the fine aspect a wind-mill will +give to the landscape.” + +They began the work by selecting timber for the cage and machinery for +the mill. Some large sand-stones, which the colonists found to the +north of the lake, were readily made into mill-stones, and the +inexhaustible envelope of the balloon furnished the cloth necessary for +the sails. + +Smith made his drawings, and the site for the mill was chosen a little +to the right of the poultry-yard, and close to the lake shore. The +whole cage rested upon a pivot, held in position by heavy timbers, in +such a manner that it could turn, with all the mechanism within it, +towards any quarter of the wind. + +The work progressed rapidly. Neb and Herbert had become expert +carpenters, and had only to follow the plans furnished by the engineer, +so that in a very short time a sort of round watch-house, a regular +pepper-box, surmounted by a sharp roof, rose upon the site selected. +The four wings had been firmly fastened by iron tenons to the main +shaft, in such a manner as to make a certain angle with it. As for the +various parts of the interior mechanism—the two mill-stones, the runner +and the feeder; the hopper, a sort of huge square trough, large above +and small below, permitting the grains to fall upon the mill-stones; +the oscillating bucket, designed to regulate the passage of the grain; +and, finally, the bolter, which, by the operation of the sieve, +separated the bran from the flour—all these were easily made. And as +their tools were good, the work simple, and everybody took part in it, +the mill was finished by the 1st of December. + +As usual, Pencroff was overjoyed by his work, and he was sure that the +machine was perfection. + +“Now, with a good wind, we will merrily grind our corn.” + +“Let it be a good wind, Pencroff, but not too strong,” said the +engineer. + +“Bah! our mill will turn the faster.” + +“It is not necessary to turn rapidly,” replied the engineer. +“Experience has demonstrated that the best results are obtained by a +mill whose wings make six times the number of turns in a minute that +the wind travels feet in a second. Thus, an ordinary wind, which +travels twenty-four feet in a second, will turn the wings of the mill +sixteen times in a minute, which is fast enough.” + +“Already!” exclaimed Herbert, “there is a fine breeze from the +northeast, which will be just the thing!” + +There was no reason to delay using the mill, and the colonists were +anxious to taste the bread of Lincoln Island; so this very morning two +or three bushels of corn were ground, and the next day, at breakfast, a +splendid loaf, rather heavy perhaps, which had been raised with the +barm of beer, was displayed upon the table of Granite House. Each +munched his portion with a pleasure perfectly inexpressible. + +Meantime the Unknown had not come back again. Often Spilett and Herbert +had searched the forest in the neighborhood of Granite House without +finding any trace of him, and all began to be seriously alarmed at his +prolonged absence. Undoubtedly the former savage of Tabor Island would +not find it difficult to live in the forests of the Far West, which +were so rich in game; but was it not to be feared that he would resume +his former habits, and that his independence would revive in him his +brutish instincts? Smith alone, by a sort of presentiment, persisted in +saying that the fugitive would return. + +“Yes, he will come back,” he repeated with a confidence in which his +companions could not share. “When this poor creature was on Tabor +Island, he knew he was alone, but here, he knows that his kindred await +him. Since he half-spoke of his past life, he will return to tell us +everything, and on that day he will be ours.” + +The event proved the correctness of Cyrus Smith’s reasoning. + +On the 3d of December, Herbert had gone to the southern shore of the +lake, to fish, and, since the dangerous animals never showed themselves +in this part of the island, he had gone unarmed. + +Pencroff and Neb were working in the poultry-yard, while Smith and the +reporter were occupied at the Chimneys making soda, the supply of soap +being low. + +Suddenly sharp cries of help were heard by Neb and Pencroff, who +summoned the others, and all rushed towards the lake. + +But before them, the Unknown, whose presence in the neighborhood had +not been suspected, leapt over Glycerine Creek and bounded along the +opposite bank. + +There, Herbert stood facing a powerful jaguar, like the one which had +been killed at Reptile End. Taken by surprise, he stood with his back +against a tree, and the animal, crouching on his haunches, was about to +spring upon him, when the Unknown, with no other arm than his knife, +threw himself on the brute, which turned upon its new adversary. + +The struggle was short. This man, whose strength and agility was +prodigious, seized the jaguar by the throat in a vice-like grip, and, +not heeding the claws of the beast tearing his flesh, he thrust his +knife into its heart. + +The jaguar fell, and the Unknown was about turning to go away, when the +colonists came up, and Herbert, catching hold of him, exclaimed:— + +“No, no, you must not leave us!” + +Smith walked towards the man, who frowned at his approach. The blood +was flowing from a wound in his shoulder, but he did not heed it. + +“My friend,” said Smith, “we are in your debt. You have risked your +life to save our boy.” + +“My life,” murmured the Unknown; “what is it worth? less than nothing.” + +“You are wounded?” + +“That does not matter.” + +“Will you not shake hands with me?” asked Herbert. + +But on the lad’s seeking to take his hand, the Unknown folded his arms, +his chest heaved, and he looked about as if he wished to escape; but, +making a violent effort at self-control, and in a gruff voice:— + +“Who are you?” he asked, “and what are you going to do with me?” + +It was their history that he thus asked for, for the first time. +Perhaps, if that was related, he would tell his own. So Smith, in a few +words, recounted all that had happened since their departure from +Richmond; how they had succeeded, and the resources now at their +disposal. + +The Unknown listened with the utmost attention. + +Then Smith told him who they all were, Spilett, Herbert, Pencroff, Neb, +himself, and he added that the greatest happiness that had come to them +since their arrival on Lincoln Island was on their return from the +islet, when they could count one more companion. + +At these words the other colored up, and bowing his head, seemed +greatly agitated. + +“And now that you know us,” asked Smith, “will you give us your hand?” + +“No,” answered the Unknown in a hoarse voice; “no! You are honest men. +But I—” + + + + +CHAPTER XXXIX + + +ALWAYS APART—A BEQUEST OF THE UNKNOWN’S—THE FARM ESTABLISHED AT THE +CORRAL—TWELVE YEARS—THE BOATSWAIN’S MATE OF THE BRITANNIA —LEFT ON +TABOR ISLAND—THE HAND OF SMITH—THE MYSTERIOUS PAPER + + +These last events justified the presentiments of the colonists. There +was some terrible past in the life of this man, expiated, perhaps, in +the eyes of men, but which his conscience still held unabsolved. At any +rate, he felt remorse; he had repented, and his new friends would have +cordially grasped that hand, but he did not feel himself worthy to +offer it to honest men. Nevertheless, after the struggle with the +jaguar, he did not go back to the forest, but remained within the +bounds of Granite House. + +What was the mystery of this life? Would he speak of it some day? The +colonists thought so, but they agreed that, under no circumstances, +would they ask him for his secret; and, in the meantime, to associate +with him as if they suspected nothing. + +For some days everything went on as usual. Smith and Spilett worked +together, sometimes as chemists, sometimes as physicists, the reporter +never leaving the engineer, except to hunt with Herbert, as it was not +prudent to allow the young lad to traverse the forest alone. As to Neb +and Pencroff, the work in the stables and poultry-yard, or at the +corral, besides the chores about Granite House, kept them busy. + +The Unknown worked apart from the others. He had gone back to his +former habit of taking no share in the meals, of sleeping under the +trees, of having nothing to do with his companions. It seemed, indeed, +as if the society of those who had saved him was intolerable. + +“But why, then,” asked Pencroff, “did he seek succor from his +fellow-creatures; why did he throw this paper in the sea?” + +“He will tell us everything,” was Smith’s invariable answer. + +“But when?” + +“Perhaps sooner than you think, Pencroff.” + +And, indeed, on the 10th of December, a week after his return to +Granite House, the Unknown accosted the engineer and in a quiet humble +voice said:— + +“Sir, I have a request to make.” + +“Speak,” replied the engineer, “but, first, let me ask you a question?” + +At these words the Unknown colored and drew back. Smith saw what was +passing in the mind of the culprit, who feared, doubtless, that the +engineer would question him upon his past. + +Smith took him by the hand. + +“Comrade,” said he, “we are not only companions, we are friends. I +wanted to say this to you first, now I will listen.” + +The Unknown covered his eyes with his hand; a sort of tremor seized +him, and for some moments he was unable to articulate a word. + +“Sir,” said he, at length, “I came to implore a favor from you.” + +“What is it?” + +“You have, four or five miles from here, at the foot of the mountain, a +corral for your animals. These require looking after. Will you permit +me to live over there with them?” + +Smith regarded the unhappy man for some time, with deep commiseration. +Then:— + +“My friend,” said he, “the corral has nothing but sheds, only fit for +the animals—” + +“It will be good enough, for me, sir.” + +“My friend,” replied Smith, “we will never thwart you in anything. If +you wish to live in the corral, you may; nevertheless, you will always +be welcome at Granite House. But since you desire to stay at the +corral, we will do what is necessary to make you comfortable.” + +“Never mind about that, I will get along well enough.” + +“My friend,” responded Smith, who persisted in the use of this cordial +title, “you must let us be the judges in that matter.” + +The Unknown thanked the engineer and went away. And Smith, having told +his companions of the proposition that had been made, they decided to +build a log house at the corral, and to make it as comfortable as +possible. + +The same day the colonists went, with the necessary tools, to the +place, and before the week was out the house was ready for its guest. +It was built twenty feet from the sheds, at a place where the herd of +moufflons, now numbering twenty-four animals, could be easily +overlooked. Some furniture, including a bed, table, bench, +clothes-press, and chest was made, and some arms, ammunition, and +tools, were carried there. + +The Unknown, meanwhile, had not seen his new home, letting the +colonists work without him, while he remained at the plateau, wishing, +doubtless, to finish up his work there. And, indeed, by his exertion +the ground was completely tilled, and ready for the sowing when the +time should arrive. + +On the 20th everything was prepared at the corral, aid the engineer +told the Unknown that his house was ready for him, to which the other +replied that he would sleep there that night. + +The same evening, the colonists were all together in the great hall of +Granite House. It was 8 o’clock, the time of their companion’s +departure; and not wishing by their presence to impose on him the +leave-taking, which would, perhaps, have cost him an effort, they had +left him alone and gone up into Granite House. + +They had been conversing together in the hall for some minutes, when +there was a light knock on the door, the Unknown entered, and without +further introduction:— + +“Before I leave you, sirs,” said he, “it is well that you should know +my history. This is it.” + +These simple words greatly affected Smith and companions. The engineer +started up. + +“We ask to hear nothing, my friend,” he said. “It is your right to be +silent—” + +“It is my duty to speak.” + +“Then sit down.” + +“I will stand where I am.” + +“We are ready to hear what you have to say,” said Smith. + +The Unknown stood in a shadowed corner of the hall, bare-headed, his +arms crossed on his breast. In this position, in a hoarse voice, +speaking as one who forces himself to speak, he made the following +recital, uninterrupted by any word from his auditors:— + +“On the 20th of December, 1854, a steam pleasure-yacht, the Duncan, +belonging to a Scotch nobleman, Lord Glenarvan, cast anchor at Cape +Bernoulli, on the western coast of Australia, near the thirty-seventh +parallel. On board the yacht were Lord Glenarvan, his wife, a major in +the English army, a French geographer, a little boy, and a little girl. +These two last were the children of Captain Grant, of the ship +Britannia, which, with its cargo, had been lost the year before. The +Duncan was commanded by Captain John Mangles, and was manned by a crew +of fifteen men. + +“This is the reason why the yacht was on the Australian coast at that +season:— + +“Six months before, a bottle containing a paper written in English, +German, and French, had been picked up by the Duncan in the Irish Sea. +This paper said, in substance, that three persons still survived from +the wreck of the Britannia; that they were the captain and two of the +men; that they had found refuge on a land of which the latitude and +longitude was given, but the longitude, blotted by the sea water, was +no longer legible. + +“The latitude was 37° 11’ south. Now, as the longitude was unknown, if +they followed the latitude across continents and seas, they were +certain to arrive at the land inhabited by Captain Grant and his +companions. + +“The English Admiralty, having hesitated to undertake the search, Lord +Glenarvan had resolved to do everything in his power to recover the +captain. Mary and Robert Grant had been in correspondence with him, and +the yacht Duncan was made ready for a long voyage, in which the family +of Lord Glenarvan and the children of the captain intended to +participate. The Duncan, leaving Glasgow, crossed the Atlantic, passed +the Straits of Magellan, and proceeded up the Pacific to Patagonia, +where, according to the first theory suggested by the paper, they might +believe that Captain Grant was a prisoner to the natives. + +“The Duncan left its passengers on the western coast of Patagonia, and +sailed for Cape Corrientes on the eastern coast, there to wait for +them. + +“Lord Glenarvan crossed Patagonia, following the 37th parallel, and, +not having found any trace of the captain, he reembarked on the 13th of +November, in order to continue his search across the ocean. + +“After having visited without success the islands of Tristan d’Acunha +and of Amsterdam, lying in the course, the Duncan, as I have stated, +arrived at Cape Bernouilli on the 20th of December, 1854. + +“It was Lord Glenarvan’s intention to cross Australia, as he had +crossed Patagonia, and he disembarked. Some miles from the coast was a +farm belonging to an Irishman, who offered hospitality to the +travellers. Lord Glenarvan told the Irishman the object which had +brought him to that region, and asked if he had heard of an English +three-master, the Britannia, having been lost, within two years, on the +west coast of Australia. + +“The Irishman had never heard of this disaster, but, to the great +surprise of everybody, one of his servants, intervening, said:— + +“‘Heaven be praised, my lord. If Captain Grant is still alive he is in +Australia.’ + +“‘Who are you?’ demanded Lord Glenarvan. + +“‘A Scotchman, like yourself, my lord,’ answered this man, ‘and one of +the companions of Captain Grant, one of the survivors of the +Britannia.’ + +“This man called himself Ayrton. He had been, in short, boatswain’s +mate of the Britannia, as his papers proved. But, separated from +Captain Grant at the moment when the ship went to pieces on the rocks, +he had believed until this moment that every one had perished but +himself. + +“‘Only,’ he added, ‘it was not on the western but on the eastern coast +of Australia that the Britannia was lost; and if the Captain is still +living he is a prisoner to the natives, and he must be searched for +there.’ + +“This man said these things frankly and with a confident expression. No +one would have doubted what he said. The Irishman, in whose service he +had been for more than a year, spoke in his favor. Lord Glenarvan +believed in his loyalty, and, following his advice, he resolved to +cross Australia, following the 37th parallel. Lord Glenarvan, his wife, +the children, the major, the Frenchman, Captain Mangles and some +sailors formed the little party under the guidance of Ayrton, while the +Duncan, under the command of the mate, Tom Austin, went to Melbourne, +to await further instructions. + +“They left on the 23d of December, 1861. + +“It is time to say that this Ayrton was a traitor. He was, indeed, the +boatswain’s mate of the Britannia; but, after some dispute with his +captain, he had tried to excite the crew to mutiny and seize the ship, +and Captain Grant had put him ashore, the 8th of April, 1832, on the +west coast of Australia, and had gone off, leaving him there, which was +no more than right. + +“Thus this wretch knew nothing of the shipwreck of the Britannia. He +had just learned it from Lord Glenarvan’s recital! Since his +abandonment, he had become, under the name of Ben Joyce, the leader of +some escaped convicts; and, if he impudently asserted the ship had been +lost on the east coast, if he urged Lord Glenarvan to go in that +direction, it was in the hope of separating him from his ship, of +seizing the Duncan, and of making this yacht a pirate of the Pacific.” + +Here the Unknown stopped for a moment. His voice trembled, but he began +again in these words:— + +“The expedition across Australia set out. It was naturally unfortunate, +since Ayrton, or Ben Joyce, whichever you wish, led it, sometimes +preceded, sometimes followed by the band of convicts, who had been +informed of the plot. + +“Meanwhile, the Duncan had been taken to Melbourne to await +instructions. It was therefore necessary to persuade Lord Glenarvan to +order her to leave Melbourne and to proceed to the east coast of +Australia, where it would be easy to seize her. After having led the +expedition sufficiently near this coast, into the midst of vast +forests, where all resources were wanting, Ayrton obtained a letter +which he was ordered to deliver to the mate of the Duncan; a letter +which gave the order directing the yacht to proceed immediately to the +east coast, to Twofold Bay, a place some days journey from the spot +where the expedition had halted. It was at this place that Ayrton had +given the rendezvous to his accomplices. + +“At the moment when this letter was to have been sent, the traitor was +unmasked and was obliged to flee. But this letter, giving him the +Duncan, must be had at any cost. Ayrton succeeded in getting hold of +it, and, in two days afterwards, he was in Melbourne. + +“So far, the criminal had succeeded in his odious projects. He could +take the Duncan to this Twofold Bay, where it would be easy for the +convicts to seize her; and, her crew massacred, Ben Joyce would be +master of the sea. Heaven stopped him in the consummation of these dark +designs. + +“Ayrton, having reached Melbourne, gave the letter to the mate, Tom +Austin, who made ready to execute the order; but one can judge of the +disappointment and the rage of Ayrton, when, the second day out, he +learned that the mate was taking the ship, not to Twofold Bay on the +east coast of Australia, but to the east coast of New Zealand. He +wished to oppose this, but the mate showed him his order. And, in +truth, by a providential error of the French geographer who had written +this letter, the eastern coast of New Zealand had been named as their +place of destination. + +“All the plans of Ayrton had miscarried. He tried to mutiny. They put +him in irons; and he was taken to the coast of New Zealand, unaware of +what had become of his accomplices, or of Lord Glenarvan. + +“The Duncan remained on this coast until the 3d of March. On that day, +Ayrton heard firing. It was a salute from the Duncan, and, very soon, +Lord Glenarvan and all his party came on board. + +“This is what had happened:— + +“After innumerable fatigues and dangers, Lord Glenarvan had been able +to accomplish his journey and arrived at Twofold Bay. The Duncan was +not there! He telegraphed to Melbourne, and received a reply:—’Duncan +sailed on the 18th. Destination unknown.’ + +“Lord Glenarvan could think of but one explanation, that was that the +good yacht had fallen into the hands of Ben Joyce, and had become a +pirate ship. + +“Nevertheless, Lord Glenarvan did not wish to give up his undertaking. +He was an intrepid and a generous man. He embarked on a merchant +vessel, which took him to the west coast of New Zealand, and he crossed +the country, following the 37th parallel without finding any trace of +Captain Grant; but on the other coast, to his great surprise, and by +the bounty of Heaven, he found the Duncan, commanded by the mate, which +had been waiting for him for five weeks! + +“It was the 3d of March, 1855. Lord Glenarvan was again on the Duncan, +but Ayrton was there also. He was brought before his lordship, who +wished to get from this bandit all that he knew concerning Captain +Grant. Ayrton refused to speak. Lord Glenarvan told him, then, that at +the first port, he would be given over to the English authorities. +Ayrton remained silent. + +“The Duncan continued along the thirty-seventh parallel. Meanwhile, +Lady Glenarvan undertook to overcome the obstinacy of the bandit, and, +finally, her influence conquered him. Ayrton, in exchange for what he +would tell, proposed to Lord Glenarvan to leave him upon one of the +islands in the Pacific, instead of giving him up to the English +authorities. Lord Glenarvan, ready to do anything to gain information +concerning Captain Grant, consented. + +“Then Ayrton told the history of his life, and declared that he knew +nothing about Captain Grant since the day when the latter had left him +on the Australian coast. + +“Nevertheless, Lord Glenarvan kept the promise he had made. The Duncan, +continuing her route, arrived at Tabor Island. It was there that Ayrton +was to be left, and it was there, too, that, by a miracle, they found +Captain Grant and his two companions. The convict was put upon the +island in their stead, and when he left the yacht, Lord Glenarvan spoke +to him in these words:— + +“‘Here, Ayrton, you will be far from any country, and without any +possible means of communicating with your fellow-men. You will not be +able to leave this island. You will be alone, under the eye of a God +who looks into the depths of our hearts, but you will neither be lost +nor neglected, like Captain Grant. Unworthy as you are of the +remembrance of men, you will be remembered. I know where you are, +Ayrton, and I know where to find you. I will never forget it.’ + +“And the Duncan, setting sail, soon disappeared. + +“This was the 18th of March, 1855. + +“Ayrton was alone; but he lacked neither ammunition nor arms nor seeds. +He, the convict, had at his disposal the house built by the honest +Captain Grant. He had only to live and to expiate in solitude the +crimes which he had committed. + +“Sirs, he repented; he was ashamed of his crimes, and he was very +unhappy. He said to himself that, as some day men would come to seek +him on this islet, he must make himself worthy to go back with them. +How he suffered, the miserable man! How he labored to benefit himself +by labor! How he prayed to regenerate himself by prayer! + +“For two years, for three years, it was thus. Ayrton, crushed by this +isolation, ever on the watch for a ship to appear upon the horizon of +his island, asking himself if the time of expiation was nearly ended, +suffered as one has rarely suffered. Oh! but solitude is hard, for a +soul gnawed by remorse! + +“But, doubtless, Heaven found this unhappy wretch insufficiently +punished, for he fell, little by little, till he became a savage! He +felt, little by little, the brute nature taking possession of him. He +cannot say whether this was after two or four years of + +abandonment, but at last he became the miserable being whom you found. + +“I need not tell you, sirs, that Ayrton and Ben Joyce and I are one!” + +Smith and his companions rose as this recital was finished. It is hard +to say how deeply they were affected! Such misery, such grief, and such +despair, had been shown to them! + +“Ayrton,” said Smith, “you have been a great criminal, but Heaven has, +doubtless, witnessed the expiation of your crimes. This is proved, in +that you have been restored to your fellow-men. Ayrton, you are +pardoned! And now, will you be our companion?” + +The man drew back. + +“Here is my hand,” said the engineer. + +Ayrton darted forward and seized it, great tears streaming from his +eyes. + +“Do you desire to live with us?” asked Smith. + +“Oh, Mr. Smith, let me have yet a little time,” he answered, “let me +remain alone in the house at the corral!” + +“Do as you wish, Ayrton,” responded Smith. + +The unhappy man was about retiring, when Smith asked him a last +question. + +“One word more, my friend. Since it is your wish to live in solitude, +why did you throw that paper, which put us in the way of finding you, +into the sea?” + +“A paper?” answered Ayrton, who seemed not to understand what was said. + +“Yes, that paper, which we found enclosed in a bottle, and which gave +the exact situation of Tabor Island?” + +The man put his hand to his forehead, and, after some reflection, +said:— + +“I never threw any paper into the sea!” + +“Never!” cried Pencroff. + +“Never!” + +And then, inclining his head, Ayrton left the room. + + + + +CHAPTER XL. + + +A TALK—SMITH AND SPILETT—THE ENGINEER’S IDEA—THE ELECTRIC TELEGRAPH—THE +WIRES—THE BATTER-THE ALPHABET—FINE WEATHER—THE PROSPERITY OF THE +COLONY—PHOTOGRAPHY—A SNOW EFFECT—TWO YEARS ON LINCOLN ISLAND. + + +“The poor man!” said Herbert, returning from the door, after having +watched Ayrton slide down the rope of the elevator and disappear in the +darkness. + +“He will come back,” said Smith. + +“What does it mean?” exclaimed Pencroff. “That he had not thrown this +bottle into the sea? Then who did it?” + +Certainly, if there was a reasonable question this was. + +“He did it,” replied Neb; “only the poor fellow was half out of his +senses at the time.” + +“Yes,” said Herbert, “and he had no knowledge of what he was doing.” + +“It can be explained in no other way, my friends,” responded Smith, +hurriedly, “and I understand, now, how Ayrton was able to give the +exact situation of the island, since the events prior to his +abandonment gave him that knowledge.” + +“Nevertheless,” observed Pencroff, “he was not a brute when he wrote +that paper, and if it is seven or eight years since it was thrown into +the sea, how is it that the paper has not been injured by moisture?” + +“It proves,” said Smith, “that Ayrton retained possession of his +faculties to a period much more recent than he imagines.” + +“That must be it,” replied Pencroff, “for otherwise the thing would be +inexplicable.” + +“Inexplicable, indeed,” answered the engineer, who seemed not to wish +to prolong this talk. + +“Has Ayrton told the truth?” questioned the sailor. + +“Yes,” answered the reporter, “the history he has related is true in +every particular. I remember, perfectly well, that the papers reported +Lord Glenarvan’s undertaking and its result.” + +“Ayrton has told the truth,” added Smith, “without any doubt, Pencroff, +since it was trying enough for him to do so. A man does not lie when he +accuses himself in this way.” + +The next day—the 21st—the colonists went down to the beach, and then +clambered up to the plateau, but they saw nothing of Ayrton. The man +had gone to his house the night before, and they judged it best not to +intrude upon him. Time would, doubtless, effect what sympathy would +fail to accomplish. + +Herbert, Pencroff, and Neb resumed their accustomed occupations; and it +happened that their work brought Smith and Spilett together at the +Chimneys. + +“Do you know, Cyrus, that your explanation of yesterday about the +bottle does not satisfy me at all? It is impossible to suppose that +this unhappy creature could have written that paper, and thrown the +bottle into the sea, without remembering anything about it!” + +“Consequently, it is not he who threw it there, my dear Spilett!” + +“Then you believe—” + +“I believe nothing, I know nothing!” replied Smith, interrupting the +reporter. “I place this incident with those others which I have not +been able to explain!” + +“In truth, Cyrus,” said Spilett, “these things are incredible. Your +rescue, the box thrown up on the beach, Top’s adventures, and now this +bottle. Will we never have an answer to these enigmas?” + +“Yes,” answered the engineer, earnestly, “yes, when I shall have +penetrated the bowels of this island!” + +“Chance will, perhaps, give us the key to this mystery.” + +“Chance, Spilett! I do not believe in chance any more than I believe in +mystery in this world. There is a cause for everything, however +inexplicable, which has happened here, and I will discover it. But, +while waiting, let us watch and work.” + +January arrived, and the year 1867 began. The works had been pushed +forward vigorously. One day Herbert and Spilett, passing the corral, +ascertained that Ayrton had taken possession of his abode. He occupied +himself with the large herd confided to his care, and thus saved his +companions the necessity of visiting it two or three times a week. +Nevertheless, in order not to leave Ayrton too much alone, they +frequently went there. + +It was just as well—owing to certain suspicions shared by Smith and +Spilett—that this part of the island should be under a certain +supervision, and Ayrton, if anything happened, would not fail to let +the inhabitants of Granite House know of it. + +Possibly, some sudden event might happen, which it would be important +to communicate to the engineer without delay. And, aside from whatever +might be connected with the mystery of the island, other things, +requiring the prompt intervention of the colonists, might occur, as, +for example, the discovering of a ship in the offing and in sight of +the west coast, a wreck on that shore, the possible arrival of pirates, +etc. + +So Smith determined to place the corral in instant communication with +Granite House. + +It was the 10th of January when he told his project to his companions. + +“How are you going to do such a thing as that, Mr. Smith?” asked +Pencroff. “Maybe you propose to erect a telegraph!” + +“That is precisely what I propose to do.” + +“Electric?” exclaimed Herbert. + +“Electric,” responded Smith. “We have everything necessary for making a +battery, and the most difficult part will be to make the wires, but I +think we can succeed.” + +“Well, after this,” replied the sailor, “I expect some day to see us +riding along on a railway!” + +They entered upon the work at once, beginning with the most difficult +part, that is to say, the manufacture of the wires, since, if that +failed, it would be useless to make the battery and other accessories. + +The iron of Lincoln Island was, as we know, of excellent quality, and, +therefore, well adapted to the purpose. Smith began by making a steel +plate, pierced with conical holes of different sizes, which would bring +the wire to the desired size. This piece of steel, after having been +tempered “through and through,” was fixed firmly to a solid frame-work +sunk in the ground, only a few feet distant from the waterfall—the +motive power which the engineer intended to use. + +And, indeed, there was the fulling-mill, not then in use, the main +shaft of which turned with great force, and would serve to draw out the +wire and roll it around itself. + +The operation was delicate and required great care. The iron, +previously made into long and thin bars, with tapering ends, having +been introduced into the largest hole of the drawing-plate, was drawn +out by the main shaft of the mill, rolled out to a length of 25 or 30 +feet, then unrolled, and pulled, in turn, through the smaller holes; +and at length, the engineer obtained wires 30 or 40 feet long, which it +was easy to join together and place along the five miles between the +corral and Granite House. + +It took but a little while to get this work under way, and then, Smith, +making his companions the wire-drawers, busied himself in the +construction of his battery. + +It was necessary to make a battery with a constant circuit. We know +that modern batteries are usually made of a certain kind of coke, zinc, +and copper. Copper the engineer was without, since, in spite of all his +efforts, he had been unable to find a trace of it on the island. The +coke, which is that hard deposit obtained from gas retorts could be +procured, but it would be necessary to arrange a special apparatus—a +difficult thing to do. As to the zinc, it will be remembered that the +box found on Jetsam Point, was lined with a sheet of that metal, which +could not be better utilized than at present. + +Smith, after deep reflection, resolved to make a very simple battery, +something like that which Becquerel invented in 1820, in which zinc +alone is used. The other substances, nitric-acid and potash, he had at +hand. + +The manner in which he made this battery, in which the current was +produced by the action of the acid and the potash on each other, was as +follows:— + +A certain number of glass vessels were made and filled with +nitric-acid. They were corked with perforated corks, containing glass +tubes reaching into the acid, and stopped: with clay plugs, connected +with threads. Into these tubes the engineer poured a solution of +potash—obtained from burnt plants—and thus the acid and the potash +reacted on each other through the clay. + +Then Smith plunged two plates of zinc, the one in the nitric acid, the +other in the solution, and thus produced a circuit between the tube and +jar, and as these plates had been connected by a bit of wire, the one +in the tube became the positive and the other the negative pole of the +apparatus. Each jar produced its currents, which, together, were +sufficient to cause all the phenomena of the electric telegraph. + +On the 6th of February they began to erect the poles, furnished with +glass insulators, and some days later the wire was stretched, ready to +produce the electric current, which travels with the speed of 100,000 +kilometres a second. + +Two batteries had been made, one for Granite House, and the other for +the corral, as, if the corral had to communicate with Granite House, it +might, also, be needful for Granite House to communicate with the +corral. + +As to the indicator and manipulator, they were very simple. At both +stations the wire was wrapped around an electro-magnet of soft iron. +Communication was established between the two poles; the current, +leaving the positive pole, traversed the wire, passed into the +electro-magnet, and returned under ground to the negative pole. The +current closed, the attraction of the electro-magnet ceased. It was, +therefore, sufficient to place a plate of soft iron before the +electro-magnet which, attracted while the current is passing, falls, +when it is interrupted. The movement of the plate thus obtained, Smith +easily fastened to it a needle, pointing to a dial, which bore the +letters of the alphabet upon its face. + +Everything was finished by the 12th of February. On that day Smith, +having turned on the current, asked if everything was all right at the +corral, and received, in a few moments, a satisfactory reply from +Ayrton. + +Pencroff was beside himself with delight, and every morning and evening +he sent a telegraph to the corral, which never remained unanswered. + +This method of communication presented evident advantages, both in +informing the colonists of Ayrton’s presence at the corral, and in +preventing his complete isolation. Moreover, Smith never allowed a week +to pass without visiting him, and Ayrton came occasionally to Granite +House, where he always found a kind reception. + +Continuing their accustomed work, the fine weather passed away, and the +resources of the colony, particularly in vegetables and cereals, +increased from day to day, and the plants brought from Tabor Island had +been perfectly acclimated. The plateau presented a most attractive +appearance. The fourth crop of corn had been excellent, and no one +undertook to count the 400,000,000,000 grains produced in the harvest; +although Pencroff had had some such idea, until Smith informed him +that, supposing he could count 300 grains a minute, or 18,000 an hour, +it would take him 5,500 years to accomplish his undertaking. + +The weather was superb, though somewhat warm during the day; but, in +the evening, the sea-breeze sprung up, tempering the air and giving +refreshing nights to the inhabitants of Granite House. Still there were +some storms, which, although not long continued, fell upon Lincoln +Island with extraordinary violence. For several hours at a time the +lightning never ceased illuminating the heavens, and the thunder roared +without cessation. + +This was a season of great prosperity to the little colony. The +denizens of the poultry-yard increased rapidly, and the colonists lived +on this increase, as it was necessary to keep the population within +certain limits. The pigs had littered, and Pencroff and Neb’s attention +to these animals absorbed a great part of their time. There were too +young onagers, and their parents were often ridden by Spilett and +Herbert, or hitched to the cart to drag wood or bring the minerals +which the engineer made use of. + +Many explorations were made about this time into the depths of the Far +West. The explorers did not suffer from the heat, as the sun’s rays +could not penetrate the leafy roof above them. Thus, they visited all +that part to the left of the Mercy, bordering on the route from the +corral to the mouth of Fall River. + +But during these excursions the colonists took care to be well armed, +as they often encountered exceedingly savage and ferocious wild boars. +They also waged war against the jaguars, for which animals Spilett had +a special hatred, and his pupil, Herbert, seconded him well. Armed as +they were, the hunters never shunned an encounter with these beasts, +and the courage of Herbert was superb, while the coolness of the +reporter was astonishing. Twenty magnificent skins already ornamented +the hall at Granite House, and at this rate the jaguars would soon be +exterminated. + +Sometimes the engineer took part in explorations of the unknown +portions of the island, which he observed with minute attention. There +were other traces than those of animals which he sought for in the +thickest places in the forests, but not once did anything suspicions +appear. Top and Jup, who accompanied him, showed by their action that +there was nothing there, and yet the dog had growled more than once +again above that pit which the engineer had explored without result. + +During this season Spilett, assisted by Herbert, took numerous views of +the most picturesque portions of the island, by means of the +photographic apparatus, which had not been used until now. + +This apparatus, furnished with a powerful lens, was very complete. All +the substances necessary in photographic work were there; the nitrate +of silver, the hyposulphata of soda, the chloride of ammonium, the +acetate of soda, and the chloride of gold. Even the paper was there, +all prepared, so that all that was necessary, in order to use it, was +to steep it for a few moments in diluted nitrate of silver. + +The reporter and his assistant soon became expert operators, and they +obtained fine views of the neighborhood, such as a comprehensive view +of the island taken from Prospect Plateau, with Mount Franklin on the +horizon, the mouth of the Mercy so picturesquely framed between its +high rocks, the glade and the corral, with the lower spurs of the +mountain in the background, the curious outline of Claw Cape, Jetsam +Point, etc. Neither did the photographers forget to take portraits of +all the inhabitants of the island, without exception. + +“Its people,” as Pencroff expressed it. + +And the sailor was charmed to see his likeness, faithfully reproduced, +ornamenting the walls of Granite House, and he stood before this +display as pleased as if he had been gazing in one of the richest +show-windows on Broadway. + +It must be confessed, however, that the portrait, showing the finest +execution, was that of master Jup. Master Jup has posed with a gravity +impossible to describe, and his picture was a speaking likeness! + +“One would say he was laughing!” exclaimed Pencroff. + +And if Jup had not been satisfied, he must have been hard to please. +But there it was, and he contemplated his image with such a sentimental +air, that it was evident he was a little conceited. + +The heat of the summer ended with March. The season was rainy, but the +air was still warm, and the month was not as pleasant as they had +expected. Perhaps it foreboded an early and a rigorous winter. + +One morning, the 21st, Herbert had risen early, and, looking from the +window, exclaimed:— + +“Hullo, the islet is covered with snow!” + +“Snow at this season!” cried the reporter, joining the lad. + +Their companions were soon beside them, and every one saw that not only +the islet, but that the entire beach below Granite House, was covered +with the white mantle. + +“It is, indeed, snow,” said Pencroff. + +“Or something very much like it,” replied Neb. + +“But the thermometer stands at 58°,” said Spilett. + +Smith looked at the white covering without speaking, for he was, +indeed, at a loss how to explain such a phenomenon in this season and +in this temperature. + +“The deuce!” cried the sailor; “our crops will have been frost-bitten.” + +And he was about descending when Jup sprang before him and slid down +the rope to the ground. + +The orang had scarcely touched the earth before the immense body of +snow rose and scattered itself through the air in such innumerable +flocks as to darken all the heavens for a time. + +“They are birds!” cried Herbert. + +The effect had, indeed, been produced by myriads of sea-birds, with +plumage of brilliant whiteness. They had come from hundreds of miles +around on to the islet and the coast, and they now disappeared in the +horizon, leaving the colonists as amazed as if they had witnessed a +transformation scene, from winter to summer, in some fancy spectacle. +Unfortunately, the change had been so sudden that neither the reporter +nor the lad had had an opportunity of knocking over some of these +birds, whose species they did not recognize. + +A few days later, and it was the 26th of March. Two years had passed +since the balloon had been thrown upon Lincoln Island. + + + + +CHAPTER XLI. + + +THOUGHTS OF HOME—CHANCES OF RETURN —PLAN TO EXPLORE THE COAST—THE +DEPARTURE OF THE 16TH OF APRIL—SERPENTINE PENINSULA SEEN FROM SEA—THE +BASALTIC CLIFFS OF THE WESTERN COAST—BAD WEATHER—NIGHT—A NEW INCIDENT. + + +Two years already! For two years the colonists had had no communication +with their fellows! They knew no more of what was happening in the +world, lost upon this island, than if they had been upon the most +distant asteroid of the solar system. + +What was going on in their country? Their fatherland was always present +to their eyes, that land which, when they left it, was torn by civil +strife, which perhaps was still red with rebellious blood. It was a +great grief to them, this war, and they often talked about it, never +doubting, however, that the cause of the North would triumph for the +honor of the American confederation. + +During these two years not a ship had been seen. It was evident that +Lincoln Island was out of the route of vessels; that it was unknown—the +maps proved this—was evident, because, although it had no harbor, yet +its streams would have drawn thither vessels desiring to renew their +supply of water. But the surrounding sea was always desert, and the +colonists could count on no outside help to bring them to their home. + +Nevertheless, one chance of rescue existed, which was discussed one day +in the first week of April, when the colonists were gathered in the +hall of Granite House. + +They had been talking of America and of the small hope of ever seeing +it again. + +“Undoubtedly, there is but one way of leaving the island,” said +Spilett, “which is, to build a vessel large enough to make a voyage of +some hundreds of miles. It seems to me, that, when one can build a +shallop, they can readily build a ship.” + +“And that they can as easily go to the Low Archipelago as to Tabor +Island,” added Herbert. + +“I do not say we cannot,” replied Pencroff, who always had the most to +say on questions of a maritime nature; “I do not say we cannot, +although it is very different whether one goes far or near! If our +sloop had been threatened with bad weather when we went to Tabor +Island, we knew that a shelter was not far off in either direction; but +1,200 miles to travel is a long bit of road, and the nearest land is at +least that distance!” + +“Do you mean, supposing the case to occur, Pencroff, that you would not +risk it?” questioned the reporter. + +“I would undertake whatever you wished, sir,” replied the sailor, “and +you know I am not the man to draw back.” + +“Remember, moreover, that we have another sailor with us, now,” said +Neb. + +“Who do you mean,” asked Pencroff. + +“Ayrton.” + +“That is true,” responded Herbert. + +“If he would join us,” remarked Pencroff. + +“Why,” said the reporter, “do you think that if Lord Glenarvan’s yacht +had arrived at Tabor Island while Ayrton was living there, that he +would have refused to leave?” + +“You forget, my friends,” said Smith, “that Ayrton was not himself +during the last few years there. But that is not the question. It is +important to know whether we can count on the return of this Scotch +vessel as among our chances for rescue. Now, Lord Glenarvan promised +Ayrton that he would return to Tabor Island, when he judged his crimes +sufficiently punished, and I believe that he will return. + +“Yes,” said the reporter, “and, moreover, I think he will return soon, +as already Ayrton has been here twelve years!” + +“I, also, think this lord will come back, and, probably, very soon. But +where will he come to? Not here, but to Tabor Island.” + +“That is as sure as that Lincoln Island is not on the maps,” said +Herbert. + +“Therefore, my friends,” replied Smith, “we must take the necessary +precautions to have Ayrton’s and our presence on Lincoln Island +advertised on Tabor Island.” + +“Evidently,” said the reporter, “and nothing can be easier than to +place in Captain Grant’s cabin a notice, giving the situation of our +island.” + +“It is, nevertheless, annoying,” rejoined the sailor, “that we forgot +to do that on our first voyage to the place.” + +“Why should we have done so?” replied Herbert. “We knew nothing about +Ayrton at that time, and when we learned his history, the season was +too far advanced to allow of our going back there.” + +“Yes,” answered Smith, “it was too late then, and we had to postpone +the voyage until spring.” + +“But supposing the yacht comes in the meantime?” asked Pencroff. + +“It is not likely,” replied the engineer, “as Lord Glenarvan would not +choose the winter season to adventure into these distant seas. Either +it has already been to the island, in the five months that Ayrton has +been with us, or it will come later, and it will be time enough, in the +first fine weather of October, to go to Tabor Island and leave a notice +there.” + +“It would, indeed, be unfortunate,” said Neb, “if the Duncan has been +to and left these seas within a few months.” + +“I hope that it is not so,” answered Smith, “and that Heaven has not +deprived us of this last remaining chance.” + +“I think,” observed the reporter, “that, at least, we will know what +our chances are, when we have visited the island; for those Stockmen +would, necessarily, leave some trace of their visit, had they been +there.” + +“Doubtless,” answered the engineer. “And, my friends, since we have +this chance of rescue, let us wait patiently, and if we find it has +been taken from us, we will see then what to do.” + +“At any rate,” said Pencroff, “it is agreed that if we do leave the +inland by some way or another, it will not be on account of +ill-treatment!” + +“No indeed, Pencroff,” replied the reporter, “it will be because we are +far from everything which a man loves in this world, his family, his +friends, his country!” + +Everything having been thus arranged there was no longer any question +of building a ship, and the colonists occupied themselves in preparing +for their third winter in Granite House. + +But they determined, before the bad weather set in, to make a voyage in +the sloop around the island. The exploration of the coast had never +been completed, and the colonists had only an imperfect idea of its +western and northern portions from the mouth of Fall River to the +Mandible Capes, and of the narrow bay between them. + +Pencroff had proposed this excursion, and Smith had gladly agreed to +it, as he wished to see for himself all that part of his domain. + +The weather was still unsettled, but the barometer made no rapid +changes, and they might expect fair days. So, in the first week of +April, after a very low barometer, its rise was followed by a strong +west wind, which lasted for five or six weeks; then the needle of the +instrument became stationary at a high figure, and everything seemed +propitious for the exploration. + +The day of departure was set for the 16th, and the Good Luck, moored in +Balloon Harbor, was provisioned for a long cruise. + +Smith told Ayrton of the excursion, and proposed to him to take part in +it; but as Ayrton preferred to remain on shore, it was decided that he +should come to Granite House while his companions were absent. Jup was +left to keep him company, and made no objection. + +On the morning of the 16th all the colonists, including Top, went on +board the Good Luck. The breeze blew fresh from the south-west, so that +from Balloon Harbor they had to beat up against the wind in order to +make Reptile End. The distance between these two points, following the +coast, was twenty miles. As the wind was dead ahead, and they had had +on starting but two hours of the ebb, it took all day to reach the +promontory, and it was night before the point was doubled. + +Pencroff proposed to the engineer that they should keep on slowly, +sailing under a double-reef, but Smith preferred mooring some cable +lengths from shore, in order to survey this part of the coast by +daylight. + +And it was agreed that henceforth, as a minute exploration of the +island was to be made, they would not sail at night, but cast anchor +every evening at the most available point. + +The wind fell as night approached, and the silence was unbroken. The +little party, excepting Pencroff, slept less comfortably than in their +beds at Granite House, but still they slept; and at daylight the next +morning the sailor raised anchor, and, with a free wind, skirted the +shore. + +The colonists knew this magnificently wooded border, as they had +traversed it formerly, on foot; but its appearance excited renewed +admiration. They ran as close in as possible, and moderated their speed +in order to observe it carefully. Often, they would cast anchor that +Spilett might take photographic views of the superb scenery. + +About noon the Good Luck arrived at the mouth of the Fall River. Above, +upon the right bank, the trees were less numerous, and three miles +further on they grew in mere isolated groups between the western spurs +of the mountain, whose arid declivities extended to the very edge of +the ocean. + +How great was the contrast between the southern and the northern +portions of this coast! The one wooded and verdant, the other harsh and +savage! It was what they call in certain countries, an “iron-bound +coast,” and its tempestuous aspect seemed to indicate a sudden +crystallization of the boiling basalt in the geologic epochs. How +appalling would this hideous mass have been to the colonists if they +had chanced to have been thrown on this part of the island! When they +were on Mount Franklin, their position had been too elevated for them +to recognize the awfully forbidding aspect of this shore; but, viewed +from the sea, it presented an appearance, the like of which cannot be +seen, perhaps, in any portion of the globe. + +The sloop passed for half a mile before this coast. It was composed of +blocks of all dimensions from twenty to thirty feet high, and of all +sorts of shapes, towers, steeples, pyramids, obelisks, and cones. The +ice-bergs of the polar seas could not have been thrown together in more +frightful confusion! Here, the rocks formed bridges, there, nave-like +arches, of indistinguishable depth; in one place, were excavations +resembling monumental vaults, in another a crowd of points outnumbering +the pinnacles of a Gothic cathedral. All the caprices of nature, more +varied than those of the imagination, were here displayed over a +distance of eight or nine miles. + +Smith and companions gazed with a surprise approaching stupefaction. +But, though they rested mute, Top kept up an incessant barking, which +awoke a thousand echoes. The engineer noticed the same strangeness in +the dog’s action as he showed at the month of the well in Granite +House. + +“Go alongside,” said Smith. + +And the Good Luck ran in as close to the rocks as possible. Perhaps +there was some cavern here which it would be well to explore. But Smith +saw nothing, not even a hollow which could serve as a retreat for any +living thing, and the base of the rocks was washed by the surf of the +sea. After a time the dog stopped barking, and the sloop kept off again +at some cable lengths from the shore. + +In the northwest portion of the island the shore became flat and sandy. +A few trees rose above the low and swampy ground, the home of myriads +of aquatic birds. + +In the evening the sloop moored in a slight hollow of the shore, to the +north of the island. She was close into the bank, as the water here was +of great depth. The breeze died away with nightfall, and the night +passed without incident. + +The next morning Spilett and Herbert went ashore for a couple of hours +and brought back many bunches of ducks and snipe, and by 8 o’clock the +Good Luck, with a fair, freshening breeze, was speeding on her way to +North Mandible Cape. + +“I should not be surprised,” said Pencroff, “if we had a squall. +Yesterday the sun set red, and, this morning, the cats-tails foreboded +no good.” + +These “cats-tails”—were slender cyrrhi, scattered high above, in the +zenith. These feathery messengers usually announce the near disturbance +of the elements. + +“Very well, then,” said Smith, “crowd on all sail and make for Shark +Gulf. There, I think the sloop will be safe.” + +“Perfectly,” replied the sailor, “and, moreover, the north coast is +nothing but uninteresting downs.” + +“I shall not regret,” added the engineer, “passing, not only the night, +but also tomorrow in that bay, which deserves to be explored with +care.” + +“I guess we’ll have to, whether we want to or no,” replied Pencroff, +“as it is beginning to be threatening in the west. See how dirty it +looks!” + +“Any how, we have a good wind to make Mandible Cape,” observed the +reporter. + +“First rate; but, we will have to tack to get into the gulf, and I +would rather have clear weather in those parts which I know nothing +about.” + +“Parts which are sown with reefs,” added Herbert, “if I may judge from +what we have seen of the coast to the south of the gulf.” + +“Pencroff,” said Smith, “do whatever you think best, we leave +everything to you.” + +“Rest assured, sir,” responded the sailor, “I will not run any +unnecessary risk. I would rather have a knife in my vitals, than that +my Good Luck should run on a rock!” + +“What time is it?” asked Pencroff. + +“10 o’clock.” + +“And how far is it to the cape?” + +“About fifteen miles.” + +“That will take two hours and a half. Unfortunately, the tide then will +be going down, and it will be a hard matter to enter the gulf with wind +and tide against us.” + +“Moreover,” said Herbert, “it is full moon to-day, and these April +tides are very strong.” + +“But, Pencroff,” asked Smith, “cannot you anchor at the cape?” + +“Anchor close to land, with bad weather coming on!” cried the sailor. +“That would be to run ourselves ashore.” + +“Then what will you do?” + +“Keep off, if possible, until the tide turns, which will be about 1 +o’clock, and if there is any daylight left try to enter the gulf; if +not, we will beat on and off until daylight.” + +“I have said, Pencroff, that we will leave everything to your +judgment.” + +“Ah,” said Pencroff, “if only there was a light-house on this coast it +would be easier for sailors.” + +“Yes,” answered Herbert, “and this time we have no thoughtful engineer +to light a fire to guide us into harbor.” + +“By the way, Cyrus,” said Spilett, “we have never thanked you for that; +but indeed, without that fire we would not have reached—” + +“A fire?” demanded Smith, astounded by the words of the reporter. + +“We wish to say, sir,” said Pencroff, “that we would have been in a bad +fix on board the Good Luck, when we were nearly back, and that we would +have passed to windward of the island unless you had taken the +precaution to light a fire, on the night of the 19th of October, upon +the plateau above Granite House.” + +“Oh, yes, yes! It was a happy thought!” replied Smith. + +“And now,” added Pencroff, “unless Ayrton thinks of it, there is not a +soul to do us this little service.” + +“No—no one!” replied Smith. + +And a moment or two later, being alone with Spilett, the engineer +whispered to him:— + +“If there is anything sure in this world, Spilett, it is that I never +lit a fire on that night, either on the plateau or anywhere else!” + + + + +CHAPTER XLII. + + +NIGHT AT SEA—SHARK GULF—CONFIDENCES—PREPARATIONS FOR WINTER—EARLY +ADVENT OF BAD WEATHER—COLD—IN-DOOR WORK—SIX MONTHS LATER—A SPECK ON THE +PHOTOGRAPH—AN UNEXPECTED EVENT. + + +The sailor’s predictions were well founded. The breeze changed to a +strong blow such as would hare caused a ship in the open sea to have +lowered her topmasts and sailed under close reefs. The sloop was +opposite the gulf at 6 o’clock, but the tide was running out, so all +that Pencroff could do was to bend the jib down to the mainmast as a +stay-sail and lie to with the bows of the Good Luck pointing on shore. + +Fortunately, although the wind was strong, the ocean, protected by the +coast, was not very rough, and there was no danger from heavy seas, +which would have tried the staunchness of the little craft. Pencroff, +although he had every confidence in his boat, waited anxiously for +daylight. + +During the night Smith and Spilett had not another opportunity to talk +alone, although the whispered words of the engineer made the reporter +anxious to discuss with him again the mysterious influence which seemed +to pervade Lincoln Island. Spilett could not rid himself of the thought +of this new and inexplicable incident. He and his companions also had +certainly seen this light, and yet Smith declared that he knew nothing +about it. + +He determined to return to this subject as soon as they returned home, +and to urge Smith to inform their companions of these strange events. +Perhaps, then, they would decide to make, altogether, a thorough search +into every part of the island. + +Whatever it was, no light appeared upon these unknown shores during +this night, and at daylight the wind, which had moderated somewhat, +shifted a couple of points, and permitted Pencroff to enter the gulf +without difficulty. About 7 o’clock the Good Luck passed into these +waters enclosed in a grotesque frame of lava. + +“Here,” said Pencroff, “is a fine roadstead, where fleets could ride at +ease.” + +“It is curious,” remarked Smith, “that this gulf has been formed by two +successive streams of lava, completely enclosing its waters; and it is +probable that, in the worst weather, the sea here is perfectly calm.” + +“It is a little too large for the Good Luck,” remarked the reporter. + +“I admit that,” replied the sailor, “but if the navy of the United +States needed a shelter in the Pacific, I don’t think they could find a +better roadstead than this!” + +“We are in the shark’s jaws,” said Neb, alluding to the form of the +gulf. + +“We are, indeed,” replied Herbert; “but, Neb, you are not afraid that +they will close on us?” + +“No, sir, not that; and yet I don’t like the looks of the place. It has +a wicked aspect.” + +“So Neb begins running down my roadstead just as I was thinking to +offer it to the United States!” cried Pencroff. + +“But are its waters deep enough?” asked the engineer. + +“That is easily seen,” answered the sailor, taking the sounding line, +which measured fifty fathoms, and letting it down. It unrolled to the +end without touching bottom. + +“There,” said Pencroff, “our iron-clads could come here without running +aground!” + +“In truth,” said Smith, “this gulf is an abyss; but when we remember +the plutonic origin of the island, that is not extraordinary.” + +“One might think,” said Herbert, “that these walls had been cut with an +instrument, and I believe that at their very base, even with a line six +times as long, we could not reach the bottom.” + +“All this is very well,” said the reporter, “but I would suggest that +Pencroff’s roadstead lacks one important element.” + +“What is that?” + +“A cut, or pathway of some kind, by which one could go inland. I do not +see a place where there is even a foothold.” + +And, indeed, these steep lava walls afforded no landing place on all +their circumference. The Good Luck, skirting within touching distance +of the lava, found no place where the passengers could disembark. + +Pencroff consoled himself by saying that they could blow up the wall, +if they wanted to, and then, as there was certainly nothing to be done +here, he turned towards the narrow opening, which was passed at 2 +o’clock. + +Neb gave a long sigh of relief. It was evident that the brave negro had +not been comfortable in those enormous jaws! + +The sloop was now headed for Granite House, eight miles distant, and, +with a fair wind, coasted along within a mile of the shore. The +enormous lava rocks were soon succeeded by the oddly-disposed downs, +among which the engineer had been so singularly discovered, and the +place was covered with sea-birds. + +Towards 4 o’clock, Pencroff, leaving the islet to the left, entered the +channel separating it from the island, and an hour later cast anchor in +the Mercy. + +The colonists had been absent three days. Ayrton was waiting for them +on the shore, and Jup came joyously to welcome them, grinning with +satisfaction. + +The entire exploration of the coast had been made, and nothing +suspicious had been seen. So that if any mysterious being resided on +the island, it must be under cover of the impenetrable woods on +Serpentine Peninsula, which the colonists had not, as yet, +investigated. + +Spilett talked the matter over with the engineer, and it was agreed +that they should call their comrades’ attention to these strange +events, the last one of which was the most inexplicable of all. + +“Are you sure you saw it, Spilett?” asked Smith, for the twentieth +time. “Was it not a partial eruption of the volcano, or some meteor?” + +“No, Cyrus, it wag certainly a fire lit by the hand of man. For that +matter, question Pencroff and Herbert. They saw it also, and they will +confirm my words.” + +So, some evenings later, on the 26th of April, when all the colonists +were gathered together on Prospect Plateau, Smith began:— + +“My friends, I want to call your attention to certain things which are +happening in our island, and to a subject on which I am anxious to have +your advice. These things are almost supernatural—” + +“Supernatural!” exclaimed the sailor, puffing his pipe. “Can anything +be supernatural?” + +“No, Pencroff, but certainly mysterious; unless, indeed, you can +explain what Spilett and I have been unable to account for up to this +time.” + +“Let us hear it, Mr. Smith,” replied the sailor. + +“Very well. Have you understood, then, how, after being thrown into the +sea, I was found a quarter of a mile inland, without my having been +conscious of getting there?” + +“Possibly, having fainted,”—began the sailor. + +“That is not admissible,” answered the engineer; “but, letting that go, +have you understood how Top discovered your retreat five miles from the +place where I lay?” + +“The dog’s instinct,” replied Herbert. + +“A singular instinct,” remarked the reporter, “since, in spite of the +storm that was raging, Top arrived at the Chimneys dry and clean!” + +“Let that pass,” continued the engineer; “have you understood how our +dog was so strangely thrown up from the lake, after his struggle with +the dugong?” + +“No! that I avow,” replied Pencroff, “and the wound in the dugong which +seemed to have been made by some sharp instrument, I don’t understand +that at all.” + +“Let us pass on again,” replied Smith. “Have you understood, my +friends, how that leaden bullet was in the body of the peccary; how +that box was so fortunately thrown ashore, without any trace of a +shipwreck; how that bottle, enclosing the paper, was found so +opportunely; how our canoe, having broken its rope, floated down the +Mercy to us at the very moment when we needed it; how, after the +invasion of the monkeys, the ladder was let down from Granite House; +how, finally, the document, which Ayrton pretends not to have written, +came into our hands?” + +Smith had thus enumerated, without forgetting one, the strange events +that had happened on the island. Herbert, Pencroff, and Neb looked at +each other, not knowing what to say, as this succession of events, thus +grouped together, gave them the greatest surprise. + +“Upon my faith,” said Pencroff, at length, “you are right, Mr. Smith, +and it is hard to explain those things.” + +“Very well, my friends,” continued the engineer, “one thing more is to +be added, not less incomprehensible than the others!” + +“What is that?” demanded Herbert, eagerly. + +“When you returned from Tabor Island, Pencroff, you say that you saw a +light on Lincoln Island?” + +“Certainly I did.” + +“And you are perfectly sure that you saw it?” + +“As sure as that I see you.” + +“And you, Herbert?” + +“Why, Mr. Smith,” cried Herbert, “it shone like a star of the first +magnitude!” + +“But was it not a star?” insisted the engineer. + +“No,” replied Pencroff, “because the sky was covered with heavy clouds, +and, under any circumstances, a star would not have been so low on the +horizon. But Mr. Spilett saw it, and he can confirm what we say.” + +“I would add,” said the reporter, “that it was as bright as an electric +light.” + +“Yes, and it was certainly placed above Granite House!” exclaimed +Herbert. + +“Very well, my friends,” replied Smith, “during all that night neither +Neb nor I lit any fire at all!” + +“You did not!—” cried Pencroff, so overcome with astonishment that he +could not finish the sentence. + +“We did not leave Granite House, and if any fire appeared upon the +coast, it was lit by another hand!” + +The others were stupefied with amazement. Undoubtedly a mystery +existed! Some inexplicable influence, evidently favorable to the +colonists, but exciting their curiosity, made itself felt upon Lincoln +Island. Was there then some being hidden in its innermost retreats? +They wished to know this, cost what it might! + +Smith also recalled to his companions the singular actions of Top and +Jup, about the mouth of the well, and he told them that he had explored +its depths without discovering anything. And the conversation ended by +a determination, on the part of the colonists, to make a thorough +search of the island as soon as the spring opened. + +After this Pencroff became moody. This island, which he had looked upon +as his own, did not belong to him alone, but was shared by another, to +whom, whether he would or not, the sailor felt himself inferior. Neb +and he often discussed these inexplicable circumstances, and readily +concluded that Lincoln Island was subject to some supernatural +influence. + +The bad weather began early, coming in with May; and the winter +occupations were undertaken without delay. The colonists were well +protected from the rigor of the season. They had plenty of felt +clothing, and the moufflons had furnished a quantity of wool for its +further manufacture. + +Ayrton had been comfortably clothed, and when the bad weather began, he +had returned to Granite House; but he remained humble and sad, never +joining in the amusements of his companions. + +The most of this third winter was passed by the colonists indoors at +Granite House. The storms were frequent and terrible, the sea broke +over the islet, and any ship driven upon the coast would have been lost +without any chance of rescue. Twice the Mercy rose to such a height +that the bridge and causeways were in danger of destruction. Often the +gusts of wind, mingled with snow and rain, damaged the fields and the +poultry-yard, and made constant repairs necessary. + +In the midst of this season, some jaguars and quadrumanes came to the +very border of the plateau, and there was danger of the bolder of these +beasts making a descent on the fields and domestic animals of the +colonists. So that a constant watch had to be kept upon these dangerous +visitors, and this, together with the work indoors, kept the little +party in Granite House busy. + +Thus the winter passed, with now and then a grand hunt in the frozen +marshes of Tadorn’s Fen. The damage done to the corral during the +winter was unimportant, and was soon repaired by Ayrton, who, in the +latter part of October, returned there to spend some days at work. + +The winter had passed without any new incident. Top and Jup passed by +the well without giving any sign of anxiety, and it seemed as if the +series of supernatural events had been interrupted. Nevertheless, the +colonists were fixed in their determination to make a thorough +exploration of the most inaccessible parts of the island, when an event +of the gravest moment, which set aside all the plans of Smith and his +companions, happened. + +It was the 28th of October. Spring was rapidly approaching, and the +young leaves were appearing on the trees on the edge of the forest. +Herbert, tempted by the beauty of the day, determined to take a +photograph of Union Bay, as it lay facing Prospect Plateau, between +Mandible and Claw Capes. + +It was 3 o’clock, the horizon was perfectly clear, and the sea, just +stirred by the breeze, scintillated with light. The instrument had been +placed at one of the windows of Granite House, and the lad, having +secured his negative, took the glass into the dark room, where the +chemicals were kept, in order to fix it. Returning to the light, after +this operation, he saw a speck on the plate, just at the horizon, which +he was unable to wash out. + +“It is a defect in the glass,” he thought. + +And then he was seized by a curiosity to examine this speck by means of +a magnifying glass made from one of the lenses of the instrument. + +Hardly had he given one look, when, uttering a cry of amazement, he ran +with the plate and the glass to Smith. The latter examined the speck, +and immediately seizing the spy-glass hurried to the window. + +The engineer, sweeping the horizon with the glass, found the speck, and +spoke one word. “A ship!” + +In truth, a ship was in sight of Lincoln Island. + + + + +PART III +THE SECRET OF THE ISLAND + + + + +CHAPTER XLIII. + + +LOST OR SAVED?—AYRTON RECALLED—IMPORTANT DISCUSSION—IT IS NOT THE +DUNCAN—SUSPICION AND PRECAUTION—APPROACH OF THE SHIP—A CANNON SHOT—THE +BRIG ANCHORS IN SIGHT OF THE ISLAND—NIGHT FALL. + + +Two years and a half ago, the castaways had been thrown on Lincoln +Island; and up to this time they had been cut off from their kind. Once +the reporter had attempted to establish communication with the +civilized world, by a letter tied to the neck of a bird; but this was +an expedient on whose success they could place no reliance. Ayrton, +indeed, under the circumstances which have been related, had joined the +little colony. And now, on the 17th of October, other men had appeared +within sight of the island, on that desert sea! There could be no doubt +of it; there was a ship, but would she sail away into the offing, or +put in shore? The question would soon be decided. Smith and Herbert +hastened to call the others into the great hall of Granite House, and +inform them of what had been observed. Pencroff seized the spy-glass +and swept the horizon till his gaze fell upon the point indicated. + +“No doubt of it, she’s a ship!” said he in a tone of no great pleasure. + +“Is she coming towards us?” asked Spilett. + +“Impossible to say yet,” replied Pencroff, “for only her sails are +visible; her hull is below the horizon. + +“What must we do?” said the boy. + +“We must wait,” said Smith. + +And for a time which seemed interminable, the colonists remained in +silence, moved alternately by fear and hope. They were not in the +situation of castaways upon a desert island, constantly struggling with +niggardly Nature for the barest means of living, and always longing to +got back to their fellow-men. Pencroff and Neb, especially, would have +quitted the island with great regret. They were made, in truth, for the +new life which they were living in a region civilized by their own +exertions! Still, this ship would bring them news of the Continent; +perhaps it was an American vessel; assuredly it carried men of their +own race, and their hearts beat high at the thought! + +From time to time, Pencroff went to the window with the glass. From +thence he examined the ship carefully. She was still twenty miles to +the east, and they had no means of communication with her. Neither flag +nor fire would have been seen; nor would the report of a gun be heard. +Yet the island, with Mount Franklin towering high above it, must be +visible to the lookout men on the ship. But why should the vessel land +there? Was it not mere chance which brought it into that part of the +Pacific, out of the usual track, and when Tabor Island was the only +land indicated on the maps? But here a suggestion came from Herbert. + +“May it not be the Duncan?” cried he. + +The Duncan, as our readers will remember, was Lord Glenarvan’s yacht, +which had abandoned Ayrton on the islet, and was one day to come back +for him. Now the islet was not so far from Lincoln Island but that a +ship steering for one might pass within sight of the other. They were +only 150 miles distant in longitude, and 75 in latitude. + +“We must warn Ayrton,” said Spilett, “and tell him to come at once. +Only he can tell us whether she is the Duncan.” + +This was every one’s opinion, and the reporter, going to the telegraph +apparatus, which communicated with the corral, telegraphed. “Come at +once.” Soon the wire clicked, “I am coming.” Then the colonists turned +again to watch the ship. + +“If it is the Duncan,” said Herbert, “Ayrton will readily recognize +her, since he was aboard her so long.” + +“It will make him feel pretty queer!” said Pencroff. + +“Yes,” replied Smith, “but Ayrton is now worthy to go on board again, +and may Heaven grant it to be indeed the Duncan! These are dangerous +seas for Malay pirates.” + +“We will fight for our island,” said Herbert. + +“Yes, my boy,” answered the engineer, smiling, “but it will be better +not to have to fight for her.” + +“Let me say one thing,” said Spilett. “Our island is unknown to +navigators, and it is not down in the most recent maps. Now, is not +that a good reason for a ship which unexpectedly sighted it to try to +run in shore?” + +“Certainly,” answered Pencroff. + +“Yes,” said the engineer, “it would even be the duty of the captain to +report the discovery of any island not on the maps, and to do this he +must pay it a visit.” + +“Well,” said Pencroff, “suppose this ship casts anchor within a few +cables’ length of our island, what shall we do?” + +This downright question for a while remained unanswered. Then Smith, +after reflection, said in his usual calm tone:— + +“What we must do, my friends, is this. We will open communication with +the ship, take passage on board of her, and leave our island, after +having taken possession of it in the name of the United States of +America. + +Afterwards we will return with a band of permanent colonists, and endow +our Republic with a useful station on the Pacific!” + +“Good!” said Pencroff, “that will be a pretty big present to our +country! We have really colonized it already. We have named every part +of the island; there is a natural port, a supply of fresh water, roads, +a line of telegraph, a wood yard, a foundry; we need only put the +island on the maps!” + +“But suppose some one else should occupy it while we are gone?” said +Spilett. + +“I would sooner stay here alone to guard it,” cried the sailor, “and, +believe me, they would not steal it from me, like a watch from a gaby’s +pocket!” + +For the next hour, it was impossible to say whether or not the vessel +was making for the island. She had drawn nearer, but Pencroff could not +make out her course. Nevertheless, as the wind blew from the northeast, +it seemed probable that she was on the starboard tack. Besides, the +breeze blew straight for the landing, and the sea was so calm that she +would not hesitate to steer for the island, though the soundings were +not laid down in the charts. + +About 4 o’clock, an hour after he had been telegraphed for, Ayrton +arrived. He entered the great hall, saying, “Here I am, gentlemen.” + +Smith shook hands with him, and drawing him to the window, “Ayrton,” +said he, “we sent for you for a weighty reason. A ship is within sight +of the island.” + +For a moment Ayrton looked pale, and his eyes were troubled. Then he +stooped down and gazed around the horizon. + +“Take this spy-glass,” said Spilett, “and look well, Ayrton, for it may +be the Duncan come to take you home.” + +“The Duncan!” murmured Ayrton. “Already!” + +The last word escaped him involuntarily and he buried his face in his +hands. Did not twelve years’ abandonment on a desert island seem to him +a sufficient expiation? + +“No,” said he, “no, it cannot be the Duncan.” + +“Look, Ayrton,” said the engineer, “for we must know beforehand with +whom we have to deal.” + +Ayrton took the glass and levelled it in the direction indicated. For +some minutes he observed the horizon in silence. Then he said:— + +“Yes, it is a ship, but I do not think it is the Duncan. + +“Why not?” asked Spilett. + +“Because the Duncan is a steam-yacht, and I see no trace of smoke about +this vessel.” + +“Perhaps she is only under sail,” observed Pencroff. “The wind is +behind her, and she may want to save her coal, being go far from land.” + +“You may be right, Mr. Pencroff,” said Ayrton. “But, let her come in +shore, and we shall soon know what to make of her.” + +So saying, he sat down in a corner and remained silent, taking no part +in the noisy discussion about the unknown ship. No more work was done. +Spilett and Pencroff were extremely nervous; they walked up and down, +changing place every minute. Herbert’s feeling was one of curiosity. +Neb alone remained calm; his master was his country. The engineer was +absorbed in his thoughts, and was inclined to believe the ship rather +an enemy than a friend. By the help of the glass they could make out +that she was a brig, and not one of those Malay proas, used by the +pirates of the Pacific. Pencroff, after a careful look, affirmed that +the ship was square-rigged, and was running obliquely to the coast, on +the starboard tack, under mainsail, topsail, and top-gallant sail set. + +Just then the ship changed her tack, and drove straight towards the +island. She was a good sailer, and rapidly neared the coast. Ayrton +took the glass to try to ascertain whether or not she was the Duncan. +The Scotch yacht, too, was square-rigged. The question therefore was +whether a smokestack could be seen between the two masts of the +approaching vessel. She was now only ten miles off, and the horizon was +clear. Ayrton looked for a moment, and then dropped his glass. + +“It is not the Duncan,” said he. + +Pencroff sighted the brig again, and made out that she was from 300 to +400 tons burden, and admirably built for sailing. To what nation she +belonged no one could tell. + +“And yet,” added the sailor, “there’s a flag floating at her peak, but +I can’t make out her colors.” + +“In half an hour we will know for certain,” answered the reporter. +“Besides, it is evident that their captain means to run in shore, and +to-day, or to-morrow at latest, we shall make her acquaintance.” + +“No matter, “said Pencroff, “we ought to know with whom we have to +deal, and I shall be glad to make out those colors.” + +And he kept the glass steadily at his eye. The daylight began to fail, +and the sea-wind dropped with it. The brig’s flag wrapped itself around +the tackle, and could hardly be seen. + +“It is not the American flag,” said Pencroff, at intervals, “nor the +English, whose red would be very conspicuous, nor the French, nor +German colors, nor the white flag of Russia, nor the yellow flag of +Spain. It seems to be of one solid color. Let us see; what would most +likely be found in these waters? The Chilian—no, that flag is +tri-colored; the Brazilian is green; the Japanese is black and yellow; +while this—” + +Just then a breeze struck the flag. Ayrton took the glass and raised it +to his eyes. + +“Black!” cried he, in a hollow voice. + +They had suspected the vessel with good reason. The piratical ensign +was fluttering at the peak! + +A dozen ideas rushed across the minds of the colonists; but there was +no doubt as to the meaning of the flag. It was the ensign of the +spoilers of the sea; the ensign which the Duncan would have carried, if +the convicts had succeeded in their criminal design. There was no time +to be lost in discussion. + +“My friends,” said Smith, “this vessel, perhaps, is only taking +observations of the coast of our island, and will send no boats on +shore. We must do all we can to hide our presence here. The mill on +Prospect Plateau is too conspicuous. Let Ayrton and Neb go at once and +take down its fans. “We must cover, the windows of Granite House under +thicker branches. Let the fires be put out, and nothing be left to +betray the existence of man!” + +“And our sloop?” said Herbert. + +“Oh,” said Pencroff, “she is safe in port in Balloon Harbor, and I defy +the rascals to find her there!” + +The engineer’s orders were instantly carried out. Neb and Ayrton went +up to the plateau and concealed every trace of human habitation. +Meanwhile their companions went to Jacamar Woods and brought back a +great quantity of branches and climbing plants, which could not, from a +distance, be distinguished from a natural foliation, and would hide +well enough the windows in the rock. At the same time their arms and +munitions were piled ready at hand, in case of a sudden attack. When +all these precautions had been taken Smith turned to his comrades— + +“My friends,” said he, in a voice full of emotion, “if these wretches +try to get possession of the island we will defend it, will we not?” + +“Yes, Cyrus,” answered the reporter, “and, if need be, we will die in +its defense.” + +And they shook hands upon it. Ayrton alone remained seated in his +corner. Perhaps he who had been a convict himself once, still deemed +himself unworthy! Smith understood what was passing in his mind, and, +stepping towards him, asked + +“And what will you do, Ayrton?” + +“My duty,” replied Ayrton. Then he went to the window, and his eager +gaze sought to penetrate the foliage. It was then half-past 7 o’clock. +The sun had set behind Granite House twenty minutes before, and the +eastern horizon was darkening. The brig was nearing Union Bay. She was +now about eight miles away, and just abreast of Prospect Plateau, for +having tacked off Claw Cape, she had been carried in by the rising +tide. In fact she was already in the bay, for a straight line drawn +from Claw Cape to Mandible Cape would have passed to the other side of +her. + +Was the brig going to run into the bay? And if so, would she anchor +there? Perhaps they would be satisfied with taking an observation. They +could do nothing but wait. Smith was profoundly anxious. Had the +pirates been on the island before, since they hoisted their colors on +approaching it? Might they not have effected a descent once before, and +might not some accomplice be now concealed in the unexplored part of +the island. They were determined to resist to the last extremity. All +depended on the arms and the number of the pirates. + +Night had come. The new moon had set a few moments after the sun. +Profound darkness enveloped land and sea. Thick masses of clouds were +spread over the sky. The wind had entirely died away. Nothing could be +seen of the vessel, for all her lights were hidden—they could tell +nothing of her whereabouts. + +“Who knows?” said Pencroff. “Perhaps the confounded ship will be off by +morning.” + +His speech was answered by a brilliant flash from the offing, and the +sound of a gun. The ship was there, and she had artillery. Six seconds +had elapsed between the flash and the report; the brig, therefore, was +about a mile and a-quarter from the shore. Just then, they heard the +noise of chain-cables grinding across the hawse-holes. The vessel was +coming to anchor in sight of Granite House! + + + + +CHAPTER XLIV. + + +DISCUSSIONS—PRESENTIMENTS—AYRTON’S PROPOSAL—IT IS ACCEPTED—AYRTON AND +PENCROFF ON SAFETY ISLET—NORFOLK CONVICTS—THEIR PROJECTS—HEROIC ATTEMPT +OF AYRTON—HIS RETURN—SIX AGAINST FIFTY. + + +There was no longer room for doubt as to the pirate’s intentions. They +had cast anchor at a short distance from the island, and evidently +intended to land on the morrow. + +Brave as they were, the colonists felt the necessity of prudence. +Perhaps their presence could yet be concealed in case the pirates were +contented with landing on the coast without going up into the interior. +The latter, in fact, might have nothing else in view than a supply of +fresh water, and the bridge, a mile and a half up stream, might well +escape their eye. + +The colonists knew now that the pirate ship carried heavy artillery, +against which they had nothing but a few shot-guns. + +“Still,” said Smith, “our situation is impregnable. The enemy cannot +discover the opening in the weir, so thickly is it covered with reeds +and grass, and consequently cannot penetrate into Granite House.” + +“But our plantations, our poultry-yard, our corral,—in short +everything,” cried Pencroff, stamping his foot. “They can destroy +everything in a few hours.” + +“Everything, Pencroff!” answered Smith, “and we have no means of +preventing them?” + +“Are there many of them?” said the reporter. “That’s the question. If +there are only a dozen, we can stop them, but forty, or fifty, or +more—” + +“Mr. Smith,” said Ayrton, coming up to the engineer, “will you grant me +one request!” + +“What, my friend?” + +“To go to the ship, and ascertain how strongly she is manned.” + +“But, Ayrton,” said the engineer, hesitating, “your life will be in +danger.” + +“And why not, sir?” + +“That is more than your duty.” + +“I must do more than my duty,” replied Ayrton. + +“You mean to go to the ship in the canoe?” asked Spilett. + +“No, sir. I will swim to her. A man can slip in where a boat could not +pass.” + +“Do you know that the brig is a mile and a half from the coast?” said +Herbert.” + +“I am a good swimmer, sir.” + +“I repeat to you that you are risking your life,” resumed the engineer. + +“No matter,” answered Ayrton—”Mr. Smith, I ask it as a favor. It may +raise me in my own estimation.” + +“Go, Ayrton,” said the engineer, who knew how deeply a refusal would +affect the ex-convict, now become an honest man. + +“I will go with you,” said Pencroff. + +“You distrust me!” said Ayrton, quickly. Then, he added, more humbly, +“and it is just.” + +“No, no!” cried Smith, eagerly, “Pencroff has no such feeling. You have +misunderstood him.” + +“Just so,” answered the sailor; “I am proposing to Ayrton to accompany +him only as far as the islet. One of these rascals may possibly have +gone on shore there, and if so, it will take two men to prevent him +from giving the alarm. I will wait for Ayrton on the islet.” + +Everything thus arranged, Ayrton got ready for departure. His project +was bold but not impracticable, thanks to the dark night. Once having +reached the ship, Ayrton, by clinging to the chains of the shrouds, +might ascertain the number and perhaps the designs of the convicts. +They walked down upon the beach. Ayrton stripped himself and rubbed +himself with grease, the better to endure the chill of the water; for +he might have to be in it several hours. Meanwhile Pencroff and Neb had +gone after the canoe, fastened on the bank of the Mercy some hundreds +of paces further up. When they came back, Ayrton was ready to start. + +They threw a wrap over his shoulders, and shook hands with him all +round. Then he got into the boat with Pencroff, and pushed off into the +darkness. It was now half-past 10, and their companions went back to +wait for them at the Chimneys. + +The channel was crossed without difficulty, and the canoe reached the +opposite bank of the islet. They moved cautiously, lest pirates should +have landed there. But the island was deserted. The two walked rapidly +over it, frightening the birds from their nests in the rocks. Having +reached the further side, Ayrton cast himself unhesitatingly into the +sea, and swam noiselessly towards the ship’s lights, which now were +streaming across the water. Pencroff hid himself among the rocks, to +await his companion’s return. + +Meanwhile, Ayrton swam strongly towards the ship, slipping through the +water. His head only appeared above the surface; his eyes were fixed on +the dark hull of the brig, whose lights were reflected in the water. He +thought only of his errand, and nothing of the danger he encountered, +not only from the pirates but from the sharks which infested these +waters. The current was in his favor, and the shore was soon far +behind. + +Half an hour afterwards, Ayrton, without having been perceived by any +one, dived under the ship, and clung with one hand to the bowsprit. +Then he drew breath, and, raising himself by the chains, climbed to the +end of the cut-water. There some sailors’ clothes hung drying. He found +an easy position, and listened. + +They were not asleep on board of the brig. They were talking, singing, +and laughing. These words, intermingled with oaths, came to Ayrton’s +ears;— + +“What a famous find our brig was!” + +“The Speedy is a fast sailor. She deserves her name.” + +“All the Norfolk shipping may do their best to take her.” + +“Hurrah for her commander. Hurrah for Bob Harvey!” + +Our readers will understand what emotion was excited in Ayrton by this +name, when they learn that Bob Harvey was one of his old companions in +Australia, who had followed out his criminal projects by getting +possession, off Norfolk Island, of this brig, charged with arms, +ammunition, utensils, and tools of all kinds, destined for one of the +Sandwich Islands. All his band had gotten on board, and, adding piracy +to their other crimes, the wretches scoured the Pacific, destroying +ships and massacring their crews. They were drinking deep and talking +loudly over their exploits, and Ayrton gathered the following facts:— + +The crew were composed entirely of English convicts, escaped from +Norfolk Island. In 29° 2’ south latitude, and 165° 42’ east longitude, +to the east of Australia, is a little island about six leagues in +circumference, with Mount Pitt rising in the midst, 1,100 feet above +the level of the sea. It is Norfolk Island, the seat of an +establishment where are crowded together the most dangerous of the +transported English convicts. There are 500 of them; they undergo a +rigid discipline, with severe punishment for disobedience, and are +guarded by 150 soldiers and 150 civil servants, under the authority of +a Governor. A worse set of villains cannot be imagined. Sometimes, +though rarely, in spite of the extreme precautions of their jailors, +some of them contrive to escape by seizing a ship, and become the pest +of the Polynesian archipelagos. Thus had done Harvey and his +companions. Thus had Ayrton formerly wished to do. Harvey had seized +the Speedy, which was anchored within sight of Norfolk Island, had +massacred the crew, and for a year had made the brig the terror of the +Pacific. + +The convicts were most of them gathered on the poop, in the after part +of the ship; but a few were lying on deck, talking in loud voices. The +conversation went on amid noise and drunkenness. Ayrton gathered that +chance only had brought them within sight of Lincoln Island. Harvey had +never set foot there; but, as Smith had foreseen, coming upon an island +not in the maps, he had determined to go on shore, and, if the land +suited him, to make it the Speedy’s headquarters. The black flag and +the cannon-shot were a mere freak of the pirates, to imitate a +ship-of-war running up her colors. + +The colonists were in very serious danger. The island, with its easy +water supply, its little harbor, its varied resources so well turned to +account by the colonists, its secret recesses of Granite House—all +these would be just what the convicts wanted. In their hands the island +would become an excellent place of refuge, and the fact of its being +unknown would add to their security. Of course the colonists would +instantly be put to death. They could not even escape to the interior, +for the convicts would make the island their headquarters, and if they +went on an expedition would leave some of the crew behind. It would be +a struggle for life and death with these wretches, every one of whom +must be destroyed before the colonists would be safe. Those were +Ayrton’s thoughts, and he knew that Smith would agree with him. But was +a successful resistance possible? Everything depended on the calibre of +the brig’s guns and the number of her men. These were facts which +Ayrton must know at any cost. + +An hour after he had reached the brig the noise began to subside, and +most of the convicts lay plunged in a drunken sleep. Ayrton determined +to risk himself on the ship’s deck, which the extinguished lanterns +left in profound darkness. He got in the chains by the cut-water, and +by means of the bowsprit climbed to the brig’s forecastle. Creeping +quietly through the sleeping crew, who lay stretched here and there on +the deck, he walked completely around the vessel and ascertained that +the Speedy carried four guns, from eight to ten-pounders. He discovered +also that the guns were breech-loading, of modern make, easily worked, +and capable of doing great damage. + +There were about ten men lying on deck, but it might be that others +were asleep in the hold. Moreover, Ayrton had gathered from the +conversation that there were some fifty on board; rather an overmatch +for the six colonists. But, at least, the latter would not be +surprised; thanks to Ayrton’s devotion, they would know their +adversaries force, and would make their dispositions accordingly. +Nothing remained for Ayrton but to go back to his comrades with the +information he had gathered, and he began walking towards the +forecastle to let himself down into the sea. + +And now to this man, who wished to do more than his duty, there came a +heroic thought, the thought of sacrificing his life for the safety of +his comrades. Smith could not of course resist fifty well-armed +marauders, who would either overcome him or starve him out. Ayrton +pictured to himself his preservers who had made a man of him, and an +honest man, to whom he owed everything, pitilessly murdered, their +labors brought to nothing, their island changed to a den of pirates. He +said to himself that he, Ayrton, was the first cause of these +disasters, since his old companion, Harvey, had only carried out +Ayrton’s projects; and a feeling of horror came over him. Then came the +irresistible desire to blow up the brig, with all on board. He would +perish in the explosion, but he would have done his duty. + +He did not hesitate! It was easy to reach the powder magazine, which is +always in the after part of the ship. Powder must be plenty on board +such a vessel, and a spark would bring destruction. + +Ayrton lowered himself carefully between-decks, where he found many of +the pirates lying about, overcome rather by drunkenness than sleep. A +ship’s lantern, was lighted at the foot of the mainmast, from which +hung a rack full of all sorts of firearms. Ayrton took from the rack a +revolver, and made sure that it was loaded and capped. It was all that +he needed to accomplish the work of destruction. Then he glided back to +the poop, where the powder magazine would be. + +Between decks it was dark, and he could hardly step without knocking +against some half-asleep convict, and meeting with an oath or a blow. +More than once he had to stop short, but at length he reached the +partition separating the after-compartment, and found the door of the +magazine. This he had to force, and it was a difficult matter to +accomplish without noise, as he had to break a padlock. But at last, +under his vigorous hand, the padlock fell apart and the door opened. + +Just then a hand was laid upon his shoulder. + +“What are you doing there?” said a harsh voice, and a tall form rose +from the shadow and turned the light of a lantern fall on Ayrton’s +face. + +Ayrton turned around sharply. By a quick flash from the lantern, he saw +his old accomplice, Harvey; but the latter, believing Ayrton, as he +did, to be dead, failed to recognize him. + +“What are you doing there?” said Harvey, seizing Ayrton by the strap of +his trousers. Ayrton made no answer but a vigorous push, and sprang +forward to the magazine. One shot into those tons of powder, and all +would have been over! + +“Help, lads!” cried Harvey. + +Two or three pirates, roused by his voice, threw themselves upon +Ayrton, and strove to drag him to the ground. He rid himself of them +with two shots from his revolver; but received in so doing, a wound +from a knife in the fleshy part of the shoulder. He saw in a moment +that his project was no longer feasible. Harvey had shut the door of +the magazine, and a dozen pirates were half-awake. He most save himself +for the sake of his comrades. + +Four barrels were left. He discharged two of them right and left, one +at Harvey, though without effect; and then, profiting by his enemies’ +momentary recoil, rushed towards the ladder which led to the deck of +the brig. As he passed the lantern he knocked it down with a blow from +the butt-end of his pistol, and left everything in darkness. + +Two or three pirates, awakened by the noise, were coming down the +ladder at that moment. A fifth shot stretched one at the foot of the +steps, and the others got out of the way, not understanding what was +going on. In two bounds Ayrton was on the brig’s deck, and three +seconds afterwards, after discharging his last shot at a pirate who +tried to seize him by the neck, he made his way down the netting and +leaped into the sea. He had not swam six fathoms before the bullets +began to whistle around him like hail. + +What were the feelings of Pencroff, hidden behind a rock on the islet, +and of his comrades in the Chimneys, when they heard these shots from +the brig! They rushed out upon the shore, and, with their guns at their +shoulders, stood ready to meet any attack. For them no doubt remained. +They believed that Ayrton had been killed, and the pirates were about +to make a descent on the island. Thus half an hour passed away. They +suffered torments of anxiety. They could not go to the assistance of +Ayrton or Pencroff, for the boat had been taken, and the high tide +forbade them crossing the channel. + +Finally, at half-past 12, a boat with two men came along shore. It was +Ayrton, with a slight wound in his shoulder, and Pencroff. Their +friends received them with open arms. + +Then all took refuge at the Chimneys. There Ayrton told them all that +happened, including his plan to blow up the brig. + +Every one grasped the man’s hand, but the situation was desperate. The +pirates knew that Lincoln Island was inhabited, and would come down +upon it in force. They would respect nothing. If the colonists fell +into their hands they had no mercy to hope for! + +“We can die like men,” said the reporter. + +“Let us go in and keep watch,” said the engineer. + +“Do you think there is any chance, Mr. Smith?” said the sailor. + +“Yes, Pencroff.” + +“How! Six against fifty!” + +“Yes, six—and one other—” + +“Who?” asked Pencroff. + +Smith did not answer, but he looked upwards + + + + +CHAPTER XLV. + + +THE MIST RISES—THE ENGINEER’S DISPOSITION OF FORCES—THREE POSTS—AYRTON +AND PENCROFF—THE FIRST ATTACK —TWO OTHER BOAT LOADS—ON THE ISLET—SIX +CONVICTS ON SHORE—THE BRIG WEIGHS ANCHOR—THE SPEEDY’S +PROJECTILES—DESPERATE SITUATION—UNEXPECTED DENOUEMENT. + + +The night passed without incident. The colonists were still at the +Chimneys, keeping a constant lookout. The pirates made no attempt at +landing. Since the last shots fired at Ayrton, not a sound betrayed the +presence of the brig in the bay. They might have supposed she had +weighed anchor and gone off in the night. + +But it was not so, and when daylight began to appear the colonists +could see her dark hulk dim through the morning mists. + +“Listen, my friends,” then said the engineer. “These are the +dispositions it seems to me best to make before the mist dispels, which +conceals us from view. We must make these convicts believe that the +inhabitants of the island are numerous and well able to resist them. +Let us divide ourselves into three groups, one posted at the Chimneys, +one at the mouth of the Mercy, and the third upon the islet, to hinder, +or at least, retard, every attempt to land. We have two carbines and +four guns, so that each of us will be armed; and as we have plenty of +powder and ball, we will not spare our shots. We have nothing to fear +from the guns, nor even from the cannon of the brig. What can they +effect against these rocks? And as we shall not shoot from the windows +of Granite House, the pirates will never think of turning their guns +upon it. What we have to fear is a hand-to-hand fight with an enemy +greatly superior in numbers. We must try to prevent their landing +without showing ourselves. So don’t spare your ammunition. Shoot fast, +and shoot straight. Each of us has eight or ten enemies to kill, and +must kill them.” + +Smith had precisely defined the situation, in a voice as quiet as if he +were directing some ordinary work. His companions acted upon his +proposal without a word. Each hastened to take his place before the +mist should be entirely dissipated. + +Neb and Pencroff went back to Granite House and brought back thence +abundance of ammunition. Spilett and Ayrton, both excellent shots, were +armed with the two carbines, which would carry nearly a mile. The four +shot-guns were divided between Smith, Neb, Pencroff, and Herbert. The +posts were thus filled:—Smith and Herbert remained in ambush at the +Chimneys, commanding a large radius of the shore in front of Granite +House. Spilett and Neb hid themselves among the rocks at the mouth of +the Mercy (the bridge and causeways over which had been removed), so as +to oppose the passage of any boat or even any landing on the opposite +side. As to Ayrton and Pencroff, they pushed the canoe into the water, +and got ready to push across the channel, to occupy two different +points on the islet, so that the firing, coming from four different +points, might convince the pirates that the island was both well manned +and vigorously defended. + +In case a landing should be effected in spite of their opposition, or +should they be in danger of being cut off by a boat from the brig, +Pencroff and Ayrton could return with the canoe to the shore of the +island, and hasten to the threatened point. + +Before going to their posts, the colonists shook hands all round. +Pencroff concealed his emotion as he embraced “his boy” Herbert, and +they parted. A few minutes afterwards each was at his post. None of +them could have been seen, for the brig itself was barely visible +through the mist. It was half-past 6 in the morning. Soon the mist rose +gradually; the ocean was covered with ripples, and, a breeze rising, +the sky was soon clear. The Speedy appeared, anchored by two cables, +her head to the north, and her larboard quarter to the island. As Smith +had calculated, she was not more than a mile and a quarter from the +shore. The ominous black flag floated at the peak. The engineer could +see with his glass that the four guns of the ship had been trained on +the island, ready to be fired at the first signal; but so far there was +no sound. Full thirty pirates could be seen coming and going on the +deck. Some were on the poop; two on the transoms of the main topmast +were examining the island with spy-glasses. In fact, Harvey and his +crew must have been exceedingly puzzled by the adventure of the night, +and especially by Ayrton’s attempt upon the powder magazine. But they +could not doubt that the island before them was inhabited by a colony +ready to defend it. Yet no one could be seen either on the shore or the +high ground. + +For an hour and a half there was no sign of attack from the brig. +Evidently Harvey was hesitating. But about 8 o’clock there was a +movement on board. They were hauling at the tackle, and a boat was +being let down into the sea. Seven men jumped into it, their guns in +their hands. One was at the tiller, four at the oars, and the two +others squatting in the bow, ready to shoot, examined the island. No +doubt their intention was to make a reconnoissance, and not to land, or +they would have come in greater number. + +The pirates, perched on the rigging of the topmast, had evidently +perceived that an islet concealed the shore, lying about half a mile +away. The boat was apparently not running for the channel, but was +making for the islet, as the most prudent beginning of the +reconnoissance. Pencroff and Ayrton, lying hidden among the rocks, saw +it coming down upon them, and even waiting for it to get within good +reach. + +It came on with extreme caution. The oars fell at considerable +intervals. One of the convicts seated in front had a sounding-line in +his hand, with which he was feeling for the increased depth of water +caused by the current of the Mercy. This indicated Harvey’s intention +of bringing his brig as near shore as possible. About thirty pirates +were scattered among the shrouds watching the boat and noting certain +sea-marks which would enable them to land without danger. The boat was +but two cables’ length from the islet when it stopped. The helmsman, +standing erect, was trying to find the best place to land. In a moment +burst forth a double flash and report. The helmsman and the man with +the line fell over into the boat. Ayrton and Pencroff had done their +work. Almost at once came a puff of smoke from the brig, and a cannon +ball struck the rock, at whose foot the two lay sheltered, making it +fly into shivers; but the marksmen remained unhurt. + +With horrible imprecations the boat resumed its course. The helmsman +was replaced by one of his comrades, and the crew bent to their oars, +eager to get beyond reach of bullets. Instead of turning back, they +pulled for the southern extremity of the islet, evidently with the +intention of coming up on the other side and putting Pencroff and +Ayrton between two fires. A quarter of an hour passed thus without a +sound. The defenders of the islet, though they understood the object of +the flanking movement, did not leave their post. They feared the cannon +of the Speedy, and counted upon their comrades in ambush. + +Twenty minutes after the first shots, the boat was less than two +cables’ length off the Mercy. The tide was running up stream with its +customary swiftness, due to the narrowness of the river, and the +convicts had to row hard to keep themselves in the middle of the +channel. But as they were passing within easy range of the river’s +mouth, two reports were heard, and two of the crew fell back into the +boat. Neb and Spilett had not missed their shot. The brig opened fire +upon their hiding place, which was indicated by the puff of smoke; but +with no result beyond shivering a few rocks. + +The boat now contained only three men fit for action. Getting into the +current, it shot up the channel like an arrow, passed Smith and +Herbert, who feared to waste a shot upon it, and turned the northern +point of the islet, whence the two remaining oarsmen pulled across to +the brig. + +So far the colonists could not complain. Their adversaries had lost the +first point in the game. Four pirates had been grievously wounded, +perhaps killed, while they were without a scratch. Moreover, from the +skilful disposition of their little force, it had no doubt given the +impression of a much greater number. + +A half hour elapsed before the boat, which was rowing against the +current, could reach the Speedy. The wounded were lifted on deck, amid +howls of rage. A dozen furious convicts manned the boat; another was +lowered into the sea, and eight more jumped into it; and while the +former rowed straight for the islet, the latter steered around its +southern point, heading for the Mercy. + +Pencroff and Ayrton were in a perilous situation. They waited till the +first boat was within easy range, sent two balls into her, to the great +discomfort of the crew; then they took to their heels, running the +gauntlet of a dozen shots, reached their canoe on the other side of the +islet, crossed the channel just as the second boat load of pirates +rounded the southern point, and hastened to hide themselves at the +Chimneys. They had hardly rejoined Smith and Herbert, when the islet +was surrounded and thoroughly searched by the pirates. + +Almost at the same moment shots were heard from the mouth of the Mercy. +As the second boat approached them, Spilett and Neb disposed of two of +the crew; and the boat itself was irresistibly hurried upon the rocks +at the mouth of the river. The six survivors, holding their guns above +their heads to keep them from contact with the water, succeeded in +getting on shore on the right bank of the river; and, finding +themselves exposed to the fire of a hidden enemy, made off towards +Jetsam Point, and were soon out of range. + +On the islet, therefore, there were twelve convicts, of whom some no +doubt were wounded, but who had a boat at their service. Six more had +landed on the island itself, but Granite House was safe from them, for +they could rot get across the river, the bridges over which were +raised. + +“What do you think of the situation, Mr. Smith?” said Pencroff. + +“I think,” said the engineer, “that unless these rascals are very +stupid, the battle will soon take a new form.” + +“They will never get across the channel,” said Pencroff. “Ayrton and +Mr. Spilett have guns that will carry a mile!” + +“No doubt,” said Herbert, “but of what avail are two carbines against +the brig’s cannon?” + +“The brig is not in the channel yet,” replied Pencroff. + +“And suppose she comes there?” said Smith. + +“She will risk foundering and utter destruction.” + +“Still it is possible,” said Ayrton. “The convicts may profit by the +high tide to run into the channel, taking the risk of running aground; +and then, under their heavy guns, our position will become untenable.” + +“By Jove!” said the sailor, “the beggars are weighing anchor.” + +It was but too true. The Speedy began to heave her anchor, and showed +her intention of approaching the islet. + +Meanwhile, the pirates on the islet had collected on the brink of the +channel. They knew that the colonists were out of reach of their +shot-guns, but forgot that their enemies, might carry weapons of longer +range. Suddenly, the carbines of Ayrton and Spilett rang out together, +carrying news to the convicts, which must have been very disagreeable, +for two of them fell flat on their faces. There was a general scamper. +The other ten, leaving their wounded or dying comrades, rushed to the +other side of the islet, sprang into the boat which had brought them +over, and rowed rapidly off. + +“Eight off!” cried Pencroff, exultingly. + +But a more serious danger was at hand. The Speedy had raised her +anchor, and was steadily nearing the shore. From their two posts at the +Mercy and the Chimneys, the colonists watched her movements without +stirring a finger, but not without lively apprehension. Their situation +would be most critical, exposed as they would be at short range to the +brig’s cannon, without power to reply by an effective fire. How then +could they prevent the pirates from landing? + +Smith felt that in a few minutes he must make up his mind what to do. +Should they shut themselves up in Granite House, and stand a siege +there? But their enemies would thus become masters of the island, and +starve them out at leisure. One chance was still left; perhaps Harvey +would not risk his ship in the channel. If he kept outside his shots +would be fired from a distance of half a mile, and would do little +execution. + +“Bob Harvey is too good a sailor,” repeated Pencroff, “to risk his ship +in the channel. He knows that he would certainly lose her if the sea +turned rough! And what would become of him without his ship?” + +But the brig came nearer and nearer, and was evidently heading for the +lower extremity of the islet. The breeze was faint, the current slack, +and Harvey could manœuvre in safety. The route followed by the boats +had enabled him to ascertain where the mouth of the river was, and he +was making for it with the greatest audacity. He intended to bring his +broadside to bear on the Chimneys, and to riddle them with shell and +cannon balls. The Speedy soon reached the extremity of the islet, +easily turning it, and, with a favoring wind, was soon off the Mercy. + +“The villains are here!” cried Pencroff. As he spoke, Neb and Spilett +rejoined their comrades. They could do nothing against the ship, and it +was better that the colonists should be together when the decisive +action was about to take place. Neither of the two were injured, though +a shower of balls had been poured upon them as they ran from rock to +rock. + +“You are not wounded, lad?” said the engineer. + +“No, only a few contusions from the ricochet of a ball. But that cursed +brig is in the channel!” + +“We must take refuge in Granite House,” said Smith, “while we have +time, and before the convicts can see us. Once inside, we can act as +the occasion demands.” + +“Let us start at once, then,” said the reporter. + +There was not a moment to lose. Two or three detonations, and the thud +of balls on the rocks apprised them that the Speedy was near at hand. + +To jump into the elevator, to hoist themselves to the door of Granite +House, where Top and Jup had been shut up since the day before, and to +rush into the great hall, was the work of a moment. Through the leaves +they saw the Speedy, environed with smoke, moving up the channel. They +had not left a moment too soon, for balls were crashing everywhere +through the hiding places they had quitted. The rocks were splintered +to pieces. + +Still they hoped that Granite House would escape notice behind its +leafy covering, when suddenly a ball passed through the doorway and +penetrated into the corridor. + +“The devil! we are discovered!” cried Pencroff. + +But perhaps the colonists had not been seen, and Harvey had only +suspected that something lay behind the leafy screen of the rock. And +soon another ball, tearing apart the foliage, exposed the opening in +the granite. + +The situation of the colonists was now desperate. They could make no +answer to the fire, under which the rock was crashing around them. +Nothing remained but to take refuge in the upper corridor of Granite +House, giving up their abode to devastation, when a hollow sound was +heard, followed by dreadful shrieks! + +Smith and his comrades rushed to the window. + +The brig, lifted on the summit of a sort of waterspout, had just split +in half; and in less than ten seconds she went to the bottom with her +wicked crew!! + + + + +CHAPTER XLVI. + + +THE COLONISTS ON THE BEACH—AYRTON AND PENCROFF AS SALVORS—TALK AT +BREAKFAST—PENCROFF’S REASONING—EXPLORATION OF THE BRIG’S HULL IN +DETAIL—THE MAGAZINE UNINJURED—NEW RICHES—A DISCOVERY—A PIECE OF A +BROKEN CYLINDER. + + +“They have blown up!” cried Herbert. + +“Yes, blown up as if Ayrton had fired the magazine,” answered Pencroff, +jumping into the elevator with Neb and the boy, + +“But what has happened?” said Spilett, still stupefied at the +unexpected issue. + +“Ah, this time we shall find out—” said the engineer, + +“What shall we find out?” + +“All in time; the chief thing is that the pirates have been disposed +of.” + +And they rejoined the rest of the party on beach. Not a sign of the +brig could be seen, not even the masts. After having been upheaved by +the water-spout, it had fallen back upon its side, and had sunk in this +position, doubtless owing to some enormous leak.’ As the channel here +was only twenty feet deep, the masts of the brig would certainly +reappear at low tide. + +Some waifs were floating on the surface of the sea. There was a whole +float, made up of masts and spare yards, chicken coops with the fowls +still living, casks and barrels, which little by little rose to the +surface, having escaped by the traps; but no debris was adrift, no +flooring of the deck, no plankage of the hull; and the sudden sinking +of the Speedy seemed still more inexplicable. + +However, the two masts, which had been broken some feet above the +“partner,” after having snapped their stays and shrouds, soon rose to +the surface of the channel, with their sails attached, some of them +furled and some unfurled. But they could not wait for low tide to carry +away all their riches, and Ayrton and Pencroff jumped into the canoe, +for the purpose of lashing these waifs either to the shore of the +island or of the islet. But just as they were about to start, they were +stopped by a word from Spilett. + +“And the six convicts who landed on the right bank of the Mercy,” said +he. + +In fact, it was as well to remember the six men who had landed at +Jetsam Point, when their boat was wrecked off the rocks. They looked in +that direction, but the fugitives were not to be seen. Very likely, +when they saw the brig go down, they had taken flight into the interior +of the island. + +“We will see after them later,” said Smith. “They may still be +dangerous, for they are armed; but with six to six, we have an even +chance. Now we have more urgent work on hand.” + +Ayrton and Pencroff jumped into the canoe and pulled vigorously out to +the wreck. The sea was quiet now and very high, for the moon was only +two days old. It would be a full hour before the hull of the brig would +appear above the water of the channel. + +Ayrton and Pencroff had time enough to lash together the masts and +spars by means of ropes, whose other end was carried along the shore to +Granite House, where the united efforts of the colonists succeeded in +hauling them in. Then the canoe picked up the chicken coops, barrels, +and casks which were floating in the water, and brought them to the +Chimneys. + +A few dead bodies were also floating on the surface. Among them Ayrton +recognized that of Bob Harvey, and pointed it out to his companion, +saying with emotion:— + +“That’s what I was, Pencroff.” + +“But what you are no longer, my worthy fellow,” replied the sailor. + +It was a curious thing that so few bodies could be seen floating on the +surface. They could count only five or six, which the current was +already carrying out to sea. Very likely the convicts, taken by +surprise, had not had time to escape, and the ship having sunk on its +side, the greater part of the crew were left entangled under the +nettings. So the ebb which was carrying the bodies of these wretches +out to sea would spare the colonists the unpleasant task of burying +them on the island. + +For two hours Smith and his companions were wholly occupied with +hauling the spars up on the sands, and in unfurling the sails, which +were entirely uninjured, and spreading them out to dry. The work was so +absorbing that they talked but little; but they had time for thought. +What a fortune was the possession of the brig, or rather of the brig’s +contents! A ship is a miniature world, and the colonists could add to +their stock a host of useful articles. It was a repetition, on a large +scale, of the chest found on Jetsam Point. + +“Moreover,” thought Pencroff, “why should it be impossible to get this +brig afloat? If she has only one leak, a leak can be stopped up, and a +ship of 300 or 400 tons is a real ship compared to our Good Luck! We +would go where we pleased in her. We must look into this matter. It is +well worth the trouble.” + +In fact, if the brig could be repaired, their chance of getting home +again would be very much greater. But in order to decide this important +question, they must wait until the tide was at its lowest, so that the +brig’s hull could be examined in every part. + +After their prizes had been secured upon the beach, Smith and his +companions, who were nearly famished, allowed themselves a few minutes +for breakfast. Fortunately the kitchen was not far off, and Neb could +cook them a good breakfast in a jiffy. They took this meal at the +Chimneys, and one can well suppose that they talked of nothing during +the repast but the miraculous deliverance of the colony. + +“Miraculous is the word,” repeated Pencroff, “for we must own that +these blackguards were blown up just in time! Granite House was +becoming rather uncomfortable.” + +“Can you imagine, Pencroff, how it happened that the brig blew up?” +asked the reporter. + +“Certainly, Mr. Spilett; nothing is more simple,” replied Pencroff. “A +pirate is not under the same discipline as a ship-of-war. Convicts +don’t make sailors. The brig’s magazine must have been open, since she +cannonaded us incessantly, and one awkward fellow might have blown up +the ship.” + +“Mr. Smith,” said Herbert, “what astonishes me is that this explosion +did not produce more effect. The detonation was not loud, and the ship +is very little broken up. She seems rather to have sunk than to have +blown up.” + +“That astonishes you, does it, my boy?” asked the engineer. + +“Yes, sir.” + +“And it astonishes me too, Herbert,” replied the engineer; “but when we +examine the hull of the brig, we shall find some explanation of this +mystery.” + +“Why, Mr. Smith,” said Pencroff, “you don’t mean to say that the Speedy +has just sunk like a ship which strikes upon a rock?” + +“Why not,” asked Neb, “if there are rocks in the channel?” + +“Good, Neb,” said Pencroff. “You did not look at the right minute. An +instant before she went down I saw the brig rise on an enormous wave, +and fall back over to larboard. Now, if she had struck a rock, she’d +have gone straight to the bottom like an honest ship.” + +“And that’s just what she is not,” said Neb. + +“Well, we’ll soon find out, Pencroff,” said the engineer. + +“We will find out,” added the sailor, “but I’ll bet my head there are +no rocks in the channel. But do you really think, Mr. Smith, that there +is anything wonderful in this event?” + +Smith did not answer. + +“At all events,” said Spilett, “whether shock or explosion, you must +own, Pencroff, that it came in good time.” + +“Yes! yes!” replied the sailor, “but that is not the question. I ask +Mr. Smith if he sees anything supernatural in this affair?” + +“I give no opinion, Pencroff,” said the engineer; a reply which was not +satisfactory to Pencroff, who believed in the explosion theory, and was +reluctant to give it up. He refused to believe that in the channel +which he had crossed so often at low tide, and whose bottom was covered +with sand as fine as that of the beach, there existed an unknown reef. + +At about half-past 1, the colonists got into the canoe, and pulled out +to the stranded brig. It was a pity that her two boats had not been +saved; but one, they knew, had gone to pieces at the mouth of the +Mercy, and was absolutely useless, and the other had gone down with the +brig, and had never reappeared. + +Just then the hull of the Speedy began to show itself above the water. +The brig had turned almost upside down, for after having broken its +masts under the weight of its ballast, displaced by the fall, it lay +with its keel in the air. The colonists rowed all around the hull, and +as the tide fell, they perceived, if not the cause of the catastrophe, +at least the effect produced. In the fore part of the brig, on both +sides of the hull, seven or eight feet before the beginning of the +stem, the sides were fearfully shattered for at least twenty feet. +There yawned two large leaks which it would have been impossible to +stop. Not only had the copper sheathing and the planking disappeared, +no doubt ground to powder, but there was not a trace of the timbers, +the iron bolts, and the treenails which fastened them. The false-keel +had been torn off with surprising violence, and the keel itself, torn +from the carlines in several places, was broken its whole length. + +“The deuce!” cried Pencroff, “here’s a ship which will be hard to set +afloat.” + +“Hard! It will be impossible,” said Ayrton. + +“At all events,” said Spilett, “the explosion, if there has been an +explosion, has produced the most remarkable effects. It has smashed the +lower part of the hull, instead of blowing up the deck and the +topsides. These great leaks seem rather to have been made by striking a +reef than by the explosion of a magazine.” + +“There’s not a reef in the channel,” answered the sailor. “I will admit +anything but striking a reef.” + +“Let us try to get into the hold,” said the engineer. “Perhaps that +will help us to discover the cause of the disaster.” + +This was the best course to take, and would moreover enable them to +make an inventory of the treasures contained in the brig, and to get +them ready for transportation to the island. Access to the hold was now +easy; the tide continued to fall, and the lower deck, which, as the +brig lay, was now uppermost, could easily be reached. The ballast, +composed of heavy pigs of cast iron, had staved it in several places. +They heard the roaring of the sea, as it rushed through the fissures of +the hull. + +Smith and his companions, axe in hand, walked along the shattered deck. +All kinds of chests encumbered it, and as they had not been long under +water, perhaps their contents had not been damaged. + +They set to work at once to put this cargo in safety. The tide would +not return for some hours, and these hours were utilized to the utmost +at the opening into the hull. Ayrton and Pencroff had seized upon +tackle which served to hoist the barrels and chests. The canoe received +them, and took them ashore at once. They took everything +indiscriminately, and left the sorting of their prizes to the future. + +In any case, the colonists, to their extreme satisfaction, had made +sure that the brig possessed a varied cargo, an assortment of all kinds +of articles, utensils, manufactured products, and tools, such as ships +are loaded with for the coasting trade of Polynesia. They would +probably find there a little of everything, which was precisely what +they needed on Lincoln Island. + +Nevertheless, Smith noticed, in silent astonishment, that not only the +hull of the brig had suffered frightfully from whatever shock it was +which caused the catastrophe, but the machinery was destroyed, +especially in the fore part. Partitions and stanchions were torn down +as if some enormous shell had burst inside of the brig. The colonists, +by piling on one side the boxes which littered their path, could easily +go from stem to stern. They were not heavy bales which would have been +difficult to handle, but mere packages thrown about in utter confusion. + +The colonists soon reached that part of the stern where the poop +formerly stood. It was here Ayrton told them they must search for the +powder magazine. Smith, believing that this had not exploded, thought +they might save some barrels, and that the powder, which is usually in +metal cases, had not been damaged by the water. In fact, this was just +what had happened. They found, among a quantity of projectiles, at +least twenty barrels, which were lined with copper, and which they +pulled out with great care. Pencroff was now convinced by his own eyes +that the destruction of the Speedy could not have been caused by an +explosion. The part of the hull in which the powder magazine was +situated was precisely the part which had suffered the least. + +“It may be so,” replied the obstinate sailor, “but as to a rock, there +is not one in the channel.” Then he added:—”I know nothing about it, +even Mr. Smith does not know. No one knows, or ever will.” + +Several hours passed in these researches, and the tide was beginning to +rise. They had to stop their work of salvage, but there was no fear +that the wreck would be washed out to sea, for it was as solidly +imbedded as if it had been anchored to the bottom. They could wait with +impunity for the turn of the tide to commence operations. As to the +ship itself, it was of no use; but they must hasten to save the debris +of the hull, which would not take long to disappear in the shifting +sands of the channel. + +It was 5 o’clock in the afternoon. The day had been a hard one, and +they sat down to their dinner with great appetite; but afterwards, +notwithstanding their fatigue, they could not resist the desire of +examining some of the chests. Most of them contained ready-made +clothes, which, as may be imagined, were very welcome. There was enough +to clothe a whole colony, linen of every description, boots of all +sizes. + +“Now we are too rich,” cried Pencroff. “What shall we do with all these +things?” + +Every moment the sailor uttered exclamations of joy, as he came upon +barrels of molasses and rum, hogsheads of tobacco, muskets and +side-arms, bales of cotton, agricultural implements, carpenters’ and +smiths’ tools, and packages of seeds of every kind, uninjured by their +short sojourn in the water. Two years before, how these things would +have come in season! But even now that the industrious colonists were +so well supplied, these riches would be put to use. + +There was plenty of storage room in Granite House, but time failed them +now to put everything in safety. They must not forget that six +survivors of the Speedy’s crew were now on the island, scoundrels of +the deepest dye, against whom they must be on their guard. + +Although the bridge over the Mercy and the culverts had been raised, +the convicts would make little account of a river or a brook; and, +urged by despair, these rascals would be formidable. Later, the +colonists could decide what course to take with regard to them; in the +meantime, the chests and packages piled up near the Chimneys must be +watched over, and to this they devoted themselves during the night. + +The night passed, however, without any attack from the convicts. Master +Jup and Top, of the Granite House guard, would have been quick to give +notice. + +The three days which followed, the 19th, 20th, and 21st of October, +were employed in carrying on shore everything of value either in the +cargo or in the rigging. At low tide they cleaned out the hold, and at +high tide, stowed away their prizes. A great part of the copper +sheathing could be wrenched from the hull, which every day sank deeper; +but before the sands had swallowed up the heavy articles which had sunk +to the bottom, Ayrton and Pencroff dived and brought up the chains and +anchors of the brig, the iron ballast, and as many as four cannon, +which could be eased along upon empty barrels and brought to land; so +that the arsenal of the colony gained as much from the wreck as the +kitchens and store-rooms. Pencroff, always enthusiastic in his +projects, talked already about constructing a battery which should +command the channel and the mouth of the river. With four cannon, he +would guarantee to prevent any fleet, however powerful, from coming +within gunshot of the island. + +Meanwhile, after nothing of the brig had been left but a useless shell, +the bad weather came to finish its destruction. Smith had intended to +blow it up, so as to collect the debris on shore, but a strong +northeast wind and a high sea saved his powder for him. On the night of +the 23d, the hull was thoroughly broken up, and part of the wreck +stranded on the beach. As to the ship’s papers, it is needless to say, +although they carefully rummaged the closet in the poop, Smith found no +trace of them. The pirates had evidently destroyed all that concerned +either the captain or the owner of the Speedy, and as the name of its +port was not painted on the stern, there was nothing to betray its +nationality. However, from the shape of the bow, Ayrton and Pencroff +believed the brig to be of English construction. + +A week after the ship went down, not a trace of her was to be seen even +at low tide. The wreck had gone to pieces, and Granite House had been +enriched with almost all its contents. But the mystery of its strange +destruction would never have been cleared up, if Neb, rambling along +the beach, had not come upon a piece of a thick iron cylinder, which +bore traces of an explosion. It was twisted and torn at the edge, as if +it had been submitted to the action of an explosive substance. Neb took +it to his master, who was busy with his companions in the workshop at +the Chimneys. Smith examined it carefully, and then turned to Pencroff. + +“Do you still maintain, my friend,” said he, “that the Speedy did not +perish by a collision?” + +“Yes, Mr. Smith,” replied the sailor, “you know as well as I that there +are no rocks in the channel.” + +“But suppose it struck against this piece of iron?” said the engineer, +showing the broken cylinder. + +“What, that pipe stem!” said Pencroff, incredulously. + +“Do you remember, my friends,” continued Smith, “that before foundering +the brig was lifted up by a sort of waterspout?” + +“Yes, Mr. Smith,” said Herbert. + +“Well, this was the cause of the waterspout,” said Smith, holding up +the broken tube. + +“That?” answered Pencroff. + +“Yes; this cylinder is all that is left of a torpedo!” + +“A torpedo!” cried they all. + +“And who put a torpedo there?” asked Pencroff, unwilling to give up. + +“That I cannot tell you,” said Smith, “but there it was, and you +witnessed its tremendous effects!” + + + + +CHAPTER XLVII + + +THE ENGINEER’S THEORY—PENCROFF’S MAGNIFICENT SUPPOSITIONS—A BATTERY IN +THE AIR—FOUR PROJECTILES—THE SURVIVING CONVICTS—AYRTON +HESITATES—SMITH’S GENEROSITY AND PENCROFF’S DISSATISFACTION. + + +Thus, then, everything was explained by the submarine action of this +torpedo. Smith had had some experience during the civil war of these +terrible engines of destruction, and was not likely to be mistaken. +This cylinder, charged with nitro-glycerine, had been the cause of the +column of water rising in the air, of the sinking of the brig, and of +the shattered condition of her hull. Everything was accounted for, +except the presence of this torpedo in the waters of the channel! + +“My friends,” resumed Smith, “we can no longer doubt the existence of +some mysterious being, perhaps a castaway like ourselves, inhabiting +our island. I say this that Ayrton may be informed of all the strange +events which have happened for two years. Who our unknown benefactor +may be, I cannot say, nor why he should hide himself after rendering us +so many services; but his services are not the less real, and such as +only a man could render who wielded some prodigious power. Ayrton is +his debtor as well; as he saved me from drowning after the fall of the +balloon, so he wrote the document, set the bottle afloat in the +channel, and gave us information of our comrade’s condition. He +stranded on Jetsam Point that chest, full of all that we needed; he +lighted that fire on the heights of the island which showed you where +to land; he fired that ball which we found in the body of the peccary; +he immersed in the channel that torpedo which destroyed the brig; in +short, he has done all those inexplicable things of which we could find +no explanation. Whatever he is, then, whether a castaway or an exile, +we should be ungrateful not to feel how much we owe him. Some day, I +hope, we shall discharge our debt.” + +“We may add,” replied Spilett, “that this unknown friend has a way of +doing things which seems supernatural. If he did all these wonderful +things, he possesses a power which makes him master of the elements.” + +“Yes,” said Smith, “there is a mystery here, but if we discover the man +we shall discover the mystery also. The question is this:—Shall we +respect the incognito of this generous being, or should we try to find +him? What do you think?” + +“Master,” said Neb, “I have an idea that we may hunt for him as long as +we please, but that we shall only find him when he chooses to make +himself known.” + +“There’s something in that, Neb,” said Pencroff. + +“I agree with you, Neb,” said Spilett; “but that is no reason for not +making the attempt. Whether we find this mysterious being or not, we +shall have fulfilled our duty towards him.” + +“And what is your opinion, my boy?” said the engineer, turning to +Herbert. + +“Ah,” cried Herbert, his eye brightening; “I want to thank him, the man +who saved you first and now has saved us all.” + +“It wouldn’t be unpleasant for any of us, my boy,” returned Pencroff. +“I am not curious, but I would give one of my eyes to see him face to +face.” + +“And you, Ayrton?” asked the engineer. + +“Mr. Smith,” replied Ayrton, “I can give no advice. Whatever you do +will be right, and whenever you want my help in your search, I am +ready.” + +“Thanks, Ayrton,” said Smith, “but I want a more direct answer. You are +our comrade, who has offered his life more than once to save ours, and +we will take no important step without consulting you.” + +“I think, Mr. Smith,” replied Ayrton, “that we ought to do everything +to discover our unknown benefactor. He may be sick or suffering. I owe +him a debt of gratitude which I can never forget, for he brought you to +save me. I will never forget him!” + +“It is settled,” said Smith. “We will begin our search as soon as +possible. We will leave no part of the island unexplored. We will pry +into its most secret recesses, and may our unknown friend pardon our +zeal!” + +For several days the colonists were actively at work haymaking and +harvesting. Before starting upon their exploring tour, they wanted to +finish all their important labors. Now, too, was the time for gathering +the vegetable products of Tabor Island. Everything had to be stored; +and, happily, there was plenty of room in Granite House for all the +riches of the island. There all was ranged in order, safe from man or +beast. No dampness was to be feared in the midst of this solid mass of +granite. Many of the natural excavations in the upper corridor were +enlarged by the pick, or blown out by mining, and Granite House thus +became a receptacle for all the goods of the colony. + +The brig’s guns were pretty pieces of cast-steel, which, at Pencroff’s +instance, were hoisted, by means of tackle and cranes, to the very +entrance of Granite House; embrasures were constructed between the +windows, and soon they could be seen stretching their shining nozzles +through the granite wall. From this height these fire-breathing gentry +had the range of all Union Bay. It was a little Gibraltar, to whose +fire every ship off the islet would inevitably be exposed. + +“Mr. Smith,” said Pencroff one day—it was the 8th of November—“now that +we have mounted our guns, we ought to try their range.” + +“For what purpose?” + +“Well, we ought to know how far we can send a ball.” + +“Try, then, Pencroff,” answered the engineer; “but don’t use our +powder, whose stock I do not want to diminish; use pyroxyline, whose +supply will never fail.” + +“Can these cannon support the explosive force of pyroxyline?” asked the +reporter, who was as eager as Pencroff to try their new artillery. + +“I think so. Besides,” added the engineer, “we will be careful.” + +Smith had good reason to think that these cannon were well made. They +were of cast steel, and breech-loaders, they could evidently bear a +heavy charge, and consequently would have a long range, on account of +the tremendous initial velocity. + +“Now,” said Smith, “the initial velocity being a question of the amount +of powder in the charge, everything depends upon the resisting power of +the metal; and steel is undeniably the best metal in this respect; so +that I have great hope of our battery.” + +The four cannon were in perfect condition. Ever since they had been +taken out of the water, Pencroff had made it his business to give them +a polish. How many hours had been spent in rubbing them, oiling them, +and cleaning the separate parts! By this time they shone as if they had +been on board of a United States frigate. + +That very day, in the presence of all the colony, including Jup and +Top, the new guns were successively tried. They were charged with +pyroxyline, which, as we have said, has an explosive force fourfold +that of gunpowder; the projectile was cylindro-conical in shape. +Pencroff, holding the fuse, stood ready to touch them off. + +Upon a word from Smith, the shot was fired. The ball, directed seaward, +passed over the islet and was lost in the offing, at a distance which +could not be computed. + +The second cannon was trained upon the rocks terminating Jetsam Point, +and the projectile, striking a sharp boulder nearly three miles from +Granite House, made it fly into shivers. Herbert had aimed and fired +the shot, and was quite proud of his success. But Pencroff was prouder +of it even than he. Such a feather in his boy’s cap! + +The third projectile, aimed at the downs which formed the upper coast +of Union Bay, struck the sand about four miles away, then ricocheted +into the water. The fourth piece was charged heavily to test its +extreme range, and every one got out of the way for fear it would +burst; then the fuse was touched off by means of a long string. There +was a deafening report, but the gun stood the charge, and the +colonists, rushing to the windows, could see the projectile graze the +rocks of Mandible Cape, nearly five miles from Granite House, and +disappear in Shark Gulf. + +“Well, Mr. Smith,” said Pencroff, who had cheered at every shot, “what +do you say to our battery? I should like to see a pirate land now!” + +“Better have them stay away, Pencroff,” answered the engineer. + +“Speaking of that,” said the sailor, “what are we going to do with the +six rascals who are prowling about the island? Shall we let them roam +about unmolested? They are wild beasts, and I think we should treat +them as such. What do you think about it, Ayrton?” added Pencroff, +turning towards his companion. + +Ayrton hesitated for a moment, while Smith regretted the abrupt +question, and was sincerely touched when Ayrton answered humbly:— + +“I was one of these wild beasts once, Mr. Pencroff, and I am not worthy +to give counsel.” + +And, with bent head, he walked slowly away. Pencroff understood him. + +“Stupid ass that I am!” cried he. “Poor Ayrton! and yet he has as good +a right to speak as any of us. I would rather have bitten off my tongue +than have given him pain! But, to go back to the subject, I think these +wretches have no claim to mercy, and that we should rid the island of +them.” + +“And before we hunt them down, Pencroff, shall we not wait for some +fresh act of hostility?” + +“Haven’t they done enough already?” said the sailor, who could not +understand these refinements. + +“They may repent,” said Smith. + +“They repent!” cried the sailor, shrugging his shoulders. + +“Think of Ayrton, Pencroff!” said Herbert, taking his hand. “He has +become an honest man.” + +Pencroff looked at his companions In stupefaction. He could not admit +the possibility of making terms with the accomplices of Harvey, the +murderers of the Speedy’s crew. + +“Be it so!” he said. “You want to be magnanimous to these rascals. May +we never repent of it!” + +“What danger do we run if we are on our guard?” said Herbert. + +“H’m!” said the reporter, doubtfully. “There are six of them, well +armed. If each of them sighted one of us from behind a tree—” + +“Why haven’t they tried it already?” said Herbert. “Evidently it was +not their cue.” + +“Very well, then,” said the sailor, who was stubborn in his opinion, +“we will let these worthy fellows attend to their innocent occupations +without troubling our heads about them.” + +“Pencroff,” said the engineer, “you have often shown respect for my +opinions. Will you trust me once again?” + +“I will do whatever you say, Mr. Smith,” said the sailor, nowise +convinced. + +“Well, let us wait, and not be the first to attack.” + +This was the final decision, with Pencroff in the minority. They would +give the pirates a chance, which their own interest might induce them +to seize upon, to come to terms. So much, humanity required of them. +But they would have to be constantly on their guard, and the situation +was a very serious one. They had silenced Pencroff, but, perhaps, after +all, his advice would prove sound. + + + + +CHAPTER XLVIII. + + +THE PROJECTED EXPEDITION—AYRTON AT THE CORRAL—VISIT TO PORT +BALLOON—PENCROFF’S REMARKS—DESPATCH SENT TO THE CORRAL—NO ANSWER FROM +AYRTON—SETTING OUT NEXT DAY—WHY THE WIRE DID NOT ACT—A DETONATION. + + +Meanwhile the thing uppermost in the colonists’ thought was to achieve +the complete exploration of the island which had been decided upon, an +exploration which now would have two objects: —First, to discover the +mysterious being whose existence was no longer a matter of doubt; and, +at the same time to find out what had become of the pirates, what +hiding place they had chosen, what sort of life they were leading, and +what was to be feared from them. + +Smith would have set off at once, but as the expedition would take +several days, it seemed better to load the wagon with all the +necessaries for camping out. Now at this time one of the onagers, +wounded in the leg, could not bear harness; it must have several days’ +rest, and they thought it would make little difference if they delayed +the departure a week, that is, till November 20. November in this +latitude corresponds to the May of the Northern Hemisphere, and the +weather was fine. They were now at the longest days in the year, so +that everything was favorable to the projected expedition, which, if it +did not attain its principal object, might be fruitful in discoveries, +especially of the products of the soil; for Smith intended to explore +those thick forests of the Far West, which stretched to the end of +Serpentine Peninsula. + +During the nine days which would precede their setting out, it was +agreed that they should finish work on Prospect Plateau. But Ayrton had +to go back to the corral to take care of their domesticated animals. It +was settled that he should stay there two days, and leave the beasts +with plenty of fodder. Just as he was setting out, Smith asked him if +he would like to have one of them with him, as the island was no longer +secure. Ayrton replied that it would be useless, as he could do +everything by himself, and that there was no danger to fear. If +anything happened at or near the corral, he would instantly acquaint +the colonists of it by a telegram sent to Granite House. + +So Ayrton drove off in the twilight, about 9 o’clock, behind one +onager, and two hours afterwards the electric wire gave notice that he +had found everything in order at the corral. + +During these two days Smith was busy at a project which would finally +secure Granite House from a surprise. The point was to hide completely +the upper orifice of the former weir, which had been already blocked up +with stones, and half hidden under grass and plants, at the southern +angle of Lake Grant. Nothing could be easier, since by raising the +level of the lake two or three feet, the hole would be entirely under +water. + +Now to raise the level, they had only to make a dam across the two +trenches by which Glycerine Creek and Waterfall Creek were fed. The +colonists were incited to the task, and the two dams, which were only +seven or eight feet long, by three feet high, were rapidly erected of +closely cemented stones. When the work had been done, no one could have +suspected the existence of the subterranean conduit. The little stream +which served to feed the reservoir at Granite House, and to work the +elevator, had been suffered to flow in its channel, so that water might +never be wanting. The elevator once raised, they might defy attack. + +This work had been quickly finished, and Pencroff, Spilett, and Herbert +found time for an expedition to Port Balloon. The sailor was anxious to +know whether the little inlet up which the Good Luck was moored had +been visited by the convicts. + +“These gentry got to land on the southern shore,” he observed, “and if +they followed the line of the coast they may have discovered the little +harbor, in which case I wouldn’t give half a dollar for our Good Luck.” + +So off the three went in the afternoon of November 10. They were well +armed, and as Pencroff slipped two bullets into each barrel of his gun, +he had a look which presaged no good to whoever came too near, “beast +or man,” as he said. Neb went with them to the elbow of the Mercy, and +lifted the bridge after them. It was agreed that they should give +notice of their return by firing a shot, when Neb would come back to +put down the bridge. + +The little band walked straight for the south coast. The distance was +only three miles and a half, but they took two hours to walk it. They +searched on both sides of the way, both the forest and Tadorn’s Fens; +but they found no trace of the fugitives. Arriving at Port Balloon, +they saw with great satisfaction that the Good Luck was quietly moored +in the narrow inlet, which was so well hidden by the rocks that it +could be seen neither from sea nor shore, but only from directly above +or below. + +“After all,” said Pencroff, “the rascals haven’t been here. The vipers +like tall grass better, and we shall find them in the Far-West.” + +“And it’s a fortunate thing,” added Herbert, “for if they had found the +Good Luck, they would have made use of her in getting away, and we +could never have gone back to Tabor Island.” + +“Yes,” replied the reporter, “it will be important to put a paper there +stating the situation of Lincoln Island, Ayrton’s new residence, in +case the Scotch yacht should come after him.” + +“Well, here is our Good Luck, Mr. Spilett,” said the sailor, “ready to +start with her crew at the first signal!” + +Talking thus, they got on board and walked about the deck. On a sudden +the sailor, after examining the bit around which the cable of the +anchor was wound, cried, + +“Hallo! this is a bad business!” + +“What’s the matter, Pencroff?” asked the reporter. + +“The matter is that that knot was never tied by me——” + +And Pencroff pointed to a rope which made the cable fast to the bit, so +as to prevent its tripping. + +“How, never tied by you?” asked Spilett. + +“No, I can swear to it. I never tie a knot like that.” + +“You are mistaken, Pencroff.” + +“No, I’m not mistaken,” insisted the sailor. “That knot of mine is +second nature with me.” + +“Then have the convicts been on board?” asked Herbert. + +“I don’t know,” said Pencroff, “but somebody has certainly raised and +dropped this anchor!” + +The sailor was so positive that neither Spilett nor Herbert could +contest his assertion. It was evident that the beat had shifted place +more or less since Pencroff had brought it back to Balloon Harbor. As +for the sailor, he had no doubt that the anchor had been pulled up and +cast again. Now, why had these manœuvres taken place unless the boat +had been used on some expedition? + +“Then why did we not see the Good Luck pass the offing?” said the +reporter, who wanted to raise every possible objection. + +“But, Mr. Spilett,” answered the sailor, “they could have set out in +the night with a good wind, and in two hours have been out of sight of +the island.” + +“Agreed,” said Spilett, but I still ask with what object the convicts +used the Good Luck, and why, after using her, they brought her back to +port?” + +“Well, Mr. Spilett,” said the sailor, “we will have to include that +among our mysterious incidents, and think no more of it. One thing is +certain, the Good Luck was there, and is here! If the convicts take it +a second time, it may never find its way back again.” + +“Then, Pencroff,” said Herbert, “perhaps we had better take the Good +Luck back and anchor her in front of Granite House.” + +“I can hardly say,” answered the sailor, “but I think not. The mouth of +the Mercy is a bad place for a ship; the sea is very heavy there.” + +“But by hauling it over the sand to the foot of the Chimneys——” + +“Well, perhaps,” answered Pencroff. “In any case, as we have to leave +Granite House for a long expedition, I believe the Good Luck will be +safer here during oar absence, and he will do well to leave her here +until the island is rid of these rascals.” + +“That is my opinion, too,” said the reporter. At least in case of bad +weather, she will not be exposed as she would be at the mouth of the +Mercy.” + +“But if the convicts should pay her another visit?” said Herbert. + +“Well, my boy,” said Pencroff, “if they do not find the boat here they +will search until they do find her; and in our absence there is nothing +to prevent their carrying her off from the front of Granite House. I +agree with Mr. Spilett that we had better leave her at Balloon Harbor; +but if we have not rid the island of these wretches by the time we come +back it will be more prudent to take our ship back to Granite House, +until we have nothing more to fear from our enemies.” + +“All right,” said Spilett. “Let us go back now.” + +When they returned to Granite House, they told Smith what had happened, +and the latter approved their present and future plans. He even +promised Pencroff he would examine that part of the channel situated +between the island and the coast, so as to see if it would be possible +to make an artificial harbor by means of a dam. In this way the Good +Luck would be always within reach, in sight of the colonists, and +locked up if necessary. + +On the same evening they sent a telegram to Ayrton, asking him to bring +back from the corral a couple of goats, which Neb wished to acclimatize +on the plateau. Strange to say, Ayrton did not acknowledge the receipt +of this despatch, as was his custom to do. This surprised the engineer, +but he concluded that Ayrton was not at the corral at the moment, and +perhaps had started on his way back to Granite House. In fact, two days +had elapsed since his departure; and it had been agreed that on the +evening of the 10th or the morning of the 11th, at latest, he would +return. + +The colonists were now waiting to see Ayrton on Prospect Plateau. Neb +and Herbert both looked after the approach by way of the bridge, so as +to let it down when their companion should appear, but when 6 o’clock +in the evening came, and there was no sign of Ayrton, they agreed to +send another despatch, asking for an immediate answer. + +The wire at Granite House remained silent. + +The uneasiness of the colonists was now extreme. What had happened? +“Was Ayrton not at the corral? or, if there, had he not power over his +own movements? Ought they to go in search of him on this dark night? + +They discussed the point. Some were for going, and others for waiting. + +“But,” said Herbert, “perhaps some accident has happened to the wires +which prevents their working.” + +“That may be,” said the reporter. + +“Let us wait until to-morrow,” said Smith. “It is just possible that +either Ayrton has not received our despatch, or we have missed his.” + +They waited, as may be imagined, with much anxiety. At daylight on the +11th of November, Smith sent a message across the wires, but received +no answer. Again, with the same result. + +“Let us set off at once for the corral,” said he. + +“Aid will armed,” added Pencroff. + +It was agreed that Granite House must not be deserted, so Neb was left +behind to take charge. After accompanying his companions to Glycerine +Creek, he put up the bridge again, and hid behind a tree, to wait +either for their return or for that of Ayrton. In case the pirates +should appear, and should attempt to force the passage, he would try to +defend it with his gun; and in the last resort he would take refuge in +Granite House, where, the elevator once drawn up, he would be in +perfect safety. The others were to go direct to the corral, and failing +to find Ayrton there, were to scour the neighboring woods. + +At 6 o’clock in the morning the engineer and his three companions had +crossed Glycerine Creek, and Neb posted himself behind a low cliff, +crowned by some large dragon trees on the left side of the brook. The +colonists, after leaving Prospect Plateau, took the direct route to the +corral. They carried their guns on their shoulders, ready to fire at +the first sign of hostility. The two rifles and the two guns had been +carefully loaded. + +On either side of the path was a dense thicket, which might easily hide +enemies, who, as they were armed, would be indeed formidable. The +colonists walked on rapidly without a word. Top preceded them, +sometimes keeping to the path, and sometimes making a detour into the +wood, but not appearing to suspect anything unusual; and they might +depend upon it that the faithful dog would not be taken by surprise, +and would bark at the slightest appearance of danger. + +Along this same path Smith and his companions followed the telegraphic +wires which connected the corral with Granite House. For the first two +miles they did not notice any solution of continuity. The posts were in +good condition, the insulators uninjured, and the wire evenly +stretched. From this point the engineer noticed that the tension was +less complete, and at last, arriving at post No. 74, Herbert, who was +ahead of the others, cried, “The wire is broken!” + +His companions hastened forward and arrived at the spot where the boy +had stopped. There the overturned post was lying across the path. They +had discovered the break, and it was evident that the dispatches from +Granite House could not have been received at the corral. + +“It can’t be the wind that has overturned this post,” said Pencroff. + +“No,” answered the reporter, “there are marks of footsteps on the +ground; it has been uprooted by the hand of man.” + +“Besides, the wire is broken,” added Herbert, showing the two ends of +the wire which had been violently torn asunder. + +“Is the break a fresh one?” asked Smith. + +“Yes,” said Herbert, “it was certainly made a very short time ago.” + +“To the corral! to the corral!” cried the sailor. + +The colonists were then midway between Granite House and the corral, +and had still two miles and a half to go. They started on a run. + +In fact, they might well fear that something had happened at the +corral. Ayrton doubtless might have sent a telegram which had not +arrived. It was not this which alarmed his companions, but a +circumstance more remarkable. Ayrton, who had promised to come back the +evening before, had not reappeared! The communication, between Granite +House and the corral had been out with a sinister design. + +They hurried on, their hearts beating quick with fear for their +comrade, to whom they were sincerely attached; Were they to find him +struck down by the hand of those he had formerly led? + +Soon they reached the place where the road lay along by the little +brook flowing from Red Creek, which watered the meadows of the corral. +They had moderated their pace, so as not to be out of breath at the +moment when a deadly struggle might occur. Their guns were uncocked, +but loaded. Each of them watched one side of the woods. Top kept up an +ill-omened growling. + +At last the fenced enclosure appeared behind the trees. They saw no +signs of devastation. The door was closed as usual; a profound silence +reigned at the corral. Neither the accustomed bleatings of the sheep +nor the voice of Ayrton was to be heard. + +“Let us go in,” said Smith, and the engineer advanced, while his +companions, keeping guard twenty feet in the rear, stood ready to fire. + +Smith raised the inner latch, and began to push back the door, when Top +barked loudly. There was a report from behind the fence, followed by a +cry of pain, and Herbert, pierced by a bullet, fell to the ground! + + + + +CHAPTER XLIX + + +THE REPORTER AND PENCROFF IN THE CORRAL—MOVING HERBERT—DESPAIR OF THE +SAILOR—CONSULTATION OF THE ENGINEER AND THE REPORTER—MODE OF +TREATMENT—A GLIMMER OF HOPE—HOW TO WARN NEB—A FAITHFUL MESSENGER—NEB’S +REPLY. + + +At Herbert’s cry, Pencroff, dropping his gun, sprang towards him. + +“They have killed him!” cried he. “My boy—they have killed him.” + +Smith and Spilett rushed forward. The reporter put his ear to the boy’s +heart to see if it were still beating. + +“He’s alive,” said he, “but he must be taken—” + +“To Granite House? Impossible!” said the engineer. + +“To the corral, then,” cried Pencroff. + +“One moment,” said Smith, and he rushed to the left around the fence. +There he found himself face to face with a convict, who fired at him +and sent a ball through his cap. An instant later, before he had time +to fire again, he fell, struck to the heart by Smith’s poniard, a surer +weapon even than his gun. + +While this was going on, the reporter and Pencroff hoisted themselves +up to the angle of the fence, strode over the top, jumped into the +enclosure, made their way into the empty house, and laid Herbert gently +down on Ayrton’s bed. + +A few minutes afterwards Smith was at his side. At the sight of +Herbert, pale and unconscious, the grief of the sailor was intense. He +sobbed and cried bitterly; neither the engineer nor the reporter could +calm him. Themselves over whelmed with emotion, they could hardly +speak. + +They did all in their power to save the poor boy’s life. Spilett, in +his life of varied experience, had acquired some knowledge of medicine. +He knew a little of everything; and had had several opportunities of +learning the surgery of gunshot wounds. With Smith’s assistance, he +hastened to apply the remedies which Herbert’s condition demanded. + +The boy lay in a complete stupor, caused either by the hemorrhage or by +concussion of the brain. He was very pale, and his pulse beat only at +long intervals, as if every moment about to stop. This, taken in +conjunction with his utter loss of consciousness, was a grave symptom. +They stripped his chest, and, staunching the blood by means of +handkerchiefs, kept bathing the wounds in cold water. + +The ball had entered between the third and fourth rib, and there they +found the wound. Smith and Spilett turned the poor boy over. At this he +uttered a moan so faint that they feared it was his last breath. There +was another wound on his back, for the bullet had gone clean through. + +“Thank Heaven!” said the reporter, “the ball is not in his body; we +shall not have to extract it.” + +“But the heart?” asked Smith. + +“The heart has not been touched, or he would be dead.” + +“Dead!” cried Pencroff, with a groan. He had only heard the reporter’s +last word. + +“No, Pencroff,” answered Smith. “No he is not dead; his pulse still +beats; he has even uttered a groan. For his sake, now, you must be +calm. We have need of all our self-possession; you must not be the +means of our losing it, my friend.” + +Pencroff was silent, but large tears rolled down his cheeks. + +Meanwhile, Spilett tried to recall to memory the proper treatment of +the case before him. There seemed no doubt that the ball had entered in +front and gone out by the back; but what injuries had it done by the +way? Had it reached any vital spot? This was a question which even a +professional surgeon could not have answered at once. + +There was something, however, which Spilett knew must be done, and that +was to keep down the inflammation, and to fight against the fever which +ensues upon a wound. The wound must be dressed without delay. It was +not necessary to bring on a fresh flow of blood by the use of tepid +water and compresses, for Herbert was already too weak. The wounds, +therefore, were bathed with cold water. + +Herbert was placed upon his left side and held in that position. + +“He must not be moved,” said Spilett; “he is in the position most +favorable to an easy suppuration, and absolute repose is necessary.” + +“Cannot we take him to Granite House?” asked Pencroff. + +“No, Pencroff,” said the reporter. + +Spilett was examining the boy’s wounds again with close attention. +Herbert was so frightfully pale that he became alarmed. + +“Cyrus,” said he, “I am no doctor. I am in a terrible strait; you must +help me with your advice and assistance.” + +“Calm yourself, my friend,” answered the engineer, pressing his hand. +“Try to judge coolly. Think only of saving Herbert.” + +Spilett’s self-possession, which in a moment of discouragement his keen +sense of responsibility had caused him to lose, returned again at these +words. He seated himself upon the bed; Smith remained standing, +Pencroff had torn up his shirt and began mechanically to make lint. + +Spilett explained that the first thing to do was to check the +hemorrhage, but not to close the wounds or bring on immediate +cicatrization—for there had been internal perforation, and they must +not let the suppurated matter collect within. It was decided therefore +to dress the two wounds, but not to press them together. The colonists +possessed a most powerful agent for quelling inflamation, and one which +nature supplies in the greatest abundance; to-wit, cold water, which is +now used by all doctors. It has, moreover, the advantage of allowing +the wound perfect rest, and dispensing with the frequent dressing, +which by exposing the wound to the air in the early stages, is so often +attended with lamentable results. + +Thus did Smith and Spilett reason, with clear, native good sense, and +acted as the best surgeon would have done. The wounds were bandaged +with linen and constantly soaked with fresh water. The sailor had +lighted a fire in the chimney, and the house fortunately contained all +the necessaries of life. They had maple-sugar and the medicinal plants +which the boy had gathered on the shores of Lake Grant. From these they +made a refreshing drink for the sick boy. His fever was very high, and +he lay all that day and night without a sign of consciousness. His life +was hanging on a thread. + +On the next day, November 12, they began to have some hopes of his +recovery. His consciousness returned, he opened his eyes and recognized +them all. He even said two or three words, and wanted to know what had +happened. Spilett told him, and begged him to keep perfectly quiet; +that his life was not in danger, and his wounds would heal in a few +days. Herbert suffered very little, for the inflammation was +successfully kept down by the plentiful use of cold water. A regular +suppuration had set in, the fever did not increase, and they began to +hope that this terrible accident would not end in a worse catastrophe. + +Pencroff took heart again; he was the best of nurses, like a Sister of +Charity, or a tender mother watching over her child. Herbert had fallen +into another stupor, but this time the sleep appeared more natural. + +“Tell me again that you have hope, Mr. Spilett,” said Pencroff; “tell +me again that you will save my boy!” + +“We shall save him,” said the reporter. “The wound is a serious one, +and perhaps the ball has touched the lung; but a wound in that organ is +not mortal.” + +“May God grant it!” answered the sailor. + +As may be imagined, the care of Herbert had occupied all their time and +thoughts for the first twenty-four hours at the corral. They had not +considered the urgent danger of a return of the convicts, nor taken any +precautions for the future. But on this day while Pencroff was watching +over the invalid, Smith and the reporter took counsel together as to +their plans. + +They first searched the corral. There was no trace of Ayrton, and it +seemed probable that he had resisted his former companions, and fallen +by their hands. The corral had not been pillaged, and as its gates had +remained shut, the domestic animals had not been able to wander away +into the woods. They could see no traces of the pirates either in the +dwelling or the palisade. The only thing gone was the stock of +ammunition. + +“The poor fellow was taken by surprise,” said Smith, “and as he was a +man to show fight, no doubt they made an end of him.” + +“Yes,” replied the reporter, “and then, no doubt, they took possession +here, where they found everything in great plenty, and took to flight +only when they saw us coming.” + +“We must beat the woods,” said the engineer, and rid the island of +these wretches. But we will have to wait some time in the corral, till +the day comes when we can safely carry Herbert to Granite House.” + +“But Neb?” asked the reporter. + +“Neb’s safe enough.” + +“Suppose he becomes anxious and risks coming here?” + +“He must not come,” said Smith sharply. “He would be murdered on the +way!” + +“It’s very likely he will try.” + +“Ah! if the telegraph was only in working order, we could warn him! But +now it’s impossible. We can’t leave Pencroff and Herbert here alone. +Well, I’ll go by myself to Granite House!” + +“No, no, Cyrus,” said the reporter, “you must not expose yourself. +These wretches are watching the corral from their ambush, and there +would be two mishaps instead of one!” + +“But Neb has been without news of us for twenty-four hours,” repeated +the engineer. “He will want to come.” + +While he reflected, his gaze fell upon Top, who, by running to and fro, +seemed to say, “Have you forgotten me?” + +“Top!” cried Smith. + +The dog sprang up at this master’s call. + +“Yes, Top shall go!” cried the reporter, who understood in a flash. Top +will make his way where we could not pass, will take our message and +bring us back an answer.” + +“Quick!” said Smith, “quick!” + +Spilett tore out a page of his note-book and wrote these lines:— + +“Herbert wounded. We are at the corral. Be on your guard. Do not leave +Granite House. Have the convicts shown themselves near you? Answer by +Top!” + +This laconic note was folded and tied in a conspicuous way to Top’s +collar. + +“Top, my dog,” said the engineer, caressing the animal, “Neb, Top, Neb! +Away! away!” + +Top sprang high at the words. He understood what was wanted, and the +road was familiar to him. The engineer went to the door of the corral +and opened one of the leaves. + +“Neb, Top, Neb!” he cried again, pointing towards Granite House. + +Top rushed out and disappeared almost instantly. + +“He’ll get there!” said the reporter. + +“Yes, and come back, the faithful brute!” + +“What time is it?” asked Spilett. + +“Ten o’clock.” + +“In an hour he may be here. We will watch for him. + +The door of the corral was closed again. The engineer and the reporter +re-entered the house. Herbert lay in a profound sleep. Pencroff kept +his compresses constantly wet with cold water. Spilett, seeing that +just then there was nothing else to do, set to work to prepare some +food, all the time keeping his eye on that part of the inclosure which +backed up against the spur, from which an attack might be made. + +The colonists awaited Top’s return with much anxiety. A little before +11 o’clock Smith andSpilett stood with their carbines behind the door, +ready to open it at the dog’s first bark. They knew that if Top got +safely to Granite House, Neb would send him back at once. + +They had waited about ten minutes, when they heard a loud report, +followed instantly by continuous barking. The engineer opened the door, +and, seeing smoke still curling up among the trees a hundred paces off, +he fired in that direction. Just then Top bounded into the corral, +whose door was quickly shut. + +“Top, Top!” cried the engineer, caressing the dog’s large, noble head. +A note was fastened to his collar, containing these words in Neb’s +sprawling handwriting:—— + +“No pirates near Granite House. I will not stir. Poor Mr. Herbert!” + + + + +CHAPTER L. + + +THE CONVICTS IN THE NEIGHBORHOOD OF THE CORRAL—PROVISIONAL +OCCUPATION—CONTINUATION OF HERBERT’S TREATMENT—PENCROFF’S +JUBILATION—REVIEW OF THE PAST—FUTURE PROSPECTS—SMITH’S IDEAS. + + +So, then, the convicts were close by, watching the corral, and waiting +to kill the colonists one after another. They must be attacked like +wild beasts, but with the greatest precaution, for the wretches had the +advantage of position, seeing and not being seen, able to make a sudden +attack, yet not themselves to be surprised. + +So Smith made his arrangements to live at the corral, which was fully +provisioned. Ayrton’s house was furnished with all the necessaries of +life, and the convicts, frightened away by the colonists’ arrival, had +not had time to pillage. It was most likely, as Spilett suggested, that +the course of events had been this:—The convicts had followed the +southern coast, and after getting over into Serpentine Peninsula, and +being in no humor to risk themselves in the woods of the Far West, they +had reached the month of Fall River. Then, walking up the right bank of +the stream, they had come to the spur of Mount Franklin; here was their +most natural place of refuge. And they had soon discovered the corral. +They had probably installed themselves there, had been surprised by +Ayrton, had overcome the unfortunate man, and—the rest was easily +divined! + +Meanwhile the convicts, reduced to five, but well armed, were prowling +in the woods, and to pursue them was to be exposed to their fire +without the power either of avoiding or of anticipating them. + +“There is nothing else to do but wait,” repeated Smith. “When Herbert +is well again, we will beat the island, and have a shot at these +rascals; while at the same time——” + +“We search for our mysterious protector,” added Spilett, finishing the +sentence. “Ah! we must confess, dear Cyrus, that, for once, his +protection has failed us.” + +“We don’t know about that,” answered the engineer. + +“What do you mean?” asked the reporter. + +“We are not at the end of our troubles, my dear Spilett, and his +powerful interference may still be exercised. But now we must think of +Herbert.” + +Several days passed, and the poor boy’s condition was happily no worse; +and to gain time was a great thing. The cold water, always kept at the +proper temperature, had absolutely prevented the inflammation of the +wounds. Nay, it seemed to the reporter that this water, which contained +a little sulphur, due to the neighborhood of the volcano, had a direct +tendency towards cicatrization. The suppuration was much less copious, +and, thanks to excellent nursing, Herbert had returned to +consciousness, and his fever had abated. He was, moreover, strictly +dieted, and, of course, was very weak; but he had plenty of broths and +gruels, and absolute rest was doing him great good. + +Smith, Spilett, and Pencroff had become very skilful in tending him. +All the linen in the house had been sacrificed. The wounded parts, +covered with lint and compresses, were subjected to just enough +pressure to cicatrize them without bringing on a reaction of +inflammation. The reporter dressed the wounds with the greatest care, +repeating to his companions the medical axiom that good dressing is as +rare as a good operation. + +At the end of ten days, by the 22d of November, Herbert was decidedly +better. He had begun to take some nourishment. The color came back to +his cheeks, and he smiled at his nurse. He talked a little, in spite of +Pencroff, who chattered away all the time to keep the boy from saying a +word, and told the most remarkable stories. Herbert inquired about +Ayrton, and was surprised not to see him at the bedside; but the +sailor, who would not distress his patient, answered merely that Ayrton +had gone to be with Neb at Granite House in case the convicts attacked +it. “Nice fellows they are,” said he. “To think that Mr. Smith wanted +to appeal to their feelings! I’ll send them my compliments in a good +heavy bullet!” + +“And nobody has seen them?” asked Herbert. + +“No, my boy,” answered the sailor, “but we will find them, and when you +are well we shall see whether these cowards, who strike from behind, +will dare to meet us face to face.” + +“I am still very weak, dear Pencroff.” + +“Oh! your strength will come back little by little. What’s a ball +through the chest? Nothing to speak of. I have seen several of them, +and feel no worse for it.” + +In fine, things were growing better, and it no unlucky complication +occurred, Herbert’s cure might be regarded as certain. But what would +have been the colonists’ situation if the ball had remained in his +body, if his arm or leg had had to be amputated? They could not think +of it without a shudder. + +It seemed to Smith that he and his companions, until now so fortunate, +had entered upon an ill-omened time. For the two and a half years which +had elapsed since their escape from Richmond they had succeeded in +everything. But now luck seemed to be turning against them. Ayrton, +doubtless, was dead, and Herbert severely wounded; and that strange but +powerful intervention, which had done them such mighty services, seemed +now to be withdrawn. Had the mysterious being abandoned the island, or +himself been overcome? + +They could give no answer to these questions; but though they talked +together about them, they were not men to despair. They looked the +situation in the face; they analyzed the chances; they prepared +themselves for every contingency; they stood firm and undaunted before +the future; and if adversity should continue to oppress them, she would +find them men prepared to do their utmost. + + + + +CHAPTER LI. + + +NO NEWS OF NEB—A PROPOSAL FROM PENCROFF AND SPILETT—THE REPORTER’S +SORTIES—A FRAGMENT OF CLOTH—A MESSAGE—HURRIED DEPARTURE—ARRIVAL AT +PROSPECT PLATEAU. + + +Herbert’s convalescence progressed steadily. Only one thing was left to +wish for, to wit, that he would get well enough to be taken to Granite +House. However well arranged and provisioned might be the dwelling in +the corral, there was nothing like the solid comfort of their abode in +the rock. Besides, they were not safe here, and, in spite of their +watchfulness, they were always in dread of a shot from the woods. +Whereas there in the midst of that unassailable and inaccessible mass +of rock there would be nothing to fear. They waited, therefore, with +impatience for the moment when Herbert could be carried, without danger +to his wound, across the difficult route through Jacamar Woods. + +Though without news of Neb, they had no fear for him. The brave negro, +occupying a position of such strength, would not let himself be +surprised. Top had not been sent back to him, for it seemed useless to +expose the faithful dog to some shot which might deprive the colonists +of their most useful helper. The engineer regretted to see his forces +divided, and thus to play into the hands of the pirates. Since Ayrton’s +disappearance, they were only four against five, for Herbert could not +be counted. The poor boy knew and lamented the danger of which he was +the cause. + +One day, November 29, when he was asleep, they discussed their plans of +action against the convicts. + +“My friends,” said the reporter, after they had talked over the +impossibility of communicating with Neb, “I agree with you that to risk +ourselves on the path leading from the corral would be a useless +exposure. But why should we not beat the woods for these wretches?” + +“That’s what I was thinking,” replied Pencroff. “We’re not afraid of a +bullet, and for my part, if Mr. Smith approves, I am ready to take to +the woods. Surely one man is as good as another!” + +“But is he as good as five?” asked the engineer. + +“I will go with Pencroff,’ answered the reporter, “and the two of us, +well armed, and Top with us—” + +“My dear Spilett, and you, Pencroff, let us discuss the matter coolly. +If the convicts were in hiding in some place known to us, from which we +could drive them by an attack, it would be a different affair. But have +we not every reason to fear that they will get the first shot?” + +“Well, sir,” cried Pencroff, “a bullet doesn’t always hit its mark!” + +“That which pierced Herbert did not go astray,” answered the engineer. +“Besides, remember that if you both leave the corral, I shall be left +alone to defend it. Can you answer that the convicts will not see you +go off, that they will not wait till you are deep in the woods, and +then make their attack in your absence upon a man and a sick boy?” + +There was nothing to say in answer to this reasoning, which went home +to the minds of all. + +“If only Ayrton was yet one of the party!” said Spilett. “Poor fellow! +his return to a life with his kind was not for long!” + +“If he is dead!” added Pencroff, in a peculiar tone. + +“Have you any hope that those rascals have spared him, Pencroff?” asked +Spilett. + +“Yes, if their interest led them to do so.” + +“What! do you suppose that Ayrton, among his former companions in +guilt, would forget all he owed to us—” + +“Nobody can tell,” answered the sailor, with some hesitation. + +“Pencroff,” said Smith, laying his hand on the sailor’s arm, “that was +an unworthy thought. I will guarantee Ayrton’s fidelity!” + +“And I too,” added the reporter, decidedly. + +“Yes, yes, Mr. Smith, I am wrong,” answered Pencroff. “But really I am +a little out of my mind. This imprisonment in the corral is driving me +to distraction.” + +“Be patient, Pencroff,” answered the engineer. “How soon, my dear +Spilett, do you suppose Herbert can be carried to Granite House?” + +“That is hard to say, Cyrus,” answered the reporter, “for a little +imprudence might be fatal. But if he goes on as well as he is doing now +for another week, why then we will see.” + +At that season the spring was two months advanced. The weather was +good, and the heat began to be oppressive. The woods were in fall leaf, +and it was almost time to reap the accustomed harvest. It can easily be +understood how this siege in the corral upset the plans of the +colonists. + +Once or twice the reporter risked himself outside, and walked around +the palisade. Top was with him, and his carbine was loaded. + +He met no one and saw nothing suspicious. Top would have warned him of +any danger, and so long as the dog did not bark, there was nothing to +fear. + +But on his second sortie, on the 27th of November, Spilett, who had +ventured into the woods for a quarter of a mile to the south of the +mountain, noticed that Top smelt something. The dog’s motions were no +longer careless; he ran to and fro, ferreting about in the grass and +thistles, as if his keen nose had put him on the track of an enemy. + +Spilett followed the dog, encouraging and exciting him by his voice; +his eye on the alert, his carbine on his shoulder, and availing himself +of the shelter of the trees. It was not likely that Top had recognized +the presence of a man, for in that case he would have announced it by a +half-stifled but angry bark. Since not even a growl was to be heard, +the danger was evidently neither near nor approaching. + +About five minutes had passed in this way, Top ferreting about and the +reporter cautiously following him, when the dog suddenly rushed towards +a thicket and tore from it a strip of cloth. It was a piece from a +garment, dirty and torn. Spilett went back with it to the corral. There +the colonists examined it and recognized it as a piece of Ayrton’s +waistcoat, which was made of the felt prepared only in the workshop at +Granite House. + +“You see, Pencroff,” observed Smith, “Ayrton resisted manfully, and the +convicts dragged him off in spite of his efforts. Do you still doubt +his good faith?” + +“No, Mr. Smith,” replied the sailor; “I have long ago given up that +momentary suspicion. But I think we may draw one conclusion from this +fact.” + +“What is that?” + +“That Ayrton was not killed at the corral. They must have dragged him +out alive, and perhaps he is still alive.” + +“It may be so,” said the engineer, thoughtfully. + +The most impatient of them all to get back to Granite House was +Herbert. He knew how necessary it was for them all to be there, and +felt that it was he who was keeping them at the corral. The one thought +which had taken possession of his mind was to leave the corral, and to +leave it as soon as possible. He believed that he could bear the +journey to Granite House. He was sure that his strength would come back +to him sooner in his own room, with the sight and the smell of the sea. + +It was now November 29. The colonists were talking together in +Herbert’s room, about 7 o’clock in the morning, when they heard Top +barking loudly. They seized their guns, always loaded and cocked, and +went out of the house. + +Top ran to the bottom of the palisade, jumping and barking with joy. + +“Some one is coming!” + +“Yes.” + +“And not an enemy.” + +“Neb, perhaps?” + +“Or Ayrton?” + +These words had scarcely been exchanged between the engineer and his +comrade, when something leaped the palisade and fell on the ground +inside. It was Jup. Master Jup himself, who was frantically welcomed by +Top. + +“Neb has sent him!” said the reporter. + +“Then he must have some note on him,” said the engineer. + +Pencroff rushed to the orang. Neb could not have chosen a better +messenger, who could get through obstacles which none of the others +could have surmounted. Smith was right. Around Jup’s neck was hung a +little bag, and in it was a note in Neb’s handwriting. The dismay of +the colonists may be imagined when they read these words:— + +“FRIDAY, 6 A. M.”—The convicts are on the plateau. NEB.” + +They looked at each other without saying a word, then walked back to +the house. What was there to do? The convicts on Prospect Plateau meant +disaster, devastation and ruin! Herbert knew at once from their faces +that the situation had become grave, and when he saw Jup, he had no +more doubt that misfortune was threatening Granite House. + +“Mr. Smith,” said he, “I want to go. I can bear the journey. I want to +start.” + +Spilett came up to Herbert and looked at him intently. + +“Let us start then,” said he. + +The question of Herbert’s transportation was quickly decided. A litter +would be the most comfortable way of travelling, but it would +necessitate two porters; that is, two guns would be subtracted from +their means of defense. On the other hand, by placing the mattresses on +which Herbert lay in the wagon, so as to deaden the motion, and by +walking carefully they could escape jolting him, and would leave their +arms free. + +The wagon was brought out and the onagga harnessed to it; Smith and the +reporter lifted the mattresses with Herbert on them, and laid them in +the bottom of the wagon between the rails. The weather was fine, and +the sun shone brightly between the trees. + +“Are the arms ready?” asked Smith. + +They were. The engineer and Pencroff, each armed with a +double-barrelled gun, and Spilett with his carbine, stood ready to set +out. + +“How do you feel, Herbert?” asked the engineer. + +“Don’t be troubled, Mr. Smith,” answered the boy, “I shall not die on +the way.” + +They could see that the poor fellow was making a tremendous effort. The +engineer felt a grievous pang. He hesitated to give the signal for +departure. But to stay would have thrown Herbert into despair. + +“Let us start,” said Smith. + +The corral door was opened. Jup and Top, who knew how to be quiet on +emergency, rushed on ahead. The wagon went out, the gate was shut, and +the onagga, under Pencroff’s guidance, walked on with a slow pace. + +It was necessary, on account of the wagon, to keep to the direct road +from the corral to Granite House, although it was known to the +convicts. Smith and Spilett walked on either side of the chariot, ready +to meet any attack. Still it was not likely that the convicts had yet +abandoned Prospect Plateau. Neb’s note had evidently been sent as soon +as they made their appearance. Now this note was dated at 6 o’clock in +the morning, and the active orang, who was accustomed to the way, would +have got over the five miles from Granite House in three-quarters of an +hour. Probably they would have no danger to fear till they approached +Granite House. + +But they kept on the alert. Top and Jup, the latter armed with his +stick, sometimes in front, and sometimes beating the woods on either +side, gave no signal of approaching danger. The wagon moved on slowly, +and an hour after leaving the corral, they had passed over four of the +five miles without any incident. + +They drew near the plateau another mile, and they saw the causeway over +Glycerine Creek. At last, through an opening in the wood, they saw the +horizon of the sea. But the wagon went on slowly, and none of its +defenders could leave it for a moment. Just then Pencroff stopped the +wagon and cried, fiercely, + +“Ah, the wretches!” + +And he pointed to a thick smoke which curled up from the mill, the +stables, and the buildings of the poultry-yard. In the midst of this +smoke a man was running about. It was Neb. + +His companions uttered a cry. He heard them and rushed to meet them. + +The convicts had abandoned the plateau half an hour before, after +having done all the mischief they could. + +“And Mr. Herbert?” cried Neb. + +Spilett went back to the wagon. Herbert had fainted. + + + + +CHAPTER LII. + + +HERBERT CARRIED TO GRANITE HOUSE—NEB RELATES WHAT HAD HAPPENED—VISIT OF +SMITH TO THE PLATEAU—RUIN AND DEVASTATION—THE COLONISTS HELPLESS—WILLOW +BARK—A MORTAL FEVER—TOP BARKS AGAIN. + + +The convicts, the dangers threatening Granite House, the ruin on the +plateau, none of these were thought of, in the present condition of +Herbert. It was impossible to say whether the transportation had +occasioned some internal rupture, but his companions were almost +hopeless. + +The wagon had been taken to the bend of the river, and there the +mattress, on which lay the unconscious lad, was placed on a litter of +branches, and within a few minutes Herbert was lying on his bed in +Granite House. He smiled for a moment on finding himself again in his +chamber, and a few words escaped feebly from his lips. Spilett looked +at his wounds, fearing that they might have opened, but the cicatrices +were unbroken. What, then, was the cause of this prostration, or why +had his condition grown worse? + +Soon the lad fell into a feverish sleep, and the reporter and Pencroff +watched beside him. + +Meantime, Smith told Neb of all that had happened at the corral, and +Neb told his master of what had passed at the plateau. + +It was not until the previous night that the convicts had shown +themselves beyond the edge of the forest, near Glycerine Creek. Neb, +keeping watch near the poultry-yard, had not hesitated to fire at one +of them who was crossing the bridge; but he could not say with what +result. At least, it did not disperse the band, and Neb had but just +time to climb up into Granite House, where he, at least, would be safe. + +But what was the next thing to do? How prevent the threatened +devastation to the plateau? How could he inform his master? And, +moreover, in what situation were the occupants of the corral? + +Smith and his companions had gone away on the 11th inst., and here it +was the 29th. In that time all the information that Neb had received +was the disastrous news brought by Top. Ayrton gone, Herbert badly +wounded, the engineer, the reporter, and the sailor imprisoned in the +corral. + +The poor negro asked himself what was to be done. Personally, he had +nothing to fear, as the convicts could not get into Granite House. But +the works, the fields, all the improvements, were at the mercy of the +pirates. Was it not best to let Smith know of the threatened danger? + +Then Neb thought of employing Jup on this errand. He knew the +intelligence of the orang. Jup knew the word “corral.” It was not yet +daylight. The agile brute could slip through the woods unperceived. So +the negro wrote a note, which he fastened round Jup’s neck, and taking +the monkey to the door and unrolling a long cord, he repeated the +words:— + +“Jup! Jup! To the corral! the corral!” + +The animal understood him, and, seizing the cord, slid down to the +ground, and disappeared in the darkness. + +“You did well, Neb, although In not forewarning us perhaps you would +have done better!” said Smith, thinking of Herbert, and how the +carrying him back had been attended with such serious results. + +Neb finished his recital. The convicts had not shown themselves upon +the beach, doubtless fearing the inhabitants of Granite House, whose +number they did not know. But the plateau was open and unprotected by +Granite House. Here, therefore, they gave loose reins to their instinct +of depredation and destruction, and they had left but half-an-hour +before the colonists returned. + +Neb had rushed from his retreat, and at the risk of being shot, he had +climbed to the plateau and had tried to put out the fire which was +destroying the inclosure to the poultry-yard. Ho was engaged in this +work when the others returned. + +Thus the presence of the convicts was a constant menace to the +colonists, heretofore so happy, and they might expect the most +disastrous results from them. + +Smith, accompanied by Neb, went to see for himself, the extent of the +injury done. He walked along by the Mercy and up the left bank without +seeing any trace of the convicts. It was likely that the latter had +either witnessed the return of the colonists, and had gone back to the +corral, now undefended, or that they had gone back to their camp to +await an occasion to renew the attack. + +At present, however, all attempts to rid the island of these pests were +subject to the condition of Herbert. + +The engineer and Neb reached the place. It was a scene of desolation. +Fields trampled; the harvest scattered; the stables and other buildings +burned; the frightened animals roaming at large over the plateau. The +fowls, which had sought refuge on the lake, were returning to their +accustomed place on its banks. Everything here would have to be done +over again. + +The succeeding days were the saddest which the colonists had passed on +the island. Herbert became more and more feeble. He was in a sort of +stupor, and symptoms of delirium began to manifest themselves. Cooling +draughts were all the remedies at the disposition of the colonists. +Meantime, the fever became intermittent, and it was necessary to check, +it before it developed greater strength. + +“To do this,” said Spilett, “we must have a febrifuge.” + +“And we have neither cinchonia nor quinine,” answered the engineer. + +“No, but we can make a substitute from the bark of the willow trees at +the lake.” + +“Let us try it immediately,” replied Smith. + +Indeed, willow bark has been partly considered succedaneous to +cinchonia, but since they had no means of extracting the salicin, the +bark must be used in its natural state. + +Smith, therefore, cut some pieces of bark from a species of black +willow, and, reducing them to powder, this powder was given to Herbert +the same evening. + +The night passed without incident. Herbert was somewhat delirious, but +the fever did not manifest itself. Pencroff became more hopeful, but +Spilett, who knew that the fever was intermittent, looked forward to +the next day with anxiety. + +They noticed that during the apyrexy, Herbert seemed completely +prostrated, his head heavy, and subject to dizziness. Another alarming +symptom was a congestion of the liver, and soon a more marked delirium +manifested itself. + +Spilett was overwhelmed by this new complication. He drew the engineer +aside and said to him:—— + +“It is a pernicious fever!” + +“A pernicious fever!” cried Smith. “You must be mistaken, Spilett. A +pernicious fever never declares itself spontaneously; it must have a +germ.” + +“I am not mistaken,” replied the reporter. “Herbert may have caught the +germ in the marshes. He has already had one attack; if another follows, +and we cannot prevent a third—he is lost!” + +“But the willow bark?——” + +“Is insufficient. And a third attack of pernicious fever, when one +cannot break it by means of quinine, is always mortal!” + +Happily Pencroff had not heard this conversation. It would have driven +him wild. + +Towards noon of the 7th, the second attack manifested itself. The +crisis was terrible. Herbert felt that he was lost! He stretched out +his arms towards Smith, towards Spilett, towards Pencroff! He did not +want to die! The scene was heartrending, and it became necessary to +take Pencroff away. + +The attack lasted five hours. It was plain that the lad could not +support a third. The night was full of torture. In his delirium, +Herbert wrestled with the convicts; he called Ayrton; he supplicated +that mysterious being, that protector, who had disappeared but whose +image haunted him—then he fell into a profound prostration, and +Spilett, more than once, thought the poor boy was dead! + +The next day passed with only a continuation of the lad’s feebleness. +His emaciated hands clutched the bed clothing. They continued giving +him doses of the willow powder, but the reporter anticipated no result +from it. + +“If,” said he, “before to-morrow morning we cannot give him a more +powerful febrifuge than this, Herbert will die!” + +The night came—doubtless the last night for this brave lad, so good, so +clever, whom all loved as their own child! The sole remedy against this +pernicious fever, the sole specific which could vanquish it, was not to +be found on Lincoln Island! + +During the night Herbert became frightfully delirious. He recognized no +one. It was not even probable that he would live till morning. His +strength was exhausted. Towards 3 o’clock he uttered a frightful cry. +He was seized by a terrible convulsion. Neb, who was beside him, +rushed, frightened, into the adjoining chamber, where his companions +were watching. + +At the same moment Top gave one of his strange barks. + +All returned to the chamber and gathered round the dying lad, who +struggled to throw himself from the bed. Spilett, who held his arms, +felt his pulse slowly rising. + +Five o’clock came. The sun’s rays shone into the chambers of Granite +House. A beautiful day, the last on earth for poor Herbert, dawned over +Lincoln Island. + +A sunbeam crept on to the table beside the bed. + +Suddenly Pencroff, uttering an exclamation, pointed to something on +that table. + +It was a small oblong box, bearing these words:—— + +_Sulphate of quinine._ + + + + +CHAPTER LIII. + + +AN INEXPLICABLE MYSTERY—HERBERT’S CONVALESCENCE—THE UNEXPLORED PARTS OF +THE ISLAND—PREPARATIONS FOR DEPARTURE—THE FIRST DAY—NIGHT—SECOND +DAY—THE KAURIS—CASSOWARIES—FOOTPRINTS IN THE SAND—ARRIVAL AT REPTILE +END. + + +Spilett took the box and opened it. It contained a white powder, which +he tasted. Its extreme bitterness was unmistakable. It was indeed that +precious alkaloid, the true anti-periodic. + +It was necessary to administer it to Herbert without delay. How it came +there could be discussed later. + +Spilett called for some coffee, and Neb brought a lukewarm infusion, in +which the reporter placed eighteen grains of quinine and gave the +mixture to Herbert to drink. + +There was still time, as the third attack of the fever had not yet +manifested itself. And, indeed, it did not return. Moreover, every one +became hopeful. The mysterious influence was again about them, and that +too in a moment when they had despaired of its aid. + +After a few hours, Herbert rested more quietly, and the colonists could +talk of the incident. The intervention of this unknown being was more +evident than ever, but how had he succeeded in getting in to Granite +House during the night? It was perfectly inexplicable, and, indeed, the +movements of this “genius of the island” were as mysterious as the +genius himself. + +The quinine was administered to Herbert every three hours, and the next +day the lad was certainly better. It is true he was not out of danger, +since these fevers are often followed by dangerous relapses; but, then, +here was the specific, and, doubtless, not far off, the one who had +brought it. In two days more Herbert became convalescent. He was still +feeble, but there had been no relapse, and he cheerfully submitted to +the rigorous diet imposed upon, him. He was so anxious to get well. + +Pencroff was beside himself with joy. After the critical period had +been safely passed he seized the reporter in his arms, and called him +nothing but Doctor Spilett. + +But the true physician was still to be found. + +““We will find him!” said the sailor. + +The year 1867, during which the colonists had been so hardly beset, +came to an end, and the new year began with superb weather. A fine +warmth, a tropical temperature, moderated by the sea breeze. Herbert’s +bed was drawn close to the window, where he could inhale long draughts +of the salt, salubrious air. His appetite began to return, and what +tempting savory morsels Neb prepared for him! + +“It made one wish to be ill,” said Pencroff. + +During this time the convicts had not shown themselves, neither was +there any news of Ayrton. The engineer and Herbert still hoped to get +him back, but the others thought that the unhappy man had succumbed. In +a month’s time, when the lad should have regained his strength, the +important search would be undertaken, and all these questions set at +rest. + +During January the work on the plateau consisted simply in collecting +the grain and vegetables undestroyed in the work of devastation, and +planting some for a late crop during the next season. Smith preferred +to wait till the island was rid of the convicts before he repaired the +damage to the mill, poultry-yard, and stable. + +In the latter part of the month Herbert began to take some exercise. He +was eighteen years old, his constitution was splendid, and from this +moment the improvement in his condition was visible daily. + +By the end of the month he walked on the shore and over the plateau, +and strengthened himself with sea-baths. Smith felt that the day for +the exploration could be set, and the 15th of February was chosen. The +nights at this season were very clear, and would, therefore, be +advantageous to the search. + +The necessary preparations were begun. These were important, as the +colonists had determined not to return to Granite House until their +double end had been obtained—to destroy the convicts and find Ayrton, +if he was still alive; and to discover the being who presided so +efficiently over the destinies of the colony. + +The colonists were familiar with all the eastern coast of the island +between Claw Cape and the Mandibles; with Tadorn’s Fens; the +neighborhood of Lake Grant; the portion of Jacamar Wood lying between +the road to the corral and the Mercy; the courses of the Mercy and Red +Creek, and those spurs of Mount Franklin where the corral was located. + +They had partially explored the long sweep of Washington Bay from Claw +Cape to Reptile End; the wooded and marshy shore of the west coast, and +the interminable downs which extended to the half-open mouth of Shark +Gulf. + +But they were unacquainted with the vast woods of Serpentine Peninsula; +all the right bank of the Mercy; the left bank of Fall River, and the +confused mass of ravines and ridges which covered three-fourths of the +base of Mount Franklin on the west, north, and east, and where, +doubtless, there existed deep recesses. Therefore, many thousands of +acres had not yet been explored. + +It was decided that the expedition should cross the Forest of the Far +West, in such a manner as to go over all that part situated on the +right of the Mercy. Perhaps it would have been better to have gone at +once to the corral, where it was probable the convicts had either +pillaged the place or installed themselves there. But either the +pillage was a work accomplished or the convicts had purposed to +entrench themselves there, and it would always be time to dislodge +them. + +So the first plan was decided upon, and it was resolved to cut a road +through these woods, placing Granite House in communication with the +end of the peninsula, a distance of sixteen or seventeen miles. + +The wagon was in perfect order. The onagers, well rested, were in +excellent condition for a long pull. Victuals, camp utensils, and the +portable stove, were loaded into the wagon, together with a careful +selection of arms and ammunition. + +No one was left in Granite House; even Top and Jup took part in the +expedition. The inaccessible dwelling could take care of itself. + +Sunday, the day before the departure, was observed as a day of rest and +prayer, and on the morning of the 15th Smith took the measures +necessary to defend Granite House from invasion. The ladders were +carried to the Chimneys and buried there, the basket of the elevator +was removed, and nothing left of the apparatus. Pencroff, who remained +behind in Granite House, saw to this latter, and then slid down to the +ground by means of a double cord which, dropped to the ground, severed +the last connection between the entrance and the shore. + +The weather was superb. + +“It is going to be a warm day,” said the reporter, joyfully. + +“But, Doctor Spilett,” said Pencroff, “our road is under the trees, and +we will never see the sun!” + +“Forward!” said the engineer. + +The wagon was ready on the bank. The reporter insisted on Herbert +taking a seat in it, at least for the first few hours. Neb walked by +the onagers. Smith, the reporter, and the sailor went on ahead. Top +bounded off into the grass; Jup took a seat beside Herbert, and the +little party started. + +The wagon went up the left bank of the Mercy, across the bridge, and +there, leaving the route to Balloon Harbor to the left, the explorers +began to make a way through the forest. + +For the first two miles, the trees grew sufficiently apart to permit +the wagon to proceed easily, without any other obstacle than here and +there a stump or some bushes to arrest their progress. The thick +foliage made a cool shadow over the ground. Birds and beasts were +plenty, and reminded the colonists of their early excursions on the +island. + +“Nevertheless,” remarked Smith, “I notice that the animals are more +timid than formerly. These woods have been recently traversed by the +convicts, and we shall certainly find their traces.” + +And, indeed, in many places, they saw where a party of men had passed, +or built a fire, but in no one place was there a definite camp. + +The engineer had charged his companions to abstain from hunting, so as +not to make the convicts aware of their presence by the sound of +firearms. + +In the afternoon, some six miles from Granite House, the advance became +very difficult, and they had to pass certain thickets, into which Top +and Jup were sent as skirmishers. + +The halt for the night was made, nine miles from Granite House, on the +bank of a small affluent to the Mercy, of whose existence they had been +unaware. They had good appetites, and all made a hearty supper, after +which the camp was carefully organized, in order to guard against a +surprise from the convicts. Two of the colonists kept guard together in +watches of two hours, but Herbert, in spite of his wishes, was not +allowed to do duty. + +The night passed without incident. The silence was unbroken save by the +growling of jaguars and the chattering of monkeys, which seemed +particularly to annoy Jup. + +The next day, they were unable to accomplish more than six miles. Like +true “frontiersmen,” the colonists avoided the large trees and cut down +only the smaller ones, so that their road was a winding one. + +During the day Herbert discovered some specimens of the tree ferns, +with vase-shaped leaves, and the algarobabeau (St. John’s bread), which +the onagers eat greedily. Splendid kauris, disposed in groups, rose to +a height of two hundred feet, their cylindrical trunks surmounted by a +crown of verdure. + +As to fauna, they discovered no new specimens, but they saw, without +being able to approach them, a couple of large birds, such as are +common in Australia, a sort of cassowary, called emus, which were five +feet high, of brown plumage, and belonged to the order of runners. Top +tried his best to catch them, but they outran him easily, so great was +their speed. + +The colonists again found traces of the convicts. Near a +recently-extinguished fire they found footprints, which they examined +with great attention. By measuring these tracks they were able to +determine the presence of five men. The five convicts had evidently +camped here; but—and they made minute search—they could not discover a +sixth track, which would have been that of Ayrton. + +“Ayrton is not with them!” said Herbert. + +“No,” replied Pencroff, “the wretches have shot him.” But they must +have a den, to which we can track them.” + +“No,” replied the reporter. “It is more likely that they intend to camp +about in places, after this manner, until they become masters of the +island.” + +“Masters of the island!” cried the sailor. “Masters of the island, +indeed” he repeated in a horrified voice. Then he added:—— + +“The ball in my gun is the one which wounded Herbert and it will do its +errand!” + +But this just reprisal would not restore Ayrton to life, and the only +conclusion to be drawn, from the footprints was that they would never +see him again! + +That evening the camp was made fourteen miles front Granite House, and +Smith estimated that it was still five miles to Reptile End. + +The next day this point was reached, and the full length of the forest +had been traversed; but nothing indicated the retreat of the convicts, +nor the asylum of the mysterious unknown. + + + + +CHAPTER LIV. + + +EXPLORATION OF REPTILE END—CAMP AT THE MOUTH OF FALL RIVER—BY THE +CORRAL—THE RECONNOISSANCE—THE RETURN—FORWARD—AN OPEN DOOR—A LIGHT IN +THE WINDOW—BY MOONLIGHT. + + +The next day, the 18th, was devoted to an exploration of the wooded +shore lying between Reptile End and Fall River. The colonists were +searching through the heart of the forest, whose width, bounded by the +shores of the promontory, was from three to four miles. The trees, by +their size and foliage, bore witness to the richness of the soil, more +productive here than in any other portion of the island. It seemed as +if a portion of the virgin forests of America or Central Africa had +been transported here. It seemed, also, as if these superb trees found +beneath the soil, moist on its surface, but heated below by volcanic +fires, a warmth not belonging to a temperate climate. The principal +trees, both in number and size, were the kauris and eucalypti. + +But the object of the colonists was not to admire these magnificent +vegetables. They knew already that, in this respect, their island +merited a first place in the Canaries, called, formerly, the Fortunate +Isles. But, alas! their island no longer belonged to them alone; others +had taken possession, wretches whom it was necessary to destroy to the +last man. + +On the west coast they found no further traces of any kind. + +“This does not astonish me,” said Smith. “The convicts landed near +Jetsam Point, and, after having crossed Tadorn’s Fens, they buried +themselves in the forests of the Far West. They took nearly the same +route which we have followed. That explains the traces we have seen in +the woods. Arrived upon the shore, the convicts saw very clearly that +it offered no convenient shelter, and it was then, on going towards the +north, that they discovered the corral—” + +“Where they may have returned,” said Pencroff. + +“I do not think so,” answered the engineer, “as they would judge that +our searches would be in that direction. The corral is only a +provisional and not a permanent retreat for them.” + +“I think so, too,” said the reporter, “and, further, that they have +sought a hiding place among the spurs of Mount Franklin.” + +“Then let us push on to the corral!” cried Pencroff. “An end must be +put to this thing, and we are only losing time here.” + +“No, my friend,” replied the engineer. + +“You forget that we are interested in determining whether the forests +of the Far West do not shelter some habitation. Our exploration has a +double end, Pencroff; to punish crime and to make a discovery.” + +“That is all very well, sir,” replied the sailor, “but I have an idea +that we will not discover our friend unless he chooses!” + +Pencroff had expressed the opinion of the others as well as his own. It +was, indeed, probable that the retreat of the unknown being was no less +mysterious than his personality. + +This evening the wagon halted at the mouth of Fall River. The +encampment was made in the usual way, with the customary precautions. +Herbert had recovered his former strength by this march in the fresh +salt air, and his place was no longer on the wagon, but at the head of +the line. + +On the 19th, the colonists left the shore and followed up the left bank +of Fall River. The route was already partially cleared, owing to the +previous excursions made from the corral to the west coast. They +reached a place six miles from Mount Franklin. + +The engineer’s project was to observe with great care all the valley +through which flowed the river, and to work cautiously up to the +corral. If they should find it occupied, they were to secure it by main +force, but if it should be empty, it was to be used as the point from +which the explorations of Mount Franklin would be made. + +The road was through a narrow valley, separating two of the most +prominent spurs of Mount Franklin. The trees grew closely together on +the banks of the river, but were more scattered on the upper slopes. +The ground was very much broken, affording excellent opportunities for +an ambush, so that it was necessary to advance with great caution. Top +and Jup went ahead, exploring the thickets on either hand, but nothing +indicated either the presence or nearness of the convicts, or that +these banks had been recently visited. + +About 5 o’clock the wagon halted 600 paces from the enclosure, hidden +by a curtain of tall trees. + +It was necessary to reconnoitre the place, in order to find out whether +it was occupied, but to do this in the day-time was to run the risk of +being shot; nevertheless Spilett wanted to make the experiment at once, +and Pencroff, out of all patience, wanted to go with him. But Smith +would not permit it. + +“No, my friends,” said he, “wait until nightfall. I will not allow one +of you to expose yourselves in the daylight.” + +“But, sir,”—urged the sailor, but little disposed to obey. + +“Pray do not go, Pencroff,” said the engineer. + +“All right,” said the sailor. But he gave vent to his anger by calling +the convicts everything bad that he could think of. + +The colonists remained about the wagon, keeping a sharp lookout in the +adjoining parts of the forest. + +Three hours passed in this manner. The wind fell, and absolute silence +reigned over everything. The slightest sound—the snapping of a twig, a +step on the dry leaves—could easily have been heard. But all was quiet. +Top rested with his head between his paws, giving no sign of +inquietude. + +By 8 o’clock the evening was far enough advanced for the reconnoissance +to be undertaken, and Spilett and Pencroff set off alone. Top and Jup +remained behind with the others, as it was necessary that no bark or +cry should give the alarm. + +“Do not do anything imprudently,” urged Smith. “Remember, you are not +to take possession of the corral, but only to find out whether it is +occupied or not.” + +“All right,” answered Pencroff. + +The two set out, advancing with the greatest caution. Under the trees, +the darkness was such as to render objects, thirty or forty paces +distant, invisible. Five minutes after having left the wagon they +reached the edge of the opening, at the end of which rose the fence of +the enclosure. Here they halted. Some little light still illuminated +the glade. Thirty paces distant was the gate of the corral, which +seemed to be closed. These thirty paces which it was necessary to cross +constituted, to use a ballistic expression, the dangerous zone, as a +shot from the palisade would certainly have killed any one venturing +himself within this space, + +Spilett and the sailor were not men to shirk danger, but they knew that +any imprudence of theirs would injure their companions as well as +themselves. If they were killed what would become of the others? + +Nevertheless, Pencroff was so excited in finding himself again close to +the corral that he would have hurried forward had not the strong hand +of Spilett detained him. “In a few minutes it will be dark,” whispered +the reporter. + +Pencroff grasped his gun nervously, and waited unwillingly. + +Very soon the last rays of light disappeared. Mount Franklin loomed +darkly against the western sky, and the night fell with the rapidity +peculiar to these low latitudes. Now was the time. + +The reporter and Pencroff, ever since their arrival on the edge of the +wood, had watched the corral. It seemed to be completely deserted. The +upper edge of the palisade was in somewhat stronger relief than the +surrounding shades, and nothing broke its outlines. Nevertheless, if +the convicts were there, they must have posted one of their number as a +guard. + +Spilett took the hand of his companion, and crept cautiously forward to +the gate of the corral. Pencroff tried to push it open, but it was, as +they had supposed, fastened. But the sailor discovered that the outer +bars were not in place. They, therefore, concluded that the convicts +were within, and had fastened the gate so that it could only be broken +open. + +They listened. No sound broke the silence. The animals were doubtless +sleeping in their sheds. Should they scale the fence? It was contrary +to Smith’s instructions. They might be successful or they might fail. +And, if there was now a chance of surprising the convicts, should they +risk that chance in this way? + +The reporter thought not. He decided that it would be better to wait +until they were all together before making the attempt. Two things were +certain, that they could reach the fence unseen, and that the place +seemed unguarded. + +Pencroff, probably, agreed to this, for he returned with the reporter +to the wood, and a few minutes later Smith was informed of the +situation. + +“Well,” said he after reflecting for a moment, “I don’t think that the +convicts are here.” + +“We will find out when we have climbed in.” cried Pencroff. + +“To the corral, my friends.” + +“Shall we leave the wagon in the wood?” cried Neb. + +“No,” said Smith, “it may serve as a defense in case of need.” + +The wagon issued from the wood and rolled noiselessly over the ground. +The darkness and the silence were profound. The colonists kept their +guns in readiness to fire. Jup kept behind, at Pencroff’s order, and +Neb held Top. + +Soon the dangerous zone was crossed, and the wagon was drawn up beside +the fence. Neb stood at the head of the onagers to keep them quiet, and +the others went to the gate to determine if it was barricaded on the +inside. + +One of its doors was open! + +“What did you tell us?” exclaimed the engineer, turning to the sailor +and Spilett. + +They were stupefied with amazement. + +“Upon my soul,” cried the sailor, “It was shut a minute ago!” + +The colonists hesitated. The convicts must have been in the corral when +Pencroff and the reporter had made their reconnoissance; for the gate +could only have been opened by them. Were they still there? + +At this moment, Herbert, who had ventured some steps within the +inclosure, rushed back and seized Smith’s hand. + +“What have you seen?” asked the engineer. + +“A light!” + +“In the house?” + +“Yes, sir.” + +All went forward and saw a feeble ray of light trembling through the +windows of the building. + +Smith determined what to do at once. + +“It is a fortunate chance, finding the convicts shut up in this house +not expecting anything! They are ours! Come on!” + +The wagon was left under charge of Top and Jup, and the colonists +glided into the enclosure. In a few moments they were before the closed +door of the house. + +Smith, making a sign to his companions not to move, approached the +window. He looked into the one room which formed the lower story of the +building. On the table was a lighted lantern, Near by was Ayrton’s bed. +On it was the body of a man. + +Suddenly, Smith uttered a stiffled exclamation. + +“Ayrton!” he cried. + +And, at once, the door was rather forced than opened, and all rushed +into the chamber. + +Ayrton seemed to be sleeping. His face showed marks of long and cruel +suffering. His wrists and ankles were much bruised. + +Smith leaned over him. + +“Ayrton!” cried the engineer, seizing in his arms this man found so +unexpectedly. + +Ayrton opened his eyes, and looked first at Smith, then at the others. + +“You! Is it you?” he cried. + +“Ayrton! Ayrton!” repeated the engineer. + +“Where am I?” + +“In the corral.” + +“Am I alone?” + +“Yes.” + +“Then they will come here!” cried Ayrton. “Look out for yourselves! +Defend yourselves!” and he fell back, fainting. + +“Spilett,” said the engineer, “We may be attacked at any minute. Bring +the wagon inside the enclosure, and bar the gate, and then come back +here.” + +Pencroff, Neb, and the reporter hastened to execute the orders of the +engineer. There was not an instant to be lost. Perhaps the wagon was +already in the hands of the convicts! + +In a moment the reporter and his companions had gained the gate of the +enclosure, behind which they heard Top growling. + +The engineer, leaving Ayrton for a moment, left the house, and held his +gun in readiness to fire. Herbert was beside him. Both scrutinized the +outline of the mountain spur overlooking the corral. If the convicts +were hidden in that place they could pick off the colonists one after +the other. + +Just then the moon appeared in the east above the black curtain of the +forest, throwing a flood of light over the interior of the corral, and +bringing into relief the trees, the little water-course, and the grassy +carpet. Towards the mountain, the house and a part of the palisade +shone white; opposite it, towards the gate, the fence was in shadow. + +A black mass soon showed itself. It was the wagon entering within the +circle of light, and Smith could hear the sound of the gate closing and +being solidly barricaded by his companions. + +But at that moment Top, by a violent effort, broke his fastening, and, +barking furiously, rushed to the extremity of the corral to the right +of the house. + +“Look out, my friends, be ready!” cried Smith. + +The colonists waited, with their guns at the shoulder. Top continued to +bark, and Jup, running towards the dog, uttered sharp cries. + +The colonists, following him, came to the border of the little brook, +overshadowed by large trees. + +And there, in the full moonlight, what did they see? + +Five corpses lay extended upon the bank! + +They were the bodies of the convicts, who, four months before, had +landed upon Lincoln Island. + + + + +CHAPTER LV. + + +AYRTON’S RECITAL—PLANS OF HIS OLD COMRADES—TAKING POSSESSION OF THE +CORRAL—THE RULES OF THE ISLAND—THE GOOD LUCK—RESEARCHES ABOUT MOUNT +FRANKLIN—THE UPPER VALLEYS —SUBTERRANEAN RUMBLINGS—PENCROFF’S ANSWER—AT +THE BOTTOM OF THE CRATER-THE RETURN + + +How had it happened? Who had killed the convicts? Ayrton? No, since the +moment before he had feared their return! + +But Ayrton was now in a slumber from which it was impossible to arouse +him. After he had spoken these few words, he had fallen back upon his +bed, seized by a sudden torpor. + +The colonists, terribly excited, preyed upon by a thousand confused +thoughts, remained all night in the house. The next morning Ayrton +awoke from his sleep, and his companions demonstrated to him their joy +at finding him safe and sound after all these months of separation. + +Then Ayrton related in a few words all that had happened. + +The day after his return to the corral, the 10th of November, just at +nightfall, he had been surprised by the convicts, who had climbed over +the fence. He was tied and gagged and taken to a dark cavern at the +foot of Mount Franklin, where the convicts had a retreat. + +His death had been resolved upon, and he was to be killed the following +day, when one of the convicts recognized him and called him by the name +he had borne in Australia. These wretches, who would have massacred +Ayrton, respected Ben Joyce. + +From this moment Ayrton was subjected to the importunities of his old +comrades. They wished to gain him over to them, and they counted upon +him to take Granite House, to enter that inaccessible dwelling, and to +become masters of the island, after having killed the colonists. + +Ayrton resisted. The former convict, repentant and pardoned, would +rather die than betray his companions. + +For four months, fastened, gagged, watched, he had remained in this +cavern. + +Meanwhile the convicts lived upon the stock in the corral, but did not +inhabit the place. + +On the 11th of November, two of these bandits, inopportunely surprised +by the arrival of the colonists, fired on Herbert, and one of them +returned boasting of having killed one of the inhabitants. His +companion, as we know, had fallen at Smith’s hand. + +One can judge of Ayrton’s despair, when he heard of Herbert’s death! It +left but four of the colonists, almost at the mercy of the convicts! + +Following this event, and during all the time that the colonists, +detained by Herbert’s illness, remained at the corral, the pirates did +not leave their cave; indeed, after having pillaged Prospect Plateau, +they did not deem it prudent to leave it. + +The bad treatment of Ayrton was redoubled. His hands and feet still +bore the red marks of the lines with which he remained bound, day and +night. Each moment he expected to be killed. + +This was the third week in February. The convicts, awaiting a favorable +opportunity, rarely left their retreat, and then only to a point in the +interior or on the west coast. Ayrton had no news of his friends, and +no hopes of seeing them again. + +Finally, the poor unfortunate, enfeebled by bad treatment, fell in a +profound prostration in which he neither saw nor heard anything. From +this moment, he could not say what had happened. + +“But, Mr. Smith,” he added, “since I was imprisoned in this cavern, how +is it that I am here?” + +“How is that the convicts are lying there, dead, in the middle of the +corral?” answered the engineer. + +“Dead!” cried Ayrton, half rising, notwithstanding his feebleness. His +companions assisted him to get up, and all went to the little brook. + +It was broad daylight. There on the shore, in the position in which +they had met their deaths, lay the five convicts. + +Ayrton was astounded. The others looked on without speaking. Then, at a +sign from Smith, Neb and Pencroff examined the bodies. Not a wound was +visible upon them. Only after minute search, Pencroff perceived on the +forehead of one, on the breast of another, on this one’s back, and on +the shoulder of a fourth, a small red mark, a hardly visible bruise, +made by some unknown instrument. + +“There is where they have been hit!” said Smith. + +“But with what sort of a weapon?” cried the reporter. + +“A destructive weapon enough, though unknown to us!” + +“And who has destroyed them?” asked Pencroff. + +“The ruler of the island,” answered Smith, “he who has brought you +here, Ayrton, whose influence is again manifesting itself, who does for +us what we are unable to do for ourselves, and who then hides from us.” + +“Let us search for him!” cried Pencroff. + +“Yes, we will search,” replied Smith; “but the being who accomplishes +such prodigies will not be found until it pleases him to call us to +him!” + +This invisible protection, which nullified their own actions, both +annoyed and affected the engineer. The relative inferiority in which it +placed him wounded his pride. A generosity which so studiously eluded +all mark of recognition denoted a sort of disdain for those benefited, +which, in a measure, detracted from the value of the gift. + +“Let us search,” he repeated, “and Heaven grant that some day we be +permitted to prove to this haughty protector that he is not dealing +with ingrates! What would I not give to be able, in our turn, to repay +him, and to render him, even at the risk of our lives, some signal +service!” + +From this time, this search was the single endeavor of the inhabitants +of Lincoln Island. All tried to discover the answer to this enigma, an +answer which involved the name of a man endowed with an inexplicable, +an almost superhuman power. + +In a short time, the colonists entered the house again, and their +efforts soon restored Ayrton to himself. Neb and Pencroff carried away +the bodies of the convicts and buried them in the wood. Then, Ayrton +was informed by the engineer of all that had happened during his +imprisonment. + +“And now,” said Smith, finishing his recital, “we have one thing more +to do. Half of our task is accomplished; but if the convicts are no +longer to be feared, we did not restore ourselves to the mastership of +the island!” + +“Very well,” replied Spilett, “let us search all the mazes of Mount +Franklin. Let us leave no cavity, no hole unexplored! Ah! if ever a +reporter found himself in the presence of an exciting mystery. I am in +that position!” + +“And we will not return to Granite House,” said Herbert, “until we have +found our benefactor.” + +“Yes,” said Smith, “we will do everything that is possible for human +beings to do—but, I repeat it, we will not find him till he wills it.” + +“Shall we stay here at the corral?” asked Pencroff. + +“Yes,” replied the engineer, “let us remain here. Provisions are +abundant, and we are in the centre of our circle of investigation, and, +moreover, if it is necessary, the wagon can go quickly to Granite +House.” + +“All right,” said Pencroff. “Only one thing.” + +“What is that?” + +“Why, the fine weather is here, and we must not forget that we have a +voyage to make.” + +“A voyage?” asked Spilett. + +“Yes, to Tabor Island. We most put up a notice, indicating our island, +in case the Scotch yacht returns. Who knows that it is not already too +late?” + +“But, Pencroff,” asked Ayrton, “how do you propose to make this +voyage?” + +“Why, on the Good Luck!” + +“The Good Luck!” cried Ayrton. “It’s gone!” + +“Gone!” shouted Pencroff, springing to his feet. + +“Yes. The convicts discovered where the sloop lay, and, a week ago, +they put out to sea in her, and—” + +“And?” said Pencroff, his heart trembling. + +“And, not having Harvey to manage her, they ran her upon the rocks, and +she broke all to pieces!” + +“Oh! the wretches! the pirates! the devils!” exclaimed the sailor. + +“Pencroff,” said Herbert, taking his hand, “we will build another, a +larger Good Luck. We have all the iron, all the rigging of the brig at +our disposal!” + +“But, do you realize,” answered Pencroff, “that it will take at least +five or six months to build a vessel of thirty or forty tons.” + +“We will take our time,” replied the reporter, “and we will give up our +voyage to Tabor Island for this year.” + +“We must make the best of it, Pencroff,” said the engineer, “and I hope +that this delay will not be prejudicial to us.” + +“My poor Good Luck! my poor boat!” exclaimed the sailor, half +broken-hearted at the loss of what was so dear to him. + +The destruction of the sloop was a thing much to be regretted, and it +was agreed that this loss must be repaired as soon as the search was +ended. + +This search was begun the same day, the 19th of February, and lasted +throughout the week. The base of the mountain was composed of a perfect +labyrinth of ravines and gorges, and it was here that the explorations +must be made. No other part of the island was so well suited to hide an +inhabitant who wished to remain concealed. But so great was the +intricacy of these places that Smith explored them by a settled system. + +In the first place, the colonists visited the valley opening to the +south of the volcano, in which Fall River rose. Here was where Ayrton +showed them the cavern of the convicts. This place was in exactly the +same condition as Ayrton had left it. They found here a quantity of +food and ammunition left there as a reserve by the convicts. + +All this beautiful wooded valley was explored with great care, and +then, the south-western spur having been turned, the colonists searched +a narrow gorge where the trees were less numerous. Here the stones took +the place of grass, and the wild goats and moufflons bounded among the +rocks. The arid part of the island began at this part. They saw already +that, of the numerous valleys ramifying from the base of Mount +Franklin, three only, bounded on the west by Fall River and on the east +by Red Creek, were as rich and fertile as the valley of the corral. +These two brooks, which developed into rivers as they progressed, +received the whole of the mountain’s southern water-shed and fertilized +that portion of it. As to the Mercy it was more directly fed by +abundant springs, hidden in Jacamar Wood. + +Now any one of these three valleys would have answered for the retreat +of some recluse, who would have found there all the necessaries of +life. But the colonists had explored each of them without detecting the +presence of man. Was it then at the bottom of these arid gorges, in the +midst of heaps of rocks, in the rugged ravines to the north, between +the streams of lava, that they would find this retreat and its +occupant? + +The northern part of Mount Franklin had at its base two large, arid +valleys strewn with lava, sown with huge rocks, sprinkled with pieces +of obsidian and labradorite. This part required long and difficult +exploration. Here were a thousand cavities, not very comfortable, +perhaps, but completely hidden and difficult of access. The colonists +visited sombre tunnels, made in the plutonic epoch, still blackened by +the fires of other days, which plunged into the heart of the mountain. +They searched these dark galleries by the light of torches, peering +into their least excavations and sounding their lowest depths. But +everywhere was silence, obscurity. It did not seem as if any human +being had ever trodden these antique corridors or an arm displaced one +of these stones. + +Nevertheless, if these places were absolutely deserted, if the +obscurity was complete, Smith was forced to notice that absolute +silence did not reign there. + +Having arrived at the bottom of one of those sombre cavities, which +extended several hundred feet into the interior of the mountain, he was +surprised to hear deep muttering sounds which were intensified by the +sonority of the rocks. + +Spilett, who was with him, also heard these distant murmurs, which +indicated an awakening of the subterranean fires. + +Several times they listened, and they came to the conclusion that some +chemical reaction was going on in the bowels of the earth. + +“The volcano is not entirely extinct,” said the reporter. + +“It is possible that, since our exploration of the crater, something +has happened in its lower regions. All volcanoes, even those which are +said to be extinct, can, evidently, become active again.” + +“But if Mount Franklin is preparing for another eruption, is not +Lincoln Island in danger?” + +“I don’t think so,” answered the engineer, “The crater, that is to say, +the safety-valve, exists, and the overflow of vapors and lavas will +escape, as heretofore, by its accustomed outlet.” + +“Unless the lavas make a new passage towards the fertile parts of the +island.” + +“Why, my dear Spilett, should they not follow their natural course?” + +“Well, volcanoes are capricious.” + +“Notice,” said Smith, “that all the slope of the mountain favors the +flow of eruptive matter towards the valleys which we are traversing at +present. It would take an earthquake to so change the centre of gravity +of the mountain as to modify this slope.” + +“But an earthquake is always possible under these conditions.” + +“True,” replied the engineer, “especially when the subterranean forces +are awakening, and the bowels of the earth, after a long repose, chance +to be obstructed. You are right, my dear Spilett, an eruption would be +a serious thing for us, and it would be better if this volcano has not +the desire to wake up; but we can do nothing. Nevertheless, in any +case, I do not think Prospect Plateau could be seriously menaced. +Between it and the lake there is quite a depression in the land, and +even if the lavas took the road to the lake, they would be distributed +over the downs and the parts adjoining Shark Gulf.” + +“We have not yet seen any smoke from the summit, indicating a near +eruption,” said Spilett. + +“No,” answered the engineer, “not the least vapor has escaped from the +crater. It was but yesterday that I observed its upper part. But it is +possible that rocks, cinders, and hardened lavas have accumulated in +the lower part of its chimney, and, for the moment, this safety-valve +is overloaded. But, at the first serious effort, all obstacles will +disappear, and you may be sure, my dear Spilett, that neither the +island, which is the boiler, nor the volcano, which is the valve, will +burst under the pressure. Nevertheless, I repeat, it is better to wish +for no eruption.” + +“And yet we are not mistaken,” replied the reporter. “We plainly hear +ominous rumblings in the depths of the volcano!” + +“No,” replied the engineer, after listening again with the utmost +attention, “that is not to be mistaken. Something is going on there the +importance of which cannot be estimated nor what the result will be.” + +Smith and Spilett, on rejoining their companions, told them of these +things. + +“All right!” cried Pencroff. “This volcano wants to take care of us! +But let it try! It will find its master!” + +“Who’s that?” asked the negro. + +“Our genius, Neb, our good genius, who will put a gag in the mouth of +the crater if it attempts to open it.” + +The confidence of the sailor in the guardian of the island was +absolute, and, indeed, the occult power which had so far been +manifested seemed limitless; but, thus far this being had escaped all +the efforts the colonists had made to discover him. + +From the 19th to the 25th of February, the investigations were +conducted in the western portion of Lincoln Island, where the most +secret recesses were searched. They even sounded each rocky wall, as +one knocks against the walls of a suspected house. The engineer went so +far as to take the exact measure of the mountain, and he pushed his +search to the last strata sustaining it. It was explored to the summit +of the truncated cone which rose above the first rocky level, and from +there to the upper edge of the enormous cap at the bottom of which +opened the crater. + +They did more; they visited the gulf, still extinct, but in whose +depths the rumblings were distinctly heard. Nevertheless, not a smoke, +not a vapor, no heat in the wall, indicated a near eruption. But +neither there, nor in any other part of Mount Franklin, did the +colonists find the traces of him whom they sought. + +Their investigations were then directed over all the tract of downs. +They carefully examined the high lava walls of Shark Gulf from base to +summit, although it was very difficult to reach the water level. No +one! Nothing! + +These two words summed up in brief the result of all the useless +fatigues Smith and his companions had been at, and they were a trifle +annoyed at their ill success. + +But it was necessary now to think of returning, as these researches +could not be pursued indefinitely. The colonists were convinced that +this mysterious being did not reside upon the surface of the island, +and strange thoughts floated through their over-excited imaginations; +Neb and Pencroff, particularly, went beyond the strange into the region +of the supernatural. The 25th of February, the colonists returned to +Granite House, and by means of the double cord, shot by an arrow to the +door-landing, communication was established with their domain. + +One month later, they celebrated the third anniversary of their arrival +on Lincoln Island. + + + + +CHAPTER LVI. + + +AFTER THREE YEARS—THE QUESTION OF A NEW SHIP—ITS +DETERMINATION—PROSPERITY OF THE COLONY—THE SHIPYARD—THE COLD +WEATHER—PENCROFF RESIGNED—WASHING—MOUNT FRANKLIN. + + +Three years had passed since the prisoners had fled from Richmond, and +in all that time their conversation and their thoughts had been of the +fatherland. + +They had no doubt that the war was ended, and that the North had +triumphed. But how? At what cost? What friends had fallen in the +struggle? They often talked of these things, although they had no +knowledge when they would be able to see that country again. To return, +if only for a few days; to renew their intercourse with civilization; +to establish a communication between their island and the mother +country, and then to spend the greater part of their lives in this +colony which they had founded and which would then be raised to a +metropolis, was this a dream which could not be realized? + +There were but two ways of realizing it: either a ship would some day +show itself in the neighborhood of Lincoln Island, or the colonists +must themselves build a vessel staunch enough to carry them to the +nearest land. + +“Unless our genius furnishes us with the means of returning home,” said +Pencroff. + +And, indeed, if Neb and Pencroff had been told that a 300-ton ship was +waiting for them in Shark Gulf or Balloon Harbor, they would not have +manifested any surprise. In their present condition they expected every +thing. + +But Smith, less confident, urged them to keep to realities, and to +build the vessel, whose need was urgent, since a paper should be placed +on Tabor Island as soon as possible, in order to indicate the new abode +of Ayrton. + +The Good Luck was gone. It would take at least six mouths to build +another vessel, and, as winter was approaching, the voyage could not be +made before the next spring. + +“We have time to prepare ourself for the fine weather,” said the +engineer, talking of these things with Pencroff. “I think, therefore, +since we have to build our own ship, it will be better to make her +dimensions greater than before. The arrival of the + +Scotch yacht is uncertain. It may even have happened that it has come +and gone. What do you think? Would it not be better to build a vessel, +that, in case of need, could carry us to the archipelagoes or New +Zealand?” + +“I think, sir, that you are as able to build a large vessel as a small +one. Neither wood nor tools are wanting. It is only a question of +time.” + +“And how long would it take to build a ship of 250 or 300 tons?” + +“Seven or eight months at least. But we must not forget that winter is +at hand, and that the timber will be difficult to work during the +severe cold. So, allowing for some weeks’ delay, you can be happy if +you have your ship by next November.” + +“Very well, that will be just the season to undertake a voyage of some +length, be it to Tabor Island of further.” + +“All right, Mr. Smith, make your plans. The workmen are ready, and I +guess that Ayrton will lend a helping hand.” + +The engineer’s project met the approval of the colonists, and indeed it +was the best thing to do. It is true that it was a great undertaking, +but they had that confidence in themselves, which is one of the +elements of success. + +While Smith was busy preparing the plans of the vessel, the others +occupied themselves in felling the trees and preparing the timber. The +forests of the Far West furnished the best oak and elm, which were +carried over the new road through the forest to the Chimneys, where the +ship-yard was established. + +It was important that the timber should be cut soon, as it was +necessary to have it seasoning for some time. Therefore the workmen +worked vigorously during April, which was not an inclement month, save +for some violent wind storms. Jup helped them by his adroitness, either +in climbing to the top of a tree to fasten a rope, or by carrying loads +on his strong shoulders. + +The timber was piled under a huge shed to await its use; and, +meanwhile, the work in the fields was pushed forward, so that soon all +traces of the devastation caused by the pirates had disappeared. The +mill was rebuilt, and a new inclosure for the poultry yard. This had to +be much larger than the former, as the number of its occupants had +increased largely. The stables contained five onagas, four of them well +broken, and one little colt. A plough had been added to the stock of +the colony, and the onagas were employed in tillage as if they were +Yorkshire or Kentucky cattle. All the colonists did their share, and +there were no idle hands. And thus, with good health and spirits, they +formed a thousand projects for the future. + +Ayrton, of course, partook of the common existence, and spoke no longer +of returning to the corral. Nevertheless, he was always quiet and +uncommunicative, and shared more in the work than the pleasure of his +companions. He was a strong workman, vigorous, adroit, intelligent, and +he could not fail to see that he was esteemed and loved by the others. +But the corral was not abandoned. Every other day some one went there +and brought back the supply of milk for the colony, and these occasions +were also hunting excursions. So that, Herbert and Spilett, with Top in +advance, oftenest made the journey, and all kinds of game abounded in +the kitchen of Granite House. The products of the warren and the +oyster-bed, some turtles, a haul of excellent salmon, the vegetables +from the plateau, the natural fruits of the forest, were riches upon +riches, and Neb, the chief cook, found it difficult to store them all +away. + +The telegraph had been repaired, and was used whenever one of the party +remained over night at the corral. But the island was secure now from +any aggression—at least from men. + +Nevertheless, what had happened once might happen again, and a descent +of pirates was always to be feared. And it was possible that +accomplices of Harvey, still in Norfolk, might be privy to his projects +and seek to imitate them. Every day the colonists searched the horizon +visible from Granite House with the glass, and whenever they were at +the corral they examined the west coast. Nothing appeared, but they +were always on the alert. + +One evening the engineer told his companions of a project to fortify +the corral. It seemed prudent to heighten the palisade, and to flank it +with a sort of block house, in which the colonists could defend +themselves against a host of enemies. Granite House, owing to its +position, was impregnable, and the corral would always be the objective +point of pirates. + +About the 15th of May the keel of the new vessel was laid, and the stem +and stern posts raised. This keel was of oak, 110 feet long, and the +breadth of beam was 25 feet. But, with the exception of putting up a +couple of the frame pieces, this was all that could be done before the +bad weather and the cold set in. + +During the latter part of the month the weather was very inclement. +Pencroff and Ayrton worked as long as they were able, but severely cold +weather following the rain made the wood impossible to handle, and by +the 10th of June the work was given up entirely, and the colonists were +often obliged to keep in-doors. + +This confinement was hard for all of them, but especially so for +Spilett. + +“I’ll tell you what, Neb,” he said, “I will give you everything I own +if you will get me a newspaper! All that I want to make me happy is to +know what is going on in the world!” + +Neb laughed. + +“Faith!” said he, “I am busy enough with my daily work.” + +And, indeed, occupation was not wanting. The colony was at the summit +of prosperity. The accident to the brig had been a new source of +riches. Without counting a complete outfit of sails, which would answer +for the new ship, utensils and tools of all sorts, ammunition, +clothing, and instruments filled the store-rooms of Granite House. +There was no longer a necessity to manufacture cloth in the felting +mill. Linen, also, was plenty, and they took great care of it. From the +chloride of sodium Smith had easily extracted soda and chlorine. The +soda was easily transformed into carbonate of soda, and the chlorine +was employed for various domestic purposes, but especially for cleaning +the linen. Moreover, they made but four washings a year, as was the +custom in old times, and Pencroff and Spilett, while waiting for the +postman to bring the paper, made famous washermen! + +Thus passed June, July, and August; very rigorous months, in which the +thermometer measured but 8° Fahrenheit. But a good fire burned in the +chimney of Granite House, and the superfluity of wood from the +ship-yard enabled them to economize the coal, which required a longer +carriage. + +All, men and beasts, enjoyed good health. Jup, it is true, shivered a +little with the cold, and they had to make him a good wadded wrapper. +What servant he was! Adroit, zealous, indefatigable, not indiscreet, +not talkative. He was, indeed, a model for his biped brethren in the +New and the Old World! + +“But, after all,” said Pencroff “when one has four hands, they cannot +help doing their work well!” + +During the seven months that had passed since the exploration of the +mountain nothing had been seen or heard of the genius of the island. +Although, it is true, that nothing had happened to the colonists +requiring his assistance. + +Smith noticed, too, that the growling of the dog and the anxiety of the +orang had ceased during this time. These two friends no longer ran to +the orifice of the well nor acted in that strange way which had +attracted the attention of the engineer. But did this prove that +everything had happened that was going to happen? That they were never +to find an answer to the enigma? Could it be affirmed that no new +conjunction of circumstances would make this mysterious personage +appear again? Who knows what the future may bring forth? + +On the 7th of September, Smith, looking towards Mount Franklin, saw a +smoke rising and curling above the crater. + + + + +CHAPTER LVII. + + +THE AWAKENING OF THE VOLCANO—THE FINE WEATHER—RESUMPTION OF WORK—THE +EVENING OF THE 15TH OF OCTOBER—A TELEGRAPH—A DEMAND—AN ANSWER—DEPARTURE +FOR THE CORRAL—THE NOTICE—THE EXTRA WIRE—THE BASALT WALL—AT HIGH +TIDE—AT LOW TIDE—THE CAVERN—A DAZZLING LIGHT. + + +The colonists, called by Smith, had left their work, and gazed in +silence at the summit of Mount Franklin. + +The volcano had certainly awakened, and its vapors had penetrated the +mineral matter of the crater, but no one could say whether the +subterranean fires would bring on a violent eruption. + +But, even supposing an eruption, it was not likely that Lincoln Island +would suffer in every part. The discharges of volcanic matter are not +always disastrous. That the island had already been subjected to an +eruption was evident from the currents of lava spread over the western +slope of the mountain. Moreover, the shape of the crater was such as to +vomit matter in the direction away from the fertile parts of the +island. + +Nevertheless, what had been was no proof of what would be. Often the +old craters of volcanoes close and new ones open. An earthquake +phenomenon, often accompanying volcanic action, may do this by changing +the interior arrangement of the mountain and opening new passages for +the incandescent lavas. + +Smith explained these things to his companions, and without +exaggerating the situation, showed them just what might happen. + +After all, they could do nothing. Granite House did not seem to be +menaced, unless by a severe earthquake. But all feared for the corral, +if any new crater opened in the mountain. + +From this time the vapor poured from the cone without cessation, and, +indeed, increased in density and volume, although no flame penetrated +its thick folds. The phenomenon was confined, as yet, to the lower part +of the central chimney. + +Meanwhile, with good weather, the work out of doors had been resumed. +They hastened the construction of the ship, and Smith established a +saw-mill at the waterfall, which cut the timber much more rapidly. + +Towards the end of September the frame of the ship, which was to be +schooner-rigged, was so far completed that its shape could be +recognized. The schooner, sheer forward and wide aft, was well adapted +for a long voyage, in case of necessity, but the planking, lining, and +decking still demanded a long time before they could be finished. +Fortunately, the iron-work of the brig had been saved after the +explosion, and Pencroff and Ayrton had obtained a great quantity of +copper nails from the broken timber, which economized the labor for the +smiths; nevertheless the carpenters had much to accomplish. + +Often, however, after the day’s work was ended, the colonists sat late +into the night, conversing together of the future and what might happen +in a voyage in the schooner to the nearest land. But in discussing +these projects they always planned to return to Lincoln Island. Never +would they abandon this colony, established with so much difficulty, +but so successfully, and which would receive a new development through +communication with America. + +Pencroff and Neb, indeed, hoped to end their days here. + +“Herbert,” asked the sailor, “you would never abandon Lincoln Island?” + +“Never, Pencroff, especially if you made up your mind to remain.” + +“Then, it’s agreed, my boy. I shall expect you! You will bring your +wife and children here, and I will make a jolly playmate for the +babies!” + +“Agreed,” answered Herbert, laughing and blushing at the same time. + +“And you, Mr. Smith,” continued the sailor, enthusiastically, “you will +always remain governor of the island! And, by the way, how many +inhabitants can the island support? Ten thousand, at the very least!” + +They chatted in this way, letting Pencroff indulge in his whims, and +one thing leading to another, the reporter finished by founding the +_New Lincoln Herald_! + +Thus it is with the spirit of man. The need of doing something +permanent, something which will survive him, is the sign of his +superiority over everything here below. It is that which has +established and justifies his domination over the whole world. + +After all, who knows if Jup and Top had not their dream of the future? + +Ayrton, silent, said to himself that he wanted to see Lord Glenarvan, +and show him the change in himself. + +One evening, the 15th of October, the conversation was prolonged longer +than usual. It was 9 o’clock, and already, long, ill-concealed yawns +showed that it was bed-time. Pencroff was about starting in that +direction, when, suddenly, the electric bell in the hall rang. + +Every one was present, so none of their party could be at the corral. + +Smith rose. His companions looked as if they had not heard aright. + +“What does he want?” cried Neb. “Is it the devil that’s ringing?” + +No one replied. + +“It is stormy weather,” said Herbert; “perhaps the electric +influence——” + +Herbert did not finish the sentence. The engineer, towards whom all +were looking, shook his head. + +“Wait a minute,” said Spilett. “If it is a signal, it will be +repeated.” + +“But what do you think it is?” asked Neb. + +“Perhaps it——” + +The sailor’s words were interrupted by another ring. + +Smith went to the apparatus, and, turning on the current, telegraphed +to the corral:—— + +“What do you want?” + +A few minutes later the needle, moving over the lettered card, gave +this answer to the inmates of Granite House:— + +“Come to the corral as quickly as possible.” + +“At last!” cried Smith. + +Yes! At last! The mystery was about to be solved! Before the strong +interest in what was at the corral, all fatigue and need of repose +vanished. Without saying a word, in a few minutes they were out of +Granite House and following the shore. Only Top and Jup remained +behind. + +The night was dark. The moon, new this day, had set with the sun. Heavy +clouds obscured the stars, but now and then heat-lightning, the +reflection of a distant storm, illuminated the horizon. + +But, great as the darkness was, it could not hinder persons as familiar +with the route as were the colonists. All were very much excited, and +walked rapidly. There could be no doubt that they were going to find +the answer to the engineer, the name of that mysterious being, who was +so generous in his influence, so powerful to accomplish! It could not +be doubted that this unknown had been familiar with the least detail of +their daily lives, that he overheard all that was said in Granite +House. + +Each one, lost in his reflections, hurried onward. The darkness under +the trees was such that the route was invisible. There was no sound in +the forest. Not a breath of wind moved the leaves. + +This silence during the first quarter of an hour was uninterrupted, +save by Pencroff, who said:—— + +“We should have brought a lantern.” + +And by the engineer’s answer:—— + +“We will find one at the corral.” + +Smith and his companions had left Granite House at twelve minutes past +9. In thirty-five minutes they had traversed three of the five miles +between the mouth of the Mercy and the corral. + +Just then, brilliant flashes of lightning threw the foliage into strong +relief. The storm was evidently about to burst upon them. The flashes +became more frequent and intense. Heavy thunder rolled through the +heavens. The air was stifling. + +The colonists rushed on, as if impelled by some irresistible force. + +At a quarter past 9, a sudden flash showed them the outline of the +palisade; and scarcely had they passed the gateway when there came a +terrible clap of thunder. In a moment the corral was crossed, and Smith +stood before the house. It was possible that the unknown being was +here, since it was from this place that the telegraph had come. +Nevertheless, there was no light in the window. + +The engineer knocked at the door, but without response. + +He opened it, and the colonists entered the room, which was in utter +darkness. + +A light was struck by Neb, and in a moment the lantern was lit, and its +light directed into every corner of the chamber. + +No one was there, and everything remained undisturbed. + +“Are we victims to a delusion?” murmured Smith. + +No! that was impossible! The telegraph had certainly said:—— + +“Come to the corral quickly as possible.” + +He went to the table on which the apparatus was arranged. Everything +was in place and in order. + +“Who was here last?” asked the engineer. + +“I, sir,” answered Ayrton. + +“And that was——” + +“Four days ago.” + +“Ah! here is something!” exclaimed Herbert, pointing to a paper lying +on the table. + +On the paper were these words, written in English:—— + +“Follow the new wire.” + +“Come on!” cried Smith, who comprehended in a moment that the dispatch +had not been sent from the corral, but from the mysterious abode which +the new wire united directly with Granite House. + +Neb took the lantern and all left the corral. + +Then the storm broke forth with extreme violence. Flashes of lightning +and peals of thunder followed in rapid succession. The island was the +centre of the storm. By the flashes of lightning they could see the +summit of Mount Franklin enshrouded in smoke. + +There were no telegraph poles inside the corral, but the engineer, +having passed the gate, ran to the nearest post, and saw there a new +wire fastened to the insulator, and reaching to the ground. + +“Here it is!” he cried. + +The wire lay along the ground, and was covered with some insulating +substance, like the submarine cables. By its direction it seemed as if +it went towards the west, across the woods, and the southern spurs of +the mountain. + +“Let us follow it,” said Smith. + +And sometimes by the light of the lantern, sometimes by the +illumination of the heavens, the colonists followed the way indicated +by the thread. + +They crossed in the first place, the spur of the mountain between the +valley of the corral and that of Fall River, which stream was crossed +in its narrowest part. The wire, sometimes hanging on the lower +branches of the trees, sometimes trailing along the ground, was a sure +guide. + +The engineer had thought that, perhaps, the wire would end at the +bottom of the valley, and that the unknown retreat was there. + +But not so. It extended over the southwestern spur and descended to the +arid plateau which ended that fantastic wall of basalt. Every now and +then one or other of the party stooped and took the direction of the +wire. There could be no doubt that it ran directly to the sea. There, +doubtless, in some profound chasm in the igneous rocks, was the +dwelling so vainly sought for until now. + +At a few minutes before 10, the colonists arrived upon the high coast +overhanging the ocean. Here the wire wound among the rocks, following a +steep slope down a narrow ravine. + +The colonists followed it, at the risk of bringing down upon themselves +a shower of rocks or of being precipitated into the sea. The descent +was extremely perilous, but they thought not of the danger; they were +attracted to this mysterious place as the needle is drawn to the +magnet. + +At length, the wire making a sudden turn, touched the shore rocks, +which were beaten by the sea. The colonists had reached the base of the +granite wall. + +Here there was a narrow projection running parallel and horizontal to +the sea. The thread led along this point, and the colonists followed. +They had not proceeded more than a hundred paces, when this projection, +by a south inclination, sloped down into the water. + +The engineer seized the wire and saw that it led down into the sea. + +His companions stood, stupefied, beside him. + +Then a cry of disappointment, almost of despair, escaped them! Must +they throw themselves into the water and search some submarine cavern? +In their present state of excitement, they would not have hesitated to +have done it. + +An observation made by the engineer stopped them. He led his companions +to the shelter of a pile of rocks and said:—— + +“Let as wait here. The tide is up. At low water the road will be open.” + +“But how do you think—” began Pencroff. + +“He would not have called us, unless the means of reaching him had been +provided.” + +Smith had spoken with an air of conviction, and, moreover, his +observation was logical. It was, indeed, quite possible that an opening +existed at low water which was covered at present. + +It was necessary to wait some hours. The colonists rested in silence +under their shelter. The rain began to fall in torrents. The echoes +repeated the roaring of the thunder in sonorous reverberations. + +At midnight the engineer took the lantern and went down to the water’s +edge. It was still two hours before low tide. + +Smith had not been mistaken. The entrance to a vast excavation began to +be visible, and the wire, turning at a right angle, entered this +yawning mouth. + +Smith returned to his companions and said:—— + +“In an hour the opening will be accessible.” + +“Then there is one,” said Pencroff. + +“Do you doubt it?” replied Smith. + +“But it will be half full of water,” said Herbert. + +“Either it will be perfectly dry,” answered the engineer, “in which +case we will walk, or it will not be dry, and some means of transport +will be furnished us.” + +An hour passed. All went down through the rain to the sea. In these +hours the tide had fallen fifteen feet. The top of the mouth of the +opening rose eight feet above the water, like the arch of a bridge. + +Looking in, the engineer saw a black object floating on the surface. He +drew it toward him. It was a canoe made of sheet-iron bolted together. +It was tied to a projecting rock inside the cavern wall. A pair of oars +were under the seats. + +“Get in,” said Smith. + +The colonists entered the boat, Neb and Ayrton took the oars, Pencroff +the tiller, and Smith, in the bows holding the lantern, lit the way. + +The vault, at first very low, rose suddenly; but the darkness was too +great for them to recognize the size of this cavern, its heighth and +depth. An imposing silence reigned throughout this granite chamber. No +sound, not even the pealing of the thunder penetrated its massive +walls. + +In certain parts of the world there are immense caves, a sort of +natural crypts which date back to the geologic epoch. Some are invaded +by the sea; others contain large lakes within their walls. Such is +Fingal’s Cave, in the Island of Staffa; such are the caves of Morgat on +the Bay of Douarnenez in Brittany; the caves of Bonifacio, in Corsica; +those of Lyse-Fjord, in Norway; such is that immense cavern, the +Mammoth Cave of Kentucky, which is 500 feet high and more than twenty +miles long! + +As to this cavern which the colonists were exploring, did it not reach +to the very centre of the island? For a quarter of an hour the canoe +advanced under the directions of the engineer. At a certain moment he +said:—— + +“Go over to the right.” + +The canoe, taking this direction, brought up beside the wall. The +engineer wished to observe whether the wire continued along this side. + +It was there fastened to the rock. + +“Forward!” said Smith. + +The canoe kept on a quarter of an hour longer, and it must have been +half a mile from the entrance, when Smith’s voice was heard again. + +“Halt!” he exclaimed. + +The canoe stopped, and the colonists saw a brilliant light illuminating +the enormous crypt, so profoundly hidden in the bowels of the earth. + +They were now enabled to examine this cavern of whose existence they +had had no suspicion. + +A vault, supported on basaltic shafts, which might all have been cast +in the same mould, rose to a height of 100 feet. Fantastic arches +sprung at irregular intervals from these columns, which Nature had +placed here by thousands. They rose to a height of forty or fifty feet, +and the water, in despite of the tumult without, quietly lapped their +base. The light noticed by the engineer seized upon each prismatic +point and tipped it with fire; penetrated, so to speak, the walls as if +they had been diaphanous, and changed into sparkling jewels the least +projections of the cavern. + +Following a phenomenon of reflection, the water reproduced these +different lights upon its surface, so that the canoe seemed to float +between two sparkling zones. + +They had not yet thought of the nature of irradiation projected by the +luminous centre whose rays, straight and clear, were broken on all the +angles and mouldings of the crypt. The white color of this light +betrayed its origin. It was electric. It was the sun of this cavern. + +On a sign from Smith, the oars fell again into the water, and the canoe +proceeded towards the luminous fire, which was half a cable’s length +distant. + +In this place, the sheet of water measured some 300 feet across, and an +enormous basaltic wall, closing all that side, was visible beyond the +luminous centre. The cavern had become much enlarged, and the sea here +formed a little lake. But the vault, the side walls, and those of the +apsis, all the prisms, cylinders, cones, were bathed in the electric +fluid. + +In the centre of the lake a long fusiform object floated on the surface +of the water, silent, motionless. The light escaped from its sides as +from two ovens heated to a white heat. This machine, looking like the +body of an enormous cetacea, was 250 feet long, and rose ten to twelve +feet above the water. + +The canoe approached softly. In the bows stood Smith. He was greatly +excited. Suddenly he seized the arm of the reporter. + +“It is he! It can be no other than he.” he cried. “He!——” + +Then he fell back upon the seat murmuring a name which Spilett alone +heard. + +Doubtless the reporter knew this name, for it affected him strangely, +and he answered in a hoarse voice:—— + +“He! a man outlawed!” + +“The same!” said Smith. + +Under the engineer’s direction the canoe approached this singular +floating machine, and came up to it on its left side, from which +escaped a gleam of light through a thick glass. + +Smith and his companions stepped on to the platform. An open hatchway +was there, down which all descended. + +At the bottom of the ladder appeared the waist of the vessel lit up by +electric light. At the end of the waist was a door, which Smith pushed +open. + +A richly ornamented library, flooded with light, was rapidly crossed by +the colonists. Beyond, a large door, also closed, was pushed open by +the engineer. + +A vast saloon, a sort of museum, in which were arranged all the +treasures of the mineral world, works of art, marvels of industry, +appeared before the eyes of the colonists, who seemed to be transported +to the land of dreams. + +Extended upon a rich divan they saw a man, who seemed unaware of their +presence. + +Then Smith raised his voice, and, to the extreme surprise of his +companions, pronounced these words:—— + +“Captain Nemo, you have called us. Here we are.’ + + + + +CHAPTER LVIII. + + +CAPTAIN NEMO—HIS FIRST WORDS—HISTORY OF A HERO OF LIBERTY—HATRED OF THE +INVADERS—HIS COMPANIONS—THE LIFE UNDER WATER—ALONE—THE LAST REFUGE OF +THE NAUTILUS—THE MYSTERIOUS GENIUS OF THE ISLAND. + + +At these words the man arose, and the light shone full upon his face: a +magnificent head, with abundance of hair thrown back from a high +forehead, a white beard, and an expression of haughtiness. + +This man stood, resting one hand upon the divan, from which he had +risen. One could see that a slow disease had broken him down, but his +voice was still powerful, when he said in English, and in a tone of +extreme surprise:—— + +“I have no name, sir!” + +“I know you!” answered Smith. + +Captain Nemo looked at the engineer as if he would have annihilated +him. Then, falling back upon the cushions, he murmured:—— + +“After all, what does it matter; I am dying!” + +Smith approached Captain Nemo, and Spilett took his hand, which was hot +with fever. The others stood respectfully in a corner of the superb +saloon, which was flooded with light. + +Captain Nemo withdrew his hand, and signed to Smith and the reporter to +be seated. + +All looked at him with lively emotion. Here was the being whom they had +called the “genius of the island,” the being whose intervention had +been so efficacious, the benefactor to whom they owed so much. Before +their eyes, here where Pencroff and Neb had expected to find some +godlike creature, was only a man-a dying man! + +But how did Smith know Captain Nemo? Why had the latter sprung up on +hearing that name pronounced? + +The Captain had taken his seat upon the divan, and, leaning upon his +arm, he regarded the engineer, who was seated near him. + +“You know the name I bore?” he asked. + +“I know it as well as I know the name of this admirable submarine +apparatus.” + +“The Nautilus,” said the Captain, with a half smile. + +“The Nautilus.” + +“But do you know-do you know, who I am?” + +“I do.” + +“For thirty years I have had no communication with the inhabited world, +for thirty years have I lived in the depths of the sea, the only place +where I have found freedom! Who, now, has betrayed my secret?” + +“A man who never pledged you his word, Captain Nemo, one who, +therefore, cannot be accused of betraying you.” + +“The Frenchman whom chance threw in my way?” + +“The same.” + +“Then this man and his companions did not perish in the maelstrom into +which the Nautilus had been drawn?” + +“They did not, and there has appeared under the title of _Twenty +Thousand Leagues Under the Sea_, a work which contains your history.” + +“The history of but a few months of my life, sir,” answered the +Captain, quickly. + +“True,” replied Smith, “but a few months of that strange life sufficed +to make you known—” + +“As a great criminal, doubtless,” said Captain Nemo, smiling +disdainfully. “Yes, a revolutionist, a scourge to humanity.” + +The engineer did not answer. + +“Well, sir?” + +“I am unable to judge Captain Nemo,” said Smith, “at least in what +concerns his past life. I, like the world at large, am ignorant of the +motives for this strange existence, and I am unable to judge of the +effects without knowing the causes, but what I do know is that a +beneficent hand has been constantly extended to us since our arrival +here, that we owe everything to a being good, generous, and powerful, +and that this being, powerful, generous, and good, is you, Captain +Nemo!” + +“It is I,” answered the captain, quietly. + +The engineer and the reporter had risen, the others had drawn near, and +the gratitude which swelled their hearts would have sought expression +in words and gesture, when Captain Nemo signed to them to be silent, +and in a voice more moved, doubtless, than he wished:— + +“When you have heard me,” he said. And then, in a few short, clear +sentences, he told them the history of his life. + +The history was brief. Nevertheless, it took all his remaining strength +to finish it. It was evident that he struggled against an extreme +feebleness. Many times Smith urged him to take some rest, but he shook +his head, like one who knew that for him there would be no to-morrow, +and when the reporter offered his services— + +“They are useless,” he answered, “my hours are numbered.” + +Captain Nemo was an Indian prince, the Prince Dakkar, the son of the +rajah of the then independent territory of Bundelkund, and nephew of +the hero of India, Tippo Saib. His father sent him, when ten years old, +to Europe, where he received a complete education; and it was the +secret intention of the rajah to have his son able some day to engage +in equal combat with those whom he considered as the oppressors of his +country. + +From ten years of age until he was thirty, the Prince Dakkar, with +superior endowments, of high heart and courage, instructed himself in +everything; pushing his investigations in science, literature, and art +to the uttermost limits. + +He travelled over all Europe. His birth and fortune made his company +much sought after, but the seductions of the world possessed no charm +for him. Young and handsome, he remained serious, gloomy, with an +insatiable thirst for knowledge, with implacable anger fixed in his +heart. + +He hated. He hated the only country where he had never wished to set +foot, the only nation whose advances he had refused: he hated England +more and more as he admired her. This Indian summed up in his own +person all the fierce hatred of the vanquished against the victor. The +invader is always unable to find grace with the invaded. The son of one +of those sovereigns whose submission to the United Kingdom was only +nominal, the prince of the family of Tippo-Saib, educated in ideas of +reclamation and vengeance, with a deep-seated love for his poetic +country weighed down with the chains of England, wished never to place +his foot on that land, to him accursed, that land to which India owed +her subjection. + +The Prince Dakkar became an artist, with a lively appreciation of the +marvels of art; a savant familiar with the sciences; a statesman +educated in European courts. In the eyes of a superficial observer, he +passed, perhaps, for one of those cosmopolites, curious after +knowledge, but disdaining to use it; for one of those opulent +travellers, high-spirited and platonic, who go all over the world and +are of no one country. + +It was not so. This artist, this savant, this man was Indian to the +heart, Indian in his desire for vengeance, Indian in the hope which he +cherished of being able some day to re-establish the rights of his +country, of driving on the stranger, of making it independent. + +He returned to Bundelkund in the year 1849. He married a noble Indian +woman whose heart bled as his did at the woes of their country. He had +two children whom he loved. But domestic happiness could not make him +forget the servitude of India. He waited for an opportunity. At length +it came. + +The English yoke was pressed, perhaps, too heavily upon the Indian +people. The Prince Dakkar became the mouthpiece of the malcontents. He +instilled into their spirits all the hatred he felt against the +strangers. He went over not only the independent portions of the Indian +peninsula, but into those regions directly submitted to the English +control. He recalled to them the grand days of Tippo-Saib, who died +heroically at Seringapatam for the defense of his country. + +In 1857 the Sepoy mutiny broke forth. Prince Dakkar was its soul. He +organized that immense uprising. He placed his talents and his wealth +at the service of that cause. He gave himself; he fought in the first +rank; he risked his life as the humblest of those heroes who had risen +to free their country; he was wounded ten times in twenty battles, and +was unable to find death when the last soldiers of independence fell +before the English guns. + +Never had British rule in India been in such danger; and, had the +Sepoys received the assistance from without which they had hoped for, +Asia would not to-day, perhaps, be under the dominion of the United +Kingdom. + +At that time the name of Prince Dakkar was there illustrious. He never +hid himself, and he fought openly. A price was put upon his head, and +although he was not delivered up by any traitor, his father, mother, +wife, and children suffered for him before he knew of the dangers which +they ran on his account. + +Once again right fell before might. Civilization never goes backwards, +and her laws are like those of necessity. The Sepoys were vanquished, +and the country of the ancient rajahs fell again under the strict rule +of England. + +Prince Dakkar, unable to die, returned again to his mountains in +Bundelkund. There, thenceforward alone, he conceived an immense disgust +against all who bore the name of man—a hatred and a horror of the +civilized world—and wishing to fly from it, he collected the wreck of +his fortune, gathered together twenty of his most faithful companions, +and one day disappeared. + +Where did Prince Dakkar seek for that independence which was refused +him upon the inhabited earth? Under the waters, in the depths of the +seas, where no one could follow him. + +From a man of war he became a man of science. On a desert island of the +Pacific he established his workshops, and there he constructed a +submarine ship after plans of his own. By means which will some day be +known, he utilized electricity, that incommensurable force, for all the +necessities of his apparatus as a motor, for lighting and for heat. The +sea, with its infinite treasures, its myriads of fishes, its harvests +of varech and sargassum, its enormous mammifers, and not only all that +nature held, but all that man had lost, amply sufficed for the needs of +the Prince and his equipage;—and thus he accomplished his heart’s +desire, to have no further communication with the earth. He named his +submarine ship the Nautilus, he called himself Captain Nemo, and he +disappeared under the seas. + +During many years, the Captain visited all the oceans, from one pole to +the other. Pariah of the earth, he reaped the treasures of the unknown +worlds. The millions lost in Vigo Bay, in 1702, by the Spanish +galleons, furnished him with an inexhaustible mine of wealth, which he +gave, anonymously, to people fighting for their independence. + +For years he had had no communication with his kindred, when, during +the night of the 6th of November, 1866, three men were thrown upon his +deck. They were a French professor, his servant, and a Canadian +fisherman. These men had been thrown overboard by the shock of the +collision between the Nautilus and the United States frigate Abraham +Lincoln, which had given it chase. + +Captain Nemo learned from the Professor that the Nautilus, sometimes +taken for a gigantic mammifer of the cetacean family, sometimes for a +submarine apparatus containing a gang of pirates, was hunted in every +sea. + +Captain Nemo could have thrown these three men, whom chance had thrown +across his mysterious life, into the ocean. He did not do it, he kept +them prisoners, and, during seven months, they were able to perceive +all the marvels of a voyage of 20,000 leagues under the sea. + +One day, the 22nd of June, 1867, these three men, who knew nothing of +Captain Nemo’s past life, seized the boat belonging to the Nautilus and +attempted to escape. But just then the Nautilus was upon the coast of +Norway in the eddy of the Maelstrom, and the Captain believed that the +fugitives, caught in its terrible vortex, had been swallowed up in the +gulf. He was unaware that the Frenchman and his companions had been +miraculously thrown upon the coast, that the fishermen of the Loffodin +Islands had rescued them, and that the Professor, on his return to +France, had published a book in which seven months of this strange and +adventurous navigation was narrated. + +For a long time Captain Nemo continued this mode of life, traversing +the sea. One by one his companions died and found their rest in the +coral cemetery at the bottom of the Pacific, and in time Captain Nemo +was the last survivor of those who had sought refuge in the depths of +the oceans. + +He was then sixty years old. As he was alone, it was necessary to take +his Nautilus to one of those submarine ports which served him in former +days as a harbor. + +One of these ports was under Lincoln Island, and was the present asylum +of the Nautilus. For six years the Captain had remained there awaiting +that death which would reunite him with his companions, when chance +made him witness to the fall of the balloon which carried the +prisoners. Clothed in his impermeable jacket, he was walking under the +water, some cables’ lengths from the shore of the islet, when the +engineer was thrown into the sea. A good impulse moved Captain Nemo—and +he saved Cyrus Smith. + +On the arrival of these five castaways he wished to go from them, but +his port of refuge was closed. Some volcanic action had raised up the +basalt so that the Nautilus could not cross the entrance to the crypt, +although there was still sufficient water for a boat of light draught. + +Captain Nemo, therefore, remained and watched these men, thrown without +resources upon a desert island, but he did not wish to be seen. Little +by little, as he saw their honest, energetic lives, how they were bound +together in fraternal amity, he interested himself in their efforts. In +spite of himself, he found out all the secrets of their existence. +Clothed in his impermeable jacket, he could easily reach the bottom of +the well in Granite House, and climbing by the projections of the rock +to its mouth, he heard the colonists talk of their past and discuss +their present and future. He learned from them of the struggle of +America against itself, for the abolition of slavery. Yes! these men +were worthy to reconcile Captain Nemo with that humanity which they +represented so honestly on the island. + +Captain Nemo had saved Smith. It was he who had led the dog to the +Chimneys, who threw Top out of the water, who stranded the box of +useful articles on Jetsam Point, who brought the canoe down the Mercy, +who threw the cord from Granite House, when it was attacked by the +monkeys, who made known the presence of Ayrton on Tabor Island by means +of the paper inclosed in the bottle, who blew up the brig by means of a +torpedo, who saved Herbert from certain death by bringing the quinine, +who, finally, killed the convicts by those electric balls which he +employed in his submarine hunting excursions. Thus was explained all +those seemingly supernatural incidents, which, all of them, attested +the generosity and the power of the Captain. + +Nevertheless, this intense misanthrope thirsted to do good. He had some +useful advice to give to his proteges, and moreover, feeling the +approach of death, he had summoned, as we have seen, the colonists from +Granite House, by means of the wire which reached from the corral to +the Nautilus. Perhaps he would not have done it, had he thought that +Smith knew enough of his history to call him by his name of Nemo. + +The Captain finished the recital of his life, and then Smith spoke. He +recalled all the instances of the salutary influences exercised over +the colonists, and then, in the name of his companions, and in his own, +he thanked this generous being for all that he had done. + +But Captain Nemo had never dreamed of asking any return for his +services. One last thought agitated his spirit, and, before taking the +hand which the engineer held out to him, he said:— + +“Now, sir, you know my life, judge of it!” + +In speaking thus, the Captain evidently alluded to an incident of a +serious nature which had been witnessed by the three strangers on the +Nautilus—an incident which the French professor had necessarily +recounted in his book, an incident whose very recital was terrible. + +In brief, some days before the flight of the professor and his +companions, the Nautilus, pursued by a frigate in the North Atlantic, +had rushed upon her like a battering-ram, and sunk her without mercy. + +Smith, understanding this allusion, made no answer. + +“It was an English frigate, sir!” cried Captain Nemo, becoming for the +moment Prince Dakkar, “an English frigate, you understand! She attacked +me! I was shut in, in a narrow and shallow bay; I had to pass out, +and—I passed!” + +Then, speaking with more calmness:— + +“I had right and justice on my side,” he added. “I did good when I +could, and evil when I must. All justice is not in forgiveness.” + +Some moments of silence followed this response, and Captain Nemo asked +again:— + +“What do you think of me?” + +Smith took the hand of the Captain, and answered him in a grave voice:— + +“Captain, your mistake has been in believing that you could bring back +the old order of things, and you have struggled against necessary +progress. It was one of those errors which some of us admire, others +blame, but of which God alone can judge, and which the human mind +exonerates. We can disagree with one who misleads himself in an +intention which he believes laudable, and at the same time esteem him. +Your error is of a kind which does not preclude admiration, and your +name has nothing to fear from the judgment of history. She loves heroic +follies, though she condemns the results which follow.” + +The breast of Captain Nemo heaved; he raised his hand towards heaven. + +“Was I wrong, or was I right?” he murmured. + +Smith continued:— + +“All great actions return to God, from whom they came! Captain Nemo, +the worthy men here, whom you have succored, will always weep for you!” + +Herbert approached him. He knelt down and took the hand of the captain, +and kissed it. + +A tear glistened in the eye of the dying man. + +“My child,” he said, “bless you!” + + + + +CHAPTER LIX. + + +THE LAST HOURS OF CAPTAIN NEMO—HIS DYING WISHES—A SOUVENIR FOR HIS +FRIENDS—HIS TOMB—SOME COUNSEL TO THE COLONISTS—THE SUPREME MOMENT—AT +THE BOTTOM OF THE SEA. + + +It was morning, though no ray of daylight penetrated the vault. The +sea, at this moment high, covered the outlet. But the artificial light +escaping in long rays from the sides of the Nautilus, had not +diminished, and the sheet of water around the vessel glowed +resplendent. + +Captain Nemo, overcome by an extreme fatigue, fell back upon the divan. +They did not dream of transporting him to Granite House, as he had +shown a wish to remain among the priceless treasures of the Nautilus, +awaiting that death which could not be long in coming. + +Smith and Spilett observed with great attention his prostration. They +saw that he was slowly sinking. His strength, formerly so great, was +almost gone, and his body was but a frail envelope for the spirit about +escaping. All life was concentrated at the heart and brain. + +The engineer and the reporter consulted together in low tones. Could +they do anything for the dying man? Could they, if not save him, at +least prolong his life for a few days? He himself had said that there +was no remedy, and he awaited death calmly and without fear. + +“We can do nothing,” said Spilett. + +“What is he dying of?” asked Pencroff. + +“Of exhaustion,” answered the reporter. + +“Supposing we take him out into the open air, into the sunlight, +perhaps he would revive?” + +“No, Pencroff,” responded the engineer, “there is nothing to do. +Moreover, Captain Nemo would not be willing to leave here. He has lived +on the Nautilus for thirty years, and on the Nautilus he wishes to +die.” + +Doubtless Captain Nemo heard Smith’s words, for, raising himself up a +little, and speaking in a feeble but intelligible voice, he said:— + +“You are right. I wish to die here. And I have a request to make.” + +Smith and his companions had gathered round the divan, and they +arranged the cushions so that the dying man was more comfortably +placed. + +They saw that his gaze was fixed upon the marvels of the saloon, lit up +by the rays of electric light sifting through the arabesques of the +luminous ceiling. He looked upon the pictures, those _chefs d’œuvre_ of +Italian, Flemish, French, and Spanish masters, which hung on the +tapestried walls, upon the marbles and bronzes, upon the magnificent +organ at the opposite end of the saloon, upon the glasses arranged +around a central vase in which were disposed the rarest products of the +seas, marine plants, zoophytes, chaplets of pearls of an inappreciable +value, and at length his attention was fixed upon this device, the +device of the Nautilus inscribed upon the front of this museum:— + +MOBILIS IN MOBILI. + + +It seemed as if he wished to caress with his regard, one last time, +those _chefs d’oeuvre_ of art and nature which had been ever visible to +him in the years of his sojourn in the depths of the sea! + +Smith respected Captain Nemo’s silence. He waited for him to speak. + +After some moments, during which passed before him, doubtless, his +whole life, Cap-Nemo turned to the colonists and said:— + +“You wish to do me a favor?” + +“Captain, we would give our lives to prolong yours!” + +“Well, then, promise me that you will execute my last wishes, and I +will be repaid for all that I have done for you.” + +“We promise,” answered Smith, speaking for his companions and himself. + +“To-morrow,” said the Captain, “to-morrow I will be dead.” + +He made a sign to Herbert, who was about to protest. + +“To-morrow I will be dead, and I wish for no other tomb than the +Nautilus. It is my coffin! All my friends rest at the bottom of the +sea, and I wish to rest there also.” + +A profound silence followed the words of Captain Nemo. + +“Attend to what I say,” he continued. “The Nautilus is imprisoned in +this grotto. But if she cannot leave this prison, she can at least sink +herself in the abyss, which will cover her and guard my mortal +remains.” + +The colonists listened religiously to the words of the dying man. + +“To-morrow, after I am dead, Mr. Smith,” continued the Captain, “you +and your companions will leave the Nautilus, all of whose riches are to +disappear with me. One single remembrance of Prince Dakkar, whose +history you now know, will remain to you. That coffer, there, encloses +diamonds worth many millions, most of them souvenirs of the time when, +a husband and father, I almost believed in happiness, and a collection +of pearls gathered by my friends and myself from the bottom of the sea. +With this treasure, you will be able, some time, to accomplish good. In +your hands and those of your companions, Mr. Smith, wealth will not be +dangerous. I shall be ever present with you in your works.” + +After some moments of rest, necessitated by his extreme feebleness, +Captain Nemo continued as follows:— + +“To-morrow, you will take this coffer, you will leave this saloon, and +close the door; then you will ascend to the platform of the Nautilus +and you will bolt down the hatchway.” + +“We will do it, sir,” replied Smith. + +“Very well. You will then embark in the boat which brought you here. +But, before abandoning the Nautilus, go to the stern, and there, open +two large cocks which you will find at the water-line. The water will +penetrate and the Nautilus will sink beneath the waves and rest upon +the bottom of the abyss.” + +Then, upon a gesture from Smith, the Captain added:— + +“Fear nothing! you will only be burying the dead!” + +Neither Smith nor his companions could say a word to Captain Nemo. +These were his last wishes, and they had nothing else to do but obey +them. + +“I have your promise?” asked Captain Nemo. + +“You have it, sir,” answered the engineer. + +The Captain made a sign thanking them, and then motioned to be left +alone for a few hours. Spilett insisted on remaining with him, in case +of an emergency, but the other refused, saying:— + +“I will live till morning, sir.” + +All left the salon, passing through the library, the dining-room, and +reached the forward part of the vessel, where the electric apparatus, +furnishing heat, light, and motive power to the Nautilus was placed. + +The Nautilus was a _chef-d’oeuvre_ containing _chefs-d’oeuvre_, which +filled the engineer with amazement. + +The colonists mounted the platform, which rose seven or eight feet +above the water. Then they saw a thick lenticular glass closing up a +sort of bull’s-eye, through which penetrated a ray of light. Behind +this bull’s-eye was the wheel-house, where the steersman stood when +directing the Nautilus under the sea, by means of the electric light. + +Smith and his companions stood here in silence, impressed by what they +saw, and what they had heard, and their hearts bled to think that he, +their protector, whose arm had been so often raised to aid them, would +soon be counted among the dead. + +Whatever would be the judgment of posterity upon this, so to say, +extra-human existence, Prince Dakkar would always remain one of those +strange characters who cannot be forgotten. + +“What a man!” said Pencroff. “Is it credible that he has lived so at +the bottom of the ocean! And to think that he has not found rest even +there!” + +“The Nautilus,” observed Ayrton, “would, perhaps, have served us to +leave Lincoln Island and gain some inhabited country.” + +“A thousand devils!” cried Pencroff. “You couldn’t get me to steer such +a craft. To sail over the seas is all very well, but under the +seas,—no, sir!” + +“I think, Pencroff,” said the reporter, “that it would be easy to +manage a submarine apparatus like the Nautilus, and that we would soon +get accustomed to it. No storms, no boarding to fear. At some little +distance under the waves the waters are as calm as those of a lake.” + +“That’s likely enough,” answered the sailor, “but give me a stiff +breeze and a well rigged ship. A ship is made to go on the water and +not under it.” + +“My friends,” said the engineer, “it is useless, at least as far as the +Nautilus is concerned, to discuss this question of submarine vessels. +The Nautilus is not ours, and we have no right to dispose of it. It +could not, moreover, serve us under any circumstances. Aside from the +fact that it cannot get out of this cavern, Captain Nemo wishes it to +be engulfed with him after his death. His wish is law, and we will obey +it.” + +Smith and his companions, after talking for a while longer, descended +into the interior of the Nautilus. There they ate some food and +returned to the salon. + +Captain Nemo had recovered from his prostration, and his eyes had +regained their brilliancy. They saw a smile upon his lips. + +The colonists approached him. “Sirs,” said the Captain, “you are brave +men, and good and honest. You have given yourselves up to the common +cause. I have often watched you. I have loved you. I do love you!—Give +me your hand, Mr. Smith.” + +Smith gave his hand to the Captain, who pressed it affectionately. + +“That is well!” he murmured. Then he added:— + +“But I have said enough about myself. I wish to speak of yourselves and +of Lincoln Island, on which you have found refuge. You want to leave +it?”. + +“To come back again!” said Pencroff eagerly. + +“To return?—Oh! yes, Pencroff,” answered the Captain, smiling, “I know +how much you love this island. It has been improved by your care, and +it is, indeed, yours.” + +“Our project, Captain,” added Smith, “would be to make it over to the +United States, and to establish a station, which would be well situated +here in this part of the Pacific.” + +“You think of your country,” replied the Captain. “You work for her +prosperity, for her glory. You are right. The Fatherland! It is there +we wish to return! It is there we wish to die! And I, I die far from +everything that I have loved!” + +“Have you no last wish to have executed,” asked the engineer earnestly, +“no souvenir to send to those friends you left in the mountains of +India?” + +“No, Mr. Smith, I have no friends! I am the last of my race—and I die +long after those whom I have known.—But to return to yourselves. +Solitude, isolation are sorrowful things, beyond human endurance. I die +from having believed that man could live alone!—You wish to leave +Lincoln Island and to return to your country. I know that these +wretches have destroyed your boat-” + +“We are building a ship,” said Spilett, “a ship large enough to take us +to the nearest country; but if sooner or later we leave the island, we +will come back again. Too many associations attach us to the place, for +us ever to forget it.” + +“Here we met Captain Nemo,” said Smith. + +“Here only will we find the perfect remembrance of you!” added +Herbert.” + +“It is here that I will rest in an eternal sleep, if—” answered the +Captain. + +He hesitated, and, instead of finishing his sentence, said:— + +“Mr. Smith, I wish to speak with you,—with you alone.” + +The companions of the engineer retired, and Smith remained for some +time alone with Captain Nemo. He soon called back his friends, but said +nothing to them of the secrets which the dying prince had confided to +him. + +Spilett observed the Captain with extreme attention. He was evidently +living by the strength of his will, which could not long hold out +against his physical weakness. + +The day ended without any change manifesting itself. The colonists did +not leave the Nautilus. Night came, although unseen in this crypt. + +Captain Nemo did not suffer pain, but sunk slowly. His noble face, pale +by the approach of death, was perfectly calm. Now and then he spoke, +incoherently, of events in his strange existence.—All saw that life was +retreating. His feet and hands were already cold. + +Once or twice, he spoke a word to the colonists who were about him, and +he looked upon them with that smile which remained when he was no more. + +At last, just after midnight, Captain Nemo made a supreme effort, and +crossed his arms upon his breast, as if he wished to die in that +attitude. + +Towards 1 o’clock all the life that was left was concentrated in his +expression. One last spark burned in that eye which had formerly +flashed fire! Then, murmuring these words, “God and Fatherland,” he +expired quietly. + +Smith, stooping down, closed the eyes of him who had been Prince +Dakkar, who was no more even Captain Nemo. + +Herbert and Pencroff wept. Ayrton wiped away a furtive tear. Neb was on +his knees near the reporter, who was immobile as a statue. + +Smith raising his hand above the head of the dead man:— + +“May God receive his soul!” he said, and then, turning towards his +friends, he added:— + +“Let us pray for him whom we have lost!” + + +Some hours later, the colonists, in fulfillment of their promise, +carried out the last wishes of the dead. + +They left the Nautilus, taking with them the sole souvenir of their +benefactor, the coffer containing a hundred fortunes. + +The marvellous salon, still flooded with light, was carefully closed. +The cover to the hatchway was bolted down in such a manner that not a +drop of water could penetrate to the inner chambers of the Nautilus. +Then the colonists entered the boat, which was moored beside the +submarine ship. + +The boat was taken to the stern. There, at the water-line, they opened +the two large cocks which communicated with the reservoirs designed to +immerse the apparatus. + +The cocks were opened, the reservoirs filled, and the Nautilus, sinking +slowly, disappeared beneath the sea. + +But the colonists were able still to follow her coarse through the +lower depths. Her strong light lit up the transparent waters, as the +crypt became darkened. Then at length the vast effusion of electric +effulgence was effaced, and the Nautilus, the tomb of Captain Nemo, +rested upon the bottom of the sea. + + + + +CHAPTER LX. + + +THE REFLECTIONS OF THE COLONISTS—RENEWAL OF WORK—THE 1ST OF JANUARY, +1869—A SMOKE FROM THE VOLCANO—SYMPTOMS OF AN ERUPTION AYRTON AND SMITH +AT THE CORRAL—EXPLORATION OF THE CRYPT DAKKAR —WHAT CAPTAIN NEMO HAD +SAID TO THE ENGINEER. + + +In the early morning the colonists reached the entrance of the cavern, +which they called Crypt Dakkar, in remembrance of Captain Nemo. The +tide was low, and they easily passed under the archway, whose piers +were washed by the waves. + +The iron boat could remain in this place without danger from the sea; +but as additional precaution they drew it up on a little beach on one +side of the crypt. + +The storm had ceased during the night. The last mutterings of the +thunder were dying away in the west. It was not raining, although the +sky was still clouded. In short, this month of October, the beginning +of the southern spring, did not come in good fashion, and the wind had +a tendency to shift from one point of the compass to another, so that +it was impossible to say what the weather would be. + +Smith and his companions, on leaving Crypt Dakkar, went towards the +corral. On the way Neb and Herbert took care to take up the wire which +had been stretched by Captain Nemo, as it might be useful in the +future. + +While walking the colonists spoke but little. The incidents of this +night had made a vivid impression upon them. This unknown, whose +influence had protected them so well, this man whom they imagined a +genii, Captain Nemo, was no more. His Nautilus and himself were buried +in the depths of the abyss. It seemed to each one of them that they +were more isolated than before. They were, so to speak, accustomed to +count upon this powerful intervention which to-day was wanting, and +Spilett, and even Smith, did not escape this feeling. So, without +speaking, they followed the road to the corral. + +By 9 o’clock the colonists were in Granite House again. + +It had been agreed that the construction of the ship should be pushed +forward as rapidly as possible, and Smith gave the work more of his +time and care than ever before. They did not know what the future might +bring forth, and it would be a guarantee of safety for them to have a +strong vessel, able to stand rough weather, and large enough to carry +them, if need be, a long distance. If, when it was finished, the +colonists decided not to leave the island they could at least make the +voyage to Tabor Island and leave a notice there. This was an +indispensable precaution in case the Scotch yacht returned to these +seas, and it must on no account be neglected. + +The work was undertaken at once. All worked at it without ceasing, +except to prosecute other necessary work. It was important to have the +new ship finished in five months, if they wished to make the voyage to +Tabor Island before the equinoxial storms would render it +impracticable. All the sails of the Speedy had been saved, so that they +need not trouble themselves about making rigging. + +The year ended in the midst of this work. At the end of two months and +a half the ribs had been put in place and the planking began, so that +they were able to see that Smith’s plans were excellent. Pencroff +worked with ardor, and always grumbled when any of the others left off +work to go hunting. It was, nevertheless, necessary to lay in a stock +of provisions for the approaching winter. But that made no difference. +The honest sailor was unhappy unless every one was at work in the +ship-yard. At these times he grumbled and did—he was so put out—the +work of half a dozen men. + +All this summer season was bad. The heat was overpowering, and the +atmosphere, charged with electricity, discharged itself in violent +storms. It was seldom that the distant muttering of the thunder was +unheard. It was like a dull, but permanent murmur, such as is produced +in the equatorial regions of the globe. + +On the 1st of January, 1869, a terrific storm burst over the island, +and the lightning struck in many places. Tall trees were shattered, and +among them was one of the enormous micocouliers which shaded the +poultry-yard. Had this meteoric storm any relation to the phenomena +which were occurring In the bowels of the earth? Was there a sort of +connection between the disturbances in the air and those in the +interior of the globe. Smith believed it to be so, since the +development of these storms was marked by a recrudescence of the +volcanic symptoms. + +On the 3d of January, Herbert, who had gone at daybreak to Prospect +Plateau to saddle one of the onagers, saw an immense black cloud +rolling out from the summit of the volcano. + +Herbert hastened to inform the others, who came at once to look at the +mountain. + +“Ah!” said Pencroff, “it is not vapor this time! It seems to me that +the giant is not content to breathe, he must smoke!” + +The image employed by the sailor expressed with exactness the change +which had taken place at the mouth of the volcano. For three months the +crater had been emitting vapors more or less intense, but there had +been no ebullition of mineral matters. This time, instead of vapors, a +thick column of smoke rose, like an immense mushroom, above the summit +of the mountain. + +“The chimney is on fire!” said Spilett. + +“And we cannot put it out!” answered Herbert. + +“It would be well to sweep the volcanoes,” said Neb, in good earnest. + +“All right, Neb,” said Pencroff, laughing. “Will you undertake the +job?” + +Smith looked attentively at the thick smoke, and at the same time he +listened as if he expected to detect some distant rumbling. Then, +turning towards his companions, who were at some little distance, he +said:— + +“In truth, my friends, it cannot be denied that an important change has +taken place. The volcanic matters are not only in a state of +ebullition, they have taken fire, and, without doubt, we are threatened +with an eruption!” + +“Very well, sir; we will witness this eruption,” cried Pencroff, “and +we will applaud it if it is a success! I don’t think that anything over +there need worry us!” + +“No, Pencroff,” answered Smith, “for the old course of the lava is +open, and, thanks to its position, the crater has heretofore discharged +towards the north. Nevertheless—” + +“Nevertheless, since there is nothing to be gained by an eruption, it +would be better not to have it,” said the reporter. + +“Who knows?” replied the sailor. “There may be some useful and precious +matter in the volcano, which it will be good enough to throw up, which +will be advantageous for us!” + +Smith shook his head, as a man who anticipated nothing good from this +phenomenon. He did not think so lightly of the consequences of an +eruption. If the lava, on account of the position of the crater, did +not menace the wooded and cultivated portions of the island, other +complications might arise. Eruptions are often accompanied by +earthquakes, and an island formed, like Lincoln Island, of such +different materials: basalt on one side, granite on another, lavas to +the north, a mixed soil inland, material which, therefore, could not be +solidly bound together, ran the risk of being torn asunder. If, +therefore, the outpouring of volcanic substances did not threaten +serious results, any movement in the framework upholding the island +might be followed by the gravest consequences. + +“It seems to me,” said Ayrton, who was kneeling down, with his ear to +the ground, “it seems to me that I hear a noise, like the rattling of a +wagon, loaded with iron bars.” + +The colonists listened carefully, and were convinced that Ayrton was +not mistaken. With the rumbling mingled subterranean roaring, making a +sort of “rinfordzando,” which died away slowly, as if from some violent +cleavage in the interior of the globe. But no detonation was heard, and +it was fair to conclude that the smoke and vapor found a free passage +through the central chimney, and, if the escape-pipe was sufficiently +large, no explosion need be feared. + +“Come,” said Pencroff at length, “shall we not go back to work? Let +Mount Franklin smoke, brawl, moan, and vomit fire and flames as much as +it chooses, but that is no excuse for us to quit work! Come, Ayrton, +Neb, all of you, we want all hands to-day! I want our new Good Luck—we +will keep the name, will we not?—to be moored in Balloon Harbor before +two months are passed! So there is not an hour to be lost!” + +All the colonists went down to the shipyard and worked steadily all day +without giving too much thought to the volcano, which could not be seen +from the beach before Granite House. But once or twice heavy shadows +obscured the sunlight, and, as the was day perfectly clear, it was +evident that thick clouds of smoke were passing between the sun’s disc +and the island. Smith and Spilett noticed these sombre voyagers, and +talked of the progress that the volcanic phenomenon was making, but +they did not cease work. It was, moreover, of great importance, in +every sense, that the ship should be finished with as little delay as +possible. In the presence of events which might happen, the security of +the colonists would be better assured. Who could say but that this ship +might not, some day, be their sole refuge? + +That evening, after supper, Smith, Spilett, and Herbert climbed to the +plateau. It was already dark, and they would be able to distinguish +whether flames or incandescent matter was mingled with the smoke and +vapor of the volcano. + +“The crater is on fire!” cried Herbert, who, more active than his +companions, had reached the plateau the first. + +Mount Franklin, six miles distant, appeared like a gigantic torch, with +fuliginous flames twisting about its summit. So much smoke, such +quantities of scoriæ and cinders, perhaps, were mingled with the +flames, that their light did not glare upon the shades of night. But a +sort of dull yellow glow spread over the island, making dimly visible +the higher masses of forest. Enormous clouds obscured the heavens, +between which glittered a few stars. + +“The progress is rapid,” said the engineer. + +“It is not astonishing,” answered the reporter. “The volcano has been +awake for some time already. You remember, Cyrus, that the first vapors +appeared about the time we were searching the mountain for the retreat +of Captain Nemo. That was, if I am not mistaken, about the 15th of +October. + +“Yes” replied Herbert, “two months and a half ago.” + +“The subterranean fires have been brooding for ten weeks,” continued +Spilett, “and it is not astonishing that they develop now with this +violence.” + +“Do not you feel certain vibrations in the ground?” asked Smith. + +“I think so,” replied Spilett, “but an earthquake—” + +“I did not say that we were menaced by an earthquake,” said Smith, “and +Heaven preserve us from one! No. These vibrations are due to the +effervesence of the central fire. The crust of the earth is nothing +more than the covering of a boiler, and you know how the covering of a +boiler, under pressure, vibrates like a sonorous plate. That is what is +happening at this moment.” + +“What magnificent flames!” cried Herbert, as a sheaf of fire shot up, +unobscured by the vapors, from the crater. From its midst luminous +fragments and bright scintillations were thrown in every direction. +Some of them pierced the dome of smoke, leaving behind them a perfect +cloud of incandescent dust. This outpouring was accompanied by rapid +detonations like the discharge of a battery of mitrailleuses. + +Smith, the reporter, and the lad, after having passed an hour on +Prospect Plateau, returned to Granite House. The engineer was pensive, +and so much preoccupied that Spilett asked him if he anticipated any +near danger. + +“Yes and no,” responded Smith. + +“But the worst that could happen,” said the reporter, “would be an +earthquake, which would overthrow the island. And I don’t think that is +to be feared, since the vapors and lava have a free passage of escape.” + +“I do not fear an earthquake,” answered Smith, “of the ordinary kind, +such as are brought about by the expansion of subterranean vapors. But +other causes may bring about great disaster.” + +“For example?” + +“I do not know exactly—I must see—I must visit the mountain. In a few +days I shall have made up my mind.” + +Spilett asked no further questions, and soon, notwithstanding the +increased violence of the volcano, the inhabitants of Granite House +slept soundly. + +Three days passed, the 4th 5th, and 6th of January, during which they +worked on the ship, and, without explaining himself further, the +engineer hastened the work as much as possible. Mount Franklin was +covered with a sinister cloud, and with the flames vomited forth +incandescent rocks, some of which fell back into the crater. This made +Pencroff, who wished to look upon the phenomenon from an amusing side, +say— + +“Look! The giant plays at cup and ball! He is a juggler.” + +And, indeed, the matters vomited forth fell back into the abyss, and it +seemed as if the lavas, swollen by the interior pressure, had not yet +risen to the mouth of the crater. At least, the fracture on the +northeast, which was partly visible, did not pour forth any torrent on +the western side of the mountain. + +Meanwhile, however pressing the ship-building, other cares required the +attention of the colonists in different parts of the island. First of +all, they must go to the corral, where the moufflons and goats were +enclosed, and renew the provisions for these animals. It was, +therefore, agreed that Ayrton should go there the next day, and, as it +was customary for but one to do this work, the others were surprised to +hear the engineer say to Ayrton:—— + +“As you are going to the corral to-morrow, I will go with you.” + +“Oh! Mr. Smith!” cried the sailor, “our time is very limited, and, if +you go off in this way, we lose just that much help!” + +“We will return the next day,” answered Smith, “but I must go to the +corral—I wish to see about this eruption.” + +“Eruption! Eruption!” answered Pencroff, with a dissatisfied air. “What +is there important about this eruption? It don’t bother me!” + +Notwithstanding the sailor’s protest, the exploration was decided upon +for the next day. Herbert wanted to go with Smith, but he did not wish +to annoy Pencroff by absenting himself. So, early the next morning, +Smith and Ayrton started off with the wagon and onagers. + +Over the forest hung huge clouds constantly supplied from Mount +Franklin with fuliginous matter. They were evidently composed of +heterogeneous substances. It was not altogether the smoke from the +volcano that made them so heavy and opaque. Scoriæ in a state of +powder, pulverized puzzolan and grey cinder as fine as the finest +fecula, were held in suspension in their thick folds. These cinders +remain in air, sometimes, for months at a time. After the eruption of +1783, in Iceland, for more than a year the atmosphere was so charged +with volcanic powder that the sun’s rays were scarcely visible. + +Usually, however, these pulverized matters fall to the earth at once, +and it was so in this instance. Smith and Ayrton had hardly reached the +corral, when a sort of black cloud, like fine gunpowder, fell, and +instantly modified the whole aspect of the ground. Trees, fields, +everything was covered with a coating several fingers deep. But, most +fortunately, the wind was from the northeast, and the greater part of +the cloud was carried off to sea. + +“That is very curious,” said Ayrton. + +“It is very serious,” answered Smith. This puzzolan, this pulverized +pumice stone, all this mineral dust in short, shows how deep-seated is +the commotion in the volcano. + +“But there is nothing to be done.” + +“Nothing, but to observe the progress of the phenomenon. Employ +yourself, Ayrton, at the corral, and meanwhile I will go up to the +sources of Red Creek and examine the state of the mountain on its +western side. Then——” + +“Then, sir?” + +“Then we will make a visit to Crypt Dakkar—I wish to see—Well, I will +come back for you in a couple of hours.” + +Ayrton went into the corral, and while waiting for the return of the +engineer occupied himself with the moufflons and goats, which showed a +certain uneasiness before these first symptoms of an eruption. + +Meantime Smith had ventured to climb the eastern spurs of the mountain, +and he arrived at the place where his companions had discovered the +sulphur spring on their first exploration. + +How everything was changed! Instead of a single column of smoke, he +counted thirteen escaping from the ground as if thrust upward by a +piston. It was evident that the crust of earth was subjected in this +place to a frightful pressure. The atmosphere was saturated with gases +and aqueous vapors. Smith felt the volcanic tufa, the pulverulent +cinders hardened by time, trembling beneath him, but he did not yet see +any traces of fresh lava. + +It was the same with the western slope of the mountain. Smoke and +flames escaped from the crater; a hail of scoriæ fell upon the soil; +but no lava flowed from the gullet of the crater, which was another +proof that the volcanic matter had not attained the upper orifice of +the central chimney. + +“And I would be better satisfied if they had!” said Smith to himself. +“At least I would be certain that the lavas had taken their accustomed +route. Who knows if they may not burst forth from some new mouth? But +that is not the danger! Captain Nemo has well foreseen it! No! the +danger is not there!” + +Smith went forward as far as the enormous causeway, whose prolongation +enframed Shark Gulf. Here he was able to examine the ancient lava +marks. There could be no doubt that the last eruption had been at a far +distant epoch. + +Then he returned, listening to the subterranean rumblings, which +sounded like continuous thunder, and by 9 o’clock he was at the corral. + +Ayrton was waiting for him. + +“The animals are attended to, sir,” said he. + +“All right, Ayrton.” + +“They seem to be restless, Mr. Smith.” + +“Yes, it is their instinct, which does not mislead them.” + +“When you are ready—” + +“Take a lantern and tinder, Ayrton, and let us go.” + +Ayrton did as he was told. The onagers had been unharnessed and placed +in the corral, and Smith, leading, took the route to the coast. + +They walked over a soil covered with the pulverulent matter which had +fallen from the clouds. No animal appeared. Even the birds had flown +away. Sometimes a breeze passed laden with cinders, and the two +colonists, caught in the cloud, were unable to see. They had to place +handkerchiefs over their eyes and nostrils or they would have been +blinded and suffocated. + +Under these circumstances they could not march rapidly. The air was +heavy, as if all the oxygen had been burned out of it, making it unfit +to breathe. Every now and then they had to stop, and it was after 10 +o’clock when the engineer and his companion reached the summit of the +enormous heap of basaltic and porphyrytic rocks which formed the +northwest coast of the island. + +They began to go down this abrupt descent, following the detestable +road, which, during that stormy night had led them to Crypt Dakkar. By +daylight this descent was less perilous, and, moreover, the covering of +cinders gave a firmer foothold to the slippery rocks. + +The projection was soon attained, and, as the tide was low, Smith and +Ayrton found the opening to the crypt without any difficulty. + +“Is the boat there?” asked the engineer. + +“Yes, sir,” answered Ayrton, drawing the boat towards him. + +“Let us get in, then, Ayrton,” said the engineer. + +The two embarked in the boat. Ayrton lit the lantern, and, placing it +in the bow of the boat, took the oars, and Smith, taking the tiller, +steered into the darkness. + +The Nautilus was no longer here to illuminate this sombre cavern. +Perhaps the electric irradiation still shone under the waters, but no +light came from the abyss where Captain Nemo reposed. + +The light of the lantern was barely sufficient to permit the engineer +to advance, following the right hand wall of the crypt. A sepulchral +silence reigned in this portion of the vault, but soon Smith heard +distinctly the mutterings which came from the interior of the earth. + +“It is the volcano,” he said. + +Soon, with this noise, the chemical combinations betrayed themselves by +a strong odor, and sulphurous vapors choked the engineer and his +companion. + +“It is as Captain Nemo feared,” murmured Smith, growing pale. “We must +go on to the end.” + +Twenty-five minutes after having left the opening the two reached the +terminal wall and stopped. + +Smith standing on the seat, moved the lantern about over this wall, +which separated the crypt from the central chimney of the volcano. How +thick was it? Whether 100 feet or but 10 could not be determined. But +the subterranean noises were too plainly heard for it to be very thick. + +The engineer, after having explored the wall along a horizontal line, +fixed the lantern to the end of an oar and went over it again at a +greater height. + +There, through scarcely visible cracks, came a pungent smoke, which +infected the air of the cavern. The wall was striped with these +fractures, and some of the larger ones came to within a few feet of the +water. + +At first, Smith rested thoughtful. Then he murmured these words:— + +“Yes! Captain Nemo was right! There is the danger, and it is terrible!” + +Ayrton said nothing, but, on a sign from the engineer, he took up the +oars, and, a half hour later, he and Smith came out of Crypt Dakkar. + + + + +CHAPTER LXI + + +SMITH’S RECITAL—HASTENING THE WORK—A LAST VISIT TO THE CORRAL—THE +COMBAT BETWEEN THE FIRE AND THE WATER—THE ASPECT OF THE ISLAND—THEY +DECIDE TO LAUNCH THE SHIP—THE NIGHT OF THE 8TH OF MARCH. + + +The next morning, the 8th of January, after a day and night passed at +the corral, Smith and Ayrton returned to Granite House. + +Then the engineer assembled his companions, and told them that Lincoln +Island was in fearful danger—a danger which no human power could +prevent. + +“My friends,” said he,—and his voice betrayed great emotion,—“Lincoln +Island is doomed to destruction sooner or later; the cause is in itself +and there is no means of removing it!” + +The colonists looked at each other. They did not understand him. + +“Explain yourself, Cyrus,” said Spilett. + +“I will, or rather I will give you the explanation which Captain Nemo +gave me, when I was alone with him.” + +“Captain Nemo!” cried the colonists. + +“Yes; it was the last service he rendered us before he died.” + +“The last service!” cried Pencroff. “The last service! You think, +because he is dead, that he will help us no more!” + +“What did he say?” asked the reporter. + +“This, my friends,” answered the engineer. “Lincoln Island is not like +the other islands of the Pacific, and a particular event, made known to +me by Captain Nemo, will cause, sooner or later, the destruction of its +submarine framework.” + +“Destruction of Lincoln Island! What an idea!” cried Pencroff, who, in +spite of his respect for Smith, could not help shrugging his shoulders. + +“Listen to me, Pencroff,” continued the engineer. “This is what Captain +Nemo ascertained and what I verified yesterday In Crypt Dakkar. The +crypt extends under the island as far as the volcano, and is only +separated from the central chimney by the wall. Now this wall is seamed +with fractures and cracks, through which the sulphurous gas is already +escaping.” + +“Well?” asked Pencroff, wrinkling his forehead. + +“Well, I have ascertained that these fractures are widening under the +pressure from within, that the basalt wall la gradually bursting open, +and that, sooner or later, it will give a passage to the waters of the +sea.” + +“That’s all right!” exclaimed Pencroff, trying still to make light of +the subject. “That’s all right! The sea will put out the volcano, and +that will be the end of it.” + +“Yes, that will be the end of it!” answered Smith. “On the day that the +sea rushes through the wall and penetrates by the central chimney to +the bowels of the island, where the eruptive matter is boiling, on that +day, Pencroff, Lincoln Island will go up, as Sicily would go up, if the +Mediterranean was emptied into Aetna!” + +The colonists made no reply. They understood the threatened danger. + +It was no longer doubtful that the island was menaced by a frightful +explosion. That it would last only as long as the wall to Crypt Dakkar +remained intact. This was not a question of months, nor of weeks, bat +of days, of hours, perhaps! + +The first sensation the colonists experienced was one of profound +sorrow. They did not think of the peril which menaced them directly, +but of the destruction of that land which had given them asylum, of +that island which they had cultivated, which they loved, which they +wished to render so prosperous some day! All their labor uselessly +employed, all their work lost! + +Pencroff did not attempt to hide the tears which rolled down his +cheeks. + +They talked for some little time longer. The chances which they might +count upon were discussed; but, in conclusion, they realized that not +an hour was to be lost; that the ship must be completed as soon as +possible, as, now, it was the only chance of safety left, to the +inhabitants of Lincoln Island! + +All hands were required. Where was the use, now, of sowing, or +harvesting, of hunting or increasing the reserve at Granite House? The +present contents of the magazine were sufficient to provision the ship +for as long a voyage as she could make! What was necessary was that +these should be at + +the disposal of the colonists before the accomplishment of the +inevitable catastrophe. + +The work was undertaken with feverish eagerness. By the 23d of January +the ship was half planked. Up to this time there had been no change in +the volcano. It was always the vapors, the smoke mixed with flames and +pierced by incandescent stones, which escaped from the crater. But +during the night of the 23d the upper cone, which formed the cap of the +volcano, was lifted off by the pressure of the lava, which had reached +the level of the lower cone. A terrible noise was heard. The colonists, +believing that the island was going to pieces, rushed out of Granite +House. + +It was 2 o’clock in the morning. The heavens were on fire. The upper +cone—a mass a thousand feet high, and weighing thousands of millions of +pounds—had been thrown upon the island, making the earth tremble. +Happily, this cone leaned to the north, and it fell upon the plain of +sand and tufa which lay between the volcano and the sea. The crater, by +this means greatly widened, threw towards the sky a light so intense, +that, by the simple effect of reverberation, the atmosphere seemed to +be incandescent. At the same time a torrent of lava swelled up over +this new summit, falling in long streams, like water escaping from an +overflowing vase, and a thousand fiery serpents writhed upon the talus +of the volcano. + +“The corral! The corral!” cried Ayrton. + +It was, indeed, towards the corral that the lava took their way, +following the slope of the new crater, and, consequently, the fertile +parts of the island. The sources of Red Creek, and Jacamar Wood were +threatened with immediate destruction. + +At the cry of Ayrton, the colonists had rushed towards the stable of +the onagers, and harnessed the animals. All had but one thought. To fly +to the corral and let loose the beasts confined there. + +Before 3 o’clock they were there. Frightful cries indicated the terror +of the moufflons and goats. Already a torrent of incandescent matter, +of liquified minerals, fell over the mountain spur upon the plain, +destroying that side of the palisade. The gate was hastily opened by +Ayrton, and the animals, wild with terror, escaped in every direction. + +An hour later the boiling lava filled the corral, volatilizing the +water of the little brook which traversed it, firing the house, which +burned like a bit of stubble, devouring to the last stake the +surrounding palisade. Nothing was left of the corral. + +The colonists wanted to struggle against this invasion; they had tried +it, but foolishly and uselessly: man is helpless before these grand +cataclysms. + +The morning of the 24th arrived. Smith and his companions, before +returning to Granite House, wished to observe the definite direction +which this inundation of lava would take. The general slope of the +ground from Mount Franklin was towards the east coast, and it was to be +feared that, notwithstanding the thick Jacamar Woods, the torrent would +extend to Prospect Plateau. + +“The lake will protect us,” said Spilett. + +“I hope so,” answered Smith. But that was all he said. + +The colonists would have liked to have advanced as far as the place on +which the upper cone of Mount Franklin abutted, but their passage was +barred by the lavas, which followed, on the one hand, the valley of Red +Creek, and, on the other, the course of Fall River, vaporizing these +two streams in their passage. There was no possible way of crossing +this stream; it was necessary, on the contrary, to fly before it. The +flattened volcano was no longer recognizable. A sort of smooth slab +terminated it, replacing the old crater. Two outlets, broken in the +south and east sides, poured forth unceasing streams of lava, which +formed two distinct currents. Above the new crater, a cloud of smoke +and cinders mixed with the vapors of the sky, and hung over the island. +Peals of thunder mingled with the rumbling of the mountain. Burning +rocks were thrown up thousands of feet, bursting in the sky and +scattering like grape-shot. The heavens answered with lightning-flashes +the eruption of the volcano. + +By 7 o’clock the colonists were no longer able to keep their position +on the edge of Jacamar Wood. Not only did the projectiles begin to fall +about them, but the lavas, overflowing the bed of Red Creek, threatened +to cut off the road from the corral. The first ranks of trees took +fire, and their sap, vaporized, made them explode like fire-crackers; +while others, less humid, remained intact in the midst of the +inundation. + +The colonists started back. The torrent, owing to the slope of the +land, gained eastward rapidly, and as the lower layers of lava +hardened, others, boiling, covered them. + +Meantime the principal current in the Red Creek Valley became more and +more threatening. All that part of the forest was surrounded, and +enormous clouds of smoke rolled above the trees, whose roots were +already in the lava. + +The colonists stopped at the lake shore, half a mile from the mouth of +Red Creek. A question of life or death was about to be decided for +them. Smith, accustomed to think and reason in the presence of danger, +and aware that he was speaking to men who could face the truth, +whatever it might be, said to them:— + +“Either the lake will arrest this current, and a part of the island +will be preserved from complete devastation, or the current will invade +the forests of the Far West, and not a tree, not a plant will be left +upon the face of the ground. We will have, upon these rocks stripped of +life, the prospect of a death which the explosion of the island may +anticipate! + +“Then,” cried Pencroff, crossing his arms and stamping his foot on the +ground, “it is useless to work on the ship! Isn’t that so?” + +“Pencroff,” answered Smith, “it is necessary to do one’s duty to the +end.” + +At this moment, the flood of lava, after having eaten its way through +the splendid trees of the forest, neared the lake. There was a certain +depression in the ground, which, if it had been larger, might, perhaps, +suffice to hold the torrent. + +“Let us try!” cried Smith. + +The idea of the engineer was instantly understood by all. It was +necessary to dam, so to speak, this torrent and force it into the lake. + +The colonists ran to the shipyard and brought back from there shovels, +picks, and hatchets, and by means of earthworks and hewn trees they +succeeded, in a few hours, in raising a barrier three feet high and +some hundreds of feet long. It seemed to them, when they had finished, +that they had not worked more than a few minutes! + +It was time. The liquified matter already reached the extremity of the +barrier. The flood spread like a swollen river seeking to overflow its +banks and threatening to break down the only obstacle which could +prevent its devastating all the Far West. But the barrier was +sufficient to withstand it, and, after one terrible moment of +hesitation, it precipitated itself into Lake Grant by a fall twenty +feet high. + +The colonists, breathless, without a word, without a gesture, looked +upon this struggle of the elements. + +What a sight was this, the combat between fire and water! What pen can +describe this scene of marvellous horror; what pencil can portray it? +The water hissed and steamed at the contact of the boiling lavas. The +steam was thrown, whirling, to an immeasurable height in the air, as if +the valves of an immense boiler had been suddenly opened. But, great as +was the mass of water contained in the lake, it must, finally, be +absorbed, since it was not renewed, while the torrent, fed from an +inexhaustible source, was ceaselessly pouring in fresh floods of +incandescent matter. + +The first lavas which fell into the lake solidified at once, and +accumulated in such a manner as soon to emerge above the surface. Over +these slid other lavas, which in their turn became stone, forming a +breakwater, which threatened to fill up the lake, which could not +overflow, as its surplus water was carried off in steam. Hissings and +shrivellings filled the air with a stunning noise, and the steam, +carried off by the wind, fell to the ground in rain. The jetty spread, +and where formerly had been peaceable waters appeared an enormous heap +of smoking rocks, as if some upheaval of the ground had raised these +thousands of reefs. If one can imagine these waters tossed about by a +storm, and then suddenly solidified by cold, he will have the +appearance of the lake three hours after the irresistible torrent had +poured into it. + +This time the water had been overcome by the fire. + +Nevertheless, it was a fortunate thing for the colonists that the lavas +had been turned into the lake. It gave them some days’ respite. +Prospect Plateau, Granite House, and the ship-yard were safe for the +moment. In these few days they must plank and caulk the vessel, launch +it, and take refuge upon it, rigging it after it was on the sea. With +the fear of the explosion menacing the destruction of the island, it +was no longer safe to remain on land. Granite House, so safe a retreat +up to this time, might, at any moment, fall! + +During the next six days, the colonists worked on the ship with all +their might. Sleeping but little, the light of the flames from the +volcano permitted them to work by night as well as by day. The eruption +continued without cessation, but, perhaps, less abundantly. A fortunate +circumstance, since Lake Grant was nearly full; and if fresh lavas had +slid over the surface of the former layers, they would inevitably have +spread over Prospect Plateau and from there to the shore. + +But while this part of the island was partially protected it was +otherwise with the west coast. + +The second current of lava, following the valley of Fall River, met +with no obstacle. The ground on either side of the bank was low, and +the incandescent liquid was spread through the forest of the Far West. +At this season of the year the trees were dried by the warmth of the +summer and took fire instantly, and the high interlacing branches +hastened the progress of the conflagration. It seemed as if the current +of flame traversed the surface of the forest more swiftly than the +current of lavas its depths. + +The beasts and birds of the woods sought refuge on the shore of the +Mercy and in the marshes of Tadorn’s Fens. But the colonists were too +busy to pay any attention to these animals. They had, moreover, +abandoned Granite House; they had not even sought refuge in the +Chimneys, but they camped in a tent near the mouth of the Mercy. + +Every day Smith and Spilett climbed up to Prospect Plateau. Sometimes +Herbert went with them, but Pencroff never. The sailor did not wish to +look upon the island in its present condition of devastation. + +It was, indeed, a desolate spectacle. All its wooded part was now +denuded. One single group of green trees remained on the extremity of +Serpentine Peninsula. Here and there appeared some blackened stumps. +The site of the forests was more desolate than Tadorn’s Fens. The +invasion of the lavas had been complete. Where formerly had been a +pleasant verdure, was now nothing but a waste covered with volcanic +tufa. The valleys of Fall River and Red Creek contained no water, and +if Lake Grant had been completely filled up, the colonists would have +had no means to slack their thirst. But fortunately its southern +extremity had been spared, and formed a sort of pool, which held all +the fresh water remaining on the island. To the northwest the spurs of +the mountain, in jagged outline, looked like a gigantic claw grasping +the ground. What a doleful spectacle! What a frightful aspect! How +grevious for the colonists, who, from a domain, fertile, wooded, + +traversed by water-courses, enriched by harvests, found themselves, in +an instant, reduced to a devastated rock, upon which, without their +stores, they would not have had the means of living. + +“It is heart-breaking!” said the reporter. + +“Yes, Spilett,” answered the engineer. And pray heaven that we are +given time to finish the ship, which is now our sole refuge!” + +“Does it not seem to you, Cyrus, that the volcano is subsiding? It +still vomits lava, but, I think, less freely!” + +“It matters little,” answered Smith. “The fire is still fierce in the +bowels of the mountain, and the sea may rush in there at any moment. We +are like persons on a ship devoured by a fire which they cannot +control, who know that sooner or later the flames will reach the powder +magazine. Come, Spilett, come, we have not an hour to lose!” + +For eight days longer, that is to say until the 8th of February, the +lavas continued to flow, but the eruption confined itself to the limits +described. Smith feared more than anything else an overflow of the +lavas on to the beach, in which case the ship-yard would be destroyed. +But about this time the colonists felt vibrations in the ground which +gave them the greatest uneasiness. + +The 20th of February arrived. A month longer was necessary to fit the +ship for sea. Would the island last that long? It was Smith’s intention +to launch her as soon as her hull should be sufficiently caulked. The +deck, lining, arranging the interior, and the rigging could be done +afterwards, but the important thing was to secure a refuge off the +island. Perhaps it would be better to take the vessel round to Balloon +Harbor, the point farthest from the eruptive centre, as, at the mouth +of the Mercy, between the islet and the granite wall, she ran the risk +of being crushed, in case of a breaking up of the island. Therefore, +all the efforts of the workmen were directed to completing the hull. + +On the 3d of March they were able to calculate that the ship could be +launched in twelve days. + +Hope returned to the hearts of these colonists, who had been so sorely +tried during this fourth year of their sojourn on Lincoln Island! Even +Pencroff was roused from the taciturnity into which he had been plunged +by the ruin and devastation of his domain. He thought of nothing else +but the ship, on which he concentrated all his hopes. + +“We will finish her!” he said to the engineer, “we will finish her, Mr. +Smith, and it is high time, for you see how far advanced the season is, +and it will soon be the equinox. Well, if it is necessary, we will +winter at Tabor Island! But Tabor Island after Lincoln Island! Alas! +how unlucky I am! To think that I should live to see such a thing as +this!” + +“Let us make haste!” was the invariable answer of the engineer. + +And every one worked unceasingly. + +“Master,” asked Neb, some days later, “if Captain Nemo had been alive, +do you think this would have happened?” + +“Yes, Neb,” answered the engineer. + +“I don’t think so!” whispered Pencroff to the negro. + +“Nor I!” replied Neb. + +During the first week in March Mount Franklin became again threatening. +Thousands of threads of glass, made by the fluid lavas, fell like rain +to the ground. The crater gave forth fresh torrents of lava that flowed +down every side of the volcano. These torrents flowed over the surface +of hardened lava, and destroyed the last vestiges of the trees which +had survived the first eruption. The current, this time following the +southwest shore of Lake Grant, flowed along Glycerine Creek and invaded +Prospect Plateau. This last calamity was a terrible blow to the +colonists; of the mill, the poultry-yard, the stables, nothing +remained. The frightened inhabitants of these places fled in every +direction. Top and Jup gave signs of the utmost terror, and their +instinct warned them of an impending disaster. A large number of +animals had perished in the first eruption, and those which survived +had found their only refuge in Tadorn’s Fens, and on Prospect Plateau. +But this last retreat was now closed from them, and the torrent of lava +having reached the edge of the granite wall, began to fall over on to +the shore in cataracts of fire. The sublime horror of this spectacle +passes all description. At night it looked like a Niagara of molten +matter, with its incandescent spray rising on high and its boiling +masses below! + +The colonists were driven to their last refuge, and, although the upper +seams were uncaulked, they resolved to launch their ship into the sea! + +Pencroff and Ayrton made the preparations for this event, which was to +take place on the morning of the next day, the 9th of March. + +But, during that night, an enormous column of steam escaped from the +crater, rising in the midst of terrific detonations to a height of more +than 3,000 feet. The wall of Crypt Dakkar had given way under the +pressure of the gas, and the sea, pouring + +through the central chimney into the burning gulf, was turned into +steam! + +The crater was not a sufficient vent for this vapor! + +An explosion, which could have been heard a hundred miles away, shook +the very heavens! Fragments of the mountain fell into the Pacific, and, +in a few minutes, the ocean covered the place where Lincoln Island had +been! + + + + +CHAPTER LXII. + + +AN ISOLATED ROCK IN THE PACIFIC—THE LAST REFUGE OF THE COLONISTS—THE +PROSPECT OF DEATH—UNEXPECTED SUCCOR—HOW AND WHY IT CAME—THE LAST GOOD +ACTION—AN ISLAND ON TERRA FIRMA-THE TOMB OF CAPTAIN NEMO. + + +An isolated rock, thirty feet long, fifteen feet wide, rising ten feet +above the surface of the water, this was the sole solid point which had +not vanished beneath the waves of the Pacific. + +It was all that remained of Granite House! The wall had been thrown +over, then broken to pieces, and some of the rocks of the great hall +had been so heaped together as to form this culminating point. All else +had disappeared in the surrounding abyss: the lower cone of Mount +Franklin, torn to pieces by the explosion; the lava jaws of Shark Gulf; +Prospect Plateau, Safety Islet, the granite of Balloon Harbor; the +basalt of Crypt Dakkar; Serpentine Peninsula—had been precipitated into +the eruptive centre! All that remained of Lincoln Island was this rock, +the refuge of the six colonists and their dog Top. + +All the animals had perished in the catastrophe. The birds as well as +the beasts, all were crashed or drowned, and poor Jup, alas! had been +swallowed up in some crevasse in the ground! + +Smith, Spilett, Herbert, Pencroff, Neb, and Ayrton had survived, +because, being gathered together in their tent, they had been thrown +into the sea, at the moment when the debris of the island rained down +upon the water. + +When they came again to the surface they saw nothing but this rock, +half a cable length away, to which they swam. + +They had been here nine days! Some provisions, brought from the +magazine of Granite House before the catastrophe, a little soft water +left by the rain in the crevice of the rock—this was all that the +unfortunates possessed. Their last hope, their ship, had been broken to +pieces. They had no means of leaving this reef. No fire, nor anything +with which to make it. They were doomed to perish! + +This day, the 18th of March, there remained a supply of food, which, +with the strictest care, could last but forty-eight hours longer. All +their knowledge, all their skill, could avail them nothing now. They +were entirely at God’s mercy. + +Smith was calm, Spilett somewhat nervous, and Pencroff, ready to throw +himself into the sea. Herbert never left the engineer; and gazed upon +him, as if demanding the succor which he could not give. Neb and Ayrton +were resigned after their manner. + +“Oh, misery! misery!” repeated Pencroff. “If we had but a walnut-shell +to take us to Tabor Island! But nothing; not a thing!” + +“And Captain Nemo is dead!” said Neb. + +During the five days which followed, Smith and his companions ate just +enough of the supply of food to keep them from famishing. Their +feebleness was extreme. Herbert and Neb began to show signs of +delirium. + +In this situation had they a shadow of hope? No! What was their sole +chance? That a ship would pass in sight of the rock? They knew, by +experience, that ships never visited this part of the Pacific. Could +they count, then, by a coincidence which would be truly providential, +upon the Scotch yacht coming just at this time to search for Ayrton at +Tabor Island? It was not probable. And, moreover, supposing that it +came, since the colonists had placed no notice there indicating the +place where Ayrton was to be found, the captain of the yacht, after a +fruitless search of the island, would proceed at once to regain the +lower latitudes. + +No! they could entertain no hope of being saved, and a horrible death, +a death by hunger and thirst, awaited them upon this rock! + +Already they lay stretched out, inanimate, unconscious of what was +going on around them. Only, Ayrton, by a supreme effort, raised his +head, and cast a despairing look over this desert sea! + +But, behold! on this morning of the 24th of March, Ayrton extended his +arms towards some point in space; he rose up, first to his knees, then +stood upright; he waved his hand— + +A ship was in sight of the island! This ship did not sail these seas at +hap-hazard. The reef was the point towards which she directed her +course, crowding on all steam, and the unfortunates would have seen her +many hours before, had they had the strength to scan the horizon! + +“The Duncan!” murmured Ayrton, and then he fell senseless upon the +rock. + + +When Smith and his companions regained consciousness, thanks to the +care lavished upon them, they found themselves in the cabin of a +steamer, unaware of the manner in which they had escaped death. + +A word from Ayrton was sufficient to enlighten them. + +“It is the Duncan,” he murmured. + +“The Duncan!” answered Smith. And then, raising his arms to heaven, he +exclaimed:— + +“Oh, all powerful Providence! thou hast wished that we should be +saved!” + +It was, indeed, the Duncan, Lord Glenarvan’s yacht, at this time +commanded by Robert, the son of Captain Grant, who had been sent to +Tabor Island to search for Ayrton and bring him home after twelve years +of expatriation! + +The colonists were saved, they were already on the homeward route! + +“Captain Robert,” asked Smith, “what suggested to you the idea, after +leaving Tabor Island, where you were unable to find Ayrton, to come in +this direction?” + +“It was to search, not only for Ayrton, Mr. Smith, but for you and your +companions!” + +“My companions and myself?” + +“Doubtless! On Lincoln Island!” + +“Lincoln Island!” cried the others, greatly astonished. + +“How did you know of Lincoln Island?” asked Smith. “It is not on the +maps.” + +“I knew of it by the notice which you left on Tabor Island,” answered +Grant. + +“The notice?” cried Spilett. + +“Certainly, and here it is,” replied the other, handing him a paper +indicating the exact position of the Lincoln Island, “the actual +residence of Ayrton and of five American colonists.” + +“Captain Nemo!” said Smith, after having read the notice, and +recognized that it was in the same handwriting as the paper found at +the corral. + +“Ah!” said Pencroff, “it was he who took our Good Luck, he who ventured +alone to Tabor Island!” + +“To place this notice there!” answered Herbert. + +“Then I was right when I said,” cried the sailor, “that he would do us +a last service even after his death!” + +“My friends,” said Smith, in a voice moved by emotion, “may the God of +sinners receive the soul of Captain Nemo; he was our savior!” + +The colonists, uncovering as Smith spake thus, murmured the name of the +captain. + +Then Ayrton, approaching the engineer, said to him, simply:— + +“What shall be done with the coffer?” + +Ayrton had saved this coffer at the risk of his life, at the moment +when the island was engulfed. He now faithfully returned it to the +engineer. + +“Ayrton! Ayrton!” exclaimed Smith, greatly affected. + +Then addressing Grant:— + +“Captain,” he said, “where you left a criminal, you have found a man +whom expiation has made honest, and to whom I am proud to give my +hand!” + +Thereupon Grant was informed of all the strange history of Captain Nemo +and the colonists of Lincoln Island. And then, the bearings of this +remaining reef having been taken, Captain Grant gave the order to go +about. + +Fifteen days later the colonists landed in America, which they found at +peace after the terrible war which had ended in the triumph of justice +and right. Of the wealth contained in the coffer, the greater part was +employed in the purchase of a vast tract of land in Iowa. One single +pearl, the most beautiful of all, was taken from the treasure and sent +to Lady Glenarvan in the name of the castaways, who had been rescued by +the Duncan. + +To this domain the colonists invited to labor—that is, to fortune and +to happiness—all those whom they had counted on receiving at Lincoln +Island. Here they founded a great colony, to which they gave the name +of the island which had disappeared in the depths of the Pacific. They +found here a river which they called the Mercy, a mountain to which +they gave the name of Franklin, a little lake which they called Lake +Grant, and forests which became the forests of the Far West. It was +like an island on terra-firma. + +Here, under the skillful hand of the engineer and his companions, +everything prospered. Not one of the former colonists was missing, for +they had agreed always to live together, Neb wherever his master was, +Ayrton always ready to sacrifice himself, Pencroff a better farmer than +he had been a sailor, Herbert who finished his studies under Smith’s +direction, Spilett who founded the New Lincoln _Herald_, which was the +best edited journal in the whole world. + +Here Smith and his companions often received visits from Lord and Lady +Glenarvan, from Captain John Mangles and his wife, sister to Robert +Grant, from Robert Grant himself, from Major MacNabbs, from all those +who had been mixed up in the double history of Captain Grant and +Captain Nemo. + +Here, finally, all were happy, united in the present as they had been +in the past; but never did they forget that island upon which they had +arrived poor and naked, that island which, for four years, had sufficed +for all their needs, and of which all that remained was a morsel of +granite, beaten by the waves of the Pacific, the tomb of him who was +Captain Nemo! + +THE END. + +GLOSSARY. + +AGOUTI. A genus of rodent animals, the size of a rabbit, but more like +the squirrel in appearance, with the exception of the tail, which is a +short, bare stump. When at rest, they sit upon their haunches, holding +their food between their fore-paws. + +ALBATROSS. A genus of large, web-footed, acquatic birds, possessing +prodigious powers of flight. Its wings, when extended, sometimes +measure 15 feet. + +ALGAROBA BEANS. The seeds of the algaroba or carob tree. These seeds +were formerly used by jewellers as weights, and the sweetish honey in +the seed-pod is supposed by some to be the wild honey upon which St. +John lived in the wilderness. Animals, especially horses, are fond of +the bean. + +AI. The three-toed sloth. The only animal which can neither walk nor +stand. It is herbivorous, and lives in trees, moving suspended from a +branch by its long and powerful arms. + +ANTHROPOMORPHI. Animals resembling human beings in form. + +APYREXY. The intermission of a fever. + +ARADS. An order of plants of which dragon-root, or jack-in-the-pulpit +is a familiar example. Portland sago is made from the corms of some of +these plants. + +ARGALL. A species of moufflon or wild sheep. + +AZOTH. The old name for nitrogen. + +BALEEN. The substance called whale-bone. + +BALLISTIC. Relating to engines for throwing missiles; such as the +ancient ballista. + +BANKSIA. A genus of plants remarkable for the beauty of their flowers +and their evergreen foliage. They are sometimes called honey-suckle +trees. + +BUSTARD. A kind of wild turkey inhabiting the open plains of Europe, +Asia and Africa. + +CABIAI. The largest known rodent. _Hystricidæ_. from its aquatic habits +it is sometimes called a water-hog. + +CARAPACE. A thick, solid shell covering some reptiles, as the turtle. + +CASAURINÆ. Tropical plants, so named on account of the resemblance +their leaves bear to the drooping feathers of the cassowary. For this +reason they are sometimes called cassowary trees. + +CASSOWARY. A large, long-legged bird of the ostrich family, famous for +its speed in running. + +CATACLYSM. An inundation or deluge. + +CELLULOSE. Called also celluline. A substance which constitutes the +cellular tissue of all plants. + +CEMENTATION. The process of changing the properties of bodies by +heating them in contact with the powder of other substances. + +CETACEA. The name of the genus of marine animals which includes whales, +dolphins, etc. + +CINCHONIA. A vegetable alkali found in the cinchona,—a genus of trees +found in Peru,—the bark of which is much used as a febrifugal, and is +known as Peruvian Bark. Cinchonia is not much used in medicine. + +COCKATOO. A genus of birds of the parrot family, distinguished from all +other parrots by a crest of feathers on the head, which the bird can +raise or depress at pleasure. + +CONIFERS. _Coniferæ_. An order of cone-bearing plants, including +fir-trees, pines, cedars, junipers, etc. + +CO-ORDINATES. A system of lines and angles by which the position of any +point may be determined with reference to a fixed point. + +CORM. The solid, underground stem of a plant, like the bulb of a tulip; +differing, however, from a bulb in being solid. + +COUROUCOUS. Birds of the warbler family, which, excepting the humming +bird family, contains the smallest birds in the world. The Nightingale, +Wood wren and Golden-crests are familiar examples. + +CURASSOW. A gallinaceous bird, about the size of turkeys, and capable +of domestication. + +CYCAS. A genus of trees intermediate between the palms and the ferns, +cultivated in China, and valued for its pith, which furnishes a kind of +sago. + +DEODAR. The Himalayan cedar. A genus of trees belonging to the order +_Pinaccæ_; the same order as the cedars of Lebanon, celebrated for its +beauty, its longevity, its magnitude, and the durability of its timber. + +DUGONG. An herbivorous mammal having an elongated body, with flippers +near the head, and terminated by a crescent-shaped tail. It drags +itself along the shore and browses on the herbage that grows along the +banks of the rivers which it frequents. + +ECHIDNA. A genus of ovoviparous mammals, which have the general form of +the ant-eater, but the body is covered with spines like a porcupine; +hence they are sometimes called porcupine ant-eaters. + +EMUE. A species of cassowary found principally in Australia, and +sometimes called Australian cassowary. + +EUCALYPTUS. A genus of plants of the myrtle family, which grow to a +prodigious height. Its leaves exude a substance resembling manna, which +falls to the ground in pieces as large as nuts. The trees are sometimes +called gum trees. + +FEBRIFUGE. A medicine to drive away or allay fever. + +FECULA. A term applied to the substance obtained from plants; also +called starch or farina. + +FULGURITE. A vitrified sand-tube made by the action of lightning. + +FULIGINOUS. Resembling smoke; smokey. + +FUSIFORM. Spindle-shaped. + +GARGOYLE. A projecting water-spout, often grotesquely carved, attached +to old gothic buildings. + +HYDROGRAPHY. As opposed to orography; the water system of a country. + +IZARD. The chamois of the Pyrenees. + +JACAMAR. A genus of climbing birds, closely allied to the kingfishers, +that live in forests, feed on insects, and build in low bushes. Their +plumage has a carious metallic lustre. + +JETSAM. Goods coming to land which have been thrown overboard from a +ship in distress. + +KAOLINE. The Chinese name for a kind of porcelain clay. + +GLOSSARY. + +KOULAS. See Ai. + +LARDIZABALACEÆ. An order of twining shrubs, some of which furnish our +greenhouses with pretty evergreen climbers. + +LENTICULAR. Having the form of a double convex lens. + +LIANA. A name used to designate the climbing, twining plants which +abound in tropical forests, often growing to an immense size, and +forming a perfect network of branches, impenetrable without the aid of +a hatchet. They are comparatively rare in our climate, but honeysuckles +may be mentioned as familiar examples. + +LILIACKÆ. Plants of the order of amaryllids, growing to an enormous +size. They are commonly known as the giant Lily. The stem is leafy, 15 +or 20 feet high, and bears at the top a cluster of superb large crimson +blossoms. + +LITHODOMI. Molluscous animals which form holes in the solid rocks, in +which they lodge themselves. One species (_Lithodomus Lithophagus_) is +esteemed as an article of food, and is known by the name of the +_sea-date shell_. + +LORIES. Birds belonging to the parrot family, remarkable for their soft +beaks. + +MACAUCO. A genus of four-handed animals, resembling the monkey tribe. + +MACRODACTYLS. Long-toed wading birds. + +MAGOT. A small species of ape, sometimes called the Barbary ape. + +MALACOLOGIST. One who treats of mollusks. + +MANNIFERS. A name synonymous with mammals; meaning animals which suckle +their young. + +MANATEE. A marine animal closely related to the dugong. It Is sometimes +called lamantine or sea-cow. + +MARGARINE. A fatty solid matter obtained from oil. + +MOUFFLON. _Caprovis Mussimon_. Resembling the mountain sheep of +Arizona. It is the size of a deer; covered with hair which assumes a +woolly character in winter. + +OLEINE. The fluid portion of fats and oils. + +ONAGER. Another name for the wild ass. + +OROGRAPHY. As opposed to hydrography; the description of the mountain +system of a country. + +PALMIPEDS. Web-footed fowl. + +PECCARY. An animal resembling a hog, sometimes called Mexican hog, or +_tajacu_. + +PELLICAN. A largo aquatic bird, having a long, straight and very strong +bill. It lives upon fish, which It carries for some time in a pouch or +bag attached to the lover mandible. + +PIROGUE. A canoe, usually formed of a hollowed tree. + +POLYPORUS. A genus of fungi, allied to mushrooms, toad-stools, +sap-balls, etc.; used in Germany to make the tinder called Amadon. + +PTEROPODA. A class of mollusks which live In the open sea, and have a +pair of flippers or wings, by which they pass rapidly through the +water. + +PULP. The common name for marine animals of the genus octopus, such as +the cuttle-fish. They have eight feet or arms around the head, with +which they swim, creep, and seize their prey. It is the _Pieuvre_ of +Victor Hugo. + +PUZZOLAN. Fine volcanic ashes, which harden under water, forming a kind +of cement. + +PYROXYLINE. Called also gun-cotton. It burns In the open air with a +flash, though without smoke or report; but It is violently explosive +when fired in a confined space. + +QUADRUMANA. Animals having four hands, as apes, baboons, etc. + +QUININE. The most important of the vegetable alkaloids found In the +cinchona (see CINCHONIA). It is one of the most valuable antiperiodics +and febrifuges known. + +RECRUDESENCE. The state of becoming sore again. + +RINFORDZANDO. A musical sign denoting an Increase of sound. Usually +expressed by the abbreviation _rf_. + +RUMINANT. An animal that chews the cud. + +SAGOIN. A species of sapajo. The squirrel monkey; so called on account +of its hairy tail. + +SALICIN. A white and very bitter substance, obtained from the bark of +the willow and other trees. + +SAPAJOS. The proper name for tailed monkeys, as distinguishing them +from apes, baboons and gorillas, which are tailless. + +SEXTANT. An Instrument for measuring angles by reflection. + +SPHENISCUS. Penguins; a sub-family of auks. Oceanic birds remarkable +for their short legs, very short wings—which are useful only In +swimming; and their upright position when at rest. + +STEARINE. The most abundant of the solid constituents of fats and oils. +Also a popular name for stearic acid, used in candles. + +SUCCEDANEOUS. Supplying the place of something else. + +TALUS. A sloping heap of fragments accumulated at the foot of a steep +rock, from the face of which they have been broken off by the action of +the weather. + +TETRA. _Tetraonieda_, or grouse. The bird here described resembles the +pinated grouse, or prairie-chicken. + +TINAMONS. A family of birds belonging to the order _gallinæ_. They are +about the size of quail. + +TOURACO-LORIES. Climbing birds of the parrot family. + +TRAGOPANS. A large species of pheasant. + +TUFA. A name given to volcanic dust, cemented by the Infiltration of +water into a porous rock. + +[Illustration: Lincoln Island] + +END OF TRANSLATION OF THE MYSTERIOUS ISLAND + + + + +*** END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE MYSTERIOUS ISLAND *** + +Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions will +be renamed. + +Creating the works from print editions not protected by U.S. copyright +law means that no one owns a United States copyright in these works, +so the Foundation (and you!) can copy and distribute it in the +United States without permission and without paying copyright +royalties. Special rules, set forth in the General Terms of Use part +of this license, apply to copying and distributing Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works to protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm +concept and trademark. Project Gutenberg is a registered trademark, +and may not be used if you charge for an eBook, except by following +the terms of the trademark license, including paying royalties for use +of the Project Gutenberg trademark. If you do not charge anything for +copies of this eBook, complying with the trademark license is very +easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose such as creation +of derivative works, reports, performances and research. Project +Gutenberg eBooks may be modified and printed and given away--you may +do practically ANYTHING in the United States with eBooks not protected +by U.S. copyright law. Redistribution is subject to the trademark +license, especially commercial redistribution. + +START: FULL LICENSE + +THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE +PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK + +To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work +(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project +Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full +Project Gutenberg-tm License available with this file or online at +www.gutenberg.org/license. + +Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works + +1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to +and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property +(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all +the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or +destroy all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your +possession. If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a +Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound +by the terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the +person or entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph +1.E.8. + +1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be +used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who +agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few +things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works +even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See +paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this +agreement and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works. See paragraph 1.E below. + +1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the +Foundation" or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection +of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual +works in the collection are in the public domain in the United +States. If an individual work is unprotected by copyright law in the +United States and you are located in the United States, we do not +claim a right to prevent you from copying, distributing, performing, +displaying or creating derivative works based on the work as long as +all references to Project Gutenberg are removed. Of course, we hope +that you will support the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting +free access to electronic works by freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm +works in compliance with the terms of this agreement for keeping the +Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with the work. You can easily +comply with the terms of this agreement by keeping this work in the +same format with its attached full Project Gutenberg-tm License when +you share it without charge with others. + +1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern +what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are +in a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, +check the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this +agreement before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, +distributing or creating derivative works based on this work or any +other Project Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no +representations concerning the copyright status of any work in any +country other than the United States. + +1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: + +1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other +immediate access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear +prominently whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work +on which the phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the +phrase "Project Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, +performed, viewed, copied or distributed: + + This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and + most other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no + restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it + under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included with this + eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the + United States, you will have to check the laws of the country where + you are located before using this eBook. + +1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is +derived from texts not protected by U.S. copyright law (does not +contain a notice indicating that it is posted with permission of the +copyright holder), the work can be copied and distributed to anyone in +the United States without paying any fees or charges. If you are +redistributing or providing access to a work with the phrase "Project +Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the work, you must comply +either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 or +obtain permission for the use of the work and the Project Gutenberg-tm +trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + +1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted +with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution +must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any +additional terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms +will be linked to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works +posted with the permission of the copyright holder found at the +beginning of this work. + +1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this +work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. + +1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this +electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without +prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with +active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project +Gutenberg-tm License. + +1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, +compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including +any word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access +to or distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format +other than "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official +version posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm website +(www.gutenberg.org), you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense +to the user, provide a copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means +of obtaining a copy upon request, of the work in its original "Plain +Vanilla ASCII" or other form. Any alternate format must include the +full Project Gutenberg-tm License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. + +1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, +performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works +unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + +1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing +access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works +provided that: + +* You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method + you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is owed + to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he has + agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the Project + Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments must be paid + within 60 days following each date on which you prepare (or are + legally required to prepare) your periodic tax returns. Royalty + payments should be clearly marked as such and sent to the Project + Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the address specified in + Section 4, "Information about donations to the Project Gutenberg + Literary Archive Foundation." + +* You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm + License. You must require such a user to return or destroy all + copies of the works possessed in a physical medium and discontinue + all use of and all access to other copies of Project Gutenberg-tm + works. + +* You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of + any money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days of + receipt of the work. + +* You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work or group of works on different terms than +are set forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing +from the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the manager of +the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the Foundation as set +forth in Section 3 below. + +1.F. + +1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable +effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread +works not protected by U.S. copyright law in creating the Project +Gutenberg-tm collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may +contain "Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate +or corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other +intellectual property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or +other medium, a computer virus, or computer codes that damage or +cannot be read by your equipment. + +1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right +of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project +Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal +fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT +LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE +PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE +TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE +LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR +INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGE. + +1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a +defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can +receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a +written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you +received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium +with your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you +with the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in +lieu of a refund. If you received the work electronically, the person +or entity providing it to you may choose to give you a second +opportunity to receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If +the second copy is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing +without further opportunities to fix the problem. + +1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth +in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS', WITH NO +OTHER WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT +LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. + +1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied +warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of +damages. If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement +violates the law of the state applicable to this agreement, the +agreement shall be interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or +limitation permitted by the applicable state law. The invalidity or +unenforceability of any provision of this agreement shall not void the +remaining provisions. + +1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the +trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone +providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in +accordance with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the +production, promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works, harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, +including legal fees, that arise directly or indirectly from any of +the following which you do or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this +or any Project Gutenberg-tm work, (b) alteration, modification, or +additions or deletions to any Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any +Defect you cause. + +Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm + +Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of +electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of +computers including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It +exists because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations +from people in all walks of life. + +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the +assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's +goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will +remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure +and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future +generations. To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation and how your efforts and donations can help, see +Sections 3 and 4 and the Foundation information page at +www.gutenberg.org + +Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non-profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the +state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal +Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification +number is 64-6221541. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent permitted by +U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. + +The Foundation's business office is located at 809 North 1500 West, +Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887. Email contact links and up +to date contact information can be found at the Foundation's website +and official page at www.gutenberg.org/contact + +Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation + +Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without +widespread public support and donations to carry out its mission of +increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be +freely distributed in machine-readable form accessible by the widest +array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations +($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt +status with the IRS. + +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United +States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a +considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up +with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations +where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To SEND +DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any particular +state visit www.gutenberg.org/donate + +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we +have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition +against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who +approach us with offers to donate. + +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make +any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from +outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. + +Please check the Project Gutenberg web pages for current donation +methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other +ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. To +donate, please visit: www.gutenberg.org/donate + +Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works + +Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project +Gutenberg-tm concept of a library of electronic works that could be +freely shared with anyone. For forty years, he produced and +distributed Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of +volunteer support. + +Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as not protected by copyright in +the U.S. unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not +necessarily keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper +edition. + +Most people start at our website which has the main PG search +facility: www.gutenberg.org + +This website includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, +including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to +subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. + + diff --git a/8993-0.zip b/8993-0.zip Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..a78dcab --- /dev/null +++ b/8993-0.zip diff --git a/8993-h.zip b/8993-h.zip Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..3ade60f --- /dev/null +++ b/8993-h.zip diff --git a/8993-h/8993-h.htm b/8993-h/8993-h.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..e55f17f --- /dev/null +++ b/8993-h/8993-h.htm @@ -0,0 +1,29391 @@ +<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Strict//EN" +"http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/DTD/xhtml1-strict.dtd"> +<html xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xml:lang="en" lang="en"> +<head> +<meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html;charset=utf-8" /> +<meta http-equiv="Content-Style-Type" content="text/css" /> +<title>The Project Gutenberg eBook of The Mysterious Island, by Jules Verne</title> + +<style type="text/css"> + +body { margin-left: 20%; + margin-right: 20%; + text-align: justify; } + +h1, h2, h3, h4, h5 {text-align: center; font-style: normal; font-weight: +normal; line-height: 1.5; margin-top: .5em; margin-bottom: .5em;} + +h1 {font-size: 300%; + margin-top: 0.6em; + margin-bottom: 0.6em; + letter-spacing: 0.12em; + word-spacing: 0.2em; + text-indent: 0em;} +h2 {font-size: 150%; margin-top: 2em; margin-bottom: 1em;} +h3 {font-size: 130%; margin-top: 1em;} +h4 {font-size: 120%;} +h5 {font-size: 110%;} + +.no-break {page-break-before: avoid;} /* for epubs */ + +div.chapter {page-break-before: always; margin-top: 4em;} + +hr {width: 80%; margin-top: 2em; margin-bottom: 2em;} + +p {text-indent: 1em; + margin-top: 0.25em; + margin-bottom: 0.25em; } + +p.letter {text-indent: 0%; + margin-left: 10%; + margin-right: 10%; + margin-top: 1em; + margin-bottom: 1em; } + +p.center {text-align: center; + text-indent: 0em; + margin-top: 1em; + margin-bottom: 1em; } + +a:link {color:blue; text-decoration:none} +a:visited {color:blue; text-decoration:none} +a:hover {color:red} + +</style> +</head> +<body> + +<div style='text-align:center; font-size:1.2em; font-weight:bold'>The Project Gutenberg eBook of The Mysterious Island, by Jules Verne</div> +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and +most other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no restrictions +whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it under the terms +of the Project Gutenberg License included with this eBook or online +at <a href="https://www.gutenberg.org">www.gutenberg.org</a>. If you +are not located in the United States, you will have to check the laws of the +country where you are located before using this eBook. +</div> +<div style='display:block; margin-top:1em; margin-bottom:1em; margin-left:2em; text-indent:-2em'>Title: The Mysterious Island</div> +<div style='display:block; margin-top:1em; margin-bottom:1em; margin-left:2em; text-indent:-2em'>Author: Jules Verne</div> +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>Release Date: August 31, 2003 [eBook #8993]<br /> +[Most recently updated: June 9, 2022]</div> +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>Language: English</div> +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>Character set encoding: UTF-8</div> +<div style='display:block; margin-left:2em; text-indent:-2em'>Produced by: Norman M. Wolcott</div> +<div style='margin-top:2em; margin-bottom:4em'>*** START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE MYSTERIOUS ISLAND ***</div> + +<h1>The Mysterious Island</h1> + +<h2 class="no-break">by Jules Verne</h2> + +<hr /> + +<p> +<b>[Redactor’s Note:</b> <i>The Mysterious Island</i> (Number <b>V013</b> +in the T&M numerical listing of Verne’s works) is a translation of +<i>L’Île mystérieuse</i> first published in England by Sampson and Low +and in the United States by Scribner and Henry L. Shepard using the same +translation of W. H. G. Kingston. English translators often altered their +translations to suit current political views of Church and Empire. In the +Kingston translation the chapters near the end of the book where Captain Nemo +makes his appearance are altered beyond all recognition and all mention of +Captain Nemo’s previous life as a “freedom fighter” for +Indian independence is removed, in addition to other deletions. The present +translation is by the American Stephen W. White. It first appeared in the +<i>Evening Telegraph</i> of Philadelphia, PA and was later published as an +Evening Telegraph Reprint Book (1876). The present version is prepared from a +xerox copy of that book kindly provided by Mr. Sidney Kravitz of Dover, NJ. +According to Taves and Michaluk “Although more faithful than any other +translation, this one has never been reprinted”. And so after a lapse of +127 years this translation of <i>The Mysterious Island</i> is now again +available to the public. +</p> + +<p> +Since the text was hand set for a newspaper there are many printer’s +errors (including upside-down characters). Where obvious these have been +corrected, although an attempt has been made to retain the original spelling of +words in use at that period. Where there is a doubt, words have been altered so +that the spelling is consistent. In other cases, like “trajopan” +where the inconsistency is traced to Verne’s original, the spelling is +left unaltered. A table of contents based on the chapter headings has been +added which also indicates the points at which the french version was divided +into three parts. An updated translation by Sidney Kravitz is now available +from Wesleyan University Press (2001). +</p> + +<hr /> + +<p class="center"> +JULES VERNE’S LAST STORY +</p> + +<hr /> + +<h4>THE</h4> + +<h4>THE MYSTERIOUS ISLAND</h4> + +<h4>ISLAND</h4> + +<p class="center"> +WITH A MAP OF THE ISLAND AND A FULL GLOSSARY +</p> + +<p class="center"> +By JULES VERNE +</p> + +<p class="center"> +AUTHOR OF “THE TOUR OF THE WORLD IN EIGHTY DAYS,” “A JOURNEY +TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH,” “TWENTY THOUSAND LEAGUES UNDER THE +SEA,” ETC.,ETC. +</p> + +<hr /> + +<p class="center"> +<i>TRANSLATED EXPRESSLY FOR</i> +</p> + +<h4>“T H E E V E N I N G T E L E G R A P +H,”</h4> + +<p class="center"> +<i>AND REPRINTED FROM THE COLUMNS OF THAT JOURNAL.</i> +</p> + +<hr /> + +<p class="center"> +PHILADELPHIA: +</p> + +<p class="center"> +OFFICE OF THE EVENING TELEGAPH, 108 SOUTH THIRD ST. +</p> + +<h4>1876</h4> + +<h3>PRICE, 25 CENTS</h3> + +<hr /> + +<h2>THE MYSTERIOUS ISLAND</h2> + +<h2>CONTENTS</h2> + +<table summary="" style="margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto"> + +<tr> +<td><h4><a href="#PART_I">PART I</a></h4></td> +<td><h4>SHIPWRECKED IN THE AIR</h4></td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td><a href="#I">I</a></td> +<td>The Hurricane of 1865—Cries in the Air—A Balloon Caught By a +Waterspout—Only the Sea in Sight—Five Passengers—What Took +Place in the Basket—Land Ahead!—The End.</td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td><a href="#II">II</a></td> +<td>An Episode of the Rebellion—The Engineer Cyrus Smith—Gideon +Spilett—The Negro Neb—The Sailor Pencroft—The Youth, +Herbert—An Unexpected Proposal—Rendezvous at 10 O’clock +P.M.—Departure in the Storm.</td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td><a href="#III">III</a></td> +<td>Five O’clock in the Afternoon—The Lost One—The Despair of +Neb—Search to the Northward—The Island—A Night of +Anguish—The Fog of the Morning—Neb Swimming—Sight of the +Land—Fording the Channel.</td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td><a href="#IV">IV</a></td> +<td>The Lithodomes—The Mouth of the River—The +“Chimneys”—Continuation of the Search—The Forest of +Evergreens—Getting Firewood—Waiting for the Tide—On Top of +the Cliff—The Timber-Float—The Return to the Coast.</td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td><a href="#V">V</a></td> +<td>Arranging the Chimneys—The Important Question of Fire—The Match +Box—Search Over the Shore—Return of the Reporter and Neb—One +Match—The Crackling Fire—The Fish Supper—The First Night on +Land.</td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td><a href="#VI">VI</a></td> +<td>The Castaways’ Inventory—No Effects—The Charred +Linen—An Expedition Into the Forest—The Flora of the +Woods—The Flight of the Jacamar—Tracks of Wild Beasts—The +Couroucous—The Heath-Cock—Line-Fishing Extraordinary.</td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td><a href="#VII">VII</a></td> +<td>Neb Has Not Yet Returned—The Reflections of the Reporter—The +Supper—Prospect of a Bad Night—The Storm Is Frightful—They Go +Out Into the Night—Struggle with the Rain and Wind.</td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td><a href="#VIII">VIII</a></td> +<td>Is Cyrus Smith Alive?—Neb’s Story—Footprints—An +Insoluble Question—The First Words of Smith—Comparing the +Footprints—Return to the Chimneys—Pencroff Dejected.</td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td><a href="#IX">IX</a></td> +<td>Cyrus Is Here-Pencroff’s Attempts—Rubbing Wood—Island or +Continent—The Plans of the Engineer—Whereabouts in the +Pacific—In the Depths of the Forest—The Pistachio Pine—A Pig +Chase—A Smoke of Good Omen.</td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td><a href="#X">X</a></td> +<td>The Engineer’s Invention—Island Or Continent?—Departure for +the Mountain—The Forest—Volcanic Soil—The Tragopans—The +Moufflons—The First Plateau—Encamping for the Night—The +Summit of the Cone</td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td><a href="#XI">XI</a></td> +<td>At the Summit of the Cone—The Interior of the Crater—Sea +Everywhere—No Land in Sight—A Bird’s Eve View of the +Coast—Hydrography and Orography—Is the Island Inhabited?—A +Geographical Baptism—Lincoln Island.</td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td><a href="#XII">XII</a></td> +<td>Regulation of Watches—Pencroff Is Satisfied—A Suspicious +Smoke—The Course of Red Creek—The Flora of the Island—Its +Fauna—Mountain Pheasants—A Kangaroo Chase—The +Agouti—Lake Grant—Return to the Chimneys.</td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td><a href="#XIII">XIII</a></td> +<td>Top’s Contribution—Making Bows and Arrows—A +Brick-Kiln—A Pottery—Different Cooking Utensils—The First +Boiled Meat—Mugwort—The Southern Cross—An Important +Astronomical Observation.</td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td><a href="#XIV">XIV</a></td> +<td>The Measure Of the Granite Wall—An Application of the Theorem of Similar +Triangles—The Latitude of the Island—An Excursion to the +North—An Oyster-Bed—Plans for the Future—The Sun’s +Passage of the Meridian—The Co-ordinates of Lincoln Island.</td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td><a href="#XV">XV</a></td> +<td>Winter Sets In—The Metallurgic Question—The Exploration of Safety +Island—A Seal Hunt—Capture of an Echidna—The Ai—The +Catalonian Method—Making Iron and Steel.</td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td><a href="#XVI">XVI</a></td> +<td>The Question of a Dwelling Discussed Again—Pencroff’s +Ideas—An Exploration to the North of the Lake—The Western Boundary +of the Plateau—The Serpents—The Outlet of the +Lake—Top’s Alarm—Top Swimming—A Fight Under +Water—The Dugong.</td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td><a href="#XVII">XVII</a></td> +<td>A Visit to the Lake—The Direction of the Current—The Prospects of +Cyrus Smith—The Dugong Fat—The Use of the Schistous +Limestone—The Sulphate of Iron—How Glycerine Is +Made—Soap—Saltpetre—Sulphuric Acid—Nitric +Acid—The New Outlet.</td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td><a href="#XVIII">XVIII</a></td> +<td>Pencroff Doubts No More—The Old Outlet of the Lake—A Subterranean +Descent—The Way Through the Granite—Top Has Disappeared—The +Central Cavern—The Lower Well—Mystery—The Blows with the +Pick—The Return.</td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td><a href="#XIX">XIX</a></td> +<td>Smith’s Plan—The Front of Granite House—The Rope +Ladder—Pencroff’s Ideas—The Aromatic Herbs—A Natural +Warren—Getting Water—The View From the Windows of Granite House.</td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td><a href="#XX">XX</a></td> +<td>The Rainy Season—What to Wear-A Seal-Hunt—Candle-Making—-Work +in the Granite House—The Two Causeways—Return From a Visit to the +Oyster-Bed—What Herbert Found in His Pocket.</td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td><a href="#XXI">XXI</a></td> +<td>Several Degrees Below Zero—Exploration of the Swamp Region to the +Southeast—The View of the Sea—A Conversation Concerning the Future +of the Pacific Ocean—The Incessant Labor of the Infusoria—What Will +Become of This Globe—The Chase—The Swamp of the Tadorns.</td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td><a href="#XXII">XXII</a>.</td> +<td>The Traps—The Foxes—The Peccaries—The Wind Veers to the +Northwest—The Snow-Storm—The Basket-Makers—The Coldest Snap +of Winter—Crystallization of the Sugar-Maple—The Mysterious +Shafts—The Projected Exploration—The Pellet of Lead.</td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td><h4><a href="#PART_II">PART II</a></h4></td> +<td><h4>THE ABANDONED</h4></td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td><a href="#XXIII">XXIII</a></td> +<td>Concerning the Leaden Pellet—Making a Canoe—Hunting—In the +Top of a Kauri—Nothing to Indicate the Presence of Man—The Turtle +on its Back—The Turtle Disappears—Smith’s Explanation.</td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td><a href="#XXIV">XXIV</a></td> +<td>Trial of the Canoe—A Wreck on the Shore—The Tow—Jetsam +Point—Inventory of the Box—What Pencroff Wanted—A +Bible—A Verse from the Bible.</td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td><a href="#XXV">XXV</a></td> +<td>The Departure—The Rising Tide—Elms and Other Trees—Different +Plants—The Kingfisher—Appearance of the Forest—The Gigantic +Eucalypti—Why They Are Called Fever-Trees—Monkeys—The +Waterfall—Encampment for the Night.</td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td><a href="#XXVI">XXVI</a></td> +<td>Going Toward the Coast—Troops of Monkeys—A New +Water-Course—Why the Tide Was Not Felt—A Forest on the +Shore—Reptile Promontory—Spilett Makes Herbert Envious—The +Bamboo Fusilade.</td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td><a href="#XXVII">XXVII</a></td> +<td>Proposal to Return By the South Coast—Its Configuration—Search for +the Shipwrecked—A Waif in the Air—Discovery of a Small Natural +Harbor—Midnight on the Mercy—A Drifting Canoe.</td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td><a href="#XXVIII">XXVIII</a></td> +<td>Pencroff’s Halloos—A Night in the Chimneys—Herbert’s +Arrow—Smith’s Plan—An Unexpected Solution—What Had +Happened in Granite House—How the Colonists Obtained a New Domestic.</td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td><a href="#XXIX">XXIX</a></td> +<td>Projects to Be Carried Out—A Bridge Over the Mercy—To Make An +Island of Prospect Plateau—The Draw-Bridge—The Corn +Harvest—The Stream—The Causeway—The Poultry Yard—The +Pigeon-House—The Two Wild Asses—Harnessed to the +Wagon—Excursion to Balloon Harbor.</td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td><a href="#XXX">XXX</a></td> +<td>Clothing—Seal-Skin Boots—Making Pyroxyline—Planting—The +Fish—Turtles’ Eggs—Jup’s Education—The +Corral-Hunting Moufflons—Other Useful Animals and Vegetables—Home +Thoughts.</td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td><a href="#XXXI">XXXI</a></td> +<td>Bad Weather—The Hydraulic Elevator—Making Window Glass and Table +Ware—The Bread Tree—Frequent Visits to the Corral—The +Increase of the Herd—The Reporter’s Question—The Exact +Position of Lincoln Island—Pencroff’s Proposal.</td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td><a href="#XXXII">XXXII</a></td> +<td>Ship Building—The Second Harvest—Ai Hunting—A New +Plant—A Whale—The Harpoon From the Vineyard—Cutting Up This +Cetacea—Use of the Whalebone—The End of May—PencroffIs +Content.</td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td><a href="#XXXIII">XXXIII</a></td> +<td>Winter—Fulling Cloth—The Mill—Pencroff’s Fixed +Purpose—The Whalebones—The Use of An Albatross—Top and +Jup—Storms—Damage to the Poultry-Yard—An Excursion to the +Marsh—Smith Alone—Exploration of the Pits.</td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td><a href="#XXXIV">XXXIV</a></td> +<td>Rigging the Launch—Attacked By Foxes—Jup Wounded—Jup +Nursed—Jup Cured—Completion of the Launch—Pencroff’s +Triumph—The Good Luck—Trial Trip, to the South of the +Island—An Unexpected Document.</td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td><a href="#XXXV">XXXV</a></td> +<td>Departure Decided Upon—Preparations—The Three Passengers—The +First Night—The Second Night—Tabor Island—Search on the +Shore—Search in the Woods—No One—Animals—Plants—A +House—Deserted.</td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td><a href="#XXXVI">XXXVI</a></td> +<td>The Inventory—The Night—Some Letters—The Search +Continued—Plants and Animals—Herbert in +Danger—Aboard—The Departure—Bad Weather—A Glimmer of +Intelligence—Lost At Sea—A Timely Light.</td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td><a href="#XXXVII">XXXVII</a></td> +<td>The Return-Discussion—Smith and the Unknown—Balloon Harbor-The +Devotion of the Engineer-A Touching Experience-Tears.</td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td><a href="#XXXVIII">XXXVIII</a></td> +<td>A Mystery to Be Solved—The First Words of the Unknown—Twelve Years +on the Island—Confessions—Disappearance—Smith’s +Confidence—Building a Wind-Mill—The First Bread—An Act of +Devotion—Honest Hands.</td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td><a href="#XXXIX">XXXIX</a></td> +<td>Always Apart—A Bequest of the Unknown’s—The Farm Established +At the Corral—Twelve Years—The Boatswain’s Mate of the +Britannia—Left on Tabor Island—The Hand of Smith—The +Mysterious Paper</td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td><a href="#XL">XL</a></td> +<td>A Talk—Smith and Spilett—The Engineer’s Idea—The +Electric Telegraph—The Wires—The Batter—the +Alphabet—Fine Weather—The Prosperity of the +Colony—Photography—A Snow Effect—Two Years on Lincoln Island.</td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td><a href="#XLI">XLI</a></td> +<td>Thoughts of Home—Chances of Return—Plan to Explore the +Coast—The Departure of the 16th of April—Serpentine Peninsula Seen +From Sea—The Basaltic Cliffs of the Western Coast—Bad +Weather—Night—A New Incident.</td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td><a href="#XLII">XLII</a></td> +<td>Night At Sea—Shark Gulf—Confidences—Preparations for +Winter—Early Advent of Bad Weather—Cold—In-Door +Work—Six Months Later—A Speck on the Photograph—An Unexpected +Event.</td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td><h4><a href="#PART_III">PART III</a></h4></td> +<td><h4>THE SECRET OF THE ISLAND</h4></td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td><a href="#XLIII">XLIII</a></td> +<td>Lost Or Saved?—Ayrton Recalled—Important Discussion—It Is Not +the Duncan—Suspicion And Precaution—Approach of the Ship—A +Cannon Shot—The Brig Anchors in Sight of the Island—Night Fall.</td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td><a href="#XLIV">XLIV</a></td> +<td>Discussions—Presentiments—Ayrton’s Proposal—It Is +Accepted—Ayrton and Pencroff on Safety Islet—Norfolk +Convicts—Their Projects—Heroic Attempt of Ayrton—His +Return—Six Against Fifty.</td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td><a href="#XLV">XLV</a></td> +<td>The Mist Rises—The Engineer’s Disposition of Forces—Three +Posts—Ayrton and Pencroft—The First Attack—Two Other Boat +Loads—On the Islet—Six Convicts on Shore—The Brig Weighs +Anchor—The Speedy’s Projectiles—Desperate +Situation—Unexpected Denouement.</td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td><a href="#XLVI">XLVI</a></td> +<td>The Colonists on the Beach—Ayrton and Pencroff as Salvors—Talk At +Breakfast—Pencroff’s Reasoning—Exploration of the +Brig’s Hull in Detail—The Magazine Uninjured—New +Riches—A Discovery—A Piece of a Broken Cylinder.</td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td><a href="#XLVII">XLVII</a></td> +<td>The Engineer’s Theory—Pencroff’s Magnificent +Suppositions—A Battery in the Air—Four Projectiles—The +Surviving Convicts—Ayrton Hesitates—Smith’s Generosity and +Pencroff’s Dissatisfaction.</td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td><a href="#XLVIII">XLVIII</a></td> +<td>The Projected Expedition—Ayrton At the Corral—Visit to Port +Balloon—Pencroff’s Remarks—Despatch Sent to the +Corral—No Answer From Ayrton—Setting Out Next Day—Why the +Wire Did Not Act—A Detonation.</td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td><a href="#XLIX">XLIX</a></td> +<td>The Reporter and Pencroff in the Corral—Moving Herbert—Despair of +the Sailor—Consultation of the Engineer and the Reporter—Mode of +Treatment—A Glimmer of Hope—How to Warn Neb—A Faithful +Messenger—Neb’s Reply.</td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td><a href="#L">L</a></td> +<td>The Convicts in the Neighborhood of the Corral—Provisional +Occupation—Continuation of Herbert’s +Treatment—Pencroff’s Jubilation—Review of the +Past—Future Prospects—Smith’s Ideas.</td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td><a href="#LI">LI</a></td> +<td>No News of Neb—A Proposal From Pencroff and Spilett—The +Reporter’s Sorties—A Fragment Of Cloth—A +Message—Hurried Departure—Arrival At Prospect Plateau.</td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td><a href="#LII">LII</a></td> +<td>Herbert Carried to Granite House—Neb Relates What Had +Happened—Visit of Smith to the Plateau—Ruin and +Devastation—The Colonists Helpless—Willow Bark—A Mortal +Fever—Top Barks Again.</td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td><a href="#LIII">LIII</a></td> +<td>An Inexplicable Mystery—Herbert’s Convalescence—The +Unexplored Parts of the Island—Preparations for Departure—The First +Day—Night—Second Day—The +Kauris—Cassowaries—Footprints in the Sand—Arrival At Reptile +End.</td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td><a href="#LIV">LIV</a></td> +<td>Exploration of Reptile End—Camp At the Mouth of Fall River—By the +Corral—The Reconnaissance—The Return—Forward—An Open +Door—A Light in the Window—By Moonlight.</td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td><a href="#LV">LV</a></td> +<td>Ayrton’s Recital—Plans of His Old Comrades—Taking Possession +of the Corral—The Rules of the Island—The Good +Luck—Researches About Mount Franklin—The Upper +Valleys—Subterranean Rumblings—Pencroff’s Answer—At the +Bottom of the Crater—The Return</td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td><a href="#LVI">LVI</a></td> +<td>After Three Years—The Question of a New Ship—Its +Determination—Prosperity of the Colony—The Shipyard—The Cold +Weather—Pencroff Resigned—Washing—Mount Franklin.</td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td><a href="#LVII">LVII</a></td> +<td>The Awakening of the Volcano—The Fine Weather—Resumption of +Work—The Evening of the 15th of October—A Telegraph—A +Demand—An Answer—Departure for the Corral—The +Notice—The Extra Wire—The Basalt Wall—At High Tide—At +Low Tide—The Cavern—A Dazzling Light.</td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td><a href="#LVIII">LVIII</a></td> +<td>Captain Nemo—His First Words—History of a Hero of +Liberty—Hatred of the Invaders—His Companions—The Life Under +Water—Alone—The Last Refuge of the Nautilus—The Mysterious +Genius of the Island.</td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td><a href="#LIX">LIX</a></td> +<td>The Last Hours of Captain Nemo—His Dying Wishes—A Souvenir for His +Friends—His Tomb—Some Counsel to the Colonists—The Supreme +Moment—At the Bottom of the Sea.</td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td><a href="#LX">LX</a></td> +<td>The Reflections of the Colonists—Renewal of Work—The 1st of +January, 1869—A Smoke From the Volcano—Symptoms of An Eruption +Ayrton and Smith At the Corral—Exploration of the Crypt Dakkar—What +Captain Nemo Had Said to the Engineer.</td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td><a href="#LXI">LXI</a></td> +<td>Smith’s Recital—Hastening the Work—A Last Visit to the +Corral—The Combat Between the Fire and the Water—The Aspect of the +Island—They Decide to Launch the Ship—The Night of the 8th of +March.</td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td><a href="#LXII">LXII</a></td> +<td>An Isolated Rock in the Pacific—The Last Refuge of the +Colonists—The Prospect of Death—Unexpected Succor—How and Why +It Came—The Last Good Action—An Island on Terra Firma—The +Tomb of Captain Nemo.</td> +</tr> + +</table> + +<hr /> + +<h2>THE MYSTERIOUS ISLAND.</h2> + +<h4>By JULES VERNE.</h4> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2><a name="PART_I" id="PART_I"></a>PART I<br/> +SHIPWRECKED IN THE AIR</h2> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2><a name="I" id="I"></a>CHAPTER I.</h2> + +<p class="letter"> +THE HURRICANE OF 1865—CRIES IN THE AIR—A BALLOON CAUGHT BY A +WATERSPOUT—ONLY THE SEA IN SIGHT—FIVE PASSENGERS—WHAT TOOK +PLACE IN THE BASKET—LAND AHEAD!—THE END. +</p> + +<p> +“Are we going up again?” +</p> + +<p> +“No. On the contrary; we are going down!” +</p> + +<p> +“Worse than that, Mr. Smith, we are falling!” +</p> + +<p> +“For God’s sake throw over all the ballast!” +</p> + +<p> +“The last sack is empty!” +</p> + +<p> +“And the balloon rises again?” +</p> + +<p> +“No!” +</p> + +<p> +“I hear the splashing waves!” +</p> + +<p> +“The sea is under us!” +</p> + +<p> +“It is not five hundred feet off!” +</p> + +<p> +Then a strong, clear voice shouted:— +</p> + +<p> +“Overboard with all we have, and God help us!” +</p> + +<p> +Such were the words which rang through the air above the vast wilderness of the +Pacific, towards 4 o’clock in the afternoon of the 23d of March, +1865:— +</p> + +<p> +Doubtless, no one has forgotten that terrible northeast gale which vented its +fury during the equinox of that year. It was a hurricane lasting without +intermission from the 18th to the 26th of March. Covering a space of 1,800 +miles, drawn obliquely to the equator, between the 35° of north latitude and +40° south, it occasioned immense destruction both in America and Europe and +Asia. Cities in ruins, forests uprooted, shores devastated by the mountains of +water hurled upon them, hundreds of shipwrecks, large tracts of territory +desolated by the waterspouts which destroyed everything in their path, +thousands of persons crushed to the earth or engulfed in the sea; such were the +witnesses to its fury left behind by this terrible hurricane. It surpassed in +disaster those storms which ravaged Havana and Guadeloupe in 1810 and 1825. +</p> + +<p> +While these catastrophes were taking place upon the land and the sea, a scene +not less thrilling was enacting in the disordered heavens. +</p> + +<p> +A balloon, caught in the whirl of a column of air, borne like a ball on the +summit of a waterspout, spinning around as in some aerial whirlpool, rushed +through space with a velocity of ninety miles an hour. Below the balloon, dimly +visible through the dense vapor, mingled with spray, which spread over the +ocean, swung a basket containing five persons. +</p> + +<p> +From whence came this aerial traveller, the sport of the awful tempest? +Evidently it could not have been launched during the storm, and the storm had +been raging five days, its symptoms manifesting themselves on the 18th. It +must, therefore, have come from a great distance, as it could not have +traversed less than 2,000 miles in twenty-four hours. The passengers, indeed, +had been unable to determine the course traversed, as they had nothing with +which to calculate their position; and it was a necessary effect, that, though +borne along in the midst of this tempest; they were unconscious of its +violence. They were whirled and spun about and carried up and down without any +sense of motion. Their vision could not penetrate the thick fog massed together +under the balloon. Around them everything was obscure. The clouds were so dense +that they could not tell the day from the night. No reflection of light, no +sound from the habitations of men, no roaring of the ocean had penetrated that +profound obscurity in which they were suspended during their passage through +the upper air. Only on their rapid descent had they become conscious of the +danger threatening them by the waves. +</p> + +<p> +Meanwhile the balloon, disencumbered of the heavy articles, such as munitions, +arms, and provisions, had risen to a height of 4,500 feet, and the passengers +having discovered that the sea was beneath them, and realizing that the dangers +above were less formidable than those below, did not hesitate to throw +overboard everything, no matter how necessary, at the same time endeavoring to +lose none of that fluid, the soul of the apparatus, which sustained them above +the abyss. +</p> + +<p> +The night passed in the midst of dangers that would have proved fatal to souls +less courageous; and with the coming of day the hurricane showed signs of +abatement. At dawn, the emptied clouds rose high into the heavens; and, in a +few hours more, the whirlwind had spent its force. The wind, from a hurricane, +had subsided into what sailors would call a “three reef breeze.” +</p> + +<p> +Toward eleven o’clock, the lower strata of the air had lightened visibly. +The atmosphere exhaled that humidity which is noticeable after the passage of +great meteors. It did not seem as if the storm had moved westward, but rather +as if it was ended. Perhaps it had flowed off in electric sheets after the +whirlwind had spent itself, as is the case with the typhoon in the Indian +Ocean. +</p> + +<p> +Now, however, it became evident that the balloon was again sinking slowly but +surely. It seemed also as if it was gradually collapsing, and that its envelope +was lengthening and passing from a spherical into an oval form. It held 50,000 +cubic feet of gas, and therefore, whether soaring to a great height or moving +along horizontally, it was able to maintain itself for a long time in the air. +In this emergency the voyagers threw overboard the remaining articles which +weighed down the balloon, the few provisions they had kept, and everything they +had in their pockets, while one of the party hoisted himself into the ring to +which was fastened the cords of the net, and endeavored to closely tie the +lower end of the balloon. But it was evident that the gas was escaping, and +that the voyagers could no longer keep the balloon afloat. +</p> + +<p> +They were lost! +</p> + +<p> +There was no land, not even an island, visible beneath them. The wide expanse +of ocean offered no point of rest, nothing upon which they could cast anchor. +It was a vast sea on which the waves were surging with incomparable violence. +It was the limitless ocean, limitless even to them from their commanding +height. It was a liquid plain, lashed and beaten by the hurricane, until it +seemed like a circuit of tossing billows, covered with a net-work of foam. Not +even a ship was in sight. +</p> + +<p> +In order, therefore, to save themselves from being swallowed up by the waves it +was necessary to arrest this downward movement, let it cost what it might. And +it was evidently to the accomplishment of this that the party were directing +their efforts. But in spite of all they could do the balloon continued to +descend, though at the same time moving rapidly along with the wind toward the +southwest. +</p> + +<p> +It was a terrible situation, this, of these unfortunate men. No longer masters +of the balloon, their efforts availed them nothing. The envelope collapsed more +and more, and the gas continued to escape. Faster and faster they fell, until +at 1 o’clock they were not more than 600 feet above the sea. The gas +poured out of a rent in the silk. By lightening the basket of everything the +party had been able to continue their suspension in the air for several hours, +but now the inevitable catastrophe could only be delayed, and unless some land +appeared before nightfall, voyagers, balloon, and basket must disappear beneath +the waves. +</p> + +<p> +It was evident that these men were strong and able to face death. Not a murmur +escaped their lips. They were determined to struggle to the last second to +retard their fall, and they tried their last expedient. The basket, constructed +of willow osiers, could not float, and they had no means of supporting it on +the surface of the water. It was 2 o’clock, and the balloon was only 400 +feet above the waves. +</p> + +<p> +Then a voice was heard—the voice of a man whose heart knew no +fear—responded to by others not less strong:— +</p> + +<p> +“Everything is thrown out?” +</p> + +<p> +“No, we yet have 10,000 francs in gold.” +</p> + +<p> +A heavy bag fell into the sea. +</p> + +<p> +“Does the balloon rise?” +</p> + +<p> +“A little, but it will soon fall again.” +</p> + +<p> +“Is there nothing else we can gut rid of?” +</p> + +<p> +“Not a thing.” +</p> + +<p> +“Yes there is; there’s the basket!” +</p> + +<p> +“Catch hold of the net then, and let it go.” +</p> + +<p> +The cords which attached the basket to the hoop were cut, and the balloon, as +the former fell into the sea, rose again 2,000 feet. This was, indeed, the last +means of lightening the apparatus. The five passengers had clambered into the +net around the hoop, and, clinging to its meshes, looked into the abyss below. +</p> + +<p> +Every one knows the statical sensibility of a balloon. It is only necessary to +relieve it of the lightest object in order to have it rise. The apparatus +floating in air acts like a mathematical balance. One can readily understand, +then, that when disencumbered of every weight relatively great, its upward +movement will be sudden and considerable. It was thus in the present instance. +But after remaining poised for a moment at its height, the balloon began to +descend. It was impossible to repair the rent, through which the gas was +rushing, and the men having done everything they could do, must look to God for +succor. +</p> + +<p> +At 4 o’clock, when the balloon was only 500 feet above the sea, the loud +barking of a dog, holding itself crouched beside its master in the meshes of +the net, was heard. +</p> + +<p> +“Top has seen something!” cried one, and immediately afterwards +another shouted:— +</p> + +<p> +“Land! Land!” +</p> + +<p> +The balloon, which the wind had continued to carry towards the southwest, had +since dawn passed over a distance of several hundred miles, and a high land +began to be distinguishable in that direction. But it was still thirty miles to +leeward, and even supposing they did not drift, it would take a full hour to +reach it. An hour! Before that time could pass, would not the balloon be +emptied of what gas remained? This was the momentous question. +</p> + +<p> +The party distinctly saw that solid point which they must reach at all hazards. +They did not know whether it was an island or a continent, as they were +uninformed as to what part of the world the tempest had hurried them. But they +knew that this land, whether inhabited or desert, must be reached. +</p> + +<p> +At 4 o’clock it was plain that the balloon could not sustain itself much +longer. It grazed the surface of the sea, and the crests of the higher waves +several times lapped the base of the net, making it heavier; and, like a bird +with a shot in its wing, could only half sustain itself. +</p> + +<p> +A half hour later, and the land was scarcely a mile distant. But the balloon, +exhausted, flabby, hanging in wrinkles, with only a little gas remaining in its +upper portion, unable to sustain the weight of those clinging to the net, was +plunging them in the sea, which lashed them with its furious billows. +Occasionally the envelope of the balloon would belly out, and the wind taking +it would carry it along like a ship. Perhaps by this means it would reach the +shore. But when only two cables’ length away four voices joined in a +terrible cry. The balloon, though seemingly unable to rise again, after having +been struck by a tremendous wave, made a bound into the air, as if it had been +suddenly lightened of some of its weight. It rose 1,500 feet, and encountering +a sort of eddy in the air, instead of being carried directly to land, it was +drawn along in a direction nearly parallel thereto. In a minute or two, +however, it reapproached the shore in an oblique direction, and fell upon the +sand above the reach of the breakers. The passengers, assisting each other, +hastened to disengage themselves from the meshes of the net; and the balloon, +relieved of their weight, was caught up by the wind, and, like a wounded bird +recovering for an instant, disappeared into space. +</p> + +<p> +The basket had contained five passengers and a dog, and but four had been +thrown upon the shore. The fifth one, then, had been washed off by the great +wave which had struck the net, and it was owing to this accident that the +lightened balloon had been able to rise for the last time before falling upon +the land. Scarcely had the four castaways felt the ground beneath their feet +than all thinking of the one who was lost, cried:—“Perhaps he is +trying to swim ashore. Save him! Let us save him!” +</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2><a name="II" id="II"></a>CHAPTER II.</h2> + +<p class="letter"> +AN EPISODE OF THE REBELLION-THE ENGINEER CYRUS SMITH—GIDEON +SPILETT—THE NEGRO NEB—THE SAILOR PENCROFF—THE YOUTH, +HERBERT—AN UNEXPECTED PROPOSAL—RENDEZVOUS AT 10 O’CLOCK +P.M.—DEPARTURE IN THE STORM. +</p> + +<p> +They were neither professional aeronauts nor amateurs in aerial navigation whom +the storm had thrown upon this coast. They were prisoners of war whose audacity +had suggested this extraordinary manner of escape. A hundred times they would +have perished, a hundred times their torn balloon would have precipitated them +into the abyss, had not Providence preserved them for a strange destiny, and on +the 20th of March, after having flown from Richmond, besieged by the troops of +General Ulysses Grant, they found themselves 7,000 miles from the Virginia +capital, the principal stronghold of the Secessionists during that terrible +war. Their aerial voyage had lasted five days. +</p> + +<p> +Let us see by what curious circumstances this escape of prisoners was +effected,—an escape which resulted in the catastrophe which we have seen. +</p> + +<p> +This same year, in the month of February, 1865, in one of those surprises by +which General Grant, though in vain, endeavored to take Richmond, many of his +officers were captured by the enemy and confined within the city. One of the +most distinguished of those taken was a Federal staff officer named Cyrus +Smith. +</p> + +<p> +Cyrus Smith was a native of Massachusetts, an engineer by profession, and a +scientist of the first order, to whom the Government had given, during the war, +the direction of the railways, which played such a great strategic part during +the war. +</p> + +<p> +A true Yankee, thin, bony, lean, about forty-five years old, with streaks of +grey appearing in his close cut hair and heavy moustache. He had one of those +fine classical heads that seem as if made to be copied upon medals; bright +eyes, a serious mouth, and the air of a practiced officer. He was one of these +engineers who began of his own wish with the pick and shovel, as there are +generals who have preferred to rise from the ranks. Thus, while possessing +inventive genius, he had acquired manual dexterity, and his muscles showed +remarkable firmness. He was as much a man of action as of study; he moved +without effort, under the influence of a strong vitality and his sanguine +temperament defied all misfortune. Highly educated, practical, +“clear-headed,” his temperament was superb, and always retaining +his presence of mind he combined in the highest degree the three conditions +whose union regulates the energy of man: activity of body, strength of will, +and determination. His motto might have been that of William of Orange in the +XVIIth century—“I can undertake without hope, and persevere through +failure.” +</p> + +<p> +Cyrus Smith was also the personification of courage. He had been in every +battle of the war. After having begun under General Grant, with the Illinois +volunteers, he had fought at Paducah, at Belmont, at Pittsburg Landing, at the +siege of Corinth, at Port Gibson, at the Black River, at Chattanooga, at the +Wilderness, upon the Potomac, everywhere with bravery, a soldier worthy of the +General who said “I never counted my dead.” And a hundred times +Cyrus Smith would have been among the number of those whom the terrible Grant +did not count; but in these combats, though he never spared himself, fortune +always favored him, until the time he was wounded and taken prisoner at the +siege of Richmond. +</p> + +<p> +At the same time with Cyrus Smith another important personage fell into the +power of the Southerners. This was no other than the honorable Gideon Spilett, +reporter to the New York Herald, who had been detailed to follow the fortunes +of the war with the armies of the North. +</p> + +<p> +Gideon Spilett was of the race of astonishing chroniclers, English or American, +such as Stanley and the like, who shrink from nothing in their endeavor to +obtain exact information and to transmit it to their journal in the quickest +manner. The journals of the United States, such as the New York <i>Herald</i>, +are true powers, and their delegates are persons of importance. Gideon Spilett +belonged in the first rank of these representatives. +</p> + +<p> +A man of great merit; energetic, prompt, and ready; full of ideas, having been +all over the world; soldier and artist; vehement in council; resolute in +action; thinking nothing of pain, fatigue, or danger when seeking information, +first for himself and afterwards for his journal; a master of recondite +information of the unpublished, the unknown, the impossible. He was one of +those cool observers who write amid the cannon balls, “reporting” +under the bullets, and to whom all perils are welcome. +</p> + +<p> +He also had been in all the battles, in the front rank, revolver in one hand +and notebook in the other, his pencil never trembling in the midst of a +cannonade. He did not tire the wires by incessant telegraphing, like those who +speak when they have nothing to say, but each of his messages was short, +condensed, clear, and to the purpose. For the rest, he did not lack humor. It +was he who, after the affair of Black river, wishing at any price to keep his +place at the telegraph wicket in order to announce the result, kept +telegraphing for two hours the first chapters of the Bible. It cost the New +York <i>Herald</i> $2,000, but the New York <i>Herald</i> had the first news. +</p> + +<p> +Gideon Spilett was tall. He was forty years old or more. Sandy-colored whiskers +encircled his face. His eye was clear, lively, and quick moving. It was the eye +of a man who was accustomed to take in everything at a glance. Strongly built, +he was tempered by all climates as a bar of steel is tempered by cold water. +For ten years Gideon Spilett had been connected with the New York +<i>Herald</i>, which he had enriched with his notes and his drawings, as he +wielded the pencil as well as the pen. When captured he was about making a +description and a sketch of the battle. The last words written in his note-book +were these:—“A Southerner is aiming at me and—.” And +Gideon Spilett was missed; so, following his invariable custom, he escaped +unscratched. +</p> + +<p> +Cyrus Smith and Gideon Spilett, who knew each other only by reputation, were +both taken to Richmond. The engineer recovered rapidly from his wound, and it +was during his convalescence he met the reporter. The two soon learned to +appreciate each-other. Soon their one aim was to rejoin the army of Grant and +fight again in the ranks for the preservation of the Union. +</p> + +<p> +The two Americans had decided to avail themselves of any chance; but although +free to go and come within the city, Richmond was so closely guarded that an +escape might be deemed impossible. +</p> + +<p> +During this time Cyrus Smith was rejoined by a devoted servant. This man was a +negro, born upon the engineer’s estate, of slave parents, whom Smith, an +abolitionist by conviction, had long since freed. The negro, though free, had +no desire to leave his master, for whom he would have given his life. He was a +man of thirty years, vigorous, agile, adroit, intelligent, quick, and +self-possessed, sometimes ingenuous always smiling, ready and honest. He was +named Nebuchadnezzar, but he answered to the nickname of Neb. +</p> + +<p> +When Neb learned that his master had been taken prisoner he left Massachusetts +without waiting a moment, arrived before Richmond, and, by a ruse, after having +risked his life twenty times, he was able to get within the besieged city. The +pleasure of Cyrus Smith on seeing again his servant, and the joy of Neb in +finding his master, cannot be expressed. But while he had been able to get into +Richmond it was much more difficult to get out, as the watch kept upon the +Federal prisoners was very strict. It would require an extraordinary +opportunity in order to attempt an escape with any chance of success; and that +occasion not only did not present itself, but it was difficult to make. +Meanwhile, Grant continued his energetic operations. The victory of Petersburg +had been vigorously contested. His forces, reunited to those of Butler, had not +as yet obtained any result before Richmond, and nothing indicated an early +release to the prisoners. The reporter, whose tiresome captivity gave him no +item worthy of note, grew impatient. He had but one idea; to get out of +Richmond at any risk. Many times, indeed, he tried the experiment, and was +stopped by obstacles insurmountable. +</p> + +<p> +Meanwhile, the siege continued, and as the prisoners were anxious to escape in +order to join the army of Grant, so there were certain of the besieged no less +desirous to be free to join the army of the Secessionists; and among these was +a certain Jonathan Forster, who was a violent Southerner. In truth, the +Confederates were no more able to get out of the city than the Federal +prisoners, as the army of Grant invested it around. The Mayor of Richmond had +not for some time been able to communicate with General Lee, and it was of the +highest importance to make the latter aware of the situation of the city, in +order to hasten the march of the rescuing army. This Jonathan Forster had +conceived the idea of passing over the lines of the besiegers in a balloon, and +arriving by this means in the Confederate camp. +</p> + +<p> +The Mayor authorized the undertaking, a balloon was made and placed at the +disposal of Forster and five of his companions. They were provided with arms as +they might have to defend themselves in descending, and food in case their +aerial voyage should be prolonged. The departure of the balloon had been fixed +for the 18th of March. It was to start in the night, and with a moderate breeze +from the northeast, the party expected to arrive at the quarters of General Lee +in a few hours. But the wind from the northeast was not a mere breeze. On the +morning of the 18th there was every symptom of a storm, and soon the tempest +broke forth, making it necessary for Forster to defer his departure, as it was +impossible to risk the balloon and those whom it would carry, to the fury of +the elements. +</p> + +<p> +The balloon, inflated in the great square of Richmond, was all ready, waiting +for the first lull in the storm; and throughout the city there was great +vexation at the settled bad weather. The night of the 19th and 20th passed, but +in the morning the storm was only developed in intensity, and departure was +impossible. +</p> + +<p> +On this day Cyrus Smith was accosted in one of the streets of Richmond by a man +whom he did not know. It was a sailor named Pencroff, aged from thirty-five to +forty years, strongly built, much sun-burnt, his eyes bright and glittering, +but with a good countenance. +</p> + +<p> +This Pencroff was a Yankee who had sailed every sea, and who had experienced +every kind of extraordinary adventure that a two-legged being without wings +could encounter. It is needless to say that he was of an adventurous nature, +ready to dare anything and to be astonished at nothing. Pencroff, in the early +part of this year, had come to Richmond on business, having with him Herbert +Brown, of New Jersey, a lad fifteen years old, the son of Pencroff’s +captain, and an orphan whom he loved as his own child. Not having left the city +at the beginning of the siege, he found himself, to his great displeasure, +blocked. He also had but one idea: to get out. He knew the reputation of the +engineer, and he knew with what impatience that determined man chaffed at his +restraint. He did not therefore hesitate to address him without ceremony. +</p> + +<p> +“Mr. Smith, have you had enough of Richmond?” +</p> + +<p> +The engineer looked fixedly at the man who spoke thus, and who added in a low +voice:— +</p> + +<p> +“Mr. Smith, do you want to escape?” +</p> + +<p> +“How?” answered the engineer, quickly, and it was evidently an +inconsiderate reply, for he had not yet examined the man who spoke. +</p> + +<p> +“Mr. Smith, do you want to escape?” +</p> + +<p> +““Who are you?” he demanded, in a cold voice. +</p> + +<p> +Pencroff made himself known. +</p> + +<p> +“Sufficient,” replied Smith. “And by what means do you +propose to escape?” +</p> + +<p> +“By this idle balloon which is doing nothing, and seems to me all ready +to take us!”— +</p> + +<p> +The sailor had no need to finish his sentence. The engineer had understood all +in a word. He seized Pencroff by the arm and hurried him to his house. There +the sailor explained his project, which, in truth, was simple +enough:—They risked only their lives in carrying it out. The storm was at +its height, it is true; but a skilful and daring engineer like Smith would know +well how to manage a balloon. He, himself, would not have hesitated to have +started, had he known how—with Herbert, of course. He had seen many +storms and he thought nothing of them. +</p> + +<p> +Cyrus Smith listened to the sailor without saying a word, but with glistening +eyes. This was the opportunity, and he was not the man to let it escape him. +The project was very dangerous, but it could be accomplished. During the night, +in spite of the guards, they might reach the balloon, creep into the basket, +and then cut the lines which held it! Certainly they risked being shot, but on +the other hand they might succeed, and but for this tempest—but without +this tempest the balloon would have been gone and the long-sought opportunity +would not have been present. +</p> + +<p> +“I am not alone,” said Smith at length. +</p> + +<p> +“How many would you want to take?” demanded the sailor. +</p> + +<p> +“Two; my friend Spilett, and my man Neb.” +</p> + +<p> +“That would be three,” replied Pencroff; “and, with Herbert +and myself, five. Well, the balloon can carry six?” +</p> + +<p> +“Very well. We will go!” said the engineer. +</p> + +<p> +This “we” pledged the reporter, who was not a man to retreat, and +who, when the project was told him, approved of it heartily. What astonished +him was, that so simple a plan had not already occurred to himself. As to Neb, +he followed his master wherever his master wanted to go. +</p> + +<p> +“To-night, then,” said Pencroff. +</p> + +<p> +“To-night, at ten o’clock,” replied Smith; “and pray +heaven that this storm does not abate before we get off.” +</p> + +<p> +Pencroff took leave of the engineer, and returned to his lodging, where he +found young Herbert Brown. This brave boy knew the plans of the sailor, and he +was not without a certain anxiety as to the result of the proposal to the +engineer. We see, therefore, five persons determined to throw themselves into +the vortex of the storm. +</p> + +<p> +The storm did not abate. And neither Jonathan Forster nor his companion dreamed +of confronting it in that frail basket. The journey would be terrible. The +engineer feared but one thing; that the balloon, held to the ground and beaten +down under the wind, would be torn into a thousand pieces. During many hours he +wandered about the nearly deserted square, watching the apparatus. Pencroff, +his hands in his pockets, yawning like a man who is unable to kill time, did +the same; but in reality he also feared that the balloon would be torn to +pieces, or break from its moorings and be carried off. +</p> + +<p> +Evening arrived and the night closed in dark and threatening. Thick masses of +fog passed like clouds low down over the earth. Rain mingled with snow fell. +The weather was cold. A sort of mist enveloped Richmond. It seemed as if in the +face of this terrible tempest a truce had been agreed upon between the +besiegers and besieged, and the cannon were silent before the heavy detonations +of the storm. The streets of the city were deserted; it had not even seemed +necessary, in such weather, to guard the square in which swung the balloon. +Everything favored the departure of the prisoners; but this voyage, in the +midst of the excited elements!— +</p> + +<p> +“Bad weather,” said Pencroff, holding his hat, which the wind was +trying to take off, firmly to his head, “but pshaw, it can’t last, +all the same.” +</p> + +<p> +At half-past 9, Cyrus Smith and his companions glided by different routes to +the square, which the gas lights, extinguished by the wind, left in profound +darkness. They could not see even the huge balloon, as it lay pressed over +against the ground. Beside the bags of ballast which held the cords of the net, +the basket was held down by a strong cable passed through a ring fastened in +the pavement, and the ends brought back on board. +</p> + +<p> +The five prisoners came together at the basket. They had not been discovered, +and such was the darkness that they could not see each other. Without saying a +word, four of them took their places in the basket, while Pencroff, under the +direction of the engineer, unfastened successively the bundles of ballast. It +took but a few moments, and then the sailor joined his companions. The only +thing that then held the balloon was the loop of the cable, and Cyrus Smith had +but to give the word for them to let it slip. At that moment, a dog leaped with +a bound into the basket. It was Top, the dog of the engineer, who, having +broken his chain, had followed his master. Cyrus Smith, fearing to add to the +weight, wanted to send the poor brute back, but Pencroff said, “Pshaw, it +is but one more!” and at the same time threw overboard two bags of sand. +Then, slipping the cable, the balloon, shooting off in an oblique direction, +disappeared, after having dashed its basket against two chimneys, which it +demolished in its rush. +</p> + +<p> +Then the storm burst upon them with frightful violence. The engineer did not +dare to descend during the night, and when day dawned all sight of the earth +was hidden by the mists. It was not until five days later that the breaking of +the clouds enabled them to see the vast sea extending below them, lashed by the +wind into a terrific fury. +</p> + +<p> +We have seen how, of these five men, who started on the 20th of March, four +were thrown, four days later, on a desert coast, more than 6,000 miles from +this country. And the one who was missing, the one to whose rescue the four +survivors had hurried was their leader, Cyrus Smith. +</p> + +<p> +[The 5th of April, Richmond fell into the hands of Grant, the Rebellion was +repressed, Lee retreated into the West (<i>sic</i>) and the cause of the Union +triumphed.] +</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2><a name="III" id="III"></a>CHAPTER III.</h2> + +<p class="letter"> +FIVE O’CLOCK IN THE AFTERNOON—THE LOST ONE—THE DESPAIR OF +NEB—SEARCH TO THE NORTHWARD—THE ISLAND—A NIGHT OF +ANGUISH—THE FOG OF THE MORNING—NEB SWIMMING—SIGHT OF THE +LAND—FORDING THE CHANNEL. +</p> + +<p> +The engineer, on the giving way of the net, had been swept away by a wave. His +dog had disappeared at the same time. The faithful animal had of its own accord +sprung to the rescue of its master. +</p> + +<p> +“Forward!” cried the reporter, and all four, forgetting weakness +and fatigue, began their search. Poor Neb wept with grief and despair at the +thought of having lost all that he loved in the world. +</p> + +<p> +Not more than two minutes had passed between the moment that Smith had +disappeared, and the instant of his companions landing. They were, therefore, +hopeful of being in time to rescue him. +</p> + +<p> +“Hunt, hunt for him,” cried Neb. +</p> + +<p> +“Yes, Neb, and we will find him,” replied Spilett. +</p> + +<p> +“Alive?” +</p> + +<p> +“Alive!” +</p> + +<p> +“Can he swim?” demanded Pencroff. +</p> + +<p> +“Oh, yes,” responded Neb. “And, besides, Top is with +him—” +</p> + +<p> +The sailor, looking at the roaring sea, shook his head. +</p> + +<p> +It was at a point northward from this shore, and about half a mile from the +place where the castaways had landed, that the engineer had disappeared, and if +he had come ashore at the nearest point it was at least that distance from +where they now were. +</p> + +<p> +It was nearly 6 o’clock. The fog had risen and made the night very dark. +The castaways followed northward along the shore of that land upon which chance +had thrown them. A land unknown, whose geographical situation they could not +guess. They walked upon a sandy soil, mixed with stones, seemingly destitute of +any kind of vegetation. The ground, very uneven, seemed in certain places to be +riddled with small holes, making the march very painful. From these holes, +great, heavy-flying birds rushed forth, and were lost in the darkness. Others, +more active, rose in flocks, and fled away like the clouds. The sailor thought +he recognized gulls and sea-mews, whose sharp cries were audible above the +raging of the sea. +</p> + +<p> +From time to time the castaways would stop and call, listening for an answering +voice from the ocean. They thought, too, that if they were near the place where +the engineer had been, washed ashore, and he had been unable to make any +response, that, at least, the barking of the dog Top would have been heard. But +no sound was distinguishable above the roaring of the waves and the thud of the +surf. Then the little party would resume their march, searching all the +windings of the shore. +</p> + +<p> +After a walk of twenty minutes the four castaways were suddenly stopped by a +foaming line of breakers. They found themselves upon the extremity of a sharp +point upon which the sea broke with fury. +</p> + +<p> +“This is a promontory,” said the sailor, “and it will be +necessary to turn back, keeping to the right in order to gain the main +land.” +</p> + +<p> +“But if he is there!” cried Neb, pointing towards the ocean, whose +enormous waves showed white through the gloom. +</p> + +<p> +“Well, let us call again.” +</p> + +<p> +And all together, uniting their voices, uttered a vigorous cry, but without +response. They waited for a lull, and tried once more. And again there was no +answer. +</p> + +<p> +Then the castaways turned back, following the opposite side of the promontory +over ground equally sandy and rocky. However, Pencroff observed that the shore +was bolder, that the land rose somewhat, and he thought that it might gradually +slope up to the high hill which was dimly visible through the darkness. The +birds were less numerous on this shore. The sea also seemed less surging and +tempestuous, and it was noticeable that the agitation of the waves was +subsiding. They hardly heard the sound of the surf, and doubtless, this side of +the promontory formed a semi-circular bay, protected by its sharp point from +the long roll of the sea. +</p> + +<p> +But by following this direction they were walking towards the south, which was +going away from that place where Smith would have landed. After a tramp of a +mile and a half, the shore presented no other curve which would permit of a +return towards the north. It was evident that this promontory, the point of +which they had turned, must be joined to the mainland. The castaways, although +much fatigued, pushed on courageously, hoping each moment to find a sudden turn +which would take them in the desired direction. What, then, was their +disappointment when, after having walked nearly two miles, they found +themselves again arrested by the sea, upon a high promontory of slippery rocks. +</p> + +<p> +“We are on an island,” exclaimed Pencroff; “and we have +measured it from end to end!” +</p> + +<p> +The words of the sailor were true. The castaways had been thrown, not upon a +continent, but upon an island not more than two miles long, and of +inconsiderable breadth. +</p> + +<p> +This desert isle, covered with stones, without vegetation, desolate refuge of +sea-birds, did it belong to a more important archipelago? They could not tell. +The party in the balloon, when from their basket they saw the land through the +clouds, had not been able to determine its size. But Pencroff, with the eyes of +a sailor accustomed to piercing the gloom, thought, at the moment, that he +could distinguish in the west confused masses, resembling a high coast. But at +this time they were unable, on account of the obscurity, to determine to what +system, whether simple or complex, their isle belonged. They were unable to get +off, as the sea surrounded them, and it was necessary to wait until the next +day to search for the engineer; who, alas! had made no cry to signal his +presence. +</p> + +<p> +“The silence of Cyrus proves nothing,” said the reporter. “He +may have fainted, or be wounded, and unable to reply, but we will not +despair.” +</p> + +<p> +The reporter then suggested the idea of lighting a fire upon the point of the +island, which would serve as a signal for the engineer. But they searched in +vain for wood or dry branches. Sand and stones were all they found. +</p> + +<p> +One can understand the grief of Neb and his companions, who were strongly +attached to their brave comrade. It was too evident that they could not help +him now, and that they must wait till day. The engineer had escaped, and was +already safe upon the land, or he was lost forever. The hours were long and +dreadful, the cold was intense, and the castaways suffered keenly, but they did +not realize it. They did not think of sleep. Thinking only of their chief, +hoping, wishing to hope, they moved back and forth upon that arid island, +constantly returning to the northern end, where they would be closest to the +place of the catastrophe. They listened, they shouted, they tried to catch some +call, and, as a lull would come, or the roar of the surf fall with the waves, +their hallooes must have sounded far into the distance. +</p> + +<p> +Once the cry of Neb was answered by an echo; and Herbert made Pencroff notice +it, saying:—“That proves that there is land not far to the +west.” +</p> + +<p> +The sailor nodded; he knew his eyes could not deceive him. He thought he had +seen land, and it must be there. But this distant echo was the only answer to +the cries of Neb, and the silence about the island remained unbroken. Meanwhile +the sky was clearing slowly. Towards midnight, some stars shone out, and, had +the engineer been there with his companions, he would have noticed that these +stars did not belong to the northern hemisphere. The pole star was not visible +in this new horizon, the constellations in the zenith were not such as they had +been accustomed to see from North America, and the Southern Cross shone +resplendent in the heavens. +</p> + +<p> +The night passed; and towards 5 o’clock in the morning the middle heavens +began to brighten, though the horizon remained obscure; until with the first +rays of day, a fog rose from the sea, so dense that the eye could scarcely +penetrate twenty paces into its depths, and separated into great, heavy-moving +masses. This was unfortunate, as the castaways were unable to distinguish +anything about them. While the gaze of Neb and the reporter was directed +towards the sea, the sailor and Herbert searched for the land in the west; but +they could see nothing. +</p> + +<p> +“Never mind,” said Pencroff, “if I do not see the land. I +feel that it is there,—just as sure as that we are not in +Richmond.” +</p> + +<p> +But the fog, which was nothing more than a morning mist, soon rose. A clear sun +warmed the upper air, its heat penetrating to the surface of the island. At +half-past 6, three quarters of an hour after sunrise, the mist was nearly gone. +Though still thick overhead, it dissolved, below, and soon all the island +appeared, as from a cloud. Then the sea appeared, limitless towards the east, +but bounded on the west by a high and abrupt coast. +</p> + +<p> +Yes, the land was there! There, safety was at least provisionally assured. The +island and the main land were separated by a channel half a mile wide, through +which rushed a strong current. Into this current one of the party, without +saying a word or consulting with his companions, precipitated himself. It was +Neb. He was anxious to be upon that coast and to be pushing forward towards the +north. No one could keep him back. Pencroff called to him in vain. The reporter +prepared to follow, but the sailor ran to him, exclaiming:— +</p> + +<p> +“Are you determined to cross this channel?” +</p> + +<p> +“I am,” replied Spilett. +</p> + +<p> +“Well, then, listen to me a moment. Neb can rescue his master alone. If +we throw ourselves into the channel we are in danger of being carried out to +sea by this strong current. Now, if I am not mistaken it is caused by the ebb. +You see the tide is going out. Have patience until low water and then we may +ford it.” +</p> + +<p> +“You are right,” answered the reporter; “we will keep +together as much as possible.” +</p> + +<p> +Meantime, Neb was swimming vigorously in a diagonal direction, against the +current; his black shoulders were seen rising with each stroke. He was drawn +backward with swiftness, but he was gaining towards the other shore. It took +him more than half an hour to cross the half mile which separated the isle from +the mainland, and when he reached the other side it was at a place a long +distance from the point opposite to that which he had left. +</p> + +<p> +Neb, having landed at the base of a high rocky wall, clambered quickly up its +side, and, running, disappeared behind a point projecting into the sea, about +the same height as the northern end of the island. +</p> + +<p> +Neb’s companions had watched with anxiety his daring attempt, and, when +he was out of sight, they fixed their eyes upon that land from which they were +going to demand refuge. They ate some of the shellfish which they found upon +the sands; it was a poor meal, but then it was better than nothing. +</p> + +<p> +The opposite coast formed an immense bay, terminated to the south by a sharp +point bare of all vegetation, and having a most forbidding aspect. This point +at its junction with the shore was abutted by high granite rocks. Towards the +north, on the contrary, the bay widened, with a shore more rounded, extending +from the southwest to the northeast, and ending in a narrow cape. Between these +two points, the distance must have been about eight miles. A half mile from the +shore the island, like an enormous whale, lay upon the sea. Its width could not +have been greater than a quarter of a mile. +</p> + +<p> +Before the Island, the shore began with a sandy beach strewn with black rocks, +at this moment beginning to appear above the receding tide. Beyond this rose, +like a curtain, a perpendicular granite wall, at least 300 feet high and +terminated by a ragged edge. This extended for about three miles, ending +abruptly on the right in a smooth face, as if cut by the hand of man. To the +left on the contrary, above the promontory, this kind of irregular cliff, +composed of heaped-up rocks and glistening in the light, sank and gradually +mingled with the rocks of the southern point. +</p> + +<p> +Upon the upper level of the coast not a tree was visible. It was a table-land, +as barren though not as extensive as that around Cape Town, or at the Cape of +Good Hope. At least so it appeared from the islet. To the right, however, and +back of the smooth face of rock, some verdure appeared. The confused massing of +large trees was easily distinguishable extending far as the eye could reach. +This verdure gladdened the sight tired by the rough face of granite. Finally, +back of and above the plateau, distant towards the northwest about seven miles, +shone a white summit, reflecting the sun’s rays. It was the snowy cap of +some lofty mountain. +</p> + +<p> +It was not possible at present to say whether this land was an island or part +of a continent; but the sight of the broken rocks heaped together on the left +would have proved to a geologist their volcanic origin, as they were +incontestably the result of igneous action. +</p> + +<p> +Gideon Spilett, Pencroff, and Herbert looked earnestly upon this land where +they were to live, perhaps for long years; upon which, if out of the track of +ships, they might have to die. +</p> + +<p> +“Well,” demanded Herbert, “what do you think of it, +Pencroff?” +</p> + +<p> +“Well,” replied the sailor, “there’s good and bad in +it, as with everything else. But we shall soon see; for look; what I told you. +In three hours we can cross, and once over there, we will see what we can do +towards finding Mr. Smith.” +</p> + +<p> +Pencroff was not wrong in his predictions. Three hours later, at low tide, the +greater part of the sandy bed of the channel was bare. A narrow strip of water, +easily crossed, was all that separated the island from the shore. And at 10 +o’clock, Spilett and his two companions, stripped of their clothing, +which they carried in packages on their heads, waded through the water, which +was nowhere more than five feet deep. Herbert, where the water was too deep, +swam like a fish, acquitting himself well; and all arrived without difficulty +at the other shore. There, having dried themselves in the sun, they put on +their clothes, which had not touched the water, and took counsel together. +</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2><a name="IV" id="IV"></a>CHAPTER IV.</h2> + +<p class="letter"> +THE LITHODOMES—THE MOUTH OF THE RIVER—THE +“CHIMNEYS”—CONTINUATION OF THE SEARCH—THE FOREST OF +EVERGREENS—GETTING FIREWOOD—WAITING FOR THE TIDE—ON TOP OF +THE CLIFF—THE TIMBER-FLOAT—THE RETURN TO THE COAST. +</p> + +<p> +Presently the reporter told the sailor to wait just where he was until he +should come back, and without losing a moment, he walked back along the coast +in the direction which Neb had taken some hours before, and disappeared quickly +around a turn in the shore. +</p> + +<p> +Herbert wished to go with him. +</p> + +<p> +“Stay, my boy,” said the sailor. “We must pitch our camp for +the night, and try to find something to eat more satisfying than shellfish. Our +friends will need food when they come back.” +</p> + +<p> +“I am ready, Pencroff,” said Herbert. +</p> + +<p> +“Good,” said the sailor. “Let us set to work methodically. We +are tired, cold, and hungry: we need shelter, fire, and food. There is plenty +of wood in the forest, and we can get eggs from the nests; but we must find a +house.” +</p> + +<p> +“Well,” said Herbert, “I will look for a cave in these rocks, +and I shall certainly find some hole in which we can stow ourselves.” +</p> + +<p> +“Right,” said Pencroff; “let us start at once.” +</p> + +<p> +They walked along the base of the rocky wall, on the strand left bare by the +receding waves. But instead of going northwards, they turned to the south. +Pencroff had noticed, some hundreds of feet below the place where they had been +thrown ashore, a narrow inlet in the coast, which he thought might be the mouth +of a river or of a brook. Now it was important to pitch the camp in the +neighborhood of fresh water; in that part of the island, too, Smith might be +found. +</p> + +<p> +The rock rose 300 feet, smooth and massive. It was a sturdy wall of the hardest +granite, never corroded by the waves, and even at its base there was no cleft +which might serve as a temporary abode. About the summit hovered a host of +aquatic birds, mainly of the web-footed tribe, with long, narrow, pointed +beaks. Swift and noisy, they cared little for the unaccustomed presence of man. +A shot into the midst of the flock would have brought down a dozen; but neither +Pencroff nor Herbert had a gun. Besides, gulls and sea-mews are barely eatable, +and their eggs have a very disagreeable flavor. +</p> + +<p> +Meanwhile Herbert, who was now to the left, soon noticed some rocks thickly +strewn with sea weed, which would evidently be submerged again in a few hours. +On them lay hosts of bivalves, not to be disdained by hungry men. Herbert +called to Pencroff, who came running to him. +</p> + +<p> +“Ah, they are mussels,” said the sailor. “Now we can spare +the eggs.” +</p> + +<p> +“They are not mussels,” said Herbert, examining the mollusks +carefully, “they are lithodomes.” +</p> + +<p> +“Can we eat them?” said Pencroff. +</p> + +<p> +“Certainly.” +</p> + +<p> +“Then let us eat some lithodomes.” +</p> + +<p> +The sailor could rely on Herbert, who was versed in Natural History and very +fond of it. He owed his acquaintance with this study in great part to his +father, who had entered him in the classes of the best professors in Boston, +where the child’s industry and intelligence had endeared him to all. +</p> + +<p> +These lithodomes were oblong shell-fish, adhering in clusters to the rocks. +They belonged to that species of boring mollusk which can perforate a hole in +the hardest stone, and whose shell has the peculiarity of being rounded at both +ends. +</p> + +<p> +Pencroff and Herbert made a good meal of these lithodomes. which lay gaping in +the sun. They tasted like oysters, with a peppery flavor which left no desire +for condiments of any kind. +</p> + +<p> +Their hunger was allayed for the moment, but their thirst was increased by the +spicy flavor of the mollusks. The thing now was to find fresh water, which was +not likely to fail them in a region so undulating. Pencroff and Herbert, after +having taken the precaution to fill their pockets and handkerchiefs with +lithodomes, regained the foot of the hill. +</p> + +<p> +Two hundred feet further on they reached the inlet, through which, as Pencroff +had surmised, a little river was flowing with full current Here the rocky wall +seemed to have been torn asunder by some volcanic convulsion. At its base lay a +little creek, running at an acute angle. The water in this place was 100 feet +across, while the banks on either side were scarcely 20 feet broad. The river +buried itself at once between the two walls of granite, which began to decline +as one went up stream. +</p> + +<p> +“Here is water,” said Pencroff, “and over there is wood. +Well, Herbert, now we only want the house.” +</p> + +<p> +The river water was clear. The sailor knew that as the tide was now low there +would be no influx from the sea, and the water would be fresh. When this +important point had been settled, Herbert looked for some cave which might give +them shelter, but it was in vain. Everywhere the wall was smooth, flat, and +perpendicular. +</p> + +<p> +However, over at the mouth of the watercourse, and above high-water mark, the +detritus had formed, not a grotto, but a pile of enormous rocks, such as are +often met with in granitic countries, and which are called <i>Chimneys</i>. +</p> + +<p> +Pencroff and Herbert went down between the rocks, into those sandy corridors, +lighted only by the huge cracks between the masses of granite, some of which +only kept their equilibrium by a miracle. But with the light the wind came in, +and with the wind the piercing cold of the outer air. Still, the sailor thought +that by stopping up some of these openings with a mixture of stones and sand, +the Chimneys might be rendered habitable. Their plan resembled the +typographical sign, &, and by cutting off the upper curve of the sign, +through which the south and the west wind rushed in, they could succeed without +doubt in utilizing its lower portion. +</p> + +<p> +“This is just what we want,” said Pencroff, and if we ever see Mr. +Smith again, he will know how to take advantage of this labyrinth.” +</p> + +<p> +“We shall see him again, Pencroff,” said Herbert, “and when +he comes back he must find here a home that is tolerably comfortable. We can +make this so if we can build a fireplace in the left corridor with an opening +for the smoke.” +</p> + +<p> +“That we can do, my boy,” answered the sailor, “and these +Chimneys will just serve our purpose. But first we must get together some +firing. Wood will be useful, too, in blocking up these great holes through +which the wind whistles so shrilly.” +</p> + +<p> +Herbert and Pencroff left the Chimneys, and turning the angle, walked up the +left bank of the river, whose current was strong enough to bring down a +quantity of dead wood. The return tide, which had already begun, would +certainly carry it in the ebb to a great distance. “Why not utilize this +flux and reflux,” thought the sailor, “in the carriage of heavy +timber?” +</p> + +<p> +After a quarter of an hour’s walk, the two reached the elbow which the +river made in turning to the left. From this point onward it flowed through a +forest of magnificent trees, which had preserved their verdure in spite of the +season; for they belonged to that great cone-bearing family indigenous +everywhere, from the poles to the tropics. Especially conspicuous were the +“deodara,” so numerous in the Himalayas, with their pungent +perfume. Among them were clusters of pines, with tall trunks and spreading +parasols of green. The ground was strewn with fallen branches, so dry as to +crackle under their feet. +</p> + +<p> +“Good,” said the sailor, “I may not know the name of these +trees, but I know they belong to the genus firewood, and that’s the main +thing for us.” +</p> + +<p> +It was an easy matter to gather the firewood. They did not need even to strip +the trees; plenty of dead branches lay at their feet. This dry wood would burn +rapidly, and they would need a large supply. How could two men carry such a +load to the Chimneys? Herbert asked the question. +</p> + +<p> +“My boy,” said the sailor, “there’s a way to do +everything. If we had a car or a boat it would be too easy.” +</p> + +<p> +“We have the river,” suggested Herbert. +</p> + +<p> +“Exactly,” said Pencroff. “The river shall be our road and +our carrier, too. Timber-floats were not invented for nothing.” +</p> + +<p> +“But our carrier is going in the wrong direction,” said Herbert, +“since the tide is coming up from the sea.” +</p> + +<p> +“We have only to wait for the turn of tide,” answered the sailor. +“Let us get our float ready.” +</p> + +<p> +They walked towards the river, each carrying a heavy load of wood tied up in +fagots. On the bank, too, lay quantities of dead boughs, among grass which the +foot of man had probably never pressed before. Pencroff began to get ready his +float. +</p> + +<p> +In an eddy caused by an angle of the shore, which broke the flow of the +current, they set afloat the larger pieces of wood, bound together by liana +stems so as to form a sort of raft. On this raft they piled the rest of the +wood, which would have been a load for twenty men. In an hour their work was +finished, and the float was moored to the bank to wait for the turn of the +tide. Pencroff and Herbert resolved to spend the mean time in gaining a more +extended view of the country from the higher plateau. Two hundred feet behind +the angle of the river, the wall terminating in irregular masses of rocks, +sloped away gently to the edge of the forest. The two easily climbed this +natural staircase, soon attained the summit, and posted themselves at the angle +overlooking the mouth of the river. +</p> + +<p> +Their first look was at that ocean over which they had been so frightfully +swept. They beheld with emotion the northern part of the coast, the scene of +the catastrophe, and of Smith’s disappearance. They hoped to see on the +surface some wreck of the balloon to which a man might cling. But the sea was a +watery desert. The coast, too, was desolate. Neither Neb nor the reporter could +be seen. +</p> + +<p> +“Something tells me,” said Herbert, “that a person so +energetic as Mr. Smith would not let himself be drowned like an ordinary man. +He must have got to shore; don’t you think so, Pencroff?” +</p> + +<p> +The sailor shook his head sadly. He never thought to see Smith again; but he +left Herbert a hope. +</p> + +<p> +“No doubt,” said he, “our engineer could save himself where +any one else would perish.” +</p> + +<p> +Meanwhile he took a careful observation of the coast. Beneath his eyes +stretched out the sandy beach, bounded, upon the right of the river-mouth, by +lines of breakers. The rocks which still were visible above the water were like +groups of amphibious monsters lying in the surf. Beyond them the sea sparkled +in the rays of the sun. A narrow point terminated the southern horizon, and it +was impossible to tell whether the land stretched further in that direction, or +whether it trended southeast and southwest, so as to make an elongated +peninsula. At the northern end of the bay, the outline of the coast was +continued to a great distance. There the shore was low and flat, without rocks, +but covered by great sandbanks, left by the receding tide. +</p> + +<p> +When Pencroff and Herbert walked back towards the west, their looks fell on the +snowcapped mountain, which rose six or seven miles away. Masses of tree-trunks, +with patches of evergreens, extended from its first declivities to within two +miles of the coast. Then from the edge of this forest to the coast stretched a +plateau strewn at random with clumps of trees. On the left shore through the +glades the waters of the little river, which seemed to have returned in its +sinuous course to the mountains which gave it birth. +</p> + +<p> +“Are we upon an island?” muttered the sailor. +</p> + +<p> +“It is big enough, at all events,” said the boy. +</p> + +<p> +“An island’s an island, no matter how big,” said Pencroff. +</p> + +<p> +But this important question could not yet be decided. The country itself, isle +or continent, seemed fertile, picturesque, and diversified in its products. For +that they must be grateful. They returned along the southern ridge of the +granite plateau, outlined by a fringe of fantastic rocks, in whose cavities +lived hundreds of birds. A whole flock of them soared aloft as Herbert jumped +over the rocks. +</p> + +<p> +“Ah!” cried he, “these are neither gulls nor sea-mews.” +</p> + +<p> +“What are they?” said Pencroff. “They look for all the world +like pigeons.” +</p> + +<p> +“So they are,” said Herbert, “but they are wild pigeons, or +rock pigeons.” I know them by the two black bands on the wing, the white +rump, and the ash-blue feathers. The rock pigeon is good to eat, and its eggs +ought to be delicious; and if they have left a few in their nests—” +</p> + +<p> +“We will let them hatch in an omelet,” said Pencroff, gaily. +</p> + +<p> +“But what will you make your omelet in?” asked Herbert; “in +your hat?” +</p> + +<p> +“I am not quite conjurer enough for that,” said the sailor. +“We must fall back on eggs in the shell, and I will undertake to despatch +the hardest.” +</p> + +<p> +Pencroff and the boy examined carefully the cavities of the granite, and +succeeded in discovering eggs in some of them. Some dozens were collected in +the sailor’s handkerchief, and, high tide approaching, the two went down +again to the water-course. +</p> + +<p> +It was 1 o’clock when they arrived at the elbow of the river, and the +tide was already on the turn. Pencroff had no intention of letting his timber +float at random, nor did he wish to get on and steer it. But a sailor is never +troubled in a matter of ropes or cordage, and Pencroff quickly twisted from the +dry lianas a rope several fathoms long. This was fastened behind the raft, and +the sailor held it in his hand, while Herbert kept the float in the current by +pushing it off from the shore with a long pole. +</p> + +<p> +This expedient proved an entire success. The enormous load of wood kept well in +the current. The banks were sheer, and there was no fear lest the float should +ground; before 2 o’clock they reached the mouth of the stream, a few feet +from the Chimneys. +</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2><a name="V" id="V"></a>CHAPTER V.</h2> + +<p class="letter"> +ARRANGING THE CHIMNEYS—THE IMPORTANT QUESTION OF FIRE—THE MATCH +BOX—SEARCH OVER THE SHORE—RETURN OF THE REPORTER AND NEB—ONE +MATCH—THE CRACKLING FIRE—THE FISH SUPPER—THE FIRST NIGHT ON +LAND. +</p> + +<p> +The first care of Pencroff, after the raft had been unloaded, was to make the +Chimneys habitable, by stopping up those passages traversed by the draughts of +air. Sand, stones, twisted branches, and mud, hermetically sealed the galleries +of the & open to the southerly winds, and shut out its upper curve. One +narrow, winding passage, opening on the side; was arranged to carry out the +smoke and to quicken the draught of the fire. The Chimneys were thus divided +into three or four chambers, if these dark dens, which would hardly have +contained a beast, might be so called. But they were dry, and one could stand +up in them, or at least in the principal one, which was in the centre. The +floor was covered with sand, and, everything considered, they could establish +themselves in this place while waiting for one better. +</p> + +<p> +While working, Herbert and Pencroff chatted together. +</p> + +<p> +“Perhaps,” said the boy, “our companions will have found a +better place than ours.” +</p> + +<p> +“It is possible.” answered the sailor, “but, until we know, +don’t let us stop. Better have two strings to one’s bow than none +at all!” +</p> + +<p> +“Oh,” repeated Herbert, “if they can only find Mr. Smith, and +bring him back with them, how thankful we will be!” +</p> + +<p> +“Yes,” murmured Pencroff. “He was a good man.” +</p> + +<p> +“Was!” said Herbert. “Do you think we shall not see him +again?” +</p> + +<p> +“Heaven forbid!” replied the sailor. +</p> + +<p> +The work of division was rapidly accomplished, and Pencroff declared himself +satisfied. “Now,” said he, “our friends may return, and they +will find a good enough shelter.” +</p> + +<p> +Nothing remained but to fix the fireplace and to prepare the meal, which, in +truth, was a task easy and simple enough. Large flat stones were placed at the +mouth of the first gallery to the left, where the smoke passage had been made; +and this chimney was made so narrow that but little heat would escape up the +flue, and the cavern would be comfortably warmed. The stock of wood was piled +up in one of the chambers, and the sailor placed some logs and broken branches +upon the stones. He was occupied in arranging them when Herbert asked him if he +had some matches. +</p> + +<p> +“Certainly,” replied Pencroff, “and moreover, fortunately; +for without matches or tinder we would indeed be in trouble.” +</p> + +<p> +“Could not we always make fire as the savages do,” replied Herbert, +“by rubbing two bits of dry wood together?” +</p> + +<p> +“Just try it, my boy, some time, and see if you do anything more than put +your arms out of joint.” +</p> + +<p> +“Nevertheless, it is often done in the islands of the Pacific.” +</p> + +<p> +“I don’t say that it is not,” replied Pencroff, “but +the savages must have a way of their own, or use a certain kind of wood, as +more than once I have wanted to get fire in that way and have never yet been +able to. For my part, I prefer matches; and, by the way, where are mine?” +</p> + +<p> +Pencroff, who was an habitual smoker, felt in his vest for the box, which he +was never without, but, not finding it, he searched the pockets of his +trowsers, and to his profound amazement, it was not there. +</p> + +<p> +“This is an awkward business,” said he, looking at Herbert. +“My box must have fallen from my pocket, and I can’t find it. But +you, Herbert, have you nothing: no steel, not anything, with which we can make +fire?” +</p> + +<p> +“Not a thing, Pencroff.” +</p> + +<p> +The sailor, followed by the boy, walked out, rubbing his forehead. +</p> + +<p> +On the sand, among the rocks, by the bank of the river, both of them searched +with the utmost care, but without result. The box was of copper, and had it +been there, they must have seen it. +</p> + +<p> +“Pencroff,” asked Herbert, “did not you throw it out of the +basket?” +</p> + +<p> +“I took good care not to,” said the sailor. “But when one has +been knocked around as we have been, so small a thing could easily have been +lost; even my pipe is gone. The confounded box; where can it be?” +</p> + +<p> +“Well, the tide is out; let us run to the place where we landed,” +said Herbert. +</p> + +<p> +It was little likely that they would find this box, which the sea would have +rolled among the pebbles at high water; nevertheless, it would do no harm to +search. They, therefore, went quickly to the place where they had first landed, +some 200 paces from the Chimneys. There, among the pebbles, in the hollows of +the rocks, they made minute search, but in vain. If the box had fallen here it +must have been carried out by the waves. As the tide went down, the sailor +peered into every crevice, but without Success. It was a serious loss, and, for +the time, irreparable. Pencroff did not conceal his chagrin. He frowned, but +did not speak, and Herbert tried to console him by saying, that, most probably, +the matches would have been so wetted as to be useless. +</p> + +<p> +“No, my boy,” answered the sailor. “They were in a tightly +closing metal box. But now, what are we to do?” +</p> + +<p> +“We will certainly find means of procuring fire,” said Herbert. +“Mr. Smith or Mr. Spilett will not be as helpless as we are.” +</p> + +<p> +“Yes, but in the meantime we are without it,” said Pencroff, +“and our companions will find but a very sorry meal on their +return.” +</p> + +<p> +“But,” said Herbert, hopefully, “it is not possible that they +will have neither tinder nor matches.” +</p> + +<p> +“I doubt it,” answered the sailor, shaking his head. “In the +first place, neither Neb nor Mr. Smith smoke, and then I’m afraid Mr. +Spilett has more likely kept his notebook than his match-box.” +</p> + +<p> +Herbert did not answer. This loss was evidently serious. Nevertheless, the lad +thought surely they could make a fire in some way or other, but Pencroff, more +experienced, although a man not easily discouraged, knew differently. At any +rate there was but one thing to do:—to wait until the return of Neb and +the reporter. It was necessary to give up the repast of cooked eggs which they +had wished to prepare, and a diet of raw flesh did not seem to be, either for +themselves or for the others, an agreeable prospect. +</p> + +<p> +Before returning to the Chimneys, the companions, in case they failed of a +fire, gathered a fresh lot of lithodomes, and then silently took the road to +their dwelling. Pencroff, his eyes fixed upon the ground, still searched in +every direction for the lost box. They followed again up the left bank of the +river, from its mouth to the angle where the raft had been built. They returned +to the upper plateau, and went in every direction, searching in the tall grass +on the edge of the forest, but in vain. It was 5 o’clock when they +returned again to the Chimneys, and it is needless to say that the passages +were searched in their darkest recesses before all hope was given up. +</p> + +<p> +Towards 6 o’clock, just as the sun was disappearing behind the high land +in the west, Herbert, who was walking back and forth upon the shore, announced +the return of Neb and of Gideon Spilett. They came back alone, and the lad felt +his heart sink. The sailor had not, then, been wrong in his presentiments; they +had been unable to find the engineer. +</p> + +<p> +The reporter, when he came up, seated himself upon a rock, without speaking. +Fainting from fatigue, half dead with hunger, he was unable to utter a word. As +to Neb, his reddened eyes showed how he had been weeping, and the fresh tears +which he was unable to restrain, indicated, but too clearly, that he had lost +all hope. +</p> + +<p> +The reporter at length gave the history of their search. Neb and he had +followed the coast for more than eight miles, and, consequently, far beyond the +point where the balloon had made the plunge which was followed by the +disappearance of the engineer and Top. The shore was deserted. Not a recently +turned stone, not a trace upon the sand, not a footprint, was upon all that +part of the shore. It was evident that nobody inhabited that portion of the +island. The sea was as deserted as the land; and it was there, at some hundreds +of feet from shore, that the engineer had found his grave. +</p> + +<p> +At that moment Neb raised his head, and in a voice which showed how he still +struggled against despair, exclaimed:— +</p> + +<p> +“No, he is not dead. It is impossible. It might happen to you or me, but +never to him. He is a man who can get out of anything!” +</p> + +<p> +Then his strength failing him, he murmured, “But I am used up.” +</p> + +<p> +Herbert ran to him and cried:— +</p> + +<p> +“Neb, we will find him; God will give him back to us; but you, you must +be famishing; do eat something.” +</p> + +<p> +And while speaking the lad offered the poor negro a handful of +shell-fish—a meagre and insufficient nourishment enough. +</p> + +<p> +But Neb, though he had eaten nothing for hours, refused them. Poor fellow! +deprived of his master, he wished no longer to live. +</p> + +<p> +As to Gideon Spilett, he devoured the mollusks, and then laid down upon the +sand at the foot of a rock. He was exhausted, but calm. Herbert, approaching +him, took his hand. +</p> + +<p> +“Mr. Spilett,” said he, “we have discovered a shelter where +you will be more comfortable. The night is coming on; so come and rest there. +To-morrow we will see—” +</p> + +<p> +The reporter rose, and, guided by the lad, proceeded towards the Chimneys. As +he did so, Pencroff came up to him, and in an off-hand way asked him if, by +chance, he had a match with him. The reporter stopped, felt in his pockets, and +finding none, said:— +</p> + +<p> +“I had some, but I must have thrown them all away.” +</p> + +<p> +Then the sailor called Neb and asked him the same question, receiving a like +answer. +</p> + +<p> +“Curse it!” cried the sailor, unable to restrain the word. +</p> + +<p> +The reporter heard it, and going to him said:—“Have you no +matches?” +</p> + +<p> +“Not one; and, of course, no fire.” +</p> + +<p> +“Ah,” cried Neb, “if he was here, my master, he could soon +make one.” +</p> + +<p> +The four castaways stood still and looked anxiously at each other. Herbert was +the first to break the silence, by saying:— +</p> + +<p> +“Mr. Spilett, you are a smoker, you always have matches about you; +perhaps you have not searched thoroughly. Look again; a single match will be +enough.” +</p> + +<p> +The reporter rummaged the pockets of his trowsers, his vest, and coat, and to +the great joy of Pencroff, as well as to his own surprise, felt a little sliver +of wood caught in the lining of his vest. He could feel it from the outside, +but his fingers were unable to disengage it. If this should prove a match, and +only one, it was extremely necessary not to rub off the phosphorus. +</p> + +<p> +“Let me try,” said the lad. And very adroitly, without breaking it, +he drew out this little bit of wood, this precious trifle, which to these poor +men was of such great importance. It was uninjured. +</p> + +<p> +“One match!” cried Pencroff.” “Why, it is as good as if +we had a whole ship-load!” +</p> + +<p> +He took it, and, followed by his companions, regained the Chimneys. This tiny +bit of wood, which in civilised lands is wasted with indifference, as +valueless, it was necessary here to use with the utmost care. The sailor, +having assured himself that it was dry, said:— +</p> + +<p> +“We must have some paper.” +</p> + +<p> +“Here is some,” answered Spilett, who, after a little hesitation, +had torn a leaf from his note-book. +</p> + +<p> +Pencroff took the bit of paper and knelt down before the fire-place, where some +handfuls of grass, leaves, and dry moss had been placed under the faggots in +such a way that the air could freely circulate and make the dry wood readily +ignite. Then Pencroff shaping the paper into a cone, as pipe-smokers do in the +wind, placed it among the moss. Taking, then, a slightly rough stone and wiping +it carefully, with beating heart and suspended breath, he gave the match a +little rub. The first stroke produced no effect, as Pencroff fearing to break +off the phosphorus had not rubbed hard enough. +</p> + +<p> +“Ho, I won’t be able to do it,” said he; “my hand +shakes—the match will miss—I can’t do it—I don’t +want to try!” And, rising, he besought Herbert to undertake it. +</p> + +<p> +Certainly, the boy had never in his life been so affected. His heart beat +furiously. Prometheus, about to steal the fire from heaven, could not have been +more excited. +</p> + +<p> +Nevertheless he did not hesitate, but rubbed the stone with a quick stroke. A +little sputtering was heard, and a light blue flame sprung out and produced a +pungent smoke. Herbert gently turned the match, so as to feed the flame, and +then slid it under the paper cone. In a few seconds the paper took fire, and +then the moss kindled. An instant later, the dry wood crackled, and a joyous +blaze, fanned by the breath of the sailor, shone out from the darkness. +</p> + +<p> +“At length,” cried Pencroff, rising, “I never was so excited +in my life!” +</p> + +<p> +It was evident that the fire did well in the fireplace of flat stones. The +smoke readily ascended through its passage; the chimney drew, and an agreeable +warmth quickly made itself felt. As to the fire, it would be necessary to take +care that it should not go out, and always to keep some embers among the +cinders. But it was only a matter of care and attention as the wood was plenty, +and the supply could always be renewed in good time. +</p> + +<p> +Pencroff began at once to utilize the fire by preparing something more +nourishing than a dish of lithodomes. Two dozen eggs were brought by Herbert, +and the reporter, seated in a corner, watched these proceedings without +speaking. A triple thought held possession of his mind. Did Cyrus still live? +If alive, where was he? If he had survived his plunge, why was it he had found +no means of making his existence known? As to Neb, he roamed the sand like one +distracted. +</p> + +<p> +Pencroff, who knew fifty-two ways of cooking eggs, had no choice at this time. +He contented himself with placing them in the hot cinders and letting them cook +slowly. In a few minutes the operation was finished, and the sailor invited the +reporter to take part in the supper. This was the first meal of the castaways +upon this unknown coast. The hard eggs were excellent, and as the egg contains +all the elements necessary for man’s nourishment, these poor men found +them sufficient, and felt their strength reviving. +</p> + +<p> +Unfortunately, one was absent from this repast. If the five prisoners who had +escaped from Richmond had all been there, under those piled-up rocks, before +that bright and crackling fire upon that dry sand, their happiness would have +been complete. But the most ingenious, as well as the most learned—he who +was undoubtedly their chief, Cyrus Smith—alas! was missing, and his body +had not even obtained burial. +</p> + +<p> +Thus passed the 25th of March. The night was come. Outside they heard the +whistling of the wind, the monotonous thud of the surf, and the grinding of the +pebbles on the beach. +</p> + +<p> +The reporter had retired to a dark corner, after having briefly noted the +events of the day—the first sight of this new land, the loss of the +engineer, the exploration of the shore, the incidents of the matches, etc.; +and, overcome by fatigue, he was enabled to find some rest in sleep. +</p> + +<p> +Herbert fell asleep at once. The sailor, dozing, with one eye open, passed the +night by the fire, on which he kept heaping fuel. +</p> + +<p> +One only of the castaways did not rest in the Chimneys. It was the +inconsolable, the despairing Neb, who, during the whole night, and in spite of +his companions’ efforts to make him take some rest, wandered upon the +sands calling his master. +</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2><a name="VI" id="VI"></a>CHAPTER VI.</h2> + +<p class="letter"> +THE CASTAWAYS’ INVENTORY—NO EFFECTS —THE CHARRED +LINEN—AN EXPEDITION INTO THE FOREST—THE FLORA OF THE +WOODS—THE FLIGHT OF THE JACAMAR—TRACKS OF WILD BEASTS—THE +COUROUCOUS—THE HEATH-COCK—LINE-FISHING EXTRAORDINARY. +</p> + +<p> +The inventory of the castaways can be promptly taken. Thrown upon a desert +coast, they had nothing but the clothes they wore in the balloon. We must add +Spilett’s watch and note-book, which he had kept by some inadvertence; +but there were no firearms and no tools, not even a pocket knife. Every thing +had been thrown overboard to lighten the balloon. Every necessary of life was +wanting! +</p> + +<p> +Yet if Cyrus Smith had been with them, his practical science and inventive +genius would have saved them from despair. But, alas! they could hope to see +him no more. The castaways could rely on Providence only, and on their own +right hands. +</p> + +<p> +And, first, should they settle down on this strip of coast without an effort to +discover whether it was island or continent, inhabited or desert? It was an +urgent question, for all their measures would depend upon its solution. +However, it seemed to Pencroff better to wait a few days before undertaking an +exploration. They must try to procure more satisfying food than eggs and +shellfish, and repair their strength, exhausted by fatigue and by the +inclemency of the weather. The Chimneys would serve as a house for a while. +Their fire was lit, and it would be easy to keep alive some embers. For the +time being there were plenty of eggs and shell-fish. They might even be able to +kill, with a stick or a stone, some of the numerous pigeons which fluttered +among the rocks. They might find fruit-trees in the neighboring forest, and +they had plenty of fresh water. It was decided then to wait a few days at the +Chimneys, and to prepare for an expedition either along the coast or into the +interior of the country. +</p> + +<p> +This plan was especially agreeable to Neb, who was in no hurry to abandon that +part of the coast which had been the scene of the catastrophe. He could not and +would not believe that Smith was dead. Until the waves should have thrown up +the engineer’s body—until Neb should have seen with his eyes and +handled with his hands his master’s corpse, he believed him alive. It was +an illusion which the sailor had not the heart to destroy; and there was no use +in talking to Neb. He was like the dog who would not leave his master’s +tomb, and his grief was such that he would probably soon follow him. +</p> + +<p> +Upon the morning of the 26th of March, at daybreak, Neb started along the coast +northward to the spot where the sea had doubtless closed over the unfortunate +engineer. +</p> + +<p> +For breakfast that morning they had only eggs and lithodomes, seasoned with +salt which Herbert had found in the cavities of the rocks. When the meal was +over they divided forces. The reporter stayed behind to keep up the fire, and +in the very improbable case of Neb’s needing him to go to his assistance. +Herbert and Pencroff went into the forest. +</p> + +<p> +“We will go hunting, Herbert, “said the sailor. “We shall +find ammunition on our way, and we will cut our guns in the forest.” +</p> + +<p> +But, before starting, Herbert suggested that as they had no tinder they must +replace it by burnt linen. They were sorry to sacrifice a piece of +handkerchief, but the need was urgent, and a piece of Pencroff’s large +check handkerchief was soon converted into a charred rag, and put away in the +central chamber in a little cavity of the rock, sheltered from wind and +dampness. +</p> + +<p> +By this time it was 9 o’clock. The weather was threatening and the breeze +blew from the southeast. Herbert and Pencroff, as they left the Chimneys, cast +a glance at the smoke which curled upwards from amid the rocks; then they +walked up the left bank of the river. +</p> + +<p> +When they reached the forest, Pencroff broke from the first tree two thick +branches which he made into cudgels, and whose points Herbert blunted against a +rock. What would he not have given for a knife? Then the hunters walked on in +the high grass along the bank of the river, which, after its turn to the +southwest, gradually narrowed, running between high banks and over-arched by +interlacing trees. Pencroff, not to lose his way, determined to follow the +course of the stream, which would bring him back to his point of departure. But +the bank offered many obstacles. Here, trees whose flexible branches bent over +to the brink of the current; there, thorns and lianas which they had to break +with their sticks. Herbert often glided between the broken stumps with the +agility of a young cat and disappeared in the copse, but Pencroff called him +back at once, begging him not to wander away. +</p> + +<p> +Meanwhile, the sailor carefully observed the character and peculiarities of the +region. On this left bank the surface was flat, rising insensibly towards the +interior. Sometimes it was moist and swampy, indicating the existence of a +subterranean network of little streams emptying themselves into the river. +Sometimes, too, a brook ran across the copse, which they crossed without +trouble. The opposite bank was more undulating, and the valley, through whose +bottom flowed the river, was more clearly defined. The hill, covered with trees +rising in terraces, intercepted the vision. Along this right bank they could +hardly have walked, for the descent was steep, and the trees which bent over +the water were only sustained by their roots. It is needless to say that both +forest and shore seemed a virgin wilderness. They saw fresh traces of animals +whose species was unknown to them. Some seemed to them the tracks of dangerous +wild beasts, but nowhere was there the mark of an axe on a tree-trunk, or the +ashes of a fire, or the imprint of a foot. They should no doubt have been glad +that it was so, for on this land in the mid-Pacific, the presence of man was a +thing more to be dreaded than desired. +</p> + +<p> +They hardly spoke, so great were the difficulties of the route; after an +hour’s walk they had but just compassed a mile. Hitherto their hunting +had been fruitless. Birds were singing and flying to and fro under the trees; +but they showed an instinctive fear of their enemy man. Herbert descried among +them, in a swampy part of the forest, a bird with narrow and elongated beak, in +shape something like a kingfisher, from which it was distinguished by its harsh +and lustrous plumage. +</p> + +<p> +“That must be a jacamar,” said Herbert, trying to get within range +of the bird. +</p> + +<p> +“It would be a good chance to taste jacamar,” answered the sailor, +“if that fellow would only let himself be roasted.” +</p> + +<p> +In a moment a stone, adroitly aimed by the boy, struck the bird on the wing; +but the jacamar took to his legs and disappeared in a minute. +</p> + +<p> +“What a muff I am,” said Herbert. ‘Not at all,” said +the sailor. “It was a good shot, a great many would have missed the bird. +Don’t be discouraged, we’ll catch him again some day.” +</p> + +<p> +The wood opened as the hunters went on, and the trees grew to a vast height, +but none had edible fruits. Pencroff sought in vain for some of those precious +palm trees, which lend themselves so wonderfully to the needs of mankind, and +which grow from 40° north latitude to 35° south. But this forest was composed +only of conifers, such as the deodars, already recognized by Herbert; the +Douglas pines, which grow on the northeast coast of America; and magnificent +fir trees, 150 feet high. Among their branches was fluttering a flock of birds, +with small bodies and long, glittering tails. Herbert picked up some of the +feathers, which lay scattered on the ground, and looked at them carefully. +</p> + +<p> +“These are ‘couroucous,’“ said he. +</p> + +<p> +“I would rather have a guinea-hen, or a heath-cock,” said Pencroff, +“but still, if they are good to eat”— +</p> + +<p> +“They are good to eat,” said Herbert; “their meat is +delicious. Besides, I think we can easily get at them with our sticks.” +</p> + +<p> +Slipping through the grass, they reached the foot of a tree whose lower +branches were covered with the little birds, who were snapping at the flying +insects. Their feathered claws clutched tight the twigs on which they were +sitting. Then the hunters rose to their feet, and using their sticks like a +scythe, they mowed down whole rows of the couroucous, of whom 105 were knocked +over before the stupid birds thought of escape. +</p> + +<p> +“Good,” said Pencroff, “this is just the sort of game for +hunters like us. We could catch them in our hands.” +</p> + +<p> +They skewered the couroucous on a switch like field-larks, and continued to +explore. The object of the expedition was, of course, to bring back as much +game as possible to the Chimneys. So far it had not been altogether attained. +They looked about everywhere, and were enraged to see animals escaping through +the high grass. If they had only had Top! But Top, most likely, had perished +with his master. +</p> + +<p> +About 3 o’clock they entered a wood full of juniper trees, at whose +aromatic berries flocks of birds were pecking. Suddenly they heard a sound like +the blast of a trumpet. It was the note of those gallinaceæ, called +“tetras” in the United States. Soon they saw several pairs of them, +with brownish-yellow plumage and brown tails. Pencroff determined to capture +one of these birds, for they were as big as hens, and their meat as delicious +as a pullet. But they would not let him come near them. At last, after several +unsuccessful attempts, he said, +</p> + +<p> +“Well, since we can’t kill them on the wing, we must take them with +a line.” +</p> + +<p> +“Like a carp,” cried the wondering Herbert. +</p> + +<p> +“Like a carp,” answered the sailor, gravely. +</p> + +<p> +Pencroff had found in the grass half-a-dozen tetras nests, with two or three +eggs in each. +</p> + +<p> +He was very careful not to touch these nests, whose owners would certainly +return to them. Around these he purposed to draw his lines, not as a snare, but +with hook and bait. He took Herbert to some distance from the nests, and there +made ready his singular apparatus with the care of a true disciple of Isaac +Walton. Herbert watched the work with a natural interest, but without much +faith in its success. The lines were made of small lianas tied together, from +fifteen to twenty feet long, and stout thorns with bent points, broken from a +thicket of dwarf acacias, and fastened to the ends of the lianas, served as +hooks, and the great red worms which crawled at their feet made excellent bait. +This done, Pencroff, walking stealthily through the grass, placed one end of +his hook-and-line close to the nests of the tetras. Then he stole back, took +the other end in his hand, and hid himself with Herbert behind a large tree. +Herbert, it must be said, was not sanguine of success. +</p> + +<p> +A good half hour passed, but as the sailor had foreseen, several pairs of +tetras returned to their nests. They hopped about, pecking the ground, and +little suspecting the presence of the hunters, who had taken care to station +themselves to leeward of the gallinaceæ. Herbert held his breath with +excitement, while Pencroff, with dilated eyes, open month, and lips parted as +if to taste a morsel of tetras, scarcely breathed. Meanwhile the gallinaceæ +walked heedlessly among the hooks. Pencroff then gave little jerks, which moved +the bait up and down as if the worms were still alive. How much more intense +was his excitement than the fisherman’s who cannot see the approach of +his prey! +</p> + +<p> +The jerks soon aroused the attention of the gallinaceæ, who began to peck at +the bait. Three of the greediest swallowed hook and bait together. Suddenly, +with a quick jerk, Pencroff pulled in his line, and the flapping of wings +showed that the birds were taken. +</p> + +<p> +“Hurrah!” cried he, springing upon the game, of which he was master +in a moment. Herbert clapped his hands. It was the first time he had seen birds +taken with a line; but the modest sailor said it was not his first attempt, +and, moreover, that the merit of the invention was not his. +</p> + +<p> +“And at any rate,” said he, “in our present situation we must +hope for many such contrivances.” +</p> + +<p> +The tetras were tied together by the feet, and Pencroff, happy that they were +not returning empty handed, and perceiving that the day was ending, thought it +best to return home. +</p> + +<p> +Their route was indicated by the river, and following it downward, by 6 +o’clock, tired out by their excursion, Herbert and Pencroff re-entered +the Chimneys. +</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2><a name="VII" id="VII"></a>CHAPTER VII.</h2> + +<p class="letter"> +NEB HAS NOT YET RETURNED—THE REFLECTIONS OF THE REPORTER—THE +SUPPER—PROSPECT OF A BAD NIGHT—THE STORM IS FRIGHTFUL—THEY GO +OUT INTO THE NIGHT—STRUGGLE WITH THE RAIN AND WIND. +</p> + +<p> +Gideon Spilett stood motionless upon the shore, his arms crossed, gazing on the +sea, whose horizon was darkened towards the east by a huge black cloud mounting +rapidly into the zenith. The wind, already strong, was freshening, the heavens +had an angry look, and the first symptoms of a heavy blow were manifesting +themselves. +</p> + +<p> +Herbert went into the Chimneys, and Pencroff walked towards the reporter, who +was too absorbed to notice his approach. +</p> + +<p> +“We will have a bad night, Mr. Spilett,” said the sailor. +“Wind and rain enough for Mother Cary’s chickens.” +</p> + +<p> +The reporter turning, and perceiving Pencroff, asked this question:— +</p> + +<p> +“How far off from the shore do you think was the basket when it was +struck by the sea that carried away our companion?” +</p> + +<p> +The sailor had not expected this question. He reflected an instant before +answering:— +</p> + +<p> +“Two cables’ lengths or more.” +</p> + +<p> +“How much is a cable’s length?” demanded Spilett. +</p> + +<p> +“About 120 fathoms, or 600 feet.” +</p> + +<p> +“Then,” said the reporter, “Cyrus Smith would have +disappeared not more than 1,200 feet from the shore?” +</p> + +<p> +“Not more than that.” +</p> + +<p> +“And his dog, too?” +</p> + +<p> +“Yes.” +</p> + +<p> +“What astonishes me,” said the reporter, “admitting that our +companion and Top have perished, is the fact that neither the body of the dog +nor of his master has been cast upon the shore.” +</p> + +<p> +“That is not astonishing with so heavy a sea,” replied the sailor. +“Moreover, it is quite possible that there are currents which have +carried them farther up the coast.” +</p> + +<p> +“Then it is really your opinion that our companion has been +drowned?” asked, once more, the reporter. +</p> + +<p> +“That is my opinion.” +</p> + +<p> +“And my opinion, Pencroff,” said Spilett, “with all respect +for your experience, is, that in this absolute disappearance of both Cyrus and +Top, living or dead, there is something inexplicable and incredible.” +</p> + +<p> +“I wish I could think as you do, sir,” responded Pencroff, +“but, unhappily, I cannot.” +</p> + +<p> +After thus speaking the sailor returned to the Chimneys. A good fire was +burning in the fireplace. Herbert had just thrown on a fresh armful of wood, +and its flames lit up the dark recesses of the corridor. +</p> + +<p> +Pencroff began at once to busy himself about dinner. It seemed expedient to +provide something substantial, as all stood in need of nourishment, so two +tetras were quickly plucked, spitted upon a stick, and placed to roast before +at blazing fire. The couroucous were reserved for the next day. +</p> + +<p> +At 7 o’clock Neb was still absent, and Pencroff began to be alarmed about +him. He feared that he might have met with some accident in this unknown land, +or that the poor fellow had been drawn by despair to some rash act. Herbert, on +the contrary, argued that Neb’s absence was owing to some fresh discovery +which had induced him to prolong his researches. And anything new must be to +Cyrus Smith’s advantage. Why had not Neb come back, if some hope was not +detaining him? Perhaps he had found some sign or footprint which had put him +upon the track. Perhaps, at this moment he was following the trail. Perhaps, +already, he was beside his master. +</p> + +<p> +Thus the lad spoke and reasoned, unchecked by his companions. The reporter +nodded approval, but Pencroff thought it more probable that Neb, in his search, +had pushed on so far that he had not been able to return. +</p> + +<p> +Meantime, Herbert, excited by vague presentiments, manifested a desire to go to +meet Neb. But Pencroff showed him that it would be useless in the darkness and +storm to attempt to find traces of the negro, and, that the better course was, +to wait. If, by morning, Neb had not returned, Pencroff would not hesitate +joining the lad in a search for him. +</p> + +<p> +Gideon Spilett concurred with the sailor in his opinion that they had better +remain together, and Herbert, though tearfully, gave up the project. The +reporter could not help embracing the generous lad. +</p> + +<p> +The storm began. A furious gust of wind passed over the coast from the +southeast. They heard the sea, which was out, roaring upon the reef. The +whirlwind drove the rain in clouds along the shore. The sand, stirred up by the +wind, mingled with the rain, and the air was filled with mineral as well as +aqueous dust. Between the mouth of the river and the cliff’s face, the +wind whirled about as in a maelstrom, and, finding no other outlet than the +narrow valley through which ran the stream, it rushed through this with +irresistible violence. +</p> + +<p> +Often, too, the smoke from the chimney, driven back down its narrow vent, +filled the corridors, and rendered them uninhabitable. Therefore, when the +tetras were cooked Pencroff let the fire smoulder, only preserving some clear +embers among the ashes. +</p> + +<p> +At 8 o’clock Neb had not returned; but they could not help admitting that +now the tempest alone was sufficient to account for his non-appearance, and +that, probably, he had sought refuge in some cavern, waiting the end of the +storm, or, at least, daybreak. As to going to meet him under present +circumstances, that was simply impossible. +</p> + +<p> +The birds were all they had for supper, but the party found them excellent +eating. Pencroff and Herbert, their appetite sharpened by their long walk, +devoured them. Then each one retired to his corner, and Herbert, lying beside +the sailor, extended before the fireplace, was soon asleep. +</p> + +<p> +Outside, as the night advanced, the storm developed formidable proportions. It +was a hurricane equal to that which had carried the prisoners from Richmond. +Such tempests, pregnant with catastrophes, spreading terror over a vast area, +their fury withstood by no obstacle, are frequent during the equinox. We can +understand how a coast facing the east, and exposed to the full fury of the +storm, was attacked with a violence perfectly indescribable. +</p> + +<p> +Happily the heap of rocks forming the Chimneys was composed of solid, enormous +blocks of granite, though some of them, imperfectly balanced, seemed to tremble +upon their foundations. Pencroff, placing his hand against the walls, could +feel their rapid vibrations; but he said to himself, with reason, that there +was no real danger, and that the improvised retreat would not tumble about +their ears. Nevertheless, he heard the sound of rocks, torn from the top of the +plateau by the gusts, crashing upon the shore. And some, falling +perpendicularly, struck the Chimneys and flew off into fragments. Twice the +sailor rose, and went to the opening of the corridor, to look abroad. But there +was no danger from these inconsiderable showers of stones, and he returned to +his place before the fire, where the embers glowed among the ashes. +</p> + +<p> +In spite of the fury and fracas of the tempest Herbert slept profoundly, and, +at length, sleep took possession of Pencroff, whose sailor life had accustomed +him to such demonstrations. Gideon Spilett, who was kept awake by anxiety, +reproached himself for not having accompanied Neb. We have seen that he had not +given up all hope, and the presentiments which had disturbed Herbert had +affected him also. His thoughts were fixed upon Neb; why had not the negro +returned? He tossed about on his sandy couch, unheeding the warfare of the +elements. Then, overcome by fatigue, he would close his eyes for an instant, +only to be awakened by some sudden thought. +</p> + +<p> +Meantime the night advanced; and it was about 2 o’clock when Pencroff was +suddenly aroused from a deep sleep by finding himself vigorously shaken. +</p> + +<p> +“What’s the matter?” he cried, rousing and collecting himself +with the quickness peculiar to sailors. +</p> + +<p> +The reporter was bending over him and saying:— +</p> + +<p> +“Listen, Pencroff, listen!” +</p> + +<p> +The sailor listened, but could hear no sounds other than those caused by the +gusts. +</p> + +<p> +“It is the wind,” he said. +</p> + +<p> +“No,” answered Spilett, listening again, “I think I +heard—” +</p> + +<p> +“What?” +</p> + +<p> +“The barking of a dog!” +</p> + +<p> +“A dog!” cried Pencroff, springing to his feet. +</p> + +<p> +“Yes—the barking—” +</p> + +<p> +“Impossible!” answered the sailor. “How, in the roarings of +the tempest—” +</p> + +<p> +“Wait—listen,” said the reporter. +</p> + +<p> +Pencroff listened most attentively, and at length, during a lull, he thought he +caught the sound of distant barking. +</p> + +<p> +“Is it?” asked the reporter, squeezing the sailor’s hand. +</p> + +<p> +“Yes—yes!” said Pencroff. +</p> + +<p> +“It is Top! It is Top!” cried Herbert, who had just wakened, and +the three rushed to the entrance of the Chimneys. +</p> + +<p> +They had great difficulty in getting out, as the wind drove against them with +fury, but at last they succeeded, and then they were obliged to steady +themselves against the rocks. They were unable to speak, but they looked about +them. The darkness was absolute. Sea, sky, and earth, were one intense +blackness. It seemed as if there was not one particle of light diffused in the +atmosphere. +</p> + +<p> +For some moments the reporter and his two companions stood in this place, beset +by the gusts, drenched by the rain, blinded by the sand. Then again, in the +hush of the storm, they heard, far away, the barking of a dog. This must be +Top. But was he alone or accompanied? Probably alone, for if Neb had been with +him, the negro would have hastened, at once, to the Chimneys. +</p> + +<p> +The sailor pressed the reporter’s hand in a manner signifying that he was +to remain without, and then returning to the corridor, emerged a moment later +with a lighted fagot, which he threw into the darkness, at the same time +whistling shrilly. At this signal, which seemed to have been looked for, the +answering barks came nearer, and soon a dog bounded into the corridor, followed +by the three companions. An armful of wood was thrown upon the coals, brightly +lighting up the passage. +</p> + +<p> +“It is Top!” cried Herbert. +</p> + +<p> +It was indeed Top, a magnificent Anglo-Norman, uniting in the cross of the two +breeds those qualities—swiftness of foot and keenness of +scent—indispensable in coursing dogs. But he was alone! Neither his +master nor Neb accompanied him. +</p> + +<p> +It seemed inexplicable how, through the darkness and storm, the dog’s +instinct had directed him to the Chimneys, a place he was unacquainted with. +But still more unaccountable was the fact that he was neither fatigued nor +exhausted nor soiled with mud or sand. Herbert had drawn him towards him, +patting his head; and the dog rubbed his neck against the lad’s hands. +</p> + +<p> +“If the dog is found, the master will be found also,” said the +reporter. +</p> + +<p> +“God grant it!” responded Herbert. “Come, let us set out. Top +will guide us!” +</p> + +<p> +Pencroff made no objection. He saw that the dog’s cunning had disproved +his conjectures. +</p> + +<p> +“Let us set out at once,” he said; and covering the fire so that it +could be relighted on their return, and preceded by the dog, who seemed to +invite their departure, the sailor, having gathered up the remnants of the +supper, followed by the reporter and Herbert, rushed into the darkness. +</p> + +<p> +The tempest, then in all its violence, was, perhaps, at its maximum intensity. +The new moon had not sufficient light to pierce the clouds. It was difficult to +follow a straight course. The better way, therefore, was to trust to the +instinct of Top; which was done. The reporter and the lad walked behind the +dog, and the sailor followed after. To speak was impossible. The rain, +dispersed by the wind, was not heavy, but the strength of the storm was +terrible. +</p> + +<p> +Fortunately, as it came from the southeast, the wind was at the back of the +party, and the sand, hurled from behind, did not prevent their march. Indeed, +they were often blown along so rapidly as nearly to be overthrown. But they +were sustained by a great hope. This time, at least, they were not wandering at +random. They felt, no doubt, that Neb had found his master and had sent the +faithful dog to them. But was the engineer living, or had Neb summoned his +companions only to render the last services to the dead? +</p> + +<p> +After having passed the smooth face of rock, which they carefully avoided, the +party stopped to take breath. The angle of the cliff sheltered them from the +wind, and they could breathe freely after this tramp, or rather race, of a +quarter of an hour. They were now able to hear themselves speak, and the lad +having pronounced the name of Smith, the dog seemed to say by his glad barking +that his master was safe. +</p> + +<p> +“Saved! He is saved! Isn’t he, Top?” repeated the boy. And +the dog barked his answer. +</p> + +<p> +It was half-past 2 when the march was resumed. The sea began to rise, and this, +which was a spring tide backed up by the wind, threatened to be very high. The +tremendous breakers thundered against the reef, assailing it so violently as +probably to pass completely over the islet, which was invisible. The coast was +no longer sheltered by this long breakwater, but was exposed to the full fury +of the open sea. +</p> + +<p> +After the party were clear of the precipice the storm attacked them again with +fury. Crouching, with backs still to the wind, they followed Top, who never +hesitated in his course. Mounting towards the north, they had upon their right +the endless line of breakers deafening them with its thunders, and upon their +left a region buried in darkness. One thing was certain, that they were upon an +open plain, as the wind rushed over them without rebounding as it had done from +the granite cliffs. +</p> + +<p> +By 4 o’clock they estimated the distance travelled as eight miles. The +clouds had risen a little, and the wind was drier and colder. Insufficiently +clad, the three companions suffered cruelly, but no murmur passed their lips. +They were determined to follow Top wherever he wished to lead them. +</p> + +<p> +Towards 5 o’clock the day began to break. At first, overhead, where some +grey shadowings bordered the clouds, and presently, under a dark band a bright +streak of light sharply defined the sea horizon. The crests of the billows +shone with a yellow light and the foam revealed its whiteness. At the same +time, on the left, the hilly parts of the shore were confusedly defined in grey +outlines upon the blackness of the night. At 6 o’clock it was daylight. +The clouds sped rapidly overhead. The sailor and his companions were some six +miles from the Chimneys, following a very flat shore, bordered in the offing by +a reef of rocks whose surface only was visible above the high tide. On the left +the country sloped up into downs bristling with thistles, giving a forbidding +aspect to the vast sandy region. The shore was low, and offered no other +resistance to the ocean than an irregular chain of hillocks. Here and there was +a tree, leaning its trunks and branches towards the west. Far behind, to the +southwest, extended the borders of the forest. +</p> + +<p> +At this moment Top gave unequivocal signs of excitement. He ran ahead, +returned, and seemed to try to hurry them on. The dog had left the coast, and +guided by his wonderful instinct, without any hesitation had gone among the +downs. They followed him through a region absolutely devoid of life. +</p> + +<p> +The border of the downs, itself large, was composed of hills and hillocks, +unevenly scattered here and there. It was like a little Switzerland of sand, +and nothing but a dog’s astonishing instinct could find the way. +</p> + +<p> +Five minutes after leaving the shore the reporter and his companions reached a +sort of hollow, formed in the back of a high down, before which Top stopped +with a loud bark. The three entered the cave. +</p> + +<p> +Neb was there, kneeling beside a body extended upon a bed of grass— +</p> + +<p> +It was the body of Cyrus Smith. +</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2><a name="VIII" id="VIII"></a>CHAPTER VIII.</h2> + +<p class="letter"> +IS CYPRUS SMITH ALIVE?—NEB’S STORY—FOOTPRINTS —AN +INSOLUBLE QUESTION—THE FIRST WORDS OF SMITH—COMPARING THE +FOOTPRINTS—RETURN TO THE CHIMNEYS—PENCROFF DEJECTED. +</p> + +<p> +Neb did not move. The sailor uttered one word. +</p> + +<p> +“Living!” he cried. +</p> + +<p> +The negro did not answer. Spilett and Pencroff turned pale. Herbert, clasping +his hands, stood motionless. But it was evident that the poor negro, overcome +by grief, had neither seen his companions nor heard the voice of the sailor. +</p> + +<p> +The reporter knelt down beside the motionless body, and, having opened the +clothing, pressed his ear to the chest of the engineer. A minute, which seemed +an age, passed, daring which he tried to detect some movement of the heart. +</p> + +<p> +Neb raised up a little, and looked on as if in a trance. Overcome by +exhaustion, prostrated by grief, the poor fellow was hardly recognizable. He +believed his master dead. +</p> + +<p> +Gideon Spilett, after a long and attentive examination, rose up. +</p> + +<p> +“He lives!” he said. +</p> + +<p> +Pencroff, in his turn, knelt down beside Cyrus Smith; he also detected some +heartbeats, and a slight breath issuing from the lips of the engineer. Herbert, +at a word from the reporter, hurried in search of water. A hundred paces off he +found a clear brook swollen by the late rains and filtered by the sand. But +there was nothing, not even a shell, in which to carry the water; so the lad +had to content himself with soaking his handkerchief in the stream, and +hastened back with it to the cave. +</p> + +<p> +Happily the handkerchief held sufficient for Spilett’s purpose, which was +simply to moisten the lips of the engineer. The drops of fresh water produced +an instantaneous effect. A sigh escaped from the breast of Smith, and it seemed +as if he attempted to speak. +</p> + +<p> +“We shall save him,” said the reporter. Neb took heart at these +words. He removed the clothing from his master to see if his body was anywhere +wounded. But neither on his head nor body nor limbs was there a bruise or even +a scratch, an astonishing circumstance, since he must have been tossed about +among the rocks; even his hands were uninjured, and it was difficult to explain +how the engineer should exhibit no mark of the efforts which he must have made +in getting over the reef. +</p> + +<p> +But the explanation of this circumstance would come later, when Cyrus Smith +could speak. At present, it was necessary to restore his consciousness, and it +was probable that this result could be accomplished by friction. For this +purpose they mode use of the sailor’s pea-jacket. The engineer, warmed by +this rude rubbing, moved his arms slightly, and his breathing began to be more +regular. He was dying from exhaustion, and, doubtless, had not the reporter and +his companions arrived, it would have been all over with Cyrus Smith. +</p> + +<p> +“You thought he was dead?” asked the sailor. +</p> + +<p> +“Yes, I thought so,” answered Neb. “And if Top had not found +you and brought you back, I would have buried my master and died beside +him.” +</p> + +<p> +The engineer had had a narrow escape! +</p> + +<p> +Then Neb told them what had happened. The day before, after having left the +Chimneys at day-break, he had followed along the coast in a direction due +north, until he reached that part of the beach which he had already visited. +There, though, as he said, without hope of success, he searched the shore, the +rocks, the sand for any marks that could guide him, examining most carefully +that part which was above high-water mark, as below that point the ebb and flow +of the tide would have effaced all traces. He did not hope to find his master +living. It was the discovery of the body which he sought, that he might bury it +with his own hands. He searched a long time, without success. It seemed as if +nothing human had ever been upon that desolate shore. Of the millions of +shell-fish lying out of reach of the tide, not a shell was broken. There was no +sign of a landing having ever been made there. The negro then decided to +continue some miles further up the coast. It was possible that the currents had +carried the body to some distant point. For Neb knew that a corpse, floating a +little distance from a low shore, was almost certain, sooner or later, to be +thrown upon the strand, and he was desirous to look upon his master one last +time. +</p> + +<p> +“I followed the shore two miles further, looking at it at low and high +water, hardly hoping to find anything, when yesterday evening, about 5 +o’clock, I discovered footprints upon the sand.” +</p> + +<p> +“Footprints,” cried Pencroff. +</p> + +<p> +“Yes, sir,” replied Neb. +</p> + +<p> +“And did they begin at the water?” demanded the reporter. +</p> + +<p> +“No,” answered the negro, “above high-water mark; below that +the tide had washed out the others.” +</p> + +<p> +“Go on, Neb,” said Spilett. +</p> + +<p> +“The sight of these footprints made me wild with joy. They were very +plain, and went towards the downs. I followed them for a quarter of an hour, +running so as not to tread on them. Five minutes later, as it was growing dark, +I heard a dog bark. It was Top. And he brought me here, to my master.” +</p> + +<p> +Neb finished his recital by telling of his grief at the discovery of the +inanimate body. He had tried to discover some signs of life still remaining in +it. But all his efforts were in vain. There was nothing, therefore, to do but +to perform the last offices to him whom he had loved so well. Then he thought +of his companions. They, too, would wish to look once more upon their comrade. +Top was there. Could he not rely upon the sagacity of that faithful animal? So +having pronounced several times the name of the reporter, who, of all the +engineer’s companions, was best known by Top, and having at the same time +motioned towards the south, the dog bounded off in the direction indicated. +</p> + +<p> +We have seen how, guided by an almost supernatural instinct, the dog had +arrived at the Chimneys. +</p> + +<p> +Neb’s companions listened to his story with the greatest attention. How +the engineer had been able to reach this cave in the midst of the downs, more +than a mile from the beach, was as inexplicable as was his escape from the +waves and rocks without a scratch. +</p> + +<p> +“So you, Neb,” said the reporter, “did not bring your master +to this place?” +</p> + +<p> +“No, it was not I,” answered Neb. +</p> + +<p> +“He certainly could not have come alone,” said Pencroff. +</p> + +<p> +“But he must have done it, though it does not seem credible,” said +the reporter. +</p> + +<p> +They must wait for the solution of the mystery until the engineer could speak. +Fortunately the rubbing had re-established the circulation of the blood, and +life was returning. Smith moved his arm again, then his head, and a second time +some incoherent words escaped his lips. +</p> + +<p> +Neb, leaning over him, spoke, but the engineer seemed not to hear, and his eyes +remained closed. Life was revealing itself by movement, but consciousness had +not yet returned. Pencroff had, unfortunately, forgotten to bring the burnt +linen, which could have been ignited with a couple of flints, and without it +they had no means of making a fire. The pockets of the engineer were empty of +everything but his watch. It was therefore the unanimous opinion that Cyrus +Smith must be carried to the Chimneys as soon as possible. +</p> + +<p> +Meantime the attention lavished on the engineer restored him to consciousness +sooner than could have been hoped. The moistening of his lips had revived him, +and Pencroff conceived the idea of mixing some of the juice of the tetras with +water. Herbert ran to the shore and brought back two large shells; and the +sailor made a mixture which they introduced between the lips of the engineer, +who swallowed it with avidity. His eyes opened. Neb and the reporter were +leaning over him. +</p> + +<p> +“My master! my master!” cried Neb. +</p> + +<p> +The engineer heard him. He recognized Neb and his companions, and his hand +gently pressed theirs. +</p> + +<p> +Again he spoke some words—doubtless the same which he had before uttered, +and which indicated that some thoughts were troubling him. This time the words +were understood. +</p> + +<p> +“Island or continent?” he murmured. +</p> + +<p> +“What the devil do we care,” cried Pencroff, unable to restrain the +exclamation, “now that you are alive, sir. Island or continent? “We +will find that out later.” +</p> + +<p> +The engineer made a motion in the affirmative, and then seemed to sleep. +</p> + +<p> +Taking care not to disturb him, the reporter set to work to provide the most +comfortable means of moving him. +</p> + +<p> +Neb, Herbert, and Pencroff left the cave and went towards a high down on which +were some gnarled trees. On the way the sailor kept repeating:— +</p> + +<p> +“Island or continent! To think of that, at his last gasp! What a +man!” +</p> + +<p> +Having reached the top of the down, Pencroff and his companions tore off the +main branches from a tree, a sort of sea pine, sickly and stunted. And with +these branches they constructed a litter, which they covered with leaves and +grass. +</p> + +<p> +This work occupied some little time, and it was 10 o’clock when the three +returned to Smith and Spilett. +</p> + +<p> +The engineer had just wakened from the sleep, or rather stupor, in which they +had found him. The color had come back to his lips, which had been as pale as +death. He raised himself slightly, and looked about, as if questioning where he +was. +</p> + +<p> +“Can you listen to me without being tired, Cyrus?” asked the +reporter. +</p> + +<p> +“Yes,” responded the engineer. +</p> + +<p> +“I think,” said the sailor, “that Mr. Smith can listen better +after having taken some more of this tetra jelly,—it is really tetra, +sir,” he continued, as he gave him some of the mixture, to which he had +this time added some of the meat of the bird. +</p> + +<p> +Cyrus Smith swallowed these bits of tetra, and the remainder was eaten by his +companions, who were suffering from hunger, and who found the repast light +enough. +</p> + +<p> +“Well,” said the sailor, “there are victuals waiting for us +at the Chimneys, for you must know, Mr. Smith, that to the south of here we +have a house with rooms and beds and fire-place, and in the pantry dozens of +birds which our Herbert calls couroucous. Your litter is ready, and whenever +you feel strong enough we will carry you to our house.” +</p> + +<p> +“Thanks, my friend,” replied the engineer, “in an hour or two +we will go. And now, Spilett, continue.” +</p> + +<p> +The reporter related everything that had happened. Recounting the events +unknown to Smith; the last plunge of the balloon, the landing upon this unknown +shore, its deserted appearance, the discovery of the Chimneys, the search for +the engineer, the devotion of Neb, and what they owed to Top’s +intelligence, etc. +</p> + +<p> +“But,” asked Smith, in a feeble voice, “you did not pick me +up on the beach?” +</p> + +<p> +“No,” replied the reporter. +</p> + +<p> +“And it was not you who brought me to this hollow?” +</p> + +<p> +“No.” +</p> + +<p> +“How far is this place from the reef?” +</p> + +<p> +“At least half a mile,” replied Pencroff, “and if you are +astonished, we are equally surprised to find you here.” +</p> + +<p> +“It is indeed singular,” said the engineer, who was gradually +reviving and taking interest in these details. +</p> + +<p> +“But,” asked the sailor, “cannot you remember anything that +happened after you were washed away by that heavy sea?” +</p> + +<p> +Cyrus Smith tried to think, but he remembered little. The wave had swept him +from the net of the balloon, and at first he had sunk several fathoms. Coming +up to the surface, he was conscious, in the half-light, of something struggling +beside him. It was Top, who had sprung to his rescue. Looking up, he could see +nothing of the balloon, which, lightened by his and the dog’s weight, had +sped away like an arrow. He found himself in the midst of the tumultuous sea, +more than half a mile from shore. He swum vigorously against the waves, and Top +sustained him by his garments; but a strong current seized him, carrying him to +the north, and, after struggling for half an hour, he sank, dragging the dog +with him into the abyss. From that moment to the instant of his finding himself +in the arms of his friends, he remembered nothing. +</p> + +<p> +“Nevertheless,” said Pencroff, “you must have been cast upon +the shore, and had strength enough to walk to this place, since Neb found your +tracks.” +</p> + +<p> +“Yes, that must be so,” answered the engineer, reflectively. +“And you have not seen any traces of inhabitants upon the shore?” +</p> + +<p> +“Not a sign,” answered the reporter. “Moreover, if by chance +some one had rescued you from the waves, why should he then have abandoned +you?” +</p> + +<p> +“You are right, my dear Spilett. Tell me, Neb,” inquired the +engineer, turning towards his servant, “it was not you—you could +not have been in a trance—during which—. No, that’s absurd. +Do any of the footprints still remain?” +</p> + +<p> +“Yes, master,” replied Neb; “there are some at the entrance, +back of this mound, in a place sheltered from the wind and rain, but the others +have been obliterated by the storm.” +</p> + +<p> +“Pencroff,” said Cyrus, “will you take my shoes and see if +they fit those footprints exactly?” +</p> + +<p> +The sailor did as he had been asked. He and Herbert, guided by Neb, went to +where the marks were, and in their absence Smith said to the reporter:— +</p> + +<p> +“That is a thing passing belief.” +</p> + +<p> +“Inexplicable, indeed,” answered the other. +</p> + +<p> +“But do not dwell upon it at present, my dear Spilett, we will talk of it +hereafter.” +</p> + +<p> +At this moment the others returned. All doubt was set at rest. The shoes of the +engineer fitted the tracks exactly. Therefore it must have been Smith himself +who had walked over the sand. +</p> + +<p> +“So,” he said, “I was the one in a trance, and not Neb! I +must have walked like a somnambulist, without consciousness, and Top’s +instinct brought me here after he rescued me from the waves. Here, Top. Come +here, dog.” +</p> + +<p> +The splendid animal sprang, barking, to his master, and caresses were lavished +upon him. It was agreed that there was no other way to account for the rescue +than by giving Top the credit of it. +</p> + +<p> +Towards noon, Pencroff having asked Smith if he felt strong enough to be +carried, the latter, for answer, by an effort which showed his strength of +will, rose to his feet. But if he had not leaned upon the sailor he would have +fallen. +</p> + +<p> +“Capital,” said Pencroff. “Summon the engineer’s +carriage!” +</p> + +<p> +The litter was brought. The cross-branches had been covered with moss and +grass; and when Smith was laid upon it they walked towards the coast, Neb and +the sailor carrying him. +</p> + +<p> +Eight miles had to be travelled, and as they could move but slowly, and would +probably have to make frequent rests, it would take six hours or more to reach +the Chimneys. The wind was still strong, but, fortunately, it had ceased +raining. From his couch, the engineer, leaning upon his arm, observed the +coast, especially the part opposite the sea. He examined it without comment, +but undoubtedly the aspect of the country, its contour, its forests and diverse +products were noted in his mind. But after two hours, fatigue overcame him, and +he slept upon the litter. +</p> + +<p> +At half-past 5 the little party reached the precipice, and soon after, were +before the Chimneys. Stopping here, the litter was placed upon the sand without +disturbing the slumber of the engineer. +</p> + +<p> +Pencroff saw, to his surprise, that the terrible storm of the day before had +altered the aspect of the place. Rocks had been displaced. Great fragments were +strewn over the sand, and a thick carpet of several kinds of seaweed covered +all the shore. It was plain that the sea sweeping over the isle had reached to +the base of the enormous granite curtain. +</p> + +<p> +Before the entrance to the Chimneys the ground had been violently torn up by +the action of the waves. Pencroff, seized with a sudden fear, rushed into the +corridor. Returning, a moment after, he stood motionless looking at his +comrades. +</p> + +<p> +The fire had been extinguished; the drowned cinders were nothing but mud. The +charred linen, which was to serve them for tinder, had gone. The sea had +penetrated every recess of the corridor, and everything was overthrown, +everything was destroyed within the Chimneys. +</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2><a name="IX" id="IX"></a>CHAPTER IX.</h2> + +<p class="letter"> +CYRUS IS HERE-PENCROFF’S ATTEMPTS—RUBBING WOOD—ISLAND OR +CONTINENT —THE PLANS OF THE ENGINEER—WHEREABOUTS IN THE +PACIFIC—IN THE DEPTHS OF THE FOREST—THE PISTACHIO PINE—A PIG +CHASE—A SMOKE OF GOOD OMEN. +</p> + +<p> +In a few words the others were informed of what had happened. This accident, +which portended serious results—at least Pencroff foresaw +such—affected each one differently. Neb, overjoyed in having recovered +his master, did not listen or did not wish to think of what Pencroff said. +Herbert shared in a measure the apprehensions of the sailor. As to the +reporter, he simply answered:— +</p> + +<p> +“Upon my word, Pencroff, I don’t think it matters much!” +</p> + +<p> +“But I tell you again; we have no fire!” +</p> + +<p> +“Pshaw!” +</p> + +<p> +“Nor any means of lighting one!” +</p> + +<p> +“Absurd!” +</p> + +<p> +“But, Mr. Spilett—” +</p> + +<p> +“Is not Cyrus here?” asked the reporter; “Isn’t he +alive? He will know well enough how to make fire!” +</p> + +<p> +“And with what?” +</p> + +<p> +“With nothing!” +</p> + +<p> +What could Pencroff answer? He had nothing to say, as, in his heart, he shared +his companion’s confidence in Cyrus Smith’s ability. To them the +engineer was a microcosm, a compound of all science and all knowledge. They +were better off on a desert island with Cyrus than without him in the busiest +city of the Union. With him they could want for nothing; with him they would +have no fear. If they had been told that a volcanic eruption would overwhelm +the land, sinking it into the depths of the Pacific, the imperturbable answer +of these brave men would have been, “Have we not Cyrus!” +</p> + +<p> +Meantime, the engineer had sunk into a lethargy, the result of the journey, and +his help could not be asked for just then. The supper, therefore, would be very +meagre. All the tetras had been eaten, there was no way to cook other birds, +and, finally, the couroucous which had been reserved had disappeared. +Something, therefore, must be done. +</p> + +<p> +First of all, Cyrus Smith was carried into the main corridor. There they were +able to make for him a couch of seaweeds, and, doubtless, the deep sleep in +which he was plunged, would strengthen him more than an abundant nourishment. +</p> + +<p> +With night the temperature, which the northwest wind had raised, again became +very cold, and, as the sea had washed away the partitions which Pencroff had +constructed, draughts of air made the place scarcely habitable. The engineer +would therefore have been in a bad plight if his companions had not covered him +with clothing which they took from themselves. +</p> + +<p> +The supper this evening consisted of the inevitable lithodomes, an ample supply +of which Herbert and Neb had gathered from the beach. To these the lad had +added a quantity of edible seaweed which clung to the high rocks and were only +washed by the highest tides. These seaweeds, belonging to the family of +Fucaceæ, were a species of Sargassum, which, when dry, furnish a gelatinous +substance full of nutritive matter, much used by the natives of the Asiatic +coast. After having eaten a quantity of lithodomes the reporter and his +companions sucked some of the seaweed, which they agreed was excellent. +</p> + +<p> +“Nevertheless,” said the sailor, “it is time for Mr. Smith to +help us.” +</p> + +<p> +Meantime the cold became intense, and, unfortunately, they had no means of +protecting themselves. The sailor, much worried, tried every possible means of +procuring a fire. He had found some dry moss, and by striking two stones +together he obtained sparks; but the moss was not sufficiently inflammable to +catch fire, nor had the sparks the strength of those struck by a steel. The +operation amounted to nothing. Then Pencroff, although he had no confidence in +the result, tried rubbing two pieces of dry wood together, after the manner of +the savages. It is true that the motion of the man, if it could have been +turned into heat, according to the new theory, would have heated the boiler of +a steamer. But it resulted in nothing except putting him in a glow, and making +the wood hot. After half an hour’s work Pencroff was in a perspiration, +and he threw away the wood in disgust. +</p> + +<p> +“When you can make me believe that savages make fire after that +fashion,” said he, “it will he hot in winter! I might as well try +to light my arms by rubbing them together.” +</p> + +<p> +But the sailor was wrong to deny the feasibility of this method. The savages +frequently do light wood in this way. But it requires particular kinds of wood, +and, moreover, the “knack,” and Pencroff had not this +“knack.” +</p> + +<p> +Pencroff’s ill humor did not last long. The bits of wood which he had +thrown away had been picked up by Herbert, who exerted himself to rub them +well. The strong sailor could not help laughing at the boy’s weak efforts +to accomplish what he had failed in. +</p> + +<p> +“Rub away, my boy; rub hard!” he cried. +</p> + +<p> +“I am rubbing them,” answered Herbert, laughing, “but only to +take my turn at getting warm, instead of sitting here shivering; and pretty +soon I will be as hot as you are, Pencroff!” +</p> + +<p> +This was the case, and though it was necessary for this night to give up trying +to make a fire, Spilett, stretching himself upon the sand in one of the +passages, repeated for the twentieth time that Smith could not be baffled by +such a trifle. The others followed his example, and Top slept at the feet of +his master. +</p> + +<p> +The next day, the 28th of March, when the engineer awoke, about 8 +o’clock, he saw his companions beside him watching, and, as on the day +before, his first words were, +</p> + +<p> +“Island or continent?” +</p> + +<p> +It was his one thought. +</p> + +<p> +“Well, Mr. Smith,” answered Pencroff, “we don’t +know.” +</p> + +<p> +“You haven’t found out yet?” +</p> + +<p> +“But we will,” affirmed Pencroff, “when you are able to guide +us in this country.” +</p> + +<p> +“I believe that I am able to do that now,” answered the engineer, +who, without much effort, rose up and stood erect. +</p> + +<p> +“That is good,” exclaimed the sailor. +</p> + +<p> +“I am dying of hunger,” responded Smith. “Give me some food, +my friend, and I will feel better. You’ve fire, haven’t you?” +</p> + +<p> +This question met with no immediate answer. But after some moments the sailor +said:— +</p> + +<p> +“No, sir, we have no fire; at least, not now.” +</p> + +<p> +And be related what had happened the day before. He amused the engineer by +recounting the history of their solitary match, and their fruitless efforts to +procure fire like the savages. +</p> + +<p> +“We will think about it,” answered the engineer, “and if we +cannot find something like tinder—” +</p> + +<p> +“Well,” asked the sailor. +</p> + +<p> +“Well, we will make matches!” +</p> + +<p> +“Friction matches?” +</p> + +<p> +“Friction matches!” +</p> + +<p> +“It’s no more difficult than that,” cried the reporter, +slapping the sailor on the shoulder. +</p> + +<p> +The latter did not see that it would be easy, but he said nothing, and all went +out of doors. The day was beautiful. A bright sun was rising above the sea +horizon, its rays sparkling and glistening on the granite wall. After having +cast a quick look about him, the engineer seated himself upon a rock. Herbert +offered him some handfuls of mussels and seaweed, saying:— +</p> + +<p> +“It is all that we have, Mr. Smith.” +</p> + +<p> +“Thank you, my boy,” answered he, “it is enough—for +this morning, at least.” +</p> + +<p> +And he ate with appetite this scanty meal, washing it down with water brought +from the river in a large shell. +</p> + +<p> +His companions looked on without speaking. Then, after having satisfied +himself, he crossed his arms and said:— +</p> + +<p> +“Then, my friends, you do not yet know whether we have been thrown upon +an island or a continent?” +</p> + +<p> +“No sir,” answered Herbert. +</p> + +<p> +“We will find out to-morrow,” said the engineer. “Until then +there is nothing to do.” +</p> + +<p> +“There is one thing,” suggested Pencroff. +</p> + +<p> +“What is that?” +</p> + +<p> +“Some fire,” replied the sailor, who thought of nothing else. +</p> + +<p> +“We will have it, Pencroff,” said Smith. “But when you were +carrying me here yesterday, did not I see a mountain rising in the west?” +</p> + +<p> +“Yes,” saidSpilett, “quite a high one.” +</p> + +<p> +“All right,” exclaimed the engineer. “Tomorrow we will climb +to its summit and determine whether this is an island or a continent; until +then I repeat there is nothing to do.” +</p> + +<p> +“But there is; we want fire!” cried the obstinate sailor again. +</p> + +<p> +“Have a little patience, Pencroff, and we will have the fire,” said +Spilett. +</p> + +<p> +The other looked at the reporter as much as to say, “If there was only +you to make it we would never taste roast meat.” But he kept silent. +</p> + +<p> +Smith had not spoken. He seemed little concerned about this question of fire. +For some moments he remained absorbed in his own thoughts. Then he spoke as +follows:— +</p> + +<p> +“My friends, our situation is, doubtless, deplorable, nevertheless it is +very simple. Either we are upon a continent, and, in that case, at the expense +of greater or less fatigue, we will reach some inhabited place, or else we are +on an island. In the latter case, it is one of two things; if the island is +inhabited, we will get out of our difficulty by the help of the inhabitants; if +it is deserted, we will get out of it by ourselves.” +</p> + +<p> +“Nothing could be plainer than that,” said Pencroff. +</p> + +<p> +“But,” asked Spilett, “whether it is a continent or an +island, whereabouts do you think this storm has thrown us, Cyrus?” +</p> + +<p> +“In truth, I cannot say,” replied the engineer, “but the +probability is that we are somewhere in the Pacific. When we left Richmond the +wind was northeast, and its very violence proves that its direction did not +vary much. Supposing it unchanged, we crossed North and South Carolina, +Georgia, the Gulf of Mexico, and the narrow part of Mexico, and a portion of +the Pacific Ocean. I do not estimate the distance traversed by the balloon at +less than 6,000 or 7,000 miles, and even if the wind had varied a half a +quarter it would have carried us either to the Marquesas Islands or to the Low +Archipelago; or, if it was stronger than I suppose, as far as New Zealand. If +this last hypothesis is correct, our return home will be easy. English or +Maoris, we shall always find somebody with whom to speak. If, on the other +hand, this coast belongs to some barren island in the Micronesian Archipelago, +perhaps we can reconnoitre it from the summit of this mountain, and then we +will consider how to establish ourselves here as if we were never going to +leave it.” +</p> + +<p> +“Never?” cried the reporter. “Do you say never, my dear +Cyrus?” +</p> + +<p> +“It is better to put things in their worst light at first,” +answered the engineer; “and to reserve those which are better, as a +surprise.” +</p> + +<p> +“Well said,” replied Pencroff. “And we hope that this island, +if it is an island, will not be situated just outside of the route of ships; +for that would, indeed, be unlucky.” +</p> + +<p> +“We will know how to act after having first ascended the mountain,” +answered Smith. +</p> + +<p> +“But will you be able, Mr. Smith, to make the climb tomorrow?” +asked Herbert. +</p> + +<p> +“I hope so,” answered the engineer, “if Pencroff and you, my +boy, show yourselves to be good and ready hunters.” +</p> + +<p> +“Mr. Smith,” said the sailor, “since you are speaking of +game, if when I come back I am as sure of getting it roasted as I am of +bringing it—” +</p> + +<p> +“Bring it, nevertheless,” interrupted Smith. +</p> + +<p> +It was now agreed that the engineer and the reporter should spend the day at +the Chimneys, in order to examine the shore and the plateau, while Neb, +Herbert, and the sailor were to return to the forest, renew the supply of wood, +and lay hands on every bird and beast that should cross their path. So, at 6 +o’clock, the party left, Herbert confident. Neb happy, and Pencroff +muttering to himself:— +</p> + +<p> +“If, when I get back I find a fire in the house, it will have been the +lightning that lit it!” +</p> + +<p> +The three climbed the bank, and having reached the turn in the river, the +sailor stopped and said to his companions:— +</p> + +<p> +“Shall we begin as hunters or wood-choppers?” +</p> + +<p> +“Hunters,” answered Herbert. “See Top, who is already at +it.” +</p> + +<p> +“Let us hunt, then,” replied the sailor, “and on our return +here we will lay in our stock of wood.” +</p> + +<p> +This said, the party made three clubs for themselves, and followed Top, who was +jumping about in the high grass. +</p> + +<p> +This time, the hunters, instead of following the course of the stream, struck +at once into the depths of the forests. The trees were for the most part of the +pine family. And in certain places, where they stood in small groups, they were +of such a size as to indicate that this country was in a higher latitude than +the engineer supposed. Some openings, bristling with stumps decayed by the +weather, were covered with dead timber which formed an inexhaustible reserve of +firewood. Then, the opening passed, the underwood became so thick as to be +nearly impenetrable. +</p> + +<p> +To guide oneself among these great trees without any beaten path was very +difficult. So the sailer from time to time blazed the route by breaking +branches in a manner easily recognizable. But perhaps they would have done +better to have followed the water course, as in the first instance, as, after +an hour’s march, no game had been taken. Top, running under the low +boughs, only flushed birds that were unapproachable. Even the couroucous were +invisible, and it seemed likely that the sailor would be obliged to return to +that swampy place where he had fished for tetras with such good luck. +</p> + +<p> +“Well, Pencroff,” said Neb sarcastically, “if this is all the +game you promised to carry back to my master it won’t take much fire to +roast it!” +</p> + +<p> +“Wait a bit, Neb,” answered the sailor; “it won’t be +game that will be wanting on our return.” +</p> + +<p> +“Don’t you believe in Mr. Smith?” +</p> + +<p> +“Yes.” +</p> + +<p> +“But you don’t believe be will make a fire?” +</p> + +<p> +“I will believe that when the wood is blazing in the fire-place.” +</p> + +<p> +“It will blaze, then, for my master has said so!” +</p> + +<p> +“Well, we’ll see!” +</p> + +<p> +Meanwhile the sun had not yet risen to its highest point above the horizon. The +exploration went on and was signalized by Herbert’s discovery of a tree +bearing edible fruit. It was the pistachio pine, which bears an excellent nut, +much liked in the temperate regions of America and Europe. These nuts were +perfectly ripe, and Herbert showed them to his companions, who feasted on them. +</p> + +<p> +“Well,” said Pencroff, “seaweed for bread, raw mussels for +meat, and nuts for dessert, that’s the sort of dinner for men who +haven’t a match in their pocket!” +</p> + +<p> +“It’s not worth while complaining,” replied Herbert. +</p> + +<p> +“I don’t complain, my boy. I simply repeat that the meat is a +little too scant in this sort of meal.” +</p> + +<p> +“Top has seen something!” cried Neb, running toward a thicket into +which the dog had disappeared barking. With the dog’s barks were mingled +singular gruntings. The sailor and Herbert had followed the negro. If it was +game, this was not the time to discuss how to cook it, but rather how to secure +it. +</p> + +<p> +The hunters, on entering the brush, saw Top struggling with an animal which he +held by the ear. This quadruped was a species of pig, about two feet and a half +long, of a brownish black color, somewhat lighter under the belly, having harsh +and somewhat scanty hair, and its toes at this time strongly grasping the soil +seemed joined together by membranes. +</p> + +<p> +Herbert thought that he recognized in this animal a cabiai, or water-hog, one +of the largest specimens of the order of rodents. The water-hog did not fight +the dog. Its great eyes, deep sank in thick layers of fat, rolled stupidly from +side to side. And Neb, grasping his club firmly, was about to knock the beast +down, when the latter tore loose from Top, leaving a piece of his ear in the +dog’s mouth, and uttering a vigorous grunt, rushed against and overset +Herbert and disappeared in the wood. +</p> + +<p> +“The beggar!” cried Pencroff, as they all three darted after the +hog. But just as they had come up to it again, the water-hog disappeared under +the surface of a large pond, overshadowed by tall, ancient pines. +</p> + +<p> +The three companions stopped, motionless. Top had plunged into the water, but +the cabiai, hidden at the bottom of the pond, did not appear. +</p> + +<p> +“Wait,”, said the boy, “he will have to come to the surface +to breathe.” +</p> + +<p> +“Won’t he drown?” asked Neb. +</p> + +<p> +“No,” answered Herbert, “since he is fin-toed and almost +amphibious. But watch for him.” +</p> + +<p> +Top remained in the water, and Pencroff and his companions took stations upon +the bank, to cut off the animal’s retreat, while the dog swam to and fro +looking for him. +</p> + +<p> +Herbert was not mistaken. In a few minutes the animal came again to the +surface. Top was upon him at once, keeping him from diving again, and a moment +later, the cabiai, dragged to the shore, was struck down by a blow from +Neb’s club. +</p> + +<p> +“Hurrah!” cried Pencroff with all his heart. “Nothing but a +clear fire, and this gnawer shall be gnawed to the bone.” +</p> + +<p> +Pencroff lifted the carcase to his shoulder, and judging by the sun that it +must be near 2 o’clock, he gave the signal to return. +</p> + +<p> +Top’s instinct was useful to the hunters, as, thanks to that intelligent +animal, they were enabled to return upon their steps. In half an hour they had +reached the bend of the river. There, as before, Pencroff quickly constructed a +raft, although, lacking fire, this seemed to him a useless job, and, with the +raft keeping the current, they returned towards the Chimneys. But the sailor +had not gone fifty paces when he stopped and gave utterance anew to a +tremendous hurrah, and extending his hand towards the angle of the cliff— +</p> + +<p> +“Herbert! Neb! See!” he cried. +</p> + +<p> +Smoke was escaping and curling above the rocks! +</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2><a name="X" id="X"></a>CHAPTER X.</h2> + +<p class="letter"> +THE ENGINEER’S INVENTION—ISLAND OR CONTINENT?—DEPARTURE FOR +THE MOUNTAIN—THE FOREST—VOLCANIC SOIL—THE TRAGOPANS—THE +MOUFFLONS —THE FIRST PLATEAU—ENCAMPING FOR THE NIGHT—THE +SUMMIT OF THE CONE +</p> + +<p> +A few minutes afterwards, the three hunters were seated before a sparkling +fire. Beside them sat Cyrus Smith and the reporter. Pencroff looked from one to +the other without saying a word, his cabiai in his hand. +</p> + +<p> +“Yes, my good fellow,” said the reporter, “a fire, a real +fire, that will roast your game to a turn.” +</p> + +<p> +“But who lighted it?” said the sailor. +</p> + +<p> +“The sun.” +</p> + +<p> +The sailor could not believe his eyes, and was too stupefied to question the +engineer. +</p> + +<p> +“Had you a burning-glass, sir?” asked Herbert of Cyrus Smith. +</p> + +<p> +“No, my boy,” said he, “but I made one.” +</p> + +<p> +And he showed his extemporized lens. It was simply the two glasses, from his +own watch and the reporter’s, which he had taken out, filled with water, +and stuck together at the edges with a little clay. Thus he had made a +veritable burning-glass, and by concentrating the solar rays on some dry moss +had set it on fire. +</p> + +<p> +The sailor examined the lens; then he looked at the engineer without saying a +word, but his face spoke for him. If Smith was not a magician to him, he was +certainly more than a man. At last his speech returned, and he said:— +</p> + +<p> +“Put that down, Mr. Spilett, put that down in your book!” +</p> + +<p> +“I have it down,” said the reporter. +</p> + +<p> +Then, with the help of Neb, the sailor arranged the spit, and dressed the +cabiai for roasting, like a suckling pig, before the sparkling fire, by whose +warmth, and by the restoration of the partitions, the Chimneys had been +rendered habitable. +</p> + +<p> +The engineer and his companion had made good use of their day. Smith had almost +entirely recovered his strength, which he had tested by climbing the plateau +above. From thence his eye, accustomed to measure heights and distances, had +attentively examined the cone whose summit he proposed to reach on the morrow. +The mountain, situated about six miles to the northwest, seemed to him to reach +about 3,500 feet above the level of the sea, so that an observer posted at its +summit, could command a horizon of fifty miles at least. He hoped, therefore, +for an easy solution of the urgent question, “Island or continent?” +</p> + +<p> +They had a pleasant supper, and the meat of the cabiai was proclaimed +excellent; the sargassum and pistachio-nuts completed the repast. But the +engineer said little; he was planning for the next day. Once or twice Pencroff +talked of some project for the future, but Smith shook his head. +</p> + +<p> +“To-morrow,” he said, “we will know how we are situated, and +we can act accordingly.” +</p> + +<p> +After supper, more armfuls of wood were thrown on the fire, and the party lay +down to sleep. The morning found them fresh and eager for the expedition which +was to settle their fate. +</p> + +<p> +Everything was ready. Enough was left of the cabiai for twenty-four +hours’ provisions, and they hoped to replenish their stock on the way. +They charred a little linen for tinder, as the watch glasses had been replaced, +and flint abounded in this volcanic region. +</p> + +<p> +At half-past 7 they left the Chimneys, each with a stout cudgel. By +Pencroff’s advice, they took the route of the previous day, which was the +shortest way to the mountain. They turned the southern angle, and followed the +left bank of the river, leaving it where it bent to the southwest. They took +the beaten path under the evergreens, and soon reached the northern border of +the forest. The soil, flat and swampy, then dry and sandy, rose by a gradual +slope towards the interior. Among the trees appeared a few shy animals, which +rapidly took flight before Top. The engineer called his dog back; later, +perhaps, they might hunt, but now nothing could distract him from his great +object. He observed neither the character of the ground nor its products; he +was going straight for the top of the mountain. +</p> + +<p> +At 10 o’clock they were clear of the forest, and they halted for a while +to observe the country. The mountain was composed of two cones. The first was +truncated about 2,500 feet up, and supported by fantastic spurs, branching out +like the talons of an immense claw, laid upon the ground. Between these spurs +were narrow valleys, thick set with trees, whose topmost foliage was level with +the flat summit of the first cone. On the northeast side of the mountain, +vegetation was more scanty, and the ground was seamed here and there, +apparently with currents of lava. +</p> + +<p> +On the first cone lay a second, slightly rounded towards the summit. It lay +somewhat across the other, like a huge hat cocked over the ear. The surface +seemed utterly bare, with reddish rocks often protruding. The object of the +expedition was to reach the top of this cone, and their best way was along the +edge of the spurs. +</p> + +<p> +“We are in a volcanic country,” said Cyrus Smith, as they began to +climb, little by little, up the side of the spurs, whose winding summit would +most readily bring them out upon the lower plateau. The ground was strewn with +traces of igneous convulsion. Here and there lay blocks, debris of basalt, +pumice-stone, and obsidian. In isolated clumps rose some few of those conifers, +which, some hundreds of feet lower, in the narrow gorges, formed a gigantic +thicket, impenetrable to the sun. As they climbed these lower slopes, Herbert +called attention to the recent marks of huge paws and hoofs on the ground. +</p> + +<p> +“These brutes will make a fight for their territory,” said +Pencroff. +</p> + +<p> +“Oh well,” said the reporter, who had hunted tigers in India and +lions in Africa, “we shall contrive to get rid of them. In the meanwhile, +we must be on our guard.” +</p> + +<p> +While talking they were gradually ascending. The way was lengthened by detours +around the obstacles which could not be directly surmounted. Sometimes, too, +deep crevasses yawned across the ascent, and compelled them to return upon +their track for a long distance, before they could find an available pathway. +At noon, when the little company halted to dine at the foot of a great clump of +firs, at whose foot babbled a tiny brook, they were still half way from the +first plateau, and could hardly reach it before nightfall. From this point the +sea stretched broad beneath their feet; but on the right their vision was +arrested by the sharp promontory of the southeast, which left them in doubt +whether there was land beyond. On the left they could see directly north for +several miles; but the northwest was concealed from them by the crest of a +fantastic spur, which formed a massive abutment to the central cone. They +could, therefore, make no approach as yet to the solving of the great question. +</p> + +<p> +At 1 o’clock, the ascent was again begun. The easiest route slanted +upwards towards the southwest, through the thick copse. There, under the trees, +were flying about a number of gallinaceæ of the pheasant family. These were +“tragopans,” adorned with a sort of fleshy wattles hanging over +their necks and with two little cylindrical horns behind their eyes. Of these +birds, which were about the size of a hen, the female was invariably brown, +while the male was resplendent in a coat of red, with little spots of white. +With a well-aimed stone Spilett killed one of the tragopans, which the hungry +Pencroff looked at with longing eyes. +</p> + +<p> +Leaving the copse, the climbers, by mounting on each other’s shoulders, +ascended for a hundred feet up a very steep hill, and reached a terrace, almost +bare of trees, whose soil was evidently volcanic. From hence, their course was +a zigzag towards the east, for the declivity was so steep that they had to take +every point of vantage. Neb and Herbert led the way, then came Smith and the +reporter; Pencroff was last. The animals who lived among these heights, and +whose traces were not wanting, must have the sure foot and the supple spine of +a chamois or an izard. They saw some to whom Pencroff gave a name of his +own—“Sheep,” he cried. +</p> + +<p> +They all had stopped fifty feet from half-a-dozen large animals, with thick +horns curved backwards and flattened at the end, and with woolly fleece, hidden +under long silky fawn-colored hair. They were not the common sheep, but a +species widely distributed through the mountainous regions of the temperate +zone. Their name, according to Herbert, was <i>Moufflon</i>. +</p> + +<p> +“Have they legs and chops?” asked the sailor. +</p> + +<p> +“Yes,” replied Herbert. +</p> + +<p> +“Then they’re sheep,” said Pencroff. The animals stood +motionless and astonished at their first sight of man. Then, seized with sudden +fear, they fled, leaping away among the rocks. +</p> + +<p> +“Good-bye till next time,” cried Pencroff to them, in a tone so +comical that the others could not forbear laughing. +</p> + +<p> +As the ascension continued, the traces of lava were more frequent, and little +sulphur springs intercepted their route. At some points sulphur had been +deposited in crystals, in the midst of the sand and whitish cinders of feldspar +which generally precede the eruption of lava. As they neared the first plateau, +formed by the truncation of the lower cone, the ascent became very difficult. +By 4 o’clock the last belt of trees had been passed. Here and there stood +a few dwarfed and distorted pines, which had survived the attacks of the +furious winds. Fortunately for the engineer and his party, it was a pleasant, +mild day; for a high wind, at that altitude of 3,000 feet, would have +interfered with them sadly. The sky overhead was extremely bright and clear. A +perfect calm reigned around them. The sun was hidden by the upper mountain, +which cast its shadow, like a vast screen, westward to the edge of the sea. A +thin haze began to appear in the east, colored with all the rays of the solar +spectrum. +</p> + +<p> +There were only 500 feet between the explorers and the plateau where they meant +to encamp for the night, but these 500 were increased to 2,000 and more by the +tortuous route. The ground, so to speak, gave way under their feet. The angle +of ascent was often so obtuse that they slipped upon the smooth-worn lava. +Little by little the evening set in, and it was almost night when the party, +tired out by a seven hours’ climb, arrived at the top of the first cone. +</p> + +<p> +Now they must pitch their camp, and think of supper and sleep. The upper +terrace of the mountain rose upon a base of rocks, amid which they could soon +find a shelter. Firewood was not plenty, yet the moss and dry thistles, so +abundant on the plateau, would serve their turn. The sailor built up a +fireplace with huge stones, while Neb and Herbert went after the combustibles. +They soon came back with a load of thistles; and with flint and steel, the +charred linen for tinder, and Neb to blow the fire, a bright blaze was soon +sparkling behind the rocks. It was for warmth only, for they kept the pheasant +for the next day, and supped off the rest of the cabiai and a few dozen +pistachio-nuts. +</p> + +<p> +It was only half-past 6 when the meal was ended. Cyrus Smith resolved to +explore, in, the semi-obscurity, the great circular pediment which upheld the +topmost cone of the mountain. Before taking rest, he was anxious to know +whether the base of the cone could be passed, in case its flanks should prove +too steep for ascent. So, regardless of fatigue, he left Pencroff and Neb to +make the sleeping arrangements, and Spilett to note down the incidents of the +day, and taking Herbert with him, began to walk around the base of the plateau +towards the north. +</p> + +<p> +The night was beautiful and still; and not yet very dark. They walked together +in silence. Sometimes the plateau was wide and easy, sometimes so encumbered +with rubbish that the two could not walk abreast. Finally, after twenty minutes +tramp, they were brought to a halt. From this point the slant of the two cones +was equal. To walk around the mountain upon an acclivity whose angle was nearly +seventy-five degrees was impossible. +</p> + +<p> +But though they had to give up their flank movement, the chance of a direct +ascent was suddenly offered to them. Before them opened an immense chasm in the +solid rock. It was the mouth of the upper crater, the gullet, so to speak, +through which, when the volcano was active, the eruption took place. Inside, +hardened lava and scoriæ formed a sort of natural staircase with enormous +steps, by which they might possibly reach the summit. Smith saw the opportunity +at a glance, and followed by the boy, he walked unhesitatingly into the huge +crevasse, in the midst of the gathering darkness. +</p> + +<p> +There were yet 1,000 feet to climb. Could they scale the interior wall of the +crater? They would try, at all events. Fortunately, the long and sinuous +declivities described a winding staircase, and greatly helped their ascent. The +crater was evidently exhausted. Not a puff of smoke, not a glimmer of fire, +escaped; not a sound or motion in the dark abyss, reaching down, perhaps, to +the centre of the globe. The air within retained no taint of sulphur. The +volcano was not only quiet, but extinct. +</p> + +<p> +Evidently the attempt was to succeed. Gradually, as the two mounted the inner +walls, they saw the crater grow larger over their heads. The light from the +outer sky visibly increased. At each step, so to speak, which they made, new +stars entered the field of their vision: The magnificent constellations of the +southern sky shone resplendent. In the zenith glittered the splendid Antares of +the Scorpion, and not far off that Beta of the Centaur, which is believed to be +the nearest star to our terrestrial globe. Then, as the crater opened, appeared +Fomalhaut of the Fish, the Triangle, and at last, almost at the Antarctic pole, +the glowing Southern Cross. +</p> + +<p> +It was nearly 8 o’clock when they set foot on the summit of the cone. The +darkness was by this time complete, and they could hardly see a couple of miles +around them. Was the land an island, or the eastern extremity of a continent? +They could not yet discover. Towards the west a band of cloud, clearly defined +against the horizon, deepened the obscurity, and confounded sea with sky. +</p> + +<p> +But at one point of the horizon suddenly appeared a vague light, which slowly +sank as the clouds mounted to the zenith. It was the slender crescent of the +moon, just about to disappear. But the line of the horizon was now cloudless, +and as the moon touched it, the engineer could see her face mirrored for an +instant on a liquid surface. He seized the boy’s hand— +</p> + +<p> +“An island!” said he, as the lunar crescent disappeared behind the +waves. +</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2><a name="XI" id="XI"></a>CHAPTER XI.</h2> + +<p class="letter"> +AT THE SUMMIT OF THE CONE—THE INTERIOR OF THE CRATER—SEA EVERYWHERE +—NO LAND IN SIGHT—A BIRD’S EVE VIEW OF THE +COAST—HYDROGRAPHY AND OROGRAPHY —IS THE ISLAND INHABITED?—A +GEOGRAPHICAL BAPTISM—LINCOLN ISLAND. +</p> + +<p> +A half hour later they walked back to the camp. The engineer contented himself +with saying to his comrades that the country was an island, and that to-morrow +they would consider what to do. Then each disposed himself to sleep, and in +this basalt cave, 2,500 feet above sea-level, they passed a quiet night in +profound repose. The next day, March 30, after a hurried breakfast on roast +trajopan, they started out for the summit of the volcano. All desired to see +the isle on which perhaps they were to spend their lives, and to ascertain how +far it lay from other land, and how near the course of vessels bound for the +archipelagoes of the Pacific. +</p> + +<p> +It was about 7 o’clock in the morning when they left the camp. No one +seemed dismayed by the situation. They had faith in themselves, no doubt; but +the source of that faith was not the same with Smith as with his companions. +They trusted in him, he in his ability to extort from the wilderness around +them all the necessaries of life. As for Pencroff, he would not have despaired, +since the rekindling of the fire by the engineer’s lens, if he had found +himself upon a barren rock, if only Smith was with him. +</p> + +<p> +“Bah!” said he, “we got out of Richmond without the +permission of the authorities, and it will be strange if we can’t get +away some time from a place where no one wants to keep us!” +</p> + +<p> +They followed the route of the day before, flanking the cone till they reached +the enormous crevasse. It was a superb day, and the southern side of the +mountain was bathed in sunlight. The crater, as the engineer had supposed, was +a huge shaft gradually opening to a height of 1,000 feet above the plateau. +From the bottom of the crevasse large currents of lava meandered down the +flanks of the mountain, indicating the path of the eruptive matter down to the +lower valleys which furrowed the north of the island. +</p> + +<p> +The interior of the crater, which had an inclination of thirty-five or forty +degrees, was easily scaled. They saw on the way traces of ancient lava, which +had probably gushed from the summit of the cone before the lateral opening had +given it a new way of escape. As to the volcano chimney which communicated with +the subterranean abyss, its depth could not be estimated by the eye, for it was +lost in obscurity; but there seemed no doubt that the volcano was completely +extinct. Before 8 o’clock, the party were standing at the summit of the +crater, on a conical elevation of the northern side. +</p> + +<p> +“The sea! the sea everywhere!” was the universal exclamation. There +it lay, an immense sheet of water around them on every side. Perhaps Smith had +hoped that daylight would reveal some neighboring coast or island. But nothing +appeared to the horizon-line, a radius of more than fifty miles. Not a sail was +in sight. Around the island stretched a desert infinity of ocean. +</p> + +<p> +Silent and motionless, they surveyed every point of the horizon. They strained +their eyes to the uttermost limit of the ocean. But even Pencroff, to whom +Nature had given a pair of telescopes instead of eyes, and who could have +detected land even in the faintest haze upon the sea-line, could see nothing. +Then they looked down upon their island, and the silence was broken by +Spilett:— +</p> + +<p> +“How large do you think this island is?” +</p> + +<p> +It seemed small enough in the midst of the infinite ocean. +</p> + +<p> +Smith thought awhile, noticed the circumference of the island, and allowed for +the elevation. +</p> + +<p> +“My friends,” he said, “if I am not mistaken, the coast of +the island is more than 100 miles around.” +</p> + +<p> +“Then its surface will be—” +</p> + +<p> +“That is hard to estimate; the outline is so irregular.” +</p> + +<p> +If Smith was right, the island would be about the size of Malta or Zante in the +Mediterranean; but it was more irregular than they, and at the same time had +fewer capes, promontories, points, bays, and creeks. Its form was very +striking. When Spilett drew it they declared it was like some fantastic sea +beast, some monstrous pteropode, asleep on the surface of the Pacific. +</p> + +<p> +The exact configuration of the island may thus be described:—The eastern +coast, upon which the castaways had landed, was a decided curve, embracing a +large bay, terminating at the southeast in a sharp promontory, which the shape +of the land had hidden from Pencroff on his first exploration. On the +northeast, two other capes shut in the bay, and between them lay a narrow gulf +like the half-open jaws of some formidable dog-fish. From northeast to +northwest the coast was round and flat, like the skull of a wild beast; then +came a sort of indeterminate hump, whose centre was occupied by the volcanic +mountain. From this point the coast ran directly north and south. For +two-thirds of its length it was bordered by a narrow creek; then it finished in +along cue, like the tail of a gigantic alligator. This cue formed a veritable +peninsula, which extended more than thirty miles into the sea, reckoning from +the southeastern cape before mentioned. These thirty miles, the southern coast +of the island, described an open bay. The narrowest part of the island, between +the Chimneys and the creek, on the west, was ten miles wide, but its greatest +length, from the jaw in the northeast to the extremity of the southwestern +peninsula, was not less than thirty miles. +</p> + +<p> +The general aspect of the interior was as follows:—The southern part, +from the shore to the mountain, was covered with woods; the northern part was +arid and sandy. Between the volcano and the eastern coast the party were +surprised to see a lake, surrounded by evergreens, whose existence they had not +suspected. Viewed from such a height it seemed to be on the same level with the +sea, but, on reflection, the engineer explained to his companions that it must +be at least 300 feet higher, for the plateau on which it lay was as high as +that of the coast. +</p> + +<p> +“So, then, it is a fresh water lake?” asked Pencroff. +</p> + +<p> +“Yes,” said the engineer, “for it must be fed by the mountain +streams.” +</p> + +<p> +“I can see a little river flowing into it,” said Herbert, pointing +to a narrow brook whose source was evidently in the spurs of the western cliff. +</p> + +<p> +“True,” said Smith, “and since this brook flows into the +lake, there is probably some outlet towards the sea for the overflow. We will +see about that when we go back.” +</p> + +<p> +This little winding stream and the river so familiar to them were all the +watercourses they could see. Nevertheless, it was possible that under +those-masses of trees which covered two-thirds of the island, other streams +flowed towards the sea. This seemed the more probable from the fertility of the +country and its magnificent display of the flora of the temperate zone. In the +northern section there was no indication of running water; perhaps there might +be stagnant pools in the swampy part of the northeast, but that was all; in the +main this region was composed of arid sand-hills and downs, contrasting +strongly with the fertility of the larger portion. +</p> + +<p> +The volcano did not occupy the centre of the island. It rose in the northwest, +and seemed to indicate the dividing line of the two zones. On the southwest, +south, and southeast, the beginnings of the spurs were lost in masses of +verdure. To the north, on the contrary, these ramifications were plainly +visible, subsiding gradually to the level of the sandy plain. On this side, +too, when the volcano was active, the eruptions had taken place, and a great +bed of lava extended as far as the narrow jaw which formed the northeastern +gulf. +</p> + +<p> +They remained for an hour at the summit of the mountain. The island lay +stretched before them like a plan in relief, with its different tints, green +for the forests, yellow for the sands, blue for the water. They understood the +configuration of the entire island; only the bottoms of the shady valleys and +the depths of the narrow gorges between the spurs of the volcano, concealed by +the spreading foliage, escaped their searching eye. +</p> + +<p> +There remained a question of great moment, whose answer would have a +controlling influence upon the fortunes of the castaways. Was the island +inhabited? It was the reporter who put this question, which seemed already to +have been answered in the negative by the minute examination which they had +just made of the different portions of the island. Nowhere could they perceive +the handiwork of man; no late settlement on the beach, not even a lonely cabin +or a fisherman’s hut. No smoke, rising on the air, betrayed a human +presence. It is true, the observers were thirty miles from the long peninsula +which extended to the southwest, and upon which even Pencroff’s eye could +hardly have discovered a dwelling. Nor could they raise the curtain of foliage +which covered three-fourths of the island to see whether some village lay +sheltered there. But the natives of these little islands in the Pacific usually +live on the coast, and the coast seemed absolutely desert. Until they should +make a more complete exploration, they might assume that the island was +uninhabited. But was it ever frequented by the inhabitants of neighboring +islands? This question was difficult to answer. No land appeared within a +radius of fifty miles. But fifty miles could easily be traversed by Malay +canoes or by the larger pirogues of the Polynesians. Everything depended upon +the situation of the island—on its isolation in the Pacific, or its +proximity to the archipelagoes. Could Smith succeed, without his instruments, +in determining its latitude and longitude? It would be difficult, and in the +uncertainty, they must take precautions against an attack from savage +neighbors. +</p> + +<p> +The exploration of the island was finished, its configuration determined, a map +of it drawn, its size calculated, and the distribution of its land and water +ascertained. The forests and the plains had been roughly sketched upon the +reporter’s map. They had only now to descend the declivities of the +mountain, and to examine into the animal, vegetable, and mineral resources of +the country. But before giving the signal of departure, Cyrus Smith, in a calm, +grave voice, addressed his companions. +</p> + +<p> +“Look, my friends, upon this little corner of the earth, on which the +hand of the Almighty has cast us. Here, perhaps, we may long dwell. Perhaps, +too, unexpected help will arrive, should some ship chance to pass. I say +<i>chance</i>, because this island is of slight importance, without even a +harbor for ships. I fear it is situated out of the usual course of vessels, too +far south for those which frequent the archipelagoes of the Pacific, too far +north for those bound to Australia round Cape Horn. I will not disguise from +you our situation.” +</p> + +<p> +“And you are right, my dear Cyrus,” said the reporter, eagerly. +“You are dealing with men. They trust you, and you can count on them. Can +he not, my friends?” +</p> + +<p> +“I will obey you in everyting [sic], Mr. Smith,” said Herbert, +taking the engineer’s hand. +</p> + +<p> +“May I lose my name,” said the sailor, “if I shirk my part! +If you choose, Mr. Smith, we will make a little America here. We will build +cities, lay railroads, establish telegraphs, and some day, when the island is +transformed and civilized, offer her to the United States. But one thing I +should like to ask.” +</p> + +<p> +“What Is that?” said the reporter. +</p> + +<p> +“That we should not consider ourselves any longer as castaways, but as +colonists.” +</p> + +<p> +Cyrus Smith could not help smiling, and the motion was adopted. Then Smith +thanked his companions, and added that he counted upon their energy and upon +the help of Heaven. +</p> + +<p> +“Well, let’s start for the Chimneys,” said Pencroff. +</p> + +<p> +“One minute, my friends,” answered the engineer; “would it +not be well to name the island, as well as the capes, promontories, and +water-courses, which we see before us?” +</p> + +<p> +“Good,” said the reporter. “That will simplify for the future +the instructions which we may have to give or to take.” +</p> + +<p> +“Yes,” added the sailor, “it will be something gained to be +able to say whence we are coming and where we are going. We shall seem to be +somewhere.” +</p> + +<p> +“At the Chimneys, for instance,” said Herbert. +</p> + +<p> +“Exactly,” said the sailor. “That name has been quite +convenient already, and I was the author of it. Shall we keep that name for our +first encampment, Mr. Smith?” +</p> + +<p> +“Yes, Pencroff, since you baptized it so.” +</p> + +<p> +“Good! the others will be easy enough,” resumed the sailor, who was +now in the vein. “Let us give them names like those of the Swiss family +Robinson, whose story Herbert has read me more than +once:—’Providence Bay,’ ‘Cochalot Point,’ +‘Cape Disappointment.’“ +</p> + +<p> +“Or rather Mr. Smith’s name, Mr. Spilett’s, or +Neb’s,” said Herbert. +</p> + +<p> +“My name!” cried Neb, showing his white teeth. +</p> + +<p> +“Why not?” replied Pencroff, “‘Port Neb’ would +sound first-rate! And ‘Cape Gideon’—” +</p> + +<p> +“I would rather have names, taken from our country,” said the +reporter, “which will recall America to us.” +</p> + +<p> +“Yes,” said Smith, “the principal features, the bays and seas +should be so named. For instance, let us call the great bay to the east Union +Bay, the southern indentation Washington Bay, the mountain on which we are +standing Mount Franklin, the lake beneath our feet Lake Grant. These names will +recall our country and the great citizens who have honored it; but for the +smaller features, let us choose names which will suggest their especial +configuration. These will remain in our memory and be more convenient at the +same time. The shape of the island is so peculiar that we shall have no trouble +in finding appropriate names. The streams, the creeks, and the forest regions +yet to be discovered we will baptize as they come. What say you, my +friends?” +</p> + +<p> +The engineer’s proposal was unanimously applauded. The inland bay +unrolled like a map before their eyes, and they had only to name the features +of its contour and relief. Spilett would put down the names over the proper +places, and the geographical nomenclature of the island would be complete. +First, they named the two bays and the mountain as the engineer had suggested. +</p> + +<p> +“Now,” said the reporter, “to that peninsula projecting from +the southwest I propose to give the name of Serpentine Peninsula, and to call +the twisted curve at the termination of it Reptile End, for it is just like a +snake’s tail.” +</p> + +<p> +“Motion carried,” said the engineer. +</p> + +<p> +“And the other extremity of the island,” said Herbert, “the +gulf so like an open pair of jaws, let us call it Shark Gulf.” +</p> + +<p> +“Good enough,” said Pencroff, “and we may complete the figure +by calling the two sides of the gulf Mandible Cape.” +</p> + +<p> +“But there are two capes,” observed the reporter. +</p> + +<p> +“Well, we will have them North Mandible and South Mandible.” +</p> + +<p> +“I’ve put them down,” said Spilett. +</p> + +<p> +“Now we must name the southwestern extremity of the island,” said +Pencroff. +</p> + +<p> +“You mean the end of Union Bay?” asked. Herbert. +</p> + +<p> +“Claw Cape,” suggested Neb, who wished to have his turn as +godfather. And he had chosen an excellent name; for this Cape was very like the +powerful claw of the fantastic animal to which they had compared the island. +Pencroff was enchanted with the turn things were taking, and their active +imaginations soon supplied other names. The river which furnished them with +fresh water, and near which the balloon had cast them on shore, they called the +Mercy, in gratitude to Providence. The islet on which they first set foot, was +Safety Island; the plateau at the top of the high granite wall above the +Chimneys, from which the whole sweep of the bay was visible, Prospect Plateau; +and, finally, that mass of impenetrable woods which covered Serpentine +Peninsula, the Forests of the Far West. +</p> + +<p> +The engineer had approximately determined, by the height and position of the +sun, the situation of the island with reference to the cardinal points, and had +put Union Bay and Prospect Plateau to the east; but on the morrow, by taking +the exact time of the sun’s rising and setting, and noting its situation +at the time exactly intermediate, he expected to ascertain precisely the +northern point of the island; for, on account of its situation on the Southern +Hemisphere, the sun at the moment of its culmination would pass to the north, +and not to the south, as it does in the Northern Hemisphere. +</p> + +<p> +All was settled, and the colonists were about to descend the mountain, when +Pencroff cried:— +</p> + +<p> +“Why, what idiots we are!” +</p> + +<p> +“Why so?” said Spilett, who had gotten up and closed his note-book. +</p> + +<p> +“We have forgotten to baptize our island!” +</p> + +<p> +Herbert was about to propose to give it the name of the engineer, and his +companions would have applauded the choice, when Cyrus Smith said +quietly:— +</p> + +<p> +“Let us give it the name of a great citizen, my friends, of the defender +of American unity! Let us call it Lincoln Island!” +</p> + +<p> +They greeted the proposal with three hurrahs. +</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2><a name="XII" id="XII"></a>CHAPTER XII.</h2> + +<p class="letter"> +REGULATION OF WATCHES—PENCROFF IS SATISFIED—A SUSPICIOUS +SMOKE—THE COURSE OF RED CREEK—THE FLORA OF THE ISLAND—ITS +FAUNA—MOUNTAIN PHEASANTS—A KANGAROO CHASE—THE +AGOUTI—LAKE GRANT—RETURN TO THE CHIMNEYS. +</p> + +<p> +The colonists of Lincoln Island cast a last look about them and walked once +around the verge of the crater. Half an hour afterwards they were again upon +the lower plateau, at their encampment of the previous night. Pencroff thought +it was breakfast time, and so came up the question of regulating the watches of +Smith and Spilett. The reporter’s chronometer was uninjured by the sea +water, as he had been cast high up on the sand beyond the reach of the waves. +It was an admirable time-piece, a veritable pocket chronometer, and Spilett had +wound it up regularly every day. The engineer’s watch, of course, had +stopped while he lay upon the downs. He now wound it up, and set it at 9 +o’clock, estimating the time approximately by the height of the sun. +Spilett was about to do the same, when the engineer stopped him. +</p> + +<p> +“Wait, my dear Spilett,” said he. “You have the Richmond +time, have you not?” +</p> + +<p> +“Yes.” +</p> + +<p> +“Your watch, then, is regulated by the meridian of that city, which is +very nearly that of Washington?” +</p> + +<p> +“Certainly.” +</p> + +<p> +“Well, keep it so. Wind it up carefully, but do not touch the hands. This +may be of use to us.” +</p> + +<p> +“What’s the use of that?” thought the sailor. +</p> + +<p> +They made such a hearty meal, that little was left of the meat and +pistachio-nuts; but Pencroff did not trouble himself about that. Top, who had +not been forgotten in the feast, would certainly find some new game in the +thicket. Besides, the sailor had made up his mind to ask Smith to make some +powder and one or two shot-guns, which, he thought, would be an easy matter. +</p> + +<p> +As they were leaving the plateau, Smith proposed to his companions to take a +new road back to the Chimneys. He wished to explore Lake Grant, which lay +surrounded so beautifully with trees. They followed the crest of one of the +spurs in which the creek which fed the lake probably had its source. The +colonists employed in conversation only the proper names which they had just +devised, and found that they could express themselves much more easily. Herbert +and Pencroff, one of whom was young and the other something of a child, were +delighted, and the sailor said as they walked along:— +</p> + +<p> +“Well, Herbert, this is jolly! We can’t lose ourselves now, my boy, +since, whether we follow Lake Grant or get to the Mercy through the woods of +the Far West, we must come to Prospect Plateau, and so to Union Bay.” +</p> + +<p> +It had been agreed that, without marching in a squad, the colonists should not +keep too far apart. Dangerous wild beasts surely inhabited the forest recesses, +and they must be on their guard. Usually Pencroff, Herbert, and Neb walked in +front, preceded by Top, who poked his nose into every corner. The reporter and +engineer walked together, the former ready to note down every incident, the +latter seldom speaking, and turning aside only to pick up sometimes one thing, +sometimes another, vegetable or mineral, which he put in his pocket without +saying a word. +</p> + +<p> +“What, the mischief, is he picking up?” muttered Pencroff. +“There’s no use in looking; I see nothing worth the trouble of +stooping for.” +</p> + +<p> +About 10 o’clock the little company descended the last declivities of +Mount Franklin. A few bushes and trees were scattered over the ground. They +were walking on a yellowish, calcined soil, forming a plain about a mile long, +which extended to the border of the wood. Large fragments of that basalt which, +according to Bischof’s theory, has taken 350,000,000 years to cool, +strewed the uneven surface of the plain. Yet there was no trace of lava, which +had especially found an exit down the northern declivities. Smith thought they +should soon reach the creek, which he expected to find flowing under the trees +by the plain, when he saw Herbert running back, and Neb and the sailor hiding +themselves behind the rocks. +</p> + +<p> +“What’s the matter, my boy?” said Spilett. +</p> + +<p> +“Smoke,” answered Herbert. “We saw smoke ascending from among +the rocks, a hundred steps in front.” +</p> + +<p> +“Men in this region!” cried the reporter. +</p> + +<p> +“We must not show ourselves till we know with whom we have to +deal,” answered Smith. “I have more fear than hope of the natives, +if there are any such on the island. Where is Top?” +</p> + +<p> +“Top is on ahead.” +</p> + +<p> +“And has not barked?” +</p> + +<p> +“No.” +</p> + +<p> +“That is strange. Still, let us try to call him back.” +</p> + +<p> +In a few moments the three had rejoined their companions, and had hidden +themselves, like Neb and Pencroff, behind the basalt rubbish. Thence they saw, +very evidently, a yellowish smoke curling into the air. Top was recalled by a +low whistle from his master, who motioned to his comrades to wait, and stole +forward under cover of the rocks. In perfect stillness the party awaited the +result, when a call from Smith summoned them forward. In a moment they were by +his side, and were struck at once by the disagreeable smell which pervaded the +atmosphere. This odor, unmistakable as it was, had been sufficient to reassure +the engineer. +</p> + +<p> +“Nature is responsible for that fire,” he said, “or rather +for that smoke. It is nothing but a sulphur spring, which will be good for our +sore throats.” +</p> + +<p> +“Good!” said Pencroff; “what a pity I have not a cold!” +</p> + +<p> +The colonists walked towards the smoke. There they beheld a spring of sulphate +of soda, which flowed in currents among the rocks, and whose waters, absorbing +the oxygen of the air, gave off a lively odor of sulpho-hydric acid. Smith +dipped his hand into the spring and found it oily. He tasted it, and perceived +a sweetish savor. Its temperature he estimated at 95° Fahrenheit; and when +Herbert asked him on what he based his estimate:— +</p> + +<p> +“Simply, my boy,” said he, “because when I put my hand into +this water, I have no sensation either of heat or of cold. Therefore, it is at +the same temperature as the human body, that is, about 95°.” +</p> + +<p> +Then as the spring of sulphur could be put to no present use, the colonists +walked towards the thick border of the forest, a few hundred paces distant. +There, as they had thought, the brook rolled its bright limpid waters between +high, reddish banks, whose color betrayed the presence of oxide of iron. On +account of this color, they instantly named the water course Red Creek. It was +nothing but a large mountain brook, deep and clear, here, flowing quietly over +the lands, there, gurgling amid rocks, or falling in a cascade, but always +flowing towards the lake. It was a mile and a half long; its breadth varied +from thirty to forty feet. Its water was fresh, which argued that those of the +lake would be found the same—a fortunate occurrence, in case they should +find upon its banks a more comfortable dwelling than the Chimneys. +</p> + +<p> +The trees which, a few hundred paces down stream overshadowed the banks of the +creek, belonged principally to the species which abound in the temperate zone +of Australia or of Tasmania, and belong to those conifers which clothed the +portion of the island already explored, some miles around Prospect Plateau. It +was now the beginning of April, a month which corresponds in that hemisphere to +our October, yet their leaves had not begun to fall. They were, especially, +casuarinæ and eucalypti, some of which, in the ensuing spring, would furnish a +sweetish manna like that of the East. Clumps of Australian cedars rose in the +glades, covered high with that sort of moss which the New-Hollanders call +<i>tussocks</i>; but the cocoa-palm, so abundant in the archipelagoes of the +Pacific, was conspicuous by its absence. Probably the latitude of the island +was too low. +</p> + +<p> +“What a pity!” said Herbert, “such a useful tree and such +splendid nuts!” +</p> + +<p> +There were flocks of birds on the thin boughs of the eucalypti and the +casuarinæ, which gave fine play to their wings. Black, white, and grey +cockatoos, parrots and parroquets of all colors, king-birds, birds of paradise, +of brilliant green, with a crowd of red, and blue lories, glowing with every +prismatic color, flew about with deafening clamors. All at once, a strange +volley of discordant sounds seemed to come from the thicket. The colonists +heard, one after another, the song of birds, the cries of four-footed beasts, +and a sort of clucking sound strangely human. Neb and Herbert rushed towards +the thicket, forgetting the most elementary rules of prudence. Happily, there +was neither formidable wild beast nor savage native, but merely half-a-dozen of +those mocking birds which they recognized as “mountain pheasants.” +A few skillfully aimed blows with a stick brought this parody to an end, and +gave them excellent game for dinner that evening. Herbert also pointed out +superb pigeons with bronze-colored wings, some with a magnificent crest, others +clad in green, like their congeners at Port-Macquarie; but like the troops of +crows and magpies which flew about, they were beyond reach. A load of +small-shot would have killed hosts of them; but the colonists had nothing but +stones and sticks, very insufficient weapons. They proved even more inadequate +when a troop of quadrupeds leaped away through the underbrush with tremendous +bounds thirty feet long, so that they almost seemed to spring from tree to +tree, like squirrels. +</p> + +<p> +“Kangaroos!” cried Herbert. +</p> + +<p> +“Can you eat them?” said Pencroff. +</p> + +<p> +“They make a delicious stew,” said the reporter. +</p> + +<p> +The words had hardly escaped his lips, when the sailor, with Neb and Herbert at +his heels, rushed after the kangaroos. Smith tried in vain to recall them, but +equally in vain did they pursue the game, whose elastic leaps left them far +behind. After five minutes’ chase, they gave it up, out of breath. +</p> + +<p> +“You see, Mr. Smith,” said Pencroff, “that guns are a +necessity. Will it be possible to make them?” +</p> + +<p> +“Perhaps,” replied the engineer; “but we will begin by making +bows and arrows, and you will soon use them as skilfully as the Australian +hunters.” +</p> + +<p> +“Bows and arrows!” said Pencroff, with a contemptuous look. +“They are for children!” +</p> + +<p> +“Don’t be so proud, my friend,” said the reporter. +“Bows and arrows were sufficient for many centuries for the warfare of +mankind. Powder is an invention of yesterday, while war, unhappily, is as old +as the race.” +</p> + +<p> +“That’s true, Mr. Spilett,” said the sailor. “I always +speak before I think. Forgive me.” +</p> + +<p> +Meanwhile Herbert, with his Natural History always uppermost in his thoughts, +returned to the subject of kangaroos. +</p> + +<p> +“Those which escaped us,” he said, “belong to the species +most difficult to capture—very large, with long grey hair, but I am sure +there are black and red kangaroos, rock-kangaroos, kangaroo-rats—” +</p> + +<p> +“Herbert,” said the sailor, “for me there is only one +kind—the ‘kangaroo-on-the-spit’—and that is just what +we haven’t got.” +</p> + +<p> +They could not help laughing at Professor Pencroff’s new classification. +He was much cast down at the prospect of dining on mountain-phesants; but +chance was once more kind to him. Top, who felt his dinner at stake, rushed +hither and thither, his instinct quickened by sharp appetite. In fact, he would +have left very little of what he might catch or any one else, had not Neb +watched him shrewdly. About 3 o’clock he disappeared into the rushes, +from which came grunts and growls which indicated a deadly tustle. Neb rushed +in, and found Top greedily devouring an animal, which in ten seconds more would +have totally disappeared. But the dog had luckily fallen on a litter, and two +more rodents—for to this species did the beasts belong—lay +strangled on the ground. Neb reappeared in triumph with a rodent in each hand. +They had yellow hair, with patches of green, and the rudiments of a tail. They +were a sort of agouti, a little larger than their tropical congeners, true +American hares, with long ears and five molar teeth on either side. +</p> + +<p> +“Hurrah!” cried Pencroff, “the roast is here; now we can go +back to the house.” +</p> + +<p> +The journey was resumed. Red Creek still rolled its limped waters under the +arching boughs of casuarence, bankseas and gigantic gum trees. Superb liliaceæ +rose, to a height of twenty feet, and other arborescent trees of species +unknown to the young naturalist, bent over the brook, which murmered gently +beneath its leafy cradle. It widened sensibly, nevertheless, and the mouth was +evidently near. As the party emerged from a massive thicket of fine trees, the +lake suddenly appeared before them. +</p> + +<p> +They were now on its left bank, and a picturesque region opened to their view. +The smooth sheet of water, about seven miles in circumference and 250 acres in +extent, lay sleeping among the trees. Towards the east, across the intermittent +screen of verdure, appeared a shining horizon of sea. To the north the curve of +the lake was concave, contrasting with the sharp outline of its lower +extremity. Numerous aquatic birds frequented the banks of this little Ontario, +in which the “Thousand Isles” of its American original were +represented by a rock emerging from its surface some hundreds of feet from the +southern bank. There lived in harmony several couples of kingfishers, perched +upon rocks, grave and motionless, watching for fish; then they would plunge +into the water and dive with a shrill cry, reappearing with the prey in their +beaks. Upon the banks of the lake and the island were constantly strutting wild +ducks, pelicans, water-hens and red-beaks. The waters of the lake were fresh +and limpid, somewhat dark, and from the concentric circles on its surface, were +evidently full of fish. +</p> + +<p> +“How beautiful this lake is!” said Spilett. “We could live on +its banks.” +</p> + +<p> +“We will live there!” answered Smith. +</p> + +<p> +The colonists, desiring to get back to the Chimneys by the shortest route, went +down towards the angle formed at the south by the junction of the banks. They +broke a path with much labor through the thickets and brush wood, hitherto +untouched by the hand of man, and walked towards the seashore, so as to strike +it to the north of Prospect Plateau. After a two miles’ walk they came +upon the thick turf of the plateau, and saw before them the infinite ocean. +</p> + +<p> +To get back to the Chimneys they had to walk across the plateau for a mile to +the elbow formed by the first bend of the Mercy. But the engineer was anxious +to know how and where the overflow of the lake escaped. It was probable that a +river existed somewhere pouring through a gorge in the granite. In fine, the +lake was an immense receptacle gradually filled at the expense of the creek, +and its overflow must somehow find a way down to the sea. Why should they not +utilize this wasted store of water-power? So they walked up the plateau, +following the banks of Lake Grant, but after a tramp of a mile, they could find +no outlet. +</p> + +<p> +It was now half-past 4, and dinner had yet to be prepared. The party returned +upon its track, and reached the Chimneys by the left bank of the Mercy. Then +the fire was lighted, and Neb and Pencroff, on whom devolved the cooking, in +their respective characters of negro and sailor, skilfully broiled the agouti, +to which the hungry explorers did great honor. When the meal was over, and just +as they were settling themselves to sleep, Smith drew from his pocket little +specimens of various kinds of minerals, and said quietly, +</p> + +<p> +“My friends, this is iron ore, this pyrites, this clay, this limestone, +this charcoal. Nature gives us these as her part in the common task. To-morrow +we must do our share!” +</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2><a name="XIII" id="XIII"></a>CHAPTER XIII.</h2> + +<p class="letter"> +TOP’S CONTRIBUTION—MAKING BOWS AND ARROWS—A +BRICK-KILN—A POTTERY—DIFFERENT COOKING UTENSILS—THE FIRST +BOILED MEAT—MUGWORT—THE SOUTHERN CROSS—AN IMPORTANT +ASTRONOMICAL OBSERVATION. +</p> + +<p> +“Now then, Mr. Smith, where shall we begin?” asked Pencroff the +next morning. +</p> + +<p> +“At the beginning,” answered the engineer. +</p> + +<p> +And this, indeed, was necessary, as the colonists did not even possess +implements with which to make implements. Neither were they in that condition +of nature which “having time,” economizes effort; the necessities +of life must be provided for at once, and, if profiting by experience they had +nothing to invent, at least they had everything to make. Their iron and steel +was in the ore, their pottery was in the clay, their linen and clothes were +still to be provided. +</p> + +<p> +It must be remembered, however, that these colonists were <i>men</i>, in the +best sense of the word. The engineer Smith could not have been aided by +comrades more intelligent, or more devoted and zealous. He had questioned them, +and knew their ability. +</p> + +<p> +The reporter, having learned everything so as to be able to speak of +everything, would contribute largely from his knowledge and skill towards the +settlement of the island. He would not shirk work; and, a thorough sportsman, +he would follow as a business what he had formerly indulged in as a pastime. +Herbert, a manly lad, already well versed in natural science, would contribute +his share to the common cause. Neb was devotion personified. Adroit, +intelligent, indefatigable, robust, of iron constitution, knowing something of +the work in a smithy, his assistance would be considerable. As to Pencroff, he +had sailed every sea, had been a carpenter in the Brooklyn yards, an assistant +tailor on board ship, and, during hie leaves of absence, a gardener, farmer, +etc.; in short, like every sailor, he was a Jack-of-all-trades. +</p> + +<p> +Indeed, it would have been hard to bring together five men, more able to +struggle against fate, and more certain to triumph in the end. +</p> + +<p> +“At the beginning,” Smith had said. And this beginning was the +construction of an apparatus which would serve to transform the natural +substances. Every one knows what an important part heat plays in these +transformations. Therefore, as wood and coal were already provided it was only +necessary to make an oven to utilize them. +</p> + +<p> +“What good is an oven,” asked Pencroff. +</p> + +<p> +“To make the pottery that we want,” replied Smith. +</p> + +<p> +“And how will we make an oven?” +</p> + +<p> +“With bricks.” +</p> + +<p> +“And how will we make the bricks?” +</p> + +<p> +“With the clay. Come, friends. We will set up our factory at the place of +production, so as to avoid carriage. Neb will bring the provisions, and we +shall not lack fire to cook food.” +</p> + +<p> +“No,” replied the reporter, “but suppose we lack food, since +we have no hunting implements?” +</p> + +<p> +“If we only had a knife!” cried the sailor, +</p> + +<p> +“What, then?” asked Smith. +</p> + +<p> +“Why, I would make a bow and arrows. And game would be plenty in the +larder.” +</p> + +<p> +“A knife. Something that will cut,” said the engineer, as if +talking to himself. +</p> + +<p> +Suddenly his face brightened: +</p> + +<p> +“Come here, Top,” he called. +</p> + +<p> +The dog bounded to his master, and Smith having taken off the collar which the +animal had around his neck, broke it into halves, saying:— +</p> + +<p> +“Here are two knives, Pencroff.” +</p> + +<p> +For all response, the sailor gave a couple of cheers. Top’s collar was +made from a thin piece of tempered steel. All that was therefore necessary was +to rub it to an edge upon a sand-stone, and then to sharpen it upon one of +finer grain. These kind of stones were readily procurable upon the beach, and +in a couple of hours the implements of the colony consisted of two strong +blades, which it was easy to fasten into solid handles. The overcoming of this +first difficulty was greeted as a triumph and it was indeed a fortunate event. +</p> + +<p> +On setting out, it was the intention of the engineer to return to the western +bank of the lake, where he had noticed the clay, of which he had secured a +specimen. Following the bank of the Mercy they crossed Prospect Plateau, and +after a walk of about five miles, they arrived at a glade some 200 paces +distant from Lake Grant. +</p> + +<p> +On the way, Herbert had discovered a tree from which the South American Indians +make bows. It was the “crejimba,” of the palm family. From it they +cut long straight branches, which they peeled and shaped into bows. For cords +they took the fibres of the “hibiscus heterophyltus” (Indian hemp), +a malvaceous plant, the fibres of which are as strong as the tendons of an +animal. Pencroff, having thus provided bows, only needed arrows. Those were +easily made from straight, stiff branches, free from knots, but it was not so +easy to arm them with a substitute for iron. But Pencroff said that he had +accomplished this much, and that chance would do the rest. +</p> + +<p> +The party had reached the place discovered the day before. The ground was +composed of that clay which is used in making bricks and tiles, and was +therefore just the thing for their purpose. The labor was not difficult. It was +only necessary to scour the clay with sand, mould the bricks, and then bake +them before a wood fire. +</p> + +<p> +Usually, bricks are pressed in moulds, but the engineer contented himself with +making these by hand. All this day and the next was employed in this work. The +clay, soaked in water, was kneaded by the hands and feet of the manipulators, +and then divided into blocks of equal size. A skilled workman can make, without +machinery, as many as 10,000 bricks in twelve hours; but in the two days the +brickmakers of Lincoln Island had made but 3,000, which were piled one upon the +other to await the time when they would be dry enough to bake, which would be +in three or four days. +</p> + +<p> +On the 2d of April, Smith occupied himself in determining the position of the +island. +</p> + +<p> +The day before he had noted the precise minute at which the sun had set, +allowing for the refraction. On this morning, he ascertained with equal +precision the time of its rising. The intervening time was twelve hours and +twenty-four minutes. Therefore six hours and twelve minutes after rising the +sun would pass the meridian, and the point in the sky which it would occupy at +that instant would be north. +</p> + +<p> +At the proper hour Smith marked this point, and by getting two trees in line +obtained a meridian for his future operations. +</p> + +<p> +During the two days preceding the baking they occupied themselves by laying in +a supply of firewood. Branches were cut from the edge of the clearing, and all +the dead wood under the trees was picked up. And now and then they hunted in +the neighborhood, the more successfully, as Pencroff had some dozens of arrows +with very sharp points. It was Top who had provided these points by bringing in +a porcupine, poor game enough, but of an undeniable value, thanks to the quills +with which it bristled. These quills were firmly fastened to the ends of the +arrows, and their flight was guided by feathering them with the +cockatoo’s feathers. The reporter and Herbert soon became expert +marksmen, and all kinds of game, such as cabiais, pigeons, agoutis, heath-cock, +etc., abounded at the Chimneys. Most of these were killed in that part of the +forest upon the left bank of the Mercy, which they had called Jacamar Wood, +after the kingfisher which Pencroff and Herbert had pursued there during their +first exploration. +</p> + +<p> +The meat was eaten fresh, but they preserved the hams of the cabiai by smoking +them before a fire of green wood, having made them aromatic with odorous +leaves. Thus, they had nothing but roast after roast, and they would have been +glad to have heard a pot singing upon the hearth; but first they must have the +pot, and for this they must have the oven. +</p> + +<p> +During these excursions, the hunters noticed the recent tracks of large +animals, armed with strong claws, but they could not tell their species; and +Smith cautioned them to be prudent, as, doubtless, there were dangerous beasts +in the forest. +</p> + +<p> +He was right. For one day Spilett and Herbert saw an animal resembling a +jaguar. But, fortunately, the beast did not attack them, as they could hardly +have killed it without being themselves wounded. But, Spilett promised, if he +should ever obtain a proper weapon, such as one of the guns Pencroff begged +for, that he would wage relentless war on all ferocious beasts and rid the +island of their presence. +</p> + +<p> +They did not do anything to the Chimneys, as the engineer hoped to discover, or +to build, if need be, a more convenient habitation, but contented themselves by +spreading fresh quantities of moss and dry leaves upon the sand in the +corridors, and upon these primitive beds the tired workmen slept soundly. They +also reckoned the days already passed on Lincoln Island, and began keeping a +calendar. On the 5th of April, which was a Wednesday, they had been twelve days +upon the island. +</p> + +<p> +On the morning of the 6th, the engineer with his companions met at the place +where the bricks were to be baked. Of course the operation was to be conducted +in the open air, and not in an oven, or, rather, the pile of bricks would in +itself form a bake-oven. Carefully-prepared faggots were laid upon the ground, +surrounding the tiers of dry bricks, which formed a great cube, in which +air-holes had been left. The work occupied the whole day, and it was not until +evening that they lit the fire, which all night long they kept supplied with +fuel. +</p> + +<p> +The work lasted forty-eight hours, and succeeded perfectly. Then, as it was +necessary to let the smoking mass cool, Neb and Pencroff, directed by Mr. +Smith, brought, on a hurdle made of branches, numerous loads of limestone which +they found scattered in abundance to the north of the lake. These stones, +decomposed by heat, furnished a thick quick-lime, which increased in bulk by +slacking, and was fully as pure as if it had been produced by the calcimation +of chalk or marble. Mixed with sand in order to diminish its shrinkage while +drying, this lime made an excellent mortar. +</p> + +<p> +By the 9th of April the engineer had at his disposal a quantity of lime, all +prepared, and some thousands of bricks. They, therefore, began at once the +construction of an oven, in which to bake their pottery. This was accomplished +without much difficulty; and, five days later, the oven was supplied with coal +from the open vein, which the engineer had discovered near the mouth of Red +Creek, and the first smoke escaped from a chimney twenty feet high. The glade +was transformed into a manufactory, and Pencroff was ready to believe that all +the products of modern industry would be produced from this oven. +</p> + +<p> +Meantime the colonists made a mixture of the clay with lime and quartz, forming +pipe-clay, from which they moulded pots and mugs, plates and jars, tubs to hold +water, and cooking vessels. Their form was rude and defective, but after they +had been baked at a high temperature, the kitchen of the Chimneys found itself +provided with utensils as precious as if they were composed of the finest +kaolin. +</p> + +<p> +We must add that Pencroff, desirous of knowing whether this material deserved +its name of pipe-clay, made some large pipes, which he would have found +perfect, but for the want of tobacco. And, indeed, this was a great privation +to the sailor. +</p> + +<p> +“But the tobacco will come like everything else,” he would say in +his hopeful moments. +</p> + +<p> +The work lasted until the 15th of April, and the time was well spent. The +colonists having become potters, made nothing but pottery. When it would suit +the engineer to make them smiths they would be smiths. But as the morrow would +be Sunday, and moreover Easter Sunday, all agreed to observe the day by rest. +These Americans were religious men, scrupulous observers of the precepts of the +Bible, and their situation could only develop their trust in the Author of all +things. +</p> + +<p> +On the evening of the 15th they returned permanently to the Chimneys, bringing +the rest of the pottery back with them, and putting out the oven fire until +there should be use for it again. This return was marked by the fortunate +discovery by the engineer of a substance that would answer for tinder, which, +we know, is the spongy, velvety pulp of a mushroom of the polypore family. +Properly prepared it is extremely inflammable, especially when previously +saturated with gunpowder, or nitrate or chlorate of potash. But until then they +had found no polypores, nor any fungi that would answer instead. Now, the +engineer, having found a certain plant belonging to the mugwort family, to +which belong wormwood, mint, etc., broke off some tufts, and, handing them to +the sailor, said:— +</p> + +<p> +“Here, Pencroff, is something for you.” +</p> + +<p> +Pencroff examined the plant, with its long silky threads and leaves covered +with a cotton-like down. +</p> + +<p> +“What is it, Mr. Smith?” he asked. “Ah, I know! It’s +tobacco!” +</p> + +<p> +“No,” answered Smith; “it is Artemesia wormwood, known to +science as Chinese mugwort, but to us it will be tinder.” +</p> + +<p> +This mugwort, properly dried, furnished a very inflammable substance, +especially after the engineer had impregnated it with nitrate of potash, which +is the same as saltpetre, a mineral very plenty on the island. +</p> + +<p> +This evening the colonists, seated in the central chamber, supped with comfort. +Neb had prepared some agouti soup, a spiced ham, and the boiled corms of the +“caladium macrorhizum,” an herbaceous plant of the arad family, +which under the tropics takes a tree form. These corms, which are very +nutritious, had an excellent flavor, something like that of Portland sago, and +measurably supplied the place of bread, which the colonists were still without. +</p> + +<p> +Supper finished, before going to sleep the party took a stroll upon the beach. +It was 8 o’clock, and the night was magnificent. The moon, which had been +full five days before, was about rising, and in the zenith, shining resplendent +above the circumpolar constellations, rode the Southern Cross. For some moments +the engineer gazed at it attentively. At its summit and base were two stars of +the first magnitude, and on the left arm and the right, stars, respectively, of +the second magnitude and the third. Then, after some reflection, he +said:— +</p> + +<p> +“Herbert, is not to-day the 15th of April?” +</p> + +<p> +“Yes, sir,” answered the lad. +</p> + +<p> +“Then, if I am not mistaken, to-morrow will be one of the four days in +the year when the mean and real time are the same; that is to say, my boy, that +to-morrow, within some seconds of noon by the clocks, the sun will pass the +meridian. If, therefore, the weather is clear, I think I will be able to obtain +the longitude of the island within a few degrees.” +</p> + +<p> +“Without a sextant or instruments?” asked Spilett. +</p> + +<p> +“Yes,” replied the engineer. And since it is so clear, I will try +to-night to find our latitude by calculating the height of the Cross, that is, +of the Southern Pole, above the horizon. You see, my friends, before settling +down, it will not do to be content with determining this land to be an island; +we must find out its locality.” +</p> + +<p> +“Indeed, instead of building a house, it will be better to build a ship, +if we are within a hundred miles of an inhabited land.” +</p> + +<p> +“That is why I am now going to try to get the latitude of the place, and +to-morrow noon to calculate the longitude.” +</p> + +<p> +If the engineer had possessed a sextant, the work would have been easy, as this +evening, by taking the height of the pole, and to-morrow by the sun’s +passage of the meridian, he would have the co-ordinates of the island. But, +having no instruments he must devise something. So returning to the Chimneys, +he made, by the light of the fire, two little flat sticks which he fastened +together with a thorn, in a way that they could be opened and shut like +compasses, and returned with them to the beach. But as the sea horizon was +hidden from this point by Claw Cape, the engineer determined to make his +observation from Prospect Plateau, leaving, until the next day, the computation +of the height of the latter, which could easily be done by elementary geometry. +</p> + +<p> +The colonists, therefore, went to the edge of the plateau which faced the +southeast, overlooking the fantastic rocks bordering the shore. The place rose +some fifty feet above the right bank of the Mercy, which descended, by a double +slope, to the end of Claw Cape and to the southern boundary of the island. +Nothing obstructed the vision, which extended over half the horizon from the +Cape to Reptile Promontory. To the south, this horizon, lit by the first rays +of the moon, was sharply defined against the sky. The Cross was at this time +reversed, the star Alpha being nearest the pole. This constellation is not +situated as near to the southern as the polar star is to the northern pole; +Alpha is about 27° from it, but Smith knew this and could calculate +accordingly. He took care also to observe it at the instant when it passed the +meridian under the pole, thus simplifying the operation. +</p> + +<p> +The engineer opened the arms of his compass so that one pointed to the horizon +and the other to the star, and thus obtained the angle of distance which +separated them. And in order to fix this distance immovably, he fastened these +arms, respectively, by means of thorns, to a cross piece of wood. This done, it +was only necessary to calculate the angle obtained, bringing the observation to +the level of the sea so as to allow for the depression of the horizon caused by +the height of the plateau. The measurement of this angle would thus give the +height of Alpha, or the pole, above the horizon; or, since the latitude of a +point on the globe is always equal to the height of the pole above the horizon +at that point, the latitude of the island. +</p> + +<p> +This calculation was postponed until the next day, and by 10 o’clock +everybody slept profoundly. +</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2><a name="XIV" id="XIV"></a>CHAPTER XIV.</h2> + +<p class="letter"> +THE MEASURE OF THE GRANITE WALL—AN APPLICATION OF THE THEOREM OF SIMILAR +TRIANGLES—THE LATITUDE OF THE ISLAND—AN EXCURSION TO THE +NORTH—AN OYSTER-BED—PLANS FOR THE FUTURE—THE SUN’S +PASSAGE OF THE MERIDIAN—THE CO-ORDINATES OF LINCOLN ISLAND. +</p> + +<p> +At daybreak the next day, Easter Sunday, the colonists left the Chimneys and +went to wash their linen and clean their clothing. The engineer intended to +make some soap as soon as he could obtain some soda or potash and grease or +oil. The important question of renewing their wardrobes would be considered in +due time. At present they were strong, and able to stand hard wear for at least +six months longer. But everything depended on the situation of the island as +regarded inhabited countries, and that would be determined this day, providing +the weather permitted. +</p> + +<p> +The sun rising above the horizon, ushered in one of those glorious days which +seem like the farewell of summer. The first thing to be done was to measure the +height of Prospect Plateau above the sea. +</p> + +<p> +“Do you not need another pair of compasses?” asked Herbert, of the +engineer. +</p> + +<p> +“No, my boy,” responded the latter, “this time we will try +another and nearly as precise a method.” +</p> + +<p> +Pencroff, Neb, and the reporter were busy at other things; but Herbert, who +desired to learn, followed the engineer, who proceeded along the beach to the +base of the granite wall. +</p> + +<p> +Smith was provided with a pole twelve feet long, carefully measured off from +his own height, which he knew to a hair. Herbert carried a plumb-line made from +a flexible fibre tied to a stone. Having reached a point 20 feet from the shore +and 500 feet from the perpendicular granite wall, Smith sunk the pole two feet +in the sand, and, steadying it carefully, proceeded to make it plumb with the +horizon. Then, moving back to a spot where, stretched upon the sand, he could +sight over the top of the pole to the edge of the cliff, bringing the two +points in line, he carefully marked this place with a stone. Then addressing +Herbert, +</p> + +<p> +“Do you know the first principles of geometry?” said he. +</p> + +<p> +“Slightly, sir,” answered Herbert, not wishing to seem forward. +</p> + +<p> +“Then you remember the relation of similar triangles?” +</p> + +<p> +“Yes, sir,” answered Herbert. “Their like sides are +proportional.” +</p> + +<p> +“Right, my boy. And I have just constructed two similar right angled +triangles:—the smaller has for its sides the perpendicular pole and the +distances from its base and top to the stake; the second has the wall which we +are about to measure, and the distances from its base and summit to the stake, +which are only the prolongation of the base and hypothenuse of the first +triangle. +</p> + +<p> +“I understand,” cried Herbert. “As the distance from the +stake to the pole is proportional to the distance from the stake to the base of +the wall, so the height of the wall is proportional to the height of the +rod.” +</p> + +<p> +“Exactly,” replied the engineer, “and after measuring the +first two distances, as we know the height of the pole, we have only to +calculate the proportion in order to find the height of the wall.” +</p> + +<p> +The measurements were made with the pole and resulted in determining the +distances from the stake to the foot of the pole and the base of the wall to be +15 and 500 feet respectively. The engineer and Herbert then returned to the +Chimneys, where the former, using a flat stone and a bit of shell to figure +with, determined the height of the wall to be 333.33 feet. +</p> + +<p> +Then taking the compasses, and carefully measuring the angle which he had +obtained the night before, upon a circle which he had divided into 360 parts, +the engineer found that this angle, allowing for the differences already +explained, was 53°. Which, subtracted from 90°—the distance of the pole +from the equator—gave 37° as the latitude of Lincoln Island. And making +an allowance of 5° for the imperfections of the observations, Smith, concluded +it to be situated between the 35th and the 40th parallel of south latitude. +</p> + +<p> +But, in order to establish the co-ordinates of the island, the longitude also +must be taken. And this the engineer determined to do when the sun passed the +meridian at noon. +</p> + +<p> +They therefore resolved to spend the morning in a walk, or rather an +exploration of that part of the island situated to the north of Shark Gulf and +the lake; and, if they should have time, to push on as far as the western side +of South Mandible Cape. They would dine on the downs and not return until +evening. +</p> + +<p> +At half-past 8 the little party set out, following the edge of the channel. +Opposite, upon Safety Islet, a number of birds of the sphemiscus family +strutted gravely about. There were divers, easily recognizable, by their +disagreeable cry, which resembled the braying of an ass. Pencroff, regarding +them with gastronomic intent, was pleased to learn that their flesh, though +dark colored, was good to eat. They could also see amphibious animals, which +probably were seals, crawling over the sand. It was not possible to think of +these as food, as their oily flesh is detestable; nevertheless Smith observed +them carefully, and without disclosing his plans to the others, he announced +that they would very soon, make a visit to the island. The shore followed by +the colonists was strewn with mollusks, which would have delighted a +malacologist. But, what was more important, Neb discovered, about four miles +from the Chimneys, among the rocks, a bed of oysters, left bare by the tide. +</p> + +<p> +“Neb hasn’t lost his day,” said Pencroff, who saw that the +bed extended some distance. +</p> + +<p> +“It is, indeed, a happy discovery,” remarked the reporter. +“And when we remember that each oyster produces fifty or sixty thousand +eggs a year, the supply is evidently inexhaustable.” +</p> + +<p> +“But I don’t think the oyster is very nourishing,” said +Herbert. +</p> + +<p> +“No,” answered Smith. “Oysters contain very little azote, and +it would be necessary for a man living on them alone to eat at least fifteen or +sixteen dozen every day.” +</p> + +<p> +“Well,” said Pencroff, “we could swallow dozens and dozens of +these and not exhaust the bed. Shall we have some for breakfast?” +</p> + +<p> +And, without waiting for an answer, which he well knew would be affirmative, +the sailor and Neb detached a quantity of these mollusks from the rocks, and +placed them with the other provisions for breakfast, in a basket which Neb had +made from the hibiscus fibres. Then they continued along the shore between the +downs and the sea. +</p> + +<p> +From time to time Smith looked at his watch, so as to be ready for the noon +observation. +</p> + +<p> +All this portion of the island, as far as South Mandible Cape, was desert, +composed of nothing but sand and shells, mixed with the debris of lava. A few +sea birds, such as the sea-gulls and albatross, frequented the shore, and some +wild ducks excited the covetousness of Pencroff. He tried to shoot some, but +unsuccessfully, as they seldom lit, and he could not hit them flying. +</p> + +<p> +This made the sailor say to the engineer:— +</p> + +<p> +“You see, Mr. Smith, how much we need guns!” +</p> + +<p> +“Doubtless, Pencroff,” answered the reporter, “but it rests +with you. You find iron for the barrels, steel for the locks, saltpetre, +charcoal and sulphur for the powder, mercury and nitric acid for the fulminate, +and last of all, lead for the balls, and Mr. Smith will make us guns of the +best quality. +</p> + +<p> +“Oh, we could probably find all these substances on the island,” +said the engineer. “But it requires fine tools to make such a delicate +instrument as a firearm. However, we will see after awhile.” +</p> + +<p> +“Why, why did we throw the arms and everything else, even our penknives, +out of the balloon?” cried Pencroff. +</p> + +<p> +“If we hadn’t, the balloon would have thrown us into the +sea,” answered Herbert. +</p> + +<p> +“So it would, my boy,” answered the sailor; and then another idea +occurring to him:— +</p> + +<p> +“I wonder what Mr. Forster and his friend thought,” he said, +“the next day, when they found they balloon had escaped?” +</p> + +<p> +“I don’t care what they thought,” said the reporter. +</p> + +<p> +“It was my plan,” cried Pencroff, with a satisfied air. +</p> + +<p> +“And a good plan it was, Pencroff,” interrupted the reporter, +laughing, “to drop us here!” +</p> + +<p> +“I had rather be here than in the hands of the Southerners!” +exclaimed the sailor, “especially since Mr. Smith has been kind enough to +rejoin us!” +</p> + +<p> +“And I, too,” cried the reporter. “After all, what do we lack +here? Nothing.” +</p> + +<p> +“That means—everything,” answered the sailor, laughing and +shrugging his shoulders. “But some day we will get away from this +place.” +</p> + +<p> +“Sooner, perhaps, than you think, my friends,” said the engineer, +“if Lincoln Island is not very far from an inhabited archipelego or a +continent. And we will find that out within an hour. I have no map of the +Pacific, but I have a distinct recollection of its southern portion. +Yesterday’s observation places the island in the latitude of New Zealand +and Chili. But the distance between these two countries is at least 6,000 +miles. We must therefore determine what point in this space the island +occupies, and that I hope to get pretty soon from the longitude. +</p> + +<p> +“Is not the Low Archipelago nearest us in latitude,” asked Herbert. +</p> + +<p> +“Yes,” replied the engineer, “but it is more than 1,200 miles +distant.” +</p> + +<p> +“And that way?” inquired Neb, who followed the conversation with +great interest, pointing towards the south. +</p> + +<p> +“Nothing!” answered Pencroff. +</p> + +<p> +“Nothing, indeed,” added the engineer. +</p> + +<p> +“Well, Cyrus,” demanded the reporter, “if we find Lincoln +Island to be only 200 or 300 miles from New Zealand or Chili?” +</p> + +<p> +“We will build a ship instead of a house, and Pencroff shall command +it.” +</p> + +<p> +“All right, Mr. Smith,” cried the sailor; “I am all ready to +be captain, provided you build something seaworthy.” +</p> + +<p> +“We will, if it is necessary,” answered Smith. +</p> + +<p> +While these men, whom nothing could discourage, were talking, the hour for +taking the observation approached. Herbert could not imagine how Mr. Smith +would be able to ascertain the time of the sun’s passage of the meridian +of the island without a single instrument. It was 11 o’clock, and the +party, halting about six miles from the Chimneys, not far from the place where +they had found the engineer after his inexplicable escape, set about preparing +breakfast. Herbert found fresh water in a neighboring brook, and brought some +back in a vessel which Neb had with him. +</p> + +<p> +Meantime, the engineer made ready for his astronomical observation. He chose a +smooth dry place upon the sand, which the sea had left perfectly level. It was +no more necessary, however, for it to be horizontal, than for the rod which he +stuck in the sand to be perpendicular. Indeed, the engineer inclined the rod +towards the south or away from the sun, as it must not be forgotten that the +colonists of Lincoln Island, being in the Southern Hemisphere, saw the orb of +day describe his diurnal arc above the northern horizon. +</p> + +<p> +Then Herbert understood how by means of the shadow of the rod on the sand, the +engineer would be able to ascertain the culmination of the sun, that is to say, +its passage of the meridian of the island, or, in other words, the <i>time</i> +of the place. For the moment that the shadow obtained its minimum length it +would be noon, and all they had to do was to watch carefully the end of the +shadow. By inclining the rod from the sun Smith had made the shadow longer, and +therefore its changes could be the more readily noted. +</p> + +<p> +When he thought it was time, the engineer knelt down upon the sand and began +marking the decrease in the length of the shadow by means of little wooden +pegs. His companions, bending over him, watched the operation with the utmost +interest. +</p> + +<p> +The reporter, chronometer in hand, stood ready to mark the minute when the +shadow would be shortest. Now, as this 16th of April was a day when the true +and mean time are the same, Spilett’s watch would give the true time of +Washington, and greatly simplify the calculation. +</p> + +<p> +Meantime the shadow diminished little by little, and as soon as Smith perceived +it begin to lengthen he exclaimed:— +</p> + +<p> +“Now!” +</p> + +<p> +“One minute past 5,” answered the reporter. +</p> + +<p> +Nothing then remained but the easy work of summing up the result. There was, as +we have seen, five hours difference between the meridian of Washington and that +of the island. Now, the sun passes around the earth at the rate of 15° an hour. +Fifteen multiplied by five gives seventy-five. And as Washington is in 77° +3’ 11” from the meridian of Greenwich, it follows that the island +was in the neighborhood of longitude 152° west. +</p> + +<p> +Smith announced this result to his companions, and, making the same allowance +as before, he was able to affirm that the bearing of the island was between the +35° and 37° of south latitude, and between the 150° and 155° of west longitude. +</p> + +<p> +The difference in this calculation, attributable to errors in observation, was +placed, as we have seen, at 5° or 300 miles in each direction. But this error +did not influence the conclusion that Lincoln Island was so far from any +continent or archipelago that they could not attempt to accomplish the distance +in a small boat. +</p> + +<p> +In fact, according to the engineer, they were at least 1,200 miles from Tahiti +and from the Low Archipelago, fully 1,800 miles from New Zealand, and more than +4,500 miles from the coast of America. +</p> + +<p> +And when Cyrus Smith searched his memory, he could not remember any island in +the Pacific occupying the position of Lincoln Island. +</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2><a name="XV" id="XV"></a>CHAPTER XV.</h2> + +<p class="letter"> +WINTER SETS IN—THE METALLUGRIC QUESTION—THE EXPLORATION OF SAFETY +ISLAND—A SEAL HUNT—CAPTURE OF AN ECHIDNA—THE AI—THE +CATALONIAN METHOD—MAKING IRON AND STEEL. +</p> + +<p> +The first words of the sailor, on the morning of the 17th of April, +were:— +</p> + +<p> +“Well, what are we going to do to-day?” +</p> + +<p> +“Whatever Mr. Smith chooses,” answered the reporter. +</p> + +<p> +The companions of the engineer, having been brickmakers and potters, were about +to become metal-workers. +</p> + +<p> +The previous day, after lunch, the party had explored as far as the extremity +of Mandible Cape, some seven miles from the Chimneys. The extensive downs here +came to an end and the soil appeared volcanic. There were no longer high walls, +as at Prospect Plateau, but the narrow gulf between the two capes was enframed +by a fantastic border of the mineral matter discharged from the volcano. Having +reached this point, the colonists retraced their steps to the Chimneys, but +they could not sleep until the question whether they should look forwards to +leaving Lincoln Island had been definitely settled. +</p> + +<p> +The 1,200 miles to the Low Archipelago was a long distance. And now, at the +beginning of the stormy season, a small boat would certainly not be able to +accomplish it. The building of a boat, even when the proper tools are provided, +is a difficult task, and as the colonists had none of these, the first thing to +do was to make hammers, hatchets, adzes, saws, augers, planes, etc., which +would take some time. It was therefore decided to winter on Lincoln Island, and +to search for a more comfortable dwelling than the Chimneys in which to live +during the inclement weather. +</p> + +<p> +The first thing was to utilize the iron ore which the engineer had discovered, +by transforming it into iron and steel. +</p> + +<p> +Iron ore is usually found in combination with oxygen or sulphur. And it was so +in this instance, as of the two specimens brought back by Cyrus Smith one was +magnetic iron, and the other pyrites or sulphuret of iron. Of these, it was the +first kind, the magnetic ore, or oxide of iron, which must be reduced by coal, +that is to say, freed from the oxygen, in order to obtain the pure metal. This +reduction is performed by submitting the ore to a great heat, either by the +Catalonian method, which has the advantage of producing the metal at one +operation, or by means of blast furnaces which first smelt the ore, and then +the iron, carrying off the 3 or 4 per cent of coal combined with it. +</p> + +<p> +The engineer wanted to obtain iron in the shortest way possible. The ore he had +found was in itself very pure and rich. Such ore is found in rich grey masses, +yielding a black dust crystallized in regular octahedrons, highly magnetic, and +in Europe the best quality of iron is made from it. Not far from this vein was +the coal field previously explored by the colonists, so that every facility +existed for the treatment of the ore. +</p> + +<p> +“Then, sir, are we going to work the iron?” questioned Pencroff. +“Yes, my friend,” answered the engineer. +</p> + +<p> +“But first we will do something I think you will enjoy—have a seal +hunt on the island.” +</p> + +<p> +“A seal hunt!” cried the sailor, addressing Spilett “Do we +need seals to make iron?” +</p> + +<p> +“It seems so, since Cyrus has said it,” replied the reporter. +</p> + +<p> +But as the engineer had already left the Chimneys, Pencroff prepared for the +chase without gaining an explanation. +</p> + +<p> +Soon the whole party were gathered upon the beach at a point where the channel +could be forded at low water without wading deeper than the knees. This was +Smith’s first visit to the islet upon which his companions had been +thrown by the balloon. On their landing, hundreds of penguins looked fearlessly +at them, and the colonists armed with clubs could have killed numbers of these +birds, but it would have been useless slaughter, and it would not do to +frighten the seals which were lying on the sand some cable lengths away. They +respected also certain innocent-looking sphemiscus, with flattened side +appendages, mere apologies for wings, and covered with scale-like vestiges of +feathers. +</p> + +<p> +The colonists marched stealthily forward over ground riddled with holes which +formed the nests of aquatic birds. Towards the end of the island, black +objects, like moving rocks, appeared above the surface of the water, they were +the seals the hunters wished to capture. +</p> + +<p> +It was necessary to allow them to land, as, owing to their shape, these +animals, although capital swimmers and difficult to seize in the sea, can move +but slowly on the shore. Pencroff, who knew their habits, counselled waiting +until the seals were sunning themselves asleep on the sand. Then the party +could manage so as to cut off their retreat and despatch them with a blow on +the muzzle. The hunters therefore hid themselves behind the rocks and waited +quietly. +</p> + +<p> +In about an hour half a dozen seals crawled on to the sand, and Pencroff and +Herbert went off round the point of the island so as to cut off their retreat, +while the three others, hidden by the rocks, crept forward to the place of +encounter. +</p> + +<p> +Suddenly the tall form of the sailor was seen. He gave a shout, and the +engineer and his companions hurriedly threw themselves between the seals and +the sea. They succeeded in beating two of the animals to death, but the others +escaped. +</p> + +<p> +“Here are your seals, Mr. Smith,” cried the sailor, coming forward. +</p> + +<p> +“And now we will make bellows,” replied the engineer. +</p> + +<p> +“Bellows!” exclaimed the sailor. “These seals are in +luck.” +</p> + +<p> +It was, in effect, a huge pair of bellows, necessary in the reduction of the +ore, which the engineer expected to make from the skins of the seals. They were +medium-sized, about six feet long, and had heads resembling those of dogs. As +it was useless to burden themselves with the whole carcass, Neb and Pencroff +resolved to skin them on the spot, while Smith and the reporter made the +exploration of the island. +</p> + +<p> +The sailor and the negro acquitted themselves well, and three hours later Smith +had at his disposal two seal skins, which he intended to use just as they were, +without tanning. +</p> + +<p> +The colonists, waiting until low water, re-crossed the channel and returned to +the Chimneys. +</p> + +<p> +It was no easy matter to stretch the skins upon the wooden frames and to sew +them so as to make them sufficiently air-tight. Smith had nothing but the two +knives to work with, yet he was so ingenious and his companions aided him so +intelligently, that, three days later, the number of implements of the little +colony was increased by a bellows intended to inject air into the midst of the +ore during its treatment by heat—a requisite to the success of the +operation. +</p> + +<p> +It was on the morning of the 20th of April that what the reporter called in his +notes the “iron age” began. The engineer had decided to work near +the deposits of coal and iron, which were situated at the base of the +northeasterly spurs of Mount Franklin, six miles from the Chimneys. And as it +would not be possible to go back and forth each day, it was decided to camp +upon the ground in a temporary hut, so that they could attend to the important +work night and day. +</p> + +<p> +This settled, they left in the morning, Neb and Pencroff carrying the bellows +and a stock of provisions, which latter they would add to on the way. +</p> + +<p> +The road led through the thickest part of Jacamar Wood, in a northwesterly +direction. It was as well to break a path which would henceforth be the most +direct route between Prospect Plateau and Mount Franklin. The trees belonging +to the species already recognized were magnificent, and Herbert discovered +another, the dragon tree, which Pencroff designated as an “overgrown +onion,” which, notwithstanding its height, belongs to the same family of +liliaceous plants as the onion, the civet, the shallot, or the asparagus. These +dragon trees have ligneous roots which, cooked, are excellent, and which, +fermented, yield a very agreeable liquor. They therefore gathered some. +</p> + +<p> +It took the entire day to traverse the wood, but the party were thus able to +observe its fauna and flora. Top, specially charged to look after the fauna, +ran about in the grass and bushes, flushing all kinds of game. Herbert and +Spilett shot two kangaroos and an animal which was like a hedge-hog, in that it +rolled itself into a ball and erected its quills, and like an ant-eater, in +that it was provided with claws for digging, a long and thin snout terminating +in a beak, and an extensile tongue furnished with little points, which enabled +it to hold insects. +</p> + +<p> +“And what does it look like boiling in the pot?” asked Pencroff, +naturally. +</p> + +<p> +“Like an excellent piece of beef,” answered Herbert. +</p> + +<p> +“We don’t want to know any more than that,” said the sailor. +</p> + +<p> +During the march they saw some wild boars, but they did not attempt to attack +the little troupe, and it seemed that they were not going to have any encounter +with savage beasts, when the reporter saw in a dense thicket, among the lower +branches of a tree, an animal which he took to be a bear, and which he began +tranquilly to sketch. Fortunately for Spilett, the animal in question did not +belong to that redoubtable family of plantigrades. It was an ai, better known +as a sloth, which has a body like that of a large dog, a rough and +dirty-colored skin, the feet armed with strong claws which enable it to grasp +the branches of trees and feed upon the leaves. Having identified the animal +without disturbing it, Spilett struck out “bear” and wrote +“ai” under his drawing and the route was resumed. +</p> + +<p> +At 5 o’clock Smith called a halt. They were past the forest and at the +beginning of the massive spurs which buttressed Mount Franklin towards the +east. A few hundred paces distant was Red Creek; so drinking water was not +wanting. +</p> + +<p> +The camp was made. In less than an hour a hut, constructed from the branches of +the tropical bindweed, and stopped with loam, was erected under the trees on +the edge of the forest. They deferred the geological work until the next day. +Supper was prepared, a good fire blazed before the hut, the spit turned, and at +8 o’clock, while one of the party kept the fire going, in case some +dangerous beast should prowl around, the others slept soundly. +</p> + +<p> +The next morning, Smith, accompanied by Herbert, went to look for the place +where they had found the specimen of ore. They found the deposit on the +surface, near the sources of the creek, close to the base of one of the +northeast buttresses. This mineral, very rich in iron, enclosed in its fusible +vein-stone, was perfectly suited to the method of reduction which the engineer +intended to employ, which was the simplified Catalonian process practised in +Corsica. +</p> + +<p> +This method properly required the construction of ovens and crucibles in which +the ore and the coal, placed in alternate layers, were transformed and reduced. +But Smith proposed to simplify matters by simply making a huge cube of coal and +ore, into the centre of which the air from the bellows would be introduced. +This was, probably, what Tubal Cain did. And a process which gave such good +results to Adam’s grandson would doubtless succeed with the colonists of +Lincoln Island. +</p> + +<p> +The coal was collected with the same facility as the ore, and the latter was +broken into little pieces and the impurities picked from it. Then the coal and +ore were heaped together in successive layers—just as a charcoal-burner +arranges his wood. Thus arranged, under the influence of the air from the +bellows, the coal would change into carbonic acid, then into oxide of carbon, +which would release the oxygen from the oxide of iron. +</p> + +<p> +The engineer proceeded in this manner. The sealskin bellows, furnished with a +pipe of refractory earth (an earth difficult of fusion), which had previously +been prepared at the pottery, was set up close to the heap of ore. And, moved +by a mechanism consisting of a frame, fibre-cords, and balance-weight, it +injected into the mass a supply of air, which, by raising the temperature, +assisted the chemical transformation which would give the pure metal. +</p> + +<p> +The operation was difficult. It took all the patience and ingenuity of the +colonists to conduct it properly; but finally it succeeded, and the result was +a pig of iron in a spongy state, which must be cut and forged in order to expel +the liquified gangue. It was evident that these self-constituted smiths wanted +a hammer, but they were no worse off than the first metallurgist, and they did +as he must have done. +</p> + +<p> +The first pig, fastened to a wooden handle, served as a hammer with which to +forge the second upon an anvil of granite, and they thus obtained a coarse +metal, but one which could be utilized. +</p> + +<p> +At length, after much trouble and labor, on the 25th of April, many bars of +iron had been forged and turned into crowbars, pincers, pickaxes, mattocks, +etc., which Pencroff and Neb declared to be real jewels. +</p> + +<p> +But in order to be in its most serviceable state, iron must be turned into +steel. Now steel, which is a combination of iron and carbon, is made in two +ways: first from cast iron, by decarburetting the molten metal, which gives +natural or puddled steel; and, second, by the method of cementation, which +consists in carburetting malleable iron. As the engineer had iron in a pure +state, he chose the latter method, and heated the metal with powdered charcoal +in a crucible made from refractory earth. +</p> + +<p> +This steel, which was malleable hot and cold, he worked with the hammer. And +Neb and Pencroff, skillfully directed, made axe-heads, which, heated red-hot +and quickly plunged in cold water, took an excellent temper. +</p> + +<p> +Other instruments, such as planes and hatchets, were rudely fashioned, and +bands of steel were made into saws and chisels; and from the iron, mattocks, +shovels, pickaxes, hammers, nails, etc., were manufactured. +</p> + +<p> +By the 5th of May the first metallurgic period was ended, the smiths returned +to the Chimneys, and new work would soon authorize their assumption of a new +title. +</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2><a name="XVI" id="XVI"></a>CHAPTER XVI.</h2> + +<p class="letter"> +THE QUESTION OF A DWELLING DISCUSSED AGAIN—PENCROFF’S +IDEAS—AN EXPLORATION TO THE NORTH OF THE LAKE—THE WESTERN BOUNDARY +OF THE PLATEAU—THE SERPENTS—THE OUTLET OF THE +LAKE—TOP’S ALARM—TOP SWIMMING—A FIGHT UNDER +WATER—THE DUGONG. +</p> + +<p> +It was the 6th of May, corresponding to the 6th of November in the Northern +Hemisphere. For some days the sky had been cloudy, and it was important to make +provision against winter. However, the temperature had not lessened much, and a +centigrade thermometer transported to Lincoln Island would have averaged 10° or +12° above zero. This would not be surprising, since Lincoln Island, from its +probable situation in the Southern Hemisphere, was subject to the same climatic +influences as Greece or Sicily in the Northern. But just as the intense cold in +Greece and Sicily sometimes produces snow and ice, so, in the height of winter, +this island would probably experience sudden changes in the temperature against +which it would be well to provide. +</p> + +<p> +At any rate, if the cold was not threatening, the rainy season was at hand, and +upon this desolate island, in the wide Pacific, exposed to all the inclemency +of the elements, the storms would be frequent, and, probably, terrible. +</p> + +<p> +The question of a more comfortable habitation than the Chimneys ought, +therefore, to be seriously considered, and promptly acted upon. +</p> + +<p> +Pencroff having discovered the Chimneys, naturally had a predilection for them; +but he understood very well that another place must be found. This refuge had +already been visited by the sea, and it would not do to expose themselves to a +like accident. +</p> + +<p> +“Moreover,” added Smith, who was discussing these things with his +companions, “there are some precautions to take.” +</p> + +<p> +“Why? The island is not inhabited,” said the reporter. +</p> + +<p> +“Probably not,” answered the engineer, “although we have not +yet explored the whole of it; but if there are no human beings, I believe +dangerous beasts are numerous. So it will be better to provide a shelter +against a possible attack, than for one of us to be tending the fire every +night. And then, my friends, we must foresee everything. We are here in a part +of the Pacific often frequented by Malay pirates—” +</p> + +<p> +“What, at this distance from land?” exclaimed Herbert. +</p> + +<p> +“Yes, my boy, these pirates are hardy sailors as well as formidable +villains, and we must provide for them accordingly.” +</p> + +<p> +“Well,” said Pencroff, “we will fortify ourselves against two +and four-footed savages. But, sir, wouldn’t it be as well to explore the +island thoroughly before doing anything else?” +</p> + +<p> +“It would be better,” added Spilett; “who knows but we may +find on the opposite coast one or more of those caves which we have looked for +here in vain.” +</p> + +<p> +“Very true,” answered the engineer, “but you forget, my +friends, that we must be somewhere near running water, and that from Mount +Franklin we were unable to see either brook or river in that direction. Here, +on the contrary, we are between the Mercy and Lake Grant, which is an advantage +not to be neglected. And, moreover, as this coast faces the east, it is not as +exposed to the trade winds, which blow from the northwest in this +hemisphere.” +</p> + +<p> +“Well, then, Mr. Smith,” replied the sailor, “let us build a +house on the edge of the lake. We are no longer without bricks and tools. After +having been brickmakers, potters, founders, and smiths, we ought to be masons +easily enough.” +</p> + +<p> +“Yes, my friend; but before deciding it will be well to look about. A +habitation all ready made would save us a great deal of work, and would, +doubtless, offer a surer retreat, in which we would be safe from enemies, +native as well as foreign?” +</p> + +<p> +“But, Cyrus,” answered the reporter, “have we not already +examined the whole of this great granite wall without finding even a +hole?” +</p> + +<p> +“No, not one!” added Pencroff. “If we could only dig a place +in it high out of reach, that would be the thing! I can see it now, on the part +overlooking the sea, five or six chambers—” +</p> + +<p> +“With windows!” said Herbert, laughing. +</p> + +<p> +“And a staircase!” added Neb. +</p> + +<p> +“Why do you laugh?” cried the sailor. “Haven’t we picks +and mattocks? Cannot Mr. Smith make powder to blow up the mine. You will be +able, won’t you, sir, to make powder when we want it?” +</p> + +<p> +The engineer had listened to the enthusiastic sailor developing these +imaginative projects. To attack this mass of granite, even by mining, was an +Herculean task, and it was truly vexing that nature had not helped them in +their necessity. But he answered Pencroff, by simply proposing to examine the +wall more attentively, from the mouth of the river to the angle which ended it +to the north. They therefore went out and examined it most carefully for about +two miles. But everywhere it rose, uniform and upright, without any visible +cavity. The rock-pigeons flying about its summit had their nests in holes +drilled in the very crest, or upon the irregularly cut edge of the granite. +</p> + +<p> +To attempt to make a sufficient excavation in such a massive wall even with +pickaxe and powder was not to be thought of. It was vexatious enough. By +chance, Pencroff had discovered in the Chimneys, which must now be abandoned, +the only temporary, habitable shelter on this part of the coast. +</p> + +<p> +When the survey was ended the colonists found themselves at the northern angle +of the wall, where it sunk by long declivities to the shore. From this point to +its western extremity it was nothing more than a sort of talus composed of +stones, earth, and sand bound together by plants, shrubs, and grass, in a slope +of about 45°. Here and there the granite thrust its sharp points out from the +cliff. Groups of trees grew over these slopes and there was a thin carpet of +grass. But the vegetation extended but a short distance, and then the long +stretch of sand, beginning at the foot of the talus, merged into the beach. +</p> + +<p> +Smith naturally thought that the over flow of the lake fell in this direction, +as the excess of water from Red Creek must be discharged somewhere, and this +point had not been found less on the side already explored, that is to say from +the mouth of the creek westward as far as Prospect Plateau. +</p> + +<p> +The engineer proposed to his companions that they clamber up the talus and +return to the Chimneys by the heights, exploring the eastern and western shores +of the lake. The proposition was accepted, and, in a few minutes, Herbert and +Neb had climbed to the plateau, the others following more leisurely. +</p> + +<p> +Two hundred feet distant the beautiful sheet of water shone through the leaves +in the sunlight. The landscape was charming. The trees in autumn tints, were +harmoniously grouped. Some huge old weatherbeaten trunks stood out in sharp +relief against the green turf which covered the ground, and brilliant +cockatoos, like moving, prisms, glanced among the branches, uttering their +shrill screams. +</p> + +<p> +The colonists, instead of proceeding directly to the north bank of the lake, +bore along the edge of the plateau, so as to come back to the mouth of the +creek, on its left bank. It was a circuit of about a mile and a half. The walk +was easy, as the trees, set wide apart, left free passage between them. They +could see that the fertile zone stopped at this point, and that the vegetation +here, was less vigorous than anywhere between the creek and the Mercy. +</p> + +<p> +Smith and his companions moved cautiously over this unexplored neighborhood. +Bows and arrows and iron-pointed sticks were their sole weapons. But no beast +showed itself, and it was probable that the animals kept to the thicker forests +in the south. The colonists, however, experienced a disagreeable sensation in +seeing Top stop before a huge serpent 14 or 15 feet long. Neb killed it at a +blow. Smith examined the reptile, and pronounced it to belong to the species of +diamond-serpents eaten by the natives of New South Wales and not venomous, but +it was possible others existed whose bite was mortal, such as the forked-tail +deaf viper, which rise up under the foot, or the winged serpents, furnished +with two ear-like appendages, which enable them to shoot forward with extreme +rapidity. Top having gotten over his surprise, pursued these reptiles with +reckless fierceness, and his master was constantly obliged to call him in. +</p> + +<p> +The mouth of Red Creek, where it emptied into the lake, was soon reached. The +party recognized on the opposite bank the point visited on their descent from +Mount Franklin. Smith ascertained that the supply of water from the creek was +considerable; there therefore must be an outlet for the overflow somewhere. It +was this place which must be found, as, doubtless, it made a fall which could +be utilized as a motive power. +</p> + +<p> +The colonists, strolling along, without, however, straying too far from each +other, began to follow round the bank of the lake, which was very abrupt. The +water was full of fishes, and Pencroff promised himself soon to manufacture +some apparatus with which to capture them. +</p> + +<p> +It was necessary first to double the point at the northeast. They had thought +that the discharge would be here, as the water flowed close to the edge of the +plateau. But as it was not here, the colonists continued along the bank, which, +after a slight curve, followed parallel with the sea-shore. +</p> + +<p> +On this side the bank was less wooded, but clumps of trees, here and there, +made a picturesque landscape. The whole extent of the lake, unmoved by a single +ripple, was visible before, them. Top, beating the bush, flushed many coveys of +birds, which Spilett and Herbert saluted with their arrows. One of these birds, +cleverly hit by the lad, dropped in the rushes. Top rushing after it, brought +back a beautiful slate-colored water fowl. It was a coot, as large as a big +partridge, belonging to the group of machio-dactyls, which form the division +between the waders and the palmipedes. Poor game and bad tasting, but as Top +was not as difficult to please as his masters, it was agreed that the bird +would answer for his supper. +</p> + +<p> +Then the colonists, following the southern bank of the lake, soon came to the +place they had previously visited. The engineer was very much surprised, as he +had seen no indication of an outlet to the surplus water. In talking with the +reporter and the sailor, he did not conceal his astonishment. +</p> + +<p> +At this moment, Top, who had been behaving himself quietly, showed signs of +alarm. The intelligent animal, running along the bank, suddenly stopped, with +one foot raised, and looked into the water as if pointing some invisible game. +Then he barked furiously, questioning it, as it were, and again was suddenly +silent. +</p> + +<p> +At first neither Smith nor his companions paid any attention to the dog’s +actions, but his barking became so incessant, that the engineer noticed it. +</p> + +<p> +“What is it, Top?” he called. +</p> + +<p> +The dog bounded towards his master, and, showing a real anxiety, rushed back to +the bank. Then, suddenly, he threw himself into the lake. +</p> + +<p> +“Come back here, Top,” cried the engineer, not wishing his dog to +venture in those supicious waters. +</p> + +<p> +“What’s going on under there?” asked the sailor examining the +surface of the lake. +</p> + +<p> +“Top has smelt something amphibious,” answered Herbert. +</p> + +<p> +“It must be an alligator,” said the reporter. +</p> + +<p> +“I don’t think so,” answered Smith. “Alligators are not +met with in this latitude.” +</p> + +<p> +Meantime, Top came ashore at the call of his master, but he could not be quiet; +he rushed along the bank, through the tall grass, and, guided by instinct, +seemed to be following some object, invisible under the water, which was +hugging the shore. Nevertheless the surface was calm and undisturbed by a +ripple. Often the colonists stood still on the bank and watched the water, but +they could discover nothing. There certainly was some mystery here, and the +engineer was much perplexed. +</p> + +<p> +“We will follow out this exploration,” he said. +</p> + +<p> +In half an hour all had arrived at the southeast angle of the lake, and were +again upon Prospect Plateau. They had made the circle of the bank without the +engineer having discovered either where or how the surplus water was +discharged. +</p> + +<p> +“Nevertheless, this outlet exists,” he repeated, “and, since +it is not outside, it must penetrate the massive granite of the coast!” +</p> + +<p> +“And why do you want to find that out?” asked Spilett. +</p> + +<p> +“Because,” answered the engineer, “if the outlet is through +the solid rock it is possible that there is some cavity, which could be easily +rendered habitable, after having turned the water in another direction.” +</p> + +<p> +“But may not the water flow into the sea, through a subterranean outlet +at the bottom of the lake?” asked Herbert. +</p> + +<p> +“Perhaps so,” answered Smith, “and in that case, since Nature +has not aided us, we must build our house ourselves.” +</p> + +<p> +As it was 5 o’clock, the colonists were thinking of returning to the +Chimneys across the plateau, when Top again became excited, and, barking with +rage, before his master could hold him, he sprang a second time into the lake. +Every one ran to the bank. The dog was already twenty feet off, and Smith +called to him to come back, when suddenly an enormous head emerged from the +water. +</p> + +<p> +Herbert instantly recognized it, the comical face, with huge eyes and long +silky moustaches. +</p> + +<p> +“A manatee,” he cried. +</p> + +<p> +Although not a manatee, it was a dugong, which belongs to the same species. +</p> + +<p> +The huge monster threw himself upon the dog. His master could do nothing to +save him, and, before Spilett or Herbert could draw their bows, Top, seized by +the dugong, had disappeared under the water. +</p> + +<p> +Neb, spear in hand, would have sprung to the rescue of the dog, and attacked +the formidable monster in its own element, had he not been held back by his +master. +</p> + +<p> +Meanwhile a struggle was going on under the water—a struggle which, owing +to the powerlessness of the dog, was inexplicable; a struggle which, they could +see by the agitation of the surface, was becoming more terrible each moment; in +short, a struggle which could only be terminated by the death of the dog. But +suddenly, through the midst of a circle of foam, Top appeared, shot upward by +some unknown force, rising ten feet in the air, and falling again into the +tumultuous waters, from which he escaped to shore without any serious wounds, +miraculously saved. +</p> + +<p> +Cyrus Smith and his companions looked on amazed. Still more inexplicable, it +seemed as if the struggle under water continued. Doubtless the dugong, after +having seized the dog, had been attacked by some more formidable animal, and +had been obliged to defend itself. +</p> + +<p> +But this did not last much longer. The water grew red with blood, and the body +of the dugong, emerging from the waves, floated on to a little shoal at the +southern angle of the lake. +</p> + +<p> +The colonists ran to where the animal lay, and found it dead. Its body was +enormous, measuring between 15 and 16 feet long and weighing between 3,000 and +4,000 pounds. On its neck, yawned a wound, which seemed to have been made by +some sharp instrument. +</p> + +<p> +What was it that had been able, by this terrible cut, to kill the formidable +dugong? None of them could imagine, and, preoccupied with these incidents, they +returned to the Chimneys. +</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2><a name="XVII" id="XVII"></a>CHAPTER XVII</h2> + +<p class="letter"> +A VISIT TO THE LAKE—THE DIRECTION OF THE CURRENT—THE PROSPECTS OF +CYRUS SMITH—THE DUGONG FAT—THE USE OF THE SCHISTOUS +LIMESTONE—THE SULPHATE OF IRON—HOW GLYCERINE IS +MADE—SOAP—SALTPETRE—SULPHURIC ACID—NITRIC +ACID—THE NEW OUTLET. +</p> + +<p> +The next day, the 7th of May, Smith and Spilett, leaving Neb to prepare the +breakfast, climbed the plateau, while Herbert and Pencroff went after a fresh +supply of wood. +</p> + +<p> +The engineer and the reporter soon arrived, at the little beach where the +dugong lay stranded. Already flocks of birds had gathered about the carcass, +and it was necessary to drive them off with stones, as the engineer wished to +preserve the fat for the use of the colony. As to the flesh of the dugong, it +would undoubtedly furnish excellent food, as in certain portions of the Malay +archipelago it is reserved for the table of the native princes. But it was +Neb’s affair to look after that. +</p> + +<p> +Just now, Cyrus Smith was thinking of other things. The incident of the day +before was constantly presenting itself. He wanted to solve the mystery of that +unseen combat, and to know what congener of the mastodons or other marine +monster had given the dugong this strange wound. +</p> + +<p> +He stood upon the border of the lake, looking upon its tranquil surface +sparkling under the rays of the rising sun. From the little beach where the +dugong lay, the waters deepened slowly towards the centre, and the lake might +be likened to a large basin, filled by the supply from Red Creek. +</p> + +<p> +“Well, Cyrus,” questioned the reporter, “I don’t see +anything suspicious in this?” +</p> + +<p> +“No, my dear fellow, and I am at a loss how to explain yesterday’s +affair.” +</p> + +<p> +“The wound on this beast is strange enough, and I can’t understand +how Top could have been thrown out of the water in that way. One would suppose +that it had been done by a strong arm, and that that same arm, wielding a +poignard, had given the dugong his death-wound.” +</p> + +<p> +“It would seem so,” answered the engineer, who had become +thoughtful. “There is something here which I cannot understand. But +neither can we explain how I myself was saved; how I was snatched from the +waves and borne to the downs. Therefore, I am sure there is some mystery which +we will some day discover. In the mean time, let us take care not to discuss +these singular incidents before our companions, but keep our thoughts for each +other, and continue our work.” +</p> + +<p> +It will be remembered that Smith had not yet discovered what became of the +surplus water of the lake, and as there was no indication of its ever +overflowing, an outlet must exist somewhere. He was surprised, therefore, on +noticing a slight current just at this place. Throwing in some leaves and bits +of wood, and observing their drift, he followed this current, which brought him +to the southern end of the lake. Here he detected a slight depression in the +waters, as if they were suddenly lost in some opening below. +</p> + +<p> +Smith listened, placing his ear to the surface of the lake, and distinctly +heard the sound of a subterranean fall. +</p> + +<p> +“It is there,” said he, rising, “there that the water is +discharged, there, doubtless, through a passage in the massive granite that it +goes to join the sea, through cavities which we will be able to utilize to our +profit! Well! I will find out!” +</p> + +<p> +The engineer cut a long branch, stripped off its leaves, and, plunging it down +at the angle of the two banks, he found that there was a large open hole a foot +below the surface. This was the long-sought-for outlet, and such was the force +of the current that the branch was snatched from his hands and disappeared. +</p> + +<p> +“There can be no doubt of it now,” repeated the engineer. “It +is the mouth of the outlet, and I am going to work to uncover it. +</p> + +<p> +“How?” inquired Spilett. +</p> + +<p> +“By lowering the lake three feet.” +</p> + +<p> +“And how will you do that?” +</p> + +<p> +“By opening another vent larger than this.” +</p> + +<p> +“Whereabouts, Cyrus?” +</p> + +<p> +“Where the bank is nearest the coast.” +</p> + +<p> +“But it is a granite wall,” exclaimed Spilett, +</p> + +<p> +“Very well,” replied Smith. “I will blow up the wall, and the +waters, escaping, will subside so as to discover the orifice—” +</p> + +<p> +“And will make a waterfall at the cliff,” added the reporter. +</p> + +<p> +“A fall that we will make use of!” answered Cyrus. “Come, +come!” +</p> + +<p> +The engineer hurried off his companion, whose confidence in Smith was such that +he doubted not the success of the undertaking. And yet, this wall of granite, +how would they begin: how, without powder, with but imperfect tools, could they +blast the rock? Had not the engineer undertaken a work beyond his skill to +accomplish? +</p> + +<p> +When Smith and the reporter re-entered the Chimneys, they found Herbert and +Pencroff occupied in unloading their raft. +</p> + +<p> +“The wood-choppers have finished, sir,” said the sailor, laughing, +“and when you want masons—” +</p> + +<p> +“Not masons, but chemists,” interrupted the engineer. +</p> + +<p> +“Yes,” added Spilett, “we are going to blow up the +island.” +</p> + +<p> +“Blow up the island?” cried the sailor. +</p> + +<p> +“A part of it, at least,” answered the reporter. +</p> + +<p> +“Listen to me, my friends,” said the engineer, who thereupon made +known the result of his observations. His theory was, that a cavity, more or +less considerable, existed in the mass of granite which upheld Prospect +Plateau, and he undertook to penetrate to it. To do this, it was first +necessary to free the present opening, in other words to lower the level of the +lake by giving the water a larger issue. To do this they must manufacture an +explosive with which to make a drain in another part of the bank. It was this +Smith was going to attempt to do, with the minerals Nature had placed at his +disposal. +</p> + +<p> +All entered into the proposal with enthusiasm. Neb and Pencroff were at once +detailed to extract the fat from the dugong and to preserve the flesh for food; +and soon after their departure the others, carrying the hurdle, went up the +shore to the vein of coal, where were to be found the schistous pyrites of +which Smith had procured a specimen. +</p> + +<p> +The whole day was employed in bringing a quantity of these pyrites to the +Chimneys, and by evening they had several tons. +</p> + +<p> +On the next day, the 8th of May, the engineer began his manipulations. The +schistous pyrites were principally composed of carbon, of silica, of alumina, +and sulphuret of iron,—these were in excess,—it was necessary to +separate the sulphuret and change it into sulphate by the quickest means. The +sulphate obtained, they would extract the Sulphuric acid, which was what they +wanted. +</p> + +<p> +Sulphuric acid is one of the agents in most general use, and the industrial +importance of a nation can be measured by its consumption. In the future this +acid would be of use to the colonists in making candles, tanning skins, etc., +but at present the engineer reserved it for another purpose. +</p> + +<p> +Smith chose, behind the Chimneys, a place upon which the earth was carefully +levelled. On this he made a pile of branches and cut wood, on which were placed +pieces of schistous pyrites leaning against each other, and then all was +covered over with a thin layer of pyrites previously reduced to the size of +nuts. +</p> + +<p> +This done, they set the wood on, fire, which in turn inflamed the schist, as it +contained carbon and sulphur. Then new layers of pyrites were arranged so as to +form an immense heap, surrounded with earth, and grass, with air-holes left +here and there, just as is done in reducing a pile of wood to charcoal. +</p> + +<p> +Then they left the transformation to complete itself. It would take ten or +twelve days for the sulphuret of iron and the alumina to change into sulphates, +which substances were equally soluble; the others—silica, burnt carbon, +and cinders—were not so. +</p> + +<p> +While this chemical process was accomplishing itself, Smith employed his +companions upon other branches of the work, which they undertook with the +utmost zeal. +</p> + +<p> +Neb and Pencroff had taken the fat from the dugong, which had been placed in +large earthen jars. It was necessary to separate the glycerine from this fat by +saponifying it. It was sufficient, in order to do this, to treat it with chalk +or soda. Chalk was not wanting, but by this treatment the soap would be +calcareous and useless, while by using soda, a soluble soap, which could be +employed for domestic purposes, would be the result. Cyrus Smith, being a +practical man, preferred to try to get the soda. Was this difficult? No, since +many kinds of marine plants abounded on the shore, and all those fucaceæ which +form wrack. They therefore gathered a great quantity of these seaweed, which +were first dried, and, afterwards, burnt in trenches in the open air. The +combustion of these plants was continued for many days, so that the heat +penetrated throughout, and the result was the greyish compact mass, long known +as “natural soda.” +</p> + +<p> +This accomplished, the engineer treated the fat with the soda, which gave both +a soluble soap and the neutral substance, glycerine. +</p> + +<p> +But this was not all. Smith wanted, in view of his future operations, another +substance, nitrate of potash, better known as saltpetre. +</p> + +<p> +He could make this by treating carbonate of potash, which is easily extracted +from vegetable ashes, with nitric acid. But this acid, which was precisely what +he wanted in order to complete his undertaking successfully, he did not have. +Fortunately, in this emergency, Nature furnished him with saltpetre, without +any labor other than picking it up. Herbert had found a vein of this mineral at +the foot of Mount Franklin, and all they had to do was to purify the salt. +</p> + +<p> +These different undertakings, which occupied eight days, were finished before +the sulphate of iron was ready. During the interval the colonists made some +refractory pottery in plastic clay, and constructed a brick furnace of a +peculiar shape, in which to distil the sulphate of iron. All was finished on +the 18th of May, the very day the chemical work was completed. +</p> + +<p> +The result of this latter operation, consisting of sulphate of iron, sulphate +of alumina, silica, and a residue of charcoal and cinders, was placed, in a +basin full of water. Having stirred up the mixture, they let it settle, and at +length poured off a clear liquid holding the sulphates of iron and alumina in +solution. Finally, this liquid was partly evaporated, the sulphate of iron +crystalized, and the mother-water was thrown away. +</p> + +<p> +Smith had now a quantity of crystals, from which the sulphuric acid was to be +extracted. +</p> + +<p> +In commerce this acid is manufactured in large quantities and by elaborate +processes. The engineer had no such means at his command, but he knew that in +Bohemia an acid known as Nordhausen is made by simpler means, which has, +moreover, the advantage of being non-concentrated. For obtaining the acid in +this way, all the engineer had to do was to calcinize the crystals in a closed +jar in such a manner that the sulphuric acid distilled in vapor, which would in +turn produce the acid by condensation. +</p> + +<p> +It was for this that the refractory jars and the furnace had been made. The +operation was a success; and on the 20th of May, twelve days after having +begun, Smith was the possessor of the agent which he expected to use later in +different ways. +</p> + +<p> +What did he want with it now? Simply to produce nitric acid, which was +perfectly easy, since the saltpetre, attacked by the sulphuric acid, would give +it by distillation. +</p> + +<p> +But how would he use this acid? None of the others knew, as he had spoken no +word on the subject. +</p> + +<p> +The work approached completion, and one more operation would procure the +substance which had required all this labor. The engineer mixed the nitric acid +with the glycerine, which latter had been previously concentrated by +evaporation in a water-bath, and without employing any freezing mixture, +obtained many pints of an oily yellow liquid. +</p> + +<p> +This last operation Smith had conducted alone, at some distance from the +Chimneys, as he feared an explosion, and when he returned, with a flagon of +this liquid, to his friends, he simply said:—“Here is some +nitro-glycerine!” +</p> + +<p> +It was, in truth, that terrible product, whose explosive power is, perhaps, ten +times as great as that of gunpowder, and which has caused so many accidents! +Although, since means have been found of transforming it into dynamite, that +is, of mixing it with clay or sugar or some solid substance sufficiently porous +to hold it, the dangerous liquid can be used with more safety. But dynamite was +not known when the colonists were at work on Lincoln Island. +</p> + +<p> +“And is that stuff going to blow up the rocks?” asked Pencroff, +incredulously. +</p> + +<p> +“Yes, my friend,” answered the engineer, “and it will do all +the better since the granite is very hard and will oppose more resistance to +the explosion.” +</p> + +<p> +“And when will we see all this, sir?” +</p> + +<p> +“To-morrow,” when we have drilled a hole,” answered the +engineer. +</p> + +<p> +Early the next morning, the 21st of May, the miners betook themselves to a +point which formed the east bank of Lake Grant, not more than 500 feet from the +coast. At this place the plateau was lower than the lake, which was upheld by +the coping of granite. It was plain that could they break this the waters would +escape by this vent, and, forming a stream, flow over the inclined surface of +the plateau, and be precipitated in a waterfall over the cliff on to the shore. +Consequently, there would be a general lowering of the lake, and the orifice of +the water would be uncovered—this was to be the result. +</p> + +<p> +The coping must be broken. Pencroff, directed by the engineer, attacked its +outer facing vigorously. The hole which he made with his pick began under a +horizontal edge of the bank, and penetrated obliquely so as to reach a level +lower than the lake’s surface. Thus the blowing up of the rocks would +permit the water to escape freely and consequently lower the lake sufficiently. +</p> + +<p> +The work was tedious, as the engineer, wishing to produce a violent shock, had +determined to use not less than two gallons of nitro-glycerine in the +operation. But Pencroff and Neb, taking turns at the work, did so well, that by +4 o’clock in the afternoon it was achieved. +</p> + +<p> +Now came the question of igniting the explosive. Ordinarily, nitro-glycerine is +ignited by the explosion of fulminated caps, as, if lighted without percussion, +this substance burns and does not explode. +</p> + +<p> +Smith could doubtless make a cap. Lacking fulminate, he could easily obtain a +substance analogous to gun-cotton, since he had nitric acid at hand. This +substance pressed in a cartridge, and introduced into the nitro-glycerine, +could be lighted with a slow match, and produce the explosion. +</p> + +<p> +But Smith knew that their liquid had the property of exploding under a blow. He +determined, therefore, to make use of this property, reserving the other means +in case this experiment failed. +</p> + +<p> +The blow of a hammer upon some drops of the substance spread on a hard stone, +suffices to provoke an explosion. But no one could give those blows without +being a victim to the operation. Smith’s idea was to suspend a heavy mass +of iron by means of a vegetable fibre to an upright post, so as to have the +iron hang directly over the hole. Another long fibre, previously soaked in +sulphur, was to be fastened to the middle of the first and laid along the +ground many feet from this excavation. The fire was to be applied to this +second fibre, it would burn till it reached the first and set it on fire, then +the latter would break and the iron be precipitated upon the nitro-glycerine. +</p> + +<p> +The apparatus was fixed in place; then the engineer, after having made his +companions go away, filled the hole so that the fluid overflowed the opening, +and spread some drops underneath the mass of suspended iron. +</p> + +<p> +This done, Smith lit the end of the sulfured fibre, and, leaving the place, +returned with his companions to the Chimneys. +</p> + +<p> +Twenty-five minutes after a tremendous explosion was heard. It seemed as if the +whole island trembled to its base. A volley of stones rose into the air as if +they had been vomited from a volcano. The concussion was such that it shook the +Chimneys. The colonists, though two miles away, were thrown to the ground. +Rising again, they clambered up to the plateau and hurried towards the place. +</p> + +<p> +A large opening had been torn in the granite coping. A rapid stream of water +escaped through it, leaping and foaming across the plateau, and, reaching the +brink, fell a distance of 300 feet to the shore below. +</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2><a name="XVIII" id="XVIII"></a>CHAPTER XVIII.</h2> + +<p class="letter"> +PENCROFF DOUBTS NO MORE—THE OLD OUTLET OF THE LAKE—A SUBTERRANEAN +DESCENT—THE WAY THROUGH THE GRANITE—TOP HAS DISAPPEARED—THE +CENTRAL CAVERN—THE LOWER WELL—MYSTERY—THE BLOWS WITH THE +PICK—THE RETURN. +</p> + +<p> +Smith’s project had succeeded; but, as was his manner, he stood +motionless, absorbed, his lips closed, giving no sign of satisfaction. Herbert +was all enthusiasm; Neb jumped with joy; Pencroff, shaking his head, +murmured:— +</p> + +<p> +“Indeed, our engineer does wonders!” +</p> + +<p> +The nitro-glycerine had worked powerfully. The opening was so great that at +least a three times greater volume of water escaped by it than by the former +outlet. In a little while, therefore, the level of the lake would be lowered +two feet or more. +</p> + +<p> +The colonists returned to the Chimneys, and collecting some picks, spears, +ropes, a steel and tinder, returned to the plateau. Top went with them. +</p> + +<p> +On the way the sailor could not resist saying to the engineer:— +</p> + +<p> +“But do you really think, Mr. Smith, that one could blow up the whole +island with this beautiful liquid of yours?” +</p> + +<p> +“Doubtless,” replied the other, “island, continents, the +world itself. It is only a question of quantity.” +</p> + +<p> +“Couldn’t you use this nitro-glycerine to load firearms.” +</p> + +<p> +“No, Pencroff, because it is too shattering. But it would be easy to make +gun-cotton, or even common powder, as we have the material. Unfortunately, the +guns themselves are wanting.” +</p> + +<p> +“But with a little ingenuity!—” +</p> + +<p> +Pencroff had erased “impossible” from his vocabulary. +</p> + +<p> +The colonists having reached Prospect Plateau, hastened at once to the old +outlet of the lake, which ought now to be uncovered. And when the water no +longer poured through it, it would, doubtless, be easy to explore its interior +arrangement. +</p> + +<p> +In a few moments they reached the lower angle of the lake, and saw at a glance +what the result was. +</p> + +<p> +There, in the granite wall of the lake, above the water-level, appeared the +long-looked for opening. A narrow ledge, left bare, by the subsidence of the +water, gave them access to it. The opening was twenty feet wide, though only +two feet high. It was like the gutter-mouth in a pavement. It was not open +enough for the party to get in, but Neb and Pencroff, with their picks, in less +than an hour had given it a sufficient height. +</p> + +<p> +The engineer looked in and saw that the walls of the opening in its upper part +showed a slope of from 30° to 35°. And, therefore, unless they became much +steeper it would be easy to descend, perhaps, to the level of the sea. And if, +as was probable, some vast cavern existed in the interior of the massive +granite, it was possible that they could make use of it. +</p> + +<p> +“What are we waiting for, Mr. Smith,” cried the sailor, all +impatience to begin the exploration, “Top, you see, has gone +ahead!” +</p> + +<p> +“We must have some light,” said the engineer. “Go, Neb, and +cut some resinous branches.” +</p> + +<p> +The negro and Herbert ran to some pine and evergreens growing upon the bank, +and soon returned with branches which were made into torches. Having lit them, +the colonists, with Smith leading, entered the dark passage, but recently +filled with water. +</p> + +<p> +Contrary to their expectation, the passage grew higher as they advanced, until +soon they were able to walk upright. The granite walls, worn, by the water, +were very slippery, and the party had to look out for falls. They, therefore, +fastened themselves together with a cord, like mountain climbers. Fortunately, +some granite steps made the descent less perilous. Drops of water, still +clinging to the rocks, glistened like stalactites in the torchlight. The +engineer looked carefully at this black granite. He could not see a stratum or +a flaw. The mass was compact and of fine grain, and the passage must have been +coeval with the island. It had not been worn little by little by the constant +action of water. Pluto, and not Neptune, had shaped it; and the traces of +igneous action were still visible upon its surface. +</p> + +<p> +The colonists descended but slowly. They experienced some emotion in thus +adventuring into the depths of the earth, in being its first human visitants. +No one spoke, but each was busied with his own reflections and the thought +occurred to more than one, that perhaps some pulp or other gigantic cephalopod +might inhabit the interior cavities which communicated with the sea. It was, +therefore, necessary to advance cautiously. +</p> + +<p> +Top was ahead of the little troop and they could rely on the dog’s +sagacity to give the alarm on occasion. After having descended 100 feet, Smith +halted, and the others came up with him. They were standing in a cavern of +moderate size. Drops of water fell from the roof, but they did not ooze through +the rocks, they were simply the last traces of the torrent which had so long +roared through this place, and the air, though humid, emitted no mephitic +vapor. +</p> + +<p> +“Well, Cyrus,” said Spilett, “here is a retreat sufficiently +unknown and hidden in the depths, but it is uninhabitable.” +</p> + +<p> +“How, uninhabitable?” asked the sailor. +</p> + +<p> +“Why, it is too small and too dark.” +</p> + +<p> +“Cannot we make it bigger, blast it out, and make openings for the light +and air?” answered Pencroff, who now thought nothing impracticable. +</p> + +<p> +“Let us push on,” said Smith. “Perhaps lower down, nature +will have spared us this work.” +</p> + +<p> +“We are only a third of the way down,” observed Herbert. +</p> + +<p> +“But 100 feet,” responded Cyrus; “and it is possible that 100 +feet lower—.” +</p> + +<p> +“Where is Top?” asked Neb, interrupting his master. +</p> + +<p> +They looked about the cavern. The dog was not there. +</p> + +<p> +“Let us overtake him,” said Smith, resuming the march. The engineer +noted carefully all the deviations of the route, and easily kept a general idea +of their direction, which was towards the sea. The party had not descended more +than fifty feet further, when their attention was arrested by distant sounds +coming from the depths of the rock. They stopped and listened. These sounds, +borne along the passage, as the voice through an acoustic tube, were distinctly +heard. +</p> + +<p> +“Its Top’s barking!” cried Herbert. +</p> + +<p> +“Yes, and the brave dog is barking furiously,” added Pencroff. +</p> + +<p> +“We have our spears,” said Smith. “Come on, and be +ready.” +</p> + +<p> +“It is becoming more and more interesting,” whispered Spilett to +the sailor, who nodded assent. +</p> + +<p> +They hurried to the rescue of the dog. His barks grew more distinct. They could +hear that he was in a strange rage. Had he been captured by some animal whom he +had disturbed? Without thinking of the danger, the colonists felt themselves +drawn on by an irresistible curiosity, and slipped rather than ran down the +passage. Sixteen feet lower they came up with the dog. +</p> + +<p> +There, the corridor opened out into a vast and magnificent cavern. Top, rushing +about, was barking furiously. Pencroff and Neb, shaking their torches, lit up +all the inequalities of the granite, and the others, with their spears ready, +held themselves prepared for any emergency. +</p> + +<p> +But the enormous cavern was empty. The colonists searched everywhere; they +could find no living thing. Nevertheless, Top continued barking, and neither +threats nor caresses could stop him. +</p> + +<p> +“There must be some place where the water escaped to the sea,” said +the engineer. +</p> + +<p> +“Yes, and look out for a hole,” answered Pencroff. +</p> + +<p> +“On, Top, on,” cried Smith, and the dog, encouraged by his master, +ran towards the end of the cavern, and redoubled his barking. +</p> + +<p> +Following him, they saw by the light of the torches the opening of what looked +like a well in the granite. Here, undoubtedly, was the place where the water +had found its way out of the cavern, but this time, instead of being a corridor +sloping and accessible, it was a perpendicular well, impossible to descend. +</p> + +<p> +The torches were waved above the opening. They saw nothing. Smith broke off a +burning branch and dropped it into the abyss. The resin, fanned by the wind of +its fall, burned brightly and illuminated the interior of the pit, but showed +nothing else. Then the flame was extinguished with a slight hiss, which +indicated that it had reached the water, which must be the sea level. +</p> + +<p> +The engineer calculated, from the time taken in the fall, that the depth was +about ninety feet. The floor of the cavern was therefore that distance above +the sea. +</p> + +<p> +“Here is our house,” said Smith. +</p> + +<p> +“But it was preoccupied,” said Spilett, whose curiosity was +unsatisfied. +</p> + +<p> +“Well, the thing that had it, whether amphibious or not, has fled by this +outlet and vacated in our favor,” replied the engineer. +</p> + +<p> +“Any how, I should like to have been Top a quarter of an hour ago,” +said the sailor, “for he does not bark at nothing.” +</p> + +<p> +Smith looked at his dog, and those who were near him heard him murmur:— +</p> + +<p> +“Yes, I am convinced that Top knows more than we do about many +things!” +</p> + +<p> +However, the wishes of the colonists had been in a great measure realized. +Chance, aided by the marvelous acuteness of their chief, had done them good +service. Here they had at their disposal a vast cavern, whose extent could not +be estimated In the insufficient light of the torches, but which could +certainly be easily partitioned off with bricks into chambers, and arranged, if +not as a house, at least as a spacious suite of rooms. The water having left +it, could not return. The place was free. +</p> + +<p> +But two difficulties remained, the possibility of lighting the cavern and the +necessity of rendering it easier of access. The first could not be done from +above as the enormous mass of granite was over them; but, perhaps, they would +be able to pierce the outer wall which faced the sea. Smith, who during the +descent had kept account of the slope, and therefore of the length of the +passage, believed that this part of the wall could not be very thick. If light +could be thus obtained, so could entrance, as it was as easy to pierce a door +as windows, and to fix a ladder on the outside. +</p> + +<p> +Smith communicated his ideas to his companions. +</p> + +<p> +“Then let us set to work!” answered Pencroff; “I have my pick +and will I soon make daylight in the granite! Where shall I begin?” +</p> + +<p> +“Here,” answered the engineer, showing the strong sailor a +considerable hollow in the wall, which greatly diminished its thickness. +</p> + +<p> +Pencroff attacked the granite, and for half an hour, by the light of the +torches, made the splinters fly about him. Then Neb took his place, and Spilett +after Neb. The work continued, two hours longer, and, when it seemed as if the +wall could not be thicker than the length of the pick, at the last stroke of +Spilett the implement, passing through, fell on the outside. +</p> + +<p> +“Hurrah forever!” cried Pencroff. +</p> + +<p> +The wall was but three feet thick. +</p> + +<p> +Smith looked through the opening, which was eighty feet above the ground. +Before him extended the coast, the islet, and, beyond, the boundless sea. +</p> + +<p> +Through the hole the light entered in floods, inundating the splendid cavern +and producing a magical effect. While on the left hand it measured only thirty +feet in height and one hundred in length, to the right it was enormous, and its +vault rose to a height of more than eighty feet. In some places, granite +pillars, irregularly disposed, supported the arches as in the nave of a +cathedral. Resting upon a sort of lateral piers, here, sinking into elliptic +arches, there, rising in ogive mouldings, losing itself in the dark bays, half +seen in the shadow through the fantastic arches, ornamented by a profusion of +projections which seemed like pendants, this vaulted roof afforded a +picturesque blending of all the architectures—Byzantine, Roman, +Gothic—that the hand of man has produced. And this was the work of +nature! She alone had constructed this magic Alhambra in a granite rock! +</p> + +<p> +The colonists were overcome with admiration. Expecting to find but a narrow +cavern, they found themselves in a sort of marvellous palace, and Neb had taken +off his hat as if he had been transported into a temple! +</p> + +<p> +Exclamations of pleasure escaped from their lips, and the hurrahs echoed and +reechoed from the depths of the dark nave. +</p> + +<p> +“My friends,” cried Smith, “when we shall have lighted the +interior of this place, when we shall have arranged our chambers, our +store-rooms, our offices in the left-hand portion, we will still have this +splendid cavern, which shall be our study and our museum! +</p> + +<p> +“And we will call it—” asked Herbert. +</p> + +<p> +“Granite House,” answered Smith; and his companions saluted the +name with their cheers. +</p> + +<p> +By this time the torches were nearly consumed, and as, in order to return, it +was necessary to regain the summit of the plateau and to remount the corridor, +it was decided to postpone until the morrow the work of arranging their new +home. +</p> + +<p> +Before leaving, Smith leaned over the dark pit once more and listened +attentively. But there was no sound from these depths save that of the water +agitated by the undulations of the surge. A resinous torch was again thrown in, +lighting up anew for an instant the walls of the well, but nothing suspicions +was revealed. If any marine monster had been inopportunely surprised by the +retreat of the waters, he had already regained the open sea by the subterranean +passage which extended under the shore. +</p> + +<p> +Nevertheless the engineer stood motionless, listening attentively, his gaze +plunged in the abyss, without speaking. +</p> + +<p> +Then the sailor approached him, and, touching his arm:— +</p> + +<p> +“Mr. Smith,” he said. +</p> + +<p> +“What is it, my friend,” responded the engineer, like one returning +from the land of dreams. +</p> + +<p> +“The torches are nearly out.” +</p> + +<p> +“Forward!” said Smith; and the little troop left the cavern and +began the ascent through the dark weir. Top walked behind, still growling in an +odd way. The ascension was sufficiently laborious, and the colonists stopped +for a few minutes at the upper grotto, which formed a sort of landing half way +up the long granite stairway. Then they began again to mount, and pretty soon +they felt the fresh air. The drops, already evaporated, no longer shone on the +walls. The light of the torches diminished; Neb’s went out, and they had +to hasten in order to avoid having to grope their way through, the profound +darkness. A little before 4 o’clock, just as the torch of the sailor was +burnt out, Smith and his companions emerged from the mouth of the passage. +</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2><a name="XIX" id="XIX"></a>CHAPTER XIX.</h2> + +<p class="letter"> +SMITH’S PLAN—THE FRONT OF GRANITE HOUSE—THE ROPE +LADDER—PENCROFF’S IDEAS—THE AROMATIC HERBS—A NATURAL +WARREN—GETTING WATER—THE VIEW FROM THE WINDOWS OF GRANITE HOUSE. +</p> + +<p> +On the next day, May 22, the colonists proceeded to take possession of their +new abode. They longed to exchange their insufficient shelter for the vast +retreat in the rock, impenetrable to wind and wave. Still they did not intend +altogether to abandon the Chimneys, but to make a workshop of it. +</p> + +<p> +Smith’s first care was to ascertain exactly over what point rose the face +of Granite House. He went down on the shore to the foot of the immense wall, +and, as the pickaxe, which slipped from the reporter’s hands, must have +fallen perpendicularly, he could ascertain, by finding this pickaxe, the place +where the granite had been pierced. And, in fact, when the implement was found, +half buried in the sand, the hole in the rock could be seen eighty feet above +it, in a straight line. Rock pigeons were already fluttering in and out by this +narrow opening. They evidently thought Granite House had been discovered for +their benefit. +</p> + +<p> +The engineer intended to divide the right portion of the cavern into several +chambers opening upon an entrance-corridor, and lighted by five windows and a +door cut in the face of the rock. Pencroff agreed with him as to the window, +but could not understand the use of the door, since the old weir furnished a +natural staircase to Granite House. +</p> + +<p> +“My friend,” said Smith, “if we could get to our abode by the +weir, so can others. I want to block up this passage at its month, to seal it +hermetically, and even, if necessary, to conceal the entrance by damming up the +lake.” +</p> + +<p> +“And how shall we get in?” said the sailor. +</p> + +<p> +“By a rope ladder from the outside,” answered Smith, “which +we can pull up after us.” +</p> + +<p> +“But why take so many precautions?” said Pencroff. “So far, +the animals we have found here have not been formidable; and there are +certainly no natives.” +</p> + +<p> +“Are you so sure, Pencroff?” said the engineer, looking steadily at +the sailor. +</p> + +<p> +“Of course we shall not be perfectly sure till we have explored every +part.” +</p> + +<p> +“Yes,” said Smith, “for we know as yet only a small portion. +But even if there are no enemies upon the island, they may come from the +outside, for this part of the Pacific is a dangerous region. We must take every +precaution.” +</p> + +<p> +So the facade of Granite House was lighted with five windows, and with a door +opening upon the “apartments,” and admitting plenty of light into +that wonderful nave which was to serve as their principal hallroom. This +facade, eighty feet above the ground, was turned to the east, and caught the +first rays of the morning sun. It was protected by the slope of the rock from +the piercing northeast wind. In the meantime, while the sashes of the windows +were being made, the engineer meant to close the openings with thick shutters, +which would keep out wind and rain, and which could be readily concealed. The +first work was to hollow out these windows. But the pickaxe was at a +disadvantage among these hard rocks, and Smith again had recourse to the +nitro-glycerine, which, used in small quantities, had the desired effect. Then +the work was finished by the pick and mattock—the five ogive windows, the +bay, the bull’s-eyes, and the door—and, some days after the work +was begun, the sun shone in upon the innermost recesses of Granite House. +</p> + +<p> +According to Smith’s plan, the space had been divided into five +compartments looking out upon the sea; upon the right was the hall, opposite to +the door from which the ladder was to hang, then a kitchen thirty feet long, a +dining-room forty feet long, a sleeping-room of the same size, and last a +“guest chamber,” claimed by Pencroff; and bordering on the great +hall. +</p> + +<p> +These rooms, or rather this suite of rooms, in which they were to live, did not +occupy the full depth of the cave. They opened upon a corridor which ran +between them and a long storehouse, where were kept their utensils and +provisions. All the products of the island, animal and vegetable, could be kept +there in good condition and free from damp. They had room enough, and there was +a place for everything. Moreover, the colonists still had at their disposal the +little grotto above the large cavern, which would serve them as a sort of +attic. This plan agreed upon, they became brickmakers again, and brought their +bricks to the foot of Granite House. +</p> + +<p> +Until that time the colonists had had access to the cavern only by the old +weir. This mode of communication compelled them first to climb up Prospect +Plateau, going round by the river, to descend 200 feet through the passage, and +then to ascend the same distance when they wanted to regain the plateau. This +involved fatigue and loss of time. Smith resolved to begin at once the +construction of a strong rope ladder, which, once drawn up after them, would +render the entrance to Granite House absolutely inaccessible. This ladder was +made with the greatest care, and its sides were twisted of fibres by means of a +shuttle. Thus constructed, it had the strength of a cable. The rungs were made +of a kind of red cedar, with light and durable branches; and the whole was put +together by the practised hand of Pencroff. +</p> + +<p> +Another kind of tackle was made of vegetable fibre, and a sort of derrick was +setup at the door of Granite House. In this way the bricks could easily be +carried to the level of Granite House; and when some thousands of them were on +the spot, with abundance of lime, they began work on the interior. They easily +set up the wood partitions, and in a short time the space was divided into +chambers and a store-house, according to the plan agreed upon. +</p> + +<p> +These labors went on quickly under the direction of the engineer, who himself +wielded hammer and trowel. They worked confidently and gaily. Pencroff, whether +carpenter, ropemaker, or mason, always had a joke ready, and all shared in his +good humor. His confidence in the engineer was absolute. All their wants would +be supplied in Smith’s own time. He dreamed of canals, of quarries, of +mines, of machinery, even of railroads, one day, to cover the island. The +engineer let Pencroff talk. He knew how contagious is confidence; he smiled to +hear him, and said nothing of his own inquietude. But in his heart he feared +that no help could come from the outside. In that part of the Pacific, out of +the track of ships, and at such a distance from other land that no boat could +dare put out to sea, they had only themselves to rely upon. +</p> + +<p> +But, as the sailor said, they were far ahead of the Swiss Family Robinson, for +whom miracles were always being wrought. In truth they knew Nature; and he who +knows Nature will succeed when others would lie down to die. +</p> + +<p> +Herbert especially distinguished himself in the work. He understood at a word +and was prompt in execution. Smith grew fonder of him every day and Herbert was +devoted to the engineer. Pencroff saw the growing friendship, but the honest +sailor was not jealous. Neb was courage, zeal, and self-denial in person. He +relied on his master as absolutely as Pencroff, but his enthusiasm was not so +noisy. The sailor and he were great friends. As to Spilett, his skill and +efficiency were a daily wonder to Pencroff. He was the model of a newspaper +man—quick alike to understand and to perform. +</p> + +<p> +The ladder was put in place May 28. It was eighty feet high, and consisted of +100 rungs; and, profiting by a projection in the face of the cliff, about forty +feet up, Smith had divided it into two parts. This projection served as a sort +of landing-place for the head of the lower ladder, shortening it, and thus +lessening its swing. They fastened it with a cord so that it could easily be +raised to the level of Granite House. The upper ladder they fastened at top and +bottom. In this way the ascent was much more easy. Besides, Smith counted upon +putting up at some future time a hydraulic elevator, which would save his +companions much fatigue and loss of time. +</p> + +<p> +The colonists rapidly accustomed themselves to the use of this ladder. The +sailor, who was used to shrouds and ratlines, was their teacher. The great +trouble was with Top, whose four feet were not intended for ladders. But +Pencroff was persevering, and Top at last learned to run up and down as nimbly +as his brothers of the circus. We cannot say whether the sailor was proud of +this pupil, but he sometimes carried Top up on his back, and Top made no +complaints. +</p> + +<p> +All this time, the question of provisions was not neglected. Every day Herbert +and the reporter spent some hours in the chase. They hunted only through +Jacamar Woods, on the left of the river, for, in the absence of boat or bridge, +they had not yet crossed the Mercy. The immense woody tracts which they had +named the Forests of the Far West were entirely unexplored. This important +excursion was set apart for the first five days of the coming spring. But +Jacamar Woods were not wanting in game; kangaroos and boars were plenty there, +and the iron-tipped spears, the bows and arrows of the hunters did wonders. +More than this, Herbert discovered, at the southwest corner of, the lagoon, a +natural warren, a sort of moist meadow covered with willows and aromatic herbs, +which perfumed the air, such as thyme, basil, and all sorts of mint, of which +rabbits are so fond. The reporter said that when the feast was spread for them +it would be strange if the rabbits did not come; and the hunters explored the +warren carefully. At all events, it produced an abundance of useful plants, and +would give a naturalist plenty of work. Herbert gathered a quantity of plants +possessing different medicinal properties, pectoral, astringent, febrifuge, +anti-rheumatic. When Pencroff asked of what good were all this collection of +herbs:— +</p> + +<p> +“To cure us when we are sick,” answered the boy. +</p> + +<p> +“Why should we be sick, since there are no doctors on the island?” +said Pencroff, quite seriously. +</p> + +<p> +To this no reply could be made, but the lad went on gathering his bundle, which +was warmly welcomed at Granite House; especially as he had found some Mountain +Mint, known in North America as “Oswego Tea,” which produces a +pleasant beverage. +</p> + +<p> +That day the hunters, in their search, reached the site of the warren. The +ground was perforated with little holes like a colander. +</p> + +<p> +“Burrows!” cried Herbert. +</p> + +<p> +“But are they inhabited?” +</p> + +<p> +“That is the question.” +</p> + +<p> +A question which was quickly resolved. Almost immediately, hundreds of little +animals, like rabbits, took to flight in every direction, with such rapidity +that Top himself was distanced. But the reporter was determined not to quit the +place till he had captured half a dozen of the little beasts. He wanted them +now for the kitchen: domestication would come later. With a few snares laid at +the mouth of the burrows, the affair would be easy; but there were no snares, +nor materials for snares; so they patiently rummaged every form with their +sticks, until four rodents were taken. +</p> + +<p> +They were rabbits, much like their European congeners, and commonly known as +“American hares.” They were brought back to Granite Home, and +figured in that evening’s meal. Delicious eating they were; and the +warren bade fair to be a most valuable reserve for the colonists. +</p> + +<p> +On May 31, the partitions were finished, and nothing remained but to furnish +the rooms, which would occupy the long days of winter. A chimney was built in +the room which served as a kitchen. The construction of the stove-pipe gave +them a good deal of trouble. The simplest material was clay; and as they did +not wish to have any outlet on the upper plateau, they pierced a hole above the +kitchen window, and conducted the pipe obliquely to this hole. No doubt during +an eastern gale the pipe would smoke, but the wind rarely blew from that +quarter, and head-cook Neb was not particular +</p> + +<p> +When these domestic arrangements had been made, the engineer proceeded to block +up the mouth of the old weir by the lake, so as to prevent any approach from +that quarter. Great square blocks were rolled to the opening, and strongly +cemented together. Smith did not yet attempt to put in execution his project of +damming up the waters of the lake so as to conceal this weir; he was satisfied +with concealing the obstruction he had placed there by means of grass, shrubs, +and thistles, which were planted in the interstices of the rocks, and which by +the next spring would sprout up luxuriantly. Meanwhile he utilized the weir in +conducting to their new abode a little stream of fresh water from the lake. A +little drain, constructed just below its level, had the effect of supplying +them with twenty-five or thirty gallons a day; so there was likely to be no +want of water at Granite House. +</p> + +<p> +At last, all was finished, just in time for the tempestuous season. They closed +the windows with thick shutters till Smith should have time to make glass from +the sand. In the rocky projections around the windows Spilett had arranged, +very artistically, plants of various kinds and long floating grasses, and thus +the windows were framed picturesquely in green. The denizens of this safe and +solid dwelling could but be delighted with their work. The windows opened upon +a limitless horizon, shut in only by the two Mandible Capes on the north and by +Claw Cape at the south. Union Bay spread magnificently before them. They had +reason enough to be satisfied, and Pencroff did not spare his praises of what +he called “his suite on the fifth floor.” +</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2><a name="XX" id="XX"></a>CHAPTER XX.</h2> + +<p class="letter"> +THE RAINY SEASON—WHAT TO WEAR-A SEAL-HUNT—CANDLE-MAKING—-WORK +IN THE GRANITE HOUSE—THE TWO CAUSEWAYS—RETURN FROM A VISIT TO THE +OYSTER-BED—WHAT HERBERT FOUND IS HIS POCKET. +</p> + +<p> +The winter season began in earnest with the month of June, which corresponded +with December in our northern hemisphere. Showers and storms succeeded each +other without an intermission, and the inmates of the Granite House could +appreciate the advantages of a dwelling impervious to the weather. The Chimneys +would indeed have proved a miserable shelter against the inclemency of the +winter; they feared even lest the high tides driven by the sea-wind should pour +in and destroy their furnaces and their foundry. All this month of June was +occupied with various labors, which left plenty of time for hunting and +fishing, so that the reserve stock of food was constantly kept up. Pencroff +intended, as soon as he had time, to set traps, from which he expected great +results. He had made snares of ligneous fibre, and not a day passed but some +rodent was captured from the warren. Neb spent all his time in smoking and +salting meat. +</p> + +<p> +The question of clothes now came up for serious discussion. The colonists had +no other garments than those which they wore when the balloon cast them on +shore. These, fortunately, were warm and substantial; and by dint of extreme +care, even their linen had been kept clean and whole; but everything would soon +wear out, and moreover, during a vigorous winter, they would suffer severely +from cold. Here Smith was fairly baffled. He had been occupied in providing for +their most urgent wants, food and shelter, and the winter was upon them before +the clothes problem could be solved. They must resign themselves to bear the +cold with fortitude, and when the dry season returned would undertake a great +hunt of the moufflons, which they had seen on Mount Franklin, and whose wool +the engineer could surely make into warm thick cloth. He would think over the +method. +</p> + +<p> +“Well, we must toast ourselves before the fire!” said +Pencroff.” There’s plenty of fire wood, no reason for sparing +it.” +</p> + +<p> +“Besides,” added Spilett, “Lincoln Island is not in very high +latitude, and the winters are probably mild. Did you not say, Cyrus that the +thirty-fifth parallel corresponded with that of Spain in the other +hemisphere?” +</p> + +<p> +“Yes,” said the engineer, “but the winter in Spain is +sometimes very cold, with snow and ice, and we may have a hard time of it. +Still we are on an island, and have a good chance for more moderate +weather.” +</p> + +<p> +“Why, Mr. Smith?” said Herbert. +</p> + +<p> +“Because the sea, my boy, may be considered as an immense reservoir, in +which the summer heat lies stored. At the coming of winter this heat is again +given out, so that the neighboring regions have always a medium temperature, +cooler in summer and warmer in winter.” +</p> + +<p> +“We shall see,” said Pencroff. “I am not going to bother +myself about the weather. One thing is certain, the days are getting short +already and the evenings long. Suppose we talk a little about candles.” +</p> + +<p> +“Nothing is easier,” said Smith. +</p> + +<p> +“To talk about?” asked the sailor. +</p> + +<p> +“To make.” +</p> + +<p> +“And when shall we begin?” +</p> + +<p> +“To-morrow, by a seal-hunt.” +</p> + +<p> +“What! to make dips?” +</p> + +<p> +“No, indeed, Pencroff, candles.” +</p> + +<p> +Such was the engineer’s project, which was feasible enough, as he had +lime and sulphuric acid, and as the amphibia of the island would furnish the +necessary fat. It was now June 4, and Pentecost Sunday, which they kept as a +day of rest and thanksgiving. They were no longer miserable castaways, they +were colonists. On the next day, June 5, they started for the islet. They had +to choose the time of low tide to ford the channel; and all determined that, +somehow or other, they must build a boat which would give them easy +communication with all parts of the island, and would enable them to go up the +Mercy, when they should undertake that grand exploration of the southwestern +district which they had reserved for the first good weather. +</p> + +<p> +Seals were numerous, and the hunters, armed with their iron-spiked spears, +easily killed half a dozen of them, which Neb and Pencroff skinned. Only the +hides and fat were carried back to Granite House, the former to be made into +shoes. The result of the hunt was about 300 pounds of fat, every pound of which +could be used in making candles. The operation was simple enough, and the +product, if not the best of its kind, was all they needed. Had Smith had at his +disposition nothing but sulphuric acid, he could, by heating this acid with +neutral fats, such as the fat of the seal, separate the glycerine, which again +could be resolved, by means of boiling water, into oleine, margarine, and +stearine. But, to simplify the operation, he preferred to saponify the fat by +lime. He thus obtained a calcareous soap, easily decomposed by sulphuric acid, +which precipitated the lime as a sulphate, and freed the fatty acids. The first +of these three acids (oleine, margarine, and stearine) was a liquid which he +expelled by pressure. The other two formed the raw material of the candles. +</p> + +<p> +In twenty-four hours the work was done. Wicks were made, after some +unsuccessful attempts, from vegetable fibre, and were steeped in the liquified +compound. They were real stearine candles, made by hand, white and smooth. +</p> + +<p> +During all this month work was going on inside their new abode. There was +plenty of carpenter’s work to do. They improved and completed their +tools, which were very rudimentary. Scissors were made, among other things, so +that they were able to cut their hair, and, if not actually to shave their +beards, at least to trim them to their liking. Herbert had no beard, and Neb +none to speak of, but the others found ample employment for the scissors. +</p> + +<p> +They had infinite trouble in making a hand-saw; but at last succeeded in +shaping an instrument which would cut wood by a rigorous application. Then they +made tables, chairs and cupboards to furnish the principal rooms, and the +frames of beds whose only bedding was mattrasses of wrack-grass. The kitchen, +with its shelves, on which lay the terra-cotta utensils, its brick furnace, and +its washing-stone, looked very comfortable, and Neb cooked with the gravity of +a chemist in his laboratory. +</p> + +<p> +But joiners work had to give place to carpentry. The new weir created by the +explosion rendered necessary the construction of two causeways, one upon +Prospect Plateau, the other on the shore itself. Now the plateau and the coast +were transversely cut by a water-course which the colonists had to cross when +ever they wished to reach the northern part of the island. To avoid this they +had to make a considerable detour, and to walk westward as far as the sources +of Red creek. Their best plan therefore was to build two causeways, one on the +plateau and one on the shore, twenty to twenty-five feet long, simply +constructed of trees squared by the axe. This was the work of some days. When +these bridges had been built, Neb and Pencroff profited by them to go to the +oyster-bed which had been discovered off the down. They dragged after them a +sort of rough cart which had taken the place of the inconvenient hurdle; and +they brought back several thousand oysters, which, were readily acclimated +among the rocks, and formed a natural preserve at the mouth of the Mercy. They +were excellent of their kind, and formed an almost daily article of diet. In +fact, Lincoln Island, though the colonists had explored but a small portion of +it, already supplied nearly all their wants, while it seemed likely that a +minute exploration of the western forests would reveal a world of new +treasures. +</p> + +<p> +Only one privation still distressed the colonists. Azotic food they had in +plenty, and the vegetables which corrected it; from the ligneous roots of the +dragon-trees, submitted to fermentation, they obtained a sort of acidulated +beer. They had even made sugar, without sugar-cane or beet-root, by collecting +the juice which distills from the “acer saccharinum,” a sort of +maple which flourishes in all parts of the temperate zone, and which abounded +on the island. They made a very pleasant tea from the plant brought from the +warren; and, finally, they had plenty of salt, the only mineral component +necessary to food—but bread was still to seek. +</p> + +<p> +Perhaps, at some future time, they would have been able to replace this aliment +by some equivalent, sago flour, or the breadfruit tree, which they might +possibly have discovered in the woods of the southwest; but so far they had not +met with them. Just at this time a little incident occurred which brought about +what Smith, with all his ingenuity, could not have achieved. +</p> + +<p> +One rainy day the colonists were together in the large hall of Granite House, +when Herbert suddenly cried, +</p> + +<p> +“See, Mr. Smith, a grain of corn.” +</p> + +<p> +And he showed his companions a single gram which had got into the lining of his +waistcoat through a hole in his pocket. Pencroff had given him some ring-doves +in Richmond, and in feeding them one of the grains had remained in his pocket. +</p> + +<p> +“A grain of corn?” said the engineer, quickly. +</p> + +<p> +“Yes, sir; but only one.” +</p> + +<p> +“That’s a wonderful help,” said Pencroff, laughing. +“The bread that grain will make will never choke us.” +</p> + +<p> +Herbert was about to throw away the grain, when Cyrus Smith took it, examined +it, found that it was in good condition, and said quietly to the sailor:— +</p> + +<p> +“Pencroff, do you know how many ears of corn will spring from one +grain?” +</p> + +<p> +“One, I suppose,” said the sailor, surprised at the question. +</p> + +<p> +“Ten, Pencroff. And how many grains are there to an ear?” +</p> + +<p> +“Faith, I don’t know.” +</p> + +<p> +“Eighty on an average,” said Smith. “So then, if we plant +this grain, we shall get from it a harvest of 800 grains; from them in the +second year 640,000; in the third, 512,000,000; in the fourth, more than +400,000,000,000. That is the proportion.” +</p> + +<p> +His companions listened in silence. The figures stupefied them. +</p> + +<p> +“Yes, my friend,” resumed the engineer. “Such is the increase +of Nature. And what is even this multiplication of a grain of corn whose ears +have only 800 grains, compared with the poppy plant, which has 32,000 seeds, or +the tobacco plant, which has 360,000? In a few years, but for the numerous +enemies which destroy them, these plants would cover the earth. And now, +Pencroff,” he resumed, “do you know how many bushels there are in +400,000,000,000 grains?” +</p> + +<p> +“No,” answered the sailor, “I only know that I am an +idiot!” +</p> + +<p> +“Well, there will be more than 3,000,000, at 130,000 the bushel!” +</p> + +<p> +“Three millions!” cried Pencroff. +</p> + +<p> +“Three millions.” +</p> + +<p> +“In four years?” +</p> + +<p> +“Yes,” said Smith, “and even in two, if, as I hope, we can +get two harvests a year in this latitude.” +</p> + +<p> +Pencroff answered with a tremendous hurrah. +</p> + +<p> +“So, Herbert,” added the engineer, “your discovery is of +immense importance. Remember, my friends, that everything may be of use to us +in our present situation.” +</p> + +<p> +“Indeed, Mr. Smith, I will remember it,” said Pencroff, “and +if ever I find one of those grains of tobacco which increase 360,000 times, +I’ll take care not to throw it away. And now what must we do?” +</p> + +<p> +“We must plant this grain,” said Herbert. +</p> + +<p> +“Yes,” added Spilett, “and with the greatest care, for upon +it depend our future harvests!” +</p> + +<p> +“Provided that it grows,” said the sailor. +</p> + +<p> +“It will grow,” answered Smith. +</p> + +<p> +It was now the 20th of June, a good time for planting the precious grain. They +thought at first of planting it in a pot; but upon consideration, they +determined to trust it frankly to the soil. The same day it was planted, with +the greatest precaution. The weather clearing a little, they walked up to the +plateau above Granite House, and chose there a spot well sheltered from the +wind, and exposed to the midday fervor of the sun. This spot was cleared, +weeded, and even dug, so as to destroy insects and worms; it was covered with a +layer of fresh earth, enriched with a little lime; a palissade was built around +it, and then the grain was covered up in its moist bed. +</p> + +<p> +They seemed to be laying the corner-stone of an edifice. Pencroff was reminded +of the extreme care with which they had lighted their only match; but this was +a more serious matter. The castaways could always have succeeded in obtaining +fire by some means or other; but no earthly power could restore that grain of +corn, if, by ill fortune, it should perish! +</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2><a name="XXI" id="XXI"></a>CHAPTER XXI</h2> + +<p class="letter"> +SEVERAL DEGREES BELOW ZERO—EXPLORATION OF THE SWAMP REGION TO THE +SOUTHEAST—THE VIEW OF THE SEA—A CONVERSATION CONCERNING THE FUTURE +OF THE PACIFIC OCEAN—THE INCESSANT LABOR OF THE INFUSORIA—WHAT WILL +BECOME OF THIS GLOBE—THE CHASE—THE SWAMP OF THE TADORNS. +</p> + +<p> +From this moment Pencroff did not let a day pass without visiting what he +called with perfect gravity, his “corn field.” And alas, for any +insects that ventured there, no mercy would be shown them. Near the end of the +month of June, after the interminable rains, the weather became decidedly cold, +and on the 29th, a Fahrenheit thermometer would certainly have stood at only +20° above zero. +</p> + +<p> +The next day, the 30th of June, the day which corresponds to the 3lst of +December in the Northern Hemisphere, was a Friday. Neb said the year ended on +an unlucky day, but Pencroff answered that consequently the new year began on a +lucky one, which was more important. At all events, it began with a very cold +snap. Ice accumulated at the mouth of the Mercy, and the whole surface of the +lake was soon frozen over. +</p> + +<p> +Fresh firewood had continually to be procured. Pencroff had not waited for the +river to freeze to convey enormous loads of wood to their destination. The +current was a tireless motor, and conveyed the floating wood until the ice +froze around it. To the fuel, which the forest so plentifully furnished, were +added several cartloads of coal, which they found at the foot of the spurs of +Mount Franklin. The powerful heat from the coal was thoroughly appreciated in a +temperature which on the 4th of July fell to eight degrees above zero. A second +chimney had been set up in the dining-room, where they all worked together. +During this cold spell Cyrus Smith could not be thankful enough that he had +conducted to Granite House a small stream of water from Lake Grant. Taken below +the frozen surface, then conducted through the old weir, it arrived unfrozen at +the interior reservoir, which had been dug at the angle of the storehouse, and +which, when too full, emptied itself into the sea. About this time the weather +being very dry, the colonists, dressing as warmly as possible, determined to +devote a day to the exploration of that part of the island situated to the +southeast, between the Mercy and Claw Cape. It was a large swampy district and +might offer good hunting, as aquatic birds must abound there. They would have +eight or nine miles to go and as far to return, consequently the whole day must +be given up. As it concerned the exploration of an unknown portion of the +island, every one had to take part. +</p> + +<p> +Therefore, on the 5th of July, at 6 o’clock in the morning, before the +sun had fairly risen, the whole party, armed with spears, snares, bows and +arrows, and furnished with enough provisions for the day, started from Granite +House, preceded by Top, who gambolled before them. They took the shortest +route, which was to cross the Mercy on the blocks of ice which then obstructed +it. +</p> + +<p> +“But,” as the reporter very truly observed, “this cannot +supply the place of a real bridge.” +</p> + +<p> +So the construction of a “real” bridge was set down as work for the +future. This was the first time that the colonists had set foot on the right +bank of the Mercy and had plunged into the forest of large and magnificent +firs, then covered with snow. But they had not gone half a mile when the +barking of Top frightened from a dense thicket where they had taken up their +abode, a whole family of quadrupeds. +</p> + +<p> +“Why they look like foxes,” said Herbert, when he saw them +scampering quickly away. +</p> + +<p> +And they were foxes, but foxes of enormous size. They made a sort of bark which +seemed to astonish Top, for he stopped in his chase and gave these swift +animals time to escape. The dog had a right to be surprised, for he knew +nothing of natural history; but by this barking, the greyish-red color of their +hair, and their black tails, which ended in a white tuft, these foxes had +betrayed their origin. So Herbert gave them without hesitation their true name +of culpeux. These culpeux are often met with in Chili, in the Saint Malo group, +and in all those parts of America lying between the 30th and 40th parallels. +</p> + +<p> +Herbert was very sorry that Top had not caught one of these carnivora. +</p> + +<p> +“Can we eat them?” asked Pencroff, who always considered the fauna +of the island from that special point of view. +</p> + +<p> +“No,” said Herbert, “but zoologists have not yet ascertained +whether the pupil of the eye of this fox is diurnal or nocturnal, or whether +the animal would come under the genus “canine.” +</p> + +<p> +Smith could not help smiling at this remark of the boy, which showed +thoughtfulness beyond his years. As for the sailor, from the moment these foxes +ceased to belong to the edible species, they ceased to interest him. Ever since +the kitchen had been established at Granite House he had been saying that +precautions ought to be taken against these four-footed plunderers. A fact +which no one denied. +</p> + +<p> +Having turned Jetsam Point the party came upon a long reach washed by the sea. +It was then 8 o’clock in the morning. The sky was very clear, as is usual +in prolonged cold weather; but, warmed by their work, Smith and his companions +did not suffer from the sharpness of the atmosphere. Besides, there was no +wind, the absence of which always renders a low temperature more endurable. The +sun, bright but cold, rose from the ocean, and his enormous disc was poised in +the horizon. The sea was a calm, blue sheet of water, like a land-locked sea +under a clear sky. Claw Cape, bent in the shape of an ataghan, was clearly +defined about four miles to the southeast. To the left, the border of the swamp +was abruptly intercepted by a little point which shone brightly against the +sun. Certainly in that part of Union Bay, which was not protected from the open +sea, even by a sand bank, ships beaten by an east wind could not have found +shelter. +</p> + +<p> +By the perfect calm of the sea, with no shoals to disturb its waters, by its +uniform color, with no tinge of yellow, and, finally, by the entire absence of +reefs, they knew that this side was steep, and that here the ocean was fathoms +deep. Behind them, in the west, at a distance of about four miles, they saw the +beginning of the Forests of the Far West. They could almost have believed +themselves upon some desolate island in the Antarctic regions surrounded by +ice. +</p> + +<p> +The party halted here for breakfast; a fire of brushwood and seaweed was +lighted, and Neb prepared the meal of cold meat, to which he added some cups of +Oswego tea. While eating they looked around them. This side of Lincoln island +was indeed barren, and presented a strong contrast to the western part. +</p> + +<p> +The reporter thought that if the castaways had been thrown upon this coast, +they would have had a very melancholy impression of their future home. +</p> + +<p> +“I do not believe we could even have reached it,” said the +engineer, “for the sea is very deep here, and there is not even a rock +which would have served as a refuge; before Granite House there were shoals, at +least, and a little island which multiplied our chances of safety; here is only +the bottomless sea.” +</p> + +<p> +“It is curious enough,” said Spilett, “that this island, +relatively so small, presents so varied a soil. This diversity of appearance +belongs, logically, only to continents of a considerable area. One would really +think that the western side of Lincoln Island, so rich and fertile, was washed +by the warm waters of the Gulf of Mexico, and that the northern and southern +coasts extended into a sort of Arctic Sea.” +</p> + +<p> +“You are right, my dear Spilett,” replied the engineer, “I +have observed the same thing. I have found this island curious both in its +shape and in its character. It has all the peculiarities of a continent, and I +would not be surprised if it had been a continent formerly.” +</p> + +<p> +“What! a continent in the middle of the Pacific!” cried Pencroff. +</p> + +<p> +“Why not?” answered Smith. “Why should not Australia, New +Ireland, all that the English geographers call Australasia, joined to the +Archipelagoes of the Pacific Ocean, have formed in times past a sixth part of +the world as important as Europe or Asia, Africa or the two Americas. My mind +does not refuse to admit that all the islands rising from this vast ocean are +the mountains of a continent now engulphed, but which formerly rose +majestically from these waters.” +</p> + +<p> +“Like Atlantis?” asked Herbert. “Yes. my boy, if that ever +existed.” “And Lincoln Island may have been a part of this +continent?” asked Pencroff. “It is probable,” replied Smith. +“And that would explain the diversity of products upon the surface, and +the number of animals which still live here,” added Herbert. +</p> + +<p> +“Yes, my boy,” answered the engineer, “and that gives me a +new argument in support of my theory. It is certain after what we have seen +that the animals in the island are numerous, and what is more curious, is that +the species are extremely varied. There must be a reason for this, and mine is, +that Lincoln Island was formerly a part of some vast continent, which has, +little by little, sunk beneath the surface of the Pacific.” +“Then,” said Pencroff, who did not seem entirely convinced, +“what remains of this old continent may disappear in its turn and leave +nothing between America and Asia.” “Yes,” said Smith, +“there will be new continents which millions upon millions of animalculæ +are building at this moment.” “And who are these masons?” +inquired Pencroff. “The coral insects,” answered Smith. “It +is these who have built by their constant labor the Island of Clermont +Tonnerre, the Atolls and many other coral islands which abound in the Pacific. +It takes 47,000,000 of these insects to deposit one particle; and yet with the +marine salt which they absorb, and the solid elements of the water which they +assimilate, these animalculæ produce limestone, and limestone forms those +enormous submarine structures whose hardness and solidity is equal to that of +granite. +</p> + +<p> +Formerly, during the first epochs of creation, Nature employed heat to produce +land by upheaval, but now she lets these microscopic insects replace this +agent, whose dynamic power at the interior of this globe has evidently +diminished. This fact is sufficiently proved by the great number of volcanoes +actually extinct on the surface of the earth. I verily believe that century +after century, and infusoria after infusoria will change the Pacific some day +into a vast continent, which new generations will, in their turn, inhabit and +civilize.” +</p> + +<p> +“It will take a long time,” said Pencroff. “Nature has time +on her side,” replied the engineer. “But what is the good of new +continents?” asked Herbert. “It seems to me that the present extent +of habitable countries is enough for mankind. Now Nature does nothing in +vain.” “Nothing in vain, indeed,” replied the engineer; +“but let us see how we can explain the necessity of new continents in the +future, and precisely in these tropical regions occupied by these coral +islands. Here is an explanation, which seems to me at least plausible.” +</p> + +<p> +“We are listening, Mr. Smith,” replied Herbert. +</p> + +<p> +“This is my idea: Scientists generally admit that some day the globe must +come to an end, or rather the animal and vegetable life will be no longer +possible, on account of the intense cold which will prevail. What they cannot +agree upon is the cause of this cold. Some think that it will be produced by +the cooling of the sun in the course of millions of years; others by the +gradual extinction of the internal fires of our own globe, which have a more +decided influence than is generally supposed. I hold to this last hypothesis, +based upon the fact that the moon is without doubt a refrigerated planet, which +is no longer habitable, although the sun continues to pour upon its surface the +same amount of heat. If then, the moon is refrigerated, it is because these +internal fires, to which like all the stellar world it owes its origin, are +entirely extinct. In short, whatever be the cause, our world will certainly +some day cool; but this cooling will take place gradually. What will happen +then? Why, the temperate zones, at a time more or less distant, will be no more +habitable than are the Polar regions now. Then human, as well as animal life, +will be driven to latitudes more directly under the influence of the solar +rays. An immense emigration will take place. Europe, Central Asia, and North +America will little by little be abandoned, as well as Australasia and the +lower parts of South America. Vegetation will follow the human emigration. The +flora will move towards the equator at the same time with the fauna, the +central parts of South America and Africa will become the inhabited continent. +The Laplanders and the Samoyedes will find the climate of the Polar Sea on the +banks of the Mediterranean. Who can tell but that at this epoch, the equatorial +regions will not be too small to contain and nourish the population of the +globe. Now, why should not a provident nature, in order from this time, to +provide a refuge for this animal and vegetable emigration, lay the foundation, +under the equator, of a new continent, and charge these infusoria with the +building of it? I have often thought of this, my friends, and I seriously +believe that, some day, the aspect of our globe will be completely transformed, +that after the upheaval of new continents the seas will cover the old ones, and +that in future ages some Columbus will discover in the islands of Chimborazo or +the Himalaya, or Mount Blanc, all that remains of an America, an Asia, and a +Europe. Then at last, these new continents, in their turn, will become +uninhabitable. The heat will die out as does the heat from a body whose soul +has departed, and life will disappear from the globe, if not forever, at least +for a time. Perhaps then our sphere will rest from its changes, and will +prepare in death to live again under nobler conditions. +</p> + +<p> +“But all this my friends, is with the Creator of all things. From the +talking of the work of these infusoria I have been led into too deep a scrutiny +of the secrets of the future.” +</p> + +<p> +“My dear Cyrus,” said the reporter, “these theories are to me +prophesies. Some day they will be accomplished.” +</p> + +<p> +“It is a secret with the Almighty,” replied Smith. +</p> + +<p> +“All this is well and good,” said Pencroff, who had listened with +all his ears, “but will you tell me, Mr. Smith, if Lincoln Island has +been constructed by these infusoria.” +</p> + +<p> +“No,” replied Smith, “it is of purely volcanic origin.” +</p> + +<p> +“Then it will probably disappear some day. I hope sincerely we +won’t be here.” +</p> + +<p> +“No, be easy, Pencroff, we will get away.” +</p> + +<p> +“In the meantime,” said Spilett, “let us settle ourselves as +if forever. It is never worth while to do anything by halves.” +</p> + +<p> +This ended the conversation. Breakfast was over, the exploration continued, and +the party soon arrived at the beginning of the swampy district. +</p> + +<p> +It was, indeed, a marsh which extended as far as the rounded side forming the +southeastern termination of the island, and measuring twenty square miles. The +soil was formed of a silicious clay mixed with decayed vegetation. It was +covered by confervæ, rushes, sedges, and here and there by beds of herbage, +thick as a velvet carpet. In many places frozen pools glistened under the +sun’s rays. Neither rains, nor any river swollen by a sudden increase +could have produced this water. One would naturally conclude that this swamp +was fed by the infiltration of water through the soil. And this was the fact. +It was even to be feared that the air here during hot weather, was laden with +that miasma which engenders the marsh fever. Above the aquatic herbs on the +surface of the stagnant waters, a swarm of birds were flying. A hunter would +not have lost a single shot. Wild ducks, teal, and snipe lived there in flocks, +and it was easy to approach these fearless creatures. So thick were these birds +that a charge of shot would certainly have brought down a dozen of them, but +our friends had to content themselves with their bows and arrows. The slaughter +was less, but the quiet arrow had the advantage of not frightening the birds, +while the sound of fire-arms would have scattered them to every corner of the +swamp. The hunters contented themselves this time with a dozen ducks, with +white bodies, cinnamon-colored belts, green heads, wings black, white, and red, +and feathered beaks. These Herbert recognized as the “Tadorns.” Top +did his share well in the capture of these birds, whose name was given this +swampy district. +</p> + +<p> +The colonists now had an abundant reserve of aquatic game. When the time should +come the only question would be how to make a proper use of them, and it was +probable that several species of these birds would be, if not domesticated, at +least acclimated, upon the borders of the lake, which would bring them nearer +to the place of consumption. +</p> + +<p> +About 5 o’clock in the afternoon Smith and his companions turned their +faces homewards. They crossed Tadorn’s Fens, and re-crossed the Mercy +upon the ice, arriving at Granite House at 8 o’clock in the evening. +</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2><a name="XXII" id="XXII"></a>CHAPTER XXII.</h2> + +<p class="letter"> +THE TRAPS—THE FOXES—THE PECCARIES —THE WIND VEERS TO THE +NORTHWEST —THE SNOW-STORM—THE BASKET-MAKERS —THE COLDEST SNAP +OF WINTER —CRYSTALLIZATION OF THE SUGAR-MAPLE —THE MYSTERIOUS +SHAFTS—THE PROJECTED EXPLORATION—THE PELLET OF LEAD. +</p> + +<p> +The intense cold lasted until the 15th of August, the thermometer never rising +above the point hitherto observed. When the atmosphere was calm this low +temperature could be easily borne; but when the wind blew, the poor fellows +suffered much for want of warmer clothing. Pencroff regretted that Lincoln +Island, instead of harboring so many foxes and seals, with no fur to speak of, +did not shelter some families of bears. +</p> + +<p> +“Bears,” said he, “are generally well dressed; and I would +ask nothing better for the winter than the loan of their warm cloaks.”. +</p> + +<p> +“But perhaps,” said Neb, laughing “These bears would not +consent to give you their cloak. Pencroff, these fellows are no Saint +Martins.” +</p> + +<p> +“We would make them, Neb, we would make them,” answered Pencroff in +a tone of authority. +</p> + +<p> +But these formidable carnivora did not dwell on the island, or if they did, had +not yet shown themselves. Herbert, Pencroff, and the reporter were constantly +at work getting traps on Prospect Plateau and on the borders of the forest. In +the sailor’s opinion any animal whatever would be a prize, and rodents or +carnivora, whichever these new traps should entice, would be well received at +Granite House. These traps were very simple. They were pits dug in the ground +and covered with branches and grass, which hid the openings. At the bottom they +placed some bait, whose odor would attract the animals. They used their +discretion about the position of their traps, choosing places where numerous +footprints indicated the frequent passage of quadrupeds. Every day they went to +look at them, and at three different times during the first few days they found +in them specimens of those foxes which had been already seen on the right bank +of the Mercy. +</p> + +<p> +“Pshaw! there are nothing but foxes in this part of the world,” +said Pencroff, as, for the third time, he drew one of these animals out of the +pit. “Good-for-nothing beasts;” +</p> + +<p> +“Stop,” said Spilett; “they are good for something.” +</p> + +<p> +“For what?” +</p> + +<p> +“To serve as bait to attract others!” +</p> + +<p> +The reporter was right, and from this time the traps were baited with the dead +bodies of foxes. The sailor had made snares out of the threads of curry-jonc, +and these snares were more profitable than the traps. It was a rare thing for a +day to pass without some rabbit from the warren being captured. It was always a +rabbit, but Neb knew how to vary his sauces, and his companions did not +complain. However, once or twice in the second week in August, the traps +contained other and more useful animals than the foxes. There were some of +those wild boars which had been already noticed at the north of the lake. +Pencroff had no need to ask if these animals were edible, that was evident from +their resemblance to the hog of America and Europe. +</p> + +<p> +“But these are not hogs, let me tell you,” said Herbert. +</p> + +<p> +“My boy,” replied the sailor, handing over the trap and drawing out +one of these representatives of the swine family by the little appendage which +served for a tail, “do let me believe them to be hogs.” +</p> + +<p> +“Why?” +</p> + +<p> +“Because it pleases me.” +</p> + +<p> +“You are fond of hogs, then, Pencroff?” +</p> + +<p> +“I am very fond of them,” replied the sailor, “especially of +their feet, and if any had eight instead of four I would like them twice as +much.” +</p> + +<p> +These animals were peccaries, belonging to one of the four genera, which make +up that family. This particular species were the “tajassans,” known +by there dark color and the absence of those long fangs which belong to the +others of their race. Peccaries generally live in herds, and it was likely that +these animals abounded in the woody parts of the island. At all events they +were edible from head to foot, and Pencroff asked nothing more. +</p> + +<p> +About the 15th of August the weather moderated suddenly by a change of wind to +the northwest. The temperature rose several degrees higher, and the vapors +accumulated in the air were soon resolved into snow. The whole island was +covered with a white mantle, and presented a new aspect to its inhabitants. It +snowed hard for several days and the ground was covered two feet deep. The wind +soon rose with great violence and from the top of Granite House they could hear +the sea roaring against the reefs. +</p> + +<p> +At certain angles the wind made eddies in the air, and the snow, forming itself +into high whirling columns, looked like those twisting waterspouts which +vessels attack with cannon. The hurricane, coming steadily from the northwest, +spent its force on the other side of the island, and the eastern lookout of +Granite House preserved it from a direct attack. +</p> + +<p> +During this snow-storm, as terrible as those of the polar regions, neither +Smith nor his companions could venture outside. They were completely housed for +five days, from the 20th to the 25th of August. They heard the tempest roar +though Jacamar Woods, which must have suffered sadly. Doubtless numbers of +trees were uprooted, but Pencroff comforted himself with the reflection that +there would be fewer to cut down. +</p> + +<p> +“The wind will be wood-cutter; let it alone,” said he. +</p> + +<p> +How fervently now the inhabitants of Granite House must have thanked Heaven for +having given to them this solid and impenetrable shelter! Smith had his share +of their gratitude, but after all, it was nature which had hollowed out this +enormous cave, and he had only discovered it. Here all were in safety, the +violence of the tempest could not reach them. If they had built a house of +brick and wood on Prospect Plateau, it could not have resisted the fury of this +hurricane. As for the Chimneys, they heard the billows strike them with such +violence that they knew they must be uninhabitable, for the sea, having +entirely covered their islet, beat upon them with all its force. +</p> + +<p> +But here at Granite House, between these solid walls which neither wind nor +water could effect, they had nothing to fear. During this confinement the +colonists were not idle. There was plenty of wood in the storehouse cut into +planks, and little by little they completed their stock of furniture. As far as +tables and chairs went they were certainly solid enough, for the material was +not spared. This furniture was a little too heavy to fulfil its essential +purpose of being easily moved, but it was the pride of Neb and Pencroff, who +would not have exchanged it for the handsomest Buhl. +</p> + +<p> +Then the carpenters turned basket-makers, and succeeded remarkably well at this +new occupation. +</p> + +<p> +They had discovered at the northern part of the lake a thick growth of purple +osiers. Before the rainy season, Pencroff and Herbert had gathered a good many +of these useful shrubs; and their branches, being now well seasoned, could be +used to advantage. Their first specimens were rough; but, thanks to the skill +and intelligence of the workmen consulting together, recalling the models they +had seen, and rivalling each other in their efforts, hampers and baskets of +different sizes here soon added to the stock of the colony. The storehouse was +filled with them, and Neb set away in special baskets his stock of pistachio +nuts and roots of the dragon tree. +</p> + +<p> +During the last week in August the weather changed again, the temperature fell +a little, and the storm was over. The colonists at once started out. There must +have been at least two feet of snow on the shore, but it was frozen over the +top, which made it easy to walk over. Smith and his companions climbed up +Prospect Plateau. What a change they beheld! The woods which they had left in +bloom, especially the part nearest to them where the conifers were plenty, were +now one uniform color. +</p> + +<p> +Everything was white, from the top of Mount Franklin to the +coast—forests, prairie, lake, river, beach. The waters of the Mercy ran +under a vault of ice, which cracked and broke with a loud noise at every change +of tide. Thousands of birds—ducks and wood-peckers—flew over the +surface of the lake. The rocks between which the cascade plunged to the borders +of the Plateau were blocked up with ice. One would have said that the water +leaped out of a huge gargoyle, cut by some fantastic artist of the Renaissance. +To calculate the damage done to the forest by this hurricane would be +impossible until the snow had entirely disappeared. +</p> + +<p> +Spilett, Pencroff, and Herbert took this opportunity to look after their traps +and had hard work finding them under their bed of snow. There was danger of +their falling in themselves; a humiliating thing to be caught in one’s +own trap! They were spared this annoyance, however, and found the traps had +been untouched; not an animal had been caught, although there were a great many +footprints in the neighborhood, among others, very clearly impressed marks of +claws. +</p> + +<p> +Herbert at once classified these carnivora among the cat tribe, a circumstance +which justified the engineer’s belief in the existence of dangerous +beasts on Lincoln Island. Doubtless these beasts dwelt in the dense forests of +the Far West; but driven by hunger, they had ventured as far as Prospect +Plateau. Perhaps they scented the inhabitants of Granite House. +</p> + +<p> +“What, exactly, are these carnivora?” asked Pencroff. +</p> + +<p> +“They are tigers,” replied Herbert. +</p> + +<p> +“I thought those animals were only found in warm countries.” +</p> + +<p> +“In the New World,” replied the lad, “they are to be found +from Mexico to the pampas of Buenos Ayres. Now, as Lincoln Island is in almost +the same latitude as La Plata, it is not surprising that tigers are found +here.” +</p> + +<p> +“All right, we will be on our guard,” replied Pencroff. +</p> + +<p> +In the meantime, the temperature rising, the snow began to melt, it came on to +rain, and gradually the white mantle disappeared. Notwithstanding the bad +weather the colonists renewed their stock of provisions, both animal and +vegetable. +</p> + +<p> +This necessitated excursions into the forest, and thus they discovered how many +trees had been beaten down by the hurricane. The sailor and Neb pushed forward +with their wagon as far as the coal deposit in order to carry back some fuel. +They saw on their way that the chimney of the pottery oven had been much +damaged by the storm; at least six feet had been blown down. +</p> + +<p> +They also renewed their stock of wood as well as that of coal, and the Mercy +having become free once more, they employed the current to draw several loads +to Granite House. It might be that the cold season was not yet over. +</p> + +<p> +A visit had been made to the Chimneys also, and the colonists could not be +sufficiently grateful that this had not been their home during the tempest. The +sea had left undoubted signs of its ravages. Lashed by the fury of the wind +from the offing, and rushing over Safety Island, it spent its full force upon +these passages, leaving them half full of sand and the rocks thickly covered +with seaweed. +</p> + +<p> +While Neb, Herbert, and Pencroff spent their time in hunting and renewing their +supply of fuel, Smith andSpilett set to work to clear out the Chimneys. They +found the forge and furnaces almost unhurt, so carefully protected had they +been by the banks of sand which the colonists had built around them. +</p> + +<p> +It was a fortunate thing that they laid in a fresh supply of fuel, for the +colonists had not yet seen the end of the intense cold. It is well known that +in the Northern Hemisphere, the month of February is noted for its low +temperature. The same rule held good in the Southern Hemisphere, and the end of +August, which is the February of North America, did not escape from this +climatic law. +</p> + +<p> +About the 25th, after another snow and rain storm, the wind veered to the +southeast, and suddenly the cold became intense. In the engineer’s +opinion, a Fahrenheit thermometer would have indicated about eight degrees +below zero, and the cold was rendered more severe by a cutting wind which +lasted for several days. +</p> + +<p> +The colonists were completely housed again, and as they were obliged to block +up all their windows, only leaving one narrow opening for ventilation, the +consumption of candles was considerable. In order to economize them, the +colonists often contented themselves with only the light from the fire; for +fuel was plenty. +</p> + +<p> +Once or twice some of them ventured to the beach, among the blocks of ice which +were heaped up there by every fresh tide. But they soon climbed up to Granite +House again. This ascent was very painful, as their hands were frostbitten by +holding on to the frozen sides of the ladder. +</p> + +<p> +There were still many leisure hours to be filled up during this long +confinement, so Smith undertook another indoor occupation. +</p> + +<p> +The only sugar which they had had up to this time was a liquid substance which +they had procured by making deep cuts in the bark of the maple tree. They +collected this liquid in jars and used it in this condition for cooking +purposes. It improved with age, becoming whiter and more like a syrup in +consistency. But they could do better than this, and one day Cyrus Smith +announced to his companions that he was going to turn them into refiners. +</p> + +<p> +“Refiners! I believe that’s a warm trade?” said Pencroff. +</p> + +<p> +“Very warm!” replied the engineer. +</p> + +<p> +“Then it will suit this season!” answered the sailor. +</p> + +<p> +Refining did not necessitate a stock of complicated tools or skilled workmen; +it was a very simple operation. +</p> + +<p> +To crystallize this liquid they first clarified it, by putting it on the fire +in earthenware jars, and submitting it to evaporation. Soon a scum rose to the +surface, which, when it began to thicken, Neb removed carefully with a wooden +ladle. This hastened the evaporation, and at the same time prevented it from +scorching. +</p> + +<p> +After several hours boiling over a good fire, which did as much good to the +cooks as it did to the boiling liquid, it turned into a thick syrup. This syrup +was poured into clay moulds which they had made beforehand, in various shapes +in the same kitchen furnace. +</p> + +<p> +The next day the syrup hardened, forming cakes and loaves. It was sugar of a +reddish color, but almost transparent, and of a delicious taste. +</p> + +<p> +The cold continued until the middle of September, and the inmates of Granite +House began to find their captivity rather tedious. Almost every day they took +a run out-doors, but they always soon returned. They were constantly at work +over their household duties, and talked while they worked. +</p> + +<p> +Smith instructed his companions in everything, and especially explained to them +the practical applications of science. +</p> + +<p> +The colonists had no library at their disposal, but the engineer was a book, +always ready, always open at the wished-for page. A book which answered their +every question, and one which they often read. Thus the time passed, and these +brave man had no fear for the future. +</p> + +<p> +However, they were all anxious for the end of their captivity, and longed to +see, if not fine weather, at least a cessation of the intense cold. If they had +only had warmer clothing, they would have attempted excursions to the downs and +to Tadorns’ Fens, for game would have been easy to approach, and the hunt +would assuredly have been fruitful. But Smith insisted that no one should +compromise his health, as he had need of every hand; and his advice was taken. +</p> + +<p> +The most impatient of the prisoners, after Pencroff, was Top. The poor dog +found himself in close quarters in Granite House, and ran from room to room, +showing plainly the uneasiness he felt at this confinement. +</p> + +<p> +Smith often noticed that whenever he approached the dark well communicating +with the sea, which had its opening in the rear of the storehouse, Top whined +in a most curious manner, and ran around and around the opening, which had been +covered over with planks of wood. Sometimes he even tried to slip his paws +under the planks, as if trying to raise them up, and yelped in a way which +indicated at the same time anger and uneasiness. +</p> + +<p> +The engineer several times noticed this strange behavior, and wondered what +there could be in the abyss to have such a peculiar effect upon this +intelligent dog. +</p> + +<p> +This well, of course, communicated with the sea. Did it then branch off into +narrow passages through the rock-work of the island? Was it in communication +with other caves? Did any sea-monsters come into it from time to time from the +bottom of these pits? +</p> + +<p> +The engineer did not know what to think, and strange thoughts passed through +his mind. Accustomed to investigate scientific truths, he could not pardon +himself for being drawn into the region of the mysterious and supernatural; but +how explain why Top, the most sensible of dogs, who never lost his time in +barking at the moon, should insist upon exploring this abyss with nose and ear, +if there was nothing there to arouse his suspicions? +</p> + +<p> +Top’s conduct perplexed Smith more than he cared to own to himself. +However, the engineer did not mention this to any one but Spilett, thinking it +useless to worry his companions with what might be, after all, only a freak of +the dog. +</p> + +<p> +At last the cold spell was over. They had rain, snow-squalls, hail-storms, and +gales of wind, but none of these lasted long. The ice thawed and the snow +melted; the beach, plateau, banks of the Mercy, and the forest were again +accessible. The return of spring rejoiced the inmates of Granite House, and +they soon passed all their time in the open air, only returning to eat and +sleep. +</p> + +<p> +They hunted a good deal during the latter part of September, which led Pencroff +to make fresh demands for those fire-arms which he declared Smith had promised +him. Smith always put him off, knowing that without a special stock of tools it +would be almost impossible to make a gun which would be of any use to them. +</p> + +<p> +Besides, he noticed that Herbert and Spilett had become very clever archers, +that all sorts of excellent game, both feathered and furred—agoutis, +kangaroos, cabiais, pigeons, bustards, wild ducks, and snipe—fell under +their arrows; consequently the firearms could wait. But the stubborn sailor did +not see it in this light, and constantly reminded the engineer that he had not +provided them with guns; and Gideon Spilett supported Pencroff. +</p> + +<p> +“If,” said he, “the island contains, as we suppose, wild +beasts, we must consider how to encounter and exterminate them. The time may +come when this will be our first duty.” +</p> + +<p> +But just now it was not the question of firearms which occupied Smith’s +mind, but that of clothes. Those which the colonists were wearing had lasted +through the winter, but could not hold out till another. What they must have at +any price was skins of the carnivora, or wool of the ruminants; and as +moufflons (mountain goats), were plenty, they must consider how to collect a +flock of them which they could keep for the benefit of the colony. They would +also lay out a farm yard in a favorable part of the island, where they could +have an enclosure for domestic animals and a poultry yard. +</p> + +<p> +These important projects must be carried out during the good weather. +Consequently, in view of these future arrangements, it was important to +undertake a reconnoissance into the unexplored part of Lincoln Island, to +wit:—the high forests which extended along the right bank of the Mercy, +from its mouth to the end of Serpentine Peninsula. But they must be sure of +their weather, and a month must yet elapse before it would be worth while to +undertake this exploration. While they were waiting impatiently, an incident +occurred which redoubled their anxiety to examine the whole island. +</p> + +<p> +It was now the 24th of October. On this day Pencroff went to look after his +traps which he always kept duly baited. In one of them, he found three animals, +of a sort welcome to the kitchen. It was a female peccary with her two little +ones. Pencroff returned to Granite House, delighted with his prize, and, as +usual, made a great talk about it. +</p> + +<p> +“Now, we’ll have a good meal, Mr Smith,” cried he, “and +you too, Mr. Spilett, must have some.” +</p> + +<p> +“I shall be delighted,” said the reporter, “but what is it +you want me to eat?” +</p> + +<p> +“Sucking pig,” said Pencroff. +</p> + +<p> +“Oh, a suckling-pig! To hear you talk one would think you had brought +back a stuffed partridge!” +</p> + +<p> +“Umph,” said Pencroff, “so you turn up your nose at my +suckling pig?” +</p> + +<p> +“No,” answered Spilett coolly, “provided one does not get too +much of them—” +</p> + +<p> +“Very well, Mr. Reporter!” returned the sailor, who did not like to +hear his game disparaged. “You are getting fastidious! Seven months ago, +when we were cast upon this island, you would have been only too glad to have +come across such game.” +</p> + +<p> +“Well, well,” said the reporter, “men are never +satisfied.” +</p> + +<p> +“And now,” continued Pencroff, “I hope Neb will distinguish +himself. Let us see; these little peccaries are only three months old, they +will be as tender as quail. Come, Neb, I will superintend the cooking of them +myself.” +</p> + +<p> +The sailor, followed by Neb, hastened to the kitchen, and was soon absorbed +over the oven. The two prepared a magnificent repast; the two little peccaries, +kangaroo soup, smoked ham, pistachio nuts, dragon-tree wine, Oswego tea; in a +word, everything of the best. But the favorite dish of all was the savory +peccaries made into a stew. At 5 o’clock, dinner was served in the +dining-room of Granite House. The kangaroo soup smoked upon the table. It was +pronounced excellent. +</p> + +<p> +After the soup came the peccaries, which Pencroff begged to be allowed to +carve, and of which he gave huge pieces to every one. These suckling pigs were +indeed delicious, and Pencroff plied his knife and fork with intense +earnestness, when suddenly a cry and an oath escaped him. +</p> + +<p> +“What’s the matter?” said Smith. +</p> + +<p> +“The matter is that I have just lost a tooth!” replied the sailor. +</p> + +<p> +“Are there pebbles in your peccaries, then?” said Spilett. +</p> + +<p> +“It seems so,” said the sailor, taking out of his mouth the object +which had cost him a grinder. +</p> + +<p> +It was not a pebble, it was a leaden pellet. +</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2><a name="PART_II" id="PART_II"></a>PART II<br/> +THE ABANDONED</h2> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2><a name="XXIII" id="XXIII"></a>CHAPTER XXIII.</h2> + +<p class="letter"> +CONCERNING THE LEADEN PELLET—MAKING A CANOE—HUNTING—IN THE +TOP OF A KAURI—NOTHING TO INDICATE THE PRESENCE OF MAN—THE TURTLE +ON ITS BACK—THE TURTLE DISAPPEARS—SMITH’S EXPLANATION. +</p> + +<p> +It was exactly seven months since the passengers in the balloon had been thrown +upon Lincoln Island. In all this time no human being had been seen. No smoke +had betrayed the presence of man upon he island. No work of man’s hands, +either ancient or modern, had attested his passage. Not only did it seem +uninhabited at present, but it appeared to have been so always. And now all the +framework of deductions fell before a little bit of metal found in the body of +a pig. +</p> + +<p> +It was certainly a bullet from a gun, and what but a human being would be so +provided? +</p> + +<p> +When Pencroff had placed it upon the table, his companions looked at it with +profound astonishment. The possibilities suggested by this seemingly trivial +incident flashed before them. The sudden appearance of a supernatural being +could not have impressed them more. +</p> + +<p> +Smith instantly began to reason upon the theories which this incident, as +surprising as it was unexpected, suggested. Taking the bit of lead between his +fingers he turned it round and about for some time before he spoke. +</p> + +<p> +“You are sure, Pencroff,” he asked, at length, “that the +peccary was hardly three months old?” +</p> + +<p> +“I’m sure, sir,” answered the sailor. “It was sucking +its mother when I found it in the ditch.” +</p> + +<p> +“Well, then, that proves that within three months a gun has been fired +upon Lincoln Island.” +</p> + +<p> +“And that the bullet has wounded, though not mortally, this little +animal,” added Spilett. +</p> + +<p> +“Undoubtedly,” replied Smith; “and now let us see what +conclusions are to be drawn from this incident. Either the island was inhabited +before our arrival, or men have landed here within three months. How these men +arrived, whether voluntarily or involuntarily, whether by landing or by +shipwreck, cannot be settled at present. Neither have we any means of +determining whether they are Europeans or Malays, friends or enemies; nor do we +know whether they are living here at present or whether they have gone. But +these questions are too important to be allowed to remain undecided.” +</p> + +<p> +“No!” cried the sailor springing from the table. “There can +be no men besides ourselves on Lincoln Island. Why, the island is not large: +and if it had been inhabited, we must have met some one of its people before +this.” +</p> + +<p> +“It would, indeed, be astonishing if we had not,” said Herbert. +</p> + +<p> +“But it would be much more astonishing, I think,” remarked the +reporter, “if this little beast had been born with a bullet in his +body!” +</p> + +<p> +“Unless,” suggested Neb, seriously, “Pencroff had had +it—” +</p> + +<p> +“How’s that, Neb?” interrupted the sailor, “I, to have +had a bullet in my jaw for five or six months, without knowing it? Where would +it have been?” he added, opening his mouth and displaying the thirty-two +splendid teeth that ornamented it. “Look, Neb, and if you can find one +broken one in the whole set you may pull out half-a-dozen!” +</p> + +<p> +“Neb’s theory is inadmissible,” said Smith, who, in spite of +the gravity of his thoughts, could not restrain a smile. “It is certain +that a gun has been discharged on the island within three months. But I am +bound to believe that the persons on this island have been here but a short +time, or else simply landed in passing; as, had the island had inhabitants when +we made the ascent of Mount Franklin, we must have seen them or been seen. It +is more probable, that within the past few weeks some people have been +shipwrecked somewhere upon the coast; the thing, therefore, to do is to +discover this point.” +</p> + +<p> +“I think we should act cautiously,” said the reporter. +</p> + +<p> +“I think so, too,” replied Smith, “as I fear that they must +be Malay pirates;” +</p> + +<p> +“How would it do, Mr. Smith,” said the sailor, “to build A +canoe so that we could go up this river, or, if need be, round the coast? It +won’t do to be taken unawares.” +</p> + +<p> +“It’s a good idea,” answered the engineer; “but we have +not the time now. It would take at least a month to build a canoe—” +</p> + +<p> +“A regular one, yes,” rejoined the sailor; “but we +don’t want it to stand the sea. I will guarantee to make one in less than +five days that will do to use on the Mercy.” +</p> + +<p> +“Build a boat in five days,” cried Neb. +</p> + +<p> +“Yes, Neb, one of Indian fashion.” +</p> + +<p> +“Of wood?” demanded the negro, still incredulous. +</p> + +<p> +“Of wood, or what is better, of bark,” answered Pencroff. +“Indeed, Mr. Smith, it could be done in five days!” +</p> + +<p> +“Be it so, then,” answered the engineer. “In five +days.” +</p> + +<p> +“But we must look out for ourselves in the meantime!” said Herbert. +</p> + +<p> +“With the utmost caution, my friends,” answered Smith. “And +be very careful to confine your hunting expeditions to the neighborhood of +Granite House.” +</p> + +<p> +The dinner was finished in lower spirits than Pencroff had expected. The +incident of the bullet proved beyond doubt that the island had been, or was +now, inhabited by others, and such a discovery awakened the liveliest anxiety +in the breasts of the colonists. +</p> + +<p> +Smith and Spilett, before retiring, had a long talk about these things. They +questioned, if by chance this incident had an connection with the unexplained +rescue of the engineer, and other strange events which they had encountered in +so many ways. Smith, after having discussed the pros and cons of the question, +ended by saying:— +</p> + +<p> +“In short, Spilett, do you want to know my opinion?” +</p> + +<p> +“Yes, Cyrus.” +</p> + +<p> +“Well, this is it. No matter how minutely we examine the island, we will +find nothing!” +</p> + +<p> +Pencroff began his work the next day. He did not mean to build a boat with ribs +and planks, but simply a flat bottomed float, which would do admirably in the +Mercy, especially in the shallow water and its sources. Strips of bark fastened +together would be sufficient for their purpose, and in places where a portage +would be necessary the affair would be neither heavy nor cumbersome. The +sailor’s idea was to fasten the strips of bark together with clinched +nails, and thus to make the craft staunch. +</p> + +<p> +The first thing was to select trees furnishing a supple and tough bark. Now, it +had happened that the last storm had blown down a number of Douglass pines, +which were perfectly adapted to this purpose. Some of these lay prone upon the +earth, and all the colonists had to do was to strip them of their bark, though +this indeed was somewhat difficult, on account of the awkwardness of their +tools. +</p> + +<p> +While the sailor, assisted by the engineer was thus occupied, Herbert and +Spilett, who had been made purveyors to the colony, were not idle. The reporter +could not help admiring the young lad, who had acquired a remarkable +proficiency in the use of the bow and arrows, and who exhibited, withal, +considerable hardiness and coolness. The two hunters, remembering the caution +of the engineer, never ventured more than two miles from Granite House, but the +outskirts of the forest furnished a sufficient supply of agoutis, cabiais, +kangaroos, peccaries, etc., and although the traps had not done so well since +the cold had abated, the warren furnished a supply sufficient for the wants of +the colonists. +</p> + +<p> +Often, while on these excursions, Herbert conversed with Spilett about the +incident of the bullet and of the engineer’s conclusions, and one +day—the 26th of October—he said:— +</p> + +<p> +“Don’t you think it strange, Mr. Spilett, that any people should +have been wrecked on this island, and never have followed up the coast to +Granite House?” +</p> + +<p> +“Very strange if they are still here,” answered the reporter, +“but not at all astonishing if they are not.” +</p> + +<p> +“Then you think they have gone again?” +</p> + +<p> +“It is likely, my boy, that, if they had staid any time, or were still +here, something would have discovered their presence.” +</p> + +<p> +“But if they had been able to get off again they were not really +shipwrecked.” +</p> + +<p> +“No, Herbert, they were what I should call shipwrecked temporarily. That +is, it is possible that they were driven by stress of weather upon the island, +without having to abandon their vessel, and when the wind moderated they set +out again.” +</p> + +<p> +“One thing is certain,” said Herbert, “and that is, that Mr. +Smith has always seemed to dread, rather than to desire, the presence of human +beings on our island.” +</p> + +<p> +“The reason is, that he knows that only Malays frequent these seas, and +these gentlemen are a kind of rascals that had better be avoided.” +</p> + +<p> +“Is it not possible, sir, that some time we will discover traces of their +landing and, perhaps, be able to settle this point?” +</p> + +<p> +“It is not unlikely, my boy. An abandoned camp or the remains of a fire, +we would certainly notice, and these are what we will look for on our +exploration.” +</p> + +<p> +The hunters, talking in this way, found themselves in a portion of the forest +near the Mercy, remarkable for its splendid trees. Among others, were those +magnificent conifera, called by the New Zealanders “kauris,” rising +mere than 200 feet in height. +</p> + +<p> +“I have an idea, Mr. Spilett,” said Herbert, “supposing I +climb to the top of one of these kauris, I could see, perhaps, for a good +ways.” +</p> + +<p> +“It’s a good idea,” answered the other, “but can you +climb one of these giants?” +</p> + +<p> +“I am going to try, anyhow,” exclaimed the boy, springing upon the +lower branches of one, which grew in such a manner as to make the tree easy to +mount. In a few minutes he was in its top, high above all the surrounding +leafage of the forest. +</p> + +<p> +From this height, the eye could take in all the southern portion of the island +between Claw Cape on the southeast and Reptile Promontory on the southwest. To +the northwest rose Mount Franklin, shutting out more than one-fourth of the +horizon. +</p> + +<p> +But Herbert, from his perch, could overlook the very portion of the island +which was giving, or had given, refuge to the strangers whose presence they +suspected. The lad looked about him with great attention, first towards the +sea, where not a sail was visible, although it was possible that a ship, and +especially one dismasted, lying close in to shore, would be concealed from view +by the trees which hid the coast. In the woods of the Far West nothing could be +seen. The forest formed a vast impenetrable dome many miles in extent, without +an opening or glade. Even the course of the Mercy could not be seen, and it +might be that there were other streams flowing westward, which were equally +invisible. +</p> + +<p> +But, other signs failing, could not the lad catch in the air some smoke that +would indicate the presence of man? The atmosphere was pure, and the slightest +vapor was sharply outlined against the sky. For an instant Herbert thought he +saw a thin film rising in the west, but a more careful observation convinced +him that he was mistaken. He looked again, however, with all care, and his +sight was excellent. No, certainly, it was nothing. +</p> + +<p> +Herbert climbed down the tree, and he and the reporter returned to Granite +House. There Smith listened to the lad’s report without comment. It was +plain he would not commit himself until after the island had been explored. +</p> + +<p> +Two days later—the 28th of October—another unaccountable incident +happened. +</p> + +<p> +In strolling along the beach, two miles from Granite House, Herbert and Neb had +been lucky enough to capture a splendid specimen of the chelonia mydas (green +turtle), whose carapace shone with emerald reflections. Herbert had caught +sight of it moving among the rocks towards the sea. +</p> + +<p> +“Stop him, Neb, stop him!” he cried. +</p> + +<p> +Neb ran to it. +</p> + +<p> +“It’s a fine animal,” said Neb, “but how are we going +to keep it?” +</p> + +<p> +“That’s easy enough, Neb. All we have to do is to turn it on its +back, and then it cannot get away. Take your spear and do as I do.” +</p> + +<p> +The reptile had shut itself in its shell, so that neither its head nor eyes +were visible, and remained motionless as a rock. The lad and the negro placed +their spears underneath it, and, after some difficulty, succeeded in turning it +over. It measured three feet in length, and must have weighed at least 400 +pounds. +</p> + +<p> +“There, that will please Pencroff,” cried Neb. +</p> + +<p> +Indeed, the sailor could not fail to be pleased, as the flesh of these turtles, +which feed upon eel-grass, is very savory. +</p> + +<p> +“And now what can we do with our game?” asked Neb; “we +can’t carry it to Granite House.” +</p> + +<p> +“Leave it here, since it cannot turn back again,” answered Herbert, +“and we will come for it with the cart.” +</p> + +<p> +Neb agreed, and Herbert, as an extra precaution, which the negro thought +useless, propped up the reptile with large stones. Then the two returned to +Granite House, following the beach, on which the tide was down. Herbert, +wishing to surprise Pencroff, did not tell him of the prize which was lying on +its back upon the sand; but two hours later Neb and he returned with the cart +to where they had left it, and—the “splendid specimen of chelonia +mydas” was not there! +</p> + +<p> +The two looked about them. Certainly, this was where they had left it. Here +were the stones he had used, and, therefore, the lad could not be mistaken. +</p> + +<p> +“Did the beast turn over, after all?” asked Neb. +</p> + +<p> +“It seems so,” replied Herbert, puzzled, and examining the stones +scattered over the sand. +</p> + +<p> +“Pencroff will be disappointed.” +</p> + +<p> +“And Mr. Smith will be troubled to explain this!” thought Herbert. +</p> + +<p> +“Well,” said Neb, who wished to conceal their misadventure, +“we won’t say anything about it.” +</p> + +<p> +“Indeed, we will tell the whole story,” answered Herbert. +</p> + +<p> +And taking with them the useless cart, they returned to Granite House. +</p> + +<p> +At the shipyard they found the engineer and the sailor working together. +Herbert related all that happened. +</p> + +<p> +“You foolish fellows,” cried the sailor, “to let at least +fifty pounds of soup, escape!” +</p> + +<p> +“But, Pencroff,” exclaimed Neb, “it was not our fault that +the reptile got away; haven’t I told you we turned it on its back?” +</p> + +<p> +“Then you didn’t turn it enough!” calmly asserted the +stubborn sailor. +</p> + +<p> +“Not enough!” cried Herbert; and he told how he had taken care to +prop the turtle up with stones. +</p> + +<p> +“Then it was a miracle!” exclaimed Pencroff. +</p> + +<p> +“Mr. Smith,” asked Herbert, “I thought that turtles once +placed on their backs could not get over again, especially the very large +ones?” +</p> + +<p> +“That is the fact,” answered Smith. +</p> + +<p> +“Then how did it—” +</p> + +<p> +“How far off from the sea did you leave this turtle,” asked the +engineer, who had stopped working and was turning this incident over in his +mind. +</p> + +<p> +“About fifteen feet,” answered Herbert. +</p> + +<p> +“And it was low water?” +</p> + +<p> +“Yes, sir.” +</p> + +<p> +“Well,” responded the engineer, “what the turtle could not do +on land, he could do in water. When the tide rose over him he turned over, +and—tranquilly paddled off.” +</p> + +<p> +“How foolish we are,” cried Neb. +</p> + +<p> +“That is just what I said you were,” answered Pencroff. +</p> + +<p> +Smith had given this explanation, which was doubtless admissible; but was he +himself satisfied with it? He did not venture to say that. +</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2><a name="XXIV" id="XXIV"></a>CHAPTER XXIV.</h2> + +<p class="letter"> +TRIAL OF THE CANOE—A WRECK ON THE SHORE—THE TOW—JETSAM +POINT—INVENTORY OF THE BOX—WHAT PENCROFF WANTED—A +BIBLE—A VERSE FROM THE BIBLE. +</p> + +<p> +On the 29th of October the canoe was finished. Pencroff had kept his word, and +had built, in five days, a sort of bark shell, stiffened with flexible crejimba +rods. A seat at either end, another midway to keep it open, a gunwale for the +thole-pins of a pair of oars, and a paddle to steer with, completed this canoe, +which was twelve feet in length, and did not weigh 200 pounds. +</p> + +<p> +“Hurrah!” cried the sailor, quite ready to applaud his own success. +“With this we can make the tour of—” +</p> + +<p> +“Of the world?” suggested Spilett. +</p> + +<p> +“No, but of the island. Some stones for ballast, a mast in the bow, with +a sail which Mr. Smith will make some day, and away we’ll go! But now let +us try our new ship, for we must see if it will carry all of us.” +</p> + +<p> +The experiment was made. Pencroff, by a stroke of the paddle, brought the canoe +close to the shore by a narrow passage between the rocks, and he was confident +that they could at once make a trial trip of the craft by following the bank as +far as the lower point where the rocks ended. +</p> + +<p> +As they were stepping in, Neb cried:— +</p> + +<p> +“But your boat leaks, Pencroff.” +</p> + +<p> +“Oh, that’s nothing, Neb,” answered the sailor. “The +wood has to drink! But in two days it will not show, and there will be as +little water in our canoe as in the stomach of a drunkard! Come, get in!” +</p> + +<p> +They all embarked, and Pencroff pushed off. The weather was splendid, the sea +was as calm as a lake, and the canoe could venture upon it with as much +security as upon the tranquil current of the Mercy. +</p> + +<p> +Neb and Herbert took the oars, and Pencroff sat in the stern with the paddle as +steersman. +</p> + +<p> +The sailor crossed the channel, and rounded the southern point of the islet. A +gentle breeze was wafted from the south. There were no billows, but the canoe +rose and fell with the long undulations of the sea, and they rowed out half a +mile from the coast so as to get a view of the outline of Mount Franklin. Then, +putting about, Pencroff returned towards the mouth of the river, and followed +along the rounded shore which hid the low marshy ground of Tadorn’s Fen. +The point, made longer by the bend of the coast, was three miles from the +Mercy, and the colonists resolved to go past it far enough to obtain a hasty +glance at the coast as far as Claw Cape. +</p> + +<p> +The canoe followed along the shore, keeping off some two cables length so as to +avoid the line of rocks beginning to be covered by the tide. The cliff, +beginning at the mouth of the river, lowered as it approached the promontory. +It was a savage-looking, unevenly-arranged heap of granite blocks, very +different from the curtain of Prospect Plateau. There was not a trace of +vegetation on this sharp point, which projected two miles beyond the forest, +like a giant’s arm, thrust out from a green sleeve. +</p> + +<p> +The canoe sped easily along. Spilett sketched the outline of the coast in his +note-book, and Neb, Pencroff, and Herbert discussed the features of their new +domain; and as they moved southward the two Mandible Capes seemed to shut +together and enclose Union Bay. As to Smith, he regarded everything in silence, +and from his distrustful expression it seemed as if he was observing some +suspicious land. +</p> + +<p> +The canoe had reached the end of the point and was about doubling it, when +Herbert rose, and pointing out a black object, said:— +</p> + +<p> +“What is that down there on the sand?” +</p> + +<p> +Every one looked in the direction indicated. +</p> + +<p> +“There is something there, indeed,” said the reporter. “It +looks like a wreck half buried in the sand.” +</p> + +<p> +“Oh, I see what it is!” cried Pencroff. +</p> + +<p> +“What?” asked Neb. +</p> + +<p> +“Barrels! they are barrels, and, may be, they are full!” +</p> + +<p> +“To shore, Pencroff!” said Smith. +</p> + +<p> +And with a few strokes the canoe was driven into a little cove, and the party +went up the beach. +</p> + +<p> +Pencroff was not mistaken. There were two barrels half buried in the sand; but +firmly fastened to them was a large box, which, borne up by them, had been +floated on to the shore. +</p> + +<p> +“Has there been a shipwreck here?” asked Herbert. +</p> + +<p> +“Evidently,” answered Spilett. +</p> + +<p> +“But what is in this box?” exclaimed Pencroff, with a natural +impatience. “What is in this box? It is closed, and we have nothing with +which to raise the lid. However, with a stone—” +</p> + +<p> +And the sailor picked up a heavy rock, and was about to break one of the sides, +when the engineer, stopping him, said:— +</p> + +<p> +“Cannot you moderate your impatience for about an hour, Pencroff?” +</p> + +<p> +“But, think, Mr. Smith! May be there is everything we want in it!” +</p> + +<p> +“We will find out, Pencroff,” answered the engineer, “but do +not break the box, as it will be useful. Let us transport it to Granite House, +where we can readily open it without injuring it. It is all prepared for the +voyage, and since it has floated here, it can float again to the river +month.” +</p> + +<p> +“You are right, sir, and I am wrong,” answered the sailor, +“but one is not always his own master!” +</p> + +<p> +The engineer’s advice was good. It was likely that the canoe could not +carry the things probably enclosed in the box, since the latter was so heavy +that it had to be buoyed up by two empty barrels. It was, therefore, better to +tow it in this condition to the shore at the Granite House. +</p> + +<p> +And now the important question was, from whence came this jetsam? Smith and his +companions searched the beach for several hundred paces, but there was nothing +else to be seen. They scanned the sea, Herbert and Neb climbing up a high rock, +but not a sail was visible on the horizon. +</p> + +<p> +Nevertheless, there must have been a shipwreck, and perhaps this incident was +connected with the incident of the bullet. Perhaps the strangers had landed +upon another part of the island. Perhaps they were still there. But the natural +conclusion of the colonists was that these strangers could not be Malay +pirates, since the jetsam was evidently of European or American production. +</p> + +<p> +They all went back to the box, which measured five feet by three. It was made +of oak, covered with thick leather, studded with copper nails. The two large +barrels, hermetically sealed, but which sounded empty, were fastened to its +sides by means of strong ropes, tied in what Pencroff recognized to be +“sailor’s knots.” That it was uninjured seemed to be +accounted for by the fact of its having been thrown upon the sand instead of +the rocks. And it was evident that it had not been long either in the sea or +upon the beach. It seemed probable, also, that the water had not penetrated, +and that its contents would be found uninjured. It therefore looked as if this +box must have been thrown overboard from a disabled ship making for the island. +And, in the hope that it would reach the island, where they would find it +later, the passengers had taken the precaution to buoy it up. +</p> + +<p> +“We will tow this box to Granite House,” said the engineer, +“and take an inventory of its contents; then, if we discover any of the +survivors of this supposed shipwreck, we will return them what is theirs. If we +find no one—” +</p> + +<p> +“We will keep the things ourselves!” cried the sailor. “But I +wish I knew what is in it.” +</p> + +<p> +The sailor was already working at the prize, which would doubtless float at +high water. One of the ropes which was fastened to the barrels was partly +untwisted and served to fasten these latter to the canoe. Then, Neb and +Pencroff dug out the sand with their oars, and soon the canoe, with the jetsam +in tow, was rounding the promontory to which they gave the name of Jetsam +Point. The box was so heavy that the barrels just sufficed to sustain it above +the water; and Pencroff feared each moment that it would break loose and sink +to the bottom. Fortunately his fears were groundless, and in an hour and a half +the canoe touched the bank before Granite House. +</p> + +<p> +The boat and the prize were drawn upon the shore, and as the tide was beginning +to fall, both soon rested on dry ground. Neb brought some tools so as to open +the box without injury, and the colonists forthwith proceeded to examine its +contents. +</p> + +<p> +Pencroff did not try to hide his anxiety. He began by unfastening the barrels, +which would be useful in the future, then the fastenings were forced with +pincers, and the cover taken off. A second envelope, of zinc, was enclosed +within the case, in such a manner that its contents were impervious to +moisture. +</p> + +<p> +“Oh!” cried Pencroff, “they must be preserves which are +inside.” +</p> + +<p> +“I hope for something better than that,” answered the reporter. +</p> + +<p> +“If it should turn out that there was—” muttered the sailor. +</p> + +<p> +“What?” asked Neb. +</p> + +<p> +“Nothing!” +</p> + +<p> +The zinc cover was split, lengthwise and turned back, and, little by little, +many different objects were lifted out on the sand. At each new discovery +Pencroff cheered, Herbert clapped his hands, and Neb danced. There were books +which made the lad crazy with pleasure, and cooking implements which Neb +covered with kisses. +</p> + +<p> +In truth the colonists had reason to be satisfied, as the following inventory, +copied from Spilett’s note-book, will show:— +</p> + +<p> +TOOLS.—3 pocket-knives, with-several blades, 2 wood-chopper’s +hatchets, 2 carpenter’s hatchets, 3 planes, I adzes, l axe, 6 cold +chisels, 2 files, 3 hammers, 3 gimlets, 2 augers, 10 bags of nails and screws, +3 saws of different sizes, 2 boxes of needles. +</p> + +<p> +ARMS.—2 flint-lock guns, 2 percussion guns, 2 central-fire carbines; 5 +cutlasses, 4 boarding sabres, 2 barrels of powder, holding l5 pounds each, l2 +boxes of caps. +</p> + +<p> +INSTRUMENTS.—1 sextant, 1 opera-glass, 1 spyglass, 1 box compass, 1 +pocket compass, 1 Fahrenheit thermometer, 1 aneroid barometer, 1 box containing +a photographic apparatus, together with glasses, chemicals, etc. +</p> + +<p> +CLOTHING.—2 dozen shirts of a peculiar material resembling wool, though +evidently a vegetable substance; 3 dozen stockings of the same material. +</p> + +<p> +UTENSILS.—1 Iron pot, 6 tinned copper stewpans, 3 iron plates, 10 +aluminium knives and forks, 2 kettles, 1 small portable stove. 5 table knives. +</p> + +<p> +BOOKS.-l Bible, 1 atlas, 1 dictionary of Polynesian languages, 1 dictionary of +the Natural Sciences, 3 reams of blank paper, 2 blank books. +</p> + +<p> +“Unquestionably,” said the reporter, after the inventory had been +taken, “the owner of this box was a practical man! Tools, arms, +instruments, clothing, utensils, books, nothing is wanting. One would say that +he had made ready for a shipwreck before-hand!” +</p> + +<p> +“Nothing, Indeed, is wanting,” murmured Smith, thoughtfully. +</p> + +<p> +“And it is a sure thing,” added Herbert, “that the ship that +brought this box was not a Malay pirate!” +</p> + +<p> +“Unless its owner had been taken prisoner,” said Pencroff. +</p> + +<p> +“That is not likely,” answered the reporter. “It is more +probable that an American or European ship has been driven to this +neighborhood, and that the passengers, wishing to save what was, at least, +necessary, have prepared this box and have thrown it overboard.” +</p> + +<p> +“And do you think so, Mr. Smith?” asked Herbert. +</p> + +<p> +“Yes, my boy,” answered the engineer, “that might have been +the case. It is possible, that, anticipating a ship wreck, this chest has been +prepared, so that it might be found again on the coast—” +</p> + +<p> +“But the photographic apparatus!” observed the sailor +incredulously. +</p> + +<p> +“As to that,” answered the engineer, “I do not see its use; +what we, as well as any other ship wrecked person, would have valued more, +would have been a greater assortment of clothing and more ammunition!” +</p> + +<p> +“But have none of these things any mark by which we can tell where they +came from,” askedSpilett. +</p> + +<p> +They looked to see. Each article was examined attentively, but, contrary to +custom, neither books, instruments, nor arms had any name or mark; +nevertheless, they were in perfect order, and seemed never to have been used. +So also with the tools and utensils; everything was new, and this went to prove +that the things had not been hastily thrown together in the box, but that their +selection had been made thoughtfully and with care. This, also, was evident +from the zinc case which had kept everything watertight, and which could not +have been soldered in a moment. +</p> + +<p> +The two dictionaries and the Bible were in English, and the latter showed that +it had been often read. The Atlas was a splendid work, containing maps of every +part of the world, and many charts laid out on Mercator’s Projection. The +nomenclature in this book was in French, but neither in it, nor in any of the +others, did the name of the editor or publisher appear. +</p> + +<p> +The colonists, therefore, were unable to even conjecture the nationality of the +ship that had so recently passed near them. But no matter where it came from, +this box enriched the party on Lincoln Island. Until now, in transforming the +products of nature, they had created everything for themselves, and had +succeeded by their own intelligence. Did it not now seem as if Providence had +intended to reward them by placing these divers products of human industry in +their hands? Therefore, with one accord, they all rendered thanks to Heaven. +</p> + +<p> +Nevertheless, Pencroff was not entirely satisfied. It appeared that the box did +not contain something to which he attached an immense importance, and as its +contests lessened, his cheers had become less hearty, and when the inventory +was closed, he murmured:— +</p> + +<p> +“That’s all very fine, but you see there is nothing for me +here!” +</p> + +<p> +“Why, what did you expect, Pencroff?” exclaimed Neb. +</p> + +<p> +“A half pound of tobacco,” answered the sailor, “and then I +would have been perfectly happy!” +</p> + +<p> +The discovery of this jetsam made the thorough exploration of the island more +necessary than ever. It was, therefore, agreed that they should set out early +the next morning, proceeding to the western coast via the Mercy. If anyone had +been shipwrecked on that part of the island, they were doubtless without +resources, and help must be given them at once. +</p> + +<p> +During the day the contents of the box were carried to Granite House and +arranged in order in the great hall. And that evening—the 29th of +October—Herbert before retiring asked Mr. Smith to read some passages +from the Bible. +</p> + +<p> +“Gladly,” answered the engineer, taking the sacred book in his +hands; when Pencroff checking him, said:— +</p> + +<p> +“Mr. Smith, I am superstitious. Open the book at random and read the +first verse which you meet with. We will see if it applies to our +situation.” +</p> + +<p> +Smith smiled at the words of the sailor, but yielding to his wishes he opened +the Bible where the marker lay between the leaves. Instantly his eye fell upon +a red cross made with a crayon, opposite the 8th verse of the seventh chapter +of St. Matthew. +</p> + +<p> +He read these words:— +</p> + +<p> +“For every one that asketh, receiveth; and he that seeketh, +findeth.” +</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2><a name="XXV" id="XXV"></a>CHAPTER XXV.</h2> + +<p class="letter"> +THE DEPARTURE—THE RISING TIDE—ELMS AND OTHER TREES—DIFFERENT +PLANTS—THE KINGFISHER—APPEARANCE OF THE FOREST—THE GIGANTIC +EUCALYPTI—WHY THEY ARE CALLED FEVER-TREES—MONKEYS—THE +WATERFALL—ENCAMPMENT FOR THE NIGHT. +</p> + +<p> +The next day—the 30th of October—everything was prepared for the +proposed exploration, which these last events had made so necessary. Indeed, as +things had turned out, the colonists could well imagine themselves in a +condition to give, rather than to receive, help. +</p> + +<p> +It was agreed that they ascend the Mercy as far as practicable. They would thus +be able to transport their arms and provisions a good part of the way without +fatigue. +</p> + +<p> +It was also necessary to think, not only of what they now carried, but of what +they might perhaps bring back to Granite House. If, as all thought, there had +been a shipwreck on the coast, they would find many things they wanted on the +shore, and the cart would doubtless have proved more convenient than the canoe. +But the cart was so heavy and unwieldy that it would have been too hard work to +drag it, which fact made Pencroff regret that the box had not only held his +half-pound of tobacco, but also a pair of stout New Jersey horses, which would +have been so useful to the colony. +</p> + +<p> +The provisions, already packed by Neb, consisted of enough dried meat, beer, +and fermented liquor to last them for the three days which Smith expected they +would be absent. Moreover, they counted on being able to replenish their stock +at need along the route, and Neb had taken care not to forget the portable +stove. +</p> + +<p> +They took the two wood-choppers’ hatchets to aid in making their way +through the thick forest, and also the glass and the pocket compass. +</p> + +<p> +Of the arms, they chose the two flint-lock guns in preference to the others, as +the colonists could always renew the flints; whereas the caps could not be +replaced. Nevertheless, they took one of the carbines and some cartridges. As +for the powder, the barrels held fifty pounds, and it was necessary to take a +certain amount of that; but the engineer expected to manufacture an explosive +substance, by which it could be saved in the future. To the firearms they added +the five cutlasses, in leather scabbards. And thus equipped, the party could +venture into the forest with some chance of success. +</p> + +<p> +Armed in this manner, Pencroff, Herbert, and Neb had all they could desire, +although Smith made them promise not to fire a shot unnecessarily. +</p> + +<p> +At 6 o’clock the party, accompanied by Top, started for the mouth of the +Mercy. The tide had been rising half an hour, and there were therefore some +hours yet of the flood which they could make use of. The current was strong, +and they did not need to row to pass rapidly up between the high banks and the +river. In a few minutes the explorers had reached the turn where, seven months +before, Pencroff had made his first raft. Having passed this elbow, the river, +flowing from the southwest, widened out under the shadow of the grand +ever-green conifers; and Smith and his companions could not but admire the +beautiful scenery. As they advanced the species of forest trees changed. On the +right bank rose splendid specimens of ulmaceæ, those valuable elms so much +sought after by builders, which have the property of remaining sound for a long +time in water. There was, also, numerous groups belonging to the same family, +among them the micocouliers, the root of which produces a useful oil. Herbert +discovered some lardizabalaceæ, whose flexible branches, soaked in water, +furnish excellent ropes, and two or three trunks of ebony of a beautiful black +color, curiously veined. +</p> + +<p> +From time to time, where a landing was easy, the canoe stopped, and Spilett, +Herbert, and Pencroff, accompanied by Top, explored the bank. In addition to +the game, Herbert thought that he might meet with some useful little plant +which was not to be despised, and the young naturalist was rewarded by +discovering a sort of wild spinach and numerous specimens of the genus cabbage, +which would, doubtless, bear transplanting; they were cresses, horse-radishes, +and a little, velvety, spreading plant, three-feet high, bearing +brownish-colored seeds. +</p> + +<p> +“Do you know what this is?” asked Herbert of the sailor. +</p> + +<p> +“Tobacco!” cried Pencroff, who had evidently never seen the plant +which he fancied so much. +</p> + +<p> +“No, Pencroff,” answered Herbert, “It is not tobacco, it is +mustard.” +</p> + +<p> +“Only mustard!” exclaimed the other. “Well if you happen to +come across a tobacco plant, my boy, do not pass it by.” +</p> + +<p> +“We will find it someday,” said Spilett. +</p> + +<p> +“All right,” cried Pencroff, “and then I will be able to say +that the island lacks nothing!” +</p> + +<p> +These plants were taken up carefully and carried back to the canoe, where Cyrus +Smith had remained absorbed in his own thoughts. +</p> + +<p> +The reporter, Herbert, and Pencroff, made many of these excursions, sometimes +on the right bank of the Mercy and sometimes upon the left. The latter was less +abrupt, but more wooded. The engineer found, by reference to the +pocket-compass, that the general direction of the river from its bend was +southwest, and that it was nearly straight for about three miles. But it was +probable that the direction would change further up, and that it would flow +from the spurs of Mount Franklin, which fed its waters in the northwest. +</p> + +<p> +During one of these excursions Spilett caught a couple of birds with long, slim +beaks, slender necks, short wings, and no tails, which Herbert called tinamous, +and which they resolved should be the first occupants of the future +poultry-yard. +</p> + +<p> +But the first report of a gun that echoed through the forests of the Far West, +was provoked by the sight of a beautiful bird, resembling a kingfisher. +</p> + +<p> +“I know it,” cried Pencroff. +</p> + +<p> +“What do you know?” asked the reporter. +</p> + +<p> +“That bird! It is the bird which escaped on our first exploration, the +one after which we named this part of the forest!” +</p> + +<p> +“A jacamar!” exclaimed Herbert. +</p> + +<p> +It was, indeed, one of those beautiful birds, whose harsh plumage is covered +with a metallic lustre. Some small shot dropped it to the earth, and Top +brought it, and also some touracolories, climbing birds, the size of pigeons, +to the canoe. The honor of this first shot belonged to the lad, who was pleased +enough with the result. The touracolories were better game than the jacamar, +the flash of the latter being tough, but it would have been hard to persuade +Pencroff that they had not killed the most delicious of birds. +</p> + +<p> +It was 10 o’clock when the canoe reached the second bend of the river, +some five miles from the mouth. Here they stopped half an hour, under the +shadow of the trees, for breakfast. +</p> + +<p> +The river measured from sixty to seventy feet in width, and was five or six +feet deep. The engineer had remarked its several affluents, but they were +simply unnavigable streams. The Forests of the Far West, or Jacamar Wood, +extended farther than they could see, but no where could they detect the +presence of man. If, therefore, any persons had been shipwrecked on the island, +they had not yet quitted the shore, and it was not in those thick coverts that +search must be made for the survivors. +</p> + +<p> +The engineer began to manifest some anxiety to get to the western coast of the +island, distant, as he calculated, about five miles or less. The journey was +resumed, and, although the course of the Mercy, sometimes towards the shore, +was oftener towards the mountain, it was thought better to follow it as long as +possible, on account of the fatigue and loss of time incident to hewing a way +through the wood. Soon, the tide having attained its height, Herbert and Neb +took the oars, and Pencroff the paddle, wad they continued the ascent by +rowing. +</p> + +<p> +It seemed as if the forest of the Far West began to grow thinner. But, as the +trees grew farther apart, they profited by the increased space, and attained a +splendid growth. +</p> + +<p> +“Eucalypti!” cried Herbert, descrying some of these superb plants, +the loftiest giants of the extra-tropical zone, the congeners of the eucalypti +of Australia and New Zealand, both of which countries were situated in the same +latitude as Lincoln Island. Some rose 200 feet in height and measured twenty +feet in circumference, and their bark, five fingers in thickness, exuded an +aromatic resin. Equally wonderful were the enormous specimens of myrtle, their +leaves extending edgewise to the sun, and permitting its rays to penetrate and +fall upon the ground. +</p> + +<p> +“What trees!” exclaimed Neb. “Are they good for +anything?” +</p> + +<p> +“Pshaw!” answered Pencroff. “They are like overgrown men, +good for nothing but to show in fairs!” +</p> + +<p> +“I think you’re wrong, Pencroff,” said Spilett, “the +eucalyptus wood is beginning to be extensively used in cabinet work.” +</p> + +<p> +“And I am sure,” added Herbert, “that it belongs to a most +useful family,” and thereupon the young naturalist enumerated many +species of the plant and their uses. +</p> + +<p> +Every one listened to the lad’s lesson in botany, Smith smiling, Pencroff +with an indescribable pride. “That’s all very well, Herbert,” +answered the sailor, “but I dare swear that of all these useful specimens +none are as large as these!” +</p> + +<p> +“That is so.” +</p> + +<p> +“Then, that proves what I said,” replied the sailor, “that +giants are good for nothing.” +</p> + +<p> +“There’s where you are wrong, Pencroff,” said the engineer, +“these very eucalypti are good for something.” +</p> + +<p> +“For what?” +</p> + +<p> +“To render the country healthy about them. Do you know what they call +them In Australia and New Zealand?” +</p> + +<p> +“No sir.” +</p> + +<p> +“They call them ‘fever’ trees.” +</p> + +<p> +“Because they give it?” +</p> + +<p> +“No; because they prevent it!” +</p> + +<p> +“Good. I shall make a note of that,” said the reporter. +</p> + +<p> +“Note then, my dear Spilett, that it has been proved that the presence of +these trees neutralizes marsh miasmas. They have tried this natural remedy in +certain unhealthy parts of Europe, and northern Africa, with the best results. +And there are no intermittent fevers in the region of these forests, which is a +fortunate thing for us colonists of Lincoln Island.” +</p> + +<p> +“What a blessed island!” cried Pencroff. “It would lack +nothing—if it was not—” +</p> + +<p> +“That will come, Pencroff, we will find it,” answered the reporter; +“but now let us attend to our work and push on as far as we can get with +the canoe.” +</p> + +<p> +They continued on through the woods two miles further, the river becoming more +winding, shallow, and so narrow that Pencroff pushed along with a pole. The sun +was setting, and, as it would be impossible to pass in the darkness through the +five or six miles of unknown woods which the engineer estimated lay between +them and the coast, it was determined to camp wherever the canoe was obliged to +stop. +</p> + +<p> +They now pushed on without delay through the forest, which grew more dense, and +seemed more inhabited, because, if the sailor’s eyes did not deceive him, +he perceived troops of monkeys running among the underbrush. Sometimes, two or +three of these animals would halt at a distance from the canoe and regard its +occupants, as if, seeing men for the first time, they had not then learned to +fear them. It would have been easy to have shot some of these quadrumanes, but +Smith was opposed to the useless slaughter. Pencroff, however, looked upon the +monkey from a gastronomic point of view, and, indeed, as these animals are +entirely herberiferous, they make excellent game; but since provisions +abounded, it was useless to waste the ammunition. +</p> + +<p> +Towards 4 o’clock the navigation of the Mercy became very difficult, its +course being obstructed by rocks and aquatic plants. The banks rose higher and +higher, and, already, the bed of the stream was confined between the outer +spurs of Mount Franklin. Its sources could not be far off, since the waters +were fed by the southern watershed of that mountain. +</p> + +<p> +“Before a quarter of an hour we will have to stop, sir,” said +Pencroff. +</p> + +<p> +“Well, then, we will make a camp for the night.” +</p> + +<p> +“How far are we from Granite House?” asked Herbert. +</p> + +<p> +“About seven miles, counting the bends of the river, which have taken us +to the northwest.” +</p> + +<p> +“Shall we keep on?” asked the reporter. +</p> + +<p> +“Yes, as far as we can get,” answered the engineer. +“To-morrow, at daylight, we will leave the canoe, and traverse, in two +hours I hope, the distance which separates us from the coast, and then we will +have nearly the whole day in which to explore the shore.” +</p> + +<p> +“Push on,” cried Pencroff. +</p> + +<p> +Very soon the canoe grated on the stones at the bottom of the river, which was +not more than twenty feet wide. A thick mass of verdure overhung and descended +the stream, and they heard the noise of a waterfall, which indicated that some +little distance further on there existed a natural barrier. +</p> + +<p> +And, indeed, at the last turn in the river, they saw the cascade shining +through the trees. The canoe scraped over the bottom and then grounded on a +rock near the right bank. +</p> + +<p> +It was 5 o’clock, and the level rays of the setting sun illuminated the +little fall. Above, the Mercy, supplied from a secret source, was hidden by the +bushes. The various streams together had made it a river, but here it was but a +shallow, limpid brook. +</p> + +<p> +They made camp in this lovely spot. Having disembarked, a fire was lighted +under a group of micocouliers, in whose branches Smith and his companions +could, if need be, find a refuge for the night. +</p> + +<p> +Supper was soon finished, as they were very hungry, and then there was nothing +to do but to go to sleep. But some suspicious growling being heard at +nightfall, the fire was so arranged as to protect the sleepers by its flames. +Neb and Pencroff kept it lit, and perhaps they were not mistaken in believing +to have seen some moving shadows among the trees and bushes; but the night +passed without accident, and the next day—the 31st of October—by 5 +o’clock all were on foot ready for the start. +</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2><a name="XXVI" id="XXVI"></a>CHAPTER XXVI.</h2> + +<p class="letter"> +GOING TOWARD THE COAST—TROOPS OF MONKEYS—A NEW +WATER-COURSE—WHY THE TIDE WAS NOT FELT—A FOREST ON THE +SHORE—REPTILE PROMONTORY—SPILETT MAKES HERBERT ENVIOUS—THE +BAMBOO FUSILADE. +</p> + +<p> +It was 6 o’clock when the colonists, after an early breakfast, started +with the intention of reaching the coast by the shortest route. Smith had +estimated that it would take them two hours, but it must depend largely on the +nature of the obstacles in the way. This part of the Far West was covered with +trees, like an immense thicket composed of many different species. It was, +therefore, probable that they would have to make a way with hatchets in +hand—and guns also, if they were to judge from the cries heard over +night. +</p> + +<p> +The exact position of the camp had been determined by the situation of Mount +Franklin, and since the volcano rose less than three miles to the north, it was +only necessary to go directly toward the southwest to reach the west coast. +</p> + +<p> +After having seen to the mooring of the canoe, the party started, Neb and +Pencroff carrying sufficient provisions to last the little troop for two days +at least. They were no longer hunting, and the engineer recommended his +companions to refrain from unnecessary firing, so as not to give warning of +their presence on the coast. The first blows of the hatchet were given in the +bushes just above the cascade, while Smith, compass in hand, indicated the +route. The forest was, for the most part, composed of such trees as had already +been recognized about the lake and on Prospect Plateau. The colonists could +advance but slowly, and the engineer believed that in time their route would +join with that of Red Creek. +</p> + +<p> +Since their departure, the party had descended the low declivities which +constituted the orography of the island, over a very dry district, although the +luxuriant vegetation suggested either a hydrographic network permeating the +ground beneath, or the proximity to some stream. Nevertheless, Smith did not +remember having seen, during the excursion to the crater, any other water +courses than Bed Creek and the Mercy. +</p> + +<p> +During the first few hours of the march, they saw troops of monkeys, who +manifested the greatest astonishment at the sight of human beings. Spilett +laughingly asked if these robust quadrumanes did not look upon their party as +degenerate brethren; and, in truth, the simple pedestrians, impeded at each +step by the bushes, entangled in the lianas, stopped by tree trunks, did not +compare favorably with these nimble animals, which bounded from branch to +branch, moving about without hindrance. These monkeys were very numerous, but, +fortunately, they did not manifest any hostile disposition. +</p> + +<p> +They saw, also, some wild-boars, some agoutis, kangaroos, and other rodents, +and two or three koulas, which latter Pencroff would have been glad to shoot. +</p> + +<p> +“But,” said he, “the hunt has not begun. Play now, my +friends, and we will talk to you when we come back.” +</p> + +<p> +At half-past 9, the route, which bore directly southwest, was suddenly +interrupted by a rapid stream, rushing over rocks, and pent in between banks +but thirty or forty feet apart. It was deep and clear, but absolutely +unnavigable. +</p> + +<p> +“We are stopped!” cried Neb. +</p> + +<p> +“No,” replied Herbert; “we can swim such a brook as +this.” +</p> + +<p> +“Why should we do that?” answered Smith. “It is certain that +this creek empties into the sea. Let us keep to this bank and I will be +astonished if it does not soon bring us to the coast. Come on!” +</p> + +<p> +“One minute,” said the reporter. “The name of this creek, my +friends? We must not leave our geography incomplete.” +</p> + +<p> +“True enough,” said Pencroff. +</p> + +<p> +“You name it, my boy,” said the engineer, addressing Herbert. +</p> + +<p> +“Will not it be better to wait till we have discovered its mouth?” +asked Herbert. +</p> + +<p> +“Right,” replied Smith, “let us push on.” +</p> + +<p> +“Another minute,” exclaimed Pencroff. +</p> + +<p> +“What more?” demanded the reporter. +</p> + +<p> +“If hunting is forbidden, fishing is allowed, I suppose,” said the +sailor. +</p> + +<p> +“We haven’t the time to waste,” answered the engineer. +</p> + +<p> +“But just five minutes,” pleaded Pencroff; “I only want five +minutes for the sake of breakfast!” And lying down on the bank he plunged +his arms in the running waters and soon brought up several dozen of the fine +crawfish which swarmed between the rocks. +</p> + +<p> +“These will be good!” cried Neb, helping the sailor. +</p> + +<p> +“Did not I tell you that the island had everything but tobacco?” +sighed the sailor. +</p> + +<p> +It took but five minutes to fill a sack with these little blue crustaceæ, and +then the journey was resumed. +</p> + +<p> +By following the bank the colonists moved more freely. Now and then they found +traces of large animals which came to the stream for water, but they found no +sign of human beings, and they were not yet in that part of the Far West where +the peccary had received the leaden pellet which cost Pencroff a tooth. +</p> + +<p> +Smith and his companions judged, from the fact that the current rushed towards +the sea with such rapidity, that they must be much farther from, the coast than +they imagined, because at this time the tide was rising, and its’ effect +would have been visible near the mouth of the creek. The engineer was greatly +astonished, and often consulted his compass to be sure that the stream, was not +returning towards the depths of the forest. Meantime, its waters, gradually +widening, became less tumultuous. The growth of trees on the right bank was +much denser than on the left, and it was impossible to see through this +thicket; but these woods were certainly not inhabited, or Top would have +discovered it. At half-past 10, to the extreme surprise of Smith, Herbert, who +was walking some paces ahead, suddenly stopped, exclaiming, “The +sea!” +</p> + +<p> +And a few minutes later the colonists, standing upon the border of the forest, +saw the western coast of the island spread before them. +</p> + +<p> +But what a contrast was this coast to the one on which chance had thrown them! +No granite wall, no reef in the offing, not even a beach. The forest formed the +shore, and its furthermost trees, washed by the waves, leaned over the waters. +It was in no sense such a beach as is usually met with, composed of vast +reaches of sand or heaps of rocks, but a fine border of beautiful trees. The +bank was raised above the highest tides, and upon this rich soil, supported by +a granite base, the splendid monarchs of the forest seemed to be as firmly set +as were those which stood in the interior of the island. +</p> + +<p> +The colonists stood in a hollow by a tiny rivulet, which served as a neck to +the other stream; but, curiously enough, these waters, instead of emptying into +the sea by a gently sloping opening, fell from a height of more than forty +feet—which fact explained why the rising tide did not affect the current. +And, on this account, they were unanimous in giving this water-course the name +of Fall River. +</p> + +<p> +Beyond, towards the north, the forest shore extended for two miles; then the +trees became thinner, and, still further on, a line of picturesque heights +extended from north to south. On the other hand, all that part of the coast +comprised between Fall River and the promontory of Reptile End was bordered by +masses of magnificent trees, some upright and others leaning over the sea, +whose waves lapped their roots. It was evidently, therefore, on this part of +the coast that the exploration must be continued, as this shore offered to the +castaways, whoever they might be, a refuge, which the other, desert and savage, +had refused. +</p> + +<p> +The weather was beautiful, and from the cliff where the breakfast had been +prepared, the view extended far and wide. The horizon was perfectly distinct, +without a sail in sight, and upon the coast, as far as could be seen, there was +neither boat nor wreck, but the engineer was not willing to be satisfied in +this respect, until they had explored the whole distance as far as Serpentine +Peninsula. +</p> + +<p> +After a hurried breakfast he gave the signal to start. Instead of traversing a +beach, the colonists followed along the coast, under the trees. The distance to +Reptile End was about twelve miles, and, had the way been clear, they could +have accomplished it in four hours, but the party were constantly obliged to +turn out from the way, or to cut branches, or to break through thickets, and +these hindrances multiplied as they proceeded. But they saw no signs of a +recent shipwreck on the shore; although, as Spilett observed, as the tide was +up, they could not say with certainty that there had not been one. +</p> + +<p> +This reasoning was just, and, moreover, the incident of the bullet proved, +indubitably, that within three months a gun had been fired on the island. +</p> + +<p> +At 5 o’clock the extremity of the peninsula was still two miles distant, +and it was evident that the colonists would have to camp for the night on the +promontory of Reptile End. Happily, game was as plenty here as on the other +coast, and birds of different kinds abounded. Two hours later, the party, tired +out, reached the promontory. Here the forest border ended, and the shore +assumed the usual aspect of a coast. It was possible that an abandoned vessel +might be here, but, as the night was falling, it was necessary to postpone the +exploration until the morrow. +</p> + +<p> +Pencroff and Herbert hastened to find a suitable place for a camp. The +outskirts of the forest died away here, and near them the lad found a bamboo +thicket. +</p> + +<p> +“Good,” said he, “this is a valuable discovery.” +</p> + +<p> +“Valuable?” asked Pencroff. +</p> + +<p> +“Yes, indeed, I need not tell you, Pencroff, all its uses, such as for +making baskets, paper, and water-pipes; that the larger ones make excellent +building material and strong jars. But—” +</p> + +<p> +“But?” +</p> + +<p> +“But perhaps you do not know that in India they eat bamboo as we do +asparagus.” +</p> + +<p> +“Asparagus thirty feet high?” cried, Pencroff. “And is it +good?” +</p> + +<p> +“Excellent,” answered the lad. “But they eat only the young +sprouts.” +</p> + +<p> +“Delicious!” cried Pencroff. +</p> + +<p> +“And I am sure that the pith of young plants preserved in vinegar makes +an excellent condiment.” +</p> + +<p> +“Better and better.” +</p> + +<p> +“And, lastly, they exude a sweet liquor which makes a pleasant +drink.” +</p> + +<p> +“Is that all?” demanded the sailor. +</p> + +<p> +“That’s all.” +</p> + +<p> +“Isn’t it good to smoke?” +</p> + +<p> +“No, my poor Pencroff, you cannot smoke it!” +</p> + +<p> +They did not have to search far for a good place for the camp. The rocks, much +worn by the action of the sea, had many hollows that would afford shelter from +the wind. But just as they were about to enter one of these cavities they were +arrested by formidable growlings. +</p> + +<p> +“Get back!” cried Pencroff, “we have only small shot in our +guns, and these beasts would mind it no more than salt!” +</p> + +<p> +And the sailor, seizing Herbert, dragged him behind some rocks, just as a huge +jaguar appeared at the mouth of the cavern. Its skin was yellow, striped with +black, and softened off with white under its belly. The beast advanced, and +looked about. Its hair was bristling, and its eyes sparkling as if it was not +scenting man for the first time. +</p> + +<p> +Just then Spilett appeared, coming round the high rocks, and Herbert, thinking +he had not seen the jaguar, was about rushing towards him, when the reporter, +motioning with his hand, continued his approach. It was not his first tiger. +</p> + +<p> +Advancing within ten paces of the animal, he rested motionless, his gun at his +shoulder, not a muscle quivering. The jaguar, crouching back, made a bound +towards the hunter, but as it sprung a bullet struck it between the eyes, +dropping it dead. +</p> + +<p> +Herbert and Pencroff rushed to it, and Smith and Neb coming up at the moment, +all stopped to look at the splendid animal lying at length upon the sand. +</p> + +<p> +“Oh, Mr. Spilett, how I envy you!” cried Herbert, in an excess of +natural enthusiasm. +</p> + +<p> +“Well, my boy, you would have done as well,” answered the reporter. +</p> + +<p> +“I have been as cool as that!” +</p> + +<p> +“Only imagine, Herbert, that a jaguar is a hare, and you will shoot him +as unconcernedly as anything in the world! And now,” continued the +reporter, “since the jaguar has left his retreat I don’t see, my +friends, why we should not occupy the place during the night” +</p> + +<p> +“But some others may return!” said Pencroff. +</p> + +<p> +“We will only have to light a fire at the entrance of the cavern,” +said the reporter, “and they will not dare to cross the threshold.” +</p> + +<p> +“To the jaguar house, then,” cried the sailor, dragging the body of +the animal after him. +</p> + +<p> +The colonists went to the abandoned cave, and, while Neb was occupied in +skinning the carcass, the others busied themselves with piling a great quantity +of dry wood around the threshold. This done they installed themselves in the +cave, whose floor was strewn with bones; the arms were loaded for an emergency; +and, having eaten supper, as soon as the time for sleep was come, the fire at +the entrance was lit. +</p> + +<p> +Immediately a tremendous fusilade ensued! It was the bamboo which, in burning, +exploded like fire-works! The noise, in itself, would have been sufficient to +frighten off the bravest beasts. +</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2><a name="XXVII" id="XXVII"></a>CHAPTER XXVII.</h2> + +<p class="letter"> +PROPOSAL TO RETURN BY THE SOUTH COAST—ITS CONFIGURATION—SEARCH FOR +THE SHIPWRECKED—A WAIF IN THE AIR—DISCOVERY OF A SMALL NATURAL +HARBOR—MIDNIGHT ON THE MERCY—A DRIFTING CANOE. +</p> + +<p> +Smith and his companions slept like mice in the cavern which the jaguar had so +politely vacated, and, by sunrise, all were on the extremity of the promontory, +and scrutinizing the horizon visible on either hand. No ship or wreck was to be +seen, and not even with the spy-glass could any suspicious object be discerned. +It was the same along the shore, at least on all that portion, three miles in +length, which formed the south side of the promontory; as, beyond that, a slope +of the land concealed the rest of the coast, and even from the extremity of +Serpentine Peninsula, Claw Cape was hidden by high rocks. +</p> + +<p> +The southern bank of the island remained to be explored. Had they not better +attempt this at once, and give up this day to it? This procedure had not +entered into their first calculations, as, when the canoe was left at the +sources of the Mercy, the colonists thought that, having explored the west +coast, they would return by the river; Smith having then believed that this +coast sheltered either a wreck or a passing ship. But as soon as this shore +disclosed no landing place, it became necessary to search the south side of the +island for those whom they had failed to discover on the west. +</p> + +<p> +It was Spilett who proposed continuing the exploration so as to settle +definitely the question of the supposed shipwreck, and he inquired how far it +would be to Claw Cape. +</p> + +<p> +“About thirty miles,” answered the engineer, “if we allow for +the irregularity of the shore.” +</p> + +<p> +“Thirty miles!” exclaimed Spilett, “that would be a long +walk. Nevertheless, I think we should return to Granite House by the south +coast.” +</p> + +<p> +“But,” observed Herbert, “from Claw Cape to Granite House is +at least ten miles further.” +</p> + +<p> +“Call it forty miles altogether,” answered the reporter, “and +do not let us hesitate to do it. At least we will have seen this unknown shore, +and will not have it to explore over again.” +</p> + +<p> +“That is so,” said Pencroff. “But how about the canoe?” +</p> + +<p> +“The canoe can stay where it is for a day or two,” replied Spilett. +“We can hardly say that the island is infested with thieves!” +‘ +</p> + +<p> +“Nevertheless, when I remember that affair of the turtle, I am not so +confident.” +</p> + +<p> +“The turtle! the turtle!” cried the reporter, “don’t +you know that the sea turned it over?” +</p> + +<p> +“Who can say?” murmured the engineer. +</p> + +<p> +“But—,” began Neb, who, it was evident, wished to say +something. +</p> + +<p> +“What is it, Neb?” questioned the engineer. +</p> + +<p> +“If we do return by the shore to Claw Cape, after having gone round it, +we will be stopped—” +</p> + +<p> +“By the Mercy!” cried Herbert. “And we have no bridge or +boat!” +</p> + +<p> +“Oh!” answered Pencroff, “we can cross it readily enough with +some logs.” +</p> + +<p> +“Nevertheless,” said Spilett, “it would be well to build a +bridge some time if we wish to have ready access to the Far West.” +</p> + +<p> +“A bridge!” cried Pencroff. “Well isn’t Mr. Smith State +Engineer? If we shall need a bridge we will have one. As to carrying you over +the Mercy to-night without getting wet, I will look out for that. We still have +a day’s provision, which is all that is necessary, and, besides, the game +may not give out to-day as It did yesterday. So let us go.” +</p> + +<p> +The proposal of the reporter, strongly seconded by the sailor, obtained general +approval, as every one wished to end their doubts, and by returning by Claw +Cape the exploration would be complete. But no time was to be lost, for the +tramp was long, and they counted on reaching Granite House that night. So by 6 +o’clock the little party was on its way, the guns loaded with ball in +case of an encounter, and Top, who went ahead, ordered to search the edge of +the forest. +</p> + +<p> +The first five miles of the distance was rapidly traversed, and not the +slightest sign of any human being was seen. When the colonists arrived at the +point where the curvature of the promontory ended, and Washington Bay began, +they were able to take in at one view the whole extent of the southern coast. +Twenty-five miles distant the shore was terminated by Claw Cape, which was +faintly visible through the morning mists, and reproduced as a mirage in +mid-air. Between the place occupied by the colonists and the upper end of the +Great Bay the shore began with a flat and continuous beach, bordered in the +background by tall trees; following this, it became very irregular, and thrust +sharp points into the sea, and finally a heap of black rocks, thrown together +in picturesque disorder, completed the distance to Claw Cape. +</p> + +<p> +“A ship would surely be lost on these sands and shoals and reefs,” +said Pencroff. +</p> + +<p> +“It is poor quarters!” +</p> + +<p> +“But at least a portion of her would be left,” observed the +reporter. +</p> + +<p> +“Some bits of wood would remain on the reefs, nothing on the +sands,” answered the sailor. +</p> + +<p> +“How is that?” +</p> + +<p> +“Because the sands are even more dangerous than the rocks, and swallow up +everything that is thrown upon them; a few days suffice to bury out of sight +the hull of a ship of many tons measurement.” +</p> + +<p> +“Then, Pencroff,” questioned the engineer, “if a vessel had +been lost on these banks, it would not be surprising if there was no trace +left?” +</p> + +<p> +“No, sir, that is after a time or after a tempest. Nevertheless, it would +be surprising, as now, that no spars or timbers were thrown upon the shore +beyond the reach of the sea.” +</p> + +<p> +“Let us continue our search,” replied Smith. +</p> + +<p> +By 1 o’clock the party had accomplished twenty miles, having reached the +upper end of Washington Bay, and they stopped to lunch. +</p> + +<p> +Here began an irregular shore, oddly cut into by a long line of rocks, +succeeding the sand banks, and just beginning to show themselves by long +streaks of foam, above the undulations of the receding waves. From this point +to Claw Cape the beach was narrow and confined between the reef of rocks and +the forest, and the march would therefore be more difficult. The granite wall +sunk more and more, and above it the tops of the trees, undisturbed by a breath +of air, appeared in the background. +</p> + +<p> +After half an hour’s rest the colonists took up the march again, on the +lookout for any sign of a wreck, but without success. They found out, however, +that edible mussels were plenty on this beach, although they would not gather +them until means of transport between the two banks of the river should have +been perfected. +</p> + +<p> +Towards 3 o’clock, Smith and his companions reached a narrow inlet, unfed +by any water-course. It formed a veritable little natural harbor, invisible +from without, and approached by a narrow passage guarded by the reefs. At the +upper end of this creek some violent convulsion had shattered the rock, and a +narrow, sloping passage gave access to the upper plateau, which proved to be +ten miles from Claw Cape, and therefore four miles in a direct line from +Prospect Plateau. +</p> + +<p> +Spilett proposed to his companions to halt here, and, as the march had +sharpened their appetites, although it was not dinner time, no one objected to +a bit of venison, and with this lunch they would be able to await supper at +Granite House. +</p> + +<p> +Soon the colonists, seated under a group of splendid pines, were eating +heartily of the provisions which Neb had brought out from his haversack. The +place was some fifty or sixty feet above the sea, and the view, extending +beyond the furthest rock of the cape, was lost in Union Bay. But the islet and +Prospect Plateau were invisible, as the high ground and the curtain of high +trees shut out the horizon to the north. Neither over the extent of sea nor on +that part of the coast which it was still necessary to explore could they +discover even with the spyglass any suspicious object. +</p> + +<p> +“Well” said Spilett, “we can console ourselves by thinking +that no one is disputing the island with us.” +</p> + +<p> +“But how about the pellet?” said Herbert. “It was not a +dream.” +</p> + +<p> +“Indeed it was not!” cried Pencroff, thinking of his missing tooth. +</p> + +<p> +“Well, what are we to conclude?” asked the reporter. +</p> + +<p> +“This,” said Smith, “that within three months a ship, +voluntarily or otherwise, has touched—” +</p> + +<p> +“What! You will admit, Cyrus, that it has been swallowed up without +leaving any trace?” cried the reporter. +</p> + +<p> +“No, my dear Spilett; but you must remember that while it is certain that +a human being has been here, it seems just as certain that he is not here +now.” +</p> + +<p> +“Then, if I understand you sir,” said Herbert, “the ship has +gone again?” +</p> + +<p> +“Evidently.” +</p> + +<p> +“And we have lost, beyond return, a chance to get home?” said Neb. +</p> + +<p> +“I believe without return.” +</p> + +<p> +“Well then, since the chance is lost, let us push on,” said +Pencroff, already home-sick for Granite House. +</p> + +<p> +“But, just as they were rising, Top’s barking was heard, and the +dog burst from the forest, holding in his mouth a soiled rag. +</p> + +<p> +Neb took it from him. It was a bit of strong cloth. Top, still barking, seemed +by his motions to invite his master to follow into the wood. +</p> + +<p> +“Here is something which will explain my bullet,” cried Pencroff. +</p> + +<p> +“A shipwrecked person!” answered Herbert. +</p> + +<p> +“Wounded, perhaps!” exclaimed Neb. +</p> + +<p> +“Or dead!” responded the reporter. +</p> + +<p> +And all holding their arms in readiness, hurried after the dog through the +outskirts of the forests. They advanced some distance into the wood, but, to +their disappointment, they saw no tracks. The underbrush and lianas were +uninjured and had to be cut away with the hatchet, as in the depths of the +forest. It was hard to imagine that any human creature had passed there, and +yet Top’s action showed no uncertainty, but was more like that of a human +being having a fixed purpose. +</p> + +<p> +In a few minutes the dog stopped. The colonists, who had arrived at a sort of +glade surrounded by high trees, looked all about them, but neither in the +underbrush or between the tree trunks could they discover a thing. +</p> + +<p> +“What is it, Top?” said Smith. +</p> + +<p> +Top, barking louder, ran to the foot of a gigantic pine. +</p> + +<p> +Suddenly Pencroff exclaimed:— +</p> + +<p> +“This is capital!” +</p> + +<p> +“What’s that,” asked Spilett. +</p> + +<p> +“We’ve been hunting for some waif on the sea or land—” +</p> + +<p> +“Well?” +</p> + +<p> +“And here it is in the air!” +</p> + +<p> +And the sailor pointed out a mass of faded cloth caught on the summit of the +pine, a piece of which Top had found on the ground. +</p> + +<p> +“But that is no waif!” exclaimed Spilett. +</p> + +<p> +“Indeed it is,” answered Pencroff. +</p> + +<p> +“How is it!” +</p> + +<p> +“It is all that is left of our balloon, of our ship which is stranded on +the top of this tree.” +</p> + +<p> +Pencroff was not mistaken, and he added, with a shout:— +</p> + +<p> +“And there is good stuff in it which will keep us in linen for years. It +will make us handkerchiefs and shirts. Aha, Mr. Spilett! what do you say of an +island where shirts grow on the trees?” +</p> + +<p> +It was, indeed, a fortunate thing for the colonists that the aerostat, after +having made its last bound into the air, had fallen again on the island. They +could, either keep the envelope in its present shape, in case they might desire +to attempt a new flight through the air, or, after having taken off the +varnish, they could make use of its hundreds of ells of good cotton cloth. At +these thoughts all shared Pencroff’s joy. +</p> + +<p> +It was no easy task to take down this envelope from the tree top. But Neb, +Herbert, and the sailor climbed up to it, and after two hours of hard work not +only the envelope, with its valve, springs, and leather mountings, but the net, +equivalent to a large quantity of cordage and ropes, together with the iron +ring and the anchor, lay upon the ground. The envelope, excepting the rent, was +in good order, and only its lower end had been torn away. +</p> + +<p> +It was a gift from heaven. +</p> + +<p> +“Nevertheless, Mr. Smith,” said the sailor, “if we ever do +decide to leave the island it won’t be in a balloon, I hope. These air +ships don’t always go the way you want them to, as we have found out. If +you will let me have my way, we will build a ship of twenty tons, and you will +allow me to cut from this cloth a foresail and jib. The rest of it will do for +clothes.” +</p> + +<p> +“We will see about it, Pencroff,” answered Smith. +</p> + +<p> +“And meanwhile it must all be put away carefully,” said Neb. +</p> + +<p> +In truth, they could not think of carrying all this weight of material to +Granite House; and while waiting for a proper means of removing it, it was +important not to leave it exposed to the weather. The colonists, uniting their +efforts, succeeded in dragging it to the shore, where they discovered a cave so +situated that neither wind, rain, nor sea could get at it. +</p> + +<p> +“It is a wardrobe,” said Pencroff; “but since it does not +kick, it will be prudent to hide the opening, not, perhaps from two-footed, but +from four-footed thieves!” +</p> + +<p> +By 6 o’clock everything was stored away, and after having named the +little inlet, Balloon, Harbor, they took the road for Claw Cape. Pencroff and +the engineer discussed several projects, which it would be well to attend to at +once. The first thing was to build a bridge across the Mercy, and, as the canoe +was too small, to bring the balloon over in the cart. Then to build a decked +launch, which Pencroff would make cutter-rigged, and in which they could make +voyages of circumnavigation—around the island; then, etc. +</p> + +<p> +In the meantime the night approached, and it was already dark, when the +colonists reached Jetsam Point, where they had discovered the precious box. But +here, as elsewhere, there was nothing to indicate a shipwreck, and it became +necessary to adopt the opinions expressed by Smith. +</p> + +<p> +The four miles from Jetsam Point to Granite House were quickly traversed, but +it was midnight when the colonists arrived at the first bend above the mouth of +the Mercy. There the river was eighty feet wide, and Pencroff, who had +undertaken to overcome the difficulty of crossing it, set to work. It must be +admitted that the colonists were fatigued. The tramp had been long, and the +incident of the balloon had not rested their arms or legs. They were therefore +anxious to get back to Granite House to supper and bed, and if they had only +had the bridge, in a quarter of an hour they could have been at home. +</p> + +<p> +The night was very dark. Pencroff and Neb, armed with the hatchets, chose two +trees near the bank, and began cutting them down, in order to make a raft. +Smith and Spilett, seated on the ground, waited to assist their companions, and +Herbert sauntered about, doing nothing. +</p> + +<p> +All at once the lad, who had gone up the stream, returned hurriedly, and, +pointing back, exclaimed:— +</p> + +<p> +“What is that drifting there?” +</p> + +<p> +Pencroff stopped work and perceived an object resting motionless in the gloom. +</p> + +<p> +“A canoe!” he exclaimed. +</p> + +<p> +All came up and saw, to their astonishment, a boat following the current. +</p> + +<p> +“Canoe, ahoy!” shouted Pencroff from force of habit, forgetting +that it might be better to keep quiet. +</p> + +<p> +There was no answer. The boat continued to drift, and it was not more than a +dozen paces off, when the sailor exclaimed:— +</p> + +<p> +“Why, it’s our canoe! She has broken away and drifted down with the +current. Well, we must admit that she comes in the nick of time!” +</p> + +<p> +“Our canoe!” murmured the engineer. +</p> + +<p> +Pencroff was right. It was indeed their canoe, which had doubtless broken loose +and drifted all the way from the headwaters of the Mercy! It was important to +seize it in passing before it should be drawn into the rapid current at the +mouth of the river, and Pencroff and Neb, by the aid of a long pole, did this, +and drew the canoe to the bank. +</p> + +<p> +The engineer stepped in first, and, seizing the rope, assured himself that it +had been really worn in two against the rocks. +</p> + +<p> +“This,” said the reporter in an undertone; “this is a +coincidence—” +</p> + +<p> +“It is very strange!” answered the engineer. +</p> + +<p> +At least it was fortunate, and while no one could doubt that the rope had been +broken by friction, the astonishing part of the affair was that the canoe had +arrived at the moment when the colonists were there to seize it, for a quarter +of an hour later, and it would have been carried out to sea. Had there been +such things as genii, this incident would have been sufficient to make the +colonists believe that the island was inhabited by a supernatural being, who +placed his power at their disposal. +</p> + +<p> +With a few strokes the party arrived at the mouth of the Mercy. The canoe was +drawn on shore at the Chimneys, and all took their way to the ladder at Granite +House. +</p> + +<p> +But, just then, Top began barking furiously, and Neb, who was feeling for the +lower rung, cried out:— +</p> + +<p> +“The ladder’s gone!” +</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2><a name="XXVIII" id="XXVIII"></a>CHAPTER XXVIII</h2> + +<p class="letter"> +PENCROFF’S HALLOOS—A NIGHT IN THE CHIMNEYS—HERBERT’S +ARROW—SMITH’S PLAN—AN UNEXPECTED SOLUTION—WHAT HAD +HAPPENED IN GRANITE HOUSE—HOW THE COLONISTS OBTAINED A NEW DOMESTIC. +</p> + +<p> +Smith stood silent. His companions searched in the obscurity along the wall, +over the ground, for the broken part of the ladder, supposing it had been torn +off by the wind. But the ladder had certainly disappeared, although it was +impossible to tell in the darkness whether a gust of wind had not carried it up +and lodged it on the first ledge. +</p> + +<p> +“If this is a joke, it’s a pretty poor one,” cried Pencroff. +“To get home and not be able to find the staircase, won’t do for +tired men.” +</p> + +<p> +Neb stood in open-mouthed amazement. +</p> + +<p> +“It could not have been carried away by the wind!” said Herbert. +</p> + +<p> +“I’m beginning to think that strange things happen in Lincoln +Island!” said Pencroff. +</p> + +<p> +“Strange?” rejoined Spilett. “Why no, Pencroff, nothing is +more natural. Somebody has come while we have been absent, and has taken +possession of the house and drawn up the ladder!”. +</p> + +<p> +“Some one!” cried the sailor. “Who could it be?” +</p> + +<p> +“Why, the man who shot the bullet,” answered the reporter +“How else can you explain it?” +</p> + +<p> +“Very well, if any one is up there,” replied Pencroff, beginning to +get angry, “I will hail him, and he had better answer.” +</p> + +<p> +And in a voice of thunder the sailor gave a prolonged “Ohe,” which +was loudly repeated by the echoes. +</p> + +<p> +The colonists listened, and thought that they heard a sort of chuckling proceed +from Granite House. But there was no answering voice to the sailor, who +repeated his appeal in vain. +</p> + +<p> +Here was an event that would have astonished people the most indifferent, and +from their situation the colonists could not be that. To them, the slightest +incident was of moment, and certainly during their seven months’ +residence nothing equal to this had happened. +</p> + +<p> +They stood there at the foot of Granite House not knowing what to do or to say. +Neb was disconsolate at not being able to get back to the kitchen, especially +as the provisions taken for the journey had all been eaten, and they had no +present means of renewing them. +</p> + +<p> +“There is but one thing to do, my friends,” said Smith, “to +wait until daylight, and then to be governed by circumstances. Meanwhile let us +go to the Chimneys, where we will be sheltered, and, even if we cannot eat, we +can sleep.” +</p> + +<p> +“But who is the ill-mannered fellow that has played us this trick?” +asked Pencroff again, who thought it no joke. +</p> + +<p> +Whoever he was, there was nothing to do but to follow the engineer’s +advice. Top having been ordered to lie down under the windows of Granite House, +took his place without complaint. The brave dog remained at the foot of the +wall, while his master and his companions took shelter among the rocks. +</p> + +<p> +The colonists, tired as they were, slept but little. Not only were their beds +uncomfortable, but it was certain that their house was occupied at present, and +they were unable to get into it. Now Granite House was not only their dwelling, +it was their storehouse. Everything they possessed was stored there. It would +be a serious thing if this should be pillaged and they should have again to +begin at the beginning. In their anxiety, one or the other went out often to +see if the dog remained on watch. Smith, alone, waited with his accustomed +patience, although he was exasperated at finding himself confronted by +something utterly inexplicable, and his reason shrank from the thought that +around him, over him, perhaps, was exercising an influence to which he could +give no name. Spilett sharing his thoughts, they conversed together in an +undertone of those unaccountable events which defied all their knowledge and +experience. Certainly, there was a mystery about this island, but how discover +it? Even Herbert did not know what to think, and often questioned Smith. As to +Neb, he said that this was his master’s business and not his; and if he +had not feared offending his companions, the brave fellow would have slept this +night as soundly as if he had been in his bed in Granite House. +</p> + +<p> +Pencroff, however, was very much put out. +</p> + +<p> +“It’s a joke,” he said. “It’s a joke that is +played on us. Well, I don’t like such jokes, and the joker won’t +like it, if I catch him!” +</p> + +<p> +At dawn the colonists, well armed, followed along the shore to the reefs. By 5 +o’clock the closed windows of Granite House appeared through their leafy +curtain. Everything, from this side, appeared to be in order, but an +exclamation escaped from the colonists when they perceived that the door which +they had left closed was wide open. There could be no more doubt that some one +was in Granite House, The upper ladder was in its place; but the lower had been +drawn up to the threshold. It was evident that the intruders wished to guard +against a surprise. As to telling who or how many they were, that was still +impossible, as none had yet shown themselves. +</p> + +<p> +Pencroff shouted again, but without answer. +</p> + +<p> +“The beggars!” he exclaimed, “to sleep as soundly as if they +were at home! Halloo! pirates! bandits! corsairs! sons of John Bull!” +</p> + +<p> +When Pencroff, as an American, called any one a “son of John Bull,” +he had reached the acme of insult. +</p> + +<p> +Just then, the day broke and the facade of Granite House was illuminated by the +rays of the rising sun. But inside as well as without all was still and calm. +It was evident from the position of the ladder that whoever had been inside the +house had not come out. But how could they get up to them? +</p> + +<p> +Herbert conceived the idea of shooting an arrow attached to a cord between the +lower rungs of the ladder which were hanging from the doorway: They would thus +be able by means of the cord to pull this ladder down, and gain access to +Granite House. There was evidently nothing else to do, and with a little skill +this attempt might prove successful. Fortunately there were bows and arrows at +the Chimneys, and they found there, also, some twenty fathoms of light hibiscus +cord. Pencroff unrolled this, and fastened the end to a well-feathered arrow. +Then Herbert having placed the arrow in his bow took careful aim at the hanging +part of the ladder. +</p> + +<p> +The others stationed themselves some distance in the background to observe what +might happen, and the reporter covered the doorway with his carbine. +</p> + +<p> +The bow bent, the arrow shot upward with the cord, and passed between the two +lower rungs of the ladder. The operation had succeeded. But just as Herbert, +having caught the end of the cord, was about giving it a pull to make the +ladder fall, an arm thrust quickly between the door and the wall seized the +ladder and drew it within Granite House. +</p> + +<p> +“You little beggar!” cried Pencroff. “If a ball would settle +you, you would not have to wait long!” +</p> + +<p> +“But what is it?” demanded Neb. +</p> + +<p> +“What! didn’t you see?” +</p> + +<p> +“No.” +</p> + +<p> +“Why, it’s a monkey, a macauco, a sapajo, an orang, a baboon, a +gorilla, a sagoin! Our house has been invaded by monkeys, which have climbed up +the ladder while we were away.” +</p> + +<p> +And at the moment, as if to prove the truth of what the sailor said, three or +four quadrumana threw open the window shutters and saluted the true proprietors +of the place with a thousand contortions and grimaces. +</p> + +<p> +“I knew all the time it was a joke,” cried Pencroff, “But +here’s one of the jokers that will pay for the others!” he added, +covering a monkey with his gun and firing. All disappeared but, this one, +which, mortally wounded, fell to the ground. +</p> + +<p> +This monkey was very large and evidently belonged to the first order of +quadrumana. Whether a chimpanzee, an orang, a gorilla, or a gibbon, it ranked +among these anthropomorphi, so called on account of their likeness to the human +race. Herbert declared it was an orang-outang, and we all know that the lad +understood zoology. +</p> + +<p> +“What a fine beast!” cried Neb. +</p> + +<p> +“As fine as you choose!” answered the reporter, “but I +don’t see yet how we are going to get in!” +</p> + +<p> +“Herbert is a good shot,” said the reporter, “and his bow is +sure! We will try again—” +</p> + +<p> +“But these monkeys are mischievous,” cried Pencroff, “and if +they don’t come to the windows, we cannot shoot them; and when I think of +the damage they can do in the rooms and, in the magazine—” +</p> + +<p> +“Have patience,” answered Smith. “These animals cannot hold +us in check, very long.” +</p> + +<p> +“I will be sure of that when they are out of there, “rejoined +Pencroff, “Can you say how many dozens of these fools there may +be?” +</p> + +<p> +It would hare been hard to answer Pencroff, but it was harder to try again the +experiment of the arrow, as the lower end of the ladder had been drawn within +the doorway, and when they pulled on the cord again, it broke, and the ladder +remained, as before. +</p> + +<p> +It was, Indeed, vexatious. Pencroff was in a fury, and, although the situation +had a certain comic aspect, he did not think it funny at all. It was evident +that the colonists would, eventually, get back into their house and drive out +the monkeys, but when and how they could not say. +</p> + +<p> +Two hours passed, during which the monkeys avoided showing themselves; but they +were there, for all that, and, two or three times, a muzzle or paw slipped by +the door or the windows, and was saluted by a shot. +</p> + +<p> +“Let us conceal ourselves,” said the engineer, at length. +“And then the monkeys will think we have gone off, and will show +themselves again. Let Herbert and Spilett remain hidden behind the rocks and +fire on any that appear. +</p> + +<p> +The directions of the engineer were followed, and while the reporter and the +lad, who were the best shots in the party, took their positions, the others +went over the plateau to the forest to shoot some game, as it was breakfast +time and they had no food. +</p> + +<p> +In half an hour the hunters returned with some wild pigeons, which would be +pretty good roasted. Not a monkey had shown itself. +</p> + +<p> +Spilett and Herbert went to their breakfast, while Top kept watch under the +windows. Then they returned to their post. Two hours later the situation was +unchanged. The quadrumana gave no sign of existence, and it seemed as if they +must have disappeared; but it was more likely that, frightened by the death of +one of their number and the detonations of the guns, they kept themselves +hidden in the chambers or the store-room of Granite House. And, when the +colonists thought of all that was stored in this latter room, the patience +which the engineer had recommended turned into irritation, and indeed they +could not be blamed for it. +</p> + +<p> +“It is too bad!” exclaimed the reporter, at length; “and is +there no way we can put an end to this?” +</p> + +<p> +“We must make these beggars give up!” cried Pencroff. “We can +readily do it, even if there are twenty of them, in a hand-to hand fight! Oh, +is there no way we can get at them?” +</p> + +<p> +“Yes,” replied Smith, struck by an idea. +</p> + +<p> +“Only one?” rejoined Pencroff. “Well, that’s better +than none at all. What is it?” +</p> + +<p> +“Try to get into Granite House by the old weir,” answered the +engineer. +</p> + +<p> +“Why in the mischief didn’t I think of that!” cried the +sailor. +</p> + +<p> +This was, indeed, the only way to get into Granite House, in order to fight the +band and drive them out. It is true that, if they tore down the cemented wall +which closed the weir, the work would have all to be done over again; but, +fortunately, Smith had not yet effected his design of hiding this opening by +covering it again with the lake, as that operation necessitated a good deal of +time. +</p> + +<p> +It was already past noon when the colonists, well armed and furnished with +picks and mattocks, left the Chimneys, passed under the windows of Granite +House, and, having ordered Top to remain at his post, made ready to climb the +left bank of the Mercy, so as to reach Prospect Plateau. But they had hardly +gone fifty paces, when they heard the loud barkings of the dog, as if making a +desperate appeal. All halted. +</p> + +<p> +“Let us run back,” cried Pencroff. And all did as proposed as fast +as possible. +</p> + +<p> +Arrived at the turn, the whole situation was changed. The monkeys, seized with +a sudden fright, startled by some unknown cause, were trying to escape. Two or +three were running and springing from window to window, with the agility of +clowns. In their fright they seemed to have forgotten to replace the ladder, by +which they could easily have descended. In a moment half a dozen were in such a +position that they could be shot, and the colonists, taking aim, fired. Some +fell, wounded or killed, within the chambers, uttering sharp cries. Others, +falling to the ground without, were crushed by the fall, and a few moments +afterwards it seemed as if there was not one living quadrumana in Granite +House. +</p> + +<p> +“Hurrah,” said Pencroff, “hurrah, hurrah!” +</p> + +<p> +“Don’t cheer yet,” saidSpilett. +</p> + +<p> +“Why not,” asked Pencroff. “Ain’t they all +killed.” +</p> + +<p> +“Doubtless: but that does not give us the means of getting in.” +</p> + +<p> +“Let us go the weir!” exclaimed Pencroff. +</p> + +<p> +“We will have to,” said the engineer. “Nevertheless it would +have been preferable—” +</p> + +<p> +And at the instant, as if in answer to the observation of the engineer, they +saw the ladder slide over the door-sill and roll over to the ground. +</p> + +<p> +“By the thousand pipes, but that is lucky!” cried Pencroff, looking +at Smith. +</p> + +<p> +“Too lucky!” muttered Smith, springing up the ladder. +</p> + +<p> +“Take care, Mr. Smith!” exclaimed Pencroff, “if there should +be any sojourners—” +</p> + +<p> +“We will soon see,” responded the other. +</p> + +<p> +All his companions followed him and in a moment were within the doorway. +</p> + +<p> +They searched everywhere. No one was in the chambers or in the storeroom, which +remained undisturbed by the quadrumana. +</p> + +<p> +“And the ladder,” said Pencroff; “where is the gentleman who +pushed it down to us?” +</p> + +<p> +But just then a cry was heard, and a huge monkey, that had taken refuge in the +corridor, sprang into the great hall, followed by Neb. +</p> + +<p> +“Ah, the thief!” cried Pencroff, about to spring with his hatchet +at the head of the animal, when Smith stopped him. +</p> + +<p> +“Spare it, Pencroff.” +</p> + +<p> +“What, spare this black ape?” +</p> + +<p> +“Yes, it is he that has thrown us the ladder,” said the engineer, +in a voice so strange, that it was hard to say whether he was in earnest or +not. +</p> + +<p> +Nevertheless, all threw themselves on the monkey, which, after a brave +resistance, was thrown down and tied. +</p> + +<p> +“Ugh!” exclaimed Pencroff; “and now what will we do with +it?” +</p> + +<p> +“Make a servant of it,” answered Herbert, half in earnest, as the +lad knew how great was the intelligence of this race of quadrumana. +</p> + +<p> +The colonists gathered round the monkey and examined it attentively. It +appeared to belong to that species of anthropomorphi in which the facial angle +is not visibly inferior to that of the Australians or Hottentots. He was an +orang of the kind which has neither the ferocity of the baboon nor the macauco, +nor the thoughtlessness of the sagoin, nor the impatience of the magot, nor the +bad instincts of the cynocephalous. It was of a family of anthropomorphi which +has traits indicating a half-human intelligence. Employed in houses, they can +wait on the table, do chamber-work, brush clothes, black boots, clean the +knives and forks, and—empty the bottles, as well as the best trained +flunkey. Buffon possessed one of these monkeys, which served him a long time as +a zealous and faithful servant. +</p> + +<p> +The one at present tied in the hall of Granite House was a big fellow, six feet +high, deep-chested, and finely built, a medium-sized head, with a sharp facial +angle, a well-rounded skull, and a prominent nose, and a skin covered with +smooth hair, soft and shining,—in short, a finished type of +anthropomorphi. Its eyes, somewhat smaller than those of a human being, +sparkled with intelligence; its teeth glistened beneath its moustache, and it +wore a small nut-brown beard. +</p> + +<p> +“He is a fine chap,” said Pencroff. “If we only understood +his language, one might talk with him!” +</p> + +<p> +“Then,” said Neb, “are they in earnest, my master? Will we +take it as a domestic?” +</p> + +<p> +“Yes, Neb,” said the engineer, smiling. “But you need not be +jealous.” +</p> + +<p> +“And I hope it will make an excellent servant. As it is young its +education will be easy, and we will not have to use force to make it mind, nor +to pull out its teeth as is sometimes done. It cannot fail to become attached +to masters who only treat it well.” +</p> + +<p> +“And we will do that,” said Pencroff, who having forgotten his +recent wrath against the “jokers,” approached the orang and +accosted him with:— +</p> + +<p> +“Hullo, my boy, how goes it?” +</p> + +<p> +The orang responded with a little grunt, which seemed to denote a not bad +temper. +</p> + +<p> +“You want to join the colony, do you? Would you like to enter the service +of Mr. Smith?” +</p> + +<p> +The monkey gave another affirmative grunt. +</p> + +<p> +“And you’ll be satisfied with your board as wages?” +</p> + +<p> +A third affirmative grunt. +</p> + +<p> +“His conversation is a little monotonous,” observed Spilett. +</p> + +<p> +“Well,” replied Pencroff, “the best domestics are those that +speak least. And then, no wages! Do you hear, my boy? At first we give you no +wages, but we will double them later, if you suit us!” +</p> + +<p> +Thus the colonists added to their number one who had already done them a +service. As to a name, the sailor asked that he should be called, in +remembrance of another monkey, Jupiter, or by abbreviation, Jup. And thus, +without more ado, Master Jup was installed in Granite House. +</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2><a name="XXIX" id="XXIX"></a>CHAPTER XXIX.</h2> + +<p class="letter"> +PROJECTS TO BE CARRIED OUT—A BRIDGE OVER THE MERCY—TO MAKE AN +ISLAND OF PROSPECT PLATEAU—THE DRAW-BRIDGE—THE CORN +HARVEST—THE STREAM—THE CAUSEWAY—THE POULTRY YARD—THE +PIGEON-HOUSE—THE TWO WILD ASSES—HARNESSED TO THE +WAGON—EXCURSION TO BALLOON HARBOR. +</p> + +<p> +The colonists had now reconquered their domicile without having been obliged to +follow the weir. It was, indeed, fortunate, that at the moment they decided to +destroy their masonry, the band of monkeys, struck by a terror not less sudden +than inexplicable, had rushed from Granite House. Had these animals a +presentiment that a dangerous attack was about to be made on them from another +direction? This was the only way to account for their retreat. +</p> + +<p> +The rest of the day was occupied in carrying the dead monkeys to the wood and +burying them there, and in repairing the disorder made by the +intruders,—disorder and not damage, as, though they had upset the +furniture in the rooms, they had broken nothing. Neb rekindled the range, and +the supply in the pantry furnished a substantial repast that was duly honored. +</p> + +<p> +Jup was not forgotten, and he ate with avidity the pistachio nuts and the roots +of the sumach, with which he saw himself abundantly provided. Pencroff had +unfastened his arms, although he thought it best to keep the monkey’s +legs bound until they could be sure he had surrendered. +</p> + +<p> +Seated at the table, before going to bed, Smith and his companions discussed +three projects, the execution of which was urgent. The most important and the +most pressing was the establishment of a bridge across the Mercy, then the +building of a corral, designed for the accommodation of moufflons or other +woolly animals which they had agreed to capture. These two plans tended to +solve the question of clothing, which was then the most serious question. +</p> + +<p> +It was Smith’s intention to establish this corral at the sources of Red +Creek, where there was abundant pasturage. Already the path between there and +Prospect Plateau was partially cleared, and with a better constructed cart, +carriage would be easy, especially if they should capture some animal that +could draw it. +</p> + +<p> +But while it would not be inconvenient to have the corral some distance from +Granite House, it was different with the poultry-yard, to which Neb called +attention. It was necessary that the “chickens” should be at the +hand of the cook, and no place seemed more favorable for an establishment of +this kind than that portion of the lake shore bordering on the former weir. The +aquatic birds also would thrive there, and the pair of tinamons, taken in the +last excursion, would serve as a beginning. +</p> + +<p> +The next day—the 3d of November—work was begun on the bridge, and +all hands were required on the important undertaking. Laden with tools the +colonists descended to the shore. +</p> + +<p> +Here Pencroff reflected as follows:— +</p> + +<p> +“Supposing while we are away Master Jup takes the notion of hauling up +the ladder, which he so gallantly unrolled for us yesterday.” +</p> + +<p> +“We would be dependent on his tail!” answered Spilett. +</p> + +<p> +The ladder was therefore made fast to two stakes driven firmly into the ground. +The colonists ascended the river, and soon arrived at its narrow bend, where +they halted to examine whether the bridge could not be thrown across at this +place. The situation was suitable, as from this point to Balloon Harbor the +distance was three miles and a half, and a wagon road connecting Granite House +with the southern part of the island, could easily be constructed. +</p> + +<p> +Then Smith communicated to his companions a project which he had had in view +for some time. This was to completely isolate Prospect Plateau, so as to +protect it from all attacks of quadrupeds or quadrumana. By this means Granite +House, the Chimneys, the poultry yard, and all the upper part of the plateau +destined for sowing would be protected against the depredations of animals. +</p> + +<p> +Nothing could be easier than to do this, and the engineer proposed to +accomplish it as follows:—The plateau was already protected on three +sides by either natural or artificial water courses. On the northwest, by the +bank of Lake Grant, extending from the angle against the former weir to the cut +made in the east bank to draw off the water. On the north, by this new water +course which had worn itself a bed both above and below the fall, which could +be dug out sufficiently to render the passage impracticable to animals. And +upon the east, by the sea itself, from the mouth of this new creek to the mouth +of the Mercy. Therefore the only part remaining open was the western part of +the plateau included between the bend in the river and the southern angle of +the lake, a distance of leas than a mile. But nothing could be easier than to +dig a ditch, wide and deep, which would be filled from the lake, and flow into +the Mercy. Doubtless the level of the lake would be lowered somewhat by this +new drain on its resources, but Smith had assured himself that the flow of Red +Creek was sufficient for his purpose. +</p> + +<p> +“Thus,” added the engineer, “Prospect Plateau will be a +veritable island, unconnected with the rest of our domain, save by the bridge +which we will throw over the Mercy, by the two causeways already built above +and below the fall, and by the two others which are to be constructed, one over +the proposed ditch, and the other over the left bank of the Mercy. Now if this +bridge and the causeways can be raised at will, Prospect Plateau will be +secured from surprise.” +</p> + +<p> +Smith, in order to make his companions comprehend clearly his plans, had made a +plot of the plateau, and his project was rendered perfectly plain. It met with +unanimous approval; and Pencroff, brandishing his hatchet, exclaimed:— +</p> + +<p> +“And first, for the bridge!” +</p> + +<p> +This work was the most urgent. Trees were selected, felled, lopped, and cut +into beams, planks, and boards. The bridge was to be stationary on the right +bank of the Mercy, but on the left it was to be so constructed as to raise by +means of counterweights, as in some draw-bridges. +</p> + +<p> +It will be seen that this work, even if it could be easily accomplished, would +take considerable time, as the Mercy was eighty feet wide at this point. It was +first necessary to drive piles in the bed of the river, to sustain the flooring +of the bridge, and to set up a pile-driver to drive the piles, so as to form +two arches capable of supporting heavy weights. +</p> + +<p> +Fortunately they lacked neither the necessary tools for preparing the timber, +nor the iron work, to bind it together, nor the ingenuity of a man who was an +adept at this sort of work, nor, finally, the zeal of his companions who in +these seven months had necessarily acquired considerable manual skill. And it +should be added that Spilett began to do nearly as well as the sailor himself +“who would never have expected so much from a newspaper man!” +</p> + +<p> +It took three weeks of steady work to build this bridge. And as the weather was +fine they lunched on the ground, and only returned to Granite House for supper. +</p> + +<p> +During this period it was observed that Master Jup took kindly to and +familiarized himself with his new masters, whom he watched with the greatest +curiosity. Nevertheless, Pencroff was careful not to give him complete liberty +until the limits of the plateau had been rendered impassible. Top and he were +the best possible friends, and got on capitally together although Jup took +everything gravely. +</p> + +<p> +The bridge was finished on the 20th of November. The movable part balanced +perfectly with the counterpoise, and needed but little effort to raise it; +between the hinge and crossbeam on which the draw rested when closed, the +distance was twenty feet, a gap sufficiently wide to prevent animals from +getting across. +</p> + +<p> +It was next proposed to go for the envelope of the balloon, which the colonists +were anxious to place in safety; but in order to bring it, the cart would have +to be dragged to Balloon Harbor, necessitating the breaking of a road through +the dense underwood of the Far West, all of which would take time. Therefore +Neb and Pencroff made an excursion to the harbor, and as they reported that the +supply of cloth was well protected in the cave, it was decided that the works +about the plateau should not be discontinued. +</p> + +<p> +“This,” said Pencroff, “will enable us to establish the +poultry-yard under the most advantageous conditions, since we need have no fear +of the visits of foxes or other noxious animals.” +</p> + +<p> +“And also,” added Neb, “we can clear the plateau, and +transplant wild plants”— +</p> + +<p> +“And make ready our second corn-field,” continued the sailor with a +triumphant air. +</p> + +<p> +Indeed the first corn-field, sowed with a single grain, had prospered +admirably, thanks to the care of Pencroff. It had produced the ten ears +foretold by the engineer, and as each ear had eighty grains, the colonists +found themselves possessed of 800 grains—in six months—which +promised them a double harvest each year. These 800 grains, excepting fifty +which it was prudent to reserve, were now about to be sowed in a new field with +as much care as the first solitary specimen. +</p> + +<p> +The field was prepared, and inclosed with high, sharp-pointed palisades, which +quadrupeds would have found very difficult to surmount. As to the birds, the +noisy whirligigs and astonishing scarecrows, the product of Pencroff’s +genius, were enough to keep them at a distance. Then the 750 grains were buried +in little hills, regularly disposed, and Nature was left to do the rest. +</p> + +<p> +On the 21st of November, Smith began laying out the ditch which was to enclose +the plateau on the west. There were two or three feet of vegetable earth, and +beneath that the granite. It was, therefore, necessary to manufacture some more +nitro-glycerine, and the nitro-glycerine had its accustomed effect. In less +than a fortnight a ditch, twelve feet wide and six feet deep was excavated in +the plateau. A new outlet was in like manner made in the rocky border of the +lake, and the waters rushed into this new channel, forming a small stream, to +which they gave the name of Glycerine Creek. As the engineer had foreseen the +level of the lake was lowered but very slightly. Finally, for completing the +enclosure, the bed of the stream across the beach was considerably enlarged, +and the sand was kept up by a double palisade. +</p> + +<p> +By the middle of December all these works were completed, and Prospect Plateau, +shaped something like an irregular pentagon, having a perimeter of about four +miles, was encircled with a liquid belt, making it absolutely safe from all +aggression. +</p> + +<p> +During this month the heat was very great. Nevertheless, the colonists, not +wishing to cease work, proceeded to construct the poultry-yard. Jup, who since +the enclosing of the plateau had been given his liberty, never quitted his +masters nor manifested the least desire to escape. He was a gentle beast, +though possessing immense strength and wonderful agility. No one could go up +the ladder to Granite House as he could. Already he was given employment; he +was instructed to fetch wood and carry off the stones which had been taken from +the bed of Glycerine Creek. +</p> + +<p> +“Although he’s not yet a mason, he is already a +‘monkey,’“ said Herbert, making a joking allusion to the +nickname masons give their apprentices. And if ever a name was well applied, it +was so in this instance! +</p> + +<p> +The poultry-yard occupied an area of 200 square yards on the southeast bank of +the lake. It was enclosed with a palisade, and within were separate divisions +for the proposed inhabitants, and huts of branches divided into compartments +awaiting their occupants. +</p> + +<p> +The first was the pair of tinamons, who were not long in breeding numerous +little ones. They had for companions half-a-dozen ducks, who were always by the +water-side. Some of these belonged to that Chinese variety whose wings open +like a fan, and whose plumage rivals in brilliance that of the golden pheasant. +Some days later, Herbert caught a pair of magnificent curassows, birds of the +gallinaceæ family, with long rounding tails. These soon bred others, and as to +the pellicans, the kingfishers, the moorhens, they came of themselves to the +poultry-yard. And soon, all this little world, after some disputing, cooing, +scolding, clucking, ended by agreeing and multiplying at a rate sufficient for +the future wants of the colony. +</p> + +<p> +Smith, in order to complete his work, established a pigeon-house in the corner +of the poultry-yard, and placed therein a dozen wild pigeons. These birds +readily habituated themselves to their new abode, and returned there each +evening, showing a greater propensity to domestication than the wood pigeons, +their congeners, which do not breed except in a savage state. +</p> + +<p> +And now the time was come to make use of the envelope in the manufacture of +clothing, for to keep it intact in order to attempt to leave the island by +risking themselves in a balloon filled with heated air over a sea, which might +be called limitless, was only to be thought of by men deprived of all other +resources, and Smith, being eminently practical, did not dream of such a thing. +</p> + +<p> +It was necessary to bring the envelope to Granite House, and the colonists +busied themselves in making their heavy cart less unwieldly and lighter. But +though the vehicle was provided, the motor was still to be found! Did not there +exist in the island some ruminant of indiginous species which could replace the +horse, ass, ox, or cow? That was the question. +</p> + +<p> +“Indeed,” said Pencroff, “a draught animal would be very +useful to us, while we are waiting until Mr. Smith is ready to build a +steam-wagon or a locomotive, though doubtless, some day we will have a railway +to Balloon Harbor, with a branch road up Mount Franklin!” +</p> + +<p> +And the honest sailor, in talking thus, believed what he said. Such is the +power of imagination combined with faith! +</p> + +<p> +But, in truth, an animal capable of being harnessed would have just suited +Pencroff, and as Fortune favored him, she did not let him want. +</p> + +<p> +One day, the 23d of December, the colonists, busy at the Chimneys, heard Neb +crying and Top barking in such emulation, that dreading some terrible accident, +they ran to them. +</p> + +<p> +What did they see? Two large, beautiful animals, which had imprudently ventured +upon the plateau, the causeways not having been closed. They seemed like two +horses, or rather two asses, male and female, finely shaped, of a light bay +color, striped with black on the head, neck, and body, and with white legs and +tail. They advanced tranquilly, without showing any fear, and looked calmly on +these men in whom they had not yet recognized their masters. +</p> + +<p> +“They are onagers,” cried Herbert. “Quadrupeds of a kind +between the zebra and the quagga.” +</p> + +<p> +“Why aren’t they asses?” asked Neb. +</p> + +<p> +“Because they have not long ears, and their forms are more +graceful.” +</p> + +<p> +“Asses or horses,” added Pencroff—“they are what Mr. +Smith would call “motors,” and it will be well to capture +them!” +</p> + +<p> +The sailor, without startling the animals, slid through the grass to the +causeway over Glycerine Creek, raised it, and the onagers were prisoners. +Should they be taken by violence, and made to submit to a forced domestication? +No. It was decided that for some days they would let these animals wander at +will over the plateau where the grass was abundant, and a stable was at once +constructed near to the poultry-yard in which the onagers would find a good +bedding, and a refuge for the night. +</p> + +<p> +The fine pair were thus left entirely at liberty, and the colonists avoided +approaching them. In the meantime the onagers often tried to quit the plateau, +which was too confined for them, accustomed to wide ranges and deep forests. +The colonists saw them following around the belt of water impossible to cross, +whinnying and galloping over the grass, and then resting quietly for hours +regarding the deep woods from which they were shut off. +</p> + +<p> +In the meantime, harness had been made from vegetable fibres, and some days +after the capture of the onagers, not only was the cart ready, but a road, or +rather a cut, had been made through the forest all the way from the bend in the +Mercy to Balloon Harbor. They could therefore get to this latter place with the +cart, and towards the end of the month the onagers were tried for the first +time. +</p> + +<p> +Pencroff had already coaxed these animals so that they ate from his hand, and +he could approach them without difficulty, but, once harnessed, they reared and +kicked, and were with difficulty kept from breaking loose, although it was not +long before they submitted to this new service. +</p> + +<p> +This day, every one except Pencroff, who walked beside his team, rode in the +cart to Balloon Harbor. They were jolted about a little over this rough road, +but the cart did not break down, and they were able to load it, the same day, +with the envelope and the appurtenances to the balloon. +</p> + +<p> +By 8 o’clock in the evening, the cart, having recrossed the bridge, +followed down the bank of the Mercy and stopped on the beach. The onagers were +unharnessed, placed in the stable, and Pencroff, before sleeping, gave a sigh +of satisfaction that resounded throughout Granite House. +</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2><a name="XXX" id="XXX"></a>CHAPTER XXX.</h2> + +<p class="letter"> +CLOTHING—SEAL-SKIN BOOTS—MAKING PYROXYLINE—PLANTING—THE +FISH—TURTLES’ EGGS—JUP’S EDUCATION—THE +CORRAL-HUNTING MOUFFLONS—OTHER USEFUL ANIMALS AND VEGETABLES—HOME +THOUGHTS. +</p> + +<p> +The first week In January was devoted to making clothing. The needles found in +the box were plied by strong, if not supple fingers, and what was sewed, was +sewed strongly. Thread was plenty, as Smith had thought of using again that +with which the strips of the balloon had been fastened together. These long +bands had been carefully unripped by Spilett and Herbert with commendable +patience, since Pencroff had thrown aside the work, which bothered him beyond +measure; but when it came to sewing again the sailor was unequalled. +</p> + +<p> +The varnish was then removed from the cloth by means of soda procured as +before, and the cloth was afterwards bleached in the sun. Some dozens of shirts +and socks—the latter, of course, not knitted, but made of sewed +strips—were thus made. How happy it made the colonists to be clothed +again in white linen—linen coarse enough, it is true, but they did not +mind that—and to lie between sheets, which transformed the banks of +Granite House into real beds! About this time they also made boots from seal +leather, which were a timely substitute for those brought from America. They +were long and wide enough, and never pinched the feet of the pedestrians. +</p> + +<p> +In the beginning of the year (1866) the hot weather was incessant, but the +hunting in the woods, which fairly swarmed with birds and beasts, continued; +and Spilett and Herbert were too good shots to waste powder. Smith had +recommended them to save their ammunition, and that they might keep it for +future use the engineer took measures to replace it by substances easily +renewable. How could he tell what the future might have in store for them in +case they left the island? It behooved them, therefore, to prepare for all +emergencies. +</p> + +<p> +As Smith had not discovered any lead in the island he substituted iron shot, +which were easily made. As they were not so heavy as leaden ones they had to be +made larger, and the charges contained a less number, but the skill of the +hunters counterbalanced this defect. Powder he could have made, since he had +all the necessary materials but as its preparation requires extreme care, and +as without special apparatus it is difficult to make it of good quality, Smith +proposed to manufacture pyroxyline, a kind of gun-cotton, a substance in which +cotton is not necessary, except as cellulose. Now cellulose is simply the +elementary tissue of vegetables, and is found in almost a pure state not only +in cotton, but also in the texile fibres of hemp and flax, in paper and old +rags, the pith of the elder, etc. And it happened that elder trees abounded in +the island towards the mouth of Red Creek:—the colonists had already used +its shoots and berries in place of coffee. +</p> + +<p> +Thus they had the cellulose at hand, and the only other substance necessary for +the manufacture of pyroxyline was nitric acid, which Smith could easily produce +as before. The engineer, therefore, resolved to make and use this combustible, +although he was aware that it had certain serious inconveniences, such as +inflaming at 170° instead of 240°, and a too instantaneous deflagration for +firearms. On the other hand, pyroxyline had these advantages—it was not +affected by dampness, it did not foul the gun-barrels, and its explosive force +was four times greater than that of gunpowder. +</p> + +<p> +In order to make the pyroxyline, Smith made a mixture of three parts of nitric +acid with five of concentrated sulphuric acid, and steeped the cellulose in +this mixture for a quarter of an hour; afterwards it was washed in fresh water +and left to dry. The operation succeeded perfectly, and the hunters had at +their disposal a substance perfectly prepared, and which, used with discretion, +gave excellent results. +</p> + +<p> +About this time the colonists cleared three acres of Prospect Plateau, leaving +the rest as pasture for the onagers. Many excursions were made into Jacamar +Wood and the Far West, and they brought back a perfect harvest of wild +vegetables, spinach, cresses, charlocks, and radishes, which intelligent +culture would greatly change, and which would serve to modify the flesh diet +which the colonists had been obliged to put up with. They also hauled large +quantities of wood and coal, and each excursion helped improve the roads by +grinding down its inequalities under the wheels. +</p> + +<p> +The warren always furnished its contingent of rabbits, and as it was situated +without Glycerine creek, its occupants could not reach nor damage the new +plantations. As to the oyster-bed among the coast rocks, it furnished a daily +supply of excellent mollusks. Further, fish from the lake and river were +abundant, as Pencroff had made set-lines on which they often caught trout and +another very savory fish marked with small yellow spots on a silver-colored +body. Thus Neb, who had charge of the culinary department, was able to make an +agreeable change in the menu of each repast. Bread alone was wanting at the +colonists’ table, and they felt this privation exceedingly. +</p> + +<p> +Sometimes the little party hunted the sea-turtles, which frequented the coast +at Mandible Cape. At this season the beach was covered with little mounds +enclosing the round eggs, which were left to the sun to hatch; and as each +turtle produces two hundred and fifty eggs annually, their number was very +great. +</p> + +<p> +“It is a true egg-field,” said Spilett, “and all we have to +do is to gather them.” +</p> + +<p> +But they did not content themselves with these products; they hunted also the +producers, and took back to Granite House a dozen of these reptiles, which were +excellent eating. Turtle soup, seasoned with herbs, and a handful of shell-fish +thrown in, gained high praise for its concoctor, Neb. +</p> + +<p> +Another fortunate event, which permitted them to make new provision for winter, +must be mentioned. Shoals of salmon ascended the Mercy for many miles, in order +to spawn. The river was full of these fish, which measured upwards of two feet +in length, and it was only necessary to place some barriers in the stream in +order to capture a great many. Hundreds were caught in this way, and salted +down for winter, when the ice would stop the fishing. +</p> + +<p> +Jup, during this time, was elevated to the position of a domestic. He had been +clothed in a jacket, and short trowsers, and an apron with pockets, which were +his joy, as he kept his hands in them and allowed no one to search them. The +adroit orang had been wonderfully trained by Neb, and one would have said they +understood each other’s conversation. Jup had, moreover, a real affection +for the Negro, which was reciprocated. When the monkey was not wanted to carry +wood or to climb to the top of some tree, he was passing his time in the +kitchen, seeking to imitate Neb in all that he was doing. The master also +showed great patience and zeal in instructing his pupil, and the pupil showed +remarkable intelligence in profiting by these lessons. +</p> + +<p> +Great was the satisfaction one day when Master Jup, napkin on arm, came without +having been called to wait on the table. Adroit and attentive, he acquitted +himself perfectly, changing the plates, bringing the dishes, and pouring the +drink, all with a gravity which greatly amused the colonists, and completely +overcame Pencroff. +</p> + +<p> +“Jup, some more soup! Jup, a bit more agouti! Jup, another plate! Jup, +brave, honest Jup!” +</p> + +<p> +Jup, not in the least disconcerted, responded to every call, looked out for +everything, and nodded his head intelligently when the sailor, alluding to his +former pleasantry said:— +</p> + +<p> +“Decidedly, Jup, we must double your wages!” +</p> + +<p> +The orang had become perfectly accustomed, to Granite House, and often +accompanied his masters to the forest without manifesting the least desire to +run off. It was laughable to see him march along with a stick of +Pencroff’s on his shoulder, like a gun. If any one wanted some fruit +gathered from a treetop how quickly be was up there. If the wagon wheels stuck +in the mire, with what strength he raised it onto the road again. +</p> + +<p> +“What a Hercules!” exclaimed Pencroff. “If he was as +mischievous as he is gentle we could not get along with him.” +</p> + +<p> +Towards the end of January the colonists undertook great work in the interior +of the island. It had been decided that they would establish at the foot of +Mount Franklin, near the sources of Red Creek, the corral destined to contain +the animals whose presence would have been unpleasant near Granite House, and +more particularly the moufflons, which were to furnish wool for winter +clothing. Every morning all the colonists, or oftener Smith, Herbert, and +Pencroff, went with the onagers to the site, five miles distant, over what they +called Corral Road. There an extensive area had been chosen opposite the +southern slope of the mountain. It was a level plain, having here and there +groups of trees, situated at the base of one of the spurs, which closed it in +on that side. A small stream, rising close by, crossed it diagonally, and +emptied into Red Creek. The grass was lush, and the position of the trees +allowed the air to circulate freely. All that was necessary was to build a +palisade around to the mountain spur sufficiently high to keep in the animals. +The enclosure would be large enough to contain one hundred cattle, moufflons or +wild goats and their young. +</p> + +<p> +The line of the corral was marked out by the engineer, and they all set to work +to cut down the trees necessary for the palisade. The road which they had made +furnished some hundred trees, which were drawn to the place and set firmly in +the ground. At the back part of the palisade they made an entranceway, closed +by a double gate made from thick plank, which could be firmly fastened on the +outside. +</p> + +<p> +The building of this corral took all of three weeks, as, besides the work on +the palisades, Smith put up large sheds for the animals. These were made of +planks, and, indeed, everything had to be made solidly and strong, as moufflons +have great strength, and their first resistance was to be feared. The uprights, +pointed at the end and charred, had been bolted together, and the strength of +the whole had been augmented by placing braces at intervals. +</p> + +<p> +The corral finished, the next thing was to inaugurate a grand hunt at the +pasturages, near the foot of Mount Franklin, frequented by the animals. The +time chosen was the 7th of February, a lovely summer day, and everybody took +part in the affair. The two onagers, already pretty well trained, were mounted +by Spilett and Herbert and did excellent service. The plan was to drive +together the moufflons and goats by gradually narrowing the circle of the chase +around them. Smith, Pencroff, Neb, and Jup posted themselves in different parts +of the wood, while the two horsemen and Top scoured the country for half a mile +around the corral. The moufflons were very numerous in this neighborhood. These +handsome animals were as large as deer, with larger horns than those of rams, +and a greyish-colored wool, mingled with long hair, like argali. +</p> + +<p> +The hunt, with its going and coming, the racing backwards and forwards, the +shouting and hallooing, was fatiguing enough. Out of a hundred animals that +were driven together many escaped, but little by little some thirty moufflons +and a dozen wild goats were driven within the corral, whose open gate seemed to +offer a chance of escape. The result was, therefore, satisfactory; and as many +of these moufflons were females with young, it was certain that the herd would +prosper, and milk and skins be plenty in the future. +</p> + +<p> +In the evening the hunters returned to Granite House nearly tired out. +Nevertheless the next day they went back to look at the corral. The prisoners +had tried hard to break down the palisade, but, not succeeding, they had soon +become quiet. +</p> + +<p> +Nothing of any importance happened during February. The routine of daily work +continued, and while improving the condition of the existing roads, a third, +starting from the enclosure, and directed towards the southern coast, was +begun. This unknown portion of Lincoln Island was one mass of forest, such as +covered Serpentine Peninsula, giving shelter to the beasts from whose presence +Spilett proposed to rid their domain. +</p> + +<p> +Before the winter returned careful attention was given to the cultivation of +the wild plants which had been transplanted to the plateau, and Herbert seldom +returned from an excursion without bringing back some useful vegetable. One day +it was a kind of succory, from the seed of which an excellent oil can be +pressed; another time, it was the common sorrel, whose anti-scorbutic +properties were not to be neglected; and again, it was some of those valuable +tubercles which have always been cultivated in South America, those potatoes, +of which more than two hundred species are known at present. The kitchen +garden, already well enclosed, well watered, and well defended against the +birds, was divided into small beds of lettuce, sorrel, radish, charlock, and +other crucifers; and as the soil upon the plateau was of wonderful richness, +abundant crops might be anticipated. +</p> + +<p> +Neither were various drinks wanting, and unless requiring wine, the most +fastidious could not have complained. To the Oswego tea, made from the mountain +mint, and the fermented liquor made from the roots of the dragon-tree, Smith +added a genuine beer; this was made from the young shoots of the “abies +nigra,” which, after having been boiled and fermented, yielded that +agreeable and particularly healthful drink, known to Americans as “spring +beer,” that is, spruce beer. +</p> + +<p> +Toward the close of summer the poultry yard received a fine pair of bustards +belonging to the species “houbara,” remarkable for a sort of short +cloak of feathers and a membranous pouch extending on either side of the upper +mandible; also some fine cocks, with black skin, comb, and wattles, like those +of Mozambique, which strutted about the lake shore. +</p> + +<p> +Thus the zeal of these intelligent and brave men made every thing prosper. +Providence, doubtless, assisted them; but, faithful to the precept, they first +helped themselves, and Heaven helped them accordingly. +</p> + +<p> +In the evenings, during this warm summer weather, after the day’s work +was ended, and when the sea breeze was springing up, the colonists loved to +gather together on the edge of Prospect Plateau in an arbor of Neb’s +building, covered with climbing plants. There they conversed and instructed +each other, and planned for the future; or the rough wit of the sailor amused +this little world, in which the most perfect harmony had never ceased to reign. +</p> + +<p> +They talked, too, of their country, dear and grand America. In what condition +was the Rebellion? It certainly could not have continued. Richmond had, +doubtless, soon fallen into General Grant’s hands. The capture of the +Confederate capital was necessarily the last act in that unhappy struggle. By +this time the North must have triumphed. How a newspaper would have been +welcomed by the colonists of Lincoln Island! It was eleven months since all +communication between them and the rest of the world had been interrupted, and +pretty soon, the 24th of March, the anniversary of the day when the balloon had +thrown them on this unknown coast, would have arrived. Then they were +castaways, struggling with the elements for life. Now thanks to the knowledge +of their leader, thanks to their own intelligence, they were true colonists, +furnished with arms, tools, instruments, who had turned to their use the +animals, vegetables and minerals of the island, the three kingdoms of nature. +</p> + +<p> +As to Smith, he listened to the conversation of his companions oftener than he +spoke himself. Sometimes he smiled at some thought of Herbert’s, or some +sally of Pencroff’s, but always and above all other things, he reflected +upon those inexplicable events, upon that strange enigma whose secret still +escaped him. +</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2><a name="XXXI" id="XXXI"></a>CHAPTER XXXI.</h2> + +<p class="letter"> +BAD WEATHER—THE HYDRAULIC ELEVATOR—MAKING WINDOW GLASS AND TABLE +WARE—THE BREAD TREE—FREQUENT VISITS TO THE CORRAL—THE +INCREASE OF THE HERD—THE REPORTER’S QUESTION—THE EXACT +POSITION OF LINCOLN ISLAND—PENCROFF’S PROPOSAL. +</p> + +<p> +The weather changed during the first week in March. There was a full moon in +the beginning of the month, and the heat was excessive. The electricity in the +air could be felt, and the stormy weather was at hand. On the 2d the thunder +was very violent, the wind came out east, and the hail beat against the front +of Granite House, pattering like a volley of musketry. It was necessary to +fasten the doors and shutters in order to keep the rooms from being inundated. +Some of the hailstones were as large as pigeons’ eggs, and made Pencroff +think of his cornfield. He instantly ran there, and by covering the tiny young +sprouts with a large cloth was able to protect them. The sailor was well +pelted, but he did not mind that. +</p> + +<p> +The stormy weather lasted for eight days, and the thunder was almost +continuous. The heavens were full of lightning, and many trees in the forest +were struck, and also a huge pine growing upon the border of the lake. Two or +three times the electric fluid struck the beach, melting and vitrifying the +sand. Finding these fulgurites, Smith conceived the idea that it would be +possible to furnish the windows of Granite House with glass thick and solid +enough to resist the wind and rain and hail. +</p> + +<p> +The colonists, having no immediate out-of-doors work, profited by the bad +weather to complete and perfect the interior arrangements of Granite House. The +engineer built a lathe with which they were able to turn some toilette articles +and cooking utensils, and also some buttons, the need of which had been +pressing. They also made a rack for the arms, which were kept with the utmost +care. Nor was Jup forgotten; he occupied a chamber apart, a sort of cabin with +a frame always full of good bedding, which suited him exactly. +</p> + +<p> +“There’s no such thing as fault-finding with Jup,” said +Pencroff. “What a servant he is, Neb!” +</p> + +<p> +“He is my pupil and almost my equal!” +</p> + +<p> +“He’s your superior,” laughed the sailor, “as you can +talk, Neb, and he cannot!” +</p> + +<p> +Jup had by this time become perfectly familiar with all the details of his +work. He brushed the clothes, turned the spit, swept the rooms, waited at +table, and—what delighted Pencroff—never laid down at night before +he had tucked the worthy sailor in his bed. +</p> + +<p> +As to the health of the colony, bipeds and bimana, quadrupeds and quadrumana, +it left nothing to be desired. With the out-of-doors work, on this salubrious +soil, under this temperate zone, laboring with head and hand, they could not +believe that they could ever be sick, and all were in splendid health. Herbert +had grown a couple of inches during the year; his figure had developed and +knitted together, and he promised to become a fine man physically and morally. +He profited by the lessons which he learned practically and from the books in +the chest, and he found in the engineer and the reporter masters pleased to +teach him. It was the engineer’s desire to teach the lad all he himself +knew. +</p> + +<p> +“If I die,” thought Smith, “he will take my place.” +</p> + +<p> +The storm ended on the 9th of March, but the sky remained clouded during the +remainder of the month, and, with the exception of two or three fine days, +rainy or foggy. +</p> + +<p> +About this time a little onager was born, and a number of moufflons, to the +great joy of Neb and Herbert, who had each their favorites among these new +comers. +</p> + +<p> +The domestication of piccaries was also attempted—a pen being built near +the poultry-yard, and a number of the young animals placed therein under +Neb’s care. Jup was charged with taking them their daily nourishment, the +kitchen refuse, and he acquitted himself conscientiously of the task. He did, +indeed, cut off their tails, but this was a prank and not naughtiness, because +those little twisted appendages amused him like a toy, and his instinct was +that of a child. +</p> + +<p> +One day in March, Pencroff, talking with the engineer, recalled to his mind a +promise made some time before. +</p> + +<p> +“You have spoken of something to take the place of our long ladder, Mr. +Smith. Will you make it some day?” +</p> + +<p> +“You mean a kind of elevator?” answered Smith. +</p> + +<p> +“Call it an elevator if you wish,” responded the sailor. “The +name does not matter, provided we can get to our house easily.” +</p> + +<p> +“Nothing is easier, Pencroff; but is it worth while?” +</p> + +<p> +“Certainly, sir, it is. After we have the necessaries, let us think of +the conveniences. For people this will be a luxury, if you choose; but for +things, it is indispensable. It is not so easy to climb a long ladder when one +is heavily loaded.” +</p> + +<p> +“Well, Pencroff, we will try to satisfy you,” answered Smith. +</p> + +<p> +“But you haven’t the machine.” +</p> + +<p> +“We will make one.” +</p> + +<p> +“To go by steam?” +</p> + +<p> +“No, to go by water.” +</p> + +<p> +Indeed, a natural force was at hand. All that was necessary was to enlarge the +passage which furnished Granite House with water, and make a fall at the end of +the corridor. Above this fall the engineer placed a paddle-wheel, and wrapped +around its axle a strong rope attached to a basket. In this manner, by means of +a long cord which reached to the ground, they could raise or lower the basket +by means of the hydraulic motor. +</p> + +<p> +On the 17th of March the elevator was used for the first time, and after that +everything was hoisted into Granite House by its means. Top was particularly +pleased by this improvement, as he could not climb like Jup, and he had often +made the ascent on the back of Neb or of the orang. +</p> + +<p> +Smith also attempted to make glass, which was difficult enough, but after +numerous attempts he succeeded in establishing a glass-works at the old +pottery, where Herbert and Spilett spent several days. The substances entering +into the composition of glass—sand, chalk, and soda—the engineer +had at hand; but the “cane” of the glassmaker, an iron tube five or +six feet long, was wanting. This Pencroff, however, succeeded in making, and on +the 28th of March the furnace was heated. +</p> + +<p> +One hundred parts of sand, thirty-five of chalk, forty of sulphate of soda, +mixed with two of three parts of powdered charcoal, composed the substance +which was placed in earthen vessels and melted to a liquid, or rather to the +consistency of paste. Smith “culled” a certain quantity of this +paste with his cane, and turned it back and forth on a metal plate so placed +that it could be blown on; then he passed the cane to Herbert, telling him to +blow in it. +</p> + +<p> +“As you do to make soap bubbles?” +</p> + +<p> +“Exactly.” +</p> + +<p> +So Herbert, puffing out his cheeks, blew through the cane, which he kept +constantly turning about, in such a manner as to inflate the vitreous mass. +Other quantities of the substance in fusion were added to the first, and the +result was a bubble, measuring a foot in diameter. Then Smith took the cane +again, and swinging it like a pendulum, he made this bubble lengthen into the +shape of cylinder. +</p> + +<p> +This cylinder was terminated at either end by two hemispherical caps, which +were easily cut off by means of a sharp iron dipped in cold water; in the same +way the cylinder was cut lengthwise, and after having been heated a second time +it was spread on the plate and smoothed with a wooden roller. +</p> + +<p> +Thus the first glass was made, and by repeating the operation fifty times they +had as many glasses, and the windows of Granite House were soon garnished with +transparent panes, not very clear, perhaps, but clear enough. +</p> + +<p> +As to the glassware, that was mere amusement. They took whatever shape happened +to come at the end of the cane. Pencroff had asked to be allowed to blow in his +turn and he enjoyed it, but he blew so hard that his products took the most +diverting forms, which pleased him amazingly. +</p> + +<p> +During one of the excursions undertaken about this time a new tree was +discovered, whose products added much to the resources of the colony. +</p> + +<p> +Smith and Herbert, being out hunting one day, went into the forests of the Far +West, and as usual the lad asked the engineer a thousand questions, and as +Smith was no sportsman, and Herbert was deep in physics and chemistry, the game +did not suffer; and so it fell out that the day was nearly ended, and the two +hunters were likely to have made a useless excursion, when Herbert, stopping +suddenly, exclaimed joyfully:— +</p> + +<p> +“Oh, Mr. Smith, do you see that tree?” +</p> + +<p> +And he pointed out a shrub rather than a tree, as it was composed of a single +stem with a scaly bark, and leaves striped with small parallel veins. +</p> + +<p> +“It looks like a small palm. What is it?” asked Smith. +</p> + +<p> +“It is a “cycas revoluta,” about which I have read in our +Dictionary of Natural History.” +</p> + +<p> +“But I see no fruit on this shrub?” +</p> + +<p> +“No, sir, but its trunk contains a flour which Nature furnishes all +ground.” +</p> + +<p> +“Is it a bread-tree?” +</p> + +<p> +“That’s it, exactly.” +</p> + +<p> +“Then, my boy, since we are waiting for our wheat crop, this is a +valuable discovery. Examine it, and pray heaven you are not mistaken.” +</p> + +<p> +Herbert was not mistaken. He broke the stem of the cycas, which was composed of +a glandular tissue containing a certain quantity of farinaceous flour, +traversed by ligneous fibres and separated by concentric rings of the same +substance. From the fecula oozed a sticky liquid of a disagreeable taste, but +this could readily be removed by pressure. The substance itself formed a real +flour of superior quality, extremely nourishing, and which used to be forbidden +exportation by the laws of Japan. +</p> + +<p> +Smith and Herbert, after baring carefully noted the location of the cycas, +returned to Granite House and made known their discovery, and the next day all +the colonists went to the place, and, Pencroff, jubilant, asked the +engineer:— +</p> + +<p> +“Mr Smith, do you believe there are such things as castaways’ +islands?” +</p> + +<p> +“What do you mean, Pencroff?.” +</p> + +<p> +“Well, I mean islands made especially for people to be shipwrecked upon, +where the poor devils could always get along!” +</p> + +<p> +“Perhaps,” said the engineer, smiling. +</p> + +<p> +“Certainly!” answered the sailor, “and just as certainly +Lincoln Island is one of them!” +</p> + +<p> +They returned to Granite House with an ample supply of cycas stems, and the +engineer made a press by which the liquid was expelled, and they obtained a +goodly quantity of flour which Neb transformed into cakes and puddings. They +had not yet real wheaten bread, but it was the next thing to do. +</p> + +<p> +The onager, the goats, and the sheep in the corral furnished a daily supply of +milk to the colony, and the cart, or rather a light wagon, which had taken its +place, made frequent trips to the corral. And when Pencroff’s turn came, +he took Jup along, and made him drive, and Jup, cracking his whip, acquitted +himself with his usual intelligence. Thus everything prospered, and the +colonists, if they had not been so far from their country, would have had +nothing to complain of. They liked the life and they were so accustomed to the +island that they would have left it with regret. Nevertheless, such is +man’s love of country, that had a ship hove in sight the colonists would +have signalled it, have gone aboard and departed. Meantime, they lived this +happy life and they had rather to fear than to wish for any interruption of its +course. +</p> + +<p> +But who is able to flatter himself that he has attained his fortune and reached +the summit of his desires? +</p> + +<p> +The colonists often discussed the nature of their Island, which they had +inhabited for more than a year, and one day a remark was made which, was +destined, later, to bring about the most serious result. +</p> + +<p> +It was the 1st of April, a Sunday, and the Pascal feast, which Smith and his +companions had sanctified by rest and prayer. The day had been lovely, like a +day in October in the Northern Hemisphere. Towards evening all were seated in +the arbor on the edge of the plateau, watching the gradual approach of night, +and drinking some of Neb’s elderberry coffee. They had been talking of +the island and its isolated position in the Pacific, when something made +Spilett say:— +</p> + +<p> +“By the way, Cyrus, have you ever taken the position of the island again +since you have had the sextant?” +</p> + +<p> +“No,” answered the engineer. +</p> + +<p> +“Well, wouldn’t it be well enough to do so?”. +</p> + +<p> +“What would be the use?” asked Pencroff. “The island is well +enough where it is.” +</p> + +<p> +“Doubtless,” answered Spilett, “but it is possible that the +imperfections of the other instruments may have caused an error in that +observation, and since, it is easy to verify it exactly—” +</p> + +<p> +“You are right, Spilett,” responded the engineer, “and I +would have made this verification before, only that if I have made an error it +cannot exceed five degrees in latitude or longitude.” +</p> + +<p> +“Who knows,” replied the reporter, “who knows but that we are +much nearer an inhabited land than we believe?” +</p> + +<p> +“We will know to-morrow,” responded the engineer,” and had it +not been for the other work, which has left us no leisure, we would have known +already.” +</p> + +<p> +“Well,” said Pencroff, “Mr. Smith is too good an observer to +have been mistaken, and if the island has not moved, it is just where he put +it!” +</p> + +<p> +So the next day the engineer made the observations with the sextant with the +following result:—Longitude 150° 30’ west; latitude 34° 57’ +south. The previous observation had given the situation of the island as +between longitude 150° and 155° west, and latitude 36° and 35° south, so that, +notwithstanding the rudeness of his apparatus, Smith’s error had not been +more than five degrees. +</p> + +<p> +“Now,” said Spilett, “since, beside a sextant, we have an +atlas, see, my dear Cyrus, the exact position of Lincoln Island in the +Pacific.” +</p> + +<p> +Herbert brought the atlas, which it will be remembered gave the nomenclature in +the French language, and the volume was opened at the map of the Pacific. The +engineer, compass in hand, was about to determine their situation, when, +suddenly he paused, exclaiming:— +</p> + +<p> +“Why, there is an island marked in this part of the Pacific!” +</p> + +<p> +“An island?” cried Pencroff. +</p> + +<p> +“Doubtless it is ours.” added Spilett. +</p> + +<p> +“No.” replied Smith. “This island is situated in 153° of +longitude and 37° 11’ of latitude.” +</p> + +<p> +“And what’s the name?” asked Herbert. +</p> + +<p> +“Tabor Island.” +</p> + +<p> +“Is it important?” +</p> + +<p> +“No, it is an island lost in the Pacific, and which has never, perhaps, +been visited.” +</p> + +<p> +“Very well, we will visit it,” said Pencroff. +</p> + +<p> +“We?” +</p> + +<p> +“Yes, sir; We will build a decked boat, and I will undertake to steer +her. How far are we from this Tabor Island?” +</p> + +<p> +“A hundred and fifty miles to the northeast.” +</p> + +<p> +“Is that all?” responded Pencroff. +</p> + +<p> +“Why in forty-eight hours, with a good breeze, we will be there!” +</p> + +<p> +“But what would be the use?” asked the reporter. +</p> + +<p> +“We cannot tell till we see it!” +</p> + +<p> +And upon this response it was decided that a boat should be built so that it +might be launched by about the next October, on the return of good weather. +</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2><a name="XXXII" id="XXXII"></a>CHAPTER XXXII.</h2> + +<p class="letter"> +SHIP BUILDING—THE SECOND HARVEST—AI HUNTING—A NEW +PLANT—A WHALE—THE HARPOON FROM THE VINEYARD—CUTTING UP THIS +CETACEA—USE OF THE WHALEBONE—THE END OF MAY—PENCROFF IS +CONTENT. +</p> + +<p> +When Pencroff was possessed of an idea, he would not rest till it was executed. +Now, he wanted to visit Tabor Island, and as a boat of some size was necessary, +therefore the boat must be built. He and the engineer accordingly determined +upon the following model:— +</p> + +<p> +The boat was to measure thirty-five feet on the keel by nine feet +beam—with the lines of a racer—and to draw six feet of water, which +would be sufficient to prevent her making leeway. She was to be flush-decked, +with the two hatchways into two holds separated by a partition, and +sloop-rigged with mainsail, topsail, jib, storm-jib and brigantine, a rig +easily handled, manageable in a squall, and excellent for lying close in the +wind. Her hull was to be constructed of planks, edge to edge, that is, not +overlapping, and her timbers would be bent by steam after the planking had been +adjusted to a false frame. +</p> + +<p> +On the question of wood, whether to use elm or deal, they decided on the latter +as being easier to work, and supporting immersion in water the better. +</p> + +<p> +These details having been arranged, it was decided that, as the fine weather +would not return before six months, Smith and Pencroff should do this work +alone. Spilett and Herbert were to continue hunting, and Neb and his assistant, +Master Jup, were to attend to the domestic cares as usual. +</p> + +<p> +At once trees were selected and cut down and sawed into planks, and a week +later a ship-yard was made in the hollow between Granite House and the Cliff, +and a keel thirty-five feet long, with stern-post and stem lay upon the sand. +</p> + +<p> +Smith had not entered blindly upon this undertaking. He understood marine +construction as he did almost everything else, and he had first drawn the model +on paper. Moreover, he was well aided by Pencroff, who had worked as a +ship-carpenter. It was, therefore, only after deep thought and careful +calculation that the false frame was raised on the keel. +</p> + +<p> +Pencroff was very anxious to begin the new enterprise, and but one thing took +him away, and then only for a day, from the work. This was the second harvest, +which was made on the 15th of April. It resulted as before, and yielded the +proportion of grains calculated. +</p> + +<p> +“Five bushels, Mr. Smith,” said Pencroff, after having scrupulously +measured these riches. +</p> + +<p> +“Five bushels,” answered the engineer, “or 650,000 grains of +corn.” +</p> + +<p> +“Well, we will sow them all this time, excepting a small reserve.” +</p> + +<p> +“Yes, and if the next harvest is proportional to this we will have 4,000 +bushels.” +</p> + +<p> +“And we will eat bread.” +</p> + +<p> +“We will, indeed.” +</p> + +<p> +“But we must build a mill?” +</p> + +<p> +“We will build one.” +</p> + +<p> +The third field of corn, though incomparably larger than the others, was +prepared with great care and received the precious seed. Then Pencroff returned +to his work. +</p> + +<p> +In the meantime, Spilett and Herbert hunted in the neighborhood, or with their +guns loaded with ball, adventured into the unexplored depths of the Far West. +It was an inextricable tangle of great trees growing close together. The +exploration of those thick masses was very difficult and the engineer never +undertook it without taking with him the pocket compass, as the sun was rarely +visible through the leaves. Naturally, game was not plenty in these thick +undergrowths, but three ai were shot during the last fortnight in April, and +their skins were taken to Granite House, where they received a sort of tanning +with sulfuric acid. +</p> + +<p> +On the 30th of April, a discovery, valuable for another reason, was made by +Spilett. The two hunters were deep in the south-western part of the Far West +when the reporter, walking some fifty paces ahead of his companion, came to a +sort of glade, and was surprised to perceive an odor proceeding from certain +straight stemmed plants, cylindrical and branching, and bearing bunches of +flowers and tiny seeds. The reporter broke off some of these stems, and, +returning to the lad, asked him if he knew what they were. +</p> + +<p> +“Where did you find this plant?” asked Herbert. +</p> + +<p> +“Over there in the glade; there is plenty of it.” +</p> + +<p> +“Well, this is a discovery that gives you Pencroff’s everlasting +gratitude.” +</p> + +<p> +“Is it tobacco?” +</p> + +<p> +“Yes, and if it is not first quality it is all the same, tobacco.” +</p> + +<p> +“Good Pencroff, how happy he’ll be. But he cannot smoke all. +He’ll have to leave some for us.” +</p> + +<p> +“I’ll tell you what, sir. Let us say nothing to Pencroff until the +tobacco has been prepared, and then some fine day we will hand him a pipe +full.” +</p> + +<p> +“And you may be sure, Herbert, that on that day the good fellow will want +nothing else in the world.” +</p> + +<p> +The two smuggled a good supply of the plant into Granite House with as much +precaution as if Pencroff had been the strictest of custom house officers. +Smith and Neb were let into the secret, but Pencroff never suspected any thing +during the two months it took to prepare the leaves, as he was occupied all day +at the ship-yard. +</p> + +<p> +On the 1st of May the sailor was again interrupted at his favorite work by a +fishing adventure, in which all the colonists took part. +</p> + +<p> +For some days they had noticed an enormous animal swimming in the sea some two +or three miles distant from the shore. It was a huge whale, apparently +belonging to the species <i>australis</i>, called “cape whales.” +</p> + +<p> +“How lucky for us if we could capture it!” cried the sailor. +“Oh, if we only had a suitable boat and a harpoon ready, so that I could +say:—Let’s go for him! For he’s worth all the trouble +he’ll give us!” +</p> + +<p> +“Well, Pencroff, I should like to see you manage a harpoon. It must be +interesting.” +</p> + +<p> +“Interesting and somewhat dangerous,” said the engineer, “but +since we have not the means to attack this animal, it is useless to think about +him.” +</p> + +<p> +“I am astonished to see a whale in such comparatively high +latitude.” +</p> + +<p> +“Why, Mr. Spilett, we are in that very part of the Pacific which whalers +call the ‘whale-field,’ and just here whales are found in the +greatest number.” +</p> + +<p> +“That is so,” said Pencroff, “and I wonder we have not seen +one before, but it don’t matter much since we cannot go to it.” +</p> + +<p> +And the sailor turned with a sigh to his work, as all sailors are fishermen; +and if the sport is proportionate to the size of the game, one can imagine what +a whaler must feel in the presence of a whale. But, aside from the sport, such +spoil would have been very acceptable to the colony, as the oil, the fat, and +the fins could be turned to various uses. +</p> + +<p> +It appeared as if the animal did not wish to leave these waters. He kept +swimming about in Union Bay for two days, now approaching the shore, when his +black body could be seen perfectly, and again darting through the water or +spouting vapor to a vast height in the air. Its presence continually engaged +the thoughts of the colonists, and Pencroff was like a child longing for some +forbidden object. +</p> + +<p> +Fortune, however, did for the colonists what they could not have done for +themselves, and on the 3d of May, Neb looking from his kitchen shouted that the +whale was aground on the island. +</p> + +<p> +Herbert and Spilett, who were about starting on a hunt, laid aside their guns, +Pencroff dropped his hatchet, and Smith and Neb, joining their companions, +hurried down to the shore. It had grounded on Jetsam Point at high water, and +it was not likely that the monster would be able to get off easily; but they +must hasten in order to cut off its retreat if necessary. So seizing some picks +and spears they ran across the bridge, down the Mercy and along the shore, and +in less than twenty minutes the party were beside the huge animal, above whom +myriads of birds were already hovering. +</p> + +<p> +“What a monster!” exclaimed Neb. +</p> + +<p> +And the term was proper, as it was one of the largest of the southern whales, +measuring forty-five feet in length and weighing not less than 150,000 pounds. +</p> + +<p> +Meantime the animal, although the tide was still high, made no effort to get +off the shore, and the reason for this was explained later when at low water +the colonists walked around its body. +</p> + +<p> +It was dead, and a harpoon protruded from its left flank. +</p> + +<p> +“Are there whalers in our neighborhood?” asked Spilett. +</p> + +<p> +“Why do you ask?” +</p> + +<p> +“Since the harpoon is still there—” +</p> + +<p> +“Oh that proves nothing, sir,” said Pencroff. “Whales +sometimes go thousands of miles with a harpoon in them, and I should not be +surprised if this one which came to die here had been struck in the North +Atlantic.” +</p> + +<p> +“Nevertheless”—began Spilett, not satisfied with +Pencroff’s affirmation. +</p> + +<p> +“It is perfectly possible,” responded the engineer, “but let +us look at the harpoon. Probably it will have the name of the ship on +it.” +</p> + +<p> +Pencroff drew out the harpoon, and read this inscription:— +</p> + +<p class="center"> +Maria-Stella Vineyard. +</p> + +<p> +“A ship from the Vineyard! A ship of my country!” be cried. +“The Maria-Stella! a good whaler! and I know her well! Oh, my friends, a +ship from the Vineyard! A whaler from the Vineyard!” +</p> + +<p> +And the sailor, brandishing the harpoon, continued to repeat that name dear to +his heart, the name of his birthplace. +</p> + +<p> +But as they could not wait for the Maria-Stella to come and reclaim their +prize, the colonists resolved to cut it up before decomposition set in. The +birds of prey were already anxious to become possessors of the spoil, and it +was necessary to drive them away with gunshots. +</p> + +<p> +The whale was a female, and her udders furnished a great quantity of milk, +which, according to Dieffenbach, resembles in taste, color, and density, the +milk of cows. +</p> + +<p> +As Pencroff had served on a whaler he was able to direct the disagreeable work +of cutting up the animal—an operation which lasted during three days. The +blubber, cut in strips two feet and a half thick and divided into pieces +weighing a thousand pounds each, was melted down in large earthen vats, which +had been brought on to the ground. And such was its abundance, that +notwithstanding a third of its weight was lost by melting, the tongue alone +yielded 6,000 pounds of oil. The colonists were therefore supplied with an +abundant supply of stearine and glycerine, and there was, besides, the +whalebone, which would find its use, although there were neither umbrellas nor +corsets in Granite House. +</p> + +<p> +The operation ended, to the great satisfaction of the colonists, the rest of +the animal was left to the birds, who made away with it to the last vestiges, +and the daily routine of work was resumed. Still, before going to the +ship-yard, Smith worked on certain affairs which excited the curiosity of his +companions. He took a dozen of the plates of baleen (the solid whalebone), +which he cut into six equal lengths, sharpened at the ends. +</p> + +<p> +“And what is that for?” asked Herbert, when they were finished. +</p> + +<p> +“To kill foxes, wolves, and jaguars,” answered the engineer. +</p> + +<p> +“Now?” +</p> + +<p> +“No, but this winter, when we have the ice.” +</p> + +<p> +“I don’t understand,” answered Herbert. +</p> + +<p> +“You shall understand, my lad,” answered the engineer. “This +is not my invention; it is frequently employed by the inhabitants of the +Aleutian islands. These whalebones which you see, when the weather is freezing +I will bend round and freeze in that position with a coating of ice; then +having covered them with a bit of fat, I will place them in the snow. Supposing +a hungry animal swallows one of these baits? The warmth will thaw the ice, and +the whalebone, springing back, will pierce the stomach.” +</p> + +<p> +“That is ingenious!” said Pencroff. +</p> + +<p> +“And it will save powder and ball,” said Smith. +</p> + +<p> +“It will be better than the traps.” +</p> + +<p> +“Just wait till winter comes.” +</p> + +<p> +The ship-building continued, and towards the end of the month the little vessel +was half-finished. Pencroff worked almost too hard, but his companions were +secretly preparing a recompense for all his toil, and the 31st of May was +destined to be one of the happiest times in his life. +</p> + +<p> +After dinner on that day, just as he was leaving table, Pencroff felt a hand on +his shoulder and heard Spilett saying to him:— +</p> + +<p> +“Don’t go yet awhile, Pencroff. You forget the dessert.” +</p> + +<p> +“Thank you, Spilett, but I must get back to work.” +</p> + +<p> +“Oh, well, have a cup of coffee.” +</p> + +<p> +“Not any.” +</p> + +<p> +“Well, then, a pipe?” +</p> + +<p> +Pencroff started up quickly, and when he saw the reporter holding him a pipe +full of tobacco, and Herbert with a light, his honest, homely face grew pale, +and he could not say a word; but taking the pipe, he placed it to his lips, lit +it, and drew five or six long puffs, one after the other. +</p> + +<p> +A fragrant, blueish-colored smoke filled the air, and from the depths of this +cloud came a voice, delirious with joy, repeating, +</p> + +<p> +“Tobacco! real tobacco!” +</p> + +<p> +“Yes, Pencroff,” answered Smith, “and good tobacco at +that.” +</p> + +<p> +“Heaven be praised!” ejaculated the sailor. “Nothing now is +wanting in our island. And he puffed and puffed and puffed. +</p> + +<p> +“Who found it?” he asked, at length. “It was you, Herbert, I +suppose?” +</p> + +<p> +“No, Pencroff, it was Mr. Spilett.” +</p> + +<p> +“Mr. Spilett!” cried the sailor, hugging the reporter, who had +never been treated that way before. +</p> + +<p> +“Yes, Pencroff,”—taking advantage of a cessation in the +embrace to get his breath—“But include in your thanksgiving +Herbert, who recognized the plant, Mr. Smith, who prepared it, and Neb, who has +found it hard to keep the secret.” +</p> + +<p> +“Well, my friends, I will repay you for this some day! Meanwhile I am +eternally grateful!.” +</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2><a name="XXXIII" id="XXXIII"></a>CHAPTER XXXIII</h2> + +<p class="letter"> +WINTER—FULLING CLOTH—THE MILL —PENCROFF’S FIXED +PURPOSE—THE WHALEBONES—THE USE OF AN ALBATROSS —TOP AND +JUP—STORMS—DAMAGE TO THE POULTRY-YARD—AN EXCURSION TO THE +MARSH—SMITH ALONE—EXPLORATION OF THE PITS. +</p> + +<p> +Winter came with June, and the principal work was the making of strong warm +clothing. The moufflons had been clipped, and the question was how to transform +the wool into cloth. +</p> + +<p> +Smith, not having any mill machinery, was obliged to proceed in the simplest +manner, in order to economize the spinning and weaving. Therefore he proposed +to make use of the property possessed by the filaments of wool of binding +themselves together under pressure, and making by their mere entanglement the +substance known as felt. This felt can be obtained by a simple fulling, an +operation which, while it diminishes the suppleness of the stuff, greatly +augments its heat-preserving qualities; and as the moufflons’ wool was +very short it was in good condition for felting. +</p> + +<p> +The engineer, assisted by his companions, including Pencroff—who had to +leave his ship again—cleansed the wool of the grease and oil by soaking +it in warm water and washing it with soda, and, when it was partially dried by +pressure it was in a condition to be milled, that is, to produce a solid stuff, +too coarse to be of any value in the industrial centres of Europe, but valuable +enough in the Lincoln Island market. +</p> + +<p> +The engineer’s professional knowledge was of great service in +constructing the machine destined to mill the wool, as he knew how to make +ready use of the power, unemployed up to this time, in the water-fall at the +cliff, to move a fulling mill. +</p> + +<p> +Its construction was most simple. A tree furnished with cams, which raised and +dropped the vertical millers, troughs for the wool, into which the millers +fell, a strong wooden building containing and sustaining the contrivance, such +was the machine in question. +</p> + +<p> +The work, superintended by Smith, resulted admirably. The wool, previously +impregnated with a soapy solution, came from the mill in the shape of a thick +felt cloth. The striæ and roughnesses of the material had caught and blended +together so thoroughly that they formed a stuff equally suitable for cloths or +coverings. It was not, indeed, one of the stuffs of commerce, but it was +“Lincoln felt,” and the island had one more industry. +</p> + +<p> +The colonists, being thus provided with good clothes and warm bed-clothing, saw +the winter of 1866-67 approach without any dread. The cold really began to be +felt on the 20th of June, and, to his great regret, Pencroff was obliged to +suspend work on his vessel, although it would certainly be finished by the next +spring. +</p> + +<p> +The fixed purpose of the sailor was to make a voyage of discovery to Tabor +Island, although Smith did not approve of this voyage of simple curiosity, as +there was evidently no succor to be obtained from that desert and half arid +rock. A voyage of 150 miles in a boat, comparatively small, in the midst of +unknown seas, was cause for considerable anxiety. If the frail craft, once at +sea, should be unable to reach Tabor Island, or to return to Lincoln Island, +what would become of her in the midst of this ocean so fertile in disasters? +</p> + +<p> +Smith often talked of this project with Pencroff, and he found in the sailor a +strange obstinacy to make the voyage, an obstinacy for which Pencroff himself +could not account. +</p> + +<p> +“Well,” said the engineer one day, “you must see, Pencroff, +after having said every good of Lincoln Island, and expressing the regret you +would feel should you have to leave it, that you are the first to want to get +away.” +</p> + +<p> +“Only for a day or two,” answered Pencroff, “for a few days, +Mr. Smith; just long enough to go and return, and see what this island +is.” +</p> + +<p> +“But it cannot compare with ours.” +</p> + +<p> +“I know that.”” +</p> + +<p> +“Then why go?” +</p> + +<p> +“To find out what’s going on there!” +</p> + +<p> +“But there is nothing; there can be nothing there.” +</p> + +<p> +“Who knows?” +</p> + +<p> +“And supposing you are caught in a storm?” +</p> + +<p> +“That is not likely in that season,” replied Pencroff. “But, +sir, as it is necessary to foresee everything, I want your permission to take +Herbert with me.” +</p> + +<p> +“Pencroff,” said the engineer, laying his hand on the shoulder of +the sailor, “If anything should happen to you and this child, whom chance +has made our son, do you think that we would ever forgive ourselves?” +</p> + +<p> +“Mr. Smith,” responded Pencroff with unshaken confidence, “we +won’t discuss such mishaps. But we will talk again of this voyage when +the time comes. Then, I think, when you have seen our boat well rigged, when +you have seen how well she behaves at sea, when you have made the tour of the +island—as we will, together—I think, I say, that you will not +hesitate to let me go. I do not conceal from you that this will be a fine work, +your ship.” +</p> + +<p> +“Say rather, our ship, Pencroff,” replied the engineer, momentarily +disarmed. And the conversation, to be renewed later, ended without convincing +either of the speakers. +</p> + +<p> +The first snow fell towards the end of the month. The corral had been well +provisioned, and there was no further necessity for daily visits, but it was +decided to go there at least once a week. The traps were set again, and the +contrivances of Smith were tried, and worked perfectly. The bent whalebones, +frozen, and covered with fat, were placed near the edge of the forest, at a +place frequented by animals, and some dozen foxes, some wild boars, and a +jaguar were found killed by this means, their stomachs perforated by the +straightened whalebones. +</p> + +<p> +At this time, an experiment, thought of by the reporter, was made. It was the +first attempt of the colonists to communicate with their kindred. +</p> + +<p> +Spilett had already often thought of throwing a bottle containing a writing +into the sea, to be carried by the currents, perhaps, to some inhabited coast, +or to make use of the pigeons. But it was pure folly to seriously believe that +pigeons or bottles could cross the 1,200 miles separating the island from all +lands.— +</p> + +<p> +But on the 30th of June they captured, not without difficulty, an albatross, +which Herbert had slightly wounded in the foot. It was a splendid specimen of +its kind, its wings measuring ten feet from tip to tip, and it could cross seas +as vast as the Pacific. +</p> + +<p> +Herbert would have liked to have kept the bird and tamed it, but Spilett made +him understand that they could not afford to neglect this chance of +corresponding by means of this courier with the Pacific coasts. So Herbert gave +up the bird, as, if it had come from some inhabited region, it was likely to +return there if at liberty. +</p> + +<p> +Perhaps, in his heart, Spilett, to whom the journalistic spirit returned +sometimes, did not regret giving to the winds an interesting article relating +the adventures of the colonists of Lincoln Island. What a triumph for the +reporters of the New York <i>Herald</i>, and for the issue containing the +chronicle, if ever the latter should reach his director, the honorable John +Bennett! +</p> + +<p> +Spilett, therefore, wrote out a succinct article, which was enclosed in a +waterproof-cloth bag, with the request to whoever found it to send it to one of +the offices of the <i>Herald</i>. This little bag was fastened around the neck +of the albatross and the bird given its freedom, and it was not without emotion +that the colonists saw this rapid courier of the air disappear in the western +clouds. +</p> + +<p> +“Where does he go that way?” asked Pencroff. +</p> + +<p> +“Towards New Zealand,” answered Herbert. +</p> + +<p> +“May he have a good voyage,” said the sailor, who did not expect +much from this method of communication. +</p> + +<p> +With the winter, in-door work was resumed; old clothes were repaired, new +garments made, and the sails of the sloop made from the inexhaustible envelope +of the balloon. During July the cold was intense, but coal and wood were +abundant, and Smith had built another chimney in the great hall, where they +passed the long evenings. It was a great comfort to the colonists, when, seated +in this well-lighted and warm hall, a good dinner finished, coffee steaming in +the cups, the pipes emitting a fragrant smoke, they listened to the roar of the +tempest without. They were perfectly comfortable, if that is possible where one +is far from his kindred and without possible means of communicating with them. +They talked about their country, of their friends at home, of the grandeur of +the republic, whose influence must increase; and Smith, who had had much to do +with the affairs of the Union, entertained his hearers with his stories, his +perceptions and his prophecies. +</p> + +<p> +One evening as they had been sitting talking in this way for some time, they +were interrupted by Top, who began barking in that peculiar way which had +previously attracted the attention of the engineer, and running around the +mouth of the well which opened at the end of the inner corridor. +</p> + +<p> +“Why is Top barking that way again?” asked Pencroff. +</p> + +<p> +“And Jup growling so?” added Herbert. +</p> + +<p> +Indeed, both the dog and the orang gave unequivocal signs of agitation, and +curiously enough these two animals seemed to be more alarmed than irritated. +</p> + +<p> +It is evident,” said Spilett, “that this well communicates directly +with the sea, and that some animal comes to breathe in its depths.” +</p> + +<p> +“It must be so, since there is no other explanation to give. Be quiet, +Top! and you, Jup! go to your room.” +</p> + +<p> +The animals turned away, Jup went to his bed, but Top remained in the hall, and +continued whining the remainder of the evening. It was not, however, the +question of this incident that darkened the countenance of the engineer. +</p> + +<p> +During the remainder of the month, rain and snow alternated, and though the +temperature was not as low as during the preceding winter, there were more +storms and gales. On more than one occasion the Chimneys had been threatened by +the waves, and it seemed as if an upraising of the sea, caused by some +submarine convulsion, raised the monstrous billows and hurled them against +Granite House. +</p> + +<p> +During these storms it was difficult, even dangerous, to attempt using the +roads on the island, as the trees were falling constantly. Nevertheless, the +colonists never let a week pass without visiting the corral, and happily this +enclosure, protected by the spur of the mountain, did not suffer from the +storms. But the poultry-yard, from its position, exposed to the blast, suffered +considerable damage. Twice the pigeon-house was unroofed, and the fence also +was demolished, making it necessary to rebuild it more solidly. It was evident +that Lincoln Island was situated in the worst part of the Pacific. Indeed, it +seemed as if the island formed the central point of vast cyclones which whipped +it as if it were a top; only in this case the top was immovable and the whip +spun about. +</p> + +<p> +During the first week in August the storm abated, and the atmosphere recovered +a calm which it seemed never to have lost. With the calm the temperature +lowered, and the thermometer of the colonists indicated 8° below zero. +</p> + +<p> +On the 3d of August, an excursion, which had been planned for some time was +made to Tadorn’s Fen. The hunters were tempted by the great number of +aquatic birds which made these marshes their home, and not only Spilett and +Herbert, but Pencroff and Neb took part in the expedition. Smith alone pleaded +some excuse for remaining behind at Granite House. +</p> + +<p> +The hunters promised to return by evening. Top and Jup accompanied them. And +when they had crossed the bridge over the Mercy the engineer left them, and +returned with the idea of executing a project in which he wished to be alone. +This was to explore minutely the well opening into the corridor. +</p> + +<p> +Why did Top run round this place so often? Why did he whine in that strange +way? Why did Jup share Top’s anxiety? Had this well other branches beside +the communication with the sea? Did it ramify towards other portions of the +island? This is what Smith wanted to discover, and, moreover, to be alone in +his discovery. He had resolved to make this exploration during the absence of +his companions, and here was the opportunity. +</p> + +<p> +It was easy to descend to the bottom of the well by means of the ladder, which +had not been used since the elevator had taken its place. The engineer dragged +this ladder to the opening of the well, and, having made fast one end, let it +unroll itself into the abyss. Then, having lit a lantern, and placing a +revolver and cutlass in his belt, he began to descend the rungs. The sides of +the well were smooth, but some projections of rocks appeared at intervals, and +by means of these projections an athlete could have raised himself to the mouth +of the well. The engineer noticed this, but in throwing the light of the +lantern on these points he could discover nothing to indicate that they had +ever been used in that way. +</p> + +<p> +Smith descended deeper, examining every part of the well, but he saw nothing +suspicious. When he had reached the lowermost rung, he was at the surface of +the water, which was perfectly calm. Neither there, nor in any other part of +the well, was there any lateral opening. The wall, struck by the handle of +Smith’s cutlass, sounded solid. It was a compact mass, through which no +human being could make his way. In order to reach the bottom of the well, and +from thence climb to its mouth, it was necessary to traverse the submerged +passage under the shore, which connected with the sea, and this was only +possible for marine animals. As to knowing whereabouts on the shore, and at +what depth under the waves, this passage came out, that was impossible to +discover. +</p> + +<p> +Smith, having ended his exploration, remounted the ladder, covered over again +the mouth of the well, and returned thoughtfully to the great hall of Granite +House, saying to himself:— +</p> + +<p> +“I have seen nothing, and yet, there is something there.” +</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2><a name="XXXIV" id="XXXIV"></a>CHAPTER XXXIV.</h2> + +<p class="letter"> +RIGGING THE LAUNCH—ATTACKED BY FOXES—JUP WOUNDED—JUP +NURSED—JUP CURED—COMPLETION OF THE LAUNCH—PENCROFF’S +TRIUMPH—THE GOOD LUCK—TRIAL TRIP, TO THE SOUTH OF THE +ISLAND—AN UNEXPECTED DOCUMENT. +</p> + +<p> +The same evening the hunters returned, fairly loaded down with game, the four +men having all they could carry. Top had a circlet of ducks round his neck, and +Jup belts of woodcock round his body. +</p> + +<p> +“See, my master,” cried Neb, “see how we have used our time. +Preserves, pies, we will have a good reserve! But some one must help me, and I +count upon you, Pencroff.” +</p> + +<p> +“No, Neb,” responded the sailor, “the rigging of the launch +occupies my time, and you will have to do without me.” +</p> + +<p> +“And you, Master Herbert?” +</p> + +<p> +“I, Neb, must go to-morrow to the corral.” +</p> + +<p> +“Then will you help me, Mr. Spilett?” +</p> + +<p> +“To oblige you, I will, Neb,” answered the reporter, “but I +warn you that if you discover your recipes to me I will publish them.” +</p> + +<p> +“Whenever you choose, sir,” responded Neb; “whenever you +choose.” +</p> + +<p> +And so the next day the reporter was installed as Neb’s aid in his +culinary laboratory. But beforehand the engineer had given him the result of +the previous day’s exploration, and Spilett agreed with Smith in his +opinion that, although he had found out nothing, still there was a secret to be +discovered. +</p> + +<p> +The cold continued a week longer, and the colonists did not leave Granite House +excepting to look after the poultry-yard. The dwelling was perfumed by the good +odors which the learned manipulations of Neb and the reporter emitted; but all +the products of the hunt in the fen had not been made into preserves, and as +the game kept perfectly in the intense cold, wild ducks and others, were eaten +fresh, and declared better than any waterfowl in the world. +</p> + +<p> +During the week, Pencroff, assisted by Herbert, who used the sailor’s +needle skilfully, worked with such diligence that the sails of the launch were +finished. Thanks to the rigging which had been recovered with the envelope of +the balloon, hemp cordage was not wanting. The sails were bordered by strong +bolt-ropes, and there was enough left to make halliards, shrouds, and sheets. +The pulleys were made by Smith on the lathe which he had set up, acting under +Pencroff’s instruction. The rigging was, therefore, completed before the +launch was finished. Pencroff made a red, white, and blue flag, getting the dye +from certain plants; but to the thirty-seven stars representing the +thirty-seven States of the Union, the sailor added another star, the star of +the “State of Lincoln:” as he considered his island as already +annexed to the great republic. +</p> + +<p> +“And,” said he, “it is in spirit, if it is not in +fact!” +</p> + +<p> +For the present the flag was unfurled from the central window of Granite House +and saluted with three cheers. +</p> + +<p> +Meantime, they had reached the end of the cold season; and it seemed as if this +second winter would pass without any serious event, when during the night of +the 11th of August, Prospect Plateau was menaced by a complete devastation. +After a busy day the colonists were sleeping soundly, when towards 4 +o’clock in the morning, they were suddenly awakened by Top’s +barking. The dog did not bark this time at the mouth of the pit, but at the +door, and he threw himself against it as if he wished to break it open. Jup, +also, uttered sharp cries. +</p> + +<p> +“Be quiet, Top!” cried Neb, who was the first awake. +</p> + +<p> +But the dog only barked the louder. +</p> + +<p> +“What’s the matter?” cried Smith. And every one dressing in +haste, hurried to the windows and opened them. +</p> + +<p> +“Beneath them a fall of snow shone white through the darkness. The +colonists could see nothing, but they heard curious barkings penetrating the +night. It was evident that the shore had been invaded by a number of animals +which they could not see.” +</p> + +<p> +“What can they be?” cried Pencroff. +</p> + +<p> +“Wolves, jaguars, or monkeys!” replied Neb. +</p> + +<p> +“The mischief! They can get on to the plateau!” exclaimed the +reporter. +</p> + +<p> +“And our poultry-yard, and our garden!” cried Herbert. +</p> + +<p> +“How have they got in?” asked Pencroff. +</p> + +<p> +“They have come through the causeway,” answered the engineer, +“which one of us must have forgotten to close!” +</p> + +<p> +“In truth,” said Spilett, “I remember that I left it +open—” +</p> + +<p> +“A nice mess you have made of it, sir!” cried the sailor. +</p> + +<p> +“What is done, is done,” replied Spilett. “Let us consider +what it is necessary to do!” +</p> + +<p> +These questions and answers passed rapidly between Smith and his companions. It +was certain that the causeway had been passed, that the shore had been invaded +by animals, and that, whatever they were, they could gain Prospect Plateau by +going up the left bank of the Mercy. It was, therefore, necessary quickly to +overtake them, and, if necessary, to fight them! +</p> + +<p> +“But what are they?” somebody asked a second time, as the barking +resounded more loudly. +</p> + +<p> +Herbert started at the sound, and he remembered having heard it during his +first visit to the sources of Red Creek. +</p> + +<p> +“They are foxes! they are foxes!” he said. +</p> + +<p> +“Come on!” cried the sailor. And all, armed with hatchets, +carbines, and revolvers, hurried into the elevator, and were soon on the shore. +</p> + +<p> +These foxes are dangerous animals, when numerous or irritated by hunger. +Nevertheless, the colonists did not hesitate to throw themselves into the midst +of the band, and their first shots, darting bright gleams through the darkness, +drove back the foremost assailants. +</p> + +<p> +It was most important to prevent these thieves from gaining Prospect Plateau, +as the garden and the poultry-yard would have been at their mercy, and the +result would have been immense, perhaps, irreparable damage, especially to the +corn-field. But as the plateau could only be invaded by the left bank of the +Mercy, it would suffice to oppose a barrier to the foxes on the narrow portion +of the shore comprised between the river and the granite wall. +</p> + +<p> +This was apparent to all, and under Smith’s direction the party gained +this position and disposed themselves so as to form an impassable line. Top, +his formidable jaws open, preceded the colonists, and was followed by Jup, +armed with a knotty cudgel, which he brandished like a cricket-bat. +</p> + +<p> +The night was very dark, and it was only by the flash of the discharges that +the colonists could perceive their assailants, who numbered at least 100, and +whose eyes shone like embers. +</p> + +<p> +“They must not pass!” cried Pencroff. +</p> + +<p> +“They shall not pass!” answered the engineer. +</p> + +<p> +But if they did not it was not because they did not try. Those behind kept +pushing on those in front, and it was an incessant struggle; the colonists +using their hatchets and revolvers. Already the dead bodies of the foxes were +strewn over the ground, but the band did not seem to lessen; and it appeared as +if reinforcements were constantly pouring in through the causeway on the shore. +Meantime the colonists fought side by side, receiving some wounds, though +happily but trifling. Herbert shot one fox, which had fastened itself on Neb +like a tiger-cat. Top fought with fury, springing at the throats of the animals +and strangling them at once. Jup, armed with his cudgel, laid about him like a +good fellow, and it was useless to try to make him stay behind. Gifted, +doubtless, with a sight able to pierce the darkness, he was always in the thick +of the fight, uttering from time to time a sharp cry, which was with him a mark +of extreme jollification. At one time he advanced so far, that by the flash of +a revolver he was seen, surrounded by five or six huge foxes, defending himself +with rare coolness. +</p> + +<p> +At length the fight ended in a victory for the colonists, but only after two +hours of resistance. Doubtless the dawn of day determined the retreat of the +foxes, who scampered off toward the north across the drawbridge, which Neb ran +at once to raise. When daylight lit the battlefield, the colonists counted +fifty dead bodies upon the shore. +</p> + +<p> +“And Jup! Where is Jup?” cried Neb. +</p> + +<p> +Jup had disappeared. His friend Neb called him, and for the first time he did +not answer the call. Every one began to search for the monkey, trembling lest +they should find him among the dead. At length, under a veritable mound of +carcasses, each one marked by the terrible cudgel of the brave animal, they +found Jup. The poor fellow still held in his hand the handle of his broken +weapon; but deprived of this arm, he had been overpowered by numbers, and deep +wounds scored his breast. +</p> + +<p> +“He’s alive!” cried Neb, who knelt beside him. +</p> + +<p> +“And we will save him,” answered the sailor, “We will nurse +him as one of ourselves!” +</p> + +<p> +It seemed as if Jup understood what was said, for he laid his head on +Pencroff’s shoulder as if to thank him. The sailor himself was wounded, +but his wounds, like those of his companions, were trifling, as thanks to their +firearms, they had always been able to keep the assailants at a distance. Only +the orang was seriously hurt. +</p> + +<p> +Jup, borne by Neb and Pencroff, was carried to the elevator, and lifted gently +to Granite House. There he was laid upon one of the beds, and his wounds +carefully washed. No vital organ seemed to have been injured, but the orang was +very feeble from loss of blood, and a strong fever had set in. His wounds +having been dressed, a strict diet was imposed upon him, “just as for a +real person,” Neb said, and they gave him a refreshing draught made from +herbs. +</p> + +<p> +He slept at first but brokenly, but little by little, his breathing became more +regular, and they left him in a heavy sleep. From time to time Top came +“on tip-toe” to visit his friend, and seemed to approve of the +attentions which had been bestowed upon it. +</p> + +<p> +One of Jup’s hands hung over the side of the bed, and Top licked it +sympathetically. +</p> + +<p> +The same morning they disposed of the dead foxes by dragging the bodies to the +Far West and burying them there. +</p> + +<p> +This attack, which might have been attended with very grave results, was a +lesson to the colonists, and thenceforth they never slept before having +ascertained that all the bridges were raised and that no invasion was possible. +</p> + +<p> +Meantime Jup, after having given serious alarm for some days, began to grow +better. The fever abated gradually, and Spilett, who was something of a +physician, considered him out of danger. On the 16th of August Jup began to +eat. Neb made him some nice, sweet dishes, which the invalid swallowed +greedily, for if he had a fault, it was that he was a bit of a glutton, and Neb +had never done anything to correct this habit. +</p> + +<p> +“What would you have?” he said to Spilett, who sometimes rebuked +the negro for indulging him. “Poor Jup has no other pleasure than to eat! +and I am only too glad to be able to reward his services in this way!” +</p> + +<p> +By the 21st of August he was about again. His wounds were healed, and the +colonists saw that he would soon recover his accustomed suppleness and vigor. +Like other convalescents he was seized with an excessive hunger, and the +reporter let him eat what he wished, knowing that the monkey’s instinct +would preserve him from excess. Neb was overjoyed to see his pupil’s +appetite returned. +</p> + +<p> +“Eat Jup,” he said, “and you shall want for nothing. You have +shed your blood for us, and it is right that I should help you to make it +again!” +</p> + +<p> +At length, on the 25th of August, the colonists seated in the great hall, were +called by Neb to Jup’s room. +</p> + +<p> +“What is it?” asked the reporter. +</p> + +<p> +“Look!” answered Neb, laughing, and what did they see but Jup, +seated like a Turk within the doorway of Granite House, tranquilly and gravely +smoking! +</p> + +<p> +“My pipe!” cried Pencroff. “He has taken my pipe! Well, Jup, +I give it to you. Smoke on my friend, smoke on!” +</p> + +<p> +And Jup gravely puffed on, seeming to experience the utmost enjoyment. +</p> + +<p> +Smith was not greatly astonished at this incident, and he cited numerous +examples of tamed monkeys that had become accustomed to the use of tobacco. +</p> + +<p> +And after this day master Jup had his own pipe hung in his room beside his +tobacco-bag, and, lighting it himself with a live coal, he appeared to be the +happiest of quadrumana. It seemed as if this community of taste drew closer +together the bonds of friendship already existing between the worthy monkey and +the honest sailor. +</p> + +<p> +“Perhaps he is a man,” Pencroff would sometimes say to Neb. +“Would it astonish you if some day he was to speak?” +</p> + +<p> +“Indeed it would not,” replied Neb. “The wonder is that he +don’t do it, as that is all he lacks!” +</p> + +<p> +“Nevertheless, it would be funny if some fine day he said to +me:—Pencroff, suppose we change pipes!” +</p> + +<p> +“Yes,” responded Neb. “What a pity he was born mute!” +</p> + +<p> +Winter ended with September, and the work was renewed with ardor. The +construction of the boat advanced rapidly. The planking was completed, and as +wood was plenty Pencroff proposed that they line the interior with a stout +ceiling, which would insure the solidity of the craft. Smith, not knowing what +might be in store for them, approved the sailor’s idea of making his boat +as strong as possible. The ceiling and the deck were finished towards the 13th +of September. For caulking, they used some dry wrack, and the seams were then +covered with boiling pitch, made from the pine trees of the forest. +</p> + +<p> +The arrangement of the boat was simple. She had been ballasted with heavy +pieces of granite, set in a bed of lime, and weighing 12,000 pounds. A deck was +placed over this ballast, and the interior was divided into two compartments, +the larger containing two bunks, which served as chests. The foot of the mast +was at the partition separating the compartments, which were entered through +hatchways. +</p> + +<p> +Pencroff had no difficulty in finding a tree suitable for a mast. He chose a +young straight fir, without knots, so that all he had to do was to square the +foot and round it off at the head. All the iron work had been roughly but +solidly made at the Chimneys; and in the first week of October yards, topmast, +spars, oars, etc., everything, in short, was completed; and it was determined +that they would first try the craft along the shores of the island, so as to +see how she acted. +</p> + +<p> +She was launched on the 10th of October. Pencroff was radiant with delight. +Completely rigged, she had been pushed on rollers to the edge of the shore, +and, as the tide rose, she was floated on the surface of the water, amid the +applause of the colonists, and especially of Pencroff, who showed no modesty on +this occasion. Moreover, his vanity looked beyond the completion of the craft, +as, now that she was built, he was to be her commander. The title of captain +was bestowed upon him unanimously. +</p> + +<p> +In order to satisfy Captain Pencroff it was necessary at once to name his ship, +and after considerable discussion they decided upon Good Luck—the name +chosen by the honest sailor. Moreover, as the weather was fine, the breeze +fresh, and the sea calm, the trial must be made at once in an excursion along +the coast. +</p> + +<p> +“Get aboard! Get aboard!” cried Captain Pencroff. +</p> + +<p> +At half-past 10, after having eaten breakfast and put some provisions aboard, +everybody, including Top and Jup, embarked, the sails were hoisted, the flag +set at the masthead, and the Good Luck, with Pencroff at the helm, stood out to +sea. +</p> + +<p> +On going out from Union Bay they had a fair wind, and they were able to see +that, sailing before it, their speed was excellent. After doubling Jetsam Point +and Claw Cape, Pencroff had to lie close to the wind in order to skirt along +the shore, and he observed the Good Luck would sail to within five points of +the wind, and that she made but little lee-way. She sailed very well, also, +before the wind, minding her helm perfectly, and gained even in going about. +</p> + +<p> +The passengers were enchanted. They had a good boat, which, in case of need, +could render them great service, and in this splendid weather, with the fair +wind, the sail was delightful. Pencroff stood out to sea two or three miles, +opposite Balloon Harbor, and then the whole varied panorama of the island from +Claw Cape to Reptile Promontory was visible under a new aspect. In the +foreground were the pine forests, contrasting with the foliage of the other +trees, and over all rose Mt. Franklin, its head white with snow. +</p> + +<p> +“How beautiful it is!” exclaimed Herbert. +</p> + +<p> +“Yes, she is a pretty creature,” responded Pencroff. “I love +her as a mother. She received us poor and needy, and what has she denied to +these five children who tumbled upon her out of the sky?” +</p> + +<p> +“Nothing, captain, nothing,” answered Neb. And the two honest +fellows gave three hearty cheers in honor of their island. +</p> + +<p> +Meantime, Spilett, seated by the mast, sketched the panorama before him, while +Smith looked on in silence. +</p> + +<p> +“What do you say of our boat, now, sir?” demanded Pencroff. +</p> + +<p> +“It acts very well,” replied the engineer. +</p> + +<p> +“Good. And now don’t you think it could undertake a voyage of some +length?” +</p> + +<p> +“Where, Pencroff?” +</p> + +<p> +“To Tabor Island, for instance.” +</p> + +<p> +“My friend,” replied the engineer, “I believe that in a case +of necessity there need be no hesitancy in trusting to the Good Luck even for a +longer journey; but, you know, I would be sorry to see you leave for Tabor +Island, because nothing obliges you to go.” +</p> + +<p> +“One likes to know one’s neighbors,” answered Pencroff, whose +mind was made up. “Tabor Island is our neighbor, and is all alone. +Politeness requires that at least we make her a visit.” +</p> + +<p> +“The mischief!” exclaimed Spilett, “our friend Pencroff is a +stickler for propriety.” +</p> + +<p> +“I am not a stickler at all,” retorted the sailor, who was a little +vexed by the engineer’s opposition. +</p> + +<p> +“Remember, Pencroff,” said Smith, “that you could not go the +island alone.” +</p> + +<p> +“One other would be all I would want.” +</p> + +<p> +“Supposing so,” replied the engineer, “would you risk +depriving our colony of five, of two of its colonists?” +</p> + +<p> +“There are six,” rejoined Pencroff. “You forget Jup.” +</p> + +<p> +“There are seven,” added Neb. “Top is as good as +another.” +</p> + +<p> +“There is no risk in it, Mr. Smith,” said Pencroff again. +</p> + +<p> +“Possibly not, Pencroff; but, I repeat, that it is exposing oneself +without necessity.” +</p> + +<p> +The obstinate sailor did not answer, but let the conversation drop for the +present. He little thought that an incident was about to aid him, and change to +a work of humanity what had been merely a caprice open to discussion. +</p> + +<p> +The Good Luck, after having stood out to sea, was returning towards the coast +and making for Balloon Harbor, as it was important to locate the channel-way +between the shoals and reefs so as to buoy them, for this little inlet was to +be resting place of the sloop. +</p> + +<p> +They were half a mile off shore, beating up to windward and moving somewhat +slowly, as the boat was under the lee of the land. The sea was as smooth as +glass. Herbert was standing in the bows indicating the channel-way. Suddenly he +cried:— +</p> + +<p> +“Luff, Pencroff, luff.” +</p> + +<p> +“What is it?” cried the sailor, springing to his feet. “A +rock?” +</p> + +<p> +“No—hold on, I cannot see very well—luff +again—steady—bear away a little—” and while thus +speaking, the lad lay down along the deck, plunged his arm quickly into the +water, and then rising up again with something in his hand, exclaimed:— +</p> + +<p> +“It is a bottle!” +</p> + +<p> +Smith took it, and without saying a word, withdrew the cork and took out a wet +paper, on which was written these words:— +</p> + +<p> +“A shipwrecked man—Tabor Island:—l53° W. lon.—37° +11’ S. lat.” +</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2><a name="XXXV" id="XXXV"></a>CHAPTER XXXV.</h2> + +<p class="letter"> +DEPARTURE DECIDED UPON—PREPARATIONS—THE THREE PASSENGERS—THE +FIRST NIGHT—THE SECOND NIGHT—TABOR ISLAND—SEARCH ON THE +SHORE—SEARCH IN THE WOODS—NO ONE—ANIMALS—PLANTS—A +HOUSE—DESERTED. +</p> + +<p> +“Some one shipwrecked!” cried Pencroff, “abandoned some +hundred miles from us upon Tabor Island! Oh! Mr. Smith, you will no longer +oppose my project!” +</p> + +<p> +“No, Pencroff, and you must leave as soon as possible.”. +</p> + +<p> +“To-morrow?” +</p> + +<p> +“To-morrow.” +</p> + +<p> +The engineer held the paper which he had taken from the bottle in his hand. He +considered for a few moments, and then spoke:— +</p> + +<p> +“From this paper, my friends,” said he, “and from the manner +in which it is worded, we must conclude that, in the first place, the person +cast away upon Tabor Island is a man well informed, since he gives the latitude +and longitude of his island exactly; secondly, that he is English or American, +since the paper is written in English.” +</p> + +<p> +“That is a logical conclusion,” answered Spilett, “and the +presence of this person explains the arrival of the box on our coast. There has +been a shipwreck, since some one has been shipwrecked. And he is fortunate in +that Pencroff had the idea of building this boat and even of trying it to-day, +for in twenty-four hours the bottle would have been broken on the rocks.” +</p> + +<p> +“Indeed,!’ said Herbert, “it is a happy chance that the Good +Luck passed by the very spot where this bottle was floating.” +</p> + +<p> +“Don’t it seem to you odd?” asked Smith of Pencroff. +</p> + +<p> +“It seems fortunate, that’s all,” replied the sailor. +“Do you see anything extraordinary in it, sir? This bottle must have gone +somewhere, and why not here as well as anywhere else?” +</p> + +<p> +“Perhaps you are right, Pencroff,” responded the engineer, +“and nevertheless—” +</p> + +<p> +“But,” interrupted Herbert, “nothing proves that this bottle +has floated in the water for a long time.” +</p> + +<p> +“Nothing,” responded Spilett, “and moreover the paper seems +to have been recently written. What do you think, Cyrus?” +</p> + +<p> +“It is hard to decide.” answered Smith.. +</p> + +<p> +Meanwhile Pencroff had not been idle. He had gone about, and the Good Luck, +with a free wind, all her sails drawing, was speeding toward Claw Cape. Each +one thought of the castaway on Tabor Island. Was there still time to save him? +This was a great event in the lives of the colonists. They too were but +castaways, but it was not probable that another had been as favored as they had +been, and it was their duty to hasten at once to this one’s relief. By 2 +o’clock Claw Cape was doubled, and the Good Luck anchored at the mouth of +the Mercy. +</p> + +<p> +That evening all the details of the expedition were arranged. It was agreed +that Herbert and Pencroff, who understood the management of a boat, were to +undertake the voyage alone. By leaving the next day, the 11th of October, they +would reach the island, supposing the wind continued, in forty-eight hours. +Allowing for one day there, and three or four days to return in, they could +calculate on being at Lincoln Island again on the 17th. The weather was good, +the barometer rose steadily, the wind seemed as if it would continue, +everything favored these brave men, who were going so far to do a humane act. +</p> + +<p> +Thus, Smith, Neb, and Spilett was to remain at Granite House; but at the last +moment, the latter, remembering his duty as reporter to the New York +<i>Herald</i>, having declared that he would swim rather than lose such an +opportunity, was allowed to take part in the voyage. +</p> + +<p> +The evening was employed in putting bedding, arms, munitions, provisions, etc., +on board, and the next morning, by 5 o’clock, the good-byes were spoken, +and Pencroff, hoisting the sails, headed for Claw Cape, which had to be doubled +before taking the route to the southeast. The Good Luck was already a quarter +of a mile from shore when her passengers saw upon the heights of Granite House +two men signalling farewells. They were Smith and Neb, from whom they were +separating for the first time in fifteen months. +</p> + +<p> +Pencroff, Herbert, and the reporter returned the signal, and soon Granite House +disappeared behind the rocks of the Cape. +</p> + +<p> +During the morning, the Good Luck remained in view of the southern coast of the +island, which appeared like a green clump of trees, above which rose Mount +Franklin. The heights, lessened by distance, gave it an appearance little +calculated to attract ships on its coasts. At 1 o’clock Reptile +Promontory was passed ten miles distant. It was therefore impossible to +distinguish the western coast, which extended to the spurs of the mountain, and +three hours later, Lincoln Island had disappeared behind the horizon. +</p> + +<p> +The Good Luck behaved admirably. She rode lightly over the seas and sailed +rapidly. Pencroff had set his topsail, and with a fair wind he followed a +straight course by the compass. Occasionally Herbert took the tiller, and the +hand of the young lad was so sure, that the sailor had nothing to correct. +</p> + +<p> +Spilett chatted with one and the other, and lent a hand when necessary in +manœuvring the sloop. Captain Pencroff was perfectly satisfied with his crew, +and was constantly promising them an extra allowance of grog. +</p> + +<p> +In the evening the slender crescent of the moon glimmered in the twilight. The +night came on dark but starlit, with the promise of a fine day on the morrow. +Pencroff thought it prudent to take in the topsail, which was perhaps an excess +of caution in so still a night, but he was a careful sailor, and was not to be +blamed. +</p> + +<p> +The reporter slept during half the night, Herbert and Pencroff taking two-hour +turns at the helm. The sailor had as much confidence in his pupil as he had in +himself, and his trust was justified by the coolness and judgment of the lad. +Pencroff set the course as a captain to his helmsman, and Herbert did not allow +the Good Luck to deviate a point from her direction. +</p> + +<p> +The night and the next day passed quietly and safely. The Good Luck held her +southeast course, and, unless she was drawn aside by some unknown current, she +would make Tabor Island exactly. The sea was completely deserted, save that +sometimes an albatross or frigate-bird passed within gun-shot distance. +</p> + +<p> +“And yet,” said Herbert, “this is the season when the whalers +usually come towards the southern part of the Pacific. I don’t believe +that there is a sea more deserted than this.” +</p> + +<p> +“It is not altogether deserted,” responded Pencroff. +</p> + +<p> +“What do you mean?” +</p> + +<p> +“Why we are here. Do you take us for porpoises or our sloop for +driftwood?” And Pencroff laughed at his pleasantry. +</p> + +<p> +By evening they calculated the distance traversed at 130 miles, or three and a +third miles an hour. The breeze was dying away, but they had reason to hope, +supposing their course to have been correct, that they would sight Tabor Island +at daylight. +</p> + +<p> +No one of the three slept during this night. While waiting for morning they +experienced the liveliest emotions. There was so much uncertainty in their +enterprise. Were they near the island? Was the shipwrecked man still there? Who +was he? Might not his presence disturb the unity of the colony? Would he, +indeed, consent to exchange one prison for another? All these questions, which +would doubtless be answered the next day, kept them alert, and at the earliest +dawn they began to scan the western horizon. +</p> + +<p> +What was the joy of the little crew when towards 6 o’clock Pencroff +shouted— +</p> + +<p> +“Land!” +</p> + +<p> +In a few hours they would be upon its shore. +</p> + +<p> +The island was a low coast, raised but a little above the waves, not more than +fifteen miles away. The sloop, which had been heading south of it, was put +about, and, as the sun rose, a few elevations became visible here and there. +</p> + +<p> +“It is not as large as Lincoln Island,” said Herbert, “and +probably owes its origin to like submarine convulsions.” +</p> + +<p> +By 11 o’clock the Good Luck was only two miles distant from shore, and +Pencroff, while seeking some place to land, sailed with extreme caution through +these unknown waters. They could see the whole extent of this island, on which +were visible groups of gum and other large trees of the same species as those +on Lincoln Island. But, it was astonishing, that no rising smoke indicated that +the place was inhabited, nor was any signal visible upon the shore. +Nevertheless the paper had been precise: it stated that there was a shipwrecked +man here; and he should have been upon the watch. +</p> + +<p> +Meanwhile the Good Luck went in through the tortuous passages between the +reefs, Herbert steering, and the sailor stationed forward, keeping a sharp +lookout, with the halliards in his hand, ready to run down the sail. Spilett, +with the spy-glass, examined all the shore without perceiving anything. By noon +the sloop touched the beach, the anchor was let go, the sails furled, and the +crew stepped on shore. +</p> + +<p> +There could be no doubt that that was Tabor Island, since the most recent maps +gave no other land in all this part of the Pacific. +</p> + +<p> +After having securely moored the sloop, Pencroff and his companion, well armed, +ascended the coast towards a round hill, some 250 feet high, which was distant +about half a mile, from the summit of which they expected to have a good view +of the island. +</p> + +<p> +The explorers followed the edge of grassy plain which ended at the foot of the +hill. Rock-pigeons and sea-swallows circled about them, and in the woods +bordering the plain to the left they heard rustlings in the bushes and saw +movements in the grass indicating the presence of very timid animals, but +nothing, so far, indicated that the island was inhabited. +</p> + +<p> +Having reached the hill the party soon climbed to its summit, and their gaze +traversed the whole horizon. They were certainly upon an island, not more than +six miles in circumference, in shape a long oval, and but little broken by +inlets or promontories. All around it, the sea, absolutely deserted, stretched +away to the horizon. +</p> + +<p> +This islet differed greatly from Lincoln Island in that it was covered over its +entire surface with woods, and the uniform mass of verdure clothed two or three +less elevated hills. Obliquely to the oval of the island a small stream crossed +a large grassy plain and emptied into the sea on the western side by a narrowed +mouth. +</p> + +<p> +“The place is small,” said Herbert. +</p> + +<p> +“Yes,” replied the sailor. “It would have been too small for +us.” +</p> + +<p> +“And,” added the reporter, “it seems uninhabited.” +</p> + +<p> +“Nevertheless,” said Pencroff, “let us go down and +search.” +</p> + +<p> +The party returned to the sloop, and they decided to walk round the entire +island before venturing into its interior, so that no place could escape their +investigation. +</p> + +<p> +The shore was easily followed, and the explorers proceeded towards the south, +starting up flocks of aquatic birds and numbers of seals, which latter threw +themselves into the sea as soon as they caught sight of the party. +</p> + +<p> +“Those beasts are not looking on man for the first time. They fear what +they know,” said the reporter. +</p> + +<p> +An hour after their departure the three had reached the southern point of the +islet, which terminated in a sharp cape, and they turned towards the north, +following the western shore, which was sandy, like the other, and bounded by a +thick wood. +</p> + +<p> +In four hours after they had set out the party had made the circuit of the +island, without having seen any trace of a habitation, and not even a +footprint. It was most extraordinary, to say the least, and it seemed necessary +to believe that the place was not and had not been inhabited. Perhaps, after +all, the paper had been in the water for many months, or even years, and it was +possible, in that case, that the shipwrecked one had been rescued or that he +had died from suffering. +</p> + +<p> +The little party, discussing all sorts of possibilities, made a hasty dinner on +board the sloop, and at 5 o’clock started to explore the woods. +</p> + +<p> +Numerous animals fled before their approach, principally, indeed solely, goats +and pigs, which it was easy to see were of European origin. Doubtless some +whaler had left them here, and they had rapidly multiplied. Herbert made up his +mind to catch two or three pairs to take back to Lincoln Island. +</p> + +<p> +There was no longer any doubt that the island had previously been visited. This +was the more evident as in passing through the forest they saw the traces of +pathways, and the trunks of trees felled by the hatchet, and all about, marks +of human handiwork; but these trees had been felled years before; the hatchet +marks were velvetted with moss, and the pathways were so overgrown with grass +that it was difficult to discover them. +</p> + +<p> +“But,” observed Spilett, “this proves that men not only +landed here, but that they lived here. Now who and how many were these men, and +how many remain?” +</p> + +<p> +“The paper speaks of but one,” replied Herbert. +</p> + +<p> +“Well,” said Pencroff, “if he is still here we cannot help +finding him.” +</p> + +<p> +The exploration was continued, following diagonally across the island, and by +this means the sailor and his companions reached the little stream which flowed +towards the sea. +</p> + +<p> +If animals of European origin, if works of human hands proved conclusively that +man had once been here, many specimens of the vegetable kingdom also evidenced +the fact. In certain clear places it was plain that kitchen vegetables had +formerly been planted. And Herbert was overjoyed when he discovered potatoes, +succory, sorrel, carrots, cabbage, and turnips, the seeds of which would enrich +the garden at Granite House. +</p> + +<p> +“Indeed,” exclaimed Pencroff, “this will rejoice Neb. Even if +we don’t find the man, our voyage will not have been useless, and Heaven +will have rewarded us.” +</p> + +<p> +“Doubtless,” replied Spilett, “but from the conditions of +these fields, it looks as if the place had not been inhabited for a long +time.” +</p> + +<p> +“An inhabitant, whoever he was, would not neglect anything so important +as this.” +</p> + +<p> +“Yes, this man has gone. It must be—” +</p> + +<p> +“That the paper had been written a long time ago?” +</p> + +<p> +“Undoubtedly.” +</p> + +<p> +“And that the bottle had been floating in the sea a good while before it +arrived at Lincoln Island?” +</p> + +<p> +“Why not?” said Pencroff. “But, see, it is getting +dark,” he added, “and I think we had better give over the +search.” +</p> + +<p> +“We will go aboard, and to-morrow we will begin again,” replied the +reporter. +</p> + +<p> +They were about adopting this counsel, when Herbert, pointing to something +dimly visible, through the trees, exclaimed:— +</p> + +<p> +“There’s a house!” +</p> + +<p> +All three directed their steps towards the place indicated, and they made out +in the twilight that it was built of planks, covered with heavy tarpaulin. The +door, half closed, was pushed back by Pencroff, who entered quickly. +</p> + +<p> +The place was empty! +</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2><a name="XXXVI" id="XXXVI"></a>CHAPTER XXXVI.</h2> + +<p class="letter"> +THE INVENTORY—THE NIGHT—SOME LETTERS—THE SEARCH +CONTINUED—PLANTS AND ANIMALS—HERBERT IN +DANGER—ABOARD—THE DEPARTURE—BAD WEATHER—A GLIMMER OF +INTELLIGENCE —LOST AT SEA—A TIMELY LIGHT. +</p> + +<p> +Pencroff, Spilett and Herbert stood silent In darkness. Then the former gave a +loud call. There was no answer. He lit a twig, and the light illuminated for a +moment a small room, seemingly deserted. At one end was a large chimney, +containing some cold cinders and an armful of dry wood. Pencroff threw the +lighted twig into it, and the wood caught fire and gave out a bright light. +</p> + +<p> +The sailor and his companions thereupon discovered a bed in disorder, its damp +and mildewed covers proving that it had been long unused; in the corner of the +fireplace were two rusty kettles and an overturned pot; a clothes-press with +some sailors’ clothing, partially moulded; on the table a tin plate, and +a Bible, injured by the dampness; in a corner some tools, a shovel, a mattock, +a pick, two shot guns, one of which was broken; on a shelf was a barrel full of +powder, a barrel of lead, and a number of boxes of caps. All were covered with +a thick coating of dust. +</p> + +<p> +“There is no one here,” said the reporter. +</p> + +<p> +“Not a soul.” +</p> + +<p> +“This room has not been occupied in a long time.” +</p> + +<p> +“Since a very long time.” +</p> + +<p> +“Mr. Spilett,” said Pencroff, “I think that instead of going +on board we had better stay here all night.” +</p> + +<p> +“You are right, Pencroff, and if the proprietor returns he will not be +sorry, perhaps, to find the place occupied.” +</p> + +<p> +“He won’t come back, though,” said the sailor, shaking his +head. +</p> + +<p> +“Do you think he has left the island?” +</p> + +<p> +“If he had left the island he would have taken these things with him. You +know how much a shipwrecked person would be attached to these objects. No, +no,” repeated the sailor, in the tone of a man perfectly convinced; +“no, he has not left the island. He is surely here.” +</p> + +<p> +“Alive?” +</p> + +<p> +“Alive or dead. But if he is dead he could not have buried himself, I am +sure, and we will at least find his remains.” +</p> + +<p> +It was therefore agreed to pass the night in this house, and a supply of wood +in the corner gave them the means of heating it. The door having been closed, +the three explorers, seated upon a bench, spoke little, but remained deep in +thought. They were in the mood to accept anything that might happen, and they +listened eagerly for any sound from without. If the door had suddenly opened +and a man had stood before them, they would not have been much surprised, in +spite of all the evidence of desolation throughout the house; and their hands +were ready to clasp the hands of this man, of this shipwrecked one, of this +unknown friend whose friends awaited him. +</p> + +<p> +But no sound was heard, the door did not open, and the hours passed by. +</p> + +<p> +The night seemed interminable to the sailor and his companions. Herbert, alone, +slept for two hours, as at his age, sleep is a necessity. All were anxious to +renew the search of the day before, and to explore the innermost recesses of +the islet. Pencroff’s conclusions were certainly just, since the house +and its contents had been abandoned. They determined, therefore, to search for +the remains of its inhabitant, and to give them Christian burial. +</p> + +<p> +As soon as it was daylight they began to examine the house. It was prettily +situated under a small hill, on which grew several fine gum trees. Before it a +large space had been cleared, giving a view over the sea. A small lawn, +surrounded by a dilapidated fence, extended to the bank of the little stream. +The house had evidently been built from planks taken from a ship. It seemed +likely that a ship had been thrown upon the island, that all or at least one of +the crew had been saved, and that this house had been built from the wreck. +This was the more probable, as Spilett, in going round the dwelling, saw on one +of the planks these half-effaced letters:— +</p> + +<p> +BR ... TAN ... A. +</p> + +<p> +“Britannia,” exclaimed Pencroff, who had been called by the +reporter to look at it; “that is a common name among ships, and I cannot +say whether it is English or American. However, it don’t matter to what +country the man belongs, we will save him, if he is alive. But before we begin +our search let us go back to the Good Luck.” +</p> + +<p> +Pencroff had been seized with a sort of anxiety about his sloop. Supposing the +island was inhabited, and some one had taken it—but he shrugged his +shoulders at this unlikely thought. Nevertheless the sailor was not unwilling +to go on board to breakfast. The route already marked was not more than a mile +in length, and they started on their walk, looking carefully about them in the +woods and underbrush, through which ran hundreds of pigs and goats. +</p> + +<p> +In twenty minutes the party reached the place where the Good Luck rode quietly +at anchor. Pencroff gave a sigh of satisfaction. +</p> + +<p> +After all, this boat was his baby, and it is a father’s right to be often +anxious without reason. +</p> + +<p> +All went on board and ate a hearty breakfast, so as not to want anything before +a late dinner; then the exploration was renewed, and conducted with the utmost +carefulness. As it was likely that the solitary inhabitant of this island was +dead, the party sought rather to find his remains than any traces of him +living. But during all the morning they were unable to find anything; if he was +dead, some animal must have devoured his body. +</p> + +<p> +“We will leave to-morrow at daylight,” said Pencroff to his +companions, who towards 2 o’clock were resting for a few moments under a +group of trees. +</p> + +<p> +“I think we need not hesitate to take those things which belonged to +him?” queried Herbert. +</p> + +<p> +“I think not,” answered Spilett; “and these arms and tools +will add materially to the stock at Granite House. If I am not mistaken, what +is left of the lead and powder is worth a good deal.” +</p> + +<p> +“And we must not forget to capture a couple of these pigs,” said +Pencroff. +</p> + +<p> +“Nor to gather some seed,” added Herbert, “which will give us +some of our own vegetables.” +</p> + +<p> +“Perhaps it would be better to spend another day here, in order to get +together everything that we want,” suggested the reporter. +</p> + +<p> +“No, sir;” replied the sailor. “I want to get away to-morrow +morning. The wind seems to be shifting to the west, and will be in our favor +going back.” +</p> + +<p> +“Then don’t let us lose any time,” said Herbert, rising. +</p> + +<p> +“We will not,” replied Pencroff. “Herbert, you get the seed, +and Spilett and I will chase the pigs, and although we haven’t Top, I +think we will catch some.” +</p> + +<p> +Herbert, therefore, followed the path which led to the cultivated part of the +island, while the others plunged at once into the forest. Although the pigs +were plenty they were singularly agile, and not in the humor to be captured. +However, after half an hour’s chasing the hunters had captured a couple +in their lair, when cries mingled with horrible hoarse sounds, having nothing +human in them, were heard. Pencroff and Spilett sprang to their feet, +regardless of the pigs, which escaped. +</p> + +<p> +“It is Herbert!” cried the reporter. +</p> + +<p> +“Hurry!” cried the sailor, as the two ran with their utmost speed +towards the place from whence the cries came. +</p> + +<p> +They had need to hasten, for at a turn in the path they saw the lad prostrate +beneath a savage, or perhaps a gigantic ape, who was throttling him. +</p> + +<p> +To throw themselves on this monster and pinion him to the ground, dragging +Herbert away, was the work of a moment. The sailor had herculean strength. +Spilett, too, was muscular, and, in spite of the resistance of the monster, it +was bound so that it could not move. +</p> + +<p> +“You are not wounded, Herbert?” +</p> + +<p> +“No, oh no.” +</p> + +<p> +“Ah! if it had hurt you, this ape-” +</p> + +<p> +“But he is not an ape!” cried Herbert. +</p> + +<p> +At these words Pencroff and Spilett looked again at the object lying on the +ground. In fact, it was not an ape, but a human being—a man! But what a +man! He was a savage, in all the horrible acceptation of the word; and, what +was more frightful, he seemed to have fallen to the last degree of brutishness. +</p> + +<p> +Matted hair, tangled beard descending to his waist, his body naked, save for a +rag about his loins, wild eyes, long nails, mahogany-colored skin, feet as hard +as if they had been made of horn; such was the miserable creature which it was, +nevertheless, necessary to call a man. But one might well question whether this +body still contained a soul, or whether the low, brutish instinct alone +survived. +</p> + +<p> +“Are you perfectly sure that this is what has been a man?” +questioned Pencroff of the reporter. +</p> + +<p> +“Alas! there can be no doubt of it,” replied Spilett. +</p> + +<p> +“Can he be the person shipwrecked?” asked Herbert +</p> + +<p> +“Yes,” responded the reporter, “but the poor creature is no +longer human.” +</p> + +<p> +Spilett was right. Evidently, if the castaway had ever been civilized, +isolation had made him a savage, a real creature of the woods. He gave +utterance to hoarse sounds, from between teeth which were as sharp as those of +animals living on raw flesh. Memory had doubtless long ago left him, and he had +long since forgotten the use of arms and tools, and even how to make a fire. +One could see that he was active and supple, but that his physical qualities +had developed to the exclusion of his moral perception. +</p> + +<p> +Spilett spoke to him, but he neither understood nor listened, and, looking him +in the eye, the reporter could see that all intelligence had forsaken him. +Nevertheless, the prisoner did not struggle or strive to break his bonds. Was +he cowed by the presence of these men, whom he had once resembled? Was there in +some corner of his brain a flitting remembrance which drew him towards +humanity? Free, would he have fled or would he have remained? They did not +know, and they did not put him to the proof. After having looked attentively at +the miserable creature, Spilett said:— +</p> + +<p> +“What he is, what he has been, and what he will be; it is still our duty +to take him to Lincoln Island.” +</p> + +<p> +“Oh yes, yes,” exclaimed Herbert, “and perhaps we can, with +care, restore to him some degree of intelligence.” +</p> + +<p> +“The soul never dies,” answered the reporter, “and it would +be a great thing to bring back this creature of God’s making from his +brutishness.” +</p> + +<p> +Pencroff shook his head doubtfully. +</p> + +<p> +“It is necessary to try at all events,” said the reporter, +“humanity requires it of us.” +</p> + +<p> +“It was, indeed, their duty as civilized and Christian beings, and they +well knew that Smith would approve of their course. +</p> + +<p> +“Shall we leave him bound?” inquired the sailor. +</p> + +<p> +“Perhaps if we unfasten his feet he will walk,” said Herbert. +</p> + +<p> +“Well, let us try,” replied the sailor. +</p> + +<p> +And the cords binding the creature’s legs were loosened, although his +arms were kept firmly bound. He rose without manifesting any desire to escape. +His tearless eyes darted sharp glances upon the three men who marched beside +him, and nothing denoted that he remembered being or having been like them. A +wheezing sound escaped from his lips, and his aspect was wild, but he made no +resistance. +</p> + +<p> +By the advice of the reporter, the poor wretch was taken to the house, where, +perhaps, the sight of the objects in it might make some impression upon him. +Perhaps a single gleam would awaken his sleeping consciousness, illuminate his +darkened mind. +</p> + +<p> +The house was near by, and in a few minutes they were there; but the prisoner +recognized nothing—he seemed to have lost consciousness of everything. +Could it be that this brutish state was due to his long imprisonment on the +island? That, having come here a reasoning being, his isolation had reduced him +to this state? +</p> + +<p> +The reporter thought that perhaps the sight of fire might affect him, and in a +moment one of those lovely flames which attract even animals lit up the +fireplace. The sight of this flame seemed at first to attract the attention of +the unfortunate man, but very soon he ceased regarding it. Evidently, for the +present at least, there was nothing to do but take him aboard the Good Luck, +which was accordingly done. He was left in charge of Pencroff, while the two +others returned to the island and brought over the arms and implements, a lot +of seeds, some game, and two pairs of pigs which they had caught. Everything +was put on board, and the sloop rode ready to hoist anchor as soon as the next +morning’s tide would permit. +</p> + +<p> +The prisoner had been placed in the forward hold, where he lay calm, quiet, +insensible, and mute. Pencroff offering him some cooked meat to eat, he pushed +it away; but, on being shown one of the ducks which Herbert had killed, he +pounced on it with bestial avidity and devoured it. +</p> + +<p> +“You think he’ll be himself again?” asked the sailor, shaking +his head. +</p> + +<p> +“Perhaps,” replied the reporter. “It is not impossible that +our attentions will react on him, since it is the isolation that has done this; +and he will be alone no longer.” +</p> + +<p> +“The poor fellow has doubtless been this way for a long time.” +</p> + +<p> +“Perhaps so.” +</p> + +<p> +“How old do you think he is?” asked the lad. +</p> + +<p> +“That is hard to say,” replied the reporter, “as his matted +beard obscures his face; but he is no longer young, and I should say he was at +least fifty years old.” +</p> + +<p> +“Have you noticed how his eyes are set deep in his head?” +</p> + +<p> +“Yes, but I think that they are more human than one would suspect from +his general appearance.” +</p> + +<p> +“Well, we will see,” said Pencroff; “and I am curious to have +Mr. Smith’s opinion of our savage. We went to find a human being, and we +are bringing back a monster. Any how, one takes what he can get.” +</p> + +<p> +The night passed, and whether the prisoner slept or not he did not move, +although he had been unbound. He was like one of those beasts that in the first +moments of their capture submit, and to whom the rage returns later. +</p> + +<p> +At daybreak the next day, the 17th, the change in the weather was as Pencroff +had predicted. The wind hauled round to the northwest and favored the return of +the Good Luck; but at the same time it had freshened, so as to make the sailing +more difficult. At 5 o’clock the anchor was raised, Pencroff took a reef +in the mainsail and headed directly towards home. +</p> + +<p> +The first day passed without incident. The prisoner rested quietly in the +forward cabin, and, as he had once been a sailor, the motion of the sloop +produced upon him a sort of salutary reaction. Did it recall to him some +remembrance of his former occupation? At least he rested tranquil, more +astonished than frightened. +</p> + +<p> +On the 16th the wind freshened considerably, coming round more to the north, +and therefore in a direction less favorable to the course of the Good Luck, +which bounded over the waves. Pencroff was soon obliged to hold her nearer to +the wind, and without saying so, he began to be anxious at the lookout ahead. +Certainly, unless the—wind moderated, it would take much longer to go +back than it had taken to come. +</p> + +<p> +On the 17th they had been forty-eight hours out, and yet nothing indicated they +were in the neighborhood of Lincoln Island. It was, moreover, impossible to +reckon their course, or even to estimate the distance traversed, as the +direction and the speed had been too irregular. Twenty-four hours later there +was still no land in view. The wind was dead ahead, and an ugly sea running. On +the 18th a huge wave struck the sloop, and had not the crew been lashed to the +deck, they would have been swept overboard. +</p> + +<p> +On this occasion Pencroff and his companions, busy in clearing things away, +received an unhoped-for assistance from the prisoner, who sprang from the +hatchway as if his sailor instinct had returned to him, and breaking the rail +by a, vigorous blow—with a spar, enabled the water on the deck to flow +off more freely. Then, the boat cleared, without having said a word, he +returned to his cabin. +</p> + +<p> +Nevertheless, the situation was bad, and the sailor had cause to believe +himself lost upon this vast sea, without the possibility of regaining his +course. The night of the 18th was dark and cold. But about 11 o’clock the +wind lulled, the sea fell, and the sloop, less tossed about, moved more +rapidly. None of the crew thought of sleep. They kept an eager lookout, as +either Lincoln Island must be near at hand and they would discover it at +daybreak, or the sloop had been drifted from her course by the currents, and it +would be next to impossible to rectify the direction. +</p> + +<p> +Pencroff, anxious to the last degree, did not, however, despair; but, seated at +the helm, he tried to see through the thick darkness around him. Towards 2 +o’clock he suddenly started up, crying:—“A light! a +light!” It was indeed a bright light appearing twenty miles to—the +northeast. Lincoln Island was there, and this light, evidently lit by Smith, +indicated the direction to be followed. +</p> + +<p> +Pencroff, who had been heading much too far towards the north, changed his +course, and steered directly towards the light, which gleamed above the horizon +like a star of the first magnitude. +</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2><a name="XXXVII" id="XXXVII"></a>CHAPTER XXXVII.</h2> + +<p class="letter"> +THE RETURN-DISCUSSION—SMITH AND THE UNKNOWN—BALLOON HARBOR-THE +DEVOTION OF THE ENGINEER-A TOUCHING EXPERIENCE-TEARS. +</p> + +<p> +At 7 o’clock the next morning the boat touched the shore at the mouth of +the Mercy. Smith and Neb, who had become very anxious at the stormy weather and +the prolonged absence of their companions, had climbed, at daylight, to +Prospect Plateau, and had at length perceived the sloop in the distance. +</p> + +<p> +“Thank Heaven! There they are,” exclaimed Smith; while Neb, dancing +with pleasure, turned towards his master, and, striking his hands together, +cried, “Oh, my master!”-a more touching expression than, the first +polished phrase. +</p> + +<p> +The engineer’s first thought, on counting the number of persons on the +deck of the Good Luck, was that Pencroff had found no one on Tabor Island, or +that the unfortunate man had refused to exchange one prison for another. +</p> + +<p> +The engineer and Neb were on the beach at the moment the sloop arrived, and +before the party had leaped ashore, Smith said:— +</p> + +<p> +“We have been very anxious about you, my friends. Did anything happen to +you?” “No, indeed; everything went finely,” replied Spilett. +“We will tell you all about it.” +</p> + +<p> +“Nevertheless, you have failed in your search, since you are all +alone.”, “But, sir, there are four of us,” said the sailor. +</p> + +<p> +“Have you found this person?”. “Yes.” +</p> + +<p> +“And brought him back?” “Yes.” “Living?” +“Where is he, and what is he, then?” “He is, or rather, he +was a human being; and that is all, Cyrus, that we can say.” +</p> + +<p> +The engineer was thereupon, informed of everything that had happened; of the +search, of the long-abandoned house, of the capture of the scarcely human +inhabitant. +</p> + +<p> +“And,” added Pencroff,” I don’t know whether we have +done right in bringing him here.” +</p> + +<p> +“Most certainly you have done right,” replied the engineer. +</p> + +<p> +“But the poor fellow has no sense at all.” “Not now, perhaps; +in a few months, he will be as much a man as any of us. “Who knows what +might happen to the last one of us, after living for a long time alone on this +island? It is terrible to be all alone, my friends, and it is probable that +solitude quickly overthrows reason, since you have found this poor being in +such a condition.” +</p> + +<p> +“But, Mr. Smith,” asked Herbert, “what makes you think that +the brutishness of this man has come on within a little while?” +</p> + +<p> +“Because the paper we found had been recently written, and no one but +this shipwrecked man could have written it.” +</p> + +<p> +“Unless,” suggested Spilett, “it had been written by a +companion of this man who has since died.” +</p> + +<p> +“That is impossible, Spilett.” +</p> + +<p> +“Why so?” +</p> + +<p> +“Because, then, the paper would have mentioned two persons instead of +one.” +</p> + +<p> +Herbert briefly related the incident of the sea striking the sloop, and +insisted that the prisoner must then have had a glimmer of his sailor instinct. +</p> + +<p> +“You are perfectly right, Herbert,” said the engineer, “to +attach great importance to this fact. This poor man will not be incurable; +despair has made him what he is. But here he will find his kindred, and if he +still has any reason, we will save it.” +</p> + +<p> +Then, to Smith’s great pity and Neb’s wonderment, the man was +brought up from the cabin of the sloop, and as soon as he was on land, he +manifested a desire to escape. But Smith, approaching him, laid his hand +authoritatively upon his shoulder and looked at him with infinite tenderness. +Thereupon the poor wretch, submitting to a sort of instantaneous power, became +quiet, his eyes fell, his head dropped forward, and he made no further +resistance. +</p> + +<p> +“Poor shipwrecked sailor,” murmured the reporter. +</p> + +<p> +Smith regarded him attentively. To judge from his appearance, this miserable +creature had little of the human left in him; but Smith caught in his glance, +as the reporter had done, an almost imperceptible gleam of intelligence. +</p> + +<p> +It was decided that the Unknown, as his new companions called him, should stay +in one of the rooms of Granite House, from which he could not escape. He made +no resistance to being conducted there, and with good care they might, perhaps, +hope that some day he would prove a companion to them. +</p> + +<p> +Neb hastened to prepare breakfast, for the voyagers were very hungry, and +during the meal Smith made them relate in detail every incident of the cruise. +He agreed with them in thinking that the name of the Britannia gave them reason +to believe that the Unknown was either English or American; and, moreover, +under all the growth of hair covering the man’s face, the engineer +thought he recognized the features characteristic of an Anglo-Saxon. +</p> + +<p> +“But, by the way, Herbert,” said the reporter, “you have +never told us how you met this savage, and we know nothing, except that he +would have strangled you, had we not arrived so opportunely.” +</p> + +<p> +“Indeed, I am not sure that I can tell just what happened,” replied +Herbert. “I was, I think, gathering seeds, when I heard a tremendous +noise in a high tree near by. I had hardly time to turn, when this unhappy +creature, who had, doubtless, been hidden crouching in the tree, threw himself +upon me; and, unless Mr. Spilett and Pencroff—” +</p> + +<p> +“You were in great danger, indeed, my boy,” said Smith; “but +perhaps, if this had not happened, this poor being would have escaped your +search, and we would have been without another companion.” +</p> + +<p> +“You expect, then, to make him a man again?” asked the reporter. +</p> + +<p> +“Yes,” replied Smith. +</p> + +<p> +Breakfast ended, all returned to the shore and began unloading the sloop; and +the engineer examined the arms and tools, but found nothing to establish the +identity of the Unknown. +</p> + +<p> +The pigs were taken to the stables, to which they would soon become accustomed. +The two barrels of powder and shot and the caps were a great acquisition, and +it was determined to make a small powder magazine in the upper cavern of +Granite House, where there would be no danger of an explosion. Meantime, since +the pyroxyline answered very well, there was no present need to use this +powder. +</p> + +<p> +When the sloop was unloaded Pencroff said:— +</p> + +<p> +“I think, Mr. Smith, that it would be better to put the Good Luck in a +safe place.” +</p> + +<p> +“Is it not safe enough at the mouth of the Mercy?” +</p> + +<p> +“No, sir,” replied the sailor. “Most of the time she is +aground on the sand, which strains her.” +</p> + +<p> +“Could not she be moored out in the stream?” +</p> + +<p> +“She could, but the place is unsheltered, and in an easterly wind I am +afraid she would suffer from the seas.” +</p> + +<p> +“Very well; where do you want to put her?” +</p> + +<p> +“In Balloon Harbor,” replied the sailor. “It seems to me that +that little inlet, hidden by the rocks, is just the place for her.” +</p> + +<p> +“Isn’t it too far off?” +</p> + +<p> +“No, it is only three miles from Granite House, and we have a good +straight road there.” +</p> + +<p> +“Have your way, Pencroff,” replied the engineer. +“Nevertheless, I should prefer to have the sloop under our sight. We +must, when we have time, make a small harbor.” +</p> + +<p> +“Capital!” cried Pencroff. “A harbor with a light house, a +breakwater, and a dry dock! Oh, indeed, sir, everything will be easy enough +with you!” +</p> + +<p> +“Always provided, my good man, that you assist me, as you do three +fourths of the work.” +</p> + +<p> +Herbert and the sailor went aboard the Good Luck, and set sail, and in a couple +of hours the sloop rode quietly at anchor in the tranquil water of Balloon +Harbor. +</p> + +<p> +During the first few days that the Unknown was at Granite House, had he given +any indication of a change in his savage nature? Did not a brighter light +illumine the depths of his intelligence? Was not, in short, his reason +returning to him? Undoubtedly, yes; and Smith and Spilett questioned whether +this reason had ever entirely forsaken him. +</p> + +<p> +At first this man, accustomed to the air and liberty which he had had in Tabor +Island, was seized with fits of passion, and there was danger of his throwing +himself out of one of the windows of Granite House. But little by little he +grew more quiet, and he was allowed to move about without restraint. +</p> + +<p> +Already forgetting his carnivorous instincts, he accepted a less bestial +nourishment, and cooked food did not produce in him the sentiment of disgust +which he had shown on board the Good Luck. +</p> + +<p> +Smith had taken advantage of a time when the man was asleep to cut the hair and +beard which had grown like a mane about his face, and had given him such a +savage aspect. He had also been clothed more decently, and the result was that +the Unknown appeared more like a human being, and it seemed as if the +expression of his eyes was softened. Certainly, sometimes, when intelligence +was visible, the expression of this man had a sort of beauty. +</p> + +<p> +Every day, Smith made a point of passing some hours in his company. He worked +beside him, and occupied himself in various ways to attract his attention. It +would suffice, if a single ray of light illuminated his reason, if a single +remembrance crossed his mind. Neither did the engineer neglect to speak in a +loud voice, so as to penetrate by both sound and sight to the depths of this +torpid intelligence. Sometimes one or another of the party joined the engineer, +and they usually talked of such matters pertaining to the sea as would be +likely to interest the man. At times the Unknown gave a sort of vague attention +to what was said, and soon the colonists began to think that he partly +understood them. Again his expression would be dolorous, proving that he +suffered inwardly. Nevertheless, he did not speak, although they thought, at +times, from his actions, that words were about to pass his lips. +</p> + +<p> +The poor creature was very calm and sad. But was not the calmness only on the +surface, and the sadness the result of his confinement? They could not yet say. +Seeing only certain objects and in a limited space, always with the colonists, +to whom he had become accustomed, having no desire to satisfy, better clothed +and better fed, it was natural that his physical nature should soften little by +little; but was he imbued with the new life, or, to use an expression justly +applicable to the case, was he only tamed, as an animal in the presence of its +master? This was the important question Smith was anxious to determine, and +meantime he did not wish to be too abrupt with his patient. For to him, the +unknown was but a sick person. Would he ever be a convalescent? +</p> + +<p> +Therefore, the engineer watched him unceasingly. How he laid in wait for his +reason, so to speak, that he might lay hold of it. +</p> + +<p> +The colonists followed with strong interest all the phases of this cure +undertaken by Smith. All aided him in it, and all, save perhaps the incredulous +Pencroff, came to share in his belief and hope. +</p> + +<p> +The submission of the Unknown was entire, and it seemed as if he showed for the +engineer, whose influence over him was apparent, a sort of attachment, and +Smith resolved now to test it by transporting him to another scene, to that +ocean which he had been accustomed to look upon, to the forest border, which +would recall those woods where he had lived such a life!” +</p> + +<p> +“But,” said Spilett, “can we hope that once at liberty, he +will not escape?” +</p> + +<p> +“We must make the experiment,” replied the engineer. +</p> + +<p> +“All right,” said Pencroff. “You will see, when this fellow +snuffs the fresh air and sees the coast clear, if he don’t make his legs +spin!” +</p> + +<p> +“I don’t think it,” replied the engineer. +</p> + +<p> +“We will try, any how,” said Spilett. +</p> + +<p> +It was the 30th of October, and the Unknown had been a prisoner for nine days. +It was a beautiful, warm, sunshiny day. Smith and Pencroff went to the room of +the Unknown, whom they found at the window gazing out at the sky. +</p> + +<p> +“Come, my friend,” said the engineer to him. +</p> + +<p> +The Unknown rose immediately. His eye was fixed on Smith, whom he followed; and +the sailor, little confident in the results of the experiment, walked with him. +</p> + +<p> +Having reached the door, they made him get into the elevator, at the foot of +which the rest of the party were waiting. The basket descended, and in a few +seconds all were standing together on the shore. +</p> + +<p> +The colonists moved off a little distance from the Unknown, so as to leave him +quite at liberty. He made some steps forward towards the sea, and his face lit +up with pleasure, but he made no effort to escape. He looked curiously at the +little waves, which, broken by the islet, died away on the shore. +</p> + +<p> +“It is not, indeed, the ocean,” remarked Spilett, “and it is +possible that this does not give him the idea of escaping.” +</p> + +<p> +“Yes,” replied Smith, “we must take him to the plateau on the +edge of the forest. There the experiment will be more conclusive.” +</p> + +<p> +“There he cannot get away, since the bridges are all raised,” said +Neb. +</p> + +<p> +“Oh, he is not the man to be troubled by such a brook as Glycerine Creek; +he could leap it at a bound,” returned Pencroff. +</p> + +<p> +“We will see presently,” said Smith, who kept his eye fixed on his +patient. +</p> + +<p> +And thereupon all proceeded towards Prospect Plateau. Having reached the place +they encountered the outskirts of the forest, with its leaves trembling in the +wind, The Unknown seemed to drink in with eagerness the perfume in the air, and +a long sigh escaped from his breast. +</p> + +<p> +The colonists stood some paces back, ready to seize him if he attempted to +escape. +</p> + +<p> +The poor creature was upon the point of plunging in the creek that separated +him from the forest; he placed himself ready to spring—then all at once +he turned about, dropping his arms beside him, and tears coursed down his +cheeks. +</p> + +<p> +“Ah!” cried Smith, “you will be a man again, since you +weep!” +</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2><a name="XXXVIII" id="XXXVIII"></a>CHAPTER XXXVIII</h2> + +<p class="letter"> +A MYSTERY TO BE SOLVED—THE FIRST WORDS OF THE UNKNOWN—TWELVE YEARS +ON THE ISLAND—CONFESSIONS—DISAPPEARANCE—SMITH’S +CONFIDENCE —BUILDING A WIND-MILL—THE FIRST BREAD—AN ACT OF +DEVOTION—HONEST HANDS. +</p> + +<p> +Yes, the poor creature had wept. Some remembrance had flashed across his +spirit, and, as Smith had said, he would be made a man through his tears. +</p> + +<p> +The colonists left him for some time, withdrawing themselves, so that he could +feel perfectly at liberty; but he showed no inclination to avail himself of +this freedom, and Smith soon decided to take him back to Granite House. +</p> + +<p> +Two days after this occurrence, the Unknown showed a disposition to enter +little by little into the common life. It was evident that he heard, that he +understood, but it was equally evident that he manifested a strange +disinclination to speak to them. Pencroff, listening at his room, heard these +words escape him:— +</p> + +<p> +“No! here! I! never!” +</p> + +<p> +The sailor reported this to his companions, and Smith said:— +</p> + +<p> +“There must be some sad mystery here.” +</p> + +<p> +The Unknown had begun to do some little chores, and to work in the garden. When +he rested, which was frequent, he seemed entirely self-absorbed; but, on the +advice of the engineer, the others respected the silence, which he seemed +desirous of keeping. If one of the colonists approached him he recoiled, +sobbing as if overcome. Could it be by remorse? or, was it, as Spilett once +suggested:— +</p> + +<p> +“If he does not speak I believe it is because he has something on his +mind too terrible to mention.” +</p> + +<p> +Some days later the Unknown was working on the plantation, when, of a sudden, +he stopped and let his spade fall, and Smith, who was watching him from a +distance, saw that he was weeping again. An irresistible pity drew the engineer +to the poor fellow’s side; and, touching his arm lightly, +</p> + +<p> +“My friend,” said he. +</p> + +<p> +The Unknown tried to look away, and when Smith sought to take his hand he drew +back quickly. +</p> + +<p> +“My friend,” said Smith, with decision, “I wish you to look +at me.” +</p> + +<p> +The Unknown obeyed, raising his eyes and regarding the other as one does who is +under the influence of magnetism. At first he wished to break away, then his +whole expression changed; his eyes flashed, and, unable longer to contain +himself, he muttered some incoherent words. Suddenly he crossed his arms, and +in a hollow voice:— +</p> + +<p> +“Who are you?” he demanded. +</p> + +<p> +“Men shipwrecked as you have been,” replied the engineer, greatly +moved. “We have brought you here among your kindred.” +</p> + +<p> +“My kindred! I have none! +</p> + +<p> +“You are among friends—,” +</p> + +<p> +“Friends! I! Friends!” cried the Unknown, hiding his face in his +hands. “Oh, no! never! Leave me! leave me!” and he rushed to the +brink of the plateau overlooking the sea, and stood there, motionless, for a +long time. +</p> + +<p> +Smith had rejoined his companions and had related to them what had happened. +</p> + +<p> +“There certainly is a mystery in this man’s life,” said +Spilett, “and it seems as if his first human sensation was +remorse.” +</p> + +<p> +“I don’t understand what kind of a man we have brought back,” +says the sailor. “He has secrets—” +</p> + +<p> +“Which we will respect,” answered the engineer, quickly. “If +he has committed some fault he has cruelly expiated it, and in our sight it is +absolved.” +</p> + +<p> +For two hours the Unknown remained upon the shore, evidently under the +influence of remembrances which brought back to him all his past, a past which, +doubtless, was hateful enough, and the colonists, though keeping watch upon +him, respected his desire to be alone. +</p> + +<p> +Suddenly he seemed to have taken a resolution, and he returned to the engineer. +His eyes were red with the traces of tears, and his face wore an expression of +deep humility. He seemed apprehensive, ashamed, humiliated, and his looks were +fixed on the ground. +</p> + +<p> +“Sir,” said he, “are you and your companions English?” +</p> + +<p> +“No,” replied Smith, “we are Americans.” +</p> + +<p> +“Ah!” murmured the Unknown, “I am glad of that.” +</p> + +<p> +“And what are you, my friend?” asked the engineer. +</p> + +<p> +“English,” he responded, as if these few words had cost him a great +effort. He rushed to the shore, and traversed its length to the mouth of the +Mercy, in a state of extreme agitation. +</p> + +<p> +Having, at one place, met Herbert, he stopped, and in a choking voice, accosted +him:— +</p> + +<p> +“What month is it?” +</p> + +<p> +“November,” replied the lad. +</p> + +<p> +“And what year?” +</p> + +<p> +“1866.” +</p> + +<p> +“Twelve years! Twelve years!” he cried, and then turned quickly +away. +</p> + +<p> +Herbert related this incident to the others. +</p> + +<p> +“The poor creature knew neither the month nor the year,” remarked +Spilett. +</p> + +<p> +“And he had been twelve years on the island, when we found him.” +</p> + +<p> +“Twelve years,” said Smith. “Twelve years of isolation, after +a wicked life, perhaps; that would indeed affect a man’s reason.” +</p> + +<p> +“I cannot help thinking,” observed Pencroff, “that this man +was not wrecked on that island, but that he has been left there for some +crime.” +</p> + +<p> +“You may be right, Pencroff,” replied the reporter, “and if +that is the case, it is not impossible that whoever left him there may return +for him some day.” +</p> + +<p> +“And they would not find him,” said Herbert. +</p> + +<p> +“But, then,” exclaimed Pencroff, “he would want to go back, +and—” +</p> + +<p> +“My friends,” interrupted Smith, “do not let us discuss this +question till we know what we are talking about. I believe that this unhappy +man has suffered, and that he has paid bitterly for his faults, whatever they +may have been, and that he is struggling with the need of opening his heart to +someone. Do not provoke him to speak; he will tell us of his own accord some +day, and when we have learned all, we will see what course it will be necessary +to follow. He alone can tell us if he has more than the hope, the certainty of +some day being restored to his country, but I doubt it.” +</p> + +<p> +“Why?” asked the reporter. +</p> + +<p> +“Because, had he been sure of being delivered after a fixed time, he +would have awaited the hour of his deliverance, and not have thrown that paper +in the sea. No, it is more likely that be was condemned to die upon this +island, to never look upon his kind again.” +</p> + +<p> +“But there still is something which I cannot understand,” said the +sailor. +</p> + +<p> +“What is that?” +</p> + +<p> +“Why, if this man had been left on Tabor Island twelve years ago, it +seems probable that he must have been in this savage condition for a long +time.” +</p> + +<p> +“That is probable,” replied the engineer. +</p> + +<p> +“And, therefore, it is a long time since he wrote that paper.” +</p> + +<p> +“Doubtless—and yet that paper seemed to have been written +recently—” +</p> + +<p> +“Yes, and how account for the bottle taking so many years in coming from +Tabor Island here?” +</p> + +<p> +“It is not absolutely impossible,” responded the reporter. +“Could not it have been in the neighborhood of the island for a long +time?” +</p> + +<p> +“And have remained floating? No,” answered the sailor, “for +sooner or later it would have been dashed to pieces on the rocks.” +</p> + +<p> +“It would, indeed,” said Smith, thoughtfully. +</p> + +<p> +“And, moreover,” continued the sailor, if the paper had been +enclosed in the bottle for a long time, it would have been injured by the +moisture, whereas, it was not damaged in the least.” +</p> + +<p> +The sailor’s remark was just, and, moreover, this paper, recently +written, gave the situation of the island with an exactness which implied a +knowledge of hydrography, such as a simple sailor could not have. +</p> + +<p> +“There is, as I said before, something inexplicable in all this,” +said the engineer, “but do not let us urge our new companion to speak, +When he wishes it we will be ready to listen.” +</p> + +<p> +For several days after this the Unknown neither spoke nor left the plateau. He +worked incessantly, digging in the garden apart from the colonists, and at meal +times, although he was often asked to join them, he remained alone, eating but +a few uncooked vegetables. At night, instead of returning to his room in +Granite House, he slept under the trees, or hid himself, if the weather was +bad, in some hollow of the rocks. Thus he returned again to that manner of life +in which he had lived when he had no other shelter than the forests of Tabor +Island, and all endeavor to make him modify this life having proved fruitless, +the colonists waited patiently. But the moment came when, irresistibly and as +if involuntarily forced from him by his conscience, the terrible avowals were +made. +</p> + +<p> +At dusk on the evening of the 10th of November, as the colonists were seated in +the arbor, the Unknown stood suddenly before them. His eyes glowed, and his +whole appearance wore again the savage aspect of former days. He stood there, +swayed by some terrible emotion, his teeth chattering like those of a person in +a fever. The colonists were astounded. “What was the matter with him? Was +the sight of his fellow-creatures unendurable? Had he had enough of this honest +life? Was he homesick for his brutish life? One would have thought so, hearing +him give utterance to these incoherent phrases:- +</p> + +<p> +“Why am I here? By what right did you drag me from my island? Is there +any bond between you and me? Do you know who I am—what I have +done—why I was there—alone? And who has told you that I was not +abandoned—that I was not condemned to die there? Do you know my past? Do +you know whether I have not robbed, murdered—if I am not a +miserable—a wicked being—fit to live like a wild beast—far +from all—say—do you know?” +</p> + +<p> +The colonists listened silently to the unhappy creature, from whom these half +avowals came in spite of himself. Smith, wishing to soothe him, would have gone +to him, but the Unknown drew back quickly. +</p> + +<p> +“No! no!” he cried. “One word only—am I free?”. +</p> + +<p> +“You are free,” replied the engineer. +</p> + +<p> +“Then, good-bye!” he cried, rushing off. +</p> + +<p> +Neb, Pencroff, and Herbert ran to the border of the wood, but they returned +alone. +</p> + +<p> +“We must let him have his own way,” said the engineer. +</p> + +<p> +“He will never come back,” exclaimed Pencroff. +</p> + +<p> +“He will return,” replied the engineer. +</p> + +<p> +And after that conversation many days passed, but Smith—was it a +presentiment—persisted in the fixed idea that the unhappy man would +return sooner or later. +</p> + +<p> +“It is the last struggle of this rude nature, which is touched by +remorse, and which would be terrified by a new isolation.” +</p> + +<p> +In the meantime, work of all kinds was continued, both on Prospect Plateau and +at the corral, where Smith proposed to make a farm. It is needless to say that +the seeds brought from Tabor Island had been carefully sown. The plateau was a +great kitchen-garden, well laid out and enclosed, which kept the colonists +always busy. As the plants multiplied, it was necessary to increase the size of +the beds, which threatened to become fields, and to take the place of the grass +land. But as forage abounded in other parts of the island, there was no fear of +the onagers having to be placed on rations; and it was also better to make +Prospect Plateau, defended by its belt of creeks, a garden of this kind, and to +extend the fields, which required no protection, beyond the belt. +</p> + +<p> +On the 15th of November they made their third harvest. Here was a field which +had indeed increased in the eighteen months since the first grain of corn had +been sown. The second crop of 600,000 grains produced this time 4,000 bushels +or more than 500,000,000 grains. The colonists were, therefore, rich in corn; +as it was only necessary to sow a dozen bushels each year in order to have a +supply sufficient for the nourishment of man and beast. +</p> + +<p> +After harvesting they, gave up the last fortnight in the month to bread-making. +They had the grain but not the flour, and a mill was therefore necessary. Smith +could have used the other waterfall which fell into the Mercy, but, after +discussing the question, it was decided to build a simple wind-mill on the +summit of the plateau. Its construction would be no more difficult than a +water-mill, and they would be sure of always having a breeze on this open +elevation. +</p> + +<p> +“Without counting,” said Pencroff, “the fine aspect a +wind-mill will give to the landscape.” +</p> + +<p> +They began the work by selecting timber for the cage and machinery for the +mill. Some large sand-stones, which the colonists found to the north of the +lake, were readily made into mill-stones, and the inexhaustible envelope of the +balloon furnished the cloth necessary for the sails. +</p> + +<p> +Smith made his drawings, and the site for the mill was chosen a little to the +right of the poultry-yard, and close to the lake shore. The whole cage rested +upon a pivot, held in position by heavy timbers, in such a manner that it could +turn, with all the mechanism within it, towards any quarter of the wind. +</p> + +<p> +The work progressed rapidly. Neb and Herbert had become expert carpenters, and +had only to follow the plans furnished by the engineer, so that in a very short +time a sort of round watch-house, a regular pepper-box, surmounted by a sharp +roof, rose upon the site selected. The four wings had been firmly fastened by +iron tenons to the main shaft, in such a manner as to make a certain angle with +it. As for the various parts of the interior mechanism—the two +mill-stones, the runner and the feeder; the hopper, a sort of huge square +trough, large above and small below, permitting the grains to fall upon the +mill-stones; the oscillating bucket, designed to regulate the passage of the +grain; and, finally, the bolter, which, by the operation of the sieve, +separated the bran from the flour—all these were easily made. And as +their tools were good, the work simple, and everybody took part in it, the mill +was finished by the 1st of December. +</p> + +<p> +As usual, Pencroff was overjoyed by his work, and he was sure that the machine +was perfection. +</p> + +<p> +“Now, with a good wind, we will merrily grind our corn.” +</p> + +<p> +“Let it be a good wind, Pencroff, but not too strong,” said the +engineer. +</p> + +<p> +“Bah! our mill will turn the faster.” +</p> + +<p> +“It is not necessary to turn rapidly,” replied the engineer. +“Experience has demonstrated that the best results are obtained by a mill +whose wings make six times the number of turns in a minute that the wind +travels feet in a second. Thus, an ordinary wind, which travels twenty-four +feet in a second, will turn the wings of the mill sixteen times in a minute, +which is fast enough.” +</p> + +<p> +“Already!” exclaimed Herbert, “there is a fine breeze from +the northeast, which will be just the thing!” +</p> + +<p> +There was no reason to delay using the mill, and the colonists were anxious to +taste the bread of Lincoln Island; so this very morning two or three bushels of +corn were ground, and the next day, at breakfast, a splendid loaf, rather heavy +perhaps, which had been raised with the barm of beer, was displayed upon the +table of Granite House. Each munched his portion with a pleasure perfectly +inexpressible. +</p> + +<p> +Meantime the Unknown had not come back again. Often Spilett and Herbert had +searched the forest in the neighborhood of Granite House without finding any +trace of him, and all began to be seriously alarmed at his prolonged absence. +Undoubtedly the former savage of Tabor Island would not find it difficult to +live in the forests of the Far West, which were so rich in game; but was it not +to be feared that he would resume his former habits, and that his independence +would revive in him his brutish instincts? Smith alone, by a sort of +presentiment, persisted in saying that the fugitive would return. +</p> + +<p> +“Yes, he will come back,” he repeated with a confidence in which +his companions could not share. “When this poor creature was on Tabor +Island, he knew he was alone, but here, he knows that his kindred await him. +Since he half-spoke of his past life, he will return to tell us everything, and +on that day he will be ours.” +</p> + +<p> +The event proved the correctness of Cyrus Smith’s reasoning. +</p> + +<p> +On the 3d of December, Herbert had gone to the southern shore of the lake, to +fish, and, since the dangerous animals never showed themselves in this part of +the island, he had gone unarmed. +</p> + +<p> +Pencroff and Neb were working in the poultry-yard, while Smith and the reporter +were occupied at the Chimneys making soda, the supply of soap being low. +</p> + +<p> +Suddenly sharp cries of help were heard by Neb and Pencroff, who summoned the +others, and all rushed towards the lake. +</p> + +<p> +But before them, the Unknown, whose presence in the neighborhood had not been +suspected, leapt over Glycerine Creek and bounded along the opposite bank. +</p> + +<p> +There, Herbert stood facing a powerful jaguar, like the one which had been +killed at Reptile End. Taken by surprise, he stood with his back against a +tree, and the animal, crouching on his haunches, was about to spring upon him, +when the Unknown, with no other arm than his knife, threw himself on the brute, +which turned upon its new adversary. +</p> + +<p> +The struggle was short. This man, whose strength and agility was prodigious, +seized the jaguar by the throat in a vice-like grip, and, not heeding the claws +of the beast tearing his flesh, he thrust his knife into its heart. +</p> + +<p> +The jaguar fell, and the Unknown was about turning to go away, when the +colonists came up, and Herbert, catching hold of him, exclaimed:— +</p> + +<p> +“No, no, you must not leave us!” +</p> + +<p> +Smith walked towards the man, who frowned at his approach. The blood was +flowing from a wound in his shoulder, but he did not heed it. +</p> + +<p> +“My friend,” said Smith, “we are in your debt. You have +risked your life to save our boy.” +</p> + +<p> +“My life,” murmured the Unknown; “what is it worth? less than +nothing.” +</p> + +<p> +“You are wounded?” +</p> + +<p> +“That does not matter.” +</p> + +<p> +“Will you not shake hands with me?” asked Herbert. +</p> + +<p> +But on the lad’s seeking to take his hand, the Unknown folded his arms, +his chest heaved, and he looked about as if he wished to escape; but, making a +violent effort at self-control, and in a gruff voice:— +</p> + +<p> +“Who are you?” he asked, “and what are you going to do with +me?” +</p> + +<p> +It was their history that he thus asked for, for the first time. Perhaps, if +that was related, he would tell his own. So Smith, in a few words, recounted +all that had happened since their departure from Richmond; how they had +succeeded, and the resources now at their disposal. +</p> + +<p> +The Unknown listened with the utmost attention. +</p> + +<p> +Then Smith told him who they all were, Spilett, Herbert, Pencroff, Neb, +himself, and he added that the greatest happiness that had come to them since +their arrival on Lincoln Island was on their return from the islet, when they +could count one more companion. +</p> + +<p> +At these words the other colored up, and bowing his head, seemed greatly +agitated. +</p> + +<p> +“And now that you know us,” asked Smith, “will you give us +your hand?” +</p> + +<p> +“No,” answered the Unknown in a hoarse voice; “no! You are +honest men. But I—” +</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2><a name="XXXIX" id="XXXIX"></a>CHAPTER XXXIX</h2> + +<p class="letter"> +ALWAYS APART—A BEQUEST OF THE UNKNOWN’S—THE FARM ESTABLISHED +AT THE CORRAL—TWELVE YEARS—THE BOATSWAIN’S MATE OF THE +BRITANNIA —LEFT ON TABOR ISLAND—THE HAND OF SMITH—THE +MYSTERIOUS PAPER +</p> + +<p> +These last events justified the presentiments of the colonists. There was some +terrible past in the life of this man, expiated, perhaps, in the eyes of men, +but which his conscience still held unabsolved. At any rate, he felt remorse; +he had repented, and his new friends would have cordially grasped that hand, +but he did not feel himself worthy to offer it to honest men. Nevertheless, +after the struggle with the jaguar, he did not go back to the forest, but +remained within the bounds of Granite House. +</p> + +<p> +What was the mystery of this life? Would he speak of it some day? The colonists +thought so, but they agreed that, under no circumstances, would they ask him +for his secret; and, in the meantime, to associate with him as if they +suspected nothing. +</p> + +<p> +For some days everything went on as usual. Smith and Spilett worked together, +sometimes as chemists, sometimes as physicists, the reporter never leaving the +engineer, except to hunt with Herbert, as it was not prudent to allow the young +lad to traverse the forest alone. As to Neb and Pencroff, the work in the +stables and poultry-yard, or at the corral, besides the chores about Granite +House, kept them busy. +</p> + +<p> +The Unknown worked apart from the others. He had gone back to his former habit +of taking no share in the meals, of sleeping under the trees, of having nothing +to do with his companions. It seemed, indeed, as if the society of those who +had saved him was intolerable. +</p> + +<p> +“But why, then,” asked Pencroff, “did he seek succor from his +fellow-creatures; why did he throw this paper in the sea?” +</p> + +<p> +“He will tell us everything,” was Smith’s invariable answer. +</p> + +<p> +“But when?” +</p> + +<p> +“Perhaps sooner than you think, Pencroff.” +</p> + +<p> +And, indeed, on the 10th of December, a week after his return to Granite House, +the Unknown accosted the engineer and in a quiet humble voice said:— +</p> + +<p> +“Sir, I have a request to make.” +</p> + +<p> +“Speak,” replied the engineer, “but, first, let me ask you a +question?” +</p> + +<p> +At these words the Unknown colored and drew back. Smith saw what was passing in +the mind of the culprit, who feared, doubtless, that the engineer would +question him upon his past. +</p> + +<p> +Smith took him by the hand. +</p> + +<p> +“Comrade,” said he, “we are not only companions, we are +friends. I wanted to say this to you first, now I will listen.” +</p> + +<p> +The Unknown covered his eyes with his hand; a sort of tremor seized him, and +for some moments he was unable to articulate a word. +</p> + +<p> +“Sir,” said he, at length, “I came to implore a favor from +you.” +</p> + +<p> +“What is it?” +</p> + +<p> +“You have, four or five miles from here, at the foot of the mountain, a +corral for your animals. These require looking after. Will you permit me to +live over there with them?” +</p> + +<p> +Smith regarded the unhappy man for some time, with deep commiseration. +Then:— +</p> + +<p> +“My friend,” said he, “the corral has nothing but sheds, only +fit for the animals—” +</p> + +<p> +“It will be good enough, for me, sir.” +</p> + +<p> +“My friend,” replied Smith, “we will never thwart you in +anything. If you wish to live in the corral, you may; nevertheless, you will +always be welcome at Granite House. But since you desire to stay at the corral, +we will do what is necessary to make you comfortable.” +</p> + +<p> +“Never mind about that, I will get along well enough.” +</p> + +<p> +“My friend,” responded Smith, who persisted in the use of this +cordial title, “you must let us be the judges in that matter.” +</p> + +<p> +The Unknown thanked the engineer and went away. And Smith, having told his +companions of the proposition that had been made, they decided to build a log +house at the corral, and to make it as comfortable as possible. +</p> + +<p> +The same day the colonists went, with the necessary tools, to the place, and +before the week was out the house was ready for its guest. It was built twenty +feet from the sheds, at a place where the herd of moufflons, now numbering +twenty-four animals, could be easily overlooked. Some furniture, including a +bed, table, bench, clothes-press, and chest was made, and some arms, +ammunition, and tools, were carried there. +</p> + +<p> +The Unknown, meanwhile, had not seen his new home, letting the colonists work +without him, while he remained at the plateau, wishing, doubtless, to finish up +his work there. And, indeed, by his exertion the ground was completely tilled, +and ready for the sowing when the time should arrive. +</p> + +<p> +On the 20th everything was prepared at the corral, aid the engineer told the +Unknown that his house was ready for him, to which the other replied that he +would sleep there that night. +</p> + +<p> +The same evening, the colonists were all together in the great hall of Granite +House. It was 8 o’clock, the time of their companion’s departure; +and not wishing by their presence to impose on him the leave-taking, which +would, perhaps, have cost him an effort, they had left him alone and gone up +into Granite House. +</p> + +<p> +They had been conversing together in the hall for some minutes, when there was +a light knock on the door, the Unknown entered, and without further +introduction:— +</p> + +<p> +“Before I leave you, sirs,” said he, “it is well that you +should know my history. This is it.” +</p> + +<p> +These simple words greatly affected Smith and companions. The engineer started +up. +</p> + +<p> +“We ask to hear nothing, my friend,” he said. “It is your +right to be silent—” +</p> + +<p> +“It is my duty to speak.” +</p> + +<p> +“Then sit down.” +</p> + +<p> +“I will stand where I am.” +</p> + +<p> +“We are ready to hear what you have to say,” said Smith. +</p> + +<p> +The Unknown stood in a shadowed corner of the hall, bare-headed, his arms +crossed on his breast. In this position, in a hoarse voice, speaking as one who +forces himself to speak, he made the following recital, uninterrupted by any +word from his auditors:— +</p> + +<p> +“On the 20th of December, 1854, a steam pleasure-yacht, the Duncan, +belonging to a Scotch nobleman, Lord Glenarvan, cast anchor at Cape Bernoulli, +on the western coast of Australia, near the thirty-seventh parallel. On board +the yacht were Lord Glenarvan, his wife, a major in the English army, a French +geographer, a little boy, and a little girl. These two last were the children +of Captain Grant, of the ship Britannia, which, with its cargo, had been lost +the year before. The Duncan was commanded by Captain John Mangles, and was +manned by a crew of fifteen men. +</p> + +<p> +“This is the reason why the yacht was on the Australian coast at that +season:— +</p> + +<p> +“Six months before, a bottle containing a paper written in English, +German, and French, had been picked up by the Duncan in the Irish Sea. This +paper said, in substance, that three persons still survived from the wreck of +the Britannia; that they were the captain and two of the men; that they had +found refuge on a land of which the latitude and longitude was given, but the +longitude, blotted by the sea water, was no longer legible. +</p> + +<p> +“The latitude was 37° 11’ south. Now, as the longitude was unknown, +if they followed the latitude across continents and seas, they were certain to +arrive at the land inhabited by Captain Grant and his companions. +</p> + +<p> +“The English Admiralty, having hesitated to undertake the search, Lord +Glenarvan had resolved to do everything in his power to recover the captain. +Mary and Robert Grant had been in correspondence with him, and the yacht Duncan +was made ready for a long voyage, in which the family of Lord Glenarvan and the +children of the captain intended to participate. The Duncan, leaving Glasgow, +crossed the Atlantic, passed the Straits of Magellan, and proceeded up the +Pacific to Patagonia, where, according to the first theory suggested by the +paper, they might believe that Captain Grant was a prisoner to the natives. +</p> + +<p> +“The Duncan left its passengers on the western coast of Patagonia, and +sailed for Cape Corrientes on the eastern coast, there to wait for them. +</p> + +<p> +“Lord Glenarvan crossed Patagonia, following the 37th parallel, and, not +having found any trace of the captain, he reembarked on the 13th of November, +in order to continue his search across the ocean. +</p> + +<p> +“After having visited without success the islands of Tristan +d’Acunha and of Amsterdam, lying in the course, the Duncan, as I have +stated, arrived at Cape Bernouilli on the 20th of December, 1854. +</p> + +<p> +“It was Lord Glenarvan’s intention to cross Australia, as he had +crossed Patagonia, and he disembarked. Some miles from the coast was a farm +belonging to an Irishman, who offered hospitality to the travellers. Lord +Glenarvan told the Irishman the object which had brought him to that region, +and asked if he had heard of an English three-master, the Britannia, having +been lost, within two years, on the west coast of Australia. +</p> + +<p> +“The Irishman had never heard of this disaster, but, to the great +surprise of everybody, one of his servants, intervening, said:— +</p> + +<p> +“‘Heaven be praised, my lord. If Captain Grant is still alive he is +in Australia.’ +</p> + +<p> +“‘Who are you?’ demanded Lord Glenarvan. +</p> + +<p> +“‘A Scotchman, like yourself, my lord,’ answered this man, +‘and one of the companions of Captain Grant, one of the survivors of the +Britannia.’ +</p> + +<p> +“This man called himself Ayrton. He had been, in short, boatswain’s +mate of the Britannia, as his papers proved. But, separated from Captain Grant +at the moment when the ship went to pieces on the rocks, he had believed until +this moment that every one had perished but himself. +</p> + +<p> +“‘Only,’ he added, ‘it was not on the western but on +the eastern coast of Australia that the Britannia was lost; and if the Captain +is still living he is a prisoner to the natives, and he must be searched for +there.’ +</p> + +<p> +“This man said these things frankly and with a confident expression. No +one would have doubted what he said. The Irishman, in whose service he had been +for more than a year, spoke in his favor. Lord Glenarvan believed in his +loyalty, and, following his advice, he resolved to cross Australia, following +the 37th parallel. Lord Glenarvan, his wife, the children, the major, the +Frenchman, Captain Mangles and some sailors formed the little party under the +guidance of Ayrton, while the Duncan, under the command of the mate, Tom +Austin, went to Melbourne, to await further instructions. +</p> + +<p> +“They left on the 23d of December, 1861. +</p> + +<p> +“It is time to say that this Ayrton was a traitor. He was, indeed, the +boatswain’s mate of the Britannia; but, after some dispute with his +captain, he had tried to excite the crew to mutiny and seize the ship, and +Captain Grant had put him ashore, the 8th of April, 1832, on the west coast of +Australia, and had gone off, leaving him there, which was no more than right. +</p> + +<p> +“Thus this wretch knew nothing of the shipwreck of the Britannia. He had +just learned it from Lord Glenarvan’s recital! Since his abandonment, he +had become, under the name of Ben Joyce, the leader of some escaped convicts; +and, if he impudently asserted the ship had been lost on the east coast, if he +urged Lord Glenarvan to go in that direction, it was in the hope of separating +him from his ship, of seizing the Duncan, and of making this yacht a pirate of +the Pacific.” +</p> + +<p> +Here the Unknown stopped for a moment. His voice trembled, but he began again +in these words:— +</p> + +<p> +“The expedition across Australia set out. It was naturally unfortunate, +since Ayrton, or Ben Joyce, whichever you wish, led it, sometimes preceded, +sometimes followed by the band of convicts, who had been informed of the plot. +</p> + +<p> +“Meanwhile, the Duncan had been taken to Melbourne to await instructions. +It was therefore necessary to persuade Lord Glenarvan to order her to leave +Melbourne and to proceed to the east coast of Australia, where it would be easy +to seize her. After having led the expedition sufficiently near this coast, +into the midst of vast forests, where all resources were wanting, Ayrton +obtained a letter which he was ordered to deliver to the mate of the Duncan; a +letter which gave the order directing the yacht to proceed immediately to the +east coast, to Twofold Bay, a place some days journey from the spot where the +expedition had halted. It was at this place that Ayrton had given the +rendezvous to his accomplices. +</p> + +<p> +“At the moment when this letter was to have been sent, the traitor was +unmasked and was obliged to flee. But this letter, giving him the Duncan, must +be had at any cost. Ayrton succeeded in getting hold of it, and, in two days +afterwards, he was in Melbourne. +</p> + +<p> +“So far, the criminal had succeeded in his odious projects. He could take +the Duncan to this Twofold Bay, where it would be easy for the convicts to +seize her; and, her crew massacred, Ben Joyce would be master of the sea. +Heaven stopped him in the consummation of these dark designs. +</p> + +<p> +“Ayrton, having reached Melbourne, gave the letter to the mate, Tom +Austin, who made ready to execute the order; but one can judge of the +disappointment and the rage of Ayrton, when, the second day out, he learned +that the mate was taking the ship, not to Twofold Bay on the east coast of +Australia, but to the east coast of New Zealand. He wished to oppose this, but +the mate showed him his order. And, in truth, by a providential error of the +French geographer who had written this letter, the eastern coast of New Zealand +had been named as their place of destination. +</p> + +<p> +“All the plans of Ayrton had miscarried. He tried to mutiny. They put him +in irons; and he was taken to the coast of New Zealand, unaware of what had +become of his accomplices, or of Lord Glenarvan. +</p> + +<p> +“The Duncan remained on this coast until the 3d of March. On that day, +Ayrton heard firing. It was a salute from the Duncan, and, very soon, Lord +Glenarvan and all his party came on board. +</p> + +<p> +“This is what had happened:— +</p> + +<p> +“After innumerable fatigues and dangers, Lord Glenarvan had been able to +accomplish his journey and arrived at Twofold Bay. The Duncan was not there! He +telegraphed to Melbourne, and received a reply:—’Duncan sailed on +the 18th. Destination unknown.’ +</p> + +<p> +“Lord Glenarvan could think of but one explanation, that was that the +good yacht had fallen into the hands of Ben Joyce, and had become a pirate +ship. +</p> + +<p> +“Nevertheless, Lord Glenarvan did not wish to give up his undertaking. He +was an intrepid and a generous man. He embarked on a merchant vessel, which +took him to the west coast of New Zealand, and he crossed the country, +following the 37th parallel without finding any trace of Captain Grant; but on +the other coast, to his great surprise, and by the bounty of Heaven, he found +the Duncan, commanded by the mate, which had been waiting for him for five +weeks! +</p> + +<p> +“It was the 3d of March, 1855. Lord Glenarvan was again on the Duncan, +but Ayrton was there also. He was brought before his lordship, who wished to +get from this bandit all that he knew concerning Captain Grant. Ayrton refused +to speak. Lord Glenarvan told him, then, that at the first port, he would be +given over to the English authorities. Ayrton remained silent. +</p> + +<p> +“The Duncan continued along the thirty-seventh parallel. Meanwhile, Lady +Glenarvan undertook to overcome the obstinacy of the bandit, and, finally, her +influence conquered him. Ayrton, in exchange for what he would tell, proposed +to Lord Glenarvan to leave him upon one of the islands in the Pacific, instead +of giving him up to the English authorities. Lord Glenarvan, ready to do +anything to gain information concerning Captain Grant, consented. +</p> + +<p> +“Then Ayrton told the history of his life, and declared that he knew +nothing about Captain Grant since the day when the latter had left him on the +Australian coast. +</p> + +<p> +“Nevertheless, Lord Glenarvan kept the promise he had made. The Duncan, +continuing her route, arrived at Tabor Island. It was there that Ayrton was to +be left, and it was there, too, that, by a miracle, they found Captain Grant +and his two companions. The convict was put upon the island in their stead, and +when he left the yacht, Lord Glenarvan spoke to him in these words:— +</p> + +<p> +“‘Here, Ayrton, you will be far from any country, and without any +possible means of communicating with your fellow-men. You will not be able to +leave this island. You will be alone, under the eye of a God who looks into the +depths of our hearts, but you will neither be lost nor neglected, like Captain +Grant. Unworthy as you are of the remembrance of men, you will be remembered. I +know where you are, Ayrton, and I know where to find you. I will never forget +it.’ +</p> + +<p> +“And the Duncan, setting sail, soon disappeared. +</p> + +<p> +“This was the 18th of March, 1855. +</p> + +<p> +“Ayrton was alone; but he lacked neither ammunition nor arms nor seeds. +He, the convict, had at his disposal the house built by the honest Captain +Grant. He had only to live and to expiate in solitude the crimes which he had +committed. +</p> + +<p> +“Sirs, he repented; he was ashamed of his crimes, and he was very +unhappy. He said to himself that, as some day men would come to seek him on +this islet, he must make himself worthy to go back with them. How he suffered, +the miserable man! How he labored to benefit himself by labor! How he prayed to +regenerate himself by prayer! +</p> + +<p> +“For two years, for three years, it was thus. Ayrton, crushed by this +isolation, ever on the watch for a ship to appear upon the horizon of his +island, asking himself if the time of expiation was nearly ended, suffered as +one has rarely suffered. Oh! but solitude is hard, for a soul gnawed by +remorse! +</p> + +<p> +“But, doubtless, Heaven found this unhappy wretch insufficiently +punished, for he fell, little by little, till he became a savage! He felt, +little by little, the brute nature taking possession of him. He cannot say +whether this was after two or four years of +</p> + +<p> +abandonment, but at last he became the miserable being whom you found. +</p> + +<p> +“I need not tell you, sirs, that Ayrton and Ben Joyce and I are +one!” +</p> + +<p> +Smith and his companions rose as this recital was finished. It is hard to say +how deeply they were affected! Such misery, such grief, and such despair, had +been shown to them! +</p> + +<p> +“Ayrton,” said Smith, “you have been a great criminal, but +Heaven has, doubtless, witnessed the expiation of your crimes. This is proved, +in that you have been restored to your fellow-men. Ayrton, you are pardoned! +And now, will you be our companion?” +</p> + +<p> +The man drew back. +</p> + +<p> +“Here is my hand,” said the engineer. +</p> + +<p> +Ayrton darted forward and seized it, great tears streaming from his eyes. +</p> + +<p> +“Do you desire to live with us?” asked Smith. +</p> + +<p> +“Oh, Mr. Smith, let me have yet a little time,” he answered, +“let me remain alone in the house at the corral!” +</p> + +<p> +“Do as you wish, Ayrton,” responded Smith. +</p> + +<p> +The unhappy man was about retiring, when Smith asked him a last question. +</p> + +<p> +“One word more, my friend. Since it is your wish to live in solitude, why +did you throw that paper, which put us in the way of finding you, into the +sea?” +</p> + +<p> +“A paper?” answered Ayrton, who seemed not to understand what was +said. +</p> + +<p> +“Yes, that paper, which we found enclosed in a bottle, and which gave the +exact situation of Tabor Island?” +</p> + +<p> +The man put his hand to his forehead, and, after some reflection, said:— +</p> + +<p> +“I never threw any paper into the sea!” +</p> + +<p> +“Never!” cried Pencroff. +</p> + +<p> +“Never!” +</p> + +<p> +And then, inclining his head, Ayrton left the room. +</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2><a name="XL" id="XL"></a>CHAPTER XL.</h2> + +<p class="letter"> +A TALK—SMITH AND SPILETT—THE ENGINEER’S IDEA—THE +ELECTRIC TELEGRAPH—THE WIRES—THE BATTER-THE ALPHABET—FINE +WEATHER—THE PROSPERITY OF THE COLONY—PHOTOGRAPHY—A SNOW +EFFECT—TWO YEARS ON LINCOLN ISLAND. +</p> + +<p> +“The poor man!” said Herbert, returning from the door, after having +watched Ayrton slide down the rope of the elevator and disappear in the +darkness. +</p> + +<p> +“He will come back,” said Smith. +</p> + +<p> +“What does it mean?” exclaimed Pencroff. “That he had not +thrown this bottle into the sea? Then who did it?” +</p> + +<p> +Certainly, if there was a reasonable question this was. +</p> + +<p> +“He did it,” replied Neb; “only the poor fellow was half out +of his senses at the time.” +</p> + +<p> +“Yes,” said Herbert, “and he had no knowledge of what he was +doing.” +</p> + +<p> +“It can be explained in no other way, my friends,” responded Smith, +hurriedly, “and I understand, now, how Ayrton was able to give the exact +situation of the island, since the events prior to his abandonment gave him +that knowledge.” +</p> + +<p> +“Nevertheless,” observed Pencroff, “he was not a brute when +he wrote that paper, and if it is seven or eight years since it was thrown into +the sea, how is it that the paper has not been injured by moisture?” +</p> + +<p> +“It proves,” said Smith, “that Ayrton retained possession of +his faculties to a period much more recent than he imagines.” +</p> + +<p> +“That must be it,” replied Pencroff, “for otherwise the thing +would be inexplicable.” +</p> + +<p> +“Inexplicable, indeed,” answered the engineer, who seemed not to +wish to prolong this talk. +</p> + +<p> +“Has Ayrton told the truth?” questioned the sailor. +</p> + +<p> +“Yes,” answered the reporter, “the history he has related is +true in every particular. I remember, perfectly well, that the papers reported +Lord Glenarvan’s undertaking and its result.” +</p> + +<p> +“Ayrton has told the truth,” added Smith, “without any doubt, +Pencroff, since it was trying enough for him to do so. A man does not lie when +he accuses himself in this way.” +</p> + +<p> +The next day—the 21st—the colonists went down to the beach, and +then clambered up to the plateau, but they saw nothing of Ayrton. The man had +gone to his house the night before, and they judged it best not to intrude upon +him. Time would, doubtless, effect what sympathy would fail to accomplish. +</p> + +<p> +Herbert, Pencroff, and Neb resumed their accustomed occupations; and it +happened that their work brought Smith and Spilett together at the Chimneys. +</p> + +<p> +“Do you know, Cyrus, that your explanation of yesterday about the bottle +does not satisfy me at all? It is impossible to suppose that this unhappy +creature could have written that paper, and thrown the bottle into the sea, +without remembering anything about it!” +</p> + +<p> +“Consequently, it is not he who threw it there, my dear Spilett!” +</p> + +<p> +“Then you believe—” +</p> + +<p> +“I believe nothing, I know nothing!” replied Smith, interrupting +the reporter. “I place this incident with those others which I have not +been able to explain!” +</p> + +<p> +“In truth, Cyrus,” said Spilett, “these things are +incredible. Your rescue, the box thrown up on the beach, Top’s +adventures, and now this bottle. Will we never have an answer to these +enigmas?” +</p> + +<p> +“Yes,” answered the engineer, earnestly, “yes, when I shall +have penetrated the bowels of this island!” +</p> + +<p> +“Chance will, perhaps, give us the key to this mystery.” +</p> + +<p> +“Chance, Spilett! I do not believe in chance any more than I believe in +mystery in this world. There is a cause for everything, however inexplicable, +which has happened here, and I will discover it. But, while waiting, let us +watch and work.” +</p> + +<p> +January arrived, and the year 1867 began. The works had been pushed forward +vigorously. One day Herbert and Spilett, passing the corral, ascertained that +Ayrton had taken possession of his abode. He occupied himself with the large +herd confided to his care, and thus saved his companions the necessity of +visiting it two or three times a week. Nevertheless, in order not to leave +Ayrton too much alone, they frequently went there. +</p> + +<p> +It was just as well—owing to certain suspicions shared by Smith and +Spilett—that this part of the island should be under a certain +supervision, and Ayrton, if anything happened, would not fail to let the +inhabitants of Granite House know of it. +</p> + +<p> +Possibly, some sudden event might happen, which it would be important to +communicate to the engineer without delay. And, aside from whatever might be +connected with the mystery of the island, other things, requiring the prompt +intervention of the colonists, might occur, as, for example, the discovering of +a ship in the offing and in sight of the west coast, a wreck on that shore, the +possible arrival of pirates, etc. +</p> + +<p> +So Smith determined to place the corral in instant communication with Granite +House. +</p> + +<p> +It was the 10th of January when he told his project to his companions. +</p> + +<p> +“How are you going to do such a thing as that, Mr. Smith?” asked +Pencroff. “Maybe you propose to erect a telegraph!” +</p> + +<p> +“That is precisely what I propose to do.” +</p> + +<p> +“Electric?” exclaimed Herbert. +</p> + +<p> +“Electric,” responded Smith. “We have everything necessary +for making a battery, and the most difficult part will be to make the wires, +but I think we can succeed.” +</p> + +<p> +“Well, after this,” replied the sailor, “I expect some day to +see us riding along on a railway!” +</p> + +<p> +They entered upon the work at once, beginning with the most difficult part, +that is to say, the manufacture of the wires, since, if that failed, it would +be useless to make the battery and other accessories. +</p> + +<p> +The iron of Lincoln Island was, as we know, of excellent quality, and, +therefore, well adapted to the purpose. Smith began by making a steel plate, +pierced with conical holes of different sizes, which would bring the wire to +the desired size. This piece of steel, after having been tempered +“through and through,” was fixed firmly to a solid frame-work sunk +in the ground, only a few feet distant from the waterfall—the motive +power which the engineer intended to use. +</p> + +<p> +And, indeed, there was the fulling-mill, not then in use, the main shaft of +which turned with great force, and would serve to draw out the wire and roll it +around itself. +</p> + +<p> +The operation was delicate and required great care. The iron, previously made +into long and thin bars, with tapering ends, having been introduced into the +largest hole of the drawing-plate, was drawn out by the main shaft of the mill, +rolled out to a length of 25 or 30 feet, then unrolled, and pulled, in turn, +through the smaller holes; and at length, the engineer obtained wires 30 or 40 +feet long, which it was easy to join together and place along the five miles +between the corral and Granite House. +</p> + +<p> +It took but a little while to get this work under way, and then, Smith, making +his companions the wire-drawers, busied himself in the construction of his +battery. +</p> + +<p> +It was necessary to make a battery with a constant circuit. We know that modern +batteries are usually made of a certain kind of coke, zinc, and copper. Copper +the engineer was without, since, in spite of all his efforts, he had been +unable to find a trace of it on the island. The coke, which is that hard +deposit obtained from gas retorts could be procured, but it would be necessary +to arrange a special apparatus—a difficult thing to do. As to the zinc, +it will be remembered that the box found on Jetsam Point, was lined with a +sheet of that metal, which could not be better utilized than at present. +</p> + +<p> +Smith, after deep reflection, resolved to make a very simple battery, something +like that which Becquerel invented in 1820, in which zinc alone is used. The +other substances, nitric-acid and potash, he had at hand. +</p> + +<p> +The manner in which he made this battery, in which the current was produced by +the action of the acid and the potash on each other, was as follows:— +</p> + +<p> +A certain number of glass vessels were made and filled with nitric-acid. They +were corked with perforated corks, containing glass tubes reaching into the +acid, and stopped: with clay plugs, connected with threads. Into these tubes +the engineer poured a solution of potash—obtained from burnt +plants—and thus the acid and the potash reacted on each other through the +clay. +</p> + +<p> +Then Smith plunged two plates of zinc, the one in the nitric acid, the other in +the solution, and thus produced a circuit between the tube and jar, and as +these plates had been connected by a bit of wire, the one in the tube became +the positive and the other the negative pole of the apparatus. Each jar +produced its currents, which, together, were sufficient to cause all the +phenomena of the electric telegraph. +</p> + +<p> +On the 6th of February they began to erect the poles, furnished with glass +insulators, and some days later the wire was stretched, ready to produce the +electric current, which travels with the speed of 100,000 kilometres a second. +</p> + +<p> +Two batteries had been made, one for Granite House, and the other for the +corral, as, if the corral had to communicate with Granite House, it might, +also, be needful for Granite House to communicate with the corral. +</p> + +<p> +As to the indicator and manipulator, they were very simple. At both stations +the wire was wrapped around an electro-magnet of soft iron. Communication was +established between the two poles; the current, leaving the positive pole, +traversed the wire, passed into the electro-magnet, and returned under ground +to the negative pole. The current closed, the attraction of the electro-magnet +ceased. It was, therefore, sufficient to place a plate of soft iron before the +electro-magnet which, attracted while the current is passing, falls, when it is +interrupted. The movement of the plate thus obtained, Smith easily fastened to +it a needle, pointing to a dial, which bore the letters of the alphabet upon +its face. +</p> + +<p> +Everything was finished by the 12th of February. On that day Smith, having +turned on the current, asked if everything was all right at the corral, and +received, in a few moments, a satisfactory reply from Ayrton. +</p> + +<p> +Pencroff was beside himself with delight, and every morning and evening he sent +a telegraph to the corral, which never remained unanswered. +</p> + +<p> +This method of communication presented evident advantages, both in informing +the colonists of Ayrton’s presence at the corral, and in preventing his +complete isolation. Moreover, Smith never allowed a week to pass without +visiting him, and Ayrton came occasionally to Granite House, where he always +found a kind reception. +</p> + +<p> +Continuing their accustomed work, the fine weather passed away, and the +resources of the colony, particularly in vegetables and cereals, increased from +day to day, and the plants brought from Tabor Island had been perfectly +acclimated. The plateau presented a most attractive appearance. The fourth crop +of corn had been excellent, and no one undertook to count the 400,000,000,000 +grains produced in the harvest; although Pencroff had had some such idea, until +Smith informed him that, supposing he could count 300 grains a minute, or +18,000 an hour, it would take him 5,500 years to accomplish his undertaking. +</p> + +<p> +The weather was superb, though somewhat warm during the day; but, in the +evening, the sea-breeze sprung up, tempering the air and giving refreshing +nights to the inhabitants of Granite House. Still there were some storms, +which, although not long continued, fell upon Lincoln Island with extraordinary +violence. For several hours at a time the lightning never ceased illuminating +the heavens, and the thunder roared without cessation. +</p> + +<p> +This was a season of great prosperity to the little colony. The denizens of the +poultry-yard increased rapidly, and the colonists lived on this increase, as it +was necessary to keep the population within certain limits. The pigs had +littered, and Pencroff and Neb’s attention to these animals absorbed a +great part of their time. There were too young onagers, and their parents were +often ridden by Spilett and Herbert, or hitched to the cart to drag wood or +bring the minerals which the engineer made use of. +</p> + +<p> +Many explorations were made about this time into the depths of the Far West. +The explorers did not suffer from the heat, as the sun’s rays could not +penetrate the leafy roof above them. Thus, they visited all that part to the +left of the Mercy, bordering on the route from the corral to the mouth of Fall +River. +</p> + +<p> +But during these excursions the colonists took care to be well armed, as they +often encountered exceedingly savage and ferocious wild boars. They also waged +war against the jaguars, for which animals Spilett had a special hatred, and +his pupil, Herbert, seconded him well. Armed as they were, the hunters never +shunned an encounter with these beasts, and the courage of Herbert was superb, +while the coolness of the reporter was astonishing. Twenty magnificent skins +already ornamented the hall at Granite House, and at this rate the jaguars +would soon be exterminated. +</p> + +<p> +Sometimes the engineer took part in explorations of the unknown portions of the +island, which he observed with minute attention. There were other traces than +those of animals which he sought for in the thickest places in the forests, but +not once did anything suspicions appear. Top and Jup, who accompanied him, +showed by their action that there was nothing there, and yet the dog had +growled more than once again above that pit which the engineer had explored +without result. +</p> + +<p> +During this season Spilett, assisted by Herbert, took numerous views of the +most picturesque portions of the island, by means of the photographic +apparatus, which had not been used until now. +</p> + +<p> +This apparatus, furnished with a powerful lens, was very complete. All the +substances necessary in photographic work were there; the nitrate of silver, +the hyposulphata of soda, the chloride of ammonium, the acetate of soda, and +the chloride of gold. Even the paper was there, all prepared, so that all that +was necessary, in order to use it, was to steep it for a few moments in diluted +nitrate of silver. +</p> + +<p> +The reporter and his assistant soon became expert operators, and they obtained +fine views of the neighborhood, such as a comprehensive view of the island +taken from Prospect Plateau, with Mount Franklin on the horizon, the mouth of +the Mercy so picturesquely framed between its high rocks, the glade and the +corral, with the lower spurs of the mountain in the background, the curious +outline of Claw Cape, Jetsam Point, etc. Neither did the photographers forget +to take portraits of all the inhabitants of the island, without exception. +</p> + +<p> +“Its people,” as Pencroff expressed it. +</p> + +<p> +And the sailor was charmed to see his likeness, faithfully reproduced, +ornamenting the walls of Granite House, and he stood before this display as +pleased as if he had been gazing in one of the richest show-windows on +Broadway. +</p> + +<p> +It must be confessed, however, that the portrait, showing the finest execution, +was that of master Jup. Master Jup has posed with a gravity impossible to +describe, and his picture was a speaking likeness! +</p> + +<p> +“One would say he was laughing!” exclaimed Pencroff. +</p> + +<p> +And if Jup had not been satisfied, he must have been hard to please. But there +it was, and he contemplated his image with such a sentimental air, that it was +evident he was a little conceited. +</p> + +<p> +The heat of the summer ended with March. The season was rainy, but the air was +still warm, and the month was not as pleasant as they had expected. Perhaps it +foreboded an early and a rigorous winter. +</p> + +<p> +One morning, the 21st, Herbert had risen early, and, looking from the window, +exclaimed:— +</p> + +<p> +“Hullo, the islet is covered with snow!” +</p> + +<p> +“Snow at this season!” cried the reporter, joining the lad. +</p> + +<p> +Their companions were soon beside them, and every one saw that not only the +islet, but that the entire beach below Granite House, was covered with the +white mantle. +</p> + +<p> +“It is, indeed, snow,” said Pencroff. +</p> + +<p> +“Or something very much like it,” replied Neb. +</p> + +<p> +“But the thermometer stands at 58°,” said Spilett. +</p> + +<p> +Smith looked at the white covering without speaking, for he was, indeed, at a +loss how to explain such a phenomenon in this season and in this temperature. +</p> + +<p> +“The deuce!” cried the sailor; “our crops will have been +frost-bitten.” +</p> + +<p> +And he was about descending when Jup sprang before him and slid down the rope +to the ground. +</p> + +<p> +The orang had scarcely touched the earth before the immense body of snow rose +and scattered itself through the air in such innumerable flocks as to darken +all the heavens for a time. +</p> + +<p> +“They are birds!” cried Herbert. +</p> + +<p> +The effect had, indeed, been produced by myriads of sea-birds, with plumage of +brilliant whiteness. They had come from hundreds of miles around on to the +islet and the coast, and they now disappeared in the horizon, leaving the +colonists as amazed as if they had witnessed a transformation scene, from +winter to summer, in some fancy spectacle. Unfortunately, the change had been +so sudden that neither the reporter nor the lad had had an opportunity of +knocking over some of these birds, whose species they did not recognize. +</p> + +<p> +A few days later, and it was the 26th of March. Two years had passed since the +balloon had been thrown upon Lincoln Island. +</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2><a name="XLI" id="XLI"></a>CHAPTER XLI.</h2> + +<p class="letter"> +THOUGHTS OF HOME—CHANCES OF RETURN —PLAN TO EXPLORE THE +COAST—THE DEPARTURE OF THE 16TH OF APRIL—SERPENTINE PENINSULA SEEN +FROM SEA—THE BASALTIC CLIFFS OF THE WESTERN COAST—BAD +WEATHER—NIGHT—A NEW INCIDENT. +</p> + +<p> +Two years already! For two years the colonists had had no communication with +their fellows! They knew no more of what was happening in the world, lost upon +this island, than if they had been upon the most distant asteroid of the solar +system. +</p> + +<p> +What was going on in their country? Their fatherland was always present to +their eyes, that land which, when they left it, was torn by civil strife, which +perhaps was still red with rebellious blood. It was a great grief to them, this +war, and they often talked about it, never doubting, however, that the cause of +the North would triumph for the honor of the American confederation. +</p> + +<p> +During these two years not a ship had been seen. It was evident that Lincoln +Island was out of the route of vessels; that it was unknown—the maps +proved this—was evident, because, although it had no harbor, yet its +streams would have drawn thither vessels desiring to renew their supply of +water. But the surrounding sea was always desert, and the colonists could count +on no outside help to bring them to their home. +</p> + +<p> +Nevertheless, one chance of rescue existed, which was discussed one day in the +first week of April, when the colonists were gathered in the hall of Granite +House. +</p> + +<p> +They had been talking of America and of the small hope of ever seeing it again. +</p> + +<p> +“Undoubtedly, there is but one way of leaving the island,” said +Spilett, “which is, to build a vessel large enough to make a voyage of +some hundreds of miles. It seems to me, that, when one can build a shallop, +they can readily build a ship.” +</p> + +<p> +“And that they can as easily go to the Low Archipelago as to Tabor +Island,” added Herbert. +</p> + +<p> +“I do not say we cannot,” replied Pencroff, who always had the most +to say on questions of a maritime nature; “I do not say we cannot, +although it is very different whether one goes far or near! If our sloop had +been threatened with bad weather when we went to Tabor Island, we knew that a +shelter was not far off in either direction; but 1,200 miles to travel is a +long bit of road, and the nearest land is at least that distance!” +</p> + +<p> +“Do you mean, supposing the case to occur, Pencroff, that you would not +risk it?” questioned the reporter. +</p> + +<p> +“I would undertake whatever you wished, sir,” replied the sailor, +“and you know I am not the man to draw back.” +</p> + +<p> +“Remember, moreover, that we have another sailor with us, now,” +said Neb. +</p> + +<p> +“Who do you mean,” asked Pencroff. +</p> + +<p> +“Ayrton.” +</p> + +<p> +“That is true,” responded Herbert. +</p> + +<p> +“If he would join us,” remarked Pencroff. +</p> + +<p> +“Why,” said the reporter, “do you think that if Lord +Glenarvan’s yacht had arrived at Tabor Island while Ayrton was living +there, that he would have refused to leave?” +</p> + +<p> +“You forget, my friends,” said Smith, “that Ayrton was not +himself during the last few years there. But that is not the question. It is +important to know whether we can count on the return of this Scotch vessel as +among our chances for rescue. Now, Lord Glenarvan promised Ayrton that he would +return to Tabor Island, when he judged his crimes sufficiently punished, and I +believe that he will return. +</p> + +<p> +“Yes,” said the reporter, “and, moreover, I think he will +return soon, as already Ayrton has been here twelve years!” +</p> + +<p> +“I, also, think this lord will come back, and, probably, very soon. But +where will he come to? Not here, but to Tabor Island.” +</p> + +<p> +“That is as sure as that Lincoln Island is not on the maps,” said +Herbert. +</p> + +<p> +“Therefore, my friends,” replied Smith, “we must take the +necessary precautions to have Ayrton’s and our presence on Lincoln Island +advertised on Tabor Island.” +</p> + +<p> +“Evidently,” said the reporter, “and nothing can be easier +than to place in Captain Grant’s cabin a notice, giving the situation of +our island.” +</p> + +<p> +“It is, nevertheless, annoying,” rejoined the sailor, “that +we forgot to do that on our first voyage to the place.” +</p> + +<p> +“Why should we have done so?” replied Herbert. “We knew +nothing about Ayrton at that time, and when we learned his history, the season +was too far advanced to allow of our going back there.” +</p> + +<p> +“Yes,” answered Smith, “it was too late then, and we had to +postpone the voyage until spring.” +</p> + +<p> +“But supposing the yacht comes in the meantime?” asked Pencroff. +</p> + +<p> +“It is not likely,” replied the engineer, “as Lord Glenarvan +would not choose the winter season to adventure into these distant seas. Either +it has already been to the island, in the five months that Ayrton has been with +us, or it will come later, and it will be time enough, in the first fine +weather of October, to go to Tabor Island and leave a notice there.” +</p> + +<p> +“It would, indeed, be unfortunate,” said Neb, “if the Duncan +has been to and left these seas within a few months.” +</p> + +<p> +“I hope that it is not so,” answered Smith, “and that Heaven +has not deprived us of this last remaining chance.” +</p> + +<p> +“I think,” observed the reporter, “that, at least, we will +know what our chances are, when we have visited the island; for those Stockmen +would, necessarily, leave some trace of their visit, had they been +there.” +</p> + +<p> +“Doubtless,” answered the engineer. “And, my friends, since +we have this chance of rescue, let us wait patiently, and if we find it has +been taken from us, we will see then what to do.” +</p> + +<p> +“At any rate,” said Pencroff, “it is agreed that if we do +leave the inland by some way or another, it will not be on account of +ill-treatment!” +</p> + +<p> +“No indeed, Pencroff,” replied the reporter, “it will be +because we are far from everything which a man loves in this world, his family, +his friends, his country!” +</p> + +<p> +Everything having been thus arranged there was no longer any question of +building a ship, and the colonists occupied themselves in preparing for their +third winter in Granite House. +</p> + +<p> +But they determined, before the bad weather set in, to make a voyage in the +sloop around the island. The exploration of the coast had never been completed, +and the colonists had only an imperfect idea of its western and northern +portions from the mouth of Fall River to the Mandible Capes, and of the narrow +bay between them. +</p> + +<p> +Pencroff had proposed this excursion, and Smith had gladly agreed to it, as he +wished to see for himself all that part of his domain. +</p> + +<p> +The weather was still unsettled, but the barometer made no rapid changes, and +they might expect fair days. So, in the first week of April, after a very low +barometer, its rise was followed by a strong west wind, which lasted for five +or six weeks; then the needle of the instrument became stationary at a high +figure, and everything seemed propitious for the exploration. +</p> + +<p> +The day of departure was set for the 16th, and the Good Luck, moored in Balloon +Harbor, was provisioned for a long cruise. +</p> + +<p> +Smith told Ayrton of the excursion, and proposed to him to take part in it; but +as Ayrton preferred to remain on shore, it was decided that he should come to +Granite House while his companions were absent. Jup was left to keep him +company, and made no objection. +</p> + +<p> +On the morning of the 16th all the colonists, including Top, went on board the +Good Luck. The breeze blew fresh from the south-west, so that from Balloon +Harbor they had to beat up against the wind in order to make Reptile End. The +distance between these two points, following the coast, was twenty miles. As +the wind was dead ahead, and they had had on starting but two hours of the ebb, +it took all day to reach the promontory, and it was night before the point was +doubled. +</p> + +<p> +Pencroff proposed to the engineer that they should keep on slowly, sailing +under a double-reef, but Smith preferred mooring some cable lengths from shore, +in order to survey this part of the coast by daylight. +</p> + +<p> +And it was agreed that henceforth, as a minute exploration of the island was to +be made, they would not sail at night, but cast anchor every evening at the +most available point. +</p> + +<p> +The wind fell as night approached, and the silence was unbroken. The little +party, excepting Pencroff, slept less comfortably than in their beds at Granite +House, but still they slept; and at daylight the next morning the sailor raised +anchor, and, with a free wind, skirted the shore. +</p> + +<p> +The colonists knew this magnificently wooded border, as they had traversed it +formerly, on foot; but its appearance excited renewed admiration. They ran as +close in as possible, and moderated their speed in order to observe it +carefully. Often, they would cast anchor that Spilett might take photographic +views of the superb scenery. +</p> + +<p> +About noon the Good Luck arrived at the mouth of the Fall River. Above, upon +the right bank, the trees were less numerous, and three miles further on they +grew in mere isolated groups between the western spurs of the mountain, whose +arid declivities extended to the very edge of the ocean. +</p> + +<p> +How great was the contrast between the southern and the northern portions of +this coast! The one wooded and verdant, the other harsh and savage! It was what +they call in certain countries, an “iron-bound coast,” and its +tempestuous aspect seemed to indicate a sudden crystallization of the boiling +basalt in the geologic epochs. How appalling would this hideous mass have been +to the colonists if they had chanced to have been thrown on this part of the +island! When they were on Mount Franklin, their position had been too elevated +for them to recognize the awfully forbidding aspect of this shore; but, viewed +from the sea, it presented an appearance, the like of which cannot be seen, +perhaps, in any portion of the globe. +</p> + +<p> +The sloop passed for half a mile before this coast. It was composed of blocks +of all dimensions from twenty to thirty feet high, and of all sorts of shapes, +towers, steeples, pyramids, obelisks, and cones. The ice-bergs of the polar +seas could not have been thrown together in more frightful confusion! Here, the +rocks formed bridges, there, nave-like arches, of indistinguishable depth; in +one place, were excavations resembling monumental vaults, in another a crowd of +points outnumbering the pinnacles of a Gothic cathedral. All the caprices of +nature, more varied than those of the imagination, were here displayed over a +distance of eight or nine miles. +</p> + +<p> +Smith and companions gazed with a surprise approaching stupefaction. But, +though they rested mute, Top kept up an incessant barking, which awoke a +thousand echoes. The engineer noticed the same strangeness in the dog’s +action as he showed at the month of the well in Granite House. +</p> + +<p> +“Go alongside,” said Smith. +</p> + +<p> +And the Good Luck ran in as close to the rocks as possible. Perhaps there was +some cavern here which it would be well to explore. But Smith saw nothing, not +even a hollow which could serve as a retreat for any living thing, and the base +of the rocks was washed by the surf of the sea. After a time the dog stopped +barking, and the sloop kept off again at some cable lengths from the shore. +</p> + +<p> +In the northwest portion of the island the shore became flat and sandy. A few +trees rose above the low and swampy ground, the home of myriads of aquatic +birds. +</p> + +<p> +In the evening the sloop moored in a slight hollow of the shore, to the north +of the island. She was close into the bank, as the water here was of great +depth. The breeze died away with nightfall, and the night passed without +incident. +</p> + +<p> +The next morning Spilett and Herbert went ashore for a couple of hours and +brought back many bunches of ducks and snipe, and by 8 o’clock the Good +Luck, with a fair, freshening breeze, was speeding on her way to North Mandible +Cape. +</p> + +<p> +“I should not be surprised,” said Pencroff, “if we had a +squall. Yesterday the sun set red, and, this morning, the cats-tails foreboded +no good.” +</p> + +<p> +These “cats-tails”—were slender cyrrhi, scattered high above, +in the zenith. These feathery messengers usually announce the near disturbance +of the elements. +</p> + +<p> +“Very well, then,” said Smith, “crowd on all sail and make +for Shark Gulf. There, I think the sloop will be safe.” +</p> + +<p> +“Perfectly,” replied the sailor, “and, moreover, the north +coast is nothing but uninteresting downs.” +</p> + +<p> +“I shall not regret,” added the engineer, “passing, not only +the night, but also tomorrow in that bay, which deserves to be explored with +care.” +</p> + +<p> +“I guess we’ll have to, whether we want to or no,” replied +Pencroff, “as it is beginning to be threatening in the west. See how +dirty it looks!” +</p> + +<p> +“Any how, we have a good wind to make Mandible Cape,” observed the +reporter. +</p> + +<p> +“First rate; but, we will have to tack to get into the gulf, and I would +rather have clear weather in those parts which I know nothing about.” +</p> + +<p> +“Parts which are sown with reefs,” added Herbert, “if I may +judge from what we have seen of the coast to the south of the gulf.” +</p> + +<p> +“Pencroff,” said Smith, “do whatever you think best, we leave +everything to you.” +</p> + +<p> +“Rest assured, sir,” responded the sailor, “I will not run +any unnecessary risk. I would rather have a knife in my vitals, than that my +Good Luck should run on a rock!” +</p> + +<p> +“What time is it?” asked Pencroff. +</p> + +<p> +“10 o’clock.” +</p> + +<p> +“And how far is it to the cape?” +</p> + +<p> +“About fifteen miles.” +</p> + +<p> +“That will take two hours and a half. Unfortunately, the tide then will +be going down, and it will be a hard matter to enter the gulf with wind and +tide against us.” +</p> + +<p> +“Moreover,” said Herbert, “it is full moon to-day, and these +April tides are very strong.” +</p> + +<p> +“But, Pencroff,” asked Smith, “cannot you anchor at the +cape?” +</p> + +<p> +“Anchor close to land, with bad weather coming on!” cried the +sailor. “That would be to run ourselves ashore.” +</p> + +<p> +“Then what will you do?” +</p> + +<p> +“Keep off, if possible, until the tide turns, which will be about 1 +o’clock, and if there is any daylight left try to enter the gulf; if not, +we will beat on and off until daylight.” +</p> + +<p> +“I have said, Pencroff, that we will leave everything to your +judgment.” +</p> + +<p> +“Ah,” said Pencroff, “if only there was a light-house on this +coast it would be easier for sailors.” +</p> + +<p> +“Yes,” answered Herbert, “and this time we have no thoughtful +engineer to light a fire to guide us into harbor.” +</p> + +<p> +“By the way, Cyrus,” said Spilett, “we have never thanked you +for that; but indeed, without that fire we would not have reached—” +</p> + +<p> +“A fire?” demanded Smith, astounded by the words of the reporter. +</p> + +<p> +“We wish to say, sir,” said Pencroff, “that we would have +been in a bad fix on board the Good Luck, when we were nearly back, and that we +would have passed to windward of the island unless you had taken the precaution +to light a fire, on the night of the 19th of October, upon the plateau above +Granite House.” +</p> + +<p> +“Oh, yes, yes! It was a happy thought!” replied Smith. +</p> + +<p> +“And now,” added Pencroff, “unless Ayrton thinks of it, there +is not a soul to do us this little service.” +</p> + +<p> +“No—no one!” replied Smith. +</p> + +<p> +And a moment or two later, being alone with Spilett, the engineer whispered to +him:— +</p> + +<p> +“If there is anything sure in this world, Spilett, it is that I never lit +a fire on that night, either on the plateau or anywhere else!” +</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2><a name="XLII" id="XLII"></a>CHAPTER XLII.</h2> + +<p class="letter"> +NIGHT AT SEA—SHARK GULF—CONFIDENCES—PREPARATIONS FOR +WINTER—EARLY ADVENT OF BAD WEATHER—COLD—IN-DOOR +WORK—SIX MONTHS LATER—A SPECK ON THE PHOTOGRAPH—AN UNEXPECTED +EVENT. +</p> + +<p> +The sailor’s predictions were well founded. The breeze changed to a +strong blow such as would hare caused a ship in the open sea to have lowered +her topmasts and sailed under close reefs. The sloop was opposite the gulf at 6 +o’clock, but the tide was running out, so all that Pencroff could do was +to bend the jib down to the mainmast as a stay-sail and lie to with the bows of +the Good Luck pointing on shore. +</p> + +<p> +Fortunately, although the wind was strong, the ocean, protected by the coast, +was not very rough, and there was no danger from heavy seas, which would have +tried the staunchness of the little craft. Pencroff, although he had every +confidence in his boat, waited anxiously for daylight. +</p> + +<p> +During the night Smith and Spilett had not another opportunity to talk alone, +although the whispered words of the engineer made the reporter anxious to +discuss with him again the mysterious influence which seemed to pervade Lincoln +Island. Spilett could not rid himself of the thought of this new and +inexplicable incident. He and his companions also had certainly seen this +light, and yet Smith declared that he knew nothing about it. +</p> + +<p> +He determined to return to this subject as soon as they returned home, and to +urge Smith to inform their companions of these strange events. Perhaps, then, +they would decide to make, altogether, a thorough search into every part of the +island. +</p> + +<p> +Whatever it was, no light appeared upon these unknown shores during this night, +and at daylight the wind, which had moderated somewhat, shifted a couple of +points, and permitted Pencroff to enter the gulf without difficulty. About 7 +o’clock the Good Luck passed into these waters enclosed in a grotesque +frame of lava. +</p> + +<p> +“Here,” said Pencroff, “is a fine roadstead, where fleets +could ride at ease.” +</p> + +<p> +“It is curious,” remarked Smith, “that this gulf has been +formed by two successive streams of lava, completely enclosing its waters; and +it is probable that, in the worst weather, the sea here is perfectly +calm.” +</p> + +<p> +“It is a little too large for the Good Luck,” remarked the +reporter. +</p> + +<p> +“I admit that,” replied the sailor, “but if the navy of the +United States needed a shelter in the Pacific, I don’t think they could +find a better roadstead than this!” +</p> + +<p> +“We are in the shark’s jaws,” said Neb, alluding to the form +of the gulf. +</p> + +<p> +“We are, indeed,” replied Herbert; “but, Neb, you are not +afraid that they will close on us?” +</p> + +<p> +“No, sir, not that; and yet I don’t like the looks of the place. It +has a wicked aspect.” +</p> + +<p> +“So Neb begins running down my roadstead just as I was thinking to offer +it to the United States!” cried Pencroff. +</p> + +<p> +“But are its waters deep enough?” asked the engineer. +</p> + +<p> +“That is easily seen,” answered the sailor, taking the sounding +line, which measured fifty fathoms, and letting it down. It unrolled to the end +without touching bottom. +</p> + +<p> +“There,” said Pencroff, “our iron-clads could come here +without running aground!” +</p> + +<p> +“In truth,” said Smith, “this gulf is an abyss; but when we +remember the plutonic origin of the island, that is not extraordinary.” +</p> + +<p> +“One might think,” said Herbert, “that these walls had been +cut with an instrument, and I believe that at their very base, even with a line +six times as long, we could not reach the bottom.” +</p> + +<p> +“All this is very well,” said the reporter, “but I would +suggest that Pencroff’s roadstead lacks one important element.” +</p> + +<p> +“What is that?” +</p> + +<p> +“A cut, or pathway of some kind, by which one could go inland. I do not +see a place where there is even a foothold.” +</p> + +<p> +And, indeed, these steep lava walls afforded no landing place on all their +circumference. The Good Luck, skirting within touching distance of the lava, +found no place where the passengers could disembark. +</p> + +<p> +Pencroff consoled himself by saying that they could blow up the wall, if they +wanted to, and then, as there was certainly nothing to be done here, he turned +towards the narrow opening, which was passed at 2 o’clock. +</p> + +<p> +Neb gave a long sigh of relief. It was evident that the brave negro had not +been comfortable in those enormous jaws! +</p> + +<p> +The sloop was now headed for Granite House, eight miles distant, and, with a +fair wind, coasted along within a mile of the shore. The enormous lava rocks +were soon succeeded by the oddly-disposed downs, among which the engineer had +been so singularly discovered, and the place was covered with sea-birds. +</p> + +<p> +Towards 4 o’clock, Pencroff, leaving the islet to the left, entered the +channel separating it from the island, and an hour later cast anchor in the +Mercy. +</p> + +<p> +The colonists had been absent three days. Ayrton was waiting for them on the +shore, and Jup came joyously to welcome them, grinning with satisfaction. +</p> + +<p> +The entire exploration of the coast had been made, and nothing suspicious had +been seen. So that if any mysterious being resided on the island, it must be +under cover of the impenetrable woods on Serpentine Peninsula, which the +colonists had not, as yet, investigated. +</p> + +<p> +Spilett talked the matter over with the engineer, and it was agreed that they +should call their comrades’ attention to these strange events, the last +one of which was the most inexplicable of all. +</p> + +<p> +“Are you sure you saw it, Spilett?” asked Smith, for the twentieth +time. “Was it not a partial eruption of the volcano, or some +meteor?” +</p> + +<p> +“No, Cyrus, it wag certainly a fire lit by the hand of man. For that +matter, question Pencroff and Herbert. They saw it also, and they will confirm +my words.” +</p> + +<p> +So, some evenings later, on the 26th of April, when all the colonists were +gathered together on Prospect Plateau, Smith began:— +</p> + +<p> +“My friends, I want to call your attention to certain things which are +happening in our island, and to a subject on which I am anxious to have your +advice. These things are almost supernatural—” +</p> + +<p> +“Supernatural!” exclaimed the sailor, puffing his pipe. “Can +anything be supernatural?” +</p> + +<p> +“No, Pencroff, but certainly mysterious; unless, indeed, you can explain +what Spilett and I have been unable to account for up to this time.” +</p> + +<p> +“Let us hear it, Mr. Smith,” replied the sailor. +</p> + +<p> +“Very well. Have you understood, then, how, after being thrown into the +sea, I was found a quarter of a mile inland, without my having been conscious +of getting there?” +</p> + +<p> +“Possibly, having fainted,”—began the sailor. +</p> + +<p> +“That is not admissible,” answered the engineer; “but, +letting that go, have you understood how Top discovered your retreat five miles +from the place where I lay?” +</p> + +<p> +“The dog’s instinct,” replied Herbert. +</p> + +<p> +“A singular instinct,” remarked the reporter, “since, in +spite of the storm that was raging, Top arrived at the Chimneys dry and +clean!” +</p> + +<p> +“Let that pass,” continued the engineer; “have you understood +how our dog was so strangely thrown up from the lake, after his struggle with +the dugong?” +</p> + +<p> +“No! that I avow,” replied Pencroff, “and the wound in the +dugong which seemed to have been made by some sharp instrument, I don’t +understand that at all.” +</p> + +<p> +“Let us pass on again,” replied Smith. “Have you understood, +my friends, how that leaden bullet was in the body of the peccary; how that box +was so fortunately thrown ashore, without any trace of a shipwreck; how that +bottle, enclosing the paper, was found so opportunely; how our canoe, having +broken its rope, floated down the Mercy to us at the very moment when we needed +it; how, after the invasion of the monkeys, the ladder was let down from +Granite House; how, finally, the document, which Ayrton pretends not to have +written, came into our hands?” +</p> + +<p> +Smith had thus enumerated, without forgetting one, the strange events that had +happened on the island. Herbert, Pencroff, and Neb looked at each other, not +knowing what to say, as this succession of events, thus grouped together, gave +them the greatest surprise. +</p> + +<p> +“Upon my faith,” said Pencroff, at length, “you are right, +Mr. Smith, and it is hard to explain those things.” +</p> + +<p> +“Very well, my friends,” continued the engineer, “one thing +more is to be added, not less incomprehensible than the others!” +</p> + +<p> +“What is that?” demanded Herbert, eagerly. +</p> + +<p> +“When you returned from Tabor Island, Pencroff, you say that you saw a +light on Lincoln Island?” +</p> + +<p> +“Certainly I did.” +</p> + +<p> +“And you are perfectly sure that you saw it?” +</p> + +<p> +“As sure as that I see you.” +</p> + +<p> +“And you, Herbert?” +</p> + +<p> +“Why, Mr. Smith,” cried Herbert, “it shone like a star of the +first magnitude!” +</p> + +<p> +“But was it not a star?” insisted the engineer. +</p> + +<p> +“No,” replied Pencroff, “because the sky was covered with +heavy clouds, and, under any circumstances, a star would not have been so low +on the horizon. But Mr. Spilett saw it, and he can confirm what we say.” +</p> + +<p> +“I would add,” said the reporter, “that it was as bright as +an electric light.” +</p> + +<p> +“Yes, and it was certainly placed above Granite House!” exclaimed +Herbert. +</p> + +<p> +“Very well, my friends,” replied Smith, “during all that +night neither Neb nor I lit any fire at all!” +</p> + +<p> +“You did not!—” cried Pencroff, so overcome with astonishment +that he could not finish the sentence. +</p> + +<p> +“We did not leave Granite House, and if any fire appeared upon the coast, +it was lit by another hand!” +</p> + +<p> +The others were stupefied with amazement. Undoubtedly a mystery existed! Some +inexplicable influence, evidently favorable to the colonists, but exciting +their curiosity, made itself felt upon Lincoln Island. Was there then some +being hidden in its innermost retreats? They wished to know this, cost what it +might! +</p> + +<p> +Smith also recalled to his companions the singular actions of Top and Jup, +about the mouth of the well, and he told them that he had explored its depths +without discovering anything. And the conversation ended by a determination, on +the part of the colonists, to make a thorough search of the island as soon as +the spring opened. +</p> + +<p> +After this Pencroff became moody. This island, which he had looked upon as his +own, did not belong to him alone, but was shared by another, to whom, whether +he would or not, the sailor felt himself inferior. Neb and he often discussed +these inexplicable circumstances, and readily concluded that Lincoln Island was +subject to some supernatural influence. +</p> + +<p> +The bad weather began early, coming in with May; and the winter occupations +were undertaken without delay. The colonists were well protected from the rigor +of the season. They had plenty of felt clothing, and the moufflons had +furnished a quantity of wool for its further manufacture. +</p> + +<p> +Ayrton had been comfortably clothed, and when the bad weather began, he had +returned to Granite House; but he remained humble and sad, never joining in the +amusements of his companions. +</p> + +<p> +The most of this third winter was passed by the colonists indoors at Granite +House. The storms were frequent and terrible, the sea broke over the islet, and +any ship driven upon the coast would have been lost without any chance of +rescue. Twice the Mercy rose to such a height that the bridge and causeways +were in danger of destruction. Often the gusts of wind, mingled with snow and +rain, damaged the fields and the poultry-yard, and made constant repairs +necessary. +</p> + +<p> +In the midst of this season, some jaguars and quadrumanes came to the very +border of the plateau, and there was danger of the bolder of these beasts +making a descent on the fields and domestic animals of the colonists. So that a +constant watch had to be kept upon these dangerous visitors, and this, together +with the work indoors, kept the little party in Granite House busy. +</p> + +<p> +Thus the winter passed, with now and then a grand hunt in the frozen marshes of +Tadorn’s Fen. The damage done to the corral during the winter was +unimportant, and was soon repaired by Ayrton, who, in the latter part of +October, returned there to spend some days at work. +</p> + +<p> +The winter had passed without any new incident. Top and Jup passed by the well +without giving any sign of anxiety, and it seemed as if the series of +supernatural events had been interrupted. Nevertheless, the colonists were +fixed in their determination to make a thorough exploration of the most +inaccessible parts of the island, when an event of the gravest moment, which +set aside all the plans of Smith and his companions, happened. +</p> + +<p> +It was the 28th of October. Spring was rapidly approaching, and the young +leaves were appearing on the trees on the edge of the forest. Herbert, tempted +by the beauty of the day, determined to take a photograph of Union Bay, as it +lay facing Prospect Plateau, between Mandible and Claw Capes. +</p> + +<p> +It was 3 o’clock, the horizon was perfectly clear, and the sea, just +stirred by the breeze, scintillated with light. The instrument had been placed +at one of the windows of Granite House, and the lad, having secured his +negative, took the glass into the dark room, where the chemicals were kept, in +order to fix it. Returning to the light, after this operation, he saw a speck +on the plate, just at the horizon, which he was unable to wash out. +</p> + +<p> +“It is a defect in the glass,” he thought. +</p> + +<p> +And then he was seized by a curiosity to examine this speck by means of a +magnifying glass made from one of the lenses of the instrument. +</p> + +<p> +Hardly had he given one look, when, uttering a cry of amazement, he ran with +the plate and the glass to Smith. The latter examined the speck, and +immediately seizing the spy-glass hurried to the window. +</p> + +<p> +The engineer, sweeping the horizon with the glass, found the speck, and spoke +one word. “A ship!” +</p> + +<p> +In truth, a ship was in sight of Lincoln Island. +</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2><a name="PART_III" id="PART_III"></a>PART III<br/> +THE SECRET OF THE ISLAND</h2> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2><a name="XLIII" id="XLIII"></a>CHAPTER XLIII.</h2> + +<p class="letter"> +LOST OR SAVED?—AYRTON RECALLED—IMPORTANT DISCUSSION—IT IS NOT +THE DUNCAN—SUSPICION AND PRECAUTION—APPROACH OF THE SHIP—A +CANNON SHOT—THE BRIG ANCHORS IN SIGHT OF THE ISLAND—NIGHT FALL. +</p> + +<p> +Two years and a half ago, the castaways had been thrown on Lincoln Island; and +up to this time they had been cut off from their kind. Once the reporter had +attempted to establish communication with the civilized world, by a letter tied +to the neck of a bird; but this was an expedient on whose success they could +place no reliance. Ayrton, indeed, under the circumstances which have been +related, had joined the little colony. And now, on the 17th of October, other +men had appeared within sight of the island, on that desert sea! There could be +no doubt of it; there was a ship, but would she sail away into the offing, or +put in shore? The question would soon be decided. Smith and Herbert hastened to +call the others into the great hall of Granite House, and inform them of what +had been observed. Pencroff seized the spy-glass and swept the horizon till his +gaze fell upon the point indicated. +</p> + +<p> +“No doubt of it, she’s a ship!” said he in a tone of no great +pleasure. +</p> + +<p> +“Is she coming towards us?” asked Spilett. +</p> + +<p> +“Impossible to say yet,” replied Pencroff, “for only her +sails are visible; her hull is below the horizon. +</p> + +<p> +“What must we do?” said the boy. +</p> + +<p> +“We must wait,” said Smith. +</p> + +<p> +And for a time which seemed interminable, the colonists remained in silence, +moved alternately by fear and hope. They were not in the situation of castaways +upon a desert island, constantly struggling with niggardly Nature for the +barest means of living, and always longing to got back to their fellow-men. +Pencroff and Neb, especially, would have quitted the island with great regret. +They were made, in truth, for the new life which they were living in a region +civilized by their own exertions! Still, this ship would bring them news of the +Continent; perhaps it was an American vessel; assuredly it carried men of their +own race, and their hearts beat high at the thought! +</p> + +<p> +From time to time, Pencroff went to the window with the glass. From thence he +examined the ship carefully. She was still twenty miles to the east, and they +had no means of communication with her. Neither flag nor fire would have been +seen; nor would the report of a gun be heard. Yet the island, with Mount +Franklin towering high above it, must be visible to the lookout men on the +ship. But why should the vessel land there? Was it not mere chance which +brought it into that part of the Pacific, out of the usual track, and when +Tabor Island was the only land indicated on the maps? But here a suggestion +came from Herbert. +</p> + +<p> +“May it not be the Duncan?” cried he. +</p> + +<p> +The Duncan, as our readers will remember, was Lord Glenarvan’s yacht, +which had abandoned Ayrton on the islet, and was one day to come back for him. +Now the islet was not so far from Lincoln Island but that a ship steering for +one might pass within sight of the other. They were only 150 miles distant in +longitude, and 75 in latitude. +</p> + +<p> +“We must warn Ayrton,” said Spilett, “and tell him to come at +once. Only he can tell us whether she is the Duncan.” +</p> + +<p> +This was every one’s opinion, and the reporter, going to the telegraph +apparatus, which communicated with the corral, telegraphed. “Come at +once.” Soon the wire clicked, “I am coming.” Then the +colonists turned again to watch the ship. +</p> + +<p> +“If it is the Duncan,” said Herbert, “Ayrton will readily +recognize her, since he was aboard her so long.” +</p> + +<p> +“It will make him feel pretty queer!” said Pencroff. +</p> + +<p> +“Yes,” replied Smith, “but Ayrton is now worthy to go on +board again, and may Heaven grant it to be indeed the Duncan! These are +dangerous seas for Malay pirates.” +</p> + +<p> +“We will fight for our island,” said Herbert. +</p> + +<p> +“Yes, my boy,” answered the engineer, smiling, “but it will +be better not to have to fight for her.” +</p> + +<p> +“Let me say one thing,” said Spilett. “Our island is unknown +to navigators, and it is not down in the most recent maps. Now, is not that a +good reason for a ship which unexpectedly sighted it to try to run in +shore?” +</p> + +<p> +“Certainly,” answered Pencroff. +</p> + +<p> +“Yes,” said the engineer, “it would even be the duty of the +captain to report the discovery of any island not on the maps, and to do this +he must pay it a visit.” +</p> + +<p> +“Well,” said Pencroff, “suppose this ship casts anchor within +a few cables’ length of our island, what shall we do?” +</p> + +<p> +This downright question for a while remained unanswered. Then Smith, after +reflection, said in his usual calm tone:— +</p> + +<p> +“What we must do, my friends, is this. We will open communication with +the ship, take passage on board of her, and leave our island, after having +taken possession of it in the name of the United States of America. +</p> + +<p> +Afterwards we will return with a band of permanent colonists, and endow our +Republic with a useful station on the Pacific!” +</p> + +<p> +“Good!” said Pencroff, “that will be a pretty big present to +our country! We have really colonized it already. We have named every part of +the island; there is a natural port, a supply of fresh water, roads, a line of +telegraph, a wood yard, a foundry; we need only put the island on the +maps!” +</p> + +<p> +“But suppose some one else should occupy it while we are gone?” +said Spilett. +</p> + +<p> +“I would sooner stay here alone to guard it,” cried the sailor, +“and, believe me, they would not steal it from me, like a watch from a +gaby’s pocket!” +</p> + +<p> +For the next hour, it was impossible to say whether or not the vessel was +making for the island. She had drawn nearer, but Pencroff could not make out +her course. Nevertheless, as the wind blew from the northeast, it seemed +probable that she was on the starboard tack. Besides, the breeze blew straight +for the landing, and the sea was so calm that she would not hesitate to steer +for the island, though the soundings were not laid down in the charts. +</p> + +<p> +About 4 o’clock, an hour after he had been telegraphed for, Ayrton +arrived. He entered the great hall, saying, “Here I am, gentlemen.” +</p> + +<p> +Smith shook hands with him, and drawing him to the window, +“Ayrton,” said he, “we sent for you for a weighty reason. A +ship is within sight of the island.” +</p> + +<p> +For a moment Ayrton looked pale, and his eyes were troubled. Then he stooped +down and gazed around the horizon. +</p> + +<p> +“Take this spy-glass,” said Spilett, “and look well, Ayrton, +for it may be the Duncan come to take you home.” +</p> + +<p> +“The Duncan!” murmured Ayrton. “Already!” +</p> + +<p> +The last word escaped him involuntarily and he buried his face in his hands. +Did not twelve years’ abandonment on a desert island seem to him a +sufficient expiation? +</p> + +<p> +“No,” said he, “no, it cannot be the Duncan.” +</p> + +<p> +“Look, Ayrton,” said the engineer, “for we must know +beforehand with whom we have to deal.” +</p> + +<p> +Ayrton took the glass and levelled it in the direction indicated. For some +minutes he observed the horizon in silence. Then he said:— +</p> + +<p> +“Yes, it is a ship, but I do not think it is the Duncan. +</p> + +<p> +“Why not?” asked Spilett. +</p> + +<p> +“Because the Duncan is a steam-yacht, and I see no trace of smoke about +this vessel.” +</p> + +<p> +“Perhaps she is only under sail,” observed Pencroff. “The +wind is behind her, and she may want to save her coal, being go far from +land.” +</p> + +<p> +“You may be right, Mr. Pencroff,” said Ayrton. “But, let her +come in shore, and we shall soon know what to make of her.” +</p> + +<p> +So saying, he sat down in a corner and remained silent, taking no part in the +noisy discussion about the unknown ship. No more work was done. Spilett and +Pencroff were extremely nervous; they walked up and down, changing place every +minute. Herbert’s feeling was one of curiosity. Neb alone remained calm; +his master was his country. The engineer was absorbed in his thoughts, and was +inclined to believe the ship rather an enemy than a friend. By the help of the +glass they could make out that she was a brig, and not one of those Malay +proas, used by the pirates of the Pacific. Pencroff, after a careful look, +affirmed that the ship was square-rigged, and was running obliquely to the +coast, on the starboard tack, under mainsail, topsail, and top-gallant sail +set. +</p> + +<p> +Just then the ship changed her tack, and drove straight towards the island. She +was a good sailer, and rapidly neared the coast. Ayrton took the glass to try +to ascertain whether or not she was the Duncan. The Scotch yacht, too, was +square-rigged. The question therefore was whether a smokestack could be seen +between the two masts of the approaching vessel. She was now only ten miles +off, and the horizon was clear. Ayrton looked for a moment, and then dropped +his glass. +</p> + +<p> +“It is not the Duncan,” said he. +</p> + +<p> +Pencroff sighted the brig again, and made out that she was from 300 to 400 tons +burden, and admirably built for sailing. To what nation she belonged no one +could tell. +</p> + +<p> +“And yet,” added the sailor, “there’s a flag floating +at her peak, but I can’t make out her colors.” +</p> + +<p> +“In half an hour we will know for certain,” answered the reporter. +“Besides, it is evident that their captain means to run in shore, and +to-day, or to-morrow at latest, we shall make her acquaintance.” +</p> + +<p> +“No matter, “said Pencroff, “we ought to know with whom we +have to deal, and I shall be glad to make out those colors.” +</p> + +<p> +And he kept the glass steadily at his eye. The daylight began to fail, and the +sea-wind dropped with it. The brig’s flag wrapped itself around the +tackle, and could hardly be seen. +</p> + +<p> +“It is not the American flag,” said Pencroff, at intervals, +“nor the English, whose red would be very conspicuous, nor the French, +nor German colors, nor the white flag of Russia, nor the yellow flag of Spain. +It seems to be of one solid color. Let us see; what would most likely be found +in these waters? The Chilian—no, that flag is tri-colored; the Brazilian +is green; the Japanese is black and yellow; while this—” +</p> + +<p> +Just then a breeze struck the flag. Ayrton took the glass and raised it to his +eyes. +</p> + +<p> +“Black!” cried he, in a hollow voice. +</p> + +<p> +They had suspected the vessel with good reason. The piratical ensign was +fluttering at the peak! +</p> + +<p> +A dozen ideas rushed across the minds of the colonists; but there was no doubt +as to the meaning of the flag. It was the ensign of the spoilers of the sea; +the ensign which the Duncan would have carried, if the convicts had succeeded +in their criminal design. There was no time to be lost in discussion. +</p> + +<p> +“My friends,” said Smith, “this vessel, perhaps, is only +taking observations of the coast of our island, and will send no boats on +shore. We must do all we can to hide our presence here. The mill on Prospect +Plateau is too conspicuous. Let Ayrton and Neb go at once and take down its +fans. “We must cover, the windows of Granite House under thicker +branches. Let the fires be put out, and nothing be left to betray the existence +of man!” +</p> + +<p> +“And our sloop?” said Herbert. +</p> + +<p> +“Oh,” said Pencroff, “she is safe in port in Balloon Harbor, +and I defy the rascals to find her there!” +</p> + +<p> +The engineer’s orders were instantly carried out. Neb and Ayrton went up +to the plateau and concealed every trace of human habitation. Meanwhile their +companions went to Jacamar Woods and brought back a great quantity of branches +and climbing plants, which could not, from a distance, be distinguished from a +natural foliation, and would hide well enough the windows in the rock. At the +same time their arms and munitions were piled ready at hand, in case of a +sudden attack. When all these precautions had been taken Smith turned to his +comrades— +</p> + +<p> +“My friends,” said he, in a voice full of emotion, “if these +wretches try to get possession of the island we will defend it, will we +not?” +</p> + +<p> +“Yes, Cyrus,” answered the reporter, “and, if need be, we +will die in its defense.” +</p> + +<p> +And they shook hands upon it. Ayrton alone remained seated in his corner. +Perhaps he who had been a convict himself once, still deemed himself unworthy! +Smith understood what was passing in his mind, and, stepping towards him, asked +</p> + +<p> +“And what will you do, Ayrton?” +</p> + +<p> +“My duty,” replied Ayrton. Then he went to the window, and his +eager gaze sought to penetrate the foliage. It was then half-past 7 +o’clock. The sun had set behind Granite House twenty minutes before, and +the eastern horizon was darkening. The brig was nearing Union Bay. She was now +about eight miles away, and just abreast of Prospect Plateau, for having tacked +off Claw Cape, she had been carried in by the rising tide. In fact she was +already in the bay, for a straight line drawn from Claw Cape to Mandible Cape +would have passed to the other side of her. +</p> + +<p> +Was the brig going to run into the bay? And if so, would she anchor there? +Perhaps they would be satisfied with taking an observation. They could do +nothing but wait. Smith was profoundly anxious. Had the pirates been on the +island before, since they hoisted their colors on approaching it? Might they +not have effected a descent once before, and might not some accomplice be now +concealed in the unexplored part of the island. They were determined to resist +to the last extremity. All depended on the arms and the number of the pirates. +</p> + +<p> +Night had come. The new moon had set a few moments after the sun. Profound +darkness enveloped land and sea. Thick masses of clouds were spread over the +sky. The wind had entirely died away. Nothing could be seen of the vessel, for +all her lights were hidden—they could tell nothing of her whereabouts. +</p> + +<p> +“Who knows?” said Pencroff. “Perhaps the confounded ship will +be off by morning.” +</p> + +<p> +His speech was answered by a brilliant flash from the offing, and the sound of +a gun. The ship was there, and she had artillery. Six seconds had elapsed +between the flash and the report; the brig, therefore, was about a mile and +a-quarter from the shore. Just then, they heard the noise of chain-cables +grinding across the hawse-holes. The vessel was coming to anchor in sight of +Granite House! +</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2><a name="XLIV" id="XLIV"></a>CHAPTER XLIV.</h2> + +<p class="letter"> +DISCUSSIONS—PRESENTIMENTS—AYRTON’S PROPOSAL—IT IS +ACCEPTED—AYRTON AND PENCROFF ON SAFETY ISLET—NORFOLK +CONVICTS—THEIR PROJECTS—HEROIC ATTEMPT OF AYRTON—HIS +RETURN—SIX AGAINST FIFTY. +</p> + +<p> +There was no longer room for doubt as to the pirate’s intentions. They +had cast anchor at a short distance from the island, and evidently intended to +land on the morrow. +</p> + +<p> +Brave as they were, the colonists felt the necessity of prudence. Perhaps their +presence could yet be concealed in case the pirates were contented with landing +on the coast without going up into the interior. The latter, in fact, might +have nothing else in view than a supply of fresh water, and the bridge, a mile +and a half up stream, might well escape their eye. +</p> + +<p> +The colonists knew now that the pirate ship carried heavy artillery, against +which they had nothing but a few shot-guns. +</p> + +<p> +“Still,” said Smith, “our situation is impregnable. The enemy +cannot discover the opening in the weir, so thickly is it covered with reeds +and grass, and consequently cannot penetrate into Granite House.” +</p> + +<p> +“But our plantations, our poultry-yard, our corral,—in short +everything,” cried Pencroff, stamping his foot. “They can destroy +everything in a few hours.” +</p> + +<p> +“Everything, Pencroff!” answered Smith, “and we have no means +of preventing them?” +</p> + +<p> +“Are there many of them?” said the reporter. “That’s +the question. If there are only a dozen, we can stop them, but forty, or fifty, +or more—” +</p> + +<p> +“Mr. Smith,” said Ayrton, coming up to the engineer, “will +you grant me one request!” +</p> + +<p> +“What, my friend?” +</p> + +<p> +“To go to the ship, and ascertain how strongly she is manned.” +</p> + +<p> +“But, Ayrton,” said the engineer, hesitating, “your life will +be in danger.” +</p> + +<p> +“And why not, sir?” +</p> + +<p> +“That is more than your duty.” +</p> + +<p> +“I must do more than my duty,” replied Ayrton. +</p> + +<p> +“You mean to go to the ship in the canoe?” asked Spilett. +</p> + +<p> +“No, sir. I will swim to her. A man can slip in where a boat could not +pass.” +</p> + +<p> +“Do you know that the brig is a mile and a half from the coast?” +said Herbert.” +</p> + +<p> +“I am a good swimmer, sir.” +</p> + +<p> +“I repeat to you that you are risking your life,” resumed the +engineer. +</p> + +<p> +“No matter,” answered Ayrton—”Mr. Smith, I ask it as a +favor. It may raise me in my own estimation.” +</p> + +<p> +“Go, Ayrton,” said the engineer, who knew how deeply a refusal +would affect the ex-convict, now become an honest man. +</p> + +<p> +“I will go with you,” said Pencroff. +</p> + +<p> +“You distrust me!” said Ayrton, quickly. Then, he added, more +humbly, “and it is just.” +</p> + +<p> +“No, no!” cried Smith, eagerly, “Pencroff has no such +feeling. You have misunderstood him.” +</p> + +<p> +“Just so,” answered the sailor; “I am proposing to Ayrton to +accompany him only as far as the islet. One of these rascals may possibly have +gone on shore there, and if so, it will take two men to prevent him from giving +the alarm. I will wait for Ayrton on the islet.” +</p> + +<p> +Everything thus arranged, Ayrton got ready for departure. His project was bold +but not impracticable, thanks to the dark night. Once having reached the ship, +Ayrton, by clinging to the chains of the shrouds, might ascertain the number +and perhaps the designs of the convicts. They walked down upon the beach. +Ayrton stripped himself and rubbed himself with grease, the better to endure +the chill of the water; for he might have to be in it several hours. Meanwhile +Pencroff and Neb had gone after the canoe, fastened on the bank of the Mercy +some hundreds of paces further up. When they came back, Ayrton was ready to +start. +</p> + +<p> +They threw a wrap over his shoulders, and shook hands with him all round. Then +he got into the boat with Pencroff, and pushed off into the darkness. It was +now half-past 10, and their companions went back to wait for them at the +Chimneys. +</p> + +<p> +The channel was crossed without difficulty, and the canoe reached the opposite +bank of the islet. They moved cautiously, lest pirates should have landed +there. But the island was deserted. The two walked rapidly over it, frightening +the birds from their nests in the rocks. Having reached the further side, +Ayrton cast himself unhesitatingly into the sea, and swam noiselessly towards +the ship’s lights, which now were streaming across the water. Pencroff +hid himself among the rocks, to await his companion’s return. +</p> + +<p> +Meanwhile, Ayrton swam strongly towards the ship, slipping through the water. +His head only appeared above the surface; his eyes were fixed on the dark hull +of the brig, whose lights were reflected in the water. He thought only of his +errand, and nothing of the danger he encountered, not only from the pirates but +from the sharks which infested these waters. The current was in his favor, and +the shore was soon far behind. +</p> + +<p> +Half an hour afterwards, Ayrton, without having been perceived by any one, +dived under the ship, and clung with one hand to the bowsprit. Then he drew +breath, and, raising himself by the chains, climbed to the end of the +cut-water. There some sailors’ clothes hung drying. He found an easy +position, and listened. +</p> + +<p> +They were not asleep on board of the brig. They were talking, singing, and +laughing. These words, intermingled with oaths, came to Ayrton’s +ears;— +</p> + +<p> +“What a famous find our brig was!” +</p> + +<p> +“The Speedy is a fast sailor. She deserves her name.” +</p> + +<p> +“All the Norfolk shipping may do their best to take her.” +</p> + +<p> +“Hurrah for her commander. Hurrah for Bob Harvey!” +</p> + +<p> +Our readers will understand what emotion was excited in Ayrton by this name, +when they learn that Bob Harvey was one of his old companions in Australia, who +had followed out his criminal projects by getting possession, off Norfolk +Island, of this brig, charged with arms, ammunition, utensils, and tools of all +kinds, destined for one of the Sandwich Islands. All his band had gotten on +board, and, adding piracy to their other crimes, the wretches scoured the +Pacific, destroying ships and massacring their crews. They were drinking deep +and talking loudly over their exploits, and Ayrton gathered the following +facts:— +</p> + +<p> +The crew were composed entirely of English convicts, escaped from Norfolk +Island. In 29° 2’ south latitude, and 165° 42’ east longitude, to +the east of Australia, is a little island about six leagues in circumference, +with Mount Pitt rising in the midst, 1,100 feet above the level of the sea. It +is Norfolk Island, the seat of an establishment where are crowded together the +most dangerous of the transported English convicts. There are 500 of them; they +undergo a rigid discipline, with severe punishment for disobedience, and are +guarded by 150 soldiers and 150 civil servants, under the authority of a +Governor. A worse set of villains cannot be imagined. Sometimes, though rarely, +in spite of the extreme precautions of their jailors, some of them contrive to +escape by seizing a ship, and become the pest of the Polynesian archipelagos. +Thus had done Harvey and his companions. Thus had Ayrton formerly wished to do. +Harvey had seized the Speedy, which was anchored within sight of Norfolk +Island, had massacred the crew, and for a year had made the brig the terror of +the Pacific. +</p> + +<p> +The convicts were most of them gathered on the poop, in the after part of the +ship; but a few were lying on deck, talking in loud voices. The conversation +went on amid noise and drunkenness. Ayrton gathered that chance only had +brought them within sight of Lincoln Island. Harvey had never set foot there; +but, as Smith had foreseen, coming upon an island not in the maps, he had +determined to go on shore, and, if the land suited him, to make it the +Speedy’s headquarters. The black flag and the cannon-shot were a mere +freak of the pirates, to imitate a ship-of-war running up her colors. +</p> + +<p> +The colonists were in very serious danger. The island, with its easy water +supply, its little harbor, its varied resources so well turned to account by +the colonists, its secret recesses of Granite House—all these would be +just what the convicts wanted. In their hands the island would become an +excellent place of refuge, and the fact of its being unknown would add to their +security. Of course the colonists would instantly be put to death. They could +not even escape to the interior, for the convicts would make the island their +headquarters, and if they went on an expedition would leave some of the crew +behind. It would be a struggle for life and death with these wretches, every +one of whom must be destroyed before the colonists would be safe. Those were +Ayrton’s thoughts, and he knew that Smith would agree with him. But was a +successful resistance possible? Everything depended on the calibre of the +brig’s guns and the number of her men. These were facts which Ayrton must +know at any cost. +</p> + +<p> +An hour after he had reached the brig the noise began to subside, and most of +the convicts lay plunged in a drunken sleep. Ayrton determined to risk himself +on the ship’s deck, which the extinguished lanterns left in profound +darkness. He got in the chains by the cut-water, and by means of the bowsprit +climbed to the brig’s forecastle. Creeping quietly through the sleeping +crew, who lay stretched here and there on the deck, he walked completely around +the vessel and ascertained that the Speedy carried four guns, from eight to +ten-pounders. He discovered also that the guns were breech-loading, of modern +make, easily worked, and capable of doing great damage. +</p> + +<p> +There were about ten men lying on deck, but it might be that others were asleep +in the hold. Moreover, Ayrton had gathered from the conversation that there +were some fifty on board; rather an overmatch for the six colonists. But, at +least, the latter would not be surprised; thanks to Ayrton’s devotion, +they would know their adversaries force, and would make their dispositions +accordingly. Nothing remained for Ayrton but to go back to his comrades with +the information he had gathered, and he began walking towards the forecastle to +let himself down into the sea. +</p> + +<p> +And now to this man, who wished to do more than his duty, there came a heroic +thought, the thought of sacrificing his life for the safety of his comrades. +Smith could not of course resist fifty well-armed marauders, who would either +overcome him or starve him out. Ayrton pictured to himself his preservers who +had made a man of him, and an honest man, to whom he owed everything, +pitilessly murdered, their labors brought to nothing, their island changed to a +den of pirates. He said to himself that he, Ayrton, was the first cause of +these disasters, since his old companion, Harvey, had only carried out +Ayrton’s projects; and a feeling of horror came over him. Then came the +irresistible desire to blow up the brig, with all on board. He would perish in +the explosion, but he would have done his duty. +</p> + +<p> +He did not hesitate! It was easy to reach the powder magazine, which is always +in the after part of the ship. Powder must be plenty on board such a vessel, +and a spark would bring destruction. +</p> + +<p> +Ayrton lowered himself carefully between-decks, where he found many of the +pirates lying about, overcome rather by drunkenness than sleep. A ship’s +lantern, was lighted at the foot of the mainmast, from which hung a rack full +of all sorts of firearms. Ayrton took from the rack a revolver, and made sure +that it was loaded and capped. It was all that he needed to accomplish the work +of destruction. Then he glided back to the poop, where the powder magazine +would be. +</p> + +<p> +Between decks it was dark, and he could hardly step without knocking against +some half-asleep convict, and meeting with an oath or a blow. More than once he +had to stop short, but at length he reached the partition separating the +after-compartment, and found the door of the magazine. This he had to force, +and it was a difficult matter to accomplish without noise, as he had to break a +padlock. But at last, under his vigorous hand, the padlock fell apart and the +door opened. +</p> + +<p> +Just then a hand was laid upon his shoulder. +</p> + +<p> +“What are you doing there?” said a harsh voice, and a tall form +rose from the shadow and turned the light of a lantern fall on Ayrton’s +face. +</p> + +<p> +Ayrton turned around sharply. By a quick flash from the lantern, he saw his old +accomplice, Harvey; but the latter, believing Ayrton, as he did, to be dead, +failed to recognize him. +</p> + +<p> +“What are you doing there?” said Harvey, seizing Ayrton by the +strap of his trousers. Ayrton made no answer but a vigorous push, and sprang +forward to the magazine. One shot into those tons of powder, and all would have +been over! +</p> + +<p> +“Help, lads!” cried Harvey. +</p> + +<p> +Two or three pirates, roused by his voice, threw themselves upon Ayrton, and +strove to drag him to the ground. He rid himself of them with two shots from +his revolver; but received in so doing, a wound from a knife in the fleshy part +of the shoulder. He saw in a moment that his project was no longer feasible. +Harvey had shut the door of the magazine, and a dozen pirates were half-awake. +He most save himself for the sake of his comrades. +</p> + +<p> +Four barrels were left. He discharged two of them right and left, one at +Harvey, though without effect; and then, profiting by his enemies’ +momentary recoil, rushed towards the ladder which led to the deck of the brig. +As he passed the lantern he knocked it down with a blow from the butt-end of +his pistol, and left everything in darkness. +</p> + +<p> +Two or three pirates, awakened by the noise, were coming down the ladder at +that moment. A fifth shot stretched one at the foot of the steps, and the +others got out of the way, not understanding what was going on. In two bounds +Ayrton was on the brig’s deck, and three seconds afterwards, after +discharging his last shot at a pirate who tried to seize him by the neck, he +made his way down the netting and leaped into the sea. He had not swam six +fathoms before the bullets began to whistle around him like hail. +</p> + +<p> +What were the feelings of Pencroff, hidden behind a rock on the islet, and of +his comrades in the Chimneys, when they heard these shots from the brig! They +rushed out upon the shore, and, with their guns at their shoulders, stood ready +to meet any attack. For them no doubt remained. They believed that Ayrton had +been killed, and the pirates were about to make a descent on the island. Thus +half an hour passed away. They suffered torments of anxiety. They could not go +to the assistance of Ayrton or Pencroff, for the boat had been taken, and the +high tide forbade them crossing the channel. +</p> + +<p> +Finally, at half-past 12, a boat with two men came along shore. It was Ayrton, +with a slight wound in his shoulder, and Pencroff. Their friends received them +with open arms. +</p> + +<p> +Then all took refuge at the Chimneys. There Ayrton told them all that happened, +including his plan to blow up the brig. +</p> + +<p> +Every one grasped the man’s hand, but the situation was desperate. The +pirates knew that Lincoln Island was inhabited, and would come down upon it in +force. They would respect nothing. If the colonists fell into their hands they +had no mercy to hope for! +</p> + +<p> +“We can die like men,” said the reporter. +</p> + +<p> +“Let us go in and keep watch,” said the engineer. +</p> + +<p> +“Do you think there is any chance, Mr. Smith?” said the sailor. +</p> + +<p> +“Yes, Pencroff.” +</p> + +<p> +“How! Six against fifty!” +</p> + +<p> +“Yes, six—and one other—” +</p> + +<p> +“Who?” asked Pencroff. +</p> + +<p> +Smith did not answer, but he looked upwards +</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2><a name="XLV" id="XLV"></a>CHAPTER XLV.</h2> + +<p class="letter"> +THE MIST RISES—THE ENGINEER’S DISPOSITION OF FORCES—THREE +POSTS—AYRTON AND PENCROFF—THE FIRST ATTACK —TWO OTHER BOAT +LOADS—ON THE ISLET—SIX CONVICTS ON SHORE—THE BRIG WEIGHS +ANCHOR—THE SPEEDY’S PROJECTILES—DESPERATE +SITUATION—UNEXPECTED DENOUEMENT. +</p> + +<p> +The night passed without incident. The colonists were still at the Chimneys, +keeping a constant lookout. The pirates made no attempt at landing. Since the +last shots fired at Ayrton, not a sound betrayed the presence of the brig in +the bay. They might have supposed she had weighed anchor and gone off in the +night. +</p> + +<p> +But it was not so, and when daylight began to appear the colonists could see +her dark hulk dim through the morning mists. +</p> + +<p> +“Listen, my friends,” then said the engineer. “These are the +dispositions it seems to me best to make before the mist dispels, which +conceals us from view. We must make these convicts believe that the inhabitants +of the island are numerous and well able to resist them. Let us divide +ourselves into three groups, one posted at the Chimneys, one at the mouth of +the Mercy, and the third upon the islet, to hinder, or at least, retard, every +attempt to land. We have two carbines and four guns, so that each of us will be +armed; and as we have plenty of powder and ball, we will not spare our shots. +We have nothing to fear from the guns, nor even from the cannon of the brig. +What can they effect against these rocks? And as we shall not shoot from the +windows of Granite House, the pirates will never think of turning their guns +upon it. What we have to fear is a hand-to-hand fight with an enemy greatly +superior in numbers. We must try to prevent their landing without showing +ourselves. So don’t spare your ammunition. Shoot fast, and shoot +straight. Each of us has eight or ten enemies to kill, and must kill +them.” +</p> + +<p> +Smith had precisely defined the situation, in a voice as quiet as if he were +directing some ordinary work. His companions acted upon his proposal without a +word. Each hastened to take his place before the mist should be entirely +dissipated. +</p> + +<p> +Neb and Pencroff went back to Granite House and brought back thence abundance +of ammunition. Spilett and Ayrton, both excellent shots, were armed with the +two carbines, which would carry nearly a mile. The four shot-guns were divided +between Smith, Neb, Pencroff, and Herbert. The posts were thus +filled:—Smith and Herbert remained in ambush at the Chimneys, commanding +a large radius of the shore in front of Granite House. Spilett and Neb hid +themselves among the rocks at the mouth of the Mercy (the bridge and causeways +over which had been removed), so as to oppose the passage of any boat or even +any landing on the opposite side. As to Ayrton and Pencroff, they pushed the +canoe into the water, and got ready to push across the channel, to occupy two +different points on the islet, so that the firing, coming from four different +points, might convince the pirates that the island was both well manned and +vigorously defended. +</p> + +<p> +In case a landing should be effected in spite of their opposition, or should +they be in danger of being cut off by a boat from the brig, Pencroff and Ayrton +could return with the canoe to the shore of the island, and hasten to the +threatened point. +</p> + +<p> +Before going to their posts, the colonists shook hands all round. Pencroff +concealed his emotion as he embraced “his boy” Herbert, and they +parted. A few minutes afterwards each was at his post. None of them could have +been seen, for the brig itself was barely visible through the mist. It was +half-past 6 in the morning. Soon the mist rose gradually; the ocean was covered +with ripples, and, a breeze rising, the sky was soon clear. The Speedy +appeared, anchored by two cables, her head to the north, and her larboard +quarter to the island. As Smith had calculated, she was not more than a mile +and a quarter from the shore. The ominous black flag floated at the peak. The +engineer could see with his glass that the four guns of the ship had been +trained on the island, ready to be fired at the first signal; but so far there +was no sound. Full thirty pirates could be seen coming and going on the deck. +Some were on the poop; two on the transoms of the main topmast were examining +the island with spy-glasses. In fact, Harvey and his crew must have been +exceedingly puzzled by the adventure of the night, and especially by +Ayrton’s attempt upon the powder magazine. But they could not doubt that +the island before them was inhabited by a colony ready to defend it. Yet no one +could be seen either on the shore or the high ground. +</p> + +<p> +For an hour and a half there was no sign of attack from the brig. Evidently +Harvey was hesitating. But about 8 o’clock there was a movement on board. +They were hauling at the tackle, and a boat was being let down into the sea. +Seven men jumped into it, their guns in their hands. One was at the tiller, +four at the oars, and the two others squatting in the bow, ready to shoot, +examined the island. No doubt their intention was to make a reconnoissance, and +not to land, or they would have come in greater number. +</p> + +<p> +The pirates, perched on the rigging of the topmast, had evidently perceived +that an islet concealed the shore, lying about half a mile away. The boat was +apparently not running for the channel, but was making for the islet, as the +most prudent beginning of the reconnoissance. Pencroff and Ayrton, lying hidden +among the rocks, saw it coming down upon them, and even waiting for it to get +within good reach. +</p> + +<p> +It came on with extreme caution. The oars fell at considerable intervals. One +of the convicts seated in front had a sounding-line in his hand, with which he +was feeling for the increased depth of water caused by the current of the +Mercy. This indicated Harvey’s intention of bringing his brig as near +shore as possible. About thirty pirates were scattered among the shrouds +watching the boat and noting certain sea-marks which would enable them to land +without danger. The boat was but two cables’ length from the islet when +it stopped. The helmsman, standing erect, was trying to find the best place to +land. In a moment burst forth a double flash and report. The helmsman and the +man with the line fell over into the boat. Ayrton and Pencroff had done their +work. Almost at once came a puff of smoke from the brig, and a cannon ball +struck the rock, at whose foot the two lay sheltered, making it fly into +shivers; but the marksmen remained unhurt. +</p> + +<p> +With horrible imprecations the boat resumed its course. The helmsman was +replaced by one of his comrades, and the crew bent to their oars, eager to get +beyond reach of bullets. Instead of turning back, they pulled for the southern +extremity of the islet, evidently with the intention of coming up on the other +side and putting Pencroff and Ayrton between two fires. A quarter of an hour +passed thus without a sound. The defenders of the islet, though they understood +the object of the flanking movement, did not leave their post. They feared the +cannon of the Speedy, and counted upon their comrades in ambush. +</p> + +<p> +Twenty minutes after the first shots, the boat was less than two cables’ +length off the Mercy. The tide was running up stream with its customary +swiftness, due to the narrowness of the river, and the convicts had to row hard +to keep themselves in the middle of the channel. But as they were passing +within easy range of the river’s mouth, two reports were heard, and two +of the crew fell back into the boat. Neb and Spilett had not missed their shot. +The brig opened fire upon their hiding place, which was indicated by the puff +of smoke; but with no result beyond shivering a few rocks. +</p> + +<p> +The boat now contained only three men fit for action. Getting into the current, +it shot up the channel like an arrow, passed Smith and Herbert, who feared to +waste a shot upon it, and turned the northern point of the islet, whence the +two remaining oarsmen pulled across to the brig. +</p> + +<p> +So far the colonists could not complain. Their adversaries had lost the first +point in the game. Four pirates had been grievously wounded, perhaps killed, +while they were without a scratch. Moreover, from the skilful disposition of +their little force, it had no doubt given the impression of a much greater +number. +</p> + +<p> +A half hour elapsed before the boat, which was rowing against the current, +could reach the Speedy. The wounded were lifted on deck, amid howls of rage. A +dozen furious convicts manned the boat; another was lowered into the sea, and +eight more jumped into it; and while the former rowed straight for the islet, +the latter steered around its southern point, heading for the Mercy. +</p> + +<p> +Pencroff and Ayrton were in a perilous situation. They waited till the first +boat was within easy range, sent two balls into her, to the great discomfort of +the crew; then they took to their heels, running the gauntlet of a dozen shots, +reached their canoe on the other side of the islet, crossed the channel just as +the second boat load of pirates rounded the southern point, and hastened to +hide themselves at the Chimneys. They had hardly rejoined Smith and Herbert, +when the islet was surrounded and thoroughly searched by the pirates. +</p> + +<p> +Almost at the same moment shots were heard from the mouth of the Mercy. As the +second boat approached them, Spilett and Neb disposed of two of the crew; and +the boat itself was irresistibly hurried upon the rocks at the mouth of the +river. The six survivors, holding their guns above their heads to keep them +from contact with the water, succeeded in getting on shore on the right bank of +the river; and, finding themselves exposed to the fire of a hidden enemy, made +off towards Jetsam Point, and were soon out of range. +</p> + +<p> +On the islet, therefore, there were twelve convicts, of whom some no doubt were +wounded, but who had a boat at their service. Six more had landed on the island +itself, but Granite House was safe from them, for they could rot get across the +river, the bridges over which were raised. +</p> + +<p> +“What do you think of the situation, Mr. Smith?” said Pencroff. +</p> + +<p> +“I think,” said the engineer, “that unless these rascals are +very stupid, the battle will soon take a new form.” +</p> + +<p> +“They will never get across the channel,” said Pencroff. +“Ayrton and Mr. Spilett have guns that will carry a mile!” +</p> + +<p> +“No doubt,” said Herbert, “but of what avail are two carbines +against the brig’s cannon?” +</p> + +<p> +“The brig is not in the channel yet,” replied Pencroff. +</p> + +<p> +“And suppose she comes there?” said Smith. +</p> + +<p> +“She will risk foundering and utter destruction.” +</p> + +<p> +“Still it is possible,” said Ayrton. “The convicts may profit +by the high tide to run into the channel, taking the risk of running aground; +and then, under their heavy guns, our position will become untenable.” +</p> + +<p> +“By Jove!” said the sailor, “the beggars are weighing +anchor.” +</p> + +<p> +It was but too true. The Speedy began to heave her anchor, and showed her +intention of approaching the islet. +</p> + +<p> +Meanwhile, the pirates on the islet had collected on the brink of the channel. +They knew that the colonists were out of reach of their shot-guns, but forgot +that their enemies, might carry weapons of longer range. Suddenly, the carbines +of Ayrton and Spilett rang out together, carrying news to the convicts, which +must have been very disagreeable, for two of them fell flat on their faces. +There was a general scamper. The other ten, leaving their wounded or dying +comrades, rushed to the other side of the islet, sprang into the boat which had +brought them over, and rowed rapidly off. +</p> + +<p> +“Eight off!” cried Pencroff, exultingly. +</p> + +<p> +But a more serious danger was at hand. The Speedy had raised her anchor, and +was steadily nearing the shore. From their two posts at the Mercy and the +Chimneys, the colonists watched her movements without stirring a finger, but +not without lively apprehension. Their situation would be most critical, +exposed as they would be at short range to the brig’s cannon, without +power to reply by an effective fire. How then could they prevent the pirates +from landing? +</p> + +<p> +Smith felt that in a few minutes he must make up his mind what to do. Should +they shut themselves up in Granite House, and stand a siege there? But their +enemies would thus become masters of the island, and starve them out at +leisure. One chance was still left; perhaps Harvey would not risk his ship in +the channel. If he kept outside his shots would be fired from a distance of +half a mile, and would do little execution. +</p> + +<p> +“Bob Harvey is too good a sailor,” repeated Pencroff, “to +risk his ship in the channel. He knows that he would certainly lose her if the +sea turned rough! And what would become of him without his ship?” +</p> + +<p> +But the brig came nearer and nearer, and was evidently heading for the lower +extremity of the islet. The breeze was faint, the current slack, and Harvey +could manœuvre in safety. The route followed by the boats had enabled him to +ascertain where the mouth of the river was, and he was making for it with the +greatest audacity. He intended to bring his broadside to bear on the Chimneys, +and to riddle them with shell and cannon balls. The Speedy soon reached the +extremity of the islet, easily turning it, and, with a favoring wind, was soon +off the Mercy. +</p> + +<p> +“The villains are here!” cried Pencroff. As he spoke, Neb and +Spilett rejoined their comrades. They could do nothing against the ship, and it +was better that the colonists should be together when the decisive action was +about to take place. Neither of the two were injured, though a shower of balls +had been poured upon them as they ran from rock to rock. +</p> + +<p> +“You are not wounded, lad?” said the engineer. +</p> + +<p> +“No, only a few contusions from the ricochet of a ball. But that cursed +brig is in the channel!” +</p> + +<p> +“We must take refuge in Granite House,” said Smith, “while we +have time, and before the convicts can see us. Once inside, we can act as the +occasion demands.” +</p> + +<p> +“Let us start at once, then,” said the reporter. +</p> + +<p> +There was not a moment to lose. Two or three detonations, and the thud of balls +on the rocks apprised them that the Speedy was near at hand. +</p> + +<p> +To jump into the elevator, to hoist themselves to the door of Granite House, +where Top and Jup had been shut up since the day before, and to rush into the +great hall, was the work of a moment. Through the leaves they saw the Speedy, +environed with smoke, moving up the channel. They had not left a moment too +soon, for balls were crashing everywhere through the hiding places they had +quitted. The rocks were splintered to pieces. +</p> + +<p> +Still they hoped that Granite House would escape notice behind its leafy +covering, when suddenly a ball passed through the doorway and penetrated into +the corridor. +</p> + +<p> +“The devil! we are discovered!” cried Pencroff. +</p> + +<p> +But perhaps the colonists had not been seen, and Harvey had only suspected that +something lay behind the leafy screen of the rock. And soon another ball, +tearing apart the foliage, exposed the opening in the granite. +</p> + +<p> +The situation of the colonists was now desperate. They could make no answer to +the fire, under which the rock was crashing around them. Nothing remained but +to take refuge in the upper corridor of Granite House, giving up their abode to +devastation, when a hollow sound was heard, followed by dreadful shrieks! +</p> + +<p> +Smith and his comrades rushed to the window. +</p> + +<p> +The brig, lifted on the summit of a sort of waterspout, had just split in half; +and in less than ten seconds she went to the bottom with her wicked crew!! +</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2><a name="XLVI" id="XLVI"></a>CHAPTER XLVI.</h2> + +<p class="letter"> +THE COLONISTS ON THE BEACH—AYRTON AND PENCROFF AS SALVORS—TALK AT +BREAKFAST—PENCROFF’S REASONING—EXPLORATION OF THE +BRIG’S HULL IN DETAIL—THE MAGAZINE UNINJURED—NEW +RICHES—A DISCOVERY—A PIECE OF A BROKEN CYLINDER. +</p> + +<p> +“They have blown up!” cried Herbert. +</p> + +<p> +“Yes, blown up as if Ayrton had fired the magazine,” answered +Pencroff, jumping into the elevator with Neb and the boy, +</p> + +<p> +“But what has happened?” said Spilett, still stupefied at the +unexpected issue. +</p> + +<p> +“Ah, this time we shall find out—” said the engineer, +</p> + +<p> +“What shall we find out?” +</p> + +<p> +“All in time; the chief thing is that the pirates have been disposed +of.” +</p> + +<p> +And they rejoined the rest of the party on beach. Not a sign of the brig could +be seen, not even the masts. After having been upheaved by the water-spout, it +had fallen back upon its side, and had sunk in this position, doubtless owing +to some enormous leak.’ As the channel here was only twenty feet deep, +the masts of the brig would certainly reappear at low tide. +</p> + +<p> +Some waifs were floating on the surface of the sea. There was a whole float, +made up of masts and spare yards, chicken coops with the fowls still living, +casks and barrels, which little by little rose to the surface, having escaped +by the traps; but no debris was adrift, no flooring of the deck, no plankage of +the hull; and the sudden sinking of the Speedy seemed still more inexplicable. +</p> + +<p> +However, the two masts, which had been broken some feet above the +“partner,” after having snapped their stays and shrouds, soon rose +to the surface of the channel, with their sails attached, some of them furled +and some unfurled. But they could not wait for low tide to carry away all their +riches, and Ayrton and Pencroff jumped into the canoe, for the purpose of +lashing these waifs either to the shore of the island or of the islet. But just +as they were about to start, they were stopped by a word from Spilett. +</p> + +<p> +“And the six convicts who landed on the right bank of the Mercy,” +said he. +</p> + +<p> +In fact, it was as well to remember the six men who had landed at Jetsam Point, +when their boat was wrecked off the rocks. They looked in that direction, but +the fugitives were not to be seen. Very likely, when they saw the brig go down, +they had taken flight into the interior of the island. +</p> + +<p> +“We will see after them later,” said Smith. “They may still +be dangerous, for they are armed; but with six to six, we have an even chance. +Now we have more urgent work on hand.” +</p> + +<p> +Ayrton and Pencroff jumped into the canoe and pulled vigorously out to the +wreck. The sea was quiet now and very high, for the moon was only two days old. +It would be a full hour before the hull of the brig would appear above the +water of the channel. +</p> + +<p> +Ayrton and Pencroff had time enough to lash together the masts and spars by +means of ropes, whose other end was carried along the shore to Granite House, +where the united efforts of the colonists succeeded in hauling them in. Then +the canoe picked up the chicken coops, barrels, and casks which were floating +in the water, and brought them to the Chimneys. +</p> + +<p> +A few dead bodies were also floating on the surface. Among them Ayrton +recognized that of Bob Harvey, and pointed it out to his companion, saying with +emotion:— +</p> + +<p> +“That’s what I was, Pencroff.” +</p> + +<p> +“But what you are no longer, my worthy fellow,” replied the sailor. +</p> + +<p> +It was a curious thing that so few bodies could be seen floating on the +surface. They could count only five or six, which the current was already +carrying out to sea. Very likely the convicts, taken by surprise, had not had +time to escape, and the ship having sunk on its side, the greater part of the +crew were left entangled under the nettings. So the ebb which was carrying the +bodies of these wretches out to sea would spare the colonists the unpleasant +task of burying them on the island. +</p> + +<p> +For two hours Smith and his companions were wholly occupied with hauling the +spars up on the sands, and in unfurling the sails, which were entirely +uninjured, and spreading them out to dry. The work was so absorbing that they +talked but little; but they had time for thought. What a fortune was the +possession of the brig, or rather of the brig’s contents! A ship is a +miniature world, and the colonists could add to their stock a host of useful +articles. It was a repetition, on a large scale, of the chest found on Jetsam +Point. +</p> + +<p> +“Moreover,” thought Pencroff, “why should it be impossible to +get this brig afloat? If she has only one leak, a leak can be stopped up, and a +ship of 300 or 400 tons is a real ship compared to our Good Luck! We would go +where we pleased in her. We must look into this matter. It is well worth the +trouble.” +</p> + +<p> +In fact, if the brig could be repaired, their chance of getting home again +would be very much greater. But in order to decide this important question, +they must wait until the tide was at its lowest, so that the brig’s hull +could be examined in every part. +</p> + +<p> +After their prizes had been secured upon the beach, Smith and his companions, +who were nearly famished, allowed themselves a few minutes for breakfast. +Fortunately the kitchen was not far off, and Neb could cook them a good +breakfast in a jiffy. They took this meal at the Chimneys, and one can well +suppose that they talked of nothing during the repast but the miraculous +deliverance of the colony. +</p> + +<p> +“Miraculous is the word,” repeated Pencroff, “for we must own +that these blackguards were blown up just in time! Granite House was becoming +rather uncomfortable.” +</p> + +<p> +“Can you imagine, Pencroff, how it happened that the brig blew up?” +asked the reporter. +</p> + +<p> +“Certainly, Mr. Spilett; nothing is more simple,” replied Pencroff. +“A pirate is not under the same discipline as a ship-of-war. Convicts +don’t make sailors. The brig’s magazine must have been open, since +she cannonaded us incessantly, and one awkward fellow might have blown up the +ship.” +</p> + +<p> +“Mr. Smith,” said Herbert, “what astonishes me is that this +explosion did not produce more effect. The detonation was not loud, and the +ship is very little broken up. She seems rather to have sunk than to have blown +up.” +</p> + +<p> +“That astonishes you, does it, my boy?” asked the engineer. +</p> + +<p> +“Yes, sir.” +</p> + +<p> +“And it astonishes me too, Herbert,” replied the engineer; +“but when we examine the hull of the brig, we shall find some explanation +of this mystery.” +</p> + +<p> +“Why, Mr. Smith,” said Pencroff, “you don’t mean to say +that the Speedy has just sunk like a ship which strikes upon a rock?” +</p> + +<p> +“Why not,” asked Neb, “if there are rocks in the +channel?” +</p> + +<p> +“Good, Neb,” said Pencroff. “You did not look at the right +minute. An instant before she went down I saw the brig rise on an enormous +wave, and fall back over to larboard. Now, if she had struck a rock, +she’d have gone straight to the bottom like an honest ship.” +</p> + +<p> +“And that’s just what she is not,” said Neb. +</p> + +<p> +“Well, we’ll soon find out, Pencroff,” said the engineer. +</p> + +<p> +“We will find out,” added the sailor, “but I’ll bet my +head there are no rocks in the channel. But do you really think, Mr. Smith, +that there is anything wonderful in this event?” +</p> + +<p> +Smith did not answer. +</p> + +<p> +“At all events,” said Spilett, “whether shock or explosion, +you must own, Pencroff, that it came in good time.” +</p> + +<p> +“Yes! yes!” replied the sailor, “but that is not the +question. I ask Mr. Smith if he sees anything supernatural in this +affair?” +</p> + +<p> +“I give no opinion, Pencroff,” said the engineer; a reply which was +not satisfactory to Pencroff, who believed in the explosion theory, and was +reluctant to give it up. He refused to believe that in the channel which he had +crossed so often at low tide, and whose bottom was covered with sand as fine as +that of the beach, there existed an unknown reef. +</p> + +<p> +At about half-past 1, the colonists got into the canoe, and pulled out to the +stranded brig. It was a pity that her two boats had not been saved; but one, +they knew, had gone to pieces at the mouth of the Mercy, and was absolutely +useless, and the other had gone down with the brig, and had never reappeared. +</p> + +<p> +Just then the hull of the Speedy began to show itself above the water. The brig +had turned almost upside down, for after having broken its masts under the +weight of its ballast, displaced by the fall, it lay with its keel in the air. +The colonists rowed all around the hull, and as the tide fell, they perceived, +if not the cause of the catastrophe, at least the effect produced. In the fore +part of the brig, on both sides of the hull, seven or eight feet before the +beginning of the stem, the sides were fearfully shattered for at least twenty +feet. There yawned two large leaks which it would have been impossible to stop. +Not only had the copper sheathing and the planking disappeared, no doubt ground +to powder, but there was not a trace of the timbers, the iron bolts, and the +treenails which fastened them. The false-keel had been torn off with surprising +violence, and the keel itself, torn from the carlines in several places, was +broken its whole length. +</p> + +<p> +“The deuce!” cried Pencroff, “here’s a ship which will +be hard to set afloat.” +</p> + +<p> +“Hard! It will be impossible,” said Ayrton. +</p> + +<p> +“At all events,” said Spilett, “the explosion, if there has +been an explosion, has produced the most remarkable effects. It has smashed the +lower part of the hull, instead of blowing up the deck and the topsides. These +great leaks seem rather to have been made by striking a reef than by the +explosion of a magazine.” +</p> + +<p> +“There’s not a reef in the channel,” answered the sailor. +“I will admit anything but striking a reef.” +</p> + +<p> +“Let us try to get into the hold,” said the engineer. +“Perhaps that will help us to discover the cause of the disaster.” +</p> + +<p> +This was the best course to take, and would moreover enable them to make an +inventory of the treasures contained in the brig, and to get them ready for +transportation to the island. Access to the hold was now easy; the tide +continued to fall, and the lower deck, which, as the brig lay, was now +uppermost, could easily be reached. The ballast, composed of heavy pigs of cast +iron, had staved it in several places. They heard the roaring of the sea, as it +rushed through the fissures of the hull. +</p> + +<p> +Smith and his companions, axe in hand, walked along the shattered deck. All +kinds of chests encumbered it, and as they had not been long under water, +perhaps their contents had not been damaged. +</p> + +<p> +They set to work at once to put this cargo in safety. The tide would not return +for some hours, and these hours were utilized to the utmost at the opening into +the hull. Ayrton and Pencroff had seized upon tackle which served to hoist the +barrels and chests. The canoe received them, and took them ashore at once. They +took everything indiscriminately, and left the sorting of their prizes to the +future. +</p> + +<p> +In any case, the colonists, to their extreme satisfaction, had made sure that +the brig possessed a varied cargo, an assortment of all kinds of articles, +utensils, manufactured products, and tools, such as ships are loaded with for +the coasting trade of Polynesia. They would probably find there a little of +everything, which was precisely what they needed on Lincoln Island. +</p> + +<p> +Nevertheless, Smith noticed, in silent astonishment, that not only the hull of +the brig had suffered frightfully from whatever shock it was which caused the +catastrophe, but the machinery was destroyed, especially in the fore part. +Partitions and stanchions were torn down as if some enormous shell had burst +inside of the brig. The colonists, by piling on one side the boxes which +littered their path, could easily go from stem to stern. They were not heavy +bales which would have been difficult to handle, but mere packages thrown about +in utter confusion. +</p> + +<p> +The colonists soon reached that part of the stern where the poop formerly +stood. It was here Ayrton told them they must search for the powder magazine. +Smith, believing that this had not exploded, thought they might save some +barrels, and that the powder, which is usually in metal cases, had not been +damaged by the water. In fact, this was just what had happened. They found, +among a quantity of projectiles, at least twenty barrels, which were lined with +copper, and which they pulled out with great care. Pencroff was now convinced +by his own eyes that the destruction of the Speedy could not have been caused +by an explosion. The part of the hull in which the powder magazine was situated +was precisely the part which had suffered the least. +</p> + +<p> +“It may be so,” replied the obstinate sailor, “but as to a +rock, there is not one in the channel.” Then he added:—”I +know nothing about it, even Mr. Smith does not know. No one knows, or ever +will.” +</p> + +<p> +Several hours passed in these researches, and the tide was beginning to rise. +They had to stop their work of salvage, but there was no fear that the wreck +would be washed out to sea, for it was as solidly imbedded as if it had been +anchored to the bottom. They could wait with impunity for the turn of the tide +to commence operations. As to the ship itself, it was of no use; but they must +hasten to save the debris of the hull, which would not take long to disappear +in the shifting sands of the channel. +</p> + +<p> +It was 5 o’clock in the afternoon. The day had been a hard one, and they +sat down to their dinner with great appetite; but afterwards, notwithstanding +their fatigue, they could not resist the desire of examining some of the +chests. Most of them contained ready-made clothes, which, as may be imagined, +were very welcome. There was enough to clothe a whole colony, linen of every +description, boots of all sizes. +</p> + +<p> +“Now we are too rich,” cried Pencroff. “What shall we do with +all these things?” +</p> + +<p> +Every moment the sailor uttered exclamations of joy, as he came upon barrels of +molasses and rum, hogsheads of tobacco, muskets and side-arms, bales of cotton, +agricultural implements, carpenters’ and smiths’ tools, and +packages of seeds of every kind, uninjured by their short sojourn in the water. +Two years before, how these things would have come in season! But even now that +the industrious colonists were so well supplied, these riches would be put to +use. +</p> + +<p> +There was plenty of storage room in Granite House, but time failed them now to +put everything in safety. They must not forget that six survivors of the +Speedy’s crew were now on the island, scoundrels of the deepest dye, +against whom they must be on their guard. +</p> + +<p> +Although the bridge over the Mercy and the culverts had been raised, the +convicts would make little account of a river or a brook; and, urged by +despair, these rascals would be formidable. Later, the colonists could decide +what course to take with regard to them; in the meantime, the chests and +packages piled up near the Chimneys must be watched over, and to this they +devoted themselves during the night. +</p> + +<p> +The night passed, however, without any attack from the convicts. Master Jup and +Top, of the Granite House guard, would have been quick to give notice. +</p> + +<p> +The three days which followed, the 19th, 20th, and 21st of October, were +employed in carrying on shore everything of value either in the cargo or in the +rigging. At low tide they cleaned out the hold, and at high tide, stowed away +their prizes. A great part of the copper sheathing could be wrenched from the +hull, which every day sank deeper; but before the sands had swallowed up the +heavy articles which had sunk to the bottom, Ayrton and Pencroff dived and +brought up the chains and anchors of the brig, the iron ballast, and as many as +four cannon, which could be eased along upon empty barrels and brought to land; +so that the arsenal of the colony gained as much from the wreck as the kitchens +and store-rooms. Pencroff, always enthusiastic in his projects, talked already +about constructing a battery which should command the channel and the mouth of +the river. With four cannon, he would guarantee to prevent any fleet, however +powerful, from coming within gunshot of the island. +</p> + +<p> +Meanwhile, after nothing of the brig had been left but a useless shell, the bad +weather came to finish its destruction. Smith had intended to blow it up, so as +to collect the debris on shore, but a strong northeast wind and a high sea +saved his powder for him. On the night of the 23d, the hull was thoroughly +broken up, and part of the wreck stranded on the beach. As to the ship’s +papers, it is needless to say, although they carefully rummaged the closet in +the poop, Smith found no trace of them. The pirates had evidently destroyed all +that concerned either the captain or the owner of the Speedy, and as the name +of its port was not painted on the stern, there was nothing to betray its +nationality. However, from the shape of the bow, Ayrton and Pencroff believed +the brig to be of English construction. +</p> + +<p> +A week after the ship went down, not a trace of her was to be seen even at low +tide. The wreck had gone to pieces, and Granite House had been enriched with +almost all its contents. But the mystery of its strange destruction would never +have been cleared up, if Neb, rambling along the beach, had not come upon a +piece of a thick iron cylinder, which bore traces of an explosion. It was +twisted and torn at the edge, as if it had been submitted to the action of an +explosive substance. Neb took it to his master, who was busy with his +companions in the workshop at the Chimneys. Smith examined it carefully, and +then turned to Pencroff. +</p> + +<p> +“Do you still maintain, my friend,” said he, “that the Speedy +did not perish by a collision?” +</p> + +<p> +“Yes, Mr. Smith,” replied the sailor, “you know as well as I +that there are no rocks in the channel.” +</p> + +<p> +“But suppose it struck against this piece of iron?” said the +engineer, showing the broken cylinder. +</p> + +<p> +“What, that pipe stem!” said Pencroff, incredulously. +</p> + +<p> +“Do you remember, my friends,” continued Smith, “that before +foundering the brig was lifted up by a sort of waterspout?” +</p> + +<p> +“Yes, Mr. Smith,” said Herbert. +</p> + +<p> +“Well, this was the cause of the waterspout,” said Smith, holding +up the broken tube. +</p> + +<p> +“That?” answered Pencroff. +</p> + +<p> +“Yes; this cylinder is all that is left of a torpedo!” +</p> + +<p> +“A torpedo!” cried they all. +</p> + +<p> +“And who put a torpedo there?” asked Pencroff, unwilling to give +up. +</p> + +<p> +“That I cannot tell you,” said Smith, “but there it was, and +you witnessed its tremendous effects!” +</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2><a name="XLVII" id="XLVII"></a>CHAPTER XLVII</h2> + +<p class="letter"> +THE ENGINEER’S THEORY—PENCROFF’S MAGNIFICENT +SUPPOSITIONS—A BATTERY IN THE AIR—FOUR PROJECTILES—THE +SURVIVING CONVICTS—AYRTON HESITATES—SMITH’S GENEROSITY AND +PENCROFF’S DISSATISFACTION. +</p> + +<p> +Thus, then, everything was explained by the submarine action of this torpedo. +Smith had had some experience during the civil war of these terrible engines of +destruction, and was not likely to be mistaken. This cylinder, charged with +nitro-glycerine, had been the cause of the column of water rising in the air, +of the sinking of the brig, and of the shattered condition of her hull. +Everything was accounted for, except the presence of this torpedo in the waters +of the channel! +</p> + +<p> +“My friends,” resumed Smith, “we can no longer doubt the +existence of some mysterious being, perhaps a castaway like ourselves, +inhabiting our island. I say this that Ayrton may be informed of all the +strange events which have happened for two years. Who our unknown benefactor +may be, I cannot say, nor why he should hide himself after rendering us so many +services; but his services are not the less real, and such as only a man could +render who wielded some prodigious power. Ayrton is his debtor as well; as he +saved me from drowning after the fall of the balloon, so he wrote the document, +set the bottle afloat in the channel, and gave us information of our +comrade’s condition. He stranded on Jetsam Point that chest, full of all +that we needed; he lighted that fire on the heights of the island which showed +you where to land; he fired that ball which we found in the body of the +peccary; he immersed in the channel that torpedo which destroyed the brig; in +short, he has done all those inexplicable things of which we could find no +explanation. Whatever he is, then, whether a castaway or an exile, we should be +ungrateful not to feel how much we owe him. Some day, I hope, we shall +discharge our debt.” +</p> + +<p> +“We may add,” replied Spilett, “that this unknown friend has +a way of doing things which seems supernatural. If he did all these wonderful +things, he possesses a power which makes him master of the elements.” +</p> + +<p> +“Yes,” said Smith, “there is a mystery here, but if we +discover the man we shall discover the mystery also. The question is +this:—Shall we respect the incognito of this generous being, or should we +try to find him? What do you think?” +</p> + +<p> +“Master,” said Neb, “I have an idea that we may hunt for him +as long as we please, but that we shall only find him when he chooses to make +himself known.” +</p> + +<p> +“There’s something in that, Neb,” said Pencroff. +</p> + +<p> +“I agree with you, Neb,” said Spilett; “but that is no reason +for not making the attempt. Whether we find this mysterious being or not, we +shall have fulfilled our duty towards him.” +</p> + +<p> +“And what is your opinion, my boy?” said the engineer, turning to +Herbert. +</p> + +<p> +“Ah,” cried Herbert, his eye brightening; “I want to thank +him, the man who saved you first and now has saved us all.” +</p> + +<p> +“It wouldn’t be unpleasant for any of us, my boy,” returned +Pencroff. “I am not curious, but I would give one of my eyes to see him +face to face.” +</p> + +<p> +“And you, Ayrton?” asked the engineer. +</p> + +<p> +“Mr. Smith,” replied Ayrton, “I can give no advice. Whatever +you do will be right, and whenever you want my help in your search, I am +ready.” +</p> + +<p> +“Thanks, Ayrton,” said Smith, “but I want a more direct +answer. You are our comrade, who has offered his life more than once to save +ours, and we will take no important step without consulting you.” +</p> + +<p> +“I think, Mr. Smith,” replied Ayrton, “that we ought to do +everything to discover our unknown benefactor. He may be sick or suffering. I +owe him a debt of gratitude which I can never forget, for he brought you to +save me. I will never forget him!” +</p> + +<p> +“It is settled,” said Smith. “We will begin our search as +soon as possible. We will leave no part of the island unexplored. We will pry +into its most secret recesses, and may our unknown friend pardon our +zeal!” +</p> + +<p> +For several days the colonists were actively at work haymaking and harvesting. +Before starting upon their exploring tour, they wanted to finish all their +important labors. Now, too, was the time for gathering the vegetable products +of Tabor Island. Everything had to be stored; and, happily, there was plenty of +room in Granite House for all the riches of the island. There all was ranged in +order, safe from man or beast. No dampness was to be feared in the midst of +this solid mass of granite. Many of the natural excavations in the upper +corridor were enlarged by the pick, or blown out by mining, and Granite House +thus became a receptacle for all the goods of the colony. +</p> + +<p> +The brig’s guns were pretty pieces of cast-steel, which, at +Pencroff’s instance, were hoisted, by means of tackle and cranes, to the +very entrance of Granite House; embrasures were constructed between the +windows, and soon they could be seen stretching their shining nozzles through +the granite wall. From this height these fire-breathing gentry had the range of +all Union Bay. It was a little Gibraltar, to whose fire every ship off the +islet would inevitably be exposed. +</p> + +<p> +“Mr. Smith,” said Pencroff one day—it was the 8th of +November—“now that we have mounted our guns, we ought to try their +range.” +</p> + +<p> +“For what purpose?” +</p> + +<p> +“Well, we ought to know how far we can send a ball.” +</p> + +<p> +“Try, then, Pencroff,” answered the engineer; “but +don’t use our powder, whose stock I do not want to diminish; use +pyroxyline, whose supply will never fail.” +</p> + +<p> +“Can these cannon support the explosive force of pyroxyline?” asked +the reporter, who was as eager as Pencroff to try their new artillery. +</p> + +<p> +“I think so. Besides,” added the engineer, “we will be +careful.” +</p> + +<p> +Smith had good reason to think that these cannon were well made. They were of +cast steel, and breech-loaders, they could evidently bear a heavy charge, and +consequently would have a long range, on account of the tremendous initial +velocity. +</p> + +<p> +“Now,” said Smith, “the initial velocity being a question of +the amount of powder in the charge, everything depends upon the resisting power +of the metal; and steel is undeniably the best metal in this respect; so that I +have great hope of our battery.” +</p> + +<p> +The four cannon were in perfect condition. Ever since they had been taken out +of the water, Pencroff had made it his business to give them a polish. How many +hours had been spent in rubbing them, oiling them, and cleaning the separate +parts! By this time they shone as if they had been on board of a United States +frigate. +</p> + +<p> +That very day, in the presence of all the colony, including Jup and Top, the +new guns were successively tried. They were charged with pyroxyline, which, as +we have said, has an explosive force fourfold that of gunpowder; the projectile +was cylindro-conical in shape. Pencroff, holding the fuse, stood ready to touch +them off. +</p> + +<p> +Upon a word from Smith, the shot was fired. The ball, directed seaward, passed +over the islet and was lost in the offing, at a distance which could not be +computed. +</p> + +<p> +The second cannon was trained upon the rocks terminating Jetsam Point, and the +projectile, striking a sharp boulder nearly three miles from Granite House, +made it fly into shivers. Herbert had aimed and fired the shot, and was quite +proud of his success. But Pencroff was prouder of it even than he. Such a +feather in his boy’s cap! +</p> + +<p> +The third projectile, aimed at the downs which formed the upper coast of Union +Bay, struck the sand about four miles away, then ricocheted into the water. The +fourth piece was charged heavily to test its extreme range, and every one got +out of the way for fear it would burst; then the fuse was touched off by means +of a long string. There was a deafening report, but the gun stood the charge, +and the colonists, rushing to the windows, could see the projectile graze the +rocks of Mandible Cape, nearly five miles from Granite House, and disappear in +Shark Gulf. +</p> + +<p> +“Well, Mr. Smith,” said Pencroff, who had cheered at every shot, +“what do you say to our battery? I should like to see a pirate land +now!” +</p> + +<p> +“Better have them stay away, Pencroff,” answered the engineer. +</p> + +<p> +“Speaking of that,” said the sailor, “what are we going to do +with the six rascals who are prowling about the island? Shall we let them roam +about unmolested? They are wild beasts, and I think we should treat them as +such. What do you think about it, Ayrton?” added Pencroff, turning +towards his companion. +</p> + +<p> +Ayrton hesitated for a moment, while Smith regretted the abrupt question, and +was sincerely touched when Ayrton answered humbly:— +</p> + +<p> +“I was one of these wild beasts once, Mr. Pencroff, and I am not worthy +to give counsel.” +</p> + +<p> +And, with bent head, he walked slowly away. Pencroff understood him. +</p> + +<p> +“Stupid ass that I am!” cried he. “Poor Ayrton! and yet he +has as good a right to speak as any of us. I would rather have bitten off my +tongue than have given him pain! But, to go back to the subject, I think these +wretches have no claim to mercy, and that we should rid the island of +them.” +</p> + +<p> +“And before we hunt them down, Pencroff, shall we not wait for some fresh +act of hostility?” +</p> + +<p> +“Haven’t they done enough already?” said the sailor, who +could not understand these refinements. +</p> + +<p> +“They may repent,” said Smith. +</p> + +<p> +“They repent!” cried the sailor, shrugging his shoulders. +</p> + +<p> +“Think of Ayrton, Pencroff!” said Herbert, taking his hand. +“He has become an honest man.” +</p> + +<p> +Pencroff looked at his companions In stupefaction. He could not admit the +possibility of making terms with the accomplices of Harvey, the murderers of +the Speedy’s crew. +</p> + +<p> +“Be it so!” he said. “You want to be magnanimous to these +rascals. May we never repent of it!” +</p> + +<p> +“What danger do we run if we are on our guard?” said Herbert. +</p> + +<p> +“H’m!” said the reporter, doubtfully. “There are six of +them, well armed. If each of them sighted one of us from behind a +tree—” +</p> + +<p> +“Why haven’t they tried it already?” said Herbert. +“Evidently it was not their cue.” +</p> + +<p> +“Very well, then,” said the sailor, who was stubborn in his +opinion, “we will let these worthy fellows attend to their innocent +occupations without troubling our heads about them.” +</p> + +<p> +“Pencroff,” said the engineer, “you have often shown respect +for my opinions. Will you trust me once again?” +</p> + +<p> +“I will do whatever you say, Mr. Smith,” said the sailor, nowise +convinced. +</p> + +<p> +“Well, let us wait, and not be the first to attack.” +</p> + +<p> +This was the final decision, with Pencroff in the minority. They would give the +pirates a chance, which their own interest might induce them to seize upon, to +come to terms. So much, humanity required of them. But they would have to be +constantly on their guard, and the situation was a very serious one. They had +silenced Pencroff, but, perhaps, after all, his advice would prove sound. +</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2><a name="XLVIII" id="XLVIII"></a>CHAPTER XLVIII.</h2> + +<p class="letter"> +THE PROJECTED EXPEDITION—AYRTON AT THE CORRAL—VISIT TO PORT +BALLOON—PENCROFF’S REMARKS—DESPATCH SENT TO THE +CORRAL—NO ANSWER FROM AYRTON—SETTING OUT NEXT DAY—WHY THE +WIRE DID NOT ACT—A DETONATION. +</p> + +<p> +Meanwhile the thing uppermost in the colonists’ thought was to achieve +the complete exploration of the island which had been decided upon, an +exploration which now would have two objects: —First, to discover the +mysterious being whose existence was no longer a matter of doubt; and, at the +same time to find out what had become of the pirates, what hiding place they +had chosen, what sort of life they were leading, and what was to be feared from +them. +</p> + +<p> +Smith would have set off at once, but as the expedition would take several +days, it seemed better to load the wagon with all the necessaries for camping +out. Now at this time one of the onagers, wounded in the leg, could not bear +harness; it must have several days’ rest, and they thought it would make +little difference if they delayed the departure a week, that is, till November +20. November in this latitude corresponds to the May of the Northern +Hemisphere, and the weather was fine. They were now at the longest days in the +year, so that everything was favorable to the projected expedition, which, if +it did not attain its principal object, might be fruitful in discoveries, +especially of the products of the soil; for Smith intended to explore those +thick forests of the Far West, which stretched to the end of Serpentine +Peninsula. +</p> + +<p> +During the nine days which would precede their setting out, it was agreed that +they should finish work on Prospect Plateau. But Ayrton had to go back to the +corral to take care of their domesticated animals. It was settled that he +should stay there two days, and leave the beasts with plenty of fodder. Just as +he was setting out, Smith asked him if he would like to have one of them with +him, as the island was no longer secure. Ayrton replied that it would be +useless, as he could do everything by himself, and that there was no danger to +fear. If anything happened at or near the corral, he would instantly acquaint +the colonists of it by a telegram sent to Granite House. +</p> + +<p> +So Ayrton drove off in the twilight, about 9 o’clock, behind one onager, +and two hours afterwards the electric wire gave notice that he had found +everything in order at the corral. +</p> + +<p> +During these two days Smith was busy at a project which would finally secure +Granite House from a surprise. The point was to hide completely the upper +orifice of the former weir, which had been already blocked up with stones, and +half hidden under grass and plants, at the southern angle of Lake Grant. +Nothing could be easier, since by raising the level of the lake two or three +feet, the hole would be entirely under water. +</p> + +<p> +Now to raise the level, they had only to make a dam across the two trenches by +which Glycerine Creek and Waterfall Creek were fed. The colonists were incited +to the task, and the two dams, which were only seven or eight feet long, by +three feet high, were rapidly erected of closely cemented stones. When the work +had been done, no one could have suspected the existence of the subterranean +conduit. The little stream which served to feed the reservoir at Granite House, +and to work the elevator, had been suffered to flow in its channel, so that +water might never be wanting. The elevator once raised, they might defy attack. +</p> + +<p> +This work had been quickly finished, and Pencroff, Spilett, and Herbert found +time for an expedition to Port Balloon. The sailor was anxious to know whether +the little inlet up which the Good Luck was moored had been visited by the +convicts. +</p> + +<p> +“These gentry got to land on the southern shore,” he observed, +“and if they followed the line of the coast they may have discovered the +little harbor, in which case I wouldn’t give half a dollar for our Good +Luck.” +</p> + +<p> +So off the three went in the afternoon of November 10. They were well armed, +and as Pencroff slipped two bullets into each barrel of his gun, he had a look +which presaged no good to whoever came too near, “beast or man,” as +he said. Neb went with them to the elbow of the Mercy, and lifted the bridge +after them. It was agreed that they should give notice of their return by +firing a shot, when Neb would come back to put down the bridge. +</p> + +<p> +The little band walked straight for the south coast. The distance was only +three miles and a half, but they took two hours to walk it. They searched on +both sides of the way, both the forest and Tadorn’s Fens; but they found +no trace of the fugitives. Arriving at Port Balloon, they saw with great +satisfaction that the Good Luck was quietly moored in the narrow inlet, which +was so well hidden by the rocks that it could be seen neither from sea nor +shore, but only from directly above or below. +</p> + +<p> +“After all,” said Pencroff, “the rascals haven’t been +here. The vipers like tall grass better, and we shall find them in the +Far-West.” +</p> + +<p> +“And it’s a fortunate thing,” added Herbert, “for if +they had found the Good Luck, they would have made use of her in getting away, +and we could never have gone back to Tabor Island.” +</p> + +<p> +“Yes,” replied the reporter, “it will be important to put a +paper there stating the situation of Lincoln Island, Ayrton’s new +residence, in case the Scotch yacht should come after him.” +</p> + +<p> +“Well, here is our Good Luck, Mr. Spilett,” said the sailor, +“ready to start with her crew at the first signal!” +</p> + +<p> +Talking thus, they got on board and walked about the deck. On a sudden the +sailor, after examining the bit around which the cable of the anchor was wound, +cried, +</p> + +<p> +“Hallo! this is a bad business!” +</p> + +<p> +“What’s the matter, Pencroff?” asked the reporter. +</p> + +<p> +“The matter is that that knot was never tied by me——” +</p> + +<p> +And Pencroff pointed to a rope which made the cable fast to the bit, so as to +prevent its tripping. +</p> + +<p> +“How, never tied by you?” asked Spilett. +</p> + +<p> +“No, I can swear to it. I never tie a knot like that.” +</p> + +<p> +“You are mistaken, Pencroff.” +</p> + +<p> +“No, I’m not mistaken,” insisted the sailor. “That knot +of mine is second nature with me.” +</p> + +<p> +“Then have the convicts been on board?” asked Herbert. +</p> + +<p> +“I don’t know,” said Pencroff, “but somebody has +certainly raised and dropped this anchor!” +</p> + +<p> +The sailor was so positive that neither Spilett nor Herbert could contest his +assertion. It was evident that the beat had shifted place more or less since +Pencroff had brought it back to Balloon Harbor. As for the sailor, he had no +doubt that the anchor had been pulled up and cast again. Now, why had these +manœuvres taken place unless the boat had been used on some expedition? +</p> + +<p> +“Then why did we not see the Good Luck pass the offing?” said the +reporter, who wanted to raise every possible objection. +</p> + +<p> +“But, Mr. Spilett,” answered the sailor, “they could have set +out in the night with a good wind, and in two hours have been out of sight of +the island.” +</p> + +<p> +“Agreed,” said Spilett, but I still ask with what object the +convicts used the Good Luck, and why, after using her, they brought her back to +port?” +</p> + +<p> +“Well, Mr. Spilett,” said the sailor, “we will have to +include that among our mysterious incidents, and think no more of it. One thing +is certain, the Good Luck was there, and is here! If the convicts take it a +second time, it may never find its way back again.” +</p> + +<p> +“Then, Pencroff,” said Herbert, “perhaps we had better take +the Good Luck back and anchor her in front of Granite House.” +</p> + +<p> +“I can hardly say,” answered the sailor, “but I think not. +The mouth of the Mercy is a bad place for a ship; the sea is very heavy +there.” +</p> + +<p> +“But by hauling it over the sand to the foot of the +Chimneys——” +</p> + +<p> +“Well, perhaps,” answered Pencroff. “In any case, as we have +to leave Granite House for a long expedition, I believe the Good Luck will be +safer here during oar absence, and he will do well to leave her here until the +island is rid of these rascals.” +</p> + +<p> +“That is my opinion, too,” said the reporter. At least in case of +bad weather, she will not be exposed as she would be at the mouth of the +Mercy.” +</p> + +<p> +“But if the convicts should pay her another visit?” said Herbert. +</p> + +<p> +“Well, my boy,” said Pencroff, “if they do not find the boat +here they will search until they do find her; and in our absence there is +nothing to prevent their carrying her off from the front of Granite House. I +agree with Mr. Spilett that we had better leave her at Balloon Harbor; but if +we have not rid the island of these wretches by the time we come back it will +be more prudent to take our ship back to Granite House, until we have nothing +more to fear from our enemies.” +</p> + +<p> +“All right,” said Spilett. “Let us go back now.” +</p> + +<p> +When they returned to Granite House, they told Smith what had happened, and the +latter approved their present and future plans. He even promised Pencroff he +would examine that part of the channel situated between the island and the +coast, so as to see if it would be possible to make an artificial harbor by +means of a dam. In this way the Good Luck would be always within reach, in +sight of the colonists, and locked up if necessary. +</p> + +<p> +On the same evening they sent a telegram to Ayrton, asking him to bring back +from the corral a couple of goats, which Neb wished to acclimatize on the +plateau. Strange to say, Ayrton did not acknowledge the receipt of this +despatch, as was his custom to do. This surprised the engineer, but he +concluded that Ayrton was not at the corral at the moment, and perhaps had +started on his way back to Granite House. In fact, two days had elapsed since +his departure; and it had been agreed that on the evening of the 10th or the +morning of the 11th, at latest, he would return. +</p> + +<p> +The colonists were now waiting to see Ayrton on Prospect Plateau. Neb and +Herbert both looked after the approach by way of the bridge, so as to let it +down when their companion should appear, but when 6 o’clock in the +evening came, and there was no sign of Ayrton, they agreed to send another +despatch, asking for an immediate answer. +</p> + +<p> +The wire at Granite House remained silent. +</p> + +<p> +The uneasiness of the colonists was now extreme. What had happened? “Was +Ayrton not at the corral? or, if there, had he not power over his own +movements? Ought they to go in search of him on this dark night? +</p> + +<p> +They discussed the point. Some were for going, and others for waiting. +</p> + +<p> +“But,” said Herbert, “perhaps some accident has happened to +the wires which prevents their working.” +</p> + +<p> +“That may be,” said the reporter. +</p> + +<p> +“Let us wait until to-morrow,” said Smith. “It is just +possible that either Ayrton has not received our despatch, or we have missed +his.” +</p> + +<p> +They waited, as may be imagined, with much anxiety. At daylight on the 11th of +November, Smith sent a message across the wires, but received no answer. Again, +with the same result. +</p> + +<p> +“Let us set off at once for the corral,” said he. +</p> + +<p> +“Aid will armed,” added Pencroff. +</p> + +<p> +It was agreed that Granite House must not be deserted, so Neb was left behind +to take charge. After accompanying his companions to Glycerine Creek, he put up +the bridge again, and hid behind a tree, to wait either for their return or for +that of Ayrton. In case the pirates should appear, and should attempt to force +the passage, he would try to defend it with his gun; and in the last resort he +would take refuge in Granite House, where, the elevator once drawn up, he would +be in perfect safety. The others were to go direct to the corral, and failing +to find Ayrton there, were to scour the neighboring woods. +</p> + +<p> +At 6 o’clock in the morning the engineer and his three companions had +crossed Glycerine Creek, and Neb posted himself behind a low cliff, crowned by +some large dragon trees on the left side of the brook. The colonists, after +leaving Prospect Plateau, took the direct route to the corral. They carried +their guns on their shoulders, ready to fire at the first sign of hostility. +The two rifles and the two guns had been carefully loaded. +</p> + +<p> +On either side of the path was a dense thicket, which might easily hide +enemies, who, as they were armed, would be indeed formidable. The colonists +walked on rapidly without a word. Top preceded them, sometimes keeping to the +path, and sometimes making a detour into the wood, but not appearing to suspect +anything unusual; and they might depend upon it that the faithful dog would not +be taken by surprise, and would bark at the slightest appearance of danger. +</p> + +<p> +Along this same path Smith and his companions followed the telegraphic wires +which connected the corral with Granite House. For the first two miles they did +not notice any solution of continuity. The posts were in good condition, the +insulators uninjured, and the wire evenly stretched. From this point the +engineer noticed that the tension was less complete, and at last, arriving at +post No. 74, Herbert, who was ahead of the others, cried, “The wire is +broken!” +</p> + +<p> +His companions hastened forward and arrived at the spot where the boy had +stopped. There the overturned post was lying across the path. They had +discovered the break, and it was evident that the dispatches from Granite House +could not have been received at the corral. +</p> + +<p> +“It can’t be the wind that has overturned this post,” said +Pencroff. +</p> + +<p> +“No,” answered the reporter, “there are marks of footsteps on +the ground; it has been uprooted by the hand of man.” +</p> + +<p> +“Besides, the wire is broken,” added Herbert, showing the two ends +of the wire which had been violently torn asunder. +</p> + +<p> +“Is the break a fresh one?” asked Smith. +</p> + +<p> +“Yes,” said Herbert, “it was certainly made a very short time +ago.” +</p> + +<p> +“To the corral! to the corral!” cried the sailor. +</p> + +<p> +The colonists were then midway between Granite House and the corral, and had +still two miles and a half to go. They started on a run. +</p> + +<p> +In fact, they might well fear that something had happened at the corral. Ayrton +doubtless might have sent a telegram which had not arrived. It was not this +which alarmed his companions, but a circumstance more remarkable. Ayrton, who +had promised to come back the evening before, had not reappeared! The +communication, between Granite House and the corral had been out with a +sinister design. +</p> + +<p> +They hurried on, their hearts beating quick with fear for their comrade, to +whom they were sincerely attached; Were they to find him struck down by the +hand of those he had formerly led? +</p> + +<p> +Soon they reached the place where the road lay along by the little brook +flowing from Red Creek, which watered the meadows of the corral. They had +moderated their pace, so as not to be out of breath at the moment when a deadly +struggle might occur. Their guns were uncocked, but loaded. Each of them +watched one side of the woods. Top kept up an ill-omened growling. +</p> + +<p> +At last the fenced enclosure appeared behind the trees. They saw no signs of +devastation. The door was closed as usual; a profound silence reigned at the +corral. Neither the accustomed bleatings of the sheep nor the voice of Ayrton +was to be heard. +</p> + +<p> +“Let us go in,” said Smith, and the engineer advanced, while his +companions, keeping guard twenty feet in the rear, stood ready to fire. +</p> + +<p> +Smith raised the inner latch, and began to push back the door, when Top barked +loudly. There was a report from behind the fence, followed by a cry of pain, +and Herbert, pierced by a bullet, fell to the ground! +</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2><a name="XLIX" id="XLIX"></a>CHAPTER XLIX</h2> + +<p class="letter"> +THE REPORTER AND PENCROFF IN THE CORRAL—MOVING HERBERT—DESPAIR OF +THE SAILOR—CONSULTATION OF THE ENGINEER AND THE REPORTER—MODE OF +TREATMENT—A GLIMMER OF HOPE—HOW TO WARN NEB—A FAITHFUL +MESSENGER—NEB’S REPLY. +</p> + +<p> +At Herbert’s cry, Pencroff, dropping his gun, sprang towards him. +</p> + +<p> +“They have killed him!” cried he. “My boy—they have +killed him.” +</p> + +<p> +Smith and Spilett rushed forward. The reporter put his ear to the boy’s +heart to see if it were still beating. +</p> + +<p> +“He’s alive,” said he, “but he must be +taken—” +</p> + +<p> +“To Granite House? Impossible!” said the engineer. +</p> + +<p> +“To the corral, then,” cried Pencroff. +</p> + +<p> +“One moment,” said Smith, and he rushed to the left around the +fence. There he found himself face to face with a convict, who fired at him and +sent a ball through his cap. An instant later, before he had time to fire +again, he fell, struck to the heart by Smith’s poniard, a surer weapon +even than his gun. +</p> + +<p> +While this was going on, the reporter and Pencroff hoisted themselves up to the +angle of the fence, strode over the top, jumped into the enclosure, made their +way into the empty house, and laid Herbert gently down on Ayrton’s bed. +</p> + +<p> +A few minutes afterwards Smith was at his side. At the sight of Herbert, pale +and unconscious, the grief of the sailor was intense. He sobbed and cried +bitterly; neither the engineer nor the reporter could calm him. Themselves over +whelmed with emotion, they could hardly speak. +</p> + +<p> +They did all in their power to save the poor boy’s life. Spilett, in his +life of varied experience, had acquired some knowledge of medicine. He knew a +little of everything; and had had several opportunities of learning the surgery +of gunshot wounds. With Smith’s assistance, he hastened to apply the +remedies which Herbert’s condition demanded. +</p> + +<p> +The boy lay in a complete stupor, caused either by the hemorrhage or by +concussion of the brain. He was very pale, and his pulse beat only at long +intervals, as if every moment about to stop. This, taken in conjunction with +his utter loss of consciousness, was a grave symptom. They stripped his chest, +and, staunching the blood by means of handkerchiefs, kept bathing the wounds in +cold water. +</p> + +<p> +The ball had entered between the third and fourth rib, and there they found the +wound. Smith and Spilett turned the poor boy over. At this he uttered a moan so +faint that they feared it was his last breath. There was another wound on his +back, for the bullet had gone clean through. +</p> + +<p> +“Thank Heaven!” said the reporter, “the ball is not in his +body; we shall not have to extract it.” +</p> + +<p> +“But the heart?” asked Smith. +</p> + +<p> +“The heart has not been touched, or he would be dead.” +</p> + +<p> +“Dead!” cried Pencroff, with a groan. He had only heard the +reporter’s last word. +</p> + +<p> +“No, Pencroff,” answered Smith. “No he is not dead; his pulse +still beats; he has even uttered a groan. For his sake, now, you must be calm. +We have need of all our self-possession; you must not be the means of our +losing it, my friend.” +</p> + +<p> +Pencroff was silent, but large tears rolled down his cheeks. +</p> + +<p> +Meanwhile, Spilett tried to recall to memory the proper treatment of the case +before him. There seemed no doubt that the ball had entered in front and gone +out by the back; but what injuries had it done by the way? Had it reached any +vital spot? This was a question which even a professional surgeon could not +have answered at once. +</p> + +<p> +There was something, however, which Spilett knew must be done, and that was to +keep down the inflammation, and to fight against the fever which ensues upon a +wound. The wound must be dressed without delay. It was not necessary to bring +on a fresh flow of blood by the use of tepid water and compresses, for Herbert +was already too weak. The wounds, therefore, were bathed with cold water. +</p> + +<p> +Herbert was placed upon his left side and held in that position. +</p> + +<p> +“He must not be moved,” said Spilett; “he is in the position +most favorable to an easy suppuration, and absolute repose is necessary.” +</p> + +<p> +“Cannot we take him to Granite House?” asked Pencroff. +</p> + +<p> +“No, Pencroff,” said the reporter. +</p> + +<p> +Spilett was examining the boy’s wounds again with close attention. +Herbert was so frightfully pale that he became alarmed. +</p> + +<p> +“Cyrus,” said he, “I am no doctor. I am in a terrible strait; +you must help me with your advice and assistance.” +</p> + +<p> +“Calm yourself, my friend,” answered the engineer, pressing his +hand. “Try to judge coolly. Think only of saving Herbert.” +</p> + +<p> +Spilett’s self-possession, which in a moment of discouragement his keen +sense of responsibility had caused him to lose, returned again at these words. +He seated himself upon the bed; Smith remained standing, Pencroff had torn up +his shirt and began mechanically to make lint. +</p> + +<p> +Spilett explained that the first thing to do was to check the hemorrhage, but +not to close the wounds or bring on immediate cicatrization—for there had +been internal perforation, and they must not let the suppurated matter collect +within. It was decided therefore to dress the two wounds, but not to press them +together. The colonists possessed a most powerful agent for quelling +inflamation, and one which nature supplies in the greatest abundance; to-wit, +cold water, which is now used by all doctors. It has, moreover, the advantage +of allowing the wound perfect rest, and dispensing with the frequent dressing, +which by exposing the wound to the air in the early stages, is so often +attended with lamentable results. +</p> + +<p> +Thus did Smith and Spilett reason, with clear, native good sense, and acted as +the best surgeon would have done. The wounds were bandaged with linen and +constantly soaked with fresh water. The sailor had lighted a fire in the +chimney, and the house fortunately contained all the necessaries of life. They +had maple-sugar and the medicinal plants which the boy had gathered on the +shores of Lake Grant. From these they made a refreshing drink for the sick boy. +His fever was very high, and he lay all that day and night without a sign of +consciousness. His life was hanging on a thread. +</p> + +<p> +On the next day, November 12, they began to have some hopes of his recovery. +His consciousness returned, he opened his eyes and recognized them all. He even +said two or three words, and wanted to know what had happened. Spilett told +him, and begged him to keep perfectly quiet; that his life was not in danger, +and his wounds would heal in a few days. Herbert suffered very little, for the +inflammation was successfully kept down by the plentiful use of cold water. A +regular suppuration had set in, the fever did not increase, and they began to +hope that this terrible accident would not end in a worse catastrophe. +</p> + +<p> +Pencroff took heart again; he was the best of nurses, like a Sister of Charity, +or a tender mother watching over her child. Herbert had fallen into another +stupor, but this time the sleep appeared more natural. +</p> + +<p> +“Tell me again that you have hope, Mr. Spilett,” said Pencroff; +“tell me again that you will save my boy!” +</p> + +<p> +“We shall save him,” said the reporter. “The wound is a +serious one, and perhaps the ball has touched the lung; but a wound in that +organ is not mortal.” +</p> + +<p> +“May God grant it!” answered the sailor. +</p> + +<p> +As may be imagined, the care of Herbert had occupied all their time and +thoughts for the first twenty-four hours at the corral. They had not considered +the urgent danger of a return of the convicts, nor taken any precautions for +the future. But on this day while Pencroff was watching over the invalid, Smith +and the reporter took counsel together as to their plans. +</p> + +<p> +They first searched the corral. There was no trace of Ayrton, and it seemed +probable that he had resisted his former companions, and fallen by their hands. +The corral had not been pillaged, and as its gates had remained shut, the +domestic animals had not been able to wander away into the woods. They could +see no traces of the pirates either in the dwelling or the palisade. The only +thing gone was the stock of ammunition. +</p> + +<p> +“The poor fellow was taken by surprise,” said Smith, “and as +he was a man to show fight, no doubt they made an end of him.” +</p> + +<p> +“Yes,” replied the reporter, “and then, no doubt, they took +possession here, where they found everything in great plenty, and took to +flight only when they saw us coming.” +</p> + +<p> +“We must beat the woods,” said the engineer, and rid the island of +these wretches. But we will have to wait some time in the corral, till the day +comes when we can safely carry Herbert to Granite House.” +</p> + +<p> +“But Neb?” asked the reporter. +</p> + +<p> +“Neb’s safe enough.” +</p> + +<p> +“Suppose he becomes anxious and risks coming here?” +</p> + +<p> +“He must not come,” said Smith sharply. “He would be murdered +on the way!” +</p> + +<p> +“It’s very likely he will try.” +</p> + +<p> +“Ah! if the telegraph was only in working order, we could warn him! But +now it’s impossible. We can’t leave Pencroff and Herbert here +alone. Well, I’ll go by myself to Granite House!” +</p> + +<p> +“No, no, Cyrus,” said the reporter, “you must not expose +yourself. These wretches are watching the corral from their ambush, and there +would be two mishaps instead of one!” +</p> + +<p> +“But Neb has been without news of us for twenty-four hours,” +repeated the engineer. “He will want to come.” +</p> + +<p> +While he reflected, his gaze fell upon Top, who, by running to and fro, seemed +to say, “Have you forgotten me?” +</p> + +<p> +“Top!” cried Smith. +</p> + +<p> +The dog sprang up at this master’s call. +</p> + +<p> +“Yes, Top shall go!” cried the reporter, who understood in a flash. +Top will make his way where we could not pass, will take our message and bring +us back an answer.” +</p> + +<p> +“Quick!” said Smith, “quick!” +</p> + +<p> +Spilett tore out a page of his note-book and wrote these lines:— +</p> + +<p> +“Herbert wounded. We are at the corral. Be on your guard. Do not leave +Granite House. Have the convicts shown themselves near you? Answer by +Top!” +</p> + +<p> +This laconic note was folded and tied in a conspicuous way to Top’s +collar. +</p> + +<p> +“Top, my dog,” said the engineer, caressing the animal, “Neb, +Top, Neb! Away! away!” +</p> + +<p> +Top sprang high at the words. He understood what was wanted, and the road was +familiar to him. The engineer went to the door of the corral and opened one of +the leaves. +</p> + +<p> +“Neb, Top, Neb!” he cried again, pointing towards Granite House. +</p> + +<p> +Top rushed out and disappeared almost instantly. +</p> + +<p> +“He’ll get there!” said the reporter. +</p> + +<p> +“Yes, and come back, the faithful brute!” +</p> + +<p> +“What time is it?” asked Spilett. +</p> + +<p> +“Ten o’clock.” +</p> + +<p> +“In an hour he may be here. We will watch for him. +</p> + +<p> +The door of the corral was closed again. The engineer and the reporter +re-entered the house. Herbert lay in a profound sleep. Pencroff kept his +compresses constantly wet with cold water. Spilett, seeing that just then there +was nothing else to do, set to work to prepare some food, all the time keeping +his eye on that part of the inclosure which backed up against the spur, from +which an attack might be made. +</p> + +<p> +The colonists awaited Top’s return with much anxiety. A little before 11 +o’clock Smith andSpilett stood with their carbines behind the door, ready +to open it at the dog’s first bark. They knew that if Top got safely to +Granite House, Neb would send him back at once. +</p> + +<p> +They had waited about ten minutes, when they heard a loud report, followed +instantly by continuous barking. The engineer opened the door, and, seeing +smoke still curling up among the trees a hundred paces off, he fired in that +direction. Just then Top bounded into the corral, whose door was quickly shut. +</p> + +<p> +“Top, Top!” cried the engineer, caressing the dog’s large, +noble head. A note was fastened to his collar, containing these words in +Neb’s sprawling handwriting:—— +</p> + +<p> +“No pirates near Granite House. I will not stir. Poor Mr. Herbert!” +</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2><a name="L" id="L"></a>CHAPTER L.</h2> + +<p class="letter"> +THE CONVICTS IN THE NEIGHBORHOOD OF THE CORRAL—PROVISIONAL +OCCUPATION—CONTINUATION OF HERBERT’S +TREATMENT—PENCROFF’S JUBILATION—REVIEW OF THE +PAST—FUTURE PROSPECTS—SMITH’S IDEAS. +</p> + +<p> +So, then, the convicts were close by, watching the corral, and waiting to kill +the colonists one after another. They must be attacked like wild beasts, but +with the greatest precaution, for the wretches had the advantage of position, +seeing and not being seen, able to make a sudden attack, yet not themselves to +be surprised. +</p> + +<p> +So Smith made his arrangements to live at the corral, which was fully +provisioned. Ayrton’s house was furnished with all the necessaries of +life, and the convicts, frightened away by the colonists’ arrival, had +not had time to pillage. It was most likely, as Spilett suggested, that the +course of events had been this:—The convicts had followed the southern +coast, and after getting over into Serpentine Peninsula, and being in no humor +to risk themselves in the woods of the Far West, they had reached the month of +Fall River. Then, walking up the right bank of the stream, they had come to the +spur of Mount Franklin; here was their most natural place of refuge. And they +had soon discovered the corral. They had probably installed themselves there, +had been surprised by Ayrton, had overcome the unfortunate man, and—the +rest was easily divined! +</p> + +<p> +Meanwhile the convicts, reduced to five, but well armed, were prowling in the +woods, and to pursue them was to be exposed to their fire without the power +either of avoiding or of anticipating them. +</p> + +<p> +“There is nothing else to do but wait,” repeated Smith. “When +Herbert is well again, we will beat the island, and have a shot at these +rascals; while at the same time——” +</p> + +<p> +“We search for our mysterious protector,” added Spilett, finishing +the sentence. “Ah! we must confess, dear Cyrus, that, for once, his +protection has failed us.” +</p> + +<p> +“We don’t know about that,” answered the engineer. +</p> + +<p> +“What do you mean?” asked the reporter. +</p> + +<p> +“We are not at the end of our troubles, my dear Spilett, and his powerful +interference may still be exercised. But now we must think of Herbert.” +</p> + +<p> +Several days passed, and the poor boy’s condition was happily no worse; +and to gain time was a great thing. The cold water, always kept at the proper +temperature, had absolutely prevented the inflammation of the wounds. Nay, it +seemed to the reporter that this water, which contained a little sulphur, due +to the neighborhood of the volcano, had a direct tendency towards +cicatrization. The suppuration was much less copious, and, thanks to excellent +nursing, Herbert had returned to consciousness, and his fever had abated. He +was, moreover, strictly dieted, and, of course, was very weak; but he had +plenty of broths and gruels, and absolute rest was doing him great good. +</p> + +<p> +Smith, Spilett, and Pencroff had become very skilful in tending him. All the +linen in the house had been sacrificed. The wounded parts, covered with lint +and compresses, were subjected to just enough pressure to cicatrize them +without bringing on a reaction of inflammation. The reporter dressed the wounds +with the greatest care, repeating to his companions the medical axiom that good +dressing is as rare as a good operation. +</p> + +<p> +At the end of ten days, by the 22d of November, Herbert was decidedly better. +He had begun to take some nourishment. The color came back to his cheeks, and +he smiled at his nurse. He talked a little, in spite of Pencroff, who chattered +away all the time to keep the boy from saying a word, and told the most +remarkable stories. Herbert inquired about Ayrton, and was surprised not to see +him at the bedside; but the sailor, who would not distress his patient, +answered merely that Ayrton had gone to be with Neb at Granite House in case +the convicts attacked it. “Nice fellows they are,” said he. +“To think that Mr. Smith wanted to appeal to their feelings! I’ll +send them my compliments in a good heavy bullet!” +</p> + +<p> +“And nobody has seen them?” asked Herbert. +</p> + +<p> +“No, my boy,” answered the sailor, “but we will find them, +and when you are well we shall see whether these cowards, who strike from +behind, will dare to meet us face to face.” +</p> + +<p> +“I am still very weak, dear Pencroff.” +</p> + +<p> +“Oh! your strength will come back little by little. What’s a ball +through the chest? Nothing to speak of. I have seen several of them, and feel +no worse for it.” +</p> + +<p> +In fine, things were growing better, and it no unlucky complication occurred, +Herbert’s cure might be regarded as certain. But what would have been the +colonists’ situation if the ball had remained in his body, if his arm or +leg had had to be amputated? They could not think of it without a shudder. +</p> + +<p> +It seemed to Smith that he and his companions, until now so fortunate, had +entered upon an ill-omened time. For the two and a half years which had elapsed +since their escape from Richmond they had succeeded in everything. But now luck +seemed to be turning against them. Ayrton, doubtless, was dead, and Herbert +severely wounded; and that strange but powerful intervention, which had done +them such mighty services, seemed now to be withdrawn. Had the mysterious being +abandoned the island, or himself been overcome? +</p> + +<p> +They could give no answer to these questions; but though they talked together +about them, they were not men to despair. They looked the situation in the +face; they analyzed the chances; they prepared themselves for every +contingency; they stood firm and undaunted before the future; and if adversity +should continue to oppress them, she would find them men prepared to do their +utmost. +</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2><a name="LI" id="LI"></a>CHAPTER LI.</h2> + +<p class="letter"> +NO NEWS OF NEB—A PROPOSAL FROM PENCROFF AND SPILETT—THE +REPORTER’S SORTIES—A FRAGMENT OF CLOTH—A +MESSAGE—HURRIED DEPARTURE—ARRIVAL AT PROSPECT PLATEAU. +</p> + +<p> +Herbert’s convalescence progressed steadily. Only one thing was left to +wish for, to wit, that he would get well enough to be taken to Granite House. +However well arranged and provisioned might be the dwelling in the corral, +there was nothing like the solid comfort of their abode in the rock. Besides, +they were not safe here, and, in spite of their watchfulness, they were always +in dread of a shot from the woods. Whereas there in the midst of that +unassailable and inaccessible mass of rock there would be nothing to fear. They +waited, therefore, with impatience for the moment when Herbert could be +carried, without danger to his wound, across the difficult route through +Jacamar Woods. +</p> + +<p> +Though without news of Neb, they had no fear for him. The brave negro, +occupying a position of such strength, would not let himself be surprised. Top +had not been sent back to him, for it seemed useless to expose the faithful dog +to some shot which might deprive the colonists of their most useful helper. The +engineer regretted to see his forces divided, and thus to play into the hands +of the pirates. Since Ayrton’s disappearance, they were only four against +five, for Herbert could not be counted. The poor boy knew and lamented the +danger of which he was the cause. +</p> + +<p> +One day, November 29, when he was asleep, they discussed their plans of action +against the convicts. +</p> + +<p> +“My friends,” said the reporter, after they had talked over the +impossibility of communicating with Neb, “I agree with you that to risk +ourselves on the path leading from the corral would be a useless exposure. But +why should we not beat the woods for these wretches?” +</p> + +<p> +“That’s what I was thinking,” replied Pencroff. +“We’re not afraid of a bullet, and for my part, if Mr. Smith +approves, I am ready to take to the woods. Surely one man is as good as +another!” +</p> + +<p> +“But is he as good as five?” asked the engineer. +</p> + +<p> +“I will go with Pencroff,’ answered the reporter, “and the +two of us, well armed, and Top with us—” +</p> + +<p> +“My dear Spilett, and you, Pencroff, let us discuss the matter coolly. If +the convicts were in hiding in some place known to us, from which we could +drive them by an attack, it would be a different affair. But have we not every +reason to fear that they will get the first shot?” +</p> + +<p> +“Well, sir,” cried Pencroff, “a bullet doesn’t always +hit its mark!” +</p> + +<p> +“That which pierced Herbert did not go astray,” answered the +engineer. “Besides, remember that if you both leave the corral, I shall +be left alone to defend it. Can you answer that the convicts will not see you +go off, that they will not wait till you are deep in the woods, and then make +their attack in your absence upon a man and a sick boy?” +</p> + +<p> +There was nothing to say in answer to this reasoning, which went home to the +minds of all. +</p> + +<p> +“If only Ayrton was yet one of the party!” said Spilett. +“Poor fellow! his return to a life with his kind was not for long!” +</p> + +<p> +“If he is dead!” added Pencroff, in a peculiar tone. +</p> + +<p> +“Have you any hope that those rascals have spared him, Pencroff?” +asked Spilett. +</p> + +<p> +“Yes, if their interest led them to do so.” +</p> + +<p> +“What! do you suppose that Ayrton, among his former companions in guilt, +would forget all he owed to us—” +</p> + +<p> +“Nobody can tell,” answered the sailor, with some hesitation. +</p> + +<p> +“Pencroff,” said Smith, laying his hand on the sailor’s arm, +“that was an unworthy thought. I will guarantee Ayrton’s +fidelity!” +</p> + +<p> +“And I too,” added the reporter, decidedly. +</p> + +<p> +“Yes, yes, Mr. Smith, I am wrong,” answered Pencroff. “But +really I am a little out of my mind. This imprisonment in the corral is driving +me to distraction.” +</p> + +<p> +“Be patient, Pencroff,” answered the engineer. “How soon, my +dear Spilett, do you suppose Herbert can be carried to Granite House?” +</p> + +<p> +“That is hard to say, Cyrus,” answered the reporter, “for a +little imprudence might be fatal. But if he goes on as well as he is doing now +for another week, why then we will see.” +</p> + +<p> +At that season the spring was two months advanced. The weather was good, and +the heat began to be oppressive. The woods were in fall leaf, and it was almost +time to reap the accustomed harvest. It can easily be understood how this siege +in the corral upset the plans of the colonists. +</p> + +<p> +Once or twice the reporter risked himself outside, and walked around the +palisade. Top was with him, and his carbine was loaded. +</p> + +<p> +He met no one and saw nothing suspicious. Top would have warned him of any +danger, and so long as the dog did not bark, there was nothing to fear. +</p> + +<p> +But on his second sortie, on the 27th of November, Spilett, who had ventured +into the woods for a quarter of a mile to the south of the mountain, noticed +that Top smelt something. The dog’s motions were no longer careless; he +ran to and fro, ferreting about in the grass and thistles, as if his keen nose +had put him on the track of an enemy. +</p> + +<p> +Spilett followed the dog, encouraging and exciting him by his voice; his eye on +the alert, his carbine on his shoulder, and availing himself of the shelter of +the trees. It was not likely that Top had recognized the presence of a man, for +in that case he would have announced it by a half-stifled but angry bark. Since +not even a growl was to be heard, the danger was evidently neither near nor +approaching. +</p> + +<p> +About five minutes had passed in this way, Top ferreting about and the reporter +cautiously following him, when the dog suddenly rushed towards a thicket and +tore from it a strip of cloth. It was a piece from a garment, dirty and torn. +Spilett went back with it to the corral. There the colonists examined it and +recognized it as a piece of Ayrton’s waistcoat, which was made of the +felt prepared only in the workshop at Granite House. +</p> + +<p> +“You see, Pencroff,” observed Smith, “Ayrton resisted +manfully, and the convicts dragged him off in spite of his efforts. Do you +still doubt his good faith?” +</p> + +<p> +“No, Mr. Smith,” replied the sailor; “I have long ago given +up that momentary suspicion. But I think we may draw one conclusion from this +fact.” +</p> + +<p> +“What is that?” +</p> + +<p> +“That Ayrton was not killed at the corral. They must have dragged him out +alive, and perhaps he is still alive.” +</p> + +<p> +“It may be so,” said the engineer, thoughtfully. +</p> + +<p> +The most impatient of them all to get back to Granite House was Herbert. He +knew how necessary it was for them all to be there, and felt that it was he who +was keeping them at the corral. The one thought which had taken possession of +his mind was to leave the corral, and to leave it as soon as possible. He +believed that he could bear the journey to Granite House. He was sure that his +strength would come back to him sooner in his own room, with the sight and the +smell of the sea. +</p> + +<p> +It was now November 29. The colonists were talking together in Herbert’s +room, about 7 o’clock in the morning, when they heard Top barking loudly. +They seized their guns, always loaded and cocked, and went out of the house. +</p> + +<p> +Top ran to the bottom of the palisade, jumping and barking with joy. +</p> + +<p> +“Some one is coming!” +</p> + +<p> +“Yes.” +</p> + +<p> +“And not an enemy.” +</p> + +<p> +“Neb, perhaps?” +</p> + +<p> +“Or Ayrton?” +</p> + +<p> +These words had scarcely been exchanged between the engineer and his comrade, +when something leaped the palisade and fell on the ground inside. It was Jup. +Master Jup himself, who was frantically welcomed by Top. +</p> + +<p> +“Neb has sent him!” said the reporter. +</p> + +<p> +“Then he must have some note on him,” said the engineer. +</p> + +<p> +Pencroff rushed to the orang. Neb could not have chosen a better messenger, who +could get through obstacles which none of the others could have surmounted. +Smith was right. Around Jup’s neck was hung a little bag, and in it was a +note in Neb’s handwriting. The dismay of the colonists may be imagined +when they read these words:— +</p> + +<p> +“FRIDAY, 6 A. M.”—The convicts are on the plateau. +NEB.” +</p> + +<p> +They looked at each other without saying a word, then walked back to the house. +What was there to do? The convicts on Prospect Plateau meant disaster, +devastation and ruin! Herbert knew at once from their faces that the situation +had become grave, and when he saw Jup, he had no more doubt that misfortune was +threatening Granite House. +</p> + +<p> +“Mr. Smith,” said he, “I want to go. I can bear the journey. +I want to start.” +</p> + +<p> +Spilett came up to Herbert and looked at him intently. +</p> + +<p> +“Let us start then,” said he. +</p> + +<p> +The question of Herbert’s transportation was quickly decided. A litter +would be the most comfortable way of travelling, but it would necessitate two +porters; that is, two guns would be subtracted from their means of defense. On +the other hand, by placing the mattresses on which Herbert lay in the wagon, so +as to deaden the motion, and by walking carefully they could escape jolting +him, and would leave their arms free. +</p> + +<p> +The wagon was brought out and the onagga harnessed to it; Smith and the +reporter lifted the mattresses with Herbert on them, and laid them in the +bottom of the wagon between the rails. The weather was fine, and the sun shone +brightly between the trees. +</p> + +<p> +“Are the arms ready?” asked Smith. +</p> + +<p> +They were. The engineer and Pencroff, each armed with a double-barrelled gun, +and Spilett with his carbine, stood ready to set out. +</p> + +<p> +“How do you feel, Herbert?” asked the engineer. +</p> + +<p> +“Don’t be troubled, Mr. Smith,” answered the boy, “I +shall not die on the way.” +</p> + +<p> +They could see that the poor fellow was making a tremendous effort. The +engineer felt a grievous pang. He hesitated to give the signal for departure. +But to stay would have thrown Herbert into despair. +</p> + +<p> +“Let us start,” said Smith. +</p> + +<p> +The corral door was opened. Jup and Top, who knew how to be quiet on emergency, +rushed on ahead. The wagon went out, the gate was shut, and the onagga, under +Pencroff’s guidance, walked on with a slow pace. +</p> + +<p> +It was necessary, on account of the wagon, to keep to the direct road from the +corral to Granite House, although it was known to the convicts. Smith and +Spilett walked on either side of the chariot, ready to meet any attack. Still +it was not likely that the convicts had yet abandoned Prospect Plateau. +Neb’s note had evidently been sent as soon as they made their appearance. +Now this note was dated at 6 o’clock in the morning, and the active +orang, who was accustomed to the way, would have got over the five miles from +Granite House in three-quarters of an hour. Probably they would have no danger +to fear till they approached Granite House. +</p> + +<p> +But they kept on the alert. Top and Jup, the latter armed with his stick, +sometimes in front, and sometimes beating the woods on either side, gave no +signal of approaching danger. The wagon moved on slowly, and an hour after +leaving the corral, they had passed over four of the five miles without any +incident. +</p> + +<p> +They drew near the plateau another mile, and they saw the causeway over +Glycerine Creek. At last, through an opening in the wood, they saw the horizon +of the sea. But the wagon went on slowly, and none of its defenders could leave +it for a moment. Just then Pencroff stopped the wagon and cried, fiercely, +</p> + +<p> +“Ah, the wretches!” +</p> + +<p> +And he pointed to a thick smoke which curled up from the mill, the stables, and +the buildings of the poultry-yard. In the midst of this smoke a man was running +about. It was Neb. +</p> + +<p> +His companions uttered a cry. He heard them and rushed to meet them. +</p> + +<p> +The convicts had abandoned the plateau half an hour before, after having done +all the mischief they could. +</p> + +<p> +“And Mr. Herbert?” cried Neb. +</p> + +<p> +Spilett went back to the wagon. Herbert had fainted. +</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2><a name="LII" id="LII"></a>CHAPTER LII.</h2> + +<p class="letter"> +HERBERT CARRIED TO GRANITE HOUSE—NEB RELATES WHAT HAD +HAPPENED—VISIT OF SMITH TO THE PLATEAU—RUIN AND +DEVASTATION—THE COLONISTS HELPLESS—WILLOW BARK—A MORTAL +FEVER—TOP BARKS AGAIN. +</p> + +<p> +The convicts, the dangers threatening Granite House, the ruin on the plateau, +none of these were thought of, in the present condition of Herbert. It was +impossible to say whether the transportation had occasioned some internal +rupture, but his companions were almost hopeless. +</p> + +<p> +The wagon had been taken to the bend of the river, and there the mattress, on +which lay the unconscious lad, was placed on a litter of branches, and within a +few minutes Herbert was lying on his bed in Granite House. He smiled for a +moment on finding himself again in his chamber, and a few words escaped feebly +from his lips. Spilett looked at his wounds, fearing that they might have +opened, but the cicatrices were unbroken. What, then, was the cause of this +prostration, or why had his condition grown worse? +</p> + +<p> +Soon the lad fell into a feverish sleep, and the reporter and Pencroff watched +beside him. +</p> + +<p> +Meantime, Smith told Neb of all that had happened at the corral, and Neb told +his master of what had passed at the plateau. +</p> + +<p> +It was not until the previous night that the convicts had shown themselves +beyond the edge of the forest, near Glycerine Creek. Neb, keeping watch near +the poultry-yard, had not hesitated to fire at one of them who was crossing the +bridge; but he could not say with what result. At least, it did not disperse +the band, and Neb had but just time to climb up into Granite House, where he, +at least, would be safe. +</p> + +<p> +But what was the next thing to do? How prevent the threatened devastation to +the plateau? How could he inform his master? And, moreover, in what situation +were the occupants of the corral? +</p> + +<p> +Smith and his companions had gone away on the 11th inst., and here it was the +29th. In that time all the information that Neb had received was the disastrous +news brought by Top. Ayrton gone, Herbert badly wounded, the engineer, the +reporter, and the sailor imprisoned in the corral. +</p> + +<p> +The poor negro asked himself what was to be done. Personally, he had nothing to +fear, as the convicts could not get into Granite House. But the works, the +fields, all the improvements, were at the mercy of the pirates. Was it not best +to let Smith know of the threatened danger? +</p> + +<p> +Then Neb thought of employing Jup on this errand. He knew the intelligence of +the orang. Jup knew the word “corral.” It was not yet daylight. The +agile brute could slip through the woods unperceived. So the negro wrote a +note, which he fastened round Jup’s neck, and taking the monkey to the +door and unrolling a long cord, he repeated the words:— +</p> + +<p> +“Jup! Jup! To the corral! the corral!” +</p> + +<p> +The animal understood him, and, seizing the cord, slid down to the ground, and +disappeared in the darkness. +</p> + +<p> +“You did well, Neb, although In not forewarning us perhaps you would have +done better!” said Smith, thinking of Herbert, and how the carrying him +back had been attended with such serious results. +</p> + +<p> +Neb finished his recital. The convicts had not shown themselves upon the beach, +doubtless fearing the inhabitants of Granite House, whose number they did not +know. But the plateau was open and unprotected by Granite House. Here, +therefore, they gave loose reins to their instinct of depredation and +destruction, and they had left but half-an-hour before the colonists returned. +</p> + +<p> +Neb had rushed from his retreat, and at the risk of being shot, he had climbed +to the plateau and had tried to put out the fire which was destroying the +inclosure to the poultry-yard. Ho was engaged in this work when the others +returned. +</p> + +<p> +Thus the presence of the convicts was a constant menace to the colonists, +heretofore so happy, and they might expect the most disastrous results from +them. +</p> + +<p> +Smith, accompanied by Neb, went to see for himself, the extent of the injury +done. He walked along by the Mercy and up the left bank without seeing any +trace of the convicts. It was likely that the latter had either witnessed the +return of the colonists, and had gone back to the corral, now undefended, or +that they had gone back to their camp to await an occasion to renew the attack. +</p> + +<p> +At present, however, all attempts to rid the island of these pests were subject +to the condition of Herbert. +</p> + +<p> +The engineer and Neb reached the place. It was a scene of desolation. Fields +trampled; the harvest scattered; the stables and other buildings burned; the +frightened animals roaming at large over the plateau. The fowls, which had +sought refuge on the lake, were returning to their accustomed place on its +banks. Everything here would have to be done over again. +</p> + +<p> +The succeeding days were the saddest which the colonists had passed on the +island. Herbert became more and more feeble. He was in a sort of stupor, and +symptoms of delirium began to manifest themselves. Cooling draughts were all +the remedies at the disposition of the colonists. Meantime, the fever became +intermittent, and it was necessary to check, it before it developed greater +strength. +</p> + +<p> +“To do this,” said Spilett, “we must have a febrifuge.” +</p> + +<p> +“And we have neither cinchonia nor quinine,” answered the engineer. +</p> + +<p> +“No, but we can make a substitute from the bark of the willow trees at +the lake.” +</p> + +<p> +“Let us try it immediately,” replied Smith. +</p> + +<p> +Indeed, willow bark has been partly considered succedaneous to cinchonia, but +since they had no means of extracting the salicin, the bark must be used in its +natural state. +</p> + +<p> +Smith, therefore, cut some pieces of bark from a species of black willow, and, +reducing them to powder, this powder was given to Herbert the same evening. +</p> + +<p> +The night passed without incident. Herbert was somewhat delirious, but the +fever did not manifest itself. Pencroff became more hopeful, but Spilett, who +knew that the fever was intermittent, looked forward to the next day with +anxiety. +</p> + +<p> +They noticed that during the apyrexy, Herbert seemed completely prostrated, his +head heavy, and subject to dizziness. Another alarming symptom was a congestion +of the liver, and soon a more marked delirium manifested itself. +</p> + +<p> +Spilett was overwhelmed by this new complication. He drew the engineer aside +and said to him:—— +</p> + +<p> +“It is a pernicious fever!” +</p> + +<p> +“A pernicious fever!” cried Smith. “You must be mistaken, +Spilett. A pernicious fever never declares itself spontaneously; it must have a +germ.” +</p> + +<p> +“I am not mistaken,” replied the reporter. “Herbert may have +caught the germ in the marshes. He has already had one attack; if another +follows, and we cannot prevent a third—he is lost!” +</p> + +<p> +“But the willow bark?——” +</p> + +<p> +“Is insufficient. And a third attack of pernicious fever, when one cannot +break it by means of quinine, is always mortal!” +</p> + +<p> +Happily Pencroff had not heard this conversation. It would have driven him +wild. +</p> + +<p> +Towards noon of the 7th, the second attack manifested itself. The crisis was +terrible. Herbert felt that he was lost! He stretched out his arms towards +Smith, towards Spilett, towards Pencroff! He did not want to die! The scene was +heartrending, and it became necessary to take Pencroff away. +</p> + +<p> +The attack lasted five hours. It was plain that the lad could not support a +third. The night was full of torture. In his delirium, Herbert wrestled with +the convicts; he called Ayrton; he supplicated that mysterious being, that +protector, who had disappeared but whose image haunted him—then he fell +into a profound prostration, and Spilett, more than once, thought the poor boy +was dead! +</p> + +<p> +The next day passed with only a continuation of the lad’s feebleness. His +emaciated hands clutched the bed clothing. They continued giving him doses of +the willow powder, but the reporter anticipated no result from it. +</p> + +<p> +“If,” said he, “before to-morrow morning we cannot give him a +more powerful febrifuge than this, Herbert will die!” +</p> + +<p> +The night came—doubtless the last night for this brave lad, so good, so +clever, whom all loved as their own child! The sole remedy against this +pernicious fever, the sole specific which could vanquish it, was not to be +found on Lincoln Island! +</p> + +<p> +During the night Herbert became frightfully delirious. He recognized no one. It +was not even probable that he would live till morning. His strength was +exhausted. Towards 3 o’clock he uttered a frightful cry. He was seized by +a terrible convulsion. Neb, who was beside him, rushed, frightened, into the +adjoining chamber, where his companions were watching. +</p> + +<p> +At the same moment Top gave one of his strange barks. +</p> + +<p> +All returned to the chamber and gathered round the dying lad, who struggled to +throw himself from the bed. Spilett, who held his arms, felt his pulse slowly +rising. +</p> + +<p> +Five o’clock came. The sun’s rays shone into the chambers of +Granite House. A beautiful day, the last on earth for poor Herbert, dawned over +Lincoln Island. +</p> + +<p> +A sunbeam crept on to the table beside the bed. +</p> + +<p> +Suddenly Pencroff, uttering an exclamation, pointed to something on that table. +</p> + +<p> +It was a small oblong box, bearing these words:—— +</p> + +<p> +<i>Sulphate of quinine.</i> +</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2><a name="LIII" id="LIII"></a>CHAPTER LIII.</h2> + +<p class="letter"> +AN INEXPLICABLE MYSTERY—HERBERT’S CONVALESCENCE—THE +UNEXPLORED PARTS OF THE ISLAND—PREPARATIONS FOR DEPARTURE—THE FIRST +DAY—NIGHT—SECOND DAY—THE +KAURIS—CASSOWARIES—FOOTPRINTS IN THE SAND—ARRIVAL AT REPTILE +END. +</p> + +<p> +Spilett took the box and opened it. It contained a white powder, which he +tasted. Its extreme bitterness was unmistakable. It was indeed that precious +alkaloid, the true anti-periodic. +</p> + +<p> +It was necessary to administer it to Herbert without delay. How it came there +could be discussed later. +</p> + +<p> +Spilett called for some coffee, and Neb brought a lukewarm infusion, in which +the reporter placed eighteen grains of quinine and gave the mixture to Herbert +to drink. +</p> + +<p> +There was still time, as the third attack of the fever had not yet manifested +itself. And, indeed, it did not return. Moreover, every one became hopeful. The +mysterious influence was again about them, and that too in a moment when they +had despaired of its aid. +</p> + +<p> +After a few hours, Herbert rested more quietly, and the colonists could talk of +the incident. The intervention of this unknown being was more evident than +ever, but how had he succeeded in getting in to Granite House during the night? +It was perfectly inexplicable, and, indeed, the movements of this “genius +of the island” were as mysterious as the genius himself. +</p> + +<p> +The quinine was administered to Herbert every three hours, and the next day the +lad was certainly better. It is true he was not out of danger, since these +fevers are often followed by dangerous relapses; but, then, here was the +specific, and, doubtless, not far off, the one who had brought it. In two days +more Herbert became convalescent. He was still feeble, but there had been no +relapse, and he cheerfully submitted to the rigorous diet imposed upon, him. He +was so anxious to get well. +</p> + +<p> +Pencroff was beside himself with joy. After the critical period had been safely +passed he seized the reporter in his arms, and called him nothing but Doctor +Spilett. +</p> + +<p> +But the true physician was still to be found. +</p> + +<p> +““We will find him!” said the sailor. +</p> + +<p> +The year 1867, during which the colonists had been so hardly beset, came to an +end, and the new year began with superb weather. A fine warmth, a tropical +temperature, moderated by the sea breeze. Herbert’s bed was drawn close +to the window, where he could inhale long draughts of the salt, salubrious air. +His appetite began to return, and what tempting savory morsels Neb prepared for +him! +</p> + +<p> +“It made one wish to be ill,” said Pencroff. +</p> + +<p> +During this time the convicts had not shown themselves, neither was there any +news of Ayrton. The engineer and Herbert still hoped to get him back, but the +others thought that the unhappy man had succumbed. In a month’s time, +when the lad should have regained his strength, the important search would be +undertaken, and all these questions set at rest. +</p> + +<p> +During January the work on the plateau consisted simply in collecting the grain +and vegetables undestroyed in the work of devastation, and planting some for a +late crop during the next season. Smith preferred to wait till the island was +rid of the convicts before he repaired the damage to the mill, poultry-yard, +and stable. +</p> + +<p> +In the latter part of the month Herbert began to take some exercise. He was +eighteen years old, his constitution was splendid, and from this moment the +improvement in his condition was visible daily. +</p> + +<p> +By the end of the month he walked on the shore and over the plateau, and +strengthened himself with sea-baths. Smith felt that the day for the +exploration could be set, and the 15th of February was chosen. The nights at +this season were very clear, and would, therefore, be advantageous to the +search. +</p> + +<p> +The necessary preparations were begun. These were important, as the colonists +had determined not to return to Granite House until their double end had been +obtained—to destroy the convicts and find Ayrton, if he was still alive; +and to discover the being who presided so efficiently over the destinies of the +colony. +</p> + +<p> +The colonists were familiar with all the eastern coast of the island between +Claw Cape and the Mandibles; with Tadorn’s Fens; the neighborhood of Lake +Grant; the portion of Jacamar Wood lying between the road to the corral and the +Mercy; the courses of the Mercy and Red Creek, and those spurs of Mount +Franklin where the corral was located. +</p> + +<p> +They had partially explored the long sweep of Washington Bay from Claw Cape to +Reptile End; the wooded and marshy shore of the west coast, and the +interminable downs which extended to the half-open mouth of Shark Gulf. +</p> + +<p> +But they were unacquainted with the vast woods of Serpentine Peninsula; all the +right bank of the Mercy; the left bank of Fall River, and the confused mass of +ravines and ridges which covered three-fourths of the base of Mount Franklin on +the west, north, and east, and where, doubtless, there existed deep recesses. +Therefore, many thousands of acres had not yet been explored. +</p> + +<p> +It was decided that the expedition should cross the Forest of the Far West, in +such a manner as to go over all that part situated on the right of the Mercy. +Perhaps it would have been better to have gone at once to the corral, where it +was probable the convicts had either pillaged the place or installed themselves +there. But either the pillage was a work accomplished or the convicts had +purposed to entrench themselves there, and it would always be time to dislodge +them. +</p> + +<p> +So the first plan was decided upon, and it was resolved to cut a road through +these woods, placing Granite House in communication with the end of the +peninsula, a distance of sixteen or seventeen miles. +</p> + +<p> +The wagon was in perfect order. The onagers, well rested, were in excellent +condition for a long pull. Victuals, camp utensils, and the portable stove, +were loaded into the wagon, together with a careful selection of arms and +ammunition. +</p> + +<p> +No one was left in Granite House; even Top and Jup took part in the expedition. +The inaccessible dwelling could take care of itself. +</p> + +<p> +Sunday, the day before the departure, was observed as a day of rest and prayer, +and on the morning of the 15th Smith took the measures necessary to defend +Granite House from invasion. The ladders were carried to the Chimneys and +buried there, the basket of the elevator was removed, and nothing left of the +apparatus. Pencroff, who remained behind in Granite House, saw to this latter, +and then slid down to the ground by means of a double cord which, dropped to +the ground, severed the last connection between the entrance and the shore. +</p> + +<p> +The weather was superb. +</p> + +<p> +“It is going to be a warm day,” said the reporter, joyfully. +</p> + +<p> +“But, Doctor Spilett,” said Pencroff, “our road is under the +trees, and we will never see the sun!” +</p> + +<p> +“Forward!” said the engineer. +</p> + +<p> +The wagon was ready on the bank. The reporter insisted on Herbert taking a seat +in it, at least for the first few hours. Neb walked by the onagers. Smith, the +reporter, and the sailor went on ahead. Top bounded off into the grass; Jup +took a seat beside Herbert, and the little party started. +</p> + +<p> +The wagon went up the left bank of the Mercy, across the bridge, and there, +leaving the route to Balloon Harbor to the left, the explorers began to make a +way through the forest. +</p> + +<p> +For the first two miles, the trees grew sufficiently apart to permit the wagon +to proceed easily, without any other obstacle than here and there a stump or +some bushes to arrest their progress. The thick foliage made a cool shadow over +the ground. Birds and beasts were plenty, and reminded the colonists of their +early excursions on the island. +</p> + +<p> +“Nevertheless,” remarked Smith, “I notice that the animals +are more timid than formerly. These woods have been recently traversed by the +convicts, and we shall certainly find their traces.” +</p> + +<p> +And, indeed, in many places, they saw where a party of men had passed, or built +a fire, but in no one place was there a definite camp. +</p> + +<p> +The engineer had charged his companions to abstain from hunting, so as not to +make the convicts aware of their presence by the sound of firearms. +</p> + +<p> +In the afternoon, some six miles from Granite House, the advance became very +difficult, and they had to pass certain thickets, into which Top and Jup were +sent as skirmishers. +</p> + +<p> +The halt for the night was made, nine miles from Granite House, on the bank of +a small affluent to the Mercy, of whose existence they had been unaware. They +had good appetites, and all made a hearty supper, after which the camp was +carefully organized, in order to guard against a surprise from the convicts. +Two of the colonists kept guard together in watches of two hours, but Herbert, +in spite of his wishes, was not allowed to do duty. +</p> + +<p> +The night passed without incident. The silence was unbroken save by the +growling of jaguars and the chattering of monkeys, which seemed particularly to +annoy Jup. +</p> + +<p> +The next day, they were unable to accomplish more than six miles. Like true +“frontiersmen,” the colonists avoided the large trees and cut down +only the smaller ones, so that their road was a winding one. +</p> + +<p> +During the day Herbert discovered some specimens of the tree ferns, with +vase-shaped leaves, and the algarobabeau (St. John’s bread), which the +onagers eat greedily. Splendid kauris, disposed in groups, rose to a height of +two hundred feet, their cylindrical trunks surmounted by a crown of verdure. +</p> + +<p> +As to fauna, they discovered no new specimens, but they saw, without being able +to approach them, a couple of large birds, such as are common in Australia, a +sort of cassowary, called emus, which were five feet high, of brown plumage, +and belonged to the order of runners. Top tried his best to catch them, but +they outran him easily, so great was their speed. +</p> + +<p> +The colonists again found traces of the convicts. Near a recently-extinguished +fire they found footprints, which they examined with great attention. By +measuring these tracks they were able to determine the presence of five men. +The five convicts had evidently camped here; but—and they made minute +search—they could not discover a sixth track, which would have been that +of Ayrton. +</p> + +<p> +“Ayrton is not with them!” said Herbert. +</p> + +<p> +“No,” replied Pencroff, “the wretches have shot him.” +But they must have a den, to which we can track them.” +</p> + +<p> +“No,” replied the reporter. “It is more likely that they +intend to camp about in places, after this manner, until they become masters of +the island.” +</p> + +<p> +“Masters of the island!” cried the sailor. “Masters of the +island, indeed” he repeated in a horrified voice. Then he +added:—— +</p> + +<p> +“The ball in my gun is the one which wounded Herbert and it will do its +errand!” +</p> + +<p> +But this just reprisal would not restore Ayrton to life, and the only +conclusion to be drawn, from the footprints was that they would never see him +again! +</p> + +<p> +That evening the camp was made fourteen miles front Granite House, and Smith +estimated that it was still five miles to Reptile End. +</p> + +<p> +The next day this point was reached, and the full length of the forest had been +traversed; but nothing indicated the retreat of the convicts, nor the asylum of +the mysterious unknown. +</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2><a name="LIV" id="LIV"></a>CHAPTER LIV.</h2> + +<p class="letter"> +EXPLORATION OF REPTILE END—CAMP AT THE MOUTH OF FALL RIVER—BY THE +CORRAL—THE RECONNOISSANCE—THE RETURN—FORWARD—AN OPEN +DOOR—A LIGHT IN THE WINDOW—BY MOONLIGHT. +</p> + +<p> +The next day, the 18th, was devoted to an exploration of the wooded shore lying +between Reptile End and Fall River. The colonists were searching through the +heart of the forest, whose width, bounded by the shores of the promontory, was +from three to four miles. The trees, by their size and foliage, bore witness to +the richness of the soil, more productive here than in any other portion of the +island. It seemed as if a portion of the virgin forests of America or Central +Africa had been transported here. It seemed, also, as if these superb trees +found beneath the soil, moist on its surface, but heated below by volcanic +fires, a warmth not belonging to a temperate climate. The principal trees, both +in number and size, were the kauris and eucalypti. +</p> + +<p> +But the object of the colonists was not to admire these magnificent vegetables. +They knew already that, in this respect, their island merited a first place in +the Canaries, called, formerly, the Fortunate Isles. But, alas! their island no +longer belonged to them alone; others had taken possession, wretches whom it +was necessary to destroy to the last man. +</p> + +<p> +On the west coast they found no further traces of any kind. +</p> + +<p> +“This does not astonish me,” said Smith. “The convicts landed +near Jetsam Point, and, after having crossed Tadorn’s Fens, they buried +themselves in the forests of the Far West. They took nearly the same route +which we have followed. That explains the traces we have seen in the woods. +Arrived upon the shore, the convicts saw very clearly that it offered no +convenient shelter, and it was then, on going towards the north, that they +discovered the corral—” +</p> + +<p> +“Where they may have returned,” said Pencroff. +</p> + +<p> +“I do not think so,” answered the engineer, “as they would +judge that our searches would be in that direction. The corral is only a +provisional and not a permanent retreat for them.” +</p> + +<p> +“I think so, too,” said the reporter, “and, further, that +they have sought a hiding place among the spurs of Mount Franklin.” +</p> + +<p> +“Then let us push on to the corral!” cried Pencroff. “An end +must be put to this thing, and we are only losing time here.” +</p> + +<p> +“No, my friend,” replied the engineer. +</p> + +<p> +“You forget that we are interested in determining whether the forests of +the Far West do not shelter some habitation. Our exploration has a double end, +Pencroff; to punish crime and to make a discovery.” +</p> + +<p> +“That is all very well, sir,” replied the sailor, “but I have +an idea that we will not discover our friend unless he chooses!” +</p> + +<p> +Pencroff had expressed the opinion of the others as well as his own. It was, +indeed, probable that the retreat of the unknown being was no less mysterious +than his personality. +</p> + +<p> +This evening the wagon halted at the mouth of Fall River. The encampment was +made in the usual way, with the customary precautions. Herbert had recovered +his former strength by this march in the fresh salt air, and his place was no +longer on the wagon, but at the head of the line. +</p> + +<p> +On the 19th, the colonists left the shore and followed up the left bank of Fall +River. The route was already partially cleared, owing to the previous +excursions made from the corral to the west coast. They reached a place six +miles from Mount Franklin. +</p> + +<p> +The engineer’s project was to observe with great care all the valley +through which flowed the river, and to work cautiously up to the corral. If +they should find it occupied, they were to secure it by main force, but if it +should be empty, it was to be used as the point from which the explorations of +Mount Franklin would be made. +</p> + +<p> +The road was through a narrow valley, separating two of the most prominent +spurs of Mount Franklin. The trees grew closely together on the banks of the +river, but were more scattered on the upper slopes. The ground was very much +broken, affording excellent opportunities for an ambush, so that it was +necessary to advance with great caution. Top and Jup went ahead, exploring the +thickets on either hand, but nothing indicated either the presence or nearness +of the convicts, or that these banks had been recently visited. +</p> + +<p> +About 5 o’clock the wagon halted 600 paces from the enclosure, hidden by +a curtain of tall trees. +</p> + +<p> +It was necessary to reconnoitre the place, in order to find out whether it was +occupied, but to do this in the day-time was to run the risk of being shot; +nevertheless Spilett wanted to make the experiment at once, and Pencroff, out +of all patience, wanted to go with him. But Smith would not permit it. +</p> + +<p> +“No, my friends,” said he, “wait until nightfall. I will not +allow one of you to expose yourselves in the daylight.” +</p> + +<p> +“But, sir,”—urged the sailor, but little disposed to obey. +</p> + +<p> +“Pray do not go, Pencroff,” said the engineer. +</p> + +<p> +“All right,” said the sailor. But he gave vent to his anger by +calling the convicts everything bad that he could think of. +</p> + +<p> +The colonists remained about the wagon, keeping a sharp lookout in the +adjoining parts of the forest. +</p> + +<p> +Three hours passed in this manner. The wind fell, and absolute silence reigned +over everything. The slightest sound—the snapping of a twig, a step on +the dry leaves—could easily have been heard. But all was quiet. Top +rested with his head between his paws, giving no sign of inquietude. +</p> + +<p> +By 8 o’clock the evening was far enough advanced for the reconnoissance +to be undertaken, and Spilett and Pencroff set off alone. Top and Jup remained +behind with the others, as it was necessary that no bark or cry should give the +alarm. +</p> + +<p> +“Do not do anything imprudently,” urged Smith. “Remember, you +are not to take possession of the corral, but only to find out whether it is +occupied or not.” +</p> + +<p> +“All right,” answered Pencroff. +</p> + +<p> +The two set out, advancing with the greatest caution. Under the trees, the +darkness was such as to render objects, thirty or forty paces distant, +invisible. Five minutes after having left the wagon they reached the edge of +the opening, at the end of which rose the fence of the enclosure. Here they +halted. Some little light still illuminated the glade. Thirty paces distant was +the gate of the corral, which seemed to be closed. These thirty paces which it +was necessary to cross constituted, to use a ballistic expression, the +dangerous zone, as a shot from the palisade would certainly have killed any one +venturing himself within this space, +</p> + +<p> +Spilett and the sailor were not men to shirk danger, but they knew that any +imprudence of theirs would injure their companions as well as themselves. If +they were killed what would become of the others? +</p> + +<p> +Nevertheless, Pencroff was so excited in finding himself again close to the +corral that he would have hurried forward had not the strong hand of Spilett +detained him. “In a few minutes it will be dark,” whispered the +reporter. +</p> + +<p> +Pencroff grasped his gun nervously, and waited unwillingly. +</p> + +<p> +Very soon the last rays of light disappeared. Mount Franklin loomed darkly +against the western sky, and the night fell with the rapidity peculiar to these +low latitudes. Now was the time. +</p> + +<p> +The reporter and Pencroff, ever since their arrival on the edge of the wood, +had watched the corral. It seemed to be completely deserted. The upper edge of +the palisade was in somewhat stronger relief than the surrounding shades, and +nothing broke its outlines. Nevertheless, if the convicts were there, they must +have posted one of their number as a guard. +</p> + +<p> +Spilett took the hand of his companion, and crept cautiously forward to the +gate of the corral. Pencroff tried to push it open, but it was, as they had +supposed, fastened. But the sailor discovered that the outer bars were not in +place. They, therefore, concluded that the convicts were within, and had +fastened the gate so that it could only be broken open. +</p> + +<p> +They listened. No sound broke the silence. The animals were doubtless sleeping +in their sheds. Should they scale the fence? It was contrary to Smith’s +instructions. They might be successful or they might fail. And, if there was +now a chance of surprising the convicts, should they risk that chance in this +way? +</p> + +<p> +The reporter thought not. He decided that it would be better to wait until they +were all together before making the attempt. Two things were certain, that they +could reach the fence unseen, and that the place seemed unguarded. +</p> + +<p> +Pencroff, probably, agreed to this, for he returned with the reporter to the +wood, and a few minutes later Smith was informed of the situation. +</p> + +<p> +“Well,” said he after reflecting for a moment, “I don’t +think that the convicts are here.” +</p> + +<p> +“We will find out when we have climbed in.” cried Pencroff. +</p> + +<p> +“To the corral, my friends.” +</p> + +<p> +“Shall we leave the wagon in the wood?” cried Neb. +</p> + +<p> +“No,” said Smith, “it may serve as a defense in case of +need.” +</p> + +<p> +The wagon issued from the wood and rolled noiselessly over the ground. The +darkness and the silence were profound. The colonists kept their guns in +readiness to fire. Jup kept behind, at Pencroff’s order, and Neb held +Top. +</p> + +<p> +Soon the dangerous zone was crossed, and the wagon was drawn up beside the +fence. Neb stood at the head of the onagers to keep them quiet, and the others +went to the gate to determine if it was barricaded on the inside. +</p> + +<p> +One of its doors was open! +</p> + +<p> +“What did you tell us?” exclaimed the engineer, turning to the +sailor and Spilett. +</p> + +<p> +They were stupefied with amazement. +</p> + +<p> +“Upon my soul,” cried the sailor, “It was shut a minute +ago!” +</p> + +<p> +The colonists hesitated. The convicts must have been in the corral when +Pencroff and the reporter had made their reconnoissance; for the gate could +only have been opened by them. Were they still there? +</p> + +<p> +At this moment, Herbert, who had ventured some steps within the inclosure, +rushed back and seized Smith’s hand. +</p> + +<p> +“What have you seen?” asked the engineer. +</p> + +<p> +“A light!” +</p> + +<p> +“In the house?” +</p> + +<p> +“Yes, sir.” +</p> + +<p> +All went forward and saw a feeble ray of light trembling through the windows of +the building. +</p> + +<p> +Smith determined what to do at once. +</p> + +<p> +“It is a fortunate chance, finding the convicts shut up in this house not +expecting anything! They are ours! Come on!” +</p> + +<p> +The wagon was left under charge of Top and Jup, and the colonists glided into +the enclosure. In a few moments they were before the closed door of the house. +</p> + +<p> +Smith, making a sign to his companions not to move, approached the window. He +looked into the one room which formed the lower story of the building. On the +table was a lighted lantern, Near by was Ayrton’s bed. On it was the body +of a man. +</p> + +<p> +Suddenly, Smith uttered a stiffled exclamation. +</p> + +<p> +“Ayrton!” he cried. +</p> + +<p> +And, at once, the door was rather forced than opened, and all rushed into the +chamber. +</p> + +<p> +Ayrton seemed to be sleeping. His face showed marks of long and cruel +suffering. His wrists and ankles were much bruised. +</p> + +<p> +Smith leaned over him. +</p> + +<p> +“Ayrton!” cried the engineer, seizing in his arms this man found so +unexpectedly. +</p> + +<p> +Ayrton opened his eyes, and looked first at Smith, then at the others. +</p> + +<p> +“You! Is it you?” he cried. +</p> + +<p> +“Ayrton! Ayrton!” repeated the engineer. +</p> + +<p> +“Where am I?” +</p> + +<p> +“In the corral.” +</p> + +<p> +“Am I alone?” +</p> + +<p> +“Yes.” +</p> + +<p> +“Then they will come here!” cried Ayrton. “Look out for +yourselves! Defend yourselves!” and he fell back, fainting. +</p> + +<p> +“Spilett,” said the engineer, “We may be attacked at any +minute. Bring the wagon inside the enclosure, and bar the gate, and then come +back here.” +</p> + +<p> +Pencroff, Neb, and the reporter hastened to execute the orders of the engineer. +There was not an instant to be lost. Perhaps the wagon was already in the hands +of the convicts! +</p> + +<p> +In a moment the reporter and his companions had gained the gate of the +enclosure, behind which they heard Top growling. +</p> + +<p> +The engineer, leaving Ayrton for a moment, left the house, and held his gun in +readiness to fire. Herbert was beside him. Both scrutinized the outline of the +mountain spur overlooking the corral. If the convicts were hidden in that place +they could pick off the colonists one after the other. +</p> + +<p> +Just then the moon appeared in the east above the black curtain of the forest, +throwing a flood of light over the interior of the corral, and bringing into +relief the trees, the little water-course, and the grassy carpet. Towards the +mountain, the house and a part of the palisade shone white; opposite it, +towards the gate, the fence was in shadow. +</p> + +<p> +A black mass soon showed itself. It was the wagon entering within the circle of +light, and Smith could hear the sound of the gate closing and being solidly +barricaded by his companions. +</p> + +<p> +But at that moment Top, by a violent effort, broke his fastening, and, barking +furiously, rushed to the extremity of the corral to the right of the house. +</p> + +<p> +“Look out, my friends, be ready!” cried Smith. +</p> + +<p> +The colonists waited, with their guns at the shoulder. Top continued to bark, +and Jup, running towards the dog, uttered sharp cries. +</p> + +<p> +The colonists, following him, came to the border of the little brook, +overshadowed by large trees. +</p> + +<p> +And there, in the full moonlight, what did they see? +</p> + +<p> +Five corpses lay extended upon the bank! +</p> + +<p> +They were the bodies of the convicts, who, four months before, had landed upon +Lincoln Island. +</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2><a name="LV" id="LV"></a>CHAPTER LV.</h2> + +<p class="letter"> +AYRTON’S RECITAL—PLANS OF HIS OLD COMRADES—TAKING POSSESSION +OF THE CORRAL—THE RULES OF THE ISLAND—THE GOOD +LUCK—RESEARCHES ABOUT MOUNT FRANKLIN—THE UPPER VALLEYS +—SUBTERRANEAN RUMBLINGS—PENCROFF’S ANSWER—AT THE BOTTOM +OF THE CRATER-THE RETURN +</p> + +<p> +How had it happened? Who had killed the convicts? Ayrton? No, since the moment +before he had feared their return! +</p> + +<p> +But Ayrton was now in a slumber from which it was impossible to arouse him. +After he had spoken these few words, he had fallen back upon his bed, seized by +a sudden torpor. +</p> + +<p> +The colonists, terribly excited, preyed upon by a thousand confused thoughts, +remained all night in the house. The next morning Ayrton awoke from his sleep, +and his companions demonstrated to him their joy at finding him safe and sound +after all these months of separation. +</p> + +<p> +Then Ayrton related in a few words all that had happened. +</p> + +<p> +The day after his return to the corral, the 10th of November, just at +nightfall, he had been surprised by the convicts, who had climbed over the +fence. He was tied and gagged and taken to a dark cavern at the foot of Mount +Franklin, where the convicts had a retreat. +</p> + +<p> +His death had been resolved upon, and he was to be killed the following day, +when one of the convicts recognized him and called him by the name he had borne +in Australia. These wretches, who would have massacred Ayrton, respected Ben +Joyce. +</p> + +<p> +From this moment Ayrton was subjected to the importunities of his old comrades. +They wished to gain him over to them, and they counted upon him to take Granite +House, to enter that inaccessible dwelling, and to become masters of the +island, after having killed the colonists. +</p> + +<p> +Ayrton resisted. The former convict, repentant and pardoned, would rather die +than betray his companions. +</p> + +<p> +For four months, fastened, gagged, watched, he had remained in this cavern. +</p> + +<p> +Meanwhile the convicts lived upon the stock in the corral, but did not inhabit +the place. +</p> + +<p> +On the 11th of November, two of these bandits, inopportunely surprised by the +arrival of the colonists, fired on Herbert, and one of them returned boasting +of having killed one of the inhabitants. His companion, as we know, had fallen +at Smith’s hand. +</p> + +<p> +One can judge of Ayrton’s despair, when he heard of Herbert’s +death! It left but four of the colonists, almost at the mercy of the convicts! +</p> + +<p> +Following this event, and during all the time that the colonists, detained by +Herbert’s illness, remained at the corral, the pirates did not leave +their cave; indeed, after having pillaged Prospect Plateau, they did not deem +it prudent to leave it. +</p> + +<p> +The bad treatment of Ayrton was redoubled. His hands and feet still bore the +red marks of the lines with which he remained bound, day and night. Each moment +he expected to be killed. +</p> + +<p> +This was the third week in February. The convicts, awaiting a favorable +opportunity, rarely left their retreat, and then only to a point in the +interior or on the west coast. Ayrton had no news of his friends, and no hopes +of seeing them again. +</p> + +<p> +Finally, the poor unfortunate, enfeebled by bad treatment, fell in a profound +prostration in which he neither saw nor heard anything. From this moment, he +could not say what had happened. +</p> + +<p> +“But, Mr. Smith,” he added, “since I was imprisoned in this +cavern, how is it that I am here?” +</p> + +<p> +“How is that the convicts are lying there, dead, in the middle of the +corral?” answered the engineer. +</p> + +<p> +“Dead!” cried Ayrton, half rising, notwithstanding his feebleness. +His companions assisted him to get up, and all went to the little brook. +</p> + +<p> +It was broad daylight. There on the shore, in the position in which they had +met their deaths, lay the five convicts. +</p> + +<p> +Ayrton was astounded. The others looked on without speaking. Then, at a sign +from Smith, Neb and Pencroff examined the bodies. Not a wound was visible upon +them. Only after minute search, Pencroff perceived on the forehead of one, on +the breast of another, on this one’s back, and on the shoulder of a +fourth, a small red mark, a hardly visible bruise, made by some unknown +instrument. +</p> + +<p> +“There is where they have been hit!” said Smith. +</p> + +<p> +“But with what sort of a weapon?” cried the reporter. +</p> + +<p> +“A destructive weapon enough, though unknown to us!” +</p> + +<p> +“And who has destroyed them?” asked Pencroff. +</p> + +<p> +“The ruler of the island,” answered Smith, “he who has +brought you here, Ayrton, whose influence is again manifesting itself, who does +for us what we are unable to do for ourselves, and who then hides from +us.” +</p> + +<p> +“Let us search for him!” cried Pencroff. +</p> + +<p> +“Yes, we will search,” replied Smith; “but the being who +accomplishes such prodigies will not be found until it pleases him to call us +to him!” +</p> + +<p> +This invisible protection, which nullified their own actions, both annoyed and +affected the engineer. The relative inferiority in which it placed him wounded +his pride. A generosity which so studiously eluded all mark of recognition +denoted a sort of disdain for those benefited, which, in a measure, detracted +from the value of the gift. +</p> + +<p> +“Let us search,” he repeated, “and Heaven grant that some day +we be permitted to prove to this haughty protector that he is not dealing with +ingrates! What would I not give to be able, in our turn, to repay him, and to +render him, even at the risk of our lives, some signal service!” +</p> + +<p> +From this time, this search was the single endeavor of the inhabitants of +Lincoln Island. All tried to discover the answer to this enigma, an answer +which involved the name of a man endowed with an inexplicable, an almost +superhuman power. +</p> + +<p> +In a short time, the colonists entered the house again, and their efforts soon +restored Ayrton to himself. Neb and Pencroff carried away the bodies of the +convicts and buried them in the wood. Then, Ayrton was informed by the engineer +of all that had happened during his imprisonment. +</p> + +<p> +“And now,” said Smith, finishing his recital, “we have one +thing more to do. Half of our task is accomplished; but if the convicts are no +longer to be feared, we did not restore ourselves to the mastership of the +island!” +</p> + +<p> +“Very well,” replied Spilett, “let us search all the mazes of +Mount Franklin. Let us leave no cavity, no hole unexplored! Ah! if ever a +reporter found himself in the presence of an exciting mystery. I am in that +position!” +</p> + +<p> +“And we will not return to Granite House,” said Herbert, +“until we have found our benefactor.” +</p> + +<p> +“Yes,” said Smith, “we will do everything that is possible +for human beings to do—but, I repeat it, we will not find him till he +wills it.” +</p> + +<p> +“Shall we stay here at the corral?” asked Pencroff. +</p> + +<p> +“Yes,” replied the engineer, “let us remain here. Provisions +are abundant, and we are in the centre of our circle of investigation, and, +moreover, if it is necessary, the wagon can go quickly to Granite House.” +</p> + +<p> +“All right,” said Pencroff. “Only one thing.” +</p> + +<p> +“What is that?” +</p> + +<p> +“Why, the fine weather is here, and we must not forget that we have a +voyage to make.” +</p> + +<p> +“A voyage?” asked Spilett. +</p> + +<p> +“Yes, to Tabor Island. We most put up a notice, indicating our island, in +case the Scotch yacht returns. Who knows that it is not already too +late?” +</p> + +<p> +“But, Pencroff,” asked Ayrton, “how do you propose to make +this voyage?” +</p> + +<p> +“Why, on the Good Luck!” +</p> + +<p> +“The Good Luck!” cried Ayrton. “It’s gone!” +</p> + +<p> +“Gone!” shouted Pencroff, springing to his feet. +</p> + +<p> +“Yes. The convicts discovered where the sloop lay, and, a week ago, they +put out to sea in her, and—” +</p> + +<p> +“And?” said Pencroff, his heart trembling. +</p> + +<p> +“And, not having Harvey to manage her, they ran her upon the rocks, and +she broke all to pieces!” +</p> + +<p> +“Oh! the wretches! the pirates! the devils!” exclaimed the sailor. +</p> + +<p> +“Pencroff,” said Herbert, taking his hand, “we will build +another, a larger Good Luck. We have all the iron, all the rigging of the brig +at our disposal!” +</p> + +<p> +“But, do you realize,” answered Pencroff, “that it will take +at least five or six months to build a vessel of thirty or forty tons.” +</p> + +<p> +“We will take our time,” replied the reporter, “and we will +give up our voyage to Tabor Island for this year.” +</p> + +<p> +“We must make the best of it, Pencroff,” said the engineer, +“and I hope that this delay will not be prejudicial to us.” +</p> + +<p> +“My poor Good Luck! my poor boat!” exclaimed the sailor, half +broken-hearted at the loss of what was so dear to him. +</p> + +<p> +The destruction of the sloop was a thing much to be regretted, and it was +agreed that this loss must be repaired as soon as the search was ended. +</p> + +<p> +This search was begun the same day, the 19th of February, and lasted throughout +the week. The base of the mountain was composed of a perfect labyrinth of +ravines and gorges, and it was here that the explorations must be made. No +other part of the island was so well suited to hide an inhabitant who wished to +remain concealed. But so great was the intricacy of these places that Smith +explored them by a settled system. +</p> + +<p> +In the first place, the colonists visited the valley opening to the south of +the volcano, in which Fall River rose. Here was where Ayrton showed them the +cavern of the convicts. This place was in exactly the same condition as Ayrton +had left it. They found here a quantity of food and ammunition left there as a +reserve by the convicts. +</p> + +<p> +All this beautiful wooded valley was explored with great care, and then, the +south-western spur having been turned, the colonists searched a narrow gorge +where the trees were less numerous. Here the stones took the place of grass, +and the wild goats and moufflons bounded among the rocks. The arid part of the +island began at this part. They saw already that, of the numerous valleys +ramifying from the base of Mount Franklin, three only, bounded on the west by +Fall River and on the east by Red Creek, were as rich and fertile as the valley +of the corral. These two brooks, which developed into rivers as they +progressed, received the whole of the mountain’s southern water-shed and +fertilized that portion of it. As to the Mercy it was more directly fed by +abundant springs, hidden in Jacamar Wood. +</p> + +<p> +Now any one of these three valleys would have answered for the retreat of some +recluse, who would have found there all the necessaries of life. But the +colonists had explored each of them without detecting the presence of man. Was +it then at the bottom of these arid gorges, in the midst of heaps of rocks, in +the rugged ravines to the north, between the streams of lava, that they would +find this retreat and its occupant? +</p> + +<p> +The northern part of Mount Franklin had at its base two large, arid valleys +strewn with lava, sown with huge rocks, sprinkled with pieces of obsidian and +labradorite. This part required long and difficult exploration. Here were a +thousand cavities, not very comfortable, perhaps, but completely hidden and +difficult of access. The colonists visited sombre tunnels, made in the plutonic +epoch, still blackened by the fires of other days, which plunged into the heart +of the mountain. They searched these dark galleries by the light of torches, +peering into their least excavations and sounding their lowest depths. But +everywhere was silence, obscurity. It did not seem as if any human being had +ever trodden these antique corridors or an arm displaced one of these stones. +</p> + +<p> +Nevertheless, if these places were absolutely deserted, if the obscurity was +complete, Smith was forced to notice that absolute silence did not reign there. +</p> + +<p> +Having arrived at the bottom of one of those sombre cavities, which extended +several hundred feet into the interior of the mountain, he was surprised to +hear deep muttering sounds which were intensified by the sonority of the rocks. +</p> + +<p> +Spilett, who was with him, also heard these distant murmurs, which indicated an +awakening of the subterranean fires. +</p> + +<p> +Several times they listened, and they came to the conclusion that some chemical +reaction was going on in the bowels of the earth. +</p> + +<p> +“The volcano is not entirely extinct,” said the reporter. +</p> + +<p> +“It is possible that, since our exploration of the crater, something has +happened in its lower regions. All volcanoes, even those which are said to be +extinct, can, evidently, become active again.” +</p> + +<p> +“But if Mount Franklin is preparing for another eruption, is not Lincoln +Island in danger?” +</p> + +<p> +“I don’t think so,” answered the engineer, “The crater, +that is to say, the safety-valve, exists, and the overflow of vapors and lavas +will escape, as heretofore, by its accustomed outlet.” +</p> + +<p> +“Unless the lavas make a new passage towards the fertile parts of the +island.” +</p> + +<p> +“Why, my dear Spilett, should they not follow their natural +course?” +</p> + +<p> +“Well, volcanoes are capricious.” +</p> + +<p> +“Notice,” said Smith, “that all the slope of the mountain +favors the flow of eruptive matter towards the valleys which we are traversing +at present. It would take an earthquake to so change the centre of gravity of +the mountain as to modify this slope.” +</p> + +<p> +“But an earthquake is always possible under these conditions.” +</p> + +<p> +“True,” replied the engineer, “especially when the +subterranean forces are awakening, and the bowels of the earth, after a long +repose, chance to be obstructed. You are right, my dear Spilett, an eruption +would be a serious thing for us, and it would be better if this volcano has not +the desire to wake up; but we can do nothing. Nevertheless, in any case, I do +not think Prospect Plateau could be seriously menaced. Between it and the lake +there is quite a depression in the land, and even if the lavas took the road to +the lake, they would be distributed over the downs and the parts adjoining +Shark Gulf.” +</p> + +<p> +“We have not yet seen any smoke from the summit, indicating a near +eruption,” said Spilett. +</p> + +<p> +“No,” answered the engineer, “not the least vapor has escaped +from the crater. It was but yesterday that I observed its upper part. But it is +possible that rocks, cinders, and hardened lavas have accumulated in the lower +part of its chimney, and, for the moment, this safety-valve is overloaded. But, +at the first serious effort, all obstacles will disappear, and you may be sure, +my dear Spilett, that neither the island, which is the boiler, nor the volcano, +which is the valve, will burst under the pressure. Nevertheless, I repeat, it +is better to wish for no eruption.” +</p> + +<p> +“And yet we are not mistaken,” replied the reporter. “We +plainly hear ominous rumblings in the depths of the volcano!” +</p> + +<p> +“No,” replied the engineer, after listening again with the utmost +attention, “that is not to be mistaken. Something is going on there the +importance of which cannot be estimated nor what the result will be.” +</p> + +<p> +Smith and Spilett, on rejoining their companions, told them of these things. +</p> + +<p> +“All right!” cried Pencroff. “This volcano wants to take care +of us! But let it try! It will find its master!” +</p> + +<p> +“Who’s that?” asked the negro. +</p> + +<p> +“Our genius, Neb, our good genius, who will put a gag in the mouth of the +crater if it attempts to open it.” +</p> + +<p> +The confidence of the sailor in the guardian of the island was absolute, and, +indeed, the occult power which had so far been manifested seemed limitless; +but, thus far this being had escaped all the efforts the colonists had made to +discover him. +</p> + +<p> +From the 19th to the 25th of February, the investigations were conducted in the +western portion of Lincoln Island, where the most secret recesses were +searched. They even sounded each rocky wall, as one knocks against the walls of +a suspected house. The engineer went so far as to take the exact measure of the +mountain, and he pushed his search to the last strata sustaining it. It was +explored to the summit of the truncated cone which rose above the first rocky +level, and from there to the upper edge of the enormous cap at the bottom of +which opened the crater. +</p> + +<p> +They did more; they visited the gulf, still extinct, but in whose depths the +rumblings were distinctly heard. Nevertheless, not a smoke, not a vapor, no +heat in the wall, indicated a near eruption. But neither there, nor in any +other part of Mount Franklin, did the colonists find the traces of him whom +they sought. +</p> + +<p> +Their investigations were then directed over all the tract of downs. They +carefully examined the high lava walls of Shark Gulf from base to summit, +although it was very difficult to reach the water level. No one! Nothing! +</p> + +<p> +These two words summed up in brief the result of all the useless fatigues Smith +and his companions had been at, and they were a trifle annoyed at their ill +success. +</p> + +<p> +But it was necessary now to think of returning, as these researches could not +be pursued indefinitely. The colonists were convinced that this mysterious +being did not reside upon the surface of the island, and strange thoughts +floated through their over-excited imaginations; Neb and Pencroff, +particularly, went beyond the strange into the region of the supernatural. The +25th of February, the colonists returned to Granite House, and by means of the +double cord, shot by an arrow to the door-landing, communication was +established with their domain. +</p> + +<p> +One month later, they celebrated the third anniversary of their arrival on +Lincoln Island. +</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2><a name="LVI" id="LVI"></a>CHAPTER LVI.</h2> + +<p class="letter"> +AFTER THREE YEARS—THE QUESTION OF A NEW SHIP—ITS +DETERMINATION—PROSPERITY OF THE COLONY—THE SHIPYARD—THE COLD +WEATHER—PENCROFF RESIGNED—WASHING—MOUNT FRANKLIN. +</p> + +<p> +Three years had passed since the prisoners had fled from Richmond, and in all +that time their conversation and their thoughts had been of the fatherland. +</p> + +<p> +They had no doubt that the war was ended, and that the North had triumphed. But +how? At what cost? What friends had fallen in the struggle? They often talked +of these things, although they had no knowledge when they would be able to see +that country again. To return, if only for a few days; to renew their +intercourse with civilization; to establish a communication between their +island and the mother country, and then to spend the greater part of their +lives in this colony which they had founded and which would then be raised to a +metropolis, was this a dream which could not be realized? +</p> + +<p> +There were but two ways of realizing it: either a ship would some day show +itself in the neighborhood of Lincoln Island, or the colonists must themselves +build a vessel staunch enough to carry them to the nearest land. +</p> + +<p> +“Unless our genius furnishes us with the means of returning home,” +said Pencroff. +</p> + +<p> +And, indeed, if Neb and Pencroff had been told that a 300-ton ship was waiting +for them in Shark Gulf or Balloon Harbor, they would not have manifested any +surprise. In their present condition they expected every thing. +</p> + +<p> +But Smith, less confident, urged them to keep to realities, and to build the +vessel, whose need was urgent, since a paper should be placed on Tabor Island +as soon as possible, in order to indicate the new abode of Ayrton. +</p> + +<p> +The Good Luck was gone. It would take at least six mouths to build another +vessel, and, as winter was approaching, the voyage could not be made before the +next spring. +</p> + +<p> +“We have time to prepare ourself for the fine weather,” said the +engineer, talking of these things with Pencroff. “I think, therefore, +since we have to build our own ship, it will be better to make her dimensions +greater than before. The arrival of the +</p> + +<p> +Scotch yacht is uncertain. It may even have happened that it has come and gone. +What do you think? Would it not be better to build a vessel, that, in case of +need, could carry us to the archipelagoes or New Zealand?” +</p> + +<p> +“I think, sir, that you are as able to build a large vessel as a small +one. Neither wood nor tools are wanting. It is only a question of time.” +</p> + +<p> +“And how long would it take to build a ship of 250 or 300 tons?” +</p> + +<p> +“Seven or eight months at least. But we must not forget that winter is at +hand, and that the timber will be difficult to work during the severe cold. So, +allowing for some weeks’ delay, you can be happy if you have your ship by +next November.” +</p> + +<p> +“Very well, that will be just the season to undertake a voyage of some +length, be it to Tabor Island of further.” +</p> + +<p> +“All right, Mr. Smith, make your plans. The workmen are ready, and I +guess that Ayrton will lend a helping hand.” +</p> + +<p> +The engineer’s project met the approval of the colonists, and indeed it +was the best thing to do. It is true that it was a great undertaking, but they +had that confidence in themselves, which is one of the elements of success. +</p> + +<p> +While Smith was busy preparing the plans of the vessel, the others occupied +themselves in felling the trees and preparing the timber. The forests of the +Far West furnished the best oak and elm, which were carried over the new road +through the forest to the Chimneys, where the ship-yard was established. +</p> + +<p> +It was important that the timber should be cut soon, as it was necessary to +have it seasoning for some time. Therefore the workmen worked vigorously during +April, which was not an inclement month, save for some violent wind storms. Jup +helped them by his adroitness, either in climbing to the top of a tree to +fasten a rope, or by carrying loads on his strong shoulders. +</p> + +<p> +The timber was piled under a huge shed to await its use; and, meanwhile, the +work in the fields was pushed forward, so that soon all traces of the +devastation caused by the pirates had disappeared. The mill was rebuilt, and a +new inclosure for the poultry yard. This had to be much larger than the former, +as the number of its occupants had increased largely. The stables contained +five onagas, four of them well broken, and one little colt. A plough had been +added to the stock of the colony, and the onagas were employed in tillage as if +they were Yorkshire or Kentucky cattle. All the colonists did their share, and +there were no idle hands. And thus, with good health and spirits, they formed a +thousand projects for the future. +</p> + +<p> +Ayrton, of course, partook of the common existence, and spoke no longer of +returning to the corral. Nevertheless, he was always quiet and uncommunicative, +and shared more in the work than the pleasure of his companions. He was a +strong workman, vigorous, adroit, intelligent, and he could not fail to see +that he was esteemed and loved by the others. But the corral was not abandoned. +Every other day some one went there and brought back the supply of milk for the +colony, and these occasions were also hunting excursions. So that, Herbert and +Spilett, with Top in advance, oftenest made the journey, and all kinds of game +abounded in the kitchen of Granite House. The products of the warren and the +oyster-bed, some turtles, a haul of excellent salmon, the vegetables from the +plateau, the natural fruits of the forest, were riches upon riches, and Neb, +the chief cook, found it difficult to store them all away. +</p> + +<p> +The telegraph had been repaired, and was used whenever one of the party +remained over night at the corral. But the island was secure now from any +aggression—at least from men. +</p> + +<p> +Nevertheless, what had happened once might happen again, and a descent of +pirates was always to be feared. And it was possible that accomplices of +Harvey, still in Norfolk, might be privy to his projects and seek to imitate +them. Every day the colonists searched the horizon visible from Granite House +with the glass, and whenever they were at the corral they examined the west +coast. Nothing appeared, but they were always on the alert. +</p> + +<p> +One evening the engineer told his companions of a project to fortify the +corral. It seemed prudent to heighten the palisade, and to flank it with a sort +of block house, in which the colonists could defend themselves against a host +of enemies. Granite House, owing to its position, was impregnable, and the +corral would always be the objective point of pirates. +</p> + +<p> +About the 15th of May the keel of the new vessel was laid, and the stem and +stern posts raised. This keel was of oak, 110 feet long, and the breadth of +beam was 25 feet. But, with the exception of putting up a couple of the frame +pieces, this was all that could be done before the bad weather and the cold set +in. +</p> + +<p> +During the latter part of the month the weather was very inclement. Pencroff +and Ayrton worked as long as they were able, but severely cold weather +following the rain made the wood impossible to handle, and by the 10th of June +the work was given up entirely, and the colonists were often obliged to keep +in-doors. +</p> + +<p> +This confinement was hard for all of them, but especially so for Spilett. +</p> + +<p> +“I’ll tell you what, Neb,” he said, “I will give you +everything I own if you will get me a newspaper! All that I want to make me +happy is to know what is going on in the world!” +</p> + +<p> +Neb laughed. +</p> + +<p> +“Faith!” said he, “I am busy enough with my daily +work.” +</p> + +<p> +And, indeed, occupation was not wanting. The colony was at the summit of +prosperity. The accident to the brig had been a new source of riches. Without +counting a complete outfit of sails, which would answer for the new ship, +utensils and tools of all sorts, ammunition, clothing, and instruments filled +the store-rooms of Granite House. There was no longer a necessity to +manufacture cloth in the felting mill. Linen, also, was plenty, and they took +great care of it. From the chloride of sodium Smith had easily extracted soda +and chlorine. The soda was easily transformed into carbonate of soda, and the +chlorine was employed for various domestic purposes, but especially for +cleaning the linen. Moreover, they made but four washings a year, as was the +custom in old times, and Pencroff and Spilett, while waiting for the postman to +bring the paper, made famous washermen! +</p> + +<p> +Thus passed June, July, and August; very rigorous months, in which the +thermometer measured but 8° Fahrenheit. But a good fire burned in the chimney +of Granite House, and the superfluity of wood from the ship-yard enabled them +to economize the coal, which required a longer carriage. +</p> + +<p> +All, men and beasts, enjoyed good health. Jup, it is true, shivered a little +with the cold, and they had to make him a good wadded wrapper. What servant he +was! Adroit, zealous, indefatigable, not indiscreet, not talkative. He was, +indeed, a model for his biped brethren in the New and the Old World! +</p> + +<p> +“But, after all,” said Pencroff “when one has four hands, +they cannot help doing their work well!” +</p> + +<p> +During the seven months that had passed since the exploration of the mountain +nothing had been seen or heard of the genius of the island. Although, it is +true, that nothing had happened to the colonists requiring his assistance. +</p> + +<p> +Smith noticed, too, that the growling of the dog and the anxiety of the orang +had ceased during this time. These two friends no longer ran to the orifice of +the well nor acted in that strange way which had attracted the attention of the +engineer. But did this prove that everything had happened that was going to +happen? That they were never to find an answer to the enigma? Could it be +affirmed that no new conjunction of circumstances would make this mysterious +personage appear again? Who knows what the future may bring forth? +</p> + +<p> +On the 7th of September, Smith, looking towards Mount Franklin, saw a smoke +rising and curling above the crater. +</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2><a name="LVII" id="LVII"></a>CHAPTER LVII.</h2> + +<p class="letter"> +THE AWAKENING OF THE VOLCANO—THE FINE WEATHER—RESUMPTION OF +WORK—THE EVENING OF THE 15TH OF OCTOBER—A TELEGRAPH—A +DEMAND—AN ANSWER—DEPARTURE FOR THE CORRAL—THE +NOTICE—THE EXTRA WIRE—THE BASALT WALL—AT HIGH TIDE—AT +LOW TIDE—THE CAVERN—A DAZZLING LIGHT. +</p> + +<p> +The colonists, called by Smith, had left their work, and gazed in silence at +the summit of Mount Franklin. +</p> + +<p> +The volcano had certainly awakened, and its vapors had penetrated the mineral +matter of the crater, but no one could say whether the subterranean fires would +bring on a violent eruption. +</p> + +<p> +But, even supposing an eruption, it was not likely that Lincoln Island would +suffer in every part. The discharges of volcanic matter are not always +disastrous. That the island had already been subjected to an eruption was +evident from the currents of lava spread over the western slope of the +mountain. Moreover, the shape of the crater was such as to vomit matter in the +direction away from the fertile parts of the island. +</p> + +<p> +Nevertheless, what had been was no proof of what would be. Often the old +craters of volcanoes close and new ones open. An earthquake phenomenon, often +accompanying volcanic action, may do this by changing the interior arrangement +of the mountain and opening new passages for the incandescent lavas. +</p> + +<p> +Smith explained these things to his companions, and without exaggerating the +situation, showed them just what might happen. +</p> + +<p> +After all, they could do nothing. Granite House did not seem to be menaced, +unless by a severe earthquake. But all feared for the corral, if any new crater +opened in the mountain. +</p> + +<p> +From this time the vapor poured from the cone without cessation, and, indeed, +increased in density and volume, although no flame penetrated its thick folds. +The phenomenon was confined, as yet, to the lower part of the central chimney. +</p> + +<p> +Meanwhile, with good weather, the work out of doors had been resumed. They +hastened the construction of the ship, and Smith established a saw-mill at the +waterfall, which cut the timber much more rapidly. +</p> + +<p> +Towards the end of September the frame of the ship, which was to be +schooner-rigged, was so far completed that its shape could be recognized. The +schooner, sheer forward and wide aft, was well adapted for a long voyage, in +case of necessity, but the planking, lining, and decking still demanded a long +time before they could be finished. Fortunately, the iron-work of the brig had +been saved after the explosion, and Pencroff and Ayrton had obtained a great +quantity of copper nails from the broken timber, which economized the labor for +the smiths; nevertheless the carpenters had much to accomplish. +</p> + +<p> +Often, however, after the day’s work was ended, the colonists sat late +into the night, conversing together of the future and what might happen in a +voyage in the schooner to the nearest land. But in discussing these projects +they always planned to return to Lincoln Island. Never would they abandon this +colony, established with so much difficulty, but so successfully, and which +would receive a new development through communication with America. +</p> + +<p> +Pencroff and Neb, indeed, hoped to end their days here. +</p> + +<p> +“Herbert,” asked the sailor, “you would never abandon Lincoln +Island?” +</p> + +<p> +“Never, Pencroff, especially if you made up your mind to remain.” +</p> + +<p> +“Then, it’s agreed, my boy. I shall expect you! You will bring your +wife and children here, and I will make a jolly playmate for the babies!” +</p> + +<p> +“Agreed,” answered Herbert, laughing and blushing at the same time. +</p> + +<p> +“And you, Mr. Smith,” continued the sailor, enthusiastically, +“you will always remain governor of the island! And, by the way, how many +inhabitants can the island support? Ten thousand, at the very least!” +</p> + +<p> +They chatted in this way, letting Pencroff indulge in his whims, and one thing +leading to another, the reporter finished by founding the <i>New Lincoln +Herald</i>! +</p> + +<p> +Thus it is with the spirit of man. The need of doing something permanent, +something which will survive him, is the sign of his superiority over +everything here below. It is that which has established and justifies his +domination over the whole world. +</p> + +<p> +After all, who knows if Jup and Top had not their dream of the future? +</p> + +<p> +Ayrton, silent, said to himself that he wanted to see Lord Glenarvan, and show +him the change in himself. +</p> + +<p> +One evening, the 15th of October, the conversation was prolonged longer than +usual. It was 9 o’clock, and already, long, ill-concealed yawns showed +that it was bed-time. Pencroff was about starting in that direction, when, +suddenly, the electric bell in the hall rang. +</p> + +<p> +Every one was present, so none of their party could be at the corral. +</p> + +<p> +Smith rose. His companions looked as if they had not heard aright. +</p> + +<p> +“What does he want?” cried Neb. “Is it the devil that’s +ringing?” +</p> + +<p> +No one replied. +</p> + +<p> +“It is stormy weather,” said Herbert; “perhaps the electric +influence——” +</p> + +<p> +Herbert did not finish the sentence. The engineer, towards whom all were +looking, shook his head. +</p> + +<p> +“Wait a minute,” said Spilett. “If it is a signal, it will be +repeated.” +</p> + +<p> +“But what do you think it is?” asked Neb. +</p> + +<p> +“Perhaps it——” +</p> + +<p> +The sailor’s words were interrupted by another ring. +</p> + +<p> +Smith went to the apparatus, and, turning on the current, telegraphed to the +corral:—— +</p> + +<p> +“What do you want?” +</p> + +<p> +A few minutes later the needle, moving over the lettered card, gave this answer +to the inmates of Granite House:— +</p> + +<p> +“Come to the corral as quickly as possible.” +</p> + +<p> +“At last!” cried Smith. +</p> + +<p> +Yes! At last! The mystery was about to be solved! Before the strong interest in +what was at the corral, all fatigue and need of repose vanished. Without saying +a word, in a few minutes they were out of Granite House and following the +shore. Only Top and Jup remained behind. +</p> + +<p> +The night was dark. The moon, new this day, had set with the sun. Heavy clouds +obscured the stars, but now and then heat-lightning, the reflection of a +distant storm, illuminated the horizon. +</p> + +<p> +But, great as the darkness was, it could not hinder persons as familiar with +the route as were the colonists. All were very much excited, and walked +rapidly. There could be no doubt that they were going to find the answer to the +engineer, the name of that mysterious being, who was so generous in his +influence, so powerful to accomplish! It could not be doubted that this unknown +had been familiar with the least detail of their daily lives, that he overheard +all that was said in Granite House. +</p> + +<p> +Each one, lost in his reflections, hurried onward. The darkness under the trees +was such that the route was invisible. There was no sound in the forest. Not a +breath of wind moved the leaves. +</p> + +<p> +This silence during the first quarter of an hour was uninterrupted, save by +Pencroff, who said:—— +</p> + +<p> +“We should have brought a lantern.” +</p> + +<p> +And by the engineer’s answer:—— +</p> + +<p> +“We will find one at the corral.” +</p> + +<p> +Smith and his companions had left Granite House at twelve minutes past 9. In +thirty-five minutes they had traversed three of the five miles between the +mouth of the Mercy and the corral. +</p> + +<p> +Just then, brilliant flashes of lightning threw the foliage into strong relief. +The storm was evidently about to burst upon them. The flashes became more +frequent and intense. Heavy thunder rolled through the heavens. The air was +stifling. +</p> + +<p> +The colonists rushed on, as if impelled by some irresistible force. +</p> + +<p> +At a quarter past 9, a sudden flash showed them the outline of the palisade; +and scarcely had they passed the gateway when there came a terrible clap of +thunder. In a moment the corral was crossed, and Smith stood before the house. +It was possible that the unknown being was here, since it was from this place +that the telegraph had come. Nevertheless, there was no light in the window. +</p> + +<p> +The engineer knocked at the door, but without response. +</p> + +<p> +He opened it, and the colonists entered the room, which was in utter darkness. +</p> + +<p> +A light was struck by Neb, and in a moment the lantern was lit, and its light +directed into every corner of the chamber. +</p> + +<p> +No one was there, and everything remained undisturbed. +</p> + +<p> +“Are we victims to a delusion?” murmured Smith. +</p> + +<p> +No! that was impossible! The telegraph had certainly said:—— +</p> + +<p> +“Come to the corral quickly as possible.” +</p> + +<p> +He went to the table on which the apparatus was arranged. Everything was in +place and in order. +</p> + +<p> +“Who was here last?” asked the engineer. +</p> + +<p> +“I, sir,” answered Ayrton. +</p> + +<p> +“And that was——” +</p> + +<p> +“Four days ago.” +</p> + +<p> +“Ah! here is something!” exclaimed Herbert, pointing to a paper +lying on the table. +</p> + +<p> +On the paper were these words, written in English:—— +</p> + +<p> +“Follow the new wire.” +</p> + +<p> +“Come on!” cried Smith, who comprehended in a moment that the +dispatch had not been sent from the corral, but from the mysterious abode which +the new wire united directly with Granite House. +</p> + +<p> +Neb took the lantern and all left the corral. +</p> + +<p> +Then the storm broke forth with extreme violence. Flashes of lightning and +peals of thunder followed in rapid succession. The island was the centre of the +storm. By the flashes of lightning they could see the summit of Mount Franklin +enshrouded in smoke. +</p> + +<p> +There were no telegraph poles inside the corral, but the engineer, having +passed the gate, ran to the nearest post, and saw there a new wire fastened to +the insulator, and reaching to the ground. +</p> + +<p> +“Here it is!” he cried. +</p> + +<p> +The wire lay along the ground, and was covered with some insulating substance, +like the submarine cables. By its direction it seemed as if it went towards the +west, across the woods, and the southern spurs of the mountain. +</p> + +<p> +“Let us follow it,” said Smith. +</p> + +<p> +And sometimes by the light of the lantern, sometimes by the illumination of the +heavens, the colonists followed the way indicated by the thread. +</p> + +<p> +They crossed in the first place, the spur of the mountain between the valley of +the corral and that of Fall River, which stream was crossed in its narrowest +part. The wire, sometimes hanging on the lower branches of the trees, sometimes +trailing along the ground, was a sure guide. +</p> + +<p> +The engineer had thought that, perhaps, the wire would end at the bottom of the +valley, and that the unknown retreat was there. +</p> + +<p> +But not so. It extended over the southwestern spur and descended to the arid +plateau which ended that fantastic wall of basalt. Every now and then one or +other of the party stooped and took the direction of the wire. There could be +no doubt that it ran directly to the sea. There, doubtless, in some profound +chasm in the igneous rocks, was the dwelling so vainly sought for until now. +</p> + +<p> +At a few minutes before 10, the colonists arrived upon the high coast +overhanging the ocean. Here the wire wound among the rocks, following a steep +slope down a narrow ravine. +</p> + +<p> +The colonists followed it, at the risk of bringing down upon themselves a +shower of rocks or of being precipitated into the sea. The descent was +extremely perilous, but they thought not of the danger; they were attracted to +this mysterious place as the needle is drawn to the magnet. +</p> + +<p> +At length, the wire making a sudden turn, touched the shore rocks, which were +beaten by the sea. The colonists had reached the base of the granite wall. +</p> + +<p> +Here there was a narrow projection running parallel and horizontal to the sea. +The thread led along this point, and the colonists followed. They had not +proceeded more than a hundred paces, when this projection, by a south +inclination, sloped down into the water. +</p> + +<p> +The engineer seized the wire and saw that it led down into the sea. +</p> + +<p> +His companions stood, stupefied, beside him. +</p> + +<p> +Then a cry of disappointment, almost of despair, escaped them! Must they throw +themselves into the water and search some submarine cavern? In their present +state of excitement, they would not have hesitated to have done it. +</p> + +<p> +An observation made by the engineer stopped them. He led his companions to the +shelter of a pile of rocks and said:—— +</p> + +<p> +“Let as wait here. The tide is up. At low water the road will be +open.” +</p> + +<p> +“But how do you think—” began Pencroff. +</p> + +<p> +“He would not have called us, unless the means of reaching him had been +provided.” +</p> + +<p> +Smith had spoken with an air of conviction, and, moreover, his observation was +logical. It was, indeed, quite possible that an opening existed at low water +which was covered at present. +</p> + +<p> +It was necessary to wait some hours. The colonists rested in silence under +their shelter. The rain began to fall in torrents. The echoes repeated the +roaring of the thunder in sonorous reverberations. +</p> + +<p> +At midnight the engineer took the lantern and went down to the water’s +edge. It was still two hours before low tide. +</p> + +<p> +Smith had not been mistaken. The entrance to a vast excavation began to be +visible, and the wire, turning at a right angle, entered this yawning mouth. +</p> + +<p> +Smith returned to his companions and said:—— +</p> + +<p> +“In an hour the opening will be accessible.” +</p> + +<p> +“Then there is one,” said Pencroff. +</p> + +<p> +“Do you doubt it?” replied Smith. +</p> + +<p> +“But it will be half full of water,” said Herbert. +</p> + +<p> +“Either it will be perfectly dry,” answered the engineer, “in +which case we will walk, or it will not be dry, and some means of transport +will be furnished us.” +</p> + +<p> +An hour passed. All went down through the rain to the sea. In these hours the +tide had fallen fifteen feet. The top of the mouth of the opening rose eight +feet above the water, like the arch of a bridge. +</p> + +<p> +Looking in, the engineer saw a black object floating on the surface. He drew it +toward him. It was a canoe made of sheet-iron bolted together. It was tied to a +projecting rock inside the cavern wall. A pair of oars were under the seats. +</p> + +<p> +“Get in,” said Smith. +</p> + +<p> +The colonists entered the boat, Neb and Ayrton took the oars, Pencroff the +tiller, and Smith, in the bows holding the lantern, lit the way. +</p> + +<p> +The vault, at first very low, rose suddenly; but the darkness was too great for +them to recognize the size of this cavern, its heighth and depth. An imposing +silence reigned throughout this granite chamber. No sound, not even the pealing +of the thunder penetrated its massive walls. +</p> + +<p> +In certain parts of the world there are immense caves, a sort of natural crypts +which date back to the geologic epoch. Some are invaded by the sea; others +contain large lakes within their walls. Such is Fingal’s Cave, in the +Island of Staffa; such are the caves of Morgat on the Bay of Douarnenez in +Brittany; the caves of Bonifacio, in Corsica; those of Lyse-Fjord, in Norway; +such is that immense cavern, the Mammoth Cave of Kentucky, which is 500 feet +high and more than twenty miles long! +</p> + +<p> +As to this cavern which the colonists were exploring, did it not reach to the +very centre of the island? For a quarter of an hour the canoe advanced under +the directions of the engineer. At a certain moment he said:—— +</p> + +<p> +“Go over to the right.” +</p> + +<p> +The canoe, taking this direction, brought up beside the wall. The engineer +wished to observe whether the wire continued along this side. +</p> + +<p> +It was there fastened to the rock. +</p> + +<p> +“Forward!” said Smith. +</p> + +<p> +The canoe kept on a quarter of an hour longer, and it must have been half a +mile from the entrance, when Smith’s voice was heard again. +</p> + +<p> +“Halt!” he exclaimed. +</p> + +<p> +The canoe stopped, and the colonists saw a brilliant light illuminating the +enormous crypt, so profoundly hidden in the bowels of the earth. +</p> + +<p> +They were now enabled to examine this cavern of whose existence they had had no +suspicion. +</p> + +<p> +A vault, supported on basaltic shafts, which might all have been cast in the +same mould, rose to a height of 100 feet. Fantastic arches sprung at irregular +intervals from these columns, which Nature had placed here by thousands. They +rose to a height of forty or fifty feet, and the water, in despite of the +tumult without, quietly lapped their base. The light noticed by the engineer +seized upon each prismatic point and tipped it with fire; penetrated, so to +speak, the walls as if they had been diaphanous, and changed into sparkling +jewels the least projections of the cavern. +</p> + +<p> +Following a phenomenon of reflection, the water reproduced these different +lights upon its surface, so that the canoe seemed to float between two +sparkling zones. +</p> + +<p> +They had not yet thought of the nature of irradiation projected by the luminous +centre whose rays, straight and clear, were broken on all the angles and +mouldings of the crypt. The white color of this light betrayed its origin. It +was electric. It was the sun of this cavern. +</p> + +<p> +On a sign from Smith, the oars fell again into the water, and the canoe +proceeded towards the luminous fire, which was half a cable’s length +distant. +</p> + +<p> +In this place, the sheet of water measured some 300 feet across, and an +enormous basaltic wall, closing all that side, was visible beyond the luminous +centre. The cavern had become much enlarged, and the sea here formed a little +lake. But the vault, the side walls, and those of the apsis, all the prisms, +cylinders, cones, were bathed in the electric fluid. +</p> + +<p> +In the centre of the lake a long fusiform object floated on the surface of the +water, silent, motionless. The light escaped from its sides as from two ovens +heated to a white heat. This machine, looking like the body of an enormous +cetacea, was 250 feet long, and rose ten to twelve feet above the water. +</p> + +<p> +The canoe approached softly. In the bows stood Smith. He was greatly excited. +Suddenly he seized the arm of the reporter. +</p> + +<p> +“It is he! It can be no other than he.” he cried. +“He!——” +</p> + +<p> +Then he fell back upon the seat murmuring a name which Spilett alone heard. +</p> + +<p> +Doubtless the reporter knew this name, for it affected him strangely, and he +answered in a hoarse voice:—— +</p> + +<p> +“He! a man outlawed!” +</p> + +<p> +“The same!” said Smith. +</p> + +<p> +Under the engineer’s direction the canoe approached this singular +floating machine, and came up to it on its left side, from which escaped a +gleam of light through a thick glass. +</p> + +<p> +Smith and his companions stepped on to the platform. An open hatchway was +there, down which all descended. +</p> + +<p> +At the bottom of the ladder appeared the waist of the vessel lit up by electric +light. At the end of the waist was a door, which Smith pushed open. +</p> + +<p> +A richly ornamented library, flooded with light, was rapidly crossed by the +colonists. Beyond, a large door, also closed, was pushed open by the engineer. +</p> + +<p> +A vast saloon, a sort of museum, in which were arranged all the treasures of +the mineral world, works of art, marvels of industry, appeared before the eyes +of the colonists, who seemed to be transported to the land of dreams. +</p> + +<p> +Extended upon a rich divan they saw a man, who seemed unaware of their +presence. +</p> + +<p> +Then Smith raised his voice, and, to the extreme surprise of his companions, +pronounced these words:—— +</p> + +<p> +“Captain Nemo, you have called us. Here we are.’ +</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2><a name="LVIII" id="LVIII"></a>CHAPTER LVIII.</h2> + +<p class="letter"> +CAPTAIN NEMO—HIS FIRST WORDS—HISTORY OF A HERO OF +LIBERTY—HATRED OF THE INVADERS—HIS COMPANIONS—THE LIFE UNDER +WATER—ALONE—THE LAST REFUGE OF THE NAUTILUS—THE MYSTERIOUS +GENIUS OF THE ISLAND. +</p> + +<p> +At these words the man arose, and the light shone full upon his face: a +magnificent head, with abundance of hair thrown back from a high forehead, a +white beard, and an expression of haughtiness. +</p> + +<p> +This man stood, resting one hand upon the divan, from which he had risen. One +could see that a slow disease had broken him down, but his voice was still +powerful, when he said in English, and in a tone of extreme +surprise:—— +</p> + +<p> +“I have no name, sir!” +</p> + +<p> +“I know you!” answered Smith. +</p> + +<p> +Captain Nemo looked at the engineer as if he would have annihilated him. Then, +falling back upon the cushions, he murmured:—— +</p> + +<p> +“After all, what does it matter; I am dying!” +</p> + +<p> +Smith approached Captain Nemo, and Spilett took his hand, which was hot with +fever. The others stood respectfully in a corner of the superb saloon, which +was flooded with light. +</p> + +<p> +Captain Nemo withdrew his hand, and signed to Smith and the reporter to be +seated. +</p> + +<p> +All looked at him with lively emotion. Here was the being whom they had called +the “genius of the island,” the being whose intervention had been +so efficacious, the benefactor to whom they owed so much. Before their eyes, +here where Pencroff and Neb had expected to find some godlike creature, was +only a man-a dying man! +</p> + +<p> +But how did Smith know Captain Nemo? Why had the latter sprung up on hearing +that name pronounced? +</p> + +<p> +The Captain had taken his seat upon the divan, and, leaning upon his arm, he +regarded the engineer, who was seated near him. +</p> + +<p> +“You know the name I bore?” he asked. +</p> + +<p> +“I know it as well as I know the name of this admirable submarine +apparatus.” +</p> + +<p> +“The Nautilus,” said the Captain, with a half smile. +</p> + +<p> +“The Nautilus.” +</p> + +<p> +“But do you know-do you know, who I am?” +</p> + +<p> +“I do.” +</p> + +<p> +“For thirty years I have had no communication with the inhabited world, +for thirty years have I lived in the depths of the sea, the only place where I +have found freedom! Who, now, has betrayed my secret?” +</p> + +<p> +“A man who never pledged you his word, Captain Nemo, one who, therefore, +cannot be accused of betraying you.” +</p> + +<p> +“The Frenchman whom chance threw in my way?” +</p> + +<p> +“The same.” +</p> + +<p> +“Then this man and his companions did not perish in the maelstrom into +which the Nautilus had been drawn?” +</p> + +<p> +“They did not, and there has appeared under the title of <i>Twenty +Thousand Leagues Under the Sea</i>, a work which contains your history.” +</p> + +<p> +“The history of but a few months of my life, sir,” answered the +Captain, quickly. +</p> + +<p> +“True,” replied Smith, “but a few months of that strange life +sufficed to make you known—” +</p> + +<p> +“As a great criminal, doubtless,” said Captain Nemo, smiling +disdainfully. “Yes, a revolutionist, a scourge to humanity.” +</p> + +<p> +The engineer did not answer. +</p> + +<p> +“Well, sir?” +</p> + +<p> +“I am unable to judge Captain Nemo,” said Smith, “at least in +what concerns his past life. I, like the world at large, am ignorant of the +motives for this strange existence, and I am unable to judge of the effects +without knowing the causes, but what I do know is that a beneficent hand has +been constantly extended to us since our arrival here, that we owe everything +to a being good, generous, and powerful, and that this being, powerful, +generous, and good, is you, Captain Nemo!” +</p> + +<p> +“It is I,” answered the captain, quietly. +</p> + +<p> +The engineer and the reporter had risen, the others had drawn near, and the +gratitude which swelled their hearts would have sought expression in words and +gesture, when Captain Nemo signed to them to be silent, and in a voice more +moved, doubtless, than he wished:— +</p> + +<p> +“When you have heard me,” he said. And then, in a few short, clear +sentences, he told them the history of his life. +</p> + +<p> +The history was brief. Nevertheless, it took all his remaining strength to +finish it. It was evident that he struggled against an extreme feebleness. Many +times Smith urged him to take some rest, but he shook his head, like one who +knew that for him there would be no to-morrow, and when the reporter offered +his services— +</p> + +<p> +“They are useless,” he answered, “my hours are +numbered.” +</p> + +<p> +Captain Nemo was an Indian prince, the Prince Dakkar, the son of the rajah of +the then independent territory of Bundelkund, and nephew of the hero of India, +Tippo Saib. His father sent him, when ten years old, to Europe, where he +received a complete education; and it was the secret intention of the rajah to +have his son able some day to engage in equal combat with those whom he +considered as the oppressors of his country. +</p> + +<p> +From ten years of age until he was thirty, the Prince Dakkar, with superior +endowments, of high heart and courage, instructed himself in everything; +pushing his investigations in science, literature, and art to the uttermost +limits. +</p> + +<p> +He travelled over all Europe. His birth and fortune made his company much +sought after, but the seductions of the world possessed no charm for him. Young +and handsome, he remained serious, gloomy, with an insatiable thirst for +knowledge, with implacable anger fixed in his heart. +</p> + +<p> +He hated. He hated the only country where he had never wished to set foot, the +only nation whose advances he had refused: he hated England more and more as he +admired her. This Indian summed up in his own person all the fierce hatred of +the vanquished against the victor. The invader is always unable to find grace +with the invaded. The son of one of those sovereigns whose submission to the +United Kingdom was only nominal, the prince of the family of Tippo-Saib, +educated in ideas of reclamation and vengeance, with a deep-seated love for his +poetic country weighed down with the chains of England, wished never to place +his foot on that land, to him accursed, that land to which India owed her +subjection. +</p> + +<p> +The Prince Dakkar became an artist, with a lively appreciation of the marvels +of art; a savant familiar with the sciences; a statesman educated in European +courts. In the eyes of a superficial observer, he passed, perhaps, for one of +those cosmopolites, curious after knowledge, but disdaining to use it; for one +of those opulent travellers, high-spirited and platonic, who go all over the +world and are of no one country. +</p> + +<p> +It was not so. This artist, this savant, this man was Indian to the heart, +Indian in his desire for vengeance, Indian in the hope which he cherished of +being able some day to re-establish the rights of his country, of driving on +the stranger, of making it independent. +</p> + +<p> +He returned to Bundelkund in the year 1849. He married a noble Indian woman +whose heart bled as his did at the woes of their country. He had two children +whom he loved. But domestic happiness could not make him forget the servitude +of India. He waited for an opportunity. At length it came. +</p> + +<p> +The English yoke was pressed, perhaps, too heavily upon the Indian people. The +Prince Dakkar became the mouthpiece of the malcontents. He instilled into their +spirits all the hatred he felt against the strangers. He went over not only the +independent portions of the Indian peninsula, but into those regions directly +submitted to the English control. He recalled to them the grand days of +Tippo-Saib, who died heroically at Seringapatam for the defense of his country. +</p> + +<p> +In 1857 the Sepoy mutiny broke forth. Prince Dakkar was its soul. He organized +that immense uprising. He placed his talents and his wealth at the service of +that cause. He gave himself; he fought in the first rank; he risked his life as +the humblest of those heroes who had risen to free their country; he was +wounded ten times in twenty battles, and was unable to find death when the last +soldiers of independence fell before the English guns. +</p> + +<p> +Never had British rule in India been in such danger; and, had the Sepoys +received the assistance from without which they had hoped for, Asia would not +to-day, perhaps, be under the dominion of the United Kingdom. +</p> + +<p> +At that time the name of Prince Dakkar was there illustrious. He never hid +himself, and he fought openly. A price was put upon his head, and although he +was not delivered up by any traitor, his father, mother, wife, and children +suffered for him before he knew of the dangers which they ran on his account. +</p> + +<p> +Once again right fell before might. Civilization never goes backwards, and her +laws are like those of necessity. The Sepoys were vanquished, and the country +of the ancient rajahs fell again under the strict rule of England. +</p> + +<p> +Prince Dakkar, unable to die, returned again to his mountains in Bundelkund. +There, thenceforward alone, he conceived an immense disgust against all who +bore the name of man—a hatred and a horror of the civilized +world—and wishing to fly from it, he collected the wreck of his fortune, +gathered together twenty of his most faithful companions, and one day +disappeared. +</p> + +<p> +Where did Prince Dakkar seek for that independence which was refused him upon +the inhabited earth? Under the waters, in the depths of the seas, where no one +could follow him. +</p> + +<p> +From a man of war he became a man of science. On a desert island of the Pacific +he established his workshops, and there he constructed a submarine ship after +plans of his own. By means which will some day be known, he utilized +electricity, that incommensurable force, for all the necessities of his +apparatus as a motor, for lighting and for heat. The sea, with its infinite +treasures, its myriads of fishes, its harvests of varech and sargassum, its +enormous mammifers, and not only all that nature held, but all that man had +lost, amply sufficed for the needs of the Prince and his equipage;—and +thus he accomplished his heart’s desire, to have no further communication +with the earth. He named his submarine ship the Nautilus, he called himself +Captain Nemo, and he disappeared under the seas. +</p> + +<p> +During many years, the Captain visited all the oceans, from one pole to the +other. Pariah of the earth, he reaped the treasures of the unknown worlds. The +millions lost in Vigo Bay, in 1702, by the Spanish galleons, furnished him with +an inexhaustible mine of wealth, which he gave, anonymously, to people fighting +for their independence. +</p> + +<p> +For years he had had no communication with his kindred, when, during the night +of the 6th of November, 1866, three men were thrown upon his deck. They were a +French professor, his servant, and a Canadian fisherman. These men had been +thrown overboard by the shock of the collision between the Nautilus and the +United States frigate Abraham Lincoln, which had given it chase. +</p> + +<p> +Captain Nemo learned from the Professor that the Nautilus, sometimes taken for +a gigantic mammifer of the cetacean family, sometimes for a submarine apparatus +containing a gang of pirates, was hunted in every sea. +</p> + +<p> +Captain Nemo could have thrown these three men, whom chance had thrown across +his mysterious life, into the ocean. He did not do it, he kept them prisoners, +and, during seven months, they were able to perceive all the marvels of a +voyage of 20,000 leagues under the sea. +</p> + +<p> +One day, the 22nd of June, 1867, these three men, who knew nothing of Captain +Nemo’s past life, seized the boat belonging to the Nautilus and attempted +to escape. But just then the Nautilus was upon the coast of Norway in the eddy +of the Maelstrom, and the Captain believed that the fugitives, caught in its +terrible vortex, had been swallowed up in the gulf. He was unaware that the +Frenchman and his companions had been miraculously thrown upon the coast, that +the fishermen of the Loffodin Islands had rescued them, and that the Professor, +on his return to France, had published a book in which seven months of this +strange and adventurous navigation was narrated. +</p> + +<p> +For a long time Captain Nemo continued this mode of life, traversing the sea. +One by one his companions died and found their rest in the coral cemetery at +the bottom of the Pacific, and in time Captain Nemo was the last survivor of +those who had sought refuge in the depths of the oceans. +</p> + +<p> +He was then sixty years old. As he was alone, it was necessary to take his +Nautilus to one of those submarine ports which served him in former days as a +harbor. +</p> + +<p> +One of these ports was under Lincoln Island, and was the present asylum of the +Nautilus. For six years the Captain had remained there awaiting that death +which would reunite him with his companions, when chance made him witness to +the fall of the balloon which carried the prisoners. Clothed in his impermeable +jacket, he was walking under the water, some cables’ lengths from the +shore of the islet, when the engineer was thrown into the sea. A good impulse +moved Captain Nemo—and he saved Cyrus Smith. +</p> + +<p> +On the arrival of these five castaways he wished to go from them, but his port +of refuge was closed. Some volcanic action had raised up the basalt so that the +Nautilus could not cross the entrance to the crypt, although there was still +sufficient water for a boat of light draught. +</p> + +<p> +Captain Nemo, therefore, remained and watched these men, thrown without +resources upon a desert island, but he did not wish to be seen. Little by +little, as he saw their honest, energetic lives, how they were bound together +in fraternal amity, he interested himself in their efforts. In spite of +himself, he found out all the secrets of their existence. Clothed in his +impermeable jacket, he could easily reach the bottom of the well in Granite +House, and climbing by the projections of the rock to its mouth, he heard the +colonists talk of their past and discuss their present and future. He learned +from them of the struggle of America against itself, for the abolition of +slavery. Yes! these men were worthy to reconcile Captain Nemo with that +humanity which they represented so honestly on the island. +</p> + +<p> +Captain Nemo had saved Smith. It was he who had led the dog to the Chimneys, +who threw Top out of the water, who stranded the box of useful articles on +Jetsam Point, who brought the canoe down the Mercy, who threw the cord from +Granite House, when it was attacked by the monkeys, who made known the presence +of Ayrton on Tabor Island by means of the paper inclosed in the bottle, who +blew up the brig by means of a torpedo, who saved Herbert from certain death by +bringing the quinine, who, finally, killed the convicts by those electric balls +which he employed in his submarine hunting excursions. Thus was explained all +those seemingly supernatural incidents, which, all of them, attested the +generosity and the power of the Captain. +</p> + +<p> +Nevertheless, this intense misanthrope thirsted to do good. He had some useful +advice to give to his proteges, and moreover, feeling the approach of death, he +had summoned, as we have seen, the colonists from Granite House, by means of +the wire which reached from the corral to the Nautilus. Perhaps he would not +have done it, had he thought that Smith knew enough of his history to call him +by his name of Nemo. +</p> + +<p> +The Captain finished the recital of his life, and then Smith spoke. He recalled +all the instances of the salutary influences exercised over the colonists, and +then, in the name of his companions, and in his own, he thanked this generous +being for all that he had done. +</p> + +<p> +But Captain Nemo had never dreamed of asking any return for his services. One +last thought agitated his spirit, and, before taking the hand which the +engineer held out to him, he said:— +</p> + +<p> +“Now, sir, you know my life, judge of it!” +</p> + +<p> +In speaking thus, the Captain evidently alluded to an incident of a serious +nature which had been witnessed by the three strangers on the Nautilus—an +incident which the French professor had necessarily recounted in his book, an +incident whose very recital was terrible. +</p> + +<p> +In brief, some days before the flight of the professor and his companions, the +Nautilus, pursued by a frigate in the North Atlantic, had rushed upon her like +a battering-ram, and sunk her without mercy. +</p> + +<p> +Smith, understanding this allusion, made no answer. +</p> + +<p> +“It was an English frigate, sir!” cried Captain Nemo, becoming for +the moment Prince Dakkar, “an English frigate, you understand! She +attacked me! I was shut in, in a narrow and shallow bay; I had to pass out, +and—I passed!” +</p> + +<p> +Then, speaking with more calmness:— +</p> + +<p> +“I had right and justice on my side,” he added. “I did good +when I could, and evil when I must. All justice is not in forgiveness.” +</p> + +<p> +Some moments of silence followed this response, and Captain Nemo asked +again:— +</p> + +<p> +“What do you think of me?” +</p> + +<p> +Smith took the hand of the Captain, and answered him in a grave voice:— +</p> + +<p> +“Captain, your mistake has been in believing that you could bring back +the old order of things, and you have struggled against necessary progress. It +was one of those errors which some of us admire, others blame, but of which God +alone can judge, and which the human mind exonerates. We can disagree with one +who misleads himself in an intention which he believes laudable, and at the +same time esteem him. Your error is of a kind which does not preclude +admiration, and your name has nothing to fear from the judgment of history. She +loves heroic follies, though she condemns the results which follow.” +</p> + +<p> +The breast of Captain Nemo heaved; he raised his hand towards heaven. +</p> + +<p> +“Was I wrong, or was I right?” he murmured. +</p> + +<p> +Smith continued:— +</p> + +<p> +“All great actions return to God, from whom they came! Captain Nemo, the +worthy men here, whom you have succored, will always weep for you!” +</p> + +<p> +Herbert approached him. He knelt down and took the hand of the captain, and +kissed it. +</p> + +<p> +A tear glistened in the eye of the dying man. +</p> + +<p> +“My child,” he said, “bless you!” +</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2><a name="LIX" id="LIX"></a>CHAPTER LIX.</h2> + +<p class="letter"> +THE LAST HOURS OF CAPTAIN NEMO—HIS DYING WISHES—A SOUVENIR FOR HIS +FRIENDS—HIS TOMB—SOME COUNSEL TO THE COLONISTS—THE SUPREME +MOMENT—AT THE BOTTOM OF THE SEA. +</p> + +<p> +It was morning, though no ray of daylight penetrated the vault. The sea, at +this moment high, covered the outlet. But the artificial light escaping in long +rays from the sides of the Nautilus, had not diminished, and the sheet of water +around the vessel glowed resplendent. +</p> + +<p> +Captain Nemo, overcome by an extreme fatigue, fell back upon the divan. They +did not dream of transporting him to Granite House, as he had shown a wish to +remain among the priceless treasures of the Nautilus, awaiting that death which +could not be long in coming. +</p> + +<p> +Smith and Spilett observed with great attention his prostration. They saw that +he was slowly sinking. His strength, formerly so great, was almost gone, and +his body was but a frail envelope for the spirit about escaping. All life was +concentrated at the heart and brain. +</p> + +<p> +The engineer and the reporter consulted together in low tones. Could they do +anything for the dying man? Could they, if not save him, at least prolong his +life for a few days? He himself had said that there was no remedy, and he +awaited death calmly and without fear. +</p> + +<p> +“We can do nothing,” said Spilett. +</p> + +<p> +“What is he dying of?” asked Pencroff. +</p> + +<p> +“Of exhaustion,” answered the reporter. +</p> + +<p> +“Supposing we take him out into the open air, into the sunlight, perhaps +he would revive?” +</p> + +<p> +“No, Pencroff,” responded the engineer, “there is nothing to +do. Moreover, Captain Nemo would not be willing to leave here. He has lived on +the Nautilus for thirty years, and on the Nautilus he wishes to die.” +</p> + +<p> +Doubtless Captain Nemo heard Smith’s words, for, raising himself up a +little, and speaking in a feeble but intelligible voice, he said:— +</p> + +<p> +“You are right. I wish to die here. And I have a request to make.” +</p> + +<p> +Smith and his companions had gathered round the divan, and they arranged the +cushions so that the dying man was more comfortably placed. +</p> + +<p> +They saw that his gaze was fixed upon the marvels of the saloon, lit up by the +rays of electric light sifting through the arabesques of the luminous ceiling. +He looked upon the pictures, those <i>chefs d’œuvre</i> of Italian, +Flemish, French, and Spanish masters, which hung on the tapestried walls, upon +the marbles and bronzes, upon the magnificent organ at the opposite end of the +saloon, upon the glasses arranged around a central vase in which were disposed +the rarest products of the seas, marine plants, zoophytes, chaplets of pearls +of an inappreciable value, and at length his attention was fixed upon this +device, the device of the Nautilus inscribed upon the front of this +museum:— +</p> + +<p class="center"> +MOBILIS IN MOBILI. +</p> + +<p> +It seemed as if he wished to caress with his regard, one last time, those +<i>chefs d’oeuvre</i> of art and nature which had been ever visible to +him in the years of his sojourn in the depths of the sea! +</p> + +<p> +Smith respected Captain Nemo’s silence. He waited for him to speak. +</p> + +<p> +After some moments, during which passed before him, doubtless, his whole life, +Cap-Nemo turned to the colonists and said:— +</p> + +<p> +“You wish to do me a favor?” +</p> + +<p> +“Captain, we would give our lives to prolong yours!” +</p> + +<p> +“Well, then, promise me that you will execute my last wishes, and I will +be repaid for all that I have done for you.” +</p> + +<p> +“We promise,” answered Smith, speaking for his companions and +himself. +</p> + +<p> +“To-morrow,” said the Captain, “to-morrow I will be +dead.” +</p> + +<p> +He made a sign to Herbert, who was about to protest. +</p> + +<p> +“To-morrow I will be dead, and I wish for no other tomb than the +Nautilus. It is my coffin! All my friends rest at the bottom of the sea, and I +wish to rest there also.” +</p> + +<p> +A profound silence followed the words of Captain Nemo. +</p> + +<p> +“Attend to what I say,” he continued. “The Nautilus is +imprisoned in this grotto. But if she cannot leave this prison, she can at +least sink herself in the abyss, which will cover her and guard my mortal +remains.” +</p> + +<p> +The colonists listened religiously to the words of the dying man. +</p> + +<p> +“To-morrow, after I am dead, Mr. Smith,” continued the Captain, +“you and your companions will leave the Nautilus, all of whose riches are +to disappear with me. One single remembrance of Prince Dakkar, whose history +you now know, will remain to you. That coffer, there, encloses diamonds worth +many millions, most of them souvenirs of the time when, a husband and father, I +almost believed in happiness, and a collection of pearls gathered by my friends +and myself from the bottom of the sea. With this treasure, you will be able, +some time, to accomplish good. In your hands and those of your companions, Mr. +Smith, wealth will not be dangerous. I shall be ever present with you in your +works.” +</p> + +<p> +After some moments of rest, necessitated by his extreme feebleness, Captain +Nemo continued as follows:— +</p> + +<p> +“To-morrow, you will take this coffer, you will leave this saloon, and +close the door; then you will ascend to the platform of the Nautilus and you +will bolt down the hatchway.” +</p> + +<p> +“We will do it, sir,” replied Smith. +</p> + +<p> +“Very well. You will then embark in the boat which brought you here. But, +before abandoning the Nautilus, go to the stern, and there, open two large +cocks which you will find at the water-line. The water will penetrate and the +Nautilus will sink beneath the waves and rest upon the bottom of the +abyss.” +</p> + +<p> +Then, upon a gesture from Smith, the Captain added:— +</p> + +<p> +“Fear nothing! you will only be burying the dead!” +</p> + +<p> +Neither Smith nor his companions could say a word to Captain Nemo. These were +his last wishes, and they had nothing else to do but obey them. +</p> + +<p> +“I have your promise?” asked Captain Nemo. +</p> + +<p> +“You have it, sir,” answered the engineer. +</p> + +<p> +The Captain made a sign thanking them, and then motioned to be left alone for a +few hours. Spilett insisted on remaining with him, in case of an emergency, but +the other refused, saying:— +</p> + +<p> +“I will live till morning, sir.” +</p> + +<p> +All left the salon, passing through the library, the dining-room, and reached +the forward part of the vessel, where the electric apparatus, furnishing heat, +light, and motive power to the Nautilus was placed. +</p> + +<p> +The Nautilus was a <i>chef-d’oeuvre</i> containing +<i>chefs-d’oeuvre</i>, which filled the engineer with amazement. +</p> + +<p> +The colonists mounted the platform, which rose seven or eight feet above the +water. Then they saw a thick lenticular glass closing up a sort of +bull’s-eye, through which penetrated a ray of light. Behind this +bull’s-eye was the wheel-house, where the steersman stood when directing +the Nautilus under the sea, by means of the electric light. +</p> + +<p> +Smith and his companions stood here in silence, impressed by what they saw, and +what they had heard, and their hearts bled to think that he, their protector, +whose arm had been so often raised to aid them, would soon be counted among the +dead. +</p> + +<p> +Whatever would be the judgment of posterity upon this, so to say, extra-human +existence, Prince Dakkar would always remain one of those strange characters +who cannot be forgotten. +</p> + +<p> +“What a man!” said Pencroff. “Is it credible that he has +lived so at the bottom of the ocean! And to think that he has not found rest +even there!” +</p> + +<p> +“The Nautilus,” observed Ayrton, “would, perhaps, have served +us to leave Lincoln Island and gain some inhabited country.” +</p> + +<p> +“A thousand devils!” cried Pencroff. “You couldn’t get +me to steer such a craft. To sail over the seas is all very well, but under the +seas,—no, sir!” +</p> + +<p> +“I think, Pencroff,” said the reporter, “that it would be +easy to manage a submarine apparatus like the Nautilus, and that we would soon +get accustomed to it. No storms, no boarding to fear. At some little distance +under the waves the waters are as calm as those of a lake.” +</p> + +<p> +“That’s likely enough,” answered the sailor, “but give +me a stiff breeze and a well rigged ship. A ship is made to go on the water and +not under it.” +</p> + +<p> +“My friends,” said the engineer, “it is useless, at least as +far as the Nautilus is concerned, to discuss this question of submarine +vessels. The Nautilus is not ours, and we have no right to dispose of it. It +could not, moreover, serve us under any circumstances. Aside from the fact that +it cannot get out of this cavern, Captain Nemo wishes it to be engulfed with +him after his death. His wish is law, and we will obey it.” +</p> + +<p> +Smith and his companions, after talking for a while longer, descended into the +interior of the Nautilus. There they ate some food and returned to the salon. +</p> + +<p> +Captain Nemo had recovered from his prostration, and his eyes had regained +their brilliancy. They saw a smile upon his lips. +</p> + +<p> +The colonists approached him. “Sirs,” said the Captain, “you +are brave men, and good and honest. You have given yourselves up to the common +cause. I have often watched you. I have loved you. I do love you!—Give me +your hand, Mr. Smith.” +</p> + +<p> +Smith gave his hand to the Captain, who pressed it affectionately. +</p> + +<p> +“That is well!” he murmured. Then he added:— +</p> + +<p> +“But I have said enough about myself. I wish to speak of yourselves and +of Lincoln Island, on which you have found refuge. You want to leave +it?”. +</p> + +<p> +“To come back again!” said Pencroff eagerly. +</p> + +<p> +“To return?—Oh! yes, Pencroff,” answered the Captain, +smiling, “I know how much you love this island. It has been improved by +your care, and it is, indeed, yours.” +</p> + +<p> +“Our project, Captain,” added Smith, “would be to make it +over to the United States, and to establish a station, which would be well +situated here in this part of the Pacific.” +</p> + +<p> +“You think of your country,” replied the Captain. “You work +for her prosperity, for her glory. You are right. The Fatherland! It is there +we wish to return! It is there we wish to die! And I, I die far from everything +that I have loved!” +</p> + +<p> +“Have you no last wish to have executed,” asked the engineer +earnestly, “no souvenir to send to those friends you left in the +mountains of India?” +</p> + +<p> +“No, Mr. Smith, I have no friends! I am the last of my race—and I +die long after those whom I have known.—But to return to yourselves. +Solitude, isolation are sorrowful things, beyond human endurance. I die from +having believed that man could live alone!—You wish to leave Lincoln +Island and to return to your country. I know that these wretches have destroyed +your boat-” +</p> + +<p> +“We are building a ship,” said Spilett, “a ship large enough +to take us to the nearest country; but if sooner or later we leave the island, +we will come back again. Too many associations attach us to the place, for us +ever to forget it.” +</p> + +<p> +“Here we met Captain Nemo,” said Smith. +</p> + +<p> +“Here only will we find the perfect remembrance of you!” added +Herbert.” +</p> + +<p> +“It is here that I will rest in an eternal sleep, if—” +answered the Captain. +</p> + +<p> +He hesitated, and, instead of finishing his sentence, said:— +</p> + +<p> +“Mr. Smith, I wish to speak with you,—with you alone.” +</p> + +<p> +The companions of the engineer retired, and Smith remained for some time alone +with Captain Nemo. He soon called back his friends, but said nothing to them of +the secrets which the dying prince had confided to him. +</p> + +<p> +Spilett observed the Captain with extreme attention. He was evidently living by +the strength of his will, which could not long hold out against his physical +weakness. +</p> + +<p> +The day ended without any change manifesting itself. The colonists did not +leave the Nautilus. Night came, although unseen in this crypt. +</p> + +<p> +Captain Nemo did not suffer pain, but sunk slowly. His noble face, pale by the +approach of death, was perfectly calm. Now and then he spoke, incoherently, of +events in his strange existence.—All saw that life was retreating. His +feet and hands were already cold. +</p> + +<p> +Once or twice, he spoke a word to the colonists who were about him, and he +looked upon them with that smile which remained when he was no more. +</p> + +<p> +At last, just after midnight, Captain Nemo made a supreme effort, and crossed +his arms upon his breast, as if he wished to die in that attitude. +</p> + +<p> +Towards 1 o’clock all the life that was left was concentrated in his +expression. One last spark burned in that eye which had formerly flashed fire! +Then, murmuring these words, “God and Fatherland,” he expired +quietly. +</p> + +<p> +Smith, stooping down, closed the eyes of him who had been Prince Dakkar, who +was no more even Captain Nemo. +</p> + +<p> +Herbert and Pencroff wept. Ayrton wiped away a furtive tear. Neb was on his +knees near the reporter, who was immobile as a statue. +</p> + +<p> +Smith raising his hand above the head of the dead man:— +</p> + +<p> +“May God receive his soul!” he said, and then, turning towards his +friends, he added:— +</p> + +<p> +“Let us pray for him whom we have lost!” +</p> + +<hr /> + +<p> +Some hours later, the colonists, in fulfillment of their promise, carried out +the last wishes of the dead. +</p> + +<p> +They left the Nautilus, taking with them the sole souvenir of their benefactor, +the coffer containing a hundred fortunes. +</p> + +<p> +The marvellous salon, still flooded with light, was carefully closed. The cover +to the hatchway was bolted down in such a manner that not a drop of water could +penetrate to the inner chambers of the Nautilus. Then the colonists entered the +boat, which was moored beside the submarine ship. +</p> + +<p> +The boat was taken to the stern. There, at the water-line, they opened the two +large cocks which communicated with the reservoirs designed to immerse the +apparatus. +</p> + +<p> +The cocks were opened, the reservoirs filled, and the Nautilus, sinking slowly, +disappeared beneath the sea. +</p> + +<p> +But the colonists were able still to follow her coarse through the lower +depths. Her strong light lit up the transparent waters, as the crypt became +darkened. Then at length the vast effusion of electric effulgence was effaced, +and the Nautilus, the tomb of Captain Nemo, rested upon the bottom of the sea. +</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2><a name="LX" id="LX"></a>CHAPTER LX.</h2> + +<p class="letter"> +THE REFLECTIONS OF THE COLONISTS—RENEWAL OF WORK—THE 1ST OF +JANUARY, 1869—A SMOKE FROM THE VOLCANO—SYMPTOMS OF AN ERUPTION +AYRTON AND SMITH AT THE CORRAL—EXPLORATION OF THE CRYPT DAKKAR +—WHAT CAPTAIN NEMO HAD SAID TO THE ENGINEER. +</p> + +<p> +In the early morning the colonists reached the entrance of the cavern, which +they called Crypt Dakkar, in remembrance of Captain Nemo. The tide was low, and +they easily passed under the archway, whose piers were washed by the waves. +</p> + +<p> +The iron boat could remain in this place without danger from the sea; but as +additional precaution they drew it up on a little beach on one side of the +crypt. +</p> + +<p> +The storm had ceased during the night. The last mutterings of the thunder were +dying away in the west. It was not raining, although the sky was still clouded. +In short, this month of October, the beginning of the southern spring, did not +come in good fashion, and the wind had a tendency to shift from one point of +the compass to another, so that it was impossible to say what the weather would +be. +</p> + +<p> +Smith and his companions, on leaving Crypt Dakkar, went towards the corral. On +the way Neb and Herbert took care to take up the wire which had been stretched +by Captain Nemo, as it might be useful in the future. +</p> + +<p> +While walking the colonists spoke but little. The incidents of this night had +made a vivid impression upon them. This unknown, whose influence had protected +them so well, this man whom they imagined a genii, Captain Nemo, was no more. +His Nautilus and himself were buried in the depths of the abyss. It seemed to +each one of them that they were more isolated than before. They were, so to +speak, accustomed to count upon this powerful intervention which to-day was +wanting, and Spilett, and even Smith, did not escape this feeling. So, without +speaking, they followed the road to the corral. +</p> + +<p> +By 9 o’clock the colonists were in Granite House again. +</p> + +<p> +It had been agreed that the construction of the ship should be pushed forward +as rapidly as possible, and Smith gave the work more of his time and care than +ever before. They did not know what the future might bring forth, and it would +be a guarantee of safety for them to have a strong vessel, able to stand rough +weather, and large enough to carry them, if need be, a long distance. If, when +it was finished, the colonists decided not to leave the island they could at +least make the voyage to Tabor Island and leave a notice there. This was an +indispensable precaution in case the Scotch yacht returned to these seas, and +it must on no account be neglected. +</p> + +<p> +The work was undertaken at once. All worked at it without ceasing, except to +prosecute other necessary work. It was important to have the new ship finished +in five months, if they wished to make the voyage to Tabor Island before the +equinoxial storms would render it impracticable. All the sails of the Speedy +had been saved, so that they need not trouble themselves about making rigging. +</p> + +<p> +The year ended in the midst of this work. At the end of two months and a half +the ribs had been put in place and the planking began, so that they were able +to see that Smith’s plans were excellent. Pencroff worked with ardor, and +always grumbled when any of the others left off work to go hunting. It was, +nevertheless, necessary to lay in a stock of provisions for the approaching +winter. But that made no difference. The honest sailor was unhappy unless every +one was at work in the ship-yard. At these times he grumbled and did—he +was so put out—the work of half a dozen men. +</p> + +<p> +All this summer season was bad. The heat was overpowering, and the atmosphere, +charged with electricity, discharged itself in violent storms. It was seldom +that the distant muttering of the thunder was unheard. It was like a dull, but +permanent murmur, such as is produced in the equatorial regions of the globe. +</p> + +<p> +On the 1st of January, 1869, a terrific storm burst over the island, and the +lightning struck in many places. Tall trees were shattered, and among them was +one of the enormous micocouliers which shaded the poultry-yard. Had this +meteoric storm any relation to the phenomena which were occurring In the bowels +of the earth? Was there a sort of connection between the disturbances in the +air and those in the interior of the globe. Smith believed it to be so, since +the development of these storms was marked by a recrudescence of the volcanic +symptoms. +</p> + +<p> +On the 3d of January, Herbert, who had gone at daybreak to Prospect Plateau to +saddle one of the onagers, saw an immense black cloud rolling out from the +summit of the volcano. +</p> + +<p> +Herbert hastened to inform the others, who came at once to look at the +mountain. +</p> + +<p> +“Ah!” said Pencroff, “it is not vapor this time! It seems to +me that the giant is not content to breathe, he must smoke!” +</p> + +<p> +The image employed by the sailor expressed with exactness the change which had +taken place at the mouth of the volcano. For three months the crater had been +emitting vapors more or less intense, but there had been no ebullition of +mineral matters. This time, instead of vapors, a thick column of smoke rose, +like an immense mushroom, above the summit of the mountain. +</p> + +<p> +“The chimney is on fire!” said Spilett. +</p> + +<p> +“And we cannot put it out!” answered Herbert. +</p> + +<p> +“It would be well to sweep the volcanoes,” said Neb, in good +earnest. +</p> + +<p> +“All right, Neb,” said Pencroff, laughing. “Will you +undertake the job?” +</p> + +<p> +Smith looked attentively at the thick smoke, and at the same time he listened +as if he expected to detect some distant rumbling. Then, turning towards his +companions, who were at some little distance, he said:— +</p> + +<p> +“In truth, my friends, it cannot be denied that an important change has +taken place. The volcanic matters are not only in a state of ebullition, they +have taken fire, and, without doubt, we are threatened with an eruption!” +</p> + +<p> +“Very well, sir; we will witness this eruption,” cried Pencroff, +“and we will applaud it if it is a success! I don’t think that +anything over there need worry us!” +</p> + +<p> +“No, Pencroff,” answered Smith, “for the old course of the +lava is open, and, thanks to its position, the crater has heretofore discharged +towards the north. Nevertheless—” +</p> + +<p> +“Nevertheless, since there is nothing to be gained by an eruption, it +would be better not to have it,” said the reporter. +</p> + +<p> +“Who knows?” replied the sailor. “There may be some useful +and precious matter in the volcano, which it will be good enough to throw up, +which will be advantageous for us!” +</p> + +<p> +Smith shook his head, as a man who anticipated nothing good from this +phenomenon. He did not think so lightly of the consequences of an eruption. If +the lava, on account of the position of the crater, did not menace the wooded +and cultivated portions of the island, other complications might arise. +Eruptions are often accompanied by earthquakes, and an island formed, like +Lincoln Island, of such different materials: basalt on one side, granite on +another, lavas to the north, a mixed soil inland, material which, therefore, +could not be solidly bound together, ran the risk of being torn asunder. If, +therefore, the outpouring of volcanic substances did not threaten serious +results, any movement in the framework upholding the island might be followed +by the gravest consequences. +</p> + +<p> +“It seems to me,” said Ayrton, who was kneeling down, with his ear +to the ground, “it seems to me that I hear a noise, like the rattling of +a wagon, loaded with iron bars.” +</p> + +<p> +The colonists listened carefully, and were convinced that Ayrton was not +mistaken. With the rumbling mingled subterranean roaring, making a sort of +“rinfordzando,” which died away slowly, as if from some violent +cleavage in the interior of the globe. But no detonation was heard, and it was +fair to conclude that the smoke and vapor found a free passage through the +central chimney, and, if the escape-pipe was sufficiently large, no explosion +need be feared. +</p> + +<p> +“Come,” said Pencroff at length, “shall we not go back to +work? Let Mount Franklin smoke, brawl, moan, and vomit fire and flames as much +as it chooses, but that is no excuse for us to quit work! Come, Ayrton, Neb, +all of you, we want all hands to-day! I want our new Good Luck—we will +keep the name, will we not?—to be moored in Balloon Harbor before two +months are passed! So there is not an hour to be lost!” +</p> + +<p> +All the colonists went down to the shipyard and worked steadily all day without +giving too much thought to the volcano, which could not be seen from the beach +before Granite House. But once or twice heavy shadows obscured the sunlight, +and, as the was day perfectly clear, it was evident that thick clouds of smoke +were passing between the sun’s disc and the island. Smith and Spilett +noticed these sombre voyagers, and talked of the progress that the volcanic +phenomenon was making, but they did not cease work. It was, moreover, of great +importance, in every sense, that the ship should be finished with as little +delay as possible. In the presence of events which might happen, the security +of the colonists would be better assured. Who could say but that this ship +might not, some day, be their sole refuge? +</p> + +<p> +That evening, after supper, Smith, Spilett, and Herbert climbed to the plateau. +It was already dark, and they would be able to distinguish whether flames or +incandescent matter was mingled with the smoke and vapor of the volcano. +</p> + +<p> +“The crater is on fire!” cried Herbert, who, more active than his +companions, had reached the plateau the first. +</p> + +<p> +Mount Franklin, six miles distant, appeared like a gigantic torch, with +fuliginous flames twisting about its summit. So much smoke, such quantities of +scoriæ and cinders, perhaps, were mingled with the flames, that their light did +not glare upon the shades of night. But a sort of dull yellow glow spread over +the island, making dimly visible the higher masses of forest. Enormous clouds +obscured the heavens, between which glittered a few stars. +</p> + +<p> +“The progress is rapid,” said the engineer. +</p> + +<p> +“It is not astonishing,” answered the reporter. “The volcano +has been awake for some time already. You remember, Cyrus, that the first +vapors appeared about the time we were searching the mountain for the retreat +of Captain Nemo. That was, if I am not mistaken, about the 15th of October. +</p> + +<p> +“Yes” replied Herbert, “two months and a half ago.” +</p> + +<p> +“The subterranean fires have been brooding for ten weeks,” +continued Spilett, “and it is not astonishing that they develop now with +this violence.” +</p> + +<p> +“Do not you feel certain vibrations in the ground?” asked Smith. +</p> + +<p> +“I think so,” replied Spilett, “but an +earthquake—” +</p> + +<p> +“I did not say that we were menaced by an earthquake,” said Smith, +“and Heaven preserve us from one! No. These vibrations are due to the +effervesence of the central fire. The crust of the earth is nothing more than +the covering of a boiler, and you know how the covering of a boiler, under +pressure, vibrates like a sonorous plate. That is what is happening at this +moment.” +</p> + +<p> +“What magnificent flames!” cried Herbert, as a sheaf of fire shot +up, unobscured by the vapors, from the crater. From its midst luminous +fragments and bright scintillations were thrown in every direction. Some of +them pierced the dome of smoke, leaving behind them a perfect cloud of +incandescent dust. This outpouring was accompanied by rapid detonations like +the discharge of a battery of mitrailleuses. +</p> + +<p> +Smith, the reporter, and the lad, after having passed an hour on Prospect +Plateau, returned to Granite House. The engineer was pensive, and so much +preoccupied that Spilett asked him if he anticipated any near danger. +</p> + +<p> +“Yes and no,” responded Smith. +</p> + +<p> +“But the worst that could happen,” said the reporter, “would +be an earthquake, which would overthrow the island. And I don’t think +that is to be feared, since the vapors and lava have a free passage of +escape.” +</p> + +<p> +“I do not fear an earthquake,” answered Smith, “of the +ordinary kind, such as are brought about by the expansion of subterranean +vapors. But other causes may bring about great disaster.” +</p> + +<p> +“For example?” +</p> + +<p> +“I do not know exactly—I must see—I must visit the mountain. +In a few days I shall have made up my mind.” +</p> + +<p> +Spilett asked no further questions, and soon, notwithstanding the increased +violence of the volcano, the inhabitants of Granite House slept soundly. +</p> + +<p> +Three days passed, the 4th 5th, and 6th of January, during which they worked on +the ship, and, without explaining himself further, the engineer hastened the +work as much as possible. Mount Franklin was covered with a sinister cloud, and +with the flames vomited forth incandescent rocks, some of which fell back into +the crater. This made Pencroff, who wished to look upon the phenomenon from an +amusing side, say— +</p> + +<p> +“Look! The giant plays at cup and ball! He is a juggler.” +</p> + +<p> +And, indeed, the matters vomited forth fell back into the abyss, and it seemed +as if the lavas, swollen by the interior pressure, had not yet risen to the +mouth of the crater. At least, the fracture on the northeast, which was partly +visible, did not pour forth any torrent on the western side of the mountain. +</p> + +<p> +Meanwhile, however pressing the ship-building, other cares required the +attention of the colonists in different parts of the island. First of all, they +must go to the corral, where the moufflons and goats were enclosed, and renew +the provisions for these animals. It was, therefore, agreed that Ayrton should +go there the next day, and, as it was customary for but one to do this work, +the others were surprised to hear the engineer say to Ayrton:—— +</p> + +<p> +“As you are going to the corral to-morrow, I will go with you.” +</p> + +<p> +“Oh! Mr. Smith!” cried the sailor, “our time is very limited, +and, if you go off in this way, we lose just that much help!” +</p> + +<p> +“We will return the next day,” answered Smith, “but I must go +to the corral—I wish to see about this eruption.” +</p> + +<p> +“Eruption! Eruption!” answered Pencroff, with a dissatisfied air. +“What is there important about this eruption? It don’t bother +me!” +</p> + +<p> +Notwithstanding the sailor’s protest, the exploration was decided upon +for the next day. Herbert wanted to go with Smith, but he did not wish to annoy +Pencroff by absenting himself. So, early the next morning, Smith and Ayrton +started off with the wagon and onagers. +</p> + +<p> +Over the forest hung huge clouds constantly supplied from Mount Franklin with +fuliginous matter. They were evidently composed of heterogeneous substances. It +was not altogether the smoke from the volcano that made them so heavy and +opaque. Scoriæ in a state of powder, pulverized puzzolan and grey cinder as +fine as the finest fecula, were held in suspension in their thick folds. These +cinders remain in air, sometimes, for months at a time. After the eruption of +1783, in Iceland, for more than a year the atmosphere was so charged with +volcanic powder that the sun’s rays were scarcely visible. +</p> + +<p> +Usually, however, these pulverized matters fall to the earth at once, and it +was so in this instance. Smith and Ayrton had hardly reached the corral, when a +sort of black cloud, like fine gunpowder, fell, and instantly modified the +whole aspect of the ground. Trees, fields, everything was covered with a +coating several fingers deep. But, most fortunately, the wind was from the +northeast, and the greater part of the cloud was carried off to sea. +</p> + +<p> +“That is very curious,” said Ayrton. +</p> + +<p> +“It is very serious,” answered Smith. This puzzolan, this +pulverized pumice stone, all this mineral dust in short, shows how deep-seated +is the commotion in the volcano. +</p> + +<p> +“But there is nothing to be done.” +</p> + +<p> +“Nothing, but to observe the progress of the phenomenon. Employ yourself, +Ayrton, at the corral, and meanwhile I will go up to the sources of Red Creek +and examine the state of the mountain on its western side. +Then——” +</p> + +<p> +“Then, sir?” +</p> + +<p> +“Then we will make a visit to Crypt Dakkar—I wish to +see—Well, I will come back for you in a couple of hours.” +</p> + +<p> +Ayrton went into the corral, and while waiting for the return of the engineer +occupied himself with the moufflons and goats, which showed a certain +uneasiness before these first symptoms of an eruption. +</p> + +<p> +Meantime Smith had ventured to climb the eastern spurs of the mountain, and he +arrived at the place where his companions had discovered the sulphur spring on +their first exploration. +</p> + +<p> +How everything was changed! Instead of a single column of smoke, he counted +thirteen escaping from the ground as if thrust upward by a piston. It was +evident that the crust of earth was subjected in this place to a frightful +pressure. The atmosphere was saturated with gases and aqueous vapors. Smith +felt the volcanic tufa, the pulverulent cinders hardened by time, trembling +beneath him, but he did not yet see any traces of fresh lava. +</p> + +<p> +It was the same with the western slope of the mountain. Smoke and flames +escaped from the crater; a hail of scoriæ fell upon the soil; but no lava +flowed from the gullet of the crater, which was another proof that the volcanic +matter had not attained the upper orifice of the central chimney. +</p> + +<p> +“And I would be better satisfied if they had!” said Smith to +himself. “At least I would be certain that the lavas had taken their +accustomed route. Who knows if they may not burst forth from some new mouth? +But that is not the danger! Captain Nemo has well foreseen it! No! the danger +is not there!” +</p> + +<p> +Smith went forward as far as the enormous causeway, whose prolongation enframed +Shark Gulf. Here he was able to examine the ancient lava marks. There could be +no doubt that the last eruption had been at a far distant epoch. +</p> + +<p> +Then he returned, listening to the subterranean rumblings, which sounded like +continuous thunder, and by 9 o’clock he was at the corral. +</p> + +<p> +Ayrton was waiting for him. +</p> + +<p> +“The animals are attended to, sir,” said he. +</p> + +<p> +“All right, Ayrton.” +</p> + +<p> +“They seem to be restless, Mr. Smith.” +</p> + +<p> +“Yes, it is their instinct, which does not mislead them.” +</p> + +<p> +“When you are ready—” +</p> + +<p> +“Take a lantern and tinder, Ayrton, and let us go.” +</p> + +<p> +Ayrton did as he was told. The onagers had been unharnessed and placed in the +corral, and Smith, leading, took the route to the coast. +</p> + +<p> +They walked over a soil covered with the pulverulent matter which had fallen +from the clouds. No animal appeared. Even the birds had flown away. Sometimes a +breeze passed laden with cinders, and the two colonists, caught in the cloud, +were unable to see. They had to place handkerchiefs over their eyes and +nostrils or they would have been blinded and suffocated. +</p> + +<p> +Under these circumstances they could not march rapidly. The air was heavy, as +if all the oxygen had been burned out of it, making it unfit to breathe. Every +now and then they had to stop, and it was after 10 o’clock when the +engineer and his companion reached the summit of the enormous heap of basaltic +and porphyrytic rocks which formed the northwest coast of the island. +</p> + +<p> +They began to go down this abrupt descent, following the detestable road, +which, during that stormy night had led them to Crypt Dakkar. By daylight this +descent was less perilous, and, moreover, the covering of cinders gave a firmer +foothold to the slippery rocks. +</p> + +<p> +The projection was soon attained, and, as the tide was low, Smith and Ayrton +found the opening to the crypt without any difficulty. +</p> + +<p> +“Is the boat there?” asked the engineer. +</p> + +<p> +“Yes, sir,” answered Ayrton, drawing the boat towards him. +</p> + +<p> +“Let us get in, then, Ayrton,” said the engineer. +</p> + +<p> +The two embarked in the boat. Ayrton lit the lantern, and, placing it in the +bow of the boat, took the oars, and Smith, taking the tiller, steered into the +darkness. +</p> + +<p> +The Nautilus was no longer here to illuminate this sombre cavern. Perhaps the +electric irradiation still shone under the waters, but no light came from the +abyss where Captain Nemo reposed. +</p> + +<p> +The light of the lantern was barely sufficient to permit the engineer to +advance, following the right hand wall of the crypt. A sepulchral silence +reigned in this portion of the vault, but soon Smith heard distinctly the +mutterings which came from the interior of the earth. +</p> + +<p> +“It is the volcano,” he said. +</p> + +<p> +Soon, with this noise, the chemical combinations betrayed themselves by a +strong odor, and sulphurous vapors choked the engineer and his companion. +</p> + +<p> +“It is as Captain Nemo feared,” murmured Smith, growing pale. +“We must go on to the end.” +</p> + +<p> +Twenty-five minutes after having left the opening the two reached the terminal +wall and stopped. +</p> + +<p> +Smith standing on the seat, moved the lantern about over this wall, which +separated the crypt from the central chimney of the volcano. How thick was it? +Whether 100 feet or but 10 could not be determined. But the subterranean noises +were too plainly heard for it to be very thick. +</p> + +<p> +The engineer, after having explored the wall along a horizontal line, fixed the +lantern to the end of an oar and went over it again at a greater height. +</p> + +<p> +There, through scarcely visible cracks, came a pungent smoke, which infected +the air of the cavern. The wall was striped with these fractures, and some of +the larger ones came to within a few feet of the water. +</p> + +<p> +At first, Smith rested thoughtful. Then he murmured these words:— +</p> + +<p> +“Yes! Captain Nemo was right! There is the danger, and it is +terrible!” +</p> + +<p> +Ayrton said nothing, but, on a sign from the engineer, he took up the oars, +and, a half hour later, he and Smith came out of Crypt Dakkar. +</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2><a name="LXI" id="LXI"></a>CHAPTER LXI</h2> + +<p class="letter"> +SMITH’S RECITAL—HASTENING THE WORK—A LAST VISIT TO THE +CORRAL—THE COMBAT BETWEEN THE FIRE AND THE WATER—THE ASPECT OF THE +ISLAND—THEY DECIDE TO LAUNCH THE SHIP—THE NIGHT OF THE 8TH OF +MARCH. +</p> + +<p> +The next morning, the 8th of January, after a day and night passed at the +corral, Smith and Ayrton returned to Granite House. +</p> + +<p> +Then the engineer assembled his companions, and told them that Lincoln Island +was in fearful danger—a danger which no human power could prevent. +</p> + +<p> +“My friends,” said he,—and his voice betrayed great +emotion,—“Lincoln Island is doomed to destruction sooner or later; +the cause is in itself and there is no means of removing it!” +</p> + +<p> +The colonists looked at each other. They did not understand him. +</p> + +<p> +“Explain yourself, Cyrus,” said Spilett. +</p> + +<p> +“I will, or rather I will give you the explanation which Captain Nemo +gave me, when I was alone with him.” +</p> + +<p> +“Captain Nemo!” cried the colonists. +</p> + +<p> +“Yes; it was the last service he rendered us before he died.” +</p> + +<p> +“The last service!” cried Pencroff. “The last service! You +think, because he is dead, that he will help us no more!” +</p> + +<p> +“What did he say?” asked the reporter. +</p> + +<p> +“This, my friends,” answered the engineer. “Lincoln Island is +not like the other islands of the Pacific, and a particular event, made known +to me by Captain Nemo, will cause, sooner or later, the destruction of its +submarine framework.” +</p> + +<p> +“Destruction of Lincoln Island! What an idea!” cried Pencroff, who, +in spite of his respect for Smith, could not help shrugging his shoulders. +</p> + +<p> +“Listen to me, Pencroff,” continued the engineer. “This is +what Captain Nemo ascertained and what I verified yesterday In Crypt Dakkar. +The crypt extends under the island as far as the volcano, and is only separated +from the central chimney by the wall. Now this wall is seamed with fractures +and cracks, through which the sulphurous gas is already escaping.” +</p> + +<p> +“Well?” asked Pencroff, wrinkling his forehead. +</p> + +<p> +“Well, I have ascertained that these fractures are widening under the +pressure from within, that the basalt wall la gradually bursting open, and +that, sooner or later, it will give a passage to the waters of the sea.” +</p> + +<p> +“That’s all right!” exclaimed Pencroff, trying still to make +light of the subject. “That’s all right! The sea will put out the +volcano, and that will be the end of it.” +</p> + +<p> +“Yes, that will be the end of it!” answered Smith. “On the +day that the sea rushes through the wall and penetrates by the central chimney +to the bowels of the island, where the eruptive matter is boiling, on that day, +Pencroff, Lincoln Island will go up, as Sicily would go up, if the +Mediterranean was emptied into Aetna!” +</p> + +<p> +The colonists made no reply. They understood the threatened danger. +</p> + +<p> +It was no longer doubtful that the island was menaced by a frightful explosion. +That it would last only as long as the wall to Crypt Dakkar remained intact. +This was not a question of months, nor of weeks, bat of days, of hours, +perhaps! +</p> + +<p> +The first sensation the colonists experienced was one of profound sorrow. They +did not think of the peril which menaced them directly, but of the destruction +of that land which had given them asylum, of that island which they had +cultivated, which they loved, which they wished to render so prosperous some +day! All their labor uselessly employed, all their work lost! +</p> + +<p> +Pencroff did not attempt to hide the tears which rolled down his cheeks. +</p> + +<p> +They talked for some little time longer. The chances which they might count +upon were discussed; but, in conclusion, they realized that not an hour was to +be lost; that the ship must be completed as soon as possible, as, now, it was +the only chance of safety left, to the inhabitants of Lincoln Island! +</p> + +<p> +All hands were required. Where was the use, now, of sowing, or harvesting, of +hunting or increasing the reserve at Granite House? The present contents of the +magazine were sufficient to provision the ship for as long a voyage as she +could make! What was necessary was that these should be at +</p> + +<p> +the disposal of the colonists before the accomplishment of the inevitable +catastrophe. +</p> + +<p> +The work was undertaken with feverish eagerness. By the 23d of January the ship +was half planked. Up to this time there had been no change in the volcano. It +was always the vapors, the smoke mixed with flames and pierced by incandescent +stones, which escaped from the crater. But during the night of the 23d the +upper cone, which formed the cap of the volcano, was lifted off by the pressure +of the lava, which had reached the level of the lower cone. A terrible noise +was heard. The colonists, believing that the island was going to pieces, rushed +out of Granite House. +</p> + +<p> +It was 2 o’clock in the morning. The heavens were on fire. The upper +cone—a mass a thousand feet high, and weighing thousands of millions of +pounds—had been thrown upon the island, making the earth tremble. +Happily, this cone leaned to the north, and it fell upon the plain of sand and +tufa which lay between the volcano and the sea. The crater, by this means +greatly widened, threw towards the sky a light so intense, that, by the simple +effect of reverberation, the atmosphere seemed to be incandescent. At the same +time a torrent of lava swelled up over this new summit, falling in long +streams, like water escaping from an overflowing vase, and a thousand fiery +serpents writhed upon the talus of the volcano. +</p> + +<p> +“The corral! The corral!” cried Ayrton. +</p> + +<p> +It was, indeed, towards the corral that the lava took their way, following the +slope of the new crater, and, consequently, the fertile parts of the island. +The sources of Red Creek, and Jacamar Wood were threatened with immediate +destruction. +</p> + +<p> +At the cry of Ayrton, the colonists had rushed towards the stable of the +onagers, and harnessed the animals. All had but one thought. To fly to the +corral and let loose the beasts confined there. +</p> + +<p> +Before 3 o’clock they were there. Frightful cries indicated the terror of +the moufflons and goats. Already a torrent of incandescent matter, of liquified +minerals, fell over the mountain spur upon the plain, destroying that side of +the palisade. The gate was hastily opened by Ayrton, and the animals, wild with +terror, escaped in every direction. +</p> + +<p> +An hour later the boiling lava filled the corral, volatilizing the water of the +little brook which traversed it, firing the house, which burned like a bit of +stubble, devouring to the last stake the surrounding palisade. Nothing was left +of the corral. +</p> + +<p> +The colonists wanted to struggle against this invasion; they had tried it, but +foolishly and uselessly: man is helpless before these grand cataclysms. +</p> + +<p> +The morning of the 24th arrived. Smith and his companions, before returning to +Granite House, wished to observe the definite direction which this inundation +of lava would take. The general slope of the ground from Mount Franklin was +towards the east coast, and it was to be feared that, notwithstanding the thick +Jacamar Woods, the torrent would extend to Prospect Plateau. +</p> + +<p> +“The lake will protect us,” said Spilett. +</p> + +<p> +“I hope so,” answered Smith. But that was all he said. +</p> + +<p> +The colonists would have liked to have advanced as far as the place on which +the upper cone of Mount Franklin abutted, but their passage was barred by the +lavas, which followed, on the one hand, the valley of Red Creek, and, on the +other, the course of Fall River, vaporizing these two streams in their passage. +There was no possible way of crossing this stream; it was necessary, on the +contrary, to fly before it. The flattened volcano was no longer recognizable. A +sort of smooth slab terminated it, replacing the old crater. Two outlets, +broken in the south and east sides, poured forth unceasing streams of lava, +which formed two distinct currents. Above the new crater, a cloud of smoke and +cinders mixed with the vapors of the sky, and hung over the island. Peals of +thunder mingled with the rumbling of the mountain. Burning rocks were thrown up +thousands of feet, bursting in the sky and scattering like grape-shot. The +heavens answered with lightning-flashes the eruption of the volcano. +</p> + +<p> +By 7 o’clock the colonists were no longer able to keep their position on +the edge of Jacamar Wood. Not only did the projectiles begin to fall about +them, but the lavas, overflowing the bed of Red Creek, threatened to cut off +the road from the corral. The first ranks of trees took fire, and their sap, +vaporized, made them explode like fire-crackers; while others, less humid, +remained intact in the midst of the inundation. +</p> + +<p> +The colonists started back. The torrent, owing to the slope of the land, gained +eastward rapidly, and as the lower layers of lava hardened, others, boiling, +covered them. +</p> + +<p> +Meantime the principal current in the Red Creek Valley became more and more +threatening. All that part of the forest was surrounded, and enormous clouds of +smoke rolled above the trees, whose roots were already in the lava. +</p> + +<p> +The colonists stopped at the lake shore, half a mile from the mouth of Red +Creek. A question of life or death was about to be decided for them. Smith, +accustomed to think and reason in the presence of danger, and aware that he was +speaking to men who could face the truth, whatever it might be, said to +them:— +</p> + +<p> +“Either the lake will arrest this current, and a part of the island will +be preserved from complete devastation, or the current will invade the forests +of the Far West, and not a tree, not a plant will be left upon the face of the +ground. We will have, upon these rocks stripped of life, the prospect of a +death which the explosion of the island may anticipate! +</p> + +<p> +“Then,” cried Pencroff, crossing his arms and stamping his foot on +the ground, “it is useless to work on the ship! Isn’t that +so?” +</p> + +<p> +“Pencroff,” answered Smith, “it is necessary to do +one’s duty to the end.” +</p> + +<p> +At this moment, the flood of lava, after having eaten its way through the +splendid trees of the forest, neared the lake. There was a certain depression +in the ground, which, if it had been larger, might, perhaps, suffice to hold +the torrent. +</p> + +<p> +“Let us try!” cried Smith. +</p> + +<p> +The idea of the engineer was instantly understood by all. It was necessary to +dam, so to speak, this torrent and force it into the lake. +</p> + +<p> +The colonists ran to the shipyard and brought back from there shovels, picks, +and hatchets, and by means of earthworks and hewn trees they succeeded, in a +few hours, in raising a barrier three feet high and some hundreds of feet long. +It seemed to them, when they had finished, that they had not worked more than a +few minutes! +</p> + +<p> +It was time. The liquified matter already reached the extremity of the barrier. +The flood spread like a swollen river seeking to overflow its banks and +threatening to break down the only obstacle which could prevent its devastating +all the Far West. But the barrier was sufficient to withstand it, and, after +one terrible moment of hesitation, it precipitated itself into Lake Grant by a +fall twenty feet high. +</p> + +<p> +The colonists, breathless, without a word, without a gesture, looked upon this +struggle of the elements. +</p> + +<p> +What a sight was this, the combat between fire and water! What pen can describe +this scene of marvellous horror; what pencil can portray it? The water hissed +and steamed at the contact of the boiling lavas. The steam was thrown, +whirling, to an immeasurable height in the air, as if the valves of an immense +boiler had been suddenly opened. But, great as was the mass of water contained +in the lake, it must, finally, be absorbed, since it was not renewed, while the +torrent, fed from an inexhaustible source, was ceaselessly pouring in fresh +floods of incandescent matter. +</p> + +<p> +The first lavas which fell into the lake solidified at once, and accumulated in +such a manner as soon to emerge above the surface. Over these slid other lavas, +which in their turn became stone, forming a breakwater, which threatened to +fill up the lake, which could not overflow, as its surplus water was carried +off in steam. Hissings and shrivellings filled the air with a stunning noise, +and the steam, carried off by the wind, fell to the ground in rain. The jetty +spread, and where formerly had been peaceable waters appeared an enormous heap +of smoking rocks, as if some upheaval of the ground had raised these thousands +of reefs. If one can imagine these waters tossed about by a storm, and then +suddenly solidified by cold, he will have the appearance of the lake three +hours after the irresistible torrent had poured into it. +</p> + +<p> +This time the water had been overcome by the fire. +</p> + +<p> +Nevertheless, it was a fortunate thing for the colonists that the lavas had +been turned into the lake. It gave them some days’ respite. Prospect +Plateau, Granite House, and the ship-yard were safe for the moment. In these +few days they must plank and caulk the vessel, launch it, and take refuge upon +it, rigging it after it was on the sea. With the fear of the explosion menacing +the destruction of the island, it was no longer safe to remain on land. Granite +House, so safe a retreat up to this time, might, at any moment, fall! +</p> + +<p> +During the next six days, the colonists worked on the ship with all their +might. Sleeping but little, the light of the flames from the volcano permitted +them to work by night as well as by day. The eruption continued without +cessation, but, perhaps, less abundantly. A fortunate circumstance, since Lake +Grant was nearly full; and if fresh lavas had slid over the surface of the +former layers, they would inevitably have spread over Prospect Plateau and from +there to the shore. +</p> + +<p> +But while this part of the island was partially protected it was otherwise with +the west coast. +</p> + +<p> +The second current of lava, following the valley of Fall River, met with no +obstacle. The ground on either side of the bank was low, and the incandescent +liquid was spread through the forest of the Far West. At this season of the +year the trees were dried by the warmth of the summer and took fire instantly, +and the high interlacing branches hastened the progress of the conflagration. +It seemed as if the current of flame traversed the surface of the forest more +swiftly than the current of lavas its depths. +</p> + +<p> +The beasts and birds of the woods sought refuge on the shore of the Mercy and +in the marshes of Tadorn’s Fens. But the colonists were too busy to pay +any attention to these animals. They had, moreover, abandoned Granite House; +they had not even sought refuge in the Chimneys, but they camped in a tent near +the mouth of the Mercy. +</p> + +<p> +Every day Smith and Spilett climbed up to Prospect Plateau. Sometimes Herbert +went with them, but Pencroff never. The sailor did not wish to look upon the +island in its present condition of devastation. +</p> + +<p> +It was, indeed, a desolate spectacle. All its wooded part was now denuded. One +single group of green trees remained on the extremity of Serpentine Peninsula. +Here and there appeared some blackened stumps. The site of the forests was more +desolate than Tadorn’s Fens. The invasion of the lavas had been complete. +Where formerly had been a pleasant verdure, was now nothing but a waste covered +with volcanic tufa. The valleys of Fall River and Red Creek contained no water, +and if Lake Grant had been completely filled up, the colonists would have had +no means to slack their thirst. But fortunately its southern extremity had been +spared, and formed a sort of pool, which held all the fresh water remaining on +the island. To the northwest the spurs of the mountain, in jagged outline, +looked like a gigantic claw grasping the ground. What a doleful spectacle! What +a frightful aspect! How grevious for the colonists, who, from a domain, +fertile, wooded, +</p> + +<p> +traversed by water-courses, enriched by harvests, found themselves, in an +instant, reduced to a devastated rock, upon which, without their stores, they +would not have had the means of living. +</p> + +<p> +“It is heart-breaking!” said the reporter. +</p> + +<p> +“Yes, Spilett,” answered the engineer. And pray heaven that we are +given time to finish the ship, which is now our sole refuge!” +</p> + +<p> +“Does it not seem to you, Cyrus, that the volcano is subsiding? It still +vomits lava, but, I think, less freely!” +</p> + +<p> +“It matters little,” answered Smith. “The fire is still +fierce in the bowels of the mountain, and the sea may rush in there at any +moment. We are like persons on a ship devoured by a fire which they cannot +control, who know that sooner or later the flames will reach the powder +magazine. Come, Spilett, come, we have not an hour to lose!” +</p> + +<p> +For eight days longer, that is to say until the 8th of February, the lavas +continued to flow, but the eruption confined itself to the limits described. +Smith feared more than anything else an overflow of the lavas on to the beach, +in which case the ship-yard would be destroyed. But about this time the +colonists felt vibrations in the ground which gave them the greatest +uneasiness. +</p> + +<p> +The 20th of February arrived. A month longer was necessary to fit the ship for +sea. Would the island last that long? It was Smith’s intention to launch +her as soon as her hull should be sufficiently caulked. The deck, lining, +arranging the interior, and the rigging could be done afterwards, but the +important thing was to secure a refuge off the island. Perhaps it would be +better to take the vessel round to Balloon Harbor, the point farthest from the +eruptive centre, as, at the mouth of the Mercy, between the islet and the +granite wall, she ran the risk of being crushed, in case of a breaking up of +the island. Therefore, all the efforts of the workmen were directed to +completing the hull. +</p> + +<p> +On the 3d of March they were able to calculate that the ship could be launched +in twelve days. +</p> + +<p> +Hope returned to the hearts of these colonists, who had been so sorely tried +during this fourth year of their sojourn on Lincoln Island! Even Pencroff was +roused from the taciturnity into which he had been plunged by the ruin and +devastation of his domain. He thought of nothing else but the ship, on which he +concentrated all his hopes. +</p> + +<p> +“We will finish her!” he said to the engineer, “we will +finish her, Mr. Smith, and it is high time, for you see how far advanced the +season is, and it will soon be the equinox. Well, if it is necessary, we will +winter at Tabor Island! But Tabor Island after Lincoln Island! Alas! how +unlucky I am! To think that I should live to see such a thing as this!” +</p> + +<p> +“Let us make haste!” was the invariable answer of the engineer. +</p> + +<p> +And every one worked unceasingly. +</p> + +<p> +“Master,” asked Neb, some days later, “if Captain Nemo had +been alive, do you think this would have happened?” +</p> + +<p> +“Yes, Neb,” answered the engineer. +</p> + +<p> +“I don’t think so!” whispered Pencroff to the negro. +</p> + +<p> +“Nor I!” replied Neb. +</p> + +<p> +During the first week in March Mount Franklin became again threatening. +Thousands of threads of glass, made by the fluid lavas, fell like rain to the +ground. The crater gave forth fresh torrents of lava that flowed down every +side of the volcano. These torrents flowed over the surface of hardened lava, +and destroyed the last vestiges of the trees which had survived the first +eruption. The current, this time following the southwest shore of Lake Grant, +flowed along Glycerine Creek and invaded Prospect Plateau. This last calamity +was a terrible blow to the colonists; of the mill, the poultry-yard, the +stables, nothing remained. The frightened inhabitants of these places fled in +every direction. Top and Jup gave signs of the utmost terror, and their +instinct warned them of an impending disaster. A large number of animals had +perished in the first eruption, and those which survived had found their only +refuge in Tadorn’s Fens, and on Prospect Plateau. But this last retreat +was now closed from them, and the torrent of lava having reached the edge of +the granite wall, began to fall over on to the shore in cataracts of fire. The +sublime horror of this spectacle passes all description. At night it looked +like a Niagara of molten matter, with its incandescent spray rising on high and +its boiling masses below! +</p> + +<p> +The colonists were driven to their last refuge, and, although the upper seams +were uncaulked, they resolved to launch their ship into the sea! +</p> + +<p> +Pencroff and Ayrton made the preparations for this event, which was to take +place on the morning of the next day, the 9th of March. +</p> + +<p> +But, during that night, an enormous column of steam escaped from the crater, +rising in the midst of terrific detonations to a height of more than 3,000 +feet. The wall of Crypt Dakkar had given way under the pressure of the gas, and +the sea, pouring +</p> + +<p> +through the central chimney into the burning gulf, was turned into steam! +</p> + +<p> +The crater was not a sufficient vent for this vapor! +</p> + +<p> +An explosion, which could have been heard a hundred miles away, shook the very +heavens! Fragments of the mountain fell into the Pacific, and, in a few +minutes, the ocean covered the place where Lincoln Island had been! +</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2><a name="LXII" id="LXII"></a>CHAPTER LXII.</h2> + +<p class="letter"> +AN ISOLATED ROCK IN THE PACIFIC—THE LAST REFUGE OF THE +COLONISTS—THE PROSPECT OF DEATH—UNEXPECTED SUCCOR—HOW AND WHY +IT CAME—THE LAST GOOD ACTION—AN ISLAND ON TERRA FIRMA-THE TOMB OF +CAPTAIN NEMO. +</p> + +<p> +An isolated rock, thirty feet long, fifteen feet wide, rising ten feet above +the surface of the water, this was the sole solid point which had not vanished +beneath the waves of the Pacific. +</p> + +<p> +It was all that remained of Granite House! The wall had been thrown over, then +broken to pieces, and some of the rocks of the great hall had been so heaped +together as to form this culminating point. All else had disappeared in the +surrounding abyss: the lower cone of Mount Franklin, torn to pieces by the +explosion; the lava jaws of Shark Gulf; Prospect Plateau, Safety Islet, the +granite of Balloon Harbor; the basalt of Crypt Dakkar; Serpentine +Peninsula—had been precipitated into the eruptive centre! All that +remained of Lincoln Island was this rock, the refuge of the six colonists and +their dog Top. +</p> + +<p> +All the animals had perished in the catastrophe. The birds as well as the +beasts, all were crashed or drowned, and poor Jup, alas! had been swallowed up +in some crevasse in the ground! +</p> + +<p> +Smith, Spilett, Herbert, Pencroff, Neb, and Ayrton had survived, because, being +gathered together in their tent, they had been thrown into the sea, at the +moment when the debris of the island rained down upon the water. +</p> + +<p> +When they came again to the surface they saw nothing but this rock, half a +cable length away, to which they swam. +</p> + +<p> +They had been here nine days! Some provisions, brought from the magazine of +Granite House before the catastrophe, a little soft water left by the rain in +the crevice of the rock—this was all that the unfortunates possessed. +Their last hope, their ship, had been broken to pieces. They had no means of +leaving this reef. No fire, nor anything with which to make it. They were +doomed to perish! +</p> + +<p> +This day, the 18th of March, there remained a supply of food, which, with the +strictest care, could last but forty-eight hours longer. All their knowledge, +all their skill, could avail them nothing now. They were entirely at +God’s mercy. +</p> + +<p> +Smith was calm, Spilett somewhat nervous, and Pencroff, ready to throw himself +into the sea. Herbert never left the engineer; and gazed upon him, as if +demanding the succor which he could not give. Neb and Ayrton were resigned +after their manner. +</p> + +<p> +“Oh, misery! misery!” repeated Pencroff. “If we had but a +walnut-shell to take us to Tabor Island! But nothing; not a thing!” +</p> + +<p> +“And Captain Nemo is dead!” said Neb. +</p> + +<p> +During the five days which followed, Smith and his companions ate just enough +of the supply of food to keep them from famishing. Their feebleness was +extreme. Herbert and Neb began to show signs of delirium. +</p> + +<p> +In this situation had they a shadow of hope? No! What was their sole chance? +That a ship would pass in sight of the rock? They knew, by experience, that +ships never visited this part of the Pacific. Could they count, then, by a +coincidence which would be truly providential, upon the Scotch yacht coming +just at this time to search for Ayrton at Tabor Island? It was not probable. +And, moreover, supposing that it came, since the colonists had placed no notice +there indicating the place where Ayrton was to be found, the captain of the +yacht, after a fruitless search of the island, would proceed at once to regain +the lower latitudes. +</p> + +<p> +No! they could entertain no hope of being saved, and a horrible death, a death +by hunger and thirst, awaited them upon this rock! +</p> + +<p> +Already they lay stretched out, inanimate, unconscious of what was going on +around them. Only, Ayrton, by a supreme effort, raised his head, and cast a +despairing look over this desert sea! +</p> + +<p> +But, behold! on this morning of the 24th of March, Ayrton extended his arms +towards some point in space; he rose up, first to his knees, then stood +upright; he waved his hand— +</p> + +<p> +A ship was in sight of the island! This ship did not sail these seas at +hap-hazard. The reef was the point towards which she directed her course, +crowding on all steam, and the unfortunates would have seen her many hours +before, had they had the strength to scan the horizon! +</p> + +<p> +“The Duncan!” murmured Ayrton, and then he fell senseless upon the +rock. +</p> + +<hr /> + +<p> +When Smith and his companions regained consciousness, thanks to the care +lavished upon them, they found themselves in the cabin of a steamer, unaware of +the manner in which they had escaped death. +</p> + +<p> +A word from Ayrton was sufficient to enlighten them. +</p> + +<p> +“It is the Duncan,” he murmured. +</p> + +<p> +“The Duncan!” answered Smith. And then, raising his arms to heaven, +he exclaimed:— +</p> + +<p> +“Oh, all powerful Providence! thou hast wished that we should be +saved!” +</p> + +<p> +It was, indeed, the Duncan, Lord Glenarvan’s yacht, at this time +commanded by Robert, the son of Captain Grant, who had been sent to Tabor +Island to search for Ayrton and bring him home after twelve years of +expatriation! +</p> + +<p> +The colonists were saved, they were already on the homeward route! +</p> + +<p> +“Captain Robert,” asked Smith, “what suggested to you the +idea, after leaving Tabor Island, where you were unable to find Ayrton, to come +in this direction?” +</p> + +<p> +“It was to search, not only for Ayrton, Mr. Smith, but for you and your +companions!” +</p> + +<p> +“My companions and myself?” +</p> + +<p> +“Doubtless! On Lincoln Island!” +</p> + +<p> +“Lincoln Island!” cried the others, greatly astonished. +</p> + +<p> +“How did you know of Lincoln Island?” asked Smith. “It is not +on the maps.” +</p> + +<p> +“I knew of it by the notice which you left on Tabor Island,” +answered Grant. +</p> + +<p> +“The notice?” cried Spilett. +</p> + +<p> +“Certainly, and here it is,” replied the other, handing him a paper +indicating the exact position of the Lincoln Island, “the actual +residence of Ayrton and of five American colonists.” +</p> + +<p> +“Captain Nemo!” said Smith, after having read the notice, and +recognized that it was in the same handwriting as the paper found at the +corral. +</p> + +<p> +“Ah!” said Pencroff, “it was he who took our Good Luck, he +who ventured alone to Tabor Island!” +</p> + +<p> +“To place this notice there!” answered Herbert. +</p> + +<p> +“Then I was right when I said,” cried the sailor, “that he +would do us a last service even after his death!” +</p> + +<p> +“My friends,” said Smith, in a voice moved by emotion, “may +the God of sinners receive the soul of Captain Nemo; he was our savior!” +</p> + +<p> +The colonists, uncovering as Smith spake thus, murmured the name of the +captain. +</p> + +<p> +Then Ayrton, approaching the engineer, said to him, simply:— +</p> + +<p> +“What shall be done with the coffer?” +</p> + +<p> +Ayrton had saved this coffer at the risk of his life, at the moment when the +island was engulfed. He now faithfully returned it to the engineer. +</p> + +<p> +“Ayrton! Ayrton!” exclaimed Smith, greatly affected. +</p> + +<p> +Then addressing Grant:— +</p> + +<p> +“Captain,” he said, “where you left a criminal, you have +found a man whom expiation has made honest, and to whom I am proud to give my +hand!” +</p> + +<p> +Thereupon Grant was informed of all the strange history of Captain Nemo and the +colonists of Lincoln Island. And then, the bearings of this remaining reef +having been taken, Captain Grant gave the order to go about. +</p> + +<p> +Fifteen days later the colonists landed in America, which they found at peace +after the terrible war which had ended in the triumph of justice and right. Of +the wealth contained in the coffer, the greater part was employed in the +purchase of a vast tract of land in Iowa. One single pearl, the most beautiful +of all, was taken from the treasure and sent to Lady Glenarvan in the name of +the castaways, who had been rescued by the Duncan. +</p> + +<p> +To this domain the colonists invited to labor—that is, to fortune and to +happiness—all those whom they had counted on receiving at Lincoln Island. +Here they founded a great colony, to which they gave the name of the island +which had disappeared in the depths of the Pacific. They found here a river +which they called the Mercy, a mountain to which they gave the name of +Franklin, a little lake which they called Lake Grant, and forests which became +the forests of the Far West. It was like an island on terra-firma. +</p> + +<p> +Here, under the skillful hand of the engineer and his companions, everything +prospered. Not one of the former colonists was missing, for they had agreed +always to live together, Neb wherever his master was, Ayrton always ready to +sacrifice himself, Pencroff a better farmer than he had been a sailor, Herbert +who finished his studies under Smith’s direction, Spilett who founded the +New Lincoln <i>Herald</i>, which was the best edited journal in the whole +world. +</p> + +<p> +Here Smith and his companions often received visits from Lord and Lady +Glenarvan, from Captain John Mangles and his wife, sister to Robert Grant, from +Robert Grant himself, from Major MacNabbs, from all those who had been mixed up +in the double history of Captain Grant and Captain Nemo. +</p> + +<p> +Here, finally, all were happy, united in the present as they had been in the +past; but never did they forget that island upon which they had arrived poor +and naked, that island which, for four years, had sufficed for all their needs, +and of which all that remained was a morsel of granite, beaten by the waves of +the Pacific, the tomb of him who was Captain Nemo! +</p> + +<p> +THE END. +</p> + +<p> +GLOSSARY. +</p> + +<p> +AGOUTI. A genus of rodent animals, the size of a rabbit, but more like the +squirrel in appearance, with the exception of the tail, which is a short, bare +stump. When at rest, they sit upon their haunches, holding their food between +their fore-paws. +</p> + +<p> +ALBATROSS. A genus of large, web-footed, acquatic birds, possessing prodigious +powers of flight. Its wings, when extended, sometimes measure 15 feet. +</p> + +<p> +ALGAROBA BEANS. The seeds of the algaroba or carob tree. These seeds were +formerly used by jewellers as weights, and the sweetish honey in the seed-pod +is supposed by some to be the wild honey upon which St. John lived in the +wilderness. Animals, especially horses, are fond of the bean. +</p> + +<p> +AI. The three-toed sloth. The only animal which can neither walk nor stand. It +is herbivorous, and lives in trees, moving suspended from a branch by its long +and powerful arms. +</p> + +<p> +ANTHROPOMORPHI. Animals resembling human beings in form. +</p> + +<p> +APYREXY. The intermission of a fever. +</p> + +<p> +ARADS. An order of plants of which dragon-root, or jack-in-the-pulpit is a +familiar example. Portland sago is made from the corms of some of these plants. +</p> + +<p> +ARGALL. A species of moufflon or wild sheep. +</p> + +<p> +AZOTH. The old name for nitrogen. +</p> + +<p> +BALEEN. The substance called whale-bone. +</p> + +<p> +BALLISTIC. Relating to engines for throwing missiles; such as the ancient +ballista. +</p> + +<p> +BANKSIA. A genus of plants remarkable for the beauty of their flowers and their +evergreen foliage. They are sometimes called honey-suckle trees. +</p> + +<p> +BUSTARD. A kind of wild turkey inhabiting the open plains of Europe, Asia and +Africa. +</p> + +<p> +CABIAI. The largest known rodent. <i>Hystricidæ</i>. from its aquatic habits it +is sometimes called a water-hog. +</p> + +<p> +CARAPACE. A thick, solid shell covering some reptiles, as the turtle. +</p> + +<p> +CASAURINÆ. Tropical plants, so named on account of the resemblance their leaves +bear to the drooping feathers of the cassowary. For this reason they are +sometimes called cassowary trees. +</p> + +<p> +CASSOWARY. A large, long-legged bird of the ostrich family, famous for its +speed in running. +</p> + +<p> +CATACLYSM. An inundation or deluge. +</p> + +<p> +CELLULOSE. Called also celluline. A substance which constitutes the cellular +tissue of all plants. +</p> + +<p> +CEMENTATION. The process of changing the properties of bodies by heating them +in contact with the powder of other substances. +</p> + +<p> +CETACEA. The name of the genus of marine animals which includes whales, +dolphins, etc. +</p> + +<p> +CINCHONIA. A vegetable alkali found in the cinchona,—a genus of trees +found in Peru,—the bark of which is much used as a febrifugal, and is +known as Peruvian Bark. Cinchonia is not much used in medicine. +</p> + +<p> +COCKATOO. A genus of birds of the parrot family, distinguished from all other +parrots by a crest of feathers on the head, which the bird can raise or depress +at pleasure. +</p> + +<p> +CONIFERS. <i>Coniferæ</i>. An order of cone-bearing plants, including +fir-trees, pines, cedars, junipers, etc. +</p> + +<p> +CO-ORDINATES. A system of lines and angles by which the position of any point +may be determined with reference to a fixed point. +</p> + +<p> +CORM. The solid, underground stem of a plant, like the bulb of a tulip; +differing, however, from a bulb in being solid. +</p> + +<p> +COUROUCOUS. Birds of the warbler family, which, excepting the humming bird +family, contains the smallest birds in the world. The Nightingale, Wood wren +and Golden-crests are familiar examples. +</p> + +<p> +CURASSOW. A gallinaceous bird, about the size of turkeys, and capable of +domestication. +</p> + +<p> +CYCAS. A genus of trees intermediate between the palms and the ferns, +cultivated in China, and valued for its pith, which furnishes a kind of sago. +</p> + +<p> +DEODAR. The Himalayan cedar. A genus of trees belonging to the order +<i>Pinaccæ</i>; the same order as the cedars of Lebanon, celebrated for its +beauty, its longevity, its magnitude, and the durability of its timber. +</p> + +<p> +DUGONG. An herbivorous mammal having an elongated body, with flippers near the +head, and terminated by a crescent-shaped tail. It drags itself along the shore +and browses on the herbage that grows along the banks of the rivers which it +frequents. +</p> + +<p> +ECHIDNA. A genus of ovoviparous mammals, which have the general form of the +ant-eater, but the body is covered with spines like a porcupine; hence they are +sometimes called porcupine ant-eaters. +</p> + +<p> +EMUE. A species of cassowary found principally in Australia, and sometimes +called Australian cassowary. +</p> + +<p> +EUCALYPTUS. A genus of plants of the myrtle family, which grow to a prodigious +height. Its leaves exude a substance resembling manna, which falls to the +ground in pieces as large as nuts. The trees are sometimes called gum trees. +</p> + +<p> +FEBRIFUGE. A medicine to drive away or allay fever. +</p> + +<p> +FECULA. A term applied to the substance obtained from plants; also called +starch or farina. +</p> + +<p> +FULGURITE. A vitrified sand-tube made by the action of lightning. +</p> + +<p> +FULIGINOUS. Resembling smoke; smokey. +</p> + +<p> +FUSIFORM. Spindle-shaped. +</p> + +<p> +GARGOYLE. A projecting water-spout, often grotesquely carved, attached to old +gothic buildings. +</p> + +<p> +HYDROGRAPHY. As opposed to orography; the water system of a country. +</p> + +<p> +IZARD. The chamois of the Pyrenees. +</p> + +<p> +JACAMAR. A genus of climbing birds, closely allied to the kingfishers, that +live in forests, feed on insects, and build in low bushes. Their plumage has a +carious metallic lustre. +</p> + +<p> +JETSAM. Goods coming to land which have been thrown overboard from a ship in +distress. +</p> + +<p> +KAOLINE. The Chinese name for a kind of porcelain clay. +</p> + +<p> +GLOSSARY. +</p> + +<p> +KOULAS. See Ai. +</p> + +<p> +LARDIZABALACEÆ. An order of twining shrubs, some of which furnish our +greenhouses with pretty evergreen climbers. +</p> + +<p> +LENTICULAR. Having the form of a double convex lens. +</p> + +<p> +LIANA. A name used to designate the climbing, twining plants which abound in +tropical forests, often growing to an immense size, and forming a perfect +network of branches, impenetrable without the aid of a hatchet. They are +comparatively rare in our climate, but honeysuckles may be mentioned as +familiar examples. +</p> + +<p> +LILIACKÆ. Plants of the order of amaryllids, growing to an enormous size. They +are commonly known as the giant Lily. The stem is leafy, 15 or 20 feet high, +and bears at the top a cluster of superb large crimson blossoms. +</p> + +<p> +LITHODOMI. Molluscous animals which form holes in the solid rocks, in which +they lodge themselves. One species (<i>Lithodomus Lithophagus</i>) is esteemed +as an article of food, and is known by the name of the <i>sea-date shell</i>. +</p> + +<p> +LORIES. Birds belonging to the parrot family, remarkable for their soft beaks. +</p> + +<p> +MACAUCO. A genus of four-handed animals, resembling the monkey tribe. +</p> + +<p> +MACRODACTYLS. Long-toed wading birds. +</p> + +<p> +MAGOT. A small species of ape, sometimes called the Barbary ape. +</p> + +<p> +MALACOLOGIST. One who treats of mollusks. +</p> + +<p> +MANNIFERS. A name synonymous with mammals; meaning animals which suckle their +young. +</p> + +<p> +MANATEE. A marine animal closely related to the dugong. It Is sometimes called +lamantine or sea-cow. +</p> + +<p> +MARGARINE. A fatty solid matter obtained from oil. +</p> + +<p> +MOUFFLON. <i>Caprovis Mussimon</i>. Resembling the mountain sheep of Arizona. +It is the size of a deer; covered with hair which assumes a woolly character in +winter. +</p> + +<p> +OLEINE. The fluid portion of fats and oils. +</p> + +<p> +ONAGER. Another name for the wild ass. +</p> + +<p> +OROGRAPHY. As opposed to hydrography; the description of the mountain system of +a country. +</p> + +<p> +PALMIPEDS. Web-footed fowl. +</p> + +<p> +PECCARY. An animal resembling a hog, sometimes called Mexican hog, or +<i>tajacu</i>. +</p> + +<p> +PELLICAN. A largo aquatic bird, having a long, straight and very strong bill. +It lives upon fish, which It carries for some time in a pouch or bag attached +to the lover mandible. +</p> + +<p> +PIROGUE. A canoe, usually formed of a hollowed tree. +</p> + +<p> +POLYPORUS. A genus of fungi, allied to mushrooms, toad-stools, sap-balls, etc.; +used in Germany to make the tinder called Amadon. +</p> + +<p> +PTEROPODA. A class of mollusks which live In the open sea, and have a pair of +flippers or wings, by which they pass rapidly through the water. +</p> + +<p> +PULP. The common name for marine animals of the genus octopus, such as the +cuttle-fish. They have eight feet or arms around the head, with which they +swim, creep, and seize their prey. It is the <i>Pieuvre</i> of Victor Hugo. +</p> + +<p> +PUZZOLAN. Fine volcanic ashes, which harden under water, forming a kind of +cement. +</p> + +<p> +PYROXYLINE. Called also gun-cotton. It burns In the open air with a flash, +though without smoke or report; but It is violently explosive when fired in a +confined space. +</p> + +<p> +QUADRUMANA. Animals having four hands, as apes, baboons, etc. +</p> + +<p> +QUININE. The most important of the vegetable alkaloids found In the cinchona +(see CINCHONIA). It is one of the most valuable antiperiodics and febrifuges +known. +</p> + +<p> +RECRUDESENCE. The state of becoming sore again. +</p> + +<p> +RINFORDZANDO. A musical sign denoting an Increase of sound. Usually expressed +by the abbreviation <i>rf</i>. +</p> + +<p> +RUMINANT. An animal that chews the cud. +</p> + +<p> +SAGOIN. A species of sapajo. The squirrel monkey; so called on account of its +hairy tail. +</p> + +<p> +SALICIN. A white and very bitter substance, obtained from the bark of the +willow and other trees. +</p> + +<p> +SAPAJOS. The proper name for tailed monkeys, as distinguishing them from apes, +baboons and gorillas, which are tailless. +</p> + +<p> +SEXTANT. An Instrument for measuring angles by reflection. +</p> + +<p> +SPHENISCUS. Penguins; a sub-family of auks. Oceanic birds remarkable for their +short legs, very short wings—which are useful only In swimming; and their +upright position when at rest. +</p> + +<p> +STEARINE. The most abundant of the solid constituents of fats and oils. Also a +popular name for stearic acid, used in candles. +</p> + +<p> +SUCCEDANEOUS. Supplying the place of something else. +</p> + +<p> +TALUS. A sloping heap of fragments accumulated at the foot of a steep rock, +from the face of which they have been broken off by the action of the weather. +</p> + +<p> +TETRA. <i>Tetraonieda</i>, or grouse. The bird here described resembles the +pinated grouse, or prairie-chicken. +</p> + +<p> +TINAMONS. A family of birds belonging to the order <i>gallinæ</i>. They are +about the size of quail. +</p> + +<p> +TOURACO-LORIES. Climbing birds of the parrot family. +</p> + +<p> +TRAGOPANS. A large species of pheasant. +</p> + +<p> +TUFA. A name given to volcanic dust, cemented by the Infiltration of water into +a porous rock. +</p> + +<p> +[Illustration: Lincoln Island] +</p> + +<h4>END OF TRANSLATION OF THE MYSTERIOUS ISLAND</h4> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div style='display:block; margin-top:4em'>*** END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE MYSTERIOUS ISLAND ***</div> +<div style='text-align:left'> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +Updated editions will replace the previous one—the old editions will +be renamed. +</div> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +Creating the works from print editions not protected by U.S. copyright +law means that no one owns a United States copyright in these works, +so the Foundation (and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United +States without permission and without paying copyright +royalties. Special rules, set forth in the General Terms of Use part +of this license, apply to copying and distributing Project +Gutenberg™ electronic works to protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG™ +concept and trademark. Project Gutenberg is a registered trademark, +and may not be used if you charge for an eBook, except by following +the terms of the trademark license, including paying royalties for use +of the Project Gutenberg trademark. If you do not charge anything for +copies of this eBook, complying with the trademark license is very +easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose such as creation +of derivative works, reports, performances and research. Project +Gutenberg eBooks may be modified and printed and given away--you may +do practically ANYTHING in the United States with eBooks not protected +by U.S. copyright law. Redistribution is subject to the trademark +license, especially commercial redistribution. +</div> + +<div style='margin:0.83em 0; font-size:1.1em; text-align:center'>START: FULL LICENSE<br /> +<span style='font-size:smaller'>THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE<br /> +PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK</span> +</div> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +To protect the Project Gutenberg™ mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work +(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase “Project +Gutenberg”), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full +Project Gutenberg™ License available with this file or online at +www.gutenberg.org/license. +</div> + +<div style='display:block; font-size:1.1em; margin:1em 0; font-weight:bold'> +Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg™ electronic works +</div> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg™ +electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to +and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property +(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all +the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or +destroy all copies of Project Gutenberg™ electronic works in your +possession. If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a +Project Gutenberg™ electronic work and you do not agree to be bound +by the terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person +or entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. +</div> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +1.B. “Project Gutenberg” is a registered trademark. It may only be +used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who +agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few +things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg™ electronic works +even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See +paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project +Gutenberg™ electronic works if you follow the terms of this +agreement and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg™ +electronic works. See paragraph 1.E below. +</div> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation (“the +Foundation” or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection +of Project Gutenberg™ electronic works. Nearly all the individual +works in the collection are in the public domain in the United +States. If an individual work is unprotected by copyright law in the +United States and you are located in the United States, we do not +claim a right to prevent you from copying, distributing, performing, +displaying or creating derivative works based on the work as long as +all references to Project Gutenberg are removed. Of course, we hope +that you will support the Project Gutenberg™ mission of promoting +free access to electronic works by freely sharing Project Gutenberg™ +works in compliance with the terms of this agreement for keeping the +Project Gutenberg™ name associated with the work. You can easily +comply with the terms of this agreement by keeping this work in the +same format with its attached full Project Gutenberg™ License when +you share it without charge with others. +</div> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern +what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are +in a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, +check the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this +agreement before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, +distributing or creating derivative works based on this work or any +other Project Gutenberg™ work. The Foundation makes no +representations concerning the copyright status of any work in any +country other than the United States. +</div> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: +</div> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other +immediate access to, the full Project Gutenberg™ License must appear +prominently whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg™ work (any work +on which the phrase “Project Gutenberg” appears, or with which the +phrase “Project Gutenberg” is associated) is accessed, displayed, +performed, viewed, copied or distributed: +</div> + +<blockquote> + <div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> + This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and most + other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no restrictions + whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it under the terms + of the Project Gutenberg License included with this eBook or online + at <a href="https://www.gutenberg.org">www.gutenberg.org</a>. If you + are not located in the United States, you will have to check the laws + of the country where you are located before using this eBook. + </div> +</blockquote> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg™ electronic work is +derived from texts not protected by U.S. copyright law (does not +contain a notice indicating that it is posted with permission of the +copyright holder), the work can be copied and distributed to anyone in +the United States without paying any fees or charges. If you are +redistributing or providing access to a work with the phrase “Project +Gutenberg” associated with or appearing on the work, you must comply +either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 or +obtain permission for the use of the work and the Project Gutenberg™ +trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. +</div> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg™ electronic work is posted +with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution +must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any +additional terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms +will be linked to the Project Gutenberg™ License for all works +posted with the permission of the copyright holder found at the +beginning of this work. +</div> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg™ +License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this +work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg™. +</div> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this +electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without +prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with +active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project +Gutenberg™ License. +</div> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, +compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including +any word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access +to or distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg™ work in a format +other than “Plain Vanilla ASCII” or other format used in the official +version posted on the official Project Gutenberg™ website +(www.gutenberg.org), you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense +to the user, provide a copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means +of obtaining a copy upon request, of the work in its original “Plain +Vanilla ASCII” or other form. Any alternate format must include the +full Project Gutenberg™ License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. +</div> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, +performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg™ works +unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. +</div> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing +access to or distributing Project Gutenberg™ electronic works +provided that: +</div> + +<div style='margin-left:0.7em;'> + <div style='text-indent:-0.7em'> + • You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg™ works calculated using the method + you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is owed + to the owner of the Project Gutenberg™ trademark, but he has + agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the Project + Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments must be paid + within 60 days following each date on which you prepare (or are + legally required to prepare) your periodic tax returns. Royalty + payments should be clearly marked as such and sent to the Project + Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the address specified in + Section 4, “Information about donations to the Project Gutenberg + Literary Archive Foundation.” + </div> + + <div style='text-indent:-0.7em'> + • You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg™ + License. You must require such a user to return or destroy all + copies of the works possessed in a physical medium and discontinue + all use of and all access to other copies of Project Gutenberg™ + works. + </div> + + <div style='text-indent:-0.7em'> + • You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of + any money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days of + receipt of the work. + </div> + + <div style='text-indent:-0.7em'> + • You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg™ works. + </div> +</div> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project +Gutenberg™ electronic work or group of works on different terms than +are set forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing +from the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the manager of +the Project Gutenberg™ trademark. Contact the Foundation as set +forth in Section 3 below. +</div> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +1.F. +</div> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable +effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread +works not protected by U.S. copyright law in creating the Project +Gutenberg™ collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg™ +electronic works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may +contain “Defects,” such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate +or corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other +intellectual property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or +other medium, a computer virus, or computer codes that damage or +cannot be read by your equipment. +</div> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the “Right +of Replacement or Refund” described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project +Gutenberg™ trademark, and any other party distributing a Project +Gutenberg™ electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal +fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT +LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE +PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE +TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE +LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR +INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGE. +</div> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a +defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can +receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a +written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you +received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium +with your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you +with the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in +lieu of a refund. If you received the work electronically, the person +or entity providing it to you may choose to give you a second +opportunity to receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If +the second copy is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing +without further opportunities to fix the problem. +</div> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth +in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you ‘AS-IS’, WITH NO +OTHER WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT +LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. +</div> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied +warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of +damages. If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement +violates the law of the state applicable to this agreement, the +agreement shall be interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or +limitation permitted by the applicable state law. The invalidity or +unenforceability of any provision of this agreement shall not void the +remaining provisions. +</div> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the +trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone +providing copies of Project Gutenberg™ electronic works in +accordance with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the +production, promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg™ +electronic works, harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, +including legal fees, that arise directly or indirectly from any of +the following which you do or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this +or any Project Gutenberg™ work, (b) alteration, modification, or +additions or deletions to any Project Gutenberg™ work, and (c) any +Defect you cause. +</div> + +<div style='display:block; font-size:1.1em; margin:1em 0; font-weight:bold'> +Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg™ +</div> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +Project Gutenberg™ is synonymous with the free distribution of +electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of +computers including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It +exists because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations +from people in all walks of life. +</div> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the +assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg™’s +goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg™ collection will +remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure +and permanent future for Project Gutenberg™ and future +generations. To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation and how your efforts and donations can help, see +Sections 3 and 4 and the Foundation information page at www.gutenberg.org. +</div> + +<div style='display:block; font-size:1.1em; margin:1em 0; font-weight:bold'> +Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +</div> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non-profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the +state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal +Revenue Service. The Foundation’s EIN or federal tax identification +number is 64-6221541. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent permitted by +U.S. federal laws and your state’s laws. +</div> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +The Foundation’s business office is located at 809 North 1500 West, +Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887. Email contact links and up +to date contact information can be found at the Foundation’s website +and official page at www.gutenberg.org/contact +</div> + +<div style='display:block; font-size:1.1em; margin:1em 0; font-weight:bold'> +Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +</div> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +Project Gutenberg™ depends upon and cannot survive without widespread +public support and donations to carry out its mission of +increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be +freely distributed in machine-readable form accessible by the widest +array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations +($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt +status with the IRS. +</div> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United +States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a +considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up +with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations +where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To SEND +DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any particular state +visit <a href="https://www.gutenberg.org/donate/">www.gutenberg.org/donate</a>. +</div> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we +have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition +against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who +approach us with offers to donate. +</div> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make +any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from +outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. +</div> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +Please check the Project Gutenberg web pages for current donation +methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other +ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. To +donate, please visit: www.gutenberg.org/donate +</div> + +<div style='display:block; font-size:1.1em; margin:1em 0; font-weight:bold'> +Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg™ electronic works +</div> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project +Gutenberg™ concept of a library of electronic works that could be +freely shared with anyone. For forty years, he produced and +distributed Project Gutenberg™ eBooks with only a loose network of +volunteer support. +</div> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +Project Gutenberg™ eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as not protected by copyright in +the U.S. unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not +necessarily keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper +edition. +</div> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +Most people start at our website which has the main PG search +facility: <a href="https://www.gutenberg.org">www.gutenberg.org</a>. +</div> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +This website includes information about Project Gutenberg™, +including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to +subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. +</div> + +</div> + +</body> + +</html> diff --git a/LICENSE.txt b/LICENSE.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6312041 --- /dev/null +++ b/LICENSE.txt @@ -0,0 +1,11 @@ +This eBook, including all associated images, markup, improvements, +metadata, and any other content or labor, has been confirmed to be +in the PUBLIC DOMAIN IN THE UNITED STATES. + +Procedures for determining public domain status are described in +the "Copyright How-To" at https://www.gutenberg.org. + +No investigation has been made concerning possible copyrights in +jurisdictions other than the United States. Anyone seeking to utilize +this eBook outside of the United States should confirm copyright +status under the laws that apply to them. diff --git a/README.md b/README.md new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6664967 --- /dev/null +++ b/README.md @@ -0,0 +1,2 @@ +Project Gutenberg (https://www.gutenberg.org) public repository for +eBook #8993 (https://www.gutenberg.org/ebooks/8993) |